The URL can be used to link to this page

Home My WebLink About00-2740PROJECT MANUAL FOR CREEK VIEW ELEMENTARY SCHOOL COLLEGE STATION I.S.D. COLLEGE STATION, TEXAS PROJECT NO. 2740.00 NOVEMBER 12, 2007 OWNER: COLLEGE STATION INDEPENDENT SCHOOL DISTRICT 1812 WELSH STREET COLLEGE STATION, TX 77840 6qk I I iplik VLK ARCHITECTS SET NO. member ameri can institute of architects 7915 FM 1960 west suite 214 houston texas 77070 ph 281 671 2300 fax 281 671 2313 vlkarchitects.com PROJECT MANUAL FOR PROJECT: CREEKVIEW ELEMENTARY SCHOOL COLLEGE STATION I.S.D. COLLEGE STATION, TEXAS PROJECT NO: 2740.00 DATE: NOVEMBER 12, 2007 OWNER: COLLEGE STATION INDEPENDENT SCHOOL DISTRICT 1812 WELSH STREET COLLEGE STATION, TX 77840 (979) 764-5400 ARCHITECT: VLK ARCHITECTS, INC. STEVE ALOWAY, AIA, LEEDO AP 7915 FM 1960 WEST, SUITE 214 HOUSTON, TEXAS 77070 (281) 671-2300 FAX (281) 671-2313 STRUCTURAL MYeD STRUCTURAL ENGINEERS, ENGINEER: MAHENDRA P. YAJNIK, P.E. 305 N.E. LOOP 820, SUITE 507 HURST, TX 76053 817.284.8056 817.284.5075 fax Copyright (C) 2007, VLK Architects, Inc. r ✓P. YAJ N I K • 43432 ! CIVIL ENGINEER: MITCHELL AND MORGAN JOEL J. MITCHELL, P.E. VERONICA MORGAN, P.E. 511 UNIVERSITY DRIVE, SUITE 204 COLLEGE STATION, TX 77840 (979) 260-6963 (979) 260-3564 FAX LANDSCAPE THE LANDSCAPE ALLIANCE ARCHITECT: GARY KUTILEK 951 WEST PIPELINE ROAD, SUITE 111 D H U RST, TEXAS 76053 (817) 589-8909 (817) 589-8909 FAX MEP ENGINEER: R. H. GEORGE & ASSOCIATES, INC. MELVIN KALMANS, P.E. 10930 W. SAM HOUSTON PARKWAY N., SI HOUSTON, TEXAS 77064 (281) 664-1900 (281) 664-1912 FAX FOOD SERVICE FRANK CLEMENTS ASSOCIATES, INC. CONSULTANT: CHRIS CLEMENTS 10850 RICHMOND AVE, #330 HOUSTON, TEXAS 77042 (713) 784-3212 (713) 784-2933 FAX CONSTRUCTION PEPPER-LAWSON CONSTRUCTION L.P. MANAGER: JOHN RICHARD GLENN SAHA 4555 KATY-HOCKLEY CUT-OFF ROAD KATY, TEXAS 77218-9227 (281) 371-3100 (281) 371-2029 FAX r�a r*F9.rrs•r•.•ii JGEL J. MITCHELL r••rt•r••rr•••rr•••• _�_ 80649 _A a Creek View Elementary School !`nn..•in hf /(`\ 7nn7 %/1 V Ar k;#e #f 1..., n__:__• ►i- n�A^ nn Creekview Elementary School College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas TABLE OF CONTENTS DIVISION 00 - PROCUREMENT AND CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS PROCUREMENT REQUIREMENTS 00 3132 - Geotechnical Data ............................................. 00 3132-1-27 DIVISION 01 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS Section 01 1100 - Summary of Work ................................................ 012100- Allowances 01 1100-1-4 .................................................... 012200- Unit Prices................................................. 01 2100-1-2 012200-1 012900 - Payment Procedures .............................................. 013100 - Project Management and Coordination 01 2900-1-2 ................................ 01 3100-1-2 013119 - Project Meetings ..... ..................... ................... 01 3119-1-2 013120 - Preconstruction Meetings .......................................... 013216 - Construction Progress Schedules 01 3120-1 .................................... 01 3216-1-2 013323 - Shop Drawings, Product Data, and Samples ........................... 01 3323-1-3 013500 - Alteration Project Procedures ....................................... 01 3500-1-4 01 4100 - Regulatory Requirements .......................................... 01 4200- References 01 4100-1 ................................................ 014500 - Quality Control ......... 014523 - Testing and Inspection Services 01 4200-1-5 01 4500-1-2 ..................................... 015000 - Temporary Facilities and Controls ................................... 01 4523-1-5 01 5000-1-3 016200 - Product Options ................................................. 016500 - Product Delivery Requirements 01 6200-1-5 ...................................... 016600 - Product Storage and Handling Requirements ........................... 01 6500-1 01 6600-1-2 017329 - Cutting and Patching .............................................. 01 7329-1-2 017413 - Progress Cleaning ................................................ 01 7413-1-2 017700- Closeout Procedures .............................................. 01 7700-1-3 017823 - Operation and Maintenance Data .................................... 01 7823-1-3 017830 - Warranties and Bonds ............................................ 017839 - Project Record Documents 01 7830-1-2 .................................... 017840 - Spare Parts, Overages and Maintenance Materials ...................... 01 7839-1-2 01 7840-1 DIVISION 02 - EXISTING CONDITIONS None in this project. DIVISION 03 - CONCRETE Section 03 1100 - Concrete Forming and Accessories .................................. 03 1100-1-3 03 2000 - Concrete Reinforcing ............................................. 03 3000 - Cast4n-place Concrete 03 2000-1-2 ............................................ 03 3519 - Colored Concrete Finishing 03 3000-1-7 ......................................... 03 3519-1-3 DIVISION 04 - MASONRY Section 04 2000 - Masonry Units ................................................... 04 2000-1-11 TABLE OF CONTENTS VLK Architects, 2007 TOC -1 2740.00 Creekview Elementary School College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas DIVISION 05 - METALS Section 05 1200 - Structural Steel Framing ........................................... 05 1200-1-4 05 2100 - Steel Joists Framing .............................................. 05 2100-1-2 05 3100-Steel Decking ................................................... 05 3100-1-2 05 4000 - Cold -formed Metal Framing ......................................... 05 4000-1-2 05 5000- Metal Fabrications ................................................ 05 5000-1-4 DIVISION 06 - WOOD, PLASTICS, AND COMPOSITES Section 06 1000-Rough Carpentry ................................................. 06 1000-1-3 06 2000-Finish Carpentry ................................................. 06 2000-1-6 DIVISION 07 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION Section 07 1100 - Dampproofing................................................... 07 1100-1-3 07 1900 - Water Repellents ................................................ 07 1900-1-2 07 2100 - Building Insulation ................................................ 07 2100-1-3 07 2119 - Foamedmin-place Insulation ......................................... 07 2119-1 07 2600-Vapor Retarders ................................................. 07 2600-1 07 5552 - Modified Bituminous Membrane Roofing .............................. 07 5552-1-7 07 6200 - Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim ...................................... 07 6200-1-4 07 7213 - Manufactured Roof Curbs and Portals ................................ 07 7213-1-2 07 7233- Roof Hatches ................................................... 07 7233-1-2 07 8116 - Cementitious Fireproofing .......................................... 07 8116-1-4 07 8400-Firestlopping.................................................... 07 8400-1-2 07 9200 - Joint Sealants ................................................... 07 9200-1-4 07 9513 - Expansion Joint Cover Assemblies ................................... 07 9513-1-3 DIVISION 08 - OPENINGS Section 08 1100 - Hollow Metal Doors and Frames ..................................... 081100-1-4 08 1400- Wood Doors .................................................... 08 1400-1-3 08 1423 - Plastic -Laminate -Faced Wood Doors ................................. 08 1423-1-4 08 3100-Access Doors ................................................... 08 3100-1-3 08 3313 - Coiling Counter Door ............... .............................. 08 3313-1-2 08 4113 - Aluminum -Framed Entrances and Storefronts .......................... 08 4113-1-6 08 7100 - Door Hardware .................................................. 08 7100-1-12 08 8000- Glaang........................................................ 08 8000-1-3 08 9100-Louvers ........................................................ 08 9100-1 DIVISION 09 - FINISHES Section 09 2113 - Plaster Assemblies ............................................... 09 2113-1-4 09 2116 - Gypsum Board Assemblies ......................................... 09 2116-1-5 09 3013 - Ceramic Tiling ................................................... 09 3013-1-4 09 5100- Acoustical Ceilings ............................................... 09 5100-1-3 09 6429 - Wood Strip Flooring .............................................. 09 6429-1-2 09 6500- Resilient Flooring ................................................ 09 6500-1-3 09 6516 - Resilient Sheet Flooring ........................................... 09 6516-1-3 09 6566 - Athletic Rubber Flooring ........................................... 09 6566.1-3 09 6723- Resinous Flooring ................................................ 09 6723-1-4 09 6800 - Carpeting ....................................................... 09 6800-1-3 09 8413 - Fixed Sound-Absorptive/Sound-Reflective Panels ....................... 09 8413-1-2 09 9100 - Painting ........................................................ 09 9100-1-6 TABLE OF CONTENTS VLK Architects, 2007 TOC - 2 2740.00 Creekview Elementary School College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas DIVISION 10 - SPECIALTIES Section 10 1110 -Chalkboards, Markerboards and Tackboards ........................... 10 1400-Identifying Devices ............................................... 10 2115 - Solid Phenolic Toilet Compartments .................................. 10 2123 - Cubicle Curtains ................................................. 10 2613-Comer Guards .................................................. 10 2800- Toilet Accessories ................................................ 10 4413 - Fire Extinguishers and Cabinets ..................................... 10 5100-Lockers ........................................................ 10 5626 - Metal Storage Shelving ............................................ 10 7326 - Prefabricated Walkway Covers ...................................... 10 7500 - Flagpoles ....................................................... 10 9900 - Miscellaneous Specialities ........................................ . DIVISION 11 -EQUIPMENT 10 1110-1-3 10 1400-1-2 10 2115-1-2 10 2123-1 10 2613-1 10 2800-1-3 10 4413-1-2 10 5100-1-2 10 5626-1-2 10 7326-1-2 10 7500-1-2 10 9900-1-3 Section 113100 - Appliances ..................................................... 11 3100-1-2 114000 - Foodservice Equipment ........................................... 11 4000-1-38 115213 - Projection Screens ............................................... 11.5213-1 116100-Stage Curtains .................................................. 116100-1-2 116600 - Athletic Equipment ............................................... 11 6600-1-2 DIVISION 12 - FURNISHINGS Section 12 2113 - Horizontal Blinds ................................................ 12 2113-1-2 12 3216 - Manufactured Plastic -Laminate -clad Casework ......................... 12 3216-1-8 12 4813 - Entrance Floor Mats .............................................. 12 4813-1 12 5651 - Library Equipment ................................................ 12 5651-1-27 DIVISION 13 through 20 - NOT USED. DIVISION 21 - FIRE SUPPRESSION Section 21 1000 - Standpipe and Sprinkler Systems .................................... DIVISION 22 - PLUMBING Section 22 0100 - Plumbing Operating and Maintenance Manuals ......................... 22 0500 - Plumbing General Provisions ....................................... 22 0510 - Plumbing Contract Quality Control ..... ........................... . 22 0512 - Plumbing Shop Drawings, Coordination Drawings and Product Data ......... 22 0513 - Electrical Provisions of Plumbing Work ............................... 22 0515 - Plumbing Earthwork .............................................. 22 0517 - Plumbing Access Doors ........................................... 22 0519 - Plumbing Pressure and Temperature Instruments ....................... 22 0523 - Plumbing Valves, Strainers and Vents .... .......................... 22 0533-Pipe Heat Tracing ................................................ 22 0719 - Plumbing Piping Insulation ......................................... 221116 - Domestic Water Piping and Appurtenances ............................ 221123 - Domestic Water Pumps .......................................... . 22 1316 - Soil, Waste and Sanitary Drain Piping, Vent Piping and Appurtenances ..... . 221413 - Roof Drainage Piping and Appurtenances ......................... . . 22 2000 - Plumbing Pipe and Fittings - General ................................. 22 3313 - Instantaneous Electric Water Heater ................................. 22 3333.13 - Gas Fired Domestic Water Heater ... ............. :................ 22 3336.16 - Electric Water Heater .......................... .............. . 22 3436.13 - Gas -Fired Domestic Water Heater ................................. 22 4000 - Plumbing Fixtures and Fixture Carriers ................................ 21 1000-1-12 22 0100-1-3 22 0500-1-6 22 0510-1-2 22 0512-1-5 22 0513-1-3 22 0515-1 22 0517-1-2 22 0519-1-3 22 0523-1-5 22 0533-1-3 22 0719-1-6 22 1116-1-4 22 1123-1-3 22 1316-1-4 22 1413-1-2 22 2200-1-7 22 3313-1 22 3333.13-1-2 22 3333.16-1 22 3436.13-1 2 22 4000-1-4 TABLE OF CONTENTS VLK Architects, 2007 TOC - 3 2740.00 Creekview Elementary School College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas DIVISION 23 - HEATING, VENTILATING, AND AIR CONDITIONING (HVAC) Section 23 0100 - HVAC Operating and Maintenance Manuals ............................ 23 0100-1-3 23 0500 - Mechanical General Provisions ...................................... 23 0500-1-6 23 0510 - HVAC Contract Quality Control ...................................... 23 0510-1-2 . 23 0512 - HVAC Shop Drawings, Coordination Drawings and Product Data ........... 23 0512-1-5 23 0513 - Electrical Provisions of HVAC Work .................................. 23 0513-1-3 23 0514 - HVAC Condensate Drain Piping System .............................. 23 0514-1 23 0517- HVAC Access Doors .............................................. 23 0517-1-2 23 0593.01 - Coordination of Testing and Balancing ............................. 23 0593.01-13 23 0593 - Testing, Balancing and Adjusting (TAB) of Environmental Systems .......... 23 0593-1-8 23 0713 - Extemal Duct insulation ........................................... 23 0713-1-5 23 0933 - Building Management and Control System ............................. 23 0933-1-21 23 3113- Ductwork..............:........................................ 23 3113-1-10 23 3416-Fans .......................................................... 23 3416-1-4 23 3713- Air Devices ..................................................... 23 3713-1-2 23 4100 - Air Filtration ......................... ...................... 23 4100-1-2 23 7413 - Single Package Rooftop Air Conditioners (100-/- Outside Air) .............. 23 7413-1-3 23 7417 - Single Package Rooftop Air Conditioners (SRTU) ....................... 23 7417-1-3 23 8119.13 - Single Package Rooftop Air Conditioners ........................... 23 8119.13-1-3 23 8216 - Heating And Cooling Coils ......................................... 23 8216-1-2 DIVISION 24 and 25 - Not used. DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL Section 26 0100 - Electrical Operating and Maintenance Manuals ......................... 26 0100-1-4 26 0500 - Electrical General Provisions ....................................... 26 0500-1-10 26 0509 - Electrical Utility Coordination and Service Entrance ...................... 26 0509-1-2 26 0510 - Contract Quality Control .........:................................. 26 0510-1-2 26 0512 - Electrical Shop Drawings, Coordination Drawings, & Product Data .......... 26 0512-1-5 26 0515- Earthwork...................................................... 26 0515-1 26 0519 - Conductors and Connectors — 600 Volt ............................... 26 0519-1-5 26 0520 - Steel Metal Clad Cables ........................................... 26 0520-1-3 26 0526 - Electrical Grounding System ........................................ 26 0526-1-5 26 0533.01 — Electrical Floor Boxes and Fittings ................................ 26 0533.01-1-3 26 0533- Conduit Systems ................................................. 26 0533 1-11 26 0535 - Electrical Connections for Equipment ................................. 26 0535-1-2 26 0537 - Electrical Boxes and Fittings ........................................ 26 0537-1-4 26 0540 - Electrical Gutters and Wireways..................................... 26 0540-1-2 26 0550-Firestops....................................................... 26 0550-1 26 0922 - Motor Control Centers ......................... ... ........... 26 0922-1-5 26 0923 - Lighting Occupancy Sensors ....................................... 26 0923-1-5 26 0925 - Electrical Contactors .................... .............. ......... 26 0925-1-2 26 1216 - Three -Phase, Energy Efficient Dry -Type Harmonic Mitigating Transformers ... 26 1216-1-4 26 2413- Switchboards.................................................... 26 2413-1-5 26 2416 - Panelboards and Enclosures ....................................... 26 2416-1-4 26 2425 - Enclosed Switches and Circuit Breakers ............ ................. 26 2425-1-3 : 26 2430-Fuses ......................................................... 26 2430-1-1 26 2773- Wiring Devices ................................................ . 26 2773-1-4 26 2913 - Combination Motor Controllers ...................................... 26 2913-1-3 26 4300 - Transient Voltage Surge Suppression and Filtering ...................... 26 4300-1-4 26 5113 - Lighting Fixtures and Lamps ........................................ 26 5113-1-6 26 5600 - Site Lighting .................................................... 26 5600-1-5 TABLE OF CONTENTS VLK Architects, 2007 TOC - 4 2740.00 Creekview Elementary School College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas DIVISION 27 - COMMUNICATIONS Section 27 0500 - Communications General Provisions ................................. 27 0500.1-17 27 0500.02 - Telecommunications, CAN, Voice, Data, Video Utility Coordination and Service Entrance ................................................ 27 0500.02-1-2 27 0507 - Communications Shop Drawings, Coordination Drawings & Product Data .... 27 0507-1-5 27 0509 - Contract Quality Control ........................................... 27 0509-1-2 271300.02 - Communications I Voice Data Cabling System - LAN .................. 271300.021-17 27 4133 - Two -Way Broadband Television and CAN Distribution System ............ 27 4133-1-9 27 5116 - Sound Reinforcement System ...................................... 27 5116-1-7 27 5123 - School Communication System ..................................... 27 5123-1-10 DIVISION 28 - ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY Section 28 0100 - Electronic Safety and Security Operating and Maintenance Manuals ......... 28 0100-1-3 28 0500 - Electronic Safety and Security General Provisions ....................... 28 0500-1-16 28 0507 - Shop Drawings, Coordination Drawings and Product Data ................. 28 0507-1-5 28 0510 - Contract Quality Control .......................................... 28 0510-1-2 28 3100 - Fire Detection and Alarm System .................................... 28 3111-1-26 DIVISION 29 and 30 - Not used. DIVISION 31 - EARTHWORK Section 31 1000-Site Clearing .................................................... 311000-1 312300 - Excavation and Fill ............................................... 31 2300-1-4 312313 - Building Subgrade Preparation ...................................... 31 2313-1-3 312333 - Trenching and Backfilling.......................................... 31 2333-1-2 313200 - Soil Stabilization.................................................. 31 3200-1-2 316329 - Drilled Concrete Piers ............................................. 31 6329-1-6 DIVISION 32 - EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS Section 32 1313 - Concrete Paving ................................................. 32 1723 - Pavement Markings ............................................... 321900 - Walk, Road, and Parking Appurtenances .............................. 32 3115 - Galvanized Chain Link Fencing ..................................... 32 8000 - Irrigation System ................................................. 32 9213-Hydro-mulching .................................................. 32 9223-Sodding ........................................................ 32 9300-Plants ......................................................... DIVISION 33 through 49 - Not used. 32 1313-1-3 32 1723-1-2 321900-1-2 32 3115-1-3 32 8000-1-9 32 9213-1-3 32 9223-1-4 32 9300-1-5 TABLE OF CONTENTS VLK Architects, 2007 TOC - 5 2740.00 Creek View Elementary School College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas DOCUMENT 00 3132 GEOTECHNICAL DATA 1.01 LOG OF BORINGS/CONTRACTOR RESPONSIBILITY A. A copy of the locations and log of borings is bound herein. Subsurface soil data derived from test borings are given only for the convenience of the Contractor, and neither the Owner northe Architect assumes responsibility for the accuracy of or for the Contractor's interpretation of the data. Contractor is responsible for any conclusions drawn from the boring data and is responsible for the work without extra compensation irrespective of whether or not the subsurface conditions encountered agree with the boring data. 1.02 REPORT A. The full geotechnical report prepared by the Owner's independent geotechnical and testing laboratory is available in the Architect's office for inspection by the Contractor. B. This geotechnical report is not a part of the Contract Documents. END OF DOCUMENT GEOTECHNICAL DATA VLK Architects, 2007 00 3132 - 1 2740.00 Pnrk / \ PROJECT AREA / 'Py 5 N A n� \n n 2000 0 2000 FEET CME TESTINPANtR4WEERING, INC. PROJECT VICINITY MAP PROPOSED CREEK VIEW ELEMENTARY COLLEGE STATION, TEXAS Prepared or. PROJECT NO:7117 LOCATION: COLLEGE STATION TEXAS COLLEGE STATION I.S.D. APPR: MFC REV. DATE: - DRAWN BY: NCT SCALE: AS SHOWN DATE: 11/08/07 FIGURE NO.: 1 m 6,00 <� O_ ox Nl .f look O F O m / w v n m z D m o m 0 SITE PLAN AND PREPARED FOR: Z Z ;a.. PLAN OF BORINGS IVc = o CMETESTING-AiDOONEE�RING,INC. CREEK VIEW COLLEGE STATION ISD m � Z ELEMENTARY SCHOOL COLLEGE STATION, TEXAS LOG OF BORING NO. B-1 PROPOSED CREEK VIEW ELEMENTARY SCHOOL PROPOSED EAGLE AVENUE EXTENSION NEAR NEWPORT LANE COLLEGE STATION, TEXAS TYPE: 3-1/2' • Solid Flight Dry Auger DRILLER: Requena/LEDI LOCATION: See Plan of Borings ^ a w DESCRIPTION OF MATERIAL SURFACE ELEVATION: Not Known x a' as p. cs ® -- POCKET PENETROMETER O -- UNCONFINED COMPRESSION TEST A -- TRIAIXIAL SHEAR TEST COHESION, TON/SQ. FT. 0.25 0.50 0.75 1.00 1.25 1.50 1.75 Plastic hater Liquid Limit Content, x Limit 10} 20 30 4•0 50 60 �70 brown, sandy, lean CLAY, dry 82.2J�n Stiff to very stiff, brown, fat CLAY, with d. dry • — --- — 5 very , mottled rown, sandy. fat CLAY. with orange ferrous steins, slightly 87.6 91.91 Fin !SI 80 Very stiff, dark tan, fat CLAY, with numerous pockets of light tan sand, with orange ferrous steins. slightly moist with a blocky structure and with thin seams of yellowish —tan, silty, fine sand below 8' O 10 erySdark tan, sandy can , with seams of tan sand, frequently of several inches thickness, and with orange ferrous stains, slightly moist 102.1 43. (san — i se -- ) — 15 Medium dense to dense, tan, clayey SAND, with orange ferous stains, slightly moist 14.0 + Fines 1.5+ 20 Medium dense to dexise, grayish —tan. clayey SAND, with orange ferrous stains, moist to very moist —becoming brown to dark brown, more clayey, with very thin seams of black lignitic material, and with thin seems of tan, sandy, lean clay, very moist below 28' 95.8 + 23.8 .3 ♦ _ Fia s -- 25 30 NOTES ON GROUNDWATER O13.4EBVATIONS: 1. hater entering borehole at 23' depthUL11 during drilling 2. 1 reho —11- th ca (! at lira d . Vatat W o ' COMPLETION DEPTH: 30' DEPTH TO WATER IN BORING See Notes Above DATE: 10/16/07 DATE: See Notes Above CME TESTING AND ENGINEERING INC. LOG OF BORING NO. B-2 PROPOSED CREEK VIEW ELEMENTARY SCHOOL PROPOSED EAGLE AVENUE EXTENSION NEAR NEWPORT LANE COLLEGE STATION, TEXAS TYPE: 3-1/2' 0 Solid Flight Dry Auger DRILLER: Requena/LEDI LOCATION: See Plan of Borings q` DESCRIPTION OF MATERIAL SURFACE ELEVATION: Not Known x S L: r ., ® -- POCKET PENETROMETER O -- UNCONFINED COMPRESSION TEST TRIAIMAL SHEAR TEST COHESION, TON/SQ. IT. 0.25 0.50 0.75 1.00 1.25 1.50 1.75 Plastic hater Liquid limit Content, X Limit ---- ------ 10} 20 30 4.0 50 60 �70 Loose. brawl)- e HAND. dry Stiff to very stiff, dark brown, fat CLAY, with sand • • 83. _ 8 _ _ .3X ea nes 1.5+ 5 Very stiff to hard, mottled tan and red, fat Y, with send, and with numerous very small pockets of white calcareous nodules _ 99. •}� -- 83. --- -- es 1.5+ -- - 82.1 _ O 9 _ _ .4X _ - ea 1.5+_ +98 Stiff to very , dark ten, at CLAY, pockets of red, ferrous stains, slightly moist with thin seams of tan, silty, fine sand, and with orange ferrous stains below 8' 10 Medium dense to dense, dark tan to tan, very clayey SAND, with orange ferrous stains, slightly moist 00, - 42. -- --- es + 1.5+ O 15 edium dense to dense, gray to gmylsh-tan, silty, fine SAND, slightly clayeyR slightly moist • 20.3 Ftn s -20- NOTES ON GROUNDWATER OBSERVATIONS: 1. Borhole dry during and imanediately after drilling on 10-15-07 2. Borehole caved at 18' depth on 10-16-07 (24 hrs.). hater level at 17' depth. 25 30 COMPLETION DEPTH: 20' DEPTH TO WATER IN BORING: See Notes Above DATE: 10/15/07 DATE: See Notes Above CME TESTING AND ENGINEERING INC. LOG OF BORING NO. B-3 PROPOSED CREEK VIEW ELEMENTARY SCHOOL PROPOSED EAGLE AVENUE EXTENSION NEAR NEWPORT LANE COLLEGE STATION, TEXAS TYPE: 3-1/2' 0 Solid Flight Dry Auger DRILLER: Requena/LEDI LOCATION: See Plan of Borings p` a DESCOMMON OF MATERIAL SURFACE ELEVATION: Not Known x w p' " � � Sp+ rS N « ® -- POCKET PENETROMETER O -- UNCONFINED COMPRESSION TEST A -- TRIAIMAL SHEAR TEST COHESION, TON/SQ. FT. 0.25 0.50 0.75 1.00 1.25 1.50 1.75 Plague Water Liquid Limit Content, X Limit ----- ------ 10} 20 30 4�0 50 60 #70 Stiff to very stiff, brown, fat CLAY, with sand, with orange ferrous stains, moist —becoming slightly moist below 1' 07. 81.4 80.1 IN +� Fin Fin --- s s -- -- -- -- -- --- -- + 5 Very stiff, tan and dark tan, fat CLAY, with numerous small pockets and occasional very thin seems of yellow, silty, Sue sand and with grange ferrous steins, slightlymoist — 79. -- --- ea -- 62.6 81.6 9 .7% 41 es O 0 1.5+ 1.5+ 1.5+ 94 Stiff to very stiff, dark tan, fat CLAY, with a blocky structure, moist 10 15 Medium dense to dense, mottled tan and dark very clayey SAND, occasionally thinly interbedded with seams of dark tan, fat clay, and with orange ferrous stains, slightly moist 00. 47. — X --- es _ —O 1.5+ 20 NOTES ON GROUNDWATER OBSMA71ONS: Borhols dry during and immediately after drilling on 10-16-07 2. Borehole dry on 10-17-07 (-24 hrs.) 25 30 COMPLETION DEPTH: 20' DEPTH TO WATER IN BORING: See Notes Above DATE: 10/16/07 DATE: See Notes Above CME TESTING AND ENGINEERING INC. LOG OF BORING NO. B-4 PROPOSED CREEK VIEW ELEMENTARY SCHOOL PROPOSED EAGLE AVENUE EXTENSION NEAR NEWPORT LANE COLLEGE STATION, TEXAS TYPE: 3-1/2" • Solid Flight Dry Auger DRILLER: Requena/LEDI LOCATION: See Plan of Borings g DESCRIPTION OF MATERIAL SURFACE ELEVATION: Not Known x a S 0� IN -- POCKET PENETROMETER 0 -- UNCONFlNED COMPRESSION TEST A -- TRIAIXIAL SHEAR TEST COHESION, TON/SQ. FT. 0.25 0.50 0.75 1.00 1.25 1.50 1.75 Plastic Water Liquid Limit Content, x Limit ---------•--------� 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 Medium dense, dark brown, very clayey SAND, slightly moist • - -- 44.8 -- FYn -- a 5+ dark grayish -brown, fat CLAY, with sand, moist L 93.e0 ® + -84-- _9 - - -- 80 5 ery stiff, brown, fat CLAY, with sand, and with pockets of white calcareous nodules, slightly moist tbecoming tan and brown below 5' 3.8X Fyne 1 ]--+ CM B4.9 • f • 95.22 - Fine --- 9 -- -- 0 92 Very stiff, dark tan, fat MY, with small pockets of reddish -tan and yellowish -tan, silty, send, with orange ferrous stains, and with blocky structure, slightly moist -with very thin seams of yellowish -tan fat y below 8' 10 �' 16 M Medium dense to dense, mottled brown and very clayey SAND, with orange ferrous slightly moist 48.5 Fin —+ —20— NOTES ON GROUNDWATER OBSERVATIONS: 1. Borhole dry during and immediately after drilling on 10-16-07 2. Borehole dry on 10-17-07 (-24 bre.). 25 El. COMPLETION DEPTH: 20' DEPTH TO WATER IN BORING: See Notes Above DATE: 10/16/07 DATE: See Notes Above CME TESTING AND ENGINEERING INC. LOG OF BORING NO. B-5 PROPOSED CREEK VIEW ELEMENTARY SCHOOL PROPOSED EAGLE AVENUE EXTENSION NEAR NEWPORT LANE COLLEGE STATION, TEXAS TYPE 3-1 /2' 0 Solid Flight Dry Auqer DRILLER: Requena/LEDI LOCATION: See Plan of Borings ® -- POCKET PENETROMETER O -- UNCONFINED COMPRESSION TEST 6 -- TRIAIXIAL SHEAR TEST COHESION. TON/SQ. FT. DESCRIPTION OF MATERIAL � e � ,� c 0.25 0.50 0.75 1.00 1.25 1.50 1.75 aLimit 5 Content. X Lit ----- ------ SURFACE EMATION: Not Known pq 10 20 30 4.0 50 60 70 -- .-ter---I brown, slity SAND, dry :iff. dark brown, sandy, fat CLAY. ery stiff, dark tan, sandy, fat CLAY with _ _. R _ ea -' 1.55+ 5 occasional very small pockets of light tan sandLl W. --- t and with orange ferrous stains, slightly moist ery stiff, dark tan, fat CLAY, with orange 1.5+ ferrous stains, and with a blocky structure. - -- -- -- slightly moist to moist 88.1 92 X R nes • 1.5+ 79.7 10-111 1-1511 .h very thin seams of orangish-yellow, silty clay below 13' seams of light ten sand, somtimes r cemented, and with small pockets of a crystals below 16' SAND, slightly moist W" NOTES ON GROUNDWATER OBSERVATIONS: 1. Borhole dry during and immediately attar drilling on 10-15-07 Borehole caved at 23' depth on 30 10-16-07 (-24 hrs.). Water level at 21' depth. COMPLETION DEPTH: 25' DATE: 10/15/07 f 1kirin TLMOrPT?.7 4 A WTI 82.0 L] 54.2 DEPTH TO WATER IN BORING: See Notes Above DATE: See Notes Above LOG OF BORING NO. B-6 PROPOSED CREEK VIEW ELEMENTARY SCHOOL PROPOSED EAGLE AVENUE EXTENSION NEAR NEWPORT LANE COLLEGE STATION, TEXAS TYPE: 3-1/2' / Solid Flight Dry Auger DRILLER: Requena/LEDI LOCATION: See Plan of Borings .-. CCC 093 DESCXFT[ON OF MATERIAL SURFACE ELEVATION: Not Known x "ggqY R ® -- POCKET PENETROMETER 0 -- UNCONFINED COMPRESSION TEST A -- TRIAIMAL SHEAR TEST COHESION. TON/SQ. FT. 0.25 0.50 0.75 1.00 1.25 1.50 1.75 Plastic Water Liquid Limit Content, x Limit 10} 20 30 4•0 50 60 �70 Very stiff, dark brown, sandy, lean CLAY, dry to slightly moist becoming brown below 2' 02.9 -- 68.8C -- Fins --� 1 0 117— li.5+ 1.5+ Stiff to very stiff, mottled tan and red, fat Y with sand, and numerous small pockets o white calcareous nodules and gypsum crystals, Uy moist _ -- -- _-- 5 6 90'2 80.8 0 70 X es 1.5+ — . I 1.5+ to very stiff, dark tan, fat CLAY, with d, and with numerous small pockets of ow, silty, fine sand, and with reddish —brown errous stains and seams, slightly moist —with orange ferrous stains below 8' with thin seams of tan, silty, fine sand and with a blocky structure below 13' 10 15 Very stiff, dark tan to brown, sandy, fat ClAY, with numerous small pockets of light sand, and with orange ferrous stains, Wightly moist 95.4 59 X F1 -- nes --- 0 -- 20 Medium dense to dense, dark gray, very clayey SAND, with small pockets of light gray sand, and with occasional very thin seams of lack lignitic material, slightly moist 02. 42.2 Fin _ e — -- O 1.5+ 25 NOTES ON GROUNDWATER OBSERVATIONS: Borhole dry during and immediately after drilling on 10-16-07 2. Borehole caved at 24' depth on 10-17-07 24 hre.). Water level at 18.8' depth. L— I — I I SO ��u COMPLETION DEPTH: 25' DEPTH TO WATER IN BORING: See Notes Above DATE. 10/16/07 DATE: See Notes Above CME TESTING AND ENGINEERING INC. LOG OF BORING NO. B-7 PROPOSED CREEK VIEW ELEMENTARY SCHOOL PROPOSED EAGLE AVENUE EXTENSION NEAR NEWPORT LANE COLLEGE STATION, TEXAS TYPE: 3-1/2* 0 Solid Flight Dry Auger DRILLER: Requena/LEDI LOCATION: See Plan of Borings DE9CRiPTION OF MATERIAL SURFACE ELEVATION: Not Known ad +' p+ ., ® -- POCKET PENETROMETER O -- UNCONFINED COMPRESSION TEST A -- TRIAIXLAL SHEAR TEST COHESION, TON/SQ. Ff. 0.25 0.50 0.75 1.00 1.25 1.50 1.75 Plastic hater Liquid Limit Content, X Limit 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 Very stiff, mottled grayish —tan and brown, fat with sand, and with numerous small calcareous nodules, slightly moist1.5+ YLay 78. — X Files --- 60 stiff, grayish —tan, fat CLAY, with sand, and with large pockets and seams of orange ferrous steins, and some pockets of gypsum 1116tly moist 190.51 +— — --- -- -- 5 65.5 61.9 84. 0 Fii • — es -- Very stiff, dark tan, fat CLAY, with send and with small pockets of yellow, silty, fine sand, and with a blocky structure, slightly moist with ornngish—brown ferrous stains below 13' 10 15 Medium dense to dense, tan to dark tan, veryclayey SAND, with dark brown and rangish—brows ferrous steins, slightly moist moist 45.2 Fin 1.5+ 20 NOTES ON GROUNDWATER OBSERVATIONS: 25 Horhole dry during and immediately after drilling on 10-16-07 2. Water level at 19.5' depth on 10/17/07 (� 24 bra.). 30 COMPLETION DEPTH: 20' DATE: 10/16/07 DEPTH TO WATER IN BORING: See Notes Above DATE: See Notes Above CME TESTING AND ENGINEERING INC. LOG OF BORING NO. B-8 PROPOSED CREEK VIEW ELEMENTARY SCHOOL PROPOSED EAGLE AVENUE EXTENSION NEAR NEWPORT LANE COLLEGE STATION, TEXAS TYPE: 3-1/2' 4 Solid Flight Dry Auger DRILLER: Requena/LEDI LOCATION: See Plan of Borings a DESCRIPTION OF MATERIAL SURFACE ELEVATION: Not Known x p' p� lffi -- POCKET PENETROMETER O -- UNCONFlNED COMPRESSION TEST A -- TRIADOAL SHEAR TEST COHESION, TON/SQ. FT. 0.25 0.50 0.75 1.00 1.25 1.50 1.75 Plastic later Liquid Limit Content, X Limit 10} 20 30 400 50 60 �70 to very stiff, brown, fat CLAY, with d, dry — 75.4 -- Fin -- I1.5+ ery stiff, dark brown to grayish —brown, fat Y, with sand, slightly moist -- --- 8.3 — Fine I1.5+ tan, fat CIAY, with sand, and with seams f tan, fat clay and w/ pockets of white cereous nodules and gypsuzzi m7stals, moist — ♦ --- -- -- 5 to very stiff, dark tan, fat CLAY, with and, and with small pockets of yellow, silty, ine sand, and with orange ferrous stains, slightly moist to moist —with pockets to white calcareous nodules, and with very thin vertical seems of yellowish —tan, fat clay below 8' 819 — — -- 78.4 83. -- Fin X Fi -- ies 94 10 i6 Very stiff, dark tan to brown, fat CLAY, with d, and with numerous pockets of light tan sand, slightly moist NOTES ON GROUNDWATER OBSERVATIONS: Borhole dry during and immediately attar drilling on 10-15-07 Borehole caved at 19' depth on 10-16-07 (- 24 hrs.). water level at 17' depth. 80,4 74.72 Fin 82 20 25 30 COMPLETION DEPTH: 20' DEPTH TO WATER IN BORING: See Notes Above DAIS 10/15/07 DATE: See Notes Above CME TESTING AND ENGINEERING INC. LOG OF BORING NO. B-9 PROPOSED CREEK VIEW ELEMENTARY SCHOOL PROPOSED EAGLE AVENUE EXTENSION NEAR NEWPORT LANE COLLEGE STATION, TEXAS TYPE: 3-1/2" 0 Solid Flight Dry Auger DRILLER: Requena/LEDI LOCATION: See Plan of Borings DESCRIMON OF IdATERiAL SURFACE ELEVATION: Not Known x pq " p. .. ® -- POCKET PENETROMETER O -- UNCONFINED COMPRESSION TEST A -- TRIAIXIAL SHEAR TEST COHESION, TON/SQ. FT. 0.25 0.50 0.75 1.00 1.25 1.50 1.75 plastic water Liquid Limit Content, x Limit 10} 20 30 4.0 50 60 �70 Stiff to very stiff, dark brown, very sandy, eon CLAY, dry • ♦ 58. -- lain 1.5+ Stiff to very stiff, tan, fat CLAY, with vertical seems of dark brown, ellty sand, and with occasional. very small black ferrous stains, • 72. as 5 -- 89.7 -- _-- a _F54 m grayish—tanan sandy, fat CLAY, with orange ferrous slightlymoist Very stiff to hard, grayish —tan, fat CLAY, with occasional pockets and seams of brown sand, and with numerous orange and dark ferrous steins 04. 78.2 Finsbrown, 10 Very stiff to hard, dark tan, fat CLAY, with pockets and seams of yellow, silty, Hue and with orange ferrous stains, Slightly moist —becoming grayish —tan to dark tan, with thin seems of light tan and below 18' 81.3 92.6 98.0 -- Ian -- 79.1 --- O -- a 15� T 91 15 20 NOTES ON GROUNDWATER OBSERVATIONS: Horhole dry during and immediately after drilling on 10-15-07 2. Borehole caved at 19.5' depth on 10-17-07 (»48 hrs.). 25 30 COMPLETION DEPTH: 20' DEPTH TO WATER IN BORING: See Notes Above DATE: 10/15/07 DATE: See Notes Above CME TESTING AND ENGINEERING INC. LOG OF BORING NO. B-10 PROPOSED CREEK VIEW ELEMENTARY SCHOOL PROPOSED EAGLE AVENUE EXTENSION NEAR NEWPORT LANE COLLEGE STATION, TEXAS TYPE: 3-1/2' 4 Solid Flight Dry Auger DRILLER: Requeno/LEDI LOCATION: See Plan of Borings a 0 �` DESCRIPTION OF MATERIAL SURFACE ELEVATION: Not Known w0 00 D ® -- POCKET PENETROMETER O -- UNCONFlNED COMPRESSION TEST A -- TRIADOAL SHEAR TEST COHESION, TON/SQ. IT. 0.25 0.50 0.75 1.00 1.25 1.50 1.75 Plastic later Liquid Limit Content, x Limit 10} 20 30 4.0 50 60 �70 to very stiff, dark brown to brown, fat Y. with send, and with black ferrous • -- 75. -- X ' -- ea --dry to very stiff, brown, sandy, fat CLAY, tly moist beco moist below 3' i2, 89.0 FVsrystiff, grayish —brown, sandy, fat CiAY, th numerous small pockets of white careous nodules and grayish —red, ferrous Lj -- 67.2 -- --- s —5 tn 89.3 84.4 82.7 .� ____pockets 98. • s 0 0 1.5+ ery stiff, dark ten, fat CLAY, with small of white calcareous nodules, and with red ferrous stains with small pockets of tan sand below 8' with numerous very thin vertical and horizontal seems of light tan, silty, fat CLAY, d with a blocky structure below 13' 10 15 Medium dense to dense, dark tan to brown, very clayey SAND, with numerous seams and layers of brown, sandy, fat clay, and with numerous pockets of tan sand, sometimes weakly cemented, and with red ferrous slightly moist 9e.9 ♦ --- 0 3 -- 1X es 1.5+ 20 Stiff to very stiff, black LIGNITE, weathered. a fragmented structure. slightly moist moist — -- 19.8 -- Fin --25 s T51th Medium dense to dense, gray, clayey SAND, odium grained, slightly moist to moist OTZ4 ON GROUNDWATER OBSERVATIONS: 91.7 28.39s 30 1. r oe dry during and y drilling on 10-15-07 Borehole caved at 27' depth on 10-16-07 (-?A hra.l. Water level at 19' dqtb- LEI E�ILJ- COMPLETION DEPTH: 30' DEPTH TO WATER IN BORING: See Notes Above DATE: 10/15/07 DATE: See Notes Above CME TESTING AND ENGINEERING INC. LOG OF BORING NO. B-11 PROPOSED CREEK VIEW ELEMENTARY SCHOOL PROPOSED EAGLE AVENUE EXTENSION NEAR NEWPORT LANE COLLEGE STATION, TEXAS TYPE: 3-1/2' f Solid Flight Dry Auger DRILLER: Requena/LEDI LOCATION: See Plan of Borings ® -- POCKET PENETROMETER O -- UNCONFINED COMPRESSION TEST TRIADUAL SHEAR TEST ^^v #%w mnv/an ae LOG OF BORING NO. B-13 PROPOSED CREEK VIEW ELEMENTARY SCHOOL PROPOSED EAGLE AVENUE EXTENSION NEAR NEWPORT LANE COLLEGE STATION, TEXAS TYPE: 3-1/2' 0 Solid Flight Dry Auger DRILLER: Requena/LEDI LOCATION: See Plan of Borings ® -- POCKET PENETROMETER O -- UNCONFINED COMPRESSION TEST A -- TRIADUAL SHEAR TEST DESCRIPTION OF MATERIAL COHESION, TON/Sq. Fr. r� p. 0.25 0.50 0.75 1.00 1.25 1.50 1.75 Plastic Rater Liquid .� SURFACE ELEVATION: Not Known M ., t Content, 7L t IV ----- - �n to An sn an n Stiff to very stiff, dark grayish —brown, fat CLAY,with thin roots to slightly moist 1.5+ Stiff to very stiff, brown, sandy, lean CLAY, dry slightly moist • --- — -- 76.5 -- C Fim es __ s —+ 1.5+ Stiff to very stiff, grayish —brown, fat CLAY, with sand, slightly moist Stiff to very stiff, tan to grayish —tan, fat CLAY, with send, slightly moist, with occasional vertical seems of black organic material and occasional very small white calcareous nodules, and occasional very small pockets f o e ferrous stains below 5' 1.5+ 5 10 III LOG OF BORING NO. B-14 III PROPOSED CREEK VIEW ELEMENTARY SCHOOL PROPOSED EAGLE AVENUE EXTENSION NEAR NEWPORT LANE COLLEGE STATION, TEXAS TYPE: 3-1/2" • Solid Flight Dry Auger DRILLER: Requena/LEDI LOCATION: See Plan of Borings 01 -- POCKET PENETROMETER O -- UNCONFINED COMPRESSION TEST "q & -- TRIAIXIAL SHEAR TEST DESCRIPTION OF ILATERIAL a COHESION, TON/SQ. FT. 0.25 0.50 0.75 1.00 1.25 1.50 1.75 a p' Plastic hater Liquid a ' o 2---------------- Content, X t p 9tJRFACE ELEVATION: Not Known 10 20 30 40 50 60 0 dark brown, sandy, fat CLAY, with traces I to very orm, brown sandy, lean slightly moist ith orange ferrous steins below 2' 51;�j I j Faull to very suu, gof bk& ferr, cat Cline wI 5 pockets of black ferrous nodules with orange ferrous stains, slightly moist f-10-1 F-15-4 1--20-11 COMPLETION DEPTH: 6' DEPTH TO WATER IN BORING: Borehole dry during and DATE: 10/16/07 DATE: Immediately after drilling on 10/16/07 LOG OF BORING NO. B-15 PROPOSED CREEK VIEW ELEMENTARY SCHOOL PROPOSED EAGLE AVENUE EXTENSION NEAR NEWPORT LANE COLLEGE STATION, TEXAS TYPE: 3-1/2' 0 Solid Flight Dry Auger DRILLER: Requeno/LEDI LOCATION: See Plan of Borings p ` DESCRIPTION OF MATERIAL SURFACE ELEVATION: Not Known x c ii� qq"Y S � ® -- POCKET PENETROMETER O -- UNCONFINED COMPRESSION TEST A -- TRIAIXIAL SHEAR TEST COHEMON, TON/SQ. FT. 0.25 0.50 0.75 1.00 1.25 1.50 1.75 Plastic later Liquid t Content, X t 1 20 — 30--4•0-- 50 60 0 Stiff to very stiff, brown, very sandy, lean MAY dry to slightly moist -becoming less sandy below 1' - 53.1 s Very stiff, grayish —brown, fat CLAY, slightly moist, with large pockets and some thin seams f light brown, sandy silt, dry —becoming mottled grayish —brown and w/ orange ferrous steins below 4' —becoming grayish —tan below 5' 1.5+ 1.5+ 5grayish—tan, 10 15 20 25 30 COMPLETION DEPTH: 6' DEPTH TO WATER IN BORING: Borehole dry during and DATE: 10/16/07 DATE: Immediately after drilling on 10/16/07 CME TESTING AND ENGINEERING INC. LOG OF BORING NO. B-17 PROPOSED CREEK VIEW ELEMENTARY SCHOOL PROPOSED EAGLE AVENUE EXTENSION NEAR NEWPORT LANE COLLEGE STATION, TEXAS TYPE: 3-1/2' 0 Solid Flight Dry Auger DRILLER: Requena/LEDI LOCATION: See Plan of Borings ® -- POCKET PENETROMETER O -- UNCONnNED COMPRESSION TEST "q A -- TRIAIXIAL SHEAR TEST COHESION, TON/SQ. FT. DESCREMON OF MATERIAL x .. g 0.25 0.50 0.75 1.00 1.25 1.50 1.75 Plastic Water Liquid t Content. X t + a a------- .. — L SURFACE ELEVATION: Not Known 20 30 4.0 50 60 0 Imes to medium dense, brown, very clayey with occasional small roots, drySUIT • - 49.4 Fin to very stiff, grayish -tan to yellowish -tan, + at CLAY, with sand, and with very tbin vertical-- -- -- seams of of dark brown, silty, fat CLAY, and with 73.51 Fin range ferrous stains, slightly moist 5 2 65 1.07. 0-�- 10 15 20 25 30 COMPLETION DEPTH: 6' DEPTH TO WATER IN BORING: Borehole dry during and DATE: 10/16/07 DATE: Immediately after drilling on 10/16/07 CME TESTING AND ENGINEERING INC. LOG OF BORING NO. B-18 PROPOSED CREEK VIEW ELEMENTARY SCHOOL PROPOSED EAGLE AVENUE EXTENSION NEAR NEWPORT LANE COLLEGE STATION, TEXAS TYPE: 3-1/2' 0 Solid Flight Dry Auger DRILLER: Requena/LEDI LOCATION: See Plan of Borings .-.D g Cw DESCRIPTION OF MATERIAL SURFACE ELEVATION: Not Known 4 a' 1 " .. ® -- POCKET PENETROMETER O -- UNCONFINED COMPRESSION TEST A -- TRIAIXIAL SHEAR TEST COHESION, TON/SQ. FT. 0.25 0.50 0.75 1.00 1.25 1.50 1.75 Plastic Rater Likd t Cott. x Lt 1 20 30 4•0 50 60 0 Loose, tan, crushed LIMESTONE bane field Intermized stiff, brown, sandy, lean CLAY crushed I nft a odium dense, grayish —tan grayish —brown, silty SAND. slightly clayey, with orange ferrous steins 5 SM to very stiff, grayish —tan to grayish—b at CLAY, with mad, and with very thin vertical,7X ra%of dark gray, sandy, fat clay, slightly mo ea -- -- 10 16 20 25 30 COMPLETION DEPTH: 6' DEPTH TO WATER IN BORING: Borehole dry during and DATE: 10/16/07 DATE: Immediately after drilling on 10/16/07 CME TESTING AND ENGINEERING INC. LOG OF BORING NO. B-19 PROPOSED CREEK VIEW ELEMENTARY SCHOOL PROPOSED EAGLE AVENUE EXTENSION NEAR NEWPORT LANE COLLEGE STATION, TEXAS TYPE: 3-1/2" 0 Solid Flight Dry Auger DRILLER: Requena/LEDI LOCATION: See Plan of Borings DESCRIPTION OF MATERIAL 31IRFACE ELEVATION: Not Known g s> ® -- POCKET PENETROMETER O -- UNCONFINED COMPRESSION TEST A -- TRIAIXIAL SHEAR TEST COHESION, TON/SQ. FT. 0.25 0.50 0.75 1.00 1.25 1.50 1.75 Plastic hater Liquid t ---- Content, X Lim+it 1 20 30 4.0 50 60 70 Loose to medium dense, dark brown to brown, Very clayey SAND, w/ large pockets and thin ofseams tan ellt , fine sand, tl moist 49.82 ft Eff to very stiff, brown, fat CUY, with sand and with orange ferrous stains, slightly moist • — -- Fine -- --- — 5+ 5sand, Stiff to very staff, grayish—tan,72.3 fat CLAY, with and with numerous very small white calcareous nodules and wtih orange ferrous sijxhuy moist -- 73.31 -- Fine -- 9 5+ 10 15 20 25 30 COMPLETION DEPTH: 6' DEPTH TO WATER IN BORING: Borehole dry during and DATE: 10/16/07 DATE: immediately after drilling on 10/16/07 CME TESTING AND ENGINEERING INC. 20 25 30 COMPLETION DEPTH: 6' DEPTH TO WATER IN BORING: Borehole dry during and DATE: 10/16/07 DATE: immediately after drilling an 10/16/07 CME TESTING AND ENGINEERING INC. LOG OF BORING NO. B-21 PROPOSED CREEK VIEW ELEMENTARY SCHOOL PROPOSED EAGLE AVENUE EXTENSION NEAR NEWPORT LANE COLLEGE STATION, TEXAS TYPE 3-1/2" 0 Solid Flight Dry Auger DRILLER: Requena/LEDI LOCATION: See Plan of Borings ® -- POCKET PENETROMETER O -- UNCONFINED COMPRESSION TEST A -- TRIADOAL SHEAR TEST DESCffiMON OF MATERL41 x R COHESION, TON/SQ. Fr. 0 0.25 0.50 0.75 1.00 1.25 1.50 1.75 Plastic later Liquid X Limit w E Limit Content, q dP. 5 SURFACE ELEVATION: Not Known 10} 20 30 4400 50 60 70 very stiff, dark brown, sandy lean -- -- -+ 1.5+ Yto very stiff, grayish —brown to brown, fat Pto Y with sand, to very stiff, grayish —tan to tan, fat1.5+, with sand and with orange and red ferrous stains, and with small pockets of 1.5+ 5 white calcareous nodules tl moist Very stiff, dark tan, fat CLAY, with occasional 11 very small pockets of yellow, silty, fine sand, and with yellowish —orange and orange ferrous _ _-- -- L. 51 stains, fitly moist 72.3 Fin with occasional pockets of tan sand and with 93.1 small pockets of white calcareous nodules 1.5+ below 8' 10 15 20 NOTES ON GROUNDWATER OBSERVATIONS: 25 1. Horhole dry during and immediately after drilling on 10-16-07 2. Borehole dry on 10-17-07 (-24 hrs.). IN COMPLETION DEPTH: 10' DEPTH TO WATER IN BORING: See Notes Above DATE 10/16/07 DATE: See Notes Above CME TESTING AND ENGINEERING INC. LOG OF BORING NO. B-22 PROPOSED CREEK VIEW ELEMENTARY SCHOOL PROPOSED EAGLE AVENUE EXTENSION NEAR NEWPORT LANE COLLEGE STATION, TEXAS I TYPE: 3-1/2" 0 Solid Flight Dry Auger DRILLER: Requena/LEDI LOCATION: See Plan of Borings ® -- POCKET PENETROMETER O -- UNCONFINED COMPRESSION TEST A -- TRIADUAL SHEAR TEST COHESION, TON/SQ. FT. 0.25 0.50 0.75 1.00 1.25 1.50 1.75 .. DESCRIPTION OF MATERIAL SURFACE ELEVATION: Not Known 0 Plastic 1latsr Liquid Limit Content, E t 10 20 30 4•0 50 60 10 I gravel fragments very sue, aars Drown, sand seams and pockets of tan sand, o very sun. grayisn—tan, sanay, lam with numerous pockets and vertical of grayish —brown, silty, fat clay, slightly to moist F-10A F-15A F- 20 -iI F-25-il COMPLETION DEPTH: 6' DATE: 10/16/07 DEPTH TO WATER IN BORING: Borehole dry during and DATE: Immediately after drilling on 10/16/07 KEY TO SYMBOLS AND SOIL CLASSIFICATION Unified Soil Classification System (ASTM D 2487) SAMPLE TYPES COMPRESSIVE STRENGTH TESTS AND LABORATORY TEST DATA N 01 [1 (& + 0 A Thin—W Splft—Barrel Rock Can Cone Disturbed Cutting• No Hand Tarvone Unconfined Compressslan U—U Tube w/Testable Penetrometer Recovery Penetrorneter Recovery Tdoldal Soave 30% Finer — Percent Mar than No. 200 Selve Major Divisions Group Symbols Typical Names Relative Density of Coarse Strained Soils Penetration Resistance N Value Descriptive Z Z GW Well —Graded Gravels, Gravel —Sand N `o c o e ��f. ,ITT Mixtures, Little or No Fines (Blows/Ft•) Term y H 0IE J O aC O � o r $ 'M v. 0-4 Very Loose 4-10 Loose GP ° Poorly Graded Gravels, Gravel —Sand 8 N ; e ci •• Mixtures, Little or No Fines 'e 10-30 Medium Dense _J O = ° S rn 30-50 Dense Over 50 Very Donee 8 GM Nil Silty Gravels, Gravel —Sand —Silt (n tD � c a � $ M ° Mixtures • Based on driving a split —barrel ° ° e sampler with a 140 lb weight Z pS GC Clayey Gravels, Gravel —Sand —Clay dropped 30 inches ct s` 1E Mixtures i v z° SW ..... Well —Graded Sands, Gravelly Sands, C� =° Soil Modifiers I W_ e o o o •• N a$ Little or No Fines � NN $ CLAYEY SP Poorly Graded Sands, Gravelly a0 N 00 Sands, Little or No Fines U o <i Zeba SILTY N SM Silty Sands, Sand —Slit Mixtures in • 2*£ SANDY o U. g S SC Clayey Sands, Sand —Clay Mixtures Consistency Terms of Fine —Grained Soils 0 a ML Inorganic Silts with Slight Plasticity Compressive N « 'n CL Inorganic pays of Low to Medium Strength, qu Descriptive (ton/sq ft) Term O r : a Plasticity, Gravelly Clays, Leon Clays En Q -- 0 to 0.25 Very Soft OL III I Organic Silts and Organic Silty e � � ran J tJ 'v � 0.25 to 0.50 Soft 0.50 to 1.00 Firm L,1 o i Clays of Low Plasticity 1.00 to 2.00 Stiff $ e Q 0 Cv 2.00 to 4.00 Very Stiff a Inorganic Slits, Micaceous or g ,n MH Diatomaceous Fine Sand or Silty Over 4.00 Hord O N o c Soils, Elastic Silts Z J a W Groundwater Levels CH Inorganic Clays of High Plasticity, U- 2 E $ Fat Clays 15 � Y Q — STATIC WATER LEVEL Organic Clays Medium to High 2 Cr CH \\ \\ of Plasticity, Organic Silts —HYDROSTATIC WATER LEVEL \\\ HARDNESS CLASSIFICATION OF INTACT ROCK Rock Classification APPROX. RANGE OF UNIAXIAL COMPRESSION STRENGTH P.S.I. I.I.I.I. HARDNESS ( ) SHALE :I�I�I�I SILTSTONE EXTREMELY HARD >13,900 :- VERY HARD 6,940 — 13.900 LIMESTONE �' �;: PAVEMENT (PCC) HARD 3.470 — 6.940 SOFT 1,740 — 3,470 SANDSTONE COAL VERY SOFT 70 — 1,740 CME TESTING AND ENGINEERING, INC. Creek View Elementary School College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas SECTION 01 1100 SUMMARY OF WORK PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Related Documents/Sections 1. Section 01 3216 - Construction Progress Schedules: Format of work schedule. 2. Section 014523 -Testing and Inspection Services. 3. Section 01 5000 -Temporary Facilities and Controls. 1.02 DESCRIPTION A. The work comprises the construction of Creek View Elementary School for College Station Independent School District, College Station, Texas, as shown on the drawings and described in the Project Manual. The work shall be done under one lump sum contract. B. Indication on the drawings or mention in the specifications of articles, materials, operations or methods requires that the Contractor provide each item indicated or mentioned of the quality or subject to the qualifications noted, and perform according to the conditions stated each operation described and provide therefor all necessary labor, equipment, services and incidentals. 1. All subcontractors are responsible for examining the architectural drawings for structural, mechanical, electrical, and plumbing items. Any items shown on these drawings shall be furnished by the appropriate subcontractor. 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. Addenda are written or graphic instruments issued prior to the execution of the Contract which modify or interpret the bidding documents, including Drawings and Specifications, by additions, deletions, clarifications or corrections.. Addenda will become part of the Contract Documents when the Construction Contract is executed. B. "VLK Architects, Inc." will be hereafter referred to in this Project Manual as "Architect" and all correspondence shall be addressed to: 7915 FM 1960 West, Suite 214, Houston, Texas 77070. C. "College Station ISD" will be hereafter referred to in this Project Manual as "Owner". D. "Pepper -Lawson Construction L.P." Will be hereafter referred to in the Bidding Documents as "Construction Manager", "General Contractor", or "Contractor". E. Suppliers and Subcontractors will be hereafter referred to in the Construction Documents as "Contractor", "Subcontractor", "Supplier", "Proposer", or "Offerer". F. Miscellaneous Definitions 1. The term "product" as used in the Construction Documents includes materials, systems, and equipment. 2. The term "provide" as used in the Construction Documents means to furnish and install. 1.03 CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT A. Subcontractors may reviewa copy of the General Conditions of the Contract and Supplementary Conditions at the Construction Manager's offices, form a part thereof and shall govern the work under each section. 1.04 EXISTING SITE CONDITIONS A. The Contractor shall visit and examine the site. Upon award of the Contract, the Contractor shall accept the condition of the site before beginning the work required. 1.05 SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS A. Construction Manager shall be required to use the project management website system (Projectmates) at www.vlkprojects.com during the Construction Phase of this project. All Submittals, RFI's, ASI's, and other construction documents shall be submitted and managed through this website based system. SUMMARY OF WORK VLK Architects, 2007 01 1100 - 1 2740.00 Creek View Elementary School College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas B. Construction Manager shall assume responsibility for the protection of all areas of work and shall provide and maintain all protections required. Provide necessary dust screens, drop cloths and temporary walls and/or coverings as may be required for protection. Existing surfaces that are damaged due to construction shall be patched or replaced to original condition. C. Execute Certificate of Substantial Completion for each designated portion of work prior to Owner occupancy. Following execution of a Substantial Completion Certificate for a designated portion of the work, the Contractor shall permit: 1. Access for Owner personnel. 2. Use of parking facilities for the benefit of the Owner. 3. Operation of HVAC and electrical systems for the benefit of the Owner. Despite partial Owner occupancy, the Contractor shall remain responsible for all portions of the work which have not attained Substantial Completion and for which a Substantial Completion Certificate, which shall designate the date on which the Owner shall become responsible for utilities, maintenance, security, damage to the work and insurance, has not been executed. D. The loop fire lane and fire hydrants are required by the City to be in place and operational prior to steel erection. 1.06 SEQUENCE OF CONSTRUCTION A. Work shall be started upon formal "Notice -to -Proceed" and shall reach Substantial Completion June 6, 2009. 1.07 CONTRACTOR USE OF PREMISES A. Construction Manager shall limit use of premises for work, for storage and for access, to allow for Owner occupancy. B. Coordinate use of premises under direction of Owner. C. Assume full responsibility for protection and safekeeping of products under this Contract. D. Obtain and pay for use of additional storage or work areas needed when required for operations under this Contract. E. There shall be no fires on the site or in the building. There shall be no dumping on Owner's property. 1.08 OWNER -FURNISHED PRODUCTS A. Owner Responsibilities 1. Arrange for delivery of shop drawings, product data, samples, manufacturer's instructions and certificates to Contractor. 2. Deliver supplier's bill of materials to Contractor. 3. Arrange and pay for delivery to site in accordance with Progress Schedule. 4. Inspect deliveries jointly with Contractor. 5. Submit claims for transportation damage. 6. Arrange for replacement of damaged, defective or missing items. 7. Arrange for manufacturers field services; arrange for and deliver manufacturer's warranties and bonds to Contractor. B. Contractor Responsibilities 1. Designate submittals and delivery date for each product in Progress Schedule. 2. Review shop drawings, product data, samples and other submittals. Submit to Architect with notification of any observed discrepancies or problems anticipated due to non-conformance with Contract Documents. 3. Receive and unload products at site. 4. Inspect deliveries jointly with Owner, record shortages and damaged or defective items. 5. Handle products at site, including uncrating and storage. 6. Protect products from damage and from exposure to elements. 7. Assemble, install, connect, adjust and finish products. Contractor shall make all necessary electrical and plumbing service connections to Owner -supplied Food Service Equipment. 8. Provide installation inspections required by public authorities. 9. Repair or replace items damaged by Contractor. SUMMARY OF WORK VLK Architects, 2007 01 1100 - 2 2740.00 Creek View Elementary School College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas C. Schedule of Owner -furnished, Contractor -Installed items 1. Pencil Sharpeners. 2. Toilet Tissue Dispensers. 3. Paper Towel Dispensers. 4. Soap Dispensers. 5. Refer to Drawings for additional items. 1.9 COORDINATION A. Drawing details and other sections of these specifications covering work connected with or relating to that specified under a specific heading shall be examined for conditions which may affect that part of the work. Failure to do so will not relieve those furnishing materials and/or labor under a specification heading from supplying materials or performing work reasonably necessaryto properly coordinate theirwork with that of other trades. 1.10 LAYING OUT WORK, MEASUREMENTS A. Employ a competent engineer or surveyor to establish and maintain lines and levels. Establish and maintain at least two elevation bench marks remote from each other and located outside the building area. Set alignment and location stakes. B. Verify all measurements at the building. No extra compensation will be allowed for differences between actual dimensions and dimensions indicated on the drawings. In all cases, figured dimensions and measurements taken at the site shall take precedence over scaled dimensions. 1.11 DISCREPANCIES A. In case of discrepancies within the drawings, within the specifications, or between the drawings and specifications, the better quality and greater quantity, in the opinion of the Architect, shall be furnished and installed. 1.12 PIPING A. Should active piping or conduit be encountered below grade within the building structure and be found at variance with the known conditions indicated by thedrawings and specifications, said piping and/or conduit shall be relocated as required by the Architect, and the contract sum shall be fairly adjusted on the basis of the cost of labor and materials. The Contractor shall provide temporary supportof active piping and conduit encountered in the excavations until permanently supported or removed. The Contractor shall cut off and cap or plug abandoned lines at least 3 ft. outside the building lines. In all cases, conform to the applicable requirements of the locality or governing agency. 1.13 PROTECTION A. General: Limit use of the premises to construction activities in areas indicated; allow for Owner occupancy in adjacent spaces and around the site. 1. Confine operations to areas within Contract limits indicated. Portions of the building which are outside the areas construction operations are indicated, are not to be disturbed. 2. Keep driveways and entrances serving the premises clear and available to the Owner and the Owner's employees at all times. Do not use these areas for parking or storage of materials without prior approval. Schedule deliveries to minimize space and time requirements for storage of materials and equipment on site. 3. Do not dispose of organic and hazardous material on site, either by burial or by burning. All disposable material and trash must be removed properly. B. Construction Manager shall take over and assume responsibility for the premises and shall provide and maintain all protections required by the governing laws, regulations and ordinances. The Construction Manager shall be responsible for any loss or damage caused by him or his workmen to the property of the Owner or to the work or materials installed, and shall make good any loss, damage or injury without cost to the Owner. C. The protection of adjacent property shall include but will not necessarily be limited to the erection and maintenance of shoring, underpinning and fences as necessary to protect and support existing work to be left in place. D. Finished floors shall be protected against damage by workmen and equipment during the work. Where materials are carried into the building, the building floors shall be covered to protect the work against dirt or grit being ground in. SUMMARY OF WORK VLK Architects, 2007 01 1100 - 3 2740.00 Creek View Elementary School College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas E. Trees and shrubs on the site which do not have to be removed for the new work shall be protected against damage. No Contractor shall remove or trim any trees and shrubs in the area without the express approval of the Architect. F. Construction Manager shall send proper notices, make necessary arrangements and perform other services required for the care, protection and maintenance of Public Utilities, including fire plugs and wires and all other items of this character on and around the building site. G. Construction Manager shall maintain accessible all building exits required by the City during all phases of construction. Protection of these exits shall include dust -proof enclosures, illumination and exit lighting required. 1.14 CUTTING AND PATCHING A. Cutting and chasing of existing construction for relocation of mechanical and electrical work and for installation of pipes and ducts will be done by the trades concerned. All patching and finishing shall be done by the Contractor. This work shall be done with proper tools and by careful workmen of the particular trade to which such work belongs and shall be done without extra cost to the Owner. 1.15 RECORD DRAWINGS A. Construction Manager shall maintain a complete clean set of "blueline" prints in the project field office for the sole purpose of recording "installed" conditions. Installed conditions shall include addendum items, change orders, or any other items which come up during the construction phase which deviate from the Construction Documents. All changes made in these drawings in connection with the final construction and installation shall be neatly made in red ink on the prints. Upon completion of the project, the marked set of prints shall be delivered to the Architect for subsequent transmittal to the Owner. These drawings shall be maintained to reflect the current conditions of the work and changes shall be reviewed on a monthly basis with the Architect's representative. The Contractor's updating of the "installed" condition drawings shall be a prerequisite to the monthly review of the Contractor's payment request by the Architect's representative. 1.16 INSTRUCTIONS CONCERNING ASBESTOS A. In the event the'Contractor encounters on the site material reasonably believed to be asbestos which has not been rendered harmless, the Construction Manager shall immediately stop work in the area affected and report the condition to the Owner in writing. If, in fact the material is asbestos and has not been rendered harmless, the work in the affected area shall not thereafter be resumed until the asbestos has been removed or rendered harmless by the Owner. The work in the affected area shall be resumed in the absence of asbestos, or when it has been rendered harmless, by written agreement of the Owner and Construction Manager. B. The Construction Manager shall not be required to perform without consent any work relating to asbestos. END OF SECTION SUMMARY OF WORK VLK Architects, 2007 01 1100 - 4 2740.00 Creek View Elementary School College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas SECTION 01 2100 ALLOWANCES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements governing allowances. 1. Certain materials and equipment are specified in the Contract Documents by allowances. Allowances have been established in lieu of additional requirements and to defer selection of actual materials and equipment to a later date when additional information is available for evaluation. If necessary, additional requirements will be issued by Change Order. B. Related Documents/Sections: 1. Section 01 2200 - Unit Prices; procedures for using unit prices. 2. Section 01 3216 - Construction Progress Schedules: Product delivery and installation dates. 3. Individual Specifications Sections Listed Under Schedule of Allowances: Specification of products and installation under Allowances. 1.02 COSTS INCLUDED IN ALLOWANCES A. Cost of product to Contractor or subcontractor, less applicable trade discounts. B. Delivery to site. C. Applicable taxes. 1.03 CONTRACTOR COSTS INCLUDED IN CONTRACT SUM A. Products handling at site, including unloading, uncrating and storage. B. Protection of products from elements and from damage. C. Labor for installation and finishing. D. Other expenses required to complete installation. E. Contractor overhead and profit. 1.04 ADJUSTMENT OF COSTS A. Should the net cost be more or less than the specified amount of the allowance, the Contract Sum will be adjusted accordingly by Change Order. B. Submit any claims for anticipated additional costs at the site, or other expenses caused by the selection under the allowance, prior to execution of the work. C. Submit documentation for actual additional costs at the site, or other expenses caused by the selection under the allowance, prior to execution of the work. D. Failure to submit claims within the designated time will constitute a waiver of claims for additional costs. 1.05 ARCHITECT RESPONSIBILITIES A. Consult with Contractor in consideration of products, suppliers and installers. B. Select products, obtain Owner's written decision, and transmit full information to Contractor as follows 1. Manufacturer, product, model or catalog number, accessories, attachments and finishes. 2. Supplier and installer as applicable. 3. Cost to Contractor, delivered to site (and installed, if so specified). 1.06 CONTRACTOR RESPONSIBILITIES A. At the earliest practical date after award of the Contract, advise Architect of the date when final selection and purchase of each product or system described by an allowance must be completed to avoid delaying the work. ALLOWANCES VLK Architects, 2007 01 2100 - 1 2740.00 Creek View Elementary School College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas B. Assist Architect in determining suppliers; and installers; obtain proposals when requested. C. Make recommendations for Architect consideration. D. Promptly notify Architect of any reasonable objections against supplier or installer. E. On notification of selection execute purchase agreement with designated supplier and installer. F. Arrange for and process shop drawings, product data and samples. G. Arrange for delivery. Promptly inspect products upon delivery for completeness, damage and defects. Submit claims for transportation damage. H. Install, adjust and finish products. 1. Provide warranties for products and installation. 1.07 CORRELATION WITH CONTRACTOR SUBMITTALS A. Schedule shop drawings, product data, samples and delivery dates, in Progress Schedule for products selected under allowances. PART 2 - PRODUCTS Not applicable. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine products covered by an allowance promptly on delivery for damage or defects. Return damaged or defective products to manufacturer for replacement. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Coordinate allowance work with related work to ensure proper integration and interface. 3.03 SCHEDULE OF ALLOWANCES A. Allowance No.1: Allow the lump sum of $ **** .00 for purchase and delivery of building dedication plaque. B. Allowance No. 2: Allow the lump sum of $ **** .00 for the purchase and delivery of room identification signs. C. Allowance No. 3: Allow the lump sum of $ **** .00 Owner's Contingency for the changes requested by the Owner. **** TO BE DETERMINED BY THE CONSTRUCTION MANAGER WITH INPUT FROM THE ARCHITECT AND OWNER. END OF SECTION ALLOWANCES VLK Architects, 2007 01 2100 - 2 2740.00 Creek View Elementary School College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas SECTION 01 2200 UNIT PRICES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Administrative and procedural requirements for unit prices. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 01 2900 - Payment Procedures: Procedures for procedures for submitting and handling Change Orders. 2. Section 31 3200 - Soil Stabilization 3. Section 31 6329 - Drilled Concrete Piers. 1.02 DEFINITIONS A. Unit price is an amount proposed by bidders as a price per unit of measurement for materials or services added to or deducted from the contract sum by appropriate modification, if the estimated quantities of work required by the contract documents are increased or decreased. 1.03 PROCEDURES A. Unit prices include all necessary material, plus cost for delivery, installation, insurance, overhead, profit and applicable taxes. B. Measurement and Payment: Refer to individual specification sections for work that requires establishment of unit prices. Methods of measurement and payment for unit prices are specified in those sections. C. The Owner reserves the right to reject the Contractor's measurement of work -in -place that involves use of established unit prices, and to have this work measured, at the Owner's expense, by an independent surveyor acceptable to the Contractor. D. Schedule: A "Unit Price Schedule" is included at the end of this section. Specification sections referenced in the Schedule contain requirements for materials described under each unit price. PART 2 - PRODUCTS Not applicable. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 UNIT PRICE SCHEDULE A. General: Each unit price for CREDIT shall be at least 66% of the corresponding unit price for EXTRA. B. Unit Price No. 1 - Piers: Drilled piers, per linear foot, including drilling, reinforcing and concrete. C. Unit Price No. 3 - Lime Treated Subgrade Additional hydrated lime treated subgrade. END OF SECTION SIZE EXTRA CREDIT 18" dia.$ $ 24" UNIT EXTRA CREDIT Sq.Yd.$ $ UNIT PRICES VLK Architects, 2007 01 2200 - 1 2740.00 Creek View Elementary School College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas SECTION 012900 PAYMENT PROCEDURES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Applications and Certificates for Payment. 2. Change Order Procedures. 3. Schedule of Values: Submit to the Architect the Schedule of Values allocated to various portions of the work within 5 days after "Notice -to -Proceed". Upon request of Architect, support values with data which will substantiate their correctness. B. Related Documents/Sections: 1. Conditions of the Contract for Construction. 2. Section 01 3216 - Construction Progress Schedules. 3. Section 01 7700 - Closeout Procedures. 4. Section 01 7839 - Project Record Documents. 1.02 APPLICATIONS AND CERTIFICATES FOR PAYMENT A. Progress payments shall be made as the work proceeds at intervals stated in the Contract. B. All work covered by progress payments shall, at the time of payment, become the property of the Owner. C. Form of Application and Certificate for Payment shall be notarized AIA Document G702 - Application and Certification for Payment, supported by AIA document G703 - Continuation Sheet, submitted in quintuplicate. D. Conditions governing regular schedule for applications, payment and retainage are as stated in the Contract. E. With each Application for Payment, Contractor shall certify that such Application for Payment represents a just estimate of cost reimbursable to Contractor under terms of Contract. 1.03 CONSTRUCTION CHANGE ORDER PROCEDURES A. Contractor to submit to Architect within 5 days of execution of Owner/Contractor Agreement name of individual authorized to accept changes on behalf of Contractor, and to be responsible for informing others in Contractor's employ of changes in the work. B. Change Order forms will be furnished and issued by Architect. C. Contractor Documentation of Changes: 1. Maintain detailed records of work done on an accounting basis acceptable to Architect and Owner. Provide full information required for evaluation of proposed changes. 2. Document each quotation for a change in cost or time with sufficient data to allow evaluation of quotation. 3. On request, provide additional data to support computations: a. Quantities of products, labor and equipment. b. Insurance and bonds. c. Overhead and profit. d. Justification for any change in Contract Time. e. Credit for deletions from Contract, similarly documented. 4. Support each request for additional costs, and for work proposed on a time and material basis, with description of products, equipment, cost of labor and subcontracts, completely documented. 5. Computation for changes in work will be computed in one of the manners described in the Conditions of the Contract. D. Initiation of Changes: 1. Architect may submit Proposal Request which includes detailed description of change with supplementary or revised drawings and specifications. 2. Contractor may initiate a proposed change by submittal of a request to Architect describing proposed change with statement of reason for change, and proposed effect on Contract Sum and Contract Time with full documentation and a statement of the effect on work of separate contractors. Document any requested substitutions in accordance with SECTION 016200 - PRODUCT OPTIONS. Submission of such requests and receipt of same by Architect does not mean acceptance, or approval of proposed change. PAYMENT PROCEDURES VLK Architects, 2007 01 2900 - 1 2740.00 Creek View Elementary School College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas E. Authorization: 1. The Owner may request, through the Architect, a Construction Change Directive, in writing, instructing Contractor to proceed with changes of all or in part of work, for subsequent inclusion in a Change Order that is pending. Directive will propose basis for necessary adjustments, if any, to Contract Sum or Time. 2. All changes that affect Contract Sum and/or Contract Time will require a Change Order signed by the Owner and the Architect. Contractor's signature indicates agreement. Any other orders, written or oral, by the Owner through the Architect or by the Architect shall be treated as a Change Order only if Contractor gives Owner proper written notice as described in Conditions of Contract. 3. Promptly execute the change in work only upon receipt of approved Change Order or Owner's written Construction Change Directive. F. Execution: 1. Architect will issue Change Orders for signatures of parties as provided in Conditions of Contract. 2. Promptly revise Schedule of Values and Application for Payment forms to record each authorized Change Order as a separate line item and adjust Contract Sum as shown on Change Order. 3. Promptly revise Progress Schedules to reflect any change in Contract Time, revise sub -schedules to adjust times for other items of work affected by Change, and resubmit Schedule. 4. Promptly enter Changes in Project Record Documents. 1.04 SCHEDULE OF VALUES FORM AND CONTENT A. Type schedule on 8Yz" x 11"white paper; Contractor's standard forms and automated printout will be considered for approval by Architect upon Contractor's request. Identify schedule with: 1. Title of project and location. 2. Architect and Architect's project number. 3. Name and address of Contractor. 4. Contract designation. 5. Date of submission. B. Follow the table of contents of this project manual as the format for listing component items. 1. Identify each line item with the number and title of the respective major section of the specifications. C. For each major line item list sub -values of major products or operations under the item. D. The sum of all values listed in the schedule shall equal the total contract sum. E. Indicate separate value associated with materials and labor. F. Resubmittal: After review by Architect, revise and resubmit schedule as necessary. PART 2 - PRODUCTS & PART 3 - EXECUTION Not applicable. END OF SECTION PAYMENT PROCEDURES VLK Architects, 2007 01 2900 - 2 2740.00 Creek View Elementary School College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas SECTION 01 3100 PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Coordination of work of the contract. B. Related Sections 1. Section 01 1100 - Summary of Work: Sequence of construction and Owner occupancy. 2. Section 01 3119 - Project Meetings. 3. Section 01 6200 - Product Options. 4. Section 01 7329 - Cutting and Patching. 5. Section 01 7700 - Closeout Procedures: Closeout submittals. 1.02 DESCRIPTION A. Coordinate scheduling, submittals and work of the various sections of Specifications to assure efficient and orderly sequence of installation of construction elements, with provisions for accommodating items to be installed later. B. Coordinate sequence of work to accommodate Owner occupancy as specified in SECTION 01 1100 - SUMMARY OF WORK. 1.03 MEETINGS A. In addition to progress meetings specified in SECTION 01 3119 - PROJECT MEETINGS, hold coordination meetings and pre -installation conferences with personnel and subcontractors to assure coordination of work. 1.04 COORDINATION OF SUBMITTALS A. Schedule and coordinate submittals specified in SECTION 01 3323 - SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA AND SAMPLES. B. Coordinate work of various sections having interdependent responsibilities for equipment, such as installing, connecting to and placing in service. C. Coordinate requests for substitutions to assure compatibility of space, of operating elements and effect on work of other sections. 1.05 COORDINATION OF SPACE A. Coordinate use of Project space and sequence of installation of mechanical and electrical work which is indicated diagrammatically on drawings. Follow routings shown for pipes, ducts and conduits as closely as practicable, with due allowance for available physical space; make runs parallel with lines of building. Utilize space efficiently to maximize accessibility for other installations, for maintenance and for repairs. B. In finished areas, except as otherwise shown, conceal pipes, ducts and wiring in the construction. Coordinate locations of fixtures and outlets with finish elements. 1.06 COORDINATION OF CONTRACT CLOSEOUT A. Coordinate completion and cleanup of work of separate sections in preparation for Substantial Completion of portions of work designated for Owner partial occupancy. B. After Owner occupancy of premises, coordinate access to site by various sections for correction of defective work and work not in accordance with Contract Documents, to minimize disruption of Owner's activities. C. Assemble and coordinate closeout submittals specified in SECTION 01 7700 - CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES. PART 2 - PRODUCTS & PART 3 - EXECUTION Not applicable. END OF SECTION PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION VLK Architects, 2007 01 3100 - 1 2740.00 Creek View Elementary School College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas SECTION 01 3119 PROJECT MEETINGS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes 1. Scheduling and administration of progress meetings. 2. Pre -installation conferences. B. Related Sections 1. Section 01 3100 - Project Management and Coordination. 2. Section 01 3120 - Preconstruction Meetings: Owner's preconstruction conference and pre -mobilization conference. 3. Section 01 3216 - Construction Progress Schedules. 4. Section 01 3323 - Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples. 5. Section 01 4500 - Quality Control. 6. Section 01 7823 - Operation and Maintenance Data. 7. Section 01 7839 - Project Record Documents. 1.02 PROGRESS MEETINGS A. The Architect will schedule and administer monthly construction progress meetings, throughout progress of work. He will prepare agenda and distribute notice of each meeting to participants B. Contractor shall make physical arrangements. C. Architect will preside at meetings. D. Location of Meetings: Construction Manager's field office. E. Attendance: Contractor, job superintendent, and Architect Owner and professional consultants will attend as appropriate. Subcontractors and suppliers shall attend as Architect sees necessary to agenda. Anticipated Agenda 1. Review of Contractor's updated Construction Schedule. 2. Review of work in -progress. 3. Field observations, problems and decisions. 4. Identification of problems which impede planned progress. 5. Review of submittals schedule and status of submittals. 6. Review of off -site fabrication and delivery schedules. 7. Maintenance of progress schedule. 8. Corrective measures to regain projected schedules. 9. Planned progress during succeeding work period. 10. Coordination of projected progress. 11. Maintenance of quality and work standards. 12. Effect of proposed changes on progress schedule and coordination. 13. Other business relating to work. 1.03 PRE -INSTALLATION CONFERENCES A. When required in individual specification section, convene a pre -installation conference at work site prior to commencing work of the section. B. Require attendance of entities directly affecting, or affected by, work of the section. C. Notify Architect four days in advance of meeting date. D. Prepare agenda, preside at conference, record minutes and distribute copies within two days after conference to participants, with two copies to Architect. E. Review conditions of installation, preparation and installation procedures and coordination with related work. PROJECT MEETINGS VLK Architects, 2007 01 3119 - 1 2740.00 Creek View Elementary School College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas PART 2 - PRODUCTS & PART 3 - EXECUTION Not applicable. END OF SECTION PROJECT MEETINGS VLK Architects, 2007 01 3119 - 2 2740.00 Creek View Elementary School College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas SECTION 01 3120 PRECONSTRUCTION MEETINGS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Contractor participation in preconstruction conferences. B. Related Sections/Documents 1. Section 01 1100 - Summary of Work: Administrative Provisions. 2. Section 013100 - Project Management and Coordination: Coordination of multiple -contract work. 3. Section 013119 - Project Meetings. 1.02 PRECONSTRUCTION CONFERENCE A. Architect will schedule conference within 15 days after notice of award. B. Attendance: Owner, Architect, Construction Manager, and representatives of major subcontractors. C. Agenda 1. Submittal of executed bonds and insurance certificates. 2. Execution of Owner -Contractor Agreement. 3. Distribution of Contract Documents. 4. Submittal of list of subcontractors, list of products, schedule of values and progress schedule. 5. Designation of responsible personnel. 6. Procedures and processing of field decisions, submittals, substitutions, applications for payments, proposal requests, change orders, allowances and Contract closeout procedures. 7. Scheduling. 8. Use of premises by Owner and Contractor. 9. Owner's requirements and occupancy. 10. Temporary facilities. 11. Survey and building layout 12. Security and housekeeping procedures. 13. Procedures for testing. 14. Procedures for maintaining record documents. 15. Requirements for startup of equipment 16. Accessibility Issues. 17. Inspection and acceptance of equipment put into service during construction period. 18. Notice to proceed. 19. Color samples. 20. Procedures for site meetings. 21. Site access and security. 22. Substantial and final project completion procedures. PART 2 - PRODUCTS & PART 3 - EXECUTION Not applicable. END OF SECTION PRECONSTRUCTION MEETINGS VLK Architects, 2007 01 3120 - 1 2740.00 Creek View Elementary School College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas SECTION 01 3216 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS SCHEDULES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Procedures for preparation and submittal of construction progress schedules and periodical updating. B. Related Sections 1. Section 01 1100 - Summary of Work: Work sequence. 2. Section 012100 -Allowances. 3. Section 013323 - Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples. 4. Section 012900 - Payment Procedures: Schedule of Values. 1.02 WORK SCHEDULE FORMAT A. Within 21 days of the contract date, Contractor shall prepare and submit a Critical Path construction schedule for the work. The schedule shall not exceed time limits current under the Contract Documents and shall be subject to the approval of the Architect. The Contractor shall prosecute the work vigorously and make every effort to start and complete each phase of the work on or before the dates stated. B. Should actual construction of project vary from the Critical Path schedule, Contractor shall take whatever actions are necessary to improve progress as quickly as possible in order to meet pre -determined milestones. Revise and re -submit schedule not less than every 30 calendar days. Presentation of the existing or updated Critical Path schedule, in three copies, along with the Certificate of Payment Request shall be a prerequisite to the monthly review of the payment request by the Architect's representative. C. Sequence of Listings: The chronological order of the start of each item of work. D. Scale and Spacing: To provide space for notations and revisions. E. Sheet Size: Minimum 11" x 17". 1.03 CONTENT A. Show complete sequence of construction by activity, with dates for beginning and completion of each element of construction. B. Identify each item by major specification section number. C. Identify work of separate stages and other logically grouped activities. D. Provide sub -schedules for each stage of work identified in SECTION 01 1100 - SUMMARY OF WORK. E. Provide sub -schedules to define critical portions of entire schedule. F. Show accumulated percentage of completion of each item, and total percentage of work completed, as of the first day of each month. G. Provide separate schedule of submittal dates for shop drawings, product data and samples, including Owner furnished products and products specified under Allowances, and dates reviewed submittals will be required from Architect. Show decision dates for selection of finishes. H. Show delivery dates for Owner furnished products and products specified under Allowances. I. Coordinate content with SECTION 01 2900 - PAYMENT PROCEDURES, Schedule of Values. 1.04 REVISIONS TO SCHEDULES A. Indicate progress of each activity to date of submittal, and projected completion date of each activity. B. Identify activities modified since previous submittal, major changes in scope and other identifiable changes. CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS SCHEDULES VLK Architects, 2007 01 3216 - 1 2740.00 Creek View Elementary School College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas C. Provide narrative report to define problem areas, anticipated delays and impact on Schedule. Report corrective action taken, or proposed and its effect. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Submit initial Schedules within 15 days from Notice to Proceed. After review, resubmit required revised data within 5 days. B. Submit revised Critical Path Construction Schedule with each Application for Payment. C. Submit the number of opaque reproductions which Contractor requires plus two copies which will be retained by Architect. D. Submit under transmittal letter specified in SECTION 01 3323 - SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA AND SAMPLES. 1.06 DISTRIBUTION A. Distribute copies of reviewed schedules to job site file, subcontractors, suppliers and other concerned entities. B. Instruct recipients to promptly report, in writing, problems anticipated by projections shown in schedules. PART 2 - PRODUCTS & PART 3 - EXECUTION Not applicable. END OF SECTION CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS SCHEDULES VLK Architects, 2007 01 3216 - 2 2740.00 Creek View Elementary School College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas SECTION 013323 SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, AND SAMPLES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Related Documents/Sections: 1. General Conditions of the Contract for Construction: Definitions and basic responsibilities of entities. 2. Section 013100 - Project Management and Coordination: Coordination of submittals. 3. Section 013216 - Construction Progress Schedules: Schedules for submittals. 4. Section 014500 - Quality Control: Mockups and samples for testing. 5. Section 015000 - Temporary Facilities and Controls: Project management software. 6. Section 016200 - Product Options. 7. Section 01 7823 - Operation and Maintenance Data. 8. Section 01 7839 - Project Record Documents. 1.02 GENERAL A. Refer to General Conditions, Paragraph 3.12 (Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples). B. Submit to the Architect, or applicable consultant, shop drawings, product data, and samples required by specification sections. Do not submit illegible fax copies nor carbon copies of shop drawings and product data. 1. The submittals shall be logged in by the Contractor and tracked using the "Submittal" feature in the Architect's project management program (Projectmates). C. Within 30 days of the contract date Contractor shall prepare and submit with the Schedule of Values a comprehensive list of shop drawings, product data and samples. This list shall include products which are proposed for substitution. Also include the estimated date of each submittal and anticipated date of submittal return. Allow the Architect reasonable time to review submittals.. 1. The list shall be compiled and submitted using the "Submittal" feature in the Architect's project management program (Projectmates). D. Prepare list on basis of each specification section. E. For products specified under reference standards, include with listing of each product: 1. Name and address of manufacturer. 2. Trade name. 3. Model or catalog designation. 4. Manufacturer's data, including performance and test data, reference standards. 1.03 SHOP DRAWINGS A. Prepared by a qualified detailer. B. Identify details by reference to sheet and detail numbers shown on Contract Documents. C. Reproductions for Submittals: Reproducible transparency and three opaque diazo prints. D. Present in a clear and thorough manner original drawings which illustrate the portion of the work showing fabrication, layout, setting, or erection details, prepared by a qualified detailer. Title each drawing with Project and Contract name and number; identify each element of drawings by reference to sheet number and detail, schedule, or room number of Contract Documents. 1.04 PRODUCT DATA A. Manufacturer's standard schematic drawings and diagrams: 1. Modify drawings to delete information which is not applicable to the work. 2. Supplement standard information to provide additional information specifically applicable to the work. B. Manufacturer's catalog sheets, brochures, diagrams, schedules, performance charts, illustrations and other standard descriptive data: 1. Clearly mark each copy to identify pertinent materials, products or models. 2. Show dimensions and clearances required. 3. Show performance characteristics and capacities. 4. Show wiring or piping diagrams and controls. SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, AND SAMPLES VLK Architects, 2007 01 3323 - 1 2740.00 Creek View Elementary School College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas C. Submit only pages which are pertinent; mark each copy of standard printed data to identify pertinent products, referenced to specification section and Article number. Show reference standards, performance characteristics and capacities; wiring and piping diagrams and controls; component parts; finishes; dimensions; and required clearances. D. Modify manufacturer's standard schematic drawings and diagrams to supplement standard information and to provide information specifically applicable to the work. Delete information not applicable. E. Submit number of copies of product data which the Contractor requires for distribution and for the Owner's record copy (to be turned over at project close-out), plus 2 copies which will be retained by the Architect and the Architect's Consultants. 1.05 SAMPLES A. Office samples shall be of sufficient size and quantity to clearly illustrate: 1. Functional characteristics of product or material, with integrally related parts and attachment devices. 2. Full range of color samples. B. Field Samples and Mock-ups: 1. Erect at project site at location acceptable to Architect. 2. Construct each sample or mock-up complete, including work of all trades required in finish work. 3. Install each sample complete and finished. Acceptable finishes in place may be retained in completed work. C. Submit full range of manufacturer's standard finishes except when more restrictive requirements are specified, indicating colors, textures and patterns, for Architect selection. D. Submit samples to illustrate functional characteristics of products, including parts and attachments. E. Approved samples which may be used in the work are indicated in the specification section. F. Label each sample with identification required for transmittal letter. 1.06 CONTRACTOR REVIEW A. Review submittals prior to transmittal; determine and verify field measurements, field construction criteria, quantities and details, manufacturer's catalog numbers and conformance of submittal with requirements of Contract Documents. B. Coordinate submittals with requirements of work and of Contract Documents. C. Sign or initial in a rubber-stamped review block format, each sheet of shop drawings and product data and each sample label to certify compliance with requirements of Contract Documents. Notify Architect in writing at time of submittal, of any deviations from requirements of Contract Documents. D. Do not fabricate products or begin work which requires submittals until return of submittal with Architect acceptance. E. Contractor's responsibility for errors and omissions in submittals is not relieved by Architect's review of submittals. F. Contractor's responsibility for deviations in submittals from requirements of contract documents is not relieved by Architect's review of submittals, unless Architect gives specific written acceptance of deviations. Architect will review submittals for general conformance to design intent only. 1.07 SUBMISSION REQUIREMENTS A. Submit shop drawing and product data as soon as practicable after award of contract but not later than 30 days before dates reviewed submittals will be needed. 1. The submittals shall be logged in and tracked using the "Submittal" feature in the Architect's project management program (Projectmates). B. Submit all office samples as soon as practicable but not later than 60 days after award of contract in order to facilitate color selections and coordination of the various materials. Final color selections and release of shop drawings contingent upon color selection will not be made until all office samples have been submitted, coordinated and approved. SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, AND SAMPLES VLK Architects, 2007 01 3323 - 2 2740.00 Creek View Elementary School College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas C. Reference SHOP DRAWINGS Paragraph, PRODUCT DATA Paragraph, and SAMPLES Paragraph within this specification section for submittal quantity requirements. D. Submittals to be reviewed by consultants shall be submitted directly to the applicable consultant with a copy of the transmittal simultaneously forwarded to the Architect's office. Submittals will be reviewed by the consultant and then delivered to the Architect for his review prior to returning them to the contractor. Submittals to be reviewed by the testing lab shall be handled in the same manner. E. Contractor is responsible for the costs associated with the delivery of all submittals to the Architect and the Architect's consultants and retrieval of all submittals from the Architect. Accompany submittals with transmittal letter containing: 1. Date. 2. Project title and number. 3. Contractor's name and address. 4. Identification of specification section and submittal numbers. 5. The number of each shop drawing, product data and sample submitted. 6. Notification of deviations from contract documents. 7. Other pertinent data. G. Submittals shall include: 1. Date and revision dates. 2. Project title and number. 3. Names of Architect, Contractor, subcontractor, supplier and manufacturer. 4. Identification of product or material and specification section number. 5. Relation to adjacent structure, materials or other critical features. 6. Field dimensions, clearly identified as such. 7. Applicable reference standards. 8. A blank space 3" x 4" for Architect's stamp. 9. Identification of deviations from contract documents. 10. Contractor's stamp, initialed or signed, certifying to review of submittal, verification of field measurements, compliance with contract documents and coordination with requirements of the work. Note: Absence of the Contractor's stamp shall constitute grounds for rejection of the submittal until such time as the submittal has been processed in accordance with this requirement. 11. Other pertinent data required by specifications. 1.08 RE -SUBMISSION REQUIREMENTS A. Re -submission: For shop drawings and product data not approved by Architect, make corrections and changes in submittals required by Architect and re -submit until approved. 1. The re -submission shall be logged in using the "Resubmit" feature in the Architect's project management program (Projectmates). B. Shop Drawings: 1. Revise initial drawings and re -submit as specified for initial submittal. 2. Indicate on drawings any changes which have been made, other than those requested by Architect. C. Product Data and Samples: Submit new data and samples as specified for initial submittal 1.09 DISTRIBUTION OF SUBMITTALS AFTER REVIEW A. Distribute reviewed copies of shop drawings and product data which carry Architect's stamp as follows: Contractor's file, project site file, record documents file, other prime contractors. B. Keep and maintain a full set of submittals throughout the construction phase to be submitted to the Architect with other Close-out documents for delivery to the Owner for his permanent record. Set of submittals shall be delivered to the Architect in cardboard file boxes with string and button type closures. Organize submittals by CSI divisions, utilizing neatly labeled pressboard dividers to separate the sections. Neatly label short end of box with project name, contents and duration of construction. END OF SECTION SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, AND SAMPLES VLK Architects, 2007 01 3323 - 3 2740.00 Creek View Elementary School College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas SECTION 014100 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 CODES A. Where references are made on drawings or specifications to codes, they shall be considered an integral part of the contract documents as minimum standards. Nothing contained in the contract documents shall be so construed as to be in conflict with any law, bylaw or regulation of the municipal, state, federal or other authorities having jurisdiction. B. Perform work in compliance with all City of College Station ordinances and requirements. 1.02 GOVERNING LAWS A. Additional information with legal implications regarding applicable governing laws and jurisdictions can be found in the conditions of the contract. 1.03 PERMITTING A. Contractor shall, without additional expense to Owner, obtain necessary licenses and permits, and be responsible for complying with any federal, state, county and municipal laws, codes and regulations applicable to the performance of the work, including, but not limited to, any laws or regulations requiring the use of licensed contractors to perform parts of the work. END OF SECTION REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS VLK Architects, 2007 01 4100 - 1 2740.00 Creek View Elementary School College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas SECTION 014200 REFERENCES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 INDUSTRY STANDARDS A. Applicability of Standards: Unless the contract documents include more stringent requirements, applicable construction industry standards have the same force and effect as if bound or copied directly into the contract documents to the extent referenced. Such standards are made a part of the contract documents by reference. B. Publication Dates: Comply with standards in effect as of date of the contract documents. C. Copies of Standards: Each entity engaged in construction on project must be familiar with industry standards applicable to its construction activity. Copies of applicable standards are not bound with the contract documents. 1. Where copies of standards are needed to perform a required construction activity, obtain copies directly from publication source. D. Abbreviations and Acronyms for Standards and Regulations: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in specifications or other contract documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the standards and regulations in the following list. Names, telephone numbers, and web -site addresses are subject to change and are believed to be accurate and up-to-date as of the date of the contract documents. ADAAG Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) 800.872.2253 Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities 202.272.0080 Available from Access Board www.access-board.gov CRD Handbook for Concrete and Cement 601.634.2355 Available from Army Corps of Engineers Waterway Experiment Station www.wes.arm.mil DOD Department of Defense Military Specifications and Standards 215.697.6257 Available from Department of Defense Single Stock Point www.dodssp.daps.mil FED -STD Federal Standard (See FS) FS Federal Specification 215.697.6257 Available from Department of Defense Single Stock Point www.dodssp.daps.mil Available from General Services Administration 202.501.1021 www.fss.gsa.gov Available from National Institute of Building Sciences 202.289.7800 www.nibs.org ICC-ES ICC Evaluation Services, Inc. 800.423.6587 www.icc-es.org 562.699.0543 MIL See MILSPEC MIL -STD See MILSPEC MILSPEC Military Specification and Standards 215.697.6257 Available from Department of Defense Single Stock Point www.dodssp.daps.mil TAS Texas Accessibility Standards 512.463.3211 P.O. Box 12157 Austin, TX 78711 www.license.state.tx.us/ab/abtas.htm REFERENCES VLK Architects, 2007 01 4200 - 1 2740.00 Creek View Elementary School College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas 1.02 ABBREVIATIONS AND ACRONYMS A. Industry Organizations: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in specifications or other contract documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following list. Names, telephone numbers, and web -site addresses are subject to change and are believed to be accurate and up-to-date as of the date of the contract documents. AA Aluminum Association, Inc. (The) 202.862.5100 www.aluminum.org AAMA American Architectural Manufacturers Association 847.303.5664 www.aamanet.org AASHTO American Association of State Highway 202.624.5800 and Transportation Officials www.transportation.org ACI ACllnternational 248.848.3700 (American Concrete Institute) www.aci-int.org AGA American Gas Association 202.824.7000 www.aga.org AISC American Institute of Steel Construction 800.644.2400 www.aisc.org 312.670.2400 AISI American Iron and Steel Institute 202.452.7100 www.steel.org ANSI American National Standards Institute 202.293.8020 www.ansi.org APA APA-The Engineered Wood Association 253.565.6600 www.apawood.org ASHRAE American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and 404.636.8400 Air Conditioning Engineers www.ashrae.org ASTM ASTM International 610.832.9585 (American Society for Testing and Materials International) www.astm.org AWI Architectural Woodwork Institute 800.449.8811 www.awinet.org 703.733.0600 AWPA American Wood -Preservers' Association 334.874.9800 www.awpa.com AWS American Welding Society 800.443.9353 www.aws.org 305.443.9353 BHMA Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association 212.297.2122 www.buildershardware.com BIA Brick Industry Association (The) 703.620.0010 www.bia.org CISCA Ceilings & Interior Systems Construction Association 630.584.1919 www.cisca.org CLFMI Chain Link Fence Manufacturers Institute 301.596.2583 www.chainlinkinfo.org CRSI Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute 847.517.1200 www.crsi.org REFERENCES VLK Architects, 2007 01 4200 - 2 2740.00 Creek View Elementary School College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas DHI Door and Hardware Institute 703.222.2010 www.dhi.org FM Factory Mutual System (See FMG) FMG FM Global 401.275.3000 (Formerly: FM - Factory Mutual System) www.fmglobal.com GA Gypsum Association 202.289.5440 www.gypsum.org GANA Glass Association of North America 785.271.0208 www.glasswebsite.com HMMA Hollow Metal Manufacturers Association (See NAAMM) HPVA Hardwood Plywood & Veneer Association 703.435.2900 www.hpva.org IGCC Insulating Glass Certification Council 315.646.2234 www.igcc.org IGMA Insulating Glass Manufacturers Alliance (The) 613.233.1510 www.igmaonline.org MBMA Metal Building Manufacturers Association 216.241.7333 www.mbma.com MFMA Maple Flooring Manufacturers Association 847.480.9138 www.mapiefloor.org MFMA Metal Framing Manufacturers Association 312.644.6610 www.metalframingmfg.org MIA Masonry Institute of America 440.250.9222 www.marble-institute.com NAAMM National Association of Architectural 312.332.0405 Metal Manufacturers www.naamm.org NCMA National Concrete Masonry Association 703.713.1900 www.ncma.org NeLMA Northeastern Lumber Manufacturers' Association 207.829.6901 www.nelma.org NEMA National Electrical Manufacturers Association 703.841.3200 www.nema.org NFPA NFPA (National Fire Protection Association) 800.344-3555 www.nfpa.org 617.770-3000 NFRC National Fenestration Rating Council 301.589.1776 www.nfrc.org NHLA National Hardwood Lumber Association 800.933.0318 www.natlhardwood.org 901.377.1818 NLGA National Lumber Grades Authority 604.524.2393 www.nlga.org NOFMA National Oak Flooring Manufacturers Association 901.526.5016 www.nofma.org REFERENCES VLK Architects, 2007 01 4200 - 3 2740.00 Creek View Elementary School College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas NRCA National Roofing Contractors Association 800.323.9545 www.nrca.net 847.299.9070 NTMA National Terrazzo & Mosaic Association, Inc. 800.323.9736 www.ntma.com 540.751.0930 NWW DA National Wood Window and Door Association (See WDMA) PCI Precast/Prestressed Concrete Institute 312.786.0300 www.pci.org PDCA Painting and Decorating Contractors of America 800.332.7322 www.pdca.com 314.514.7322 SDI Steel Deck Institute 847.462.1930 www.sdi.org SDI Steel Door Institute 440.899.0010 www.steeldoor.org SEFA Scientific Equipment and Furniture Association 516.294.5424 www.sefalabs.com SGCC Safety Glazing Certification Council 315.646.2234 www.sgcc.org SIGMA Sealed Insulating Glass Manufacturers Association (See IGMA) SJI Steel Joist Institute 843.626.1995 www.steeljoist.org SMACNA Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning 703.803.2980 Contractors' National Association www.smacna.org SPIB Southern Pine Inspection Bureau (The) 850.434.2611 www.spib.org TCA Tile Council of America, Inc. 864.646.8453 www.tileusa.com TPI Truss Plate Institute, Inc. 608.833.5900 www.tpinst.org UL Underwriters Laboratories Inc. 800.285.4476 www.ul.com 847.272.8800 USGBC U.S. Green Building Council 202.828.7422 www.usgbc.org WCLIB West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau 800.283.1486 www.wclib.org 503.639.0651 WDMA Window & Door Manufacturers Association 800.223.2301 (Formerly. NWWA - National Wood Window 847.299.5200 and Door Association) www.wdma.com WWPA Western Wood Products Association 503.224.3930 www.wwpa.org REFERENCES VLK Architects, 2007 01 4200 - 4 2740.00 Creek View Elementary School College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas B. Code Agencies: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in specifications or other contract documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following list. Names, telephone numbers, and web -site addresses are subject to change and are believed to be accurate and up-to-date as of the date of the contract documents. BOCA BOCA International, Inc. (See ICC) CABO Council of American Building Officials (See ICC) IAPMO International Association of Plumbing 909.472.4100 and Mechanical Officials www.iapmo.org ICBO International Conference of Building Officials (See ICC) ICC International Code Council 703.931.4533 (Formerly: CABO - Council of American Building Officials) www.iccsafe.org SBCCI Southern Building Code Congress International, Inc. (See ICC) C. Federal GovernmentAgencies: Where abbreviations and acronymsare used in specifications or other contract documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following list. Names, telephone numbers, and web -site addresses are subject to change and are believed to be accurate and up-to-date as of the date of the contract documents. CE Army Corps of Engineers www.usace.army.mil CPSC Consumer Product Safety Commission 800.638.2772 www.cpsc.gov 301.504.6816 EPA Environmental Protection Agency 202.272.0167 www.epa.gov OSHA Occupational Safety & Health Administration 800.321.6742 www.osha.gov 202.693.1999 PART 2 - PRODUCTS & PART 3 - EXECUTION Not applicable. END OF SECTION REFERENCES VLK Architects, 2007 01 4200 - 5 2740.00 Creek View Elementary School College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas SECTION 014500 QUALITY CONTROL PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes 1. Quality control of products and workmanship. 2. Manufacturer's instructions. 3. Manufacturer's certificates and field services. 4. Mockups. B. Related Sections 1. Section 013323 - Shop Drawings, Product Data, and Samples: Field samples. Submittal of manufacturer's instructions. 2. Section 014200 - References. 3. Section 014523 - Testing and Inspection Services. 4. Section 016200 - Product Options. 5. Individual Specifications Sections: Mockups required. 1.02 DESCRIPTION A. Maintain quality control over supervision, subcontractors, suppliers, manufacturers, products, services, workmanship, and site conditions, to produce work in accordance with Contract Documents. 1.03 WORKMANSHIP A. Comply with industry standards of the region exceptwhen more restrictive tolerances or specified requirements indicate more rigid standards or more precise workmanship. B. Provide suitably qualified personnel to produce work of specified quality. C. Secure products in place with positive anchorage devices designed and sized to withstand stresses, vibration, and racking. D. Provide finishes to match approved samples. 1.04 MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS A. Require compliance with instructions in full detail, including each step in sequence. B. Should instruction conflict with Contract Documents, request clarification from Architect/Engineer before proceeding. 1.05 MANUFACTURER'S CERTIFICATES A. When required in individual Specifications section, submit manufacturer's certificate, in duplicate, certifying that products meet or exceed specified requirements, executed by responsible officer. 1.06 MANUFACTURER'S FIELD SERVICES A. When required in individual Specifications section, have manufacturer or his authorized representative provide qualified representative to observe field conditions, conditions of surfaces and installation, quality of workmanship, start-up of equipment test, adjust, and balance of equipment as applicable, and to make written report of observations and recommendations to Architect. B. Individuals to report observations and site decisions or instructions given to applicators or installers that are supplemental or contrary to manufacturers' written instructions. C. Submit report in duplicate within 30 days of observation to Architect/Engineer for review. 1.07 MOCKUPS A. Tests will be performed under provisions of SECTION 014523 - TESTING AND INSPECTION SERVICES. QUALITY CONTROL VLK Architects, 2007 01 4500 - 1 2740.00 Creek View Elementary School College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas B. Assemble and erect complete, with specified attachment and anchorage devices, flashings, seals, and finishes. C. Acceptable mockups in place may be retained in completed work. 1.08 FIELD SAMPLES A. Install field samples at the site as required by individual specification sections for review. B. Acceptable samples represent a quality level for the work. C. Where field sample is specified in individual sections to be removed, clear area after field sample has been accepted by Architect/Engineer. PART 2 - PRODUCTS & PART 3 - EXECUTION Not applicable. END OF SECTION QUALITY CONTROL VLK Architects, 2007 01 4500 - 2 2740.00 Creek View Elementary School College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas SECTION 014523 TESTING AND INSPECTION SERVICES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Requirements Included: Owner provided materials testing laboratory services. B. Related Requirements: 1. Document 00 3132 - Geotechnical Data. 2. Terms and Conditions: Inspections, testing, and approvals required by public authorities. 3. Section 014500 - Contract Quality Control: Manufacturer's certificates. 4. Section 01 7839 - Project Record Documents. 5. Individual Specifications Sections: Inspections and tests required, and standards for testing. 1.02 SELECTION AND PAYMENT A. Owner will employ services of an independent materials testing laboratory to perform specified inspection and testing and will pay for these services directly to the testing laboratory. B. Employment of testing laboratory shall in no way relieve Contractor of obligation to perform work in accordance with requirements of contract documents. Contractor will pay all testing required by local authorities having jurisdiction. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Laboratory shall comply with requirements of ASTM E 329 and ASTM D 3740 and provide certifications to this effect. B. Laboratory shall maintain a full-time registered Engineer on staff to review specific tests required by this specification. C. Laboratory shall be authorized to operate in State in which project is located. D. Testing equipment shall be calibrated to ensure accurate results and values in order to ensure that test results are true and valid, and at intervals with devices of an accuracy traceable to either NBS Standards or accepted values of natural physical constants. 1.04 LABORATORY RESPONSIBILITIES A. Provide qualified personnel at site after due notice from the contractor; cooperate with Architect, Contractor, and appropriate public authorities having jurisdiction in performance of services. B. Perform specified inspection, sampling, and testing of products in accordance with latest, up-to-date standards. C. Ascertain compliance of materials and mixes with requirements of contract documents. D. Promptly notify Architect, appropriate consultants, Contractor, Owner, and authority having jurisdiction of observed irregularities or non-conformance of work or products. E. Perform additional inspections and tests required by Architect, Owner, Contractor, or authority having jurisdiction. 1.05 LABORATORY REPORTS A. After each inspection and test, promptly submit two copies of laboratory report to Architect, one to applicable consultant, one to Owner, one to Contractor, and one to City. Include: Date issued, project title and number, name of inspector, date and time of sampling or inspection, weather conditions, identification of product and specifications section, location in the project, type of inspection or test, date of test, results of tests, and specific indication of conformance, or lack of such, with contract documents. When requested by Architect/Engineer, provide interpretation of test results. 1.06 LIMITS ON TESTING LABORATORY AUTHORITY A. Laboratory may not release, revoke, alter, or enlarge on requirements of contract documents. TESTING AND INSPECTION SERVICES VLK Architects, 2007 01 4523 - 1 2740.00 Creek View Elementary School College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas B. Laboratory may not approve or accept any portion of the work. C. Laboratory may not assume any duties of Contractor. D. Laboratory has no authority to stop work. 1.07 CONTRACTOR RESPONSIBILITIES A. Deliver to laboratory at designated location adequate samples of materials proposed to be used which require testing, together with proposed mix designs. B. Cooperate with laboratory personnel, and ensure ready access to work and to manufacturer's facilities, if requested by testing lab. C. Provide incidental labor and facilities for access to work to be tested, to obtain and handle samples at the site, or at source of products to be tested, in order to facilitate tests and inspections, and for storage and curing of test samples. D. Notify laboratory of material sources and furnish lab -determined necessary quantities of representative samples of materials proposed for use which are required to be tested. E. Notify Architect and laboratory 24 hours prior to expected time for operations requiring inspection and testing services. Cancel notifications in a timely manner if items or systems are not ready for inspection as intended. Reimburse Owner for trip charges when cancellation notifications are not made in a timely fashion. F. Advise laboratory in a timely fashion to complete required inspection and testing priorto subsequent work being performed. G. Reimburse Owner for all subsequent retesting of products or systems found to be defective or otherwise not in accordance with specification requirements, and for any overtime pay required as a result of any inspection requirements that may fall outside of normal job -site weekday work schedule. Remove rejected products or work and replace with products or work of specified quality. H. Notification of Source Change: The Contractorshall be responsible for notifying the Owner, Architect, Engineer, and Testing Laboratory when the source of any material is changed after the original tests or inspections have been made. PART 2 - PRODUCTS Not applicable. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EARTHWORK (SITE GENERAL) A. Make necessary soil tests (Atterberg Limit Series ASTM D 4318 and ASTM D 698 Standard Proctor) to determine moisture content and density of existing subgrade. Perform necessary soil tests (Atterberg Limit Series and ASTM D 698 Standard Proctor for each type of imported fill) to determine the moisture content and to inspect and test the placement of additional fill lifts to verify that all fill materials used are in accordance with the specifications forthat use. Perform one field density test (ASTM D 2922 and ASTM D 3017) per 5,000 S.F. of site area in the area affected on each lift prior to placement of additional fill material. B. Imported Topsoil Tests: Testing for topsoil quality compliance shall be performed by the Testing Laboratory. 3.02 PAVING OR SPECIAL SURFACE SUBGRADE PREPARATION A. Perform one subgrade in -place density test per 7,500 S.F. of subgrade, after subgrade preparation, in accordance with ASTM D 2922 and ASTM D 3017. Perform tests within 48 hours of pavement construction. B. Pulverization tests on lime subgrade, TEX101 E, Part III, at same frequency as density tests. TESTING AND INSPECTION SERVICES VLK Architects, 2007 01 4523 - 2 2740.00 Creek View Elementary School College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas 3.03 BUILDING SUBGRADE PREPARATION A. Make necessary soil tests (Atterberg Limit Series and ASTM D 698 Standard Proctor for each type of fill) to determine the moisture content and density of existing subgrade and inspect and test the placement of additional fill lifts to verify that all fill materials used are in accordance with the specifications for that use. Perform one field density test (ASTM D 2922 and ASTM D 3017) for each 5,000 S.F. of area within the building footprint on each lift prior to placement of additional fill material. 3.04 CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE PIERS A. The Independent Testing Laboratory shall provide the services of their registered geotechnical engineer at the initiation of the on -site pier drilling operations to determine the appropriate bearing material into which the piers are to be founded. Written documentation of the "determination" shall be prepared and forwarded to the Owner, Architect, and Contractor. B. Make on -site full-time inspections of the pier drilling operation for each pier drilled and placed to verify that the proper strata and penetration, or depth, has been attained, and determine that shafts are properly clean and dry before placing concrete. C. Maintain a pier log foreach pier showing design requirements and actual in place size and depth, in accordance with example noted in Specification SECTION 31 6329 - DRILLED CONCRETE PIERS. D. Verify that the excavation is of the proper size and adequately clean and dry. E. Verify that each shaft is founded at a depth in accordance with the geotechnical report, existing on -site conditions that may be encountered, and at the proper bearing strata. F. Verify that the reinforcing steel and concrete are properly placed in accordance with other testing provisions specified herein. G. Notify the Architect and Contractor if soil or water conditions may require casing of piers. H. Inspection reports of pier drilling shall contain the following: 1. Pier Mark. 2. Pier Depth. 3. Depth of penetration into bearing strata. 4. Plumbness deviation. 5. Description of unusual conditions encountered, including groundwater. 6. Record of deviations from contract document requirements. 7. Other requirements, as defined in SECTION 316329 - DRILLED CONCRETE PIERS. 3.05 FORMWORK, REINFORCING STEEL AND INSERTS A. Make general inspection of formwork. B. Prior to each concrete pour, inspect fabrication and bending of bars, bar sizes, spacing, placement and tying in accordance with ACI 315. C. Prior to each concrete pour, inspect positioning of steel inserts and assemblies, sizes, and spacing, and inspect fusion -welded anchors and sheer connectors. 3.06 CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE A. Design Mixes: 1. At the beginning of the work, Contractor shall submit proposed concrete mixes for review by the Architect, structural engineering consultant, and testing laboratory, including the sieve analysis of fine and course aggregate ASTM C 136, dry rodded weight of coarse aggregate - ASTM C 29, and the specific gravity (bulk saturated surface dry), of fine and coarse aggregates ASTM C 127 and C 128. 2. The testing laboratory will submit their findings to the structural consultant, who will subsequently forward this information, with their review of the submittals, to the Architect. 3. Contractor shall not mix concrete for placing in the work until confirmation laboratory reports are supplied to reflect that each proposed mix will develop the strength required. Successful past history in accordance with ACI 318 will be satisfactory. TESTING AND INSPECTION SERVICES VLK Architects, 2007 01 4523 -3 2740.00 Creek View Elementary School College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas B. Test Cylinders: Make at least one (1) test of each day's pouring of concrete or each 100 cubic yards, whichever is the least, on each different portion or section of the work. Mold and cure specimens in accordance with ASTM C 31, and test in accordance with ASTM C 39. Test cylinders shall be made and tested by the laboratory. Footings, walls, and floor systems constitute different sections. Each test shall consist of four (4) specimens, one (1) of which shall be broken at seven (7) days, two (2) at twenty-eight (28) days and one held in reserve. Determine temperature and air content for each set of test cylinders in accordance with ASTM C 231. C. Field Quality Control: 1. Determine slump for each concrete strength test and whenever consistency of concrete varies, in accordance with ASTM C 143. 2. Monitor and record addition of water to concrete and length of time concrete is allowed to remain in truck. 3. Verify delivery tickets indicating class of concrete, amount of water added during initial batching, and time initial batching occurred. 4. Monitor work being performed in accordance with ACI (American Concrete Institute) recommendations as a standard of quality. 5. Reference SECTION 03 3000 - CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE for additional requirements. D. Source Quality Control: An independent testing laboratory representative shall periodically inspect and control concrete mixing and loading of transit mix trucks at batch plant at intervals appropriate to monitor quality of material issued on job. 3.07 MORTAR, GROUT, AND MASONRY REINFORCEMENT A. Coordinate with Owner's testing laboratory to provide periodic inspection of the following task: 1. As masonry construction begins, the following shall be verified to ensure compliance: a. Proportions of site prepared mortar. b. Construction of mortar joints. c. Location of reinforcement and connectors. 2. The inspection program shall verify: a. Size and location of structural elements. b. Type, size, and location of anchors, including other details of anchorage of masonry to structural members, frames, or other construction. c. Specified size, grade, and type of reinforcement. d. Protection of masonry during cold weather (temperature below 40°F.) or hot weather (temperature above 90°F.). 3. Prior to grouting, the following shall be verified to ensure compliance: a. Grout space is clean. b. Placement of reinforcement and connectors. c. Proportions of site -prepared grout. d. Construction of mortar joints. B. Coordinate with Owner's testing laboratory to provide continuous inspection of the following task: 1. Grout placement shall be verified to ensure compliance with code and construction document provisions. 3.08 STRUCTURAL STEEL A. Fabrication of, erection of, and connections between, structural steel members, including welding and tension in high strength bolts, will be accomplished under and subject to the inspection of an independent testing agency. The general contractor, structural steel fabricator, and erector shall afford full cooperation to the laboratory. B. Perform the following testing and inspection: (Prior to placement of steel deck) 1. Check location of condition of anchor bolts. 2. Check plumbness and tolerance of steel frame. 3. Qualification of welders and welding techniques (at Contractor's expense). 4. Visually inspect common bolts. 5. Inspection of high -strength bolting: a. Visually inspect connections. b. Check tightness of at least 33% of connections. c. Check at least two bolts of each girder to column connection. 6. Visually inspect field and shop welds. 7. Ultrasonic or X-ray testing of full penetration welds. 8. Re -inspect corrective measures required at expense of Contractor. 9. Verify that no members are damaged. 10. Verify that materials and installation are according to contract documents and industry standards. TESTING AND INSPECTION SERVICES VLK Architects, 2007 01 4523 -4 2740.00 Creek View Elementary School College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas C. Gas Cutting: Do not use gas cutting torches for correcting fabrication errors in the structural framing. Cutting will not be permitted on any member, unless specifically approved by the Structural Engineer. Finish gas -cut sections equal to a sheared appearance when gas finish cutting is permitted. Do not flame cut holes or enlarge holes by burning. D. Correction: The fabricator or erector shall correct deficiencies in structural steel work which inspection and test reports have indicated to be not in compliance with the specified requirements. Perform all additional tests required to reconfirm non-compliance of the original work and to show compliance of corrected work. Retesting of non -conforming work shall be paid by the Contractor. E. All welders employed during erection of structural steel must be certified by The American Welding Society for type of base materials and positions encountered. Certification testing to be performed at Contractor's expense and copies of Certifications shall be submitted for review upon request and maintained at the project site by the Contractor. 3.09 STEEL JOISTS A. All steel joists and connections to structural steel members shall be inspected. B. Quality Assurance: All welding performed during the manufacture and erection of steel joists shall comply with the requirements of AWS D1.1. C. Inspect condition of joists after erection; check method of attachment to structures and details of bridging and accessories to verify compliance with required standards. 3.10 METAL DECKING A. Qualification of Welders: Qualify the welding process and all welders (at Contractor expense), and periodically monitor the work in accordance with the requirements of AWS D1.3. B. Testing Laboratory shall inspect steel decking to ensure the material and installation is in accordance with the specifications and shop drawings. 3.11 METAL DECK AND FIELD WELDED SHEAR STUDS: A. The erection of metal deck and field welded shear studs shall be subject to inspection by the testing agency. B. Shear Studs: 1. Test minimum of two shear studs welded at start of each production period in order to determine generator, control unit and stud welder setting. Studs shall be capable of being bent 45° from vertical without weld failure. If, after welding, visual inspection reveals that sound weld or a full 360° fillet has not been attained for a particular stud, such stud shall be struck with hammer and bent 15° off perpendicular to nearest end of beam. Studs failing under this test shall be replaced. 2. When the temperature is below 32°F., two studs from each group of 100 studs (or one stud if less than 100 studs are present) should be tested after cooling. Studs shall not be welded below 0°F. or when surfaces are wet with rain or snow. If stud fails in weld, two new studs shall pass test before resumption of welding. 3.12 CEMENTITIOUS FIREPROOFING A. Application inspection to ensure the material and installation is in accordance with the specifications. B. Sample and verify the thickness and density of spray applied fireproofing in accordance with ASTM E 605 for each days application. 3.13 SMOKE TEST OF DRAINAGE AND VENT PIPING A. Test to check for joint leakage in the sanitary sewer system and vent system. 3.14 OTHER WORK REQUIRING TESTS A. Refer to individual sections covered under Division 15 and 16 for other work requiring tests by independent testing laboratory. B. Other Tests: 1. Moisture content in face brick. END OF SECTION TESTING AND INSPECTION SERVICES VLK Architects, 2007 01 4523 - 5 2740.00 Creek View Elementary School College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas SECTION 01 5000 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 1.01 GENERAL A. Provide temporary facilities and controls needed for the work including, but not limited to those described in the Articles below. B. Maintain temporary facilities and controls as long as needed for safe and proper completion of the work. 1.02 ACCESS A. Provide adequate access to and temporary roads to the site of the building if required for the prosecution of the work. B. Provide and maintain access to fire hydrants, free of obstructions. 1.03 FIELD OFFICE A. Provide and maintain a weathertight temporary field office equipped with adequate illumination; with glazed operable windows; with smooth tables for perusal of drawings and specifications. During cold weather the field offices shall be equipped with a heating device to maintain 65°F. temperature during the work day. During hot weather the offices shall be equipped with an air conditioning device to maintain temperature below 80°F. Provide and pay for fuel and electric energy. In addition to the above listed equipment, provide a space to accommodate the site meetings and have a layout/conference table at 28" height and chairs for 12 people. Upon completion of the project, remove offices from the premises. 1.04 TELEPHONES AND ELECTRONIC COMMUNICATION SERVICE A. Provide telephones/mobile phones in the field office. Telephone shall be in operation from the commencement of work until the acceptance of the building. Contractor shall pay for installation, maintenance, and removal of telephone and for all use charges. B. Provide facsimile (fax) machine in the field office. Fax machine shall be in operation from the commencement of work until the acceptance of the building. Contractor shall pay for installation, maintenance, and removal of telephone line and for all use charges. C. Electronic Communication Service: Provide a computer, printer, high-speed data connection, and internet service as required for the Contractor to maintain internet access and e-mail correspondence. 1. The Architect's project management system is Projectmates by Systemates, which can be accessed by logging in at the following website: www.vlkprojects.com. Contractor shall utilize this system for all formal and informal correspondence with the Architect and Architect's Consultants, including E-Mails, Requests for Information, Proposals, Submittals, Submittal Transmittals, Meeting Minutes (for regularly scheduled meetings), and Warranty Responses (if warranty items are submitted in the system). In addition, Subcontractor Lists, Project Schedules, Schedule of Values and other documents requiring submission shall be uploaded in pdf, Word, or Excel format by the Contractor to the appropriate location in Projectmates. At the Contractor's option, Pay Applications, Project Schedules, and Transmittals, may be created or imported into the system, as well. 2. While the project management system is very user friendly and easy to learn, Architect will provide informal training for the Contractor as necessary to expedite the Contractor's familiarity with the program. 3. Contractor shall pay for installation, maintenance, and removal of highspeed data connection and for all use charges. 1.05 TEMPORARY ELECTRICAL SERVICE A. The contractor shall provide, install, and maintain separate temporary electrical service, including a separate temporary electric meter and temporary pole, if required. The contractor shall be responsible for contacting and coordinating with the local utility company for the installation, maintenance and removal of the temporary service. The contractor shall pay for all costs associated with this separate temporary electrical service. B. Provide and maintain temporary electric powerto points in the building convenient for and available to all trades, including mechanical and other contracts, so that power can be secured anywhere in the building with no more than a 100 ft. extension cord. Energy charges shall be paid by the Contractor. TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS VLK Architects, 2007 01 5000 - 1 2740.00 Creek View Elementary School College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas 1.06 TEMPORARY LIGHTING A. Provide and maintain temporary lighting inside the building for safe and adequate working conditions throughout all areas where work of any kind is being performed. Provide at least Yz watt of incandescent lighting for each square foot of space. Where practical, place temporary lights in the locations where the permanent lighting fixtures are to be installed. 1.07 TEMPORARY HEAT A. Provide necessary heat during the course of construction, including equipment, fuel and attendance where required. Equipment for temporary heating shall be of a non -smudging type. The permanent heating system may be used for temporary heat, when installed. Upon completion and before acceptance of the building, Contractor shall repair all damage caused by such temporary use and shall clean all filters. B. When the outside temperature is below freezing, inside of the building shall be kept at or above 40°F. at all times. While painting and finishing are in progress, the temperature shall be kept at or above 60°F. Contractor shall make good all damage caused by insufficient heat. 1.08 TEMPORARY VENTILATION A. Ventilate enclosed areas to assist cure of materials, to dissipate humidity, and to prevent accumulation of dust, fumes, vapors, or gases. B. Utilize existing ventilation equipment. Extend and supplement equipment with temporary fan units as required . to maintain clean air for construction operations. 1.09 TEMPORARY WATER SERVICE A. Provide and maintain a temporary water supply during the course of construction and pay water bill and meter installation or "tap" fee, if any. Include necessary piping and hose connections. Take precautions to avoid spattering and spilling water in the building. 1.10 TEMPORARY SANITARY FACILITIES A. Provide and maintain adequate sanitary toilet facilities on the project site. The toilet facilities shall meet the requirements of the public authorities having jurisdiction and their use strictly enforced. Sanitary sewer "tap" fee and monthly use fees, if any, shall be paid by Contractor if temporary facilities are connected to city sanitary sewer. 1.11 REFUSE A. The Contractor shall provide refuse removal service at all times. 1.12 PROTECTIVE FACILITIES A. Provide and maintain temporary guardrails, handrails and covers for floor, roof and wall openings, vertical shafts and stairways. If movement of the protective facilities is required by a Subcontractor to perform his work, it will be the responsibility of that Subcontractor to give prior notification to the Contractor and to replace the protective facilities in a satisfactory manner. B. Provide and maintain, as per City of College Station requirements, fire lane(s) and other required fire protection at the appropriate time and sequence of construction. 1.13 BARRICADES A. Provide and maintain lighted barricades and fences for the public protection in accordance with requirements of the local City ordinances. 1.14 TEMPORARY FENCING A. Provide and maintain for the duration of construction a temporary fence of design and type needed to prevent entry onto the work by the public. TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS VLK Architects, 2007 01 5000 - 2 2740.00 Creek View Elementary School College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas 1.15 TEMPORARY FIRE PROTECTION A. Contractor shall provide adequate fire extinguishers on the premises during the course of construction, of the type and size recommended to control fires, which may result from the particular work being performed in accordance with the local Fire Marshal and Fire Codes. B. Provide supervision of welding operations, combustion type temporary heating units, and similar sources of ignition for possible fires. 1. Keep work area free of combustible material. 2. A fire watch consisting of at least one man furnished by Contractor with a fire extinguisher in hand and with no other assigned duties, shall be posted to stand by and observe for potential hazards while welding or cutting is being done. Equip fire watch with suitable personal eye protection and fire extinguishers. 3. At completion of work operations, immediately inspect work and adjacent area for hazards. Reinspect work for hazards at '/2 hour and at one hour after completion of welding and cutting operations. C. No smoking shall be allowed within the building or on the site. Post NO SMOKING signs in areas where work is in progress. 1.16 ENCLOSURES A. Provide temporary weathertight closures of openings in exterior surfaces to provide acceptable working conditions and protection for materials, to allow for temporary heating, and to prevent entry of unauthorized persons. Provide doors with self -closing hardware and locks. B. Provide temporary partitions and ceilings as required to separate work areas from Owner occupied areas, to prevent penetration of dust and moisture into Owner occupied areas, to prevent damage to existing areas and equipment. Construction: Framing and sheet materials with closed joints and sealed edges at intersections with existing surfaces; STC rating 35 in accordance with ASTM E 90; Flame Spread Rating of 25 in accordance with ASTM E 84; paint surfaces exposed to view in Owner occupied areas. 1.17 WATER CONTROL A. Grade site to drain. Maintain excavations free of water. Provide and operate pumping equipment. B. Protect site from puddling or running water. 1.18 CLEANING DURING CONSTRUCTION A. Control accumulation of waste materials and rubbish; periodically dispose of off site. B. Clean interior areas prior to start of finish work, maintain areas free of dust and other contaminants during finishing operations. C. Refer to SECTION 01 7413 - PROGRESS CLEANING for additional cleaning requirements. 1.19 REMOVAL OF UTILITIES, FACILITIES, AND CONTROLS A. Remove temporary materials, equipment, services, and construction prior to Substantial Completion inspection. B. Clean and repair damage caused by installation or use of temporary facilities. Remove underground installations to a depth of 2'; grade site as indicated. Restore existing facilities used during construction to specified, or to original, condition. 1.20 PROJECT IDENTIFICATION SIGNS A. Furnish and erect a project sign, approximately 4' high by 8' long of %" thick exterior grade plywood, in conformance with sign detail supplied by the Architect. Support on posts of framing of treated wood or steel. B. Erect sign within 30 days of start of construction and maintain in good condition until completion of project. Sign shall be located as directed by the Architect. C. No other signs or advertising of any kind, except precautionary warning signs, will be permitted. END OF SECTION TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS VLK Architects, 2007 01 5000 - 3 2740.00 Creek View Elementary School College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas SECTION 01 6200 PRODUCT OPTIONS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Administrative and procedural requirements for product options and substitutions. B. Related Sections 1. Section 01 3100 - Project Management and Coordination: Coordination of construction. 2. Section 013323 - Shop Drawings, Product Data, and Samples: Product data submittals. 3. Section 014200 - References: Applicability of specified reference standards. 4. Section 01 7823 - Operation and Maintenance Data. 5. Section 01 7839 - Project Record Documents. 1.02 PRODUCT LIST A. Within 30 days after date of contract, submit to the Architect a list of products and materials which are proposed for substitution per SECTION 013323 - SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, AND SAMPLES. 1.03 CONTRACTOR'S OPTIONS A. For products specified only by reference standards, select any product meeting standards, byany manufacturer. B. For products specified by naming several products or manufacturers, followed by the words "NO SUBSTITUTIONS", select one of the products/manufacturers named. C. For products specified by naming only one product and manufacturer, there is no option unless a substitution is approved as specified below. D. For products specified by naming only one product and manufacturer, followed by the words "NO SUBSTITUTIONS", there is no option. 1.04 SUBSTITUTIONS A. Requests for substitution to material, products, or equipment instead of those specified will be considered if received at least 10 days prior to the bid date. Substitution request received within 10 days of the bid date will be returned without review. Refer to Substitution Request (During the Bidding Phase) form attached to this section. B. Within 30 days after Notice to Proceed, Architect will consider additional formal requests from the Contractor for substitutions of products in place of those specified. Refer to Substitution Request (After the Bidding Phase) form attached to this section. C. Submit a separate request for each substitution on a copy of the "SUBSTITUTION REQUEST" form, attached to this section. Include in request: 1. Complete data substantiating compliance of proposed substitution with contract documents. 2. For products: a. Product identification, including manufacturer's name and address. b. Manufacturer's literature, including product description, performance and test data and reference standards. c. Samples, if applicable. d. Name and address of similar projects on which product was used and date of installation. 3. For construction methods: a. Detailed written descriptions of proposed method. b. Complete drawings illustrating methods or revisions. 4. Itemized Comparison of qualities of proposed substitution with product or method specified. 5. Changes required in other elements of work because of substitution. 6. Effect on construction schedule. D. Request for substitution constitutes a representation that Contractor: 1. Has personally investigated proposed product or method and determined that it is equal to or superior in all respects to that specified. 2. Will provide same warranties for substitution as for product or method specified. PRODUCT OPTIONS VLK Architects, 2007 01 6200 - 1 2740.00 Creek View Elementary School College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas 3. Will coordinate installation of accepted substitution into the work, making such changes as maybe required for the work to be complete in all respects. 4. Waives all claims for additional cost, under his responsibility and related to substitution, which subsequently become apparent. E. Substitutions will not be considered if: 1. They are indicated or implied on shop drawings or product data submittals without formal request submitted in accordance with this section. 2. Acceptance will require substantial revision of contract documents. F. If substitution is not approved or accepted, Contractor shall furnish specified product or method at no additional cost to the Owner. G. Acceptance of a proposed substitution prior to the bid date will be in the form of an addendum. 1.05 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES A. Submit five copies of request for substitution. B. Architect will review Contractor's requests for substitutions with reasonable promptness. C. For accepted products, submit shop drawings, product data, and samples under provisions of SECTION 01 3323 - SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, AND SAMPLES. END OF SECTION PRODUCT OPTIONS VLK Architects, 2007 01 6200 - 2 2740.00 Creek View Elementary School College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas SUBSTITUTION REQUEST (During the Bidding Phase) (submit two copies -must be received 10 days prior to bid/proposal date) Project: To: Re: Specification Title: Section: Page: Proposed Substitution: Manufacturer: Trade Name: Substitution Request Number From: Date: A/E Project Number. Contract For. Description: Article/Paragraph: Address: Phone: Model No.: Attached data includes product description, specifications, drawings, custom color/pre-selected color availability, photographs, and performance and test data adequate for evaluation of the request; applicable portions of the data are clearly identified. Attached data also includes a description of changes to the Contract Documents that the proposed substitution will require for its proper installation. The Undersigned certifies: • Proposed substitution has been fully investigated and determined to be equal or superior in all respects to specified product. • Same warranty will be fumished for proposed substitution as for specified product. • Same maintenance service and source of replacement parts, as applicable, is available. • Proposed substitution will have no adverse effect on other trades and will not affect or delay progress schedule. • Proposed substitution does not affect dimensions and functional clearances. • Payment will be made for changes to building design, including A/E/ design, detailing, and construction costs caused by the substitution. Submitted by: Signed by: Firm: Address: Telephone: A/E REVIEW AND ACTION ❑ Substitution approved - Submit bid/proposal based on accepted substitution. ❑ Substitution approved as noted - Submit bid/proposal based on accepted substitution - as noted. ❑ Substitution rejected - Submit bid/proposal for specified materials. ❑ Substitution Request received too late - Submit bid/proposal for specified materials. Signed by: Date: Supporting Data Attached: ❑ Drawings ❑ Product Data ❑ Samples ❑ Tests ❑ Reports ❑ PRODUCT OPTIONS VLK Architects, 2007 01 6200 - 3 2740.00 Creek View Elementary School College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas Project: To: Re: SUBSTITUTION REQUEST (After the Bidding Phase) (submit five copies - must be received not later than 30 days after Notice to Proceed) Substitution Request Number: From: Date: A/E Project Number: Contract For: Specification Title: Description: Section: Page: Article/Paragraph: Proposed Substitution: Manufacturer: Address: Trade Name: Installer: Address: History: ❑ New product ❑ 2-5 years old ❑ 5-10 years old ❑ More than 10 years old Differences between proposed substitution and specified product: Phone: Model No.: Phone: For finish materials and pre -finished equipment, list the colors available for the specified item and the colors available for the proposed substitution. ❑ Point -by -point comparative data attached - REQUIRED BY A/E Reason for not providing specified item: Similar Installation: Project: Architect: _ Address: Owner: Date Installed: Proposed substitution affects other parts of Work: ❑ No ❑ Yes; explain Savings to Owner for accepting substitution: ($ )• Proposed substitution changes Contract Time: ❑ No ❑ Yes [Add] [Deduct] days. Supporting Data Attached: ❑ Drawings ❑ Product Data ❑ Samples ❑ Tests ❑ Reports ❑ PRODUCT OPTIONS VLK Architects, 2007 01 6200 - 4 2740.00 Creek View Elementary School College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas SUBSTITUTION REQUEST - Continued The Undersigned certifies: • Proposed substitution has been fully investigated and determined to be equal or superior in all respects to specified product. • Same warranty will be furnished for proposed substitution as for specified product. • Same maintenance service and source of replacement parts, as applicable, is available. • Proposed substitution will have no adverse effect on other trades and will not affect or delay progress schedule. • Cost data as stated above is complete. Claims for additional costs related to accepted substitution which may subsequently become apparent are to be waived. • Proposed substitution does not affect dimensions and functional clearances. • Payment will be made for changes to building design, including A/E design, detailing, and construction costs caused by the substitution. • Coordination, installation, and changes in the Work as necessary for accepted substitution will be complete in all respects. Submitted by: Signed by: Firm: Address: Telephone: Attachments: A/E REVIEW AND ACTION ❑ Substitution approved - Make submittals in accordance with Section 01340. ❑ Substitution approved as noted - Make submittals in accordance with Section 01340. ❑ Substitution rejected - Use specified materials. ❑ Substitution Request received too late - Use specified materials. Signed by: Date: Additional Comments: ❑ Contractor ❑ Subcontractor ❑ Supplier ❑ Manufacturer ❑ A/E ❑ PRODUCT OPTIONS VLK Architects, 2007 01 6200 - 5 2740.00 Creek View Elementary School College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas SECTION 01 6500 PRODUCT DELIVERY REQUIREMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Requirements Included: 1. Packaging, Transportation. 2. Delivery and Receiving. 3. Product Handling. B. Related Requirements 1. Section 013216 - Construction Progress Schedules. 2. Section 01 3323 - Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples: Manufacturers' Instructions. 3. Section 016600 - Product Storage and Handling Requirements. 4. Individual Sections: Specific requirements for packaging, shipping and handling. PART 2 - PRODUCTS Not applicable. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 PACKAGING, TRANSPORTATION A. Require supplier to package products in boxes or crates for protection during shipment, handling and storage. Protect sensitive products against exposure to elements and moisture. B. Protect sensitive equipment and finishes against impact, abrasion and other damage. 3.02 DELIVERY AND RECEIVING A. Arrange deliveries of products in accordance with construction progress schedules. Allow time for inspection prior to installation. B. Coordinate deliveries to avoid conflict with work and conditions at site; limitations on storage space; availability of personnel and handling equipment; and Owner's use of premises. C. Deliver products in undamaged, dry condition, in original unopened containers or packaging with identifying labels intact and legible. D. Clearly mark partial deliveries of component parts of equipment to identify equipment and contents to permit easy accumulation of parts and to facilitate assembly. E. Immediately on delivery, inspect shipment to assure 1. Product complies with requirements of Contract Documents and reviewed submittals. 2. Quantities are correct. 3. Accessories, and installation hardware are correct. 4. Containers and packages are intact and labels legible. 5. Products are protected and undamaged. 3.03 PRODUCT HANDLING A. Provide equipment and personnel to handle products by methods to prevent soiling and damage. B. Provide additional protection during handling to prevent marring and otherwise damaging products, packaging and surrounding surfaces. C. Handle product by methods to avoid bending or over -stressing. Lift large and heavy components only at designated lift points. END OF SECTION PRODUCT DELIVERY REQUIREMENTS VLK Architects, 2007 01 6500 - 1 2740.00 Creek View Elementary School College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas SECTION 016600 PRODUCT STORAGE AND HANDLING REQUIREMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Requirements Included 1. Storage, General. 2. Enclosed Storage. 3. Exterior Storage. 4. Maintenance of Storage. B. Related Requirements 1. Section 01 1100 - Summary of Work. 2. Section 015000 - Construction Facilities and Temporary Controls: Storage facilities. Protection of installed work. 3. Section 01 6500 - Product Delivery Requirements. 4. Section 01 7839 - Project Record Documents. PART 2 - PRODUCTS Not applicable. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 STORAGE, GENERAL A. Store products, immediately on delivery, in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, with seals and labels intact. Protect until installed. B. Arrange storage in a manner to provide access for maintenance of stored items and for inspection. 3.02 ENCLOSED STORAGE A. Store products, subject to damage by the elements, in substantial weathertight enclosures. B. Maintain temperature and humidity within ranges stated in manufacturer's instructions. C. Provide humidity control and ventilation for sensitive products as required by manufacturer's instructions. D. Store unpacked and loose products on shelves, in bins, or in neat groups of like items. 3.03 EXTERIOR STORAGE A. Provide substantial platforms, blocking, orskids, to support fabricated products above ground; slope to provide drainage. Protect products from soiling and staining. B. For products subject to discoloration or deterioration from exposure to the elements, cover with impervious sheet material. Provide ventilation to avoid condensation. C. Store loose granular materials on clean, solid surfaces such as pavement, or on rigid sheet materials, to prevent mixing with foreign matter. D. Provide surface drainage to prevent erosion and ponding of water. E. Prevent mixing of refuse or chemically injurious materials or liquids. 3.04 MAINTENANCE OF STORAGE A. Periodically inspect stored products on a scheduled basis. B. Verify that storage facilities comply with manufacturer's product storage requirements. C. Verify that manufacturer required environmental conditions are maintained continually. PRODUCT STORAGE AND HANDLING REQUIREMENTS VLK Architects, 2007 01 6600 - 1 2740.00 Creek View Elementary School College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas D. Verify that surfaces of products exposed to the elements are not adversely affected; that any weathering of finishes is acceptable under requirements of contract documents. 3.05 MAINTENANCE OF EQUIPMENT STORAGE A. For mechanical and electrical equipment in long-term storage, provide manufacturer's service instructions to accompany each item, with notice of enclosed instructions shown on exterior of package. B. Service equipment on a regularly scheduled basis, maintaining a log of services; submit as a record document. END OF SECTION PRODUCT STORAGE AND HANDLING REQUIREMENTS VLK Architects, 2007 01 6600 - 2 2740.00 Creek View Elementary School College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas SECTION 01 7329 CUTTING AND PATCHING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Requirements and limitations for cutting and patching of work. B. Related Sections 1. Section 01 1100 - Summary of Work: Work by Owner or by separate contractors. 2. Section 016200 - Product Options. 3. Individual Specifications Sections a. Cutting and patching incidental to work of the section. b. Advance notification to other Sections of openings required in work of those sections. c. Limitations on cutting structural members. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Submit written request in advance of cutting or alteration which affects 1. Structural integrity of any element of the Project. 2. Integrity of weather -exposed or moisture -resistant element. 3. Efficiency, maintenance, or safety of any operational element 4. Visual qualities of sight -exposed elements. 5. Work of Owner or separate contractor. B. Include in request 1. Identification of Project. 2. Location and description of affected work. 3. Necessity for cutting or alteration. 4. Description of proposed work and products to be used. 5. Alternatives to cutting and patching. 6. Effect on work of Owner or separate contractor. 7. Written permission of affected separate contractor. 8. Date and time work will be executed. 1.03 PAYMENT FOR COSTS A. Costs resulting from ill-timed or defective work, or work not conforming to contract documents, including costs for additional services of Architect, or other consultants shall be borne by the party responsible for ill-timed, rejected or non -conforming work. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Products: Those required for original installation. B. For any change in materials, submit request for substitution under provisions of SECTION 016200 - PRODUCT OPTIONS. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. Execute cutting, fitting and patching including excavation and fill, to complete work, and to 1. Fit the several parts together, to integrate with other work. 2. Uncover work to install ill-timed work. 3. Remove and replace defective and non -conforming work. 4. Remove samples of installed worts for testing. 5. Provide openings in elements of work for penetrations of mechanical and electrical work. 3.02 INSPECTION A. Inspect existing conditions, including elements subject to damage or movement during cutting and patching. CUTTING AND PATCHING VLK Architects, 2007 01 7329 - 1 2740.00 Creek View Elementary School College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas B. After uncovering, inspect conditions affecting performance of work. C. Beginning of cutting or patching means acceptance of existing conditions. 3.03 PREPARATION A. Provide temporary supports to assure structural integrityof surroundings; devices and methods to protect other portions of Project from damage. B. Provide protection from elements for areas which may be exposed by uncovering work; maintain excavations free of water. C. Maintain excavations free of water. 3.04 CUTTING AND PATCHING A. Execute cuffing, fitting and patching (including excavation and fill) to complete work. B. Fit products together, to integrate with other work. C. Uncover work to install ill-timed work. D. Remove and replace defective or non -conforming work. E. Remove samples of installed work for testing when requested. F. Provide openings in the work for penetration of mechanical and electrical work. 3.05 PERFORMANCE A. Execute work by methods to avoid damage to other work, and which will provide proper surfaces to receive patching and finishing. B. Employ original installer to perform cutting and patching for weather -exposed and moisture -resistant elements, and sight -exposed surfaces. C. Cut rigid materials using masonry saw or core drill. Pneumatic tools not allowed without prior approval. D. Restore work with new products in accordance with requirements of contract documents. E. Fit work tight to pipes, sleeves, ducts, conduit and other penetrations through surfaces. F. At penetrations of fire -rated wall, ceiling, or floor construction, completely seal voids with fire -rated packing material, full thickness of the construction element. G. Refinish surfaces to match adjacent finishes. For continuous surfaces, refinish to nearest intersection; for an assembly, refinish entire unit. END OF SECTION CUTTING AND PATCHING VLK Architects, 2007 01 7329 - 2 2740.00 Creek View Elementary School College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas SECTION 01 7413 PROGRESS CLEANING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Work Included: Throughout the construction period, maintain the building and site in a standard of cleanliness as described in this section. B. Related Work: In addition to standards described in this section, comply with requirements for cleaning as described in other pertinent sections of these specifications. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Conduct a daily inspection, and more often if necessary, to verify that requirements for cleanliness are being met. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 CLEANING MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT A. Provide required personnel, equipment, and materials needed to maintain the specified standard of cleanliness. 2.02 COMPATIBILITY A. Use only the cleaning materials and equipment which are compatible with the surface being cleaned, as recommended by the manufacturer of the material. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 PROGRESS CLEANING A. General: 1. Retain stored items in an orderly arrangement allowing maximum access, not impeding traffic or drainage, and providing required protection of materials. 2. Do not allow accumulation of scrap, debris waste material, and other items not required for construction of the work. 3. At least twice each month, and more often if necessary, completely remove all scrap, debris, and waste material from the project site. 4. Provide adequate storage for all items awaiting removal from the project site, observing requirements for fire protection and protection of the ecology. B. Site: 1. Daily, and more often if necessary, inspect the site and pick up all scrap, debris, and waste material. Remove such items to the place designated for their storage. 2. Weekly, and more often if necessary, inspect all arrangements of materials stored on the site. Restack, tidy, or otherwise service arrangements to meet the requirements of this section. 3. Maintain the site in a neat and orderly condition at all times. C. Structure: 1. Weekly, and more often if necessary, inspect the structure and pick up all scrap, debris, and waste material. Remove such items to the place designated for their storage. 2. Weekly, and more often if necessary, sweep interior spaces clean. a. "Clean", for the purpose of this subparagraph, shall be interpreted as meaning free from dust and other material capable of being removed by use of reasonable effort and a hand-held broom. 3. As required preparatory to installation of succeeding materials, clean the structure or pertinent portions thereof to the degree of cleanliness recommended by the manufacturer of the succeeding material, using equipment and materials required to achieve the necessary cleanliness. 4. Following the installation of finish floor materials, clean the finish floor daily (and more often if necessary) at all times while work is being performed in the space in which finish materials are installed. a. "Clean", for the purpose of this subparagraph shall be interpreted as meaning free from foreign material which, in the opinion of the Architect, may be injurious to the finish floor material. PROGRESS CLEANING VLK Architects, 2007 01 7413 - 1 2740.00 Creek View Elementary School College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas 3.02 FINAL CLEANING A. "Clean", forthe purpose of this Article, and except as may be specifically provided otherwise, shall be interpreted as meaning the level of cleanliness generally provide by skilled cleaners using commercial quality building maintenance equipment and materials. B. Prior to completion of the work, remove from the project site all tools, surplus materials, equipment, scrap, debris, and waste. Conduct final progress cleaning as described in this section. C. Site: 1. Unless otherwise specifically directed by Architect, broom clean paved areas on the site and public paved areas adjacent to the site. 2. Completely remove resultant debris. D. Structure: 1. Exterior. a. Visually inspect exterior surfaces and remove all traces of soil, waste materials, smudges, and other foreign matter. b. Remove all traces of splashed materials from adjacent surfaces. c. If necessary to achieve a uniform degree of cleanliness, hose down the exterior of the structure. d. In event of stubborn stains not removable with water, Architect may require light sandblasting or other cleaning at no additional cost to the Owner. 2. Interior: a. Visually inspect interior surfaces and remove all traces of soil, waste materials, smudges, and other foreign matter. b. Remove all traces of splashed material from adjacent surfaces. c. Remove paint droppings, spots, stains, and dirt from finished surfaces. 3. Glass: Clean inside and outside. 4. Polished Surfaces: To surfaces requiring routine application of buffed polish, apply the polish recommended by the manufacturer of the material being polished. This does not apply to resilient flooring surfaces. Reference SECTION 09 6500 - RESILIENT FLOORING for cleaning of resilient flooring. E. Schedule final cleaning, as approved by the Architect, to enable the Owner to accept a completely clean work. 3.03 CLEANING DURING OWNER'S OCCUPANCY A. Should the Owner occupy the work, or any portion thereof, prior to its completion by the Contractor and acceptance by the Owner, responsibilities for interim and final cleaning shall be as determined by the Architect in accordance with the General Conditions of the Contract for Construction. END OF SECTION PROGRESS CLEANING VLK Architects, 2007 01 7413 - 2 2740.00 Creek View Elementary School College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas SECTION 01 7700 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Administrative and procedural requirements for project closeout, including but not limited to: 1. Inspection procedures. 2. Project record document submittal. 3. Operating and maintenance data submittal, including training sessions for equipment and systems. 4. Submittal of warranties. 5. Submittal of spare parts and maintenance materials. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 01 1100 - Summary of Work: record drawings. 2. Section 01 3323 - Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples. 3. Section 017413 - Progress Cleaning: final cleaning. 4. Section 08 7100 - Door Hardware: keys and keying schedule. 1.02 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION A. General: Substantial Completion is defined in Paragraph 9.8.1 of the General Conditions. B. Preliminary Procedures: Before requesting inspection for certification of substantial completion, complete the following. List exceptions in the request. 1. In the Application for Payment that coincides with, or first follows, the date Substantial Completion is claimed, show 100% completion for the portion of the work claimed as substantially complete. Include supporting documentation for completion as indicated in these Contract Documents and a statement showing an accounting of changes to the Contract Sum. a. If 100% completion cannot be shown, include a list of incomplete items, the value of incomplete construction and reasons the work is not complete. 2. Advise Owner of pending insurance change -over requirements. 3. Submit specific warranties, maintenance agreements, final certifications and similar documents. 4. Obtain and submit releases enabling the Owner unrestricted use of the work and access to services and utilities; include occupancy permits, operating certificates and similar releases. 5. Submit record drawings, maintenance manuals and similar final record information. 6. Deliver tools, spare parts, extra stock and similar items. 7. Make final change -over of permanent locks and transmit keys and keying schedule to the Owner. Advise the Owner's personnel of change -over in security provisions. 8. Complete start-up testing of systems, and training sessions for Owner's operating and maintenance personnel. Discontinue or change over and remove temporary facilities from the site, along with construction tools, mock-ups and similar elements. 9. Complete final clean-up requirements, including touch-up painting. Touch-up and otherwise repair and restore marred exposed finishes. C. Inspection Procedures: On receipt of a request for inspection, the Architect will either proceed with inspection or advise the Contractor of unfulfilled requirements. The Architect will prepare the Certificate of Substantial Completion following inspection, or advise the Contractor of construction that must be completed or corrected before the certificate will be issued. 1. Architect will repeat the inspection when requested and assured that the work has been substantially completed. 2. Results of the completed inspection will form the basis of requirements for final acceptance. 1.03 FINAL ACCEPTANCE A. Preliminary Procedures: Before requesting final inspection for certification of final acceptance and final payment, submit the following. List exceptions in the request. 1. Final payment request with releases and supporting documentation not previously submitted and accepted. Include certificates of insurance for products and completed operations where required. 2. Updated final statement, accounting for final additional changes to the contract sum. 3. Certified copy of the Architect's final inspection list of items to be completed or corrected, stating that each item has been completed or otherwise resolved foracceptance, and the list has been endorsed and dated by the Architect. 4. Consent of surety to final payment. 5. Final Liquidated Damages settlement statement. CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES VLK Architects, 2007 01 7700 - 1 2740.00 Creek View Elementary School College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas 6. Evidence of final, continuing insurance coverage complying with insurance requirements. 7. Evidence of Compliance with Requirements of Governing Authorities a. Certificate of Occupancy. b. Certificates of Inspection required for mechanical and electrical systems. 8. Operation and Maintenance Data: Under provisions of SECTION 01 7823 - OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA. 9. Warranties and Bonds: Under provisions of SECTION 01 7830 - WARRANTIES AND BONDS. 10. Project Record Documents: Under provisions of SECTION 017839 - PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS. 11. Spare Parts and Maintenance Materials: Under provisions of SECTION 01 7840 - SPARE PARTS, OVERAGES AND MAINTENANCE MATERIALS. 12. Keys and Keying Schedule: Under provisions of SECTION 08 7100 - DOOR HARDWARE. 13. Evidence of Payment and Release of Liens: In accordance with General Conditions of the Contract for Construction. B. Re -inspection Procedures: Architect will re -inspect the work upon receipt of notice that the work, including inspection list items from earlier inspections, has been complete, except items whose completion has been delayed because of circumstances acceptable to the Architect. 1. Upon completion of re -inspection, the Architect will advise the Contractor of work that is incomplete or of obligations that have not been fulfilled but are required for final acceptance. 2. If necessary, re -inspection will be repeated. C. Reinspection Fees: Should status of completion of work require reinspection by Architect due to failure of work to comply with Contractor's claims on initial inspection, Owner will deduct the amount of Architect and appropriate consultants compensation for reinspection services from final payment to Contractor. The reimbursement transaction shall be executed by change order to the contract. 1.04 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES A. Maintenance Manuals: Organize operating and maintenance data into suitable sets of manageable size. Bind properly indexed data in three individual heavy-duty 31/2", 3-ring vinyl -covered binders, with identification on front and spine of each binder. Include the following types of information: 1. Emergency instructions. 2. Spare parts list. 3. Copies of warranties. 4. Wiring diagrams. 5. Recommended "turn around" cycles. 6. Inspection procedures. 7. Shop drawings. 8. Fixture lamping schedule. B. Shop Drawings: Keep and maintain a full set of submittals throughout the construction phase to be submitted to the Architect with other close-out documents for delivery to the Owner for his permanent record. Set of submittals shall be delivered to the Architect in cardboard file boxes with string and button type closures. Organize submittals by CSI divisions, utilizing neatly labeled pressboard dividers to separate the sections. Neatly label short end of box with project name, contents and duration of construction. C. Operating and Maintenance Training Sessions: Prepare a written agenda of items to be covered at each training session. Attendance by Owner's operating and maintenance personnel is mandatory. Notify Owner not less than 48 hours prior to scheduled training sessions. 1. Arrange for each installer of equipment and systems that requires regular maintenance to meet with the Owner's personnel to provide instruction in proper operation and maintenance. If installers are not experienced in procedures, provide instruction by manufacturer's representatives. Include a detailed review of the following items: a. Maintenance manuals. b. Record documents. c. Spare parts and materials. d. Tools. e. Lubricants. f. Fuels. g. Identification systems. h. Control sequences. i. Hazards. j. Cleaning. k. Warranties and bonds. I. Maintenance agreements and similar continuing commitments. CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES VLK Architects, 2007 01 7700 - 2 2740.00 Creek View Elementary School College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas 2. Training sessions shall consist of not less than 5 days of not less than 4 hours each day. A copy of maintenance manuals for equipment or system being demonstrated shall be on hand during training session. As part of instruction for operating equipment, demonstrate the following procedures: a. Start-up. b. Shutdown. c. Emergency operations. d. Noise and vibration adjustments. e. Safety procedures. f. Economy and efficiency adjustments. g. Effective energy utilization. 3. Training sessions shall be conducted for: a. Irrigation system. b. Food service equipment. c. HVAC systems. d. Energy management controls. e. Public address system. f. Fire alarm and smoke detection systems. g. Security System. PART 2 - PRODUCTS & PART 3 - EXECUTION Not applicable. END OF SECTION CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES VLK Architects, 2007 01 7700 - 3 2740.00 Creek View Elementary School College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas SECTION 01 7823 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Format and content of manuals. 2. Instruction of Owner's personnel. 3. Schedule of submittals. B. Related Sections 1. Section 013323 - Shop Drawings, Product Data, and Samples. 2. Section 014500 - Quality Control: Manufacturer's instructions. 3. Section 01 7700 - Closeout Procedures. 4. Section 017830 - Warranties and Bonds. 5. Section 017839 - Project Record Documents. 6. Individual Specifications Sections: Specific requirements for operation and maintenance data. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Prepare instructions and data by personnel experienced in maintenance and operation of described products. 1.03 FORMAT A. Prepare data in the form of an instructional manual. B. Binders: Bind in three individual heavy-duty8'/i' x 11" black, three-ring binders with hardback, cleanable, plastic covers; 3" maximum ring size. When multiple binders are used, correlate data into related consistent groupings. C. Cover: Identify each binder with typed or printed title OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS; list title of project identify subject matter of contents. D. Arrange content by systems, under section numbers and sequence of table of contents of this project manual. E. Provide tabbed fly leaf for each separate product and system, with typed description of product and major component parts of equipment. F. Text: Manufacturer's printed data, or typewritten data on 20 pound paper. G. Drawings: Provide with reinforced punched binder tab. Bind in with text; fold larger drawings to size of text pages. 1.04 CONTENTS, EACH VOLUME A. Table of Contents: Provide title of project names, addresses, and telephone numbers of Architect/Engineer and Contractor with name of responsible parties; schedule of products and systems, indexed to content of the volume. B. For Each Product or System: List names, addresses and telephone numbers of subcontractors and suppliers, including local source of supplies and replacement parts. C. Product Data: Mark each sheet to clearly identify specific products and component parts, and data applicable to installation; delete inapplicable information. D. Drawings: Supplement product data to illustrate relations of component parts of equipment and systems, to show control and flow diagrams. Do not use project record documents as maintenance drawings. E. Typed Text: As required to supplement product data. Provide logical sequence of instructions for each procedure, incorporating manufacturer's instructions specified in SECTION 014500 - QUALITY CONTROL. F. Warranties and Bonds: Bind in copy of each. OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA VLK Architects, 2007 01 7823 - 1 2740.00 Creek View Elementary School College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas 1.05 MANUAL FOR MATERIALS AND FINISHES A. Building Products, Applied Materials, and Finishes: Include product data, with catalog number, size, composition, and color and texture designations. Provide information for re -ordering custom manufactured products. B. Instructions for Care and Maintenance: Include manufacturer's recommendations for cleaning agents and methods, precautions against detrimental agents and methods, and recommended schedule for cleaning and maintenance. C. Moisture -protection and Weather -exposed Products: Include product data listing applicable reference standards, chemical composition, and details of installation. Provide recommendations for inspections, maintenance, and repair. D. Additional Requirements: As Specified in individual Specifications sections. E. Provide a listing in Table of Contents for design data, with tabbed fly sheet and space for insertion of data. 1.06 MANUAL FOR EQUIPMENT AND SYSTEMS A. Each Item of Equipment and Each System: Include description of unit or system, and component parts. Give function, normal operating characteristics, and limiting conditions. Include performance curves, with engineering data and tests, and complete nomenclature and commercial number of replaceable parts. B. Panelboard Circuit Directories: Provide electrical service characteristics, controls, and communications. C. Include as -installed color coded wiring diagrams. D. Operating Procedures: Include start-up, break-in, and routine normal operating instructions and sequences. Include regulation, control, stopping, shut -down, and emergency instructions. Include summer, winter, and any special operating instructions. E. Maintenance Requirements: Include routine procedures and guide for trouble -shooting; disassembly, repair, and reassembly instructions; and alignment, adjusting, balancing, and checking instructions. F. Provide servicing and lubrication schedule, and list of lubricants required. G. Include manufacturer's printed operation and maintenance instructions. H. Include sequence of operation by controls manufacturer. I. Provide original manufacturer's parts list, illustrations, assembly drawings, and diagrams required for maintenance. J. Provide as -installed control diagrams by controls manufacturer. K. Provide Contractor's coordination drawings, with as -installed color coded piping diagrams. L. Provide charts of valve tag numbers, with location and function of each valve, keyed to flow and control diagrams. M. Provide list oforiginal manufacturer's spare parts, current prices, and recommended quantities to be maintained in storage. N. Additional Requirements: As specified in individual Specifications sections. O. Provide a listing in table of contents for design data, with tabbed fly sheet and space for insertion of data. 1.07 INSTRUCTION OF OWNER PERSONNEL A. Before final inspection, instruct Owner's designated personnel in operation, adjustment, and maintenance of products, equipment, and systems, at agreed upon times. For equipment requiring seasonal operation, perform instructions for other seasons within six months. B. Use operation and maintenance manuals as basis of instruction. Review contents of manual with personnel in detail to explain all aspects of operation and maintenance. OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA VLK Architects, 2007 01 7823 - 2 2740.00 Creek View Elementary School College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas C. Prepare and insert additional data in Operation and Maintenance Manual when need for such data becomes apparent during instruction. 1.08 SUBMITTALS A. Submit two copies of preliminary draft or proposed formats and outlines of contents before start of work. Architect/Engineer will review draft and return one copy with comments. B. For equipment, or component parts of equipment put into service during construction and operated by Owner, submit documents within 10 days after acceptance. C. Submit one copy of completed volumes in final form 15 days prior to final inspection. Copy will be returned after final inspection, with Architect/Engineer comments. Revise content of documents as required prior to final submittal. D. Submit two copies of revised volumes of data in final form within 10 days after final inspection. PART 2 - PRODUCTS & PART 3 - EXECUTION Not applicable. END OF SECTION OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA VLK Architects, 2007 01 7823 - 3 2740.00 Creek View Elementary School College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas SECTION 017830 WARRANTIES AND BONDS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes 1. Preparation and submittal of warranties and bonds. 2. Schedule of submittals. B. Related Documents/Sections: 1. General Conditions of the Contract for Construction: Performance Bond and Labor and Material Payment Bonds, Warranty, and Correction of Work. 2. Section 01 7700 - Closeout Procedures. 3. Section 01 7823 - Operation and Maintenance Data. 4. Individual Specifications Sections: Warranties and bonds required for specific products or work. 1.02 FORM OF SUBMITTALS A. Bind in three individual heavy-duty 8'/Z" x 11" black, three-ring binders, with hardback, cleanable, plastic covers. B. Label cover of each binder with typed or printed title WARRANTIES AND BONDS, with title of project; name, address and telephone number of Contractor; and name of responsible principal. C. Table of Contents: Neatly typed, in the sequence of the table of contents of the project manual, with each item identified with the number and title of the specification section in which specified, and the name of product or work item. D. Separate each warranty or bond with index tab sheets keyed to the table of contents listing. Provide full information, using separate typed sheets as necessary. List subcontractor, supplier, and manufacturer, with name, address, and telephone number of responsible principal. 1.03 PREPARATION OF SUBMITTALS A. Obtain warranties and bonds, executed in duplicate by responsible subcontractors, suppliers, and manufacturers, within ten days after completion of the applicable item of work. Except for items put into use with Owner's permission, leave date of beginning of time of warranty until the date of substantial completion is determined. B. Verify that documents are in proper form, contain full information, and are notarized. C. Co -execute submittals when required. D. Retain warranties and bonds until time specified for submittal. 1.04 TIME OF SUBMITTALS A. For equipment or component parts of equipment put into service during construction with Owner's permission, submit documents within ten days after acceptance. B. Make other submittals within 10 days after date of substantial completion, priorto final application for payment. C. For items of work when acceptance is delayed beyond date of substantial completion, submit within ten days after acceptance, listing the date of acceptance as the beginning of the warranty period. PART 2 - PRODUCTS & PART 3 - EXECUTION Not applicable. END OF SECTION WARRANTIES AND BONDS VLK Architects, 2007 01 7830 - 1 2740.00 Creek View Elementary School College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas SECTION 01 7839 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Maintenance and submittal of record documents and samples. B. Related Sections/Documents 1. General Conditions of the Contract for Construction: Documents at the site. 2. Section 013323 - Shop Drawings, Product Data, and Samples. 3. Section 017700 - Closeout Procedures. 4. Section 017823 - Operation and Maintenance Data. 5. Individual Specifications Sections: Manufacturer's certificates and certificates of inspection. 1.02 MAINTENANCE OF DOCUMENTS AND SAMPLES A. In addition to requirements in General Conditions, maintain at the site for Owner one record copy of: 1. Contract drawings. 2. Specifications. 3. Addenda. 4. Change orders and other modifications to the contract. 5. Reviewed shop drawings, product data, and samples. 6. Field test records. 7. Inspection certificates. 8. Manufacturer's certificates. B. Store record documents and samples in field office apart from documents used for construction. Provide files, racks, and secure storage for record documents and samples. C. Label and file record documents and samples in accordance with section number listings in table of contents of this project manual. Label each document "PROJECT RECORD" in neat, large, printed letters. D. Maintain record documents in a clean, dry and legible condition. Do not use record documents for construction purposes. E. Keep record documents and samples available for inspection by Architect. 1.03 RECORDING A. Record information on a set of blueline opaque drawings, and in a copy of a project manual. All changes made in these drawings in connection with the final construction and installation shall be neatly made in red ink on the prints. B. Provide felt tip marking pens, maintaining separate colors for each major system, for recording information. C. Contractor shall include with the record documents, all changes and modifications made by addenda, change orders, supplementary instructions, or other forms of documentation, written or verbal, which alter the documents. D. Record information concurrently with construction progress. Do not conceal any work until required information is recorded. E. Contract drawings and shop drawings: Legibly mark each item on the drawings to record actual construction, including: 1. Measured depths of elements of foundation in relation to finish first floor datum. 2. Measured horizontal and vertical locations of underground utilities and appurtenances, referenced to permanent surface improvements. 3. Measured locations of internal utilities and appurtenances concealed in construction, referenced to visible and accessible features of construction. 4. Field changes of dimension and detail. 5. Changes made by addenda and modifications. 6. Details not on original contract drawings. 7. References to related shop drawings and modifications. PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS VLK Architects, 2007 01 7839 - 1 2740.00 Creek View Elementary School College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas F. Specifications: Legibly mark each item in the specifications to record actual construction, including: 1. Manufacturer, trade name, and catalog numberof each product actually installed, particularly optional items and substitute items. 2. Changes made by addenda and modifications. G. Other Documents: Maintain manufacturer's certifications, inspection certifications, field test records, and other documents required by individual specifications sections. H. Maintain these documents to reflect the current conditions of the work. Changes shall be reviewed on a monthly basis with the Architect's representative. The Contractor's updating of the "installed condition drawings" shall be a prerequisite to the monthly review of the Contractor's payment request by the Architect's representative. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. At contract closeout, deliver record documents and samples under provisions of SECTION 01 7700 - CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES. B. Transmit with cover letter in duplicate, listing: 1. Date. 2. Project title and number. 3. Contractor's name, address, and telephone number. 4. Number and title of each record document. 5. Signature of Contractor or authorized representative. PART 2 - PRODUCTS & PART 3 - EXECUTION Not applicable. END OF SECTION PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS VLK Architects, 2007 01 7839 - 2 2740.00 Creek View Elementary School College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas SECTION 017840 SPARE PARTS, OVERAGES AND MAINTENANCE MATERIALS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Requirements Included 1. Products required. 2. Storage and delivery of products. B. Related Requirements 1. Section 01 6600 - Product Storage and Handling Requirements. 2. Section 01 7700 - Closeout Procedures. 3. Section 01 7823 - Operation and Maintenance Data. 4. Individual Specifications Sections: Specific spare parts and materials required. 1.02 PRODUCTS REQUIRED A. Provide quantities of products, spare parts, maintenance tools, and maintenance materials specified in individual sections to be provided to Owner, in addition to that required for completion of work. B. Products: Identical to those installed in the work. Include quantities in original purchase from manufacturer to avoid variations in manufacture. 1.03 STORAGE, MAINTENANCE A. Store products with products to be installed in the work, under provisions of SECTION 01 6600 - PRODUCT STORAGE AND HANDLING REQUIREMENTS. B. When adequate, secure storage facilities are available at site, capable of maintaining conditions required for storage and not required for contract work or storage, or for Owner's needs, spare products may be stored in available space. C. Maintain spare products in original containers with labels intact and legible, until delivery to Owner. 1.04 DELIVERY A. Coordinate with Owner: Deliver and unload spare products to Owner at project site and obtain receipt prior to final payment. B. For portions of project accepted and occupied by Owner prior to substantial completion, deliver a proportional part of spare products to Owner, obtain receipt. PART 2 - PRODUCTS & PART 3 - EXECUTION Not applicable. END OF SECTION SPARE PARTS, OVERAGES AND MAINTENANCE MATERIALS VLK Architects, 2007 01 7840 - 1 2740.00 Creekview Elementary School College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas SECTION 03 1100 CONCRETE FORMING AND ACCESSORIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Formwork with accessories for the cast -in -place concrete and permanent shoring. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 31 2300 - Excavation and Fill: temporary sheeting for excavations. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Standard: Formwork shall meet the requirements of ACI 347. B. Surface Tolerances: Allowable tolerances for formed concrete surfaces shall be 3/8" maximum in 20 feet for vertical surfaces out of plumb and'/," maximum in 20 feet for horizontal surfaces out of plane. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 FORM MATERIALS A. Lumber: S2S&CM or S2S&SL No. 3 Boards or better Southern Pine not less than a nominal 1" thick. B. Plywood: EXT-APA grade -trademarked B-B Plyform, Class I, or High Density Overlaid Plyform, Class I. B-B Plyform shall be sanded but not mill oiled. Plywood shall be new. C. Fiberboard: Corrugated fiberboard laminated with waterproof adhesive and coated with water resistant compound. 1. Forms in a completely dry condition shall be capable of supporting not less than the following loading without deflection: a. 1,000 psf for walls/beams 5' or less in height. b. 1,600 psf for walls exceeding 5' but less than 8' in height. c. Greater than 1,600 psf for custom designed walls exceeding 8' in height. 2. Fiberboard void forms for beam soffits below grade and slab voids shall be rectangular forms. 3. Fiberboard void forms to correctly void the circular edge of beam soffits to a drilled pier, and slab drops at piers such as ArcVoid and SureRound PierVoid as manufactured by SureVoid Products, Inc., Englewood, CO (phone 888.803.8643 web site: www.surevoid.com). 4. Topping sheet shall be'/4" masonite D. Soil Retainer Boards: 1. Foam Board Panels: Styrofoam Brand Square Edge Rigid Insulation as manufactured by Dow Chemical Co. and distributed locally by Cain's Builders Supply (phone 817.581.1344). Retainer boards shall have a flexural strength of 50 psi (ASTM C 203), shear strength of 35 psi (ASTM D 393), compressive strength of 25 psi (ASTM D 1621) and a tensile strength of 50 psi (ASTM D 1623), supplied in 8" forms, thickness. 2. Plastic Boards: Retainer boards shall be a cambered, ribbed and made of high density polyethylene. Retainer boards shall have superior strength to resist lateral loads applied by compacted soil, be impact resistant and capable of being exposed to moisture without deterioration. Product/manufacturer; Motzblock, M&M Construction Specialties (phone 800.937.9493). E. Foam Board Panels at Platform: Styrofoam Brand High Load 40 Rigid Insulation as manufactured by Dow Chemical Co. Boards shall have a compressive strength of 40 psi (ASTM D 1621) and tensile strength of 60 psi (ASTM D 1623), supplied in 3" thickness. F. Expansion Joint Filler: 1. Concealed: ASTM D 1751, asphalt saturated cane fiberboard. 2. Exposed: ASTM D 1752, Type I, premolded, non -bituminous, closed cell sponge rubber. Color to be stone gray. CONCRETE FORMING AND ACCESSORIES VLK Architects, 2007 03 1100 - 1 2740.00 Creekview Elementary School College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas 2.02 ACCESSORIES A. Form Ties: Form ties for exposed concrete surfaces shall be manufactured to allow a positive breakback of at least 1" inside the concrete surface. Ties shall be equipped with a plastic cone or washer not less than 1" in diameter and 1" long which will cover the hole and prevent leakage of mortar. Form ties for unexposed surfaces shall be bolt rods or patented devices having a minimum tensile strength of 3000 pounds when fully assembled. Ties shall be adjustable in length and free of lugs, cones, washers or other features which would leave a hole larger than'/e" in diameter, or depressions back of the exposed surface of the concrete. Ties shall be of such construction that, when the forms are removed, there will be no metal remaining within 1" of the finished surface of the concrete. B. Form Release Agent: Colorless material which will not stain concrete, absorb moisture or affect bond of subsequent surface finish manufactured by Nox-Crete, Symons, or approved equivalent. C. Dovetail Anchor Slots: 24 gage galvanized steel anchor slots with %" throat, 1" deep, furnished with foam or felt fillers to exclude grout seepage. D. Plastic Waterstops: Multiple rib extruded strips of PVC resin 3/e" thick and 6" wide. Product/manufacturer; one of the following: Type 5; Grace Construction Products No. 705; Greenstreak Plastic Products RB6-38; Vinylex Corp. E. Chamfer Strips: Extruded plastic triangular chamfer with W face; Burke "CSF %", Greenstreak Cat. No. 612 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 FORMWORK A. General: Construct forms in compliance with referenced standard. All forms, shores, falsework, bracing and other temporary supports shall be engineered by the Contractor to support all loads imposed during construction, including weight of construction equipment, allowance for live loads and lateral forces due to wind and temporary imbalance of discontinuity of building components. B. Construction: Construct forms to the dimensions and shapes of the concrete members as detailed and scheduled; and to obtain accurate alignment, location, grades, level and plumb work in finished structures. Set, assemble and brace forms to withstand wet concrete construction loads without deflection, movement, or leakage. Provide access for placing and adjusting reinforcement and cleaning forms. 1. Exposed Surfaces: Form with plywood the non -wearing concrete surfaces exposed to view. On these surfaces locate the form ties in uniform patterns. The joints shall be tight and flush. Plywood may not be re -used. Chamfer exposed outside corners. 2. Concealed Surfaces: Form with wood or metal forms the concealed vertical surfaces of grade beams and walls below grade. 3. Soffits: Form the soffits of grade beams and walls bearing on piers using rectangular fiberboard set forms. 4. Slab Voids: Install forms continuous and tightly butted together. Cut forms tight around all projections. Prior to placing reinforcement, entire carton form area shall be covered with masonite topping sheets secured with staples. 5. Metal Anchors: Install dovetail anchor slots in concrete for anchoring masonry facing and partitions to concrete. On concrete wall and beam surfaces which are faced more than 12" high with masonry, place slots vertically and on 24" centers. On concrete columns faced with masonry and where a masonry partition abuts such a column, place a continuous vertical slot in each face of the column as required to secure the masonry. 6. Recesses and Chases: Form for and provide in their proper locations all slots, chases and recesses indicated or implied by the drawings and not formed by sleeves, frames, and other equipment furnished under other sections. The trades requiring such recesses and openings in concrete shall furnish the necessary information for their correct location and placement. 7. Joint Waterstops: Provide continuous waterstops for joints in the concrete walls below grade and in other concrete joints where detailed. Install waterstops with one-half the width encased in the concrete on the first pour and the other half in the second pour. Make end points watertight by fusing with a hot iron. Prefabrication of comers and whole frames is recommended where this is practical. C. Inserts and Fasteners: Provide forthe installation of inserts, conduits, sleeves, drains, hangers, nosings, metal reglets, nailing strips, and like items required for the attachment of other work and furnished by other trades. Properly locate in cooperation with other trades and secure in position before concrete is placed. CONCRETE FORMING AND ACCESSORIES VLK Architects, 2007 03 1100 - 2 2740.00 Creekview Elementary School College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas D. Provide bracing to ensure stability of formwork. Strengthen formwork liable to be overstressed by construction loads. E. Provide temporary ports in formwork to facilitate cleaning and inspection. Locate openings at bottom of forms to allow flushing water to drain. Close ports with tight fitting panels, flush with inside face of forms, neatly fitted so that joints will not be apparent in exposed concrete surfaces. F. Installing Shoring: Before backfilling, install permanent shoring along the bottom of concrete grade beams around areas of suspended floor construction to prevent caving of backfill material into the under floor areas. Provide shoring where the under floor grade at a beam is below the beam soffit. 1. Dig the shoring at least 5' into the soil at the bottom and lap it approximately 3" up over the outside face of the beam or wall. 2. Cut the panels to fit snugly at piers, footings, corners, and other irregularities. 3.02 EARTH FORMS A. Earth forms are not permitted 3.03 REMOVAL OF FORMS A. Remove forms with sufficient care to avoid scarring exposed surfaces. Prying against face of concrete will not be permitted. Remove forms completely so that no wood form material is left in contact with concrete. Only fiberboard soffit forms may be left in place. 1. General: Formwork for walls, sides of beams, and other parts not supporting the weight of the concrete may be removed as soon as the concrete has hardened sufficiently to resist damage from removal operations, but in no event before concrete is 24 hours old. Formwork for beam soffits and other parts that support the weight of concrete shall remain in place until the concrete has reached its specified 28-day strength unless otherwise permitted. When shores and other vertical supports are so arranged that the form facing material may be removed without loosening or disturbing the shores and supports, the facing material only may be removed at an age of 24 hours. Whenever the formwork is removed during the curing period, the exposed concrete shall be cured. 2. Re -shoring: When re -shoring is permitted orrequired, theoperations shall beplanned in advance and shall be subject to review. Re -shoring for the purpose of early form removal shall be performed so that at no time will large areas of new construction be required to support their own weight. While re -shoring is under way, no live loads shall be permitted on the new construction. Re -shores shall be tightened to carry their required loads, but they shall not be over -tightened so that the new construction is over -stressed. Re -shores shall remain in place until the concrete has reached its specified 28-day strength and while weights or loads in excess of design live loads are imposed. 3. Permanent shoring shall not be removed. 3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspect erected formwork, shoring, and bracing to ensure that work is in accordance with formwork design, and that supports, fastenings, wedges, ties, and items are secure. B. Do not reuse wood formwork for surfaces exposed to view. 3.05 FORMWORK TOLERANCES A. Construct formwork to maintain tolerances required by AC1301. END OF SECTION CONCRETE FORMING AND ACCESSORIES VLK Architects, 2007 03 1100 - 3 2740.00 Creek View Elementary School College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas SECTION 03 2000 CONCRETE REINFORCING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Reinforcement with accessories for the cast -in -place concrete. 2. Reinforcing steel bars and welded steel wire fabric for cast -in -place concrete. 3. Support chairs, bolsters, and spacers, for supporting reinforcement B. Related Sections: 1. Section 03 1100 - Concrete Forming and Accessories. 2. Section 03 3000 - Cast -in -Place Concrete. 3. Section 04 2000 - Masonry Units: Reinforcement for masonry. 4. Section 07 9513 - Expansion Joint Cover Assemblies. 5. Section 31 6329 - Drilled Concrete Piers. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Submit in accordance with SECTION 01 3323 - SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, AND SAMPLES. Drawings shall show the size, length, form and position of bar reinforcing and accessories. B. Certification: Submit a letter certifying that reinforcing bars comply with specified standard for grade. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Standard: Reinforcement shall meet the requirements of ACI 318 Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete. 1.04 DELIVERY AND STORAGE A. Stack reinforcing steel in tiers and mark so that each length, size, shape and location can be readily determined. Exercise care to maintain reinforcement free of dirt, mud, paint or rust. B. Store materials and accessories on dunnage and under protective sheeting. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615, Grade 60 deformed billet steel. B. Reinforcing Fabric: ASTM A 185, welded steel wire fabric in flat sheets. C. Tie Wire: 16 gage annealed steel wire. D. Accessories: Anchors, dowels, spacers, chairs, bolsters and other devices for supporting and fastening reinforcement and normally considered as accessories to the concrete work. Chairs and bolsters resting on void forms shall be plastic tipped and set on continuous plates. 2.02 FABRICATION A. Fabricate reinforcing bars to conform to the required shapes and dimensions, with fabrication tolerances complying with the CRSI Manual. B. In case of fabricating errors, do not straighten or re -bend reinforcement in a manner that will weaken or injure the material. CONCRETE REINFORCING VLK Architects, 2007 03 2000 - 1 2740.00 Creek View Elementary School College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Placing Steel: 1. Place reinforcement in accordance with CRSI "Placing Reinforcing Bars" and ACI 318, with provisions of ACI 318 governing. 2. Assemble reinforcing steel in the forms, wired and fastened securely. Bending shall be done cold. Bars with kinks or bends not detailed shall be rejected. 3. Clean reinforcing steel of loose rust, mill scale, grease, dirt and other coatings which will reduce or destroy bond with the concrete. A thin film of tight rust will not be objectionable. 4. Position, support, and secure reinforcement to resist displacement by formwork, construction, and concrete placing operations. 5. Locate and support reinforcement by metal chairs, runners, bolsters, spacers, and hangers. 6. Place reinforcement to obtain minimum coverages for concrete protection. 7. Arrange, space, and securely tie bars and bar supports together with the specified be wire. 8. Set wire ties so twisted ends are directed away from exposed concrete surfaces. 9. Support reinforcement and fasten together to prevent displacement by construction loads of placing concrete. Use No. 16 gauge black annealed wire at all joints and crosses to accurately position reinforcement in place. 10. Over formwork, use metal or plastic bar chairs and spacers to support reinforcement. 11. Where concrete surface will be exposed to weather in finished structure, use non -corrosive or corrosion protected accessories within Y2' of concrete surface. 12. Where successive mats of reinforcing fabric are continuous, overlap welded wire fabric so that overlap measured between outermost cross wires of each fabric sheet is not less than spacing of cross wires plus 2". 13. Bars having splices not shown on shop drawings will be subject to rejections. 14. Do not bend reinforcement after being embedded in hardened concrete. 15. Do not allow bars to be in contact with dissimilar materials. 3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspection and Evaluation: The testing and inspection laboratory shall inspect placement of all reinforcing steel to confirm compliance with the contract documents. B. Concrete shall not be poured without inspection approval as noted above. END OF SECTION CONCRETE REINFORCING VLK Architects, 2007 03 2000 - 2 2740.00 Creek View Elementary School College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas SECTION 03 3000 CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Cast -in -place concrete, including mixing, placing, and finishing. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 014523 -Testing and Inspection Services. 2. Section 03 1000 - Concrete Forming and Accessories. 3. Section 03 2000 -Concrete Reinforcing. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit in accordance with SECTION 01340 - SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, AND SAMPLES. B. Product Data: 1. Submit product data for admixture, bonding compound, curing compound, and grout. C. Design Mixes: 1. At the beginning of the work, Contractor shall submit proposed concrete mix designs for review by the Architect, structural engineering consultant, and testing laboratory per SECTION 01340 - SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA AND SAMPLES. a. Include the sieve analysis of fine and course aggregate ASTM C 136, dry rodded weight of coarse aggregate - ASTM C 29, and the specific gravity (bulk saturated surface dry), of fine and coarse aggregates ASTM C 127 and C 128. b. State admixture used and project conditions required for specific admixtures. c. Proposed concrete mix design shall also include the results of compressive tests. 2. Contractor shall not mix concrete for placing in the work until confirmation laboratory reports are supplied to reflect that each proposed mix will develop the strength and slump required. Successful past history in accordance with ACI 318 will be satisfactory. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Standard: Concrete shall meet the requirements of ASTM C 94. B. Perform work in accordance with ACI 301, 304, 305, 306, and 309. C. Obtain materials from same source throughout the work. D. Batch plant shall be able to show a minimum of five -years experience in batching concrete. If required, they shall furnish a list of similar sized jobs or special condition jobs performed during the last two -years. E. Surface Tolerances: For all finished concrete wearing surfaces, the variation from level or from elevations indicated shall not exceed'h" in 16'. If variations exceed those as set forth then the wearing surface shall be filled or ground down as required to meet the stated tolerances. 1. Surface Tolerance at Cafetorium: The variation from level or from elevations indicated shall not exceed'/8" in 16'. If variations exceed those set forth, the wearing surface shall be filled or ground down as required to meet the stated tolerances. It is the intent to obtain a surface as smooth and level as possible in the Cafetorium. Re -surfacing material for filling depressions shall be Ardex K-15 or Flo -Top. 1.04 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Requirements: 1. Cold Weather Placing: Do not place concrete when the temperature is below 40°F. or is expected to fall below40*F. within 24 hours after placing concrete; unless either favorable weather is forecast or adequate arrangements for protection and heating have been made in accordance with ACI 306. 2. Hot Weather Placing: Do not place concrete when hot weather conditions exist that would impair the quality and strength of concrete, i.e. any combination of high air temperature, low relative humidity, and wind velocity, unless adequate arrangements for protection have been made in accordance with ACI 305. B. Coordination: Notify other trades and contractors well in advance of placing concrete to allow them sufficient time in which to install work which is to be builtmin or cast into the concrete. CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE VLK Architects, 2007 03 3000 - 1 2740.00 Creek View Elementary School College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 CONCRETE MATERIALS A. Portland Cements: ASTM C 150, Type I, domestic manufacture. B. Fine Aggregate: ASTM C 33, washed sand with a fineness modulus of between 2.50 and 3.00. C. Coarse Aggregate: ASTM C 33, clean crushed stone or washed gravel. The nominal maximum particle size shall not exceed 1/5 of the narrowest dimension between forms or % of the minimum clear spacing between reinforcing bars. D. Chemical Admixtures: Provide admixtures certified by manufacturer to be compatible with other admixtures and that will not contribute water-soluble chloride ions exceeding those permitted in hardened concrete. Do not use calcium chloride or admixtures containing calcium chloride. 1. Water -Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type A. 2. Water -Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type D. E. Air -Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260, certified by manufacturer to be compatible with other required admixtures, equal to Master Builders "Micro Air". F. Fly Ash - ASTM C 618, Type C or Type F, limit use of fly ash to not -to -exceed 20% of cement content by weight. G. Water: Clean and potable. 2.02 CONCRETE TREATMENT PRODUCTS A. Epoxy Bonding Adhesive: ASTM C 881, two -component epoxy resin, capable of humid curing and bonding to damp surfaces, of class suitable for application temperature and of grade to suit requirements. Product/ manufacturer; one of the following: Sikadur 32, Hi -Mod; Sika Chemical Sealtight Rea -Weld 1000; W.R. Meadows, Inc. EpoxealTm GS Structural; Sonneborn Div. of ChemRex Building Products B. Curing Compound: ASTM C 309, Type 1, Class B,18 to 25 percent solids, clear, acrylic copolymer based liquid for curing and sealing concrete. Product/manufacturer, one of the following: Safe -Cure Clear; ChemMasters Diamond Clear VOX; Euclid Chemical Co. Cure & Seal 18 Percent E; Symons Corp., a Dayton Superior Co. Vocomp-20; W.R. Meadows, Inc. C. Non-metallic, Shrinkage -Resistant Grout: ASTM C 1107, factory -packaged, non-metallic aggregate grout, non- corrosive, non -staining, mixed with water to consistency suitable for application and 30-minute working time. Product/manufacturer; one of the following: NS Grout; Euclid Chemical Co. Sealtight 588 Precision Grout; W.R. Meadows, Inc. Sonogrout® 10K; Sonneborn Div. of ChemRex D. Re -surfacing and/or Self -Leveling Underlayment Material: Provide Ardex K-15 as distributed by Ardex, Inc. (phone 214.867.5616) or Flo -Top as manufactured by The Euclid Chemical Co. 2.03 SELECTING PROPORTIONS FOR CONCRETE A. Strength: Select proportions for a mix designed to produce concrete with a minimum 28-day compressive strength of 4000 psi, unless noted otherwise. B. Admixture: 1. Use admixture in all concrete. Select the type (normal, retarder, or high early) best suited for the temperature conditions at the time the concrete is placed and finished. 2. Use water reducing admixture only with the permission of the Engineer. Do not use water reducing admixture and air entrainment together with any slabs to receive a hard trowelled finish. Use air entrainment in all concrete to be pumped (5%). C. Use air -entraining admixture in all exterior concrete, including pavement and flatwork. Add air -entraining admixture at manufacturer's prescribed rate to result in concrete at point of placement having total air content by volume with a tolerance of plus or minus 1'/z percent within the following limits: 1. 3 to 6 percent, 1'/2" max. aggregate. CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE VLK Architects, 2007 03 3000 - 2 2740.00 Creek View Elementary School College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas 2. 3.5 to 6.5 percent, 1" max. aggregate. 3. 4 to 8 percent,'/." max. aggregate. 4. 5 to 9 percent, 1/2" max. aggregate. D. Calcium chloride shall not be used. E. Slump: Select proportions to produce concrete with the following maximum allowable slumps. The slump limits given shall apply after inclusion of the admixture. Reinforced piers, footings 5" Reinforced walls, beams, slabs 6" Pavement, flatwork 4" 2.04 MIXING AND DELIVERY A. Measurement of concrete materials, mixing, and delivery of fresh concrete to the project shall meet the requirements of ASTM C 94. Transit -mixed concrete supplier shall have a plant with sufficient capacity and transportation facilities to assure continuous delivery at the rate required. B. Mix concrete in accordance with ASTM C 94, Alternative No. 2, or ACI 304. C. Deliver concrete in accordance with ASTM C 94. D. Select proportions for normal weight concrete in accordance with ACI 301 Method 1. Mix not less than one minute after materials are in mixer. E. Do not transport or use concrete after 90 minutes has expired from time of initial mixing. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Before any concrete is placed, the forms and reinforcement shall be inspected by the Contractor and the Owner's testing laboratory. Notify the Owner's testing laboratory not less than one working day before concrete is scheduled to be placed. Bucks, sleeves, anchors and other fixtures to be embedded in concrete shall be properly positioned and anchored. Wash down form surfaces to remove foreign substances. Provide elevated runways clearing steel and other embedded work. B. Prepare previously placed concrete by cleaning with steel brush and applying bonding agent. Apply bonding agent in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. C. At locations where new concrete is doweled to existing work, drill over -sized holes in existing concrete, insert steel dowels, and pack solid with non -shrink grout. 3.02 CONVEYING CONCRETE A. Convey concrete to the place of final deposit by methods which will prevent the separation or loss of the ingredients. Equipment for chuting, pumping, and pneumatically conveying concrete shall be such as to assure a continuous flow of concrete at the delivery end without separation. The use of aluminum chutes or pipes for transporting concrete will not be permitted. 3.03 PLACING CONCRETE A. Notify Architect and testing laboratorya minimum of 24 hours prior to commencement of concreting operations. B. General: Place concrete in continuous horizontal lifts no deeper than 24". Avoid inclined lifts and inclined construction joints and do not cause or allow concrete to flow horizontally in the forms. Keep conveying equipment clean and free of hardened concrete. Use tremies or suitable chutes for placing concrete in high narrow walls so that concrete will not have a free vertical fall in excess of 3'. C. Place concrete in accordance with ACI 301 and as specified below: 1. Unless protection is provided, do not place concrete in rain, sleet, or snow. 2. Regulate rate of placement so concrete remains plastic and flows into position. 3. Deposit concrete continuously until panel or section is completed. Place as near as possible to its final location; do not rehandle. 4. Do not place concrete, under any circumstances, except in presence of testing laboratory. 5. When placing concrete in masonry, exercise extreme care to prevent concrete from staining face of masonry. CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE VLK Architects, 2007 03 3000 - 3 2740.00 Creek View Elementary School College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas 6. Consolidation a. Comply with requirements of ACI 309. b. Use mechanical vibrating equipment for consolidation. c. Do not use vibrators to transport concrete in forms. d. Use vibrators with sufficient speed and amplitude to consolidate effectively. e. Keep a spare vibrator on site during all concrete pours. f. Thoroughly consolidate concrete and work around reinforcement, embedded items and into corners of forms. Thoroughly consolidate layers of concrete with previous layers. 7. Expansion Joint Fillers: Place pre -molded expansion joint fillers at locations as detailed and whenever required to separate site paving from building slabs. Refer to Drawings for required joint dimensions. Reference SECTION 03100 - CONCRETE FORMS AND ACCESSORIES for joint filler products. 8. Bonding: Before depositing any new concrete on or against previously deposited concrete which has partially or entirely set, thoroughly roughen and clean the surfaces of the latter of all foreign matter, scum, and laitance. Retighten forms and re -coat the surface of the previously deposited concrete with specified bonding agent per manufacturer's directions. D. Ensure reinforcement, inserts, embedded parts, and formed joints are not disturbed during concrete placement. E. Place concrete continuously between predetermined construction and control joints. Do not break or interrupt successive pours such that cold joints occur. F. Saw cut control joints at an optimum time after finishing. Use 3/16" thick blade, cutting 1/3 into depth of slab thickness. G. Separate exterior slabs on fill from vertical surfaces with joint filler. Extend joint filler from bottom of slab to within'/." of finished slab surface. H. Excessive honeycomb or embedded debris in concrete is not acceptable. Notify Architect/Engineer upon discovery. I. Maintain record of concrete placement. Record date, location, quantity, airtemperature and test samples taken. J. Beams and Walls: Place beams and walls continuously where possible. Start placing at ends of section and progress toward the center. Do not place concrete in beams and walls supported on piers until the concrete in the piers is no longer plastic. K. Slabs: Place each slab in one continuous operation without joints within the area established for a continuous pour. Start placing at the far end of the area and place each load of concrete against previously placed concrete, not away from it. L. Drains: Check the setting of floor drains so that they will finish flush with floor surfaces without varying the intended elevations and slopes. Slope surfaces down to drains at least 1/a' per foot or as shown. M. Compaction: Compact concrete with ramming and spading tools during placing to work the coarse aggregate away from the forms and to produce a dense mass without air pockets. Work concrete through and around reinforcing steel. Do not disturb any embedded work. N. Consolidation: Use high frequency mechanical vibrators to consolidate concrete and eliminate lift lines in walls exposed to view. Vibrators shall be operated by skilled mechanics under close supervision. Insert and withdraw the vibrator heads at points from 18" to 30" apart for short periods. Do not allow heads to touch the forms. O. Leveling: Level and grade the top surface of slabs with straight edges over gauge strips. Level the top of foundations for the reception of subsequent work. Level and line steps in like manner over strips or forms. Remove wood spreaders, block, and screeds as the concrete is placed and before it sets. P. Construction Joints: Generally, locate construction joints in beams and suspended slabs in the middle third of the span. Form each construction joint with a vertical bulkhead. Remove the bulkhead as soon as the concrete has attained its initial set and leave the surface rough. Before placing fresh concrete against the surface, coat the surface with bonding compound applied in conformance with the manufacturer's instructions. Q. Loading: Do not shake or move the forms and reinforcement nor place any strain on projecting metal after the concrete has taken its initial set. Do not permit loading or traffic of any kind on the construction until the concrete has fully hardened. R. Hot Weather Placement: Take special care to prevent high temperatures in the fresh concrete during hot weather. Use a set -retarding type admixture to assure that concrete remains workable and lift lines will not be visible. For flatwork use a spray -on evaporation retardant as needed during finishing operations. CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE VLK Architects, 2007 03 3000 - 4 2740.00 Creek View Elementary School College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas S. Mechanical equipment pads required in mechanical yard shall be 6" thick with #4 @12" o.c. each way in mid - slab. Pour pad 6" larger than equipment all around. Additionally provide a continuous poured -down edge beam around the pad 18" deep by 10" wide reinforced with 245 continuous in bottom of beam with #3 ties @ 24" o.c. Add intermediate beams, same size and reinforcing, if pad exceeds 12'-0" in either direction and every 12'-0" thereafter. Provide 4" thick sand bed under slab. Top of slab elevation shall be 3" above finish grade around pad. 3.04 CORRECTING DEFECTIVE CONCRETE A. Examine concrete for defects as the forms are removed. Concrete out of alignment or with defective surfaces shall be considered as not conforming to the intent of these specifications. Such concrete shall be removed from the project site unless the Architect grants permission to patch the defective area. B. Concrete that does not attain the specified 28-day strength shall be removed from the project site at the contractor's expense. C. Formed surfaces exposed to view shall not have fins, offsets, voids, and bulges. Minor grain marks will not be objectionable, but the texture shall be uniform. Leave corners and other details sharply defined and surfaces straight and true. D. Repair honeycomb, pour joints, stone pockets, and like imperfections by wetting and pointing with mortar to match adjacent concrete. Where unacceptable surface blemishes occur on concrete exposed to view, rub the entire surface to produce a uniform appearance throughout. 3.05 FILLING TIE ROD AND BOLT HOLES A. Fill solidly with stiff cement grout the holes in concrete resulting from the removal of bolts and rods. Strike off flush any excess mortar at the faces of the holes. In concrete exposed to view, holes shall be patched with mortar to match adjacent concrete. 3.06 CONCRETE TOPPING A. Over entrances and other areas as shown on drawings, provide 3000 psi concrete topping as detailed. Before the topping is placed, remove loose dirt and sand particles with a stiff broom. Brush in a bonding coat of neat cementjust ahead of the topping. Screed, tamp, and float the topping to the lines and slopes indicated. Finish as specified below. 3.07 CONCRETE FINISHING A. Rubbed Concrete Finish 1. Exposed non -wearing concrete surfaces noted to be "Rubbed Concrete" shall be given a rubbed finish. a. Remove the forms as soon as possible and while the concrete is still "green". Level offsets and fins, and repair surfaces. b. Wet surfaces and rub with a carborundum brick orother suitable abrasive to obtain a uniformly textured and colored finish. Flush the surfaces with clean water to remove slurry and loose particles. c. After the rough work on the building has been completed, again rub the surfaces with a carborundum brick. For this rubbing use a slurry made from a patching and repairing compound equal to "Pave -Crete." Apply the slurry and rub it thoroughly into the concrete to provide the desired finish. Remove surplus slurry with burlap before it hardens. d. The finished work shall be free of holes and other unsightly defects and shall be uniform in texture and color. Leave corners sharply defined and surfaces straight and true. 3.08 CONCRETE FLOOR, SLAB, AND TOPPING FINISHES A. Steel Trowel: For concrete floor surfaces to be left exposed, to receive resilient tile, or carpet, provide a standard integral trowel finish. This finish is required on all concrete wearing surfaces for which other specific finishes are not indicated or scheduled. 1. Strike the surface at the finish floor elevation, and roll and tamp the concrete to force aggregate away from the surface. Screed to a true, level surface except where slopes are specifically indicated, and float when hard enough to support knee boards. 2. Bring the surface to a true grade by cutting down high spots and filling low spots with fresh concrete. Test with a 16 ft. straight edge, or shorter in restricted areas, and limit surface variations to not more than '/:' in 16' and not more than 1/8" in 16' in the Cafetorium. 3. Finish the floor with a steel trowel to a smooth dense surface. When hard enough to ring under the trowel, burnish the surface to the final polished finish. CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE VLK Architects, 2007 03 3000 - 5 2740.00 Creek View Elementary School College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas B. Smooth: Concrete slab surfaces to be covered with thinset ceramic tile shall receive steel trowel finish, except that the second burnish troweling shall be omitted. Leave surfaces with some "tooth" for a bond. C. Rough: Concrete slab surfaces to be covered with quarry and ceramic tile shall be roughened for bond by scrubbing with stiff brooms to exposed the aggregate before laitance has hardened. Sweep the surfaces to remove loose material. D. Brush: Provide a texture finish for exterior concrete except where scheduled otherwise. After floating and an initial troweling, go over the surfaces with a soft bristle brush or broom to produce a fine textured non -slip finish. Exposed vertical surfaces and corners shall be tooled and troweled smooth. E. Float: Concrete slab surfaces to be covered with membrane waterproofing and with insulation board, or slabs with sloped surfaces, shall be screeded and floated to a true, relatively smooth finish without sharp projections, offsets and other irregularities. 3.09 CURING A. Cure all concrete at least 7 days. All curing procedures shall prevent evaporation of moisture from the concrete for the full curing period. Protect surfaces from traffic damage until the curing is complete. B. Keep exposed vertical surfaces and the tops of beams and walls moist by spraying with water or covering with saturated burlap, starting as soon as the surfaces will resist erosion. C. Concrete surfaces to be covered with thinset flooring materials (ceramic tile, vinyl composition tile, etc.), shall be cured by covering with reinforced 2-ply paper or 4 mil thick polyethylene sheeting laid with joints lapped 3" and sealed with tape. Do not use curing compound on these surfaces. D. Coat other concrete wearing surfaces with the curing and sealing compound, using at least 1 gallon per 300 sq. ft. Areas damaged by traffic or subsequent construction operations shall be re -coated. 3.10 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Acceptance Tests: 1. Samples for strength tests of concrete shall be taken from each 75 cu. yds., or fraction thereof, of each mix design of concrete placed in any one day. 2. Sampling procedures shall meet the requirements of ASTM C 172. If concrete is being pumped, take concrete samples for testing at the pant of placement and not at the mixer discharge. 3. Make and record a slump test on each sample. The method of test shall meet the requirements of ASTM C 143. 4. Make 4 cylinders from each sample for strength tests, 1 for 7-day, 2 for 28-day test, and 1 in reserve. The cylinders shall be made on the project site by an Independent Testing Laboratory and shall be cured and tested in conformance with the requirements of ASTM C 31 and C 39. 5. Samples for 3-day strength tests may be taken at the Contractor's discretion and at the Contractor's expense. 6. Samples for temperature and slump tests of concrete shall be taken from each truck, of each mix design of concrete placed in any one day. 7. Testing lab representative shall be on site at all times during concrete pours. 8. No water shall be added to concrete mix on project site without approval from Owner's representative. 9. Concrete delivery tickets for all trucks shall be given to General Contractor for later submission to Owner. Delivery tickets shall record time truck left plant, time truck arrived at site and mix design number being delivered. A maximum of 90 minutes will be allowed from mixing of concrete to delivery. B. Evaluation of Test Results: 1. Each strength test result shall be the average of 2 cylinders from the same sample tested at 28 days. 2. Strength of each concrete mixture will be satisfactory if the average of any 3 consecutive compressive - strength tests equals or exceeds the specified compressive strength and no individual strength test value falls below specified compressive strength by more than 500 psi. 3. Additional Tests: Testing and inspecting agency shall make additional tests of concrete when test results indicate that compressive strengths or other requirements have not been met. Testing and inspecting agency may conduct tests to determine adequacy of concrete by cored cylinders complying with ASTM C 42. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance of replaced or additional work. C. The cost of testing service shall be per SECTION 01455 - MATERIALS TESTING AND LABORATORY SERVICES. CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE VLK Architects, 2007 03 3000 - 6 2740.00 Creek View Elementary School College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas 3.11 GROUTING A. Grout base plates and other structural members. Pea gravel may be added to the grout if the space to be grouted is 1" thick or more. Do not add sand to the grout. 3.12 BASE PLATE ANCHOR BOLTS A. Set the anchor bolts for steel base plates. Use templates. 3.13 PATCHING A. Patch and repair existing concrete to restore smooth, uniform surfaces. B. Prepare the surfaces by removing loose and faulty material down to firm concrete. Edges of concrete exposed to view shall be saw -cut straight and square. Brush the surfaces free of dirt and debris and flush down with clean water. After the surfaces are dry, coat them with bonding compound used in conformance with the manufacturer's instructions. C. Major patching and deep fills shall be done with a mixture of 1 part Portland cement, 1'/2 parts sand, and 1'/: parts pea gravel. Work and tamp the fill into place, screed the surface and float and trowel to a smooth finish. Cure as specified above. D. Minor patching and re -surfacing of concrete to be covered with tile and carpet shall be done using a suitable re -surfacing material such as Ardex K-15 or Flo -Top, which can be carried to a feather edge. Mix and apply in conformance with the manufacturers instructions and finish to a smooth surface. 3.14 PROTECTION AND CLEAN UP A. Floor Protection: All concrete floors which will be exposed to view in the completed building shall be covered with reinforced paper with joints lapped and sealed. Maintain the protective covering until all wet work in the building (masonry, plaster, and tile) is completed. B. Clean Up: Excess concrete and wash water from concrete truck drums shall not be dumped anywhere on the site or on adjoining streets, but shall be disposed of away from the premises. END OF SECTION CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE VLK Architects, 2007 03 3000 - 7 2740.00 Creek View Elementary School College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas SECTION 03 3519 COLORED CONCRETE FINISHING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Chemical staining of accessible curb ramps includes furnishing all labor, materials, and equipment necessary for, and pertinent to, the work to be done. Work will be accomplished in a thorough and workmanlike manner. The specified products will be prepared and applied strictly in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 03 3000 - Cast -in -Place Concrete. 2. Section 32 1313 -Concrete Paving. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit in accordance with SECTION 01 3323 - SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, AND SAMPLES. Submit current specifications and product literature, including color charts, as printed by the manufacturer of the products specified herein. All proposed materials and methods of application are subject to review by the Architect/Engineer and Owner. The Contractor shall include his qualifications, as required below, in this submittal. 1.03 LIMITS OF THE WORK A. The extent of concrete surfaces to be stained shall be as indicated on the drawings and/or as described in the specifications and/or bid proposal. 1.04 OBSERVATION OF EXISTING CONDITIONS A. It is essential that prior to submitting a bid, the contractor shall observe existing improvements adjacent to the places of work and places of access to perform the work. 1.05 ACCESS A. Access to the work shall be as indicated on the plans. 1.06 TEST PANEL A. A test panel as shown on the plan sheet details shall be stained to the Owner's and Architect/Engineer's satisfaction before work may begin. 1.07 STANDARDS AND WORKMANSHIP A. Chemical stain and preparation materials shall perform, be manufactured, and be applied as described in LITHOCHROME CHEMICAL STAIN: Application Instructions A-403.03 (1985) by L. M. Scofield Company, 6533 Bandini Boulevard, Los Angeles, California 90040. 1.8 QUALIFICATIONS A. The chemical staining contractor shall submit a list of completed projects in which chemical staining of concrete surfaces was done. The list shall include the name of client, location, completion date, and telephone number of the Owner or of the General Contractor. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Chemical stain for coloring concrete shall be LITHOCHROME, a penetrating, acid stain manufactured by L.M. Scofield Company, or an approved equal. 1. Color: One color shall be selected by the Architect/Engineer. COLORED CONCRETE FINISHING VLK Architects, 2007 03 3519 - 1 2740.00 Creek View Elementary School College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas 2.02 MATERIAL LABELS AND CONTAINERS A. Materials specified for application shall be delivered to the site in sealed containers, properly labeled with the manufacturer's labels, and stenciled with the proper batch code numbers. Products packaged or labeled in any other manner will not be accepted. 2.03 APPROVED EQUAL SUBSTITUTIONS A. If a Bidder wishes to submit an item for consideration as an "approved equal," the Bidder and each item must meet all of the requirements of SECTION 01 6200 - PRODUCT OPTIONS. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 ADVERSE CONDITIONS A. Neither preparation materials nor chemical staining materials will be applied when adverse conditions exist. Adverse conditions include air pollutants, blowing sand and other airborne materials, excessive humidity, present or imminent precipitation of all kinds, high and low temperatures, adverse concrete surface conditions, and other conditions and limitations as specified by the product manufacturer(s) that are detrimental to the products' performance and the desired results as specified herein: 1. Protection of Materials: All materials and containers stored on the site will be protected from extremes of heat, solar radiation and cold which adversely affect their performance. 3.02 PROTECTION OF EXISTING IMPROVEMENTS A. The contractor shall be responsible to protect existing improvements (such as lawn areas, landscape materials, curbing, pavements, fences, walks, etc.) from damage, coloration, or applications of staining materials. Such areas shall be masked or otherwise protected. Any existing improvements that are damaged or detrimentally affected will be cleaned, repaired, or restored to their original condition by the contractor at his expense. 3.03 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS A. Since the chemical stain has corrosive and toxic properties, the contractor shall exercise care in its application to avoid contaminating people, animals, plants, or trees. The contractor will take necessary measures to keep people away from the area where the stain is being applied. Refer to Note 9 of the referenced "Application Instructions A-403.03." 3.04 PREPARATION OF THE SURFACE A. Concrete surfaces to be stained will be prepared per the stain manufacturer's recommendations. In general, the concrete shall have cured for at least 30 days, and it shall be dry, clean and free of curing compound, excess dust, paint, mortar, oils, waxes, and other foreign materials that would adversely affect the penetration and subsequent reaction of the stain solution with the concrete surface to be colored. The Owner's representative or Architect/Engineer shall approve the surface before staining may begin. 3.05 APPLICATION A. Stain will be applied per the manufacturer's instructions using either a broom -type medium -stiff bristle brush or spray equipment, as appropriate. Scofield's instructions shall be followed for application on vertical and sloping surfaces. 1. Coverage: One gallon of stain will cover approximately 125-200 square feet with two coats depending on surface texture and porosity of the concrete. 2. Coats: One or two coats will be applied, as selected by the Owner. 3. Drying Time: A minimum of eight hours will elapse between coats. 4. Sealants and Waxes: None are required. 3.06 COLOR RESULTS A. Color variations shall not be extreme and shall not vary significantly from the color(s) on the test panel that are judged satisfactory by the Architect/Engineer. 1. Coats: The Architect will select the number of coats to be applied. If the color variation after application is judged unacceptable by the Architect/Engineer, the contractor shall apply more stain as necessary to correct the problem. COLORED CONCRETE FINISHING VLK Architects, 2007 03 3519 - 2 2740.00 Creek View Elementary School College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas 3.07 CLEANUP A. The contractor is responsible for removing and disposing of all containers, surplus material, rubbish, trash, debris or other foreign material resulting from his work. In general, the site shall be left in a clean and orderly condition acceptable to the Owner. 3.08 CURING COMPOUND A. Concrete surfaces designated to receive chemical stain must be free of curing compound. Accordingly, finished concrete shall be "water -cured" or shall be completely sandblasted if cured with a curing compound membrane. END OF SECTION COLORED CONCRETE FINISHING VLK Architects, 2007 03 3519 - 3 2740.00 Creekview Elementary School College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas SECTION 04 2000 MASONRY UNITS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Unit masonry construction. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 014523 - Testing and Inspection Services. 2. Section 03 1100 - Concrete Forming and Accessories: dovetail anchor slots. 3. Section 05 5000 - Metal Fabrications: steel lintels. 4. Section 07 1100 - Dampproofing: dampproofing mastic and gaskets for masonry walls. 5. Section 07 1900 - Water Repellents. 6. Section 07 2119 - Foamed -in -place Insulation. 7. Section 07 9200 - Joint Sealants. 8. Section 08 1100 - Hollow Metal Doors and Frames: installation of steel frames. 9. Section 10 9900 - Miscellaneous Specialties; Recessed Knox Box. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit in accordance with SECTION 01 3323 - SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, AND SAMPLES. B. Product Data: Submit for each type of product indicated. 1. Include statements of material properties indicating compliance with requirements including compliance with standards and type designations within standards. C. Samples: Within 60 days after the contract has been awarded, submit manufacturer's standard sample panel showing full range of color, approximately 12" x 24" for each color and size of brick required. D. Test Reports: Manufacturer of the concrete masonry units shall submit: 1. Certified test reports showing that the units to be furnished meet the requirements of ASTM C 90 and C 129, and have the required minimum compressive strengths. 2. Reports certifying concrete masonry units meet or exceed each of the fire -resistive ratings. E. Provide a diagram of proposed control joints and expansion joints. F. Mortar Mixture Proportions: ASTM C 270, Submit copies of each proposed mix design for review priorto starting masonry work. G. Grout Mixture Proportions: ASTM C 476, Submit copies of each proposed mix design for review prior to any grout placement. 1. Include recent historical grout cylinder strength test reports for each mix design. H. Pre -blended Mortar and Grout Certificates: Submit manufacturer's certificates that products meet or exceed specified requirements. 1. Mortar: Submit test reports, per ASTM C 780, for each mortar mix indicating strength of mortar mixes. Submit computer batch -ticket to confirm the mixes meet the project specifications for every 80-pound, 94- pound, and 3,000-pound bulk bag of SPEC MIX mortar. 2. Grout: Submit test reports, per ASTM C1019, for each grout mix indicating compressive strengths. Submit computer batch -ticket to confirm the grout mixes meet the project specifications for every 80-pound, 94- pound, and 3,000-pound bulk bag of SPEC MIX grout. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer: Manufacturer shall have a minimum of 5 years experience manufacturing the specified product. B. Installer: Masonry contractor shall have a minimum of 5 years experience in similar types of work and be able to furnish a list of previous jobs and references if requested by the Architect. C. Expansion Joints (Control Joints): Provide expansion joints as shown on the Drawings or if not shown, install at frequency and in accordance with details as recommended by the N.C.M.A. or B.I.A. Confirm locations and frequency with Architect before beginning work. Refer to expansion joint Paragraph in the Installation portion of this specification section. MASONRY UNITS VLK Architects, 2007 04 2000 - 1 2740.00 Creekview Elementary School College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas D. Mock-up: Construct a sample wall panel at the site using brick veneer, mortar, and masonry backup proposed for the project. The panel shall duplicate the typical building wall construction (coursing, bonding, joint treatment, sealant, cleaning methods and materials as required in SECTION 07 9200 - JOINT SEALANTS). Sample panel shall be fully acceptable to the Architect prior to ordering of materials. Install one vertical 3/8" control joint for full height of panel. Panel shall be not less than 4 ft. by 3 ft. Construct panel on a wood pallet, providing portability around the project site. Do not alter nor destroy mock-up until attainment of Substantial Completion. Approved mock-up panel shall be the standard of comparison for workmanship and materials. E. Fire -Resistance Ratings: Where indicated, provide materials and construction identical to those of assemblies with fire -resistance ratings determined per ASTM E 119 by a testing and inspecting agency, by equivalent concrete masonry thickness, or by another means, as acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Brick Delivery: Do not lay face brick until at least 50% of the brick for the project has been delivered. As brick work progresses, make additional deliveries of brick so that at all times at least 50% of the remaining brick requirements are on the project site. Serve masons brick intermixed from the various storage piles to assure blending of brick. B. Store face brick and masonry units above ground on wood pallets which allow air circulation under the stacked units. 1.05 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Refer to "Protection" Paragraph for daily activities. B. Cold Weather Construction: Do no masonry work when freezing weather is expected. If Contractor elects to lay masonry when air temperature falls or is expected to fall below 40"F., provide construction means and protection of completed masonry as described in BIA Technical Note 1A Cold Weather Masonry Construction — Construction and Protection Recommendations. 1. The use of admixtures or antifreezes to lower the freezing point of mortar shall not be permitted. C. In hot weather (above 99°F with less than 50% relative humidity) protect masonry construction from direct exposure to sun and wind. D. Temporary Bracing: Take adequate precautions to prevent damage to walls during erection by high winds or other forces. Where necessary, provide temporary bracing until the designed lateral strength is reached. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MASONRY MATERIALS A. Brick Veneer: ASTM C 216 face brick or ASTM C 652 hollow brick. 1. Face Brick: ASTM C 216, Grade SW, Type FBS, face brick. 2. Hollow Brick: ASTM C 652, Grade SW, Class H40V, Type HBS, hollow brick with 3/4" minimum shell thickness on outer face shell, inner face shell, and end webs. 3. Brick Veneer "A" (Field Brick): King size face brick with actual dimensions of 25/s" x 3" x 9%". Provide TUP 20 Amaretto, Western, King Size Velour, as manufactured by Acme Brick Co. Manufacturer's identification on face brick will not be acceptable. 4. Brick Veneer "B" (Accent Brick): King size face brick with actual dimensions of 25/8" x 3" x 9r%". Provide PEP 437 Harbor Mist, Western, King Size Velour, as manufactured by Acme Brick Co. Manufacturer's identification on face brick will not be acceptable. 5. Brick Veneer "C" (Accent Brick): King size face with actual dimensions of 2%" x 3" x 95/e'. Provide PEP 30 Dove Gray, Western, King Size Velour, as manufactured by Acme Brick Co. Manufacturer's identification on face brick will not be acceptable. B. Special Brick Shapes: Provide special shapes and sizes of face brick as required for a complete project. Exposed surfaces to match the face brick in color, texture, and blend. Special shapes and sizes shall include, but not be limited to, the following and those shown on the drawings: 1. Solid bricks at soldier bond corners 2. Two-faced brick at corners, windows, and doors. 3. Solid bricks at windowsills. C. Common Brick: ASTM C 62, Grade MW, hard -burned stiff mud or dry -pressed brick. Use common brick where concealed brick is required. MASONRY UNITS VLK Architects, 2007 04 2000 - 2 2740.00 Creekview Elementary School College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas D. Concrete Masonry Units: ASTM C 90, Grade N-1, moisture controlled, for load -bearing units; ASTM C 129, moisture controlled, Type I, for non -load -bearing units. Provide hollow units made from Portland cement and lightweight mineral aggregate. 1. All units shall be from the same manufacturing plant and shall have the same surface texture. 2. Use load -bearing units for exterior wall backup and load -bearing partitions, non -load -bearing units elsewhere. Provide 1" bullnose units for exposed outside corners, unless noted otherwise. 3. Provide sash block control joints at all concrete block walls with pre -molded rubber control joint filler. 4. Provide starter blocks where required. 5. Nominal Size: 8" x 16" face. 6. Minimum compressive strength as shown on the structural drawings. 7. Provide "equivalent concrete masonry thickness" required for fire -rated assemblies where required. E. Related Materials: 1. Bond Breaker: ASTM D 226, Type I, (No. 15) non -perforated asphalt -saturated felt. 2.02 REINFORCING AND TIES A. Wall Ties: 1. For brick veneer: Provide adjustable veneer anchors consisting of 14 gage galvanized screw -on 6" anchor straps with backplates and holes at top and bottom. Also provide galvanized steel tie rods of/4" diameter. Product/manufacturer; one of the following: 315-D with 316; Heckman Building Products, Inc. DW1OHS with Vee Tie; Hohmann & Barnard, Inc. Type III with Triangular Tie; Masonry Reinforcing Corp. of America 2. For solid masonry, ties shall be 16 gage galvanized corrugated steel straps 7/8" wide x 7" long. B. Triangular Ties and Column Anchors: ASTM A 82 galvanized steel wire, 3/16" diameter ties and '/4" diameter anchors, for tying masonry walls to steel columns. C. Dovetail Anchors: 16 gage galvanized corrugated steel ties 1" wide x 4'/2" long. D. Joint Reinforcement at Single Wythe Concrete Masonry Unit: Provide truss type with continuous 9 gage diagonal cross rods spaced not more than 16" o.c. Product/manufacturer; one of the following: Truss; Dur-O-WaI Products #120 Truss -Mesh; Hohmann & Barnard, Inc. Series 300; Masonry Reinforcing Corp. of America 1. Finish shall be Class 1 mill galvanized. 2. Corners and tees shall be prefabricated. E. Joint Reinforcement at Multi-Wythe Concrete Masonry Units: Truss design with continuous 9 gage side rods and 9 gage diagonal cross rods spaced not more than 16" o.c., #140 Truss -Twin -Mesh as manufactured by Hohmann & Barnard, Inc. or approved equivalent. F. Joint Reinforcement for Brick with Concrete Masonry Unit Back -Up: Provide truss type reinforcing strips with 9 gage side rods and box ties welded at each intersection. Tab ties shall be 3/16" steel wire. Product/manufacturer; one of the following: Dur-O-Eye; Dur-O-WaI Products #170 Truss Type; Hohmann & Barnard, Inc. Series 700; Masonry Reinforcing Corp. of America 1. Finish shall be Class 1 mill galvanized. 2. Comers and tees shall be prefabricated. G. Reinforcing Steel: ASTM A 615, Grade 60, deformed billet steel. 2.03 MORTAR AND GROUT MATERIALS A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, domestic manufacture. 1. Provide white Portland cement for colored mortar. 2. Provide natural Portland cement for all other masonry. B. Lime: ASTM C 207, Type S, with not more than 8% unhydrated oxides. C. Aggregate for Mortar; Sand: ASTM C 144, well -graded natural sand. Provide white or light color sand for colored mortar and white mortar. D. Aggregate for Grout: ASTM C 404. MASONRY UNITS VLK Architects, 2007 04 2000 - 3 2740.00 Creekview Elementary School College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas E. Coloring Pigment: Custom blended mortar color as selected by Architect. Provide coloring pigment as manufactured by Lambert Southwest, Inc., (phone 903.657.4680 web site: www.lambertsw.com) or Solomon Colors (phone 800.624.0261 web site www.solomoncolors.com). F. Water: Clean and free of deleterious amounts of acids, alkalis, or organic materials. 2.04 MORTAR; FIELD PREPARED A. Mix proportions: ASTM C 270, mortar proportions by volume: 1. Type N Mortar - Exterior and Interior at masonry veneer construction: 1 part Portland cement 1 part lime 6 parts sand Coloring Pigment: Add coloring pigment at manufacturer's recommended rate to obtain custom colors as selected by Architect. No mortar color is required at concealed or painted masonry. 2. Type S Mortar - Exterior and Interior at load -bearing masonry walls: 1 part Portland cement '/2 part lime 4'/2 parts sand Coloring Pigment: Add coloring pigment at manufacturer's recommended rate to obtain custom colors as selected by Architect. No mortar color is required at concealed or painted masonry. 3. Bedding Mortar: 1 part Portland cement 1/7 part lime 3 parts sand B. Mixing: 1. All dry material shall be accurately measured in a leak -proof box. Contractor shall have the option of using Mix -Rite as manufactured by Gibco (phone 800 822-0802); VOL-CON as manufactured by Vol -Con, Inc. (phone 319 383-1856); or fabricating a wood box for measuring dry materials. Box maybe any convenient size, but shall be not less than 12" x 12" x 12" inside dimensions. The use of shovels for measuring dry materials is strictly prohibited. 2. Proportion mortar accurately and mix thoroughly with the maximum amount of water to produce a workable consistency for at least 5 minutes in a mechanical batch mixer. Keep tools and mixing equipment clean. 3. Do not use mortar which has begun to set, or if more than 2'/Z hours have elapsed since initial mixing. Do not re -temper mortar. C. Use: Lay exterior and interior masonry veneer construction using Type N mortar. Lay exterior and interior load - bearing masonry using Type S mortar. Where required use bedding mortar to set and fill hollow metal frames. D. Masonry cement is not acceptable for mortar. E. Do not use calcium chloride in mortar. F. Pre -mix, dry or wet, is not acceptable for mortar, except as listed below; i.e. no other pre -mix mortars are acceptable. 2.05 MORTAR; PRE -BLENDED MORTAR MIXES, COLORED MORTAR MIXES, AND INTEGRAL WATER REPELLENT MORTAR MIXES A. Contractor's Option: Provide pre -blended mortar mix, colored mortar mix, and integral water repellent mortar mix as manufactured by SPEC MIX, Inc. (phone 888.329.7732 web site: www.specmix.com), instead of field - prepared mortars, NO SUBSTITUTIONS. SPEC MIX pre -blended mortar option shall include manufacturer's standard silo system for mixing and delivery of mortar mixes. 1. An equivalent product by Quikrete Cement and Concrete Products —Dallas (800.627.6125) will be considered as a substitution request per Section 01 6200 PRODUCT OPTIONS. 2. Pre -blended mortar mixes shall be mixed with potable waterin strict compliance with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations. 3. Masonry cement is not acceptable for pre -blended mortar. B. SPEC MIX PCL Sand Pre -blended Mortar Mix: . 1. Material: Pre -blended factory mix of Portland cement, hydrated lime and sand aggregate mixtures, NO SUBSTITUTIONS. 2. Mortar Type: Property mixture Type S for exterior and Interior at load -bearing masonry walls and Type N for exterior and Interior masonry veneer construction. MASONRY UNITS VLK Architects, 2007 04 2000 - 4 2740.00 Creekview, Elementary School College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas C. SPEC MIX PCL Sand Pre -blended Colored Mortar Mix: 1. Material: Pre -blended factory mix of Portland cement, hydrated lime, sand aggregate, and color pigments, NO SUBSTITUTION. 2. Mortar Type: Property mixture Type S for exterior and Interior at load -bearing masonry walls and Type N for exterior and Interior masonry veneer construction. D. SPEC MIX PCL Sand Pre -blended IWR Colored Mortar Mix: 1. Material: Pre -blended factory mix of Portland cement, hydrated lime, sand aggregate, color pigments, and incorporating dry SPEC MIX Integral Water-repellent Mortar Admixture, NO SUBSTITUTION. 2. Mortar Type: Property mixture Type S for exterior and Interior at load -bearing masonry walls and Type N for exterior and Interior masonry veneer construction. E. Mixing: Mix mortar using manufacturer's standard mechanical mixer to ensure homogeneity and workability. Observe mixing times of 4-5 minutes, consistent from batch to batch. Use clean, potable water; add the maximum amount consistent with optimum workability. 1. At the end of the day, thoroughly rinse the mixer to avoid contamination of future mortar batches. 2. Discard mortar 2.5 hours after initial mixing. 2.06 GROUT, FIELD PREPARED A. Grout shall conform to ASTM C 476 1. Fine Grout Proportions: 1 part Portland cement 1/10 part lime 3 parts fine aggregate 2. Coarse Grout Proportions 1 part Portland cement 1/10 part lime 3 parts fine aggregate 2 parts coarse aggregate Provide grout for bond beams, masonry lintels, and reinforced masonry. B. When placing grout in masonry, exercise extreme care to prevent grout from staining face of masonry. 2.07 GROUT; PRE -BLENDED A. Contractor's Option: Provide pre -blended grout mix as manufactured by SPEC MIX, Inc. (phone 888.329.7732 web site: www.specmix.com), instead of field -prepared grouts, NO SUBSTITUTIONS. SPEC MIX pre -blended grout option shall include manufacturer's standard silo system for mixing and delivery of grout mixes. 1. An equivalent product by Quikrete Cement and Concrete Products —Dallas (800.627.6125) will be considered as a substitution request per Section 01 6200 PRODUCT OPTIONS. 2. Pre -blended grout mixes shall be mixed with potable water in strict compliance with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations. B. SPEC MIX Core Fill Masonry Grout: 1. Material: Pre -blended factory mix of cementitious materials and dried aggregates meeting ASTM C 476 requirements for reinforced masonry construction. 2. SPEC MIX Core Fill - Fine Grout: Pre -blended mix containing cementitious materials and fine aggregate designed to fill masonry voids two inches or less. 3. SPEC MIX Core Fill - Course Grout: Pre -blended mix containing cementitious materials and coarse aggregate designed to fill masonry voids greater than two inches. C. Mixing: Mix grout using manufacturer's standard mechanical mixer to ensure homogeneity and workability. Observe mixing time of 5 minutes, consistent from batch to batch. Use clean, potable water; add the maximum amount consistent with optimum workability. 1. Discard unused grout 1.5 hours after initial mixing. 2.08 BRICK CLEANER A. Use "Sure-Klean Vana Trol" as manufactured by ProSoCo, Inc., or an approved equivalent inorganic commercial masonry surface cleaner. "Sure Klean 600" may be used at concrete masonry units which are not adjacent to colored mortar and concrete masonry units which are scheduled to be painted. 2.09 ACCESSORIES A. Control Joints: Preformed rubber material; RS Series Rubber Control Joint as manufactured by Hohmann & Barnard, Inc. or comparable products by Dur-O-Wall Inc. or Heckman. Width slightly less than wall thickness to allow for sealant material. MASONRY UNITS VLK Architects, 2007 04 2000 - 5 2740.00 Creekview Elementary School College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas B. Round Plastic Weep/Vent Tubing: Medium -density polyethylene, 3/81nch OD by 4 inches long. C. Cellular Plastic Weeps: One-piece, flexible extrusion made from UV -resistant polypropylene copolymer, full height and width of head joint and depth 1/8" less than depth of outer wythe. Product/manufacturer; one of the following: Mortar Maze weep vent; Advanced Building Products Inc. Cell Vents; Dayton Superior Corporation, Dur-O-Wal Division No. 85 Cell Vent; Heckmann Building Products Inc. Quadro-Vent; Hohmann & Barnard, Inc. Cell Vent; Wire -Bond D. Cavity Drainage Material: Free -draining mesh, made from polymer strands that will not degrade within the cavity. Provide strips, full -depth of cavity and 10 inches wide, with dovetail shaped notches 7 inches deep that prevent mesh from being clogged with mortar droppings. Product/manufacturer; Mortar NetTm, Mortar Net USA, Ltd. (phone 800.664.6638 web site: www.mortarnet.com). E. Rebar Positioners: Size and type required to accurately place reinforcing steel in bond beams, concrete masonry unit lintels, and vertically in walls. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Wetting of Face Brick: 1. Draw a 1" circle with wax crayon on the bed surface of dry brick. Using medicine dropper, place 20 drops of water inside circle and measure time required fior absorption of water. 2. If water is absorbed in less than 1'/2 minutes, brick must be wet before being laid. 3. Brick shall have no visible moisture when laid. B. Cleaning: Beams, slabs, and lintels on which masonry walls and partitions are to be laid shall be brushed thoroughly to remove loose dirt and laitance. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Installation Tolerances: 1. Maximum Variation from Plumb: a. Vertical lines and surfaces of columns and walls: 1) '/4" in 10'-0". 2) 3/a" in any story or 20'-0" maximum. 3) ''/2" in 40'-0". b. External Comers or Control Joints: 1) '/4" in any one story or 20'-0" maximum. 2) '/2" in 40'-0". 2. Maximum Variation from Unit to Adjacent Unit: 1 /32" maximum. Maximum variation is mandatory on walls where only one surface is exposed. Where two surfaces are exposed to view, the more prominent face, per Architect, is to have maximum variation maintained, with the less prominentface allowed to exceed the maximum tolerance. 3. Maximum Variation from Level or Grades for Exposed Lintels, Sill, Parapets, or Horizontal Grooves: a. '/4" in any bay or 20'-0" maximum. b. '/z" in 40'-0". 4. Maximum Variation from Plan Location or Linear Building Line or Related Portions of Columns, Walls, and Partitions: a. '/2" in any bay or 20'-0" maximum. b. 3/" in 40'-0". 5. Maximum Variation in Cross -sectional Dimension of Columns and Thickness of Walls: ±'/.". 6. Maximum Variation in Mortar Joint Thickness: a. Bed Joint: ±I/a". b. Head Joint: ±'/a". B. Dimensions are based on modular and king size units except for special details. If units other than modular and king size size are used, there shall be no change in story heights or other main dimensions of partition centerlines, and connecting work shall be adjusted to any changes in unit sizes. MASONRY UNITS VLK Architects, 2007 04 2000 - 6 2740.00 Creekview Elementary School College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas C. Laying Brick: Lay brick level, plumb, straight, and true to line within tolerances specified above. Spread the mortar bed full width and relatively smooth. Do not furrow Butter the end of each brick with mortar and shove into place to completely fill the head joint. Do not feather the brick with excess mortar cut from the bed. 1. At concrete foundations and beams, install bond breaker between first course of brick veneer and concrete bearing. Gaskets at bottom of cavity walls shall not be used as bond breakers unless gasket occurs under the first course of brick. 2. Cut masonry units with motor -driven saw designed to cut masonry with clean, sharp, unchipped edges. Cut units to provide patterns shown and to fit adjoining work neatly. Use full units without cutting wherever possible. Remove cut misfits and replace with properly cut units. 3. Lay brick with special coursing and jointing as detailed. Lay rowlock and soldier courses with uniform joints approximately 3/8" wide. Use uncored brick for the exposed ends of such courses and wherever the holes would be exposed. 4. When laying walls, keep the air space free and clear of mortar droppings and debris. 5. Unless shown otherwise, provide vertical control joints every 40'. 6. Refer to Expansion Joint Paragraph for Expansion Joints (Control Joints). D. Laying Concrete Masonry Units: Spread mortar beds smooth and full to cover all bearing areas. Do not furrow. Butter head joints and shove units into place. Head joints shall be staggered except where stack bond is specifically indicated. Make back joints full against the backing materials as each course is laid. 1. Leave pipe spaces open on one full side until pipe work has been completed and inspected. 2. Lay concrete masonrywalls and partitions level, plumb, straight, and true to line within tolerances specified above. 3. Fill the cells of exposed concrete masonry units with mortar for a width of 8" at the jambs of all openings in exterior walls. 4. Fill cells of concrete masonry units at exterior walls with foamed -in -place masonry wall insulation [loose fill insulation]. 5. Exposed ends of units at external corners shall be solid. 6. Units shown to be laid in stack bond shall be laid with such accuracy that a plumb line centered on a vertical joint in an upper course will be entirely within the width of the corresponding vertical joint in every lower course. 7. Unless shown otherwise, provide vertical control joints every 40'. 8. Maximum pour of grout in vertical cells shall be limited to 5'-0" unless cleanouts are provided at each cell. E. Installation of Reinforced Unit Masonry: 1. Temporary Formwork and Shores: Construct formwork and shores to support reinforced masonry elements during construction. a. Construct formwork to conformto shape, line, and dimensions shown. make sufficiently tightto prevent leakage of mortar and grout. Brace, tie, and support forms to maintain position and shape during construction and curing of reinforced masonry. b. Do not remove forms and shores until reinforced masonry members have hardened sufficiently to carry their own weight and other temporary loads that may be placed on them during construction. 2. Set reinforcing in required position and secure against displacement before grouting is started. Cells requiring vertical reinforcement and grout shall be aligned to provide continuous unobstructed vertical opening. Place vertical reinforcing in cells with enough steel extending to provide proper lap splice. Horizontal steel shall be fully embedded in grout. 3. Grouting: Do not place grout until entire height of masonry to be grouted has attained sufficient strength to resist grout pressure. a. do not exceed the following pour heights for fine grout. 1) For minimum widths of the grout spaces of 3/4 inch or for minimum grout space of hollow unit cells of 1-1/2 by 2 inches, pour height of 12 inches. 2) For minimum widths of grout spaces of 2 inches or for minimum grout space of hollow unit cells of 2 by 3 inches, pour height of 60 inches. 3) For minimum widths of grout spaces of 2-1/2 inches or for minimum grout space of hollow unit cells of 2-1/2 by 3 inches, pour height of 12 feet. 4) For minimum widths of grout spaces of 3 inches or for minimum grout space of hollow unit cells of 2 by 3 inches, pour height of 24 feet. b. Do not exceed the following pour heights for coarse grout. 1) For minimum widths of the grout spaces of 1-1/2 inches or for minimum grout space of hollow unit cells of 1-1/2 by 3 inches, pour height of 12 inches. 2) For minimum widths of grout spaces of 2 inches or for minimum grout space of hollow unit cells of 2-1/2 by 3 inches, pour height of 60 inches. 3) For minimum widths of grout spaces of 2-1/2 inches or for minimum grout space of hollow unit cells of 3 by 3 inches, pour height of 12 feet. 4) For minimum widths of grout spaces of 3 inches or for minimum grout space of hollow unit cells of 3 by 4 inches, pour height of 24 feet. MASONRY UNITS VLK Architects, 2007 04 2000 - 7 2740.00 Creekview Elementary School College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas 4. Provide cleanout holes at least 3 inches in least dimension for grout pours over 60 inches in height. Cleanouts shall be sealed after inspections before grouting. a. Provide cleanout holes at each vertical reinforcing bar. 5. Place grout in lifts not exceeding 5 feet. 6. Consolidate grout at the time of initial placement. 7. Grouting of any section of wall shall be completed within one day with no interruptions greater than one hour. Reinforcing Masonry Joints: Reinforce the bed joints of concrete masonry unit walls and partitions with continuous joint reinforcement strips. 1. Furnish strips in long lengths. Width of strips shall be 2" less than nominal overall width of the wall or partition. 2. Lap strip ends 12" and bed side rods in mortar for complete cover and bond. 3. Install strips in bed joints spaced 16" o.c. for exterior walls and 24" o.c. for interior partitions. Reinforcement shall extend into and bond the facing wythe in walls. 4. At exterior masonry walls, discontinue horizontal joint reinforcement across control joints. 5. At interior masonry walls and intersection of interior/exterior masonry walls, continue horizontal joint reinforcement across control joints. G. Bonding: Tie together all masonry unit construction within walls and at intersections of walls by masonry bond and staggered vertical joints. Toothing will not be permitted except where specifically authorized by the Architect. Where walls must be built in advance of adjacent walls, form the stop -off by racking back. 1. Lay brick facing wythe in standard running bond with staggered head joints except where special coursing is indicated. Tie multiple wythe construction together with horizontal joint reinforcement and tab ties. 2. Where bond with joint reinforcement cannot be made, use wall ties spaced not more than 24" o.c. horizontally and vertically Ties shall be laid in the joints, not shoved into wet mortar after setting the next course of masonry. 3. Tie brick veneer back to steel stud curtain walls with metal ties spaced 16" o.c. horizontally and 16" o.c. vertically Additional ties should be installed at approximately 8" o.c. at openings, edges, and tops and bottoms of walls. Secure ties through the sheathing to the studs with two screws and insert ties. 4. Tie masonry to structural steel columns by welding anchors to columns at 16" o.c. and inserting triangular ties. Ties shall be of the size required to extend within 2" of brick face. 5. Where concrete is faced more than 12" high with masonry, bond masonry to concrete with anchors set into dovetail anchor slots cast into the concrete. Provide the anchors. Spacing shall be as specified above for wall ties. 6. Bond interior masonry walls and the intersection of interior/exterior masonry walls by forming control joints and reinforce with horizontal reinforcing at 16" o.c. 7. Partitions between rooms without suspended ceilings, and 4" thick partitions with an unsupported length of more than 12 ft. shall be extended to the floor or roof above and wedged and sealed against it Extend all other partitions above the highest adjacent ceiling, unless indicated to extend up to floor or roof above. H. Joints shall be 3/s" wide. Joints shall be straight and uniform. 1. Tool and work exposed joints to a hard, dense surface with a sled runner and leave without any shrinkage cracks. Delay tooling until the mortar has set thumbprint hard. Tool the joints in masonry walls behind chalkboards and tackboards. 2. Rake out the joints to be caulked and keep them free of mortar as the work progresses. 3. Provide control joints at inside corners with backer rod and sealant. 4. Mortar color changes: Location of mortar color changes in relation to masonry color changes shall be as directed by Architect. Contractor shall rake and point mortar joints or otherwise alter standard masonry procedures to satisfy this requirement. I. Masonry Bearings: Provide bearings of common brick under framing members which bear on masonry walls unless the members bear directly on concrete -filled bond beams. J. Chases: Form chases and recesses tothe required dimensions and lines, strike joints flush and remove excess mortar. Before closing chases and similar inaccessible spaces with masonry, remove all rubbish and sweep out the area. K. Lintels and Beams: Provide lintels and beams for openings in masonry walls. This includes lintels at masonry openings for ducts. Verify duct layouts on the mechanical drawings. 1. Reinforced Masonry Lintels: Construct and reinforce masonry lintels where shown. a. Make concrete masonry lintel units of the same material and by the same process as the other concrete masonry units used in the building. b. Use trough -type units, not regular units with the web knocked out. Fill the troughs with concrete. c. Build lintels in place where possible and cure at least 14 days before subjecting them to load. Provide at least 8" bearing at each jamb. MASONRY UNITS VLK Architects, 2007 04 2000 - 8 2740.00 Creekview Elementary School College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas d. Where reinforcing is not specifically called out for masonry lintels, use not less than a #4 bar top and bottom of 8" high masonry units for each 4" thickness of wall. 2. Bond Beams: Provide bond beams in masonry walls. Bond beams shall be continuous where possible. Provide rebar positioners to accurately position reinforcing steel. 3. Steel Lintels: Build steel lintels into the masonry walls. Where reinforcing or steel shapes are not specifically called out for lintels in brick walls, use one steel angle for each 4" thickness of brick in the wall. L. Flashing: 1. Build in flashings which enter the masonry, using the materials and following the instructions of the pertinent sections of the specifications. 2. Create end dams at ends of window heads, at edges of storefronts, and other vertical elements to channel water to nearest weep hole away from window mullions and other items which might allow water to travel vertically. M. Weeps: Install weep holes in veneer at 24" o.c. and 20" o.c. (king-size brick)] horizontally for clay masonry and 32" o.c. for 16" long concrete masonry, above through -wall flashing, above shelf angles, and at bottom of walls. Install plastic weeps in strict accordance with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations. N. Cavity Drainage Material: Install cavity drainage material in cavities to comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations. Provide one or more thickness as required to fill cavity width. O. Expansion Joints (Control Joints) 1. At exterior masonry walls, discontinue horizontal joint reinforcement across control joints. 2. At interior masonry walls and intersection of interior/exterior masonry walls, continue horizontal joint reinforcement across control joints. 3. Provide resilient continuous lengths of control joint material in concrete masonry unit sash blocks. Solvent weld butt and comer joints, in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 4. Size control joints in accordance with SECTION 07 9200 - JOINT SEALANTS, for sealant performance, but in no case larger than adjacent mortar joints in exposed face brick. 5. Interior control joints are not required to align with exterior control joints. 6. Provide vertical expansion joints in all masonry (concrete masonry unit and brick), as follows: a. Where shown on drawings. b. Every 40'-0" - horizontal. c. Within 2'-0" of all inside corners. d. Change of substrate including but not limited to the following: 1) Concrete masonry unit to metal stud back-up. 2) In masonry wall at intersection of concrete beam supported masonry and structural steel supported masonry. e. As recommended by referenced standards. 7. Control joints shall extend continuous through bond beam although concrete and reinforcement for bond beam shall extend continuous through control joint. P. Built-in work: 1. As work progresses, build -in metal door frames, fabricated metal frames, window frames, wood nailing strips, anchor bolts, plates, and other items to be built in the work supplied by other sections. 2. Build -in items plumb and level. 3. Bed anchors of metal door and glazed frames in mortar joints. Fill frame voids solid with mortar. Fill masonry cores with mortar minimum 8" from framed openings. 4. Do not build -in organic materials subject to deterioration. Q. Cutting and fitting: 1. Cut and fit for chases, pipes, conduit, sleeves, and grounds. Cooperate with other sections of work to provide correct size, shape, and location. 2. Obtain approval prior to cutting or fitting anyarea not indicated orwhere appearance or strength of masonry work may be impaired. R. Miscellaneous Work: 1. Cooperate with other trades in installing their work in masonry. Furnish bedding mortar and set loose lintels. Cooperate in setting bucks and frames, maintain them in position and build them in with anchors properly placed. Do not distort frames by crowding. 2. Cut and form openings for recessed items and for electrical and plumbing installations so that wall plates and escutcheons will completely cover the openings. Cut edges shall be clean, sharp and straight. 3. Fill solid with mortar the spaces around and behind metal door frames. 4. Point with mortar the openings around flush -mounted electrical outlet boxes. MASONRY UNITS VLK Architects, 2007 04 2000 - 9 2740.00 Creekview Elementary School College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas S. Sound -Conditioned Masonry Walls: Fill cells of concrete masonry walls scheduled to be sound conditioned with dry, well -graded natural sand meeting ASTM C 33. 1. Sand -filled masonry walls shall be covered with plastic sheeting secured with Hohmann & Barnard, Inc. Masonry Wall Clamp No. HB3000. Sand must be completely dry when wall is finished and enclosed. 2. At the end of each day's work, cover the tops of sand -filled masonry walls and all other unfinished exposed cavity wall openings with secured plastic sheeting. T. Curing: In dry weather, masonry exposed to wind and sun shall be wet with a fine water spray several times each day for at least 6 days, starting as soon as the mortar has set sufficiently to resist erosion. U. Building Expansion Joints: Discontinue horizontal joint reinforcement across building expansion joints. V. Non -Load -Bearing Concrete Masonry Unit Partitions: Partitions which extend up to structure above for fire, acoustical, or security reasons, shall terminate within 2"of structural deck, joists or beams to allow for deflection. Fill 2" gap with sealant and fire safing to achieve proper rating. 3.03 PROTECTION A. Protect finished installation under provisions of SECTION 01 5000 - TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS. B. Maintain protective boards at exposed external corners which may be damaged by construction activities. C. Provide protection without damaging completed work. D. At the end of each day's work, cover the tops of masonry walls, window sills and jambs, door jambs, and any other unfinished exposed cavity wall opening with plastic sheeting or other suitable material. Cover shall extend a minimum of 2' down both sides of walls and shall be held securely in place with Hohmann & Barnard, Inc. Masonry Wall Clamp No. HB3000. E. Keep expansion joint voids clear of mortar. 3.04 POINT AND CLEAN A. Pointing: Upon completion of the masonry work, fill and neatly point line nail holes and other defects. Remove mortar droppings from projecting surfaces. B. Cleaning: 1. Clean face brick with a commercial cleaner. Test the cleaner on an inconspicuous area of face brick to insure that it performs as intended without leaving any scum or residue. Before the solution is applied, soak the brick surface with clean water. Apply the cleaner in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions and rinse the surface thoroughly with clean water to remove all traces of the cleaner. Protect metal and concrete surfaces from contact with the cleaner. 2. Clean glazed facing tile with brushes and clean water. Use no acids or abrasives. 3. Clean exposed concrete masonry units by dry brushing at the end of each day's work and after final pointing to remove mortar spots and droppings. 3.05 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. General: Owner will employ services of an independent materials testing laboratory to perform specified inspections and testing. B. Coordinate with Owner's testing laboratory to provide periodic inspection of the following task: 1. As masonry construction begins, the following shall be verified to ensure compliance: a. Proportions of site prepared mortar. b. Construction of mortar joints. c. Location of reinforcement and connectors. 2. The inspection program shall verify: a. Size and location of structural elements. b. Type, size, and location of anchors, including other details of anchorage of masonry to structural members, frames, or other construction. c. Specified size, grade, and type of reinforcement. d. Protection of masonry during cold weather (temperature below 40°F.) or hot weather (temperature above 90°F.). 3. Prior to grouting, the following shall be verified to ensure compliance: a. Grout space is clean. b. Placement of reinforcement and connectors. MASONRY UNITS VLK Architects, 2007 04 2000 - 10 2740.00 Creekview Elementary School College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas Proportions of site -prepared grout. Construction of mortar joints. C. Coordinate with Owners testing laboratory to provide continuous inspection of the following task: 1. Grout placement shall be verified to ensure compliance with code and construction document provisions. END OF SECTION MASONRY UNITS VLK Architects, 2007 04 2000 - 11 2740.00 Creek View Elementary School College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas SECTION 05 1200 STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Structural metal framing. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 01 4523 -Testing and Inspection Services. 2. Section 03 3000 -Cast-in-place Concrete: grouting under base plates. 3. Section 05 2100 - Steel Joists Framing. 4. Section 05 3100 - Steel Decking. 5. Section 05 400 - Cold -formed Metal Framing: lightgage framing. 6. Section 07 8116 - Cementitious Fireproofing. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. General: 1. Submit in accordance with SECTION 01 3323 - SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, AND SAMPLES. 2. Contractor shall be responsible for omissions and errors and for conformance with the drawings and specifications relative to the various details. 3. Architect's review will cover member sizes, strength of connections and general arrangements but not dimensions or quantities. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate shop and erection details, including cuts, copes, connections, holes, threaded fasteners and welds. C. Product Data: 1. Provide Manufacturer's data and certification for pre -assembled bolt, washer, and nut. 2. Provide copy of Welders' Certification. Welders must show proof of certification within the last year prior to starting any welding on the project. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Codes and Standards: 1. Fabrication and erection shall comply with the requirements of AISC "Specifications for the Design, Fabrication, and Erection of Structural Steel for Buildings", "Specifications for Structural Joints using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts" approved by the Research Council on Riveted and Bolted Structural Joints of the Engineering Foundation and "Code of Standard Practices for Steel Buildings and Bridges", latest editions. 2. Welders and welding procedures shall comply with requirements of ANSI/AWS D1.3 Structural Welding Code. 3. Steel Structure Painting Council a. Painting Manual, Volume 1, Good Painting Practice. b. Painting Manual, Volume 2, Systems Specifications. 4. Research Council on Riveted and Bolted Structural Joints: "Specifications for Structural Joints using ASTM A 325 Bolts. B. Design 1. Substitutions: Submit substitutions of sections or modifications of details, or both, and the reasons with the shop drawings for approval. Submitted substitutions must be clearly identified and noted as such. Coordinate approved substitutions, modifications, and necessary changes in related portions of the work by the fabricator and accomplish same at no additional cost to the Owner. 2. Responsibility for errors: The Fabricator shall be responsible for all errors of detailing, fabrications, and for the correct fitting of structural steel members. 1.04 QUALIFICATIONS A. Structural Steel Fabricator: Not less than 10 years experience in the fabrication of structural steel for buildings. B. Structural Steel Erection: Not less than 5 years experience in the erection of structural steel. Welders must be qualified to perform all procedures and positions encountered per AWS certification standards. STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING VLK Architects, 2007 05 1200 - 1 2740.00 Creek View Elementary School College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Bolts and other anchorage devices to be embedded in concrete and masonry shall be delivered to the site before the start of concrete or masonry work. Furnish setting drawings and templates for the installation of anchor bolts. B. Fasteners shall be protected from dirt and moisture at the project site. Only as many fasteners as are anticipated to be installed and tightened during a work shift shall be taken from protected storage. Fasteners not used shall be returned to protected storage at the end of the shift. Fasteners shall not be cleaned of lubricant that is present in as- delivered condition. 1.06 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Coordinate erection of structural steel with work of other trades. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Structural Steel: 1. ASTM A 36, typical Channels, Angles, Bars, and Plates. 2. ASTM A 992, W Shapes. B. Hollow Structural Sections: ASTM A 500, Grade B and C. C. Pipe Columns: ASTM A 53, Grade B. D. Anchor Rods, Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: 1. Anchor Rods: ASTM F 1554, Grade 55. 2. Nuts: ASTM A 563, heavy hex Grade C, C3, D, DH, or DH3. 3. Washers: ASTM F 436. E. High -Strength Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: 1. Heavy hex steel structural bolts: ASTM A 325, Type 1, uncoated. 2. Heavy hex carbon -steel nuts: ASTM A 563, Grade C, C3, D, DH, or DH3. 3. Hardened carbon -steel washers: ASTM F 436. F. Tension Control Bolt Assemblies: ASTM F 1852; Lohr "High Strength Rapid Tension Bolts". G. Shear Connectors: ASTM A 108, Grade 1015 through 1020, headed -stud type, cold -finished carbon steel, AW S D1.1, Type B. H. Shop Paint: SSPC-Paint 25, Type I, iron oxide, zinc oxide, raw linseed oil, and alkyd. Do not prime areas which are to receive sprayed -on fireproofing. I. Bituminous Paint: Cold applied asphalt mastic, SSPC Paint 12, compounded for 30-mil thickness per coat. J. Bearing Pads: Neoprene rubber of 70durometer hardness, as manufactured by Oil States Bearing Pad Division of Fluorocarbon. 2.02 FABRICATION A. General: Fabricate structural steel in accordance with referenced specifications. 1. Drawings indicate the design, sections and weights of members. Make no substitutions except with the written permission of the Architect. Do not use dimensions scaled from the drawings for fabrication. Contractor shall, when necessary, determine actual dimensions at the building. 2. Workmanship shall conform to the best practice in structural steel shops. Materials shall be clean and straight. Shop kinks will not be permitted. 3. Exposed steel, where in view, shall meet the requirements of the AISC Manual for "Architecturally Exposed Structural Steel." B. Connections shall conform to the standard specifications of the American Institute of Steel Construction. C. Punching: Shop -punch steel members for bolts and hanger rods needed to support wood nailers and other items. STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING VLK Architects, 2007 05 1200 - 2 2740.00 Creek View Elementary School College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas D. Marking: Components of high strength steel required to have a yield stress greater than 36 kips/sq. in. shall be clearly marked with the ASTM designation over any shop coat prior to shipment from the fabricator's plant. E. Shop Painting: 1. Do not paint steel surfaces to be welded, including top flange of steel beams that are to receive shear studs. Do not paint steel surfaces which are scheduled to receive sprayed -on fireproofing. Clean this steelwork of oil and grease with solvent cleaner and remove dirtand other foreign matter by sweeping with brushes or with compressed air. 2. Apply one coat of shop paint to steel. Prior to application of shop paint clean steel to remove loose mill scale, rust, weld slag, dirt, and other foreign matter. Clean welds of spatter, smoke, and iron oxide film. Remove oil and grease with solvent cleaner 3. Apply shop paint to dry surfaces thoroughly and evenly by brush, spray, roller coating, or dipping at the election of the fabricator. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 ERECTION A. General: Comply with AISC Specifications and Code of Standard Practice, and as herein specified. B. Erection of structural metal shall comply with the requirements of referenced codes and standards. 1. The use of a cutting torch for field correction of fabricating errors will be permitted only with the approval of the Architect. For each fabrication error the contractor shall submit a drawing of existing conditions and the proposed correction for the Architect's review. 2. Set column base plates to correct elevations; support temporarily on shims until the columns have been plumbed and grouted. 3. Make field connections by electric arc welding or with high -strength pre -assembled threaded fasteners. C. Metal Protection: Apply two coats of bituminous paint to all steel members embedded or in contact with soil. D. Make high -strength bolted connections in conformance with "Specifications for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 Bolts" as approved by the Research Council on Riveted and Bolted Structural Joints, November 13, 1985. 1. Prior to installation, clean bolts, nuts, and washers, if required. Dirt and noticeable rust on bolts, nuts, and washers will not be allowed. 2. Install Lohr "High Strength Rapid Tension Bolts" in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. E. Stud weld shearconnectors through the steel deck to the steel beams using welding equipment and procedures recommended by the manufacturer of the stud anchors used. F. Erect steel framing true and plumb; brace temporarily where necessary to handle all loads to which the structure may be subjected. The Contractor shall remove such bracing as part of his equipment. Securely connect all work to take care of dead load, wind, and erection stresses. G. Steel framing members supporting and connected to metal panels shall be erected to '/s" tolerance for entire member length in any direction. H. Provide neoprene rubber bearing pads where steel beams bear on concrete. 3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspection and Testing: Verification inspection and testing of all field connections shall be done by an Independent Testing Laboratory, and copies of the inspection and test reports shall be submitted to the Architect and Contractor. The cost of these inspections and tests shall be paid as specified in SECTION 01455 - MATERIALS TESTING AND LABORATORY SERVICES. B. High -Strength Bolted Connections: All bolted connections shall be visually inspected in accordance with manufacturer's specifications. C. Welded Connections: 1. All field fillet welds shall be visually inspected in accordance with the applicable parts of AWS D1.1 Section 6, Inspection. 2. In addition to visual inspection, full penetration butt welds shall be subjected to ultrasonic testing in accordance with AWS D1.1, Section 6, Part C, Ultrasonic Testing of Groove Welds. Testing shall be performed on the percentage of welds set forth in the following schedule: Level Percent to be tested 1st and 2nd 100% 3. All welds that fail ultrasonic test shall be re -welded and re -tested until they pass the test. STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING VLK Architects, 2007 05 1200 - 3 2740.00 Creek View Elementary School College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas D. Shear connectors: 1. Visual inspection and bend tests shall be performed in accordance with the applicable parts of AWS D1.1, Section 4, Technique. 2. In addition to the bend tests, 25 beams per floor shall be selected at random and on each beam five studs shall be hammered toward the center of the beam as per the manufacturer's recommendations. If any of the five studs show failure, all studs on the beam shall be hammered, and all that fail shall be replaced. For each beam with any defective studs, two additional beams shall be tested. END OF SECTION STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING VLK Architects, 2007 05 1200 - 4 2740.00 Creek View Elementary School College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas SECTION 05 2100 STEEL JOISTS FRAMING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Open -web steel joists with bridging and attached bearing plates. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 014523 - Testing and Inspection Services. 2. Section 05 1200 - Structural Steel Framing. 3. Section 05 3100 -Steel Decking. 1.02 QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer shall be a member of S.J.I. and shall have engaged in the design and manufacture of similar units for a period of not less than 5 years. B. Installer shall have minimum 2 years experience in similar sized projects and all welders shall be certified using AWS testing procedures. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Submit in accordance with SECTION 01 3323 - SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA AND SAMPLES. Shop drawings shall indicate joist type, number, size, spacing, bridging, connections and erection details. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Reference Standards: The term "Standard Specifications" as used refers to latest editions of "Standard Specifications for Open Web Steel Joists" and "Standard Specifications for Longspan Steel Joists" as adopted by the Steel Joist Institute. B. Erection Tolerances: Sweep in joists when erected shall not exceed 1/8" per foot of length. C. All exposed steel joists shall comply with the finish requirements for "Architectural Exposed Steel". PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Joists: Open web, parallel chord, load carrying members of hot -rolled or cold -formed steel designated and fabricated in accordance with the "Standard Specifications". 1. Joists shall be cambered and shall fulfill their design requirements. 2. Joist bottom chords shall be double angles. 3. Provide extended ends for top chords of joists where indicated. B. Shop Paint: SSPC-Paint 15, Type I, red oxide; Fed. Spec. TT-P-636, red oxide; or manufacturer's standard shop primer complying with performance requirements of either of these red -oxide primers. C. Welding Materials: AWS D1.1; type required for materials being welded. D. Joist Accessories: ASTM A 36 quality for bridging, sidewall anchors, joist leg extensions and wall connectors as required. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Erecting Joists: Set joists to spacing shown with bearing areas in accordance with the "Standard Specifications". Provide headers, trimmers and bearing plates. 1. Anchor ends of joists to masonry supports with bar anchors, bolts, or welding. 2. Anchor ends of joists to steel supports by welding. STEEL JOISTS FRAMING VLK Architects, 2007 05 2100 - 1 2740.00 Creek View Elementary School College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas 3. Before construction loads are applied, align the joists as shown on the drawings and install bridging and bridging anchors. 4. Repair or replace any damaged joists. B. Coordinate placement of anchorages in masonry construction for securing bearing plates. C. Field weld joist seat to placed bearing plates after alignment and positioning are complete. Execute welding in accordance with AWS standards by welders who have been previously qualified forpositions and base metals encountered. D. Do not permit erection of decking until joists are braced and bridged. E. Do not field cut or alter joists without approval of ArchitecVEngineer. F. After erection, prime welds, abrasions and surfaces not primed. Use primer consistent with shop coat. G. Touch -Up Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections and abraded areas of shop paint and paint exposed areas with same material used for shop painting. Apply by brush or spray to provide a minimum dry film thickness of 2.0 mils. 3.02 ERECTION TOLERANCES A. Maximum Variation From Plumb: '/:". B. Maximum Offset From True Alignment: '/<". 3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspection and Testing: Verification inspection and testing of all field connections shall be done by an Independent Testing Laboratory, and copies of the inspection and test reports shall be submitted to the Architect, Engineer, City, Owner and Contractor. The cost of these inspections and tests shall be paid as specified in SECTION 01455 - MATERIALS TESTING AND LABORATORY SERVICES. B. High -Strength Bolted Connections: All bolted connections shall be visually inspected in accordance with manufacturer's specifications. C. Welded Connections: All field welds shall be visually inspected in accordance with the applicable parts of AWS D1.1 Section 6, Inspection. END OF SECTION STEEL JOISTS FRAMING VLK Architects, 2007 05 2100 - 2 2740.00 Creek View Elementary School College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas SECTION 05 3100 STEEL DECKING 17\iil��l�i•1�1:71>A 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Steel floor and roof decking. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 05 1200 - Structural Steel Framing. 2. Section 05 2100 - Steel Joists Framing: Structural framed openings larger than 18". 3. Section 09 9100 -Painting. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Submit in accordance with SECTION 01 3323 -SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, AND SAMPLES. Indicate type of deck, gage and finish of metal, and shape and size of special pieces and accessories. Indicate fastening to supporting structure and side lap fastening. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer: Shall have a minimum of 5 years experience in the design and manufacture of metal deck units. B. Installer: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum 3 years documented experience. C. Welders must show proof of certification within the last year prior to starting any welding on the project. Welders and welding procedures shall comply with the requirements of ANSI/AWS D1.3 Structural Welding Code or as shown in the Steel Deck Institute Manual of Construction with Steel Deck. D. Label Construction: Floor deck units shall be Listed by Underwriters Laboratories as a "Steel Floor and Form Unit' and shall bear the UL Classification Marking. 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver products to site under provisions of SECTION 016500 - PRODUCT DELIVERY REQUIREMENTS. B. Store decking under provisions of SECTION 01 6600 - PRODUCT STORAGE AND HANDLING REQUIREMENTS on wood sleepers with slope for positive drainage. 1.05 COORDINATION A. Coordinate installation with structural steel erection. Do not proceed until structure is ready to receive metal decking. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Acceptable Manufacturers: Bowman Metal Deck Div. Nucor Corp.; Vulcraft Division United Steel Deck, Inc. Wheeling Corrugating Co., Div. of Wheeling-Pittsburgh Steel Corp. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Floor Decking: Provide 22 gage x 2" deep composite steel floor deck. Prod uct/manufacturer; Type 2VLI22 Deck; Nucor Corp.; Vulcraft Division or approved equal. STEEL DECKING VLK Architects, 2007 05 3100 - 1 2740.00 Creek View Elementary School College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas B. Roof Decking: 1. Provide 1'/2" deep 22 gage wide rib deck units with ribs spaced 6" o.c. Deck plate shall have a flat surface; ribbed top flange is not acceptable. Product/manufacturer; Type 1.513 Roof Deck; Nucor Corp.; Vulcraft Division or approved equal. 2. Gymnasium Area: Provide 3" deep x 20 gage acoustical steel deck units with ribs spaced 8" o.c. Product/manufacturer: Type NIA; Roof Deck; Nucor Corp.; Vulcraft Division or approved equal. 3. Provide 3" x 20/18 gage Type EP such as Epic Wideck EP324. 4. Provide 3" x 20/18 gage Type EP such as Epic Wideck EP324A (Acoustical). C. Finish: Floor and roof decking units shall have a light commercial class zinc coating in accordance with ASTM A 653, Class G60. 2.03 ACCESSORIES A. Fasteners: Galvanized hardened steel. B. Weld Washers: Mild steel, uncoated %" outside diameter, 1/8" thick. C. Screws: #10 x %- HWH TEKS/1 self -drilling screw manufactured from galvanized heat treated carbon steel as manufactured by "Buildex". PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 ERECTION A. Placement: Place steel deck units on the supporting steel framework and adjust to final position before fastening permanently. Bring each unit to proper bearing on the supports. Place the units in straight alignment and with a minimum of clearance between the ends of abutting units. Deck units shall be continuous over at least three spans. B. Fastening: Weld deck units to steel framework at ends and at intermediate supports. Space welds as indicated on structural drawings. 1. Fasten side joints of roof and floor decking as indicated on the structural drawings. C. Opening: As the steel deck units are erected, cut and form the holes and openings which are located and dimensioned on the drawings. Holes required for the work of the other trades will be cut by the trades requiring them. Provide deck reinforcing for openings as recommended by the manufacturer. D. Where interior partitions are indicated to extend to the underside of metal roof deck, provide manufacturer's standard rubber closure installed to fill all voids between top of partition and underside of metal deck. 3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspection and Testing: Verification inspection and testing of all field connections shall be done by an Independent Testing Laboratory, and copies of the inspection and test reports shall be submitted to the Architect, Engineer, City, Owner, and the Contractor. The cost of these inspections and tests shall be paid as specified in SECTION 014523 - TESTING AND INSPECTION SERVICES. END OF SECTION STEEL DECKING VLK Architects, 2007 05 3100 - 2 2740.00 Creek View Elementary School College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas SECTION 05 4000 COLD -FORMED METAL FRAMING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Lightgage structural metal studs in exterior wall systems used as masonry veneer back-up. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 05 1200 - Structural Steel Framing. 2. Section 05 5000 - Metal Fabrications: steel angles. 3. Section 09 2116 - Gypsum Board Assemblies: non-loadbearing partition studs and glass mat sheathing. 1.02 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. The exterior non -load -bearing curtain wall system shall be designed to withstand both positive and negative pressure with a maximum deflection of U600 of stud span. If stud span for 6" and 8" 18 gage stud exceed U600, either increase stud gage, decrease stud spacing, or add light -gage bracing to control deflection to U600. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit in accordance with SECTION 01 3323 - SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, AND SAMPLES. Include manufacturer's specifications, load tables, dimension diagrams, anchor details, installation instructions for products to be used in lightgage framing work, and type and location of fasteners. Describe materials and finish, product criteria, and limitations. B. Shop Drawings: Submit in accordance with SECTION 01 3323 - SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, AND SAMPLES. Drawings shall incorporate fabrication and erection details. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. All structural members shall be designed in accordance with AISI "Specifications for the Design of Cold -Formed Steel Structural Members", latest edition. B. Qualifications: Welders and welding procedures shall comply with the requirements of ANSI/AWS D1.3 Structural Welding Code. 1.05 DELIVERY AND STORAGE A. Protect metal members from rusting and damage. Deliver to project site in manufacturer's containers or bundles, fully identified with name, brand, type and grade. Store off the ground in a dry, ventilated space. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Lightgage Steel Framing: ASTM A 653, 18 gage by 6" (60SJ18) structural stud framing members as manufactured by Unimast, Inc. (phone 800.654.7883), or products of equal substance and function as approved by the Architect. Refer to structural drawings for specific size, type, and locations of framing which may be used on the project. Substitutions: Under provisions of SECTION 01630 - PRODUCT OPTIONS AND SUBSTITUTIONS. Other acceptable manufacturer's include: Clark Steel Framing Industries Dale Industries, Inc. Dietrich Industries, Inc. Marino\Ware; Div. of Ware Industries, Inc. B. Furnish bridging and bracing members shown or required for a complete and structurally sound installation. C. Track: Formed steel; channel shaped; same width and finish as studs, tight fit; 18 gage thick, solid web. 2.02 ACCESSORIES A. Slide Clips: ASTM A 653, Grade A, galvanized metal clip. 1. ASTM A 653, Grade C, galvanized metal clip. 2. Designed and manufactured for attachment of metal stud framing to edge of structural steel framing. 3. Permits differential vertical movement between stud and floor or roof structure. COLD -FORMED METAL FRAMING VLK Architects, 2007 05 4000 - 1 2740.00 Creek View Elementary School College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas 4. Clip and its connection to structure shall be adequate to safely brace metal studs to resist design lateral load of at least 330 pounds (allowable stress increase permitted by Building Code already taken into account). B. Bracing and Furring: Formed sheet steel, thickness determined for conditions encountered, manufacturer's standard shapes, same finish as framing members. C. Bridging: 1'/2" C.R. channels, 16 ga; same finish as framing members. D. Plates, Gussets, Clips: Formed sheet steel, thickness determined for conditions encountered, manufacturer's standard shapes, same finish as framing members. E. Galvanizing Repair Paint: Organic Zinc -Rich coating containing 95% metallic zinc, by weight in the dried film; recognized under the Component Program of Underwriter's Laboratories, Inc. as an equivalent to hot -dip galvanizing; conforming to Federal Specification DOD P-21035A for repair of hot -dip galvanizing; as manufactured by ZRC Worldwide, Marshfield, MA (phone 800.831.3275 web site: www.zrcworldwide.com/gaids.htm). Provide Z.R.C. Cold Galvanizing Compound. 2.03 FASTENERS A. Self -drilling, Self -tapping Screws, Bolts, Nuts and Washers: ASTM A 90, hot dip galvanized. B. Anchorage Devices: Power driven as recommended by manufacturer for size and spacing. C. Welding Electrodes: Comply with AWS standards D1.1 and D1.3 2.04 FABRICATION A. General: Framing components may be prefabricated into panels prior to erection. Cut framing components accurately to fit squarely against abutting members. Hold members finely in position until properly fastened. Prefabricated panels shall be square and braced against racking. Attach similar components by welding. B. Protective Finishing: Paint abraded surfaces and welds after fabrication, using galvanizing repair paint for galvanized surfaces. 2.05 FINISHES A. All framing members shall be formed from hot -dip galvanized steel, G60 coating, conforming to the requirements of ASTM A 653, Grade C, with a minimum yield of 40 ksi. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. General: Install steel framing members and accessories in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions and the erection drawings. Spacing of studs shall not exceed 16" o.c. B. Securely anchor track to floor and overhead structure or member. Seat studs squarely in the track with the stud flange securely attached to the flanges of both upper and lower track. 1. Attach structural components by welding, bolting or with self -drilling screws. 2. Wire tying of framing components in structural applications will not be permitted. C. Touch-up Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint and paint exposed areas with same material used for shop painting. Apply by brush or spray to provide a minimum dry film thinness of 2.0 mils. For galvanized surfaces, apply galvanizing repair paint. D. Construct corners using minimum three studs. Double stud at wall opening, door, and window jambs. E. Provide rows of horizontal bridging welded in place at spacing recommended by stud manufacturer to resist lateral forces and stud rotation. 3.02 TOLERANCES A. Maximum Variation from True Position: t1/a' from plan location. B. Maximum Variation of any Member from Plane: 1/8" in 10 feet. END OF SECTION COLD -FORMED METAL FRAMING VLK Architects, 2007 05 4000 - 2 2740.00 Creekview Elementary School College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas SECTION 05 5000 METAL FABRICATIONS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Miscellaneous metal work and related items. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 05 1200 - Structural Steel Framing. 1.02 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Structural Performance of Stairs: Provide metal stairs capable of withstanding the effects of gravity loads and the following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated: 1. Uniform Load: 100 Ibf/sq. ft. 2. Concentrated Live Load: 300 Ibf applied on an area of 4 sq. in. 3. Uniform and concentrated loads need not be assumed to act concurrently. 4. Stair Framing: Capable of withstanding stresses resulting from railing loads in addition to loads specified above. 5. Limit deflection of treads, platforms, and framing members to U360 or 1/4 inch, whichever is less. B. Structural Performance of Railings: Provide railings capable of withstanding the effects of gravity loads and the following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated: 1. Handrails: a. Uniform load of 50 Ibf/ft. applied in any direction. b. Concentrated load of 200 Ibf applied in any direction. c. Uniform and concentrated loads need not be assumed to act concurrently. 2. Top Rails of Guards: a. Uniform load of 50 Ibf/ft. applied in any direction. b. Concentrated load of 200 Ibf applied in any direction. c. Uniform and concentrated loads need not be assumed to act concurrently. 3. Infill of Guards: a. Concentrated load of 50 Ibf applied horizontally on an area of 1 sq. ft. b. Infill load and other loads need not be assumed to act concurrently. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Submit in accordance with SECTION 01 3323 - SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, AND SAMPLES. Include details of each metal fabrication, including setting drawings for anchor bolts and other required anchors. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Steel: ASTM A 36, shapes, plates and bars. B. Threaded Fasteners: ASTM A 307, Grade A, bolts and nuts. C. Stud Anchors: Provide headed stud anchors with a smooth shank of carbon steel with a minimum tensile strength of 60,000 psi, as manufactured by Nelson Stud Welding Div. or KSM Welding Systems Div. D. Expansion Bolts: Fed. Spec. FF-S-325, Group II, Type A, Class 1. Provide Hilti Kwik-bolt or Ramset Trubolt stud anchors. E. Galvanizing Repair Paint: Organic Zinc -Rich coating containing 95% metallic zinc, by weight in the dried film; recognized under the Component Program of Underwriter's Laboratories, Inc. as an equivalent to hot -dip galvanizing; conforming to Federal Specification DOD P-21035A for repair of hot -dip galvanizing; as manufactured by ZRC Worldwide, Marshfield, MA (phone 800.831.3275 web site: www.zrcwoddwide.com). Provide Z.R.C. Cold Galvanizing Compound. METAL FABRICATIONS VLK Architects, 2007 05 5000 - 1 2740.00 Creekview Elementary School College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas 2.02 FABRICATION A. Fabricate and assemble metal work in the shop to the greatest extent possible. 1. Metal surfaces shall be clean and free of mill scale and rust pitting, well -formed to shape and size with sharp lines and angles. Shearing and punching shall leave clean true lines and surfaces. Exposed ends and edges shall be milled smooth with corners slightly rounded. 2. Weld shop connections to the extent practical; finish exposed welds smooth. Weld joints shall be flush. 3. Cut, drill or punch holes; do not make or enlarge by burning. Provide holes where required for connecting the work of other trades. 4. Conceal fastenings where practical. Thickness of metal and method of assembly and support shall give ample strength and rigidity. 5. Assemble parts so that joints are tight, members are in good alignment, and the finished work reproduces the drawing details as intended. 6. Stud Anchors: Weld stud anchors to miscellaneous shapes using welding equipment and procedures recommended by the manufacturer of the stud anchors used. B. Shop Painting: 1. Carbon steel surfaces shall be cleaned, degreased, and shop coated with a straight alkyd, zinc chromate, rust inhibitive paint applied by brush or spray Steel to be encased in concrete need not be painted. 2. Aluminum surfaces to be in direct contact with concrete and masonry shall be shop coated with zinc chromate primer. C. Galvanizing: Provide a zinc coating for those items indicated or specified to be galvanized, as follows: 1. ASTM A 153 for galvanizing iron and steel hardware. 2. ASTM A 123 for galvanizing rolled, pressed and forged steel shapes, plates, bars and strip 1/8" thick and heavier, and for galvanizing assembled steel products. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Deliver, store and erect metalwork in such manner that the parts are not damaged or deformed. Install the work true to line, plumb, level, in proper alignment with other work, and free of sags, buckles and other objectionable defects. Anchorage shall be adequate to safely resist all stresses to which the work will normally be subjected. B. Touch -Up Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint and paint exposed areas with same material used for shop painting. Apply by brush or spray to provide a minimum dry film thickness of 2.0 mils. For galvanized surfaces, apply galvanizing repair paint. 3.02 MISCELLANEOUS METAL SCHEDULE A. General: The following is a general list of the metal work to be furnished underthis section of the specifications. Other items of miscellaneous metal work shown and noted on the drawings and not mentioned elsewhere in the specifications shall be furnished as though specifically described herein. B. Loose Lintels: Lintels of steel shapes and plates where required at exterior brick veneer and as detailed. 1. End bearing shall be at least 8". 2. Where steel lintels are not specifically called out, furnish at least one steel angle for each 4" thickness of masonry in the wall. 3. Wrap bearing ends of lintels with felts to achieve a bond breaker between the lintel and the masonry. 4. Galvanize steel lintels located in exterior walls. C. Interior Trench Cover: Provide Trench CoverType TSTas manufactured by Balco, Inc. at interior wire trenches. 1. Plate Thickness is 1/4" 2. Trench Covers shall be aluminum, ASTM B 209, alloy 6061-T651 for plate; Frames shall be aluminum, ASTM B221, alloy 6063-T5 for extrusions. Trench cover shall have 1/8" recessed surface for carpeWCT finish to match surrounding floor finish. 3. Finish: Exposed aluminum surfaces shall be mill finish. Aluminum surfaces in contact with concrete shall be prime painted. 4. Fabrications: Fabricate trench cover assemblies as detailed. Provide splice covers and closures as necessary for complete installation. Fabricate splices, special transitions, corner units, corner fittings, intersections, and end closures as required. Miter and weld joints shall be factory manufactured. Provide necessary and related parts, devices, anchors, and other items required for water-resistant installations. 5. Provide 4"L removable cover piece at ends of each trench that can be secured in place when trench is not in use. METAL FABRICATIONS VLK Architects, 2007 05 5000 - 2 2740.00 Creekview Elementary School College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas 6. Installation: a. Contractor shall verify that field measurements are as shown on shop drawings prior to releasing materials for fabrication by the manufacturer. b. Installer shall examine conditions under which work is to be performed and shall notify the contractor in writing of unsatisfactory conditions. Installer shall not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to the installer. c. Install trench covers in accordance with the manufacturer's written installation instructions. Anchors shall be spaces at 10 inches o.c. d. Align work plumb, level, and, as required, flush with adjacent surfaces. e. Make allowances for change in trench size due to difference between installation and existing building construction. f. Clean exposed surfaces as recommended by the manufacturer. D. Pipe Rails: Handrails and railings of standard black steel pipe with fittings as detailed. 1. Bend pipe to smooth curves without kinks. Make joints and connections flush and smooth. Grind rough edges and exposed welds smooth; dress to profile. 2. For railings, space the posts as shown but not more than 4 ft. apart. Install posts into pipe sleeves set in the concrete; grout each post tight with low viscosity epoxy grout. 3. Provide slip flanges where posts are set into concrete and where rails terminate against walls. 4. Railings shall be designed and installed to meet the TAS requirement of withstanding 250 IV. pressure applied in any direction at any point on the railing. 5. For wall mounted handrails, provide malleable iron brackets having the mounting hole countersunk for a flat head machine screw to finish flush with the surface. Space brackets not more than 4 ft. apart. Fabricate returns from plates and welding elbows. Anchor returns and brackets with built-in anchor plates. 6. Handrails shall extend a minimum of 12" beyond the top riser of a stair and the top and bottom of a ramp. Handrails shall extend 12" plus one tread width beyond the bottom riser of a stair. 7. Galvanize exterior pipe handrails and railings after fabrication. E. Roof Curbs: Fabricate curbs of steel angles, channels and plates at roof openings for ducts, exhaust fans and other set -on items. 1. Miter and weld corners. 2. Bolt or weld curbs to roof framing members. F. Storefront Bracing: Provide braces of steel angles, channels and plates to reinforce and stiffen the head of the aluminum storefront framing. G. Track Supports: Provide framing and brackets of steel shapes as detailed to support curtain track. 1. Erect to be level, straight and rigid. 2. Punch for mounting bolts as required. H. Pipe Rail Supports: Support light support rail of standard black steel pipe with fittings as detailed for the lighting pocket in the ceiling. 1. Hang the support rail from the structure above with braced pipe struts spaced 48" o.c. Rail shall be straight and level. 2. Furnish slip flanges where pipe struts penetrate gypsum board ceiling. 1. Cast Iron Gratings: Standard duty cast iron gratings and frames of the type and size detailed for the concrete catch basins and tree grates. 1. Set frames flush with the concrete and loose in the frames at catch basins. J. Ladders: Fabricate ladders of steel bars and shapes. 1. Weld all connections. 2. Bolt ladders to floor and wall with steel brackets and clips. 3. Galvanize exterior ladders after fabrication. K. Aluminum Ladder: Provide O'Keeffe's No. 523 Ship Ladder and Ladder with Platform. Provide 1'/," dia. steel pipe rails as shown on drawings. K. Bollards: 1. Embedded: Provide bollards of size indicated, extend 3' below grade and 4' above grade, fabricated of Schedule 40 steel pipe, galvanized with G90 coating. Fill bollards with 3000 psi concrete, finish with domed top. 2. Removable Embedded: Reference SECTION 32 1900 - WALK, ROAD, AND PARKING APPURTENANCES. METAL FABRICATIONS VLK Architects, 2007 05 5000 - 3 2740.00 Creekview Elementary School College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas L. Gates: Provide gates of structural steel tubing of the sizes and spacing as detailed. Miter corners and weld all connections. 1. Frame: Structural steel plate as detailed. 2. Gate Hardware: Reference Drawings. 3. Installation: Frame shall be anchored to concrete. Install hardware and hang the gates. Adjust gates to operate smoothly and easily. Make gates secure against entry when closed 4. Galvanize gates after fabrication. M. Brick Vents: Provide aluminum brick vents 2'/z"W x 3%"D x length indicated on drawings, as manufactured by Construction Specialties, Inc. N. Roof Edge Angles: Provide steel angles along roof edges to support wood nailers. 1. Weld angles to steel framing unless otherwise indicated. O. Trench Covers: Provide cast iron, light duty trench drain and cover, Series R-4995, as manufactured by Neenah Foundry Company or approved equal. P. Blocking in Walls: Install 25ga sheet metal blocking on studs to stiffen the structure and for the support of other work. Provide metal blocking for installation of wall hung objects. Q. Metal Downspout Boots: Provide downspout boots made from 1/8" steel bent plate by heights as indicated on drawings with inlets of size and shape to suit downspouts. 1. Outlet: Vertical, to discharge into pipe. R. Miscellaneous Steel Shapes: Channels, wide flange shapes, angles, plates, tubing, connections, and bolts where shown and detailed on Drawings. Hot -dip galvanize where exposed to weather or touching exterior masonry after fabrication. Set mechanical unit frames directly on joists, not on deck. Provide an angle frame supported by structure around all roof penetrations including hatches and ductwork. END OF SECTION METAL FABRICATIONS VLK Architects, 2007 05 5000 - 4 2740.00 Creekview Elementary School College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas SECTION 06 1000 ROUGH CARPENTRY PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Framing with dimension lumber, nailers, wood furring and grounds, plywood subflooring and plywood backing panels. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 05 5000 - Metal Fabrications: Blocking. 2. Section 06 2000 - Finish Carpentry. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit in accordance with SECTION 01 3323 - SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA AND SAMPLES. B. Product Data: 1. Include all data for rough carpentry products required for installation. 2. Fire -retardant -treated wood product data, including certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with specified standard and other requirements as well as data relative to bending strength, stiffness, and fastener -holding capacities of treated materials. C. Warranty: Provide warranty of chemical treatment manufacturer for each type of treatment. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Lumber Grading: Lumber Grading Rules and Wood Species in accordance with Voluntary Product Standards. Grading rules of following associations apply to materials furnished. 1. Southern Pine Inspection Bureau (SPIB). 2. West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau (WCLIBB). 3. Western Wood Products Association (WWPA). B. Grade Marks: Identify lumber and plywood by official grade mark. 1. Lumber: Include symbol of grading agency, mill name, grade, species, grading rules and condition of seasoning at time of manufacturer. 2. Plywood: Include type, span rating or group number, exposure durability classification, and agency mark of APA. 1.04 QUALIFICATIONS A. Design structural site fabricated items underdirect supervision of a professional structural engineer experienced in design of this work and licensed in the State of Texas. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver, store, handle, and protect products in accordance with SECTION 01 6500 - PRODUCT DELIVERY REQUIREMENTS and 01 6600 - PRODUCT STORAGE AND HANDLING REQUIREMENTS. B. Store products above ground, on platforms or skids, and covered with waterproof coverings. Provide for adequate air circulation. C. Do not store seasoned materials in damp or wet locations. D. Support products in such a way as to prevent warping and distortion. 1.06 WARRANTY A. Provide a 20-year warranty for each type of chemical treatment. ROUGH CARPENTRY VLK Architects, 2007 06 1000 - 1 2740.00 Creekview Elementary School College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Wood: Lumber for framing and general carpentry work shall be sound, well manufactured, surfaced S4S material with a moisture content limit of 19%. 1. Dimension: SPIB grade marked No.2 Dimension Southern Pine or WCLB grade marked No. 2 Dimension Douglas Fir. 2. Boards: SPIB grade marked No. 2 Boards Southern Pine. 3. Redwood: RIS grade marked Construction Heart California Redwood. B. Plywood: Plywood for general carpentry work and sheathing shall be APA trademarked, 23/32" minimum thickness, Tongue & Groove. 1. Interior: APA Rated Sturd-I-Floor, 24 oc, Exposure 1, fire -retardant treated. 2. Exterior: APA Rated Sturd-I-Floor, 24 oc, Exterior, fire -retardant treated. C. Rough Hardware: 1. Anchors, bolts, screws, and spikes shall be of proper types and sizes to support the work, to draw the members into place, and to hold them securely. Bolt heads and nuts bearing on wood shall have standard washers. 2. Metal fasteners to secure wood grounds and blocking to masonry and concrete shall be of the type best suited to the conditions and spaced no more than 16" o.c. Wood plugs and nailing blocks are not acceptable. 3. Nails shall be of the sizes and types intended for the particular use. 4. Rough hardware exposed tothe weatheror embedded in exterior masonryand concrete walls or slabs shall be galvanized. 5. Nails and bolts used with preservative treated lumber shall be galvanized. 2.02 WOOD TREATMENT A. Fire -Retardant Treatment: 1. Provide fire treated wood and plywood complying with AW PA standards for pressure impregnation with fire - retardant chemicals. 2. Kiln -dry treated items to maximum moisture content of 19% for lumber and 15% for plywood. 3. Treat all wood framing members, cants, nailers, curbs, blocking, stripping, and similar members. 4. At Interior and Substrate Locations: Wood shall be fire -retardant chemically treated and pressure impregnated; capable of providing maximum flame spread of 25, fuel contribution of 14, and smoke developed of 0 per ASTM E 84. Treat in accordance with AWPA C20 for lumber and C27 for plywood and particleboard. 5. At Exposed Exterior Locations: Wood and plywood shall be treated with Exterior Fire-X Blue as manufactured by Hoover Treated Wood Products (phone 404.595.5058). Provide UL label on each piece of fire -retardant lumber or plywood. B. Preservative Treatment: 1. Comply with applicable requirements of AWPA Standards C2 (Lumber and C9 (Plywood). 2. Mark each treated item with the AWPB Quality Mark Requirements. 3. Above -ground items: a. Pressure treat with waterborne preservatives complying with AWPB LP-2; after treatment, kiln -dry to maximum moisture content of 19% for lumber and 15% for plywood. b. Treat all wood framing members, cants, nailers, curbs, blocking, stripping, and similar members. 4. Ground contact: a. Pressure treat with waterborne preservatives for ground contact use complying with AWPA LP-22 B. If cut after treatment, coat cut surfaces with heavy brush coat of same chemical used for treatment. Inspect each piece of lumber or plywood after drying; discard damaged or defective pieces. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. General 1. Discard units of material with defects which might impair quality of work, and units which are too small to fabricate work with minimum joints or optimum joint arrangement. 2. Set carpentry work accurately to required levels and lines, with members plumb and true and accurately cut and fitted. Scribe and cope as required. ROUGH CARPENTRY VLK Architects, 2007 06 1000 - 2 2740.00 Creekview Elementary School College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas 3. Securely attach carpentry work to substrates by anchoring and fastening as required by recognized standards and as required to draw members into place and securely hold same unless otherwise indicated. Use washers under all bolt heads. 4. Select fasteners of size that will not penetrate members where opposite side will be exposed to view or will receive finish materials. 5. Make tight connections between members to develop full strength of members. 6. Install fasteners without splitting of wood. 7. Pre -drill as necessary. 8. Comply with APA E30 requirements for plywood. 9. Install fasteners at spacings recommended by AFPA National Design Specifications for Stress Grade Lumber and Its Fastening - 1973 for lumber and APA Guide E30 for Plywood, unless more restrictive code requirements dictate tighter spacing or heavier fasteners. 10. Locate members as indicated on the drawings. Size, spacing or spans shall not be changed without specific approval of Architect. Take care to place proper grades and species of members where indicated in accordance with the lumber schedule herein. 11. Temporary brace framing at the end of each days' work until all framing is completed and securely anchored. Leave temporary bracing in place as long as required for safety. As work progresses, securely connect work to compensate for dead load, wind and erection stresses. B. Shoring: Construct shoring for masonry where required. Brace and maintain it until the mortar has set sufficiently to permit removal. C. Nailers: Install nailers of adequate size where detailed. Nailers shall be bolted in place. Where bolt sizes and spacing are not specifically noted, use not less than 3/8' bolts at 32" o.c., staggered. D. Roof Curbs: Construct wood curbs as detailed to frame openings and support flashings in roof decks. E. Bucks: Install wood bucks for frames as required. Members shall be at least 2 x 4 material. Spike securely together. In masonry, provide 16 ga. corrugated metal jamb anchors screwed to the back and spaced to work masonry bed joints, not more than 32" apart. F. Floor Underlayment for Platforms Flooring: Install underlayment with face grain perpendicular to supports and spanning minimum two spans. Locate ends and sides over supports and stagger the short joints. Leave 1/8" spacing between all panel ends and edges. Use screw4ype nails on 6" centers at ends and 12" centers at intermediate supports. Set screw heads 1/16". Start nails 3/8" from panel edges. Nail and glue using adhesives meeting APA specification AFG-01 or ASTM D 3498, with installation per APA's Form E30. G. Plywood Backing Panels: Screw attach through gypsum board to supports. 3.02 PROTECTION A. Protect products from moisture absorption and subsequent warping or deterioration until subsequent construction can proceed. END OF SECTION ROUGH CARPENTRY VLK Architects, 2007 06 1000 - 3 2740.00 Creek View Elementary School College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas SECTION 06 2000 FINISH CARPENTRY PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Standing and running trim, millwork, panelwork, handrails, base, and display cases. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 06 1000 - Rough Carpentry. 2. Section 08 1423 - Plastic -Laminate -Faced Wood Doors. 3. Section 08 7100 - Door Hardware: masterkey cabinet locks. 4. Section 08 8000 - Glazing: display case glass, track, and hardware. 5. Section 09 9100 -Painting: applied finishes. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submitfollowing items in accordance with SECTION 01 3323 - SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, AND SAMPLES. B. Product Data: Manufacturer's technical literature for factory fabricated items and components. C. Shop Drawings 1. Indicate profiles, sections, and views of stock items as well as specially fabricated items for the work, at scale large enough to permit checking for design conformity. 2. Indicate sizes, quantities, markings, materials, wood species, finishes and accessories. 3. Include assembly and installation drawings to show methods of blocking, fastening, bracing, jointing, and connecting to work of other trades. D. Samples 1. Two samples of each type and species of plywood, particle board, and finish lumber specified, complete with applied finish. 2. Each type of hardware and fastening device required in the construction of the work specified herein. E. Certificate: Submit certification by testing plant stating chemicals and process used, conformance with referenced standards and governing ordinances, and non -bleeding quality of treatment. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Mock-up: Construct the mock-up cabinet as designated on the drawings using all materials and hardware proposed for the project. The cabinet shall duplicate the typical construction and quality grade specified. Deliver the mock-up cabinet to the project site for approval by Architect. Notify the Architect in writing one week in advance of the mock-up's on -site arrival. Mock-up cabinet shall be made fully acceptable to the Architect through re -manufacture at the millwork shop or through acceptable field corrections prior to commencing construction of all other cabinets. Mock-up cabinet shall be properly identified, and, if acceptable to Architect may be installed in the project. Once installed, do not alter or move the mock-up cabinet. B. Material Grading: The grades of lumber and plywood used shall be as defined in the latest edition of AWI Quality Standards, Sections 100 and 200, and as defined by the rules of the recognized associations of lumber and plywood manufacturers producing the materials specified. C. Manufacturing Standards: Woodwork shall be manufactured in accordance with the standards in the current edition of the Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards of the Architectural Woodwork Institute in the grade or grades hereinafter specified or shown on the drawings. Any item not given a specific quality grade shall be Premium grade as defined in the latest edition of the AWI "Quality Standards". D. Color Uniformity: Provide plastic laminate for laminate -clad millwork and plastic -laminate -faced wood doors from the same manufacturer. E. Fabrication Standards: Fabricate items in accordance with AWI standards listed below using Premium Grade. 1. Lumber grades: AWI Section 100. 2. Counter tops: AWI Section 400. 3. Painted Millwork: AWI Section 600. 4. Miscellaneous Work: AWI Section 700. F. Regulatory Requirements: Conform to applicable code for fire retardant requirements. FINISH CARPENTRY VLK Architects, 2007 06 2000 - 1 2740.00 Creek View Elementary School College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas G. Accessibility Standards: The following special requirements shall be met, where required to comply with Texas Accessibility Standards (TAS). 1. Countertop height with or without cabinet below, not to exceed a height required by TAS. 2. Kneespace clearance to be minimum clearance as required by TAS. 3. 12" deep shelving, adjustable or fixed not to exceed a range as required by TAS. 4. Wardrobe cabinets to be furnished with rod/shelf adjustable to 48" A.F.F. at a maximum 21" shelf depth. 5. Sink cabinet clearances as required by TAS. 6. Cabinet locks, latches, and other operating mechanisms shall be mounted to comply with forward reach requirements of TAS; i.e. 15" to 48" above finish floor, except locked bottom drawers at base cabinets. 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver woodwork to the project site only when dry and product storage space is available at or in the building so that it can be kept dry and protected from injury. 1.05 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Protection: Protect finish woodwork surfaces from soiling and damage during handling and installation. Keep covered with polyethylene film orother protective covering. Woodwork damaged through neglect of the above requirements shall be repaired or replaced without additional cost to the Owner. 1.06 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Install finish carpentry products only when temperature and humidity conditions have been stabilized and will be maintained. B. Maintain temperature and moisture conditions as recommended by woodwork fabricator from date of installation through remainder of construction period. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. General: 1. Comply with quality and grading standards contained herein for each material. 2. Sizes noted on drawings or indicated herein for lumber are nominal unless detailed by specific dimensions of actual size. 3. Plywood and particleboard 3/4" thickness unless noted or detailed otherwise. 4. Products surfaced four sides, unless noted otherwise. B. Softwood Lumber 1. Quality standard: PS 20. 2. Grading Standard: AWI premium grade. 3. Maximum moisture content: 6% for interior work; 10% for exterior work. 4. Species: Douglas fir. 5. Grain: Plain sliced. C. Softwood Plywood 1. Quality standard: PS 1. 2. Grading standard: AWI premium. 3. Core material: C-D Plugged INT-APA. 4. Face quality: A-B INT-APA. 5. Species: Douglas fir. 6. Ply construction: 3 ply - 3/a'; 5 ply-1/2"; 7 ply -'/. D. Hardwood Lumber 1. Quality standard: FS MM-L-736C. 2. Grading standard: AWI custom grade. 3. Maximum moisture content: 6%. 4. Species: Red Oak. 5. Grain: a. Rift Cut. b. Plain Sliced at windowsill trim. E. Hardwood Plywood 1. Quality standard: PS51. 2. Grading standard: AWI custom. FINISH CARPENTRY VLK Architects, 2007 06 2000 - 2 2740.00 Creek View Elementary School College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas 3. Core material: Fir Veneer. 4. Face veneer: Red Oak. 5. Grain: Rift Cut. 6. Ply construction: 3 ply - 3/8"; 5 ply-1/2"; 7 ply - 3/4". F. Hardboard 1. Quality standard: PS 58. 2. Grade: Tempered . 3. Face: Both faces sanded. 4. Thickness: '/.". 2.02 ACCESSORIES AND TREATMENT A. Contact Adhesive: FS MMM-A-130B, of type recommended by millwork manufacturer to suit application. B. Wall Adhesive: Solvent release cartridge type, compatible with substrate, capable of achieving durable bond. C. Glass: '/," clear tempered. D. Bolts, Nuts, Washers, Lags, Pins, Nails, and Screws: Size and type to suit application. E. Nails: Size and type to suit application, plain finish. 2.03 CABINETS AND COUNTERTOPS A. General: If practical, cabinets not dependent upon job conditions shall be shop assembled. B. Identification of Cabinet Parts by Surface Visibility: 1. Exposed Surfaces: Surfaces visible when: a. Drawers and opaque doors (if any) are closed. b. Behind clear glass doors. c. Bottoms of cabinets 42" or more above finish floor. d. Tops of cabinets below 78" above finish floor. e. Tops of cabinets or millwork are visible from an adjacent higher elevation. 2. Semi -exposed Surfaces: Surfaces which become visible when. a. Opaque doors are open or drawers are extended. b. Bottoms of cabinets are more than 30" and less than 42" above finish floor. 3. Concealed Surfaces: Surfaces considered concealed when: a. Surfaces not visible after installation. b. Bottoms of cabinets less than 30" above finish floor. c. Tops of cabinets over 78" above finish floor and not visible from an upper level. d. Stretchers, blocking, and components concealed by drawers. Laminate Clad Cabinets: 1. Quality Standard: AWI Section 400 and its Division 400E Laminate Clad Cabinets, Premium Grade. 2. AWI Type of Cabinet Construction: Reveal overlay design. 3. Laminate Grade for Exposed Surfaces: a. Horizontal Surfaces other than Tops: GP-50 (0.050" nominal thickness). b. Vertical Surfaces: GP-28 (0.028" nominal thickness). c. Edges: GP-50 (0.050" nominal thickness). 4. Semi -Exposed Surfaces: Provide high pressure laminate, GP-28, including backs of doors and drawers. Other interior surfaces of drawers may be sealed wood; reference SECTION 09 9100 - PAINTING 5. Shop joints will be allowed only when the required lengths exceed the lengths of plastic regularly available. Field joints shall be shop prepared and pre -fitted with bolt -up type fasteners. 6. PVC edging banding will not be acceptable. 7. The use of LPDL (Melamine) will not be acceptable. 8. Plastic Laminate: General purpose grade, high pressure decorative laminate meeting the physical requirements of NEMA LD 3 and with a suede finish. Colors shall be as selected by Architect from manufacturer's full color and pattern range. Architect reserves the right to select one color forthe exposed surfaces of the basic components of cabinets and a different color forthe following components of cabinets: door and drawer fronts (including edges of door and drawerfronts), backs of open shelving, and countertop and backsplash, unless shown otherwise. Product/manufacturer; one of the following: Formica Brand Laminate; Formica Corp. Nevamar; Nevamar Co., LLC; Decorative Products Div. Wilsonart; Wilsonart International; Div. of Premark International, Inc. Pionite; Panolam Industries FINISH CARPENTRY VLK Architects, 2007 06 2000 - 3 2740.00 Creek View Elementary School College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas Countertops: 1. Quality Standard: AWI Section 400 and its Division 400C Tops. 2. Type of Top: High pressure decorative laminate complying with Premium Grade. 3. Laminate Cladding for Horizontal Surfaces: High pressure decorative laminate, HGS (0.050" nominal thickness) Grade. Laminate shall be selected from one of the manufacturers listed above. 4. Edge Treatment: Same as laminate cladding on horizontal surfaces. Plastic laminate edges shall return across all open ends of cabinets. 5. Joints between tops and backsplash shall be square. 6. PVC edging will not be acceptable. 7. The use of LPDL (Melamine) will not be acceptable. 2.04 DISPLAY CASE A. Provide %" tempered glass shelves and doors with polished edges. Glass doors shall be mounted on K&V P992ZC sliding glass door assembly as indicated on drawings. Provide one K&V P965KA50NP Ratchet Lock at each opening between a pair of doors. Furnish shelf standards and brackets; brackets should come with rests and rubber cushions. Parabolic louver as referenced by Drawings shall be Parasquare 3louvers of acrylic as manufactured by Scientific Lighting Products (phone 800.248.0224) with %" x 3/4" cell size,'/z' thk., and silver colored metallic finish. 2.05 WOOD BASE AND HANDRAILS A. Fabricate the wood members to detail. Wood shall be Red Oak solid lumber. Sand surfaces smooth. Joints shall be accurately cut to provide a close, flush fit. No end grain shall be visible. 2.06 WINDOWSILLS A. Plastic Laminate Faced Windowsills: Fabricate the windowsill to detail. 1. Plastic laminate faced %" thick "A -A" grade plywood (untreated) with waterproof and heatproof "Urea" based cement. a. Laminate Grade: High pressure decorative laminate, HGS (0.050" nominal thickness) Grade. b. Plastic Laminate finish shall be selected by Architect from manufacturer's full color and pattern range. Product/manufacturer; one of the following Formica Brand Laminate; Formica Corp. Nevamar; TexMar, Inc. Wilsonart; Ralph Wilson Plastic Co. Pionite 2. Edge Treatment: Red Oak wood trim with '/4" eased edges, extended %" past jambs. Transparent finish color as selected by Architect. 2.07 PANEL AND TRIM WORK IN CAFETORIUM A. Quality Standard: Comply with AWI Section 500 requirements for flush wood paneling. B. Grade: Premium. C. Wood Species and Cut: Red oak, rift cut. D. Matching of Adjacent Veneer Leaves: Book match. E. Vertical Matching of Adjacent Veneer Leaves: End match. F. Veneer Matching within Panel Face: Center match. G. Panel -Matching Method: Provide veneered panel product Sequenced and Numbered Uniform sets. 2.08 TRANSPARENT FINISH A. AWI Premium quality, reference SECTION 09900 - PAINTING with stain and sheen to be Custom Color as selected by Architect. 2.9 SHOP FABRICATION A. Fabricate millwork toAWI premium standards for reveal overlay construction as detailed (or as indicated in AWI Architectural Millwork Details if details are not present). FINISH CARPENTRY VLK Architects, 2007 06 2000 - 4 2740.00 Creek View Elementary School College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas B. Sanding/Filling 1. Perform work in accordance with AWL 2. Sand work smooth and set exposed nails and screws. 3. Apply wood filler in exposed nail and screw indentations and leave ready to receive applied finishes. 4. On items to receive transparent finishes, use wood fillerwhich matches surrounding surfaces and of types recommended for applied finishes. C. Prime seal concealed and semi -concealed surfaces. Brush apply only. D. Provide cutouts for plumbing fixtures, inserts, appliances, outlet boxes, and other fixtures. Verify locations of cutouts from site dimensions. Seal edge surfaces of cutouts. E. Before proceeding with millwork required to be fitted to other construction, obtain measurements and verify dimensions of shop drawing details for accurate fit. F. Fabricate millwork to dimensions, profiles, and details shown. G. Route and groove back of flat trim members, kerf backs of other wide flat members except plywood or veneered members. H. Assemble millwork in mill in as large of units as practicable to minimize field cutting and fitting. I. Miter trim joints, where required, by joining, splining, and gluing to complying with requirements for specified grade. J. Band exposed plywood and particleboard edges with hardwood trim, 3/8" x width of sheet unless otherwise noted or shown to be trimmed with plastic or aluminum. K. On high pressure laminate work: 1. Apply laminate finish in full, uninterrupted sheets of maximum practical lengths. Apply backing sheets to reverse side of items receiving laminate surfacing. Use decorative vertical grade laminate for cabinet interiors. 2. Form corners and butt joints with hairline joints. 3. Do not locate joints within 2' of sink cut-out. 4. Cap all exposed edges with laminate. Construction 1. General a. Unless otherwise indicated, construct millwork bodies, bottoms, dividers, sides, tops, shelves, doors, drawer fronts and countertops of W sheet material. b. Use'/z" thick solid lumber material for drawer sides, back and sub -front. c. Use Y:' veneer core panel product for drawer bottoms and cabinet backs, unless noted otherwise. 2. Overlay reveals a. Unless shown or noted otherwise, allow '/." between adjacent drawers and doors and at vertical edges. b. Allow reveal at top and bottom of wall cabinets and at bottom of base cabinets. 3. Methods of Joinery a. Provide face plates, paneled ends, and construction, glued under pressure. b. Provide body web frames of stile plowed and stub tenoned construction. c. Join case body members by dado or concealed dowel joints. d. Do not use mechanical fasteners or metal clips for attachment of body members to other body members or to web frames. 4. Base cabinets a. Use finished end panels unless condition will be fully concealed. b. Provide unfinished toe space, prepared to receive base by others. c. Construct drawers with Lock Shoulder rabbited (tongue -and -groove) construction. 6. Countertops a. Provide with 2" deep face edge, faced with high pressure laminate unless noted or shown otherwise. b. Provide loose 4" high pressure laminate covered splashes typically at countertops unless taller splashes shown or noted. c. Regardless of drawing indications, provide a'/2" thick wood strip on back side of splash to increase the splash top thickness for coping the splash to the wall. d. Countertops containing sinks shall be medium density overlay plywood. 2.10 FINISH A. Sand work smooth and set exposed nails. FINISH CARPENTRY VLK Architects, 2007 06 2000 - 5 2740.00 Creek View Elementary School College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas B. Apply wood filler in exposed nail indentations. C. On items to receive transparent finishes, use wood filler which matches surrounding surfaces and of types recommended for applied finishes. D. Refer to SECTION 09900 -PAINTING for field applied finish descriptions. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Verify location of wood blocking prior to installation of finish carpentry. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. General: Installation of standing and running trim and millwork shall comply with the applicable requirements of Section 1700 Installation of Architectural Woodwork (Interior) of the AWI Quality Standards. B. Workmanship: Exposed woodwork shall have a smooth finish, free from machine and tool marks, abrasions, and raised grain on exposed surfaces. Joints shall be tight and formed so as to conceal shrinkage. C. Interior Woodwork Installation: 1. Accurately scribe and closely fit face plates, filler strips and trim strips to abutting walls and to irregularities of adjacent surfaces. 2. Set wood finish straight, plumb, and level, in true alignment, and rigidly fastened in place. Nailing and fastening shall be concealed where possible. Set exposed nail heads for puttying. 3. Anchor base and wall cabinets to walls with fully threaded oval head wood screws with finishing washers set at a minimum of 12" o.c. 3.03 CABINET HARDWARE SCHEDULE A. In addition to the items of hardware specifically noted and shown on the drawing details, furnish and install the following hardware for cabinets. This schedule is intended to include all hardware needed to completely equip all cabinets specified in this Section. Verify cabinets shown and detailed on the drawings with cabinets listed in this schedule. In the event of omissions in the schedule, furnish hardware of the kind and quality scheduled for similar cabinets. 1. Each cabinet drawer: KV #1300 Extension Drawer Slides. KV #8400 Extension Drawer Slides at File Drawers. 1 recessed pull Cat No. 158.88.0 (Hewi Hafele) (Color as selected by Architect.) 2. Cabinets indicated to be locked: a. Each drawer. C8055-14A x C2004 US26D (National) b. Cabinet locks in each room shall be keyed alike. 3. Grommets: Model No. LO-3 (Doug Mockett & Co., Inc.) END OF SECTION FINISH CARPENTRY VLK Architects, 2007 06 2000 - 6 2740.00 Creek View Elementary School College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas SECTION 07 1100 DAMPPROOFING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Concealed dampproofing and gaskets through and in masonry walls. Refer to schedule at end of section. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 04 2000 - Masonry Units. 2. Section 05 4000 - Cold -Formed Metal Framing. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit following items under provisions of SECTION 013323 - SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, AND SAMPLES. B. Product Data: Indicate properties of products, performance characteristics, proposed use, and certifications that product meets or exceeds standards. C. Manufacturer's Instructions: Including application instructions, precautions, material safety, and methods of attach menUembedment into substrate data sheets. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform Work in accordance with NRCA Waterproofing Manual, and manufacturer's instructions, whichever are more stringent. B. For interior and concealed in all applications, provide product certified by manufacturer to be substantially odor - free within 24 hours of application. 1.04 QUALIFICATIONS A. Applicator Qualifications: Company experienced in application of dampproofing with 3-years experience on similar sized projects. 1.05 FIELD SAMPLES A. Provide 4 x 6 foot field sample of mastic dampproofing under provisions of SECTION 01 4500 - QUALITY CONTROL illustrating application techniques and material thickness. B. Sample may be incorporated as part of work if approved in writing by Architect. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver, store, handle and protect under provisions of SECTION 01 6500 - PRODUCT DELIVERY REQUIREMENTS and SECTION 01 6600 - PRODUCT STORAGE AND HANDLING PROTECTION. B. Do not allow products to become frozen. 1.07 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Maintain ambient and surface temperature above 40°F for 24 hours before application and continuously until mastic dampproofing has cured. B. Do not allow dampproofed surfaces to be exposed to prolonged sunlight. C. Do not allow membrane dampproofing to remain exposed to the elements for longer than 30 days. 1.08 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING A. Coordinate installation in accordance with SECTION 01 3100 - PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION. Do not begin work until substrate preparation is complete. DAMPPROOFING VLK Architects, 2007 07 1100 - 1 2740.00 Creek View Elementary School College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Asphalt -coated Copper Flashing (Gasket): 7-oz./sq. ft. copper sheet coated with flexible asphalt. Product/Manufacturer, one of the following: Cop-R-Cote; Advanced Building Products, Inc. Cop -A -Cote; AFCO Products, Inc. Coated Copper Flashing; Polytite Manufacturing Corp. Coated Copper Flashing; Sandell Manufacturing Corp. Copperseal; York Manufacturing, Inc. B. Mastic: ASTM D 1227, Type II, Class 1, semi -mastic asphaltic emulsion reinforced with non -asbestos fibers. Prod uct/manufacturer; one of the following: 920AF Fibered Emulsion Mastic; Karnak Sealmastic; W.R. Meadows, Inc. Hydrocide 70013; Sonneborn 2.02 ACCESSORIES A. Membrane Dampproofing: Joint Cement and Adhesive: Asphaltic based mastic, of type and composition recommended by membrane manufacturer. B. Fasteners: Same metal as flashing material, or other non -corrosive metal as recommended by sheet manufacturer. C. Mastic Dampproofing: 1. Emulsion Based Dampproofing: Non -asbestos fiber reinforced emulsion asphaltic compound, brush or spray consistency, meeting requirements of ASTM D 1227 or FS-4-1781. 2. Reinforcing Mesh; Treated glass fabric, woven design, 20 x 10 mesh. 3. Plastic Cement: Type recommended by manufacturer and compatible with dampproofing product, for trowel consistency. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verification of Conditions: Verify that surfaces and conditions are ready to receive work of this section. Notify Architect of any existing conditions which will adversely affect execution. Beginning of execution will constitute acceptance of existing conditions. B. Do not apply when surface of ambient temperature is below 40°F., during inclement weather, or if surface is damp, dirty, or dusty. C. Verify surfaces are solid and free of cracks, pits, rough or sharp projections. D. Verify items which penetrate surface to receive dampproofing are securely anchored. E. Verify that reglets have been set and are ready to receive the work of this section. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Remove rough or sharp projections, loose particles, and foreign matter detrimental to adhesion and application of dampproofing. B. Clean and prepare surfaces to receive dampproofing in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. C. Apply two coats of plastic cement and one layer of reinforcing mesh (between plastic cement coats) to seal penetrations, small cracks, and at other areas as recommended by manufacturer. D. Fill voids, seal joints, and apply bond breakers, if any, as recommended by prime materials manufacturer, with particular attention at control joints. DAMPPROOFING VLK Architects, 2007 07 1100 - 2 2740.00 Creek View Elementary School College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Membrane Dampproofing (gasket): 1. Lay dampproofing for horizontal masonry surfaces in a slurry of fresh mortar and on top with a full bed of mortar. Start membrane '/2" from the outside face of the wall and carry through the wall with steps as detailed to within %" of the inside face of the wall. 2. Attach or adhere (at manufacturer's recommendation) flashing to sheathing backup on stud wall systems as work progresses. Allow flashing to drop a minimum of 8" before bedding into mortar joint of exterior veneer. Stop flashing '/." beyond outside face of wall. Seal flashing tightly to vapor barrier. 3. Vertical masonry and concrete surfaces to be dampproofed shall be dry, clean, and reasonably smooth. Spot surfaces with cement to hold the membrane in place until the masonry is set. 4. Over steel lintels and shelf angles, start membrane at the inside toe of the lintel or angle and install over the steel member with cement. 5. On masonry, turn the upper edge of the membrane back through the wall in a bed joint to within 1" of the inside surface. 6. On concrete, extend the membrane above the angle and seal the upper edge continuously to the concrete with cement. 7. Membrane dampproofing shall be continuous where possible. Where joints are necessary, lap the membrane 4" and seal with cement. 8. Create end dams to channel water back to nearest weep hole. B. Mastic Dampproofing: For application over concealed masonry, concrete surfaces, and glass -mat gypsum sheathing within walls. 1. Clean surfaces of excess mortar and loose dirt and apply the mastic in two coats by brush or spray. Allow the first coat to dry tacky before applying the second coat. 2. Coverage shall be approximately 35 sq.ft. per gallon per coat. Fill in crevices and grooves and around projecting anchors and joint reinforcement. Make sure that coating is continuous and free from breaks and pinholes. 3. At glass -mat gypsum sheathing, apply dammproofing prior to installation of masonry anchors. 3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Tests: Periodically (not less than once per 100 sq.ft. of surface area) check application thickness to verify compliance with specified thickness. Immediately re -apply if found to be deficient. 3.05 PROTECTION A. Protect finished installation under provisions of SECTION 01 5000 - TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS. B. Protect adjacent surfaces not to receive dampproofing against "overspray" or "over brush". C. Protect dampproofing against damage during backfilling with adhered protection course, neatly fitted around projections and penetrations. Do not apply until dampproofing has thoroughly cured. D. Protect flashing until placement within wall is complete. Do not allow wind to displace or damage flashing. 3.06 CLEANING A. Perform final cleaning under provisions of SECTION 01 7413 - PROGRESS CLEANING. 3.07 DAMPPROOFING SCHEDULE A. Dampproof as follows with membrane (gasket): 1. Over steel lintels, plates and angles in exterior masonry walls. 2. Within masonry parapets and walls as through flashing to detail. 3. At the bottom of cavity walls with weep holes. 4. Under window sills to detail. 5. Elsewhere in walls where "gasket" is indicated. B. Dampproof as follows with mastic: 1. Over the entire exterior surface of the exterior glass -mat gypsum sheathing in cavity walls to provide an unbroken dampproofing barrier 2. Over the exterior surfaces of the inside wythe of masonry and concrete backup in exterior cavity walls to provide an unbroken dampproofing barrier. 3. Over surfaces of masonry backup behind exterior metal panels. 4. Elsewhere where indicated. END OF SECTION DAMPPROOFING VLK Architects, 2007 07 1100 - 3 2740.00 Creek View Elementary School College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas SECTION 07 1900 WATER REPELLENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Clear water repellent coating applied to exterior vertical and sloping masonry surfaces. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 03 3000 - Cast -in -place Concrete: cleaning of concrete surfaces. 2. Section 04 2000 - Masonry Units: cleaning of masonry surfaces. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit in accordance with SECTION 01 3323 - SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA AND SAMPLES. Include manufacturer's installation instructions. B. Samples: 12" x 24" sample of substrate with half of sample having been treated with coating and the other half bare. C. Manufacturer's Instructions: Installation instructions, including application rates, methods and techniques. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Applicator Qualifications: Work shall be performed by an experienced applicator who has not less than five years experience and has successfully applied this material under similar conditions. 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver material in the original, sealed containers clearly labeled with the manufacturers name and the contents. Store material in a well -ventilated area. 1.05 FIELD SAMPLE A. Apply coating to approximately a 100 sq. ft. area of substrate material for Architect's approval. B. Verify that substrate has received a sufficient amount of coating to perform as intended and that product is not staining or discoloring surface. C. When approved, field sample may remain as part of the work. 1.06 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Do not apply coating when ambient or substrate temperatures are lower than 40° F or higher than 100' F. B. Do not apply during inclement weather or when forecasted conditions will not permit work in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions. C. Do not apply during windy conditions that may cause water repellent to be blown onto vegetation or surfaces not intended to be coated. D. Provide mechanical ventilation during and after application to dissipate fumes if natural ventilation is insufficient. 1.07 WARRANTY A. Warranty: Submit a written warranty, executed by the applicator and water repellent manufacturer, covering materials and labor, agreeing to repair or replace materials that fail to provide water repellency within 5 years from date of substantial completion. 1.08 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Furnish under provisions of SECTION 01 7840 - SPARE PARTS, OVERAGES, AND MAINTENANCE MATERIALS. B. Provide two gallons of coating. WATER REPELLENTS VLK Architects, 2007 07 1900 - 1 2740.00 Creek View Elementary School College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIAL A. Provide a colorless water and stain repellent coating for masonry. Coating shall be clear, liquid, penetrating, solvent based, non -yellowing, non -staining, breathable acrylic solution, have a minimum solids of 5% as determined by ASTM D2369 testing, and meeting requirement of FF-SS-110C. Product/manufacturer; one of the following: Prime -A -Pell 200; Chemprobe Technologies, Inc. Weather Seal Siloxane; ProSoCo, Inc. Euco-Guard 200; Euclid ChemicalCo. Water -Guard; Nox-Crete Chemicals, Inc. Klere-Seal 908SX; Pecora Corp. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that surfaces and conditions are ready to receive work of this section. Notify Architect of any existing conditions which will adversely affect execution. Beginning of execution will constitute acceptance of existing conditions. B. Verify that surfaces are clean, dry, sound, properly covered, dust free, free of efflorescence, oil or other matter detrimental to coating application. C. Verify that joint sealant work is complete and sealant has properly cured. D. Verify that cracks in concrete larger than 1/64" in width have been filled with patching compound acceptable to coating manufacturer. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Examine surfaces to be treated for loose dirt and debris, stains, chemical films, oil, grease, paint and other foreign contaminants. Surfaces shall be clean and dry prior to application. Immediately prior to and during application, remove any dust and dirt from surfaces. B. Allow surfaces to dry sufficiently after washing in accordance with manufacturer's directions. C. Protect adjacent surfaces from overspray or drift. D. Protect landscaping, adjacent property, and vehicles. E. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Apply using skilled workmen in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions and recommendations. B. Apply the coating to dry surfaces using a standard metal tank sprayer or painting apparatus such that the treatment totally wets the surface. Apply evenly, being careful to avoid excessive run down. Avoid misting of the spray as the treatment is applied. Protect shrubs and painted surfaces during application. Allow coating to cure. C. Do not dilute or alter material as packaged. 3.04 CLEANING A. Take care to avoid spraying coating on adjacent materials. Any such soiling shall be carefully and completely cleaned using a suitable solvent. B. After application on glazed brick and mortar, wipe down brick only to remove any extra coating residue retained on the brick. END OF SECTION WATER REPELLENTS VLK Architects, 2007 07 1900 - 2 2740.00 Creekview Elementary School College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas SECTION 07 2100 BUILDING INSULATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Thermal, acoustical, and fire safing building insulations. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 07 2119 - Foamed -in -place Insulation. 2. Section 07 5552 - Modified Bituminous Membrane Roofing; roof insulation 3. Section 07 8400 - Firestopping. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit following items under provisions of SECTION 01 3323-SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, AND SAMPLES. B. Product Data: Including performance specifications, composition and applicable standards. C. Samples: Submit 12" x 12" size samples of each type insulation proposed for use. D. Manufacturer's Instructions: Written installation instructions, including attachment recommendations. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Acceptable Manufacturers: (See Articles below for specific products) Fibrex Co. Manville Building Materials Marketing Division, Manville Corp., Denver, CO Owens Coming Fiberglas Corp., Toledo, OH Certainteed Corp., Valley Forge, PA U.S. Gypsum Co. 2.02 BATT THERMAL INSULATION A. Glass fiber composition, unfaced typically, minimum one lb./c.f. density, meeting following standards: 1. ASTM E 84: FHC 25/50 maximum. 2. ASTM C 518: R value of 3.2 per inch of thickness. 3. ASTM C 665: Type I and Type III, Class A. B. Following products are acceptable: 1. Unfaced Thermal Batts by Owens Corning Fiberglas Corp. 2. Unfaced Building Insulation by Certainteed Corp. 3. Unfaced Building Insulation by Manville Corp. 2.03 BATT ACOUSTICAL INSULATION A. Unfaced glass fiber composition, 3'/2" thick, minimum one lb./c.f. density, meeting following standards: 1. ASTM E 84: FHC 25/50 maximum. 2. ASTM C 518: R value of 3.2 per inch of thickness. 3. ASTM C 665: Type I, Class A. B. Following products are acceptable 1. Sonobatts by Owens Corning Fiberglas Corp. 2. Sound Control Batts by Certainteed Corp. 2.04 RIGID INSULATION A. Platform Floor: Extruded polystyrene board insulation composed of rigid, cellular thermal insulation with closed cells and integral high density skin, formed by the expansion of polystyrene base resin in an extrusion process to comply with ASTM C 578, Type IV. BUILDING INSULATION VLK Architects, 2007 07 2100 - 1 2740.00 Creekview Elementary School College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas 2.05 FIRE SAFING INSULATION A. Mineral fiber composition, 4" thick, 4.0 pcf density, meeting following standards 1. ASTM E 84: FHC 15/10 maximum. 2. ASTM C 665: Type I, Class A 3. ASTM E 119: Testing Procedures. 4. FS HH-1-55813: Class 1 and 2. B. Following products are acceptable 1. Thermafiber Safing Insulation by U.S. Gypsum Co. 2. FBX Safing Insulation by Fibrex Co. 2.06 ACCESSORIES A. Joint Tape: Pressure sensitive type, recommended by insulation manufacturer. B. Insulation Adhesive: Type recommended by insulation manufacturer. C. Stick Clips 1. Galvanized sheet metal with impaling pins and retainer washers. 2. Size and type to suit application and insulation thickness. 3. Approved by manufacturer of insulation for intended use. D. Stick Clip Adhesive 1. High strength, resilient adhesive, having drying time of 0 to 30 minutes (rapid initial set), and 24 hours final set. 2. Compatible with insulation adhesive, insulation and substrate. 3. Non -corrosive to galvanized steel. E. Supportive Wire Mesh: Hexagonal design, woven mesh "chicken wire" style. F. Tie wire: Minimum 18 ga. annealed wire. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION A. Examine areas to receive insulation for conditions that will adversely affect the execution and quality ofthe work. Do not start this work until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Fit insulation tight within stud spaces, above soffits, behind fascias, and tight to and behind mechanical and electric services within plane of insulation, leaving no gaps or voids. Butt insulation tightly. Cut and fit tightly around items penetrating insulation. Stagger and butt joints, or cavity of a cavity wall system. B. Install in conformance with the manufacturer's recommendations. Cut material to fit closely around obstructions and projections. 1. Walls: Secure insulation by mechanical means to hold it in place without sagging or slumping. Install insulation with edges and joints butted tight to leave no gaps. 2. Soffits: a. Insulation shall be laid between wire hangers on back of cement plaster and over cross runners. Sides and ends of adjacent batts shall be tightly butted together. b. Install insulation with vapor barrier on the warm side (inside). 3. Acoustical Insulation: a. Install acoustical insulation between the studs in those gypsum drywall partitions so detailed and noted on the drawings. Staple blankets to the gypsum board or otherwise fasten in place as recommended by the manufacturer of the blankets. Fill all voids. b. Where indicated at suspended gypsum board ceilings, lay sound attenuation blankets between wire hangers on back of gypsum board and over cross runners. Do not install on top of or within 3" of light fixtures. C. Applying Rigid Insulation: Cut the material to fit snugly around obstructions and projections. Joints shall be tight. Securely fasten the board to the backup with mastic and suitable mechanical anchors where required to hold it firmly in place. BUILDING INSULATION VLK Architects, 2007 07 2100 - 2 2740.00 Creekview Elementary School College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas D. Safing Insulation: Compress and install insulation on wire hangers or clips in spaces between floor slabs and curtain walls. Also, in openings in floor slabs to seal around telephone cables, piping, ducts and other utilities per SECTION 07 8400 - FIRESTOPPING. 3.03 SCHEDULES A. Provide R values for thermal insulation in locations as follows: 1. Exterior walls: R = 19 2. Soffits and fascias: R = 19 B. Provide acoustical insulation in thickness and locations as follows: 1. Walls: 3'/z" (In areas where shown on drawings) 2. Above Ceilings: 3'/2" (In areas where shown on drawings) END OF SECTION BUILDING INSULATION VLK Architects, 2007 07 2100 - 3 2740.00 Creek View Elementary School College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas SECTION 07 2119 FOAMED -IN -PLACE INSULATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Foamed -in -place masonry insulation for thermal values. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 04 2000 - Masonry Units 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit in accordance with Section 01 3323 - Shop Drawings, Product Data, and Samples. B. Product Data: Submit copies of performance specifications, composition, and applicable standards. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced applicator who has been trained and licensed by the product manufacturer and which has not less than three years direct experience in the installation of the product used. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 INSULATING MATERIALS A. General: Provide Core -Fill 500TM' foamed -in -place insulation as manufactured by Tailored Chemical Products (phone 800.627.1687). B. Foamed -In -Place Masonry Insulation: Two component thermal insulation produced by combining a plastic resin and catalyst foaming agent surfactant which, when properly ratioed and mixed, together with compressed air produce a cold -setting foam insulation in the hollow cores of hollow unit masonry walls. 1. Surface Burning Characteristics: Maximum flame spread, smoke developed and fuel contributed of 0, 5 and 0 respectively. 2. Density: Dry; 0.8 Ib/ft', Wet; 2.7 to 3.3 Ib/ft3 3. Combustion Characteristics: Must be noncombustible, Class A building material. 4. Thermal Values: "R" Value of 4.91/inch @ 32° F. mean; ASTM C 177. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. General: Install foamed -in -place insulation from interior prior to installation of interior finish work and after all masonry and structural concrete work is in place; comply with manufacturer's written instructions. B. Installation: Fill all open cells and voids in hollow concrete masonry units in exterior walls. The foam insulation shall be pressure injected through a series of 5/8" to 7/8" holes drilled into every vertical column of block cells (every 8" on center) beginning at an approximate height of 4 feet from finished floor level. Repeat this procedure at an approximate height of 10 feet above the first horizontal row of holes (or as needed) until the void is completely filled. Patch holes with mortar and score to resemble existing surface. END OF SECTION FOAMED -IN -PLACE INSULATION VLK Architects, 2007 07 2119 - 1 2740.00 Creek View Elementary School College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas SECTION 07 2600 VAPOR RETARDERS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Vapor barrier placed on masonite topping sheet. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 03 1100 -Concrete Forming and Accessories: Masonite topping sheet. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit in accordance with SECTION 01 3323 - SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, AND SAMPLES. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Vapor Retarder membrane shall have the following qualities: 1. Minimum Permeance: 0.03 Perms, ASTM E 96. 2. Water Vapor Retarder: Meets or exceeds Class C, ASTM E 1745. 3. Thickness of Retarder (plastic): Not less than 10 mils, ACI 302.1 R. B. Vapor Retarder: Product/manufacturer; one of the following: Griffolyn T 85; Reef Industries Moistop Ultra; Fortifiber Industries Perminator 10-mil Vapor Mat; W.R. Meadows Stego Wrap (10 mil) Vapor Barrier; Stego Industries, LLC Vapor Block 10; Raven Industries C. Accessories: 1. Seam Tape: High -density polyethylene tape with pressure sensitive adhesive. Minimum width 4 inches. 2. Pipe Boots: Construct pipe boots from vapor barrier material and pressure sensitive tape per manufacturer's instructions. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Remove soil treatment protective vapor barrier before placement of permanent vapor barrier. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Unroll vapor retarder with the longest dimension parallel with the direction of the pour. B. Overlap joints a minimum of 6" and seal with manufacturer's tape. C. Seal all penetrations (including pipes) with manufacturer's pipe boot D. Turn edge of sheeting down face of perimeter grade beam a minimum of 6". E. Repair damaged areas by cutting patches of vapor retarder, overlapping damaged area 6" and taping all four sides with tape. END OF SECTION VAPOR RETARDERS VLK Architects, 2007 07 2600 - 1 2740.00 Creek View Elementary School College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas SECTION 07 5552 MODIFIED BITUMINOUS MEMBRANE ROOFING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Mechanically fastened, UL Class A, white granule surface, modified bitumen sheet roofing system installed over isocyanurate and perlite insulation and metal deck, meeting FM 190 up -lift rating. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 06100 - Rough Carpentry: Treated wood nailers, blocking and curbs. 2. Section 07620 - Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim. 3. Section 07721 - Pre -Fabricated Roof Curbs and Portals. 4. Division 15 - Roof Drains. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit in accordance with SECTION 01340 - SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, AND SAMPLES. 1. Furnish manufacturer's printed specifications and instructions for installation of system, include applicable temperature range. 2. Include procedures and materials for terminations, flashing, and expansion joints. B. Shop Drawings: Submit in accordance with SECTION 01340 - SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, AND SAMPLES. Indicate roof configuration, sheet layout, mechanical equipment flashing, expansion joints, termination details, penetration details, parapet wall details, design of tapered insulation system showing layout, slope and thickness of entire system. C. Sample: Submit in accordance with SECTION 01340 - SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, AND SAMPLES. Submit a 12" x 12" sample of membrane material and each type of fastener with documentation of FM listing. D. Certificates: 1. Submit manufacturer's certification stating materials ordered and supplied are compatible with each other, suited for locale and purpose intended, and shipped in sufficient quantity to ensure proper, timely installation. 2. Submit manufacturer's approval of proposed fasteners. 3. Submit manufacturer's approval of installer. 4. Submit installer's experience record. 5. Certify materials shipped to site meet membrane manufacturer's published performance requirements. 6. Stating that membrane manufacturer approves of insulation type and method of installation. 7. Indicating that materials specified and details shown conform with manufacturer's requirements for specified warranty. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer: 1. Obtain primary sheet roofing materials from a single manufacturer. 2. Provide secondary materials as recommended by manufacturer of primary materials. 3. Manufacturer's qualified technical representative will be required to visit project site to advise Installer of procedures and precautions for installation of roofing materials and to verify warranty inspection requirements. 4. Provide primary products, including each type of flexible sheet roofing and sheet flashing produced by a single manufacturer, which has produced SBS modified bitumen product successfully for not less than 5 years. Provide accessory products which are acceptable to manufacturers of primary products. B. Applicator Qualifications: Five years successful experience in installation of roofing systems similar to system for this project and approved by membrane manufacturer. C. Compatibility or Roofing System: Roof insulation, roof crickets and tapered roof insulation system shall be compatible with the roofing materials to be used and shall be approved by the manufacturer of the membrane roofing materials. D. Pre -roofing Conference: 1. At least one week prior to start of roofing installation, convene pre -roofing conference at project site. MODIFIED BITUMINOUS MEMBRANE ROOFING VLK Architects, 2007 07 5552 - 1 2740.00 Creek View Elementary School College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas 2. Attendance is required by Contractor, Installer, Manufacturer's Technical Representative, Architect, and Program Manager. 3. Review requirements for work and conditions which could possibly interfere with successful performance of work. 4. Minimum agenda: a. Review project specifications and drawings. b. Review weather and working conditions. 1) Substrate requirements. 2) Membrane installation. 3) Roof terminations, flashings, and roof drain requirements. 4) Mechanical equipment placement, supports, and height requirements. 5) Inspection, testing, and quality control procedures. 6) Protection requirements for construction period beyond roofing installation. 7) Procedures for making roof penetrations after membrane installation. 5. Conduct tour of roof deck; report discrepancies and problem areas to Architect. 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials in manufacturer's original unopened packaging with legible labels intact. B. Store materials on site in enclosures or under protective coverings off ground. C. Do not store material in or on building in such concentrations as to impose excessive strain on deck or structural members. 1.05 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Weather: 1. Proceed with roofing work when existing and forecasted weather conditions permit performance in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and warranty requirements. 2. Take special precautions as recommended by manufacturer when applying roofing below 40°F. Ensure cements, adhesives, mastics, and coatings are not affected by freezing weather. 1.06 WARRANTY A. Furnish written 10-year no dollar limit warranty of materials and workmanship for watertightness extended to include but not be limited to flashings, seams, membrane and penetrations. B. Warranty shall be signed by membrane manufacturer, agreeing to repair or replace defects in material or workmanship and failure of roof to resistwater penetration for a period of ten years from Substantial Completion of project with no dollar limit C. Special Project Warranty: Submit 2 executed copies of standard 2-year "Applicator's Roofing Guarantee" on form included at end of this section, covering work of this section including roofing membrane, composition flashing, roof insulation and roofing accessories, signed and countersigned by installer (roofer) and Contractor. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 INSULATION MATERIALS A. Isocyanurate Insulation: FS HH-1-1972/GEN polyisocyanurate rigid board, both faces finished with Asphalt/Glass Fiber Felt Facer chemically bonded in the manufacturing process; 3" thick; board density of 1.8 Ib/cu.ft.; square edges; 'K' factor of .18"; manufacturer approved by roof membrane manufacturer; meeting requirements of Factory Mutual Class 1 Insulated Steel Deck Roofs. B. Perlite Insulation: ASTM C 728; expanded perlite mineral aggregate board; 10 Ib/cu.ft. density; %" minimum thickness; 'K' factor of 0.36; square edges; manufacturer approved by roof membrane manufacturer. C. Crickets and Cants: Provide crickets and cants at locations as shown. Cricket and cant must be compatible with built-up roofing material. D. Tapered Roof Insulation: Provide tapered roof insulation as required to fulfill slope requirements. Tapered roof insulation must be compatible with built-up roofing material. Provide of same material as top layer of insulation. E. Steep Asphalt: ASTM D 312, Type III. MODIFIED BITUMINOUS MEMBRANE ROOFING VLK Architects, 2007 07 5552 - 2 2740.00 Creek View Elementary School College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas F. Mechanical Fasteners for Insulation: Screw type on metal deck, Tube -Nail type on lightweight insulating decks, length required for thickness of material, with plastic washers and fluoropolymer finish, approved and listed by Factory Mutual, and approved by membrane manufacturer. 2.02 MODIFIED BITUMEN SHEET ROOFING MATERIALS A. Product/Manufacturer: Provide 2FID system using one -ply each of DynaBase and DynaGlas FR as manufactured by Johns Manville or approved equivalent. B. Sheet Size: Maximum width and length of sheet possible as determined by project conditions and manufacturer's recommendations. C. Base Sheet: As required by membrane manufacturer. D. Vented Base: ASTM D4897, Type II, Ventsulation Felt as manufactured by Johns Manville or approved equivalent. E. Flashing: Manufacturer's approved bonding adhesive for conditions encountered. F. Base Flashing: DynaFlex as manufactured by Johns Manville or approved equivalent. 2.03 RELATED MATERIALS A. Bituminous Materials: 1. As recommended by roofing sheet manufacturer for bonding to substrates and for waterproof sealing of seams. 2. Asphalt Bitumen: ASTM D312, Type III. 3. Asphalt Primer: ASTM D41. 4. Flashing Cement: ASTM D4586. B. Fasteners: Provide fasteners as manufactured by or approved by membrane manufacturer for conditions encountered. C. Accessories: Provide primers, adhesives, sealants, mastics, prefabricated pipe flashing, roof drain flashing, expansion joint flashing, and appropriate cleaning agents and solvents as recommended by membrane manufacturer for conditions encountered. D. Expansion Joints: Provide expansion joint approved by the manufacturer where required by membrane system and as detailed on the drawings. E. Walkway Protection: Provide walkway protection pads around all rooftop mechanical units and path leading to roof hatches and in accordance with manufacturer's standards. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION A. Examine deck surfaces to receive insulation for conditions that will adversely affect the execution and quality of work. Do not start this work until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. B. Verify that deck is supported and secured. C. Verify that deck is clean and smooth, free of depressions, waves, or projections, property sloped to drains. D. Verify that deck surfaces are dry and free of snow or ice. Verify flutes of metal deck are clean and dry. E. Verify that roof openings, curbs, pipes, sleeves, ducts, and vents through roof are solidly set, and wood cant strips and nailing strips are in place. F. Examine surfaces scheduled to receive roofing to assure that they are smooth, dry, and free from oils, grease, and conditions that will adversely affect execution, permanence, or quality of work. G. Beginning of installation means installer accepts existing substrate. MODIFIED BITUMINOUS MEMBRANE ROOFING VLK Architects, 2007 07 5552 - 3 2740.00 Creek View Elementary School College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas 3.02 PREPARATION OF SURFACES A. Comply with manufacturer's instructions for substrate preparation. B. Sweep surfaces upon which sheet is applied, removing loose and foreign materials. C. Coat metal surfaces with primer or adhesive as recommended by manufacturer. 3.03 VENTED BASE INSTALLATION A. Install vented base with the embossed waffle pattern placed facing down and in contact with the decking. 3.04 INSULATION INSTALLATION A. Apply first layer of insulation (Isocyanurate) with long joints continuous and short joints staggered. B. Apply second layer (perlite insulation) over first layer in broken joint pattern so that each layer breaks joints both ways with the preceding layer. C. In areas to receive tapered roof insulation or crickets, apply over isocyanurate insulation only. D. Bring insulation panels into moderate contact with each other and cope to fit neatly around projections. Joints parallel to ribs on steel deck installation shall be located over solid bearing. E. Over steel roof decks and concrete decks, mechanically fasten both layers of insulation tothe decks throughout. Spacing and number of fasteners shall meet Factory Mutual Windstorm Resistance Classification 1-90. F. Tapered roof insulation system and crickets shall be installed per manufacturer's instructions as required to meet Factory Mutual Windstorm Resistance Classification 1-90. G. Do not install more insulation at one time than the amount which can be covered with roofing the same day. H. At the end of each day's work and after any other work stoppage, apply temporary water cutoffs in accordance with membrane roofing manufacturers recommendations. 3.05 MEMBRANE INSTALLATION A. General: 1. Manufacturer's technical representative is required to be presentas necessary to ensure proper installation. Install materials in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions. 2. Protect other work from spillage of roofing materials, and prevent liquid materials from entering or clogging drains and conductors. Replace and restore other work damaged by installation of roofing system work. B. Cutoffs: 1. Coordinate installation of insulation, roofing sheets, flashings, stripping, coatings and surfacings, so that insulation and felts are not exposed to precipitation nor exposed overnight. 2. Provide cut-offs at end of each day's work, to cover exposed felts and insulation with course of coated felt with joints and edges sealed with roofing cement. 3. Remove cut-offs immediately before resuming work. 4. Glaze coat installed ply -sheet courses at end of each day's work where final surfacing has not been installed. C. Asphalt Bitumen Heating: 1. Heat and apply bitumen in accordance with equiviscous temperature method ("EVT Method") as recommended by National Roofing Contractors Association and manufacturer. 2. Do not raise temperature above minimum normal fluid -holding temperature necessary to attain EVT (t25°F. at point of application) more than one hour prior to time of application. 3. Discard bitumen which has been held at temperature exceeding finished blowing temperature (FBT) for period exceeding three hours. 4. Determine flash point, finished blowing temperature and EVT of bitumen, either byinformation from bitumen producer or by suitable tests, and determine maximum fire -safe handling temperature and do not exceed that temperature in heating bitumen. 5. Do not heat bitumen to temperature higher than 25°F. below flash point. 6. Keep kettle lid closed except when adding bitumen. MODIFIED BITUMINOUS MEMBRANE ROOFING VLK Architects, 2007 07 5552 - 4 2740.00 Creek View Elementary School College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas D. Substrate Joint Penetrations: Do not allow bitumen to penetrate substrate joints and enter building or damage insulation, or other construction. Tape insulation joints. E. Membrane Installation: 1. Cut sheets to maximum size possible in order to minimize seams. 2. Roll an 18" wide piece of the base felt into a full mopping of bitumen. The remaining felts are to be applied full width, in the same manner, with 3" side and 4" end laps over the preceding sheets. 3. Roll the sheet out onto the deck over the base sheet, inspecting the membrane for defects as it is being rolled out. Allow membrane to relax for'/z hour before fastening or splicing. The sheet should be aligned so that it overlaps the previous sheet by the required lap width and then should be rerolled. A mopping of hot asphalt is then to be applied immediately in front of the roll. Roll the membrane into the hot bitumen in a manner that minimizes voids and wrinkles, taking care to ensure proper lap alignment. Membrane laps are sealed together as the sheet is being adhered to the deck. Laps should be fabricated to shed water wherever possible. 4. Lap adjoining sheets: 4" min. side laps, 6" min. end laps. 5. Apply all felts so that they are firmly and uniformly set, without voids, into the hot bitumen. All felt edges shall be well sealed. The bitumen shall be applied just before the felt, at a nominal rate of 25 lbs. per square. When applying over insulations, more than 25 lbs. per square of bitumen may be needed due to the absorbency of the insulation. 6. Install mechanical fasteners where required atspacings recommended by manufacturer as required to meet FM-90 Uplift Rating. F. Equipment Curbs: 1. Adhere membrane over equipment supports prior to installation of mechanical equipment. 2. Provide sealant over exposed fasteners. G. Expansion Joints: Install expansion joints in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations H. Cant and Tapered Edge Strips: 1. Install performed 45° insulation cant strips at junctures of roofing membrane with vertical surface. 2. Install tapered edge strips at perimeter edges of roofs which do not terminate at vertical surfaces. 3. Set in plastic cement. I. Set -on Accessories: Where small roof accessories are set in roofing membrane, set metal flanges in bed of roofing cement, and seal penetration of membrane with bead of roofing cement to preventflow of bitumen from membrane. Flashing: 1. Install flashings as indicated and recommended by manufacturer. 2. Use longest pieces practicable. 3. Extend splice 3" beyond fasteners which attach membrane to batten strip. 4. Take measures to assure flashing is not ridging where there is change of direction. 5. Fasten top of flashing under metal counterflashing at manufacturer's recommended spacing. 6. Flash penetrations passing through membrane. 7. Use factory prefabricated conduit seals where indicated. 8. When prefabricated pipe seals cannot be used, field fabricate pipe seals. 9. Install fillers around penetrations and fill pocketwith non -shrink grout and manufacturer's approved sealer. K. Roof Drains and Overflow Drains: 1. Fill clamping ring base with heavy coating of roofing cement. 2. Set lead flashing sheet in bed of roofing cement on completed roofing ply sheet courses, with lead sheet clamped in roof drain ring and extended 12" onto roofing. 3. Cover lead sheet with plies extended 4" to 6" beyond edges of lead sheet. 3.06 TERMINATIONS A. Provide water cutoffs at end of each day's work. B. Pull membrane loose from water cutoff and remove contaminated material before resuming work. 3.07 WALKWAY PROTECTION A. Install walkway protection pads as recommended by manufacturer. END OF SECTION MODIFIED BITUMINOUS MEMBRANE ROOFING VLK Architects, 2007 07 5552 - 5 2740.00 Creek View Elementary School College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas ROOFING WARRANTY WHEREAS of (Address) herein called the "Roofing Contractor", has performed roofing and associated work ("work") on following project: Owner: Address: Name and Type of Building: Address: Area of Work: Date of Acceptance: Warranty Period: Date of Expiration: AND WHEREAS Roofing Contractor has contracted (either directly with Owner or indirectly as a subcontractor) to warrant said work against leaks and faulty or defective materials and workmanship for designated Warranty Period, NOW THEREFORE Roofing Contractor hereby warrants, subject to terms and conditions herein set forth, that during Warranty Period he will at his own cost and expense, make or cause to be made such repairs to or replacements of said work as are necessary to correct faulty and defective work and as are necessary to maintain said work in watertight condition. This Warranty is made subject to the following terms and conditions: 1. Specifically excluded from this Warranty are damages to work and other parts of the building, and to building contents, caused by: a) lightning, windstorm; b) fire; c) failure of roofing system substrate including cracking, settlement, excessive deflection, deterioration, and decomposition; d) faulty construction of parapet walls, copings, chimneys, skylights, vents, equipment supports, and other edge conditions and penetrations of the work; e) vapor condensation on bottom of roofing; and f) activity on roofing by others including construction contractors, maintenance personnel, other persons, and animals whether authorized or unauthorized by Owner. When work has been damaged by any of foregoing causes, Warranty shall be null and void until such damage has been repaired by Roofing Contractor, and until cost and expense thereof has been paid by Owner or by another responsible party so designated. 2. The Roofing Contractor is responsible for damage to work covered by this Warranty, but is not liable for consequential damages to building or building contents, resulting from leaks or faults or defects of work. 3. During Warranty Period, if Owner allows alteration of work by anyone otherthan Roofing Contractor, including cutting, patching, and maintenance in connection with penetrations, attachment of other work, and positioning of anything on roof, this Warranty shall become null and void upon date of said alterations, but only to extent said alterations affect work covered by this Warranty. If Owner engages Roofing Contractor to perform said alterations, Warranty shall not become null and void, unless Roofing Contractor, prior to proceeding with said work, shall have notified Owner in writing, showing reasonable cause for claim that said alterations would likely damage or deteriorate work, thereby reasonably justifying a limitation or termination of this warranty. 4. During Warranty Period, if original use of roof is changed and it becomes used for, but was not originally specified for, a promenade, work deck, spray -cooled surface, flooded basin, or other use or service more severe than originally specified, this Warranty shall become null and void upon date of said change, but only to extent said change affects work covered by this Warranty. 5. The Owner shall promptly notify Roofing Contractor of observed, known or suspected leaks, defect, or deterioration, and shall afford reasonable opportunity for Roofing Contractor to inspect work, and to examine evidence of such leaks, defects, or deterioration. MODIFIED BITUMINOUS MEMBRANE ROOFING VLK Architects, 2007 07 5552 - 6 2740.00 Creek View Elementary School College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas 6. This Warranty is recognized to be the only warranty of Roofing Contractor on said work and shall not operate to restrict or cut off Owner from other remedies and resources lawfully available to him in cases of roofing failure. Specifically, this Warranty shall not operate to relieve Roofing Contractorof responsibility for performance of original work in accordance with requirements of the Contract Documents, regardless of whether Contract was a contract directly with Owner or a subcontract with Owner's General Contractor. ATTEST: Secretary Installation Company By Title Business Address Telephone Number FAX Number IN WITNESS THEREOF, this instrument has been duly executed this day of 20 (INSERT APPROPRIATE EXECUTION FORM) MODIFIED BITUMINOUS MEMBRANE ROOFING VLK Architects, 2007 07 5552 - 7 2740.00 Creekview Elementary School College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas SECTION 07 6200 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Sheet metal flashing and trim. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 07 5552 - Modified Bituminous Membrane Roofing 2. Section 07 9200 - Joint Sealants. 3. Section 09 9100 -Painting. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Samples: Submit in accordance with SECTION 01 3323 - SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, AND SAMPLES. Submit for approval samples of parapet coping cover expansion joint and soldered joint. 1.03 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver, store, handle and protect products under provisions of SECTION 01 6500 - PRODUCT DELIVERY REQUIREMENTS and SECTION 01 6600 - PRODUCT STORAGE AND HANDLING REQUIREMENTS. B. Stack pre -formed material to prevent twisting, bending, and abrasions, and to provide ventilation. C. Prevent contact with materials which may cause discoloration or staining. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Standard: Comply with the requirements of the Architectural Sheet Metal Manual published by SMACNA. B. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in sheet metal flashing work with three years minimum experience in similar sized installations. 1.05 WARRANTY A. Furnish to the Owner a written warranty providing the following without cost to the Owner. 1. Sheet metal roof flashings shall be maintained in normal repair and free of leaks for a period of 2 years from the date of acceptance of the roof. 2. At end of 2-year period, Owner and Contractor shall make final inspection of flashing work. Holes, breaks and other defects shall be promptly repaired at the Contractor's expense. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Sheet Metal: ASTM A 653, Coating Designation G90 Paint Grip, zinc coated (galvanized) copper -bearing steel sheet, mill-phosphatized ready to receive field finishing in accordance with SECTION 09 9100 - PAINTING. [Fluorocarbon coating containing 70% Kynar 500. Color shall be selected from Fluropon Standard colors as manufactured by Desoto, Inc.] [ B. Reglet: Surface mounted Fry Type SM reglet of 24 gauge galvanized steel with slots punched 12" o.c. and furnished with drive pins of stainless steel with neoprene facing. ] [ C. Reglet: Two piece snaplock receiver, Per Figure 4-3C, SMACNA Manual, 5th Edition, of 24 gauge galvanized steel.] D. Underlayment: ASTM D962, 30 Ib/100 s.f. weight felt containing no additives corrosive to sheet metals. E. Solder: ASTM B 32, made from block tin and pig lead (50/50) with no antimony. F. Sealant: Two component polyurethane, non -sagging, sealant as specified in SECTION 07 9200 - JOINT SEALANTS. G. Asphalt Roofing Cement: ASTM D 4586, asbestos free, of consistency required for application. SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM VLK Architects, 2007 07 6200 - 1 2740.00 Creekview Elementary School College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas H. Miscellaneous items such as nails and mastic shall be furnished as required by the conditions of use and must be of the best grade available. 2.02 FABRICATION A. Form sections true to shape, accurate in size, square, free from distortion and defects, to profiles indicated in accordance with SMACNA Architectural Sheet Metal Manual. B. Fabricate cleats and starter strips of same material as sheet, interlockable with sheet C. Form pieces in longest practical lengths. D. Hem exposed flashings on underside V; miter and seam corners. E. Solder and seal metal joints except those indicated or required to be expansive type joints. After soldering, remove flux. Wipe and wash solder joints clean. F. Fabricate corners from one place with minimum 18" long legs; solder for rigidity; seal with sealant. G. Fabricate vertical faces with bottom edge formed outward Y." and hemmed to form drip. H. Fabricate flashings to allow toe to extend minimum 2" over wall surfaces. 1. Fabricate as much as possible in shop with machinery to eliminate as much hand tooling on the job as possible. Shop fabricate to allow for adjustments in the field for proper anchoring and joining. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that surfaces and conditions are ready to receive work of this section. Notify Architect of any existing conditions which will adversely affect execution. Beginning of execution will constitute acceptance of existing conditions. B. Verify roof openings, curbs, pipes, sleeves, ducts, and vents through roof are solidly set, cant strips and reglets in place, and nailing strips located. C. Verify membrane termination and base flashings are in place, sealed, and secure. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Field measure site conditions prior to fabricating work. B. Install starter and edge strips, and cleats before starting installation. C. Install surface mounted reglets true to lines and levels. Seal top of reglets with sealant D. Install one layer of underlayment prior to installing copings. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. General: Fabricate, assemble, and install sheet metal work in conformance with referenced standard. 1. Make adequate provision for metal expansion and contraction without buckling or splitting. Use cleats and watertight slip and expansion joints. 2. Nails and screws shall be of the same metal as the member on which used. Nails through exposed wash surfaces will not be permitted. 3. When soldering, use flux and wash off surplus flux after soldering has been completed. 4. Set sheet metal with horizontal lines straight and level. Surfaces shall be flat without wrinkles and waves. Profiles shall align at joints with no offsets. 5. Conform to drawing details included in manuals published by SMACNA and NRCA. 6. Fit flashings tight in place. Make corners square, surfaces true and straight in planes, and lines accurate to profiles. 7. Seal metal joints watertight 8. Provide electrolytic separation between dissimilar metals with protective back paint. SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM VLK Architects, 2007 07 6200 - 2 2740.00 Creekview Elementary School College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas B. Reglet: Install surface mounted reglets on walls. 1. Clean surface of oil, grease and loose particles. 2. Place sealant bead on back in groove and on lap. 3. Secure reglet in precise alignment to wall with power driven pins spaced 12" o.c. 4. Lap joints 3" and bed in sealant. Miter and seal corners. C. Reglet Counterflashing: Counterflashing for reglet shall be formed of 24 gage metal to fit the reglet in conformance with the manufacturer's instructions. 1. Lap counterflashing down over flashing strip approximately 4" and form lower edge with a spring bend against the base flashing. 2. After roofing and flashing strip have been installed, snap counter -flashing up into reglet so that it is held securely in place without screws or clips. 3. Lap end joints 3" and bed in sealant. Miter and seal corners. D. Parapet Coping Cover: Form and install coping covers and fascia covers of 24 gage metal. Finish coping covers with a fluorocarbon coating containing 70% Kynar 500. Color shall be as selected by Architect. 1. Make up the coping in 10 ft. lengths. 2. Bend outside bottom edge to form drip and lock to continuous heavy gage cleat secured to wood blocking with nails and to masonry with screws into expansion shields. 3. On roof side copings shall be fastened through slotted holes located 2' o.c. with screws and watertight washers. 4. Provide loose -locked expansion joints filled with sealant where each 10' section meets. Provide an expansion joint within 10 ft. of each corner. 5. Comers shall be mitered, locked and soldered seams. E. Scupper: Form and install scuppers of 24 ga. metal through the parapets. 1. Form scuppers with outside edges hemmed and flanged. 2. To inside of scupper lock and solder an apron extending out over the cant each side, down the cant to the roof at the bottom, and up under the counterflashing at the top. 3. Set scupper in roof cement with apron flanges on top of the roofing membrane. 4. Strip the apron flanges with base flashing as specified in SECTION 07 5552 - MODIFIED BITUMINOUS MEMBRANE ROOFING. F. Downspout: Form and install downspouts of 24 gage metal. Finish downspouts with a fluorocarbon coating containing 70% Kynar 500. Color shall be as selected by architect. 1. Install with the top slipped up over the outlet sleeve and anchor to the wall with 2" wide by 18 gage metal straps fastened with galvanized bolts into metal expansion shields. 2. For each downspout, set the straps at the top, bottom and at intermediate points spaced not more than 8' apart. G. Gutter: Form and install hung molded gutters of 24 gage metal at roof eaves. Finish gutters with a fluorocarbon coating containing 70% Kynar 500. Color shall be as selected by architect. 1. Provide watertight lap or butt type expansion joints at intervals of 50 ft. and not more than 16 ft. from inside and outside corners. 2. Support molded outside edge with 1" wide 18 gage strap hangers at 36" centers and weld to gutter as detailed. 3. Form downspout outlet sleeves and rivet and solder sleeves to gutter. Fit each sleeve with a removable, galvanized wire basket strainer. H. Conductor Head: Provide conductor heads of 24 gage metal, riveted and soldered watertight. Finish conductor head with a fluorocarbon coating containing 70% Kynar 500. Color shall be as selected by Architect. 1. outlet sleeve to fit downspout, rivet and solder sleeve into downspout. 2. Solder'/." mesh galvanized wire screen over conductor head top. 3. Attach conductor head to wall with masonry fasteners. 4. Loose lock conductor head to scupper and solder watertight. 5. Provide overflow 1" below level of scupper. Roof Expansion Joint Cover: Form and install the continuous covers and flashing required to make the roof expansion joints watertight 1. Install covers over the membrane on wood curbs and nail flanges to the wood curbs. 2. Strip the flanges with base flashing as specified in SECTION 07 5552 - MODIFIED BITUMINOUS MEMBRANE ROOFING. 3. At wall intersections, nail upper vertical flange to wall just below receiver reglet and seal top edge and nail heads with roof cement. SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM VLK Architects, 2007 07 6200 - 3 2740.00 Creekview Elementary School College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas 4. Faced, Slag-Wool-Fiber/Rock-Wool-Fiber Blanket Insulation In -fill: ASTM C 665, Type III (blankets with reflective membrane facing), Class A (membrane -faced surfacewith a flame spread of 25 orless); Category 1 (membrane is a vapor barrier), faced with foil-scrim-kraft, foil -scrim, or foil -scrim -polyethylene vapor -retarder membrane on both faces, 1-1/2" thick. 5. Splice joints and intersections of covers in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. J. Gravel Guard: Form and install guards of 24 gage metal at roof edges. 1. Make up gravel guards in 10 ft. lengths. 2. Install over the roofing membrane in a bed of roof cement and nail flange with nails spaced in staggered pattern 6" o.c. near the back edge. 3. Secure the bottom drip edge with concealed cleats at 12" centers. 4. Strip horizontal flange with base flashing as specified in SECTION 07 5552 - MODIFIED BITUMINOUS MEMBRANE ROOFING. 5. Lap end joints 8" and bed in roof cement. Miter and seam solder the joints at comers. K. Splash Pans: Provide 24 gage galvanized metal splash pans where downspouts discharge onto roofs. Install pans in mastic (mastic must be approved by membrane manufacturer) to set flat on the roof and secure to downspouts by riveting and soldering. L. Miscellaneous flashings and other items of sheet metal roof work shall be provided as required for a weathertight job. END OF SECTION SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM VLK Architects, 2007 07 6200 - 4 2740.00 Creek View Elementary School College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas SECTION 07 7213 MANUFACTURED ROOF CURBS AND PORTALS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Prefabricated roof curbs and penetration portals. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 05 3100 - Steel Decking. 2. Section 05 5000 - Metal Fabrications. 3. Section 06 1000 - Rough Carpentry: Field -constructed curbs and cants. 4. Section 07 5552 - Modified Bituminous Membrane Roofing. 5. Section 07 6200 - Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim: Flashings and counter-flashings. 6. Section 07 9200 -Joint Sealants. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submitfollowing items under provisions of SECTION 01 3323-SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, AND SAMPLES. B. Product Data: Indicating technical and performance data of products. C. Shop Drawings: Indicating details of special connections and transitions, typical section details, and play layout showing intended locations for use of products. D. Manufacturer's Instructions: Printed instructions for recommended installation methods and sequences for all products. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturers Qualifications: Company specializing inthe manufacturing of prefabricated roof expansionjoints for a minimum of 5 years. 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver, store, handle, and protect products under provisions of SECTION 01 6500 - PRODUCT DELIVERY REQUIREMENTS and SECTION 016600 - PRODUCT STORAGE AND HANDLING REQUIREMENTS. B. Prevent contact with materials which may cause discoloration or staining. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 PRODUCTS AND MANUFACTURERS A. Acceptable Products and Manufacturers 1. Roof Curbs: RPS Expansion Curbs (EC-213, with 2" extended flange), Roof Curbs (RC-213) and Equipment Rail (ER-26) by Roof Products and Systems Corp., Bensenville, Illinois. 2. Penetration Portals: Alumi-Flash by Portals Plus, Bensenville, Illinois. 3. Pipe Mounting Pedestal: For pipes 2" to 3-3/4" o.d., provide Model 3-R Pedestals as manufactured by Miro Industries, Inc. Murray, Utah. B. Substitutions: Submit in accordance with SECTION 016200 - PRODUCT OPTIONS. 2.02 SIZES AND CONFIGURATIONS A. Provide in sizes and configurations as required to accommodate joint widths, penetrations, and equipment being supported. B. Provide configurations and special transitions as shown or required to utilize factory formed pieces wherever possible. C. Provide custom factory -formed pieces conforming to roof slope to allow for a level equipment installation. MANUFACTURED ROOF CURBS AND PORTALS VLK Architects, 2007 07 7213 - 1 2740.00 Creek View Elementary School College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that surfaces and conditions are ready to receive work of this section. Notify Architect of any existing conditions which will adversely affect execution. Beginning of execution will constitute acceptance of existing conditions. B. Verify that curbs are level and flashing reglets have been installed at proper locations. C. Verify that insulation has been packed into joint prior to beginning work. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Interface with other systems. On roof mounted expansion joints, set flanges in adhesive and make watertight over cant strip. B. Install using skilled workmen in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions and recommendations. C. Anchor units securely with fasteners and at spacing as recommended by manufacturer. D. Where metal surfaces are to be in contact with corrosive substrates, apply bituminous coating on concealed metal surfaces. E. Splice sections of curbs together with procedures as recommended by manufacturer for a solid, watertight installation. F. Penetrations of piping through equipment curbs shall not be permitted. G. Utilize factory fabricated intersections and transitions wherever possible. Field fabricate where pre -manufactured sections are not available. 3.03 PROTECTION A. Protect completed installation under provisions of SECTION 01 5000 - TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS. END OF SECTION MANUFACTURED ROOF CURBS AND PORTALS VLK Architects, 2007 07 7213 - 2 2740.00 Creek View Elementary School College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas SECTION 07 7233 ROOF HATCHES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Roof hatches, including ladder safety post and hatch rail system. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 05 3100 - Steel Decking. 2. Section 05 5000 - Metal Fabrications. 3. Section 06 1000 - Rough Carpentry. 4. Section 07 5552 - Modified Bituminous Membrane Roofing. 5. Section 07 6200 - Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim: flashing of the hatch curb. 6. Section 07 7213 - Manufactured Roof Curbs and Portals. 7. Section 07 9200 - Joint Sealants. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit in accordance with SECTION 01 3323 SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, AND SAMPLES. Include complete manufacturer's catalog cuts and installation requirements for each item specified. 1.03 WARRANTY A. Provide manufacturer's standard warranty. Materials shall be free from defects in material and workmanship for a period of 1. Roof Hatch: Five years. 2. Ladder Extension: Five years. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 ROOF HATCHES A. Roof Hatches: Provide single leaf roof hatches, 3'-0" x T-0", of 14 gage galvanized steel with 22 gage galvanized steel liner. Product/manufacturer; one of the following: Model No. B-RHG; Babcock -Davis Hatchways Inc. Type E-20; The Bilco Co. Model No. SAH-12; Bristol Feberlite Ind. Model No. RB-1; Milcor Limited Partnership B. Construction: Hatch shall be factory assembled with heavy pintle hinges, compression spring operators, positive snap latch with turn handles, padlock hasps and neoprene draft seals. 1. Curb shall be 12" high with 3'/z" flanges, fully welded at comers and equipped with integral metal cap flashing. 2. Cover shall be insulated with 1" thick glass fiber. Curb shall be insulated with 1" thick high -density fiberglass insulation. Fiberboard insulation is not acceptable. 3. Cover shall have an automatic hold -open arm with red vinyl grip handle. All hardware shall be cadmium plated. 2.02 LADDER EXTENSION A. Provide ladder extension Model LU-2, "LadderUP" Safety post as manufactured by The Bilco Company. 1. 42" high telescoping extension. 2. Post shall lock automatically when fully extended. Release lever shall disengage the post to allow it to be returned to its lowered position. 3. Adjustable mounting brackets shall fit ladder rung spacing and clamp brackets shall accommodate ladder rungs. 4. Balancing Spring: A stainless steel spring balancing mechanism shall be provided to provide smooth, easy, controlled operation when raising and lower the safety post. 5. Hardware: All mounting hardware shall be Type 316 stainless steel. 6. Finish: Factory finish of post shall be hot dipped galvanized steel. ROOF HATCHES VLK Architects, 2007 07 7233 - 1 2740.00 Creek View Elementary School College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION A. Verify that ladder safety post or hatch rail system installations will not disrupt other trades. B. Verify that the ladder rungs are dry, clean, and free of foreign matter. C. Report and correct defects prior to any installation. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Roof Hatch: Install roof hatches in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. Securely fasten to the roof deck with bolts or screws. B. Installer shall field check conditions and verify the manufacturer's ladder safety post and hatch rail system details for accuracy to fit the application prior to fabrication. C. Installer shall comply with the ladder safety post and hatch rail system manufacturer's installation instructions. D. The manufacturer shall furnish fasteners necessary for installations. END OF SECTION ROOF HATCHES VLK Architects, 2007 07 7233 - 2 2740.00 Creek View Elementary School College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas SECTION 07 8116 CEMENTITIOUS FIREPROOFING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Direct -to -steel fireproofing sprayed on shop primed steel members, galvanized floor deck, and galvanized roof deck, as scheduled. Material and installation shall conform to the applicable building code requirements of all authorities having jurisdiction. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 014523 -Testing and Inspection Services. 2. Section 05 1200 - Structural Steel Framing. 3. Section 05 2100 - Steel Joists Framing. 4. Section 05 3100 - Steel Decking. 5. Section 09 2116 - Gypsum Board Assemblies: gypsum wallboard fireproofing. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Fireproofing Design: Submit copies of each UL Design selected for each required fire resistance rating, including an applicator's certification that each UL Design selected will provide the scheduled fire resistance rating in accordance with the referenced building code. B. Certificates: 1. Provide manufacturer's certification or independent test reports confirming that installed materials meet or exceed performance criteria specified. 2. Provide reports from reputable independent testing agencies, of product proposed for use, which indicate conformance to ASTM E 84 and E 119. C. Product Data: Submit in accordance with SECTION 01 3323 - SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, AND SAMPLES. Submit manufacturer's literature of products furnished, including application instructions. D. Thickness Schedule: Provide schedule indicating material to be used, building elements to be protected with spray -applied fireproofing, hourly rating, and material thickness provided and appropriate references. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Applicator: Work shall be performed by a firm acceptable to the cementitious fireproofing material manufacturer. B. Requirements of Regulatory Agencies: 1. Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc.: Products, execution, and thickness shall conform to approved UL Designs as published in UL Fire Resistance Directory. 2. Testing: Sprayed fireproofing designs shall be as tested and certified to attain specified fire resistance ratings in accordance with ASTM E 119. 3. Local Building Code: Fireproofing material shall have approval of governing code authorities for this building's materials and designs. C. Pre -installation Conference: Conduct conference at project site. Contractor, fireproofing subcontractor, and independent testing laboratory shall attend a pre -installation conference to review the substrates for acceptability, method of application, applied thicknesses, inspection procedures, and other issues. 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver products to project site in original, unopened packages with legible and intact manufacturers' labels identifying products. Include on labels names of products, manufacturers, and date of manufacture. Also include UL labels for fire -resistance ratings applicable to project. B. Store materials inside, undercover, above ground and in a manner to keep them dry until ready to use. Remove from project site and discard materials that have been exposed to moisture or have otherwise deteriorated. 1.05 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Conditions: Do not install sprayed -on fireproofing when ambient or substrate temperatures are 40°F. and falling. A minimum air and substrate temperature of 40°F. must be maintained during and for 24- hours after application of the spray -applied fireproofing. CEMENTITIOUS FIREPROOFING VLK Architects, 2007 07 8116 - 1 2740.00 Creek View Elementary School College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas B. Protection: 1. Provide ventilation in area to receive fireproofing. Provide ventilation in poorly ventilated areas to achieve a total air exchange rate of 4 times per hour until the material is substantially dry. 2. Provide temporary enclosures to prevent spray from contaminating air or adjacent property. 3. Protect adjacent surfaces and equipment from damage by overspray, fall -out, and dusting -off of fireproofing. 1.06 SEQUENCING A. Coordinate installation with other work to avoid cutting and patching of installed fireproofing. 1. Clips, hangers, clamps, sleeves, stops, and other attachments to the substrate shall be installed prior to application of fireproofing. 2. Concrete work on steel floor decking shall be completed prior to application of fireproofing to the underside of the deck. 3. Roofing system, including rigid insulation system on decking, shall be completed prior to application of fireproofing to the underside of the deck. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Sprayed -on Cementitious Fireproofing; product/manufacturer: Monokote Type MK-6/HY; Grace Construction Products Div., W.R. Grace & Co. Cafco 300; Isolatek International Pyrolite No. 15; Carboline Company - Fireproofing Products Division. B. Bonding Agent; Product/Manufacturer: Fire Bond; Grace Construction Products Div., or approved equivalent. 2.02 SPRAYED -ON FIREPROOFING MATERIALS A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard applications of standard products complying with requirements indicated below for material composition and physical properties representative of installed products. B. Material Composition: Cementitious Fireproofing consisting of factory -mixed, dry formulation of gypsum or Portland cement binders and lightweight mineral or synthetic aggregates mixed with water at project site to form a slurry or mortar for pumping and for dispersal by compressed air introduced at spray nozzle. NOTE: Mineral Fiber fireproofing will not be permitted. C. Physical Properties: Minimum values, unless otherwise indicated or higher values required to attain designated fire -resistance ratings, measured per standard test methods referenced with each property listed below: 1. Bond Strength: 339 Ibf. per sq. ft. per ASTM E 736. 2. Compressive Strength: 1,440 Ibf. per sq. ft. per ASTM E 761. 3. Corrosion Resistance: No evidence of corrosion per ASTM E 937. 4. Deflection: No cracking, spalling, delamination or the like per ASTM E 759. 5. Effect of Impact on Bonding: No cracking, spalling, delamination or the like per ASTM E 760. 6. Air Erosion: Maximum weight loss of 0.0025 grams per sq. ft. in 24 hours per ASTM E 859. 7. DryDensity: 15 pcf for average and individual densities as required for fire -resistance rating indicated, per ASTM E 605. 8. Surface Burning Characteristics: ASTM E 84. a. Flame Spread: 0 b. Smoke Developed: 0 D. Water: Clean, potable. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Surfaces to receive fireproofing shall be free of mill scale, dirt, oil, grease, dust, loose rust, paint or other foreign substances which may impair proper adhesion of the fireproofing to the substrate. B. Cleaning shall be accomplished just prior to the application of fireproofing. C. Do not apply fireproofing to surfaces which cannot be corrected by normal cleaning methods. Correct condition before applying fireproofing.. CEMENTITIOUS FIREPROOFING VLK Architects, 2007 07 8116 - 2 2740.00 Creek View Elementary School College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas D. Cover other work subject to damage from fall -out or overspray of fireproofing materials during application. Provide temporary enclosure as required to confine spraying operations, protect the environment, and ensure maintaining adequate ambient conditions for temperature and ventilation. E. Complete placing of concrete on floor and roof decking prior to application of the fireproofing to the underside of steel deck and supporting beams and joists. F. On roof decks without a concrete cover, complete all roofing applications and roof mounted equipment installation prior to application of the fireproofing to the underside of roof decking and supporting beams and joists. Prohibit all roof traffic upon commencement of the fireproofing and until the fireproofing material is dry. G. Commencement of application of fireproofing shall be interpreted as acceptance by the applicator of the suitability of the surface to receive fireproofing material and acceptance of responsibility for failure of bond between fireproofing and steel 3.02 APPLICATION A. Apply fireproofing in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations for mixing materials, application procedures, and types of equipment used to convey and spray on fireproofing materials; as particular conditions of installation and as required to comply with fire rating requirements and approved UL Designs indicated. B. Spray apply with as many coats as necessary to obtain required thickness and uniform density. C. Completely cover members designated to be fireproofed. D. Install metal lath, as required, to comply with fire -resistance ratings and recommendations of fireproofing manufacturer for conditions of exposure and intended use. Securely attach lath to substrate in position required for support and reinforcement of fireproofing. Use anchorage devices of type recommended by fireproofing manufacturer. Attach lathing accessories where indicated or required. E. Post appropriate cautionary "Slippery When Wet" signs in all areas in contact with wet fireproofing material. Erect appropriate barriers to prevent entry by non -fireproofing workers into the fireproofing spray and mixing areas and other areas exposed to wet fireproofing material. 3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Field testing will be performed in accordance with SECTION 01 4523 - TESTING AND INSPECTION SERVICES. 1. Testing laboratory shall sample and verify the thickness and density of the fireproofing in accordance with the provisions of ASTM E 605 and the Inspection Procedure for Field Applied Sprayed Fire Protection Materials as published by Uniform Building Code Standard 7-6 entitled Thickness and Density Determination for Spray -Applied Fireproofing. 2. Testing laboratory shall sample and verify the bond strength of the fireproofing in accordance with provisions of ASTM E 736. B. Re -testing required as a result of non -conforming work shall be paid for by the Contractor. 3.04 PATCHING A. Inspect members for complete coverage, correct unacceptable work, and patch. Chip out areas which are defective or do not bond. Clean steel surface and reapply fireproofing. B. Patch areas damaged or cut by other work. Patch area from which test samples are taken. 3.05 CLEANING, REPAIR, AND PROTECTION A. Remove equipment. Immediately after completing spraying operations in each containable area of project, remove material over -spray and fall -out from surfaces of other construction and clean exposed surfaces to remove evidence of soiling. B. Cure exposed cementitious fireproofing materials according to fireproofing manufacturer's recommendations to prevent premature drying. C. Protect fireproofing, according to advice of fireproofing manufacturer and Installer, from damage resulting from construction operations or other causes so that fireproofing will be without damage or deterioration at time of substantial completion. CEMENTITIOUS FIREPROOFING VLK Architects, 2007 07 8116 - 3 2740.00 Creek View Elementary School College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas D. Coordinate installation of fireproofing with other construction to minimize the need to cut orremove fireproofing. As installation of other construction proceeds, inspect fireproofing and patch any areas where fireproofing was removed or damaged. E. Repair or replace work that has not been successfully protected. END OF SECTION CEMENTITIOUS FIREPROOFING VLK Architects, 2007 07 8116 - 4 2740.00 Creek View Elementary School College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas SECTION 07 8400 FIRESTOPPING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Firestopping for all fire -rated construction complete, including, but not limited to: 1. Firestopping in conjunction with gypsum board, masonry and plaster partitions. 2. Firestopping shall include, but not be limited to the following applications: a. Sealing gaps between tops of partitions and roof/floor decks. b. Sealing gaps between structure and glass curtainwalls with fire sating insulation. c. Other locations where "firestopping", "firestop", or "satng" is indicated. d. Where required by codes. e. Control joints and expansion joints in masonry or gypsum board fire -rated partitions. f. Expansion joints in roof and floor assemblies. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 04 2000 - Masonry Units. 2. Section 07 2100 -Thermal Insulation. 3. Section 07 9200 -Joint Sealants. 4. Section 09 2113 - Plaster Assemblies. 5. Section 09 2116 - Gypsum Board Assemblies. 6. Divisions 23 and 26. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Refer to SECTION 013323 - SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, AND SAMPLES. B. Product Data: Submit copies of manufacturer's literature. Include data substantiating that materials comply with specified tested system requirements. C. Samples: Submit duplicate samples of each type of firestopping material and accessories. D. For those firestop applications that exist for which no UL tested system is available through a manufacturer, an engineering judgement derived from similar UL system designs or other tests will be submitted to local authorities having jurisdiction for their review and approval prior to installation. Engineer judgement drawings must follow requirements set forth by the International Firestop Council. 1.03 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Do not allow firestopping materials to become wet, soiled, or covered with ice or snow. Comply with manufacturer's recommendations for handling, storage and protection. 1.04 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Do not install firestopping materials until building is completely enclosed and weathertight. B. Coordinate installation with the work of other trades. Reference SECTION 01 3100 - PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 PRODUCT/MATERIAL PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Except as otherwise indicated, firestop materials shall be classed in the Underwriters Laboratories (UL) Building Materials Directory, "SectionXHEZ-Through-Penetration Firestop Systems", and/or"Section XHHW-Fill Void or Cavity Materials", and "Section XHBN - Joint Systems" for specific project conditions: 1. Time rating ("F", Fire and "T", Temperature) (T rating is only required for construction joint systems). 2. Floor or wall assembly and material. 3. Penetrating materials/items diameters, or void space. 4. Through opening size. 5. Annular space between penetration opening and penetrating item. B. Firestopping materials shall provide a fire -rating commensurate with the adjacent construction rating. FIRESTOPPING VLK Architects, 2007 07 8400 - 1 2740.00 Creek View Elementary School College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas C. Firestop materials shall comply with ASTM E 84: Surface Burning Characteristics. D. Firestop materials shall have been tested in accordance with ASTM E 814, UL 1479 or UL 2079. E. Firestop materials shall be free of asbestos. F. Firestop materials shall be paintable or capable of receiving finish materials in those areas which are exposed to view and which are scheduled to receive finishes. G. Obtain firestop products from a single manufacturer. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION A. Installer must examine substrate and conditions under which firestopping work is to be performed, and notify Contractor in writing of any unsatisfactory conditions. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install firestopping materials including foaming, packing and accessory materials to fill openings around penetrations in floors and walls, to seal gaps between decks and partitions, gaps between structure and curtainwall, etc., to provide fire -stops with fire resistance ratings indicated for floor or wall assembly in which penetration occurs. Use silicone based materials for all wet or damp conditions. B. Install Firestop materials and systems in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions and applicable UL Building Materials Directory assemblies. C. Cut and friction fit fire safing type insulation firestopping to completely fill all gaps and voids. Provide stick -clips, sheet metal closures, and any other accessories to support insulation. D. Where floor openings are 4" or more in width and subject to traffic or loading, install firestopping materials capable of supporting same loading as floor. E. Remove damming materials after curing if made of other than fire resistant materials. F. Protect materials from damage on surfaces subject to traffic. 3.03 FIELD TESTING A. Firestop materials and installation may be tested by an independent testing laboratory. Refer to SECTION 014523 - TESTING AND INSPECTION SERVICES. 3.04 CLEAN UP A. Clean up all debris caused by the work of this Section, keeping the premises clean and neat at all times. B. Clean adjacent surfaces soiled by the work of this section. END OF SECTION FIRESTOPPING VLK Architects, 2007 07 8400 - 2 2740.00 Creek View Elementary School College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas SECTION 07 9200 JOINT SEALANTS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Sealing and caulking of joints. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 03 3000 - Cast -In -Place Concrete. 2. Section 04 2000 - Masonry Units. 3. Section 06 2000 - Finish Carpentry. 4. Section 07 6200 - Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim. 5. Section 07 8400 - Firestopping. 6. Section 08 8000 - Glazing. 7. Section 09 2116 - Gypsum Board Assemblies. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of SECTION 01 3323 - SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, AND SAMPLES. B. Submit product data indicating sealant chemical characteristics, performance criteria, limitations, color availability and application instructions. C. Submit two samples'/." diameter x 4" in size illustrating color selections available. D. Submit manufacturer's certificate under provisions of SECTION 01 4500 - QUALITY CONTROL that products meet or exceed specified requirements. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section with minimum 3 years documented experience. B. Applicator: Company specializing in applying the work of this section with minimum 3 years documented experience and approved by sealant manufacturer. C. Conform to Sealant and Waterproofers Institute requirements for materials and installation. 1.04 FIELD SAMPLES A. Provide samples under provisions of SECTION 01 3323 - SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, AND SAMPLES. B. Construct one field sample joint, 5 feet long, illustrating sealant type, color, and tooled surface. C. Locate where directed. D. Accepted sample may remain as part of the work. 1.05 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Requirements: No caulking shall be done at temperatures below 40°F. 1.06 WARRANTY A. Furnish to the Owner a written warranty that the sealants shall remain watertight fora period of 2 years from the date of acceptance of the building. Joints which prove defective by leaking, cracking, melting or shrinking of the sealant shall be re -sealed without additional expense to the Owner. JOINT SEALANTS VLK Architects, 2007 07 9200 - 1 2740.00 Creek View Elementary School College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Modified Polyurethane (Type 1 Sealant): 1. Two or three-part conforming to ASTM C 920, Type M, Grade NS, Class 25. 2. Color: Custom colors as selected by Architect. 3. Product/manufacturer: Sonneborn Sonolastic NP2, Degussa Building Systems Dymeric, Tremco. NO SUBSTITUTIONS B. Pourable Urethane (Type 2 Sealant): 1. Multicomponent conforming to ASTM C 920, Type M, Grade P (pourable), Class 25, Use T (traffic). 2. Color: Custom color as selected by Architect. 3. Product/manufacturer: Urexpan NR-200, Pecora Corp. Sonolastic SL 2 Sealant; Degussa Building Systems THC 900 (Self leveling) or 901 (low sag), Tremco. NO SUBSTITUTIONS C. Pourable Urethane Sealant (Type 3 Sealant): 1. Single -component conforming to ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade P (pourable), Class 25, Use T (traffic). 2. Color: Gray or limestone as selected by Architect. 3. Product/manufacturer; one of the following: Sikaflex -1 CSL; Sika Corporation, Inc. Sonneborn SL 1; Degussa Building Systems Vulkem Nova 300 SSL; Tremco D. Silicone, General Purpose (Type 4 Sealant) 1. One -part rubber based silicone conforming to ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 100/50. 2. Color: As selected by Architect. 3. Acceptable products 790 Building Sealant, Dow Corning. Silpruf LM SCS2799, GE Silicones. Spectrem 1, Tremco. E. Silicone, Paintable (Type 5 Sealant): 1. One -part silicone rubber sealant for interior use. 2. Acceptable product: Silicone Rubber Sealant, Paintable Dow Corning. F. Silicone, Sanitary (Type 6 Sealant): 1. One -part conforming to ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, F.D.A. Regulation 21 CFR177.2600, and FDA Food Additive Regulation 121.2514. 2. Color: Clear. 3. Acceptable products: 786 Mildew Resistant, Dow Corning. Sanitary SCS1700, GE Silicones. G. Acrylic Latex (Type 7 Sealant) 1. One -part, non -sag acrylic latex, conforming to ASTM C 834, Type P, Grade NF. 2. Acceptable products: AC-20+, Pecora Corp. Sonolac; Sonneborn, Div. of ChemRex, Inc. Tremflex 834; Tremco. NO SUBSTITUTIONS H. Acoustical Sealant (Type 8 Sealant): 1. Butyl rubber for concealed locations. 2. Acceptable products: AC-20 FTR Acoustical and Insulation Sealant, Pecora Corp. Acoustical Sealant, Tremco Sheetrock Acoustical Sealant; USG Co. JOINT SEALANTS VLK Architects, 2007 07 9200 - 2 2740.00 Creek View Elementary School College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas 2.02 ACCESSORIES A. Primer: Non -staining type, recommended by sealant manufacturer to suit application. B. Joint Cleaner: Non -corrosive and non -staining type, recommended by sealant manufacturer, compatible with joint forming materials. C. Joint Backing: ASTM D 1056 and D 1565 round. In vertical joints use closed cell polyethylene foam rod; oversized 30 to 50 percent larger than joint width. In horizontal joints, use solid neoprene or butyl rubber, Shore A hardness of 70. D. Bond Breaker: Pressure sensitive tape recommended by sealant manufacturer to suit application. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that surfaces and joint openings are ready to receive work and field measurements are as shown on drawings and recommended by the manufacturer. B. Beginning of installation means installer accepts existing substrate. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Joint surfaces shall be clean and dry. Remove loose mortar and other material completely with compressed air or by brushing. 1. Joints to be caulked shall be at least'/:' wide unless specifically specified smaller. At any point where the width of the joint is appreciably less, cut or grind out the joint to that width to assure an adequate volume of sealant along the length of the joint, except at concrete paving joints, those shall remain 1/8" wide as indicated. 2. Pack with backing material the voids and recesses around metal frames which are deeper than the depth required for caulking. Leave the proper depth for the sealant. 3. In open joints and where detailed, install rod stock as backing material. Roll the material into the joints to avoid stretching. The natural thickness of the rod stock shall be approximately twice the thickness of the joint in which it is installed. 4. In raked masonry joints, apply a bondbreaker strip of polyethylene or masking tape along the bottom of the joints. 5. Where sealant is to be applied against smooth metal surfaces, wipe these surfaces clean with a suitable ketone solvent immediately prior to caulking. 6. Particular attention shall be paid to the preparation of horizontal joints in wear surfaces to be filled with sealant. Adjust joint depth to comply with sealant manufacturer's recommendations by malleting down the joint filler or filling in with rod stock as may be required. Joints in concrete paving shall be primed in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. B. Perform preparation in accordance with ASTM C 1193 for solvent release sealants, C 1193 for latex base sealants, C 919 for acoustical applications, and C 1193 for elastomeric sealants. 3.03 APPLICATION A. Priming: Prime porous joint surfaces, particularly masonry and concrete. Test the primer to make sure it causes no staining of the material on which it is applied. B. Depth of sealant: Seal joints to a depth of approximately''/Z the joint width, but never less than %" deep. Follow the sealant manufacturer's recommendations where possible. C. Apply the sealant in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. 1. Force the sealant into joints with enough pressure to expel all air and provide a solid filling. Correct any flowing or sagging before final inspection is made. 2. Where adjacent surfaces permit, use masking tape to obtain straight, even lines. Remove tape immediately after the joints have been sealed. 3. Fill joints flush with adjacent surfaces except where a recessed joint is specifically detailed. Tool beads with a sled runner or similar tool to insure full contact with joint faces. 4. For caulking horizontal joints in wear surfaces, use a gun with a narrow nozzle. Apply the flow type sealant with the nozzle riding along the bottom so that the sealant is forced up to completely fill the slot without cavities. Provide and use a portable vacuum cleaner to remove loose dirt from the joints just ahead of the caulking gun. JOINT SEALANTS VLK Architects, 2007 07 9200 - 3 2740.00 Creek View Elementary School College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas D. Install sealant free of air pockets, foreign embedded matter, ridges, and sags. E. Tool joints concave. Sealant shall achieve a firm skin before surface coating is applied. 3.04 CLEANING/REPAIRING A. Clean adjacent surfaces of soiling due to caulking operations. This applicator shall be responsible for and shall bear the cost of replacing any material damaged or discolored due to caulking operations. B. Repair or replace defaced or disfigured finishes caused by work of this section. 3.05 SEALANT SCHEDULE A. Locations specified below for sealants and caulking required under this section are general and shall not be considered as affecting the required use of sealing compounds specified under other sections of the specifications. SEALANT TYPE APPLICATION 1 a. Vertical control and expansion joints in exterior and interior masonry surfaces. b. Vertical joints at perimeter of window, door, and storefront elements where adjacent to stone, masonry, or concrete surfaces. C. Reglets: The top groove along the surface -mounted flashing reglets. d. Sealing joints in sheet metal fabrications. e. Unless noted otherwise, any other exterior vertical joints. 2 a. Interior horizontal control and expansion joints in flooring, stone, masonry and tile flooring and at junctures between these materials and other adjacent materials. 3 a. Exterior horizontal control and expansion joints in concrete paving. 4 a. Sealing of joints between plumbing fixtures and substrates and between plastic Laminate splashes and adjacent tops and walls. b. Threshold and windowsills set in full bed of sealant. 5 a. General caulking as part of interior painting in joints subject to movement. 6 a. Sealing joints between countertops and substrates in concession areas and elsewhere which may be in contact with food. 7 a. General caulking as part of interior painting. 8 a. Setting sill track, head track, and end studs to substrates on acoustically rated partitions. Refer to SECTION 09 2116 -GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES for application requirements. END OF SECTION JOINT SEALANTS VLK Architects, 2007 07 9200 - 4 2740.00 Creek View Elementary School College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas SECTION 07 9513 EXPANSION JOINT COVER ASSEMBLIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Expansion joint assemblies for floor, wall and ceiling surfaces. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 03 1100 - Concrete Forming and Acccessories: Expansion and contraction joints in exterior concrete joints. 2. Section 07 6200 - Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim: Roof control joints. 3. Section 07 9200 - Joint Sealants: Expansion and control joints. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit under provisions of SECTION 01 3323 - SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, AND SAMPLES. B. Product Data: Provide joint assembly profiles, dimensions, locations in the Work, affected adjacent construction, anchorage devices, available colors and finish, and locations of splices. Provide Manufacturer's Installation Instructions. Indicate rough -in sizes. C. Certificates: Material test reports from qualified independent testing laboratory indicating and interpreting test results relative to compliance of fire -rated expansion joint assemblies with requirements indicated. D. Samples: Submit two 4" long samples, illustrating profile, dimension, color, and finish selected. E. Templates: For cast -in or placed frames or anchors, and indicate tolerances for item placement. 1.03 FIELD MEASUREMENTS A. Verify that field measurements are as instructed by the manufacturer. 1.04 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Furnish under provisions of SECTION 01 7840 - SPARE PARTS, OVERAGES, AND MAINTENANCE MATERIALS. B. Provide 25% overage of resilient joint filler, and special tools required for servicing components. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Basis -of -design Products: The design for each architectural joint system is based on products by Construction Specialties, Inc. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide either the named products or comparable products by one of the following: Architectural Art Mfg. Inc. Balco Metalines, Div. of Balco, Inc. MM Systems Corp. B. Substitutions: In accordance with SECTION 016200 - PRODUCT OPTIONS. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Extruded Aluminum: ANSI/ASTM B 2216063-T5 alloy for extrusions; ASTM B 308 Alloy 6061-T6, for sheet and plate. B. Resilient Filler: Extruded vinyl exhibiting Shore 'A' hardness of40 - 65 Durometer. C. Threaded Fasteners: Stainless steel. D. Primer: Zinc Chromate E. Fire Rated Systems: Fire barrier caulk (SECTION 07 8400 - FIRESTOPPING), fire blanket, and insulation. EXPANSION JOINT COVER ASSEMBLIES VLK Architects, 2007 07 9513 - 1 2740.00 Creek View Elementary School College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas 2.03 FABRICATION A. All Metal Joint Covers: Aluminum frame construction, free of gaskets and fillers, designed to permit plus or minus 50% joint movement with full recovery, recess mounted. See drawings. B. Joint Covers: Flexible dual durometer extruded preformed gasket bonded to extruded aluminum retainers for interior expansion joints in floors and walls. 1. Covers shall be single or multilayered rubber extrusions as classified underASTM D 2000, with continuous, longitudinal, internal baffles and formed to fit compatible frames. Expansion joint seals shall be as manufactured by Construction Specialties, Inc., or approved equivalent. See drawings for types. 2. Extruded preformed gasket color(s) shall be as selected by Architect. C. Concealed aluminum surfaces in direct contact with masonry and concrete shall be shop coated with zinc chromate primer. D. Galvanize embedded ferrous metal anchors and fastening devices. E. Shop assemble components and package with anchors and fittings. F. Provide joint components in single length wherever practical. Minimize site splicing. 2.04 FINISHES A. Floors: Mill finish. B. Walls and Ceilings: Clear anodized. C. Resilient Filler Exposed to View: Color as selected by Architect from standard colors. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify surfaces are ready to receive the materials of this section. B. Verify that joint preparation and affected dimensions are acceptable. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Provide anchoring devices for installation. B. Provide templates and rough -in measurements. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Install components and accessories in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Align work plumb and level, flush with adjacent surfaces. C. Rigidly anchor components to substrate to prevent misalignment. D. Install fire -rated systems where required. 3.04 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK A. Protect finished work under provisions of SECTION 01 5000 -TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS. B. Do not permit traffic over unprotected floor joint surfaces. C. Provide removable coating to protect finish surface. END OF SECTION EXPANSION JOINT COVER ASSEMBLIES VLK Architects, 2007 07 9513 - 2 2740.00 Creek View Elementary School College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas SECTION 08 1100 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Hollow metal doors and frames, sidelight frames, and borrowed light frames. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 08 1400 - Wood Doors. 2. Section 08 1423 - Plastic -laminate -faced Wood Doors. 3. Section 08 7100 - Door Hardware: hardware locations, weatherstripping and seals. 4. Section 08 8000 - Glazing: glass for doors, sidelights, and borrowed lights. 5. Section 09 9100 - Painting: finishing of hollow metal doors and frames. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Submit in accordance with SECTION 01 3323 - SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, AND SAMPLES. Include door sizes, construction, frame types, wall anchors, and accessories required for installation. 1.03 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to applicable local building codes for fire rated requirements of metal door/metal frame and wood door/metal frame assemblies. B. Fire Rated Door Construction: Conform to NFPA 252 or UL 10C. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Standard: Provide steel doors and frames complying with the Steel Door Institute SDI-100 and as herein specified. B. Fire -Rated Door Assemblies: Provide door and frame assemblies which are identical in materials and construction to units tested in door and frame assemblies per NFPA 252 and which are labeled and listed for ratings indicated by UL. Metal UL classification markers shall be attached to these doors and frames. 1. Test Pressure (positive -pressure testing): After 5 minutes into the test, the neutral pressure level in furnace shall be established at 40 inches or less above the sill. 2. Oversize Fire -Rated Doors: For door assemblies exceeding sizes of tested assemblies, provide manufacturer's certificate stating that doors conform to all standard construction requirements of tested and labeled fire door assemblies except as to size. C. Conform to requirements of SDI-100. D. Installed frame and door assembly to conform to UL 10C for fire -rated class indicated or scheduled. E. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver metal doors and frames to the project site with no dents or open seams and store upright in a protected dry area. Provide packaging and wrapping to protect hollow metal items. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Provide steel doors and frames as manufactured by one of the following: Ceco Door Products; an ASSA ABLOY Group Co. Curries Company; an ASSA ABLOY Group Co. Deansteel Mfg., Inc. Mesker Door, Inc. Republic Builders Products Co. Rocky Mountain Metals, Inc. Steelcraft; an Ingersoll-Rand Co. HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES VLK Architects, 2007 08 1100 - 1 2740.00 Creek View Elementary School College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas 2.02 MATERIALS A. Sheet and Strip: ASTM A 1008, commercial quality, leveled, cold -rolled steel free of scale and other surface defects. 2.03 FABRICATION A. Flush Steel Doors: Full flush type of welded seamless construction with no visible seams or joints on faces or vertical edges. 1. Face sheets of 18 gage steel reinforced, stiffened and sound -deadened by laminating to small cell impregnated kraft honeycomb core completely filling the door or by formed steel vertical stiffeners spaced 6" o.c. and attached to face sheets by spot welds and with the spaces between stiffeners filled with inorganic blanket insulation material. At exterior doors, provide insulation value of R - 8.0 for foamed -in - place polyurethane. At fire rated doors, provide mineral fiberboard core as scheduled and/or as required to meet applicable codes. 2. Continuous vertical interlocking joints on lock and hinge edges with seams continuously welded, filled and dressed smooth. Bevel vertical edges. 3. Top and bottom edges closed with continuous recessed steel channels spot welded to both faces. Top edge of exterior doors sealed flush with closing channel to exclude water. 4. Fixed glass moldings welded to security side of door. Loose moldings of 20 gage steel fastened with countersunk flat head screws. Fabricate stops to receive vinyl gaskets. 5. Overlapping steel astragals for pairs of labeled doors as required by manufacturer to meet codes. 6. Louvers: Provide factory installed, inverted "V" or "Y" sightproof type fixed louvers. Louver blades shall be 18 gage and frame shall be 18 gage welded construction. B. Steel Frames: Combination buck, frame and trim type of 16 gage steel for interior frames and 14 gage steel for exterior frames. Provide frames with face width, throat opening, backbend, and jamb depth as per dimensions shown. 1. Brake -form to profile free of warp, buckles, and fractures with corners square and sharp. Form stop integral with frame except where detailed otherwise. Dress sheared edges straight and smooth. 2. Close corner joints tight with trim faces mitered and continuously welded. Dress exposed welds flush and smooth. 3. Fabricate frames for large openings in knocked -down sections for field assemblywith buttjoints and internal reinforcing sleeves. Knocked -down frame assemblies shall be trial assembled in the shop. 4. Loose glazing stops shall be 16 gage steel, mitered corners, fastened with countersunk flathead screws. Fabricate stops to receive vinyl gaskets. 5. Weld 14 gage steel floor anchors inside each jamb with two holes each anchor for floor anchor bolts. 6. Furnish frames with steel spreader temporarily fastened to the feet of both jambs for rigidity during shipping and handling. 7. For each jamb in masonry construction provide 3 or more 16 gage adjustable jamb anchors of the T strap type spaced not more than 30" apart. Furnish yoke type Underwriters anchors for labeled door openings only. 8. For each jamb in steel stud construction provide 4 or more 18 gage drywall type jamb anchors. Weld anchors inside each jamb and wire or bolt to the studs. C. Shop Finish: After fabrication, doors and frames shall be degreased, phosphatized, and factory painted inside and out with a rust inhibitive synthetic primer. Apply mineral filler to eliminate weld scars and other blemishes. D. Fabricate frames and doors with hardware reinforcement plates welded in place. Provide mortar guard boxes. E. Reinforce frames wider than 48" with roll formed steel channels fitted tightly into frame head, flush with top. F. Prepare frame for silencers. Provide three single rubber silencers for single doors and mullions of double doors on strike side, and two single silencers on frame head at double doors without mullions. G. Attach fire -rated label to each frame and door unit. H. Close top edge of exterior door flush with inverted steel channel closure. Seal joints watertight I. Fabricate frames for masonry wall coursing with 2" head member. 2.04 HARDWARE PREPARATION A. Prepare doors and door frames for hardware. Mortising, reinforcing, drilling, and tapping shall be done at the factory for mortised hardware. Reinforcement shall be provided for surface -applied hardware, and the drilling and tapping for this hardware shall be done in the field. Provide plaster guards for hinge and strike reinforcements and cutouts on frames. HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES VLK Architects, 2007 08 1100 - 2 2740.00 Creek View Elementary School College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas B. Reinforcement plates in doors and frames for hardware shall be 7 gage for hinges and 12 gage for all other hardware. C. Punch for and install rubber silencers on all interior hollow metal door frames. Furnish 3 silencers for each single door and 2 silencers for each pair of doors. Set out and adjust strikes to provide clearance for the silencers. Omit silencers on exterior door frames. 2.05 CLEARANCES A. Doors shall have pre -fit clearances of: 1. At Head and Lock Stile: 1/8". 2. At Hinge Stile: 1/16". 3. At Door Sill: a. Without Threshold: 1 /8" from bottom of door to top of decorative floor finish or covering. b. With Threshold: 1 /8" from bottom of door to top of threshold. 4. Between meeting edges of pair of doors: 1 /8". B. Fitting Clearances for Fire -Rated Doors: Comply with NFPA 80. Bevel fire -rated doors 1/8" in 2" in lock edge. 2.06 ACCESSORIES A. Rubber Silencers: Resilient rubber. B. Anchors: Three per jamb, typically, of type to suit supportive construction. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify substrate conditions under provisions of SECTION 01 3100 - PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION. B. Verify that opening sizes and tolerances are acceptable. C. Verify surfaces and conditions are ready to receive work of this section. Notify Architect of any existing conditions which will adversely affect execution. Beginning of execution will constitute acceptance of existing conditions. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install frames in accordance with SDI-105. B. Install doors in accordance with DHI. C. Install fire -rated frames and place fire -rated doors in accordance with NFPA 80. D. Coordinate with masonry and wallboard construction for anchor placement. E. Coordinate installation of glass and glazing. F. Install doors accurately in frames, maintaining specified clearances. G. Setting Frames: 1. Check frames for rack, twist and out -of -square, and correct. 2. Set frames accurately to maintain scheduled dimensions, hold head level and maintain jambs plumb and square. 3. Anchor frames securely to adjacent construction. Anchor to floor at each jamb with two bolts to prevent twist. 4. Leave spreader bars in place until frames have been permanently built into the walls. 5. Install fire -rated frames in accordance with NFPA 80. H. Hanging Doors: 1. Fit and hang the doors to maintain specified door clearances. Metal hinge shims are acceptable to maintain clearances. 2. Doors shall be out of wind and shall operate smoothly and quietly after adjustment. 3. Place fire -rated doors with clearances as specified in NFPA 80. HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES VLK Architects, 2007 08 1100 - 3 2740.00 Creek View Elementary School College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas 3.03 TOLERANCES A. Maximum Diagonal Distortion: 1/8" measured with straight edge, corner to corner. END OF SECTION HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES VLK Architects, 2007 08 1100 - 4 2740.00 Creek View Elementary School College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas SECTION 08 1400 WOOD DOORS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Solid core wood doors. 2. Factory finishing of wood doors with transparent finish. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 06 2000 - Finish Carpentry 2. Section 08 1100 - Steel Doors and Frames: hollow metal frames. 3. Section 08 1400 - Plastic -laminate -faced Wood Doors. 4. Section 08 7100 - Door Hardware: location of hardware. 5. Section 08 8000 - Glazing: glass for doors. 6. Section 09 9100 - Painting: finishing of metal glazing frames. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit in accordance with SECTION 01 3323 - SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, AND SAMPLES. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate sizes, construction, face veneer species, core materials, edge banding dimensions and stop profile. C. Product Data: Indicate door core materials and construction; type and characteristics. D. Samples: 1. Samples for Initial Selection: For factory -finished doors 2. Submit a sample, 6" by 6", of each face veneer species finish and color selected. Include factory finishes applied to actual door face materials, for each material and finish. 3. 12" x 12" sample of solid core door panel indicating construction, core, face and edge detail. 4. Submit 8Y2" x 11" paint color samples of door glazing frame paint. E. Certificates: Submit certification that doors comply with reference standards fabrication requirements, signed by authorized representative of door manufacturer. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Standard: Comply with the requirements of "Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards, Guide Specifications and Quality Certification Program" as published by Architectural Woodwork Institute. 1.04 DELIVERY A. Deliver doors to the project site ready for installation and to receive hardware. Each unit shall be individually plastic wrapped at the factory for protection in transit and storage. 1.05 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Provide Life -of -Installation warranty on manufacturer's standard form, signed by manufacturer, installer, and contractor, in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace doors that are defective in materials or workmanship or have warped (bow, cup, or twist) more than 1 /4 inch in a 42-by-84-inch section. Warranty shall specifically include installation of replacement doors required during term of the warranty. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Provide wood doors as manufactured by one of the following: Algoma Hardwoods, Inc. Eggers Industries, Architectural Door Div. Marshfield DoorSystems, Inc. WOOD DOORS VLK Architects, 2007 08 1400 - 1 2740.00 Creek View Elementary School College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas 2.02 MATERIALS AND FABRICATION A. Flush Solid Core Doors: Premium Grade as defined in Section 1300 of AWI Quality Standards. Adhesive for faces and crossbands shall be Type I. 1. Core: AWI Type SLC-5 glued block. 2. Stiles: Vertical edges at least 5/8" and bonded to core. Door stiles Red Oak for doors with stain grade faces, mill option for doors with paint grade faces. 3. Rails: Top and bottom rail edges at least 1-1/8" wide and bonded to core. Species mill option. 4. Crossbands: 1/16" selected hardwood bonded to core and to face veneer. 5. Stain Grade Faces: I.S. "Premium Grade" plain sliced "book match" Red Oak for a transparent finish. Note: Half -round slicing will not be accepted. 6. Stops: Provide shop primed metal glazing frames at all light openings. Fasten by through -bolted countersunk flathead screws. Field painted color as selected by Architect. B. Fitting: 1. Cutouts for mortise hardware shall be made to template at the factory. 2. Top and bottom rail edges and core exposed by cutouts for hardware shall be factory sealed. 3. Doors shall have pre -fit clearances of: a. At Head and Lock Stile: 1/8" b. At Hinge Stile: 1/16" c. At Door Sill: 1) Without Threshold: 1/8" from bottom of door to top of decorative floor finish or covering. 2) With Threshold: 1/8" from bottom of door to top of threshold. d. Between meeting edges of pair of doors: 1/8" 4. Fitting Clearances for Fire -Rated Doors: Comply with NFPA 80. Bevel fire -rated doors 1/8" in 2" in lock edge. 2.03 ADHESIVE A. Facing Adhesive: Type I - waterproof. 2.04 FABRICATION A. Fabricate non -rated doors in accordance with AWI Quality Standards requirements. B. Provide lock blocks at lock edge and top of door for closer and hardware reinforcement. C. Fit door metal edge trim to edge of stiles after applying veneer facing. D. Bond edge banding to cores. E. Factory machine doors forfinish hardware in accordancewith hardware requirements and dimensions. Do not machine for surface hardware. Provide solid blocking for through -bolted hardware. F. Factory pre -fit doors for frame opening dimensions identified on shop drawings. 2.05 FACTORY FINISHING A. General: Comply with referenced quality standard for factory finishing. Complete fabrication, including fitting doors for openings and machining for hardware that is not surface applied, before finishing. 1. Finish faces, all four edges. Stains and fillers may be omitted edges of cutouts, and mortises. B. Finish doors at factory. C. Transparent Finish: 1. Grade: Premium. 2. Finish: AWI Quality Standard Section 1500, Conversion Varnish Transparent 3. Staining: Custom color stain as selected by Architect. 4. Effect: Open grain finish. 5. Sheen: Satin. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify frame opening conditions under provisions of SECTION 01 310 - PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION. WOOD DOORS VLK Architects, 2007 08 1400 - 2 2740.00 Creek View Elementary School College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas B. Verify that opening sizes and tolerances are acceptable. C. Do not install doors in frame openings that are not plumb or are out -of -tolerance for size or alignment. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Condition wood doors to the average prevailing humidity in the building prior to fitting and hanging. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. General: Installation of doors shall comply with the applicable requirements of Section 1700 Installation of Architectural Woodwork (Interior) of the AWI Quality Standards. B. Hang doors to maintain uniform clearances. Doors shall be out of wind and shall operate smoothly and quietly after adjustment. Replace doors damaged during installation. C. Pilot drill screw and bolt holes. D. Machine cut for hardware. Core for handsets and cylinders. E. Coordinate installation of doors with installation of frames specified in SECTION 08 1100 - HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES and hardware specified in SECTION 08 7100 - DOOR HARDWARE. F. Factory Finished Doors: Restore finish before installation if fitting or machining is required at Project site. G. Coordinate installation of glass and glazing. 3.04 INSTALLATION TOLERANCES A. Conform to AWI requirements for fit and clearance tolerances. B. Maximum Diagonal Distortion (Warp): 1/8" measured with straight edge or taut string, corner to corner, over an imaginary 36" x 84" surface area. C. Maximum Vertical Distortion (Bow): 1/8" measured with straight edge or taut string, top to bottom, over an imaginary 36" x 84" surface area. D. Maximum Width Distortion (Cup): 1/8" measured with straight edge or taut string, edge to edge, over an imaginary 36" x 84" surface area. 3.05 ADJUSTING A. Adjust work under provisions of SECTION 01 7700 - CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES. B. Adjust door for smooth and balanced door movement. C. Finished Doors: Replace doors that are damaged or that do not comply with requirements. Doors may be repaired or refinished if work complies with requirements and shows no evidence of repair or refinishing END OF SECTION WOOD DOORS VLK Architects, 2007 08 1400 - 3 2740.00 Creek View Elementary School College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas SECTION 08 1423 PLASTIC -LAMINATE -FACED WOOD DOORS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Solid core plastic -faced wood doors. 2. Fire -rated plastic -faced wood doors. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 06 2000 - Finish Carpentry: laminate clad cabinets. 2. Section 08 1100 - Steel Doors and Frames: hollow metal frames. 3. Section 08 7100 - Door Hardware: location of hardware. 4. Section 08 8000 - Glazing: glass for doors. 5. Section 12 3216 - Manufactured Plastic -laminate -clad Casework 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit in accordance with SECTION 01 3323 - SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, AND SAMPLES. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate sizes, construction, core materials, edge banding dimensions and stop profile. C. Product Data: Indicate door core materials and construction; type and characteristics. D. Samples: 1. Submit a sample, 6" by 6", of each plastic laminate finish and color selected. 2. Submit a 12" x 12" sample of solid core door panel indicating construction, core, face and edge detail. 3. Submit 81/2' x 11" paint color samples of door glazing frame paint. E. Certificates: Submit certification that doors comply with reference standards fabrication requirements, signed by authorized representative of door manufacturer. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Standard: Comply with the requirements of "Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards, Guide Specifications and Quality Certification Program" as published by Architectural Woodwork Institute. B. Fire -Rated Wood Doors: Provide plastic faced wood doors which are identical in materials and construction to units tested in door and frame assemblies per NFPA 252 and which are labeled and listed for ratings indicated by UL or Warnock Hersey. Provide metal UL or Warnock Hersey classification markers attached to door. 1. Test Pressure (positive -pressure testing): After 5 minutes into the test, the neutral pressure level in furnace shall be established at 40 inches or less above the sill. C. Color Uniformity: Provide plastic laminate for laminate clad millwork, casework and plastic faced wood doors, from the same manufacturer. D. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience. 1.04 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Fire Door Construction: Conform to NFPA 252. B. Installed Fire -Rated Door Assembly: Conform to NFPA 80 for fire -rated class as scheduled. 1.05 DELIVERY A. Deliver doors to the project site ready for installation and to receive hardware. Each unit shall be individually plastic wrapped at the factory for protection in transit and storage. PLASTIC -LAMINATE -FACED WOOD DOORS VLK Architects, 2007 08 1423 - 1 2740.00 Creek View Elementary School College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas 1.06 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Provide Life -of -Installation warranty on manufacturer's standard form, signed by manufacturer, installer, and contractor, in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace doors that are defective in materials orworkmanship or have warped (bow, cup, ortwist) more than 1/4 inch in a 42-by-84-inch section. Warranty shall specifically include installation of replacement doors required during term of the warranty. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Provide plastic laminate faced wood doors as manufactured by one of the following: Eggers Industries, Architectural Door Div. Marshfield DoorSystems, Inc. VT Industries, Inc. 2.02 MATERIALS AND FABRICATION A. Flush Doors: Premium Grade, PC-HPDL-3 (3-ply), as defined in Section 1300 of AW 1 Quality Standards. 1. Core: Particleboard meeting Type I, Density C, Class 1 of CS 236. 2. Stiles: Vertical edges at least 1-1/8" and bonded to core. Species shall be close grain hardwood with factory -painted finish to match faces. 3. Rails: Top and bottom rail edges at least 1-1/8" and bonded to core. Mill option. 4. Faces: HGS (nominal 0.048") high pressure decorative laminated plastic conforming to NEMA LD 3. Laminate to be bonded to both faces. Fire -rated plastic laminate faced wood doors shall be surfaced with fire -rated (UL Stamped) laminated plastic sheet. Color shall be as selected by Architect from manufacturer's full color and pattern range. Product/manufacturer; one of the following: Formica Brand Laminate; Formica Corp. Nevamar; TexMar, Inc. Pionite Decorative Laminate; Pioneer Plastics Corp. Wilsonart; Ralph Wilson Plastics Co. 5. Stops: Provide shop primed metal glazing frames at all light openings. Fasten by through -bolted countersunk flathead screws. Field painted color as selected by Architect. B. Labeled Doors: 1. "B" Label Doors (90-minute): AWI Type FD 1'/z or 1 non-combustible solid mineral core with chemically treated hardwood edge banding and fire -retardant cross banding. Pairs of "B Label" doors shall be furnished with necessary metal edge and astragal trim if required by door manufacturer to meet code requirements. 2. Cut-outs for vision panels in fire -rated doors shall be factory cut. No field cutting shall be permitted. 3. Stops: Provide listed shop primed metal glazing frames at all light openings. Fasten by through -bolted countersunk flathead screws. Field painted color as selected by Architect. C. Fitting: 1. Cutouts for mortise hardware shall be made to template at the factory. 2. Top and bottom rail edges and core exposed by cutouts for hardware shall be factory sealed. 3. Doors shall have pre -fit clearances of: a. At Head and Lock Stile: 1/8" b. At Hinge Stile: 1/16" c. At Door Sill: 1) Without Threshold: 1/8" from bottom of door to top of decorative floor finish or covering. 2) With Threshold: 1/8" from bottom of door to top of threshold. d. Between meeting edges of pair of doors: 1/8" 4. Fitting Clearances for Fire -Rated Doors: Comply with NFPA 80. Bevel fire -rated doors 1/8" in 2" in lock edge. 2.03 ADHESIVE A. Facing Adhesive: Type I - waterproof. 2.04 FABRICATION A. Fabricate non -rated doors in accordance with AWI Quality Standards requirements. PLASTIC -LAMINATE -FACED WOOD DOORS VLK Architects, 2007 08 1423 - 2 2740.00 Creek View Elementary School College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas B. Fabricate fire -rated doors in accordance with AWI Quality Standards and to UL or Warnock -Hersey requirements. Attach fire -rating label to door. C. Provide lock blocks at lock edge and top of door for closer for hardware reinforcement D. Fit door metal edge trim to edge of stiles after applying veneer facing. E. Bond edge banding to cores. F. Factory machine doors for finish hardware in accordance with hardware requirements and dimensions. Do not machine for surface hardware. Provide solid blocking for through -bolted hardware. G. Factory pre -fit doors for frame opening dimensions identified on shop drawings. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify frame opening conditions under provisions of SECTION 01 3100 - PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION. B. Verify that opening sizes and tolerances are acceptable. C. Do not install doors in frame openings that are not plumb or are out -of -tolerance for size or alignment. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Condition plastic faced wood doors to the average prevailing humidity in the building prior to fitting and hanging. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. General: Installation of doors shall comply with the applicable requirements of Section 1700 Installation of Architectural Woodwork (Interior) of the AWI Quality Standards. B. Hang doors to maintain uniform clearances. Doors shall be out of wind and shall operate smoothly and quietly after adjustment. Replace doors damaged during installation. C. Cutting and fitting of plastic laminate faced doors at the project site will not be permitted. Doors which do not fit properly shall be replaced. D. Install fire -rated doors in corresponding fire -rated frames according to NFPA 80. Trim stiles and rails of fire -rated doors only to extent permitted by labeling agency. E. Pilot drill screw and bolt holes. F. Machine cut for hardware. Core for handsets and cylinders. G. Coordinate installation of doors with installation of frames specified in SECTION 08 1100 - HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES and hardware specified in SECTION 08 7100 - DOOR HARDWARE. H. Coordinate installation of glass and glazing. 3.04 INSTALLATION TOLERANCES A. Conform to AWI requirements for fit and clearance tolerances. B. Maximum Diagonal Distortion (Warp): 1/8" measured with straight edge or taut string, corner to corner, over an imaginary 36" x 84" surface area. C. Maximum Vertical Distortion (Bow): 1/8" measured with straight edge or taut string, top to bottom, over an imaginary 36" x 84" surface area. D. Maximum Width Distortion (Cup): 1/8" measured with straight edge or taut string, edge to edge, over an imaginary 36" x 84" surface area. PLASTIC -LAMINATE -FACED WOOD DOORS VLK Architects, 2007 08 1423 - 3 2740.00 Creek View Elementary School College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas 3.05 ADJUSTING A. Adjust work under provisions of SECTION 01 7700 - CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES. B. Adjust door for smooth and balanced door movement. END OF SECTION PLASTIC -LAMINATE -FACED WOOD DOORS VLK Architects, 2007 08 1423 - 4 2740.00 Creek View Elementary School College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas SECTION 08 3100 ACCESS DOORS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: all, ceiling and floor access doors. B. Related Sections 1. Section 03 3000 - Cast -In -Place Concrete: Openings in concrete. 2. Section 04 2000 - Masonry Units: Openings in masonry. 3. Section 09 2116 - Gypsum Board Assemblies: Openings in gypsum board walls and ceilings. 4. Section 09 3013 - Ceramic Tiling. 5. Section 09 9100 - Painting: Field paint finish. 6. Division 22 - Plumbing components requiring access. 7. Division 23 - Mechanical components requiring access. 8. Division 26 - Electrical components requiring access. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit in accordance with SECTION 01 3323 - SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, AND SAMPLES. Include manufacturer's installation instructions. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform work in accordance with UL requirements for fire -rated doors. 1.04 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to applicable code for fire -rated access units. 1.05 FIELD MEASUREMENTS A. Verify that field measurements are as instructed by the manufacturer. 1.06 COORDINATION A. Coordinate work under provisions of SECTION 01 3100 - COORDINATION. B. Coordinate the work with mechanical and electrical work requiring access units. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Provide wall and ceiling access doors as manufactured by one of the following: J.L. Industries, Inc. Karp Associates, Inc. Larsen's Mfg. Co. Milcor Limited Partnership Nystrom Building Products Co. B. Provide floor access door as manufactured by one of the following: Babcock -Davis Hatchways, Inc. The Bilco Co. Karp Associates, Inc. Milcor Limited Partnership Nystrom Building Products Co. 2.02 GENERAL A. Flush metal panel access doors. B. Size: As required for ease of access, but not less than 12" x 12". ACCESS DOORS VLK Architects, 2007 08 3100 - 1 2740.00 Creek View Elementary School College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas C. Material: 1. Model M3202: Painted steel 14 gauge frame and door. 2. Model MS3202: Stainless steel 16 gauge frame and door. 3. Models DW3203 and K3200: Painted steel 16 gauge frame; 14 gauge door. 4. Model ATR3204: Painted steel 16 gauge frame; 18 gauge door. 5. Fire -Rated Model 3218: Painted and stainless steel 14 gauge frame; 20 gauge door. D. Lock: Screwdriver operated, with metal cam. 2.03 ACCESS UNITS - WALLS A. Non -Fire -Rated Door and Frame Unit: 1. In Cast -in -Place Concrete: Model M3202 (painted) manufactured by Milcor. 2. In Masonry. Model M3202 (painted) manufactured by Milcor. 3. In Ceramic Tile on Gypsum Board on Steel Studs: Model MS3202 (stainless steel) manufactured by Milcor. 4. In Gypsum Board on Steel Studs: Model DW3203 (painted) manufactured by Milcor. 5. In Plaster on Metal Furring: Model K3200 (painted) manufactured by Milcor. B. Fire -Rated Door and Frame Unit: 1-1/2 hour UL B label fire rating 1. In Cast -in -Place Concrete: Model 3218 (painted) manufactured by Milcor. 2. In Masonry. Model 3218 (painted) manufactured by Milcor. 3. In Ceramic Tile on Gypsum Board on Steel Studs: Model 3218 (stainless steel) manufactured by Milcor. 4. In Gypsum Board on Steel Studs: Model 3218 (painted) manufactured by Milcor. 5. In Plaster on Metal Furring: Model 3218 manufactured by Milcor. 2.04 ACCESS UNITS - CEILINGS A. Non -Fire -Rated Door and Frame Unit: 1. In Gypsum Board on Metal Furring: Model DW 3203 manufactured by Milcor. 2. In Plaster on Metal Furring: Model K3200 manufactured by Milcor. 3. In Metal T-Bar Ceiling: Model ATR 3204 manufactured by Milcor. B. Fire -Rated Door and Frame Unit: 1-1/2 hour UL B label fire rating 1. In Gypsum Board on Metal Furring: Model 3218 manufactured by Milcor. 2. In Plaster on Metal Furring: Model 3218 manufactured by Milcor. 2.05 ACCESS UNITS - FLOORS A. Floor Access Door. 1. Provide single -leaf door, 2'-6" x 3'-0". Type K-3 by The Bilco Company. 2. Construction: Provide door of aluminum diamond pattern plate reinforced with aluminum stiffeners as required to withstand a live load of 150 lbs. per sq. ft. Provide cast steel hinges that pivot on torsion bars that counter -balance the door for easy operation. The door shall open 90° and lock in the open position. Provide under side release handle and removable key wrench on top side. Aluminum shall be mill finished with bituminous coating to be applied to exterior of frame by manufacturer. Hardware shall be zinc -plated and chromate sealed. 3. Ladder Extension: "LadderUP" safety post, 42" (1050mm) high; telescoping steel, automatically locking when extended (as manufactured by The Bilco Company). 2.06 FINISHES A. Painted Finish: One coat baked enamel primer with baked enamel finish, color as selected by Architect. B. Stainless Steel: No. 4 finish. C. Aluminum: Mill finish. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify substrate conditions under provisions of SECTION 01 3100 - COORDINATION. B. Verify that rough openings for door and frame are correctly sized and located. ACCESS DOORS VLK Architects, 2007 08 3100 - 2 2740.00 Creek View Elementary School College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations. B. Set frames accurately in position and attach securely to supports with plane of face panels aligned with adjacent finish surfaces. C. Position unit to provide convenient access to concealed work requiring access. END OF SECTION ACCESS DOORS VLK Architects, 2007 08 3100 - 3 2740.00 Creek View Elementary School College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas SECTION 08 3313 COILING COUNTER DOORS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Coiling counter doors. B. Related Sections: Section 08 7100 - Door Hardware: cylinders for coiling door lock and key switch. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit in accordance with SECTION 01 3323 - SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, AND SAMPLES B. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product data and installation instructions for each type of coiling counter door. Include both published data and any specific data prepared for this project. C. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings for approval prior to fabrication. Include detailed plans, elevations, details of framing members, required clearances, anchors and accessories. Include relationship with adjacent materials. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Labeled Construction: Door and frame shall be manufactured in accordance with specifications and procedures for doors and frames tested and rated by Underwriter's Laboratories, Inc. Metal UL classification markers shall be attached to door and frame. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 COILING COUNTER DOORS A. Face -of -Wall Mounted coiling door to detail. Product/manufacturer; one of the following: Type CD10-2; The Cookson Co. DuraShutter Standard; Raynor 651 Series; Overhead Door Corp. Model 520; Wayne -Dalton Commercial Rolling Doors Model 8325; Windsor Door B. Curtain: Constructed of interlocking, roll -formed, flat -face stainless steel slats similar to Cookson Slat No. 10 and equipped with a tubular steel bottom bar for reinforcement. All slats shall have malleable iron end locks to act as wearing surfaces in the guides. C. Guides: Box type fabricated of stainless steel angles and channels. D. Roller Shaft: Steel pipe with cast iron end plugs and containing an oil tempered, helical counterbalancing steel spring with external adjustment by means of a wheel. E. Brackets: Heavy cast iron or steel designed to form end closure supports for the hood. Roller shaft ends shall be journaled into bracket hubs and fitted with self-lubricating bronze bearings or sealed ball bearings. F. Hood: No hood needed, as hood is above the ceiling. G. Operation: Motor Operation 1. Provide high starting torque motor of the size and design as recommended by door manufacturer, reduction gearing, solenoid brake, limit switches, emergency hand chain with electric interlock, magnetic relay contactor, overload protection, prewiring to terminal block, stoplock safety bearing to prevent doors from falling in event of motor damage. 2. 115 V, single phase, 60 Hz. 3. Provide key operated control switch with spring return to require constant pressure on the key turn to operate the door up or down (i.e. when the key is not physically being turned, the door will not operate). Control switch shall be mounted on the secure side of the opening. 4. Motor operator shall be equipped with electric sensing edge safety protection in conjunction with the door operator control COILING COUNTER DOORS VLK Architects, 2007 08 3313 - 1 2740.00 Creek View Elementary School College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas H. Locking: Provide cylinder locks on bottom bar less cylinder for key operation. Cylinder locking for motor operated doors to include electrical interlock to prevent operation before door is unlocked. Finish: The stainless curtain slats, guides, and hood shall have a No. 4 finish. All other exposed metal parts shall have a shop coat of rust inhibitive paint. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Coiling counter door shall be installed by skilled mechanics supervised by the manufacturer's authorized representative. B. Erect the door, guides, and accessories in a rigid substantial manner, straight and plumb, and with horizontal lines level. 3.03 ADJUSTING A. Adjust the door and operators and leave in good working order. END OF SECTION COILING COUNTER DOORS VLK Architects, 2007 08 3313 - 2 2740.00 Creekview Elementary School College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas SECTION 08 4113 ALUMINUM -FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Aluminum entrance and storefront systems with associated aluminum doors. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 07 9200 - Joint Sealants: caulking of perimeter joints. 2. Section 08 7100 -Door Hardware: hardware, weatherstripping and seals. 3. Section 08 8000 - Glazing. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Submit in accordance with SECTION 01 3323 - SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, AND SAMPLES. Include drawings showing elevations of each entrance and storefront type, detail sections of typical composite members, and glazing details. B. Samples: Submit in accordance with SECTION 01 3323 - SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, AND SAMPLES. Submit for approval duplicate samples showing the limits of color range to which the entrance, storefront, and door materials will be processed. Samples shall be representative of the materials to be furnished, and the color of the installed materials shall be within the range of the approved samples. 1.03 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION AND PERFORMANCE A. Architectural Requirements 1. Drawings are diagrammatic and do not purport to identify or solve problems of thermal or structural movement, glazing or anchorage. 2. Requirements shown by details are intended to establish basic dimensions of units, sightlines and profiles of members. 3. Provide concealed fastening wherever possible. 4. Provide continuous snap -in aluminum backer plate at head and jamb conditions. B. Structural Requirements 1. System to provide for expansion and contraction within system components caused by a cycling temperature range of 170°F. degrees without causing detrimental effects to system or components. 2. Design and size members to withstand dead loads and live loads caused by pressure and suction of wind as calculated in accordance with building code, and measured in accordance with ANSI/ASTM E 330. 3. Limit mullion deflection to L/175, or flexure limit of glass with full recovery of glazing materials, whichever is less. 4. System to accommodate, without damage to system or components, or deterioration of perimeter seal: Movementwithin system; movement between system and perimeter framing components; dynamic loading and release of loads; and deflection of structural support framing. 5. Storefront manufacturer shall be responsible for design and engineering of storefront system, including necessary modifications to meet specified requirements and maintaining visual design concepts. 6. Attachment considerations shall take into account site peculiarities and expansion and contraction movements so there is no possibility of loosening, weakening or fracturing connection between units and building structure or between units themselves. 7. Design anchors, fasteners and braces to be structurally stressed not more than 50% of allowable stress when maximum loads are applied. 8. Engineer storefront and entrances to be free from rattles, wind whistles and noise due to thermal and structural movement and wind pressure. C. Environmental Requirements 1. Drain water entering joints, condensation occurring in glazing channels, or migrating moisture occurring within system, to exterior. No leakage shall occur in wall when tested in accordance with ASTM E 331 at test pressure of 2.86 Ibs/sq ft. 2. Limit air infiltration through assembly to 0.06 cu ft/min/sq ft of assembly surface area, measured at a reference differential pressure across assembly of 1.57 Ibs/sq ft. as measured in accordance with ANSI/ASTM E 283. 3. Maintain continuous air and vapor barrier throughout assembly, primarily in line with inside pane of glass and heel bead of glazing compound. ALUMINUM -FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS VLK Architects, 2007 08 4113 - 1 2740.00 Creekview Elementary School College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Erector Qualifications: Erection of the entrance and storefront systems and doors shall be by an experienced erector approved by the manufacturer. B. Design Criteria: 1. Deflection of glass framing members under design loads shall not exceed U175 or 3/.", whichever is less. 2. Deadload deflection of horizontal glass framing members shall not exceed 0.125". 3. Exterior Entrances and Storefront: Design windload shall be 22 psf. C. Perform work in accordance with AAMA SFM-1 and AAMA - Metal Curtain Wall, Window, Store Front and Entrance - Guide Specifications Manual. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver and handle system components under provisions of SECTION 01 6500 - PRODUCT DELIVERY REQUIREMENTS. B. Store and protect system components under provisions of SECTION 01 6600 - PRODUCT STORAGE AND HANDLING REQUIREMENTS. C. Provide wrapping to protect prefinished aluminum surfaces. 1.06 COORDINATION A. Manufacturer shall be responsible for details and dimensions not controlled by job conditions and shall show on his shop drawings required field measurements beyond his control. B. Coordinate with responsible trades to establish, verify and maintain field dimensions and job conditions. 1.07 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS A. Do not install sealants when ambient temperature is less than 40° F during and 48-hours after installation. 1.08 WARRANTY A. Special Assembly Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of aluminum -framed systems that do not comply with requirements or that deteriorate within specified warranty period. 1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Structural failures including, but not limited to, excessive deflection. b. Noise or vibration caused by thermal movements. c. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal weathering. d. Water leakage through fixed glazing and framing areas. e. Failure or operating components to function properly. 2. Warranty Period: 2 years from date of substantial completion. 1.09 FIELD MEASUREMENTS A. Verify that field measurements are as indicated on shop drawings and as instructed by the manufacturer. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Provide aluminum entrances and storefronts as manufactured by one of the following: EFCO Corp. Kawneer United States Aluminum Vistawall Architectural Products YKK AP America, Inc. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Extruded Aluminum: ASTM B 221; AA 6063-T5 alloy, temper. B. Sheet Aluminum: ASTM B 209; 5005-H16 alloy, temper. ALUMINUM -FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS VLK Architects, 2007 08 4113 - 2 2740.00 Creekview Elementary School College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas C. Sheet Steel: ASTM A 446; hot -dipped galvanized. D. Steel Sections: ASTM A 36; shapes to suit mullion sections. E. Primerand Touch -Up Primerfor Galvanized Surfaces: High -zinc -dust -content paint complying with SSPC-Paint 20. F. Fasteners: Stainless steel. 2.03 FABRICATED COMPONENTS A. General: Form section true to details with clean, straight, sharply defined profiles, free from defects impairing strength or durability. B. Framing: Kawneer Trifab® VG 450 and Heavywall Framing System. Fabricate the aluminum entrance and storefront systems with the shapes and sections detailed. All heavy wall framing shall be 1-3/4" wide. 1. Design the glass framing system to minimize loads on the glass due to building movement and incorporate provisions for thermal expansion by means of expansion joints. Where insulating glass is to be installed, design the glass framing system so that moisture does not accumulate in the glazing channel for prolonged periods. 2. Construction: Mill joints to a hairline fit. Assemble and connect members to form rigid, watertight assemblies. No exposed fastenings will be permitted. Reinforce the framing internally as required to meet the design criteria specified above. 3. Continuous Solid Closures: Fabricate required closures and covers to detail of aluminum sheet, plate, and angles. Provide solid continuous back plate closures at head and all jambs. 4. Accessories: Provide glazing gaskets, flashing, and miscellaneous shims and other parts detailed or otherwise required to complete the work. 5. Provide manufacturer's standard closure plate at perimeter framing members to cover open side of framing member against surrounding construction. C. Doors: The aluminum doors shall be wide -stile type with 5" stiles, 5" top rail, 5" intermediate rail (centered on panic device) and 10'/;' bottom rail; bevelled glazing stops for single glazed units. Wide stile doors shall be 1-3/4" thick. 1. Construction: Doors shall be mortised and have reinforced welded corner construction with hairline watertight joints. Fastenings shall be concealed. 2. Doors shall be factory fabricated by aluminum entrance and storefront manufacturer. 3. Glazing Beads: Fixed or theft proof snap -in glazing beads on exterior or security side of doors. Interior glazing beads shall be snap -in type. All glazing beads shall have vinyl inserts and glazing gaskets. 4. Weatherstripping: Continuous contact weatherstripping on stiles and top rails of exterior doors. D. Hardware Preparation: Prepare and reinforce doors and door frames for hardware. 1. Mortising, reinforcing, drilling, and tapping for mortised hardware shall be done at the factory. 2. Wherever possible, concealed steel reinforcement for surface -applied hardware shall be installed at the factory. The drilling and tapping for surface -applied hardware shall be done in the field. E. Reinforced Mullion: Same profile as non -reinforced frames, of extruded aluminum cladding with internal reinforcement of steel shaped structural section. F. Flashings: Form from sheet aluminum with same finish as extruded sections. Apply finish after fabrication. Material thickness as required to suit condition without deflection or "oilcanning"; of proper alloy to match the finished extrusions. G. Extruded Aluminum: 1. Framing System: Principal extrusions shall have a minimum wall thickness of 0.08". Moldings, trim, and glass stops shall be not less than 0.050" thick. 2. Doors: Principal extrusions shall have a minimum wall thickness of 3/16". Moldings, trim, and glass stops shall be not less than 0.050" thick. H. Reinforcement: Concealed reinforcements for hardware in doors and frames and mullions shall be plated or galvanized steel and shall be secured in place. Continuous reinforcement shall be installed at continuous geared hinges. I. Fabricate doors and frames allowing for minimum clearances and shim spacing around perimeter of assembly, yet enabling installation. ALUMINUM -FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS VLK Architects, 2007 08 4113 - 3 2740.00 Creekview Elementary School College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas J. Rigidly fit and secure joints and corners with internal reinforcement, except that door corners will be welded. Make joints and connections flush, hairline, and weatherproof. K. Develop drainage holes with moisture pattern to exterior. L. Prepare components to receive anchor devices. Fabricate anchorage items. M. Arrange fasteners, attachments, and jointing to ensure concealment from view. N. Prepare components with internal reinforcement for door hardware. O. Reinforce framing members for imposed loads. 2.04 HARDWARE A. Flush Bolts: Reference SECTION 08 7100 - DOOR HARDWARE for flush bolts to be provided by the Storefront Manufacturer. B. Refer to SECTION 08 7100 -DOOR HARDWARE for balance of hardware. 2.05 FINISHES A. Finish coating to conform to AAMA 607.1. Finish for aluminum storefront and entrances shall match. B. Aluminum Finish: Exposed aluminum surfaces of entrances, storefronts, frames, doors, and all their associated parts shall be Architectural Class II AA-M12C22A31 Clear Anodic Coating. Screw and bolt heads exposed to view shall be finished to match the exposed aluminum surfaces. C. Concealed Steel Items: Galvanized in accordance with ANSI/ASTM A 123 to 2.0 oz/sq ft. D. Apply one coat of bituminous paint to concealed aluminum surfaces in contact with cementitious or dissimilar materials. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION A. Examine areas to receive entrances and storefronts for conditions that will adversely affect the execution and quality of work. Do not start this work until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. B. Field check dimensions, elevations, and slopes on the connecting work affecting the entrance and storefront to assure a proper fit and weathertight installation. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install wall system, doors, and glazing in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and AAMA - Metal Curtain Wall, Window. B. Erecting Storefronts: Erect the members to be plumb, level, square and in proper alignment with other work, and free from sags, waves and buckles. 1. Materials shall be accurately cut and fitted and rigidly anchored in place to resist safely all normal stresses to which the work will be subjected. 2. Cut and machined ends and recesses shall be true, accurate and free of burrs and rough edges. 3. Create end dams at ends of window heads, at edges of storefronts, and other vertical elements to channel water to nearest weep hole away from window mullions and other items which might allow water to travel vertically. 4. Provide clearance around the perimeter between entrance and storefront metal and the opening substrate (concrete, masonry, or stucco) for caulking. C. Hanging Doors: Fit the doors with hardware and hang to operate smoothly, without bind or chatter. 1. Where concealed reinforcement for hardware cannot be provided, install and use Riv Nuts for fastening surface applied hardware. 2. Use sex bolts and nuts for fastening closers and closer arms to aluminum doors. 3. The use of sheet metal or self -tapping screws to mount hardware is prohibited. D. Sealing Joints: Seal the metal -to -metal framing joints properly with butene tape and sealant in conformance with the manufacturer's standard procedure. ALUMINUM -FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS VLK Architects, 2007 08 4113 - 4 2740.00 Creekview Elementary School College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas E. Pack fibrous insulation in shim spaces at perimeter of assembly to maintain continuity of thermal barrier. F. Install hardware using templates provided. Refer to SECTION 08 7100 -DOOR HARDWARE for installation requirements. G. Install glass and infill panels in accordance with SECTION 08 8000 - GLAZING using exterior dry method of glazing. H. Install perimeter 2 part polyurethane type sealant, backing materials, and installation requirements in accordance with SECTION 07 9200 - JOINT SEALANTS. 3.03 TOLERANCES A. Maximum Variation from Plumb: 0.06" every 3' non -cumulative or 1/16" per 10', whichever is less. B. Maximum Misalignment of Two Adjoining Members Abutting in Plane: 1/32". 3.04 ADJUSTING A. Adjust operating hardware for smooth operation. 3.05 PROTECT AND CLEAN A. Protection of Aluminum: 1. Protect concealed aluminum surfaces that will contact masonry, concrete and steel with neoprene gaskets or a coat of bituminous paint to prevent galvanic and corrosive action. 2. If drainage of moisture from incompatible metal passes over aluminum, paint the incompatible metal with a coat of aluminum pigmented paint. 3. Protect finished aluminum surfaces from staining by gypsum and cement materials until all adjacent masonry and plaster work has been completed. B. Cleaning: Upon completion of the work, wash down aluminum surfaces with water and soft cloths and leave in first class condition. END OF SECTION ALUMINUM -FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS VLK Architects, 2007 08 4113 - 5 2740.00 Creekview Elementary School College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas SECTION 08 7100 DOOR HARDWARE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Commercial door hardware, weatherstripping, sound seals, smoke seals, and thresholds to fully equip doors throughout the project.. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 06 2000 - Finish Carpentry: display case hardware. 2. Section 08 1100 - Steel Doors and Frames. 3. Section 08 1400 -Wood Doors. 4. Section 08 1423 - Plastic -Laminate -Faced Wood Doors. 5. Section 08 4113 - Aluminum -Framed Entrances and Storefronts. 6. Section 12 3216 - Manufactured Plastic -Laminate -Clad Casework: casework hardware. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Hardware Schedule: Submit in accordance with SECTION 01 3323 - SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, AND SAMPLES. Hardware schedule shall be in the vertical format as outlined by the Door and Hardware Institute. Schedule items required for the entire project. Include a picture or catalog cut of each item and list the finish. Provide manufacturer's installation instructions for closers. B. Templates: Upon receipt of reviewed hardware schedule, provide one copy of reviewed schedule with templates to each fabricator of doors and frames and other work effected by the hardware. C. Accessibility Standards: Submit a letter verifying that the hardware submitted is in conformance with Texas Accessibility Standards (TAS). D. Certifications: 1. Architectural Hardware Consultant shall inspect complete installation and certify that hardware and installation has been furnished and installed in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 2. Provide two copies of certifications to Architect. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Departures from Scheduled Designations: Only those products listed will be accepted. NO SUBSTITUTIONS WILL BE ACCEPTED. Manufacturers listed as being acceptable must still meet the conditions of this specification. B. Fire -Rated Door Assemblies: Provide door hardware for assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled for ratings indicated by UL or Warnock Hersey, based on testing according to NFPA 252. 1. Test Pressure (positive -pressure testing): After 5 minutes into the test, the neutral pressure level in furnace shall be established at 40 inches or less above the sill. C. Accessibility Standards: Hardware shall be in conformance with Texas Accessibility Standards (TAS). 1. Handles, Pulls, Latches, Locks, and other Operating Devices: Shape that is easy to grasp with one hand and does not require tight grasping, tight pinching, or twisting of the wrist. 2. Door Closers: The sweep period of closers shall be adjusted so that from an open position of 70°, the door will take at least three seconds to move to an open position of approximately 3" from strike side of door. 3. The maximum force for pushing or pulling open a door shall be as follows: a. Exterior hinged doors: Reserved. b. Interior Hinged Doors: Not to exceed 5 IV. applied perpendicular to door. c. Sliding or Folding Doors: Not to exceed 5 IV. applied parallel to door at latch. d. Fire doors: Adjusted to meet minimum closing force permitted by governing fire safety standards. D. Life Safety Standard; NFPA 101: Comply with the following for means of egress doors: 1. Latches, Locks, and Exit Devices: Not more than 15 Ibf to release the latch. Locks shall not require the use of a key, tool, or special knowledge for operation. 2. Door Closers: Not more than 30 Ibfto set door in motion and not more than 15 Ibf to open door to minimum required width. DOOR HARDWARE VLK Architects, 2007 08 7100 - 1 2740.00 Creekview Elementary School College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas E. Prior to the installation of the finish hardware, it shall be a contract requirement that the hardware supplier and his representatives be present at the initial installation and to render recommendations as required for the following hardware installation procedures: 1. Installation of all hardware, except hinges, associated with one pair of exterior aluminum entrances. 2. Installation of all hardware, except hinges, associated with one exterior hollow metal door. 3. Installation of all hardware, except hinges, associated with one pair of fire -rated plastic laminatewood doors which utilize vertical rod exit devices. 4. Installation of all hardware, except hinges, associated with one fire -rated plastic laminate wood corridor door. 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Material shall be delivered to project site in a timely manner so as not to impede job progress. Factory drop shipments will not be accepted. Material must be marked with manufacturer's name, number, finish, door number, and hardware set number. 1.05 WARRANTY A. Door closers shall carry a published ten-year limited factory warranty against defects in workmanship and operation. B. Door Push and Pull Bars shall carry a published two-year factory warranty against defects in material and workmanship. C. Exit devices shall carry a published three-year limited factory warranty against defects in workmanship and operation. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Hinges: 1. Furnish butt hinges with flat button tips. 2. Provide hinges from one manufacturer. 3. The following are acceptable manufacturers: Hager Hinge Co. Ives NO SUBSTITUTIONS 4. Furnish hinges in size, weight, and finishes listed in hardware set. Where scheduled as BB, provide ball bearing hinges. Oil -impregnated porous metal bearing hinges are not acceptable. B. Continuous -Geared Hinges: 1. Provide continuous gear hinges manufactured of extruded 6063-T6 aluminum alloy with anodized finish, manufactured bo template. 2. Hinges shall be non -handed and shall be a pin -less assembly of three interlocking extrusions applied to the full height of the door and frame. 3. Vertical loads shall be carried on chemically lubricated polyacetal thrust bearings. 4. Provide hinges from one manufacturer. 5. Fasteners shall be stainless steel, plated, and hardened. 6. Where installed on fire rated doors, continuous hinges shall be labeled for this use. 7. The following are acceptable manufacturers: ABH Manufacturing, Inc. Hager Hinge Co. Lawrence Brothers, Inc. McKinney Markar Pemko Manufacturing Co., Inc. Select Products Limited Zero International, Inc. 8. Furnish hinges in size, weight, and finishes listed in hardware set. Hinges with visible knuckle separations are not acceptable. C. Mortise Locks and Trim: 1. Provide mortise locks with three piece anti -friction latch. 2. Provide ASA 47/e" standardized strikes with lips of sufficient length to protect door jambs and trim from damage by latch bolt. 3. Furnish strikes with steel wrought boxes. DOOR HARDWARE VLK Architects, 2007 08 7100 - 2 2740.00 Creekview Elementary School College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas 4. Lock trim and rose shall be cast or solid wrought material. 5. The following are acceptable products: NT Falcon Lock M Series DN NO SUBSTITUTIONS 6. Provide mortise lock in functions as listed in hardware sets. 7. Locks and trim shall be from the same manufacturer. 8. All locksets shall be provided with a mortise cylinder. D. Removable Core Cylinders: Provide Falcon Locking System removable cores at cylinders for locks at all exit devices, for cylinder dogging, and at all other locks requiring cylinder cores. NO SUBSTITUTIONS. E. Exit Devices: 1. Provide exit devices in functions as listed in hardware sets and with cylinder dogging, including cylinder cores. 2. Provide exit devices with stainless steel touch pads. 3. Provide recessed metal strikes where floor and head strikes are scheduled. 4. For mortise exit devices, furnish strikes with wrought boxes. 5. Provide and install exit devices with sex nuts and bolts. 6. Provide two stabilizers per door. 7. Fire Exit Devices: Complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency for fire and panic protection, based on testing according to UL 305 and NFPA 252. 8. Removable Mullions: All mullions shall be Arrow Series S21 2" x 3" Steel Tubular Mullion. 9. Provide full -height rod and latch guard protectors as scheduled. 10. The following are acceptable products: Arrow S3600, S3700, S3800, or S3900 series; in functions and finishes as listed in hardware sets. Door Closers: 1. Provide door closers with a 50% power adjustment and adjustable backcheck. 2. Provide and install door closers with sex nut and bolts. 3. Do not install on the outside of exterior dons nor on the corridor side of room doors. Install door closers so that the arm is not visible on the public side of the door. 4. Whenever it is necessary to install a closer on the side of the door away from the hinges, use parallel arm, regardless of model number specified. 5. All closers shall have full covers. Door closer covers shall be attached with a minimum of two screws. Snap -on covers will not be acceptable. 6. All exterior closers and high traffic closers are required to have extra -duty arms, "EDA" Cush with Hole Open. 7. Provide all necessary brackets and adaptor plates for a complete installation. 8. Door closers shall be installed to allow for 180° swing. 9. Provide door closers from one manufacturer. 10. The following are acceptable products: All Closers LCN Closers 4041 series H CUSH NO SUBSTITUTIONS G. Door Pulls and Push Bars: 1. Push and pull bars shall be through bolted or back -to- back mounted as conditions require. 2. Where through bolts are required, provide a cap of the same color for the head of the exposed bolt. 3. Color: US32D. 4. Acceptable Manufacturers: Quality. H. Push, Pull, and Kick Plates: 1. Provide plates in 0.050" thick stainless steel with countersunk flat -head screws and four edges beveled. 2. Attach pulls with through bolts. 3. Provide kick plates 2" less door width. 4. Acceptable Manufacturers: Accent Div. Hager Hinge Co. Baldwin Hardware Corp. H.B. Ives Trimco Builders Hardware I. Overhead Stops: 1. Provide solid brass or bronze units at exterior and interior vestibule doors. DOOR HARDWARE VLK Architects, 2007 08 7100 - 3 2740.00 Creekview Elementary School College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas 2. Acceptable Manufacturers: ABH Manufacturing, Inc. Glynn -Johnson Rixson-Firemark Yale Security, Inc. Door Stops: 1. Floor Stops: a. Floor stops shall be solid cast brass or bronze. b. Furnish and install floor stops with machine screws and expansion shield. c. As conditions require, provide necessary carpet risers. 2. Acceptable Manufacturers: Accent Div. Hager Hinge Co. Baldwin Hardware Corp. H.B. Ives Trimco Builders Hardware K. Door Bolts: 1. Surface Bolts: Minimum of 1/2-inch diameter rods of brass, bronze, orstainless steel with minimum 12-inch long rod for doors up to 84 inches in height. Provide longer rods for doors exceeding 84 inches. 2. Flush Bolts: Manual design, minimum 5/8" throw. Equip with extension bolts of lengths to locate operating mechanism at 12 inches above floor for bottom unit and not over 72 inches above floor for top unit. Provide dust -proof strikes without thresholds. 3. Acceptable Manufacturers: ABH Manufacturing, Inc. Glynn -Johnson Hager Companies H.B. Ives Rockwood Mfg. Co., Inc. Trimco L. Fasteners: 1. Furnish necessary screws, bolts, and other fasteners of suitable size and type to anchor the hardware in position for long life under hard use. 2. Where necessary, furnish fasteners with toggle bolts, expansion shields, sex bolts, and other anchors, appropriate for the material to which the hardware is to be applied and according to the recommendations of the hardware manufacturer. 3. Fasteners shall be packaged with hardware. 4. Provide fasteners of the same material and finish as the hardware. 2.02 KEYING REQUIREMENTS A. Construction Cylinders and Cores: During construction, cylinders shall be keyed alike. Under no circumstances shall the Contractor receive any of the permanent building masterkeys or change keys. Upon completion of the building, the hardware supplier shall install the permanent key system. 1. All cylinders shall be keyed at the Falcon Factory. All cores shall be Factory Grandmaster keyed as instructed by the school district. Stamp change keys with key set symbol. All change keys and master keys shall be shipped directly to the school district. 2. Furnish construction coresat all doors. Furnish conventional and high -security cylinders as specified under hardware sets. B. Master -key locks in one set. Furnish 3 Grandmaster keys, 9 master keys, and 3 change keys for each lock. 1. Keys shall be nickel silver and shall be identified as to location by tagging before delivery to the Owner. 2. Individual keying shall be in accordance with the Owner's wishes and generally shall be as follows. a. Kitchen doors keyed alike (keyed to district kitchen schedule). b. Exterior doors to lobbies, corridors, and stairs keyed alike. c. Doors to any one room keyed alike. d. Doors to each separate room keyed separately. e. Keys to closets and storage rooms to pass other doors in the room where located, but not the reverse. f. Group toilet areas shall be keyed alike to mechanical equipment rooms and custodial area. 3. Hardware supplier shall coordinate with the Owner and the lock manufacture forthe purpose of determining the specific building keying system. The hardware supplier shall be responsible for installing the permanent cylinders as directed by the Owner. C. Key Cabinet: Provide key cabinet and complete two -tag key control system, mounted as directed. Provide Lund Deluxe No. 1204 as manufactured by Lund Equipment Co., Inc. DOOR HARDWARE VLK Architects, 2007 08 7100 - 4 2740.00 Creekview Elementary School College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas 2.03 FINISHES A. Comply with base material and finish requirements indicated by the following: 1. Hinges, exterior US32D 2. Hinges, interior US26D 3. Continuous geared hinges US28 4. Locksets US26D 5. Exit Devices US26D x US32D touch bar 6. Closers SBL 7. Push Bars, metal US32D 8. Pulls, metal US32D 9. Push Plates, metal US32D 10. Kick Plates US32D 11. Flush Bolts US26D 12. Dustproof Strike US26D 13. Stops US26D 14. Overhead Stops US26D 2.04 WEATHERSTRIPPING, SOUND SEALS, SMOKE SEALS, AND THRESHOLDS A. Provide weatherstripping, sound seals, smoke seals, and thresholds as manufactured by one of the following: Hager Companies National Guard Products, Inc. Pemko Mfg. Co. Reese Weatherstripping & Thresholds Zero International, Inc. B. Materials: 1. Extruded Aluminum: Alloy 6063-T5, and compatible with specified finish. 2. Rolled Aluminum: Alloy 5052-1-114, mill finish. 3. Gasketing: UL or Warnock Hersey approved material. 4. Fasteners: Stainless steel, cadmium plated steel, or hard aluminum. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Fit and install hardware on doors in conformance with the following hardware schedule. Hardware shall be installed by tradesmen skilled in the application of commercial grade hardware. 1. Provide properly sized and accurately located mortises and drilled holes forhardware on wood doors, using appropriate jigs, templates and power equipment. 2. Metal frames shall be drilled and tapped accurately. 3. Fit hardware accurately, remove until painter's finish is applied, and then replace and adjust 4. Ensure that operating parts move freely and smoothly without binding, sticking, or excessive clearance. 5. Position and install the various hardware items on doors to agree with the locations specified, or as may be specifically detailed. 6. Floor stops in areas to be carpeted shall be installed directly on the concrete surface before the carpet is installed. 7. Keep levers and pulls covered with heavy cloth or plastic wraps until final acceptance of the building. Upon completion, leave hardware clean, undamaged, and in proper working order. B. Weatherstripping, Smoke Seals, and Sound Seals: Install weatherstripping, smoke seals, and sound seals along both jambs and across the head of each door in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. 1. Fit tightly at corners for continuity. 2. Adjust so that doorcloser can fully close and latch dooragainst pressure of weatherstripping, smoke seals, and sound seals. 3. Install astragals at pairs of doors in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 4. Door Bottom Seals: a. Attach door bottom seals to lower edge of exterior doors. b. Mount UL rated automatic door bottom in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Adjust for desired drop and install end cover plate to lock adjustment in place. 5. Install thresholds at all exterior doors in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Set thresholds for exterior and acoustical doors in full bed of sealant. DOOR HARDWARE VLK Architects, 2007 08 7100 - 5 2740.00 Creekview Elementary School College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas 3.02 HARDWARE LOCATIONS A. Locate hardware for doors as follows, unless specifically detailed otherwise: Locks and Latches Push Plates Pulls (interior) Push/pull (exterior/vestibule) Deadlocks (with Locks & Latches) Deadlocks (with Push/Pull) Panic Hardware Hinges 3.03 ADJUST AND CLEAN 40" (t1 ") floor to centerline of strike. 45" from floor to centerline of plate. 43" from floor to centerline of grip. 38" from floor to centerline of push bar and pull. 48" from floor to centerline of cylinder. 37" from floor to centerline of cylinder. 38" from floor to centerline of cross bar. Manufacturer's standard locations. A. Adjust and clean the operating hardware at each door. Lubricate parts with lubricant recommended by manufacturer (graphite type, if no other recommended). Replace units which cannot be adjusted to operate freely and smoothly. 3.04 HARDWARE SCHEDULE A. This schedule is intended to include hardware required. Verify doors shown and scheduled on the drawings with doors listed in this schedule. In the event of omissions in the schedule, furnish hardware of the kind, quantity, and quality scheduled for similar locations. Hardware for a complete installation is required, whether specifically mentioned herein or not 02. Designations in hardware schedule are taken from the following manufacturers: Adams -Rite (AR) National Guard Products (NG) Arrow (A) Quality (Q) Hager (H) Rixson-Firemark (R) Falcon (F) Schlage (SC) Glynn -Johnson (G) Trimco (T) LCN (L) Von Duprin (V) Lund (LU) Hardware Set No. 1: [ext. single aluminum doors w/fixed mullion] Doors No. A102A, A102B, A137A, A13713, 6103A, 610313, C102A, C10213, C137A, C137B, D101A, D1016, D101C, D101D, D158A, D15813; each door shall receive: 1 continuous geared hinge 1 exit device 1 rim cylinder 2 sets stabilizers 1 door closer 1 exterior stop 1 bottom rail weatherstripping 1 threshold 780-112HD (H) S3803 x IC x SP-03 x TB (A) C953 (F) 154 (V) 4041 x H CUSH (L) 269F (H) 200NA (NG) 564 P Hardware Set No. 2: (non -rated classroom) Doors No. A101, A103, A104, A106, A107, A109, A110, A112, A123, A131, A132, A133, A135, A136, A138, B101, B104, B106, B108, B109, B112, B122, B125, B126, B129, B131, B136, B138A, B138B, B140, C101, C103, C104, C106, C107, C109, C118, C121, C131, C132, C133, C135, C136, C138, D112A, D11213, D117A, D11713, D121, D134; each door shall receive: 1 '/2 pair hinges BB1279 4% x 4% 1 lockset M431 x DN (F) 1 floor stop 259F (H) Hardware Set No. 3: (non -rated; office, storage <100 sq ft; self -closing) Doors No. A111, A122, B128, B130, C120; each door shall receive: 1 '/2 pair hinges BB1168 4'/2 x 4% (H) 1 lockset M561 x DN (F) 1 door closer 4041 x H CUSH' (L) 1 floor stop 259F (H) DOOR HARDWARE VLK Architects, 2007 08 7100 - 6 2740.00 Creekview Elementary School College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas Hardware Set No. 4: (faculty toilet; secure; self -closing) Doors No. A113, A124, B119, C116, C122, D156, D157; each door shall receive: 1 '/I pair hinges BB1168 4'/2 x 4'/2 (H) 1 lockset M711 x DN (F) 1 door closer (delete at D156, D157) 4041 x H CUSH (L) 1 lever thumb turn XL1100-800 (SC) 1 floor stop 259F (H) Hardware Set No. 5: (toilet; non -locking) Doors No. B102A, 6102B, B105A, B105B, B110, B113, B123, B132, B137, C119, D120; each door shall receive: 1 '/2 pair hinges BB1279 4Ys x 4'/z (H) 1 latchset M101 x DN (F) 1 overhead stop 904S (G) Hardware Set No. 6: (non -rated; storage) Doors No. B127, B133, C130, D105, D109, D131, D153; each door shall receive: 1 '/2 pair hinges BB1279 4'/z x 4'/2 (H) 1 lockset M581 x DN (F) 1 floor stop 259F (H) Hardware Set No. 7: (electrical room) Doors No. A118, 13121A, C110, D125, D143B; each door shall receive: 1 '/2 pair hinges BB1168 4'/z x 4'/z (H) 1 exit device S3803 x IC x SP-03 x TB (A) 1 rim cylinder C953 (F) 1 door closer 4041 x H CUSH (L) 1 floor stop 259F (H) Hardware Set No. 8: (ext. pair aluminum w/removable mullion) Doors No. A121, C115, D122, D13713; each pair of doors shall receive: 2 continuous geared hinges 780-112HD (H) 2 exit devices S3803 x IC x SP-03 x TB (A) 2 rim cylinders C953 (F) 4 sets stabilizers 154 (V) 2 closers 4041 x H CUSH (L) 1 removable mullion S21 (A) 2 exterior stops 269F (H) 2 bottom rail weatherstripping 200NA (NG) 1 threshold 564 (Z) Hardware Set No. 9: (ext. storage >100 sq ft) Door No. A130; each door shall receive: 1 '/2 pair hinges BB1199 4'/z x 4'/z NRP (H) 1 lockset M561 x DN (F) 1 door closer 4041 x H CUSH (L) 1 overhead stop 904S (G) 1 overhead rain drip 16A (NG) 1 set head &jamb weatherstripping 130SA (NG) 1 bottom rail weatherstripping 200NA (NG) 1 threshold 564 (Z) DOOR HARDWARE VLK Architects, 2007 08 7100 - 7 2740.00 Creekview Elementary School College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas Hardware Set No. 10: (music room >50) Doors No. D133A, D1336; each door shall receive: 1 continuous geared hinge 780-224HD (H) 1 exit device S3803 x IC x SP-03 x TB (A) 1 rim cylinder C953 (F) 1 door closer 4041 x H CUSH (L) 1 kick plate K0050 12" x 2" LDW (T) 1 floor stop 259F (H) 1 set head and jamb sound seals 107NA (NG) 1 automatic door bottom 420NA (NG) 1 carpet edge/threshold 417 (NG) Hardware Set No. 11: [single aluminum doors to Serving Line] Doors No. D138A, D138C; each door shall receive: 1 continuous geared hinge 780-112HD (H) 1 deadbolt/latch lock MS-1890-4 x 4569 x 628 (AR) 1 strike plate 4505 x 628, mortised (AR) 2 mortise cylinders C985 (F) 1 door closer 4041 (L) 1 door pull 484-B to B (Q) 1 stop/holder 258F (H) Hardware Set No. 12: [pair aluminum doors to Serving Line] Door No. D138B; each pair of doors shall receive: 2 continuous geared hinges 780-112HD (H) 1 deadbolt lock MS 1 850S-4-050 x 628 (AR) 1 strike plate 4000 x 628, mortised (AR) 2 mortise cylinders C985 (F) 2 door pulls 484-B to B (Q) 2 flush bolts' Kawneer Flush Bolt' (Kawneer) 2 stop/holders 258F (H) 'Note: Flush bolts provided by door manufacturer. Hardware Set No. 13: [classroom; library >50) Doors No. B114, 13134A, B134B, B134C, 13134D, D160; each door shall receive: 1 continuous geared hinge 780-224HD (H) 1 exit device S3803 x IC x SP-03 x TB (A) 1 rim cylinder C953 (F) 1 door closer 4041 x H CUSH (L) 1 kick plate K0050 12" x 2" LDW (T) 1 floor stop 259F (H) Hardware Set No. 14: [single aluminum reception] Doors No. D102A, D10213, D158C, D158D; each door shall receive: 1 continuous geared hinge 780-112HD (H) 1 exit device S3803 x IC x SP-03 x TB (A) 1 rim cylinder C953 (F) 1 door closer 4041 x H CUSH (L) 1 floor stop 259F (H) Hardware Set No. 15: [pair aluminum w/o mull] Doors No. D123, D136, D137A; each pair shall receive: 2 continuous geared hinges 780-112HD (H) 2 exit devices S3608 x SLOB x IC x TB (A) 2 rim cylinders C953 (F) 2 door closers 4041 x H CUSH (L) 2 floor stops 259F (H) DOOR HARDWARE VLK Architects, 2007 08 7100 - 8 2740.00 Creekview Elementary School College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas Hardware Set No. 16: [fire -rated cross -corridor w/electro-mag holder opens] Doors No. B141, D159; each pair shall receive: 2 continuous geared hinges 780-224-HD (H) 2 exit devices FS3708 x SL08 x IC x TB (A) 2 rim cylinders C953 (F) 1 mortise cylinder C985 (F) 2 door closers 4041 x EDA (L) 2 electromagnetic hold opens 993 less push-button release (RF) 1 keyed switch K5920 NIL (V) 2 kick plates K0050 12" x 2" LDW (T) 2 floor stops 259F (H) 1 set fire/smoke seals 9500/130SA (colors as selected) (NG) 1 set astragal smoke seals 125NA (NG) 1 astragal intumescent seal 9500 (color as selected) (NG) NOTE: Electromagnetic hold -open to be interlocked with the fire alarm system to release upon signal of alarm or by keyed switch. Hardware Set No. 17: [non -rated cross -corridor w/holder opens] Doors No. B124, C125; each pair shall receive: 2 continuous geared hinges 2 exit devices 2 rim cylinders 1 mortise cylinder 2 door closers 2 kick plates 2 floor stop/holders 780-224-H D S3708 x SL08 x IC x TB C953 C985 4041 x H CUSH K0050 12" x 2" LDW 268F Hardware Set No. 18: [non -rated pair gym] Doors No. D148A; each pair shall receive: 2 continuous geared hinges 2 exit devices 2 rim cylinders 2 door closers 2 kick plates 780-224-HD S3708 x SL08 x IC x TB C953 4041 x H CUSH K0050 12" x 2" LDW Hardware Set No. 19: (toilet; clinic isolation) Door No. D119; each door shall receive: (H) (A) (F) (F) (L) (T) (H) (H) (A) (F) (L) (T) 1 '/2 pair hinges BB1279 4'/2 x 4% (H) 1 latchset M101 x DN (F) 1 floor stop 259F (H) Hardware Set No. 20: (non -rated office) Doors No. D103, D104, D106, D108, D110, D111, D115, D118, D144, D154; each door shall receive: 1 '/2 pair hinges BB1279 4'/2 x 4% (H) 1 lockset M521 x DN (F) 1 floor stop 259F (H) Hardware Set No. 21: (smoke -rated; pair storage) Doors No. D124, D149; each pair of doors shall receive: 3 pair hinges BB1168 4'/z x 4'/2 (H) 1 lockset M561 x DN (F) 1 door closer 4041 x CUSH (L) 2 flush bolts 3915 x 12" rod (T) 1 dustproof strike 3910 (T) 2 floor stops 259F (H) 1 set smoke seals 130SA (NG) 1 set astragal smoke seals 125NA (NG) DOOR HARDWARE VLK Architects, 2007 08 7100 - 9 2740.00 Creekview Elementary School College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas Hardware Set No. 22: [single wood reception] Doors No. D102C; each door shall receive: 1 continuous geared hinge 780-224HD (H) 1 exit device S3803 x IC x SP-03 x TB (A) 1 rim cylinder C953 (F) 1 door closer 4041 x H CUSH (L) 1 floor stop 259F (H) Hardware Set No. 23: (non -rated classroom; wide) Door No. D127; each door shall receive: 1 '/2 pair hinges BB1279 5 x 4'/z (H) 1 lockset M431 x DN (F) 1 overhead stop 904S (G) Hardware Set No. 24: (group toilet) Doors No. D150, D151; each door shall receive: 1 continuous geared hinge 780-224HD (H) 1 deadlock M911 (F) 1 door closer 4041 x H CUSH (L) 1 push plate 1001 - 3 CFC (T) 1 pull 1017 - 3 CFC (T) 1 kick plate KOO50 12" x 2" LDW (T) 1 heavy duty floor stop 269F (H) Hardware Set No. 25: (overhead coiling door) Doors No. D147; each door shall receive: 2 mortise cylinders C985 (F) Remainder of hardware by door manufacturer. Hardware Set No. 26: (laundry; o.h. stop) Doors No. D145; each door shall receive: 1 continuous geared hinge 780-224HD (H) 1 deadlock M911 (F) 1 lever thumb turn XL1100-800 (SC) 1 door closer 4041 x H CUSH (L) 1 push plate 1001 - 3 CFC (T) 1 pull 1017 - 3 CFC (T) 1 kick plate KOO50 12" x 2" LDW (T) 1 overhead stop* 904S (G) *Note: Coordinate overhead stop with closer. Hardware Set No. 27: (ext. HM exit only) Doors No. D148B, D148C; each door shall receive: 1 '/2 pair hinges BB1199 4'/z x 4'/Z NRP (H) 1 exit device S3903 x TB (A) 1 door closer 4041 x H CUSH (L) 1 exterior stop 269F (H) 1 overhead rain drip 16A (NG) 1 set head &jamb weatherstripping 130SA (NG) 1 bottom rail weatherstripping 200NA (NG) 1 threshold 564 M DOOR HARDWARE VLK Architects, 2007 08 7100 - 10 2740.00 Creekview Elementary School College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas Hardware Set No. 28: (ext. Kitchen) Door No. D139A; each door shall receive: 1 continuous geared hinge 1 exit device 1 mortise cylinder 1 door closer 1 view port 1 armor plate 1 exterior stop 1 set head &jamb weatherstripping 1 bottom rail weatherstripping 1 threshold 780-224HD S3908 x SL08 x IC x TB C985 4041 x H CUSH 1756 KA050-2 36" x LDW 269F 130SA 200NA 564 Hardware Set No. 29: (e)t. mechanical room) Door No. D161; each pair of doors shall receive: 3 pair hinges 1 lockset 2 flush bolts 1 dustproof strike 2 exterior stops 1 overhead rain drip 1 set head &jamb weatherstripping 1 bottom rail weatherstripping 1 threshold 13131191 4% x 4% NRP M571 x DN 3915 x 12" rod 3910 269F 16A 130SA 200NA 564 Hardware Set No. 30: (ext. electrical) Door No. D143A; each door shall receive: 1 '/2 pair hinges 1 exit device 1 mortise cylinder 1 door closer 1 exterior stop 1 overhead rain drip 1 set head &jamb weatherstripping 1 bottom rail weatherstripping 1 threshold BB1199 4'/Z x 4'/2 NRP S3908 x SL08 x IC x TB C985 4041 x H CUSH 269F 16A 130SA 200NA 564 (H) (A) (F) (L) (H) (T) (H) (NG) (NG) (Z) (H) (F) (T) (T) (H) (NG) (NG) (NG) M (H) (A) (F) (L) (H) (NG) (NG) (NG) (Z) Hardware Set No. 31: (smoke -rated; storage >100 sq ft) Doors No. A114, A119, A125, B115, B116, B117, B118, B120, 1312113, C111, C117, C123, C129, D126, D130, D132; each door shall receive: 1 '/2 pair hinges BB1168 4'/2 x 4'/Z (H) 1 lockset M561 x DN (F) 1 door closer 4041 x CUSH (L) 1 floor stop 259F (H) 1 set smoke seals 130SA (NG) Hardware Set No. 32: (fire -rated; storage) Doors No. D114; each door shall receive: 1 '/2 pair hinges BB1168 4'/z x 4'/z (H) 1 lockset M561 x DN (F) 1 door closer 4041 x CUSH (L) 1 floor stop 259F (H) 1 set fire/smoke seals 9500/130SA (colors as selected) (NG) DOOR HARDWARE VLK Architects, 2007 08 7100 - 11 2740.00 Creekview Elementary School College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas Hardware Set No. 33: (smoke -rated; dry storage >100 sq ft) Doors No. D140; each door shall receive: 1 '/2 pair hinges BB1168 4'/z x 4'/ (H) 1 lockset M561 x DN (F) 1 door closer 4041 x CUSH (L) 1 floor stop 259F (H) 1 set smoke seals 130SA (NG) 1 kickplate K0050 12" x 2" LDW (T) Hardware Set No. 34: (fire -rated; o.h. stop) Doors No. B139; each door shall receive: 1 '/2 pair hinges BB1168 4'/2 x 4'/z (H) 1 lockset M561 x DN (F) 1 door closer* 4041 x CUSH (L) 1 overhead stop* 904S (G) 1 set fire/smoke seals 9500/130SA (colors as selected) (NG) *Note: Coordinate overhead stop with closer. Hardware Set No. 35: (faculty toilet; non -secure; non -self -closing) Doors No. D146; each door shall receive: 1 'h pair hinges BB1279 4% x 4'/2 (H) 1 lockset M311 x DN (F) 1 lever thumb turn XL1100-800 (SC) 1 floor stop 259F (H) Hardware Set No. 36: (faculty toilet; non -secure; self -closing; o.h. stop) Doors No. D116; each door shall receive: 1 '/7 pair hinges BB1279 4'/2 x 4'/2 (H) 1 lockset M311 x DN (F) 1 door closer* 4041 x H CUSH (L) 1 lever thumb turn XL1100-800 (SC) 1 overhead stop* 904S (G) *Note: Coordinate overhead stop with closer. Hardware Set No. 37: (cased opening) Door No. D139B, D139C: No hardware required. Hardware Set No. 38: 1 key cabinet 1204 (LU) END OF SECTION DOOR HARDWARE VLK Architects, 2007 08 7100 - 12 2740.00 Creekview Elementary School College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas SECTION 08 8000 GLAZING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Glass and glazing accessories. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 06 2000 - Finish Carpentry; display case glass, track, and hardware. 2. Section 07 9200 - Joint Sealants 3. Section 08 1100 - Steel Doors and Frames. 4. Section 08 1400 -Wood Doors. 5. Section 08 1423 - Plastic Faced Wood Doors. 6. Section 08 4113 - Aluminum -framed Entrances and Storefronts. 1.02 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Glass and glazing materials of this Section shall provide continuity of building enclosure vapor and air barrier 1. In conjunction with materials described in SECTION 07 9200 - JOINT SEALANTS. 2. Maintain continuous air and vapor barrier throughout glazed assembly from glass pane to heel bead of glazing sealant. B. Design and size glass to withstand dead loads and live loads caused by pressure and suction of wind as calculated in accordance with building code, and measured in accordance with ASTM E 330. C. Limit glass deflection to 1 /200 or flexure limit of glass with full recovery of glazing materials, whichever is less. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit product data and samples under provisions of SECTION 01 3323 - SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA AND SAMPLES. B. Provide structural, physical and environmental characteristics, size limitations, special handling or installation requirements. C. Provide data on glazing sealant. Identify colors available. D. Samples: 1. Submit 2 samples of each type of glass (except clear glass), 12" x 12" in size, illustrating glass unit, coloration, design. 2. Submit 4" long bead of glazing sealant in color selected. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Glazing Standards: Comply with recommendations of Glass Association of North America (GANA) "Glazing Manual." B. Source Quality Control: Glass shall be identified by the manufacturer's labels of grade and quality. Temporary labels shall not be removed until final cleaning. Permanent labels on tempered glass shall not be removed. C. Safety Glazing Standard: Where safety glass is indicated or required, provide type of products indicated which comply with ANSI Z97.1 and testing requirements of CPSC 16 CFR Part 1201 for Category II materials. D. Fire -Rated Door Assemblies: Assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for fire ratings indicated, based on testing according to NFPA 252. E. Fire -Rated Window Assemblies: Assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for fire ratings indicated, based on testing according to NFPA 257. GLAZING VLK Architects, 2007 08 8000 - 1 2740.00 Creekview Elementary School College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING: A. Protect glass and glazing materials during delivery, storage, and handling as required to prevent edge damage to glass, and damage to glass and glazing materials from effects of moisture including condensation, or temperature changes, and other causes. 1.05 WARRANTY A. Provide written 5-year warranty signed by manufacturer of polycarbonate plastic glazing agreeing to furnish replacements for breakage, yellowing, loss of light transmission, abrasion and coating delamination. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS: A. Provide glass as manufactured by one of the following: General Electric Plastics Guardian Industries Corp. Oldcastle Glass Pilkington Libbey-Owens-Ford PPG Industries, Glass Group Nippon Sheet Glass Co., Ltd. Technical Glass Products Visteon Float Glass Products B. Provide wire glass as manufactured by Safti (phone 888.653.3333 web site www.safti.com) 2.02 GLASS A. Tempered Glass: ASTM C 1048, Type I. 1. Interior: Class 1 (Clear), Quality q3 (Glazing select). Kind FT - Fully Tempered, Condition A - Uncoated surfaces, 114" thickness. 2. Exterior. Class 2-gray tint (Tinted Heat -Absorbing and Light- Reducing), Quality q3 (Glazing select), Kind FT - Fully Tempered, Condition A - Uncoated surfaces, Y." thickness. a. Shading Coefficient: 0.66 t0.05. b. Solar Heat Gain: 0.57 t0.05. B. Wire Glass: Propriety Category II safety glazing product in the form of clear, 1 /4" thick, fire -rated wire glass with safetyfilm applied to meet CPSC 16 CFR 1201, Category 11400 ft. lbs. Product/manufacturer: SuperLite I-W M; Safti, a division of O'Keeffe's, Inc. 1. Each piece of fire -rated glazing material shall be labeled with a permanent logo including name of product, manufacturer, testing laboratory, fire rating period, and safety glazing standards. C. Polycarbonate Plastic: Provide Lexan MR10, clear, polycarbonate plastic glazing, impact and abrasion resistant, UV- resistant, 3/8" thick, as manufactured by General Electric Plastics Structural Products. 3.03 GLAZING MATERIALS A. Glazing Compound: Comply with ASTM C 1311 or FS TT-S-00230, one -part, non -sag acrylic polymeric sealant. Product/manufacturer; one of the following: Acryl-R Acrylic Sealant; Schnee -Moorehead, Inc. Mono 555; Tremco B. Channel Glazing Strips; Hollow Metal Doors and Frames: Provide black vinyl channel glazing strips, Glazing Vinyl for 990 Sliders Part #6062-01 as manufactured by Kawneer. C. Accessories: Setting blocks, tape, vinyl gaskets and spacer strips as required for a complete installation. D. Glazing Sealant for Fire -Resistive Glazing Products: Identical to product used in test assembly to obtain fire -protection rating. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION A. Examine areas to receive glass for conditions that will adversely affect the execution and quality of work. Do not start this work until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. GLAZING VLK Architects, 2007 08 8000 - 2 2740.00 Creekview Elementary School College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Setting Glass: Glazing shall be done at the site by skilled glaziers in conformance with the general conditions governing glazing in the GANA Glazing Manual. 1. Glazing of aluminum windows and storefront shall be done in conformance with the methods recommended by the manufacturer of the aluminum items. Beads or stops furnished with the items to be glazed shall be used to secure the glass in place. 2. For interior hollowmetal door and frameglazing, install channel glazing strips and place glass within glazing strips. Install the removable stop and position the channel glazing strip to seal completely the void around the glass. 3. Verify glass sizes for required edge clearances by measuring the openings. Cut each piece accurately and fit to its particular position. Center glass in the opening vertically and horizontally. Use edge blocks in vertical jambs to prevent lateral "walking" of the glass. 4. Glass shall have clean cut edges. Do not seam, nip, stone or strike edges, or scarf corners, and do not install glass with flared edges at the bottom. Do not bump, drag, or rest the edge of a glass light against metal or other hard objects. 5. Set tempered glass with tong marks completely concealed or in as inconspicuous a location as possible. B. Special requirement for Wire Glass: In fire -rated doors, embed glass in putty with metal stops complying with NFPA 80. 3.03 CLEANING A. Upon completion of the building, clean all glass on both sides and remove labels, paint spots, putty and other defacement. Replace damaged glass with new. END OF SECTION GLAZING VLK Architects, 2007 08 8000 - 3 2740.00 Creek View Elementary School College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas SECTION 08 9100 LOUVERS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Fixed, extruded -aluminum wall louvers. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit in accordance with Section 01 3323. Include manufacturer's installation instructions. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with SMACNA Architectural Sheet Metal Manual recommendations for fabrication, construction details and installation procedures. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURER A. Louver Type: Provide stationary, weatherproof type louvers fabricated of6063-T52 alloy, minimum 0.125" thick, extruded aluminum. Product/ manufacturer; one of the following: Model 4130; Construction Specialties, Inc. Model 455-XP (0.125" thick); Industrial Louvers, Inc. Model EL-302; Louvers & Dampers, Inc. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Aluminum Sheet: ASTM B 209, Alloy 3003 or 5005 with temper as required for forming. B. Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B 221, Alloy 6063-T52. C. Fasteners shall be aluminum. Provide types, gages and lengths to suit unit installation conditions. Use Phillips flat -head machine screws for exposed fasteners. D. Screens: Provide removable screens consisting of U-shaped metal for permanently securing screen mesh. Provide bird screens of 1/4" sq. mesh, 0.063" aluminum. E. Insulated Metal Blank -Off Panel: Provide insulated metal blank -off panel (painted black) at all louver areas not utilized by mechanical ducts at mechanical rooms. F. Aluminum Finish: Fluorocarbon Coating color as selected by architect. 1. Louvers to be finished with an inhibitive thermocured primer, 0.2 mil minimum dry film thickness, and a thermo-cured fluorocarbon coating containing "Kynar 500" resin, 1.0 mil minimum dry film thickness. 2. All aluminum shall be thoroughly cleaned, etched and given a chromated conversion pretreatment before application of the Kynar/Hylar coating. The coating shall receive a bake cycle of 17 minutes at 4500F. 3. All finishing procedures shall be one continuous operation in the plant of the manufacturer. 4. Manufacturer to fumish an extended 20 limited warranty for the Kynar/Hylar coating. This limited warranty shall begin on the date of material shipment PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install the louvers in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. Erect to be straight and plumb with horizontal lines level. The completed installation shall be rigid and weathertight. B. Use concealed anchorages wherever possible. C. Provide concealed gaskets and flashings and install as work progresses to make installations weathertight. END OF SECTION LOUVERS VLK Architects, 2007 08 9100 - 1 2740.00 Creek View Elementary School College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas SECTION 09 2113 PLASTER ASSEMBLIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Furring, lathing, framing and plaster construction. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 05 4000 - Cold -formed Metal Framing. 2. Section 09 9100 - Painting. 1.02 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Fabricate vertical wall and furred space framing to limitfinish surface deflection to U180 under lateral point load of 100 lbs. B. Fabricate horizontal ceiling and soffit framing to limit finish surface to U360 deflection under superimposed dead loads and wind uplift. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit in accordance with SECTION 01 3323 - SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, SAMPLES. B. Product Data: Submit product data with installation instructions. C. Shop Drawings: Submit a diagram of proposed control joint and expansion joint layout prior to starting work. D. Samples: Include color chips for color selection. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform work in accordance with: 1. MUSFA (Metal Lath/Steel Framing Association). 2. PCA (Portland Cement Association) Plaster (Stucco) Manual. 3. Lath & Plaster Systems Manual published by Texas Lathing and Plastering Contractors Association and Texas Bureau for Lath &Plaster. 1.05 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Requirements: In cold weather, maintain the temperature of the building reasonably constant at not less than 55°F. for and adequate period prior to, during, and after the plastering operation. Provide adequate ventilation to dry plaster. B. Protection: Provide protection during plastering for finished door and window frames and other designated areas which do not receive a plaster finish. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Portland Cement ASTM C 150, domestic manufacturer. B. Lime: ASTM C 206, hydrated finishing lime. C. Sand: ANSUASTM C 897 clean, sharp plaster sand. D. Water: Clean and free of deleterious amounts of acids, alkalis, or organic materials. E. Cement Plaster Finish Coat: Mill prepared, water-resistant finish for use over Portland cement base coats; color as selected by Architect. Product/manufacturer; La Habra Exterior Stucco or USG Oriental Exterior Finish Stucco. F. Hangers: No. 8 gage annealed, galvanized wire. PLASTER ASSEMBLIES VLK Architects, 2007 09 2113 - 1 2740.00 Creek View Elementary School College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas G. Tie Wire: No. 16 gage annealed, galvanized wire for channels, No. 18 gage for lath. H. Metal Lath: Diamond -mesh, expanded -metal lath of copper bearing steel, electroplated zinc finish. At exterior vertical work, lath shall be self -furring, "dimpled" at 1'/2" o.c. each way with t/." indentations. Comply with ASTM C 847. 1. 3.4 lb. lath for horizontal work. 2. 2.5 lb. lath for vertical work. 3. 3.4 lb. self -furring lath for exterior vertical work. I. Comer Mesh: Formed galvanized sheet steel; minimum 26 gage thick; expanded flanges shaped to permit complete embedding in plaster; minimum 2" size. J. Strip Mesh: Expanded galvanized metal lath, minimum 26 gage thick; 2" wide x 24" long. K. Channels: 16 gage cold rolled steel, painted. 1. Furring channels; %" x YZ" weighing 300 lbs./M ft. 2. Runner channels; 11/2' x 9/16" weighing 475 lbs./M ft. L. Weather Resistive Barrier: ASTM D 226, Grade D, No. 15 asphalt felt. 2.02 PLASTERING ACCESSORIES A. Provide custom radiused collars at columns, custom curved casing and comer beads, and custom curved reveals as required. The following products are referenced by USG Nos. 1. Corner Beads: No. 1 small -nose corner beads of 26 gage galvanized steel. 2. Casings: No. 66 square expansion casing beads of 24 gage galvanized steel. 3. Control Joints: No. 15 control joint of 26 gage galvanized steel or as shown on the drawings. 4. Expansion Joints: No. 40 adjustable expansion joints of 26 gage galvanized steel. 5. Corner Control Joints: No. 30 expansion joints of 26 gage galvanized steel. B. Reveal Molding: 1. No. RS75-100Vand RS75-50 vented vinyl reveal moldings as manufactured by Vinyl Corp. a Dietrich Metal Framing Co. 2. 'h Keene #40. G90 galvanized coated as manufactured by Keene Products. 2.03 PLASTER BASE COAT MIXES A. Mix and proportion cement plaster in accordance with PCA Plaster (Stucco) Manual and in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Do not re -temper or use material that has partially set. Do not use frozen, caked or lumpy materials. Clean mixer or mixing boxes of set of hardened materials before materials for a new batch are loaded. Mix each batch separately. Thoroughly dry mix materials before adding water. C. Portland Cement For both coats under cement plaster (stucco) finish coat. 1. Scratch coat, by volume: 1 Sack Portland cement 2 Sacks Masonry Cement Nine Cubic Feet Sharp Torpedo Sand 1-1/2 Ibs of 1/2 inch Alkaline Resistant Fiberglass Strands (Add Last) 2. Brown coat, by volume: 1 Sack Portland cement 2 Sacks Masonry Cement 10 Cubic Feet Sharp Torpedo Sand 1-1/2 Ibs of 12 inch Alkaline Resistant Fiberglass Strands (Add Last) Integral Liquid or Powder Waterproofing in Accordance with Manufacturer's Recommendations D. Mix only as much plaster as can be used prior to initial set E. Mix materials dry, to uniform color and consistency, before adding water. F. Protect mixtures from frost, contamination, and evaporation. PLASTER ASSEMBLIES VLK Architects, 2007 09 2113 - 2 2740.00 Creek View Elementary School College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas 2.04 PLASTER FINISH COAT MIXES A. Cement Plaster (18A): Finish coat mix shall be the mill prepared, exterior, colored finish as selected by Architect. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 METAL FURRING AND LATHING A. General: Comply with MUSFA 920, "Guide Specifications for Metal Lathing and Furring", and with requirements of ASTM C 1063. B. Soffits: 1. Space hangers so that each hanger supports a maximum area of 16 sq. ft. Wrap or saddle -tie hangers around the runner channels to prevent twisting. a. Under steel construction, wrap hangers around or clip or bolt hangers to a structural steel member (not steel deck). b. Under bar joists suspend hangers from top chord or from bottom chord at panel points only. c. Under ductwork, employ trapeze system of hangers to support ceiling. Do not suspend hangers from ducts, piping or conduit. 2. Erect runner channels on 4' centers or closer and locate a channel within 4" of each parallel wall. If runner channel spans between hangers are more than 4' but less than 5 ft., use 1.12 lb. 1'/2" runner channels. If spans between hangers are 5' or more, use boxed 1'/2" channels, 2" channels, or heavier as required. 3. Erect furring channels at right angles to runner channels with joints lapped and made at hangers and crossings only. Provide a channel next to each wall. Space %" furring channels on 131/2" centers. Saddle -tie channels to runners with two strands of wire at each crossing. 4. Brace vertical furring channels with horizontal channels on 4' centers where possible. Provide additional bracing and cross -bracing to make all furring rigid and secure. 5. No part of the suspended grillage (main runners and cross furring) shall be permitted to come in contact with abutting masonry walls and partitions. C. Lathing: 1. Apply lath with the lengths of the sheets at right angles to supports. Side laps and end laps shall be 1", with end laps staggered and made at supports only. Tie all laps 6" o.c. and tie to each channel at 6" o.c. 2. Break lath behind the control joints in cement plaster surfaces. D. Accessories: 1. Install corner beads on projecting plaster corners. Set beads straight and parallel with building lines. 2. Install casings where detailed and in all places where plaster abuts metal, masonry and other dissimilar materials. 3. Install control joints in cement plaster surfaces complying with the following criteria and as acceptable to Architect. Make up control joints with adjustable expansion joints set with a 1/8" gap. Extend control joints through corner beads and casings to isolate the areas. a. Where an expansion or control joint occurs in substrate. b. At not more than 10' in either direction. c. Where area of Portland cement panel exceed 100 sq. ft. 4. Install reveal molding where detailed, at soffits and furrings. 5. Install corner expansion joints at intersections of plastered interior partitions with plastered exterior walls. 6. Install foundation weep screed at bottom of all vertical plaster surfaces. E. Grounds: Set grounds and casings at 1" for three coats of plaster except for fireproofing plaster. 3.02 APPLICATION - GENERAL A. Apply plaster in accordance with ASTM C 926, PCA Plaster Manual, and manufacturer's instructions. Utilize most stringent requirements if conflicts exist. B. Apply plaster by machine or hand. Interrupt plaster only at junctions of plaster planes, at openings or at control joints. C. Layout to permit completion of an entire surface in one application. Maintain a wet edge. Work to corners and joints, and do not allow material to set up within a distinct wall area. D. Interrupt plaster at control joints. Tool through second and finish coat to produce "V" joint at intersection of frames and other items of metal or wood which act as plaster grounds. PLASTER ASSEMBLIES VLK Architects, 2007 09 2113 - 3 2740.00 Creek View Elementary School College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas E. Nominal Plaster Thicknesses SOFFITS 1. First Coat: 3/8"' 2. Second Coat: 1/4" 3. Third Coat: 1/8"" 3.03 APPLICATION OF PLASTER BASE COATS A. Scratch Coat: On lath, apply scratch coat with sufficient pressure to obtain good key and to lightly cover the lath. Roughen for bond and allow to cure 24 hours. Damp cure scratch coats at least 48 hours. B. Brown Coat: Apply brown coat with pressure, bring up to grounds, work with straight edges, and rod to straight, true surfaces. Broom or scratch for bond. Damp cure at least 48 hours. 3.04 APPLICATION OF PLASTER FINISH COAT A. Cement Plaster: Mix and apply the mill prepared finish coat in conformance with the manufacturer's directions. The cement plaster shall have a uniform sand texture finish. 3.05 ADJUSTING A. Upon completion, point -up plaster around trim and other locations where plaster meets dissimilar materials. B. Apply fog coat to integral color plaster to ensure uniform color. C. Cut out and patch defective or damaged plaster. Cut out and patch stained or discolored finish plaster. D. Match patch of defective or damaged plaster to existing work in form, texture and color. E. Obtain Architect's acceptance of plaster color and texture prior to scaffold removal. 3.06 TOLERANCES A. Maximum variation from true flatness: Ma" in Was measured with a straightedge placed at any location on the surface. 3.07 PATCHING A. Patch defects in workmanship and materials. Patches in finished areas shall match adjacent surfaces. END OF SECTION PLASTER ASSEMBLIES VLK Architects, 2007 09 2113 - 4 2740.00 Creek View Elementary School College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas SECTION 09 2116 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Metal stud wall framing. 2. Furred wall framing. 3. Metal channel ceiling framing. 4. Gypsum board partitions, ceilings, and furrings 5. Finishing of panel joints. 6. Exterior sheathing. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 05 4000 - Cold -Formed Metal Framing: exterior wall studs. 2. Section 07 2100 - Building Insulation: acoustical insulation. 3. Section 09 3013 - Ceramic Tiling: backer board at shower areas. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit in accordance with Section 013323 - SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, SAMPLES. Submit materials list of items proposed to be provided, manufacturer's data indicating compliance with specified requirements, and manufacturers recommended installation procedures. B. Submit diagrams of proposed control joint and expansion joint layout prior to starting work. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Tolerances for Drywall: Do not exceed a variation of 1/8" in 8'-0" and 1/16" in 4'-0" from plumb, level, and flat (all directions) and do not exceed 1/16" offset of planes at joints between panels. Shim panels as necessary to comply with tolerances. B. Perform Work in accordance with ASTM C 840, GA-201, GA-216 and GA-600. 1.04 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Requirements: In cold weather, maintain the temperature of the building reasonably constant at no less than 55° F. during gypsum panel application and joint finishing. Provide adequate ventilation to carry off excess moisture. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, HANDLING A. Deliver, store, handle, and protect products in conformance with manufacturer's instructions and in accordance with Section 016500 - PRODUCT DELIVERY REQUIREMENTS and Section 016600 - PRODUCT STORAGE AND HANDLING REQUIREMENTS. B. Store inside building, on sleepers, and out of water. 1.06 QUALIFICATIONS A. Applicator: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum three years documented experience. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Gypsum Board (20A): ASTM C 36. Provide Type X fire -rated; 48"w x 5/8" thick by maximum permissible length gypsum board with tapered edges. Product/manufacturer, one of the following: ToughRock Fireguard Gypsum Board: G-P Gypsum Corp. Fire -Shield Gypsum Wallboard; National Gypsum Co. Type X Gypsum Wallboard; Temple-Inland Forest Products Corp. Sheetrock Brand Firecode Core Gypsum Panel; United States Gypsum Co. GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES VLK Architects, 2007 09 2116 - 1 2740.00 Creek View Elementary School College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas B. Water -Resistant Gypsum Board: ASTM C 630. Provide Type X fire -rated, 48"w x 5/8" thick by maximum permissible length gypsum board with tapered edges. Gypsum board to be covered with ceramic tile in toilets, EWC alcoves, and other wet areas (except showers) shall be specially processed moisture -resistant gypsum board. Product/manufacturer; one of the following: ToughRock Fireguard Moisture -Guard; G-P Gypsum Corp. Fire -Shield MR Gypsum Board; National Gypsum Co. Type X Water -Resistant Gypsum Wallboard; Temple-Inland Forest Products Corp. Sheetrock Brand Water -resistance Firecode; United States Gypsum Co. C. Gypsum Tile Backer Board: Refer to Section 09 3013 - CERAMIC TILING for gypsum tile backer board to be used as a substrate for ceramic wall tile at shower areas. D. Gypsum Sheathing: 1. Glass -Mat Gypsum Sheathing: ASTM C 1177, 4' x 8' x 1/2" thick water-resistant treated core with glass mats front and back. Provide Dens -Glass Gold Exterior Guard as manufactured by G-P Gypsum Corp. a. Joint Tape: 2" wide, 10 x 10 glass mesh tape. b. Joint Compound: G-P Corporation GyProc 90 setting -type joint compound. E. Studs: ASTM C 645. Non-loadbearing channel type roll -formed from minimum 25 gage electro- or hot -dipped galvanized steel. 1. Provide 18 gage studs, per SECTION 05 4000 - COLD -FORMED METAL FRAMINQ at all X-bracing. F. Furring, Framing and Accessories: Provide in conformance with ASTM C 645, GA-216, and GA-600 and as follows: 1. Cold Rolled Channels: 3/4", 1-1/2" and 2" x 9/16", 16 gage, steel channels prime painted. 2. Furring Channels: ASTM 645, 7/8" deep x 1-1/4" face, roll -formed from 25 gage electro-galvanized steel and furnished with galvanized wire clips. 3. Resilient Furring: 7/8" deep x 1-1/4" face, 25 gage, galvanized with one leg attached only, Style RC-1. G. Fasteners: ASTM C 514 for nails and C 1002 for screws as follows: 1. Inserts, clips, bolts, nails or other screws as recommended by wallboard manufacturer, of type and size to suit application and to rigidly secure materials in place. 2. Self -drilling, self -tapping bugle head screws for use with power drive tool. 3. Screws: Drywall Screws, Type S Bugle Head. 4. Metal framing to structure: Power driven screw fasteners to withstand 190 lb. single shear resistance and 200 lb. bearing force when drive through structural head or base and without exceeding allowable design stress in runner, fastener, or structural support. 5. Metal to metal: 3/8", Type S or S-12, pan head screws. 6. Gypsum board to sheet metal application: Type S Bugle Head screws. 7. Gypsum board to gypsum board application: Type G screws. H. Adhesive: Utilize adhesive meeting requirements of GA-216 over metal framing. Accessories: 1. Runners: ASTM C 645, channel type sections roll -formed from electro-galvanized steel with unhemmed edges. Same gage as studs with which used. 2. Hangers: No. 8 gage annealed, galvanized wire. 3. Tie Wire: No. 16 gage annealed, galvanized wire. 4. Trim: Galvanized steel comer reinforcements, edge trim angles and casings; USG No. 200 series. 5. Reinforcing Tape: 2-3/16" minimum width, cross laminated, spark perforated fiber tape. 6. Joint Compound: Quick -drying, polyindurate-type, pre -fill material. 7. Joint Topping: Vinyl base all-purpose finishing material. 8. Acoustical Sealant: A one -part acrylic base sealant designed for use with drywall construction. 9. Edge Sealant: USG Sheetrock Brand W/R Sealant for use in high -moisture room areas. 10. Control Joints: Roll -formed zinc control joints with 1/4" slot (USG #093) 11. Asphalt Roofing Cement: ASTM D 4586, Type II, asbestos free. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Workmanship: The completed gypsum wallboard surfaces shall be smooth, level or plumb, and acceptable to the finish material applicators. All joint treatment on exposed wallboard shall be invisible after painting. B. Ceiling Furring: 1. Install in accordance with ASTM C 754, GA-201, GA-216, and GA-600 and manufacturer's instructions. GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES VLK Architects, 2007 09 2116 - 2 2740.00 Creek View Elementary School College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas 2. Space ceiling hangers 48" o.c. along runner channels and within 6" of ends of channel runs. Wrap or saddle -tie hangers around the runner channels to prevent twisting. a. Under steel construction, wrap hangers around or clip or bolt hangers to a structural steel member (not steel deck). b. Under bar joists suspend hangers from top chord or from bottom chord at panel points only. c. Under ductwork, employ trapeze system of hangers to support ceiling. Do not suspend hangers from ducts, piping or conduit 3. Erect runner channels at 48" o.c. maxamum and locate a channel within 4" of each parallel wall. Level channels with hangers taut and do not make kinks or bends in the hangers as a means of leveling. At channel splices, overlap ends 12" with flanges interlocked; secure each end with tie wire. 4. Erect furring channels at 16" o.c. for 1/2" thick gypsum or 24" o.c. for 5/8" thick gypsum board and at right angles to runner channels or main support members; secure with clips or saddle -tie to supports with tie wire. Make end splices by nesting channels 8" and wire tying each end. 5. At light troffers or other openings that interrupt the runner or furring channels, install additional reinforcing to restore lateral stability of the grillage. 6. No part of the suspended grillage (main runners and cross furring) shall be permitted to come in contact with abutting masonry walls and partitions. C. Wall Furring: For gypsum wallboard over masonry, space furring channels vertically at 24" o.c. maximum and attach with power driven anchors through alternate wing flanges (staggered), spaced 24" o.c. Make end splices with 8" nested laps anchored to wall with two fasteners in each wing. Where necessary, install furring with adjustable furring brackets and 1/2" x 3/4" steel channels to which the furring channels shall be clipped or tied. D. Partitions: 1. Follow recommendations of U.S. Gypsum Co., "Gypsum Construction Handbook". 2. Install studding in accordance with ASTM C 754, GA-201, GA-216, and GA-600. 3. Erect partitions with studs aligned to be plumb and true. Anchor studs top and bottom with runners, shoes and clips. 4. Attach floor runners to concrete slabs using shielded screws or power driven fasteners. Locate fasteners at corners and at runner ends and spaced not to exceed 24" o.c. 5. Under drywall ceilings, attach metal runner to ceiling and position studs to engage the ceiling runner. Elsewhere, extend studs above the ceiling and brace securely to the floor or roof structure above with a continuous top runner and channel braces unless specifically detailed otherwise. For fire rated partitions and where specifically detailed or noted, extend studs full height to the floor or roof structure above. Where studs extend more than 24" above finished ceiling line, provide either 5/8" gypsum board on both sides of studs or horizontal bracing at 16" o.c. attached with mechanical fasteners to both flanges of studs. 6. Space studs as shown and noted but not more than 16" o.c. Locate studs not more than 2" from abutting partitions and partition corners. Anchor studs to runner flanges with positive screw engagement where located at corners and at door frame jambs. 7. At door frame jambs of doorways up to 4'-0" wide, double the studs or reinforce with 20 gage steel studs. At jambs of doorways over 4'-0" wide, reinforce with two 20 gage steel studs placed back to back. Fasten reinforcing studs to the anchor clips on each door frame with bolts or screws. Place horizontally over each frame a cut -to -length section of runner track; attach with screws to the adjacent vertical studs. 8. In chase wall construction, set studs opposite each other with the flanges in the same direction and cross brace between the rows of studs with three 12" high pieces of gypsum board or three pieces of metal stud attached to each pair of studs at the quarter points with drive screws. 9. Double the studs at vertical control joints in partitions. 10. Brace partitions to top chord of the structure above with 20 ga. diagonal braces at 4'-0" o.c. minimum. Where floor to structure height exceeds 16'-0", in addition to extending and fastening studs to structure, add 20 ga. stud diagonal braces at 4'-0" o.c. minimum. E. Sealant Application: Caulk those gypsum drywall partitions which have sound attenuation blankets, serving as sound barriers. 1. Apply sealant in two continuous beads underneath runners at the floor and ceiling and where runners are used at partition intersections with dissimilar wall construction. 2. Fill with sealant the grooves around the edges of wallboard at the floor, ceiling, and intersections with dissimilar walls. 3. Caulk fully the openings around all cut-outs at electrical boxes, heating ducts and the like. F. Exterior Walls: Erect the exterior walls as detailed. 1. Glass Mat Gypsum Sheathing: Install exterior sheathing horizontally over the outside face of metal studs (SECTION 054000 - COLD -FORMED METAL FRAMING). Screw -attach sheathing to exterior of each stud with screws spaced 3/8" from ends and edges and approximately 8" o.c. Make all end joints at bearings. Seal joints with joint tape and joint compound. GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES VLK Architects, 2007 09 2116 - 3 2740.00 Creek View Elementary School College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas G. Wallboard Application: 1. Apply gypsum wallboard first to the ceilings and then to the partitions. Use maximum practical lengths to minimize end joints. Fit ends and edges closely but not forced together. 2. For single -layer ceiling application, applywallboard with the long dimension either parallel or at right angles to the framing members. All abutting ends and edges shall occur over framing members, except in horizontal application. Stagger end joints in adjacent rows. 3. For single -layer wall application with a ceiling height of 8'-2" or less, use either the horizontal or the vertical application method. With a ceiling height over 8'-2" and for fire -rated partitions, use only the vertical application method without any exposed horizontal joints. Stagger the vertical joints on opposite sides of a partition. Extend wallboard full height to the floor or roof structure above where so detailed. 4. Fasten wallboard firmly to studs and furring channels with power -driven drywall screws. Gypsum board shall extend to within 1/4" of floor line. Drive screw heads close without cutting the surface paper or fracturing the core. Maximum screw spacing shall be 12" o.c. for ceilings and 16" o.c. for partitions. For fire -rated partitions, maximum spacing shall be 12" o.c. Do not drive screws closer than 3/8" from any edge. 5. For two -layer wall application, apply the base layer of wallboard vertically; attach with screws spaced 16" o.c. Apply the face layer vertically with joints offset 24" from base layer joints; attach with adhesive and 1-5/8" screws spaced 16" o.c. 6. Wallboard joints in single layer or in face layer of two layer applications shall not occur within 12" of the comers of doorframe, window frames, and openings largerthan 12" x 12", unless control joints are installed at the corners. 7. Accurately cut and fit abutting ends, edges and holes for pipes and electrical fixtures. Support the edges of gypsum wallboard at cutouts and openings. 8. Reinforce exposed external corners with metal corner reinforcement. 9. Where wallboard surfaces abut dissimilar intersecting surfaces such as metal and masonry, trim the meeting edge with a metal trim angle held approximately 1/4" away from the intersecting surface. Caulk the joint full with sealant; tool smooth. 10. After application, check all gypsum wallboard for loose fasteners; drive tight any found loose. H. Control Joints: 1. Isolate gypsum wallboard surfaces with control joints where specifically detailed and where the following conditions •exist: a. Partition or furring run exceeds 30 feet without a corner or a ceiling -height door frame. b. Ceiling dimensions exceed 50 feet in either direction. c. Construction changes within the plane of the partition. d. Each side of column furring within a partition run. e. Above each doorjamb from head to top of partition. f. At each side of furr downs. 2. Locate control joints in partitions at less -than -ceiling -height door frames with control joints extending to the ceiling from both top comers. 3. Make joints with roll -formed zinc control joints (USG #093) with Y." slot a. Do not install roll -formed joint behind ceramic tile. Provide a 1/4" wide gap in the substrate only. b. At acoustical partitions, seal behind the joints with acoustical sealant. 4. Back -block ceiling control joints with face panel strips laid over the joints. 5. At acoustical partitions, seal behind partition control joints with batt acoustical insulation stuffed between the doubled studs. I. Edge Sealing: On wallboard partitions to be covered with ceramic tile, treat cut edges, holes, corner joints, and intermediate joints with edge sealant before installation of wallboard panels. Treat all fastener heads with edge sealant after installation. Caulking of openings through ceramic the is specified in SECTION 09 3013 - CERAMIC TILING J. Joint Treatment: 1. Finish the joints in exposed wallboard, wallboard which is to be covered with vinyl wall covering and carpet wall covering, and wallboard in sound partitions to deck. Joints in wall board to be covered with ceramic tile shall be filled but may be left unfinished. 2. Fill the V-grooves between boards with quick drying joint compound. Wipe joints clean of excess compound and allow to harden. 3. Apply a thin layer of joint topping to joints. Immediately embed tape reinforcement over joints, follow with a skim coat of compound. 4. Apply joint topping over the tape to fill flush with the board surface. 5. Apply joint topping over the fill coat and feather out smoothly beyond fill coat edge. Sand between coats as necessary to provide a smooth surface ready for painting. 6. Fill screw head depressions flush with three coats of compound. 7. Finish metal corner reinforcements and edge and control joint trim with two or three coats of joint compound, using edge of trim as a screed to secure a smooth, flat finish. GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES VLK Architects, 2007 09 2116 - 4 2740.00 Creek View Elementary School College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas 3.02 TOLERANCES A. Maximum variation from true flatness: 1/8 inch in 10 feet in any direction. END OF SECTION GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES VLK Architects, 2007 09 2116 - 5 2740.00 Creek View Elementary School College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas SECTION 09 3013 CERAMIC TILE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Ceramic tile and marble thresholds. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 09 2116 - Gypsum Board Assemblies. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Samples: Submit in accordance with SECTION 01 3323 - SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, AND SAMPLES. Tile samples shall be size scheduled for each particular type of tile required. B. Certificate: Furnish one master grade certificate on ceramic the executed prior to delivery of the tile to the site. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Standard: Ceramic the shall be Standard Grade complying with the requirements of ANSI A 137.1. Deliver tile to the project site in grade sealed containers. 1.04 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install tile until construction in spaces is completed and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are bing maintained. B. Do not install adhesives in a closed, unventilated environment C. Maintain 50°F. during installation of mortar materials. 1.05 MAINTENANCE A. Extra Materials: Upon completion of work, deliver to the project site one box for each type, color, pattern, and size of ceramic tile installed. Furnish maintenance materials from same manufactured lot as materials installed and enclose in protective packaging with appropriate identifying labels. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 TILE A. Ceramic tile and trim as manufactured by American Olean, Dal -Tile Corp., and Crossville Ceramics shall set all standards in the areas of trim shapes availability, tile size, color, pattern, and texture. B. Provide factory made fitters and trim shapes required for a finished installation. Keep job -cut fitters and trim shapes to a minimum. Provide bullnose tile at horizontal and vertical tile edges. C. Ceramic Tile: 1. Floor Tile (313): 2" x 2" unglazed, impervious, porcelain the with integral color, smooth all-purpose edges. Base shall be sanitary cove type unless specifically detailed otherwise. Colors will be selected by Architect from price groups 1 and 2.. 2. Wall Tile (3D): 6" x 6" glazed nonvitreous tile with interior natural clay body, cushion edges and gloss finish. Base shall be sanitary cove type unless specifically detailed otherwise. Accent tile color shall be selected from American Olean or Dal -Tile's price group 4. Field colors shall be selected by Architect from American Olean or Dal -Tile's Bright & Matte colors. 80% from price group 1 and 20% from price groups 1 through 3. 3. Floor Tile (3G):12" x 12", unglazed, unpolished porcelain tile. Colors shall be as selected by Architect from full range of colors from Crossville's "Cross -Colors" orAmerican Olean's "Terra Paver" and "Crystal Flame", and Dal -Tile's "Porcealto Solids" and "Grani" price groups 2 and 3. 4. Wall Tile (3J): 2" x 6" glazed nonvitreous the with interior natural clay body, cushion edges, bullnose top edge, gloss finish. Base shall be sanitary cove type unless specifically detailed otherwise. Accent the color shall be selected from American Olean or Dal -Tile's price group 4. Field colors shall be selected by Architect from American Olean or Dal -Tile's Bright & Matte colors. 80% from price group 1 and 20% from price groups 1 through 3. CERAMIC TILE VLK Architects, 2007 09 3013 - 1 2740.00 Creek View Elementary School College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas D. Marble thresholds: Group A domestic white marble with honed finish. 2.02 MORTAR MATERIALS A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, domestic manufacture. B. Dry -Set Mortar: ANSI A 118.1, factory sanded mortar mix. C. Adhesive: ANSI A 136.1, Type I, prepared organic adhesive. D. Grout: 1. Floor: ANSI A118.6, latex modified dry -set Portland cement or commercial waterproof Portland cement grout. Custom blended color(s) shall be selected by Architect from the Designer and Standard Series of "Custom Building Products" or approved equivalent. 2. Walls: Modified acrylic, premixed Mastic Grout or dry -set grout complying with ANSI A118.6, custom blended color(s) as selected by Architectfrom Custom Building Products:, the Designer Series & Standard Series, or approved equal. If Contractor elects to provide dry -set grout, the installation shall be damp cured. E. Lime: ASTM C 207, Type S, hydrated lime. F. Sand: ASTM C 35, clean, sharp plaster sand. G. Water: Clean and potable. H. Reinforcement: 1 Y2" x 17 gage galvanized woven steel wire fabric or 2 x 2 x 16/16 gage galvanized welded steel wire fabric. 2.03 SETTING BED MORTAR A. Mix one part Portland cement and 4 parts damp sand, by volume. Hydrated lime may be added for plasticity in an amount not to exceed 1/10 part by volume. B. Reinforcing: Woven glass fiber scrim, 2" wide roll. 2.04 SHOWER PAN A. Liquid Applied Waterproofing Membrane: Provide Laticrete 9235 Waterproof Membrane as manufactured by Laticrete International, Inc. or approved equal. Waterproofing membrane to be thin, cold applied, single component liquid, load bearing and non -toxic. It shall be certified by IAPMO as a showerpan liner. Reinforcing fabric to be non -woven rot -proof specifically intended for waterproof membrane. 1. Water Permeability (at 30ft.hydro/0.9 atmos/91.2kPa) Nil (Fed. Spec. TT-C-00555 Modified) 2. Elongation at break 20-30% (ASTM D751) 3. Service Temperatures- 20to+280F(-28to +137C) (LIL 1016-92) 4. Tensile breaking strength 2950psi (20.4MPa;207kg/cm2 ) (ASTM D751) 5. Thickness 20 mils (0.5mm) (LIL 1013-92) 6. Bond strength 250 PSI (1.72 MPa) (ANSI A118.4) 7. Service Rating (TCA) Extra Heavy 2.05 BACKER BOARD A. Provide a lightweight concrete panel layered between coated glass fiber mesh reinforcement and 2 wide coated fiber glass mesh tape for reinforcement at joint system. For installation under ceramic the on steel studs at shower locations. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Sweep concrete slab surfaces clean and free of dirt and debris. Remove oil, grease, paint, and dried mortar. B. Shower Wall Tile Base: At showers, install tile backer board. Apply with uncut long edge at bottom of work. Fasten boards to steel stud framing with Type S bugle head drywall screws spaced 6" o.c. Space fasteners at least 3/a' from edge of board. C. Shower Pan Liquid Applied Waterproofing Membrane Installation: See manufacturer's written installation instructions. CERAMIC TILE VLK Architects, 2007 09 3013 - 2 2740.00 Creek View Elementary School College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas 3.02 INSTALLATION A. General Workmanship: 1. Center and balance areas of tile, if possible. 2. Do not make an excessive amount of cuts. Usually, no cuts smaller than half size should be made. Make all cuts on the outer edges of the field. 3. Smooth cut edges. Install tile without jagged or flaked edges. 4. Fit tile closely where edges will be covered by trim, escutcheons or other similar devices. 5. The splitting of tile is expressly prohibited except where no alternative is possible. 6. Maintain the heights of tilework in full courses to the nearest obtainable dimension where heights, given in feet and inches, are not required to fill vertical spaces exactly. 7. Make corners of all tile flush and level with comers of adjacent tile, with due allowance to tolerances for tile as specified in ANSI A137.1. 8. Keep all joint lines straight and even width, including miters. 9. Thoroughly back-up with thin -set bonding material all thin -set units, molded or shaped pieces; secure firmly in place. 10. Thoroughly back-up with mortar -bed mix thick -bed nosings, coves, curbing, gutters, flat tile and trimmers, molded or shaped pieces; secure firmly in place. 11. Bond coat mix shall not be used to back-up thick -bed trim and angles. Coat all thick -bed trim shapes with 1/32" to 1/16 " of bond coat mix. 12. Finish floor and wall areas level and plumb with no variations exceeding'/8" in 8' from the required plane. 13. Install accessories in tilework to be evenly spaced, properly centered with tile joints, and level, plumb and true to the correct projection. Install accessories at locations and heights designated. 14. Finished tilework shall be clean. Replace pitted, chipped, cracked and scratched tiles. B. Setting Floor Tile - Conventional: 1. Set floor the in straight joint pattern using Portland cement mortar in conformance with ANSI A 108.1. 2. Where tile is to be installed over waterproofing membrane, place wire reinforcing and mortar bed over the membrane. Lap reinforcing one full mesh and support so that it is completely embedded in the mortar bed. 3. Place mortar bed, tamp firmly and screed to true planes and proper slopes. While still plastic, trowel a bond coat of cement paste over the mortar bed or dust a thin layer of dry cement over the mortar bed and work lightly until damp. 4. Set tile firmly on the mortar bed with close, uniform joints. Press and thoroughly beat in tile while the mortar bed is still plastic. Bring surfaces to true planes at the proper position of elevation. Slope tile down to floor drains. Make any adjustment of tile before initial set of the mortar takes place. C. Setting Floor Tile - Thinset: 1. Set floor tile in straight joint pattern using dry -set cement mortar in conformance with ANSI A 108.5. 2. Mix and apply dry -set mortar in conformance with the manufacturer's recommendations. Cover surface evenly and comb with a notched trowel not more than 10 minutes before applying tile. 3. Set tile before initial set of the mortar has taken place. Press and beat tile firmly into place to establish proper and complete bond. Joints shall be close and uniform. D. Setting Wall Tile: 1. Set base and wall tile over masonry in straight joint pattern using dry -set cement mortar in conformance with ANSI A 108.5. 2. Set base and wall tile over gypsum wallboard in straight joint pattern using organic adhesive in conformance with ANSI A 108.4. 3. Surfaces to be tiled shall be dry, firm and proper for bond. a. Treat gypsum wallboard surfaces with a primer -sealer; caulk openings around pipes and fixtures with a non -hardening waterproof sealant. b. Apply leveling coat of sanded dry -set mortar over irregular surfaces if and as required to secure plumb, flat surfaces for the application of tile. 4. Mix and apply mortar and adhesive in conformance with best trade practice and the recommendations of the manufacturer of the materials used. Cover surfaces evenly, with no bare spots, and comb with a notched trowel within 10 minutes of applying tile. 5. Apply tile before skinning of the adhesive or mortar has taken place. Press and beat firmly into place to obtain at least 75 percent contact area of adhesive or mortar on the tile back. 6. If tile is face mounted, remove paper and glue before the adhesive or mortar is firmly set; adjust tiles that are out of line. 7. Provide control joints at all inside corners of wall tile areas. Install sealant in joint Color as selected by Architect. E. Grouting: 1. Force a maximum amount of grout into the joints. 2. Clean the joints of cushion -edge file to depth of cushion. Fill joints of square -edge file flush with face of tile. 3. Fill all gaps and skips. Mortar shall not show through grouted joints. CERAMIC TILE VLK Architects, 2007 09 3013 - 3 2740.00 Creek View Elementary School College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas 4. Finished grout shall be uniform in color, smooth, and without voids and low spots. 5. Grout joint width as recommended by tile manufacturer. 6. Damp cure Portland cement grout for at least 72 hours. F. Wail Expansion Joints: Where tile on wallboard abuts tile on masonry, provide a '/." caulked expansion joint to separate the two areas. 1. After tile work and grout are dry, clean the open expansion joint and roll -in foam rod stock to leave a joint depth of/.". 2. Fill the joint with primerless one -part acrylic polymeric sealant equal to "Mono" by Tremco Manufacturing Co. Color shall be white. 3. Tool the sealant smooth. G. Joints at Frames: Where 4'/." x 4'/4" ceramic the abuts frame, provide a Ma" caulked expansion joint to separate tile from the frame. Where 6" x 6" ceramic tile abuts frame, provide a '/4" caulked expansion joint to separate tile from the frame. 1. After tile work and grout are dry, clean the joint at the frame. 2. Fill the joint with primerless one -part acrylic polymeric sealant equal to "Mono 555" by Tremco. 3. Color shall be white at 4Y." x 4'/." tiles and shall batch adjacent grout at 6" x 6" tiles. 4. Tool the sealant smooth. H. Setting Marble Thresholds: 1. Set in a cement mortar bed mixed dry for tamping. 2. Press and tamp the marble into place until firmly bedded to the proper level, then lift out, parge the back with cement paste, butter the edges, and relay. 3. Clean surplus cement from the marble faces immediately. 3.03 CLEANING A. When the work of other trades is completed, clean down tile and marble surfaces and leave in first class condition. 1. The use of wire brushes or acids is expressly prohibited. 2. Replace cracked, broken, and chipped the with new units. 3. Correct uneven and stained joints. END OF SECTION CERAMIC TILE VLK Architects, 2007 09 3013 - 4 2740.00 Creekview Elementary School College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas SECTION 09 5100 ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Acoustical panels and exposed suspension systems for ceilings. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Samples: Submit in accordance with Section 01340 - SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, SAMPLES. Submit a 12" x 12" sample of each type of acoustic panel. Submit a 6" long sample of each component of each type of exposed suspension system. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Erector Qualifications: This work shall be performed by an experienced erector approved by the acoustical material manufacturer. B. Pre -ceiling conference: 1. Prior to start of ceiling grid installation, convene pre -ceiling conference at project site. 2. Attendance is required by Contractor, installer, and Architect. 3. Review specifications and drawings of ceiling installation and layout. 1.04 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Requirements: 1. Before acoustical work is started, all wet work such as concrete and plastering shall be completed and thoroughly dried out. 2. Acoustical ceiling shall not begin until building has been closed to the weather and suitable mechanical ventilation is supplied to maintain condition ranges of 60°F. to 85°F. at not more than 70% R.H. These conditions shall be maintained prior to, during, and after installation. 3. Acoustical panels shall be unpacked and allowed to stabilize for a period of 72 hours, in the environment as defined above, prior to installation. B. Work Sequence: 1. Do not start acoustical work until mechanical and electrical work to be covered up has been inspected and approved. 2. Coordinate the related work of other trades involved in the ceiling installation. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Store tile and panel cartons open at each end to stabilize moisture content. 1.06 WARRANTY A. Acoustic Lay -in Panels: Submit manufacturer's standard 10-yearwarranty against sagging orwarping (defined as greater than measured in the panel center) from the date of installation. 1.07 MAINTENANCE A. Extra Materials: Upon completion of work, deliver maintenance materials to the project site, packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with appropriate labels. Furnish two boxes of full size acoustical ceiling units of each type installed. ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS VLK Architects, 2007 09 5100 - 1 2740.00 Creekview Elementary School College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Acoustic Lay -in Panels (22A): ASTM E 1264, mineral fiber panels, Class 25 (non-combustible) and having an NRC range of 0.50-0.60. 1. Sizes: 24" x 24" x 5/8". 2. Design: Fine, non -directional fissured surface. 3. Prod ucUmanufacturer; standard panels: Fine Fissured Humiguard; Armstrong World Industries, Inc. Hytone Vantage 10 Safetone; Celotex Corp. Radar ClimaPlus; USG Interiors, Inc. 4. Finish: Washable factory applied vinyl latex paint. 5. Edges: Square. B. Vinyl Covered Lay -In Gypsum Board Panels (22B): Provide 24" x 24" x t/2" thick white vinyl faced panels. Product/manufacturer; one of the following: Vinylrock X CRF; Capaul Corp. Vinyltone; Celotex Corp. Stipple Pattern; USG Interiors, Inc. C. Suspension System; Acoustic Lay -in Panels: Exposed type for panel ceilings as manufactured by the ceiling panel manufacturer or one of the following: Armstrong World Industries, Inc. Chicago Metallic Corp. USG Interiors, Inc. 1. Components shall be roll -formed from steel to meet ASTM C 635 and conform to the requirements for Intermediate duty structural classification. Exposed main tee runners shall be double web with capped face. 2. Components shall be electro-zinc coated or hot -dip galvanized and exposed surfaces shall have white enamel finish. 3. System shall be designed and sized to support the ceiling assembly with a maximum deflection of L/360 of the span. 4. Color shall be white to match color of lay -in panels. D. Suspension System: Vinyl Coated Gypsum Board Ceilings: Aluminum grid, 6063 T-5 aluminum alloy with painted white finish. Prod uct/manufacturer: one of the following: Standard Grid System; Fry Reglet Environmental Grid System; Gordon Interior Specialties Div. E. Powerand Projector Ceiling Mount: Provide Chief Manufacturing, Inc. (1-800-582-6480) Model RPA117 Custom Inverted LCD/DLP Projector Ceiling Mount with Model CMS-440, Speed Connect Lightweight Suspended Ceiling Kit, Model CMA470 plenum enclosure, and Model CMA-01 2,12" Fixed Extension Column. All hardware for attachment to supporting structure shall be included. The projector mount finish shall be scratch resistant white fused epoxy. It shall be UL Listed. Assembly and installation shall be according to the instructions provided by the manufacturer to maintain fire rating. Where column penetrates ceiling tile, fire caulking is required on back of ceiling tile around column with fire -rated column escutcheon on exposed surface of ceiling tile at fire - rated ceilings F. Hangers: 12 gage annealed and galvanized steel wire. G. Hold-down Clips: UHDC Universal Hold Down Clip by Armstrong. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION A. Examine areas to receive acoustical treatmentfor conditions that will adversely affect the execution and quality of work. Designate any areas of potential interference between ceiling components and components of other trades. Do not start this work until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. 3.02 CEILING INSTALLATION A. General: Installation procedures shall meet or exceed the manufacturer's recommendations and ASTM C 636. 1. Layout each area so that the panel patterns are symmetrical, joints parallel to walls and borders generally equal in width. ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS VLK Architects, 2007 09 5100 - 2 2740.00 Creekview Elementary School College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas 2. Coordinate the patterns with ceiling lights and grilles in conformance with the reflected ceiling plans and as directed. 3. Verify types and sizes of light fixtures and grilles to be accommodated and arrange the work accordingly. B. Suspension: Locate main and cross tee runners to form the indicated patterns. 1. Use a laser leveling method to direct -suspend the main tees with hangers spaced not more than 48" o.c. 2. Provide hangers within 6" of the corners of recessed lighting fixtures. 3. Under steel construction, wrap hangers around or clip or bolt hangers to a structural steel member (not steel deck). 4. Under bar joists, suspend hangers from top chord or from bottom chord at panel points only. 5. Under ductwork, employ trapeze system for hanging ceiling. 6. Do not suspend hangers from ducts, piping, conduit, or fireproofing membrane. 7. Use a laser beam system to level the main tee runners to within 1 /8" in 12 ft. Level with hangers taut; do not make kinks or bends in hangers as a means of leveling. C. Moldings: Install finish channel and angle moldings where ceilings abut walls, furrings and other intersecting vertical surfaces. 1. Moldings shall be in long lengths, secured to adjoining surfaces with at least two fasteners for each piece or more as may be required. Pull the molding snugly against the vertical surface without any gaps. 2. No molding length shall be less than 3 ft. except at short offsets. 3. Use prefabricated corner pieces where possible to eliminate field mitering. D. Lay -in Panels: Install the acoustic panels in the exposed suspension system with bottom surfaces flush and in a true, level plane. 1. Hold-down clips are required at all vinyl covered gypsum panels for cleaning purposes. 2. Provide hold-down clips at lay -in panels within 5 of exterior exits and at areas shown on drawings.. E. Access: Provide access through acoustic panel ceilings with one or more access locations in each room to maintain a maximum spacing of 30 ft. between access panels. 3.03 TOLERANCES A. Variation from flat and level surface: 1/8 inch in 10 ft. B. Variation from plumb of grid members caused by eccentric loads: Two degrees (2°) maximum. 3.04 ADJUSTING AND PATCHING A. Replace damaged members of exposed suspension system. Replace ceiling board and the that is damaged, installed improperly, or shows visible signs of sagging. 3.05 CLEANING A. After installation, clean soiled and discolored surfaces. Remove damaged units and replace with new. END OF SECTION ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS VLK Architects, 2007 09 5100 - 3 2740.00 Creekview Elementary School College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas SECTION 09 6429 WOOD STRIP FLOORING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Wood strip flooring system, including treads and risers. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 06 1000 -Rough Carpentry: Plywood underlayment. 2. Section 07 2100 -Building Insulation: Rigid insulation between screeds. 3. Section 09 6500 - Resilient Flooring. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations: Obtain each species, grade, and cut of wood from one source with resources to provide materials and products of consistent quality in appearance and physical properties. B. Hardwood Flooring: Comply with NOFMA's "Official Flooring Grading Rules" for species, grade, and cut. C. The work shall be done by an experienced applicator using trained mechanics skilled in the laying of hardwood floors. 1.03 STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Flooring shall be delivered to and stored in the area to be floored at least one week before the floor is to be laid. The area must be under proper and protected ventilation and heating, and the flooring bundles shall be opened and spread out to allow good air circulation throughout. 1.04 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Requirements: Maintain the ambient temperature between 70°F. and 90°F. from 72 hours before installation until 48 hours after work is complete. Thereafter, keep the temperature above 55°F. degrees until final acceptance of the building. B. Protection: Protect wood flooring from damage during and after installation. Cover traffic areas with paper and maintain until final acceptance of the building. 1.05 WARRANTY A. The wood flooring shall be warranted in writing to the Owner against cupping, buckling, and other defects in material and workmanship for 2 years from the date of final acceptance of the building. This warranty shall stipulate that the floor will be repaired or replaced and refinished at no extra cost to the Owner if cupping or buckling occurs within the 2-year period. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Flooring (9A): Solid Red Oak, V x 2Y,", tongue and groove, Select and Better Grade as graded in accordance with NOFMA/OFI Certified Flooring Grade publication, random lengths with no strip less than 2'-0" in length. B. Finishing Materials: Penetrating Seal No. 21 and Super Hil-Brite wax as manufactured by Hillyard (phone 800.365.1555 web site: www.hillyard.com). C. Screeds: Fire -retardant treated 2" x 3", KD, S4S wood screeds at 12" o.c. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION A. Examine area to receive wood floor for conditions that will adversely affect the execution and quality of work. Do not start this work until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. WOOD STRIP FLOORING VLK Architects, 2007 09 6429 - 1 2740.00 Creekview Elementary School College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas 3.02 PREPARATION A. Surface shall be completely dry before flooring is laid. Sweep the surface clean and free of dirt and remove oil, grease, paint, dried mortar and curing compound residue. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Subflooring: 1. Construct subfloor framing of fire retardant treated 2 x 3 wood sleepers, flat side down, placed 12" o.c. 2. Install sleepers around all floor mounted boxes, trap openings and wall lines. Sleepers are to be free floating; do not anchor to support structure. 3. After all conduit, boxes, sleepers and pads have been installed and leveled for the final floor elevation, fill the remaining space with insulation. B. The laying and finishing of the wood floor should be one of the last operations in the building construction. 1. Lay strip flooring perpendicular to the wood framing supports. 2. Visible face -nailing is not acceptable. Blind -nail strip through tongues with 2" spiral thread flooring nails or 2" power cleat nails. Space nails approximately 12" apart and locate a nail within 4" of the end of each piece. End joints shall be well distributed. 3. Leave clearance at walls as detailed to allow for expansion. Do not drive flooring up tight, but make suitable and adequate provision for distributed expansion throughout the floor. 3.04 SANDING A. Allow at least one week between completion of floor laying and the start of sanding. Scrape and sand wood floor to a smooth, unblemished surface. Brush and vacuum the surface clean and otherwise prepare for finishing. 3.05 FINISHING A. Apply the floor finishes immediately after the final sanding and in accord with the manufacturer's directions. 1. Apply four coats of penetrating sealer, buffing and cleaning between each coat. 2. After penetrating sealer has thoroughly cured, clean surface with towel dampened with water. Apply two coats of wax allowing one hour's drying time between coats. END OF SECTION WOOD STRIP FLOORING VLK Architects, 2007 09 6429 - 2 2740.00 Creekview Elementary School College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas SECTION 09 6500 RESILIENT FLOORING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Vinyl composition tile flooring, rubber base, and accessories. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Samples: Submit in accordance with SECTION 01 3323 - SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, AND SAMPLES. Submit manufacturer's standard color samples of tile, not less than 3" x 3", full thickness. Submit samples of each accessory, full height or width by not less than 2" length. 1.03 DELIVERY A. Deliver floor materials to the project site in unbroken containers and cartons bearing the manufacturer's labels. B. Deliver resilient floor materials to an acclimatized building at least 36 hours prior to installation of vinyl composition tile and 48 hours for installation of rubber products. 1.04 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Requirements: Maintain the temperature inside the building reasonably constant at not less than 65"F. for 48 hours before installation, during installation, and for 48 hours after installation. B. After installation, maintain temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 55°F. or more than 95°F. 1.05 MAINTENANCE A. Extra Materials: Upon completion of work, deliver to the project site not less than one box for each 50 boxes or fraction thereof, for each type, color, pattern, and size installed. Furnish maintenance materials from same manufactured lot as materials installed and enclose in protective packaging with appropriate identifying labels. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Vinyl Composition Tile (15A): ASTM F 1066, Class 2 (through -pattern tile), 12" x 12" x 1/8" thick vinyl plastic composition tile. Provide Standard Excelon Imperial Texture and Multicolor, Armstrong Flooring Div. B. Textured Vinyl Composition Tile (156): Provide Safety Zone slip -retardant tile (12" x 12" x 1/8" thick) as manufactured by Armstrong Flooring Division. Color as selected by Architect. C. Rubber Base (1413): ASTM F 1861, Type TS (rubber, vulcanized thermoset), Style Cove (with top -set toe), 1/8" thick, 4" high, color(s) as selected by Architect. Furnish base in manufacturers continuous rolls. Outside corners shall be factory formed pre -molded units matching base in color and finish. Prod uct/manufacturer; one of the following: Wallflowers® Premium Wall Base; Flexco Type TS Rubber Base; Roppe Rubber Corp. NO SUBSTITUTIONS D. Edge Strips: 1" wide by 1/8" thick black rubber tile reducer with beveled surface. E. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex -modified, Portland cement based or blended hydraulic cement based formulation provided or approved by vinyl composition the manufacturer. F. Adhesive: Moisture -resistant type recommended by flooring manufacturer. G. Cleaner: Neutral, chemical cleaner such as Hil[yard "Super Shine -All" designed to be safe to use on any surface not damaged by water. RESILIENT FLOORING VLK Architects, 2007 09 6500 - 1 2740.00 Creekview Elementary School College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine areas to receive resilient flooring, base, and accessories for conditions that will adversely affect the execution and quality of work. Do not start this work until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Concrete Substrates: Prepare according to ASTM F 710. 1. Verify that substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, and hardeners. Surfaces shall be clean and dry before flooring is laid. 2. Remove substrate coatings and other substances that are incompatible with adhesives and that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, using mechanical methods recommended by manufacturer. Do not use solvents. 3. Sweep the surfaces free of dust and dirt and remove oil, grease, paint, dried mortar and curing compound residue. 4. Fill low spots, cracks, minor holes and crevices in concrete floors with latex underlayment patching material. Re -surface rough and irregular surfaces with the same underlayment material. B. Concrete Slab -on -grade and Existing Concrete Substrates: 1. Alkalinityand Adhesion Testing: Performtest recommended by manufacturer. Proceed with installation only after substrates pass testing. 2. Moisture Testing: Perform tests recommended by manufacturer and as follows. Proceed with installation only after substrates pass testing. a. Perform anhydrous calcium chloride test, ASTM F 1869. Proceed with installation only after substrates have maximum moisture -vapor -emission rate of 3 lb. of water/1000 sq. ft. in 24 hours, unless otherwise specified by the flooring or adhesive manufacturer. b. If moisture condition exceeds 3 pounds per 1,000 square feet per 24 hour day and if acceptable to the vinyl composition tile/rubber floor manufacturer, apply moisture reduction barrier, Planiseal MRB by Mapei, in strict accordance with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Laying Flooring: 1. Install floor tile in straight joint pattern as directed and in conformance with the manufacturer's recommended procedure. 2. Start at centerlines of spaces and adjust borders to maintain full tiles in the field and equal borders. Except as required in irregularly shaped areas, no tile shall be less than one-half the width of field tile, and in no event shall any tile piece be less than 3" wide. 3. Install tile to square grid pattern with all joints aligned, with pattern grain alternating with adjacent unit to produce basket weave pattern. Allow minimum 1/2 full size tile width at room or area perimeter. Lay the starting at center of room working toward walls, square with room axis. Joints shall be tight butt joints, true to line. 4. Terminate flooring at centerline of door openings where adjacent floor finish is dissimilar. 5. Install edge strips at unprotected or exposed edges and where flooring terminates. 6. Bed tile firmly and maintain joints tight, straight; and square with the room axes. The completed surfaces shall be free of buckles, waves, and projecting tile. Scribe tiles neatly at columns, corners, and casework. 7. Where flooring edges are not concealed by thresholds or other materials, install rubber edge strips. B. Applying Rubber Base: 1. Install coved base after the floor tile, mat, and carpet have been laid. Do not use less than manufacturer's continuous rolls, except where required for last piece in any one run of wall length. 2. Apply base with adhesive covering 100% of the back surface, not just in spots. Apply adhesive with a notched trowel. Use headless brads in addition to adhesive where required. Use preformed outside comers and miter inside corners. Joints shall be tight. 3. Fit joints tight and vertical. Maintain minimum measurement of 18 inches between joints. 3.04 PROTECTION A. Prohibit traffic on floor finish for 48 hours after installation. B. Repair or replace damaged surfaces that are soiled or scarred in a manner acceptable to the Owner. RESILIENT FLOORING VLK Architects, 2007 09 6500 - 2 2740.00 Creekview Elementary School College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas 3.05 CLEANING A. Clean in accordance with Section 01 7413 - PROGRESS CLEANING. 1. Remove excess adhesive and other foreign matter from tile flooring and base. 2. Scrub floor with cleaner in conformance with manufacturer's instructions and rinse. 3. Replace defective or loose material. END OF SECTION RESILIENT FLOORING VLK Architects, 2007 09 6500 - 3 2740.00 Creekview Elementary School College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas SECTION 09 6516 RESILIENT SHEET FLOORING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Vinyl sheet flooring and accessories. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 09 6500 - Resilient Flooring; rubber base. 2. Section 09 6800 - Carpeting; edge strips. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Samples: Submit in accordance with SECTION 01 3323 - SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, AND SAMPLES. Submit manufacturer's standard color samples of tile, not less than 3" x 3", full thickness. Submit samples of each accessory, full height or width by not less than 2" length. 1.03 DELIVERY A. Deliver floor materials to the project site in unbroken containers and cartons bearing the manufacturers labels. B. Deliver resilient floor materials to an acclimatized building at least 36 hours prior to installation of vinyl composition tile. 1.04 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Requirements: Maintain the temperature inside the building reasonably constant at not less than 65°F. for 48 hours before installation, during installation, and for 48 hours after installation. B. After installation, maintain temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 55°F. or more than 95°F. 1.05 MAINTENANCE A. Extra Materials: Upon completion of work, deliver to the project site not less than 10 linear feet for every 500 linear feet or fraction thereof, in roll form and in full roll width for each color, pattern, and type of floor covering installed. Furnish maintenance materials from same manufactured lot as materials installed and enclose in protective packaging with appropriate identifying labels. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Slip -resistant Sheet Flooring (16A): Provide non -porous Mannington AssuranceTm II Vinyl Sheet Flooring as manufactured by Mannington Resilient Floors or approved equivalent. 1. Color as selected by Architect from full color and pattern range. 2. 6 foot wide, having a nominal total thickness of 0.080 in. 3. The urethane -coated wear surface shall be composed of polyvinyl chloride resin, plasticizers, stabilizers, fillers, and pigments comprising a through -grain vinyl chip visual with pattern and color uniformly dispersed throughout the entire thickness. Embossed texture with slip resistant properties. 4. Vinyl sheet flooring shall meet ASTM F-1913, "Standard Specification for Vinyl Sheet Floor Covering Without Backing" and shall be asbestos -free. 5. Where needed, color of Heat Welding Rods as selected by Architect to match flooring. B. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex -modified, Portland cement based or blended hydraulic cement based formulation provided or approved by vinyl composition tile manufacturer. C. Adhesive: Moisture -resistant type recommended by flooring manufacturer. D. Edge Strips: Reference SECTION 09 6800 - Carpeting. E. Cleaner: Neutral, chemical cleaner such as Hillyard "Super Shine All" designed to be safe to use on any surface not damaged by water. RESILIENT SHEET FLOORING VLK Architects, 2007 09 6516 - 1 2740.00 Creekview Elementary School College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine areas to receive resilient flooring, base, and accessories for conditions that will adversely affect the execution and quality of work. Do not start this work until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. B. Examine subfloors priorto installation to determine that surfaces are smooth and free from cracks, holes, ridges, and other defects that might prevent adhesive bond or impair durability or appearance of the flooring material. C. Inspect subfloors prior to installation to determine that surfaces are free from curing, sealing, parting and hardening compounds; residual adhesives; adhesive removers; and other foreign materials that might prevent adhesive bond. Visually inspect for evidence of moisture, alkaline salts, carbonation, dusting, mold, or mildew. D. Report conditions contrary to contract requirements that would prevent a proper installation. Do not proceed with the installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. E. Failure to call attention to defects or imperfections will be construed as acceptance and approval of the subfloor. Installation indicates acceptance of substrates with regard to conditions existing at the time of installation. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Remove paint, varnish, oils, release agents, sealers, and waxes. Remove residual adhesives as recommended by the flooring manufacturer. Avoid organic solvents. B. Perform subfloor preparation as recommended by flooring manufacturer to determine if surfaces are dry; free of curing and hardening compounds, old adhesive, and other coatings; and ready to receive flooring. C. Vacuum or broom -clean surfaces to be covered immediately before the application of flooring. Make subfloor free from dust, dirt, grease, and all foreign materials. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Laying Flooring: 1. Install flooring in strict accordance with the latest edition of the flooring manufacturer's recommendations. 2. Install flooring wall to wall before the installation of floor -set cabinets, casework, furniture, equipment, movable partitions, etc. Extend flooring into toe spaces, door recesses, closets, and similar openings as shown on the drawings. 3. Scribe, cut, and fit or flash cove to permanent fixtures, columns, walls, partitions, pipes, outlets, and built-in furniture and cabinets. 4. Adhere flooring to the subfloor without cracks, voids, raising and puckering at the seams. Roll with a 100- pound roller in the field areas. Hand -roll flooring at the perimeter and the seams to assure adhesion. Refer to specific rolling instructions of the flooring manufacturer. 5. Lay flooring to provide a minimum number of seams. Avoid cross seams, filler pieces, and strips. Match edges for color shading and pattern at the seams in compliance with the manufacturer's recommendations. 6. Install flooring with adhesives, tools, and procedures in strict accordance with the manufacturer's written instructions. Observe the recommended adhesive trowel notching, open times, and working times. 7. All seams shall be heat welded. Use methods and sequence of work in conformance with written instructions of the flooring manufacturer. Finish all seams flush and free from voids, recesses, and raised areas. B. Applying Rubber Base: 1. Install coved base after the floor have been laid. Do not use less than manufacturer's continuous rolls, except where required for last piece in any one run of wall length. 2. Apply base with adhesive covering 100% of the back surface, not just in spots. Apply adhesive with a notched trowel. Use headless brads in addition to adhesive where required. Use preformed outside comers and miter inside corners. Joints shall be tight. 3. Fit joints tight and vertical. Maintain minimum measurement of 18 inches between joints. 3.04 PROTECTION A. Prohibit traffic on floor finish for 48 hours after installation. B. Repair or replace damaged surfaces that are soiled or scarred in a manner acceptable to the Owner. RESILIENT SHEET FLOORING VLK Architects, 2007 09 6516 - 2 2740.00 Creekview Elementary School College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas 3.05 CLEANING A. Clean in accordance with Section 01 7413 - PROGRESS CLEANING. 1. Remove excess adhesive and other foreign matter from tile flooring and base. 2. Scrub floor with cleaner in conformance with manufacturer's instructions and rinse. 3. Replace defective or loose material. END OF SECTION RESILIENT SHEET FLOORING VLK Architects, 2007 09 6516 - 3 2740.00 Creek View Elementary School College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas SECTION 09 6566 ATHLETIC RUBBER FLOORING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Athletic rubberflooring. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 03300 - Cast -in -Place Concrete. 2. Section 09650 - Resilient Flooring; rubber base. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit in accordance with SECTION 01 3223 - SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA AND SAMPLES. B. Product Data: Submit copies of each of the following: 1. Manufacturer's requirements for correct preparation, finishing and testing of substrate base material to receive premanufactured rubber sport surface. 2. Adhesive product data sheets and manufacturer's certificates indicating approval for the proposed application. 3. Manufacturer's standard warranty. 4. Manufacturer's installation and maintenance instructions. C. Shop Drawings: Include appropriate room bordering or feature strip details. D. Samples: Provide samples of the actual sport surface, feature and reducer strips, in standard colors. Architect reserves the right to reject any brand of flooring on the basis of color at no extra cost to the Owner. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Acceptable manufacturer: The manufacturer to be a firm experienced in the manufacturing of prefabricated rubber surface. B. Acceptable Installer: 1. Installer must submit a list of similar projects completed within the past three years. 2. Installer to be recognized and approved by the sport surfacing manufacturer. 1.04 DELIVERY AND STORAGE A. Deliver and store material in the original containers with seals unbroken and labels intact, in a maintained environment of a minimum of 55' F. and under 55% relative humidity. Protect work until accepted by Owner. 1.05 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Temperatures: A temperature of at least 70 ° F. shall be maintained in the surrounding area and on the surface receiving the floor covering for 24 hours prior to beginning work, during installation, and for 48 hours after installation is completed. 1.06 WARRANTY A. Submit manufacturer's standard 3-year warranty against defects in material and workmanship. B. Submit manufacturer's standard 10-year wear warranty. ATHLETIC RUBBER FLOORING VLK Architects, 2007 09 6566 - 1 2740.00 Creek View Elementary School College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Provide "Advance" triple layer athletic rubber flooring as manufactured by Mondo America, Inc. (888.966.6369 web site: www.mondousa.com), or approved equal. Flooring shall have the following minimum requirements: 1. Prefabricated athletic rubber flooring, calandered and vulcanized with a base of natural and synthetic rubber, stabilizing agents and pigmentation. 2. Thickness: 8mm (5/16"). 3. Colors: As selected by Architect from manufacturers standard colors. 4. Finish: Smooth satin matt texture. 5. Manufactured in three layers, which are vulcanized together. The shore hardness of the top layer will be greater than that of the middle and bottom layer; shore hardness of layers to be recommended by the manufacturer and the limits specified. 6. Rolls: 6' (1.83m) wide. B. Adhesive: Provide adhesive certified by the manufacturer, P.U. 100 Polyurethane Adhesive. C. Floor filler/resurfacing material shall be as recommended by rubber floor manufacturer. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION A. Carefully and completely examine area to receive rubber flooring and accessories for conditions that will adversely affect the execution and quality of work. Do not start this work until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. 3.02 PREPARATION A. All other trades shall be completely finished in this area. B. Preparation of substrate to provide a smooth, dense finish highly compacted with a tolerance of 1/8" in a 10' radius. C. Concrete substrate to be in place a minimum of thirty days prior to the installation of the rubber athletic flooring. D. All inserts, penetrations and other construction items which affect the installation of the prefabricated rubber sport surface to be in place. E. Alkalinity test and moisture test must be preformed. PH level should be in the range of 7 to 8.5. Moisture content must not exceed 3 Ibs/1000 ft2 per 24 hrs (verify using the calcium chloride test as per ASTM F 1869-98). F. Subfloors must be clean, free of paint, dust, sealer, hardeners, grease, oil, solvents, old adhesive and any other foreign substances that may act as a bond barrier. G. Sealing of cracks, holes and, smoothing and leveling of rough, uneven surfaces, must be carried out using a good quality Portland cement based leveling compound (feathering compound), approved by the manufacturer. H. The beginning of installation stipulates the acceptance of surface and site conditions. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Install athletic rubberflooring in strict compliance with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations. B. Unroll sheet and allow relaxation. C. Inspect sheet for any damages or defects. D. Always install the flooring in the same direction. E. Cut and adjust flooring prior to installation. F. All edges must be straight -edged before adjusting the seams. G. Mix adhesive in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. ATHLETIC RUBBER FLOORING VLK Architects, 2007 09 6566 - 2 2740.00 Creek View Elementary School College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas H. Roll flooring in both directions with a 100 lb. sectional floor roller. I. Check for air bubbles and continue rolling if needed. J. Roll the seam with a hand roller and remove any excess adhesive that may have come through the seam. K. Hold all seams in place with suitable weights for a minimum of 12 hrs. L. Repeat the same procedure for the rest of the installation. M. Surface to be protected before, during and after installation until project's acceptance. N. Allow adhesive to set 72 hours before the initial cleaning of the surface. 3.04 CLEANING A. Remove foreign matter from tile flooring and base. Clean floor with cleaner in conformance with manufacturer's instructions. Replace defective or damaged material at no additional cost to the Owner. B. Remove from the premises all debris caused by work under this Section. 3.05 PROTECTION A. All traffic shall be prohibited for a period of 12 hours after installation, then limited traffic for an additional 12 hours. END OF SECTION ATHLETIC RUBBER FLOORING VLK Architects, 2007 09 6566 - 3 2740.00 Creekview Elementary School College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas SECTION 09 6723 RESINOUS FLOORING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Decorative epoxy -resin flooring consisting of colored quartz aggregate in an epoxy matrix. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product specified. Include manufacturer's technical data, installation instructions, and recommendations for each resinous flooring component required. B. Samples for Verification: Of each resinous flooring system required, 6 inches square, applied by Installer for this Project to a rigid backing, in color, texture, and finish indicated. Where finishes involve normal color and texture variations, include Sample sets showing the full range of variations expected. C. Installer Certificates: Signed by manufacturer certifying that installers comply with specified requirements. D. Material Test Reports: From a qualified independent testing agency indicating and interpreting test results of the resinous flooring's reaction to chemicals and other reagents and substantiating compliance with requirements. E. Material Certificates: In lieu of material test reports, when permitted by Architect, signed by manufacturers certifying that materials furnished comply with requirements. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced installer (applicator) who has specialized in installing resinous flooring similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and who is acceptable to resinous flooring manufacturer. Engage an installer who is certified in writing by resinous flooring manufacturer as qualified to install resinous flooring systems specified. B. Source limitations: Obtain primary resinous flooring materials, including primers, resins, hardening agents, and sealing or finish coats, through one source from a single manufacturer. Provide secondary materials including patching and fill material, joint sealant, and repair materials of type and from source recommended by manufacturer of primary materials. C. Field Samples: On floor area selected by Architect, provide full -thickness resinous flooring system samples that are at least 48 inches square to demonstrate texture, color, thickness, chemical resistance, cleanability, and other features of each resinous flooring system required. Simulate finished lighting conditions for review of in - place field samples. 1. If field samples are unacceptable, make adjustments to comply with requirements and apply additional samples until field samples are approved. 2. After field samples are approved, these surfaces will be used to evaluate resinous flooring. 3. Obtain Architect's approval of field samples before applying resinous flooring. 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials in original packages and containers, with seals unbroken, bearing manufacturer's labels indicating brand name and directions for storage and mixing with other components. B. Store materials to comply with manufacturer's written instructions to prevent deterioration from moisture, heat, cold, direct sunlight, or other detrimental effects. 1.05 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Comply with resinous flooring manufacturer's written instructions for substrate temperature, ambient temperature, moisture, ventilation, and other conditions affecting resinous flooring installation. B. Lighting: Provide permanent lighting or, if permanent lighting is not in place, simulate permanent lighting conditions during resinous flooring installation. RESINOUS FLOORING VLK Architects, 2007 09 6723 - 1 2740.00 Creekview Elementary School College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas C. Close spaces to traffic during resinous flooring application and for not less than 24 hours after application, unless manufacturer recommends a longer period. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work Include, but are not limited to: Dex O-Tex, Division of Crossfield Products Corp. (phone 310.886.9100 web site: www.dexotex.com) Dur-A-Flex, Inc. (phone 800.253.3539 web site: www.dur-a-flex.com) General Polymers, Inc., Division of Sherwin -William (phone 800.543.7694 web site: www.generalpolymers.com Harris Specialty Chemicals, Inc. (phone 800.322.7825) Key Resin Company (phone 888.943.4532 web site: www.keyresin.com) Neogard, Division of Jones -Blair (phone 800.321.6588 web site: www.neogard.com) Palma Inc. (phone 800.336.7256 web site: www.palmainc.com) RBC Industries, Inc. (phone 888.722.3769 www.rbcepoxy.com/index2.htm Silikal Resin Systems (phone 800.477.4545 we site: www.silikairesins.com) Stonhard (phone 800.257.7953 web site: www.stonhard.com) 1. Color and Pattern: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors and patterns produced for resinous flooring complying with requirements indicated. 2. Total Thickness of Body Coat(s): As recommended by manufacturer for system compliance with requirements. 3. System Thickness: Minimum 1/8 inch. 4. Wearing Surface: Antislip. 5. Base: 4 inch high integral cove base. 6. Components: Provide manufacturer's standard components complying with requirements, unless otherwise indicated. Provide the following optional components where recommended by the manufacturer for intended uses and locations: a. Primer. b. Reinforcing membrane. c. Chemical -resistant sealing or finish coat(s). B. Physical Properties: Provide resinous flooring system with the following minimum physical property requirements when tested according to standard test methods indicated: 1. Compression Strength: 12,500 psi per ASTM C 579. 2. Tensile Strength: 2,600 psi per ASTM C 307. 3. Flexural Modulus of Elasticity: 4,500 psi per ASTM C 580. 4. Water Absorption: 0.04 percent maximum per ASTM D 570. 5. Indentation: 0.025 percent maximum per MIL-D-3134. 6. Impact Resistance: No chipping, cracking, or delamination and not more than 1/164nch permanent indentation per MIL-D-3134. 7. Resistance to Elevated Temperature: No slip or flow of more than 1/16 inch per MIL-D-3134. 8. Abrasion Resistance: 24 mg maximum weight loss per ASTM D 2047. 9. Flammability: Self -extinguishing per ASTM D 635. 10. Hardness: 75-80, Shore D per ASTM D 2240. 11. Bond Strength: 400 psi, 100 percent concrete failure per ACI 503R. C. Chemical Resistance: Test specimens of cured resinous flooring system are unaffected when tested according to ASTM D 543, Procedure A, for immersion in the following reagents for not less than 7 days: 1. Ammonium hydroxide, carbon tetrachloride, citric acid, dimethyl formamide, formaldehyde (3%), heavy-duty detergent, heptane, hydrogen peroxide (28%), lactic acid, oleic acid, phenol solution, sodium carbonate (20%), sodium chloride (10%), sodium hydroxide (60%), sodium hypochlorite, sulfuric acid (30%), urine. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Resinous Flooring (15C): Resinous floor surfacing system consisting of primer; body coat(s) including resin, hardener, aggregates, and colorants, if any; and sealing or finish coat(s). 1. Reinforcing Membrane: Manufacturer's flexible resin recommended for crack isolation to help prevent substrate cracks from reflecting through resinous flooring. B. Patching and Fill Material: Resinous product of or approved by resinous flooring manufacturer and recommended by manufacturer for application indicated. C. Joint Sealant: Type recommended or produced by resinous flooring manufacturer for type of service and joint condition indicated. RESINOUS FLOORING VLK Architects, 2007 09 6723 - 2 2740.00 Creekview Elementary School College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. General: Prepare and clean substrate according to resinous flooring manufacturer's written instructions for substrate indicated. Provide clean, dry, and neutral substrate for resinous flooring application. B. Concrete Substrates: Provide sound concrete surfaces free of laitance, glaze, efflorescence, curing compounds, form -release agents, dust, dirt, grease, oil, and other contaminates incompatible with resinous flooring. 1. Comply with ASTM C 811 requirements, unless manufacturers written instructions are more stringent. 2. Repair damaged and deteriorated concrete according to resinous flooring manufacturer's written recommendations. C. Resinous Materials: Mix components and prepare materials according to resinous flooring manufacturer's written instructions. D. Use patching and fill material to fill holes and depressions in substrate according to manufacturers written instructions. E. Treat control joints and other nonmoving substrate cracks to prevent cracks from reflecting through resinous flooring according to manufacturer's written recommendations. 3.02 APPLICATION A. General: Apply components of resinous flooring system according to manufacturers written instructions to produce a uniform, monolithic wearing surface of thickness indicated. 1. Coordinate application of componentsto provide optimum adhesion of resinous flooring system to substrate and optimum intercoat adhesion. 2. Cure resinous flooring components according to manufacturer's written instructions. Prevent contamination during application and curing processes. 3. At substrate expansion and isolation joints, provide joint in resinous flooring to comply with resinous flooring manufacturer's written recommendations. 4. Apply joint sealant to comply with manufacturer's written recommendations. B. Apply primer over prepared substrate at manufacturer's recommended spreading rate. C. Apply reinforcing membrane to substrate cracks or entire substrate surface as recommended by manufacturer. D. Apply self -leveling slurry body coat(s) in thickness indicated. E. Broadcast aggregates and, after resin is cured, remove excess aggregates to provide surface texture indicated. F. Integral Cove Base: Apply cove base mixto wall surfaces adjacent floorapplications unless otherwise indicated. Round internal and external comers. Install cove base according to manufacturer's written instructions and details including taping, mixing, priming, troweling, sanding, and topcoating of cove base. G. Apply sealing or finish coat(s), including grout coat, if any, of type recommended by resinous flooring manufacturer to produce finish indicated. Apply in number of coats and at spreading rates recommended in writing by manufacturer. 3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Material Sampling: Owner may at anytime and any number of times during flooring application require material samples for testing for compliance with requirements. 1. Owner will engage an independent testing agency to take samples of materials being used. Material samples will be taken, identified and sealed, and certified in presence of Contractor. 2. Testing agency will test samples for compliance with requirements, using applicable referenced testing procedures or, if not referenced, using testing procedures listed in manufacturer's Product Data. 3. If test results show installed materials do not comply with specified requirements, pay for testing, remove noncomplying materials, prepare surfaces coated with unacceptable materials, and reapply flooring materials to comply with requirements. RESINOUS FLOORING VLK Architects, 2007 09 6723 - 3 2740.00 Creekview Elementary School College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas 3.04 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Protect resinous flooring from damage and wear during the remainder of construction period. Use protective methods and materials, including temporary covering, recommended in writing by resinous flooring manufacturer. B. Clean resinous flooring not more than 4 days before dates scheduled for inspections intended to establish date of substantial completion in each project area. Use cleaning materials and procedures recommended in writing by resinous flooring manufacturer. END OF SECTION RESINOUS FLOORING VLK Architects, 2007 09 6723 - 4 2740.00 Creekview Elementary School College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas SECTION 09 6800 CARPETING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Carpet, including the following: 1. Surface preparation. 2. Glue down carpeting on floor surfaces. 3. Accessories, including edge strips. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 09 6500 - Resilient Flooring: Rubber base. 2. Section 09 6516 - Resilient Sheet Flooring 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit in accordance with SECTION 01340 - SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, AND SAMPLES. Include manufacturer's installation instructions. B. Samples for verification purposes in manufacturer's standard size, showing full range of color, texture, and pattern variations expected. Secure samples from material to be used for the work. Submit the following: 1. 12" square samples of each type of carpet material required. 2. 12" long samples of each type of exposed edge striping and accessory item. C. Seaming Diagrams: Submit to the Architect for review. 1. Contractor shall be responsible for conformance with the drawings and specifications relative to the installation. 2. Architect's reviewwill coverthe sizes of the pieces and location of seams, but not dimensions or quantities. 3. All length seams and cross joints necessary to the layout of the carpet shall be shown on the seaming diagrams. D. Maintenance Manual: Provide 2 copies of a printed maintenance manual, written by the carpet manufacturer's Technical Service Department delivered to the Owner at the project site. Include the following: 1. Methods for maintaining carpet, including cleaning and stain -removal products and procedures and manufacturer's recommended maintenance schedule. 2. Precautions for cleaning materials and methods that could be detrimental to carpet. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in carpet manufacturing with 5 years minimum experience. B. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer with 3 years minimum documented experience in carpeting installations of similar scope. 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Delivery: Carpet shall be delivered to the project site in mill wrappings. Each roll shall have register number tags attached or register number stenciled on bale. B. Store materials for 3 days prior to installation in the areas of installation to achieve temperature stability. 1.05 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Measurements: Dimensions supplied on the drawings are approximate. Contractor shall carefully check all dimensions and other conditions affecting his work in the field and shall be responsible for proper installation. 1.06 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Maintain room temperature at minimum 70°F. and relative humidity at approximately that at which the area is to be maintained for at least 24 hours prior to, during, and for 24 hours after installation. B. Provide sufficient lighting. CARPETING VLK Architects, 2007 09 6800 - 1 2740.00 Creekview Elementary School College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas 1.07 MAINTENANCE A. Extra Materials: Upon completion of work, deliver to the project site not less than 12 sq. yds. of each type, color, and pattern of carpet, exclusive of materials required to properly complete installation. Furnish maintenance materials from same production run as materials installed. Package maintenance materials with protective covering, identified with appropriate labels. Other remnants, usable scraps, and overage in carpeting shall be packaged in appropriate wrapping, labeled, and delivered to the Owner. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Carpet (17A): Provide tufted, loop pile carpet, solution dyed or yarn dyed with at least 20% recycled content, with ER3 or Unibond RE backing in 6' wide roll goods. Color shall be as selected by Architect from manufacturer's full color range. Product/manufacturer. Collins & Aikman; Crayon Mannington Commercial; Gametime B. Accent Carpet (17A): Provide 100% continuous filament Antron Legacy nylon with static control with at least 20% recycled content, with ER3 or Unibond RE backing in 6' wide roll goods. Color shall be as selected by Architect from manufacturer's full color range. Product/manufacturer: Collins & Aikman; Plexus Accents II Mannington Commercial; Gametime C. Substrate Filler: As recommended by adhesive and carpet manufacturer; compatible with substrate. D. Adhesive: As recommended by the carpet manufacturer. E. Edge Strips: Provide two-piece vinyl Joining Moulding, No. 365 'T' with No. 970 Track as manufactured by BurkeMercer Products (phone 800.669.7010 web site: www.burkmercer.com). Color(s) as selected by Architect. F. Miscellaneous Materials: Types of seaming tape, thread, and other accessory items recommended by the carpet manufacturer and installer for the conditions of installation and use. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION A. Before commencement of any work the Contractor shall inspect the floors to receive carpet to determine the condition of those surfaces, and shall furnish and apply suitable primer and otherwise prepare floor surfaces in accordance with the carpet manufacturer's instruction. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Delay installation until all surrounding work, including painting, has been completed. Vacuum substrate immediately prior to carpet installation, and remove all deleterious substances which would interfere with installation or be harmful to the work. B. Ensure floors are level, with maximum surface variation of 1 /4 inch in 10 feet noncumulative. Inspect subflooring for cracks, holes, abrasions, rough spots, ridges, or other conditions which will adversely affect execution and quality of work. C. Ensure concrete floors are free from scaling and irregularities and exhibit neutrality relative to acidity and alkalinity. D. Use an approved cementitious filler to patch cracks, small holes, and for leveling. E. Notify Architect in writing of any condition which will prevent satisfactory completion of work. Do not proceed until such defects are entirely corrected. Application or installation of carpet shall constitute acceptance of sub - floors. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Install carpet using the direct cement method. 1. Comply with carpet manufacturer's written instruction and recommendations. Maintain direction of pattern and texture throughout the entire building. Do not seam weft to warp, except as directed by Architect. CARPETING VLK Architects, 2007 09 6800 - 2 2740.00 Creekview Elementary School College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas 2. Extend carpet under open -bottomed and raised -bottom obstructions, and under removable flanges of obstructions. Extend carpet into closets and alcoves of rooms indicated to be carpeted, unless another floor finish is indicated for such spaces. Extend carpet under all movable furniture and equipment 3. Install carpet wall to wall, using continuous lengths and as broad widths as possible to minimize the placement of seams in traffic lanes. Cut edges shall be trued and appropriately treated to form invisible and non -raveling joints where exposed. 4. Edges of carpet abutting vertical surfaces shall fit tight and meet against such materials. Where carpet edges are not concealed by thresholds or other materials use vinyl edge strips. 5. In corridors, run carpet length parallel to the corridor walls. At corridor intersections, carpet shall change direction. 6. Installed carpet shall be free of spots, dirt or soil, and shall be without tears, frayed or pulled tufts. Carpet surfaces shall be smooth and tight, without wrinkles and open seams. B. Check matching of carpet before cutting and ensure there is no visible variation between dye lots. C. Cut carpet, where required, in manner to allow proper seam and pattern match. Ensure cuts are straight and true and unfrayed. D. Seams 1. Install in accordance with approved seam layout using a minimum of seams. Where possible and practical, locate seams in areas of least amount of traffic. 2. Do not use small carpet fill strips. 3. Do not place seams perpendicular to doors or entries. 4. Cross joints necessary due to layout of areas shall be at absolute minimum and shall be indicated on shop drawings. 5. Cross joins necessary due to length of rolls received shall be placed, in the cutting, to avoid occurrence at conspicuous locations, near doors or at pivot points, and shall be approved prior to seaming. 6. Join seams in recommended mannerso as not to detractfrom the appearance of the carpet installation and decrease its life expectancy. Ensure seams are straight, not overlapped or peaked and free of gaps. 7. Weld seams at hardback products with manufacturer's approved materials and methods. E. Vacuum clean substrate. Spread adhesive in quantity recommended by manufacturer after primer application to ensure proper adhesion over full area of installation. Apply only enough adhesive to permit proper adhesion of carpet before initial set. F. Lay carpet on floors with the run of the pile in same direction of anticipated traffic. Lay carpet on stairs with run of the pile in opposite direction of anticipated traffic to avoid peeking of backing at nosing. G. Do not change run of pile in any one room or from one room to next where continuous through a wall opening. 3.04 CLEANING A. Remove access adhesive from floor, base, and wall surfaces without damage. B. Clean and vacuum carpet surfaces. 3.05 PROTECTION A. Prohibit traffic from carpet areas for 24 hours after installation. END OF SECTION CARPETING VLK Architects, 2007 09 6800 - 3 2740.00 Creek View Elementary School College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas SECTION 09 7216 VINYL -COATED FABRIC WALL COVERING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Vinyl -coated fabric wall covering. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 09 2116 - Gypsum Board Assemblies: taping and bedding of gypsum board. 2. Section 10 1113 - Chalkboards, Markerboards and Tackboards: cork wall tack surface. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Samples: Submit in accordance with Section 01 3323. Submit 6" square samples of each type of vinyl wall covering. B. Certificate: The manufacturer of the proposed vinyl wall covering shall furnish to the Architect written certification that the material shipped to the project will meet the physical and performance requirements listed below. Certification from a dealer or distributor will not be acceptable. C. Maintenance Instructions: Submit copies of the vinyl wall covering manufacturer's printed instructions for maintenance of the installed work. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Applicator Qualifications: Work shall be performed by a skilled applicator having at least five years experience in the installation of vinyl wall covering. B. Source Quality Control: Flame spread rating of the material shall be determined by ASTM E 84. Each roll of goods delivered to the project shall bear Underwriters' Laboratories labels. 1.04 MAINTENANCE A. Extra Materials: Upon completion of work, deliver to project site not less than 6 linear yards of each type, cola, and pattern of vinyl wall covering installed. Furnish maintenance materials from same production run as materials installed. Other remnants, usable scraps, and overage in wall covering shall be packaged in appropriate wrapping, labeled, and delivered to the Owner. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Vinyl Wall Covering: Provide "Moreau", 20 oz. vinyl wallcovering as manufactured by Lanark Vinyl Wallcoverings. Color shall be as selected by Architect from manufacturer's complete color line 2.02 MATERIALS A. Vinyl Wall Covering: FS CCC-W-408, Type II/Class A; supported vinyl material shall consist of a pigmented and mildew inhibited polyvinyl chloride fused to cotton fabric. Wall covering shall have a flame spread rating of 25 or less when tested in accordance with ASTM E 84. B. Adhesive: Vinyl paste as recommended by the wall covering manufacture. C. Substrate Filler: As recommended by adhesive and vinyl wall covering manufacturers; compatible with substrate. D. Substrate Primer and Sealer: Type as recommended by vinyl wall covering manufacturer. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION A. Examine areas to receive vinyl wall covering for conditions that will adversely affect the execution and quality of work. Do not start this work until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. VINYL -COATED FABRIC WALL COVERING VLK Architects, 2007 09 7216 - 1 2740.00 Creek View Elementary School College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas 3.02 PREPARATION A. Clean surfaces to receive vinyl wall covering, including dirt, grease, oil, other contaminants. Surfaces shall be dry, smooth, and clean. Protrusions or low spots must be sanded or filled, as needed, to achieve a smooth surface. B. Acclimatize wall covering materials by removing them from packaging in the installation areas not less than 24 hours before installation. C. Remove electrical plates and covers, light fixture trims, and similar items. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Applying Wall Covering: Follow the manufacturer's printed instructions for cutting and installing vinyl wall covering. 1. Use fabric panels in exact order as they are cut from rolls; use rolls in consecutive order. Apply paste to the fabric back using a roller or paste brush. 2. Trim deeply textured patterns, or patterns on which strip must be matched, on the worktable. Use a metal straight edge and sharp blade. 3. Handle smooth, non -match patterns by pasting strips on the wall, overlapping the edge and "double cutting" through both thicknesses. Use thin metal strip between wall and material when cutting to avoid gouging the wall. 4. Use stiff -bristled brush or flexible broad knife to eliminate air pockets and to secure the wall covering to the wall surface. 5. Fill in spaces above doors and similar areas in sequence from the roll. 6. Remove excess adhesive from each seam as it is made. Use sponge dampened with warm water. Wipe seam clean with dry cloth towel. 7. Examine each seam carefully when completed. Trim additional selvage where required to achieve a color and pattern match at seams. 8. Install seams vertical and plumb at least 6" from outside corners and 6" from inside comers, unless a change of pattern or color exists at corner. No horizontal seams are permitted. 9. Except on match patterns, hang panels by reversing alternate strips. 10. The installed fabric shall be secure, smooth, and clean without wrinkles, gaps or overlaps. 3.04 CLEANING A. Clean vinyl wall covering with mild soap powderdissolved in warm water, and remove excess adhesive at joints and on adjacent surfaces. B. Replace vinyl wall covering that cannot be successfully cleaned or that is applied to defective substrate surfaces. C. Reinstall electrical plates and covers, light fixture trims, and similar items. END OF SECTION VINYL -COATED FABRIC WALL COVERING VLK Architects, 2007 09 7216 - 2 2740.00 Creekview Elementary School College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas SECTION 09 8413 FIXED SOUND-ABSORPTIVE/SOUND-REFLECTIVE PANELS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Acoustical wall panel system. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit in accordance with SECTION 01 3323 - SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA AND SAMPLES. B. Shop Drawings: Submit proposed layout of coverage by acoustical panels, details of proposed mounting method. C. Samples: 1. Submit a minimum size of 12" x 12" sample of each proposed panel, to include specified facing, proposed edge detailing and a mounting element. 2. Submit manufacturer's available sample selections of fabric or color for Architect's selection and approval. 3. Samples for wood fiber wall panel unit required, showing full range of exposed texture to be expected in completed work D. Certification: Submit manufacturer's certificates of flame spread rating of selected fabric facings or products, and independent laboratory tests of sound absorption coefficients for products in thickness specified. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Acoustical Wall Panels (24A): Provide acoustical wall panels as manufactured by one of the following: AR Acoustical Resources Decoustics. Ltd. Tectum, Inc. AVL Systems, Inc. Golterman & Sabo, Inc. Wenger Conwed QTS Quiet Technology Systems Wall Technology, Inc. B. Quality: Custom, fabric covered acoustical wall panels constructed of rigid fiberglass insulation core with fabric stretched and bonded over core. Panels shall have fully tailored square edges and corners, with fabric wrapped around edge and secured to back of panel. Edges shall be made rigid and abuse resistant by either chemical edge -hardening resin or non-ferrous metal framing. 1. 2" Thick Acoustical Wall Panel: a. Panel Core: 6 to 7 pound per cubic foot multiple density core, with a membrane type absorber (drumskin) located within the core. b. Panel Fabric: Guilford Panel Fabric FR701. Colors as selected by Architect. c. Panel Size: Minimum 2" thickness, or as required to meet sound absorption specification, face dimensions as required. d. Sound Absorption (ASTM C423): Noise Reduction Coefficient (NRC) minimum value 1.05 for a Type A (#4) mounting or Type D-20 (#2) mounting, whichever mounting method will be used to meet the specified NRC 2. High Impact Resistant Acoustical Wall Panel: a. Panel Core: 6 to 7 pound per cubic foot fiberglass or mineral wool insulation board; or molded rigid fiberglass honeycomb panels with flat fiberglass faces. 1/8" thick, 20 Ib/ft3 surface laminate to panel face. b. Panel Fabric: Guilford Panel Fabric FR701. Colors as selected by Architect. c. Panel Size: Minimum 1-5/8" thickness, or as required to meet sound absorption specification, face dimensions as required. d. Sound Absorption (ASTM C423): Noise Reduction Coefficient (NRC) minimum value .95 for a Type A (#4) mounting or Type D-20 (#2) mounting, whichever mounting method will be used to meet the specified NRC. 3. Wood Fiber Acoustical Wall Panels: a. Material: Aspen wood fibers bonded with inorganic hydraulic cement. b. Thickness: 1 ". c. Edge: Long edge beveled. d. Color: Natural e. Mounting Style: Provide all fasteners for a complete Type "A" installation. FIXED SOUND-ABSORPTIVE/SOUND-REFLECTIVE PANELS VLK Architects, 2007 09 8413 - 1 2740.00 Creekview Elementary School College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine walls for conditions that would prevent proper installation of acoustical products, and report such conditions to the Architect for correction. B. Do not proceed until defective conditions are corrected. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Securely install acoustical panels aligned plumb and square, with uniform, tight butt joints between adjacent panels, in accordance with manufacturer's written directions. B. Contractor shall remove all packing material, construction debris, tools and equipment form site upon completion of the work, leaving each installation clean and acceptable for use and occupancy by the Owner. END OF SECTION FIXED SOUND-ABSORPTIVE/SOUND-REFLECTIVE PANELS VLK Architects, 2007 09 8413 - 2 2740.00 Creekview Elementary School College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas SECTION 09 9100 PAINTING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: On-the-job painting and finishing of exterior and interior surfaces. 1. Included: Paint and finish the following materials, fittings, and equipment items which are exposed -to -view. a. Iron, steel, and galvanized metal. b. Wood. c. Concrete masonry units. d. Interior concrete ceiling and beam surfaces. e. Gypsum board. f. Interior caulked joints. g. Portland cement plaster. h. Bare and insulation covered piping and ductwork, conduit, hangers, grilles and registers, and primed metal surfaces and factory -finished surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment. 2. Do not paint prefinished items, concealed surfaces, finished metal surfaces, operating parts, and labels, including the following: a. Factory -finished metal lockers and finished light fixtures. b. Architectural aluminum and stainless steel. c. Interior concrete floors and steps and all exterior concrete. d. Acoustic panel ceilings, unless noted on drawings. e. Pre -finished cabinets. f. Operating parts: Moving parts of operating mechanical and electrical equipment, such as: valve and damper operators, linkages, sensing devices, motor and fan shafts g. Labels: UL, FM, or other code -required labels or equipment name, identification, performance rating, or nomenclature plates. 3. Contractor shall examine the drawings for mechanical and electrical work, and all materials installed throughout the building which require painting shall be painted under this section of the specifications. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 05 1200 - Structural Steel Framing: shop priming of structural steel. 2. Section 05 2100 - Steel Joists Framing: shop priming of steel joists. 3. Section 05 5000 - Metal Fabrications: shop priming of metal fabrications. 1.02 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. For purposes of this painting specification, the following areas and spaces are not considered finished, occupied areas and there will be no painting therein except for doors and frames and as may be specifically scheduled in article paint schedule. 1. Mechanical chases. 2. Spaces above suspended ceilings. 3. Underfloor crawl spaces. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Samples: Submit in accordance with SECTION 01 3323 - SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, AND SAMPLES. Submit two 81/2' x 11" samples of each paint color scheduled on the color schedule prepared by the Architect. Samples shall be on heavy cardboard and shall be made with the actual mixed paints to be used on the project. B. Paint Schedule: If painting materials other than those specified are proposed for use, submit a complete schedule of the materials to be substituted. This schedule, in triplicate, shall be in the same form as the paint schedule included in this section, and shall list materials by manufacturer, brand name, and type for each surface to be finished. C. Close-out Schedule: Upon completion of work, furnish a full schedule of paint types and colors actually used and formulas for each to the Owner. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Product Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing quality paint and finish products with 3 years experience. PAINTING VLK Architects, 2007 09 9100 - 1 2740.00 Creekview Elementary School College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas B. Applicator: Company specializing in commercial painting and finishing with 2 years experience. C. Product Labels: Include manufacturer's name, type of paint, stock number, color and label analysis on label of containers. D. Single Source Responsibility: Provide primers and other undercoat paint produced by same manufacturer as final coats. Use only thinners approved by paint manufacturer, and use only within recommended limits. E. V.O.C. (Volatile Organic Compound) Compliance: Products listed in the schedules and/or substitutes proposed for use by Contractor must be formulated to meet all applicable ordinances and regulations regarding maximum V.O.C. content. Utilize products which have been specially formulated to meet such requirements. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Delivery: Deliver materials in original containers with seals unbroken and labels intact. B. Storage: Contractor shall designate a specific space at the project site for storing and mixing materials. Protect this space and repair all damage resulting from use. Do not store kerosene nor gasoline in this space. Remove oily rags at the end of each days work. 1.06 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Requirements: Maintain the temperature inside the building at not less than 60°F. during painting and finishing. B. Provide continuous ventilation and heating facilities to maintain surface and ambient temperatures above 65°F. for 24 hours before, during, and 48 hours after application of finishes, unless required otherwise by manufacturer's instructions. C. Minimum application temperatures for latex paints: 45°F. for interiors; 50°F. for exterior; unless required otherwise by manufacturer's instructions. D. Minimum application temperature for varnish and finishes: 65°F. for interior or exterior, unless required otherwise by manufacturer's instructions. E. Provide lighting level of 80 ft.-candles measured mid -height at substrate surface. F. Do not apply paint in snow, rain, fog, or mist; or when the relative humidity exceeds 85%; or to damp or wet surfaces; unless otherwise permitted by the paint manufacturer's printed instructions. Painting may be continued during inclement weather only if the areas and surfaces to be painted are enclosed and heated within the temperature limits specified during application and drying periods of 24 hours between coats and 72 hours after final coat. G. Protection: Provide sufficient drop cloths to fully protect adjacent finished work. 1.07 PRECAUTIONS A. Do not store paints, oils, thinners and other flammable items inside the building. They shall be stored in approved containers when not in actual use during the painting job. The fire hazard shall be kept at a minimum. B. Take precautions to protect the public and construction workers during the progress of the work. C. Furnish a temporary fire extinguisher of suitable chemicals and capacity, located near flammable materials. 1.08 MAINTENANCE A. Extra Materials: Upon completion of the work, deliver to project site 2 gallons of each type and color of paint applied to interior and exterior surfaces. Provide formula for custom match colors. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Provide paint as manufactured by one of the following: Pittsburgh Paints (http://www.pittsburghpaints.com) The Sherwin-Williams Co. (http://www.sherwin.com/default.asp) PAINTING VLK Architects, 2007 09 9100 - 2 2740.00 Creekview Elementary School College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas B. Materials described are based on the specifications of the above listed manufacturers, and are given to designate the quality of materials required. Materials of best quality grade are representative of the standard of quality required. Materials not displaying manufacturer's identification as a first line, best -grade product will not be acceptable. C. Colors: The Architect will prepare a color schedule. Regardless of which brand of paint is selected for use the Contractor shall intermix and blend as required to obtain an exact match to each color on the color schedule. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that surfaces and substrate conditions are ready to receive work as instructed by the product manufacturer. B. Examine surfaces scheduled to be finished prior to commencement of work. Report to Architect any condition that may potentially affect proper application. C. Measure moisture content of surfaces using an electronic moisture meter. Do not apply finishes unless moisture content of surfaces are below the following maximums: 1. Gypsum wallboard: 12 percent. 2. Interior located wood: 15 percent, measured in accordance with ASTM D 4442. D. Test shop -applied primers for compatibility with subsequent cover materials. E. Perform the following Test procedure prior to painting. This will determine if Passivators exist on galvanized metal. This procedure is not necessary on galvanized metal with G 90 Paint Grip. . 1. Prepare a solution by dissolving 20 grams of copper sulfate in one liter (1000 grams) of water. Copper sulfate crystals may be purchased at most drug stores. 2. Solvent wash a small area per the procedure of SSPC-SP1. 3. Sand a small washed area using emery cloth. 4. Using a cotton swab saturated with the copper sulfate solution, apply a swipe to both sanded and unsanded washed areas. 5. If the sanded and unsanded surfaces turn black at the same time and that time is less than 10 seconds, there is no passivation on the surface other than light oil, and a normal degreasing/cleaning operation is sufficient preparation prior to the coating application. If the unsanded surface turns slower than the sanded surface, or not at all, a passivator of some type is present on the surface. If neither surface turns, the surface is probably an alloy of zinc or some other metal. 6. If the galvanized steel has been treated or passivated, the treatment or passivator must be removed by brush blasting. If this method is prohibited by environmental regulations, then chemical etching with Amchem's GALVAPREP SG-3 will be acceptable, if previously approved by the Architect. The chemical etching manufacturer's procedures should be followed carefully. 7. If the surface is determined to be an alloy by this test procedure, notify Architect and adhesion tests of the proposed coating applied over the proposed surface preparation must be conducted. 8. If no passivators are present, wash galvanized metal surfaces with mineral spirits to remove residual grease and oil. F. Beginning of installation means acceptance of existing surfaces and substrate. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Perform preparation and cleaning procedures in accordance with coating manufacturer's instructions for each substrate condition. B. Fill open joints, cracks and crevices on steel buck frames with metal putty and sand smooth before painting. C. Sand woodwork surfaces smooth before priming. D. Coat pine knots and pitch streaks with shellac before painting. E. Putty nail holes after the prime coat. F. Remove hardware and accessories, plates, lighting fixtures and similar items which are not to be finish -painted or provide adequate surface -applied protection for these items in place. PAINTING VLK Architects, 2007 09 9100 - 3 2740.00 Creekview Elementary School College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas G. Uncoated steel and iron surfaces: Remove grease, scale, dirt, and rust. Where heavy coatings of scale are evident, remove by wire brushing or sandblasting; clean by washing with solvent. Apply a treatment of phosphoric acid solution, ensuring weld joints, bolts, and nuts are similarly cleaned. Spot prime paint after repairs. H. Shop primed steel surfaces: Sand and scrape to remove loose primer and rust. Feather edges to make touch- up patches inconspicuous. Clean surfaces with solvent. Prime bare steel surfaces. 3.03 APPLICATION A. Workmanship shall be of the highest quality. Mix and use paint materials in accord with the manufacturer's directions. Spread materials evenly, flow smoothly, and brush out without sags or runs. B. Provide finish coats which are compatible with primer paints used. Provide barrier coats over incompatible primers where required. C. When undercoats, stains or other conditions show through final paint coat, apply additional coats until paint film is of uniform color and sheen. D. Finish the insides of wood cabinets, including backs of cabinet doors, as scheduled for the fronts and ends. E. Between coats, sand enamel and lacquer finish on wood and metal surfaces to produce a smooth, even finish. Use #220 grit sandpaper or finer. F. Tint priming coats and undercoats to approximate shade of final coat to assure uniformity of color in the finish. Touch up suction spots and "hot spots" before applying the last coat to produce an even result in the finish coat. G. Exposed ductwork, piping and conduit in finished, occupied areas shall be painted the same color as the wall or ceiling against which it is installed, unless otherwise noted. H. Apply the finish coat on gypsum board, plaster, and concrete surfaces with rollers. I. On concrete masonry unit wall surfaces without a block filler, apply the first coat of paint with a spray gun. 3.04 TOUCH UP AND CLEAN A. Touching Up: On completion, carefully touch up all holidays, marred and damaged spots, and work over all surfaces that have been repaired by other trades. B. Cleaning: Remove spilled, splashed, and splattered paint from all surfaces. Do not mar surface finish of item being cleaned. C. Reinstall the items removed under the provisions of paragraph above. 3.05 PAINT SCHEDULE A. The products listed below represent top of the line products of each manufacturer. These products are not presented as being equivalent, as there are too many variables to match each product across the board. Manufacturer's designations are: PPG Pittsburgh Paints SWThe Sherwin-Williams Co. B. Interior Metal 1. Steel door frames, borrowed light frames, louvers and vision panel frames in doors, hollow metal doors, and ladders. 1 primer coat PPG Red Inhibitive Steel Primer, 6-208 SW Kromik Metal Primer E41 N1 2 finish coats PPG Speedhide 6-1110 SW ProMar 200 Alkyd Semi -Gloss Enamel, Series B34 W 200 PAINTING VLK Architects, 2007 09 9100 - 4 2740.00 Creekview Elementary School College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas 2. Steel pipe handrails and railings. 1 primer coat PPG Red Inhibitive Steel Primer, 6-208 SW Kromik Metal Primer E41N1 2 finish coats PPG Int/Ext Industrial Gloss Alkyd, 7-282 Series SW Industrial Enamel, Series B54 3. Grilles, diffusers and registers in walls and ceilings. 1 finish coat PPG Speedhide Alkyd Lo-Sheen, 6-90 SW ProMar 200 Alkyd Eg-Shel Enamel, Series B33 W 200 4. Other exposed iron and steel. (Excluding interior machinery or piping) 1 primer coat PPG Speedhide Inhibitive Steel Primer, 6-208 SW Kern Kromik Metal Primer, B50 W 1 1 finish coat PPG Speedhide Alkyd Lo-Sheen, 6-90 SW ProMar 200 Alkyd Eg-Shel Enamel, Series B33 W 200 5. Fire extinguisher cabinets, including door and frame inside and outside. 1 finish coat PPG Aquapon 35 Gloss Polyamide Epoxy Enamel 95-1 Series SW Tile Clad II Epoxy, Series B62 C. Interior Wood 1. Inside of cabinet drawers. 1 finish coat clear satin polyurethane 2. Hardwood millwork, doors, and Vim. 1 coat stain; color as selected by Architect. 1 coat clear sanding sealer 2 coats clear satin polyurethane D. Interior Masonry 1. Concrete masonry unit walls scheduled to have Epoxy Paint. 1 filler coat PPG Pitt -Glaze Int/Ext Latex Block Filler 16-90 SW Heavy Duty Block Filler, B42 W 46 2 finish coats PPG Auquapon WB Waterborne Gloss Epoxy coating 98-1 Series SW Water -Based Catalyzed Epoxy, Series B70, Gloss Hardener 2. Concrete masonry unit walls in Mechanical Rooms. 2 finish coats PPG Speedhide Interior Acrylic Latex Semi -Gloss Enamel, 6-510 Series SW Pro -Mar 200 Latex Semi -Gloss, B31 W 200 3. Other concrete masonry unit walls. 1 filler coat PPG Pitt -Glaze Int/Ext Latex Block Filler 16-90 SW Heavy Duty Block Filler, B42 W 46 2 finish coats PPG Speedhide Interior Acrylic Latex Semi -Gloss Enamel, 6-510 Series SW Pro -Mar 200 Latex Semi -Gloss, B31 W 200 E. Gypsum Wallboard 1. Gypsum board ceilings and furr downs. 1 texture coat USG Multi -Purpose Texture - Sprayed Splatter - Light Finish Texture PPG Speedhide Acrylic Texture Coating 4-50 3 finish coats PPG Speedhide Interior Flat Latex 6-70 Series SW ProMar 200 Latex Flat Wall Paint, Series B30 W 200 2. Gypsum board walls above ceramic file wainscot. 1 texture coat USG Multi -Purpose Texture - sprayed splatter medium -light finish texture PPG Speedhide Acrylic Texture Coating 4-50 3 finish coats PPG Speedhide Interior Enamel Eggshell Latex 6-411 Series SW ProMar 200 Interior Latex Eg-Shel B20W2200 Series PAINTING VLK Architects, 2007 09 9100 - 5 2740.00 Creekview Elementary School College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas 3. All other gypsum board walls. 1 texture coat USG Multi -Purpose Texture - sprayed splatter medium -light finish texture PPG Speedhide Acrylic Texture Coating 4-50 1 primer coat SW ProMar 200 Latex Wall Primer B28W200 or approved equivalent 2 finish coats PPG Speedhide Interior Semi -Gloss Latex Enamel 6-510 Series SW Pro -Mar 200 Latex Semi -Gloss, B31 W 200 F. Interior Caulked Joints 1. Caulking 2 finish coats PPG Speedhide Interior Semi -Gloss Latex Enamel 6-510 Series SW Pro -Mar 200 Latex Semi -Gloss, B31 W 200 G. Interior Plaster 1. Smooth plaster finish 1 primer coat SW ProMar 200 Latex Wall Primer, B28 W 200 2 finish coats PPG Aquapon WB Waterborne gloss Epoxy Coating 98-1 Series SW Water -Based Catalyzed Epoxy, Series B70, Gloss Hardener H. Interior Tectum Panels 2 finish coats PPG Wall Hide Latex Wall Paint SW ProMar 400 Flat Latex I. Exterior Metal 1. Steel door frames and hollow metal doors. 1 primer coat PPG Speedhide Int/Ext Rust Inhibitive Steel Primer 6-208 Series SW Kromik Metal Primer E41 N1 2 finish coats PPG Int/Ext Industrial Gloss Alkyd Enamel 7-282 Series SW Industrial Enamel, Series B54 2. Steel gas pipe, conduit, hangers supports and brackets. 1 primer coat PPG Speedhide Int/Ext Galvanized Steel Primer 6-209 SW Galvite Paint, B50 WZ30 1 finish coat PPG Int/Ext Industrial Gloss Alkyd Enamel 7-282 Series SW Industrial Enamel, Series B54 3. Galvanized steel pipe handrails, railings, lintels, gates, metal fencing, ladders, ductwork, flashings, roof hatches, scuppers, downspout boots, ventilators, and louvers. (Reference test procedure for Passivators) 1 primer coat PPG Speedhide Int/Ext Galvanized Steel Primer 6-209 SW Galvite Paint, B50 WZ30 2 finish coats PPG Int/Ext Industrial Gloss Alkyd Enamel 7-282 Series SW Industrial Enamel, Series B54 J. Exterior Plaster 1. Cement plaster surfaces with integral color. 1 finish coat PPG Speedhide Exterior Flat Acrylic Latex 6-610 Series SW Weather Perfect Exterior Flat, B36 END OF SECTION PAINTING VLK Architects, 2007 09 9100 - 6 2740.00 Creek View Elementary School College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas SECTION 10 1110 CHALKBOARDS, MARKERBOARDS AND TACKBOARDS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Framed chalkboards, markerboards and tackboards. 2. Tackboard surfacing on walls. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 06100 - Rough Carpentry; wood grounds. 2. Section 06200 - Finish Carpentry, display cases. 3. Section 09720 - Vinyl Wall Covering. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit in accordance with SECTION 01340 - SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, AND SAMPLES. Include complete manufacturer's catalog cuts and data sheets of anchors, fasteners, color chips (photographic reproductions are not acceptable) and installation requirements. B. Samples: Submit in accordance with SECTION 01340 - SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, AND SAMPLES. Submit a 12" x 12" sample of each type of chalkboard, markerboard and tackboard. Submit a 6" long sample of each component of exposed trim. 1.03 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA A. Submit under provisions of SECTION 01782 - OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA. B. Maintenance Data: Include data on regular cleaning, and stain removal. 1.04 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to applicable code for flame/smoke rating for vinyl fabric covered tackboards in accordance with ASTM E 84. 1.05 QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience. 1.06 FIELD MEASUREMENTS A. Verify that field measurements are as indicated on shop drawings. 1.07 WARRANTY A. Provide 5-year warranty under provisions of SECTION 01784 - WARRANTIES AND BONDS. B. Warranty: Include coverage of chalkboard and markerboard surface from discoloration due to cleaning, crazing or cracking, or staining. C. Special Warranty for Porcelain -enamel Face Sheets: Manufacturer's standard Life -of -the -building warranty in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace porcelain -enamel face sheets that fail in materials or workmanship. Failures include, but are not limited to: 1) Surface lose original writing and erasing qualities; 2) Surfaces become slick or shiny; 3) Surfaces exhibit crazing, cracking, or flaking. CHALKBOARDS, MARKERBOARDS AND TACKBOARDS VLK Architects, 2007 10 1110 - 1 2740.00 Creek View Elementary School College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Chalkboard: Provide porcelain enamel steel chalkboards, 4'-0" width by length indicated, as manufactured by one of the following: Claridge Products and Equipment, Inc. Newline Products, Inc. Platinum Visual Systems'; a division of ABC School Equipment Polyvision Corp. 1. Face sheet of 24 gage leveled enameling steel with porcelain enamel writing surface meeting the wearability requirements of PEI Test CB- 1(t). 2. Core material of nominal 1/2" thick fiberboard or double -ply hardboard. 3. Panel backing of 0.015" sheet aluminum or 26 gage sheet steel. 4. Manufacturer shall factory assemble and bond together the face sheet, core, and backing. 5. Colors shall be as selected by Architect. 6. Chalkboard panel shall be up to 16'-0" in length without joints. B. Liquid Chalk Type Board: Provide porcelain enamel steel liquid chalk writing system, 4'-0" width by length indicated. Product/ manufacturer; one of the following: LCS White Board; Claridge Products and Equipment, Inc. Porcelain Enamel Markerboards; Newline Products, Inc. Porcelain on Steel Markerboards; Platinum Visual Systems'; a division of ABC School Equipment P' ceramicsteel'; Polyvision Corp. 1. Face sheet of 24 gage leveled enameling steel with porcelain enamel writing surface. 2. Core material of nominal 1/2" thick fiberboard or double -ply hardboard. 3. Panel backing of 0.015" sheet aluminum or 26 gage sheet steel. 4. Manufacturer shall factory assemble and bond together the face sheet, core and backing sheet. 5. Colors shall be as selected by Architect. 6. Chalkboard and markerboard panels shall be up to 16'-0" in length without joints. C. Framed Tackboard: Provide vinyl covered tackboards in configuration as shown Product/ manufacturer; one of the following: Fabricork Vinyl Bulletin Boards; Claridge Products and Equipment, Inc. Vinyl -fabric -faced Cork Tackboards; Newline Products, Inc. Vinyl Corkboard; Platinum Visual Systems"; a division of abc School Equipment Type I Vinyl; Polyvision Corp. 1. Heavy-duty, self -healing vinyl machine laminated under high pressure to 1/4" thick cork. 2. Rigid backing panel of 1/4" hardboard. 3. Cork and backing panel shall be factory assembled and bonded together. 4. Colors shall be as selected by Architect. 5. Tackboards shall be up to 16'-0" in lengths without joints. D. Framed Pegboard: 1/4" natural hardboard with 9/32" dia. holes on 1" centers. Provide board in configuration as shown. E. Frames and Trim: Provide extruded aluminum frames and trim. Finish for exposed trim surfaces shall be Architectural Class II AA-M21A31 natural anodic coating. Snap -on type trim is not acceptable. Product/manufacturer; one of the following: Series 36; Best -Rite Manufacturing Series 185; Claridge Products and Equipment, Inc. AX Series; Greensteel, Inc. 210 Series; Nelson Adams, Div of A. Lawer Corp. F. Joint Strips: H-shaped aluminum in single pieces for full height of boards. 1. At vertical joints within chalkboards and markerboards, color the strips to match the chalkboards and markerboards. 2. At vertical joints between chalkboards and tackboards, and markerboards and tackboards, strips shall be anodized aluminum. G. Map Rails: 1" wide of extruded aluminum with cork insert and Claridge No. 51 ES type end stops. Furnish one metal spring clip hook for each linear foot of map rail and two (2) flag holders for each room with map rails. Finish map rail to match the chalkboard and markerboard frames. H. Exhibit Rails/Tack Strips: 3" wide extruded aluminum with Fabricork insert (color as selected by Architect) similar to Claridge No. EDR Exhibit Rail. CHALKBOARDS, MARKERBOARDS AND TACKBOARDS VLK Architects, 2007 10 1110 - 2 2740.00 Creek View Elementary School College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas Chalktroughs and Markertroughs: 1. Provide heavy tubular type of extruded aluminum with cast aluminum end caps, finished to match the chalkboard and markerboard frames. 2. At markerboard in Gymnasium, provide Model M31-TM magnetic tray full length of markerboard, as manufactured by Best -Rite or approved equal. J. Adhesive: Flash -proof type furnished or recommended by the manufacturer. 2.02 FABRICATION A. Fabricating Boards: Chalkboards, markerboards and tackboards shall be factory framed units up to 16'-0" one piece in length. Boards too large to be factory framed shall be assembled on the job to match the factory -built boards. 1. Assemble frames with hairline joints. Corner joints shall be mitered. There shall be no exposed face fasteners of any sort. 2. Make up boards in single sheets without joints where possible. Where vertical joints are necessary, space them symmetrically and use joint strips to cover them. Horizontal joints are not acceptable. 3. Vertical joints between chalkboard or markerboard and tackboard in the same frame shall be covered with single mullion trim pieces. Double mullions at these joints will not be acceptable. 4. Provide a map rail across the top of each chalkboard and markerboard unit. 5. Provide a chalk/marker trough under each chalkboard and markerboard unit. Marker/chalk trough tray at markerboard in gymnasium shall be magnetic. 6. Manufacturer's labels shall not be exposed to view. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Erecting Framed Units: Install framed chalkboards, markerboards and tackboards in conformance with the manufacturer's instructions using continuous wall hangers and adjustable mounting clip angles. 1. On masonry walls, secure the hangers with screws into metal expansion shields or with toggle bolts. 2. On gypsum wallboard partitions, locate the hangers to engage the steel stud flanges where possible and secure with molly bolts or self -drilling fasteners into the studs, or attach to wood blocking with suitable length screws. 3. On back of chalkboards and markerboards, apply manufacturer's recommended adhesive, cover entire surface evenly using a serrated trowel. 4. Behind the tackboards furnish and field install suitable blocking pads 16" o.c. each way to prevent bowing. 5. Behind pegboards, field install blocking pads at 16" on centers. 6. The installed boards shall be flat, plumb, square and rigid. 7. Pre -dust chalkboards after erection. 8. Mounting Height: Reference drawings. B. Erecting Exhibit Rails/Tack Strips: 1. On masonry walls, secure the hangers with screws into metal expansion shields or with toggle bolts. 2. On gypsum wallboard partitions, locate the hangers to engage the steel stud flanges where possible and secure with molly bolts or self -drilling fasteners into the studs, or attach to wood blocking with suitable length screws. 3.02 CLEANING A. Remove crates, cartons and rubbish from the premises and leave the rooms broom clean. Clean down board surfaces to leave them in perfect condition. END OF SECTION CHALKBOARDS, MARKERBOARDS AND TACKBOARDS VLK Architects, 2007 10 1110 - 3 2740.00 Creek View Elementary School College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas SECTION 10 1400 IDENTIFYING DEVICES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Cast aluminum letters, room identification signs, and building dedication plaque. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 012100 -Allowances. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit in accordance with SECTION 01 3323 - SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, AND SAMPLES. B. Samples: Submit manufacturer's complete line of color samples, 1" x 3", for initial color selection. C. Invoices: Submit certified copies of invoices indicating description and quantity of signs delivered and installed. D. Template: Submit full-size template drawing for approval of aluminum letter size, stock, spacing, anchorage devices, etc. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. All interior signs shall be provided by a single source with at least five years experience successfully providing signs of similar type and scope. B. All signs shall comply with the Texas Accessibility Standards (TAS) and all other laws and ordinances of authorities having jurisdiction. Braille shall be Grade ll, having dimensions as required to meet TAS. 1.04 PACKING, DELIVERY, AND STORAGE A. Deliver components correctly packaged to prevent damage. Pack modules and back-up plates unassembled to allow for mechanical mounting of backplate to wall with concealed fasteners. B. Individually and clearly identify each sign number, type, location to be installed, mounting instructions, and any other pertinent information. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 CAST ALUMINUM LETTERS A. Type: Custom fabricated 14" and 8" high Clarendon Medium letters and numbers specified herein. 1. School Name Signage: School name shall read "Creek View Elementary School" and shall be 14" upper and/or lowercase 2. School Address Signage: Numbers shall read "1001" and shall be 8" numbers. B. Material: Manufacturer's standard aluminum alloy for casting. All screws shall be stainless steel. C. Fabrication: Letters shall be fully fabricated before enameling. 1. Letters shall be cast with smooth flat faces, sharp comers, true lines and accurate profiles. 2. Cast letters shall be free of pits, scale, and holes, or other defects and faces shall be mechanically finished to a satin texture and etched. 3. Provide at least two points of attachment for each letter. D. Pre -cleaning: Immerse the letters in hot alkaline cleaner to remove all contamination. E. Clear Anodic Finish: Manufacturer's standard clear anodic coating, 0.018 mm or thicker, over a satin (directionally textured) mechanical finish. F. Warranty: 5 years. IDENTIFYING DEVICES VLK Architects, 2007 10 1400 - 1 2740.00 Creek View Elementary School College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas 2.02 INTERIOR IDENTIFICATION GRAPHICS A. Provide room identification signs as selected by Architect by allowance. 2.03 BUILDING DEDICATION PLAQUE A. Provide building dedication plaque as selected by Architect by allowance. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Erecting Letters: Erect letters straight and level on the exterior face of building where shown. 1. Secure letters to face brick with threaded stud anchors set in non -staining, quick setting cement. Letters shall be flush mounted to masonry surfaces. B. Interior Identification Graphics: 1. On hard surfaces (i.e. ceramic tile, masonry, or plastic laminate), install room identification signs plumb and square with the "Tuff -bond" silicone adhesive furnished by the manufacturer (foam tape is not allowed). 2. On painted gypsum wallboard or vinyl wallcovering, install room identification signs on backing plates with the "Tuff -bond" silicone adhesive furnished by the manufacturer (foam tape is not allowed). a. The backing plate shall bet/8" thick and shall be the same size as the face panel. b. Screw the backing panel into molly bolts in the wall with two countersunk, flathead screws. 3. Install signs on the wall 60" from floor to centerline of sign, and with the edge closest to the door at 8" maximum from door frame. 4. Unless noted otherwise, install signs on latch side of the door such that a person can approach within 3" and avoid door swing and protruding objects. 5. Installation shall comply with ADA requirements. 6. For signs mounted on glass, install matching coverplate on opposite side of glass and aligned with the sign. C. Building Dedication Plaque: Install building dedication plaque plumb and square in strict compliance with manufacturer's instructions. 3.02 CLEANING A. On completion, clean exposed surfaces and leave free of defects. Do not use abrasives. B. Do not use abrasives. 3.03 COORDINATION A. Contractor shall coordinate the installation of the identifying devices with other trades involved in the project. 3.04 DAMAGE A. Any identifying device which is scratched or defaced will be rejected. END OF SECTION IDENTIFYING DEVICES VLK Architects, 2007 10 1400 - 2 2740.00 Creekview Elementary School College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas SECTION 10 2115 SOLID PHENOLIC TOILET COMPARTMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Solid phenolic toilet compartments and urinal screens. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 10 2800 -Toilet Accessories. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit in accordance with SECTION 01 3323 - SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, AND SAMPLES B. Product Data: 1. Include complete manufacturer's catalog cuts and data sheets of hardware, anchors, fasteners, and installation requirements. 2. Submit literature documenting that the partition door latch meets Texas Accessibility Standards (TAS) requirements. C. Shop Drawings: Include drawings for fabrication and erection of toilet compartment assemblies which are not fully described in manufacturer's data. D. Samples: Submit a sample, 6" by 6", of each finish and color selected (photographic reproductions of color are not acceptable). 1.03 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING A. Coordinate work with placement of suspension members and anchorage devices. Supply rough -in data in sufficient time for concealed preparatory to be conducted. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Provide floor -mounted, overhead -braced toilet compartments. Product/manufacturer; one of the following: Concord; Accurate Partitions Division, Kinkead Industries, Inc. Embassy; Global Steel Products Corp. Corinthian; Metpar Corp. Academy; The Sanymetal Products Co., Inc. B. Provide floor anchored urinal screens; product/manufacturer; one of the following: Type PBUS; Accurate Partitions Division, Kinkead Industries, Inc. Floor Anchored; Global Steel Products Corp. FT-700; Metpar Corp. Type BX; Sanymetal; A Crane Plumbing Company 2.02 MATERIALS A. Solid phenolic core with melamine facing on both sides, fused to substrate without visible glue line or seam. Provide units with eased edges and with minimum 3/4-inch thick doors and pilasters and minimum 1/2-inch thick panels and screens. Color(s) as selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors. B. Pilaster Shoes: ASTM A 167, Type 302/304 stainless steel of one-piece construction, 3" high, finish to match hardware. C. Headrails: Extruded, polished anodized aluminum in anti -grip profile. 2.03 FABRICATION A. Fabricate flush compartment panels, pilasters, and doors to the layout indicated with the following minimum dimensions. 1. Where grab bars are indicated, provide a 32" wide (clear opening) door. SOLID PHENOLIC TOILET COMPARTMENTS VLK Architects, 2007 10 2115 - 1 2740.00 Creekview Elementary School College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas 2. At other locations, standard compartments shall have a 24" wide in -swinging door, unless specifically detailed and dimensioned otherwise. 3. Doors and compartments panels 58" in length with a 12" clearance between floor and bottom of panels and doors. Pilasters shall be floor mounted, overhead braced, 82" high. 4. Urinal screens 18" by 58" high at floor anchored urinal screens. B. Hardware: Provide hardware and fittings for compartment system of chrome -plated cast non-ferrous metal alloy, chrome -plated brass, or polished stainless steel. 1. Hinges: Adjustable to permit doors to be set either self -opening or ajar, and with operating parts encased within the door. Opposing cam action with compensation by gravity or compressive spring action. 2. Latches: Fully mortised concealed type with steel bolt and provision for emergency access and paddle handle on accessible stalls. 3. Strikes and Keepers: Wrap -around type with rubber bumper, mounted with through bolts. 4. Coat hooks with rubber bumpers for in -swinging doors. 5. Pulls for out -swinging doors only. Furnish with wall bumpers where required to prevent doors from striking wall. 6. Brackets: Full -Height (Continuous) Type: Manufacturer's standard design; aluminum with bright anodized finish.. 7. Fasteners: Vandal proof (one-way) screws and sex bolts of chrome -plated brass or stainless steel for all exposed locations. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine conditions and proceed with Work in accordance with SECTION 013100 - PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION. B. Check areas scheduled to receive partitions for correct dimensions, plumbness of walls, soundness of wall surfaces, location of built-in framing/anchorages/bracing, and other conditions that would affect proper installation of holding brackets and anchorage or suspension devices. C. Verify spacing of plumbing fixtures to assure compatibility with installation of partitions. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install compartments rigid, straight, plumb, and with horizontal lines level. Drilling, cutting, and fitting to room finish shall be concealed in the finished work. Clearance at vertical edges of doors shall be uniform from top to bottom, and doors shall be free of warp and wind. Provide clearances of not more than between pilasters and panels, and not more than 1" between panels and walls. 1. Attach dividing compartments to the back wall with full -height continuous brackets, and at the front to the pilasters with two heavy two -eared stirrup brackets. Use two one -eared brackets at corners. The use of U-type brackets is not acceptable. 2. Attach pilasters to floor with 3/a" threaded studs, washers, lock nuts, expansion shields (minimum of 2" penetration into concrete), and pilaster brackets. Level, plumb, and tighten the installation with the leveling device. Conceal the floor anchorage and bases with pilaster shoe assembly having concealed snap -down action on a concealed hold-down clip. Exposed fasteners on shoe will not be permitted. 3. Provide a 12" clearance between floor and bottom of compartment panels and doors. 4. Attach urinal screens to the wall with full -height continuous brackets. The use of U-type brackets is not acceptable. Attach pilaster to floor in the same manner as stated for toilet compartments. Exposed fasteners on shoe will not be permitted. 3.03 ADJUST AND CLEAN A. Adjusting: Adjust hardware just prior to final acceptance. Doors shall operate freely. 1. For out -swinging doors, adjust hinges to hold doors closed. 2. For in -swinging doors, adjust hinges to hold doors open at 30°. B. Cleaning: Remove protective masking and clean surfaces, leaving them free of soil and imperfections. END OF SECTION SOLID PHENOLIC TOILET COMPARTMENTS VLK Architects, 2007 10 2115 - 2 2740.00 Creek View Elementary School College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas SECTION 10 2123 CUBICLE CURTAINS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Cubicles, including curtain, track and hanger system. B. Related Work: 1. Section 09 5100 -Acoustical Ceilings. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit in accordance with SECTION 01 3323 - SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, AND SAMPLES. B. Product Data: Include complete manufacturer's catalog cuts, and installation requirements. C. Samples: Provide 6" x 6" material sample of colors selected. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Prod ucUmanufacturer; one of the following: Ultra CubeTm; Clickeze, InPro Corp. (www.inprocorp.com) Cubicle Tracks and Hardware; General Cubicle Co. (www.generalcubicie.com) 19100 Series; Salsbury Ind. (www.hospitalhardware.com) 2.02 MATERIALS A. Track shall be extruded 6063-T5 anodized aluminum, 0.185 lb. per foot minimum weight B. Carriers shall be an assembly with a body and wheels made of self lubricating Dupont Delrin. The eye and hook assembly shall be made of 0.093 bright basic wire, bright nickel plated with a 2" drop overall from the bottom of the track. C. Pullout shall be 0.032 sheet aluminum, provide to permit entry of carriers into end of track. D. End stops shall be 0.032 sheet aluminum. E. Curtains: 1. Dimensions: a. Width: Track width plus 10%. b. Height: Ceiling to 15" above floor. 2. Hems: Triple thickness; 3" to top, 1" at sides and bottom. 3. Mesh top: 20" high, edges bound with same fabric as body of curtain. Overlap and sew to curtain fabric. 4. Grommets: Space 6" maximum on center; secure to top hem. 5. Solid Fabric: Flame resistant, polyester reinforced, anti -bacterial vinyl fabric. Color to be selected from General Cubicle's "Staph Chek". PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install tracks, curtains, and accessories in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Secure tracks directly to underside of ceiling; attach at 24" o.c. maximum. Provide hardware required for attachment to ceilings encountered. C. Install end stops at terminal ends of tracks. D. Install track splices at joints between sections. E. Support curtains with one carrier per grommet. END OF SECTION CUBICLE CURTAINS VLK Architects, 2007 10 2123 - 1 2740.00 Creekview Elementary School College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas SECTION 10 2613 CORNER GUARDS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Corner guards. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 04 2000 - Unit Masonry: concrete masonry units. 2. Section 09 2116 - Gypsum Board Assemblies: gypsum board walls. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit in accordance with SECTION 01 3323 - SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, AND SAMPLES. Include complete manufacturer's catalog cuts, and installation requirements. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 CORNER GUARDS A. Cement -On Guards: Provide 4'-0" long Type 430, 16-gage stainless steel corner guards, 90°, 3'/2" wing as manufactured by Wilkinson Hi -Rise, LLC. (330.686.9922, www.wilkinsonhirise.com). Mounted with PL Premium Adhesive standard Styles shall be as follows: 1. WCG-1/8C - 4'-0" long. 2. WCGU-118C - 4'-0" long. B. Provide ACROVYN SM-20 by Construction Specialties (800.233.8493, www.c-sgroup.com). Surface mounted guards consisting of a continuous aluminum retainer with snap -on vinyl acrylic cover. Provide color matched end caps. Length as indicated on drawings. Color to be selected by Architect from manufacturer's full color range. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install corner guards in wall using manufacturer's anchoring devices and in compliance with manufacturer's instructions. Install true and plumb. 1. Stainless steel corner guards shall be installed at all outside corners in the Kitchen. Surface mounted stainless steel corner guards shall be applied with manufacturer supplied adhesive. Tops of corner guards in kitchen shall be sealed with clear silicone sealant. 3.02 PROTECTION A. Protect stainless steel surface from damage during construction. END OF SECTION CORNER GUARDS VLK Architects, 2007 10 2613 - 1 2740.00 Creekview Elementary School College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas SECTION 10 2800 TOILET ACCESSORIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Toilet accessories. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 10 2115 - Solid Phenolic Toilet Compartments. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit in accordance with SECTION 01 3323 - SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA AND SAMPLES. Include complete manufacturer's catalog cuts and data sheets, complete parts list and installation requirements for each accessory item specified. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Products: Provide products of the same manufacturer for each type of accessory unit and for units exposed in the same area. 1. Stamped names or labels on exposed faces of units will not be permitted. 2. Provide locks where specified, with the same keying for all accessory units in the project. 1.04 COORDINATION A. Accessibility Standards: Coordinate accessory locations with otherwork to prevent interference with clearances required for access under Texas Accessibility Standards (TAS), Architectural Barriers Act --Article 9102, Vernon's Texas Civil Statutes and Texas Government Code, Chapter 469. 1.05 WARRANTY A. Provide manufacturer's written 3-year limited parts warranty for hand dryers. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Toilet accessories shall be of the quality manufactured by Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc. and are listed by Bobrick catalog numbers for convenience in identification. The use of a catalog number as a description of an item shall be taken to include the description or specification for the item in the manufacturer's catalog. B. Toilet Accessories: Equivalent items of the following manufacturer's are acceptable: American Specialties, Inc. Bobrick Washroom Equipment Bradley Corp. General Accessory Manufacturing Co. (GAMCO) McKinney/Parker Washroom Accessories Corp. 2.02 BASIC MATERIALS A. Stainless Steel: ASTM A 666, Type 304 with No. 4 satin finish. B. Brass: ASTM B 19, leaded and unleaded flat products; ASTM B 16, rods, shapes, forgings, and flat products with finished edges; ASTM B 30 castings. C. Sheet Steel: ASTM A 1008, cold rolled, commercial quality. D. Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653, G60 (Z180). E. Chromium Plating: ASTM B 456, Service Condition Number SC 2 (moderate service), nickel plus chromium electro-deposited on base metal. F. Mirror Glass: ASTM C 1036, Type I, Class 1, Quality q3, nominal 1/4" thick, with silvering, electroplated copper coating, and protective organic coating complying with ASTM C 1036. TOILET ACCESSORIES VLK Architects, 2007 10 2800 - 1 2740.00 Creekview Elementary School College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas G. Galvanized Steel Mounting Devices: ASTM A 153, hot -dip galvanized after fabrication. H. Fasteners: Screws, bolts, and otherdevices of same material as accessoryunit, tamperand theft resistantwhen exposed, and of galvanized steel when concealed. I. Keys: Provide universal keys for access to accessories for servicing and resupplying. Provide minimum of six keys. 2.03 ACCESSORIES A. Toilet Tissue Dispenser: Owner -furnished, Contractor -Installed. B. Grab Bars: Model B-6806, sizes as indicated. C. Mirror: Model B-290 2436. D. Paper Towel Dispenser. Owner -Furnished, Contractor -Installed. E. Sanitary Napkin Disposal: Rubbermaid Model 6140 w/Liner Model 6141. One carton per napkin disposal unit. F. NOT USED. G. Soap Dispenser: Owner -Furnished, Contractor -Installed.. H. NOT USED I. NOT USED J. Custodian's Mop and Broom Holder with Utility Shelf: Model B-224 x 36, one per Janitor's Closet and where scheduled. K. Shower Curtain Rod: Model B-6107 with 204-2 shower curtain on 204-1 curtain hooks. Robe Hook to be Model B-211 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install accessories according to manufacturers' written instructions and recommendations, using fasteners appropriate to substrate and recommended by manufacturer. Install units level, plumb, and firmly anchored in locations and at heights indicated. Adhesive mountings and plastic rawl plug mounts will not be acceptable. B. Secure mirrors to walls in concealed, tamper -resistant mannerwith special hangers, toggle bolts, or screws. Set units level, plumb, and square. C. At toilets with wheelchair compartments all toilet accessories shall be installed so that operating areas such as coin slots, pushbuttons, openings for towels, cups and waste are not more than 48" above finished floor for frontal approach. D. Attach dispensers and cabinets to steel stud partitions with suitable hollow wall screw anchors. Attach dispensers and cabinets to masonry partitions with stainless steel expansion shields and machine screws. E. Attach sanitary napkin disposal units and toilet tissue dispensers to toilet partition panels with stainless steel or chrome plated through bolts and hex cap nuts. F. Install grab bars to withstand a downward load of at least 250 Ibf. Attach grab bars to toilet partition panels with stainless steel through bolts and plated hex cap nuts. Attach grab bars to steel stud partitions with connector assemblies to steel anchors fastened to studs. Attach grab bars to masonry partitions with stainless steel expansion shields and machine screws. 3.02 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Adjust accessories for unencumbered, smooth operation and verify that mechanisms function properly. Replace damaged or defective items. TOILET ACCESSORIES VLK Architects, 2007 10 2800 - 2 2740.00 Creekview Elementary School College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas B. Remove temporary labels and protective coatings. C. Clean and polish exposed surfaces according to manufacturers written recommendations. END OF SECTION TOILET ACCESSORIES VLK Architects, 2007 10 2800 - 3 2740.00 Creek View Elementary School College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas SECTION 10 4413 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS AND CABINETS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Fire extinguishers and fire extinguisher cabinets. 1.02 DEFINITIONS A. Where indicated on the drawings the abbreviation "F.E.C." defines a fire extinguisher and cabinet and the abbreviation "FE." is for fire extinguisher without cabinet. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit in accordance with SECTION 01 3323 - SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, AND SAMPLES. B. Product Data: Include physical dimensions, operational features, color and finish, anchorage details, material descriptions and type of hardware. C. Shop Drawings: Include rough -in measurements, locations, and details for cabinets. 1.04 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA A. Submit under provisions of SECTION 01 7823 - OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA. B. Maintenance Data: Include test, refill or recharge schedules and re -certification requirements. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Single Source Responsibility: Obtain products in this Section from one manufacturer. B. Certifications 1. Provide extinguishers which are U.L. listed and bear the U.L. "Listing Work" for type, rating, and classification. 2. Conform to NFPA-10 requirements for extinguishers. 3. Provide units conforming with ANSI/UL 711. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver, store and handle products in accordance with SECTION 01 6500 - PRODUCT DELIVERY REQUIREMENTS and SECTION 01 6600 - PRODUCT STORAGE AND HANDLING REQUIREMENTS. B. Store extinguishers in protected location until after final cleaning is completed. 1.07 PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS A. Environmental Requirements: Do not store products subject to freeze damage in environments where damage could occur. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS A. Provide multi -purpose dry chemical type fire extinguisher, 10 lbs. nominal capacity. Provide manufacturer's standard hook type bracket where fire extinguishers are noted without cabinets. Product/manufacturer; one of the following: Cosmic 10E; J.L. Industries MP10; Larsen's Manufacturing Co. Wing 10HB; Modern Metal Products by Muckle Model 3010; Potter -Roemer FIRE EXTINGUISHERS AND CABINETS VLK Architects, 2007 10 4413 - 1 2740.00 Creek View Elementary School College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas B. At Kitchen provide wet chemical typefire extinguisher with a Class K UL rating. Provide manufacturer's standard wall mounting bracket. Product/manufacturer; one of the following: Saturn 15 Model, JL Industries, Inc. WC-61- Series Wet Chemical, Larsen's Manufacturing Co. 2.02 FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINETS A. Provide steel trim and door. Doors shall be solid with vertical window and have continuous piano hinge. "Fire Extinguisher" vertical ascending silk-screened lettering in red. Prod uct/manufacturer; one of the following: Fire-FX 1012V12 Ambassador; J.L. Industries FS 2409-RA Vertical Duo, Acrylic; Larsen's Manufacturing Co. "Alta" Series No. 7023-DV-6; Potter -Roemer. 2.03 MOUNTING BRACKETS A. Mounting Brackets: Manufacturer's standard steel, designed to secure fire extinguisher to wall or structure, of sizes required fortype and capacity of fire extinguisher indicated, with plated or baked -enamel finish. Color shall be red. B. Identification: Identify bracket -mounted fire extinguishers with the words "FIRE EXTINGUISHER" in red letter decals applied to mounting surface. Orientation shall be horizontal. 2.04 FABRICATION A. Form body of cabinet with tight inside comers and seams. B. Predrill holes for anchorage. C. Form perimeter trim and door stiles by welding, filling, and grinding smooth. D. Hinge doors for 180' opening with continuous piano hinge. Provide nylon roller type catch. 2.05 FINISHES A. Extinguisher: Red enamel. B. Cabinet Trim and Door: Primed. C. Cabinet Interior: White enamel. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install fire extinguisher cabinets at locations indicated in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. Install level, plumb, secure. Install fire extinguisher cabinets with center of pulls at 48" above finished floor. B. Install fire extinguishers within cabinets on mounting brackets, placed in such a manner that operating instructions face outward. C. Mounting Brackets: Fasten mounting brackets to surfaces, square and plumb. Apply identification decals above bracket -mounted fire extinguishers. D. Service, charge (if required), and tag each fire extinguisher not more than five calendar days prior to substantial completion. E. Maintain design of fire -rated partitions associated with cabinets. END OF SECTION FIRE EXTINGUISHERS AND CABINETS VLK Architects, 2007 10 4413 - 2 2740.00 Creekview Elementary School College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas SECTION 10 5100 LOCKERS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Metal lockers. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 06 1000 -Rough Carpentry; wood sleepers and wood blocking. 2. Section 09 6500 - Resilient Flooring; rubber base. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit in accordance with SECTION 01 3323 - SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, AND SAMPLES. B. Product Data: Submit complete manufacturer's catalog cuts and data sheets of hardware, anchors, fasteners and installation requirements. C. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. Show base, flat tops, filler panels and other accessories. Include locker identification system. D. Samples: Submit color chips (photographic reproductions of color are not acceptable). 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Uniformity: Provide each type of metal locker as produced by a single manufacturer, including necessary mounting accessories, fittings, and fastenings. 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Do not deliver metal lockers until spaces to receive them are clean, dry, and ready for metal locker installation. B. Store and protect lockers under provisions of SECTION 01 6600 - PRODUCT STORAGE AND HANDLING REQUIREMENTS. C. Protect locker finishes and adjacent surfaces from damage during installation. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. General Lockers: Materials and methods described are based on the specifications of Republic Storage System, LLC (www.republicstorage.com) and are given to designate the quality of materials and workmanship required. Equivalent lockers as manufactured by one of the following will be acceptable: Art Metal Products, Div Fort Knox Storage Co. (www.artmetalproducts.com) List Industries, Inc. (www.listindustries.com) Lyon Metal Products, Inc. (www.lyonmetal.com) Penco Products, Inc. (www.pencoproducts.com) Republic Storage System, LLC (www.republicstoracle.com) NO SUBSTITUTIONS 2.02 STANDARD LOCKERS (KITCHEN) A. Materials: Sheet metal shall be smooth cold -rolled steel, ASTM A 1008, at least 16 gage for doors and frames and 24 gage for bodies. Nuts and bolts shall be cadmium plated. B. Construction: Doors shall be louvered at top and bottom, and adequately flanged at edges. channel shapes shall be securely welded together. Provide continuous door strikes at jambs. silencers on each latching hook. Fabricate to swing 180°. 1. Ventilation: Provide stamped, louvered vents in door face, as follows: a. Double -tier Lockers: Not less than 6 louver openings top and bottom. 2. Hinges: Heavy-duty, not less than 0.050" thick steel, full -loop, 5 knuckle, fight pin, 2" high. 3 hinges for each door over 42" high and at least 2 hinges for each door 42" high or less. Door frames of Provide rubber Provide at least LOCKERS VLK Architects, 2007 10 5100 - 1 2740.00 Creekview Elementary School College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas C. Locks: Recessed handle with provisions for Owner -furnished padlocks. 1. Provide handicapped accessible latches on accessible lockers. D. Trim: 16 gage steel filler strips to cover spaces between lockers and adjacent walls at ends of rows and elsewhere as may be required. Provide finished end panels (no holes) for exposed ends of locker rows. Finish trim to match lockers. E. Equipment: Furnish each double -tier locker with the following items. 1. One double prong hook and not less than two single -prong wall hooks. 2. At handicapped accessible lockers, locker bottom must be a minimum of 15" (front approach) or 9" (side approach) from the floor. 3. No Accessible stickers on lockers, per Owner. F. Flat Tops: not less than 24-gauge sheet steel, in lengths as long as possible. Provide closures at ends. Finish to match exterior of lockers. G. Zee Bases: 16 gauge, 4" toe space for application of rubber base by others. H. Finish: Chemically pre -treat metal with degreasing and phosphatizing process. Apply baked -on enamel finish to all surfaces, exposed and concealed, except plates and non-ferrous metal. Lockers shall be one custom color exterior and shall be manufacturer's standard color interior. Colors as selected by Architect. Number Plates: Aluminum with black filled numbers, fastened with rivets to the top of the front face of the locker door, not in the recess. Number lockers consecutively as directed by Owner. J. Acceptable Products: Standard Lockers; Republic Storage Systems Co. 1. Kitchen: Double Tier, 12"W x 12"D x 36" Tall - with continuous flat tops and zee -base, recessed handle and staple with provisions for Owner -furnished padlocks. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine walls, floors, and support bases and verify that bases are properly sized and located. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. General: Install level, plumb, and true; shim as required, using concealed shims. B. Anchor locker runs at ends and at intervals recommended by manufacturer, but not more than 36" o.c. The use of sheet metal screws for assembly and installation is not allowed. C. Accessories: Fit exposed connections of trim, fillers, and closures accurately together to form tight, hairline joints, with concealed fasteners and splice plates. 3.03 ADJUST AND CLEAN A. Clean, lubricate, and adjust hardware. Adjust doors and latches to operate easily without binding. B. Protect metal lockers from damage, abuse, dust, dirt, stain, or paint. C. Touch-up marred finishes, or replace metal lockers that cannot be restored to factory -finished appearance. Use only materials and procedures recommended or furnished by metal locker manufacturer. END OF SECTION LOCKERS VLK Architects, 2007 10 5100 - 2 2740.00 Creekview Elementary School College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas SECTION 10 5626 METAL STORAGE SHELVING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Metal storage shelving. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit following items in accordance with SECTION 01340 - SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, AND SAMPLES. B. Product Data: Include complete manufacturer's catalog cuts and data sheets, complete parts list, installation requirements, and all pertinent performance characteristics and criteria. C. Shop Drawings: Indicate materials, construction, sizes, quantities, finishes, and installation details. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations: Provide metal storage shelving of the same manufacturer throughout the project. 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver, store, handle, and protect products in accordance with SECTION 01650 - TRANSPORTATION AND HANDLING and SECTION 01660 - STORAGE AND PROTECTION. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Provide metal storage shelving as manufactured by one of the following: Lyon Workspace Products Penco Products, Inc. Republic Storage Systems Co. Richards -Wilcox Tennsco Western Pacific Storage Systems 2.02 MATERIALS A. Provide RiveTier "Long Span H" Shelving as manufactured by Western Pacific Storage Systems (phone 1-800-732-9777) or approved equivalent. 1. Sizes: 7'-0" H x 24"D x width noted on drawings, with a shelf capacity from 500 lbs. (8'-0" length shelf) to 1800 lbs. (4'-0" length shelf) 2. Metal Shelves: 22 gauge steel. 3. Standard Duty Angle Upright Post - LURH - 14 gauge steel. 2.03 FABRICATION A. Fabricate metal storage shelving square and rigid with posts plumb and true, and shelves flat and free of dents or distortion. Fabricate exposed metal edges free of sharp edges do burrs. Fabricate connections to form a rigid structure, free of buckling and warping. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. General: Install metal storage shelving in strict accordance with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations. B. Install metal storage shelving level, plumb, square, and true. METAL STORAGE SHELVING VLK Architects, 2007 10 5626 - 1 2740.00 Creekview Elementary School College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas C. Install bracing as recommended by manufacturer and as required for stability. 3.02 PROTECTION A. Protect the completed work from damage. Replace damaged items which cannot be repaired. Protect finished installation in accordance with SECTION 01660 - STORAGE AND PROTECTION. 3.03 CLEANING A. Upon completion of the building, clean the metal storage shelving. Leave the metal storage shelving free of defects and in ready -to -use condition. B. Perform final cleaning in accordance with SECTION 01740 - CLEANING. END OF SECTION METAL STORAGE SHELVING VLK Architects, 2007 10 5626 - 2 2740.00 Creek View Elementary School College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas SECTION 10 7326 PREFABRICATED WALKWAY COVERS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Prefabricated walkway canopies. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 03 3000 - Cast -in -Place Concrete. 2. Section 07 9200 - Joint Sealants. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Wind Loading: Fabricate and install prefabricated walkway canopies and othercomponents of system to comply with code requirements for resisting wind effects based on a 70 mph wind. B. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced installer who is an authorized representative of the canopy manufacturer and has completed installation of canopies similar in material, design, and extent to canopy required for this project. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit in accordance with SECTION 01 3323 - SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, AND SAMPLES. B. Shop Drawings: Include drawings showing small scale layouts of prefabricated walkway canopies and large-scale details of edge conditions, joints, expansion joints, anchorages, trim, closures, and special details. C. Samples: Submit two 12" square samples of finished metal panels. D. Certification: Submit design calculations sealed and signed by an engineer registered in the State of Texas. Design calculations shall state that the protective cover system design complies with the wind requirements of all governing jurisdictions, the stability criteria of applicable building code, and all other governing criteria. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Provide prefabricated walkway canopies as manufactured by one of the following: AVAdek E.L. Burns, Inc. Dittmer Architectural Aluminum Mapes Industries, Inc. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Aluminum Sheets: Extruded aluminum sections, Alloy 6063, T6 temper. B. Structural Supports: Extruded aluminum sections, Alloy 6063, T6 temper. C. Fasteners: Manufacturer's standard non -corrosive types, with heads gasketed. D. Accessories: Provide components required for a complete prefabricated walkway canopy system, including fascia, trim, closures, clips, fillers, and similar items. Match materials and finishes of prefabricated walkway canopy framing. E. Finish: Bents, Canopy roof, deck and fascia shall be baked acrylic enamel. Color as selected by Architect. 2.03 FABRICATION A. General: Fabricate and finish canopies and accessories at the factory to greatest extent possible, by manufacturer's standard procedures and processes. Comply with indicated profiles and dimensional requirements. Internal gutters shall connect to weep system. PREFABRICATED WALKWAY COVERS VLK Architects, 2007 10 7326 - 1 2740.00 Creek View Elementary School College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION A. Examine surfaces to receive prefabricated walkway canopies for conditions that will adversely affect the execution and quality of work. Do not start this work until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. General: Comply with canopy fabricator's and material manufacturer's instructions and recommendations for installation, as applicable to project conditions and supporting substrates. Anchor supports and other components of the work securely in place, with provisions for thermal and structural movement. Install expansion joints to provide for thermal and structural movement 3.03 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Damaged Units: Replace canopies and other components of the work which have been damaged or have deteriorated beyond successful repair by means of finish touch-up or similar minor repair procedures. B. Cleaning: Upon completion of canopy installation, clean finished surfaces as recommended by canopy manufacturer, and maintain in a clean condition during construction. END OF SECTION PREFABRICATED WALKWAY COVERS VLK Architects, 2007 10 7326 - 2 2740.00 Creek View Elementary School College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas SECTION 10 7500 FLAGPOLES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Flagpoles. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 32 1313 - Concrete Paving: concrete forflagpole base. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Submit in accordance with SECTION 01 3323 - SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, AND SAMPLES. Include manufacturer's installation instructions. 1.03 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Structural Performance: Provide flagpole assemblies, including anchorages and supports, capable of withstanding the effects of wind loads, determined according to NAAMM FP 1001, "Guide Specifications for Design of Metal Flagpoles". B. Basic Wind Speed: 100 mph; 3-second gust speed at 33 feet above ground. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Provide flagpoles as manufactured by one of the following: American Flagpole; a Kearney -National Inc. Co. Baartol Co., Inc. Concord Industries, Inc. Ewing International Morgan -Francis Div.; Original Tractor Cab Co., Inc. 2.02 FLAGPOLE A. Pole: Concealed halyard, cone tapered aluminum. 1. Material: Seamless alloy 6063-T6 aluminum tubing uniformly cone tapered. 2. Height: 30'-0" exposed. 3. Finish: Clear anodized. B. Fittings: Furnish fittings equal to the following: 1. External Halyard Ball -Bearing, Nonfou ling, Revolving Truck assembly of cast metal with continuous braided polypropylene halyard and 9" cast -metal cleats with fasteners. Finsh exposed metal surfaces to match flagpole. 2. Provide one halyard and one cleat. 3. Provide cast -metal cleat covers, finished to match flagpole, secured with cylinder locks. 4. Collar: Spun aluminum, same finish as flagpole, 14" diameter, 2YZ" high. 5. Two -Flag Arrangement: Provide two beaded retaining loops (one at the bottom of each flag) and four swivel snaps per flagpole, of bronze with neoprene or nylon covers. C. Foundation Tubes: Standard weight steel pipe having self -centering fins, centering bolts, and lightning ground spike. Hot -dip galvanize the assembly after fabrication. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Paint portions of pole below grade with heavy coat of bituminous paint. FLAGPOLES VLK Architects, 2007 10 7500 - 1 2740.00 Creek View Elementary School College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Set foundation tube accurately and hold in position until concrete is placed. B. Install flagpole and fittings in accord with shop drawings and manufacturer's instructions. 3.03 ADJUSTING A. Adjust fittings for smooth operation of halyard. END OF SECTION FLAGPOLES VLK Architects, 2007 10 7500 - 2 2740.00 Creek View Elementary School College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas SECTION 10 9900 MISCELLANEOUS SPECIALTIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Pencil Sharpeners - Owner -Furnished, Contractor -Installed.. 2. Kiln Vent. 3. Knox Box. 4. Propane Cylinder Locker. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 06 1000 - Rough Carpentry; blocking. 2. Section 06 2000 - Finish Carpentry; mounting bases. 3. Section 09 5100 -Acoustical Ceilings. 4. Division 26 - Electrical; connection to Security System. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit following items in accordance with SECTION 013323 - SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, AND SAMPLES. B. Samples: Submit one sample of pencil sharpener, including screws. C. Product Data: Include complete manufacturer's catalog cuts and data sheets, complete parts list, installation requirements, and all pertinent performance characteristics and criteria. D. Shop Drawings: Indicate materials, construction, sizes, quantities, finishes, and installation details. E. Manufacturer's Instructions: For installation, maintenance, and repair of Vent -A -Kiln System. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Products: Provide products of the same manufacturer throughout the project. 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver, store, handle, and protect products in accordance with SECTION 01 6500 - PRODUCT DELIVERY REQUIREMENTS and SECTION 01 6600 - PRODUCT STORAGE AND HANDLING REQUIREMENTS. 1.05 WARRANTY A. Provide a 3-year manufacturer's warranty for the kiln vent and associated parts. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Pencil Sharpener: Owner -Furnished, Contractor -Installed. Painted wood mounting base with eased edges provided by Contractor. B. Kiln Vent: Vent -A -Kiln System as made by Vent -A -Kiln Corp., Buffalo, NY. 1. Provide hood, integral exhaust fan, plug, and wall bracket with counterweight pulley system, flexible hose, and accessories to make a complete and operational system. 2. Provide 44" diameter kiln vent to accommodate pottery kiln with sufficient length of5" diameter flexible hose and clamps to make transition to rigid ductwork above. 3. Integral mount exhaust fan shall include single inlet centered on hood top. Fan shall be nominal 1750 RPM with externally mounted PSC motor to exhaust 238 CFM of standard air at 0 inches W.G, external static pressure. Fan shall include "High -Low -Off' controls with plug, minimum six foot (6') electrical cord, and shall have 115 volt, single phase electrical characteristics. Maximum motor wattage shall be 64. 4. Provide swinging wall bracket assemblyfor each hood with plastic coated 3/16 inch steel cable, pulley, and counterweight 5. Furnish ten feet (10') of five inch (5") diameter flexible vent hose, hose damps, transition and locking blast gate damper for each hood provided. MISCELLANEOUS SPECIALTIES VLK Architects, 2007 10 9900 - 1 2740.00 Creek View Elementary School College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas C. Knox Box: Fire/Rapid Entry System as manufactured by The Knox Company. 1. Model 3200 RTS with 3200 RMK Recessed Mounting Kit at building. 2. Model 3200, surface mounted at gate D. Propane Cylinder Locker: Provide Model LB04202SS, 30w x 30d x 38h, capacity of 4, galvanized steel with electrostatic powder coating, and stainless steel hinges with tamper resistant hardware and heavy duty lock receiver, as manufactured by American Standard Manufacturing (ASM) (phone 1-800-488-8816, website www. amrstd.com) or approved equivalent. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Prepare substrate surfaces as recommended by manufacturer. 3.02 EXAMINATION A. Verify that surfaces and conditions are ready to receive work of this Section. B. Notify Architect of any existing conditions which will adversely affect execution. C. Beginning of execution will constitute acceptance of existing conditions. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Pencil Sharpener: Install pencil sharpeners to be in accurate alignment with the partition or wall and rigidly fastened in place to painted wood mounting base with eased edges. Provide fasteners of adequate length to penetrate not less than %" into blocking behind gypsum board. B. Kiln Vent: Install using skilled workmen in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions and recommendations. C. Knox Box: 1. Surface Mounted: a. Mount the Knox Box unit with the yellow mounting marker pointing up so that the small moisture drain hole is on the bottom side. b. Use a small level to plumb the box square. c. Use at least 4 mounting fasteners (Carriage Bolts, etc.) of 5/16' diameter, bolting completely through solid, secure wall. The Knox Box unit may also be welded in place. NOTE: Do not mount unit on drywall, plywood, pressboard or any other limited strength materials. d. To install door, first attach retaining chain through the hole in the chain tab on the back side of the door and close link with pliers. Door should be inserted bottom side first so that tail piece fits over bottom of door frame. Top of door will now swing shut. 2. Recessed Mounting: a. The Mounting Kit may be set in place during construction of the masonry wall. Wiring conduit may be connected through one or several knock -out holes in the shell housing. Care should be taken to insure that the front of the shell housing, including the cover plate and screw heads, are flush with the finish wall. The shell housing should be plumbed with a level. Leave cover and screws in place until the KNOX-BOX unit is readyto be mounted inside. The five (5) mounting studs may be replaced with bolts or longer studs if required. Do not over tighten mounting nuts, as they may distort the outside flange. With the housing held firmly in place, drill two (2)'/s" holes through the form wall and the housing front cover. Insert screws and pull housing fight against the form wall. Remove screws before removing form. b. Model 3200-RTS is shipped with a door tamper switch mounted in place. Before mounting, carefully remove the door tamper switch and set aside. This will give clear access to inside mounting holes. Do not allow the upper right-hand fastener to extend too far into the box so as to interfere with the door tamper switch. The alarm wiring to the tamper switch should be pulled tight so that any attempt to force box out of wall will break the wire or pull terminals loose. Push -On type terminals are supplied for connection to tamper switch. Tamper switch can be connected for either open or close circuits. D. Propane Cylinder Locker: Install propane cylinder locker in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. 3.04 ADJUSTING A. Adjust and fit items to be flush with adjacent construction. MISCELLANEOUS SPECIALTIES VLK Architects, 2007 10 9900 - 2 2740.00 Creek View Elementary School College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas B. Fasten or adhere for tight connections and joints. 3.05 PROTECTION A. Protect the completed work from damage. Replace damaged items which cannot be repaired. Protectfinished installation in accordance with SECTION 016600 - PRODUCT STORAGE AND HANDLING REQUIREMENTS. 3.06 CLEANING A. Upon completion of the building, clean all items included in this section. Leave them free of defects and in ready -to -use condition. B. Perform final cleaning in accordance with SECTION 01 7413 - PROGRESS CLEANING. END OF SECTION MISCELLANEOUS SPECIALTIES VLK Architects, 2007 10 9900 - 3 2740.00 Creek View Elementary School College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas SECTION 11 3100 APPLIANCES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Appliances. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 12 3216 - Manufactured Plastic -laminate -clad Casework 2. Division 22 - Plumbing: plumbing rough -in. 3. Division 26 - Electrical: electrical rough -in. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit in accordance with SECTION 01 3323 - SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA AND SAMPLES. Include list of optional features, operating characteristics, and dimensions of individual appliances. B. Shop Drawings: Submit in accordance with SECTION 01 3323 - SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA AND SAMPLES. Submit rough -in drawings showing dimensioned locations of electrical and plumbing stub -outs for appliances. 1.03- QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Regulatory Requirements: Provide electrical components required as part of appliances that are listed and labeled by UL and that comply with applicable NEMA standards. B. Accessibility Standards: Where appliances are required to complywith accessibility requirements, comply with Texas Accessibility Standards (TAS) and ICC/ANSI A117.1 Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities (International Building Code). PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Appliances shall be of the quality manufactured by Whirlpool Corp. and U-Line Corp. and are listed by Whirlpool and U-Line catalog numbers for convenience in identification. The use of a catalog number as a description of an item shall be taken to include the description or specification for the item in the manufacturer's catalog. Equivalent items of the following manufacturer's are acceptable: Hotpoint GE Appliances KitchenAid Maytag 2.02 EQUIPMENT A. Microwave/Non-Vented Hood Combination: Provide Model GH7155XK, color as selected by Architedct, non - vented with charcoal filter included, as manufactured by Whirlpool. B. Disposer: Provide Model GC5000XE 3/4 hp disposer as manufactured by Whirlpool. C. Built-in Combination Oven: Provide Model GMC305PD, Color as selected by Architect 30-inch built-in combination oven as manufactured by Whirlpool. Upper oven shall be 1.4 cu. ft. microwave and loweroven shall be 4.3 cu. ft. self-cleaning conventional oven with oven control child lockout. D. Undercounter Refrigerator; Accessible Counter Height: Provide Origins Series Model 29R, color as selected by Architect, undercounter refrigerator as manufactured by U-Line. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.03 EXAMINATION A. Examine roughing -in for piping systems to verify actual locations of piping connections before appliance installation. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. APPLIANCES VLK Architects, 2007 11 3100 - 1 2740.00 Creek View Elementary School College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas 3.04 INSTALLATION A. General: Comply with manufacturer's written instructions. B. Built-in Appliances: Securely anchor units to supporting cabinets or contertops with concealed fasteners. Verify that clearances are adequate for proper functioning and rough openings are completely concealed. C. Freestanding Appliances: Place units in final locations after finishes have been completed in each area. Verify that clearances are adequate to properly operate appliances. 3.05 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Test each item of appliances to verify proper operation. Make necessary adjustments. Verify that accessories required have been furnished and installed. B. Remove packing material from appliances and leave units in clean condition, ready for operation. C. Protection: Protect the completed work from damage. END OF SECTION APPLIANCES VLK Architects, 2007 11 3100 - 2 2740.00 SECTION 11400 FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS Creek View Elementary School College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas A. The general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and General Documents, apply to the Work specified in this Section. 1.02 SCOPE A. Include the Work specified, shown or reasonably inferable as part of Foodservice Equipment. Portions of this Work may be subcontracted to those qualified to do such work, as may be necessary because of jurisdictional trade agreements and restrictions. B. The General Contractor is responsible for Related Work specified in other Sections: i.e. final plumbing, electrical and mechanical connections. The Foodservice Equipment Contractor is responsible for all internal connections when specified. C. The requirements of this Project include minimal inconvenience to the Owner and no interruption in the foodservice operation. Submit proposed schedule of time frame, task - sequence and operation for approval prior to starting work. 1.03 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED IN OTHER SECTIONS A. Slab depressions, reinforced concrete wearing bed and interior finished floor with coved base at prefabricated cold storage assemblies: Divisions 03/09. B. Slab depressions to receive stainless steel drain trench liner/grate assemblies (provided under this Section): Division 03. C. Corner guards: Division 09. D. EMT Conduit with pull -wire and wide -sweep bends for refrigerant piping to remote foodservice equipment refrigeration systems: Division 15/16. E. Empty EMT conduit with pull -wire and wide -sweep bends for interconnect cables between LAN and POS terminals, change -makers, pre -check units, printers, CPU's, etc.: Division 16. F. Supply and exhaust fans for foodservice equipment and exhaust hoods: Division 15. G. Roughing -in and final connection of mechanical, electrical and plumbing systems to Fixed, Movable Foodservice Equipment and Cold Storage Assemblies: Divisions 15 and 16. 1.04 EQUIPMENT FURNISHED / INSTALLED BY OTHERS A. Obtain and coordinate utilities requirements of Owner-Furnished/Owner-Installed (OF/OI) equipment with the building utilities and roughing -in drawings/provisions. B. Coordinate physical data of OF/OI appliances or equipment and incorporate information into Submittal Drawings. Vendor- or Purveyor -Furnished equipment (e.g., coffeeltea equipment): same as OF/OI. FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT VLK Architects, 2007 11 4000 - 1 2740.00 Creek View Elementary School College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas 1.05 WORK INSTALLED BUT FURNISHED BY OTHERS A. Coordinate delivery/installation schedule of Owner-Furnished/Contractor-Installed (OF/CI) equipment with Owner not less than ninety (90) days before equipment requirement. Obtain and coordinate utilities requirements of OF/CI equipment with the building utilities and roughing -in drawings/provisions. C. Receive at job -site and fully incorporate into installation procedures as if furnished under this Section. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. In addition to complying with applicable laws, statutes, building codes and regulations of public authorities, comply with the following: 01 National Sanitation Foundation (all equipment to bear label). 02 National Electric Code. 03 Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. 04 American Gauges Association Laboratories. 05 National Fire Protection Association. 06 Americans with Disabilities Act 07 Food and Drug Administration HAACP Guidelines. 08 Clean Air Act Title 6. Furnish certification of regularly manufactured equipment listing or classification by Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. or other recognized test facility with initial submittal. 1.07 SUBSTITUTIONS A. Equipment items or components specified are intended to be the Basis of Bid. All other brands, including any additional names, which may be listed as "Alternates" or "Approved Equal," must conform with the specifications, size, accessories, etc. of the first -named brand and be subject to Paragraph C-03 of this Article. All appliances within common group or category (e.g., refrigerators, kettles, ovens, etc.): same manufacturer. B. Proposed Substitutions: 01 Submitted no less than 14 calendar days prior to Bid Date. 02 Submit proposed substitutions with catalog data and/or manufacturer's shop details indicating all modifications required to conform with specified brand. 03. Submit proposed substitution of stainless steel manufacturer, provide name, address, telephone, FAX number, Contact (person), project references and qualifications (NSF, UL, etc.). C. Substitutions with prior approval: 01 Submitted on Bidder's letterhead attached to Proposal Form with individual additiveldeductive amounts stipulated and the documentation required in Paragraph B-02. 02 Owner reserves the right to accept or reject any or all substitution proposals before execution of Contract. 03 Provide all design/engineering services required to make adjustments in space, systems, utilities, etc. and pay all additional costs of utilities, construction or professional services that may be incurred due to the acceptance of any substitution. FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT VLK Architects, 2007 11 4000 - 2 2740.00 Creek View Elementary School College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas 1.08 INTERPRETATION OF DOCUMENTS A. During Bidding: contractors', suppliers' or vendors' questions and comments pertaining to Construction Documents' clarity or intent will be addressed by addendum. B. Subsequent to Award: 01 Confirmation of Construction Document requirements will be provided by Clarification Bulletin. 02 Request For Information Bulletins submitted by Contractor: contain Contractor's proposed resolution. 1.09 WARRANTY A. Provide a written warranty for a period of one year from the date of Substantial Completion, including extended four-year replacement warranty on compressor bodies. B. Components of equipment subject to replacement prior to one -year's use (such as refrigerator door gaskets) and those items which may fail due to improper or inadequate periodic maintenance by the Owner/Operator (such as an uncleaned refrigeration system condenser) are not intended to be included within the scope of the Warranty. C. Refrigeration Systems/Equipment: one year free service available within twenty-four hours of notification. D. Furnish three copies of a list of all equipment and their respective local service agencies, indicating the address, telephone number and name of person to contact. Whenever possible, the service agencies selected shall be factory -authorized for the equipment assigned. 1.10 SUBMITTAL DATA A. Special Requirements: the following are in addition to any general requirements given elsewhere in the Documents. B. All drawings and other submittals: indicate Frank Clements Associates, Inc. Associates, Inc. as foodservice consultant. C. Preliminary Submittal: submit two copies of the "buy-out" equipment brochure, one reproducible and one print of all roughing -in and fabrication shop drawings directly to the Foodservice Consultant within four weeks after award of contract, Notice To Proceed or issuance of Letter of Intent. Partial submittals will not be accepted or processed. 01 Include information listed in Article 1.12. Verification and Coordination of Project Data. D. Brochure Format (for regularly -manufactured equipment and components): 01 Front and rear protective cover with labeled project name. 02 Brochure index: indicate functional Area/Room number, item number, quantity, description and manufacturer. 03 A separate flysheet for each component or item of equipment, indicating: item number, name, quantity, manufacturer, optional equipment, modifications, special instructions and utility requirements. An item of equipment or assembly containing more than one buyout sub -assembly or component shall have the secondary item FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT VLK Architects, 2007 11 4000 - 3 2740.00 Creek View Elementary School College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas listed in parenthesis beside the primary item name. For example: Serving Counter (hot food well). 04 Catalog specification sheet and manufacturer's drawing. 05 Certification letter of equipment listing or classification by Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. or other recognized testing facility. Shop Drawings (Rough -In Drawings): O1 Separate drawing sheets: same size as Contract Drawings (Contract Drawings are not to be traced or reproduced). 02 'A" scale drawing of fixed/movable Foodservice Equipment and pre -fabricated Cold Storage Assemblies with itemized schedules. 03 Special Conditions Drawings, sizing and locating the following conditions: a. Slab depressions, cores, sleeves or block -outs (cold storage assemblies, drain trenches, piping, etc.). b. Concrete or masonry platforms. C. Pipe sleeves or roof jacks. d. Wall -openings or block -outs for pass -through equipment, in -wall fire - protection system components, etc. e. Blocking grounds or anchor plates required in walls for equipment support/attachment. f. Above -ceiling hanger assemblies for support of exhaust hoods, utensil - racks, etc. g. Access panels in walls or ceiling for service of equipment. 04 Electrical rough -in drawing. 05 Plumbing/mechanical rough -in drawing. 06 Required information: a. All fixed and movable Foodservice Equipment shown on Contract Drawings. b. All prefabricated Cold Storage Assemblies shown on Contract Drawings. C. All general -use and convenience utilities or services indicated on Contract Drawings, including those required by or connected to equipment or devices not in this Section. d. All rough -in drawings: fully dimensioned from engineering benchmark or finished -room surface to point of stub -up through floor and stub -out through wall or ceiling for all mechanical, electrical and plumbing services. e. Connection number/tag system and symbols: identical to Contract Drawings. F. Shop Drawings (Manufacturer's and Fabricator's): 01 Sheet Size: identical to Contract Drawings, drawn or plotted at 3/a" scale for plan view and elevations; 1'/2" scale for sections and construction details. 02 Included information: item number, name and quantity. 03 Construction details, sections and elevations to reflect requirements of the Specifications and Drawings. 04 Indicate adjacent walls, columns and equipment. 05 Indicate plumbing and electrical schematic drawings for equipment such as: conveyors, waste systems, self-cleaning exhaust hoods, exhaust hood fire protection systems and fabricated fixtures with single electrical or plumbing connection. 06 Mechanical or electrical operating components or products integrated into a fabricated fixture: ventilation and service access required or recommended by the manufacturer, including panel size and location to permit easy lubrication, adjustment or replacement of all moving pans. FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT VLK Architects, 2007 11 4000 - 4 2740.00 Creek View Elementary School College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas G. Regular Submittal: 01 After the return of one copy of the preliminary submittal, resubmit for approval. 02 Follow routine procedures specified elsewhere or as directed. 03 All data and material: thoroughly reviewed for compliance by Contractor prior to submittal. Foodservice Consultant's repetitive reviewing time (more than twice) incurred due to the Contractor's failure to comply with the requirements of this Article may be invoiced to this Contractor at Consultant's standard hourly rates. 1.11 SERVICE MANUAL A. Three copies bound in 1'/z" hardback, three-ring binders (as many volumes as required by scope of project) with same data as brochure at completion of installation (Refer to "Submittal Data"). B. Each Volume: section for maintenance of finish materials (e.g., stainless steel, plastic laminates, FRP, Plexiglas, etc.). C. Catalog specification sheet and/or manufacturer's shop drawings. D. Each Volume: index of items, manufacturer's operating/maintenance information, replacement parts data and price lists. Provide the name, title and address of personnel at each respective manufacturer to be contacted for sparetreplacement parts after warranty period. To the extent possible, provide two copies of manufacturers' video instructional cassettes for operating, maintenance and service of equipment. 1.12 VERIFICATION AND COORDINATION OF PROJECT / DATA A. Utilities Rough -in Drawings and Field -Services within four weeks after receipt of notice -to - proceed, review Contract Drawings and Submittal Data for accuracy and completeness and notify Architect of conflicts and proposed adjustments. Coordinate work with other sub- contractors and field -check the installed utility capacities and locations. B. Review critical systems/components for application, performance and capacity and submit calculation worksheets with initial submission of brochure/rough-in drawings, with all proposed adjustments noted, including: 01 Exhaust hood removal/supply air volume, velocity, static pressure, duct collar sizes and locations. 02 Refrigeration Systems (compressor, condenser and evaporator) capacities/sizes, quantities and refrigerant piping distances/sizes. 03 Exhaust Hood Fire Suppression Systems (nozzle locations, air handler and fuel interlocks, piping/distance limitations). 04 Locations of Vacuum Breakers. 05 Conformance of Refrigerated Components/Equipment with HACCP Guidelines (e.g., salad/sandwich pans, uprightlopen refrigerator cabinets, walk-in refrigerators, salad bars) with HACCP Guidelines. 06 Gauges, water line sizes and manifold configurations. 07 Diameter and length of flexible connector lines for fixed movable gauges appliances. 08 Fabricated Equipment load center panels (individual and total amperage calculations and circuit balance). 09 ADA compliance of workstations, service positions, passageways, etc. FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT VLK Architects, 2007 11 4000 - 5 2740.00 Creek View Elementary School College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas C. Ceiling mounted appliances/fixtures: verify and coordinate dimensions/location of support framingthangers with General Contractor. All material and installation below 12'-0" aff.: Section 11400. D. Dimension Responsibility: obtain actual or guaranteed measurements for proper fit of equipment. All dimensions indicated in Contract Documents are approximate and are as accurate as can be determined at the time. Field -check all horizontal/vertical measurements and conditions at the building prior to fabrication or delivery of equipment and notify the Architect of all conflicts or deviation from the dimensions shown. Scheduling to Fit Openings: should it become necessary to schedule construction of walls or partitions prior to delivery of fixed equipment, the equipment must be fabricated for passage through finished openings. Maintain close contact with the project and be cognizant of all conditions, including vertical handling limitations within the building (elevator cabs or openings, stairs, etc.) and possible hoisting requirements. Coordinate all procedures with General Contractor and Project Team. Refrigerated and Dry Storage Areas: verify and coordinate dimensions to accommodate scheduled modular shelf sections. Notify Architect of variance between the Contract Documents and actual conditions. G. Color/Pattern Selections: submit selection samples of solid polymer products, plastic laminate, paint or stain finishes and vinyl -coated surface material of equipment as selected by Architect. H. Size/Weight Coordination: obtain dinnerware size/weight information for selection by for coordination of self -leveling dispensing, ware washing and transport equipment. Movable Equipment Interface: rolling stock (pan racks, carts, dollies, dish/tray/rack dispensers) required to fit through or into fixed equipment (roll -in refrigerators, counter bodies, etc.) is to be reviewed and coordinated for compatibility at time initial of shop drawing submittal. Indicate conflicts and proposed adjustments. Relocation of Work: relocate or re-route work as required to coordinate related items free of charge if no extra work is involved. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 FABRICATED FIXTURES MATERIAL / COMPONENTS A. Stainless steel sheets or shapes: 18-8, Type 302, polished to 180 grit No. 4 finish. 01 Stainless steel joints and seams: heli-arc welded, free of pits and flaws, ground smooth and polished to No. 4 finish. 02 The "grain" direction of horizontal stainless steel surfaces: longitudinal, including the splashback. The polishing procedure at right-angle corners of fixtures shall provide a mitered appearance. B. Galvanized Iron Sheets: Armco copper bearing Zinc Grip or Zinc Grip/Paint Grip. 01 Galvanized iron joints and seams: arc -welded, free of pits and flaws and ground smooth. 02 Galvanized sheets or shapes: washed with mineral spirits and painted with Rustoleum gray semi -gloss enamel. FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT VLK Architects, 2007 11 4000 - 6 2740.00 Creek View Elementary School College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas C. Sound Deadening: Schnee Butyl Sealant'/2" wide rope positioned continuously between all frame -members or contact material and underside of stainless steel surface (sinks, table tops, food wells, overshelves and undershelves). Tighten stud -bolts for maximum compression of sealant and trim excess. D. Plastic Laminates: color/pattern selected by Architect, in 1/16" thickness for flat surfaces: 1/32" thickness for radiused surfaces. Plastic laminates and adhesives must be N.S.F. approved (Standard No. 35). Cutting Boards: 3/4" thick Read Products, Inc. "PolyLite" cutting board, size as indicated. F. Identification Plates, Labels, Tags: 01 Prohibited Information: names of suppliers, fabricators and contractors. 02 NSF Labels: required on all pieces of equipment. 03 Required Information: function or purpose of controls such as display light switches, food warmer controls, etc. 04 Plate Construction: engraved phenolic plastic, secured to equipment with epoxy cement or stainless steel screws. Furnish samples. 2.02 PLUMBING / MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS A. Plumbing Fittings and Components: furnished under this Section as follows: NOTE: FITTING AND COMPONENTS DESCRIBED IN ITEMS 1, 2, 3 AND DIVISION 15 FURNISHES 4 LOOSE FOR INSTALLATION. 01 Control valves, appliance pressure regulators for water, gauges and vacuum breakers: wherever required on Foodservice Equipment (chrome -plated where exposed). 02 Faucets and drains without connected overflows (unless otherwise indicated) for all sinks. 03 Specialty Foodservice water -fill faucets or hose assemblies indicated in drawings/specifications. 04 Wade Model No. W-10 Shock -Stop shock absorbers for all Foodservice Equipment with quick -opening or solenoid -operated water valves. 05 Extensions of indirect waste fittings to open -sight floor sink or floor drains from sinks, under bar equipment, and food -holding components of serving counters (e.g. cold pans, hot food wells, refrigerator/freezer coils not equipped with condensate evaporators) furnished and installed by Division 15. Drains: painted with aluminum paint where exposed, type "K" copper where concealed. 06 Piping brackets and supports beneath/within fabricated equipment. 07 Closed Base Bodies: removable 18-gauge stainless steel closure panel at plumbing penetrations, under top. 08 Control valves on Open Base fixtures: mounted on 14 gauge stainless steel gusset - shaped panel with 3'/2" setback from counter top edge/rim to face of control handle. 09 In -line water filter system: a. Everpure System filters for coffee/tea brewers, icemakers, water chillers and beverage systems. B. Steam -heated Equipment Fittings and Components: furnished under this Section as follows: 01 Compartment steam cookers: piping manifolded from all compartment exhaust valves for extensions to a floor drain, floor sink or drain trench by Division 15. 02 Steam generators specified within this Section: automatic boiler blow -down and cold -water condenser. FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT VLK Architects, 2007 11 4000 - 7 2740.00 Creek View Elementary School College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas C. Gauges -Heated Equipment Fittings and Components: furnished under this Section as follows: 01 Fixed/Mobile Gauges Equipment: Hose Master, Inc. Model No. LQP/UNQP Series "Smart Set " with Quick Disconnect fitting at appliance: diameter per fuel volume/connection size requirements. Gauges valve Model No. APBAL diameter size per fuel volumelconnection size requirements. a. Restraining device: heavy duty steel cable, fastened to equipment and walls, 3" to 6" shorter than equipment connector length. D. Final Plumbing Connections Provisions. 01 Fabricated equipment containing components, fittings and/or devices indicated on Foodservice Connections Drawings to be connected to the building systems: each component, fitting or group thereof pre -piped to a utility compartment for final connection by Division 15. Refer to drawings for capacities. 02 Field -assembled equipment (e.g., prefabricated walk-in refrigerator/freezers, exhaust hoods, warewash machines, convection ovens, etc.): plumbing components completely interconnected under this Section for final connection arrangements indicated on Utility Connection Drawings. 03 All plumbing final connection points of equipment shall be tagged, indicating: a. Item number. b. Name of devices or components. C. Type of utility (water, gauges, drain). Ducts and Vents. 01 Exhaust hoods which are furred -in to ceiling: 2" high duct collar for final connection to duct system. 02 Warewash machines equipped with integral vent cowls or extended hoods: furnished with 18 gauge stainless steel seamless duct risers to 6" above finish ceiling for final connection. The duct: trimmed at ceiling with 16-gauge stainless steel angle flange with all corners welded. 2.03 FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT REFRIGERATION SYSTEMS A. Install complete with all refrigerant, oil, dials, dehydrators, gauges, controls required for the proper operation of the system. B. Self-contained or factory -installed compressors: check and adjust to proper operating temperature prescribed by FDA/HACCP. 2.04 PLUMBING TRIM A. Faucets: furnished for all sinks or equipment requiring open water supply. B. Fill Faucets: furnished for appliances requiring open water supply. Unless otherwise noted in Part 4 - Equipment Schedule, provide a Chicago Model No. 512GC Fill Faucet Assembly with 68" hose length, No. 81 valve and No. E4F Rose Spray. C. Drain Fittings: furnished for all sinks or equipment requiring removal of liquids. Install specified chrome -plated or stainless steel fittings in die -stamped openings with washers and locknuts. Solder may be used as a sealer but shall not be applied to the top surface of the drain fittings. FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT VLK Architects, 2007 11 4000 - 8 2740.00 Creek View Elementary School College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas 2.05 ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS A. All electrical systems, components and accessories within the work of this Section: certified to be in accordance with NEC 70. B. Electrical Fittings and Components: furnished under this Section as follows. Coordinate foodservice equipment loads, voltage and phase with building system and confirm any existing or OF/01 equipment requirements. C. Cord and Caps. 01 Coordinate all Foodservice Equipment cord/caps with related receptacles. 02 All 120-volt "plug-in" equipment shall have Type SO or S)O cord and plug with ground wire fastened to frame/body of item. 03 Cord lengths for fixed equipment: adjusted to eliminate loose -hanging excess. 04 All mobile equipment: equipped with Kellems strain -relief assembly at the cord connection of the appliance. 05 All mobile electrical support equipment (heated cabinets, etc.) and counter appliances mounted on mobile stands (slicers, etc.): 6'-0" cord length with cord - hanger strap secured to rear of equipment or mobile stand. D. Switches and Controls. 01 Each motor -driven appliance or electrically heated unit: equipped with control switch or starter per Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. with low -voltage and overload protection. 02 Equipment which is not provided with built-in circuit breakers or fused terminal block and is indicated on Utility Connections Drawings to be directly -connected to the building electrical system: a NEMA 4 stainless steel disconnect switch furnished and installed by Division 16. 03 All remote manual starters, disconnect switches, magnetic contactors or starters and push-button stations: NEMA Type 4 enclosure; NEMA Type 1 enclosure only when installed in a Closed Base Body. 04 All 208/240 volt and 460/480 volt equipment or devices: integral, pre -wired step- down transformer to provide 120-volt control circuit. Motors. 01 120-volt motors: manual tumbler type starter with thermal overload protection and interchangeable heating elements. 02 208/240 volt and 460/480 volt motors: magnetic starter with low -voltage protection and one interchangeable overload relay per phase. Heating Elements. 01 Electrically -heated equipment: thermostatic controls. 02 Water heating equipment: equipped with positive low-water shut-off. G. Receptacles and Switches. 01 Receptacles installed in vertical panels of support pedestals or Closed Base Bodies: installed in 12" x 8�/x" x 3" deep recessed mounting panel sloped on 600 angle and turned up to top of opening. 02 Pre -wire receptacles in closed base fixtures to a junction box installed within 6" from bottom of utility or compressor compartments. 03 Receptacles mounted on Open Base fixtures: installed on 12" x 10'/z" x 4�/z" deep 14 gauge stainless steel panel with returned ends and sloping recess. Secure panel to underframe of fixture top. FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT VLK Architects, 2007 11 4000 - 9 2740.00 Creek View Elementary School College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas 04 Pre -wire receptacles on open base fixtures to a junction box secured to a leg or mounted on underside of lower shelf. Vertical runs of wiring: made in rigid conduit or within the tubular leg. 05 Receptacles installed in/on-fabricated equipment: Hubbell, Inc. assemblies horizontally -mounted in a metal box with stainless steel cover plate. 06 Switches installed in/on-fabricated equipment: Hubbell, Inc. with metal box and Sierra Model No. C-361 stainless steel cover plate. Switches: pre -wired to the controlled device and to a junction box installed within 6" from bottom of utility or compressor compartment. All refrigeration system switches: installed within the compressor compartment near the door opening. H. Light Fixtures. 01 Light fixtures with lamps installed in/on fabricated or field -assembled equipment: pre -wired to a junction box for final connection (continuous -run fixtures when indicated). 02 Fluorescent Display Light: install light fixtures full-length of Display Stand and Serving Shelf with stud bolts and pre -wire through support posts to an apron - mounted switch. 03 Heat Lamps: installed to underside of serving shelf assemblies. When multiple 24" heat lamps are specified, provide maximum length heat lamp chassis. Install all switches remote from lamps. 04 Cold Storage Light Fixtures: electrically connected through the hub fitting located on the top of the fixture. All horizontal conduit: above ceiling panels. Install plastic sleeve through ceiling panels for electrical conduit. Seal sleeved penetrations airtight at both sides of panel. Final Electrical Connection Provisions. O1 Fabricated equipment containing electrically -operated components or fittings indicated on Utility Connections Drawings: direct -connected, with each component, fitting or group pre -wired to a junction box for final connection by Division 16. Refer to drawings for circuit loading. 02 Fabricated equipment containing electrically -operated components and/or devices indicated: circuit -breaker load center with each component or device pre -wired to a separate circuit breaker for balanced phase loading and single final connection by Division 16. 03 Field -assembled equipment (e.g., prefabricated cold storage assemblies, exhaust hoods, warewash machines, etc.) shall have electrical components completely interconnected in this Section for final connection arrangements as indicated on Utility Connections Drawings by Division 16. 04 Pre -wire the following groups of cold storage assembly electrical devices to a top - mounted junction box for final connection by Division 16 per compartment grouping (unless otherwise indicated). a. Light fixtures and switches; heated pressure -relief vent. b. Door/jamb heaters. C. Evaporator fans, defrost elements and drain line heaters. 05 All electrical final connection points of equipment shall be tagged, indicating: a. Item number. b. Name of devices on circuit. C. Total electrical load. d. Voltage and phase. FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT VLK Architects, 2007 11 4000 - 10 2740.00 Creek View Elementary School College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas Lamps: in all Foodservice Equipment containing light fixtures. Refrigerator or heated cabinets: G.E. Model No. 40A15 appliance bulbs. All exposed fluorescent lamps above or within a food zone: Shat-R-Shield lamps or standard lamps, sleeved with end caps. 2.06 CUSTOM - FABRICATED / ASSEMBLED UNITS A. All fixtures within this Section: constructed and installed by one manufacturers, of uniform design and finish: Pre -approved Manufacturers (1) Custom Kitchen Equipment Company, Inc./Houston; (2) Kitchen Equipment Fabricating CoMouston (3 Keas Stainless Steel Fabricators, Inc./Oklahoma City; (4) Texas Metal Equipment CoJHouston Refer to Article 1.08. B. Mechanical or electrical operating components or products integrated into a fabricated fixture: ventilation and service access required or recommended by the manufacturer. The service access panel(s) size and placement is to permit easy lubrication, adjustment or replacement of all moving parts and is to be indicated on fabrication shop drawings. 2.07 BAKER TABLE TOPS A. 1'/4" thick Read tabletop with 2" drop edge at all sides by Read Products, Inc. Brace same as "Counter/Table Tops". B. 1'/a" x 6" high integral coved riser at rear and ends unless indicated otherwise on drawings. C. 16 gauge stainless steel flour -trough at free long sides, secured to underside of top. Trough: 3" diameter with eased edges/corners. 2.08 COUNTER / TABLE TOPS A. 14 gauge stainless steel; all free edges turned down 2" with 3/a" tight hem at bottom. Free corners: rounded on 3/a" radius. B. Marine edges: turned up ''/z" on 450 angle and turned down 2" with 3/" tight hem at bottom. C. Tops abutting high fixtures or walls: cove up specified height and slope back 1 Yz" at top on 450 angle; 2'/z" slope where piping occurs. Turn down 1" at rear of splash and close ends to bottom of top turn -down. Secure splash turndown to wall with 4" long 14 gauge stainless steel "Z" clip anchored to wall, 36" o.c. D. Freestanding tables and all serving counter splash -risers: turned back on 900 angle with 1" turndown at rear. E. Brace tops with rigid -welded 1'/2" x 1 Yz" x 1/8" galvanized steel angle frame at perimeter with cross bracing 2'-0" o.c. maximum. Provide 4" x 4" x 12 gauge stainless steel triangular pads where leg gusset welds to frame. Paint entire frame with Rustoleum gray semi -gloss enamel. Angle frames: secured to underside of top surfaces with A" studs welded 9" o.c. maximum with chrome -plated washer, lockwasher and capnut. Studs: such length that cap nuts can be made-up tight, bringing top down snugly on angle frame eliminating all vibrations or "oil -canning". F. Tops: 1'h" overhang at free sides of underframe or Closed Base Body. FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT VLK Architects, 2007 11 4000 - 11 2740.00 Creek View Elementary School College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas G. Mockett Model No. SG5-26 chrome-plated/plastic grommet assembly where service utilities penetrate tops. H. All openings in tops: 3/16" high raised die -formed edges. I. All top openings for pans or inserts: 20 gauge stainless steel, watertight liners, 8'/2" deep, secured to underside of counter top. 2.09 DRAWERS A. Liners: Component Hardware Model No. 580-1520 (20" x 15"), easily removable with drawer in fully extended position. B. Drawer Frame: 16 gauge stainless steel flanged out at top. Weld the frame to double - paneled 16 gauge stainless steel drawer front with full-length recessed pull at top (similar profile as Garcy Model No. R-1060) with closed ends. C. Channel -formed horizontal pull: 3/a" turndown at front and ends with %z" tight hem. Front edge of pull: flush with face of drawer. Recess behind pull: sloped up on 600 angle, terminating 1" below bottom edge of pull. D. Mount drawer frame on Component Hardware Model No. S26-0024 self -closing slides, with solid nylon rollers, fulWepth of fixture. Secure slides to body or brackets to eliminate lateral movement in extended position. Refrigerator drawers: Component Hardware Model No. 552-2024 stainless steel slides with Delrin rollers. E. Each Drawer Housing (Kitchen): welded 14 gauge locking hasp fitted neatly through a slot in the drawer front to accommodate padlock by Owner. F. Drawer enclosure in an Open Base Fixture: 18 gauge stainless steel flanged out at top for attachment to underside of tabletop. Lower edge of enclosure is flanged in toward open bottom. Mount drawer slides to enclosure and brace as required. Face of enclosure is to be same length and height of drawer face. Provide 3/3" deep offset in front of enclosure and 2'/z" from underside of table top for flush -fitting appearance. Drawer enclosure on freestanding fixture: full -depth of table framing. G. Drawer Liners other than tool/utility: Bread Drawer: Component Hardware Model No. 583- 2020; Refrigerated Drawer: Component Hardware Model No. 581-1520 stainless steel liner. 2.10 SINKS A. 14 gauge stainless steel; all interior corners (horizontal/vertical) coved on 3/" radius. 1'/z" wide double -walled partitions with flat tops between compartments. B. Continuous exterior panels of multiple -compartment sinks: 14 gauge stainless steel filler panel welded, ground and polished between compartments. C. Sinks with dimension larger than 20" x 20" (no overflow): score and slope sink bottom %z" to die -stamped opening fitted with Component Hardware Model No. D50-7200 rotary drain with tailpiece. 14 gauge stainless steel bracket: welded to sink bottom for drain stem with 1'/z" handle clearance. FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT VLK Architects, 2007 11 4000 - 12 2740.00 Creek View Elementary School College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas D. Sinks with dimension of 20" x 20" or less (with overflow): score and slope sink bottom ''/z" to die -stamped opening fitted with Component Hardware Model No. D50-7215 rotary drain with connected overflow and tailpiece. 14 gauge stainless steel bracket: welded to sink bottom for drain stem with 1 %z" handle clearance. Where sinks are installed in fixture with Closed Base Body, provide a Component Hardware Model No. D50-7215 rotary drain with connected overflow and tailpiece. (Sinks with dimension larger than 20" x 20" in Closed Base Body will not have overflow fitting.) 14- gauge stainless steel bracket: welded to sink bottom with T & S Model No. BL4740-1 guide bushing. Install on shortened drain stem, one T & S Model No. BL4710-1 remote control stem assembly only (length as required) with Model No. 113-L universal joint and white blank button. Set drain control handle in Cambro Model PSB-6 bowl with bottom omitted (dress raw edge) to permit passage of drain handle. Secure bowl in utility compartment door or body panel with clear silicone. F. When single -hole deck -mounted faucets are specified, install overflow fitting in sidewall of sink compartment and provide ell -fitting in connecting tubing. G. Flush Covers: 3/4" thick Read Products "PolyLite" cutting board with all corners and edges eased and two 1" finger rings. Support clips: ''/4" stainless steel rod 2" long, formed at 450 with two 3/4" leg ends ('/4" long threaded ends). Insert rod -clips through tight -clearance holes in sink, seal watertight and secure with stainless steel acorn -nuts or tack -weld at exterior of sink wall. Set support clips %2" below top. Provide 14-gauge stainless steel channel or angle support frame to store covers when not in use. Cover holder: adjacent to sink compartment, below counter top or under drawer assembly. 2.11 DISHTABLES A. Soiled/clean dishtable: 14 gauge stainless steel; free edges coved up 3" with 1 %" diameter rolled rim and bullnosed corners. B. Edge of dishtables next to high fixtures or walls: coved up 10" and sloped back 1'/2" on 450 angle; 2'/2" slope where piping occurs. Turn down 1" at rear of splash and secure to wall with 4" long 14 gauge stainless steel "Z" clips anchored to wall, a 36" o.c. C. Cove all interior corners (horizontal/vertical) on 1/4" radius and slope tables 1/8" per foot to sinks, scuppers or warewash machines, maintaining level crown/splash. D. Brace dishtables with 1" x 4" 12 gauge stainless steel channels down centerline of top and between each pair of legs, with closed ends. Bracing: secured to underside of dishtable with ''/4" studs welded 6" o.c. maximum, with chrome -plated washer, lockwasher and cap nut. Studs: such length that the cap nuts can be made up tight, bringing the dishtable down on the channel -members, eliminating all vibration and 'oil -canning." Integrally -welded stainless steel flange or inverted gusset where service utilities or support posts penetrate or abut tops; ground and polished to match top. Hose Bibb: Chicago Model No. 305VBR; mounted on 12 gauge stainless steel flange or inverted gusset bracket with 3/8" stainless steel rod hose hanger. G. Integral Pre -wash Sink: 23" x 23" with 1" vertical top flange welded to dishtable top with corners rounded on ''/z" radius. Taper the sink body from the bottom edge of flange to 6" below dishtable surface and install disposer throat flange drain assembly. FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT VLK Architects, 2007 11 4000 - 13 2740.00 Creek View Elementary School College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas 01 Rack Support/Slide Assembly: 223/4" square constructed of 1" x 'A" stainless steel perimeter frame with corners rounded on ''/z" radius and two intermediate cross - members. Two 1" x 1" x 1/8" stainless steel angle rack -guides on top of frame a 20" apart, with all ends flared out %". Round the top corners on a'/z" radius. Entire rack support/slide assembly is to be fully welded, ground and polished. H. Scupper Drain: full -width of dishtable x 6" x 2" deep integrally -welded to soiled/clean dishtable at entrance/exit to rack -type dishwasher machine. Score and slope coved drainer to Component Hardware Model No. E38-1010 drain with tailpiece. Removable 16 gauge stainless steel flush pan -formed perforated drainer ('/z" holes punched 1 Y2" 0.0. Wall panel: 18 gauge stainless steel with butt joint edges. Set lower edge at 3'-8" aff, behind the dishtable splash; upper edge of panel set at height of overshelf + 1 " (4'-4" aft). Secure to wall with silicone adhesive. 2.12 DISH / TRAY DEPOSIT ASSEMBLY A. 14 gauge stainless steel deposit shelf, size as indicated. Extend shelf through opening, flush with public side of partition. Turn shelf down 1" at front with 3/a" return at bottom (either scribed into partition or forming reveal). Shelf: 1" square turndown at rear long side, integral with conveyor slider pan, tray -accumulator or dishtable. Extend rear/end splash to align with head of deposit station opening. B. 18 gauge stainless steel window frame with perimeter flange channel -formed 1" x 3/4" at both sides of wall. Weld all corners of frame and install with concealed attachment. Align/abut one jamb of frame with end splash of conveyor slider pan or dishtable whenever adjacent. C. Cookson Model No. CD8-2 rolling door, furnished and installed by General Contractor. Coordinate enclosure and track installation with splash/jambs and partition bucks. Verify finish with Architect. 2.13 UTENSIL -WASH COUNTERS A. 14 gauge stainless steel; all free edges coved up 3" with 1'/z" diameter rolled rim and bullnosed corners. Edges of utensil -wash counters next to high fixtures or walls: coved up 10" and sloped back 1'/z" on 450 angle; 2'/2" slope where piping occurs. Turn down 1" at rear of splash and secure back splash to wall with 4" long 14 gauge stainless steel "Z" clip anchored to wall 36" o.c. Vacuum breaker pockets: 4" long square turn back sections, aligned with slope break tine. C. Cove all interior corners (horizontal/vertical) on 3/a" radius and slope tables 1/8" per foot, maintaining level crown. D. Brace utensil -wash counters with 1" x 4" 12 gauge stainless steel channels down centerline of top and between each pair of legs, with closed ends. Bracing: secured to underside of dishtable with A" studs welded 6" o.c. maximum, with chrome -plated washer, lockwasher and cap nut. Studs: such length that the cap nuts can be made up tight, bringing the dishtable down on the channel -members, eliminating all vibration and "oil -canning." E. Integrally -welded stainless steel flange or inverted gusset where service utilities or support posts penetrate or abut tops: ground and polished to match top. FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT VLK Architects, 2007 11 4000 - 14 2740.00 Creek View Elementary School College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas F. Hose Bibb: Chicago Model No. 305VBR; mounted on 12 gauge stainless steel flange or inverted gusset bracket with 3/8" stainless steel rod hose -hanger. 2.14 DOORS A. 18 gauge x 1" stainless steel double pan -formed welded construction, insulated with 1" thick polyurethane boards. Seal perimeter joint of pans. Offset lower horizontal framing member of Closed Base Body to align flush access door with bottom of Body. B. Channel -formed full-length horizontal recessed pull: 3/a" turndown at front and ends with %2" tight hem. Front edge of pull: flush with face of door. Recess behind pull: sloped up on 600 angle and terminated 1" below bottom edge of pull. C. Door Hardware: 01 Two (2)-Component Hardware Model No. M75-1002 stainless steel hinges (notch door/jamb at hinge location). 02 Component Hardware Model No. 35-2000 concealed Magnetic Catch. 03 Component Hardware Model No. D304780 lock in upper free corner of door. D. Offset lower horizontal framing member of Closed Base Body/utility compressor compartment to align door flush with bottom of Body. 2.15 CLOSED BASE BODIES A. Frame: rigid -welded 1'Y2" x 1'/2" x 1/8" galvanized steel angle forming a continuous structure around the top and bottom perimeters of the fixture, a post at each corner, studs spaced 48" o.c. maximum. Top of frame is cross -braced with 1'/2" angles, 2'-0" o.c. maximum. B. 18 gauge stainless steel panels and trim with concealed attachment. All seams: welded, ground and polished. C. Exposed Vertical Corners: rounded on 3/4" radius. Closed Base Bodies adjacent to walls or fixtures: square corners. D. Vertical and horizontal channel members at shelf interior or drawer enclosures, such as corners and center mullions: closed and sealed E. Closed Base Bodies set on finished masonry platforms: closed and caulked at underside of equipment overhang and bolted to platform. Body overhang of platform: 1" at free ends 2" at front and exposed rear sides. F. Closed Base Bodies not set on platform: Component Hardware Model No. A54-2-6, 6" legs spaced 5'-0" o.c. maximum. 2.16 UTILITY COMPARTMENTS A. Closed Base Bodies or Pedestal Supports: fitted with utility compartments wherever piping or wiring is required in/on the fixture. B. Same material as Closed Base Bodies with full -height back and end partitions. Omit bottoms except at hose -reel locations. FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT VLK Architects, 2007 11 4000 - 15 2740.00 Creek View Elementary School College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas C. Access Doors: 18 gauge stainless steel double -pan type with channel formed horizontal recessed pull full-length of top (similar profile to Garcy Model No. R-1060) with closed ends. Channel -formed horizontal pull: '/4" turn down at front of door, recess behind pull slopes up on 600 angle, terminating 1" below bottom edge of pull. Offset the lower horizontal framing member of the Closed Base Fixture to permit flush alignment of door with face and bottom edge of body. Door hardware: two Component Hardware Model No. M75-1002 stainless steel hinges (notch door/jamb at hinge locations) and one Component Hardware Model No. 35-2000 concealed magnetic catch. D. No shelves of Closed Base Fixtures are to be penetrated. 2.17 UTENSIL RACKS A. Rack: 'A" x 2" 300 series stainless steel flat bar with No. 4 finish, fully welded and formed to match shape shown on drawings. Lowest band: 7-6 aff, unless otherwise indicated. B. Ceiling Mount Supports: 1-5/8" diameter 16 gauge stainless steel tubing from band to 18" above ceiling. Anti -sway bracing above ceiling: 1'/2" unistrut members. Tubing penetrations at ceiling: Component Hardware Model No. A16-0206 stainless steel gussets. C. Table Mount Supports: 1-5/8" diameter 16 gauge stainless steel tubing extended thru counter top. Secure to closed base framing or cross rail/undershelf on open base fixture. Tubing penetrations of counter tops: integrally welded stainless steel inverted gusset. D. Utensil Rack Hooks: Component Hardware Model No. J77-4401 stainless steel hooks spaced 8" o.c. maximum. E. Electrical Receptacle: NEMA No. 5-20-R or as noted. Mount in fully welded 3'/2" x 5%2" x 3" 14 gauge stainless steel enclosure with ''/z" radius corners. Stainless steel cover plate to fit specified receptacle. Pre -wire thru tubular support for final connection above ceiling by Division 16. 2.18 OPEN BASE STRUCTURES A. 1-5/8" o.d. x 16 gauge seamless stainless steel tubing legs beveled at bottom. 1 %." o.d. crossrails fully -welded (3600 smooth and polished) to legs at 10" aff, o.c. B. Top of Leg: inserted in Component Hardware Model No. A20-0206 gusset fully -welded to table frame or sink bottom. C. Bullet Foot: Component Hardware Model No. A10-0851. D. Freestanding fixtures requiring utility connections: Component Hardware Model No. A10- 0854 flanged feet at the fixture corners, anchored to floor with non -corrosive bolts. E. Table Bases: maximum leg spacing of 6'-0" o.c.; dishtable and utensil wash counter bases at 5'-0" o.c. F. Open Base equipment specified to be supported by brackets at the rear side only (not completely cantilevered): tubular legs at front side only with Component Hardware Model No. A10-0854 flanged feet anchored to floor with non -corrosive bolts. Front -to -back crossrail: fitted into Component Hardware Model No. A20-0406 circular gusset secured to wall with non -corrosive bolts. FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT VLK Architects, 2007 11 4000 - 16 2740.00 Creek View Elementary School College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas 2.19 UNDERSHELVES A. Open Base Structures: 16 gauge stainless steel turned down 1'/2" with tight hem at bottom. Notch all corners to fit tubular legs and weld from underside to completely fill gap; grind and polish. Cove up 2" at rear or ends adjacent to wall, columns, refrigerators, etc. The turn up at freestanding fixtures is to be hemmed tight to bottom of turndown. Brace undershelf with 1" x 4" 14 gauge stainless steel channel at longitudinal centerline and at each intermediate pair of legs. Closed Base Fixtures: 16 gauge stainless steel turned down 1'/2" at front. Front edge of bottom shelf: turned back and sealed to finished masonry platform or boxed for leg application. Center shelf has 3/4" tight hem. O1 Shelves: turn up square at ends (coved up at rear only) to the shelf above or counter top flanged out for attachment with no open spaces at interior. 02 All shelf partitions at exposed ends of cabinet bodies or interiors: free of exposed framing members. 03 Reinforce shelves with full-length 1" x 4" x 14 gauge stainless steel closed hat channel. 04 Unless otherwise noted, all closed base undershelves are to be 22" deep, clear. 05 Fully weld smooth and polish, the vertical seam of shelf turndown/turn up with face of body partition. 06 Seal the vertical seam of square turn -in at exposed interior of open shelf sections. 2.20 ANCHOR PLATES / WOOD GROUNDS A. Behind finish surface wherever building wall, partitions or ceiling construction will not accommodate direct attachment of equipment such as overshelves, wall cabinets, hose reels, utensil racks, exhaust hoods, display cases, etc. Material and installation by General Contractor. Location and coordination with trades by Section 11400. B. Anchor Plates: not less than 12" x 12" x %4" thick steel, secured to the structure above or behind the finished surface, positioned at attachment points. C. Wood Grounds: length required by fixture, component or device, 24" wide x 3/4" thick plywood secured to partition system prior to gypsum board installation. D. Above ceiling supports: structural shapes (4" x 8.0 lb. channel) suspended from structure. Maximum height 15'-0" aff. size: width of equipment x length of equipment plus 6'-0". Cross bracing at 6'-0" on center maximum. 2.21 OVERSHELVES A. 16 gauge stainless steel with free edges turned down 1" with %" tight hem at bottom. 3/4" radius at free corners. B. Turn up 2" raw at walls or adjoining high fixtures with horizontal coved corner at rear. Round front corners of turn up on 3/4" radius. C. Where shelf width exceeds 12" width, reinforce with ''/z" x 4" x 14 gauge stainless steel closed hat channel full-length of shelf. D. Wall -Mounted Shelves: 16 gauge stainless steel brackets 48" o.c. maximum, set in 6" from ends. FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT VLK Architects, 2007 11 4000 - 17 2740.00 Creek View Elementary School College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas E. Freestanding Shelves: where splash is required at free overshelves, turn up square 2" at ends, cove up at rear and hem tight to lower edge of front turndown. Weld exposed corners. 01 Freestanding overshelves: 16 gauge stainless steel cantilevered brackets at rear of table; double -cantilevered brackets at center of table. Posts for cantilevered overshelves are 1-5/8" o.d. x 16 gauge stainless steel secured to underframe, 4'-0" o.c. Ends of shelves: secured to adjacent wall/fixture or mounted on 1'/." diameter stainless steel posts. 02 Freestanding overshelves not on cantilevered brackets: 1'/." o.d. x 16 gauge stainless steel posts, each pair at 4'-0" o.c., maximum. F. Baker Table Overshelves: supported at 18" above top with 1 %a" o.d. stainless steel tubular supports with channel shoe secured to risers. 2.22 DRAIN TRENCH LINER / GRATING A. Liners: 14 gauge stainless steel in sizes as indicated. B. Interior of liners: 6" deep with all interior corners (horizontal/vertical) coved on 3/a" radius; sloped and scored 1" to integrally welded Component Hardware Model No. D34-Y011 basket drain assemblies @ 48" o.c., fitted with 6" long welded tailpiece. Stainless steel safety chain: connected to basket strainer assembly and top of liner wall. C. Liners: 1" wide perimeter shoulder at the top, turned up flush with finished floor, tight - hemmed back down to the shoulder level and flanged out 2" for attachment to the slab. D. Underside of sloping portion of liner: 2" long "Z" clips. E. Grating: Irving Subway Grating Type DD removable aluminum grating. 01 1'/2" x 3/16" bearing bars. 02 Full perimeter frame, section quantities and sizes indicated. 03 Maximum of 2'-0" sections. 2.23 WALL PANELS A. Wall Panels: 18 gauge stainless steel, double pan -formed '/2" thick with internal stiffener members. Fill with USDA approved thermal insulation, full height and width of panels, attach to interior with mastic. Maximum allowable temperature at rear side of panel: 120oF. 01 Height of panels as required: top of tile base to underside of hood, top of tile base to top cap of stub wall or top of splash to underside of hood. 02 Level and square lower edge and sides. 03 Butt joint all panels. 2.24 EXHAUST HOOD (SURFACE - MOUNTED CONDENSATE) A. Hoods: size/shape as indicated: 18" high at interior. B. Body: 16 gauge stainless steel, with all seams welded, ground and polished. C. Continuous condensate trough at perimeter: 3" x 1 ". FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT VLK Architects, 2007 11 4000 - 18 2740.00 Creek View Elementary School College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas D. Frame top of hood with 1'/2" angle iron assembly and suspend from structure above ceiling by diameter steel rods, drawn tight against finished ceiling surface. E. Duct opening/collar as specified with stainless steel louvered grille over opening. F. Component Hardware Model No. NSF-8240-RS-2 light fixtures, pre -wired to junction box at top rear. G. Exhaust hoods with closure panels: 2" wide 16 gauge stainless steel vertical mullions at the corners, welded integrally to the furring cap and head channel. H. Perimeter furring cap: 3" x 2" high channel -formed integral stainless steel with welded corners. Closure Panels: ''Y2" pan -formed 18 gauge stainless steel. 01 Upper edge of panels retained in 1" x 2" continuous 16 gauge stainless steel head channel secured to the hood super structure. 02 Lower edge of panels mounted on perimeter furring cap, turned back 1" and flanged up 1" for "Z"-clip retention. 2.25 EXHAUST HOOD FIRE EXTINGUISHING SYSTEM (FUSIBLE -LINK / LIQUID CHEMICAL) A. System: installed in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and applicable codes or standards. Submit Installation certification Form to Architect. B. Automatic Chemical System: in each filtered exhaust hood/duct assembly and also surface protection abovelin all equipment required by NFPA Bulletin No. 96 and local Fire Marshall's regulations. Refer to Contract Drawings for quantity of exhaust fan units serving single or multiple exhaust hoods and coordinate with hood/fan controls. C. Install chemical cylinders within recessed 18-gauge stainless steel cabinet with hinged door as indicated on drawings and install piping to exhaust hoods in totally -concealed manner. Set cylinders and cabinets at 7'-0" clear aff unless noted otherwise. Exposed piping/fittings within cylinder location and exhaust hood: chrome -plated or sleeved with stainless steel tubing. Exposed pipe threads in/above food zone not acceptable. Submit schematic diagram of installation and confirm critical distances from cylinders to nozzles. D. System Components: Ansul Model No. R-102 system assemblies, in system increments required by dimensions and configuration of equipment and hoods. E. Remote Manual Release: located in path of egress from protected exhaust hood area. Division 16 to provide 4" Octagon box in wall (at 42" aff) with EMT conduit stub to 6" above finished ceiling. F. Each System: Ansul Automan cylinder control assembly with electric switch. G. Fusible links installed in duct collar of filtered hoods/ducts. H. Fusible links located directly above each cooking device required by Code, in quantity required by length of protected appliance. I. Ansul Sentry 40-13C. fire extinguisher located at each exhaust hood. Install within recessed 18-gauge stainless steel cabinet with Lexan hinged door, set at 54" aff to top of cabinet. FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT VLK Architects, 2007 11 4000 - 19 2740.00 Creek View Elementary School College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas 02 Level and square prefabricated perimeter and partition wall panels, anchored to slab recess. Protect exposed surface of panels. 03 Two layers of 2" thick rigid polyurethane board insulation with staggered joints, set in mastic. 04 15# felt slip -sheet over insulation with 6" lapped joints flashed up the height of finished floor base. 05 Concrete flooring over insulation by Divisions 03/09. H. Each Compartment: 3 '/2" diameter chrome -plated flush -mounted dial thermometer with re - calibration. All thermometers furnished with sufficient length of capillary tubing to extend from exterior front of the assembly to a mounting position of the sensor bulb and glycerin container within evaporator return air -stream with tubing clipped to panel at 36" o.c. Each Compartment: EJS Limited Model No. STD 200 C/F temperature monitor/alarm with sensor and probe -cord length required to extend from exterior front of assembly to a mounting position of the sensor within evaporator return air -stream. Panic -alarm Switch: installed in each compartment at 72 A Interconnect Hubbell "Press switch" to EJS Monitor. K. McPhilbin Model No. 22C1214-FC-JB surface -mounted light fixture, with No. 116A21/TS 130-volt extended -service lamps, in quantity/arrangement shown on drawings. L. Light Fixtures: wired to interior and exterior companion 3-way Hubbell Press switch per compartment, mounted in "FS" boxes with Hypalon covers and pilot lights. Compartments with multiple entrances: 4-way switches. M. Penetrations of Panels: sealed with Dow Corning 3-6548 silicone RTV foam, full -depth of panel. Trim excess flush. N. 12" x 2" engraved phenolic -plastic compartment identification sign in Architect's selection of color with 1" letters, mounted below respective alarm and thermometer. O. Install closure panels and/or trim strips to building walls and ceiling with concealed attachment. Closure material: same as wall panels unless noted otherwise. P. Compartment Entrance Doors: 36" x 78" nominal clearance unless otherwise noted. 01 Mount hinged doors on three Kason Model No. 1245; polished chrome plated nylon cam -lift hinges. 02 Swing doors as indicated on drawings. 03 Defrost heater: thermostatically controlled and replaceable at full -perimeter of all doors, except when using clear Lexan doors (in addition to door jambs). Defrost heaters to be wired for continuous service. 04 36" high x full-length (unless otherwise indicated) 16 gauge stainless steel kick plates at front and rear of all hinged doors. 05 12" x 2" engraved phenolic plastic compartment identification sign in Architect's color selection with 1 " letters, mounted above door window. 06 14" x 22" four -panel glass view window (refrigerator/freezer) with heater and molded non-metallic inner and outer frame. Heater to be wired for continuous service. 07 Padlock/key provisions in door latch with interior safety release. 09 Refrigerator Entrance Door Material/Finish: 20 gauge stainless steel interior/exterior. 10 Freezer door material: 20 gauge stainless steel interior/exterior. FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT VLK Architects, 2007 11 4000 - 21 2740.00 Creek View Elementary School College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas 11 Freezer fan switch connected to solenoid (for compressor pump down cycle) at each freezer entrance door jamb, pre -wired thru-wall to top -mounted junction box and freezer evaporator fans with temperature activated override control. 12 Heated pressure relief ports in freezers to be wired for continuous service. 2.28 COLD STORAGE REFRIGERATION SYSTEMS A. Unit Coolers: specified quantity and model, ceiling -hung by ''/z" o.d. nylon bolts with stainless steel washers and nuts. Insert hanger bolts through plastic sleeve and seal penetration airtight. 01 Unit cooler drain fittings: positioned as indicated on drawings. Installation of cast tee -fittings on drain pan outlet with union and clean out plug and extension of 1" Type K copper drain line through wall panel to air -gap fitting or floor drain under this Section. 02 Slope drain line ''/2" per foot, trap at exterior of assembly and turn down into drain. Manifold drain lines of adjacent compartments wherever possible. 03 Install drain line plastic sleeve through compartment wall, seal around drain line and install stainless steel escutcheon with set screws. 04 Electric drain line heater cable (self regulating 7 watts): on all unit coolers operating below 360F., installed from coil drain line fitting to wall penetration under this Section. Heater cables: minimum rating of 15 watts/lineal foot, 208 volts, single phase. Wrap drain line with maximum 2" loop spacing and interwire to unit cooler for continuous operation. 05 Mounted, pre -piped and pre -wired evaporator components: a. Sporlan thermostatic expansion valve with external equalizer. b. Shut-off valve at evaporator suction and liquid lines. C. Sporlan "Catch -All" refrigerant filter/dehydrator on liquid line. d. White Rogers 1609-101 adjustable thermostat with remote bulb positioned in return air -stream of evaporator. e. Electrical disconnect switch in NEMA 4 enclosure. Multi -circuited Condenser: Refrigerated Design Texas, air-cooled units, each fitted with a 80-81 pre -wired control panel and: 01 Suction and discharge line vibration eliminators. 02 Shut-off valve at condensing unit inlet and outlet. 03 Suction line filter/dryer. 04 Time Clock, defrost for all compressors. 05 Oil separator for all compressors that are: a. Positioned 20'-0" higher than the coil. 06 Condensing units installed in an area subject to weather conditions or low ambient temperatures: furnished with a weatherproof housing with stainless steel enclosure; cold weather controls package. 07 12" x 2" engraved phenolic plastic condenser identification signs in Architects selection of color with 1" letters mounted on rack below each compressor unit. 08 EJS Limited CRM series monitor panel install on rack. C. Refrigerant System Installation. 01 Refrigerant Lines; Type "L" hard copper tubing. Fittings: wrought copper or brass designed for use with high temperature solder. Piping joints: made with silver solder (Sil-Fos). Piping: properly suspended from and anchored to the structure with adjustable hangers 6' o.c. maximum. Suction lines: sized to have maximum pressure drop of two pounds in medium temperature systems; one pound in low temperature system. Liquid lines: sized to give maximum pressure to prevent FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT VLK Architects, 2007 11 4000 - 22 2740.00 Creek View Elementary School College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas trapping of oil. Insulation on all suction lines: Armaflex insulation by Armstrong. 3/a" thick at medium temp 1" thick at low -temp. Refrigerant lines in PVC or EMT conduit: sealed at both ends with Dow Corning 3-6548 silicone RTV foam. Exterior Refrigerant Lines to be wrapped by refrigeration system installer in self fastening jacket of Type 3003-1-114 aluminum alloy 0.016-inch thick. Provide aluminum strapping and seals for applying aluminum jacket and covers according to manufacturer's recommendations to provide completely weather -tight covering. D. Evacuation and Charging. 01 After completion of the pressure test, the system shall be evacuated using an approved auxiliary vacuum pump. Connections for evacuation: in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. 02 Charging subsequent to the initial charge which is contained in the condensing unit (R-22 Refrigerant for medium and high temp units, R404A - Non CFC Ozone Depletion Refrigerant on low temp units): given through the charging valve in the high side passing all the liquid refrigerant through a charging dehydrator. All charging lines and gauge: purged of air prior to connection with system. Refrigerant: unused and shall be delivered in clean containers. After the system is fully charged: start and place in full operation. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 DELIVERY AND INSTALLATION A. Supervision: provide a competent foreman or supervisor who shall remain on the job during the entire installation. B. Delivery: coordinate with progress of construction and Owner's operation schedules. Unless otherwise instructed and documented by Owner or General Contractor, the following procedures apply: 01 Field -Assembled Fixed Equipment integrated into the structure (e.g., cold storage assemblies, exhaust hoods, drain trench/grate assemblies, ceiling -mounted utensil racks, etc.) are to be sent to the job -site when directed by the General Contractor and installed/protected accordingly. 02 All other Fixed Equipment: delivered after completion of work on adjacent finished ceilings, lighting, finished floor and wall systems, including painting. 03 Major Movable Equipment: delivered when possible to inventory in secured area for interim job -site storage or, if secured area is not available, when fixed equipment installation/clean-up has been completed. 04 Minor appliances and loose items (e.g., pans, covers, flatware containers, etc.) delivered only when Owner is prepared to receive and inventory such items. C. Installation: performed by manufacturer of custom fabricated fixtures. 01 Assemble, square, level and make ready all items for the final utilities connections. 02 Cut neatly around obstructions to provide sanitary conditions. 03 Where gaps of %a" or less occur adjacent to or between equipment, insert rope backing and smoothly -applied General Electric construction sealant Series SE-1200 silicone mastic (white color). Mask both sides of gap for neat application of sealant and remove excess. If space exceeds 'A", neatly install 18 gauge stainless steel trim molding of proper shape with concealed attachment. Use epoxy cement or "Z" clips wherever possible to secure stainless steel trim. Exposed edges or corners of trim: eased and smooth. FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT VLK Architects, 2007 11 4000 - 23 2740.00 Creek View Elementary School College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas D. Protection of Work: 01 Fabricated fixtures: fiberboard or plywood taped to tops and exposed body panels/components. 02 Manufactured Equipment: fiberboard or plywood taped as required by equipment shape and installation -access requirements. 03 Prohibited use of equipment: tool and materials storage, workbench, scaffold, stacking area, etc. 04 Damaged Equipment: immediately documented and submitted to Owner with Contractor's recommendation of action for repair or replacement and it's impact on the Project Schedule and Contract Amount, if any. 3.02 CLEAN AND ADJUST A. Clean up and remove from the job site, all debris resulting from this Work as the installation progresses. B. Thoroughly clean and polish interior/exterior of all Foodservice Equipment, prior to demonstration and final observation, ready for Owner's use. C. Lubricate and adjust drawer slides, hinges, casters. D. Adjust pressure -regulating valves, timed -delay relays, thermostatic controls, temperature sensors, exhaust hood grilles, etc. E. Clean. or replace faucet aerators, line strainers. F. Touch-up damage to painted finishes. G. Start up and check operation of all refrigeration systems for at least 72 hours prior to acceptance. 3.03 EQUIPMENT START-UP/DEMONSTRATION A. Carefully test, adjust and regulate all equipment in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions and certify in writing to the Owner that the installation, adjustments and performance are in full compliance. B. Provide the Owner or Foodservice Operators with a thorough operational demonstration of all equipment and furnish instructions for general and specific care and maintenance. Coordinate and schedule selected items of equipment and attendees with Owner at least two weeks in advance of demonstration periods. 3.04 FINAL OBSERVATION A. Final observation will be made when the Contractor will certify that he has completed his work, made a thorough review of the installation/operation of each item in the contract and found it to be in compliance with the Construction Documents. B. Repetitive final observations (more than two) and all costs associated thereto which may be incurred due to the Contractor's failure to comply with the requirements of this Article will be invoiced to this Contractor on a time and expense basis. FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT VLK Architects, 2007 11 4000 - 24 2740.00 Creek View Elementary School College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas PART 4 - EQUIPMENT SCHEDULE 4.01 REGULARLY -MANUFACTURED EQUIPMENT/COMPONENTS: Standard finishes and accessories unless specifically deleted or superseded by the Contract Documents. 4.02 FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT ITEM NO. 1 WALK IN COOLER / FREEZER ASSEMBLY QUANTITY ONE LOT MANUFACTURER BROWN MODEL CUSTOM ASSEMBLY 01. Stainless steel finish where exposed. 02. Galvanized steel where unexposed. 03. Interior walls to be textured aluminum. 04. Ceiling to be white epoxy enamel. 05. Two (2) 36" doors with stainless steel finish, interior and exterior. Doors to have heated perimeter, door jambs, windows, and threshold heaters. 06. 36" high stainless steel kick plate interior and exterior of door surfaces. 07. Four (4) three way Hyplon light switches with pilot lights. 08. 18 gauge stainless steel closure panels from top of walk in to 2" above finished ceiling. 18 gauge stainless steel trim at all wall lines. 09. Two (2) ceiling mounted light fixtures in each compartment. Special Instructions: Coordinate slab depression, flooring installation with general contractor. ITEM NO. 2 COLD STORAGE REFRIGERATION SYSTEM QUANTITY ONE LOT MANUFACTURER REFRIGERATED DESIGN/TEXAS MODEL ZS1-2 01. Cooler evaporator; model number LET-090. 02. Freezer evaporator; model number LET-120. 03. Cooler compressor; model number Z610KCE. 04. Freezer compressor; model number ZF11 K4E. 05. Stainless steel outdoor housing. 06. Pre -wired control panel. 07. Unit circuit breaker and contactor. 08. Defrost timer and contactor. 09. Prepiped suction and liquid lines. 10. Dual pressure control. 11. Headmaster control. 12. Fan cycle control. 13. Crankcase heater. 14. Suction filter. 15. Sight glass drier. 16. Suction/discharge vibrasorber. 17. Scroll type compressors. FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT VLK Architects, 2007 11 4000 - 25 2740.00 Creek View Elementary School College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas Special Instruction Unit to be roof mounted. Coordinate location and support with general contractor. Coordinate routing of refrigeration lines and conduit with appropriate trades. Heat tape and insulate all low temperature drain lines. ITEM NO. 3 REFRIGERATOR SHELVING QUANTITY ONE LOT MANUFACTURER METRO MODEL METRO MAX with grid type removable shelves 01. Each section to have four (4) shelves. 02. Each section to have four (4) 74" posts. 03. Two (2) 24" x 54" sections. 04. Two (2) 24" x 60" sections. 05. Two (2) 24" x 36" sections. Special Instruction Install lower shelf at 12" above finished floor. Balance to be 14" clear. ITEM NO.4 FREEZER SHELVING QUANTITY ONE LOT MANUFACTURER METRO MODEL METRO MAX with grid type removable shelves 01. Each section to have four (4) shelves. 02. Each section to have four (4) 74" posts. 03. Two (2) 24" x 54" sections. 04. Five (5) 24" x 60" sections. Special Instruction Install lower shelf at 12" above finished floor. Balance to be 14" clear. ITEM NO. 5 DRY STORAGE SHELVING QUANTITY ONE LOT MANUFACTURER METRO MODEL SUPER ERECTA 01. Each section to have five (5) shelves. 02. Each section to have four (4) 86" posts. 03. Three (3) 24" x 48" sections. 04. Four (4) 24" x 60" sections. 05. One (1) 24" x 42" section. 06. Eight (8) PR model no. 9984HZ wall brackets. Special Instruction Install lower shelf at 8" above finished floor, second shelf at 29" above finished floor, balance to be 14" clear. Secure wall brackets to in wall grounds or anchors. Coordinate in wall grounds with GC. ITEM NO.6 WORKTABLE WITH POT RACK QUANTITY ONE MANUFACTURER CUSTOM FABRICATED 01. Top: stainless steel with 2" straight turn down on all free sides. FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT VLK Architects, 2007 11 4000 - 26 2740.00 Creek View Elementary School College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas 02. Open base construction. 03. Full-length stainless steel undershelf. 04. One (1) standard drawer assembly. 05. One (1) 12" deep x 10'-0" long overhead utensil rack. Mount at 18" above working surface. 06. Flange feet. Special Instruction Secure overhead pot rack to anchors (by section 11400). Coordinate size and location with General Contractor. Secure flange feet to floor with non -corrosive bolts. ITEM NO. 7 MOBILE EQUIPMENT STAND QUANTITY ONE MANUFACTURER CUSTOM FABRICATED / PIPER 01. Stainless steel top with 2" straight turn down on all sides. 02. Open base construction. 03. Full-length stainless steel undershelf. 04. Four (4) 5" heavy-duty casters, two (2) diagonal casters with brakes. ITEM NO. 8 FOOD SLICER QUANTITY ONE MANUFACTURER HOBART MODEL 2912 ITEM NO. 9 60 QUART MIXER QUANTITY ONE MANUFACTURER HOBART MODEL H-600 Utilities 2.0 HP 208/60/3, 10.9 amp 01. 60 qt stainless steel bowl, "B" beater, "D" whip. 02. One (1) 60 qt. ED dough hook 03. One (1) each 30 qt stainless steel bowl, "B" beater, "D" whip, "ED" dough hook 04. One (1) model no. VS-9 vegetable slicer attachment with adjustable slicer plate. 05. One (1) plate holder assembly. 06. One (1) each grater plate and two (2) each shredder plates. (size of shredder plates to be determined by Owner.) 07. One (1) 60 qt bowl truck. ITEM NO. 10 NUMBER NOT USED ITEM NO. 11 WORKTABLE QUANTITY ONE MANUFACTURER CUSTOM FABRICATED MODEL — 01. Top: stainless steel with 2" straight turndown on all sides. 02. Open base construction. 03. Full-length stainless steel undershelf. 04. One (1) standard drawer assembly. FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT VLK Architects, 2007 11 4000 - 27 2740.00 ITEM NO. 12 QUANTITY MANUFACTURER MODEL ITEM NO. 13 QUANTITY MANUFACTURER MODEL MOBILE PAN RACK SIX PIPER RI U64-11 UTENSIL WASH COUNTER ONE CUSTOM FABRICATED Creek View Elementary School College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas 01. Top: stainless steel with 3" x 1-1/2" rolled rim on all free sides; 10" splash on balance. 02. Open base construction. 03. Omit rear rails at sinks. 04. Full-length stainless steel undershelf at both drainboards. 05. Three (3) 24' x 26-1/4" x 15" deep sink compartments. 06. Two (2) T & S model no. B-0290 fast flo faucets with 3/a" fittings. 07. One (12) deep x full-length post mounted stainless steel overshelf, mounted at 18" above working surface. 08. One (1) full-length utensil rack, formed as extension of rear legs of this counter. Extend tubing supports at top forward 12" and terminate with 2" x 'A' stainless steel band iron. Weld band iron integrally to face of supports. Provide Component Hardware model no. J774401 stainless steel pot hooks. 09. Flange feet. Special Instruction Secure flange feel to floor with non -corrosive bolts. ITEM NO. 14 PREPARATION COUNTER QUANTITY ONE MANUFACTURER CUSTOM FABRICATED MODEL — 01. Top: stainless steel with'/z" marine edge on all free sides; 10" splash on balance. 02. Open base construction. 03. Omit rear rails at sinks. 04. Full-length stainless steel undershelf under left drainboard. 05. Two (2) 24" x 26-1/4" x 15" deep sink compartments. 06. One (1) T & S model no. B-0290 faucet, with 3/a" fittings. 07. One (1) T & S Model No. 00270-45, stainless steel hose rack, provide 14-gauge stainless steel mounting bracket per Detail X, Sheet FS-5, for wash down hose provided by Division 15. 08. Weld cone for Item no. 15 into right drainboard as shown. 09. Mount vacuum breaker from Item no. 15 into flat pad in backsplash. 10. One (1) 14-gaugeuge stainless steel disposer control panel bracket, sized to disposer control panel on Item no 15. Mount bracket to underside of drainboard as shown. 11. One (1) 12" deep x full-length wall mounted overshelf. Mount overshelf at 18" above working surface. 12. Flange feet. Special Instruction Secure wall -mounted overshelf to in wall grounds or anchors. Coordinate size and location of in wall grounds with General Contractor. Secure flange feet to floor with non -corrosive bolts. FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT VLK Architects, 2007 11 4000 - 28 2740.00 Creek View Elementary School College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas ITEM NO. 15 DISPOSER WITH CONTROL PANEL QUANTITY ONE MANUFACTURER SALVAJOR MODEL 200-CA-18-ARSS-LD 01. 2 HP motor 02. 18" diameter cone bowl assembly complete with vacuum breaker, solenoid valve with flow control, and fixed nozzle. 03. Mount vacuum breaker in flat pad of backsplash of Item no. 14. 04. One (1) 18" diameter cone bowl cover. 05. One (1) model no. ARSS-LD disposer control panel. Mount on stainless steel bracket where indicated. 06. One (1) T & S model no. B-0133-B pre -rinse spray with wall bracket. ITEM NO. 16 BAKERS TABLE WITH INGREDIENT BINS QUANTITY ONE MANUFACTURER CUSTOM FABRICATED 01. Top: Richlite, with 2" straight turndown on front; 6" splash on rear and both ends. 02. Open base construction 03. Front rail omitted to accommodate ingredient bins. 04. One (1) 16-gauge stainless steel flour trough on front of table. 05. Four (4) Cambro model no. IB-36 ingredient bins. 06. One (1) 12" deep x full width post mounted overshelf. Mount overshelf to backsplash with 1" diameter stainless steel posts. Post to be mounted to backsplash by means of saddle brackets. Mount overshelf at 18" above working surface. 07. Flange feet. Special Instruction Secure flange feet to floor with non -corrosive bolts. ITEM NO. 17 FIRE SUPPRESSION SYSTEM QUANTITY ONE LOT MANUFACTURER ANSUL MODEL R-102 01. Duct and plenum protection for exhaust hood assemblies. 02. Surface protection to cooking equipment as required. 03. Locate remote fire pull as indicated on plan 04. Mechanical gauges valve (maximum 2" diameter). Size as required. Furnished by Section 11400, installed by Division 15. 05. System to meet UL-300 requirements. 06. One (1) hand held fire extinguisher (10 lb) per system, wall mounted. Special Instruction Install unit at 7'-0" above finished floor. Install hand held extinguisher in location as required by code, maximum of 3'-2" above finished floor to bottom of unit. FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT VLK Architects, 2007 11 4000 - 29 2740.00 Creek View Elementary School College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas ITEM NO. 18 EXHAUST HOOD QUANTITY ONE MANUFACTURER MOD-U-SERVE OR GAYLORD MODEL W-IM 01. Hood to measure approximately 12"-0" long x 5"-0" front to back. 02. 18 gauge stainless steel all welded construction. 03. Removable stainless steel grease cup. 04. Stainless steel baffle type filters. 05. Insulated make-up air plenum, with 1" thick foil faced insulation. 06. Full length, vapor proof fluorescent type light fixtures. Pre -wire lights to j-box on top of exhaust hood, for final connection by Division 16. 07. Provide stainless steel enclosure panels from top of hood to 2" above finished ceiling. Special Instruction Install at 6'-10" AFF to bottom of hood. Coordinate duct and fan requirements with Mechanical Contractor. Support from structure above ceiling with %z" diameter threaded steel rod. Interconnection to wall mounted light switch by Division 16. ITEM NO. 19 CONVECTION STEAMER QUANTITY ONE MANUFACTURER CLEVELAND MODEL 24CGE10 01. Two (2) steamers, each with maximum capacity of six (6) 12" x 20" x2-1/2" standard steam table pans. 02. Door hinged left hand. 03. Compensating timer. 04. One (1) Scaltrol filter system sized to fit this application. 05. One (1) T & S model no. HG4D-48SK quick disconnect gauges line assembly. ITEM NO. 20 QUANTITY MANUFACTURER MODEL ITEM NO. 21 QUANTITY MANUFACTURER WASH DOWN FAUCET ONE T & S TRENCH LINER / GRATE ONE CUSTOM FABRICATED 01. Liner to measure approximately 24" x 24". 02. Construction per details, page FS-2. 03. Furnish aluminum grating per detail. Special Instruction Coordinate size and location of trench liner with General Contractor. Furnish trench liner to Division 15 for installation. FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT VLK Architects, 2007 11 4000 - 30 2740.00 Creek View Elementary School College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas ITEM NO.22 TILT SKILLET QUANTITY ONE MANUFACTURER CLEVELAND MODEL SGL30T 01. 30-gallon capacity. 02. Power tilt with hand tilt override. 03. Double pantry faucet. Provide stainless steel faucet mounting bracket. 04. One (1) T & S model no. HG-4D48SK quick disconnect gauges line assembly. ITEM NO. 23 IMPINGER OVEN QUANTITY ONE MANUFACTURER LINCOLN MODEL 11 16-080-A-DOUBLE/1 120 01. Model no. 1120 mobile stand. 02. Columnating panels as required for owner's usage. 03. One (1) T & S model no. HG-4D-48SK quick disconnect gauges line assembly per oven set-up. ITEM NO. 24 DOUBLE CONVECTION OVEN QUANTITY TWO MANUFACTURER BLODGETT MODEL DFG-100 (DOUBLE) 01. Double stack units. 02. Manifolded to single gauges connection. 03. Two (2) extra oven racks per section. 04. Heavy-duty casters. 05. One (1) T & S model no. HG-4D-48SK quick disconnect gauges line assembly per oven set-up. ITEM NO. 25 EXHAUST HOOD QUANTITY ONE MANUFACTURER MOD-U-SERVE OR GAYLORD MODEL W-IM 01. Hood to measure approximately 7"-6" long x 5"-0" front to back. 02. 18 gauge stainless steel all welded construction. 03. Removable stainless steel grease cup. 04. Stainless steel baffle type filters. 05. Insulated make-up air plenum, with 1" thick foil faced insulation. 06. Full length, vapor proof fluorescent type light fixtures. Pre -wire lights to j-box on top of exhaust hood, for final connection by Division 16. 07. Provide stainless steel enclosure panels from top of hood to 2" above finished ceiling. Special Instruction Install at 6'-10" AFF to bottom of hood. Coordinate duct and fan requirements with Mechanical Contractor. Support from structure above ceiling with �'/z" diameter threaded steel rod. Interconnection to wall mounted light switch by Division 16. FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT VLK Architects, 2007 11 4000 - 31 2740.00 Creek View Elementary School College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas ITEM NO. 26 MOBILE UTENSIL CART QUANTITY THREE MANUFACTURER METRO MODEL PR-48-LS 01. Four (4) 24" x 48' stainless steel embossed shelves. 02. Four (4) 63" stainless steel posts. 03. Four (4) model number 5M casters, two (2) with brakes. ITEM NO. 27 WORKTABLE WITH POT RACK QUANTITY ONE MANUFACTURER CUSTOM FABRICATED 01. Top: stainless steel with 2' straight turn down on all free sides. 02. Open base construction. 03. Full-length stainless steel undershelf. 04. One (1) standard drawer assembly. 05. One (1) 12' deep x 10'-0" long overhead utensil rack. Mount at 18" above working surface. 06. Flange feet. Special Instruction Secure overhead pot rack to anchors (by section 11400). Coordinate size and location with General Contractor. Secure flange feet to floor with non -corrosive bolts. ITEM NO. 28 MOBILE EQUIPMENT STAND QUANTITY ONE MANUFACTURER CUSTOM FABRICATED / PIPER 01. Stainless steel top with 2" straight turn down on all sides. 02. Open base construction. 03. Full-length stainless steel undershelf. 04. Four (4) 5"heavy-duty casters, two (2) diagonal casters with brakes. ITEM NO. 29 FOOD PROCESSOR QUANTITY ONE MANUFACTURER MANNHART MODEL M2000 01. Two (2) slicer plates. 02. Three (3) shredder plates. 03. Two (2) dicing grids. Special Instruction Verify sizes of attachments with owner. ITEM NO. 30 NUMBER NOT USED ITEM NO. 31 MOBILE EQUIPMENT STAND QUANTITY ONE MANUFACTURER CUSTOM FABRICATED / PIPER 01. Stainless steel top with 2" straight turn down on all sides. FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT VLK Architects, 2007 11 4000 - 32 2740.00 Creek View Elementary School College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas .02. Open base construction. 03. Full-length stainless steel undershelf. 04. Four (4) 5" heavy-duty casters, two (2) diagonal casters with brakes. ITEM NO. 32 QUANTITY MANUFACTURER MODEL 20 QUART MIXER ONE HOBART A200 01. 20 qt stainless steel bowl, "B" beater, "D" whip. 02. One (1) 20 qt. ED dough hook 03. One (1) each 20 qt stainless steel bowl, "B" beater, "D" whip, "ED" dough hook ITEM NO. 33 WORKTABLE QUANTITY ONE MANUFACTURER CUSTOM FABRICATED 01. Top: stainless steel with 2" straight turndown on all sides. 02. Open base construction. 03. Full-length stainless steel undershelf. 04. One (1) standard drawer assembly. ITEM NO. 34 QUANTITY MANUFACTURER MODEL ITEM NO. 35 QUANTITY MANUFACTURER MODEL MOBILE CART ONE RUBBERMAID 3316 ICE MACHINE / BIN ONE MANITOWOC SY-0604A/8-5 70 01. Model B-570 Bin 02. One (1) Scaltrol filter system sized to fit this application. Special Instruction Secure wall mounted equipment/components to in wall grounds or anchors. Coordinate size and location of in wall grounds with General Contractor. ITEM NO. 36 TRENCH LINER / GRATE QUANTITY ONE MANUFACTURER CUSTOM FABRICATED 01. Liner to measure approximately 12" x 36" 02. Construction per details, page FS-2. 03. Furnish aluminum grating per detail. Special Instruction Coordinate size and location of trench liner with General Contractor. Furnish trench liner to Division 15 for installation. FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT VLK Architects, 2007 11 4000 - 33 2740.00 ITEM NO. 37 ROLL THRU HEATED CABINET QUANTITY TWO MANUFACTURER TRAULSEN MODEL RIH 132LP 01. Doors hinged as shown on plan. 02. Full height universal angle pan guides. 03. Controls on kitchen side. 04. Enclosed upper housing on all sides. 05. 6" stainless steel legs. 06. All reach in doors keyed alike. ITEM NO. 38 ROLL THRU REFRIGERATOR QUANTITY TWO MANUFACTURER TRAULSEN MODEL RRI132LPUT 01. Doors hinged as shown on plan. 02. Full height universal angle pan guides. 03. Controls on kitchen side. 04. Enclosed upper housing on all sides. 05. 6" stainless steel legs. 06. All reach in doors keyed alike. ITEM NO. 39 MILK COOLER QUANTITY TWO MANUFACTURER BEVERAGE AIR / MOD-U-SERVE MODEL ST34N-S 01. Stainless steel finish. ITEM NO. 40 MOBILE TRAY DISPENSERS QUANTITY TWO MANUFACTURER PIPER MODEL TCA-ST-MOD Special Instruction Coordinate size and weight of owner's trays with equipment. ITEM NO. 41 HOT FOOD COUNTER QUANTITY TWO MANUFACTURER MOD-U-SERVE MODEL MCT-H F5 01 02 03 04 05. 06. Creek View Elementary School College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas Full-length stainless steel trayslide mounted at 30" A.F.F. on folding brackets. Full height Wilson Art plastic laminate front panels, color as selected by Architect. Full-length breath protector with heat lamps and fluorescent lights. Pre -wire lights to switch on rear panel and then into counter electrical system. Food wells to have individual drains manifolded to one drain valve. Extend drain to nearest floor drain. Provide 8" wide workshelf on fold down brackets. One (1) T & S Model No. B-0208 deck mount faucet, install where indicated on drawings. FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT VLK Architects, 2007 11 4000 - 34 2740.00 Creek View Elementary School College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas 07. Manifold drains to single drain valve located below control panel. 08. Full length stainless steel undershelf, provide holes for drain and cord to exit. 09. Mount counter on heavy-duty 5" polyurethane casters, with brakes. 10. Provide interlocking mechanism. ITEM NO. 42 FLAT -TOP UTILITY COUNTER QUANTITY TWO MANUFACTURER MOD-U-SERVE MODEL MCT-FT2 01. Full-length stainless steel trayslide mounted at 30" A.F.F. on folding brackets. 02. Full height Wilson Art plastic laminate front panels, color as selected by Architect. 03. Full-length display stand with fluorescent lights. 04. Provide 8" wide workshelf on fold down brackets. 05. Full-length stainless steel undershelf. 06. Mount counter on heavy-duty 5" polyurethane casters, with brakes. 07. Provide interlocking mechanism. ITEM NO.43 FROST TOP COUNTER QUANTITY TWO MANUFACTURER MOD-U-SERVE MODEL MCT-FRT2 01. Full-length stainless steel trayslide mounted at 30" A.F.F. on folding brackets. 02. Full height Wilson Art plastic laminate front panels, color as selected by Architect. 03. Full-length display stand with fluorescent lights. 04. Full length stainless steel undershelf, provide holes for drain and cord to exit. 05. Mount counter on heavy-duty 5" polyurethane casters, with brakes. 06. Provide interlocking mechanism. ITEM NO. 44 QUANTITY MANUFACTURER MODEL CASHIER COUNTER TWO SERVOLI FT/EASTERN MCT-CRSG 01. Full-length stainless steel trayslide mounted at 30" A.F.F. on folding brackets. 02. Full height Wilson Art plastic laminate front panels, color as selected by Architect. 03. Cashier drawer. 04. Mount counter on heavy-duty 5" polyurethane casters, with brakes. 05. Provide interlocking mechanism. ITEM NO. 45 CASH REGISTERS, NOT IN CONTRACT QUANTITY TWO ITEM NO.46 SOILED DISHTABLE/ROLL DOWN DOOR QUANTITY ONE MANUFACTURER CUSTOM FABRICATED 01. Top: stainless steel with 3" x 1-1/2" rolled rim on all free sides; 10" splash on balance. 02. Open base construction. 03. One (1) 23" x 23" x 7" deep pre -rinse sink, complete with stainless steel removable rack guides. 04. Weld in sink adaptor assembly for Item no. 47. FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT VLK Architects, 2007 11 4000 - 35 2740.00 Creek View Elementary School College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas 05. Mount disposer control panel to 12-gauge stainless steel bracket, sized to accommodate disposer control pane. Mount bracket to underside of table. 06. Mount vacuum breaker from Item no 47 in flat pad on backsplash. 07. One (1) recessed tray deposit area, complete with 16-gauge stainless steel window framework. Tray deposit to terminate in 45-degree turndown onto soiled dishtable. Integrally weld tray deposit area to soiled dishtable top, grind smooth and polish to original finish. Integrally weld stainless steel framework to dishtable top, grind smooth and polish to original finish. 08. Scupper drain at entrance to warewash machine. 09. Flange feet. Special Instruction Secure flange feet to floor with non -corrosive bolts. ITEM NO. 47 DISPOSER WITH CONTROL PANEL QUANTITY ONE MANUFACTURER SALVA)OR MODEL 200-CA-18-ARSS-LD 01. 2 HP motor 02. Sink adaptor assembly, complete with vacuum breaker, solenoid valve with flow control, and fixed nozzle. 03. Mount vacuum breaker in flat pad of backsplash of Item no. 46. 04. One (1) Custom fabricated rack guide assembly. 05. - One (1) model no. ARSS disposer control panel. Mount to bracket specified at Item no. 108. 06. One (1) T & S model no. B-0133-B pre -rinse spray with walll bracket. ITEM NO. 48 WAREWASH MACHINE QUANTITY ONE MANUFACTURER HOBART MODEL C-44A 01. Right to left operation. 02. Wired to single electrical connection 03. Auto fill. 04. Auto timer. 05. 6" higher chamber to accommodate sheet pans. 06. All stainless steel frame and panels. 07. Two (2) extended vent hoods with locking dampers. 08. 18 gauge stainless steel risers from collars to exhaust connections above ceiling. Stainless steel perimeter finishing flange at ceiling. 09. Table mounted conveyor limit switch. Kitchen subcontractor to interconnect to dishmachine. ITEM NO. 49 QUANTITY MANUFACTURER MODEL 01. 02. BOOSTER HEATER ONE HATCO S-54 54.0 KW booster heater. Furnish with temperature/pressure relief valve; pressure reducing valve; two (2) temperature pressure gauge; hi -temp. limit control; low water cut-off. VLK Architects, 2007 FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT 11 4000 - 36 2740.00 Creek View Elementary School College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas 03. Slide brackets for under counter mounting in lieu of standard legs. ITEM NO.50 NUMBER NOT USED ITEM NO.51 CLEAN DISHTABLE QUANTITY ONE MANUFACTURER CUSTOM FABRICATED 01. Top: Stainless steel with 3" x 1-112" rolled rim on all free sides; 10" splash at balance. 02. Open base construction. 03. Full length stainless steel undershelf, except at booster heater. 04. Scupper drain at exit end of warewash machine. 05. Mount stainless steel booster heater slides for Item no. 49. 06. Flange feet. Special Instruction Secure flange feet to floor with non -corrosive bolts. ITEM NO.52 STAINLESS STEEL WALL CAP QUANTITY ONE MANUFACTURER CUSTOM FABRICATED 01. 14 gauge stainless steel construction. 02. Turn down 2" on all sides and seal to same. 03. Turn up 2" raw through wall opening and seal turn up to wall. ITEM NO.53 FILL FAUCET QUANTITY ONE MANUFACTURER T & S MODEL B-0610 01. Provide with 6'-0 long hose in lieu of standard. 02. Mount faucet to 14-gauge stainless steel wall bracket, per details. Mount wall bracket as shown on drawings. ITEM NO. 54 GAUGES VALVE HOUSING QUANTITY ONE MANUFACTURER CUSTOM FABRICATED 01. All stainless steel construction. 02. Per details on sheet no. FS-2. 03. Provided by Section 11400 to Division 15 for installation. Special instruction Coordinate size and location of recess in wall for this housing with General Contractor. Furnish to Division 15 for installation into recess. ITEM NO. 55 FLY FAN QUANTITY ONE MANUFACTURER BERNER / MARS MODEL AST-1048A 01. Install micro switch in doorframe so unit operates when door is open. FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT VLK Architects, 2007 11 4000 - 37 2740.00 Creek View Elementary School College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas 02. Mount at receiving door as indicated. ITEM NO.56 QUANTITY MANUFACTURER MODEL JANITOR SHELVING ONE LOT METRO SUPER ERECTA 01. Each section to have five (5) shelves. 02. Each section to have four (4) 86' posts. 03. One (1) 24' x 24" sections. 04. Special Instruction Install lower shelf at 8" above finished floor, second shelf at 29" above finished floor, balance to be 14' clear. END OF SECTION 11400 FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT VLK Architects, 2007 11 4000 - 38 2740.00 Creek View Elementary School College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas SECTION 11 5213 PROJECTION SCREENS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Motorized projection screens and manually operated project screens. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 09 5100 -Acoustical Ceilings. 2: Section 09 9100 -Painting 3. Division 26 - Electrical: electrical rough -in. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Submit in accordance with SECTION 01 3323 - SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA AND SAMPLES. Include manufacturer's installation instructions. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Electrically Operated Projection Screen, "Board Room" as manufactured by Da-Lite Screen Company, Inc. 1. Mounting: Recessed above ceiling. 2. Motor: 3-wire, instantly reversible, with lifetime lubrication. Motor shall be equipped with internal thermal overload protector; shall be fitted with mechanical brake to eliminate coasting; and shall be mounted on rubber vibration insulators. Entire drive unit shall be removable from case. 3. Control Switch: Provide 3-position control switch which shall stop or reverse screen at any point in its operating cycle. Controls shall be furnished complete with aluminum box and stainless steel cover plate. 4. Screen Fabric: Glass beaded, flame and mildew resistant. Provide Black "extra drop" above picture area to: Cafetorium: V-6" above stage finish floor. 5. Case: Hardwood finish with primer coat of paint. Motor compartment shall be metal lined. 6. Viewing Surface: Cafetorium: 8'-0" tall x 10'-0" wide. 7. Cut matching gypsum board or ceiling tile and mount to aluminum doors to be flush with ceiling. 8. Screen to be listed by U.L. B. Manually Operated Projection Screen: Model B with magnetic tilt locks as manufactured by Da-Lite Screen Company, Inc. 1. Mounting: Wall mounted. Surface -mounted with No. 23 wall brackets 2. Screen Fabric: Glass beaded, flame and mildew resistant. 3. Case: 22 gage steel case with flat back design finished with baked enamel. 4. Size: 60" x 60". PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install projection screens securely anchored to provide rigid installation. Screen shall be installed in strict accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Certificate: The distributor or manufacturer's representative shall certify in writing to the Owner that the installation, adjustment and performance are in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. 3.03 ADJUST AND CLEAN A. Adjusting: Carefully adjust and regulate the projection screen after installation. B. Protection: Protect the completed work from damage. Replace damaged items which cannot be repaired. C. Cleaning: Upon completion of the building, clean the projection screen. Leave the screen free of defects and in ready -to -use condition. END OF SECTION PROJECTION SCREENS VLK Architects, 2007 11 5213 - 1 2740.00 Creek View Elementary School College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas SECTION 11 6100 STAGE CURTAINS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Front, side, and back setting stage curtains. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Submit in accordance with SECTION 01 3323 - SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA AND SAMPLES. Include detail sections of typical rigging elements; show anchors, hardware, operating equipment and other components. B. Samples: Submit in accordance with SECTION 01 3323 - SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA AND SAMPLES. Submit manufacturer's color card, together with 12" square sample (any color). 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fabricator and Installer Qualifications: Firm with not less than 5-years of successful experience in fabrication and installation of stage curtains similar to those required for this project. B. Flame Resistance Requirements: Provide stage curtains which are certified to be flame resistant in accordance with requirements of NFPA 701. Permanently attach label to curtain indicating whether curtain is permanently and inherently flame resistant, or whether it will require re -treatment after dry cleaning. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Main Platform Curtain: 1. Fabric: 100% cotton 25 oz./linear yard, velour, color as selected by Architect. 2. Lining: Yarn-dyed denim cloth of 100% cotton, woven in a wrap faced twill; 54" minimum width, color as selected by Architect. B. Side and Back Curtains at Platform: 100% Trevira polyester flame retardant 12 oz. per lineal yd. Color shall be as selected by Architect. 2.02 FABRICATION A. Curtains, General: Provide not less than 50% additional fullness for curtains. Horizontal seams and fabric less than half -width are not permitted. 1. Provide box pleats at 12" o.c., seams shall be 3'/2" and shall be attached to a 31/2' jute webbing with no less than 3 rows of stitching. 2. Seams on leading edge shall be one-half width turn back, but no less than 18". Seams on offside shall be 4" to 6". Seams shall be free of puckers. 3. Bottom hem shall have tube 5 with concealed chain pocket carving 2/0 tenso chain secured on both ends to prevent buckling. Bottom chain pocket shall be a minimum of 1" above bottom of hem. 4. Curtain shall be sewn with heavy-duty commercial thread to match fabric in color. 5. Grommets shall be #4 brass installed through fabric and webbing. 6. Curtain shall be secured to track by means of #10 bright zinc shook. B. Front Curtain Tracks: Provide Besteel Model 170 two section track and assembly with a 2'-0" overlap in center as manufactured by Automatic Devices Co. (web site: www.stagingequipment.com/adctravelertrack.htm). 1. Channel: No. 1700, 1 lb. 11 oz./linear ft. 2. Accessories: Provide as necessary. a. No. 1701 Single Carriers. b. No. 1703 Live end Pulleys. c. No. 1704 Dead end Pulleys. d. No. 1709 End Stops. e. No. 1728 Cord. f. No. 1702 Master Carriers. Q. No. 2865 Tension Floor Pulleys. STAGE CURTAINS VLK Architects, 2007 11 6100 - 1 2740.00 Creek View Elementary School College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas C. Side and Back Curtain Tracks at Platform: Provide track and hanger assembly No. 110, as manufactured by Automatic Devices Co. (web site: www.stagingequipment.com/adctravelertrack.htm)fora pull drawtype curtain. 1. Aluminum track 16 gauge, 7/8' x 1'/4". 2. Provide accessories including splices, end caps, mounting spacers and radiused corners. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. General: Install equipment in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations. B. Install track (ceiling mounted) directly to top of pocket with maximum span of 18" between attachments. C. Secure curtains to track carriers with track manufacturer's special heavy-duty "S" hooks or snap hooks. END OF SECTION STAGE CURTAINS VLK Architects, 2007 11 6100 - 2 2740.00 Creek View Elementary School College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas SECTION 11 6600 ATHLETIC EQUIPMENT PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Athletic equipment. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 09900 - Painting. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit in accordance with SECTION 01 3233 - SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, AND SAMPLES. B. Product Data: Include manufacturer's specifications, anchor details, installation instructions for products, and cut sheets. C. Shop Drawings: Include drawings for fabrication and erection of equipment assemblies which are not fully described in manufacturer's data. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. The entire backstop structure shall conform to the current FIBA/NCAA rules and regulations governing basketball in force at time of installation. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 BASKETBALL BACKSTOPS A. Backstops: Provide backstops, goals, and nets as manufactured by Draper, Inc. (phone 800.989.0131 web site: www.draperinc.com/Athletic.htm). 1. Type A: a. Backstop: Model EZ Fold TS-21, ceiling -suspended, stationary, rear braced with manual height adjustors. b. Backboard: Model EZ Fold A0140 wood backboard (3'-6" x 6'-0"). c. Padding: AO264 2" thick backboard padding. d. Goal: EZ Fold A0581 breakaway basketball goal with tube -tie net attachment and white nylon anti -whip net. e. Mounting: Furnish all framing, accessories and associated hardware for a complete and rigid installation. 2. Type B: a. Backstop: Model EZ Fold DGW, side -fold, wall mounted backstop with manual height adjustors. b. Backboard: Model EZ Fold A0140 wood backboard (3'-6" x 6-0"). c. Padding: A0264 2" backboard padding. d. Goal: EZ Fold A0576 breakaway basketball goal with white nylon anti -whip net. e. Mounting: Furnish all framing, accessories and associated hardware for a complete and rigid installation. 3. Exterior a. Backstops: Model EZ Fold OD600 - heavy duty galvanized steel posts 5-9/16" o.d. with a 6'-0" horizontal extension b. Backboard: Model EZ Fold A0133 Aluminum Fan (54" x39") white finish with competition striping. c. Backstop Padding: A0744 reinforced vinyl with 1-12" thick x T-0"H x 14"W polyurethane foam with weatherproof lacing and metal grommets. d. Goal: Model EZ Fold A0575 double rim playground goal with nylon net. e. Mounting: Furnish all accessories and associated hardware for a complete and rigid installation. ATHLETIC EQUIPMENT VLK Architects, 2007 11 6600 - 1 2740.00 Creek View Elementary School College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas 2.02 WALL PADS A. Wall pads shall be as manufactured by Draper, Inc.. Panels shall be 2'-0" wide by 6'-0" high constructed of 2" polyurethane foam bonded to 7/16" thick waferboard and covered with 14 oz. vinyl covering fabric folded and stapled securely to wood backer. Provide manufacturer's optional Vonar interlining material. Color shall be as selected by Architect from manufacturer's 15 colors. 2.03 VOLLEYBALL SLEEVES A. Provide Senoh Model KA25 Floorplate/Sleeve volleyball sleeves as manufactured by Sports Imports (phone 800.556.3198 web site: www.sportsimports.com), NO SUBSTITUTIONS. Install sleeve and adapter per manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install athletic equipment and accessories in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. 1. Locate equipment accurately and install to be rigid and secure. 2. Install supplementary framing required for proper supporting of the backstops. 3. Mount backstops at proper height. 4. Set post accurately and plumb, hold in position until concrete is placed. 5. Upright sleeves must be absolutely plumb so that upright posts do not lean. 6. In addition to securing wall pads at top and bottom at nail strip, apply manufacturer recommended adhesive to back of pads to prevent them from bowing. 7. Volleyball Sleeves: Install sleeve and adapter per manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations. Floor plates shall finish flush with the finish court floor surface. 3.02 ADJUSTING A. Adjust movable athletic equipment to operate safely, smoothly, easily, and quietly, free from binding, warp, distortion, nonalignment, misplacement, disruption, or malfunction, throughout entire operational range. Lubricate hardware and moving parts. 3.03 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. After completing athletic equipment installation, inspect components. Remove spots, dirt, and debris and tough up damaged shop -applied finishes according to manufacturer's written instructions. B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions acceptable to manufacturer and installer that ensure athletic equipment is without damage or deterioration at time of substantial completion. C. Replace athletic equipment and finishes that cannot be cleaned and repaired, in a manner acceptable to Architect, before time of substantial completion. END OF SECTION ATHLETIC EQUIPMENT VLK Architects, 2007 11 6600 - 2 2740.00 Creek View Elementary School College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas SECTION 12 2113 HORIZONTAL BLINDS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Horizontal blinds. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 08 1100 -Hollow Metal Doors and Frames; glazed openings. 2. Section 08 4113 - Aluminum -framed Entrances and Storefronts. 1.02 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Horizontal metal slat louver blinds installed at storefront, curtain wall, glazed openings, and mirrors manual control of raising and lowering by cord; blade angle adjustable by control wand. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit in accordance with SECTION 01 3323 - SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, AND SAMPLES. B. Product Data: Include manufacturer's catalog cuts and data sheets, and installation instructions and data certifying blinds are lead-free. C. Shop Drawings: Include details of attachment and schedule of each size and location. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Measurements: Provide custom size blinds for the openings or mirrors in which they are to be installed. Take careful measurements of each opening so that the blinds will fit properly. Plan dimensions shall not be used. Verify head, jamb, and sill conditions. B. All blinds shall be lead-free. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver products to site under provisions of SECTION 01 6500 - PRODUCT DELIVERY REQUIREMENTS. B. Deliver blinds wrapped and crated in a manner to prevent damage to components or marring of surfaces. C. Store and protect products under provisions of SECTION 016600 - PRODUCT STORAGE AND HANDLING REQUIREMENTS. D. Store in a clean, dry area, laid flat and blocked off ground to prevent sagging, twisting, or warping. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Horizontal Blinds: 1" wide slat type, with valance for each blind. Product/manufacturer; one of the following: Bali S3000 Mini Blinds; Springs Window Fashions Division, Inc. Levolor 1" (25mm) Riviera Blind; Levolor Corp. 2.02 MATERIALS AND FABRICATION A. Horizontal Blinds: 1. Head channel shall be 0.025" thick Tomized steel with a plastic type coating. Channel shall be "U" shaped, approximately 1" high be 1-9/16" wide, with flanged edges at the top. 2. Slat supports shall be braided of polyester yarn. The vertical component shall have a diameter of not less than 0.045" nor greater than 0.066". Braiding shall be accurate to hold slats equally spaced, parallel and straight, and to assure proper tilt control and adequate overlay of slats. Provide 31 rungs per 2 feet of ladder, equally spaced. Distance between ladders shall not exceed 21". The horizontal component shall consist of not less than four cables interbraided with the vertical component. 3. Slats shall be virgin aluminum alloy approximately 1" wide by 0.0085" thick. Slats shall have sufficient crown to prevent sagging and radius corners. HORIZONTAL BLINDS VLK Architects, 2007 12 2113 - 1 2740.00 Creek View Elementary School College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas 4. Bottom rail shall be 0.031" thick Tomized steel with a plastic type coating. 5. Tilter shall be Tomized steel of enclosed construction. Unit shall tiltthe slats to any desired angle and hold them at that angle. An automatic disengagement of worm and gear shall eliminate overdrive to prevent strain or damage to wand, worm, gear, ladder or top slat. Operation shall be by wand of sufficient length and swivel for easy operation. 6. Lift cord shall be of adequate diameter, braided of high strength synthetic fibers. 7. Finish: The factory finish forthe exposed surfaces shall be a plastic type finish coat baked on. Color shall be as selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard color range. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION A. Examine areas to receive blinds for conditions which will adversely affect the installation of the blinds. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Attach installation end brackets at each end of blind location. For blinds over 55" long or over 50 square feet in area, provide intermediate brackets. B. Blinds shall be mounted in brackets inside frame jambs by skilled mechanics under the supervision of an authorized representative of the manufacturer. The completed blinds shall be left clean and in perfect working order. Crates, cartons, and rubbish shall be removed from the premises; rooms shall be left broom clean. 3.03 TOLERANCES A. Maximum Variation of Gap at Window Opening Perimeter: 1/4". B. Maximum Offset From Level: 1/8". 3.04 ADJUSTING A. Adjust work under provisions of SECTION 01 7700 - CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES. B. Adjust blinds for smooth operation. 3.05 CLEANING A. Clean work under provisions of SECTION 01 7413 - PROGRESS CLEANING. END OF SECTION HORIZONTAL BLINDS VLK Architects, 2007 12 2113 - 2 2740.00 Creekview Elementary School College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas SECTION 12 3216 MANUFACTURED PLASTIC -LAMINATE -CLAD CASEWORK PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Plastic laminate -faced casework as shown on drawings. 2. The fabrication and installation of standard casework components of base cabinets, wall cabinets, storage cabinets, wardrobe cabinets, shelf units and other units as indicated. 3. The fabrication and installation of custom units, as detailed in the drawings. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 05 5000 - Metal Fabrications: blocking in wall. 2. Section 06 2000 - Finish Carpentry: custom cabinets and millwork, display cases. 3. Section 08 1423 - Plastic -laminate -faced Wood Doors 4. Section 08 7100 - Door Hardware: masterkey cabinet locks. 5. Section 09 6500 - Resilient Flooring: coved rubber base. 6. Section 11 3100 - Appliances. 7. Section 22 4000 - Plumbing Fixtures. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit in accordance with SECTION 01 3323 - SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA AND SAMPLES. Include manufacturer's installation instructions for each type of casework unit. B. Samples: Submit 6" x 6" samples of specified finishes, including top material. Samples will be reviewed by Architect for color, texture and pattern only. Compliance with other specified requirements is exclusive responsibility of contractor. C. Shop Drawings: 1. Submit shop drawings for plastic laminate -faced casework showing plans, elevations, ends and cross - sections. Show details and location of anchorages and fitting to floors, walls and base. Include layout of units with relation to surrounding walls, doors, windows and other building components. 2. Coordinate shop drawings with other work involved. D. Mock-up Casework: 1. Submit one full-size sample of finished base cabinet unit complete with hardware, doors and drawers, without finish top. 2. Submit one full-size sample of finished wall -mounted cabinet unit complete with hardware, doors and adjustable shelves. 3. Furnish both hinged and rolling door samples. 4. Acceptable sample units will be used for comparison inspections at project. Unless otherwise directed, acceptable sample units may be incorporated in work. Notify Architect of their exact locations. If not incorporated in work, retain acceptable sample units in building until completion of work and removesample units from premises when directed by Architect. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Single Source Responsibility: Provide casework with tops and accessories manufactured or furnished by same casework company for single responsibility. B. Catalog Standards: 1. The use of catalog numbers and specific requirements set forth in drawings and specifications, are not intended to preclude the use of any other acceptable manufacturer's product or procedures which may be equivalent, but are given for purpose of establishing standard of design and quality for materials, construction and workmanship. 2. Custom units shall be of the same quality as standard units specified. C. AWI Quality Standard: Comply with applicable requirements of "Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards" published by the Architectural Woodwork Institute (AWI) except as otherwise indicated. D. Color Uniformity: Provide plastic laminate for laminate -clad casework and plastic faced wood doors from the same manufacturer. MANUFACTURED PLASTIC -LAMINATE -CLAD CASEWORK VLK Architects, 2007 12 3216 - 1 2740.00 Creekview Elementary School College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas E. Manufacturer shall have at least 5 years experience and have done installations for similar types of projects. Accessibility Standards: The following special requirements shall be met, where required to comply with Texas Accessibility Standards (TAS). 1. Countertop height with or without cabinet below, not to exceed a height required by TAS. 2. Kneespace clearance to be minimum clearance as required by TAS. 3. 12" deep shelving, adjustable or fixed not to exceed a range as required by TAS. 4. Wardrobe cabinets to be furnished with rod/shelf adjustable to 48" A.F.F. at a maximum 21" shelf depth. 5. Sink cabinet clearances as required by TAS. 6. Cabinet locks, latches, and other operating mechanisms shall be mounted to comply with forward reach requirements of TAS; i.e. 15' to 48" above finish floor, except locked bottom drawers at base cabinets. 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver plastic laminate -faced casework only after wet operations in building are completed. B. Store completed plastic laminate -faced casework in a ventilated place, protected from the weather, with relative humidity therein of 50% or less at 70°F. C. Protect finished surfaces from soiling and damage during handling and installation. Keep covered with polyethylene film or other protective covering. Woodwork damaged through neglect of the above requirements shall be repaired or replaced without additional cost to the Owner. 1.05 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Install finish carpentry products only when temperature and humidity conditions have been stabilized and will be maintained. B. Maintain temperature and moisture conditions as recommended by woodwork fabricator from date of installation through remainder of construction period. 1.06 GUARANTEE A. Provide 5-year guarantee against defective materials and workmanship. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturer's catalog numbers for Case Systems, Inc. are shown on drawings for convenience in identifying certain cabinet work. Unless modified by notation on drawings or otherwise specified, catalog description for indicated number constitutes requirements for each such cabinet. Subject to compliance with requirements of this specification, equivalent plastic laminate -faced casework as manufactured by one of the following will be acceptable: Casework Services, Inc. CIC Concepts in Cabinetry TMI Systems Design Corp. NO SUBSTITUTIONS 2.02 GENERAL A. Decorative laminate casework shall be Case Systems as specified or approved equal with the following minimum features: 1. M-3 47# density engineered particleboard for all cabinet components. 2. PVC edges applied with hot melt. 3. Epoxy coated, self closing, minimum 150# static rated drawer slides with lifetime warranty. 4. Non -Racking, Non -Deflecting Platform Drawer Box With 1/2" Thick Bottoms. 5. 1/2" Thick Cabinet Back. 6. "Balanced" High pressure laminates applied with rigid PVA glue. 7. Thermally Fused Laminate Interior Which Exceeds NEMA LD3-1995 for GP-28 Performance. 8. Each Cabinet to have a factory applied, separate and full support toe base construction. 9. Colors and finishes shall be as selected by Architect. MANUFACTURED PLASTIC -LAMINATE -CLAD CASEWORK VLK Architects, 2007 12 3216 - 2 2740.00 Creekview Elementary School College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas 10. Casework shall be independently tested to meet the following minimum performance values: Base Unit Racking 1460 Ibf Base Front Joint Loading 725 Ibf Wall Unit Racking 1600 Ibf Wall Unit Static Load 2500 Ibf Drawer Unit Static Load 1050 Ibf Drawer Front Joint Load 805 Ibf Drawer Side Joint Load 450 Ibf 11. Rail mounted casework shall be vertically and horizontally adjustable. 12. Rail mounted casework shall have integral lower leveling bar, adjustable from inside of cabinet. B. Color and finish selections: Architect reserves the rightto select one color for the exposed surfaces of the basic components of cabinets and a different color for the following components of cabinets: door and drawer fronts (including edges of door and drawer fronts), backs of open shelving and countertop and backsplash, unless shown otherwise. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Exterior Vertical Surfaces: 1. All door and drawer fronts, finished end panels, and exposed exterior backs shall be surfaced with .028" thick high-pressure decorative laminate conforming to NEMA LD3-1995, 2. All exterior vertical high-pressure laminate panels shall be balanced with textured .020" thick high- pressure cabinet liner conforming to NEMA Standard LD3-1995, CL-20. Color shall be as selected by Architect. Surface texture shall be similar to exterior finish. 3. All high-pressure laminate must be laminated using a PVA adhesive, set under pressure, resulting in a rigid glue line. Contact adhesives shall not be used. 4. HPL at all open interiors, interiors of glazed door cabinets shall be considered exposed and finished in Decorative High -Pressure GP-28 laminate. B. Plastic Laminate: General purpose grade, high pressure decorative laminate meeting requirements of NEMA LD 3 and with a suede finish. Colors shall be as selected by Architect from full color and pattern range of plastic laminate manufacturers listed. Product/manufacturer; one of the following: Formica Brand Laminate; Formica Corp. Nevamar; TexMar, Inc. Wilsonart; Ralph Wilson Plastics Co. Pionite Decorative Laminate; Pioneer Plastics Corp. C. Casework with Transparent Finish: 1. AWI quality grade: Premium Grade 2. Construction of Casework: Details shall conform to reveal overlay design. 3. Exposed Parts: Red Oak veneer, Rift Cut. a. Grain Matching: Run and match grain vertically for drawer fronts, doors and fixed panels. b. Matching of Veneer Leaves: Slip Match. c. Veneer Matching Within Panel Face: Balance Match. 4. Semi -exposed parts: As governed by selected AWI quality grade unless shown otherwise. C. Thermally Fused Interiors at Semi -Exposed Surfaces: Interior surfaces behind doors, drawer boxes, backs, underside of wall cabinet bottoms, and unfinished ends shall be laminated with a thermally fused laminate that meets or exceeds the performance standards for NEMA LD3-1995 for GP-28. Color as selected by Architect. All panels shall be of "BALANCED" construction. Fast cycle thermally fused, melamine foil or polyester surfaced panels or other surface types that do not meet these requirements are not acceptable. D. 3mm PVC Edges: Door and drawer edging shall be 3mm PVC. The PVC shall be applied utilizing hot melt adhesive and radiused by automatic trimmers. Hand tool applying and trimming of PVC shall not be allowed. Edging shall be available in TWENTY TWO coordinated color options. Color shall be as selected by Architect. E. Particleboard: 1. All particleboard shall be Grade M-3 Industrial, according to the American National Standard (ANSI) for Mat -Formed Wood Particleboard, ANSI-A208.1-1993 and shall meet or exceed the following: a. Density 47lbs/cu.ft. b. Moisture Content 6% c. Modulus of Rupture 2400 psi d. Modulus of Elasticity 450,000 psi e. Internal Bond 80 psi f. Hardness 900 pounds g. Linear Expansion 0.30% h. Thickness Tolerance +/- 0.005" MANUFACTURED PLASTIC -LAMINATE -CLAD CASEWORK VLK Architects, 2007 12 3216 - 3 2740.00 Creekview Elementary School College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas i. Face Screw Holding 325 pounds j. Edge Screw Holding 275 pounds 2.03 CASEWORK HARDWARE AND ACCESSORIES A. Provide manufacturer's standard, satin finish hardware units, unless otherwise indicated. B. Hinges: Institutional type, 5 knuckle. Provide one pair for doors less than 4 ft. high and 1'/2 pair for doors over 4'. Mill ground hospital tip tight pin feature with all edges eased. Hinge to be full wrap around type of tempered steel .095" thick. Each hinge to have minimum 9 screws, #7, %" FHMS to assure positive door attachment. C. Wire Pulls: Solid brass with dull chrome finish, 4" wide, (#LH-321), for drawers and swing doors, mounted with two screws fastened from back. Provide two pulls for drawers over 24" wide. C. Door Catches: 1. Dual self -aligning, heavy-duty permanent magnet type with resistance in compliance with the Americans with Disabilities Act and Texas Accessibility Standards. Provide two catches on doors over 4' high. At double -leaf doors, provide Ives No. 2 catch for leaf with the lock. 2. At double -leaf doors, provide Ives No. 2 catch for leaf without the lock. 3. At each 1Ma" doors, provide 1 flap stay No. 499.050.02.0215 or 499.050.03.0215 (Mepla) or approved equivalent. D. Drawer Slides: 1. Standard Drawers: Case DS230, self -closing design, epoxy powder coated with positive in -stop. Captive nylon rollers, front and rear. Minimum 100 lb. load rating. 2. File Drawers: Case DS430, full extension, 3-part progressive opening slide, minimum 100 lb., zinc plated or epoxy coated at manufacturer's option. 3. File Drawer Accessory: Knape & Vogt No. 476 follower and track assembly. 4. Paper Storage Drawers: Full extension, 3-part progressive opening slide, minimum 100 lb., zinc plated or epoxy coated at manufacturer's option. E. Drawer and Cabinet Locks: Provide CompX National No. C8053-14A, half -mortise type, disc tumbler locks, round cylinder only exposed. Locks to be keyed differently, with locks in individual rooms keyed alike. Provide a masterkey. F. Cabinet Base Molding: To be provided by General Contractor in field. G. Adjustable Shelf Supports: Provide twin pin design with anti tip -up shelf restraints for both %" and 1" shelves. Design to include keel to retard shelf slide -off, and slot for ability to mechanically attach shelf to clip. Load rating to be minimum 300 lbs. each support without failure. Cabinet interior sides shall be flush, without shelf system permanent projection. Product/manufacturer; one of the following, no substitutions: 1. SC240 Plastic Shelf Clip; Case Systems, Inc. 2. Cat. No. 282.47.402; Hafele 3. Clear Polycarbonate Shelf Clip; TMI System Design Corp. H. Wardrobe Rod: To be 1-1/16" rod, Knape & Vogt No. 660, supported by Knape & Vogt No. 632 CHR flanges. I. Shelf and Rod Hardware: 1 hanger rod KV660SS 1 shelf and rod support KV1195 2 rod flanges KV734 wood dowel connectors J. Countertop Support Bracket: Model X0500, 1/:' steel, welded white enamel finish. K. Coat Hooks: Model No. 580-A26 Wardrobe Hooks (Ives) L. Grommets: Model No. LO-3 as manufactured by Doug Mockett & Co., Inc. 2.04 CONSTRUCTION A. All cabinet body components shall be secured utilizing concealed interlocking mechanical fasteners as approved by the Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards 6th Edition -1994 Sections 1600A-S-10 and AW 11600E-S-9. They shall be especially designed for use in joining particleboard panels. B. All joints are tight fitting and will not rupture or loosen due to the following: 1. Dimensional changes in the particleboard. MANUFACTURED PLASTIC -LAMINATE -CLAD CASEWORK VLK Architects, 2007 12 3216 - 4 2740.00 Creekview Elementary School College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas 2. Racking of casework during shipment and installation. 3. Normal use. 4. All fastening devices and screws shall be treated to deter or resist corrosion. C. Construction Features -- All Cabinets: 1. All structural components shall be 3/4" thick with balanced surfaces. 2. All back panels shall be 1/2" thick surfaced both sides for balanced construction. 3. All drawer components shall be 1/2" thick surfaced both sides for balanced construction. 4. Mounting stretchers are 3/4" thick structural components fastened to end panels by mechanical fasteners, and are concealed by the cabinet back. 5. When the rear of cabinets are exposed, a finished 3/4" thick decorative laminate back panel is applied. 6. Exterior grade plywood core individual bases, factory applied to base and tall cabinets shall support and carry the load of the end panels, and the cabinet bottom, directly to the floor. The base shall be let in from the sides and back of the cabinet to allow cabinets to be installed tightly together and tight against a wall. Also to conceal the top edge of applied vinyl base molding. There shall be a front to back center support for all bases over 30" wide. 7. Horizontal parting rails between drawers shall be 3/4" particleboard with balanced surfaces, secured to and further reinforcing cabinet ends. When drawers are keyed individually within a cabinet, or when drawers are fitted with lock hasps, the parting rail shall run full depth of cabinet to prevent pilfer. 8. A 5mm diameter row hole pattern 32mm (1-1/4") on center shall be boned in cabinet ends for adjustable shelves. This row hole pattern shall also serve for hardware mounting and replacement and/or relocation of cabinet components. 9. All door and drawer fronts and finished ends shall be balanced constuction with "cabinet liner' laminate bonded to both sides of a M-3, 47# particleboard core. 10. Adjustable shelves shall be particleboard core, balanced surfaces and have a .020" thick PVC front edge. a. Adjustable shelves, in a cabinet, over 33" wide shall be 1" thick. b. All adjustable shelves in open cabinets shall be 1" thick, except for special use cabinets such as mail, cubical or locker type units. c. All other shelves shall be 3/4" thick. 11. Fixed Interior Components such as fixed shelves, dividers, and cubicle compartments shall be full 3/4" thick particleboard attached with concealed interlocking mechanical fasteners. 12. All doors shall be a maximum of 24" wide. The height of any door shall not be greater than the width. D. Wall Cabinets: 1. Each end panel to be secured with a minimum of seven interlocking mechanical fasteners for a total tensile strength of 2,450 pounds. 2. All wall cabinet bottoms shall be of 1" thick particleboard core mechanically fastened to end panels and secured to the bottom back stretcher. 3. An upper 3/4" thick stretcher shall be located behind the back panel with two interlocking mechanical fasteners per end. Also the stretcher is secured to the cabinet top with #8 x 2" plated flat head screws. 4. A lower 3/4" thick stretcher shall be located behind the back panel and attached to the end panels with interlocking mechanical fasteners. The stretcher is also secured to the cabinet bottom. E. Base Cabinets: 1. Each end panel to be secured with a minimum of seven interlocking mechanical fasteners for a total tensile strength of 2,450 pounds. 2. All base cabinets, except sink cabinets, shall have a solid 3/4" thick sub -top fastened to the ends with interlocking mechanical fasteners. 3. All sink cabinets shall have a vertically mounted front stretcher panel supporting the countertop, a split removable back panel, and four steel corner gussets used to secure the counter -top. 4. An upper 3/4" thick stretcher shall be located behind the back panel and attached to the end panels with interlocking mechanical fasteners. This stretcher is also fastened to the full sub -stop thus capturing the back panel. Tall Cabinets: 1. Each end panel to be secured with a minimum of eleven interlocking mechanical fasteners for a total tensile strength of 3,850 pounds. 2. An intermediate fixed shelf shall be provided on all general storage cabinets, including both enclosed cabinets and open shelf units, to maintain internal dimensional stability under heavy loading conditions. 3. An upper %" thick stretcher shall be located behind the back panel and attached to the end panels with interlocking mechanical fasteners. This stretcher is also fastened to the full sub -stop thus capturing the back panel. 4. An intermediate %" thick stretcher shall be located behind the back panel and be secured to the cabinet ends with interlocking mechanical fasteners. Where an intermediate shelf is present, the stretcher shall also be secured to the shelf with a #8 x 2 plated flat head screw. MANUFACTURED PLASTIC -LAMINATE -CLAD CASEWORK VLK Architects, 2007 12 3216 - 5 2740.00 Creekview Elementary School College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas G. Drawers: 1. Drawer box shall be constructed with a full 1/2" thick non -racking, non -deflecting platform bottom which is carried directly by "L" shaped, bottom mount drawer glides. Sides are secured with 1 1/4" long screws directly into platform and into the sides. 2. Sides, back, sub -front and bottom shall be 1/2" thick 47# density particleboard surfaced both faces with Light Beige, Greystone, or White thermally fused laminate per 2.02. The top edge shall be .020" PVC matching the drawer color. 3. Corners shall be joined with fluted hardwood dowels and glue, minimum 32mm o/c. 4. Drawer fronts shall be removable and attached drawer box sub -front with screws from inside of drawer. 5. Drawers with 1/4' bottoms requiring hot melt glue or intermediate supports will not be permitted. No exceptions will be permitted. 2.05 PERFORMANCE A. Laminates: 1. "High Pressure Laminates" shall meet the definition and performance requirements of NEMA LD3-1995. Vertical grade laminate shall be GP-28 balanced with a minimum grade of CL-20. Countertops shall be GP-50. 2. Thermally Fused Laminate shall meet the performance requirements of NEMA L133-1995 for GP-28. Cabinet manufacturer shall submit panel manufacturers' current published specification stating ANSI core properties and NEMA finish properties. B. Hinges: ANSI 156.9.4.1,2,3,4: Two hinges mounted 23" on center on a 23-7/16" wide x 19-11/16" high cabinet door shall be capable of supporting a 100 pound test load located 1" from the outside edge of the door. 1. Cycle, open and close, from 5 degrees open through 95 degrees open with no failure to hinges, door, or cabinet end panel. The maximum horizontal permanent hinge set shall not exceed .030". C. Drawers: ANSI/BHMA A156.9-1988 4.11: an actual production drawer box with an applied finished front and 450mm drawer slides mounted per the manufacturers' instructions shall be tested as follows: 1. Dynamic Cycle Test: When uniformly loaded with 100 pounds and tested through 50,000 opening and closing cycles, the drawer shall operate freely. 2. Static Edge Load Test: When the drawer is fully extended, a 150 pound load shall be supplied to the drawer front at a point on the centerline of the drawer for one minute. No permanent damage or distortion shall occur. D. Adjustable Cabinet Shelving: Shelving shall not deflect in excess of 1/4" when loaded as follows: 1. Standard Shelving - 25 pounds/sq. ft. 2. Library Shelving - 40 pounds/sq. ft. 2.06 COUNTERTOPS A. High -Pressure Decorative Laminate, Nominal 1 1/8" Thick: 1. General Purpose, GP-50 high-pressure decorative laminate on horizontal surface, conforming to NEMA Standard LD3-1995. 2. Laminate bonded to 1" thick 47# M-3 particleboard core with PVA rigid adhesives. Contact method shall NOT be allowed. Core shall be balanced with HPL backer. 3. All joints shall be secured with adhesive and tight joint fasteners. 4. Provide 4" high back splashes where shown and at all ends abutting walls and adjacent cabinets. 5. Countertops shall conform to ANSI A161.2-1979 PERFORMANCE STANDARDS FOR FABRICATED HIGH-PRESSURE DECORATIVE LAMINATE COUNTERTOPS. 6. Edges shall be 3mm radiused PVC, machine applied with hot -melt adhesives. 7. Countertops containing sinks and countertops over dishwashers shall be exterior -grade veneer core plywood, no substitutions. 8. Joint between backsplash and countertops containing sinks shall be sealed with sanitary, silicone sealant to ensure a tight seal. 9. Seal substrate at sink cutouts with sanitary, silicone sealant. 2.07 FABRICATION A. Fabricate plastic laminate -faced casework to dimensions, profiles and details shown. B. Assemble units in the shop in as large components as practicable to minimize field jointing. C. Install hardware uniformly and precisely after final finishing is complete. Set hinges snug and flat in mortises unless otherwise indicated. Turn screws to a flat seat. Adjust and align hardware so that moving parts operate freely and contact points meet accurately. Allow for final field adjustment after installation. MANUFACTURED PLASTIC -LAMINATE -CLAD CASEWORK VLK Architects, 2007 12 3216 - 6 2740.00 Creekview Elementary School College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Verify site dimensions of cabinet locations in building prior to fabrication. B. Verify location of sheet metal blocking prior to installation of finish carpentry. 3.02 CASEWORK INSTALLATION A. Installers: Install casework under the supervision of the manufacturer's representative with factory -trained mechanics certified by manufacturer. B. Install plumb, level, true and aligned with no distortions. Shim as required, using concealed shims. Where casework abuts other finished work, scribe and apply filler strips for accurate fit with fasteners concealed where practicable. C. Base Cabinets: 1. Set cabinets straight, plumb and level. Adjust sub -tops within 1/16" of a single plane. Fasten each individual cabinet to blocking in wall with screws and finishing washers spaced 24" o.c. Bolt adjacent cabinets together into one integral unit with joints flush, tight, and uniform. Align similar adjoining doors and drawers to a tolerance of 1/16". 2. Where base cabinets are not installed adjacent to walls, fasten to floor at toe space with fasteners spaced 24" o.c. Secure sides of cabinets to floor, where they do not adjoin other cabinets, with not less than two fasteners. D. Wall Cabinets 1. Securely fasten to sheet metal blocking on partitions (not plaster, lath, or wallboard). Anchor, adjust and align wall cabinets as specified for base cabinets. Using screws with finishing washers, securely fasten each cabinet through back, near top, at not less than 24" o.c. Align similar adjoining doors to a tolerance of 1/16". 2. Adjust fronts and bottoms within 1/16" of a single plane. 3. Reinforcement of stud walls to support wall -mounted cabinets will be done during wall erection by trade involved, but responsibility for accurate location and sizing of reinforcement is part of this work. E. Adjust casework and hardware so that doors and drawers operate smoothly without warp or bind. Lubricate operating hardware as recommended by manufacturer. 3.03 INSTALLATION OF TOPS A. Field Jointing: Where practicable, make in same manner as factory jointing using dowels, splines, adhesives and fasteners recommended by manufacturer. Locate field joints as shown on accepted shop drawings, factory prepared so there is no jobsite processing of top and edge surfaces. B. Fastenings: Use concealed clamping devices for field joints, located within 6" of front, at back edges and at intervals not exceeding 24". Tighten in accordance with manufacturer's instructions to exert a constant, heavy clamping pressure at joints. Secure tops to cabinets with 7"-type fasteners or equivalent, using two or more fasteners at each front, end and back. C. Workmanship: 1. Abut top and edge surfaces in one true plane, with internal supports placed to prevent any deflection. Provide flush hairline joints in top units using clamping devices. 2. After installation, carefully dress joints smooth, remove any surface scratches, clean and polish entire surface. 3. Provide holes and cutouts as required for mechanical and electrical service fixtures. 4. Provide scribe moldings for closures at junctures of top, curb and splash with walls as recommended by manufacturer for materials involved. Use permanently elastic sealing compound recommended by manufacturer. 3.04 INSTALLATION OF ACCESSORIES A. Install in a precise manner in accordance with manufacturer's directions. Turn screws to a flat seat; do not drive. Adjust moving parts to operate freely without excessive bind. B. Install grommets at all knee spaces where electrical/telephone/data outlets are installed below countertop, whether detailed on drawings or not. MANUFACTURED PLASTIC -LAMINATE -CLAD CASEWORK VLK Architects, 2007 12 3216 - 7 2740.00 Creekview Elementary School College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas 3.05 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Clean Up: Remove all cartons, debris, sawdust, scraps, etc., and leave spaces clean and all casework ready for Owner's use. B. Repair or remove and replace defective work as directed upon completion of installation. C. Clean shop -finished surfaces, touch-up as required and remove or refinish damaged or soiled areas, as acceptable to Architect D. Protection: Advise contractor of procedures and precautions for protection of materials and installed plastic laminate -faced casework from damage by work of other trades. END OF SECTION MANUFACTURED PLASTIC -LAMINATE -CLAD CASEWORK VLK Architects, 2007 12 3216 - 8 2740.00 Creek View Elementary School College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas SECTION 12 4813 ENTRANCE FLOOR MATS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Entrance mats. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 03 3000 - Cast -In -Place Concrete. 2. Section 09 6500 - Resilient Flooring. 3. Section 09 6516 - Resilient Sheet Flooring. 4. Section 09 6800 - Carpeting. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit in accordance with SECTION 01 3323 - SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA AND SAMPLES. 1. Provide manufacturer's installation instructions, including manufacturer's approved adhesive with mat. 2. Provide certification of manufacturer's approval of adhesive. 3. Provide warranty information. B. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings showing layout, profiles and product components. C. Samples: Submit 124nch square samples of mat materials. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Provide Geo Tile as manufactured by Collins and Aikman. Floor mat construction shall be: 1. Composed of 18" x 18" tiles, 1/4" thickness, and weighing not less than 135 oz. 2. Molded SBR rubber backing with reinforced needle punch 100% Solution -Dyed low static polypropylene modular tiles with rubber -reinforced pattern to prevent crushing. 3. Color(s) shall be as selected by Architect. B. Vinyl Reducer: PVC reducer transition strip as recommended by manufacturer. C. Adhesive: Provide manufacturer's recommended adhesive. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Remove tiles from shipping cartons and climatize in installation area. Maintain temperature where products will be installed before, during and after installation as recommended by manufacturer. B. Floor area shall be clean, dry and free of foreign substances prior to installation. C. Examine substrates and conditions where floor mats will be installed. Do no proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. D. Verify sizes by field measurement before shop fabrication. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install floor mat to floor with manufacturer's recommended adhesive in accordance with the manufacturer's installation instructions. Lay tile from center markers established with principal walls orgeneral entrance area, discounting minor offsets, so that tile at opposite edges of flooring area are of equal width. Adjust as necessary to avoid use of cut widths less than 1 /2 file at perimeters. Lay tile square to flooring area axis. Tiles must be quarter -turned when installing. Install by turning each the 90-degrees in an alternating pattern. Coordinate installation with adjacent work to ensure proper clearances and to prevent tripping hazards. B. Provide vinyl transition strips as recommended by manufacturer. END OF SECTION ENTRANCE FLOOR MATS VLK Architects, 2007 12 4813 - 1 2740.00 Creekview Ele. College Station ISD SECTION 12 5651 LIBRARY EQUIPMENT PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, Including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 GENERAL A. It is the intent of these specifications to establish a minimum standard for materials, construction, workmanship and finished product for the work to be performed under this section. Substitutions must be accompanied by a detailed submittal outlining all deviations from specifications in order for a proposal to be considered. Guideline specifications are based on library furniture as manufactured by Tesco Products Company of Bellville, Texas. Acceptable companies shall be Tesco, Worden, Buckstaff, Brodart, Texwood Bravo, Blanton & Moore, or Library Bureau products modified to meet these specifications. Chairs are as manufactured by Jasper Chair Company of Jasper, Indiana. Acceptable companies shall be Jasper Chair, Community, Thonet, Buckstaff, or Nemschoff products modified to meet these specifications. Librarian's chairs are based on products as manufactured by Highmark ErgoDesigned Seating of Huntington Beach, California. 1.3 WORK SPECIFIED A. All materials, transportation, equipment and services necessary to furnish and install all library furniture and accessories as shown in the Drawings, as specified herein, and as needed for a complete and proper installation. 1.4 BIDDER QUALIFICATION INFORMATION A. Bidder must supply the following information with their bid to be considered: Detailed specifications of all items being bid. 2. Specific steps, materials and procedures used in the wood finishing process. 3. Five references with district name, project name(s), contact person(s), address, and phone number(s) where the furniture being proposed is in use. At least one of these references must be for a proiect where this furniture has been in use for over five years. 4. The following check list. CHECK LIST for LIBRARY EQUIPMENT Is all exposed wood solid Northern Grown Red Oak? Yes No If not, explain Are all veneers of sliced Northern Grown Red Oak of no less than 1/28" thick after sanding? Yes No If not, explain Are all oak veneers applied to oak plywood? Yes No If not, explain Are all materials used in unexposed structural parts of solid oak? Yes No If not, explain 2740.00 125651 -1 Creekview Ele. College Station ISD Are all wood parts dipped in Nelsonite 15602 wood stabilizer? Yes No If not, explain Are all wood parts roll coated with U.V. stain and then oven cured? Yes No I If not, explain Are all wood parts roll coated with U.V. sealer and then oven cured? Yes No If not, explain Are all wood parts roll coated with U.V. clear top coat and then oven cured? Yes No If not, explain Does the finish used pass the NKCA tests required? Yes No If not, explain Is a complete detail of your wood finishing process included? Yes No If not, explain Are wood stain and plastic laminate patterns as specified? Yes No If not, explain Are all exposed edges finished with a 1-1/4" solid oak external bullnose edge band? Yes No If not, explain Is all lumber core material of hardwood with a Modulus of Rupture of 8600 Ib./p.s.i. or more? Yes No If not, explain Do all plastic laminated surfaces have a .050 HPL top with a .030 Phenolic backing sheet? Yes No If not, explain Are all shelving uprights, end and middle, a minimum of 1" thick solid Northern Grown Red Oak? Yes No If not, explain Are all shelves a minimum of 3/4" thick solid Northern Grown Red Oak? Yes No If not, explain Do all sizes of shelving units have the quantity of fixed and adjustable shelves shown in the specifications? Yes No If not, explain 2740.00 125651 - 2 Creekview Ele. College Station ISD Are shelves finished on front and back so they can be reversed? Yes No If not, explain Do all shelving units 60" high and under have continuous top with external oak bullnose edging? Yes No If not, explain Are adjustable shelves of the pin hole type? Yes No If not, explain Are shelves routed underneath to receive support pins? Yes No If not, explain Are all shelving backs of 1/4" thick oak plywood? Yes No If not, explain Are backs inserted into grooves on all sides including the bottom? Yes No If not, explain Do table, circulation desk, and computer station tops have a hardwood lumber core with external 1-1/4" oak bullnose edging? Yes No If not, explain Are table legs attached as shown in Illustration CS-2 of the Construction Specifications? Yes No If not, explain and include a diagram of your leg attachment Are table legs 2-3/8" square of solid Northern Grown Red Oak? Yes No If not, explain Are table legs attached to tops by means of a 5" x 5" x 5/16" metal plate? Yes No If not, explain Are table leg mounting plates attached to the legs by two machine bolts into barrel nuts inserted into the leg? Yes No If not, explain Are table leg mounting plates attached to the table tops by four machine bolts into metal inserts in the table top? Yes No If not, explain Do table legs have an apron trim of 1" x 2-1/8" solid Northern Grown Red Oak? Yes No 125651 - 3 2740.00 Creekview Ele. College Station ISD If not, explain Do all tables have heavy duty 1-3/4" adjustable glides with chrome tops? Yes No If not, explain Do all tables, carrels and technical units have 1-3/4" adjustable glides? Yes No If not, explain Are computer stations of full frame panel construction? Yes No If not, explain Do computer station side panels slope from 36" at the back to 32" at the front where specified? Yes No If not, explain Are all computer station panels of 1" thick 7 ply oak plywood with solid oak edge band? Yes No If not, explain Do computer stations have a 60"wide x 6" deep center wire chase? Yes No If not, explain Do computer stations have 18" x 18" lockable access doors? Yes No If not, explain Do computer stations have adjustable work surfaces where specified? Yes No If not, explain Do computer station work surfaces tops have a hardwood lumber core? Yes No If not, explain Are computer station work surfaces finished with a 1-1/4" solid oak external bullnose edge band? Yes No If not, explain Is all exterior material in circulation units of 3/4" five ply oak core with solid oak edging? Yes No If not, explain Are circulation desk units of "full frame" solid oak construction? Yes No If not, explain Are circulation desk units 30" deep overall? Yes No If not, explain Is the circulation desk top continuous with an oak bullnose edging? Yes No 2740.00 125651 - 4 Creekview Ele. College Station ISD If not explain Is the front exterior design of the circulation desk as shown in Illustration CS-3 of the Construction Specifications? Yes No If not, explain and include diagram of your front exterior design Are library chairs Jasper Chair as specified? Yes No If not, explain Are chair frames of solid Northern Grown Red Oak? Yes No If not, explain Are upholstered backs removable? Yes No If not, explain Do the chairs have a solid oak "saddle" seat? Yes No If not, explain Are the librarian's chairs Highmark as specified? Yes No If not, explain Has the Qualification Information required been submitted? Yes No If not, explain Are the references given using the same furniture that you proposed? Yes No If not, explain Is one of the references included for an installation at least five years old? Yes No If not, explain Does furniture proposed have a written ten year manufacturer's warranty? Yes No If not, explain On a separate page, list in detail any deviations from specifications not already covered by the check list. If no deviations are listed, the owner will assume and will require that the bidder supply the furniture and accessories exactly as specified. 1.5 SAMPLES A. If bidder does not have existing library furniture of the exact type specified already in the school district, bidder may be required to submit a sample section of shelving, a table corner unit and a library chair showing the construction of the furniture exactly as it will be furnished. Failure to submit such samples if requested shall be grounds for rejection of proposal. 1.6 SUBMITTALS A. Contractor shall be required to submit shop drawings for all work under this section. These drawings shall show size, arrangement and type of materials, and connections and relationships to adjacent work. The contractor is responsible for verifying all dimensions prior to fabrication. 2740.00 125651 - 5 Creekview Ele. College Station ISD 1.7 WARRANTY A. Library Furniture shall be warranted for ten years. PART 2 — PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL CONSTRUCTION A. All wood used in the construction of furniture and cabinets shall be of Northern Grown Red Oak and shall be selected from seasoned, kiln -dried materials free from structural imperfections. The moisture content at time of fabrication shall range from 5% to 7%. All woods shall be selected for uniformity of grain and color. Wood used for internal parts shall be selected as structurally sound. B. All plywood used shall be of quality as specified by the American Plywood Association. All facing materials shall be no less than 1/28" thickness after sanding. All core material shall be of oak plywood. C. All table, office furniture, circulation desk, and computer station tops shall be of hardwood lumber core no less than 5/8" thick with a Modulus of Rupture of 8600 lb./psi or more. D. All high pressure plastic laminate shall meet N.E.M.A.-LD 3-1985 specifications. Vertical surfaces are laminated with .030" thick laminate on each side. Horizontal surfaces as unit tops are laminated with .050" thick laminate and a .030" thick Phenolic backer sheet is applied on the reverse side of all horizontal surfaces. All exposed horizontal edges shall be banded with 1-1/4" external oak bullnose edging. CS-1 Bull Nose Edging E. Drawer and door pulls shall be provided in bronze finish, style 101. F. All joints shall be those used in standard woodworking practice including dovetail, spline, rabbet, mortise and tenon. G. All exposed wood shall be finished as follows. After parts are dipped in Nelsonite 151302 wood stabilizer, they are to be passed through a five head wide belt sander which has 100, 120, 150, 180 and 220 grit sand paper. Parts shall then be inspected, filled and hand sanded as necessary until thoroughly cleaned. Then parts are to be roll coated with 100% solid U.V. (Ultra Violet) stain, wiped, and oven cured. Subsequent to curing, parts shall pass through a deburring station. Next the parts are roll coated with a 100% solid U.V. sealer, oven cured, and then passed again through a deburring station. Last, all parts are roll coated with a final 100% solid U.V. clear top coat and then oven cured. All sealers and finishes must be U.V. and applied by a roll coat system to insure a uniform and environmentally safe finish. H. All framing shall be of kiln -dried hardwood selected for structural soundness and shall be a minimum of 3/4" thick. 2.2 FINISHES A. Plastic laminate shall be any Wilson Art wood grain with wood finish to match. Circulation desk inserts shall be in any Wilson Art pattern. Upholstery fabric shall be selected from standard Marquesa Lana colors. 2.3 SHELVING A. All vertical uprights of library shelving shall be a minimum of 1" thick, kiln -dried solid oak, glued up in strips no less than 1-1/2" and no more than 4", and free of all imperfections. Veneered plywood 2740.00 125651 - 6 Creekview Ele. College Station ISD or particle board of any type and/or uprights of less than 1" thickness will not be acceptable. B. Canopy cornice shall be constructed of oak plywood top with solid oak fascia strips, which are machine applied to front and back edges. Bolting cleats are attached by means of wood screws and glued construction. Continuous top shelving shall have a 2-1/4" deep dovetailed top frame provided with countersunk holes for screwing down a top made of solid core with 1-1/4" oak bullnose matching edge bands on exposed edges. Bases shall be of solid hardwood 3-1/2" in height and dovetail joints. C. Shelving units shall be standard with back panels on single faced shelving and divider panels on double faced units. Backs shall be 1/4" thick oak plywood and finished on one side for single faced units and both sides for double faced units. Backs shall be inserted into grooves on all sides including the bottom. End panels shall be joined to cornice and base by means of metal ferrules embedded in the end panels with 5/16" hex head bolts passing through the cleats on the cornice and the sides of the base and engaging the ferrules. D. Shelves shall be a minimum of 3/4" thick, edge glued, solid oak strips no less than 1-1/2" wide nor more than 4" wide. Veneered plywood or particle board of any type will not be acceptable. The underside of all shelves shall be neatly routed to receive the metal supporting pins. Adjustable shelves shall be of the pin hole type construction with adjustments of 1-1/4". Shelves shall be interchangeable to fit in any shelving unit in the library and shall be finished on both the back and front edges to make them reversible. Neither shelves without routing for the pin supports nor offset holes and/or offset routing of shelf underside will be acceptable. Metal stripping adjustment for shelving will not be acceptable. E. Additional shelving units shall be joined by means of 5/16" hex head bolts passing through both bases and the intermediate upright and both cleats on the cornices and the intermediate upright and then secured with washers and nuts. F. All shelving 60" high and. under will have a continuous top with high pressure plastic laminate surface. All shelving 72" and higher will have a canopy top wood veneer to match shelving unit. All continuous tops shall have a 1-1/4" external solid oak bullnose edge. G. Standard shelf arrangements per side shall be as follows: Height Fixed Adiustable Total 28" - 36" 1 1 2 42" 1 2 3 48" 1 3 4 60" 1 4 5 72" 1 5 6 H. Magazine shelving shall have one flat shelf beneath each sloped shelf for storage. Picture book shelving upright dividers shall be of solid oak. Wire or sheet metal dividers will not be acceptable. 2.4 TABLES A. Table tops shall be constructed of solid hardwood lumber core with a .050" high pressure laminate surface and a .030" Phenolic backer. Table tops shall be banded with a 1-1/4" external solid oak bullnose edge band. B. Tables shall have an apron trim of 1/1/8" x 2-1/8" solid Northern Grown Red Oak attached around the perimeter of the table and shall fit between the legs to form a reveal design. The apron shall be attached to the table from the underside with 1-1/4" x #10 wood screws. C. Legs shall be constructed of two pieces of solid oak, glued and machined to a minimum of 2-3/8" square. Legs shall be attached to the top by means of a 5" x 5' x 5/16" metal -flanged plate. The mounting plate to be attached to the legs by means of two 5/16" x 3/4" machine bolts into 5/8" diameter barrel nuts inserted into the leg. The plate will in turn attach to the table top by means of 5/16" x 1" machine bolts into metal inserts in the table top. All tables shall be equipped with heavy duty 1-3/4" adjustable glides with chrome tops. 2740.00 125651 - 7 Creekview, Ele. College Station ISD CS-2 Table Leg Attachment Detail 2.5 COMPUTER STATIONS A. Fixed height computer stations shall be full panel with panel of 1" thick 7 ply oak plywood with 1" x 1/2" thick solid oak edge band. Side panels shall slope from 36" at the rear to 32" at the front. Work surface shall be of solid lumber core with an .050 HPL top and .030 phenolic backer and shall have a 1-1/4" solid oak bullnose edge (Illustration CS-1). Units shall be equipped with grommets and access sleeves as shown in the design specifications. Units shall be equipped with 1- 3/4" adjustable glides. B. Adjustable height computer stations shall be full panel with panels of 1" thick 7 ply oak veneer with 1" x 1/2" thick solid oak edge band. Side panels shall slope from 36" at the rear to 32" at the front. Work surface shall be of solid lumber core with a .050 HPL top and .030 phenolic backer and shall have a 1-1/4" solid oak external bullnose edge (Illustration CS-1). Units must be adjustable in heights as shown in the design specifications and shall be equipped with 1- 3/4" adjustable glides. Units shall be equipped with grommets and access sleeves as shown in the design specifications. Units shall be equipped with 1- 3/4" adjustable glides. C. Double faced units shall be equipped with a 6" wide x 36" high x 72" long center chase made of 1" thick 7 ply oak veneer panels. Chase shall be equipped with four grommets (two per side) set into the vertical rise. Interior clearance of this chase shall be 4" wide x 70" long x 35" high. Chase shall be accessible by two 18" x 18" hinged doors with locks. All interior chase end panels shall have a 3" wide x 18" high access opening to accommodate networking. 2.6 CIRCULATION DESK AND COMPONENTS A. Circulation Desks shall be designed using a modular concept with a continuous top. Modules shall be 36" high x 30" deep unless otherwise noted in Design Specifications. Sizes shall be as shown in Design Specifications. B. Facing materials shall be 3/4" thick, five ply oak plywood with oak veneer facing and solid oak edges. The individual modules shall be as shown in the Design Specifications. All components shall be manufactured using oak plywood with matching solid oak "full frame" construction. All framing materials shall be of kiln dried oak selected for structural soundness and shall be a minimum of 3/4" thick. All exterior materials used shall be 3/4" thick, five ply oak plywood with face veneers 1/28" thick, matched for color and grain uniformity and with a solid oak edge. C. Tops shall be of a continuous design and be fabricated in as large of sections as possible and shall be joined together by a draw bolt method. The top shall be 1-1/4" thick with a surface of .050" thick high pressure plastic laminate over a solid hardwood lumber core with a .030" thick balancer sheet on the underside. Tops shall have 1-1/4" external oak bullnose edging. D. Drawer fronts shall be made of 3/4" thick northern oak lumber, edge glued forming a continuous solid wood drawer front. Drawer sides and parts shall be 5/8" thick solid oak with dovetail joints and a 1/4" bottom recessed on all four sides. Drawers shall be equipped with side mounted full extension drawer slides. Drawer pulls shall be in a bronze finish. E. All doors and end panels shall be 3/4" thick five ply oak with face veneer of 1/28" thick matched for color and grain with a solid oak edge to match. All doors shall be hung with two Blum commercial grade, concealed, self closing hinges. Units, which include shelves, shall be drilled with pinholes to provide support for the shelves. KV strips shall not be acceptable. 2740.00 125651 - 8 Creekview Ele. College Station ISD The mobile book box shall be constructed of W thick 7 ply oak veneer plywood with solid oak edge banding. All framing shall be of kiln dried hardwood of minimum %" thickness. Top shall be 1-1/4" thick consisting of a hardwood lumber core with a .050" thick HPL and a .030" thick phenolic backing sheet and shall have a bullnose edge band. Unit shall be equipped with four 3" diameter swivel casters. G. The front exterior design shall be with two 3/4" oak bullnose bands which, when combined with the bullnose edge on the top, shall provide for two high pressure .050 plastic laminate inserts. CS-3 Circulation Desk 2.7 DICTIONARY STAND A. Top, legs and apron construction to be the same as Tables. Top shall have a solid oak stop. Cabinet ends and front shall be 3/4" thick solid oak. The unit shall have one adjustable oak shelf, 3/4" thick. All surface edging shall have 1-1/4" external oak bullnose edging. 2.8 ATLAS CASE A. Top, legs and apron construction to be the same as Tables. Case shall house five shelves with retainer on front edge. Shelves to slide on Grant 328 Full Extension Slides. The shelves shall be solid oak and have a recessed pull. All surface edging shall have 1-1/4" external oak bullnose edging. 2.9 LIBRARY CHAIRS A. Chairs to be of oak wood construction stained to match library furniture. All joints are to be multiple doweled and with frames reinforced with heavy wood corner blocks, glued and screwed in place. Back posts shall be made of 5/4" oak finished to 1-1/16" thickness and 2" width. B. Seat shall be solid wood saddle seat. Plywood seats will not be acceptable. C. Frame to be of the sled base type of 5/4" solid oak finished to 1-1/16" thickness x 2-1/4" width and shall be double doweled to the bottom of the front and back posts using 3/8" x 2" spiral groove dowels. 2.10 LIBRARIAN'S DESK CHAIR A. Circulation desk chairs shall be of steel and molded plastic construction. Seat and back inserts shall be of curved hardwood plywood. Base shall be five star with carpet casters. Seat and back cushions shall be of sculptured foam. Back height shall be adjustable. Seat shall be equipped with swivel tilt control and pneumatic lift height adjustment PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Library Furniture shall not be delivered until the building areas are sufficiently dry so that furniture will not be damaged by excessive changes in atmospheric conditions. Installation shall be by the 2740.00 125651 - 9 Creekview Ele. College Station ISD manufacturer's authorized representative and shall conform to the manufacturer's standard procedure. Installation shall include provision of connecting hardware, closure panels and trim required for complete and finished installation. Furniture shall be plumbed and securely set in place with permanent attachment where required. Installation shall include electrical hook ups. All debris resulting from installation shall be cleaned up and all furniture interiors and exteriors shall be cleaned at the completion of the installation. 2740.00 125651 -10 Creekview Ele. PART 4 - PRODUCT DESIGN SPECIFICATIONS Item: 1, 2 & 3 Item Description: Single Faced Shelving 1. 36' W x 60"H x 12"D Starter 2. 36"W x 60"H x 12"D Adder 3. As needed to finish run wide x 60"H x 12"D Adder 3A. Corner Unit Continuous top with oak bullnose edging College Station ISD If Bidding an alternate, attach list of deviations and a picture or drawing showing exact Item bid. 2740.00 125651 -11 Creekview Ele. PART 4 - PRODUCT DESIGN SPECIFICATIONS Item: 4 & 5 Item Description: Double Faced Shelving 4. 36"W x 48"H x 24"D Starter 5. 36"W x 48"H x 24"D Adder Continuous top with oak bullnose edging College Station ISD If Bidding an alternate, attach list of deviations and a picture or drawing showing exact Item bid. 2740.00 125651 -12 Creekview Ele. College Station ISD PART 4 - PRODUCT DESIGN SPECIFICATIONS Item: 5M Item Description: Double Faced Shelving w/Magazine Shelving on One Side 36"W x 48"H x 24"D Adder Magazine display shelves on one side Continuous top with oak bullnose edging If Bidding an alternate, attach list of deviations and a picture or drawing showing exact Item bid. 2740.00 125651 -13 Creekview Ele. PART 4 - PRODUCT DESIGN SPECIFICATIONS Item: 6, 7 & 8 Item Description: Single Faced Shelving 6. 36"W x 48"H x 12"D Starter 7. 36"W x 48"H x 12"D Adder 8. Filler as required Continuous top with oak bullnose edging Floor Attached College Station ISD If Bidding an alternate, attach list of deviations and a picture or drawing showing exact Item bid. 2740.00 125651 -14 Creekview Ele. PART 4 - PRODUCT DESIGN SPECIFICATIONS Item: 9 & 10 Item Description: Library Tables 9. 36"W x 60"L x 29"H Student Table 10. 36"W x 60"L x 30"H ADA Student Table Oak bullnose edging College Station ISO If Bidding an alternate, attach list of deviations and a picture or drawing showing exact Item bid. 2740.00 125651 -15 Creekview Ele. College Station ISD PART 4 - PRODUCT DESIGN SPECIFICATIONS Item: 11 Item Description: Double Faced Computer Station 60"W x 36"H at rear sloping to 32"H at front x 66"D overall - Starter 27" H work surface with oak bullnose edge band 6" wide x 36"H center wire chase Two 3" surface wire grommets per side in vertical rise above work surface Two 18" x 18" access doors with locks Two 6 outlet power strips with surge protectors mounted inside center chaise 3" wide x 18" high access opening in interior end panels If Bidding an alternate, attach list of deviations and a picture or drawing showing exact Item bid. 2740.00 125651 -16 Creekview Ele. PART 4 - PRODUCT DESIGN SPECIFICATIONS Item: 12 Item Description: Double Faced Computer Station 36"W x 36"H at rear sloping to 32"H at front x 66"D overall — Adder Adjustable work surfaces at 27", 29", and 31" (one to be set at 31" high for ADA access) 6" wide x 36"H center wire chase One 3" surface wire grommet per side in vertical rise above work surface One 18" x 18" access door with lock Two 6 outlet power strips with surge protectors mounted inside center chaise 3" wide x 18" high access opening in interior end panels Oak bullnose edge band College Station ISD If Bidding an alternate, attach list of deviations and a picture or drawing showing exact Item bid. 2740.00 125651 -17 Creekview Ele. PART 4 - PRODUCT DESIGN SPECIFICATIONS Item: 13 Item Description: Circulation Desk Component: Mobile Book Box 30"W x 36"H x 30"D overall Top with bullnose edge band Locking doors 3" swivel casters College Station ISD If Bidding an alternate, attach list of deviations and a picture or drawing showing exact Item bid. 2740.00 125651 -18 Creekview Ele. College Station ISD PART 4 - PRODUCT DESIGN SPECIFICATIONS Item: 14.15 & 16 Item Description: Circulation Desk Component: Door Storage Unit 14. 36" H Finished End Panel 15. 30" H Finished End Panel 16. 36" Wide x 30" Deep x 36" High overall Two adjustable and one fixed shelves Double Doors Oak bullnose edging See Illustration CS-3 for front design detail If Bidding an alternate, attach list of deviations and a picture or drawing showing exact Item bid. 2740.00 125651 -19 Creekview Ele. PART 4 - PRODUCT DESIGN SPECIFICATIONS Item: 17 Item Description: Circulation Desk Component: Corner Unit 90 degree, 30" x 30" x 36" H Oak bullnose edging See Illustration CS-3 for front design detail College Station ISD If Bidding an alternate, attach list of deviations and a picture or drawing showing exact item bid. 2740.00 125651 - 20 Creekview Ele. College Station ISD PART 4 - PRODUCT DESIGN SPECIFICATIONS Item: 18 Item Description: Circulation Desk Component: Computer Desk Unit 72" W x 30" D x 36" High overall with 29" High work surface Pedestal with one box and one file drawer on right One 6 outlet power strip with surge protector mounted underneath counter top 3"x3" WF9 "U" shaped under counter wire manager Fully articulating 11-1/2"D x 30"W keyboard/mouse tray unit 3-1/2" Access sleeve in each side panel Oak bullnose edging See Illustration CS-3 for front design detail if Bidding an alternate, attach list of deviations and a picture or drawing showing exact Item bid. 2740.00 125651 - 21 Creekview Ele. College Station ISD PART 4 - PRODUCT DESIGN SPECIFICATIONS Item: 19 Item Description: Circulation Desk Component: Charge Unit 36" Wide x 30" Deep x 36" High Two drawers, one with lock; locking drawer to be fitted with money holder insert Pull-out center shelf on rollers; to be set at 18" clear from drawer bottoms Base shelf to be removable and have two 3" access grommets at rear Oak bullnose edging I 3-1/2" Access sleeve in interior side panels See Illustration CS-3 for front design detail If Bidding an alternate, attach list of deviations and a picture or drawing showing exact Item bid. 2740.00 125651 - 22 Creekview Ele. PART 4 - PRODUCT DESIGN SPECIFICATIONS Item: 20 Item Description: Circulation Desk Component: Computer Desk Unit 36" W x 30" D x 30" High One 6 outlet power strip with surge protector mounted underneath counter top Two 3" wire grommets Under counter wire manager Oak bullnose edging College Station ISD if Bidding an alternate, attach list of deviations and a picture or drawing showing exact Item bid. 2740.00 125651 - 23 Creekview Ele. College Station ISD PART 4 - PRODUCT DESIGN SPECIFICATIONS Item: 21 Item Description: Dictionary Stand 24" W x 38" - 36"H x 16" D with sloping top and solid oak stop at bottom One fixed and one adjustable shelf Table leg base Table leg construction Oak bullnose edging If Bidding an alternate, attach list of deviations and a picture or drawing showing exact Item bid. 2740.00 125651 - 24 Creekview Ele. PART 4 - PRODUCT DESIGN SPECIFICATIONS Item: 22 Item Description: Atlas Case 30" W x 38" - 36" H x 30" D with 4 pull out shelves Table leg base Table leg construction Oak bullnose edging College Station ISD If Bidding an alternate, attach list of deviations and a picture or drawing showing exact Item bid. 2740.00 125651 - 25 Creekview Ele. PART 4 - PRODUCT DESIGN SPECIFICATIONS Item: 23 & 24 Item Description: Sled Base Library Chairs 19-1/2"D x 18-3/4"W x 31-1/2"H overall with 17-1/2" seat height Wood back Solid oak saddle seat Jasper Chair 173-SB-18 College Station ISD If Bidding an alternate, attach list of deviations and a picture or drawing showing exact Item bid. 2740.00 125651 - 26 Creekview Ele. PART 4 - PRODUCT DESIGN SPECIFICATIONS Item: 25 Item Description: Librarian's Chair 22"W x 20-1 /2" to 23-1 /2"D x 30-1 /2" to 37-1 /2"H overall Adjustable back depth Pneumatic chair lift mechanism Upholstered Seat & Back Five Star Base College Station ISO If Bidding an alternate, attach list of deviations and a picture or drawing showing exact Item bid. 2740.00 125651 - 27 CREEKVIEW ELEMENTARY SCHOOL COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX SECTION 21 1000 - STANDPIPE AND SPRINKLER SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Design coordination of sprinkler work with the installations of other trades as shown on their drawings; all mechanical, electrical, plumbing and sprinkler work must fit the space requirements. The sprinkler work shall comply with other Sections of this specification; and fit the structure finishes. The Sprinkler Contractor will comply with all the codes and underwriter authorities, and the requirements for the installation of inside and outside piping; including sprinkler heads, valves, tamper switches, flow switches, hangers and supports, sleeves, fire department connections, inspector test connections, main drain and accessories, signs and any other component parts reasonably incidental to providing a complete protection system. Provide 100 percent coverage for the entire building. B. A wet system shall be installed in heated areas and dry pipe systems in areas subject to freezing. C. Furnish all articles of a completed sprinkler system including all materials, labor, tools, equipment, transportation services and supervision fees. D. The plans provide a riser assembly location at water entry into building for flow switch locations, valve locations (with tamper switches), fire department test assemblies and fire department Siamese connections. These are a guide for subsequent preparation of the Contractor's detailed installation drawings of the complete fire protection sprinkler system which shall be submitted to the Architect / Engineer for review. Submit only drawings and calculations bearing the approval of the authority having jurisdiction. E. Do not exceed 52,000 square feet of building for each individual sprinkler system. F. Install fire protective system identification signs in accordance with NFPA-13, NFPA-14, and NFPA-20 G. It shall be the fire protection installer's responsibility, prior to bid, to verify pressure at the project site by performing a flow test. Determine if the available static pressure, residual pressure and flow rate will adequately provide the fire extinguishing system with the necessary operating requirements or if a fire pump, storage tank and necessary appurtenances are required. Notify Architect and Engineer if low water flow / pressure condition exist and inform them of all options prior to proceeding. H. The installation of the entire Sprinkler Systems shall comply with all rules and regulations of the National Board of Fire Underwriters, the Local Building Code, Local Fire Marshall, and Requirements of NFPA Pamphlet 13, and other local authorities exercising jurisdiction. Study the general, structural, electrical and mechanical drawings and specifications, in order to become familiar with the building and details as they apply to the work of this Section. Cooperate with all Trades so that there will be no conflict of space. Plumbing flow lines, large ductwork HVAC piping and electrical service feeders shall take precedence over Fire Protection work, except where it is absolutely necessary to maintain coverage protection. J. Provide heat tracing and insulation for wet pipes exposed to freezing conditions. STANDPIPE AND SPRINKLER SYSTEMS VLK Architects, 2007 21 1000 - 1 2740.00 CREEKVIEW ELEMENTARY SCHOOL COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX 1.02 BASIS OF DESIGN A. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA), latest edition of NFPA 13, Standard for the Installation of Sprinkler Systems. B. Vertical zone valves installed in horizontal position are not acceptable. All zone valves are to be located at water entry into building and mounted in the vertical riser. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Sprinkler equipment and installation to be in accordance with recommendations of and approved by local, state and federal fire authorities. B. Equipment and installation to meet requirements of NFPA No. 13, 14, 20, 24, 25, 70 and 72. C. Use materials and equipment that are new and of unused, approved by NFPA and as listed in the UL list of "Inspected Fire Protection Equipment and Materials." 1.04 SHOP DRAWINGS A. Make complete shop drawings and working drawings of equipment furnished, including detailed drawings of piping and sprinkler head locations. Drawings shall show construction details and dimensions of each piece of equipment and work to be installed. The location of all heads shall be as approved. Where additional heads are required to meet NFPA 13, provide at no additional cost. B. Before the shop drawings are submitted to Architect / Engineer, submit drawings to the jurisdictions for approval. All approvals shall be noted on the drawings or by letter from the departments. C. The Architect's approval of shop drawings shall not relieve the responsibility of correctly figured dimensions or any errors that may be contained in these drawings. The omission of any material shown on the contract drawings, or specified from the shop drawings, even though approved, shall not relieve the responsibility to furnish and erect them. D. The drawings show the location of the water entry into building. Install all zone valves at this location. Prepare the sprinkler drawings under the work of this Section. E. Submit samples of all sprinkler types for approval. 1.05 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Tyco Fire Products 1. Grinnell 2. Gem 3. Central B. Automatic Sprinkler Company of America C. Potter Roemer, Inc. D. The Reliable Automatic Sprinkler Company STANDPIPE AND SPRINKLER SYSTEMS VLK Architects, 2007 21 1000 - 2 2740.00 CREEKVIEW ELEMENTARY SCHOOL COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX E. Viking Corporation F. Victaulic Company of America PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 PIPING AND FITTINGS A. Above Slab Inside Building 1. Pipe 2" and Smaller. Schedule. 40, black steel pipe conforming to ASTM A 795 or ASTM A135 joined with threaded fittings. 2. Pipe 2-1/2" and larger, provide ASTM A795 or ASTM A135 UL and FM listed. a. Schedule. 40, black steel pipe joined with rolled grooved fittings. B. Underground within five feet of building. Provide ductile iron pipe, Class 200 conforming to ASTM, and ring-tite fittings. Provide concrete thrust blocks at changes in direction, according to the pipe manufacturer's recommendations. C. All piping shall be black carbon steel, except in dry systems where pipe shall be galvanized per ASTM A53. D. Fittings used to join pipe shall be listed fabricated fittings or manufactured in accordance to the material and dimension standards listed in table 6.4.1 NFPA 13 AND 2.2.1 nfpa 14. 2.02 SPRINKLER HEAD A. All sprinklers shall comply with the latest requirements of NFPA 13 with respect to orifice size. B. All heads shall be UL listed and FM approved, and comply with the latest requirements of NFPA 13 with respect to orifice size unless otherwise noted. Sprinkler heads with "O" ring design shall not be acceptable. C. Exposed areas: 1. Standard upright type with brass finish with escutcheon, with 165 degree F temperature 2. Tyco Model B, FRB, or approved equal D. Sidewall applications: 1. Horizontal sidewall type with brass finishes and chrome escutcheon. 2. Unfinished areas and recessed with chrome plated escutcheon with 155 degree F temperature rating. 3. Tyco Model B, FRB, or approved equal. E. Suspended ceilings: 1. Adjustable concealed type heads with manufacturer painted white cover plate with glass bulb fusible link, with 135 degree F temperature rating. 2. Color of plate, selected by Architect 3. Tyco Model B, FRB, or approved equal. F. Dry sprinklers heads at freezers and coolers 1. Tyco Model DS-1, DS-2, or approved equal. G. Sprinklers subject to mechanical injury shall be protected with fusible solder type sprinklers and listed guards. Bulb type sprinklers will not be acceptable for these locations. STANDPIPE AND SPRINKLER SYSTEMS VLK Architects, 2007 21 1000 - 3 2740.00 CREEKVIEW ELEMENTARY SCHOOL COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX 1. Storage rooms with exposed structure. 2. Gymnasiums. 3. Mechanical and Electrical rooms. 4. Below exposed stairs. 5. Exposed structure areas. H. Systems serving walk-n freezers shall utilize Tyco Model DS-1 or DS-C dry pendent sprinklers. A Model DSB-1 dry sprinkler boot shall be utilized in conjunction with the dry sprinkler to eliminate the requirement for insulation and to stop potential air interchange. Length of dry pendent shall be determined by manufacturer's recommendation with respect to freezer ambient temperatures expected. 2.03 INSPECTOR'S TEST CONNECTION A. Provide inspector's test connection as required by NFPA 13. 1. Ductile iron module housing with combination sight glass, orifice and bonnet assembly 2. UL listed 3. Victaulic No. 718 4. Tyco or approved equal 2.04 TAMPER SWITCH / SUPERVISORY SWITCH A. Tamper switch on each valve 1. Controlling or shutting off sprinkler system or any portion thereof. 2. Tamper switch with either one single pole, double throw switch or two single pole, double throw switches as required. 3. Switch shall be compatible with installed valve for standard mounting. 4. Potter -Roemer Fig. 6220, 6221, 6222, 6223 or approved equal. 2.05 FLOW SWITCH A. Vane type flow switch. 1. Self contained, pneumatic, adjustable retard. 2. Two, single pole, double throw switches. 3. Red enamel tamper proof switch housing with flow paddle. 4. Potter Roemer Model No. 6200, or approved equal. 2.06 FLOORS AND CEILING PLATES A. Provide chrome -plated floor and ceiling plates around pipes exposed to view when passing through walls, floors, partitions, or ceilings in finished areas. Size plates to fit pipe or insulation and lock in place. 2.07 DOMESTIC MANUFACTURE A. All piping material, pipe and pipe fittings shall be manufactured in the United States of America. 2.08 GASKETS A. Use 1/1 6-inch thick preformed synthetic rubber bonded. STANDPIPE AND SPRINKLER SYSTEMS VLK Architects, 2007 21 1000 - 4 2740.00 CREEKVIEW ELEMENTARY SCHOOL COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX 2.09 COUPLINGS A. Use listed rolled grooved mechanical couplings to engage and lock grooved or shouldered pipe ends and to allow for some angular deflection, contraction and expansion. Coupling consists of ductile iron housing, c-shaped composition sealing gasket and steel bolts. Gasket Material for dry pipe systems shall be silicone and listed for dry pipe service. 2.10 VALVES A. Use valves suitable for 175 psig WOG. B. Valves to be UL listed and FM approved. C. Valve Connections: 1. Provide valves suitable to connect adjoining piping as specified for pipe joints. Use full line size valves unless noted otherwise. 2. Screwed ends for pipe sizes 2 inches and smaller. 3. Flanged ends for pipe sizes 2-1/2 inches and larger. 4. Solder or screw to solder adapters for copper tubing. 5. Use grooved body valves with mechanical grooved jointed piping. D. Gate Valves: 1. Up to 2 inches, bronze, outside screw and yoke, rising stem, solid wedge, screwed ends, manufactured by: Mueller, or approved equal. 2. Over 2 inches, iron body, bronze trim, outside screw and yoke, rising stem, solid wedge, flanged ends; manufactured by Mueller, or approved equal. E. Check Valves: 1. Up to 2 inch, bronze, regrind bronze swing disk, solder or screwed ends; 200 WOG, manufactured by Mueller, or approved equal. 2. Over 2 inch, iron body bronze trim, swing disk, regrind — renew bronze disk and seat, flanged ends; 200 WOG, manufactured by Mueller, or approved equal. F. Butterfly Valve: Lug body style, bubble -tight shutoff, cast iron body, ASTM B 148 bronze disk, with integral tamper switch, manufactured by Grinnell, Model No. 8000 FP, or approved equal. G. Freestanding Indicating Post: Install adjustable indicating post and valve outside building where shown on Civil drawings, consisting of UUFM, non -rising stem gate valve and indicating post. Gate valve shall be iron body, non -rising stem, bronze mounted. Indicator flange, 175-psi non -shock rating, flanged end. Indicator shall be UUFM approved cast iron body, plexiglass window and 18-inch adjustment span with handle and tamper switch wired to main fire alarm control panel, manufactured by Mueller, Valve No. A-2052, Indicating Post No. A20800, or approved equal. H. Wall post -adjustable indicating valve: Outside building at water entry location into building, consisting of UUFM, non -rising stem gate valve and indicator. Gate valve shall be iron body, non -rising stem, bronze mounted. Indicator flange, 175-psi non -shock rating, flanged end. Indicator shall be UUFM approved cast iron body, plexiglass window and 18-inch adjustment span with handle and tamper switch wired to main fire alarm control panel, manufactured by Mueller, Valve No. A-2052, Indicating Post No. A20800, or approved equal. STANDPIPE AND SPRINKLER SYSTEMS VLK Architects, 2007 21 1000 - 5 2740.00 CREEKVIEW ELEMENTARY SCHOOL COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX 2.11 ELECTRIC ALARM BELL A. 10-inch round red enamel steel bell with electrically operated vibrating outdoor alarm bell, UL listed, red enamel steel, manufactured by Simplex, or approved equal. 2.12 GAUGES A. Gauges shall be bourdon tube type with minimum 4-1/2 inch dial and die cast aluminum case with screwed ring and black enamel finish. The movement shall be all stainless steel with Grade A phosphor bronze bourdon tube, brazed at socket and tip. The accuracy of the gauge shall be within one-half of one percent of the scale range. The pointer shall be the micrometer adjustment type recalibrated from the front. Pressure and compound gauges shall have suitable scale ranges and graduations. Suitable for temperatures up to 120 degrees F. B. Gauges shall have 'A inch connections and be mounted with combination stop / snubber needle valve with suitable pressure rating. Scale ranges: 0-200 psi. C. Gauge range shall be such that system normal operating pressure falls with 25 percent and 75 percent of the full-scale range. D. Pressure scale graduations shall read in psig. Figure intervals shall be in — 20 psig increments, with minor divisions in 2 psig increments. E. The accuracy of the gauge shall be at least 0.5 percent of the scale range. Gauge shall be made in accordance with ASME B40.1 accuracy grade 2A. F. Manufactured by: 1. Trerice. Model No. 4500 Series 2. Ashcroft 3. Marsh 4. Weksler 2.13 SPARE SPRINKLER HEAD BOX. A. Provide baked enamel steel box to store 36 sprinkler heads (Minimum of 3 of each type used) for emergency replacement. Provide sprinkler wrench. 2.14 ALARM CHECK VALVE. A. Provide UL listed check valve. 1. Variable for City Supplied systems pressure trim set. 2. Constant for Fire Pump Systems pressure trim set. 3. Tyco AV-1 or approved equal. 2.15 WATER MOTOR ALARM. A. Provide a red enamel motor alarm for installation on exterior wall. 1. Tyco Model WMA-1 or approved equal. 2.16 SIAMESE FIRE DEPARTMENT CONNECTION A. Siamese Wall mounted chrome -plated Siamese. Include caps, sillcock, chain, and a plate lettered AUTO-SPKR. 1. Provide a 4" X 2-1/2" x2-1 /2". 2. Potter -Roemer #5751 STANDPIPE AND SPRINKLER SYSTEMS VLK Architects, 2007 21 1000 - 6 2740.00 CREEKVIEW ELEMENTARY SCHOOL COLLEGE STATION ISO COLLEGE STATION, TX B. Free Standing Fire Department Connection. Furnish rough chrome plated body with polished chrome plated body with polished chrome plated trim sized 4"x2-1/2" x 2-1/2" similar to Potter -Roemer Fig. 5761. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 DESIGN A. Design, spacing of sprinkler heads and selection sizes shall conform to the requirements of NFPA 13 for the indicated occupancy. B. Uniform discharge density design shall be based on hydraulic calculations using the method outlined in NFPA 13. Density of discharge from sprinkler heads shall conform to NFPA 13. C. Friction losses in pipe will be based on a value of "C 120 in the Hazen and Williams formula. D. Design and install the system so that no part will interfere with doors, windows, heating, mechanical, lighting or electrical equipment. Do not locate sprinkler heads closer than 3 feet to lighting fixtures or other obstructions. 3.02 LOCATION A. Heads shown, if indicated on reflected ceiling plans, are an integral part of the ceiling design. Where heads are not shown or indicated, locate them in the exact center of acoustical ceiling tile unless noted otherwise. In rooms with monolithic plaster or gypsum drywall ceilings, locate the sprinkler heads symmetrically arranged with respect to both axes of the room. Locate sprinkler heads in relation to specialty ceiling elements such as slats, ribs, panels, grids, etc., if not shown on the drawings. Generally, locate heads in the exact center of, or spaced between, such elements. Center heads in corridors. B. Locate heads as may be required for coordinated ceiling pattern, even through number of heads exceed minimum code requirements. C. Sprinkler heads located in utility or mechanical rooms, penthouses, service corridors; or other such spaces not subject to public view need not be centered in ceiling patterns and may use a straight drop from branch line. 3.03 PREPARATION A. Ream pipes and tubes, clean off scale, rust, oxide and dirt, inside and outside, before assembly. Remove welding slag or other foreign material from piping. B. Pipe beveled each end, per approved procedures. C. Hammer clean and flush out piping after welding to remove scale, welding slag and other debris. 3.04 CONNECTION A. Make screwed joints with square, clean full cut standard taper pipe threads. Ream after cutting and threading. Red lead and linseed oil or other approved non -toxic joint compound applied to male threads only. STANDPIPE AND SPRINKLER SYSTEMS VLK Architects, 2007 21 1000 - 7 2740.00 CREEKVIEW ELEMENTARY SCHOOL COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX B. Nipples: Shoulder type; extra heavy where less than 1-1/2 inch is unthreaded. C. Clamp cast iron water pipe at fittings with 3/4 inch rods and properly anchor and support. D. Use grooved mechanical couplings and mechanical fasteners only in accessible locations. 3.05 COORDINATION A. Coordinate the installation schedule for this work with the construction schedule for the Work to ensure orderly progress with minimum delay. B. Coordinate interface of fire sprinkler system with the work of other trades to ensure proper and adequate provision for the installation and connection of this system. C. Coordinate location and quantity of Siamese connections required for fire department connection with Architect and local fire officials. 3.06 SURFACE CONDITIONS A. Before starting each stage of the fire sprinkler systems installation, inspect the installed work of other trades and determine that work is complete enough to allow installation to begin. Ensure that work of other trades has been installed in a manner to permit work of this Section in accordance with approved design. 3.07 INSTALLATION A. Run piping concealed above furred ceilings and in joists to minimize obstructions. Expose only heads. B. Protect sprinkler heads against mechanical injury with standard guards. C. Locate system drains and inspector's test connections in utility rooms, mechanical rooms or other readily accessible areas not requiring access through ceiling. Coordinate sprinkler system drain flow rates with plumbing system drainage capacities. D. Where low points, or drains occur above ceilings or in otherwise finished spaces, furnish drain valve with brass cap and chain. E. Locate outside alarms on wall of building and coordinate with Architect. F. Provide on interior wall near sprinkler valve, cabinet containing extra sprinkler heads of each type and wrench suitable for each head type. G. Provide a minimum 18-inch radius swing joint for each drop to sprinkler heads located in ceilings. H. Install pipe markers to identify fire protection. I. Provide shield or deflector for sprinklers or equipment where electrical switchgear, switchboards and motor control centers are in sprinkler protected spaces. J. Install valves with stems upright or horizontal, not inverted. K. Sprinkler heads shall be installed above and below ductwork over 48 inches wide, in exposed areas, per NFPA 13. STANDPIPE AND SPRINKLER SYSTEMS VLK Architects, 2007 21 1000 - 8 2740.00 CREEKVIEW ELEMENTARY SCHOOL COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX L. Install the complete fire sprinkler system in accordance with the approved shop drawings. M. Perform piping installation in accordance with the provisions of the specifications, including furnishing of required sleeves for fire sprinkler system pipes passing through rated walls, floors, and other parts of the building. Provide scheduled 40 galvanized pipe sleeve for concrete or CMU penetrations. Furnish size required for fireproofing and or insulation. Furnish and install split wall plates and chrome plated escutcheons for exposed fire sprinkler system pipes. Where pipes pass through concrete floors, furnish and install wrought iron or steel pipe sleeves made flush with the ceiling below and extending 2" above the finished floor. N. Do not cut or make holes in any part of the building except where shown on the approved shop drawings. O. Furnish and install, next to the sprinkler riser main, a print sheet protected by glass or a transparent plastic cover, giving brief instructions regarding control, emergency procedure, and other data required by NFPA #13. For hydraulically designed sprinkler systems, a placard is to be permanently attached to the riser indicating the location, and the basis of design (discharge density and system demand). P. Do not install exposed piping below structure in public area. Q. Provide heat tracing and insulation on wet piping systems exposed to freezing when not installed in a heated space or installed by other acceptable methods of maintaining the piping from freezing. Installation of heat tracing and insulation shall be in accordance with the latest edition of NFPA 13 and the local code authorities. Coordinate electrical requirements with Division 26. 3.08 SECURING AND SUPPORTING A. Support piping to maintain line and grade, with provision for expansion and contraction. Use approved clevis-type or trapeze -type hangers connected to structural members of the building. Single pipe runs to be supported by approved clevis type hangers. Multiple pipe runs to be supported by approved trapeze type hangers. Do not support piping from other piping or structural joist bridging. B. C. Am Provide supports both sides of elbows for pipe 6" and larger. Support vertical risers with steel strap pipe clamps of approved design and size, supported at each floor. Support piping assemblies in chases so they are rigid and self - supported before the chase is closed. Support spacing: As recommended by the project structural engineer and support manufacturer, but not more than listed below. Not to exceed spacing requirements of smallest pipe. Steel Minimum Rod Max. Support Diameter, Inches Pipe Size Spacing, Feet 1" & smaller 6 3/8 1-1/4" & 1-1/2" 8 3/8 2" 10 3/8 3" 10 1/2 4" & 5" 10 5/8 STANDPIPE AND SPRINKLER SYSTEMS VLK Architects, 2007 21 1000 - 9 2740.00 CREEKVIEW ELEMENTARY SCHOOL COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX 6" and above 1 10 13/4 3.09 PIPE SUPPORTS A. Provide P1001 or P 5000 Unistrut metal framing members and appurtenances for pipe support. Hot -dip galvanize members and appurtenances when located outside. Sagging of pipes or supports is not acceptable. B. Adjustable clevis hangers shall be used for single pipe supports. Grinnell Fig. 260. When oversized clevis is used, a nipple shall be placed over the clevis bolt as a spacer to assure that the lower U-strap will not move in on the bolt. Ring type clevis hangers are not acceptable. 3.10 PIPE SLEEVES A. Sleeves through masonry and concrete construction: 1. Fabricate sleeves of Schedule 40 galvanized steel pipe. 2. Size sleeve large enough to allow for movement due to expansion and to provide continuous insulation. B. Sleeves through gypsum wall construction. 1. Fabricate sleeves of 16 gauge galvanized sheet metal. C. Sleeves through elevated slab construction. 1. Fabricate sleeves of Schedule 40 galvanized steel pipe with welded center flange in floor. D. Extend each sleeve through the floor or wall. Cut the sleeve flush with each wall surface. Sleeves through floors shall extend 2" above floor lines for waterproofing purposes. Slab on grade floors shall not be sleeved except where penetrating waterproofing membrane or insect control is required. E. Caulk sleeves water and airtight. Seal annular space between pipes and sleeves with mastic compound to make the space water and airtight. F. For sleeves below grades in outside walls, provide Thunderline Link -Seal or Advance Product and System Interlynx, with 316 stainless steel nuts and bolts, with cast iron pressure plate. G. Provide chrome plated escutcheon plates on pipes passing through walls, floors or ceilings exposed to view. At exterior walls, stainless steel sheet metal is to be used. H. For sleeves through fire and smoke rated walls, seal with a UL through -penetration firestop, rated to maintain the integrity of the time rated construction. Install in accordance with the manufacturer's installation instructions. Comply with UL and NFPA standards for the installation of firestops. Refer to Architectural drawings for all fire and smoke rated partitions, walls, floors, etc. 3.11 CLEANING OF PIPING SYSTEMS A. General cleaning of piping systems. Purge pipe of construction debris and contamination before placing the systems in service. Provide and install temporary connections as required to clean, purge and circulate. STANDPIPE AND SPRINKLER SYSTEMS VLK Architects, 2007 21 1000 - 10 2740.00 CREEKVIEW ELEMENTARY SCHOOL COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX 3.12 FLUSHING AND TESTING A. Testing and flushing of installation of sprinkler system shall be in accordance with NFPA 13, and NFPA 25. B. Flush sprinkler piping in accordance with NFPA 13. Additionally, flush all alarm valves, and all main piping up to valve. C. In addition to NFPA 13 required tests, provide flow switch test and tamper switch test for each device, and verify alarm valve operation. D. All tests shall be witnessed by Architect / Engineer. Contractor shall notify Architect / Engineer 7 working days in advance. 3.13 EXCAVATING, TRENCHING, AND BACKFILLING A. Perform excavation, trenching, and backfilling for this portion of the work in accordance with the specifications. 3.14 PIPE MARKERS A. Identify interior exposed piping and piping in accessible chases or plenums with Opti- Code Brady Pressure Sensitive Adhesive Pipe Markers, consisting of pipe marker and direction of flow arrow tape. Clean pipe prior to installation. Background colors of markers, arrows and tape for each type of system shall be the same. Meet ANSI/OSHA standards and clearly identify each system. Minimum 2-1/4-inch letters through 4-inch pipe and 4-inch letters for 5-inch pipe and larger. B. Identify exterior and mechanical room piping with Snap Around pipe markers through 4- inch pipe and Strap Around markers 5-inch pipe and larger. Pipe markers consisting of pipe marker and direction of flow arrow tape; background colors of markers, arrows and type for each type of system shall be the same. Meet ANSI / OSHA standards and clearly identify each system. Minimum 2-1/4-inch letters through 4-inch pipe and 4-inch letters for 5-inch pipe and larger. C. Install identification in the following locations: 1. both sides of penetrations through walls, floors and ceilings. 2. Close to valves or flanges. 3. Intervals on straight pipe runs not to exceed 50 feet 4. Apply marker where view is obstructed. D. Pipe markers shall meet or exceed the specifications of the ASME A13.1 "Scheme for Identification of Piping Systems". 3.15 TESTING AND ACCEPTANCE A. Prior to connecting to the overhead sprinkler piping, flush the underground main. Secure required approvals of the flushing operations. B. Upon completion of the fire sprinkler system installation, test and retest the complete installation and make corrections as necessary to obtain acceptance by the Fire Marshall and/or any other authority having jurisdiction. Furnish test equipment and personnel required. STANDPIPE AND SPRINKLER SYSTEMS VLK Architects, 2007 21 1000 - 11 2740.00 CREEKVIEW ELEMENTARY SCHOOL COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX 3.16 TRAINING A. At a time mutually agreed upon, provide 4 hours of instruction to the Owner's designated personnel on the operation and maintenance of the automatic sprinkler system and associated equipment. Owner's Operation and Maintenance Manual prepared for this project shall be used during the instruction. END OF SECTION STANDPIPE AND SPRINKLER SYSTEMS VLK Architects, 2007 21 1000 - 12 2740.00 CREEKVIEW ELEMENTARY SCHOOL COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX SECTION 22 0100 - PLUMBING OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Compilation product data and related information appropriate for Owner's operation and maintenance of products furnished under Contract. Prepare operating and maintenance data as specified. B. Instruct Owner's personnel in operation and maintenance of equipment and systems. C. Submit three copies of complete manual in final form. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Thirty (30) days after the Contractor has received the final scheduled identified submittals bearing the Architect/Engineer's stamp of acceptance (including resubmittals), submit for review one copy of the first draft of the Operating and Maintenance Manual. This copy shall contain as a minimum: 1. Table of Contents for each element. 2. Contractor information. 3. All submittals, coordination drawings and product data, reviewed by the Architect/Engineer; bearing the Architect/Engineer's stamp of acceptance. (When submittals are returned from Engineer "Correct as Noted", corrected inserts shall be included.) 4. All parts and maintenance manuals for items of equipment. 5. Warranties (without starting dates) 6. Certifications that have been completed. Submit forms and outlines of certifications that have not been completed. 7. Operating and maintenance procedures. 8. Form of Owner's Training Program Syllabus (including times and dates). 9. Control operations/equipment wiring diagrams. 10. Other required operating and maintenance information that are complete. B. Copy will be returned to the Contractor within 15 days with comments for corrections. C. Submit three (3) completed manuals in final form to the Architect/Engineer one day after substantial completion, and prior to Owner's instructions. Include all specified data, test and balance reports, drawings, dated warranties, certificates, reports, along with other materials and information. D. The Architect/Engineer will review the manuals for completeness within fifteen (15) days. E. The Contractor shall be notified of any missing or omitted materials. The Manuals shall be reworked by the Contractor, as required, in the office of the Architect / Engineer. The manuals will not be retransmitted. F. Two (2) complete Manuals will be delivered to the Owner. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 BINDERS A. Commercial quality black three-ring binders with clear overlay plastic covers. PLUMBING OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS VLK Architects, 2007 22 0100 - 1 2740.00 CREEKVIEW ELEMENTARY SCHOOL COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX B. Minimum ring size: 1". Maximum ring size: 3". C. When multiple binders are used, correlate the data into related groupings. D. Label contents on spine and face of binder with full size insert. Label under plastic cover. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL A. Form for Manuals: 1. Prepare data in form of an instructional manual for use by Owner's personnel. 2. Format: a. Size: 8-1/2" x 11". b. Text: Manufacturer's printed data or neatly typewritten. 3. Drawings: a. Provide reinforced punched binder tab and bind in text. b. Fold larger drawings to size of text pages. 4. Provide flyleaf indexed tabs for each separate product or each piece of operating equipment. 5. Cover: Identify each volume with typed or printed title "Operating and Maintenance Instructions". List: a. Title of Project b. Identity of separate structures as applicable. C. Identity of general subject matter covered in the manual. 6. Binder as specified. B. Content of Manual: 1. Neatly typewritten Table of Contents for each volume arranged in systematic order as outlined in the specifications. a. Contractor, name of responsible principal, address and telephone number. b. A list of each product required to be included, indexed to content of the volume. C. List with each product, name, address and telephone number of: 1) Subcontractor or installer. 2) Maintenance contractor as appropriate. 3) Identify area of responsibility of each. 4) Local source of supply for parts and replacement. d. Identify each product by product name and other identifying symbols as set forth in Contract Documents. 2. Product Data: a. Include those sheets pertinent to the specific product. b. Annotate each sheet to: 1) Identify specific product or part installed. 2) Identify data applicable to installation. 3) Delete references to inapplicable information. (All options not supplied with equipment shall be marked out indicated in some manner. 3. Drawings: a. Supplement product data with drawings as necessary to illustrate: 1) Relations of component parts of equipment and systems. 2) Control and flow diagrams. b. Coordinate drawings with information in Project Record Documents to assure correct illustration of completed installation. C. Do not use Project Record Documents as maintenance drawings. PLUMBING OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS VLK Architects, 2007 22 0100 - 2 2740.00 CREEKVIEW ELEMENTARY. SCHOOL COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX 4. Written text, as required to supplement product data for the particular installation: a. Organize in consistent format under separate headings for different procedures. b. Provide logical sequence of instructions for each procedure. 5. Copy of each warranty, bond and service contract issued. a. Provide information sheet for Owner's personnel, giving: 1) Proper procedures in event of failure. 2) Instances that might affect validity of warranties or bonds. 6. Shop drawings, coordination drawings and product data as specified. C. Sections for Equipment and Systems. 1. Content for each unit of equipment and system as appropriate: a. Description of unit and component parts. 1) Function, normal operating characteristics, and limiting conditions. 2) Performance curves, engineering data and tests. 3) Complete nomenclature and commercial number of replaceable parts. b. Operating procedures: 1) Start up, break-in, routine and normal operating instructions. 2) Regulation, control, stopping, shut down and emergency instructions. 3) Summer and winter operating instructions. 4) Special operating instructions. C. Maintenance procedures: 1) Routine operations 2) Guide to trouble -shooting. 3) Disassembly, repair and reassembly. 4) Alignment, adjusting and checking. 5) Routine service based on operating hours. d. Servicing and lubrication schedule. List of lubricants required. e. Manufacturer's printed operating and maintenance instructions. f. Description of sequence of operation by control manufacturer. g. Original manufacturer's parts list, illustrations, assembly drawings and diagrams required for maintenance. 1) Predicted life of part subject to wear. 2) Items recommended to be stocked as spare parts. h. As installed control diagrams by controls manufacturer. i. Complete equipment internal wiring diagrams. j. Each Contractor's coordination drawings. k. As installed color coded piping diagrams. I. Charts of valve tag number, with location and function of each valve. M. List of original manufacturer's spare parts and recommended quantities to be maintained in storage. n. Other data as required under pertinent sections of the specifications. 2. Prepare and include additional data when the need for such data becomes apparent during instruction of Owner's personnel. 3. Additional requirements for operating and maintenance data as outlined in respective sections of specifications. 4. Provide complete information for products specified in Division 23. 5. Provide certificates of compliance as specified in each related section. 6. Provide start up reports as specified in each related section. 7. Provide signed receipts for spare parts and material. 8. Provide training report and certificates. 9. Provide backflow preventer certified test reports. 10. Provide gas piping pressure test reports. END OF SECTION PLUMBING OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS VLK Architects, 2007 22 0100 - 3 2740.00 CREEKVIEW ELEMENTARY SCHOOL COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX SECTION 22 0500 - PLUMBING GENERAL PROVISIONS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Except as modified in this Section, General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, applicable provisions of the General Requirements, and other provisions and requirements of the contract documents apply to work of Division 22 Mechanical. B. Applicable provisions of this section apply to all sections of Division 22, Mechanical. 1.02 CODE REQUIREMENTS, AND FEES A. Perform work in accordance with applicable statutes, ordinances, codes and regulations of governmental authorities having jurisdiction. B. Mechanical work shall comply with applicable inspection services: 1. Underwriters Laboratories 2. National Fire Protection Association 3. State Health Department 4. Local Municipal Building Inspection Department 5. Texas Department of Licensing & Regulations (ADA) 6. Texas Accessibility Standards (TAS Based on ADA) C. Resolve any code violations discovered in contract documents with the Engineer prior to award of the contract. After Contract award, any correction or additions necessary for compliance with applicable codes shall be made at no additional cost to the Owner. D. This Contractor shall be responsible for being aware of and complying with asbestos NESHAP regulations, as well as all other applicable codes, laws and regulations. E. Obtain all permits required. 1.03 CONTRACTOR'S QUALIFICATIONS A. An approved contractor for the work under this division shall be: 1. A licensed specialist in this field and have the personnel, experience, training, skill, and organization to provide a practical working system 2. Able to furnish evidence of having contracted for and installed not less than 3 systems of comparable size and type that have served their Owners satisfactorily for not less than 3 years 1.04 REFERENCE SPECIFICATIONS AND STANDARDS A. Materials which are specified by reference to Federal Specifications; ASTM, ASME, ANSI, or AW WA Specifications; Federal Standards; or other standard specifications must comply with latest editions, revisions, amendments or supplements in effect on date bids are received. Requirements in reference specifications and standards are minimum for all equipment, material, and work. In instances where specified capacities, size, or other features of equipment, devices, or materials exceed these minimums, meet specified capacities. 1.05 CONTRACT DRAWINGS A. Contract drawings are diagrammatic only and do not give fully dimensioned locations of various elements of work. Determine exact locations from field measurements. PLUMBING GENERAL PROVISIONS VLK Architects, 2007 22 0500 - 1 2740.00 CREEKVIEW ELEMENTARY SCHOOL COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX 1.06 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS A. Maintain at the job site a separate set of white prints (blue line or black line) of the contract drawings for the sole purpose of recording the "as -built" changes and diagrams of those portions of work in which actual construction is at variance with the contract drawings. Mark the drawings with a colored pencil. Prepare, as the work progresses and upon completion of Work, reproducible drawings clearly indicating locations of various lines, valves, ductwork, traps, equipment, and other pertinent items, as installed. Include flow -line elevation of sewer lines. Record existing and new underground and under slab piping with dimensioned locations and elevations of such piping. B. At the conclusion of project, obtain without cost to the Owner, erasable mylars of the original drawings and transfer as -built changes to these. Prior to transmittal of corrected drawings, obtain 3 sets of blue -line prints of each drawing, regardless of whether corrections were necessary and include in the transmittal (2 sets are for the Owner's use and one set is for the Architect/Engineer's records). Delivery of these as -built prints and reproducibles is a condition of final acceptance. Provide record drawings on one set each (reproducible Dayrex mylar film positives) and AutoCad 2000 files on disk (CD Rom). C. As -Built drawings should indicate the following information as a minimum: 1. Indicate all addendum changes to documents. 2. Remove Engineer's seal, name, address and logo from drawings. 3. Mark documents AS -BUILT DRAWINGS. 4. Clearly indicate: DOCUMENT PRODUCED BY 5. Indicate all changes to construction during construction. Indicate actual routing of all piping, ductwork, etc. that were deviated from construction drawings. 6. Indicate exact location of all underground plumbing and flow line elevation. 7. Indicate exact location of all underground mechanical piping and elevation. 8. Indicate exact location of all underground electrical raceways and elevations. 9. Correct schedules to reflect (actual) equipment furnished and manufacturer. 10. During the execution of work, maintain a complete set of drawings and specifications upon which all locations of equipment, ductwork, piping, devices, and all deviations and changes from the construction documents in the work shall be recorded. 11. Location and size of all ductwork and mechanical piping above ceiling including exact location of isolation of domestic and mechanical valves. 12. Exact location of all electrical equipment in and outside of the building. 13. Fire Protection System documents revised to indicate exact location of all sprinkler heads and zone valves. 14. Exact location of all roof mounted equipment, wall, roof and floor penetrations. 15. Cloud all changes. 1.07 SPACE REQUIREMENTS A. Consider space limitations imposed by contiguous work in selection and location of equipment and material. Do not provide equipment or material that is not suitable in this respect. 1.08 RELATION WITH OTHER TRADES A. Carefully study all matters and conditions concerning the project. Submit notification of conflict in ample time to prevent unwarranted changes in any work. Review other Divisions of these specifications to determine their requirements. B. Because of the complicated relationship of this work to the total project, conscientiously study the relation and cooperate as necessary to accomplish the full intent of the documents. PLUMBING GENERAL PROVISIONS VLK Architects, 2007 22 0500 - 2 2740.00 CREEKVIEW ELEMENTARY SCHOOL COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX C. Provide sleeves and inserts in forms as required for the work. Stub up and protect open ends of pipe before any concrete is placed. Furnish sizes of required equipment pads. Furnish and locate bolts and fittings required to be cast in them. D. Locate and size openings required for installation of work specified in this Division in sufficient time to prevent delay in the work. E. Refer to other Divisions of the specifications for the scope of required connections to equipment furnished under that Division. Determine from the Contractor for the various trades, the Owner, and by direction from the Architect/Engineer, the exact location of all items. 1.09 CONCEALED AND EXPOSED WORK A. When the word "concealed" is used in connection with insulating, painting, piping, ducts and the like, the work is understood to mean hidden from sight as in chases, furred spaces or above ceilings. "Exposed" is understood to mean open to view. 1.10 GUARANTEE A. Guarantee work for 1 year from the date of substantial completion of the project. During that period make good any faults or imperfections that may arise due to defects or omissions in material, equipment or workmanship. At the Owner's option, replacement of failed parts or equipment shall be provided. 1.11 MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT A. Furnish new and unused materials and equipment meeting the requirements of the paragraph specifying acceptable manufacturers. Where two or more units of the same type or class of equipment are required, provide units of a single manufacturer. 1.12 NOISE AND VIBRATION A. Select equipment to operate with minimum noise and vibration. If objectionable noise or vibration is produced or transmitted to or through the building structure by equipment, piping, ducts or other parts of work, rectify such conditions at no additional cost. If the item of equipment is judged to produce objectionable noise or vibration, demonstrate at no additional cost that equipment performs within designated limits on a vibration chart. 1.13 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers names and catalog number specified under sections of Division 22 are used to establish standards of design, performance, quality and serviceability and not to limit competition. Equipment of similar design, equal to that specified, manufactured by a named manufacturer will be acceptable on approval. A request for prior approval of equipment not listed must be submitted ten (10) days before bid due date. Submit complete design and performance data to the Engineer. 1.14 OPERATING TESTS A. After all mechanical systems have been completed and put into operation, subject each system to an operating test under design conditions to ensure proper sequencing and operation throughout the range of operation. Tests shall be made in the presence of the Architect/Engineer. Make adjustments as required to ensure proper functioning of all systems. Special tests on individual systems are specified under individual sections. Submit 3 copies of all certifications and test reports adequately in advance of completion of the work to PLUMBING GENERAL PROVISIONS VLK Architects, 2007 22 0500 - 3 2740.00 CREEKVIEW ELEMENTARY SCHOOL COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX allow for remedial action as required to correct deficiencies discovered in equipment and systems. 1.15 WARRANTIES A. Submit 3 copies of all warranties and guarantees for systems, equipment, devices and materials. These shall be included in the Operating and Maintenance Manuals. 1.16 BUILDING CONSTRUCTION A. It shall be the responsibility of each sub -contractor to consult the Architectural and Engineering drawings, details, and specifications and thoroughly familiarize himself with the project and all job related requirements. Each sub -contractor shall cooperate with the General Contractor to verify that all piping and other items are placed in the walls, furred spaces, chases, etc., so there will be no delays in the job. PART 2 - PRODUCTS — NOT USED PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 OPENINGS A. Framed, cast or masonry openings for ductwork, equipment or piping are specified under other divisions. Drawings and layout work for exact size and location of all openings are included under this division. 3.02 HOUSEKEEPING PADS A. Provide equipment housekeeping pads under all floor mounted and ground mounted plumbing equipment, and as shown on the drawings. B. Concrete work as specified. C. Concrete pads: 1. 4" thick unless otherwise indicated on the drawings. 2. Chamfer strips at edges and corner of forms. 3. Smooth steel trowel finish. 3.03 VANDAL RESISTANT DEVICES A. Provide a handle for each loose keyed operated valve and hose bibb on the project. B. Where vandal resistant screws or bolts are employed on the project, deliver to the Owner 2 suitable tools for use with each type of fastener used. C. Proof of delivery of these items to the Owner shall be included in the Operating and Maintenance Manuals. 3.04 INSTRUCTION OF OWNER'S PERSONNEL A. Prior to final inspection, conduct an on -site training program to instruct the Owner's operating personnel in the operation and maintenance of the mechanical systems. 1. Provide the training during the Owner's regular working day. 2. The Instructors shall each be experienced in their phase of operation and maintenance of building mechanical systems and with the project. B. Time to be allocated for instructions. PLUMBING GENERAL PROVISIONS VLK Architects, 2007 22 0500 - 4 2740.00 CREEKVIEW ELEMENTARY SCHOOL COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX 1. Minimum of 8 hours dedicated instructor time. 2. 4 hours on each of 2 days. C. Before proceeding with the on -site training program, submit the program syllabus; proposed time and dates; and other pertinent information for review and approval. 1. One copy to the Owner. 2. One copy to the Architect/Engineer. D. The Owner will provide a list of personnel to receive instructions, and will coordinate their attendance at the agreed upon times. E. Use the operation and maintenance manuals as the basis of instruction. Review contents of manual with personnel in detail to explain all aspects of operation and maintenance. F. Demonstrate start-up, operation, control, adjustment, trouble -shooting, servicing, maintenance, and shut down of each item of equipment. G. Demonstrate equipment functions (both individually and as part of the total integrated system). H. Prepare and insert additional data in the operating and maintenance manuals when the need for additional data becomes apparent during instructions. Submit a report within one week after completion of the training program that instructions have been satisfactorily completed. Give time and date of each demonstration and hours devoted to the demonstration, with a list of people present. J. At the conclusion of the on -site training program, have the person designated by the Owner sign a certificate to certify that he/she has a proper understanding of the system, that the demonstrations and instructions have been satisfactorily completed, and the scope and content of the operating and maintenance manuals used for the training program are satisfactory. K. Provide a copy of the report and the certificate in an appropriately tabbed section of each Operating and Maintenance Manual. 3.05 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION A. Provide a laminated engraved plastic nameplate on each piece of equipment and starter. 1. Designation approved by Architect/Engineer. 2. Equipment includes, but is not limited to, water heaters, pumps, boilers and utility controllers. 3. Submit schedule of equipment to be included and designations. B. Provide nameplates with 1/2" high letters and fastened with epoxy or screws. 3.66 OBSTRUCTIONS A. The drawings indicate certain information pertaining to surface and subsurface obstructions which has been taken from available drawings. Such information is not guaranteed, however, as to accuracy of location or complete information. 01. Before any cutting or trenching operations are begun, verify with Owner's representative, utility companies, municipalities, and other interested parties that all available information has been provided. 02. Should obstruction be encountered, whether shown or not, after routing of new work, reroute existing lines, remove obstruction where permitted, or otherwise perform whatever work is necessary to satisfy the purpose of the new work and leave existing PLUMBING GENERAL PROVISIONS VLK Architects, 2007 22 0500 - 5 2740.00 CREEKVIEW ELEMENTARY SCHOOL COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX services and structures in a satisfactory and serviceable condition. B. Assume total responsibility for and repair any damage to existing utilities or construction, whether or not such existing facilities are shown. 3.07 PROTECTION A. Protect work, equipment, fixtures, and materials. At work completion, work must be clean and in original manufacturer's condition. END OF SECTION PLUMBING GENERAL PROVISIONS VLK Architects, 2007 22 0500 - 6 2740.00 CREEKVIEW ELEMENTARY SCHOOL COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX SECTION 22 0510 - PLUMBING CONTRACT QUALITY CONTROL PART 1-GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Contract quality control including workmanship, manufacturer's instructions, mock-ups and demonstrations. 1.02 QUALITY CONTROL PROGRAM A. Maintain quality control over supervision, subcontractors, suppliers, manufacturers, products, services, site conditions and workmanship to produce work in accordance with contract documents. 1.03 WORKMANSHIP A. Comply with industry standards except when more restrictive tolerances or specified requirements indicate more rigid standards or more precise workmanship. B. Perform work by persons qualified to produce workmanship of specified quality. C. Secure products in place with positive anchorage devices designed and sized to withstand stresses, vibration, and ' racking. Under no conditions shall material or equipment be suspended from structural bridging. D. Provide finishes to match approved samples. All exposed finishes shall be approved by the Architect. Submit color samples as required. 1.04 MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS A. Comply with instructions in full detail, including each step in sequence. B. Should instruction conflict with Contract Documents, request clarification from Architect / Engineer before proceeding. 1.05 MANUFACTURER'S CERTIFICATES A. When required in individual Specification Sections, submit manufacturer's certificate in duplicate, certifying that products meet or exceed specified requirements. 1.06 MANUFACTURER'S FIELD SERVICES A. When required in individual Specification Sections, manufacturer shall provide qualified personnel to observe: 1. Field conditions. 2. Condition of installation. 3. Quality of workmanship. 4. Start-up of equipment. 5. Testing, adjusting, and balancing of equipment. B. Representative shall make written report of observations and recommendations to Architect / Engineer. PLUMBING CONTRACT QUALITY CONTROL VLK Architects, 2007 22 0510 - 1 2740.00 CREEKVIEW ELEMENTARY SCHOOL COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX 1.07 MOCK-UPS A. Assemble and erect the specified equipment and products complete, with specified anchorage and support devices, seals and finishes. B. Do not proceed with any work involving a mock-up, until the related mock-up has been approved in writing. C. Acceptable mock-ups in place shall be retained in the completed work. D. Perform tests and submit results as specified. 1.08 SCHEDULING OF MOCK-UPS A. Schedule demonstration and observation of mock-ups, in phases, with Architect / Engineer. 1. Rough -in. 2. Finish with all appurtenances in place. 3. Insulation installed. 4. Demonstrations. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.01 REFERENCE APPLICABLE SPECIFICATION SECTIONS. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 PROTECTION OF EQUIPMENT A. Do not deliver equipment to the project site until progress of construction has reached the stage where equipment is actually needed or until building is closed in enough to protect the equipment from weather. Equipment allowed to stand in the weather will be rejected, and the Contractor is obligated to furnish new equipment of a like kind at no additional cost to the Owner. B. Adequately protect equipment from damage after delivery to the project. Cover with heavy tarpaulins, drop cloths or other protective coverings as required to protect from plaster, paint, mortar and/or dirt. Do not cover with plastic materials and trap condensate and cause corrosion. END OF SECTION PLUMBING CONTRACT QUALITY CONTROL VLK Architects, 2007 22 0510 - 2 2740.00 CREEKVIEW ELEMENTARY SCHOOL COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX SECTION 22 0512 - PLUMBING SHOP DRAWINGS, COORDINATION DRAWINGS & PRODUCT DATA PART 1-GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Prepare submittals as required by Division 1. B. The term submittal, as used herein, refers to all: 1. Shop Drawings 2. Coordination Drawings 3. Product data C. Submittals shall be prepared and produced for: 1. Distribution as specified 2. Inclusion in the Operating and Maintenance Manual, as specified, in the related section 1.02 SHOP DRAWINGS A. Present drawings in a clear and thorough manner. Identify details by reference to sheet and detail, schedule, or room numbers shown on Contract Drawings. B. Show all dimensions of each item of equipment on a single composite Shop Drawing. Do not submit a series of drawings of components. C. Identify field dimensions; show relationship to adjacent features, critical features, work, or products. D. Submit shop drawings in plan, elevation and sections, showing equipment in mechanical equipment areas. 1.03 COORDINATION DRAWINGS A. Present in a clear and thorough manner. Title each drawing with project name. Identify each element of drawings by reference to sheet number and detail, or room number of contract documents. Minimum drawing scale: 1/a" = F-0". B. Prepare coordination drawings to coordinate installations for efficient use of available space, for proper sequence of installation, and to resolve conflicts. Coordinate with work specified in other sections and other divisions of the specifications. C. For each mechanical room and for each outside equipment pad where equipment is located, submit plan and elevation drawings. Show: 1. Actual mechanical equipment and components to be furnished 2. Service clearance 3. Relationship to other equipment and components 4. Roof drains and leader piping 5. Fire protection piping and equipment D. Identify field dimensions. Show relation to adjacent or critical features of work or products. E. Related requirements: 1. Ductwork shop drawings 2. Coordination drawing specified in Division 26 F. Submit shop drawings in plan, elevation and sections, showing equipment in mechanical equipment areas. PLUMBING SHOP DRAWINGS, COORDINATION DRAWINGS & PRODUCT DATA VLK Architects, 2007 22 0512 - 1 2740.00 CREEKVIEW ELEMENTARY SCHOOL COLLEGE STATION ISO COLLEGE STATION, TX G. Gas piping sketch indicating proposed location of piping prior to proceeding with the installation. 1.04 PRODUCT DATA AND INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION A. Submit only pages which are pertinent to the project. All options which are indicated on the product data shall become part of the contract and shall be required whether specified are not. B. Mark each copy of standard printed data to identify pertinent products, referenced to specification section and article number. C. Show reference standards, performance characteristics and capacities; wiring and piping diagrams and controls; component parts; finishes; dimensions and required clearances. D. Modify manufacturer's standard schematic drawings and diagrams to supplement standard information and to provide information specifically applicable to the work. Delete information not applicable. E. Mark up a copy of the specifications for the product. Indicate in the margin of each paragraph the following: "Comply, "Do Not Comply", or "Not Applicable". Explain all "Do Not Comply" statements. F. Provide a separate transmittal for each submittal item. Transmittals shall indicate product by specification section name and number. Separate all submittals into appropriate specification section number. Do not combine specification sections. 1.05 MANUFACTURERS INSTRUCTIONS A. Submit Manufacturer's instructions for storage, preparation, assembly, installation, start-up, adjusting, calibrating, balancing and finishing. 1.06 CONTRACTOR RESPONSIBILITIES A. Review submittals prior to transmittal. B. Determine and verify: 1. Field measurements 2. Field construction criteria 3. Manufacturer's catalog numbers 4. Conformance with requirements of Contract Documents C. Coordinate submittals with requirements of the work and of the Contract Documents. D. Notify the Architect/engineer in writing at time of submission of any deviations in the submittals from requirements of the Contract Documents. E. Do not fabricate products, or begin work for which submittals are specified, until such submittals have been produced and bear contractor's stamp. Do not fabricate products or begin work scheduled to have submittals reviewed until return of reviewed submittals with Architect/Engineer's acceptance. F. Contractor's responsibility for errors and omissions in submittals is not relieved whether Architect/engineer reviews submittals or not. G. Contractor's responsibility for deviations in submittals from requirements of Contract Documents is not relieved whether Architect/Engineer reviews submittals or not, unless Architect/engineer gives written acceptance of the specific deviations on reviewed documents. PLUMBING SHOP DRAWINGS, COORDINATION DRAWINGS & PRODUCT DATA VLK Architects, 2007 22 0512 - 2 2740.00 CREEKVIEW ELEMENTARY SCHOOL COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX H. Submittals shall show sufficient data to indicate complete compliance with Contract Documents: 1. Proper sizes and capacities 2. That the item will fit in the available space in a manner that will allow proper service 3. Construction methods, materials and finishes I. Schedule submissions at least 15 days before date reviewed submittals will be needed. 1.07 SUBMISSION REQUIREMENTS A. Make submittals promptly in accordance with approved schedule, and in such sequence as to cause no delay in the Project or in the work of any other Contractor. B. Number of submittals required: 1. Shop Drawings and Coordination Drawings: Submit one reproducible transparency and three opaque reproductions. 2. Product Data: Submit the number of copies which the contractor requires, plus those which will be retained by the Architect/Engineer. C. Accompany submittals with transmittal letter, in duplicate, containing: 1. Date 2. Project title and number 3. Contractor's name and address 4. The number of each Shop Drawing, Project Datum and Sample submitted 5. Other pertinent data D. Submittals shall include: 1. The date of submission 2. The project title and number 3. Contract Identification 4. The names of: a. Contractor b. Subcontractor C. Supplier d. Manufacturer 5. Identification of the product 6. Field dimensions, clearly identified as such 7. Relation to adjacent or critical features of the work or materials 8. Applicable standards, such as ASTM or federal specifications numbers 9. Identification of deviations from contract documents 10. Suitable blank space for General Contractor and Architect/Engineer stamps 11. Contractor's signed and dated Stamp of Approval E. Coordinate submittals into logical groupings to facilitate interrelation of the several items: 1. Finishes which involve Architect/Engineer selection of colors, textures or patterns 2. Associated items which require correlation for efficient function or for installation 1.08 SUBMITTAL SPECIFICATION INFORMATION A. Every submittal document shall bear the following information as used in the project manual: 1. The related specification section number 2. The exact specification section title B. Submittals delivered to the Architect/Engineer without the specified information will not be processed. The Contractor shall bear the risk of all delays, as if no submittal had been delivered. PLUMBING SHOP DRAWINGS, COORDINATION DRAWINGS & PRODUCT DATA VLK Architects, 2007 22 0512 - 3 2740.00 CREEKVIEW ELEMENTARY SCHOOL COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX 1.09 RESUBMISSION REQUIREMENTS A. Make re -submittals under procedures specified for initial submittals. 1. Indicate that the document or sample is a re -submittal 2. Identify changes made since previous submittals B. Indicate any changes which have been made, other than those requested by the Architect/Engineer. 1.10 CONTRACTOR'S STAMP OF APPROVAL A. Contractor shall stamp and sign each document certifying to the review of products, field measurements and field construction criteria, and coordination of the information within the submittal with requirements of the work and of Contract Documents. B. Contractor's stamp of approval on any submittal shall constitute a representation to Owner and Architect/Engineer that Contractor has either determined and verified all quantities, dimensions, field construction criteria, materials, catalog numbers, and similar data or assumes full responsibility for doing so, and that Contractor has reviewed or coordinated each submittal with the requirements of the work and the Contract Documents. C. Do not deliver any submittals to the Architect/Engineer that do not bear the Contractor's stamp of approval and signature. D. Submittals delivered to the Architect/Engineer without Contractor's stamp of approval and signature will not be processed. The Contractor shall bear the risk of all delays, as if no submittal had been delivered. 1.11 ARCHITECT/ENGINEER REVIEW OF IDENTIFIED SUBMITTALS A. The Architect/Engineer will: 1. Review identified submittals with reasonable promptness and in accordance with schedule 2. Affix stamp and initials or signature, and indicate requirements for re -submittal or approval of submittal 3. Return submittals to Contractor for distribution or for resubmission B. Review and approval of submittals will not extend to design data reflected in submittals which is peculiarly within the special expertise of the Contractor or any party dealing directly with the Contractor. C. Architect/Engineer's review and approval is only for conformance with the design concept of the project and for compliance with the information given in the contract. 1. The review shall not extend to means, methods, sequences, techniques or procedures of construction or to safety precautions or programs incident thereto. 2. The review shall not extend to review of quantities, dimensions, weights or gauges, fabrication processes or coordination with the work of other trades. D. The review and approval of a separate item as such will not indicate approval of the assembly in which the item functions. 1.12 SUBSTITUTIONS A. Do not make requests for substitution employing the procedures of this Section. B. The procedure for making a formal request for substitution is specified in Div. 1. PLUMBING SHOP DRAWINGS, COORDINATION DRAWINGS & PRODUCT DATA VLK Architects, 2007 22 0512 - 4 2740.00 PART 2 - PRODUCTS - NOT USED. PART 3 - EXECUTION - NOT USED END OF SECTION CREEKVIEW ELEMENTARY SCHOOL COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX PLUMBING SHOP DRAWINGS, COORDINATION DRAWINGS & PRODUCT DATA VLK Architects, 2007 22 0512 - 5 2740.00 CREEKVIEW ELEMENTARY SCHOOL COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX SECTION 22 0513 - ELECTRICAL PROVISIONS OF PLUMBING WORK PART 1-GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Electrical provisions to be provided as plumbing work are indicated in other Division 22 sections, on drawings, and as specified. B. Types of work, normally recognized as electrical but provided as plumbing, specified or partially specified in this Section, include but are not necessarily limited to the following: 1. Motors for plumbing equipment. 2. Starters for motors of plumbing equipment, but only where specifically indicated to be furnished integrally with equipment. 3. Wiring from motors to disconnect switches or junction boxes for motors of plumbing equipment, but only where specifically indicated to be furnished integrally with equipment. 4. Wiring of field -mounted float control switches, flow control switches, and similar plumbing -electrical devices provided for plumbing systems, to equipment control panels. 5. Pipe heat tracing. C. Refer to Division 22 sections for specific individual plumbing equipment electrical requirements. F. Refer to Division 26 sections for motor starters and controls not furnished integrally with plumbing equipment. G. Refer to Division 26 sections for junction boxes and disconnect switches required for motors and other electrical units of plumbing equipment. 1.02 RELATED WORK A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Specification Sections, apply to work of this Section. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Wherever possible, match elements of electrical provisions of plumbing work with similar elements of electrical work specified in Division 26 sections for electrical work not otherwise specified. B. For electrical equipment and products, comply with applicable NEMA standards, and refer to NEMA standards for definitions of terminology. Comply with National Electrical Code (NFPA 70) for workmanship and installation requirements. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Include in listing of motors, voltage, notation of whether motor starter is furnished or installed integrally with motor or equipment containing motors. .ELECTRICAL PROVISIONS OF PLUMBING WORK VLK Architects, 2007 22 0513 - 1 2740.00 CREEKVIEW ELEMENTARY SCHOOL COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MOTORS A. Provide motors for plumbing equipment manufactured by one of the following: 1. Baldor Electric Company. 2. Century Electric Div., Inc. 3. General Electric Co. 4. Louis Allis Div.; Litton Industrial Products, Inc. 5. Lincoln Electric 6. Marathon Electric Mfg. Corp. 7. Reliance Electric Co. 8. Westinghouse Electric Corp. B. Motor Characteristics. Except where more stringent requirements are indicated, and except where required items of plumbing equipment cannot be obtained with fully complying motors, comply with the following requirements for motors of plumbing work: C. Temperature Rating. Rated for 4011 C environment with maximum 50oC temperature rise for continuous duty at full load (Class A Insulation). D. Provide each motor capable of making starts as frequently as indicated by automatic control system, and not less than 5 starts per hour for manually controlled motors. E. Phases and Current Characteristics. Provide squirrel -cage induction polyphase motors for 3/4hp and larger, and provide capacitor -start single-phase motors for 1/2hp and smaller, except 1/6hp and smaller may, at equipment manufacturer's option, be split - phase type. Coordinate current characteristics with power specified in Division 26 sections, and with individual equipment requirements specified in other Division 22 requirements. For 2-speed motors provide 2 separate windings on polyphase motors. Do not purchase motors until power characteristics available at locations of motors have been confirmed, and until rotation directions have been confirmed. F. Service Factor. 1.15 for polyphase motors and 1.35 for single-phase motors. G. Motor Construction. Provide general purpose, continuous duty motors, Design "B" except "C" where required for high starting torque. 1. Frames. NEMA #56. 2. Bearings are to be ball or roller bearings with inner and outer shaft seals, regreasable except permanently sealed where motor is inaccessible for regular maintenance. Where belt drives and other drives produce lateral or axial thrust in motor, provide bearings designed to resist thrust loading. Refer to individual section of Division 22 for fractional -hp light -duty motors where sleeve -type bearings are permitted. 3. Except as indicated, provide open drip -proof motors for indoor use where satisfactorily housed or remotely located during operation, and provide guarded drip -proof motors where exposed to contact by employees or building occupants. Provide weather -protected Type I for outdoor use, Type II where not housed. Refer to individual sections of Division 22 for other enclosure requirements. 4. Provide built-in thermal overload protection and, where indicated, provide internal sensing device suitable for signaling and stopping motor at starter. 5. Noise Rating: Provide "Quiet" rating on motors. H. All motors shall be premium efficiency. ELECTRICAL PROVISIONS OF PLUMBING WORK VLK Architects, 2007 22 0513 - 2 2740.00 CREEKVIEW ELEMENTARY SCHOOL COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX 2.02 EQUIPMENT FABRICATION A. Fabricate plumbing equipment for secure mounting of motors and other electrical items included in work. Provide either permanent alignment of motors with equipment, or adjustable mountings as applicable for belt drives, gear drives, special couplings and similar indirect coupling of equipment. Provide safe, secure, durable, and removable guards for motor drives. Arrange for lubrication and similar running -maintenance without removal of guards. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install motors on motor mounting systems in accordance with motor manufacturer's instructions, anchored to resist torque, drive thrusts, and other external forces inherent in plumbing work. Secure sheaves and other drive units to motor shafts with keys and Allen set screws on flat surface of shaft. Unless otherwise indicated, set motor shafts parallel with machine shafts. B. Verify voltage with Electrical Plans. END OF SECTION ELECTRICAL PROVISIONS OF PLUMBING WORK VLK Architects, 2007 22 0513 - 3 2740.00 CREEKVIEW ELEMENTARY SCHOOL COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX SECTION 22 05 15 - PLUMBING EARTHWORK PART 1 - GENERAL A. Excavate and backfill for pipe trenches for underground piping, and excavate for structures installed as part of plumbing work. PART 2 - PRODUCTS - NOT USED PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXCAVATION A. Excavate trenches for underground piping to the required depth to ensure 2 foot minimum coverage over piping. B. Cut the bottom of the trench or excavation to uniform grade. C. Should rock be encountered, excavate 6 inches below grade, fill with bedding material and tamp well. D. Lay out alignment of pipe trenches to avoid obstructions. Assure that proposed route of pipe will not interfere with building foundation before any cutting is begun. Should interference be found, contact the Architect/Engineer before proceeding. 3.02 BACKFILL A. Backfill shall not be placed until the work has been inspected, tested and approved. Complete backfill to the surface of natural ground or to the lines and grades shown on drawings. Except where special materials are requested, use suitable friable soils from other excavation as backfill material. Do not use peat, silt, muck, debris or other organic materials. Deposit backfill in uniform layers and compact each layer as specified in Division 2. B. Compacting Backfill. Place material in uniform layers of prescribed maximum thickness and wet or dry the material to optimum moisture content. Compact with power -driven tampers to the prescribed density. Place regular backfill in 8 inch maximum layers, loose measure. Compact to not less than 95% of maximum soil density as determined by ASTM D-698 Standard Proctor. C. Restoration. Compact backfill, where trenching or excavation is required in improved areas such as pavements, walks, and similar areas, to a condition equal to the adjacent undisturbed earth, and restore surface of the area to the condition existing prior to trenching or excavating operation. D. Provide 6 inch stabilized sand bed with 4 inch stabilized sand cover around each pipe. 3.03 DISPOSAL OF EXCESS MATERIAL A. Remove excess excavation material or material unsuitable for backfill. Excess material can be spread on grade, or shall be removed from site as directed by the Owner/Architect. END OF SECTION PLUMBING EARTHWORK VLK Architects, 2007 22 05 15 - 1 2740.00 CREEKVIEW ELEMENTARY SCHOOL COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX SECTION 22 0517 - PLUMBING ACCESS DOORS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Furnish and install access doors in wall or ceiling locations as required or shown for access to valves, controls, regulating devices, water arresters and other equipment requiring maintenance, adjustment or operation. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 NON -FIRE RATED ACCESS DOORS A. 16-Gauge frames B. 14-gauge steel panels C. Continuous fully concealed hinges D. Flush screwdriver cam lock & cylinder lock for Owner selection E. Automatic closing and latching mechanism F. Prime coat finish G. Brushed satin stainless steel finish for restroom, kitchen or cafeteria installation H. Material suitable for wall and/or ceiling mounting 2.02 FIRE RATED ACCESS DOORS A. UL listed, 1-1/2 hour Label "B", access doors B. 16-Gauge stainless steel C. 20-Gauge insulated sandwich -type door panel. D. Two inch thick with fire rated insulation E. Continuous fully concealed hinge F. Automatic closing and latching mechanism G. Knurled knob and recessed key operation for Owner selection H. Interior latch release slide for opening from inside I. Prime coat finish J. Material suitable for wall and/or ceiling mounting PLUMBING ACCESS DOORS VLK Architects, 2007 22 0517 - 1 2740.00 CREEKVIEW ELEMENTARY SCHOOL COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX 2.03 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Milcor B. MIFAB C. Acudor D. Elmdor PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Access doors specified in Division 22 will be installed by other crafts. Not all required access doors are shown. Coordinate with the Contractor to locate access doors for ease of operation and maintenance of concealed equipment. B. Installation shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's printed instructions. C. Minimum size required: 1. 24" x 24" for plumbing isolation valves and electrical related items END OF SECTION PLUMBING ACCESS DOORS VLK Architects, 2007 22 0517 - 2 2740.00 CREEKVIEW ELEMENTARY SCHOOL COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX SECTION 22 0519 - PRESSURE AND TEMPERATURE INSTRUMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. This section specifies gauges, thermometers, wells and/or pressure and temperature test stations to be installed as specified. 1.02 RELATED WORK A. Division 22, Plumbing 1. 22 05 00 - Plumbing General Provisions 2. 22 20 00 — Plumbing Pipe and Pipe Fittings, General 3. 22 05 23 - Valves, Strainers and Vents PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS - GAUGES AND THERMOMETERS A. Trerice B. Taylor C. Marsh D. Weksler E. Marshalltown F. Weiss G. Miljoco 2.02 PRESSURE GAUGES A. Case and Ring: 4" type 304 stainless steel; liquid filled case with stainless steel bayonet ring. B. Dial: White aluminum with black markings C. Window: Clear acrylic D. Tube: Phosphor bronze and forged brass socket. E. Gauge accuracy: +/- 1 % over operating range. F. For pulsating service, provide impulse dampers. G. Without flange for pipe mounting. H. With flange for wall mounting. I. Weiss Model: LF44S-1 B or equal. PRESSURE AND TEMPERATURE INSTRUMENTS VLK Architects, 2007 22 0519 -1 2740.00 CREEKVIEW ELEMENTARY SCHOOL COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX 2.03 THERMOMETER WELLS A. Brass or type 300 stainless steel. Machined bar stock, 1-piece construction. B. Where installed in insulated piping or vessels, provide with extension neck to match insulation thickness. C. Provide metal -to -metal contact with bulb chamber for maximum sensitivity. D. Wells shall be sized to extend a minimum of 50% into pipe. 2.04 THERMOMETERS IN PIPING SYSTEMS OR VESSELS A. Die cast aluminum case with baked epoxy finish. B. Adjustable angle 9" scale length. C. Clear acrylic window. D. Brass stem, length to match well. E. Red reading organic spirit filled -in magnifying glass column. F. White background with black figures and markings. G. Brass stems and union connections. H Accuracy: +/- 1 % of scale range. I. Range: 01. Hot water lines: 30OF to 240°F. 2.05 PRESSURE AND TEMPERATURE TEST STATIONS A. 'Test Station" fitting to receive either a temperature or pressure probe. Fitting shall be solid brass with two valve cores of Nordel. 1. Fitted with a color coded cap strap with gasket. 2. Acceptable Manufacturer: Peterson Equipment Company. 3. Provide with extension neck to match insulation thickness. B. Provide to the Owner a fitted case with: 1. Two 0-100 psi pressure gauges as specified and adapters with 1/8" OD probe. 2. Four 5" stem pocket testing thermometers. a. Two with range 0°F to 220OF for hot water. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with drawing details and manufacturer's recommendations. B. Provide a ball valve at each gauge. C. Locate gauges and thermometers to be easily readable from the floor at a T-6" eye level. Use adjustable angle or rigid stem as required. Install gauges in upright position. PRESSURE AND TEMPERATURE INSTRUMENTS VLK Architects, 2007 22 0519 -2 2740.00 CREEKVIEW ELEMENTARY SCHOOL COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX D. Install gauges in the following locations: across pumps, storage tanks, heat exchangers. E. Install thermometer in the following locations: At storage tanks, across heat exchangers, across boiler, leaving side of water heater, leaving water side of tempered water valves, and hot water supply and return lines. 01. Hot water lines: 30OF to 240°F. 02. Tempered water valves 0°F to 120°F. END OF SECTION PRESSURE AND TEMPERATURE INSTRUMENTS VLK Architects, 2007 22 0519 -3 2740.00 CREEKVIEW ELEMENTARY SCHOOL COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX SECTION 22 0523 - VALVES, STRAINERS AND VENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Plumbing Valves B. Pipe strainer and suction diffusers. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 VALVES A. Pressure Ratings: 1. Unless otherwise indicated, use valves suitable for 125 minimum psig working steam pressure (WSP) and 450OF. 2. The pressure temperature rating of valves shall be not less than the design criteria applicable to components of the system. B. Gate Valves 1 Gate valves shall be designed for repacking under pressure when fully opened. Equipped with packing suitable for the intended service. 2. When the valve is fully opened, the back seat shall protect the packing and the stem threads from the fluid. 3. All gate valves shall have a gland follower. 4. Provide solid wedge type gate valves designed and manufactured so that seating surfaces are prevented from contacting until near the point of closure. 5. Provide a malleable hand -wheel for all gate valves. 6. Provide bronze body, bronze trim, non -rising stem, hand -wheel, inside screw, single wedge or disc, threaded ends up to 2". 7. Provide iron body, bronze trim, rising stem, hand -wheel, OS&Y, double wedge, flanged ends over 2". C. Balancing Valves 1. Provide balancing valves with: a. Corrosion resistant plug with resilient seal when required. b. O-ring stem seal. C. Permanently lubricated, corrosion resistant bearings. 2. Connections a. Through 2" pipe size use threaded connections. b. For valves 2-1/2" pipe size and larger shall be provided with 150 psig flange connections. 3. Provide each valve with: a. Memory stop. b. Plastic drip cap. C. 1 /8" gauge tap. D. Ball Valves 1. Provide ball valves with: a. Blowout proof stem. b. Full size port, 316 stainless steel ball and stem. VALVES, STRAINERS AND VENTS VLK Architects, 2007 22 0523 - 1 2740.00 CREEKVIEW ELEMENTARY SCHOOL COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX C. Cast bronze body. d. Threaded ends. 2. Seat, seals, thrust washers and packing shall be suitable for the intended service. 3. Service rating: a. 150 psi saturated steam. b. 600 psi WOG. 4. Where piping is insulated, ball valves shall be equipped with 2" extended handles of non -thermal conductive material. Provide a protective sleeve that allows operation of the valve without breaking the vapor seal or disturbing the insulation. 5. Provide with memory stop for balancing valves. 6. Where Viega ProPress fittings are used, Viega ProPress ball valves may be used. E. Globe and Angle Valves 1. Bronze body 2" and smaller, bronze plug disc and renewable seat ring, union bonnet, malleable iron hand wheel, standard packing with bronze gland follower. 2. Iron body 2-1/2" and larger, bronze mounted disc and bronze seat ring, outside screw and yoke, standard packing with gland follower. 3. Globe valves shall be designed for repacking under pressure when fully opened. a. Equipped with packing suitable for the intended service. 4. When the valve is fully opened, the back seat shall protect the packing and the stem threads from the fluid. F. Valve Connections 1. Provide valves suitable to connect to adjoining piping as specified for pipe joints. Use pipe size valves. Sweated joints are not allowed. 2. Thread pipe sizes 2" and smaller. 3. Flange pipe sizes 2-1/2" and larger. 4. Use screw to solder adapters for copper tubing. 5. Use grooved body valves with mechanical grooved jointed piping. H. Acceptable Manufacturers 1. Stockham 2. Dezurik 3. Hammond 4. Crane 5. Nibco 6. Keystone 7. Jenkins Check Valves 1. Bronze body, 2" and smaller, bronze disc (Teflon disc for steam service), regrinding swing check, screw -in cap, threaded connection. 2. Iron body, 2-1/2" and larger, bronze trim, non -slam: stainless steel pins and springs, and bronze plate or bronze mounted, regrind -renew check, bronze seat ring and disc. Provide either wafer or threaded lug. 3. Acceptable Manufacturers a. Mission Duochek b. Nibco C. Keystone J. Provide valves of same manufacturer throughout where possible. VALVES, STRAINERS AND VENTS VLK Architects, 2007 22 0523 - 2 2740.00 CREEKVIEW ELEMENTARY SCHOOL COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX K. Provide valves with manufacturer's name and manufacturing location, duty and pressure rating clearly marked on outside of body. L. Where valves are installed in insulated piping, provide with extended neck so valve operator and stop plate clears the full thickness insulation. M. Provide valve, seat and trim materials suitable for the intended service. N. Provide memory stops for all valves used for throttling service. Valves for throttling service shall be butterfly, plug, caged or ball type. O. Float Valve 1. On — Off non -modulating action 2. Fully adjustable high and low level settings 3. Float, float linkage and float rod 4. Complete stainless steel material 5. Level differential adjustment minimum to 18" maximum 6. Stilling well 7. Acceptable Manufacturer: CLA-VAL 2.02 PIPE SYSTEMS STRAINERS A. Body: 1. "Y" pattern or basket as shown on the drawings. 2. Line size. 3. Threaded strainer blow down port. 4. ASTM A #126 Class B Cast Iron Body. B. Construction: 1. 2" size and smaller with screw connections rated 400 psi WOG. .2. Over 2" size with flanged connections, rated 125 psi WOG. C. Fabricate screens of Monel or type 304 stainless steel: 1. With 20 mesh woven wire in piping systems through 2". 2. With 0.045 perforations in piping systems 2-1/2" and 3". 3. With 0.125 perforations in piping systems 4" and larger. D. Start-up: 1. Provide an additional fine mesh disposable screen for use during start-up operations. 2. Remove after 30 days. 3. Attach to piping for owners review. E. Acceptable Manufacturers 1. Crane 2. Keckley 3. Zurn 4. Mueller 5. McAlear 6. Muesco VALVES, STRAINERS AND VENTS VLK Architects, 2007 22 0523 - 3 2740.00 CREEKVIEW ELEMENTARY SCHOOL COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX 2.03 VALVE SCHEDULE A. Domestic Service 1. Gas shut-off service: UL approved for natural gas service. a. Nibco Ball Valve, full port through 1": T-585-70-UL b. Nibco Ball Valve conventional port 1-1/4" through 3": T-580-70-UL C. Resun 2-1/2" and larger: 143 - 1-UL d. DeZurick 2-1/2" and larger: Series 425 or 435 e. Locking Type: Rockford 3/4" and 1" PNP-400 Mueller 1-1/4" through 4": Lub-O-seal f. Conbraco Ball Valve, full port through 4": 64-100 Series h. Hammond Full Port'/a"-2" #8303A i. Hammond Standard Port 2-1/2" & 3" #8503 j. Viega ProPress Bronze Ball Valves (where Viega ProPress fittings are used) 2. Cold And Hot water service a. Nibco Ball Valve full port through 2": T-585-70-66 b. Nibco Ball Valve 2-1/2" and 3" conventional port: T-580-70-66 C. Nibco Butterfly Valve 4" and larger: LD-3022 d. Watts Ball Valve 4" and larger: G-4000-FDA e. Viega ProPress Bronze Ball Valves (where Viega ProPress fittings are used) f. Kitz Full Port through 2" - #68M h. Hammond Full Port'/a"-2" #8303A i. Hammond Standard Port 2-1/2" & 3" #8503 3. Compressed air system a. Nibco Ball Valve full port through 2": T-585-70-66 b. Nibco Ball Valve 2-1/2" and 3" conventional port: T-580-70-66 C. Watts Ball Valve 4" and larger: G-4000 d. Viega ProPress Bronze Ball Valves (where Viega ProPress fittings are used) 4. Check Valve: a. Nibco Check Valve: T - 413 - Y (Teflon Seats) b. Nibco Check Valve 2-1/2" and larger: F - 918 - Y (Teflon Seats) C. Nibco Check Valve 2-1/2" and larger: W - 920 -W (Wafer) 5. Globe Valve: a. Nibco Globe Valve: T - 235 - Y (Teflon Seats) b. Nibco Globe Valve 2-1/2" and larger: F - 718 - B (Bronze Seats) 6. Gate Valve a. Nibco Gate Valve through 2": T-133 b. Nibco Gate Valve 2-1/2" and Larger: F-617 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install valves with stems upright or horizontal, not inverted. B. Install valves for shut-off and isolating service at each piece of equipment, at vertical risers, and where shown on the drawings. C. Use ball valves in domestic hot water and domestic cold water systems interchangeable in place of gate and globe valves. D. Use ball valves in circulating water systems, for balancing duty. Provide infinite position gear operator with memory stop. VALVES, STRAINERS AND VENTS VLK Architects, 2007 22 0523 - 4 2740.00 CREEKVIEW ELEMENTARY SCHOOL COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX E. Provide drain valves at main shut-off valves and low points of piping and apparatus so the systems can be entirely drained. 1. 1" valve for pipes 6" and larger. 2. 3/4" valve for pipes smaller than 6". 3. Terminate with pipe plug. 4. Drain valves shall be ball valves. F. Provide isolation valves in domestic water lines to isolate all equipment, restrooms, hose bibs, and where shown on the drawings. G. Install handles so the lever or handles will not damage the insulation. H. Provide clearance for installation of insulation and access to valves. I. Provide access where valves are not exposed. 3.02 VALVE TAGS A. Furnish valves with 1-1/2" diameter brass valve tags with stamped, black or red -filled numbers. Service designations shall be 1/4" letters, and valve numbers shall be 2" letters. Engineer shall approve Service designations. Secure tags to valves by use of brass "S" hooks or brass chain. Secure chain to valve by use of copper or Monel meter seals. Valve tags are not required if the valve is located within 3' of the equipment being served and the service is obvious. B. Mount charts and drawings listing functions of each valve and its location in a metal and glass frame. Place charts and drawings as directed; in addition, on the record drawings mark the symbols and furnish a valve schedule properly identifying the valve number, service, exact location, the material being piped, and the room number of area that the valve services. This schedule shall be furnished on reproducible drafting paper or film suitable for reproduction on an Ozalid machine. The Owner shall approve the size of drafting paper. Provide a copy of the valve chart in the Operating and Maintenance Manuals. 3.03 PIPE SYSTEMS STRAINERS A. Provide strainers in supply piping to circulating pumps, thermostatic mixing valves, before solenoid valves and trap primer valves. END OF SECTION VALVES, STRAINERS AND VENTS VLK Architects, 2007 22 0523 - 5 2740.00 CREEKVIEW ELEMENTARY SCHOOL COLLEGE STATION ISO COLLEGE STATION, TX SECTION 22 0533 - PIPE HEAT TRACING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Furnish and install a complete industrial, constant wattage, UL listed system of electric pipe heat tracing and controls on all make-up water piping outdoors above grade to prevent freezing. The heat tracing system shall conform to ANSI/IEEE Standard 515-1989. B. Protect the pipe, valves, fittings, meters and appurtenances. Apply sufficient cable and overheat thermostat to protect the entire system. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Submit shop drawings and product data as specified in Section 22 0512. B. Submit detailed calculations for length of heat tracing cable per foot of pipe, based on actual length of piping installed. C. Submit manufacturer's certified capacity charts with selections plotted thereon. D. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions. E. Submit full load ampere requirement and voltage for branch circuit. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Raychem Corporation B. Thermon Manufacturing Company 2.02 COMPONENTS A. Self-regulating heater. 1. The self-regulating heater shall consist of two 16 AWG tinned -copper bus wires embedded in parallel in a self-regulating polymer core that varies its power output to respond to temperature all along its length, allowing the heater to be crossed itself without overheating and to be cut in the field. The heater shall be covered by a radiation cross -linked modified polyolefin dielectric jacket. 2. In order to provide energy conservation, and to prevent overheating, the heater shall have a self-regulating factor of at least 90%. 3. The heater shall operate on a line voltage of 120 VAC without the use of transformers. 4. The heater shall be sized according to the following. The required heater output rating is in watts per foot at 50oF (heater selection based on 1-1/2 inch fiberglass insulation on metal piping). 5. The heater shall be XL -Trace as manufactured by Raychem Corporation or XL- Econotrace as manufactured by Thermon Manufacturing Company. 6. Power connection, end seal, splice and tee kits components shall be applied in the field. PIPE HEAT TRACING VLK Architects, 2007 22 0533 -1 2740.00 CREEKVIEW ELEMENTARY SCHOOL COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX 7. The system shall be controlled by an ambient sensing thermostat set at 40OF either directly or through an appropriate contactor. 8. Provide an end -of -circuit voltage indicating light PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install and start up the pipe heat tracing system in accordance with the manufacturer's Installation, Start-up and Service Instructions. B. Install the pipe heat tracing cable under the pipe insulation. C. Apply "Electrically Traced" signs to the outside of the thermal insulation. D. Ground fault protection of the equipment shall be provided per the 1996 National Electrical Code, Article 427-22. E: Provide a cast aluminum weatherproof NEMA-4 rated junction box for installation of the cable, with pilot light to indicate operation of the cable. F. Use only electrical components as recommended by the manufacturer. 3.02 ELECTRICAL WORK A. Furnish and install the wire, conduit and raceway systems required for the automatic operation of the pipe heat tracing system. Conform to the National Electrical Code. B. The specified wiring work includes: 1. Wiring of control instruments between thermostat and junction boxes 2. Installation of thermostat and junction boxes 3. Wiring from the heat tracing cable to the junction boxes C. Related branch circuit power wiring from the junction box to ground fault type circuit is specified to be provided in Division 26. D. Provide devices and appurtenances as specified in Division 26. E. Identify each circuit at each terminal with a separate tag. F. Color code wires in accordance with IPCEA Standards. G. Make all joints and connections with approved mechanical connectors. 3.03 TESTING OF THE PIPE HEAT TRACING SYSTEM A. Test the pipe heat tracing system: 1. Simulate freezing outside air conditions 2. Measure the amperage draw of the heat tracing system 3. Compare to the manufacturer's capacity rating of the actual system 4. After installation and before and after installing the thermal insulation, subject heat to testing using a 1000 VDC megger. Minimum insulation resistance should be between 20 to 1000 megohms regardless of the length. PIPE HEAT TRACING VLK Architects, 2007 22 0533 -2 2740.00 CREEKVIEW ELEMENTARY SCHOOL COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX B. Submit records of test for approval prior to substantial completion; insert in the Owner's Manual. END SECTION PIPE HEAT TRACING VLK Architects, 2007 22 0533 -3 2740.00 CREEKVIEW ELEMENTARY SCHOOL COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX SECTION 22 0719 - PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Furnish and install piping insulation, jackets, accessories and covering of specified materials. The insulation shall be used for high and low temperature piping applications including domestic hot and cold water, roof and overflow drain sump bodies and rain leaders, horizontal sanitary drain piping which receives condensate, and make-up water. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. The intent of insulation specifications is to obtain superior quality workmanship resulting in an installation that is absolutely satisfactory in both function and appearance. Provide insulation in accordance with the specifications for each type of service and apply as recommended by the manufacturer and as specified. B. An approved contractor for this work under this Division shall be: 1. A specialist in this field and have the personnel, experience, training, skill, and the organization to provide a practical working system. 2. Able to furnish evidence of having contracted for and installed not less than 3 systems of comparable size and type that have served their owners satisfactorily for not less than 3 years. C. All piping insulation used on the project inside the building must have a flame spread rating not exceeding 25 and a smoke developed rating not exceeding 50, as determined by test procedures ASTM E 84, NFPA 255 and UL 723. These ratings must be as tested on the composite of insulation, jacket or facing, and adhesive. Components such as adhesives, mastics and cements must meet the same individual ratings as the minimum requirements and bear the UL label. D. Condensation on any insulated piping system is not acceptable. E. Replace insulation damaged by either moisture or other means. Insulation that has been wet, whether dried or not, is considered damaged. Make repairs where condensation is caused by improper installation of insulation. Also repair any damage caused by the condensation. F. Where existing insulated piping, or other surfaces are tapped, remove existing insulation back to undamaged sections for hot surfaces or to nearest insulation stop for cold surfaces, and replace with new insulation of the same type and thickness as existing insulation. Apply as specified for insulation of the same service. 1.03 APPROVALS A. Submit product data on each insulation type, adhesive, and finish to be used in the work. Make the submittal as specified in Division 1 General Requirements and obtain approval before beginning installation. Include product description, list of materials and thickness for each service and location and the manufacturer's installation instructions for each product. B. Make a field application of each type of insulation to display the material, quality and application method. Obtain approval of the sample application before proceeding with installation of the work. PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION VLK Architects, 2007 22 0719 -1 2740.00 CREEKVIEW ELEMENTARY SCHOOL COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Glass fiber pipe insulation: 1. Johns -Manville Micro-Lok AP-T 2. Owens-Corning ASJ/SSL 3. Knauf ASJ/SSL B. Cellular Glass Insulation (Foamglass): 1. Pittsburg Corning 2. Cell-U-Foam C. Aluminum Jacketing: 1. Childers 2. Pabco 3. RPR D. Fiberglass reinforcing cloth mesh: 1. Perma Glass Mesh 2. Alpha Glass Mesh 3. Childers Chi[-Glas 4. Vimasco E. Mastics and Adhesives 1. Childers 2. Foster 3. Vimasco 4. Armstrong 520 Adhesive F. Elastomeric Insulation 1. Armstrong G. Weather Resistant Coating 1. WB Armaflex Finish H. Glass fiber blanket insulation 1. Manville R-series Microlite FSKL 2. Owens-Corning eD75 or ED100 RKF 3. Knauf 0.75 PCF FSK 2.02 FIBERGLASS PIPE INSULATION A. Heavy density, dual temperature fiberglass insulation with factory applied, all service, reinforced vapor barrier jacket having integral laminated vapor barrier. Provide with a factory applied pressure sensitive tape closure system and matching butt strips. Supply in thickness as shown. 1. Thermal conductivity 0.23 @ 750F mean (ASTM 335). 2.03 ELASTOMERIC INSULATION A. Insulation material shall be flexible, closed -cell elastomeric insulation in tubular or sheet form. Material shall have a flame spread rating of 25 or less and a smoke developed rating of 50 or less when tested in accordance with ASTM E84, latest revision. Sheet material with a thickness greater than 3W shall have a flame spread rating of 25 or less and a smoke developed rating of 100 or less when tested in accordance with ASTM E84, latest revision. In PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION VLK Architects, 2007 22 0719 - 2 2740.00 CREEKVIEW ELEMENTARY SCHOOL COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX addition, the product, when tested, shall not melt or drip flaming particles, and the flame shall not be progressive. In addition, all materials shall pass simulated end -use fire test. Minimum 3/a" thick. 1. Thermal conductivity 0.27 at 750F mean (ASTM C177 or C518) 2.04 CELLULAR GLASS INSULATION A. ASTM C552: 1. "k" value of 0.35 @ 750F ("ksi" value of 0.047 @ 240C); 2. 8.0 Ib/cu.ft. (128 kg/cu.m.) density 2.05 INSULATION/SHIELD AT HANGERS A. Field fabricated: Use 3600 sections of rigid foamglass insulation that will support the bearing area at hangers and supports. Further support insulation at hangers and supports with a shield of galvanized metal covering at least half of the pipe circumference, and conforming to the schedule. Insulation shall extend at least 1" beyond metal shield on each end. When pipe is guided at top and bottom, metal shields shall cover the whole pipe circumference. Adhere metal shield to insulation so that metal will not slide with respect to insulation with 1W aluminum bands (2) per shield. 1. Sections of foam glass insulation may be used of the same outside diameter of the adjoining pipe insulation. 2. Minimum thickness of foam glass insulation shall not be less than 1" thick. B. Pipe saddles: Formed galvanized sheets at each support point for insulated pipe, shaped to fit pipe, and covering bottom half of pipe. Length at saddle shall be not less than twice the insulation outside diameter or more than 22". Provide 18 gauge through 4" pipe and 16- gauge 5" pipe and above. 2.06 SEALANT, ADHESIVE AND FINISH A. Lap Adhesive. Provide Childers CP-82 adhesive. B. Vapor Barrier Finish: 1. Indoors: Provide as insulation coating Childers CP-35, white. 2. Outdoors: Provide as insulation coating Childers Encacel X. 3. Underground: Provide Childers CP-22/24 for fittings and areas. Pittwrap cannot be used. C. Sealant. Provide Childers CP-76 vapor barrier sealant. D. Lagging Adhesive. Provide Childers CP-50. E. Other products of equal quality will be acceptable only upon approval. 2.07 ALUMINUM JACKETING A. Finish insulated piping outdoors with a smooth prefabricated Z-lock aluminum jacket 0.016" thick with factory applied 1 mil polyethylene/40 lb and Fab strap. Kraft moisture barrier. Childers Lock -On or approved equal. B. Valves, Fittings and Flanges. For finishing valves, fittings, flanges and similar installations, provide formed aluminum covers, 0.024" thick. C. Straps and Seals. Provide 1W x 0.020 stainless steel strapping and seals for jackets and covers according to manufacturer's recommendations. PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION VLK Architects, 2007 22 0719 - 3 2740.00 CREEKVIEW ELEMENTARY SCHOOL COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX 2.08 GLASS FIBER BLANKET INSULATION A. Minimum density of 1.0 PCF, 2" thick, installed R value to be 6.0 or better at 750F mean, facing of 0.35 mil foil reinforced with glass yarn mesh and laminated to 40 Ibs fire resistant kraft. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INTERIOR PIPING A. Coverall piping with glass fiber, heavy density, dual temperature pipe insulation with a vapor barrier jacket. Apply insulation to clean, dry pipes. Longitudinal seams shall be joined firmly together and sealed with self-sealing lap joints. Butt insulation joints firmly together and seal with a 3" wide ASJ butt strip seal. Longitudinal seams and butt strip laps shall be coated and sealed with CP-35 vapor barrier coating for chilled water piping applications. B. Install hanger with protective shield, on the outside of all insulation. C. Where domestic water pipes (1/2" & 3/a" pipe sizes) are installed on trapeze type hangers, provide galvanized sheet metal protection shields at these locations. Place insulation jacket directly on hanger. Incompressible, load bearing insulation segments are not required. D. Pipe Saddles: Formed galvanized sheets at each support point for insulated pipe, shaped to fit pipe, and covering bottom half of pipe. Length at saddle shall be not less than twice the insulation outside diameter. Provide 18-gauge through 4" pipe and 16-gauge for 5" pipe and above. E. Seal ends of pipe for drinking chilled water insulation with vapor barrier mastic at valves, flanges, fittings and every 21' on straight runs of piping. Mastic should extend on top of ASJ jacket, across the glass, down onto the pipe making a complete seal. F. Apply a smooth flood coat of white lagging Foster 8142W over all exposed insulation. G. Piping to be insulated as specified above: 1. Domestic hot and cold water 2. Make-up water 3. Horizontal sanitary drain piping that receives condensate 4. Exposed to view storm drainage system including roof and overflow drain bodies, vertical piping from drain body to elbow, all horizontal rain leaders, and first elbow turning down 3.02 PIPING OUTDOORS ABOVE GRADE A. Insulate all water piping exterior of building above grade with rigid foam insulation and aluminum jacketing. B. Adhere the vapor barrier jacket longitudinal seam with vapor barrier adhesive. C. Cover all valves, fittings and flanges with factory made molded or field fabricated segments of pipe insulation of a thickness and material equal to the adjoining insulation. Adhere segments together with no voids, using CP-82 adhesive. Secure fitting insulation covers and segments in place with 1/2" wide glass filament tape. D. Apply a tack coat of fitting mastic over the insulation and tape. PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION VLK Architects, 2007 22 0719 - 4 2740.00 CREEKVIEW ELEMENTARY SCHOOL COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX E. Neatly embed with 10 x 10 fiberglass cloth into the tack coat. F. Apply mastic over the fiberglass cloth to a thickness where the fabric is not visible after completion. G. Seal ends of pipe insulation with vapor barrier mastic at valves, flanges, fittings and every 21' on straight runs of piping. Mastic should extend on top of ASJ jacket, across the foam, down onto the pipe, making a complete seal. H. Finish with aluminum jacketing as specified. 3.03 FLANGE, VALVE AND FITTING INSULATION A. Cover valves and flanges with fabricated segments, fittings with two-piece factory molded fittings, and both of matching pipe insulation type and thickness equal to that of the adjoining pipe. Fittings and fabricated segments shall be securely held in place. 1. Apply a tack coat of insulating mastic to the insulated fitting to produce a smooth surface. 2. After mastic is dry, apply a second coat of vapor barrier mastic. Neatly embed with 10 x 10 fiberglass cloth into the tack coat. 3. Overlap mastic and fiberglass cloth by 2" on adjoining sections of pipe insulation. 4. Apply a second coat of mastic over the fiberglass cloth to present a smooth surface. 5. Apply mastic to a wet film thickness of 3/64". 6. Fabric shall not be visible after completion. 7. Vapor seal flanges, valves and fittings with Childers CP-35. B. PVC fitting covers are not acceptable. 3.04 ALUMINUM JACKETING (insulated Piping Outdoors Above Grade) A. Apply smooth aluminum jacket on piping, valves, fittings and flange covers according to manufacturer's recommendations, using stainless steel strapping and seals, to provide weather tight covering and to shed water. B. Aluminum jacketing is not considered as contributing to the vapor barrier or the insulation jacket. The vapor barrier must be sufficient in itself for this function. Lap each adjoining jacket section a minimum of 3" to make a weather tight seal. C. Install straps on 9" centers and at each circumferential lap joint. D. Cover and seal all exposed surfaces. E. The use of screws and rivets is not approved. F. Provide isolation (30# felt) between the aluminum jacket and the sheetmetal protection shield at each pipe support point. 3.05 CONCEALED STORM DRAIN PIPING A. Provide flexible glass fiber insulation with factory -applied, reinforced UL labeled Foil-Skrim- Kraft (FSK) facing. Install insulation of clean, dry piping. B. Insulation shall be wrapped tightly on the piping with all circumferential joints and longitudinal joints overlapped a minimum of 2" with facing to the outside to obtain specified R-value using a maximum of 25% compression. PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION VLK Architects, 2007 22 0719 - 5 2740.00 CREEKVIEW ELEMENTARY SCHOOL COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX C. Provide vapor retarder at penetrations, joints, seams and damage to the facing with staples and FSK foil tape. The facing shall be taped with a minimum 3" wide strip of reinforced foil tape. Pressure -sensitive tape shall be a minimum 3" (76mm) wide and shall be applied with moving pressure using an appropriate sealing tool. Staples shall be outward cinch and placed 6" (152mm) on center. D. Mechanical / Electrical rooms and above ceilings are considered concealed spaces. 3.06 MISCELLANEOUS A. Install materials after piping has been tested and approved. B. Apply insulation on clean, dry surfaces only. C. Apply weather protective finish on elastomeric insulation installed in non -conditioned spaces. Provide a minimum of three coats. 3.09 INSULATION THICKNESS INSULATED UNIT Exposed Roof Drain Bodies and Horizontal Roof Drain Leaders Exposed Roof Overflow Drain Bodies and Horizontal Drain Leaders Domestic Cold Water/Make-Up Water Piping/Drinking Chilled Water Horizontal Sanitary Drain Piping Which Receives Condensate Domestic Hot Water Piping, 1-1/2" Pipe and Smaller Domestic Hot Water Piping, 2" Pipe and Larger END OF SECTION THICKNESS Inches 1 1 1 1 1 1-1/2 PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION VLK Architects, 2007 22 0719 - 6 2740.00 CREEKVIEW ELEMENTARY SCHOOL COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX SECTION 22 1116 - DOMESTIC WATER PIPING AND APPURTENANCES PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Furnish and install domestic hot and cold water piping. 1.02 RELATED WORK A. Division 22 Plumbing 1. Valves, Strainers and Vents 2. Pipe and Pipe Fittings - General 3. Plumbing Piping Insulation 4. Plumbing Fixtures and Fixture Carriers PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 PIPING AND FITTINGS A. Below Slab on Grade Piping for Water Entries: 1. 2-1/2 inch and smaller, provide ASTM B88 Type K annealed tempered (soft) seamless copper water tube. No joints below slab entries. 2. 3-inch, provide ASTM B88 Type K annealed tempered (soft) seamless copper water tube. One joint allowed below slab entry using wrought copper, solder -joint pressure fittings: ASME B16.22 with an approved brazing filler metal or pipe can be shop bent for no joint installation by using a "bending" temper tubing. 3. 4-inch and larger, provide ductile iron pipe with mechanical joints, ANSI A21.6. B. Below Grade Piping Outside Building (beyond 5'-0" of building): Provide PVC water main pipe 3 inch through 12 inch in diameter in conformance with AWWA C900. Provide fittings in conformance with ASTM 2466. Furnish pipe with a minimum pressure rating of 150 lbs. per square inch. Provide PVC pipe as manufactured by Johns -Manville, CertainTeed, Clow or approved equal. C. Below Slab on Grade Piping. Furnish ASTM B 88 and ANSI/NSF Standard 61 annealed tempered (soft), Type K copper water tube. Run continuous with no joints under the floor slab. Provide copper pipe corrosion protection as specified in this Section. D. Above Slab Piping. Provide seamless ASTM B 88 and ANSI/NSF Standard 61 drawn tempered (hard) Type L copper water tube with wrought copper and bronze solder -joint, ANSI B16.22. Solder material shall be 95-5 (lead free) (Tin -Antimony -Grade 95TA) ASTM B 32. E. Unions. Provide 150 lb. standard unions with ground joint and bronze seat. Flange joints larger than 2 inches. Provide dielectric isolating unions at junctions or connection between metallic piping of dissimilar metal. Provide pipe threads with standard taper pipe threads ANSI B2..1. 2.02 WATER HAMMER ARRESTORS A. Provide piston type hydraulic engineered/manufactured water hammer arrestors in cold and hot water supply lines in chases or walls to each fixture branch or battery of fixtures serving quick closing valves of electrical, pneumatic, spring loaded type, or quick hand closure valves on fixture trim. Provide water hammer arrestors at the end of the branch line between the last two fixtures served. Provide Precision Plumbing Products, Inc., or equal. Size units according to water hammer arrestor's Standard PDI WH-201; refer to schedule on drawings. DOMESTIC WATER PIPING AND APPURTENANCES VLK Architects, 2007 22 1116 - 1 2740.00 CREEKVIEW ELEMENTARY SCHOOL COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX B. Install all water hammer arrestors so as to attain 100% effectiveness according to Plumbing and Drainage Institute PDI-WH2O1 Table 5, 6 and 6-A for water hammer arrestors. C. All water hammer arrestors shall be installed in a vertical position. D. All water hammer arrestors shall be accessible and shall have access panels where required. Arrestors located above ceilings in fixture drops will not be acceptable. Refer to sizing and placement data as indicated in PDI Standard PDI-WH-201. 2.03 AIR CHAMBERS A. Provide a minimum 18-inch long air chamber, of the same size and connecting pipe material at each single lavatory, sink, drinking fountain or fixture that does not have a quick -closing valve or electrical, pneumatic, spring loaded type, or flush valve. Air chambers to be used for remote fixtures and not mixed with water hammer arrestors at group toilets. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 DRAINAGE A. Install water piping systems with uniform horizontal grade of 1 /8 inch per 10 foot, minimum, to low points to provide complete system drainage. Where constant pitch cannot be maintained for long runs, establish intermediate low points and rise to new level. Grade branches to drain to mains or risers. Unless otherwise indicated, terminate low points of risers with drain valve piped to nearest hub or floor drain. 3.02 STERILIZATION A. Prior to starting work, verify system is complete, flushed and clean. B. Inject chorine disinfectant in liquid, powder, tablet or gas form throughout the system to obtain 50 to 80 Mg/L residual. C. Bleed water from outlets to ensure distribution and test for disinfectant residual at minimum 20% of the outlets. D. Retain disinfectant in system for 8 hours (minimum), 24 hours (maximum). During the disinfection process, operate all valves and accessories. E. If final disinfectant residual tests less than 25 Mg/L, repeat treatment. F. Flush disinfectant from system until chemical and bacteriological tests prove water quality equal to that of the service main. G. Take samples no sooner than 24 hours after flushing from at least 10% of the outlets and from the water entry. 1. Obtain a minimum of one water sample flushing from at least 10% of the outlets and from the water entry. 2. Take samples from faucets located at highest point in the building, and farthest point from the main water supply. H. After final flushing, remove aerators, clean and replace. I. Chemical and bacteriological tests shall be conducted by a state certified laboratory. J. The firm performing the disinfection shall have chemical laboratory experience. DOMESTIC WATER PIPING AND APPURTENANCES VLK Architects, 2007 22 1116 - 2 2740.00 CREEKVIEW ELEMENTARY SCHOOL COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX K. Provide a laboratory report to indicate the following information. 1. Name and address of the approved laboratory testing the samples. 2. Name and location of the project and date the samples were obtained. 3. Mg/L chlorine during retention. 4. Mg/L chlorine after flushing. 5. The coliform organism count. (An acceptable test shall show absence of coliform organisms.) L. If analysis does not satisfy the specified minimum requirements, repeat the disinfection procedure. M. Submit for approval to the Architect/Engineer a copy of the laboratory report and the certification of performance. An approved copy of each document shall be inserted in the Owner's manual. 3.03 UNDERGROUND WATER PIPING SYSTEM PROCEDURES A. Lay sewer and water lines in separate trenches, separated by 10 foot of undisturbed or compacted soil. 3.04 TESTING A. Test under a cold water hydrostatic pressure of 1-1/2 times operating pressure (150 psig minimum) and carefully check for leaks. Repair leaks and retest system until proven watertight. B. Test the domestic water piping system at 150psig hydrostatic pressure, maintained for 6 hours. C. Use only potable water for the test. D. Perform the test before fixtures, faucets, trim or final connections are made to equipment. E. If the system is tested in sections, the entire domestic water piping system shall be submitted to a final test, employing the specified procedure. F. Do not insulate or conceal piping systems until tests are satisfactorily complete. G. If any leaks or other defects are observed, suspend the test and correct the condition at once. Repeat testing until leaks are eliminated and the full test period is achieved. H. The satisfactory completion of testing does not relieve the Contractor of responsibility for ultimate proper and satisfactory operation of piping systems and their accessories. 3.05 COPPER PIPE CORROSION PROTECTION A. Corrosion protect copper tube piping systems: 1. In the building slab. 2. Beneath the building slab. 3. Buried. 4. Route plasti-sleeve 0.006 thick material entire length of below slab on grade copper tubing. B. Cover copper tubing piping system with: 1. "Tapecoat" TC Primer. 2. "Tapecoat" CT cold applied coating tape. DOMESTIC WATER PIPING AND APPURTENANCES VLK Architects, 2007 22 1116 - 3 2740.00 CREEKVIEW ELEMENTARY SCHOOL COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX C. Install coating system as specified by the manufacturer. D. Extend the corrosion protection 2 inches above concrete slab on grade. 106 TEST OF PIPE CORROSION PROTECTION SYSTEM A. Test the pipe corrosion protection coating with an approved high voltage tester adjusted to provide sufficient voltage to produce a spark through a pinhole in the coating (at least 15 kv AC). B. Make repairs to small holes in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. C. Retest the repairs using procedures listed above. D. Furnish certificate of compliance with field testing in Owner's manual. END OF SECTION DOMESTIC WATER PIPING AND APPURTENANCES VLK Architects, 2007 22 1116 - 4 2740.00 CREEKVIEW ELEMENTARY SCHOOL COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX SECTION 22 1123 - DOMESTIC WATER PUMPS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. General characteristics for pumps specified in Division 22 - Plumbing. 1.02 RELATED WORK Requirements for pumps are specified in other sections of Division 22 - Plumbing, including the following: A. Division 22 Plumbing - Electrical Provisions of Plumbing Work. 1.03 PUMP SELECTION A. Select pumps conservatively for scheduled conditions. Furnish pumps that have reasonably high efficiencies, with peak efficiency at or near rated conditions. Select pumps that will operate stably at 15' suction lift despite substantial reduction in head or substantial increase in delivery. B. If the pumps proposed are not considered suitable, submit manufacturer's data on other pumps, for review. C. Scheduled design flow, design head, pump efficiency, and motor horsepower are the minimum acceptable. D. The pump curve shall rise continuously from maximum flow to cut-off. E. Shut-off head approximately 10 percent greater than design head, unless otherwise indicated in pump schedules. F. Pump brake horsepower shall not exceed the motor horsepower rating over the entire operating range from shut-off to run -out. G. Select the pump for operation at or near peak efficiency. H. Cavitation -free at all points on the curve. Impeller diameter shall not exceed 90 percent of the maximum published diameter. 1.04 PUMP SIZE AND TYPE A. Provide motor -driven pumps of the type and speed scheduled. Select pumps that are not overloaded throughout the entire range of pump operation. Provide pump connection sizes as indicated. B. The head capacities indicated in the schedules are listed for bidding purposes only. Calculate the operating head at each pump; take into consideration the actual routing of the various lines, pressure drops in heat exchangers and, coils, exact lengths of pipe, fittings, etc. Submit these calculations, together with copies of manufacturer's performance curves, as shop drawings on each pump. Clearly mark the curves for each pump to indicate the diameter of the impeller and the selection point. DOMESTIC WATER PUMPS VLK Architects, 2007 22 1 23 -1 2740.00 CREEKVIEW ELEMENTARY SCHOOL COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX 1.05 CERTIFIED DATA A. Submit factory certified pump cures showing pump performance characteristics with pump and system operating points plotted. Cures shall include as a minimum, flow (gallons per minute), head (feet of water), all available impeller diameters (inches), efficiency (percent), net positive suction head required (feet of water), brake horsepower, pump size and pump model. Show pump curves with system curve plotted. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 DOMESTIC HOT WATER CIRCULATOR A. Pump construction: 1. Cast iron, designed for 125 psi working pressure 2. Bronze fitted 3. Grease lubricated ball bearings selected for an average life of 150,000 hours 4. Flexible coupled 5. Horizontal or vertical in -line 6. Flanged connections B. Provide each pump with a mechanical seal. Use seal materials suitable for the pumped liquid. C. Paint entire unit with two coats of machinery enamel after completion of installation. D. Pump motor: 1. NEMA Standard 2. Open drip proof 3. So sized with relation to the pump impeller that the brake horsepower requirements will not overload the motor at any point on the pump curve. 4. Provide insertion thermostat (Aquastat) or (timer) to control operation of the domestic hot water return pumps. E. The schedule on the drawing sets forth the type of pump and GPM required. 1. The head capacities and horsepower are for bidding purposes only. 2. Make pump selection based on actual system calculations. F. Acceptable manufacturers: 1. Bell & Gossett 2. Amtrol/Thrush 3. Armstrong 4. Aurora 5. Taco 6. Grundfos 2.02 DOMESTIC HOT WATER CIRCULATING PUMPS (SMALL) FRACTIONAL HORSEPOWER A. Pump Construction: 1. Wet -rotor, in -line, single stage 2. Bronze housings with Ile and 3/a" sweat connections 3. Stainless steel housing with union threaded connections 4. Integrated check valve inside union fitting on a sweat pump housing 5. Built-in 5-foot, 115 volt AC line cord with NEMA 3 Prong male plug or line cord 6. Built-in timer 7. Aquastat thermostatic control DOMESTIC WATER PUMPS VLK Architects, 2007 22 1 23 -2 2740.00 CREEKVIEW ELEMENTARY SCHOOL COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX 2.03 FLOW INDICATOR A. Flow Indicator 1. Bronze Construction 2. Rotating wheel 3. Line Size 4. Double Window 5. Ernst Flow Industries Model EFI E-57-3 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install the pumps in accordance with Manufacturer's 'Installation, Start-up and Service Instructions". 1. Provide access space around pumps for service. 2. Lubricate pumps prior to start-up. 3. Install hot water circulator horizontally, properly supported to wall, in an accessible location for testing and maintenance at a height not to exceed 60" above finished floor. Install line size Ernst bronze rotating wheel, flow indicator with double window, downstream of circulator. B. Provide a line size isolation valve and strainer on the pump suction and a line size silent check valve and balancing valve on the pump discharge. C. Support piping adjacent to the pump such that no weight is carried on the pump casing. Decrease from pipe size with eccentric reducer on suction side and concentric increaser on discharge side. END OF SECTION DOMESTIC WATER PUMPS VLK Architects, 2007 22 1 23 -3 2740.00 CREEKVIEW ELEMENTARY SCHOOL COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX SECTION 221316 - SOIL, WASTE AND SANITARY DRAIN PIPING, VENT PIPING AND APPURTENANCES PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Furnish and install piping in buildings and underground laterals to 5 foot outside of building. 1.02 RELATED WORK A. Site Work: 1. Sanitary Sewers 2. Excavation, Trenching and Backfilling for Utilities B. Division 22 Plumbing 1. Pipe and Pipe Fittings 2. Plumbing Fixtures and Fixture Carriers 3. Drains, Cleanouts and Hydrants 4. Earthwork 1.03 REFERENCES A. CISPI - Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute B. ASTM - American Society for Testing and Materials PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. All No -Hub clamps must have 4 bands minimum. Sizes 5" through 10" shall have six bands minimum. 1. No -Hub Clamps — Sanitary Waste: a. Husky SD 4000 b. MiFab MI-XHUB 2. No -Hub Clamps - Vents a. Husky SD — 2000 b. MiFab MI-XHUB B. Provide only transition couplings for cast iron to PVC at slab penetrations. C. Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings: 1. AB&I 2. Charlotte Pipe 3. Tyler 2.02 DRAIN PIPE AND FITTINGS A. Above Slab Pipe: 1. No -hub cast iron soil pipe and fittings shall conform to CISPI 301 and ASTM A888. 2. Pipe shall conform to ASTM A74. 3. No -hub couplings shall conform to CISPI 310. 4. Rubber Gaskets for cast iron soil pipe and fittings shall conform to ASTM C564 SOIL, WASTE AND SANITARY DRAIN PIPING, VENT PIPING AND APPURTENANCES VLK Architects, 2007 22 1316 - 1 2740.00 CREEKVIEW ELEMENTARY SCHOOL COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX B. Below Slab on Grade Piping: 1. Schedule 40 PVC plastic pipe and DWV fittings. 2. Solvent welded DWV joints shall conform to IAPMO Installation Standard IS-9. 3. Pipe and fittings shall conform to ASTM D 1784, ASTM D 1785, ASTM D 2665, ASTM D 3311 and NPS Standard 14 & 61. 2.03 VENT PIPE AND FITTINGS A. Above Slab Pipe: 1. No -hub cast iron soil pipe and fittings shall conform to CISPI 301 and ASTM A888. 2. Pipe shall conform to ASTM A74. 3. No -hub couplings shall conform to CISPI 310 4. Rubber gaskets for cast iron soil pipe and fittings shall conform to ASTM C564 B. Below Slab on Grade Piping: 1. Same as DRAIN PIPE AND FITTINGS listed above. C. Above Slab Pipe. 1. Drainage -waste -vent copper pipe and fittings for waste stub -outs for all fixture locations. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. All above and below slab soil, waste, sanitary drain and vent piping installation methods shall be in accordance with Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute Standards. B. Tracer wires shall be installed on all underground PVC sanitary sewer lines installed outside the building slab. 3.02 GRADE A. Give horizontal pipe grade of 1/4-inch per foot where possible, but not less than 1/8 inch per foot unless otherwise shown. 3.03 DRAIN PIPE AND FITTINGS A. Offsets and Fittings. 1. Use reduction fittings to connect two pipes of different diameter. 2. Change directions by appropriate use of 45-degree wyes, long -sweep quarter - bends, and sixth-, eights-, and sixteenth -bends. Sanitary tees can be used on vertical stacks. Use long sweeps at the base of risers. 3. Provide a separate trap at each fixture, unless a trap is built into the fixture. Provide a deep seal trap at each floor drain and hub drain. Place traps so that the discharge from any fixture will pass through only one trap before reaching a building drain. B. Hub Drains. Install hub drains where indicated, with the top of the hub 1/2 above the finished floor, unless otherwise indicated on the drawings. C. Cleanouts. Install cleanouts the same size as the soil waste lines in which the cleanouts are placed; however, no cleanout should be larger than 4 inches in diameter. SOIL, WASTE AND SANITARY DRAIN PIPING, VENT PIPING AND APPURTENANCES VLK Architects, 2007 22 1316 - 2 2740.00 CREEKVIEW ELEMENTARY SCHOOL COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX 1. Where cleanouts occur in pipe chases, bring the cleanouts through the walls and install covers. Where cleanouts occur in floor slabs, set flush. Reference drawing schedule. 2. Provide cleanouts where soil lines change direction, every 50 foot on long runs, or as shown on the drawings, at the end of each horizontal waste line, and at the base of each riser (and at each increase in pipe size). 3. Cleanouts shall occur at the end of each battery of water closets, urinals, lavatories and sinks. Cleanouts shall be installed so as to access the main sanitary or soil line. Extend and offset above flood rim of water closet. 4. Double sanitary tees and double quarter bends do not allow for easy access to main lines, therefore these types of fittings are not allowed. D. Floor Drains. Locate floor drains 1/2-inch below finish floor elevation unless otherwise shown. 3.04 VENT PIPING A. Make vent connections to vent stacks with inverted wye fittings. Extend full-size vents through the roof to at least 6 inches above the roof. B. Flash the roof penetration with 6 lb. lead flashing approximately 24 inches square. Flange the flashing to the lead sleeve. Extend the flashing up and around the vent pipe. Turn the flashing down inside the pipe at least 2 inches to make a watertight joint. Flashing shall comply with the roofing manufacturer's requirements. Reference the Architectural Drawings for exact requirements. C. Locate vent piping through roof a minimum horizontal distance of not less than 20 feet from any air intake opening or supply fan. 3.04. TESTING A. Below Slab on Grade and All Floors in Multi -Story Buildings: 1. Test pipe below slab on grade before backfilling and connecting to city sewers. 2. Maintain not less than 10 foot of hydrostatic head forl hour without a leak. B. System Test. After the various sections of soil, waste and vent piping are installed, but before fixtures are connected, test the system by: 1. Plugging outlets. 2. Filling vertical sections of multiple story buildings of not less than three floors at a time with water. Provide wyes as required to facilitate plugging. 3. Test for 6 hours without any drop in the water level. 3.05 RODDING SEWERS A. All sanitary soil and waste lines, both in the building and out, shall be rodded out and flushed out after completion of construction and prior to finish floor being installed. All work must be completed prior to substantial completion. All floor drains and cleanout locations must be included in this work. B. All sanitary soil and waste lines below building 3" and larger shall be internally videotaped at time of substantial completion. All videotaping shall include on -screen date and time, and include audio narration. All videotaping shall be provided by experienced individual in videotaping piping systems. An Owner's Representative shall be present during video- taping. Three copies of the videotape shall be delivered to the Owner for future records. SOIL, WASTE AND SANITARY DRAIN PIPING, VENT PIPING AND APPURTENANCES VLK Architects, 2007 22 1316 3 2740.00 CREEKVIEW ELEMENTARY SCHOOL COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX C. This work shall be done in the presence of the Owner's Representative, as part of the Contract, to ensure all lines are clear, and any obstruction that may be discovered shall be removed immediately. Rodding shall be accomplished by utilizing the proper rotary head to clear sewer. Pipe sizes 8 inches and larger shall be hydro -flushed. END OF SECTION SOIL, WASTE AND SANITARY DRAIN PIPING, VENT PIPING AND APPURTENANCES VLK Architects, 2007 22 1316 - 4 2740.00 CREEKVIEW ELEMENTARY SCHOOL COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX SECTION 22 1413 - ROOF DRAINAGE PIPING AND APPURTENANCES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Furnish and install roof drains, drain pipes and accessories. 1.02 RELATED WORK A. Division 22 Plumbing 1. Pipe and Pipe Fittings - General; for general piping requirements. 2. Drains and Cleanouts. 3. Plumbing Piping Insulation. 4. Earthwork 1.03 REFERENCES A. CISPI — Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute B. ASTM — American Society for Testing and Materials PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.01 STORM PIPE AND FITTINGS A. Above Ground Pipe. Provide service weight cast iron Bell and Spigot soil pipe and fittings with compression type neoprene gaskets that conform to ASTM C-564. Pipe and fittings shall meet the requirements of ASTM A 74. B. Below Slab on Grade: Provide Schedule 40 PVC plastic pipe and DWV fittings with solvent welded joints. Pipe and fittings shall conform to ASTM D 1784-82. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. All above and below slab storm piping installation methods shall be in accordance with the Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute Standards. B. Above ground installation in the horizontal position shall be supported at every hub (hub & spigot or hubless type). Hangers to be placed within 18" of hub or coupling. For large diameter fittings, 5 inches and larger shall be braced to prevent horizontal movement. Every branch opening or change of direction, braces, blocks, rodding or other suitable method shall be used to prevent movement. Riser clamps to be used for each floor, not to exceed 15-0". 3.02 GRADE A. Give horizontal lines minimum grade of 1/8 inch per foot. 3.03 TESTING A. Below Floors. 1. Test pipe below floors before backfilling and connecting to sewers. 2. Maintain not less than 10 foot of hydrostatic head for 1 hour without a leak. ROOF DRAINAGE PIPING AND APPURTENANCES VLK Architects, 2007 22 1413 -1 2740.00 CREEKVIEW ELEMENTARY SCHOOL COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX B. System Test. After all the various sections of soil, waste and vent piping are installed, but before fixtures are connected, test the system: 1. Plugging outlets. 2. Fill vertical sections with water. Provide wyes as required to facilitate plugging. 3. Test for 6 hours without any drop in the water level. 3.04 RODDING SEWERS A. All storm sewer lines, both in the building and out, shall be raided out and flushed out after completion of construction and prior to finish floor being installed. All work must be completed prior to substantial completion. All floor drains and cleanout locations must be included in this work. B. All storm lines below building 3" and larger shall be internally video-taped at time of substantial completion. An Owner's Representative shall be present during video-taping. Three copies of the video-tape shall be delivered to the Owner for future records. C. This work shall be done in the presence of the Owner's Representative, as part of the Contract, to ensure all lines are clear, and any obstruction that may be discovered shall be removed immediately. Rodding shall be accomplished by utilizing a rotary cutter, which shall be full size of pipe being cleaned for pipe sizes up to 6 inches. Pipe sizes 8 inches and larger shall be hydro -flushed. END OF SECTION ROOF DRAINAGE PIPING AND APPURTENANCES VLK Architects, 2007 22 1413 -2 2740.00 CREEKVIEW ELEMENTARY SCHOOL COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX SECTION 22 2000 - PLUMBING PIPE AND PIPE FITTINGS - GENERAL PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Furnish and install pipe and pipe fittings for piping systems specified in Division 22 - Mechanical. 1.02 RELATED WORK A. Division 22 Plumbing 1. Earthwork. 2. Insulation. 3. Other Piping Sections PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.01 PIPE AND FITTINGS A. The particular type of pipe and fittings for each system is specified in the individual sections. 2.02 JOINTS A. Make screwed joints using machine cut USASI taper pipe threads. Apply a suitable joint compound to the male threads only. Ream the pipe to full inside diameter after cutting. All - thread nipples are not permitted. B. Dissimilar Metals. Make joints between copper and steel pipe and equipment using insulating unions or couplings such as Crane Company #1259; EPCO as manufactured by EPCO Sales, Inc.; or an approved equal. C. Solder joints. 1. Prior to making joints, cut pipe square and ream to full inside diameter. Clean exterior of pipe and socket. Apply a thin coat of suitable fluxing compound to both pipe and socket, and fit parts together immediately. 2. Heat assembled joint only as required to cause the solder to flow. Run the joint full, slightly beaded on the outside, and wipe to remove excess solder. 3. Use silver brazing alloy or Sil-Fos on underground water entry piping. Use lead free solder on all other copper piping. D. Make welded joints as recommended by the standards of the American Welding Society. Ensure complete penetration of deposited metal with base metal. Provide filler metal suitable for use with base metal. Keep inside of fittings free from globules of weld metal. The use of mitered joints is not approved. E. Flanged. 1. Prior to installation of bolts, center and align flanged joints to prevent mechanical pre -stressing of flanges, pipe or equipment. Align bolt holes to straddle the vertical, horizontal or north -south centerline. Do not exceed 3/64" per foot inclination of the flange face from true alignment. 2. Use flat -face companion flanges only with flat -faced fittings, valves or equipment. Otherwise, use raised -face flanges. 3. Install gaskets suitable for the intended service and factory cut to proper dimensions. Secure with manufacturers recommended gasket cement. 4. Use ANSI nuts and bolts, galvanized or black to match flange material. Use ANSI 316 stainless steel nuts and bolts underground. Tighten bolts progressively to PLUMBING PIPE AND PIPE FITTINGS — GENERAL VLK Architects, 2007 22 2000 -1 2740.00 CREEKVIEW ELEMENTARY SCHOOL COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX prevent unbalanced stress. Draw bolts tight to ensure proper seating of gaskets. 5. Use carbon steel flanges conforming to ANSI 1316.5 with pipe materials conforming to ASTM A 105 Grade II or ASTM A 108, Grade II, ASTM A 53, Grade B. Use slip-on type flanges on pipe only. Use welding neck type flanges on all fittings. Weld slip-on flanges inside and outside. 6. Keep flange covers on equipment while fabricating piping. Remove when ready to install in system. F. No Hub. Hubless joints shall be made with wide body, neoprene sealing sleeve with stainless steel sleeve, coupling joints conforming to ASTM C 1277. 1. 4" pipe size and smaller coupling housing minimum of 3" width; 24 gauge Series 300 stainless steel with hi -torque clamps; neoprene coupling gasket. 2. 6" through 10" pipe size coupling housing minimum of 4" width. 3. Tighten clamps to within manufacturer's tolerances using preset torque wrench. G. Mechanical Joints. Provide a stuffing box type mechanical joint adapted to use gasket, cast iron gland and bolts. Coat bolts with bitumastic enamel. Use joint parts similar in design to one of the following: 1. Doublex Simplex Joint manufactured by the American Cast Iron Pipe Company, Birmingham, Alabama. 2. U.S. joints manufactured by the United States Pipe and Foundry Company, Burlington, New Jersey. 3. Boltite Joint manufactured by the McWane Cast Iron Pipe Company, Birmingham, Alabama. 4. Flexlamp manufactured by the National Cast Iron Pipe Company, Birmingham, Alabama. H. Compression Joints for Cast Iron Water Pipe. Use Beltite, Tyton or Grip-Tite compression joints. Install in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations for compression joints. Provide adequate concrete thrust blocks at changes of direction, as recommended by the manufacturer. I. Compression Gasket System. Bell and spigot cast iron pipe 4" and smaller, use flax -base lubricant, Tyler Ty -Seal Lubricant or Charlotte Regular Lubricant. 6" and larger use a neoprene base lubricant, Charlotte Adhesive Lubricant. J. Ring-Tite Joints: Furnish joints for installation according to manufacturer's recommendations. Provide adequate concrete thrust blocks at changes in direction, as recommended by manufacturer. K. Ball Joints. Where shown, provide flexible ball joints, made of carbon steel. Ball joints must have 150 of angular flexibility. Use welded or flanged ends, as required. Furnish with 11 N gaskets. 2.03 UNIONS A. Use 150 lb. standard (300 lb. WOG) malleable iron, ground joint unions with bronze seat. Provide flanged joints on piping 2-1/2" and larger. 1. Where pipe material of different types join, use a dielectric union. Union shall be threaded, solder or as required for its intended use. 2.04 BRANCH CONNECTIONS A. Pipe 2" and Smaller. For threaded piping, use straight size reducing tee. When branch is smaller than header, a nipple and reducing coupling or swagged nipple may be used. PLUMBING PIPE AND PIPE FITTINGS — GENERAL VLK Architects, 2007 22 2000 -2 2740.00 CREEKVIEW ELEMENTARY SCHOOL COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX B. 2-1/2" through 36". For welding piping, when branch size is the same as header size, use welding tee. Use Weld-o-let when branch is smaller than header. For threaded branch connections, use 3000 lb. full coupling or Thread-o-let welded to header. 2.05 GASKETS A. High Temperature Piping. Provide 1 /16" thick ring gaskets of aramid reinforced SBR such as Garlock #3200 or 3400 or equal by Advanced Products and Systems. B. Other Piping. Provide ring rubber gaskets, Garlock #7992 or equal by Advanced Products and Systems. Use 1/8" thick cloth reinforced neoprene gaskets. For smaller than 6", use 1 /16" thick gasket. 2.06 FLOORS AND CEILING PLATES A. Provide chrome -plated floor and ceiling plates around pipes exposed to view when passing through walls, floors, partitions, or ceilings in finished areas. Size plates to fit pipe or insulation and lock in place. 2.07 DOMESTIC MANUFACTURE A. All piping material, pipe and pipe fittings shall be manufactured in the United States of America. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 PIPE FABRICATION AND INSTALLATION A. Make piping layout and installation in the most advantageous manner possible with respect to headroom, valve access, opening and equipment clearance, and clearance for other work. Give particular attention to piping in the vicinity of equipment. Preserve the required minimum access clearances to various equipment parts, as recommended by the equipment manufactured, for maintenance. B. Cut all pipes to measurement determined at the site. After cutting pipe, remove burrs by reaming. Bevel plain ends of ferrous pipe. C. Install piping neatly, free from unnecessary traps and pockets. Work into place without springing or forcing. Use fittings to make changes in direction. Field bending and mitering is prohibited. Make connections to equipment using flanged joints, unions or couplings. Make reducing connections with reducing fittings only. D. Install piping without tapping out of the bottom of pipe. 3.02 WELD A. Weld and fabricate piping in accordance with ANSI Standard B31.1, latest edition, Code for Pressure Piping. B. Align piping and equipment so that no part is offset more than 1/16". Set fittings and joints square and true, and preserve alignment during welding operation. Use of alignment rods inside pipe is prohibited. C. Do not permit any weld to project within the pipe so as to restrict flows. Tack welds, if used, must be of the same material and made by the same procedure as the completed weld. Otherwise, remove tack welds during welding operation. PLUMBING PIPE AND PIPE FITTINGS — GENERAL VLK Architects, 2007 22 2000 -3 2740.00 CREEKVIEW ELEMENTARY SCHOOL COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX D. Do not split, bend, flatten or otherwise damage piping before, during or after installation. E. Remove dirt, scale and other foreign matter from inside piping before tying into existing piping sections, fittings, valves or equipment. F. Bevel ends of ferrous pipe. 3.03 OFFSETS AND FITTINGS A. Due to the small scale of drawings, the indication of offsets and fittings is not possible. Investigate the structural and finish conditions affecting the work and take steps required to meet these conditions. B. Install pipe close to walls, ceilings and columns so pipe will occupy minimum space. Provide proper spacing for insulation coverings, removal of pipe, special clearances, and offsets and fittings. 3.04 SECURING AND SUPPORTING A. Support piping to maintain line and grade, with provision for expansion and contraction. Use approved clevis-type or trapeze -type hangers connected to structural members of the building. Single pipe runs to be supported by approved clevis type hangers. Multiple pipe runs to be supported by approved trapeze type hangers. Do not support piping from other piping or structural joist bridging. B. Provide supports both sides of elbows for pipe 6" and larger. C. Support vertical risers with steel strap pipe clamps of approved design and size, supported at each floor. Support piping assemblies in chases so they are rigid and self -supported before the chase is closed. Provide structural support for piping penetrating chase walls to fixtures. On chilled water pipe supports shall be outside the insulation. D. Where insulation occurs, design hangers to protect insulation from damage. Pipe saddles and insulation shields, where required, are specified in the appropriate insulation section and are sized in accordance with the schedule on the drawings. E. Install trapeze hangers, properly sized, to support the intended load without distortion. F. Use electro-galvanized or zinc plated threaded rods, nuts, washers and hangers. G. At outdoor locations, all supports, brackets and structural members shall be hot -dipped galvanized. H. Provide hangers within 3' of pipe length from all coil connections. I. Support spacing: As recommended by the project structural engineer and support manufacturer, but not more than listed below. Not to exceed spacing requirements of cmallpst nine_ Copper & Steel Cast Iron Minimum Rod Pipe Size Max. Support Max. Support Diameter, Inches Spacing, Feet Spacing, Feet 1" & smaller 6 3/8 1-1/4" & 1-1/2" 8 5 3/8 2" 10 5 3/8 3" 10 5 1 /2 4" & 5" 10 5 5/8 PLUMBING PIPE AND PIPE FITTINGS — GENERAL VLK Architects, 2007 22 2000 -4 2740.00 CREEKVIEW ELEMENTARY SCHOOL COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX 6" and above 10 5 3/4 3.05 PIPE SUPPORTS A. Provide P1001 or P 5000 Unistrut metal framing members and appurtenances for pipe support. Hot -dip galvanize members and appurtenances when located outside. Sagging of pipes or supports is not acceptable. 3.06 ANCHORS A. Provide anchors as required. Use pipe anchors consisting of heavy steel collars with lugs and bolts for clamping to pipe and attaching anchor braces. Install anchor braces in the most effective manner to secure desired results. Do not install supports, anchors or similar devices where they will damage construction during installation or because of the weight or the expansion of the pipe. When possible, install sleeves in structural concrete prior to pouring of concrete. 3.07 PIPE SLEEVES A. Sleeves through masonry and concrete construction: 1. Fabricate sleeves of Schedule 40 galvanized steel pipe. 2. Size sleeve large enough to allow for movement due to expansion and to provide continuous insulation. B. Sleeves through gypsum wall construction. 1. Fabricate sleeves of 16 gauge galvanized sheet metal. C. Sleeves through elevated slab construction. 1. Fabricate sleeves of Schedule 40 galvanized steel pipe with welded center flange in floor. D. Extend each sleeve through the floor or wall. Cut the sleeve flush with each wall surface. Sleeves through floors shall extend 2" above floor lines for waterproofing purposes. Slab on grade floors shall not be sleeved except where penetrating waterproofing membrane or insect control is required. C. Caulk sleeves water and airtight. Seal annular space between pipes and sleeves with mastic compound to make the space water and airtight. D. For sleeves below grades in outside walls, provide Thunderline Link -Seal or Advance Product and System Interlynx, with 316 stainless steel nuts and bolts, with cast iron pressure plate. E. Provide chrome plated escutcheon plates on pipes passing through walls, floors or ceilings exposed to view. At exterior walls, stainless steel sheet metal is to be used. F. For sleeves through fire and smoke rated walls, seal with a UL through -penetration firestop, rated to maintain the integrity of the time rated construction. Install in accordance with the manufacturer's installation instructions. Comply with UL and NFPA standards for the installation of firestops. Refer to Architectural drawings for all fire and smoke rated partitions, walls, floors, etc. 3.08 ISOLATION VALVES A. Provide piping systems with line size shutoff valves located at the risers, at main branch connections.to mains for equipment, to isolate central plant, and at other locations. PLUMBING PIPE AND PIPE FITTINGS — GENERAL VLK Architects, 2007 22 2000 -5 2740.00 CREEKVIEW ELEMENTARY SCHOOL COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX 3.09 DRAIN VALVES A. Install drain valves at low points of water piping systems so that these systems can be entirely drained. Install a line size drain valve for pipes smaller than 2" unless indicated otherwise. For pipes 2-1/2" and larger, provide 2" drain valves unless indicated otherwise. Drain valves shall be plugged when not in use and at completion. 3.10 CLEANING OF PIPING SYSTEMS A. General cleaning of piping systems. Purge pipe of construction debris and contamination before placing the systems in service. Provide and install temporary connections as required to clean, purge and circulate. B. Install temporary strainers at the inlet of pumps and other equipment as necessary where permanent strainers are not indicated. Keep strainers in service until the equipment has been tested, then remove either entire strainer or straining element only. Fit strainers with a line size blow down ball valve and pipe to nearest drain. Blow down strainers, remove and clean as frequently as necessary. C. Phase One: Initial flushing of system. Remove loose dirt, mill scale, weld beads, rust and other deleterious substances without damage to system components. Open valves, drains, vents and strainers at all system levels during flushing procedures. Flush until "potable water clear" and particles larger than 5 microns are removed. D. Connect dead-end supply and return headers, even if not shown on the drawings, and provide terminal drains in bottom of pipe end caps or blind flanges. E. Dispose of water in approved manner. F. Phase Two: Cleaning of Piping Systems. Remove, without chemical or mechanical damage to any system component, adherent dirt (organic soil), oil, grease, (hydrocarbons), soldering flux, mill varnish, piping compounds, rust (iron oxide) and other deleterious substances not removed by initial flushing. Flush system and replace with clean water. G. Phase Three: Final flushing and rinsing: Flush and rinse until "potable water clear" and particles larger than 5 microns are removed. Operate valves to dislodge any debris in valve body. Dispose of water in approved manner. H. Submit status reports upon completion of each phase of work on each system. 3.11 PIPE MARKERS A. Identify interior exposed piping and piping in accessible chases or plenums with Opti-Code Brady Pressure Sensitive Adhesive Pipe Markers, consisting of pipe marker and direction of flow arrow tape. Clean pipe prior to installation. Background colors of markers, arrows and tape for each type of system shall be the same. Meet ANSI/OSHA standards and clearly identify each system. Minimum 2-1/4-inch letters through 4-inch pipe and 4-inch letters for 5- inch pipe and larger. B. Identify exterior and mechanical room piping with Snap Around pipe markers through 4-inch pipe and Strap Around markers 5-inch pipe and larger. Pipe markers consisting of pipe marker and direction of flow arrow tape; background colors of markers, arrows and type for each type of system shall be the same. Meet ANSI / OSHA standards and clearly identify each system. Minimum 2-1/4-inch letters through 4-inch pipe and 4-inch letters for 5-inch pipe and larger. PLUMBING PIPE AND PIPE FITTINGS — GENERAL VLK Architects, 2007 22 2000 -6 2740.00 CREEKVIEW ELEMENTARY SCHOOL COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX C. Install identification in the following locations: 1. both sides of penetrations through walls, floors and ceilings. 2. Close to valves or flanges. 3. Intervals on straight pipe runs not to exceed 50 feet 4. Apply marker where view is obstructed. D. Pipe markers shall meet or exceed the specifications of the ASME A13.1 "Scheme for Identification of Piping Systems". END OF SECTION PLUMBING PIPE AND PIPE FITTINGS — GENERAL VLK Architects, 2007 22 2000 -7 2740.00 CREEKVIEW ELEMENTARY SCHOOL COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX SECTION 22 3313 - INSTANTANEOUS ELECTRIC WATER HEATER PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Electric water heaters for domestic water systems. 1.02 RELATED WORK A. Division 22 Plumbing 1. Domestic Water Piping. 2. Plumbing Piping Insulation. 3. Division 26 Electrical. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Chronomite B. EEMAX 2.02 PRODUCTS A. Provide tankless, flow switch activated heater. B. Hot water temperature range of 1030F to 120°F. C. 0.5 GPM flow rate. D. Low pressure model if required. Contractor shall verify pressure at site. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install where shown on Drawings and in accordance with manufacturer's requirements. END OF SECTION INSTANTANEOUS ELECTRIC WATER HEATER VLK Architects, 2007 22 3313 - 1 2740.00 CREEKVIEW ELEMENTARY SCHOOL COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX SECTION 22 3333.13 — GAS -FIRED DOMESTIC WATER HEATER PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Gas -fired domestic hot water heating systems, including hot water heaters, storage tanks, control valves, and pressure and temperature relief valves, as required. 1.02 RELATED ITEMS A. Division 22 Plumbing 1. Domestic Water Piping. 2. Gas Piping. 3. Flue Piping. 4. Plumbing Piping Insulation. 1.03 CERTIFICATION A. Provide water heater listed by UL Laboratories, according to ANSZ21.10 Standards governing storage -type water heaters. Must meet ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1-1999 and be design - certified by Underwriter's Laboratories for 180OF water. Must meet SCAOMD Rule 1146.2 for low-nox emissions. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 CAPACITY A. Water heaters shall have the storage capacity and gallons per hour recovery at 100°F rise as scheduled. 2.02 TANK A. Construct the tank with a 125 psi ASME rating in accordance with the ASME Code, Section IV. Tank shall have a seamless glass -lined steel tank construction. B. Powered Anodes. 2.03 BURNER A. A spiral -shaped heat exchanger placed entirely inside the tank which shall be glass -lined on the flue gas side to protect against acidic flue gas condensate. B. Heater shall have a down=fired power burner designed for precise mixing of air and gas for optimum efficiency, requiring no special calibration on start-up. 2.04 INSULATION A. Insulate the water heater with factory applied foam insulation and trim with a heavy -gauge, enameled steel jacket. 2.05 CONTROLS A. Furnish 120V controls for heaters of 100,000 BTUH and above. Controls shall be an integrated solid-state temperature and ignition control device with integral diagnostics, LED fault display capability, and a digital display of temperature system. GAS -FIRED DOMESTIC WATER HEATER VLK Architects, 2007 22 3333.13 - 1 2740.00 CREEKVIEW ELEMENTARY SCHOOL COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX 2.06 FLUE A. This water heater(s) shall be suitable for sealed combustion direct -venting with 4" diameter PVC air intake pipe and 4" diameter PVC exhaust pipe for a total of 70 feet of intake and 70 feet of exhaust. Provide a properly sized thermal expansion tank as scheduled on drawings. 2.07 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. A.O. Smith B. Lochinvar PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install a line size valve in the cold water supply close to each heater and a line size plug cock in the gas supply close to each heater. B. Provide approved dielectric couplings at all cold water and hot water connections to storage tank, and at pressure and temperature relief valve connection. C. Install according to manufacturer's specifications and pipe as shown. D. Install water heater in galvanized drain pan piped to floor drain. Provide 3/a" outlet connection. END OF SECTION GAS -FIRED DOMESTIC WATER HEATER VLK Architects, 2007 22 3333.13 - 2 2740.00 CREEKVIEW ELEMENTARY SCHOOL COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX SECTION 22 3333 - ELECTRIC WATER HEATER (Commercial ASME) PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Electric water heaters for domestic water systems. 1.02 RELATED WORK A. Division 22 Plumbing: 1. Domestic Water Piping. 2. Plumbing Piping Insulation. 3. Division 26 Electrical. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. A. O. Smith B. Lochinvar 2.02 PRODUCTS A. Provide electric water heaters with kilowatt, recovery ratings, and storage capacities as scheduled on drawings. B. Provide an ASME code construction tank designed for 150 psig working pressure. Furnish glass -lined tank. Lining shall be corrosion -resistant. C. Furnish factory -assembled, integral units equipped as follows: 1. Immersion thermostat. 2. High temperature limit switch (energy cutout). 3. Low-water cutoff. 4. Heavy duty UL rated for 100,000 cycles. 5. Temperature and pressure relief valve. 6. Anode rod. D. Provide heavy-duty, medium watt density elements having nickel alloy sheathing and prewired leads. E. The entire vessel shall be enclosed in a round steel enclosure with baked enamel finish and shall enclose the tank with R-16 foam insulation. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Provide at each heater an automatic temperature and pressure relief valve with rating matching or exceeding the energy input rate. B. Pipe the discharge port to a point of visible and safe disposal required by codes and the drawings. C. Provide temperature gauges. D. Install water heater in galvanized drain pan piped to floor drain. Provide 3/a" outlet connection. END OF SECTION ELECTRIC WATER HEATER VLK Architects, 2007 22 3333.16 - 1 2740.00 CREEKVIEW ELEMENTARY SCHOOL COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX SECTION 22 3436.13 - GAS -FIRED DOMESTIC WATER HEATER (Small Commercial Gas Tank Type) PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Gas -fired domestic hot water heating systems, including hot water heaters, storage tanks, control valves, and pressure and temperature relief valves, as required. 1.02 RELATED ITEMS A. Division 22 Plumbing 1. Domestic Water Piping. 2. Gas Piping 3. Flue Piping 4. Plumbing Piping Insulation. 1.03 CERTIFICATION A. Provide water heater listed by the American Gas Association Laboratories as a circulating - tank water heater and automatic storage water heater for outlet water temperature of 140°F. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 CAPACITY A. Water heaters shall have the storage capacity and gallons per hour recovery at 100°F rise as scheduled. 2.02 TANK A. Construct the tank with a 125 psi ASME rating in accordance with the ASME Code, Section IV. Tank lining shall be epoxy or glass. 2.03 BURNER A. Multiple tubular constructed steel burner, mounted in a removable tray to permit field replacement. 2.04 INSULATION A. Insulate the water heater with factory applied fiberglass or foam and trim with a heavy -gauge, enameled steel jacket. 2.05 CONTROLS A. Furnish 120V controls for heaters of 100,000 BTUH and above. Provide controls designed to shut off the gas to main burners and pilot burners in the event of gas or pilot failure. B. Include a temperature limiting device with automatic reset, an ASME-rated pressure relief valve, and a manual gas shut-off valve. 2.06 FLUE A. Use water heater flues of indicated sizes and as specified in other sections. Extend flues from the diverter through the roof and terminate with a vacuum cap of approved design. Include an approved flashing where the flue pierces the roof. GAS -FIRED DOMESTIC WATER HEATER (Small Commercial Gas Tank Type) VLK Architects, 2007 22 3436.13 - 1 2740.00 CREEKVIEW ELEMENTARY SCHOOL COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX 2.07 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Lochinvar B. A. O. Smith PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install a line size valve in the cold water supply close to each heater and a line size plug cock in the gas supply close to each heater. B. Provide approved dielectric couplings at all cold water and hot water connections to storage tank, and at pressure and temperature relief valve connection. C. Install according to manufacturer's specifications and pipe as shown. D. Install water heater in galvanized drain pan piped to floor drain. Provide 3/a" outlet connection. END OF SECTION GAS -FIRED DOMESTIC WATER HEATER (Small Commercial Gas Tank Type) VLK Architects, 2007 22 3436.13 - 2 2740.00 CREEKVIEW ELEMENTARY SCHOOL COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX SECTION 22 4000 - PLUMBING FIXTURES AND FIXTURE CARRIERS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Furnish and install water closets, urinals, lavatories, electric drinking fountains, fixture carriers and plumbing appurtenances. 1.02 RELATED WORK A. Division 22 Plumbing 1. Drains, Hydrants and Cleanouts. 2. Domestic Water Piping. 3. Soil, Waste and Sanitary Drain Piping and Vent Piping. 1.03 JOB REQUIREMENTS A. Furnish plumbing fixtures and trim as shown and specified. Provide faucets, fittings, supply stops and similar devices of a single manufacturer. Furnish faucets and supply stops with renewable seats. Porcelain to steel and enameled cast iron fixtures shall be acid resistant. Wall hung fixtures shall be installed with a fixture carrier. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Plumbing Fixtures (Vitreous China): 1. American Standard. 2. Eljer. 3. Kohler. 4. Toto 5. Zurn B. Plumbing Faucets: 1. American Standard. 2. Chicago. 3. T&S Brass. 4. Zurn. 5. Symmons 6. Speakman C. Supports and Carriers: 1. Zurn. 2. J.R. Smith. 3. Josam. 4. MIFAB D. Flush Valves: 1. Sloan 2. Zurn E. Supplies, Stops and Chrome Plated Tubular Brass: 1. McGuire 2. Kohler PLUMBING FIXTURES AND FIXTURE CARRIERS VLK Architects, 2007 22 4000 - 1 2740.00 CREEKVIEW ELEMENTARY SCHOOL COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX 3. Chicago 4. Zurn F. Water Closet Seats: 1. Beneke 2. Church 3. Olsonite 4. Bemis 5. Centoco G. Electric Drinking Fountains: 1. Halsey Taylor 2. Elkay 3. Oasis 4. Acorn Aqua H. Floor Drains: 1. Zurn 2. J.R. Smith 3. Josam 4. Sioux Chief 5. MIFAB 1. Cleanouts: 1. Zurn 2. J.R. Smith 3. Josam 4. MIFAB 5. Sioux Chief J. Shower Valves 1. Chicago 2. Acorn 3. Symmons 4. Bradley K. Stainless Steel Sinks: 1. Elkay 2. Just 3. Griffin L. Mop Sinks: 1. Crane Fiat 2. Stern Williams 3. CECO M. Roof Drains: 1. J.R. Smith 2. Josam 3. Zurn 4. MIFAB N. Thermostatic Mixing Valves 1. Lawler 2. Symmons 3. Powers PLUMBING FIXTURES AND FIXTURE CARRIERS VLK Architects, 2007 22 4000 - 2 2740.00 CREEKVIEW ELEMENTARY SCHOOL COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX O. Shock Arrestors: 1. Precision Products 2. Sioux Chief P. Backflow Preventors 1. Watts 2. Febco 3. Wilkins Q. Hose Bibbs 1. Chicago 2. Josam 3. Woodford 4. Zurn 5. J.R. Smith 5. MIFAB R. Wall Hydrants 1. Woodford 2. MIFAB 3. Zurn 4. J.R. Smith 5. Josam S. Solids Interceptors 1. J.R. Smith 2. Zurn 3. Josam 4. MIFAB 2.02 REQUIREMENTS A. Refer to the drawings for equipment to be supplied. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Installation shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. B. Make rough -in and final connection of service to each fixture provided under this Section and other Sections or Architectural or Plumbing Drawings. C. Provide necessary stops, valves, traps, unions, vents, cold water, hot water, sanitary, etc. for a complete installation. D. Remove piping and services roughed -in incorrectly and install correctly, without cost. E. Exposed piping, fittings and appurtenances shall be chrome -plated brass. F. Coordinate with the Contractor for locations and service required for each plumbing fixture. G. All floor drains and floor sinks shall have Pro -Set "Trap Guard" for trap seal protection. PLUMBING FIXTURES AND FIXTURE CARRIERS VLK Architects, 2007 22 4000 - 3 2740.00 CREEKVIEW ELEMENTARY SCHOOL COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX H. All floor drains and floor sink locations are to be coordinated with all equipment. Locate drains in mechanical equipment spaces to conform to drain locations of equipment furnished. Coordinate drain location with food service equipment and Architectural Drawings. All floor drains, floor sinks and cleanout covers are to be provided with stainless steel vandal resistant screws. END OF SECTION PLUMBING FIXTURES AND FIXTURE CARRIERS VLK Architects, 2007 22 4000 - 4 2740.00 CREEKVIEW ELEMENTARY SCHOOL COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX SECTION 23 0100 - HVAC OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS PART 1-GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Compilation product data and related information appropriate for Owner's operation and maintenance of products furnished under Contract. Prepare operating and maintenance data as specified. B. Instruct Owner's personnel in operation and maintenance of equipment and systems. C. Submit three copies of complete manual in final form. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Thirty (30) days after the Contractor has received the final scheduled identified submittals bearing the Architect/Engineer's stamp of acceptance (including resubmittals), submit for review one copy of the first draft of the Operating and Maintenance Manual. This copy shall contain as a minimum: 1. Table of Contents for each element. 2. Contractor information. 3. All submittals, coordination drawings and product data, reviewed by the Architect/Engineer; bearing the Architect/Engineer's stamp of acceptance. (When submittals are returned from Engineer "Correct as Noted", corrected inserts shall be included.) 4. All parts and maintenance manuals for items of equipment. 5. Warranties (without starting dates) 6. Certifications that have been completed. Submit forms and outlines of certifications that have not been completed. 7. Operating and maintenance procedures. 8. Form of Owner's Training Program Syllabus (including times and dates). 9. Control operations/equipment wiring diagrams. 10. Schedule of filters for each item of equipment. 11. Schedule of belts for each item of equipment. 12. Other required operating and maintenance information that are complete. B. Copy will be returned to the Contractor within 15 days with comments for corrections. C. Submit three (3) completed manuals in final form to the Architect/Engineer one day after substantial completion, and prior to Owner's instructions. Include all specified data, test and balance reports, drawings, dated warranties, certificates, reports, along with other materials and information. D. The Architect/Engineer will review the manuals for completeness within fifteen (15) days. E. The Contractor shall be notified of any missing or omitted materials. The Manuals shall be reworked by the Contractor, as required, in the office of the Architect / Engineer. The manuals will not be retransmitted. F. Two (2) complete Manuals will be delivered to the Owner. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 BINDERS A. Commercial quality black three-ring binders with clear overlay plastic covers. HVAC OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS VLK Architects, 2007 23 0100 - 1 2740.00 CREEKVIEW ELEMENTARY SCHOOL COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX B. Minimum ring size: 1". Maximum ring size: 3". C. When multiple binders are used, correlate the data into related groupings. D. Label contents on spine and face of binder with full size insert. Label under plastic cover. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL A. Form for Manuals: 1. Prepare data in form of an instructional manual for use by Owner's personnel. 2. Format: a. Size: 8-1/2" x 11 ". b. Text: Manufacturer's printed data or neatly typewritten. 3. Drawings: a. Provide reinforced punched binder tab and bind in text. b. Fold larger drawings to size of text pages. 4. Provide flyleaf indexed tabs for each separate product or each piece of operating equipment. 5. Cover: Identify each volume with typed or printed title "Operating and Maintenance Instructions". List: a. Title of Project b. Identity of separate structures as applicable. C. Identity of general subject matter covered in the manual. 6. Binder as specified. B. Content of Manual: 1. Neatly typewritten Table of Contents for each volume arranged in systematic order as outlined in the specifications. a. Contractor, name of responsible principal, address and telephone number. b. A list of each product required to be included, indexed to content of the volume. C. List with each product, name, address and telephone number of: 1) Subcontractor or installer. 2) Maintenance contractor as appropriate. 3) Identify area of responsibility of each. 4) Local source of supply for parts and replacement. d. Identify each product by product name and other identifying symbols as set forth in Contract Documents. 2. Product Data: a. Include those sheets pertinent to the specific product. b. Annotate each sheet to: 1) Identify specific product or part installed. 2) Identify data applicable to installation. 3) Delete references to inapplicable information. (All options not supplied with equipment shall be marked out indicated in some manner. 3. Drawings: a. Supplement product data with drawings as necessary to illustrate: 1) Relations of component parts of equipment and systems. 2) Control and flow diagrams. b. Coordinate drawings with information in Project Record Documents to assure correct illustration of completed installation. C. Do not use Project Record Documents as maintenance drawings. HVAC OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS VLK Architects, 2007 23 0100 - 2 2740.00 CREEKVIEW ELEMENTARY SCHOOL COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX 4. Written text, as required to supplement product data for the particular installation: a. Organize in consistent format under separate headings for different procedures. b. Provide logical sequence of instructions for each procedure. 5. Copy of each warranty, bond and service contract issued. a. Provide information sheet for Owner's personnel, giving: 1) Proper procedures in event of failure. 2) Instances that might affect validity of warranties or bonds. 6. Shop drawings, coordination drawings and product data as specified. C. Sections for Equipment and Systems. 1. Content for each unit of equipment and system as appropriate: a. Description of unit and component parts. 1) Function, normal operating characteristics, and limiting conditions. 2) Performance curves, engineering data and tests. 3) Complete nomenclature and commercial number of replaceable parts. b. Operating procedures: 1) Start up, break-in, routine and normal operating instructions. 2) Regulation, control, stopping, shut down and emergency instructions. 3) Summer and winter operating instructions. 4) Special operating instructions. C. Maintenance procedures: 1) Routine operations 2) Guide to trouble -shooting. 3) Disassembly, repair and reassembly. 4) Alignment, adjusting and checking. 5) Routine service based on operating hours. d. Servicing and lubrication schedule. List of lubricants required. e. Manufacturer's printed operating and maintenance instructions. f. Description of sequence of operation by control manufacturer. g. Original manufacturer's parts list, illustrations, assembly drawings and diagrams required for maintenance. 1) Predicted life of part subject to wear. 2) Items recommended to be stocked as spare parts. h. As installed control diagrams by controls manufacturer. i. Complete equipment internal wiring diagrams. j. Schedule of filters for each air handling system. k. Schedule of belts for each item of equipment. I. Each Contractor's coordination drawings. M. As installed color coded piping diagrams. n. Charts of valve tag number, with location and function of each valve. o. List of original manufacturer's spare parts and recommended quantities to be maintained in storage. p. Other data as required under pertinent sections of the specifications. 2. Prepare and include additional data when the need for such data becomes apparent during instruction of Owner's personnel. 3. Additional requirements for operating and maintenance data as outlined in respective sections of specifications. 4. Provide complete information for products specified in Division 23. 5. Provide certificates of compliance as specified in each related section. 6. Provide start up reports as specified in each related section. 7. Provide signed receipts for'spare parts and material. 8. Provide training report and certificates. END OF SECTION HVAC OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS VLK Architects, 2007 23 0100 - 3 2740.00 CREEKVIEW ELEMENTARY SCHOOL COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX SECTION 23 0500 - MECHANICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Except as modified in this Section, General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, applicable provisions of the General Requirements, and other provisions and requirements of the contract documents apply to work of Division 23 Mechanical. B. Applicable provisions of this section apply to all sections of Division 23, Mechanical. 1.02 CODE REQUIREMENTS, AND FEES A. Perform work in accordance with applicable statutes, ordinances, codes and regulations of governmental authorities having jurisdiction. B. Mechanical work shall comply with applicable inspection services: 1. Underwriters Laboratories 2. National Fire Protection Association 3. State Health Department 4. Local Municipal Building Inspection Department 5. Texas Department of Licensing & Regulations (ADA) C. Resolve any code violations discovered in contract documents with the Engineer prior to award of the contract. After Contract award, any correction or additions necessary for compliance with applicable codes shall be made at no additional cost to the Owner. D. This Contractor shall be responsible for being aware of and complying with asbestos NESHAP regulations, as well as all other applicable codes, laws and regulations. E. Obtain all permits required. 1.03 CONTRACTOR'S QUALIFICATIONS A. An approved contractor for the work under this division shall be: 1. A specialist in this field and have the personnel, experience, training, skill, and organization to provide a practical working system 2. Able to furnish evidence of having contracted for and installed not less than 3 systems of comparable size and type that have served their Owners satisfactorily for not less than 3 years 1.04 REFERENCE SPECIFICATIONS AND STANDARDS A. Materials which are specified by reference to Federal Specifications; ASTM, ASME, ANSI, or AW WA Specifications; Federal Standards; or other standard specifications must comply with latest editions, revisions, amendments or supplements in effect on date bids are received. Requirements in reference specifications and standards are minimum for all equipment, material, and work. In instances where specified capacities, size, or other features of equipment, devices, or materials exceed these minimums, meet specified capacities. 1.05 CONTRACT DRAWINGS A. Contract drawings are diagrammatic only and do not give fully dimensioned locations of various elements of work. Determine exact locations from field measurements. MECHANICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS VLK Architects, 2007 23 0500 - 1 2740.00 CREEKVIEW ELEMENTARY SCHOOL COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX 1.06 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS A. Maintain at the job site a separate set of white prints (blue line or black line) of the contract drawings for the sole purpose of recording the "as -built" changes and diagrams of those portions of work in which actual construction is at variance with the contract drawings. Mark the drawings with a colored pencil. Prepare, as the work progresses and upon completion of work, reproducible drawings clearly indicating locations of various lines, valves, ductwork, traps, equipment, and other pertinent items, as installed. Include flow -line elevation of sewer lines. Record existing and new underground and under slab piping with dimensioned locations and elevations of such piping. B. At the conclusion of project, obtain without cost to the Owner, erasable mylars of the original drawings and transfer as -built changes to these. Prior to transmittal of corrected drawings, obtain 3 sets of blue -line prints of each drawing, regardless of whether corrections were necessary and include in the transmittal (2 sets are for the Owner's use and one set is for the Architect/Engineer's records). Delivery of these as -built prints and reproducibles is a condition of final acceptance. Provide record drawings on one set each (reproducible Dayrex mylar film positives) and AutoCad 2000 files on disk (CD Rom). C. As -Built drawings should indicate the following information as a minimum: 1. Indicate all addendum changes to documents. 2. Remove Engineer's seal, name, address and logo from drawings. 3. Mark documents AS -BUILT DRAWINGS. 4. Clearly indicate: DOCUMENT PRODUCED BY 5. Indicate all changes to construction during construction. Indicate actual routing of all piping, ductwork, etc. that were deviated from construction drawings. 6. Indicate exact location of all underground mechanical piping and elevation. 7. Indicate exact location of all underground electrical raceways and elevations. 8. Correct schedules to reflect (actual) equipment furnished and manufacturer. 9. Location and size of all ductwork and mechanical piping above ceiling including exact location of isolation of domestic and mechanical valves. 10. Exact location of all electrical equipment in and outside of the building. 11. Exact location of all roof mounted equipment, wall, roof and floor penetrations. 12. Cloud all changes. 1.07 SPACE REQUIREMENTS A. Consider space limitations imposed by contiguous work in selection and location of equipment and material. Do not provide equipment or material that is not suitable in this respect. 1.08 RELATION WITH OTHER TRADES A. Carefully study all matters and conditions concerning the project. Submit notification of conflict in ample time to prevent unwarranted changes in any work. Review other Divisions of these specifications to determine their requirements. B. Because of the complicated relationship of this work to the total project, conscientiously study the relation and cooperate as necessary to accomplish the full intent of the documents. C. Provide sleeves and inserts in forms as required for the work. Stub up and protect open ends of pipe before any concrete is placed. Furnish sizes of required equipment pads. Furnish and locate bolts and fittings required to be cast in them. D. Locate and size openings required for installation of work specified in this Division in sufficient time to prevent delay in the work. MECHANICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS VLK Architects, 2007 23 0500 - 2 2740.00 CREEKVIEW ELEMENTARY SCHOOL COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX E. Refer to other Divisions of the specifications for the scope of required connections to equipment furnished under that Division. Determine from the Contractor for the various trades, the Owner, and by direction from the Architect/Engineer, the exact location of all items. 1.09 CONCEALED AND EXPOSED WORK A. When the word "concealed" is used in connection with insulating, painting, piping, ducts and the like, the work is understood to mean hidden from sight as in chases, furred spaces or above ceilings. "Exposed" is understood to mean open to view. 1.10 GUARANTEE A. Guarantee work for 1 year from the date of substantial completion of the project. During that period make good any faults or imperfections that may arise due to defects or omissions in material, equipment or workmanship. At the Owner's option, replacement of failed parts or equipment shall be provided. 1.11 MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT A. Furnish new and unused materials and equipment meeting the requirements of the paragraph specifying acceptable manufacturers. Where two or more units of the same type or class of equipment are required, provide units of a single manufacturer. 1.12 NOISE AND VIBRATION A. Select equipment to operate with minimum noise and vibration. If objectionable noise or vibration is produced or transmitted to or through the building structure by equipment, piping, ducts or other parts of work, rectify such conditions at no additional cost. If the item of equipment is judged to produce objectionable noise or vibration, demonstrate at no additional cost that equipment performs within designated limits on a vibration chart. 1.13 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers names and catalog number specified under sections of Division 23 are used to establish standards of design, performance, quality and serviceability and not to limit competition. Equipment of similar design, equal to that specified, manufactured by a named manufacturer will be acceptable on approval. A request for prior approval of equipment not listed must be submitted ten (10) days before bid due date. Submit complete design and performance data to the Engineer. 1.14 OPERATING TESTS A. After all mechanical systems have been completed and put into operation, subject each system to an operating test under design conditions to ensure proper sequencing and operation throughout the range of operation. Tests shall be made in the presence of the Architect/Engineer. Make adjustments as required to ensure proper functioning of all systems. Special tests on individual systems are specified under individual sections. Submit 3 copies of all certifications and test reports adequately in advance of completion of the work to allow for remedial action as required to correct deficiencies discovered in equipment and systems. 1.15 WARRANTIES A. Submit 3 copies of all warranties and guarantees for systems, equipment, devices and materials. These shall be included in the Operating and Maintenance Manuals. MECHANICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS VLK Architects, 2007 23 0500 - 3 2740.00 CREEKVIEW ELEMENTARY SCHOOL COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX 1.16 BUILDING CONSTRUCTION A. It shall be the responsibility of each sub -contractor to consult the Architectural and Engineering drawings, details, and specifications and thoroughly familiarize himself with the project and all job related requirements. Each sub -contractor shall cooperate with the General Contractor to verify that all piping and other items are placed in the walls, furred spaces, chases, etc., so there will be no delays in the job. PART 2 - PRODUCTS — NOT USED PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 OPENINGS A. Framed, cast or masonry openings for ductwork, equipment or piping are specified under other divisions. Drawings and layout work for exact size and location of all openings are included under this division. 3.02 AIR FILTERS AND PIPE STRAINERS A. Immediately prior to substantial completion of the project, inspect, clean and service air filters and strainers. Replace air filters. 3.03 LUBRICATION, REFRIGERANT AND OIL A. Provide a complete charge of correct lubricant for each item of equipment requiring lubrication. B. Provide a complete and working charge of proper refrigerant, free of contaminants, into each refrigerant system. After each system has been in operation long enough to ensure completely balanced conditions, check the charge and modify for proper operation as required. C. Provide a complete charge of special oil for refrigeration use, suitable for operation with refrigerant, in each system. 3.04 HOUSEKEEPING PADS A. Provide equipment housekeeping pads under all floor mounted and ground mounted HVAC and plumbing equipment, and as shown on the drawings. B. Concrete work as specified C. Concrete pads: 1. 4" thick unless otherwise indicated on the drawings. 2. Chamfer strips at edges and corner of forms. 3. Smooth steel trowel finish. 3.05 INSTRUCTION OF OWNER'S PERSONNEL A. Prior to final inspection, conduct an on -site training program to instruct the Owner's operating personnel in the operation and maintenance of the mechanical systems. 1. Provide the training during the Owner's regular working day. 2. The Instructors shall each be experienced in their phase of operation and maintenance of building mechanical systems and with the project. MECHANICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS VLK Architects, 2007 23 0500 - 4 2740.00 CREEKVIEW ELEMENTARY SCHOOL COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX B. Time to be allocated for instructions. 1. Minimum of 24 hours dedicated instructor time. 2. 8 hours on each of 3 days. C. Before proceeding with the on -site training program, submit the program syllabus; proposed time and dates; and other pertinent information for review and approval. 1. One copy to the Owner. 2. One copy to the Architect/Engineer. D. The Owner will provide a list of personnel to receive instructions, and will coordinate their attendance at the agreed upon times. E. Use the operation and maintenance manuals as the basis of instruction. Review contents of manual with personnel in detail to explain all aspects of operation and maintenance. F. Demonstrate start-up, operation, control, adjustment, trouble -shooting, servicing, maintenance, and shut down of each item of equipment. G. Demonstrate equipment functions (both individually and as part of the total integrated system)- H. Prepare and insert additional data in the operating and maintenance manuals when the need for additional data becomes apparent during instructions. Submit a report within one week after completion of the training program that instructions have been satisfactorily completed. Give time and date of each demonstration and hours devoted to the demonstration, with a list of people present. J. At the conclusion of the on -site training program, have the person designated by the Owner sign a certificate to certify that he/she has a proper understanding of the system, that the demonstrations and instructions have been satisfactorily completed, and the scope and content of the operating and maintenance manuals used for the training program are satisfactory. K. Provide a copy of the report and the certificate in an appropriately tabbed section of each Operating and Maintenance Manual. 3.06 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION A. Provide a laminated engraved plastic nameplate on each piece of equipment and starter. 1. Designation approved by Architect/Engineer. 2. Equipment includes, but is not limited to, air handling units, fan coil units, variable volume boxes, fans, pumps, boilers and chillers. 3. Submit schedule of equipment to be included and designations. B. Provide nameplates with 1/2" high letters and fastened with epoxy or screws. 3.07 OBSTRUCTIONS A. The drawings indicate certain information pertaining to surface and subsurface obstructions which has been taken from available drawings. Such information is not guaranteed, however, as to accuracy of location or complete information. 1. Before any cutting or trenching operations are begun, verify with Owner's representative, utility companies, municipalities, and other interested parties that all available information has been provided. MECHANICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS VLK Architects, 2007 23 0500 - 5 2740.00 CREEKVIEW ELEMENTARY SCHOOL COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX 2. Should obstruction be encountered, whether shown or not, alter routing of new work, reroute existing lines, remove obstruction where permitted, or otherwise perform whatever work is necessary to satisfy the purpose of the new work and leave existing services and structures in a satisfactory and serviceable condition. B. Assume total responsibility for and repair any damage to existing utilities or construction, whether or not such existing facilities are shown. 3.08 PROTECTION A. Protect work, equipment, fixtures, and materials. At work completion, work must be clean and in original manufacturer's condition. 3.09 INDOOR AIR QUALITY A. All equipment and ductwork shall be installed to allow sufficient space for testing, maintenance, and commissioning functions. Access doors or panels shall be installed in ventilation equipment, ductwork, and plenum enclosures for inspection and cleaning of outdoor air intakes, mixing plenums, up and downstream of coils, filters, drain pans and fans. B. Practice source control and eliminate potential contaminants in material selection, installation, and maintenance. C. Provide installation and disposal instructions for all materials and chemicals that are potential contaminants. D. Obtain and conform to the requirements of the Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDSs) in the use of materials. E. Utilize manufacturer's recommendations and provide installation instructions for all chemicals, compounds, and potential contaminants including pre -installation degassing if required. F. Ventilate completed building prior to final completion using no less than design outside air for at least 48 hours before occupancy. G. Make provisions for controls to prevent the entry of air contaminants into the HVAC air distribution system. H. Steps shall be taken to ensure that the HVAC system continues to function effectively and are not damaged or contaminated during construction activities. END OF SECTION MECHANICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS VLK Architects, 2007 23 0500 - 6 2740.00 CREEKVIEW ELEMENTARY SCHOOL COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX SECTION 23 0510 - HVAC CONTRACT QUALITY CONTROL PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Contract quality control including workmanship, manufacturer's instructions, mock-ups and demonstrations. 1.02 QUALITY CONTROL PROGRAM A. Maintain quality control over supervision, subcontractors, suppliers, manufacturers, products, services, site conditions and workmanship to produce work in accordance with contract documents. 1.03 WORKMANSHIP A. Comply with industry standards except when more restrictive tolerances or specified requirements indicate more rigid standards or more precise workmanship. B. Perform work by persons qualified to produce workmanship of specified quality. C. Secure products in place with positive anchorage devices designed and sized to withstand stresses, vibration, and racking. Under no conditions shall material or equipment be suspended from structural bridging. D. Provide finishes to match approved samples. All exposed finishes shall be approved by the Architect. Submit color samples as required. 1.04 MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS A. Comply with instructions in full detail, including each step in sequence. B. Should instruction conflict with Contract Documents, request clarification from Architect / Engineer before proceeding. 1.05 MANUFACTURER'S CERTIFICATES A. When required in individual Specification Sections, submit manufacturer's certificate in duplicate, certifying that products meet or exceed specified requirements. 1.06 MANUFACTURER'S FIELD SERVICES A. When required in individual Specification Sections, manufacturer shall provide qualified personnel to observe: 1. Field conditions. 2. Condition of installation. 3. Quality of workmanship. 4. Start-up of equipment. 5. Testing, adjusting, and balancing of equipment. B. Representative shall make written report of observations and recommendations to Architect / Engineer. HVAC CONTRACT QUALITY CONTROL VLK Architects, 2007 23 0510 - 1 2740.00 CREEKVIEW ELEMENTARY SCHOOL COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX 1.07 MOCK-UPS A. Assemble and erect the specified equipment and products complete, with specified anchorage and support devices, seals and finishes. B. Do not proceed with any work involving a mock-up, until the related mock-up has been approved in writing. C. Acceptable mock-ups in place shall be retained in the completed work. D. Perform tests and submit results as specified. 1.08 SCHEDULING OF MOCK-UPS A. Schedule demonstration and observation of mock-ups, in phases, with Architect / Engineer 1. Rough -in. 2. Finish with all appurtenances in place. 3. Insulation installed. 4. Demonstrations. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.01 REFERENCE APPLICABLE SPECIFICATION SECTIONS. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 PROTECTION OF EQUIPMENT A. Do not deliver equipment to the project site until progress of construction has reached the stage where equipment is actually needed or until building is closed in enough to protect the equipment from weather. Equipment allowed to stand in the weather will be rejected, and the Contractor is obligated to furnish new equipment of a like kind at no additional cost to the Owner. B. Adequately protect equipment from damage after delivery to the project. Cover with heavy tarpaulins, drop cloths or other protective coverings as required to protect from plaster, paint, mortar and/or dirt. Do not cover with plastic materials and trap condensate and cause corrosion. END OF SECTION HVAC CONTRACT QUALITY CONTROL VLK Architects, 2007 23 0510 - 2 2740.00 CREEKVIEW ELEMENTARY SCHOOL COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX SECTION 23 0512 - SHOP DRAWINGS; COORDINATION DRAWINGS & PRODUCT DATA PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Prepare submittals as required by these specifications as outlined below. B. The term submittal, as used herein, refers to all: 1. Shop Drawings 2. Coordination Drawings 3. Product data C. Submittals shall be prepared and produced for: 1. Distribution as specified 2. Inclusion in the Operating and Maintenance Manual, as specified, in the related section 1.02 SHOP DRAWINGS A. Present drawings in a clear and thorough manner. Identify details by reference to sheet and detail, schedule, or room numbers shown on Contract Drawings. B. Show all dimensions of each item of equipment on a single composite Shop Drawing. Do not submit a series of drawings of components. C. Identify field dimensions; show relationship to adjacent features, critical features, work, or products. D. Submit shop drawings in plan, elevation and sections, showing equipment in mechanical equipment areas. 1.03 COORDINATION DRAWINGS A. Present in a clear and thorough manner. Title each drawing with project name. Identify each element of drawings by reference to sheet number and detail, or room number of contract documents. Minimum drawing scale:'/a" = V-0". B. Prepare coordination drawings to coordinate installations for efficient use of available space, for proper sequence of installation, and to resolve conflicts. Coordinate with work specified in other sections and other divisions of the specifications. C. For each mechanical room and for each outside equipment pad where equipment is located, submit plan and elevation drawings. Show: 1. Actual mechanical equipment and components to be furnished 2. Service clearance 3. Relationship to other equipment and components 4. Roof drains and leader piping 5. Fire protection piping and equipment D. Identify field dimensions. Show relation to adjacent or critical features of work or products. E. Related requirements: 1. Ductwork shop drawings 2. Coordination drawing specified in Division 26 SHOP DRAWINGS, COORDINATION DRAWINGS & PRODUCT DATA VLK Architects, 2007 23 0512 - 1 2740.00 CREEKVIEW ELEMENTARY SCHOOL COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX F. Submit shop drawings in plan, elevation and sections, showing equipment in mechanical equipment areas. G. Gas piping sketch indicating proposed location of piping prior to proceeding with the installation. 1.04 PRODUCT DATA AND INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION A. Submit only pages which are pertinent to the project. All options which are indicated on the product data shall become part of the contract and shall be required whether specified are not. B. Mark each copy of standard printed data to identify pertinent products, referenced to specification section and article number. C. Show reference standards, performance characteristics and capacities; wiring and piping diagrams and controls; component parts; finishes; dimensions and required clearances. D. Modify manufacturer's standard schematic drawings and diagrams to supplement standard information and to provide information specifically applicable to the work. Delete information not applicable. E. Mark up a copy of the specifications for the product. Indicate in the margin of each paragraph the following: "Comply, "Do Not Comply", or "Not Applicable". Explain all "Do Not Comply' statements. F. Provide a separate transmittal for each submittal item. Transmittals shall indicate product by specification section name and number. Separate all submittals into appropriate specification section number. Do not combine specification sections. 1.05 MANUFACTURERS INSTRUCTIONS A. Submit Manufacturer's instructions for storage, preparation, assembly, installation, start-up, adjusting, calibrating, balancing and finishing. 1.06 CONTRACTOR RESPONSIBILITIES A. Review submittals prior to transmittal. B. Determine and verify: 1. Field measurements 2. Field construction criteria 3. Manufacturer's catalog numbers 4. Conformance with requirements of Contract Documents C. Coordinate submittals with requirements of the work and of the Contract Documents. D. Notify the Architect/Engineer in writing at time of submission of any deviations in the submittals from requirements of the Contract Documents. E. Do not fabricate products, or begin work for which submittals are specified, until such submittals have been produced and bear contractor's stamp. Do not fabricate products or begin work scheduled to have submittals reviewed until return of reviewed submittals with Architect/Engineer's acceptance. F. Contractor's responsibility for errors and omissions in submittals is not relieved whether Architect/Engineer reviews submittals or not. SHOP DRAWINGS, COORDINATION DRAWINGS & PRODUCT DATA VLK Architects, 2007 23 0512 - 2 2740.00 CREEKVIEW ELEMENTARY SCHOOL COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX G. Contractor's responsibility for deviations in submittals from requirements of Contract Documents is not relieved whether Architect/Engineer reviews submittals or not, unless Architect/engineer gives written acceptance of the specific deviations on reviewed documents. H. Submittals shall show sufficient data to indicate complete compliance with Contract Documents: 1. Proper sizes and capacities 2. That the item will fit in the available space in a manner that will allow proper service 3. Construction methods, materials and finishes Schedule submissions at least 15 days before date reviewed submittals will be needed. 1.07 SUBMISSION REQUIREMENTS A. Make submittals promptly in accordance with approved schedule, and in such sequence as to cause no delay in the Project or in the work of any other Contractor. B. Number of submittals required: 1. Shop Drawings and Coordination Drawings: Submit one reproducible transparency and three opaque reproductions. 2. Product Data: Submit the number of copies which the contractor requires, plus those which will be retained by the Architect/Engineer. C. Accompany submittals with transmittal letter, in duplicate, containing: 1. Date 2. Project title and number 3. Contractor's name and address 4. The number of each Shop Drawing, Project Datum and Sample submitted 5. Other pertinent data D. Submittals shall include: 1. The date of submission 2. The project title and number 3. Contract Identification 4. The names of: a. Contractor b. Subcontractor C. Supplier d. Manufacturer 5. Identification of the product 6. Field dimensions, clearly identified as such 7. Relation to adjacent or critical features of the work or materials 8. Applicable standards, such as ASTM or federal specifications numbers 9. Identification of deviations from contract documents 10. Suitable blank space for General Contractor and Architect/Engineer stamps 11. Contractor's signed and dated Stamp of Approval E. Coordinate submittals into logical groupings to facilitate interrelation of the several items: 1. Finishes which involve Architect/Engineer selection of colors, textures or patterns 2. Associated items which require correlation for efficient function or for installation SHOP DRAWINGS, COORDINATION DRAWINGS & PRODUCT DATA VLK Architects, 2007 23 0512 - 3 2740.00 CREEKVIEW ELEMENTARY SCHOOL COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX 1.08 SUBMITTAL SPECIFICATION INFORMATION A. Every submittal document shall bear the following information as used in the project manual: 1. The related specification section number 2. The exact specification section title B. Submittals delivered to the Architect/Engineer without the specified information will not be processed. The Contractor shall bear the risk of all delays, as if no submittal had been delivered. 1.09 RESUBMISSION REQUIREMENTS A. Make re -submittals under procedures specified for initial submittals. 1. Indicate that the document or sample is a re -submittal 2. Identify changes made since previous submittals B. Indicate any changes which have been made, other than those requested by the Architect/Engineer. 1.10 CONTRACTOR'S STAMP OF APPROVAL A. Contractor shall stamp and sign each document certifying to the review of products, field measurements and field construction criteria, and coordination of the information within the submittal with requirements of the work and of Contract Documents. B. Contractor's stamp of approval on any submittal shall constitute a representation to Owner and Architect/Engineer that Contractor has either determined and verified all quantities, dimensions, field construction criteria, materials, catalog numbers, and similar data or assumes full responsibility for doing so, and that Contractor has reviewed or coordinated each submittal with the requirements of the work and the Contract Documents. C. Do not deliver any submittals to the Architect/Engineer that do not bear the Contractor's stamp of approval and signature. D. Submittals delivered to the Architect/Engineer without Contractor's stamp of approval and signature will not be processed. The Contractor shall bear the risk of all delays, as if no submittal had been delivered. 1.11 ARCHITECT/ENGINEER REVIEW OF IDENTIFIED SUBMITTALS A. The Architect/Engineer will: 1. Review identified submittals with reasonable promptness and in accordance with schedule 2. Affix stamp and initials or signature, and indicate requirements for re -submittal or approval of submittal 3. Return submittals to Contractor for distribution or for resubmission B. Review and approval of submittals will not extend to design data reflected in submittals which is peculiarly within the special expertise of the Contractor or any party dealing directly with the Contractor. C. Architect/Engineer's review and approval is only for conformance with the design concept of the project and for compliance with the information given in the contract. 1. The review shall not extend to means, methods, sequences, techniques or procedures of construction or to safety precautions or programs incident thereto. 2. The review shall not extend to review of quantities, dimensions, weights or gauges, fabrication processes or coordination with the work of other trades. SHOP DRAWINGS, COORDINATION DRAWINGS & PRODUCT DATA VLK Architects, 2007 23 0512 - 4 2740.00 CREEKVIEW ELEMENTARY SCHOOL COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX D. The review and approval of a separate item as such will not indicate approval of the assembly in which the item functions. 1.12 SUBSTITUTIONS A. Do not make requests for substitution employing the procedures of this Section. B. The procedure for making a formal request for substitution is specified in Div. 1. PART 2 - PRODUCTS - NOT USED. PART 3 - EXECUTION - NOT USED END OF SECTION SHOP DRAWINGS, COORDINATION DRAWINGS & PRODUCT DATA VLK Architects, 2007 23 0512 - 5 2740.00 CREEKVIEW ELEMENTARY SCHOOL COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX SECTION 23 0513 - ELECTRICAL PROVISIONS OF HVAC WORK PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Electrical provisions to be provided as mechanical work are indicated in other Division 23 sections, on drawings, and as specified. B. Types of work, normally recognized as electrical but provided as mechanical, specified or partially specified in this Section, include but are not necessarily limited to the following: 1. Motors for mechanical equipment. 2. Starters for motors of mechanical equipment, but only where specifically indicated to be furnished integrally with equipment. 3. Wiring from motors to disconnect switches or junction boxes for motors of mechanical equipment, but only where specifically indicated to be furnished integrally with equipment. 4. Wiring of field -mounted float control switches, flow control switches, and similar mechanical -electrical devices provided for mechanical systems, to equipment control panels. 5. Wiring of smoke detectors for shutdown of air handling equipment when a fire alarm system is not included in the project. 6. Pipe heat tracing. C. Refer to Division 23 Controls Sections for related control system wiring. D. Refer to Division 23 sections for specific individual mechanical equipment electrical requirements. E. Refer to Division 26 sections for motor starters and controls not furnished integrally with mechanical equipment. F. Refer to Division 26 sections for junction boxes and disconnect switches required for motors and other electrical units of mechanical equipment. 1.02 RELATED WORK A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Specification Sections, apply to work of this Section. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Wherever possible, match elements of electrical provisions of mechanical work with similar elements of electrical work specified in Division 26 sections for electrical work not otherwise specified. B. For electrical equipment and products, comply with applicable NEMA standards, and refer to NEMA standards for definitions of terminology. Comply with National Electrical Code (NFPA 70) for workmanship and installation requirements. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Include in listing of motors, voltage, notation of whether motor starter is furnished or installed integrally with motor or equipment containing motors. ELECTRICAL PROVISIONS OF HVAC WORK VLK Architects, 2007 23 0513 - 1 2740.00 CREEKVIEW ELEMENTARY SCHOOL COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MOTORS A. Provide motors for mechanical equipment manufactured by one of the following: 1. Baldor Electric Company. 2. Century Electric Div., Inc. 3. General Electric Co. 4. Louis Allis Div.; Litton Industrial Products, Inc. 5. Lincoln Electric 6. Marathon Electric Mfg. Corp. 7. Reliance Electric Co. 8. Westinghouse Electric Corp. B. Motor Characteristics. Except where more stringent requirements are indicated, and except where required items of mechanical equipment cannot be obtained with fully complying motors, comply with the following requirements for motors of mechanical work: C. Temperature Rating. Rated for 40 Degrees C environment with maximum 50 Degrees C temperature rise for continuous duty at full load (Class A Insulation). D. Provide each motor capable of making starts as frequently as indicated by automatic control system, and not less than 5 starts per hour for manually controlled motors. E. Phases and Current Characteristics. Provide squirrel -cage induction polyphase motors for 3/4hp and larger, and provide capacitor -start single-phase motors for 1/2hp and smaller, except 1/6hp and smaller may, at equipment manufacturer's option, be split - phase type. Coordinate current characteristics with power specified in Division 26 sections, and with individual equipment requirements specified in other Division 23 requirements. For 2-speed motors provide 2 separate windings on polyphase motors. Do not purchase motors until power characteristics available at locations of motors have been confirmed, and until rotation directions have been confirmed. F. Service Factor. 1.15 for polyphase motors and 1.35 for single-phase motors. G. Motor Construction. Provide general purpose, continuous duty motors, Design "B" except "C" where required for high starting torque. 1. Frames. NEMA #56. 2. Bearings are to be ball or roller bearings with inner and outer shaft seals, regreasable except permanently sealed where motor is inaccessible for regular maintenance. Where belt drives and other drives produce lateral or axial thrust in motor, provide bearings designed to resist thrust loading. Refer to individual section of Division 23 for fractional -hp light -duty motors where sleeve -type bearings are permitted. 3. Except as indicated, provide open drip -proof motors for indoor use where satisfactorily housed or remotely located during operation, and provide guarded drip -proof motors where exposed to contact by employees or building occupants. Provide weather -protected Type I for outdoor use, Type II where not housed. Refer to individual sections of Division 23 for other enclosure requirements. 4. Provide built-in thermal overload protection and, where indicated, provide internal sensing device suitable for signaling and stopping motor at starter. 5. Noise Rating: Provide "Quiet" rating on motors. H. All motors shall be premium efficiency. ELECTRICAL PROVISIONS OF HVAC WORK VLK Architects, 2007 23 0513 - 2 2740.00 CREEKVIEW ELEMENTARY SCHOOL COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX 2.02 EQUIPMENT FABRICATION A. Fabricate mechanical equipment for secure mounting of motors and other electrical items included in work. Provide either permanent alignment of motors with equipment, or adjustable mountings as applicable for belt drives, gear drives, special couplings and similar indirect coupling of equipment. Provide safe, secure, durable, and removable guards for motor drives. Arrange for lubrication and similar running -maintenance without removal of guards. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install motors on motor mounting systems in accordance with motor manufacturer's instructions, anchored to resist torque, drive thrusts, and other external forces inherent in mechanical work. Secure sheaves and other drive units to motor shafts with keys and Allen set screws on flat surface of shaft. Unless otherwise indicated, set motor shafts parallel with machine shafts. B. Verify voltage with Electrical Plans. END OF SECTION ELECTRICAL PROVISIONS OF HVAC WORK VLK Architects, 2007 23 0513 - 3 2740.00 CREEKVIEW ELEMENTARY SCHOOL COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX SECTION 23 0514 - HVAC CONDENSATE DRAIN PIPING SYSTEM PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Provide and install air conditioning condensate drains. 1.02 RELATED WORK A. Division 23 - Mechanical. 1. Insulation 2. Fan/Coil Units 3. Air Handling Units 4. Equipment Drain Pans PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 PIPE MATERIAL A. Galvanized steel with drainage pattern fittings. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install the system to facilitate easy removal. 1. Use threaded plugged tee at each change of direction to permit cleaning. 2. Install a cleanout every 50 feet of straight run piping 3. Maintain a positive slope on all piping B. Install a water seal trap leg based on the fan pressure. 1. Size the length of the trap leg 1 inch larger than the actual system pressure. C. Install traps and cleanout as shown in the drawing details. 1. Confirm requirements with manufacturer's installation instructions 3.02 SIZE PIPE AS SHOWN ON DRAWINGS. A. Do not install piping sized smaller than the unit drain connection size. 3.03 SECONDARY DRAINS A. Provide secondary drains where required by code, shown on the drawings, or where equipment has secondary drain connections. END OF SECTION HVAC CONDENSATE DRAIN PIPING SYSTEM VLK Architects, 2007 23 0514 -1 2740.00 CREEKVIEW ELEMENTARY SCHOOL COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX SECTION 23 0517 - HVAC ACCESS DOORS PART 1-GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Furnish and install access doors in wall or ceiling locations as required or shown for access to valves, controls, fire dampers, air distribution devices and other equipment requiring maintenance, adjustment or operation. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 NON -FIRE RATED ACCESS DOORS A. 16-Gauge frames B. 14-gauge steel panels C. Continuous fully concealed hinges D. Flush screwdriver cam lock & cylinder lock for Owner selection E. Automatic closing and latching mechanism F. Prime coat finish G. Brushed satin stainless steel finish for restroom, kitchen or cafeteria installation H. Material suitable for wall and/or ceiling mounting 2.02 FIRE RATED ACCESS DOORS A. UL listed, 1-1/2 hour Label "B", access doors B. 16-Gauge stainless steel C. 20-Gauge insulated sandwich -type door panel. D. Two inch thick with fire rated insulation E. Continuous fully concealed hinge F. Automatic closing and latching mechanism G. Knurled knob and recessed key operation for Owner selection H. Interior latch release slide for opening from inside I. Prime coat finish J. Material suitable for wall and/or ceiling mounting HVAC ACCESS DOORS VLK Architects, 2007 23 0517 - 1 2740.00 CREEKVIEW ELEMENTARY SCHOOL COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX 2.03 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Milcor B. MIFAB C. Acudor D. Elmdor PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Access doors specified in Division 23 will be installed by other crafts. Not all required access doors are shown. Coordinate with the Contractor to locate access doors for ease of operation and maintenance of concealed equipment. B. Installation shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's printed instructions. C. Minimum size required: 01. 36" x 24" for Mechanical HVAC equipment related items END OF SECTION HVAC ACCESS DOORS VLK Architects, 2007 23 0517 - 2 2740.00 CREEKVIEW ELEMENTARY SCHOOL COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX SECTION 23 0593.01 - COORDINATION OF TESTING AND BALANCING PART 1 - TESTING, BALANCING AND ADJUSTING 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Balancing and adjusting of the environmental systems is specified in Section 23 0593. B. Coordination of the work is specified in this Section. PART 2 - PRODUCTS / NOT USED PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 COORDINATION A. Bring the work to a state of readiness for testing, balancing, and adjusting. 1. Install air terminal devices. 2. Provide specified filters in air handling equipment. Install clean filters just prior to the start of the test and balance work. 3. Verify lubrication of equipment. 4. Install permanent instrumentation. 5. Complete "Start-up" of equipment. 6. Check rotation and alignment of rotating equipment and tension of belted drives. 7. Verify ratings of overload heaters in motor starters. 8. Verify that safety and operating control set points are as designed and automatic control sequences have been checked. 9. Provide control diagrams and sequence of operation. 10. Collect material for maintenance manuals and prepare one manual especially for use in testing and balancing. 11. Verify that graphic operational data such as start/stop instructions, valve tag schedules, and piping identification schedules have been provided where needed. 12. Verify that equipment identification work has been completed with valve tags, schedules, and piping identification system. 13. Comb out fins on extended -surface heat transfer coils where damaged. 14. Remove all temporary filters from HVAC equipment. 15. Provide start-up reports listing all start-up information and manufacturer's information attached. B. Provide and install new pulleys and belts as required to effect the correct speed ratio. Adjustments where no belt or pulley change is required, is specified in Section 23 0593. C. Verify that the systems are ready for balancing and adjusting. D. Submit a letter stating: 01. The specified pieces of equipment have been checked, started, and adjusted by the manufacturer. 02. Other equipment has been checked and started. 03. The systems have been operated for the specified period of time. 04. The automatic controls system has been adjusted, calibrated, and checked, and is operating as specified. E. Provide the services of a technician full time at all times at the project when testing, balancing and adjusting work is being conducted. COORDINATION OF TESTING AND BALANCING VLK Architects, 2007 23 0593.01 - 1 2740.00 CREEKVIEW ELEMENTARY SCHOOL COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX F. Provide instrumentation and services to take readings of the required data for the refrigerant circuits. G. Provide and install volume dampers required for balancing by the TAB Contractor. 3.02 START-UP OF EQUIPMENT A. Pre -start & Start-up equipment using the procedures as recommended by the manufacturers. B. Complete start-up of equipment prior to start of testing & balancing. C. Submit start-up procedures as outlined by the manufacturers and complete the "HVAC FAN / AIR HANDLING / START-UP REPORT FORM" to Engineer. COORDINATION OF TESTING AND BALANCING VLK Architects, 2007 23 0593.01 - 2 2740.00 CREEKVIEW ELEMENTARY SCHOOL COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX FAN AIR HANDLING UNIT START-UP REPORTHVAC FORM Equipment Description Disc. Switch Wired ' 'List nt To Roof Curb Of Dampers Condition & Part # END OF SEGTIUN COORDINATION OF TESTING AND BALANCING VLK Architects, 2007 23 0593.01 - 3 2740.00 CREEKVIEW ELEMENTARY SCHOOL COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX SECTION 23 0593 - TESTING, BALANCING AND ADJUSTING (TAB) OF ENVIRONMENTAL SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Balance, adjust and test the air distribution system including the exhaust system. B. Verify and record the duct test results performed by the mechanical contractor. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. COORDINATION OF TESTING AND BALANCING 1.03 PAYMENT PROCEDURES A. The work of this Section of the Specifications shall be paid directly by the Owner. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. History of the TAB organization. B. Agency certification. C. Personnel qualifications. D. TAB data forms. E. Instrumentation list. F. Name of the project supervising engineer. G. Name and address and contact person of five successfully completed projects of similar size and scope. H. To perform required professional services, the balancing agency shall have a minimum of one test and balance engineer certified by the Associated Air Balance Council. 1.05 TAB FIRM QUALIFICATIONS A. The organization performing the work shall be a Certified member in good standing of the (AABC) Associated Air Balance Council. B. Able to furnish evidence of having contracted for and completed not less than five systems of comparable size and type that have served their Owners satisfactorily for not less than five years. C. A specialist in this field and have the personnel, experience, training, skill, and the organization to perform the work. D. The balancing agency shall furnish all necessary calibrated instrumentation to adequately perform the specified services. An inventory of all instruments and devices in possession of the balancing agency may be required by the engineer to determine the balancing agency's performance capability. TESTING AND BALANCING (TAB) OF ENVIRONMENTAL SYSTEMS VLK Architects, 2007 23 0593 - 1 2740.00 CREEKVIEW ELEMENTARY SCHOOL COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX E. The balancing agency shall have operated for a minimum of five years under its current name. F. PERSONNEL 1. The project supervisor shall be a Professional Engineer registered in Texas. a. Extensive knowledge of the work involved. b. At least five years experience conducting tests of the type specified. C. This test and balance engineer shall be responsible for the supervision and certification of the total work herein specified. 2. All work shall be conducted under the direct supervision of the supervising engineer. 3. Technicians shall be trained and experienced in the work they conduct. 1.06 WARRANTY A. Provide (AABC) guarantee in writing. B. Extended warranty. 1. Include an extended warranty of 2 years after completion of test and balance work, during which time the Architect/Engineer may request a retest or resetting of any outlet or other items as listed in the test report. 2. Provide technicians and instruments to assist the Architect/Engineer in making any tests he may require during this period. 3. The balancing agency shall perform an inspection of the HVAC system during the opposite season from that which the initial adjustments were made. The balancing agency shall make any necessary modifications to the initial adjustments to produce optimum system operation. PART 2 - PRODUCTS - NOT USED PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 TAB TOLERANCES A. The outside air, supply air, return air, and exhaust air for each system shall be adjusted to within +/- 5% of the value scheduled on the drawings. 3.02 SITE VISITS A. During construction, the balancing agency shall inspect the installation of the piping systems, sheetmetal work, temperature controls, energy management system, and other component parts of the heating, ventilating, and air conditioning systems. One inspection shall take place when 6011/6 of the ductwork is installed and another inspection shall take place when 90% of the equipment is installed. The balancing agency shall submit a brief written report of each inspection to the architect and engineer. B. Upon completion of the installation and start-up of the mechanical equipment by the mechanical contractor, the balancing agency shall test and balance the system components to obtain optimum conditions in each conditioned space of the building. If construction deficiencies are encountered that preclude obtaining optimum conditions, and the deficiencies cannot be corrected by the mechanical contractor within a reasonable period of time, the balancing agency shall cease testing and balancing services and advise the architect, engineer, general contractor and owner, in writing, of the deficiencies. C. Note proper piping installation, location of valves, and flow measuring instruments. TESTING AND BALANCING (TAB) OF ENVIRONMENTAL SYSTEMS VLK Architects, 2007 23 0593 - 2 2740.00 CREEKVIEW ELEMENTARY SCHOOL COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX D. Make one series of visits, phased as required by construction progress, prior to installation of the ceiling. Note proper installation of balancing dampers. E. Continue the site visits up to completion of project. In each succeeding report, list corrections made from previous reports. 3.03 TESTING INSTRUMENTS A. Submit a list of all instruments to be used for the test and balance procedures. 1. Catalog sheets 2. Certificate of last calibration 3. Calibration within a period of six months prior to balancing B. Testing equipment shall be in good working order and tested for accuracy prior to start of work. 3.04 COORDINATION WITH OTHER SPECIFICATION SECTIONS A. Review the related ductwork shop drawings and piping shop drawings. Make recommendations concerning suitability with respect to the testing, balancing and adjusting work. B. Make tests to verify proper placement of the static pressure sensors for the variable air volume fan system control. C. In cooperation with the work specified in Building Management and Control System section, a systematic listing of the testing and verification shall be included in the final TAB report. The TAB firm shall provide a laptop computer to operate with the Building Management and Control System. Building Management and Control System shall provide all necessary software and special interface cables, as required, to communicate with the DDC system: 1. Work with the temperature control contractor to ensure the most effective total system operation within the design limitations, and to obtain mutual understanding of the intended control performance. 2. Verify that all control devices are properly connected. 3. Verify that all dampers, valves, and other controlled devices, are operated by the intended controller. 4. Verify that all dampers and valves are in the position indicated by the controller (open, closed or modulating). 5. Verify the integrity of valves and dampers in terms of tightness of close -off and full open positions. This includes dampers in multizone units, terminal boxes and fire/smoke dampers. 6. Observe that all valves are properly installed in piping system in relation to direction of flow and location. 7. Observe the calibration of all controllers. 8. Verify the proper application of all normally opened and normally closed valves. 9. Observe the locations of all thermostats and humidistats for potential erratic operation from outside influences such as sunlight, drafts or cold walls. 10. Observe the location of all sensors to determine whether their position will allow them to sense only the intended temperatures or pressures of the media. Control contractor will relocate as deemed necessary by the Engineer. 11. Verify that the sequence of operation for any control mode is in accordance with the approved shop drawings and specifications. Verify that no simultaneous heating and cooling occurs. TESTING AND BALANCING (TAB) OF ENVIRONMENTAL SYSTEMS VLK Architects, 2007 23 0593 - 3 2740.00 CREEKVIEW ELEMENTARY SCHOOL COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX 12. Verify the correct operation of all interlock systems and installation is per the manufacturer recommendations. 13. Check all dampers for free operation. 14. Verify that all controller setpoints meet the design intent. 15. Perform variable volume system verification to assure the system and its components track with changes from full flow to minimum flow. D. Upon completion of the testing and balancing, submit three days prior notice that the systems are ready for a running test. A qualified representative of the test and balance organization shall be present, with a representative from the engineers office, to field verify TAB report readings. Specific and random selections of data recorded in the certified test and balance report will be reviewed. 3.05 INSTRUMENT TEST HOLES A. When it is required to make holes in the field to measure temperature, static pressure or velocity in the ducts: 1. Drill holes, plug and tape external duct insulation. 2. Repair damaged insulation to Engineer's approval. 3.06 TESTING THE AIR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM A. The TAB agency shall verify that all ductwork, dampers, grilles, registers, and diffusers have been installed per design and set full open. The TAB agency shall perform the following TAB procedures in accordance with the AABC National Standards and all results shall be recorded in the TAB report: 1. Supply Fans: a. Fan speeds: Test and adjust fan RPM to achieve design CFM requirements. b. Current and Voltage: Test and record motor voltage and amperage, and compare data with the nameplate limits to ensure fan motor is not in or above the service factor. C. Pitot-Tube Traverse: Perform a Pitot-Tube traverse of the main supply and return ducts, as applicable, to obtain total CFM. If a Pitot-Tube traverse is not practical, an explanation of why a traverse was not made must appear on the appropriate data sheet. Measurements must be recorded with an Inclined Manometer or an Inclined/Vertical Manometer. d. Outside Air: Test and adjust the outside air on applicable equipment using a Pitot-Tube traverse. If a Pitot-Tube traverse is not practical, an explanation of why a traverse was not made must appear on the appropriate data sheet. If a traverse is not practical, use the mixed air temperature method, if the inside and outside temperature difference is at least 20°F, or use the difference between Pitot-tube traverse of the supply and return ducts. e. Static Pressure: Test and record system static pressure, including the static pressure profile of each supply fan. 2. All Other Fans: a. Fan speeds: Test and adjust fan RPM to achieve design CFM requirements. b. Current and Voltage: Test and record motor voltage and amperage, and compare data with the nameplate limits to ensure fan motor is not in or above the service factor. C. Pitot-Tube Traverse: Perform a Pitot-Tube traverse of the main return ducts, as applicable, to obtain total CFM. If a Pitot-Tube traverse is not practical, an explanation of why a traverse was not made must appear TESTING AND BALANCING (TAB) OF ENVIRONMENTAL SYSTEMS VLK Architects, 2007 23 0593 - 4 2740.00 CREEKVIEW ELEMENTARY SCHOOL COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX on the appropriate data sheet. Measurements must be recorded with an Inclined Manometer or an Inclined/Vertical Manometer. d. Static Pressure: Test and record system static pressure, including the static pressure profile of each return fan. 3. Diffusers, Registers and Grilles: a. Tolerances: Test, adjust, and balance each diffuser, grille, and register to within 5% of design requirements. Minimize drafts. Observe throws are in direction as indicated on drawings. 4. Coils (including electric coils): a. Air Temperature: Once air flows are set to acceptable limits, take wet bulb (cooling coil only) and dry bulb air temperatures on the entering and leaving side of each coil. Calculate the sensible and latent (cooling coil only) capacity of the coil. Provide information in TAB report. B. Record preliminary air handler data, including fan RPM and static pressures across filter, fans and coils. C. Perform a velocity traverse of the main supply ducts using a pitot-tube and inclined manometer to establish initial air delivery. Perform a Pitot-tube traverse of main supply and return ducts, as applicable, to obtain total CFM. If a pitot-tube traverse is not practical, a detailed explanation of why a traverse was not made must appear on the appropriate data sheet. D. Make adjustments in fan RPM and damper settings, as required, to obtain design supply air, return air, and outside air. E. Measure and adjust all supply and return branches to design air delivery. F. Measure and adjust all diffusers to design air delivery to +/- 5% of design requirements. G. Make a set of recordings showing final system conditions. 3.07 EQUIPMENT POWER READINGS A. Record the following information for each motor: 1. Equipment designation. 2. Manufacturer. 3. Unit model number and serial number and frame. 4. Motor nameplate horsepower; nameplate voltage; phase and full load amperes. 5. Heater coil in starter. a. Rating in amperes. b. Manufacturer's recommendation. 6. Motor RPM/driven equipment RPM. 7. Power reading (voltage, amperes of all legs at motor terminals). 3.08 DUCT TEST A. Test and Balancing Contractor shall verify and record the duct test results. A copy of the duct test results, as completed, shall be submitted to the engineer for review within five days. Provide a complete report of all the duct test results in the final TAB report. 3.09 DIRECT EXPANSION EQUIPMENT A. With each unit operating at near design conditions, measure and record the following: 1. Manufacturer, model number, serial number and all nameplate data. 2. Ambient temperature, condenser discharge temperature. TESTING AND BALANCING (TAB) OF ENVIRONMENTAL SYSTEMS VLK Architects, 2007 23 0593 - 5 2740.00 CREEKVIEW ELEMENTARY SCHOOL COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX 3. Amperage and voltage for each phase. 4. Leaving and entering air temperatures. 5. Suction and discharge pressures and temperatures. 6. Tons of cooling. 7. Verification that moisture indicator shows dry refrigerant. 3.11 TAB REPORT A. The activities described in this specification shall be recorded in a report form; and four individually bound copies shall be provided to the Architect and Engineer. Neatly type and arrange data. Include with the data the date tested, personnel present, weather conditions, nameplate record of the test instruments used and list all measurements taken after all corrections are made to the system. Record all failures and corrective action taken to remedy any incorrect situation. The intent of the final report is to provide a reference of actual operating conditions for the Owner's operations personnel. Provide a "Preface" which shall include a general discussion of the system and any abnormalities or problems encountered. B. All measurements and recorded readings (of air, electricity, etc.) that appear in the report must have been recorded on site by the permanently employed technicians or engineers of the TAB firm. C. Submit reports on forms approved by the engineer that will include the following data as a minimum: 1. Title Page a. Company Name b. Company Address C. Company telephone number d. Project name e. Project location f. Project Manager g. Project Engineer h. Project Contractor I. Project Identification Number 2. Summary of the TAB report data 3. Index 4. Instrument List a. Instrument b. Manufacturer C. Model d. Serial Number e. Range f. Calibration Date g. What test instrument is to be used for: 5. Fan Data a. Location b. Manufacturer C. Model d. Air flow, specified and actual e. Total static pressure (total external) specified and actual f. Inlet pressure g. Discharge pressure h. Fan RPM 6. Return Air/Outside Air Data a. Identification/location b. Design return air flow TESTING AND BALANCING (TAB) OF ENVIRONMENTAL SYSTEMS VLK Architects, 2007 23 0593 - 6 2740.00 CREEKVIEW ELEMENTARY SCHOOL COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX C. Actual return air flow d. Design outside air flow e. Actual outside air flow f. Return air temperature g. Outside air temperature h. Required mixed air temperature I. Actual mixed air temperature 7. Electric Motors a. Manufacturer b. HP/BHP C. Phase, voltage, amperage, nameplate, actual d. PM e. Service Factor f. Starter size, heater elements, rating 8. V-Belt Drive a. Identification/location b. Required driven RPM C. Drive sheave, diameter and RPM d. Belt, size and quantity e. Motor sheave, diameter and RPM f. Center -to -center distance, maximum, minimum and actual 9. Duct Traverse a. System zone/branch b. Duct size C. Area d. Design velocity e. Design air flow f. Test velocity g. Test air flow h. Duct static pressure I. Air correction factor 10. Air Distribution Test Sheet a. Air terminal number b. Room number/location C. Terminal type d. Terminal size e. Correction factor f. Design velocity g. Design air flow h. Test (final) velocity i. Test (final) air flow 11. Sound Level Report a. Location (Location established by the design engineer) b. N C curve for eight (8) bands -equipment off C. N C curve for eight (8) bands -equipment on 12. Vibration Test on equipment having 10 HP motors or greater in size. a. Location of points: 1) Fan bearing, drive end 2) Fan bearing, opposite end 3) Motor bearing, center (if applicable) 4) Motor bearing, drive end 5) Motor bearing, opposite end 6) Casing (bottom or top) 7) Casing (side) 8) Duct after flexible connection (discharge) 9) Duct after flexible connection (suction) TESTING AND BALANCING (TAB) OF ENVIRONMENTAL SYSTEMS VLK Architects, 2007 23 0593 - 7 2740.00 CREEKVIEW ELEMENTARY SCHOOL COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX b. Test readings: 1) Horizontal, velocity and displacement 2) Vertical, velocity and displacement 3) Axial, velocity and displacement C. Normally acceptable readings, velocity and acceleration d. Unusual conditions at time of test e. Vibration source (if non -complying) 14. Control verification indicating date performed and any abnormalities identified. a. Point Location/Description b. EMS Readout (Setpoint and Actual) C. Actual Readout of all points d. Interlocks e. Safeties f. Variable speed drive tracking with EMS input g. Variable speed drive Bypass operation h. Sequence of operation END OF SECTION TESTING AND BALANCING (TAB) OF ENVIRONMENTAL SYSTEMS VLK Architects, 2007 23 0593 - 8 2740.00 CREEKVIEW ELEMENTARY SCHOOL COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX SECTION 23 0713 - EXTERNAL DUCT INSULATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Furnish and install external insulation on supply, return and fresh air ductwork. B. External insulation of concealed and exposed ducts is included in this Section. Internal acoustic duct lining is specified under ductwork and not included in this Section. 1.02 RELATED WORK A. FINISHES. Painting and Color Coding. B. Division 23 - Mechanical 1. Air Handling Units. Internal insulation for air units is specified in the sections on air handling units. The units do not require external insulation. 2. Internal Duct Liner. Internal duct liner is specified in the section on ductwork. 3. Insulation. Refer to specific sections on individual insulation types. 4. Refer to insulation and liner plan detail. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. The intent of insulation specifications is to obtain superior quality workmanship, resulting in an installation that is absolutely satisfactory in both function and appearance. Provide insulation in accordance with the specifications for each type of service and apply as recommended by the manufacturer and as specified. B. An approved contractor for this work under this Division shall be: 1. A specialist in this field and have the personnel, experience, training, skill, and the organization to provide a practical working system. 2. Able to furnish evidence of having contracted for and installed not less than 3 systems of comparable size and type that have served their Owners satisfactorily for not less than 3 years. C. All duct insulation used on the project inside the building must have a flame spread rating not exceeding 25 and a smoke developed rating not exceeding 50 as determined by test procedures ASTM E84, NFPA 255 and UL 723. These ratings must be as tested on the composite of insulation, jacket or facing, and adhesive. Components such as adhesives, mastics and cements must meet the same individual ratings as the minimum requirements and bear the UL label. D. Condensation on any insulated system is not approved. E. Replace insulation damaged by either moisture or other means. Insulation that has been wet, whether dried or not, is considered damaged. Make repairs where condensation is caused by improper installation of insulation. Also repair any damage caused by the condensation. F. Where existing insulated ductwork or other services are tapped, remove existing insulation back to undamaged sections and replace with new insulation of the same type and thickness as existing insulation. Apply as specified for insulation of the same service. EXTERNAL DUCT INSULATION VLK Architects, 2007 23 0713 - 1 2740.00 CREEKVIEW ELEMENTARY SCHOOL COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX 1.04 APPROVALS A. Submittals. Submit product data on each insulation type, adhesive, and finish to be used in the work. Make the submittal as specified in General Requirements and obtain approval before beginning installation. Include product description, list of materials and thickness for each service and location, and the manufacturer's installation instructions for each product. B. Sample Application. Make an application of each type of insulation to display the material, quality and application method. Obtain approval of the sample application before proceeding with installation of the work. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Glass fiber rigid duct insulation. 1. Minimum density of 3 pcf, installed R value to be 6.0 or better at 750F mean, facing of 0.7 mil aluminum foil reinforced with glass yarn mesh and laminated to 40 lbs. fire- resistant kraft. R-value to be indicated on exterior side of insulation to be verified by City inspector. 2. Schuller 814 spin-glas FSK. 3. Owens-Corning Type 703 board RKF. 4. Knauf 3 PCF FSK. B. Glass fiber blanket duct insulation. 1. Minimum density of 1.0 pcf, installed R value to be 6.0 or better at 750F mean, facing of 0.35 mil foil reinforced with glass yarn mesh and laminated to 40 lbs. fire resistant kraft. R-value to be indicated on exterior side of insulation to be verified by City inspector. 2. Manville R-series Microlite FSKL. 3. Owens-Corning ED100 RKF. 4. Knauf 1.0 PCF FSK. C. Fiberglass reinforcing cloth mesh. 1. Perma Glass Mesh. 2. Alpha Glass Mesh. 3. Childers Chi[-Glas. 4. Vimasco. D. Mastics and adhesives. 1. Childers. 2. Foster. 3. Vimasco. E. Fireboard Insulation 1. Totally encapsulated with foil facing. 2. Two hour rated fire protection. 3. Zero clearance to combustible protection. 4. Partak Insulation, Inc. Paroc Fireboard 5. Thermal Ceramics FireMaster 3M 6. Premier Refractories International, Pyroscat. F. Rigid Closed Cell Insulation 1. Dow Thymer. 2. Phenolic Foam. EXTERNAL DUCT INSULATION VLK Architects, 2007 23 0713 - 2 2740.00 CREEKVIEW ELEMENTARY SCHOOL COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX G. Reinforced Foil Tape 1. Venture 1525CW 2. 3" FSK 3. Thickness 6.5 mils 4. Color: silver 2.02 COATING AND ADHESIVE A. Coating. Provide Childers CP-35 vapor barrier coating. B. Adhesive. Provide Childers CP-82 vapor barrier adhesive. C. Glass Cloth. Provide 10 x 10 white glass cloth. 2.03 OUTDOOR DUCT LAMINATED JACKETING A. Rubberized bitumen compound material: 1. Ultraviolet resistant 2. Weatherproof 3. Vapor retarding jacketing 4. Laminated jacketing 5. Cross -laminated high strength polyethylene film 6. Laminated to aluminum foil 7. Minimum 60-mil thickness 8. Alumaguard 60 9. Flex Clad 400 10. Venture Clad 1577CW PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 FIRE SAFETY REQUIREMENTS A. Do not extend duct coverings through walls or floors required to be fire -stopped or required to have a fire resistance rating. Interrupt duct coverings in the immediate vicinity of heat sources such as electric resistance or fuel -burning heater. 3.02 CONCEALED DUCT A. Provide flexible glass fiber insulation with factory -applied, reinforced UL labeled Foil-Skrim- Kraft (FSK) facing. B. Standing Seams. Insulate standing seams and stiffeners, which protrude through the insulation with 0.6 lb. per cubic foot density, 1-1/2" thick, faced, flexible blanket insulation. Insulation shall not prevent adjustment of damper operators. C. Insulation shall be wrapped tightly on the ductwork with all circumferential joints butted and longitudinal joints overlapped a minimum of 2". In addition, secure insulation to the bottom of rectangular ductwork by the use of either weld pins with washers or cup -head pins welded to the ductwork or perforated based insulation hangers glued to the duct on twelve inch centers to prevent sagging of insulation. D. On circumferential joint, the 2" flange on the facing shall be stapled with 9/16" outward clinch steel staples on 2" centers and taped using 3" wide foil tape applied with additional adhesive of Foster 85-75. Cover all seams, joints, pin penetrations and other breaks with foil tape and glue. EXTERNAL DUCT INSULATION VLK Architects, 2007 23 0713 - 3 2740.00 CREEKVIEW ELEMENTARY SCHOOL COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX E. Ductwork in mechanical rooms is considered concealed spaces. 3.03 EXPOSED DUCT INSULATION A. Ductwork in exposed locations is to be insulated with fiberglass rigid / semi -rigid board insulation. 01. Apply fabric and mastic to provide a smooth surface for painting. B. Standing Seams: Insulate standing seams and stiffeners which protrude through the insulation with 0.6 lb per cubic foot density, 1-1 /2 inch thick, faced insulation. As a vapor seal, use glass cloth with vapor barrier coating. Insulation shall not prevent adjustment of damper operators. C. Insulation shall be wrapped tightly on the ductwork. Adhere insulation to ductwork with adhesive. In addition, secure insulation to the bottom of rectangular ductwork by the use of either weld pins with washers or cup -head pins welded to the ductwork or perforated based insulation hangers glued to the duct on 12 inch centers to prevent sagging of insulation. D. Cover all seams, joints, pin penetrations and other breaks with coating reinforced with glass fabric. Fabric shall not be visible after coating. 3.04' OUTDOOR DUCTWORK COVERING A. Cover all supply and return ductwork outdoors: 01. 1-1/2" thick, rigid closed cell insulation with reinforced foil facing. B. Install a high point in center and slope in both directions so water will not stand on horizontal surfaces. C. Impale the insulation over mechanical fasteners and washers. 01. A minimum of 2 rows of fasteners per side on 12-inch centers. 02. Seal all breaks, joints and punctures by applying a 1/8" thick vapor barrier mastic coating, embedded in open mesh glass fabric. D. Standing S, or flanged connections shall be covered with the same thickness of insulation overlapped a minimum of 4". E. Apply a tack coat of Childers CP-10/11 weather barrier mastic over the entire surface. 1. While this coat is still tacky, Childers #5 glass fiber reinforcing mesh shall be smoothly applied and pressed into the mastic. The cloth shall be taut with adjacent edges overlapped a minimum of 4". 2. After the first coat of mastic has taken its set, the second coat shall be applied over the cloth by palm, trowel, or spray to sufficient thickness that, when dried, the combined thickness of mastic and cloth is not less than 1/8". 3. Upon completion, the openings in the cloth shall be completely sealed and the yarn shall not be visible. The completed work shall be completely smooth and present a plane surface. 4. Aluminum gray or white finish as approved by the Architect. F. Standing water on horizontal surfaces is not approved. G. Apply outdoor duct laminated jacketing protection over entire insulation surface. Apply rubberized bitumen compound, applied to a cross -laminated high strength polyethylene film, laminated to aluminum foil. EXTERNAL DUCT INSULATION VLK Architects, 2007 23 0713 - 4 2740.00 CREEKVIEW ELEMENTARY SCHOOL COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX 3.05 KITCHEN GREASE EXHAUST DUCTWORK / KILN DUCTWORK / FUME HOOD DUCT A. Secure fireboard insulation to duct with impaling pins and 3" square speed clips. In addition, provide a wire mesh support system and additional sealing or support as required by the code enforcing authority. The insulation support system shall include framed access to allow the insulation to be removed and replaced without damage at the access doors in the duct system for inspection and cleaning. Coordinate location of access openings to correspond accurately. Provide stainless steel banding on 12" centers. 3.06 GENERAL INSTALLATION A. Install materials in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Apply insulation on clean, dry surfaces only. C. Continue insulation with vapor barrier through penetrations. D. Neatly finish insulation at supports, protrusions and interruptions. E. Install insulation on clean, dry surfaces, and only after building is weatherproofed sufficiently to preclude any rainwater on insulation. F. Apply mastic over the fiberglass cloth fabric to a thickness where fabric is not visible after completion. END OF SECTION EXTERNAL DUCT INSULATION VLK Architects, 2007 23 0713 - 5 2740.00 CREEKVIEW ELEMENTARY SCHOOL COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX SECTION 23 0933 - BUILDING MANAGEMENT AND CONTROL SYSTEM PART 1-GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE A. Provide and install a complete Building Management and Control System (BMCS), including industrial instrumentation necessary to obtain functions and results specified. A complete system includes items such as sensors, valves, dampers, valve and damper operators, DDC panels, relays, terminal equipment controllers, mounting brackets and thermowell, etc. Integrate all components to provide a complete and functioning system. B. Temperature Control System components: 1. Electronic instruments as specified 2. Electric instruments as specified 3. Microcomputer instruments as specified C. All control devices of the same type product shall be of a single manufacture. D. Control, power and interlock wiring necessary to accomplish sequences specified in this Section shall be provided and installed by the Control Subcontractor. Materials and methods of execution as specified in Division 26, Electrical. 1. Coordinate current characteristics of all electrical instruments and equipment with Division 26 of the specifications and related electrical drawings. E. The entire Building Management and Control System (BMCS) shall be installed by the Automation System Manufacturer or Authorized Distributor. 1. All components and elements 2. The testing and acceptance procedure F. The manufacturer of the building automation system shall provide documentation supporting compliance with ISO-9002 (Model for Quality Assurance in Production, Installation, and Servicing). The intent of this specification requirement is to ensure that the products from the manufacturer are delivered through a Quality System and Framework that will assure consistency in the products delivered for this project. G. The entire Building Management and Control Systqm (BMCS) shall be installed, Commissioned, and tested; all performed by the Automation System Manufacturer or Authorized Distributor if approved by engineer. 1. All components and elements. 2. Start-up and point verification. 3. The testing and acceptance procedure. 1.02 RELATED WORK A. Division 23, Mechanical. B. Division 26, Electrical. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit items of the Building Management and Control System (BMCS). 1. Temperature control equipment & Field devices. 2. Wiring & Flow diagrams. 3. Sequence of operation. 4. Complete, detailed, control and interlock -wiring diagram. BUILDING MANAGEMENT AND CONTROL SYSTEM VLK Architects, 2007 23 0933 - 1 2740.00 CREEKVIEW ELEMENTARY SCHOOL COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX 5. Indicate mechanical and electrical equipment furnished and electrical interlocks, indicating terminal designation of equipment. Respective equipment manufacturers shall furnish through the Mechanical Contractor, approved drawings of equipment to be incorporated in this diagram. 6. Submit Input / Output summary of all points. 7. Submit an outline of testing procedures from section Testing And Acceptance. 8. Mark up a copy of the specifications for the product. Indicate in the margin of each paragraph the following: "Comply, "Do Not Comply", or "Not Applicable". Explain all "Do Not Comply" statements. 9. Submit sample of space temperature sensor and guards for review prior to purchase or installation. 1.04 COOPERATION WITH OTHER TRADES A. Furnish control valves, temperature sensing element wells, flow and pressure sensing devices, dampers and other similar devices to the Mechanical Contractor in a timely manner for installation under the Building Management and Control System (BMCS), Subcontractor's supervision. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Delta installed by T.E.A.M. Solutions, Inc. 2.02 SYSTEM ARCHITECTURE A. The system shall match and expand the existing Delta Controls System. All new panels must communicate seamlessly as part of the Delta Controls network and use the existing programming, setup and graphical interfacing tools. The new panels will exchange data and accept all editing commands from the existing Delta Controls Operator Workstation located in the Owner's office. B. The Building Management and Control System (BMCS) shall consist of an information - sharing network of stand-alone Direct Digital Control Panels (DDCP) to monitor and control equipment as specified of the control sequence and input/output summary. This project is an extension of an existing campus wide area network. B. "Information sharing" shall be defined as: The function of each DDCP to exchange data on the network trunk with other DDCP's without the need for additional devices such as network managers, gateways or central computers. C. "Stand-alone" shall be defined as: The function of each DDCP to independently monitor and control connected equipment through its own microcomputer. 2.03 COMMUNICATIONS PROCESSING A. The BMCS shall operate as a true token -pass peer -to -peer communication network. Resident processors in each DDCP shall provide for full exchange of system data between other DDCP's on the network trunk. Systems that limit data exchange to a defined number of system points are not acceptable. B. Systems that operate via polled response or other types of protocols that rely on a central processor or similar device to manage DDCP to DDCP communications may be considered only if a similar device is provided as a stand-by. Upon a failure of malfunction BUILDING MANAGEMENT AND CONTROL SYSTEM VLK Architects, 2007 23 0933 - 2 2740.00 CREEKVIEW ELEMENTARY SCHOOL COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX of the primary device, the stand-by shall automatically, without any operator intervention, assume all BMCS network management activities. C. The failure of any DDCP on the network shall not affect the operation of other DDCP's. All DDCP failure shall be annunciated at the specified alarm printers and terminals. D. Network shall support a minimum communications speed of 115.2 Kbps. E. The network shall support a minimum of 100 DDC controllers and PC workstations. F. Each PC workstation shall support a minimum of 4 peer -to -peer networks, either by hardwired connection or dial up. G. The system shall support integration of third party systems BACnet Systems. 2.04 BUILDING CONTROLLERS (DDCP) A. Provide an adequate number of Building Controllers to achieve the performance specified in the Part 1 Article on "System Performance." Each of these panels shall meet the following requirements. 1. The Energy Management and Control System shall be comprised of one or more independent, standalone, microprocessor -based Building Controllers to manage the global strategies described in the System Software section. 2. The Building Controller shall have sufficient memory to support its operating system, database, and programming requirements. 3. Data shall be shared between networked Building Controllers. 4. The operating system of the Building Controller shall manage the input and output communication signals to allow distributed controllers to share real and virtual object information, and allow central monitoring and alarms. 5. Controllers that perform scheduling shall have a real-time clock. 6. The Building Controller shall communicate with other BACnet objects on the internetwork using the Read (Execute and Initiate) and Write (Execute and Initiate) Property services as defined in Clauses 15.5 and 15.8, respectively, of ASHRAE Standard 135-2001. 7. BACnet Functional Groups. The Building Controller shall support the following BACnet functional groups: Clock, Event Initiation, COV Event Response, Files, Device Communication and Time Master. B. Communication 1. Each Building Controller shall support direct Ethernet or a communications card. The communications card shall be connected to the Building Controller by an PC-104 bus connection. The Building Controller shall be connected to the BACnet network using the ISO 8802-3 (Ethernet) Data Link/ Physical layer protocol. 2. Each Building Controller with a communications card shall perform BACnet routing if connected to a network of Custom Application and Application Specific Controllers. BUILDING MANAGEMENT AND CONTROL SYSTEM VLK Architects, 2007 23 0933 - 3 2740.00 CREEKVIEW ELEMENTARY SCHOOL COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX 3. The controller shall provide a service communication port using BACnet Data Link/ Physical layer protocol P-T-P for connection to a hand-held workstation/ and/or modem. 4. The Building Controller secondary communication network shall support BACnet MS/TP. C. Environment. Controller hardware shall be suitable for the anticipated ambient conditions. 1. Controllers used outdoors and/or in wet ambient conditions shall be mounted within waterproof enclosures, and shall be rated for operation at 0°C to 40°C [32OF to 100OF] and 10 to 90% RH. 2. Controllers used in conditioned space shall be mounted in dust -proof enclosures, and shall be rated for operation at 0OC to 500C [32°F to 120OF]. D. Building Controllers shall be fully peer -to -peer. E. Provide diagnostic LEDs for power, communication, and processor. All wiring connections shall be made to field- removable, modular terminal strips — or to a termination card connected by a ribbon cable. F. The Building Controller shall have as a minimum standard SRAM of 256 KB, standard DRAM of 1 MB and standard non-volatile 1 MB of flash memory in lieu of EPROM. Memory shall be user extendible through RAM chip sockets and SIMMs for future memory expansion. G. Immunity to power and noise. Controller shall be able to operate at 90% to 110% of nominal voltage rating and shall perform an orderly shutdown below 80% nominal voltage. The Building Controller shall maintain all database information including BIOS and programming information in the event of a power loss for at least 72 hours. Operation shall be protected against electrical noise of 5 to 120 Hz and from keyed radios up to 5 W at 1 m [3 ft]. H. Inputs/Outputs. 1. Inputs. Controller input/output board shall support dry contact, 0-5 VDC and 0-10 VDC- voltage, 4-20 mA- current and thermistor-resistive signal types on an individual basis for connecting any status or sensing device. Analog resolution shall be 10-bit A to D. 2. Ouputs. Controller input/output board shall support plug -and -play 1/0 modules or built in HOA modules configured with manual -auto -off override switch, potentiometer and input channel for feedback status or and unrelated analog or digital input. Output supported shall be 0-10 VDC. All HOA's shall be supervised. 3. Diagnostics. Controller input/output board shall have red LEDs providing input status indication. 4. External Power. Controller input/ouput board shall have one on -board 24 VDC terminal for directly connected active transducers. 5. Building Controller shall have the capability to create, delete and support the following BACnet Objects: a. ANALOG INPUT, ANALOG OUTPUT AND ANALOG VALUE: These objects shall have the following writeable properties: Object Name; Object Value; Description; COV Increment; Out of Service and Units. In addition, these objects shall support the properties: Device type; Reliability; Min./Max. Values; Update Interval and Resolution. BUILDING MANAGEMENT AND CONTROL SYSTEM VLK Architects, 2007 23 0933 - 4 2740.00 CREEKVIEW ELEMENTARY SCHOOL COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX b. BINARY INPUT, BINARY OUTPUT AND BINARY VALUE: These objects shall have the following writeable properties: Object Name; Object Value; Desription; Polarity; Default Value; Min On/Off and Out of Service. In addition, these objects shall support the properties: Device Type; Reliability; Active/Inactive Texts; Update Interval; Resolution; Change -of -State Time; Count Times and Time Reset. C. CALENDAR: This object shall have the following writeable properties: Object Name; Object Value; Description; and Date List. d. DEVICE: This object shall have the following writeable properties: Object Name; Description; Location; and UTC Offset. e. EVENT ENROLMENT: This object shall have the following writeable properties: Object Name; Object Value; Description;Out-of-Service; Event & Notify Types; Paramenters; Property Ref; Enable; and Notification Class. f. FILE: This object shall have the following writeable properties: Object Name; Description; File Type; and File Access. g. LOOP (PID): This object shall have the following writeable properties: Object Name; Object Value; Description; Polarity; Output and Input Refs.; Input Value & Units; Setpoint Value; PID Values; Bias; Write Priority and COV Increment. In addition, this object shall support the properties: Reliablity; Update Interval; Proportional Constant & Units; Derviative Constant & Units. h. NOTIFICATION CLASS: This object shall have the following writeable properties: Object Name; Object Value; Description; Priority and Ack Requried. L PROGRAM: This object shall have the following writeable properties: Object Name; Object Value and Description. In addition, this object shall support the property Reliablity. j. SCHEDULE: This object shall have the following writeable properties: Object Name; Object Value and Description; Effective period; Schedule; Exception; Controlled Properties and Write Properties. k. TREND LOG: This object shall have the following writeable properties: Object Name; Description; Log Enable; Start/stop Times; Log Device Object Property; Log Interval; Stop When Full; Buffer Size; and Record Count. 2.05 FACILITY MANAGEMENT SOFTWARE A. The BMCS shall be provided with standard and custom report generation functions that include: 1. Alarm summaries. 2. Motor status summaries. 3. Point displays by type, system, status, overrides, failures, location, equipment and enabled/disabled. 4. Program listings. B. All reports shall be either displayed or printed by: 1. Operator request. 2. Time of day. 3. Event conditions (such as in response to an alarm, interlock, etc.). C. All reports shall be time and date stamped. D. An alarm -processing program shall be provided to annunciate those points designated as alarmable. Alarm points shall, upon alarm occurrence, be displayed or printed at designated terminals. BUILDING MANAGEMENT AND CONTROL SYSTEM VLK Architects, 2007 23 0933 - 5 2740.00 CREEKVIEW ELEMENTARY SCHOOL COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX E. Historical trend data shall be collected and stored at each. DDCP for later retrieval. Retrieval shall be manual or automatic. Any point, physical or calculated, may be designated for trending. The system shall allow for two methods of trend collection: Either by a pre -defined time interval sample or upon a pre -defined change of value. Trend data shall be presented in a columnar format. Each sample shall be timed stamped. Trend reports may be a single point or may be a group of points up to a maximum of (8) points in any single group. Any point, regardless of physical location in the system may become part of a multiple point group. F. Each BMCS network shall provide a point -monitoring function that can display single or multiple points in a continuous updated fashion for dynamic displays of point values. G. A database and configuration report program shall be provided that allows the user to interrogate BMCS status. As a minimum, the user shall be able to: Verify available RAM at each DDCP, verify DDCP status (on-line, off-line, failed) and set the system clock. H. Any invalid operator entry shall result in an error message. DDCP's shall contain a password access routine that will assign an operator to one of three level of access. Level 1 shall permit display function only, level 2 shall additionally permit commanding of system points and level 3 shall additionally permit full program and database editing. DDCP's shall provide for the accumulation of totalized values for the purposes of run-time or energy totalization. Totalized values may be displayed or printed automatically or by operator request. 2.06 ENERGY MANAGEMENT SOFTWARE A. The BMCS shall be provided with an optimal start program such that the building may be divided into ten zones for optimum start. Warm-up and cool -down shall occur in sequence with succeeding zones starting only after the preceding zone has completed its warm-up or cool -down. 1. The optimum start-up time of assigned equipment shall be determined based on a software calculation that takes into consideration outdoor air conditions, space conditions, and building thermal characteristics ("U" factor). 2. The optimum start program shall control start-up of the cooling and heating equipment to achieve the target occupancy space temperature at the precise time of building occupancy. 3. A built -In "learning" technique shall cause the BMCS to automatically adjust itself to the most affective time to start equipment based on historical data. B. The BMCS shall be provided with an operator interactive time of day (TOD) program. TOD programming and modifying shall be accomplished in a calendar -like format that prompts the user in English language to specify month, year, day and time and associated point commands. It shall be possible to assign single points or groups of points to any on or off time. Appropriate time delays shall be provided to "stagger" on times. 1. TOD shall incorporate a holiday and special day schedule capability, which will automatically bring up a pre -defined holiday or special day schedule of operation. Holidays or special days can be scheduled up to one year in advance. 2. In addition to the time dependent two -state control, TOD also provides time dependent setpoint control. This control provides the capability to output assignable, proportional setpoint values in accordance with the time of day and day of week. This program shall be used to accomplish night setback, morning warm-up and normal daily operating setpoints of all control system loops BUILDING MANAGEMENT AND CONTROL SYSTEM VLK Architects, 2007 23 0933 - 6 2740.00 CREEKVIEW ELEMENTARY SCHOOL COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX controlled by the BMCS. As with the two -state control, time dependent setpoint control shall be subject to the holiday schedule. The setpoints desired shall be user definable at any operator terminal. 3. The operator shall be capable of reading and/or altering all sorted data pertaining to time of day, day of week, on/off times, setpoint values, and holiday designation. 4. The TOD program shall also provide an override function that allows the user to conveniently change a start or stop time for any point up to one week in advance. The override command shall be temporary. Once executed the TOD program shall revert to its original schedule. 5. The TOD program shall interface with the optimal start program (OSP) such that stop times may be assigned by OSP. C. Additional Program functions required: 1. Enthalpy optimization. 2. Supply air reset. 3. Volumetric control. 4. Dead band control. 5. All specified energy management programs, whether or not applicable to this project shall be provided such that the owner may enable the program at a future date without the need to purchase additional software or modify existing software. 6. Auto answer/Auto dial software 2.07 POINT EXPANSION MODULES A. Capable of extending its input/output capabilities via special purpose modules. 1. Modules may be mounted remote from the DDCP. 2. Shall communicate with the DDCP over a pair of twisted cables. 2.08 TERMINAL EQUIPMENT CONTROLLERS A. Provide for control of each piece of equipment, including, but not limited to, the following: 1. Rooftop Units B. Include the following items: 1. All input and outputs necessary to perform the specified control sequences. a. Analog outputs shall be industry standard signals such as 24V floating control. 2. Sufficient memory to accommodate point database, operating programs, local alarming and local trending. 3. All databases and programs shall be stored in non-volatile EEPROM, EPROM and PROM, or minimum of 100-hour battery backup shall be provided. 4. Return to full normal operation without user intervention after a power outage of unlimited duration. 5. Operation programs shall be field selectable for specific applications. 6. Specific control strategy requirements, allowing for additional system flexibility. 7. Controllers that require factory changes of all applications are not acceptable. 2.09 ELECTRONIC DAMPER ACTUATORS A. Two position damper operators: 1. Spring return to full travel position. 2. Built in auxiliary switches (motor end switches) a. Switch shall be fully adjustable so that cut-in/cut-out points may be preset at any point within angular travel of the motor. 3. Minimum torque 60-in-lb BUILDING MANAGEMENT AND CONTROL SYSTEM VLK Architects, 2007 23 0933 - 7 2740.00 CREEKVIEW ELEMENTARY SCHOOL COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX B. Modulating damper operators: 1. Sized with sufficient reserve power to provide smooth modulating action and tight close off against the system pressure 2. Select the operator with available torque to exceed the maximum required operating torque by not less than 50% 3. Minimum torque 100 in -lb 2.10 HOST COMPUTER AND PERIPHERALS A. Shall be provided by owner. 2.11 CONTROL CABINETS A. Fully enclosed NEMA 1 for indoors, NEMA 4 for outdoors. 1. Powder coat painted on all sides 2. Cabinet with continuously piano type hinged door 3. Locking latch 4. All locks shall use a common key 5. Devices on the panel face must be identified with engraved nameplates. 6. Panels or termination panels must be identified with engraved nameplates. 7. Provide enamel beige finish and extruded aluminum alloy frame UL 50 certified. 2.12 Environmental CO2 Sensors A. Wall Mounted 1. Non -dispersive infrared analyzer. 2. Repeatable to +/-30ppm +/-4.5% of measured value 3. Veris Industries m/n CWVSIXX5 4. 5 year calibration and warranty 2.13 TEMPERATURE LOW LIMIT SWITCH A. Responsive to the coldest I'section of its length. 1. Double pole single throw switch 2. 20' capillary 3. Line voltage with bellows actuated switch 4. Auto reset for outdoor installation 5. Manual reset for indoor installation 2.14 TEMPERATURE AND HUMIDITY SENSORS A. Space Temperature Sensors 1. Thermistor with resistance of 10,000 ohms at 77°F. 2. Accuracy shall be +/-1/2°F. 3. Range of 550 to 950 F. 4. Provide manufacturers calibration certificate. 5. Surface Mounted a. Digital temperature display b. Ventilation ring for fast response C. Setpoint slide adjustment d. Override button e. Internal RJ11 Communication jack at sensor for communications f. Color to be approved by Architect / Owner 6. Stainless steel flush mount sensor 7. Location and height to be approved by Architect/Engineer prior to installation. BUILDING MANAGEMENT AND CONTROL SYSTEM VLK Architects, 2007 23 0933 - 8 2740.00 CREEKVIEW ELEMENTARY SCHOOL COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX 8. Provide metal guards in the following locations: a. Corridors b. Gymnasium B. Space / Duct Humidity Sensor 1. Capacitance element in the space or duct as required and output a 4 to 20 MA signal proportional to 0 to 100% RH to the DDC. 2. Capacitance element shall be field replaceable and not require calibration. 3. Accuracy shall be +/-2% in the range from 20 to 95% RH. 4. Relative humidity sensors shall have the sensing element of inorganic resistance media. 5. Provide locking metal covers suitable for institutional use. 6. Provide manufacturers calibration certificate. 7. Provide metal guards in the following locations: a. Corridors b. Gymnasium. C. Duct Temperature Sensors 1. Range of 200 to 120°F. 2. Single point sensing of temperature. 3. Averaging elements of sufficient length to sense temperature across 2/3 duct width. 4. Averaging elements of sufficient length to provide accurate, representative indication and control. 5. Averaging elements of sufficient length to prevent variances in temperature or stratification. D. Outside Air / Freezer / Cooler Sensors 1. Range of -580 to 122°F. 2. Weatherproof sun shield. 3. External trim material corrosion resistant with all parts assembled into water tight, vibration -proof, heat resistant assembly. 4. Minimum of 8' long leads. 5. Encapsulated into Type 304 stainless steel tubes with low conductivity moisture proofing material and lag extension for thickness of insulation. 2.15 CURRENT SENSITIVE RELAYS: A. Ensure compatibility with VFD applications for variable speed motor status. 1. Provide with adjustable set point. 2. Relays must be mounted and not hung by power wires thru CT. 3. Provide split -core type current sensors. 4. Loop powered. 5. LED Status. 6. Acceptable Manufacturer: Veris Industries / Hawkeye 7. Relays shall close status contacts in response to current flow in power leads to the equipment being monitored. 2.16 ELECTRIC REMOTE BULB THERMOSTAT A. Two position remote bulb thermostat: 1. Bimetal controlled. 2. Sealed mercury switches. 3. Provide specified control action. 4. Adjustment can be made by removing unit cover. 5. Element with capillary length as required for the location. BUILDING MANAGEMENT AND CONTROL SYSTEM VLK Architects, 2007 23 0933 - 9 2740.00 CREEKVIEW ELEMENTARY SCHOOL COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX 2.17 ELECTRIC SPACE THERMOSTAT A. Two position space thermostat. 1. Single Pole switch actuated by bi-metal sensing element. 2. Range shall be 60OF to 90°F. 3. Removable external knob adjustment means. 2.18 HIGH STATIC PRESSURE SWITCH A. With manual reset switch 1. Approved manufacturer: Cleveland AFS-460. 2.19 CONTROL DAMPERS A. Opposed blade dampers. 1. Frames of 13-gauge galvanized sheet metal. 2. Provisions for duct mounting. 3. Damper blades not exceeding 8" in width. 4. Blades of two sheets of 16-gauge galvanized sheet metal. 5. Blades suitable for high velocity performance. 6. Bearings of nylon or oil -impregnated, sinthered bronze. 7. Shafts of 1/2" zinc -plated steel. 8. Leakage does not exceed 1/2% based on 2000 fpm and 4" static pressure. 9. Replaceable resilient seals along top, bottom and sides of frame and blade edge. 10. Submit leakage and flow characteristics data with shop drawings. 11. Linkage shall be concealed out of the air stream within damper frame. 12. Acceptable Model is Ruskin Model CD60. 2.20 DRAIN PAN FLOAT SWITCH A. Rated at 10 Amps. 1. Shuts off equipment if water level becomes too high. 2. DPDT Contacts. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. The control system shall be installed and final adjustments made by full-time employees of the factory -approved BMCS Building Management Control Subcontractor. B. The contractor shall collaborate through Architect / Engineer and Owner to determine the Owner's preference for naming conventions, etc. before entering the data in to the system. C. Due to room conditions, it may be necessary for the Contractor to make controller adjustments, change the location or type of sensor to obtain proper operation and coverage of the system in each room, therefore labor allowances should be made for such changes and adjustments. 3.02 INTERLOCK AND SAFETY CIRCUITS A. Close the outdoor air dampers when the related HVAC unit supply fan is de -energized: 1. The damper and actuators are specified in this section. BUILDING MANAGEMENT AND CONTROL SYSTEM VLK Architects, 2007 23 0933 - 10 2740.00 CREEKVIEW ELEMENTARY SCHOOL COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX 2. Outdoor air damper shall be fully opened before related air handling unit fan is energized for 100% outside air use. B. Exhaust/Supply Fans 1. Interlock the related exhaust and supply fans and the related outside air damper. 2. Interlock the exhaust fans with the related air -handling unit through software. 3. Interlock related exhaust fan for dishwasher with time delay off relay. 4. Interlock related exhaust fan for kiln with time delay off relay 5. Interlock kitchen hood related supply and exhaust fans. 6. Provide additional interlocks as indicated on fan schedule and on drawings. 7. Interlock electrical and mechanical room exhaust fans with thermostat. C. Drain Pan Float Protection 1. Interlock to shut down unit and close valves. 2. Cooling Coils mounted above ceiling. 3. Provide for each cooling coil location. 4. Signal BMCS alarm point D. Domestic Water System 1. Interlock in -line circulating pumps at water heaters with return water pipe mounted thermostat to cycle pump with return water temperature. 2. Interlock high temperature entering water solenoid valve with thermostat on discharge side of tempered water mixing valves. E. Emergency Shutdown Station 1. Provide an emergency mushroom style push / pull station shutdown switch in the Administration Area as indicated on plans. 2. Signal the building automation system to de -energize the HVAC equipment. 3. This is to stop exhaust fans and outside air units immediately. 4. Once stopped, the system may only be restarted with a key operated switch located adjacent to the shutdown switch. 3.03 GRAPHICS A. Furnish as -built drawings indicating finally corrected "as installed" diagram(s) of the complete Building Management Control System. 1. Modification of existing control systems shall be included. 2. These must be as -built and any changes during the warranty period drawings must be revised and updated. 3. Provide final sequence of operation in written format. B. Provide a set of the "as installed" diagram(s) of the complete control system laminated in plastic and hung in the main mechanical room or as directed by Owner. C. Provide a color -coded floor plan of the building showing the location of each system, and the area served by each AHU or related zone. These must be of professional quality. Floor plan to hang in room as directed by owner. D. Provide computer graphics for each system. 3.04 IDENTIFICATION A. Provide a laminated engraved nameplate on all control panels and devices shown on the "as installed" control diagrams. Coordinate engraving with nomenclature used on the diagrams. BUILDING MANAGEMENT AND CONTROL SYSTEM VLK Architects, 2007 23 0933 - 11 2740.00 CREEKVIEW ELEMENTARY SCHOOL COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX B. A black -white -black laminated plastic engraved identifying nameplate shall be secured to each terminal cabinet, and control panels. Identifying nameplates shall have Sh inch high, engraved letters. 3.05 WIRING FOR BUILDING MANAGEMENT AND CONTROL SYSTEMS A. Furnish and install all wire, conduit, raceways and cable systems required for the complete operation of the Building Management and Control System. B. All wiring for the Building Management and Control System is specified in this section and includes, but is not limited to: 1. Wiring of interlock system. 2. Wiring of control instruments. 3. Wiring of control panels. 4. Wiring of related power supplies, i.e. transformers. 5. Wiring of 120 VAC power circuits for control panels and devices. C. All materials and methods specified in this section shall comply with the requirements specified in Division 26 of this specification. D. All power supply requirements shall be connected to the building electrical distribution system in an approved manner. Do not connect control equipment of circuits common with other building loads or devices. E. Temperature control wiring shall be jacketed cables installed with or without conduit as specified below or single conductors installed in conduit. Control wiring shall have minimum 300V insulation for low voltage wiring and 600V insulation for line voltage wiring. F. All line voltage control wiring, all low voltage control wiring which is exposed in the central plant, penthouse, and other similar spaces; all low voltage control wiring which is routed through concealed inaccessible locations shall be installed in conduit. G. All low voltage control wiring which is routed through concealed accessible locations may be run without conduit provided that the wiring run without conduit is properly supported from the building structure on maximum 5' centers and does not depend upon the ceiling grid or the ceiling support system for support. Wiring run in plenum spaces shall be plenum rated. Support all plenum wiring in accessible locations in bridle rings, J-hooks, D rings. Plenum wiring is not to be supported within building structure or attached to conduit raceways. All low voltage wiring must be installed through supports. Wires shall be supported on 5' centers and identified at each termination point and at 50' centers minimum. Install wire parallel or perpendicular to the structural features of the building. H. Line and low voltage control wiring shall not be installed in the same conduit with control wiring and shall not be installed in the same conduit with power wiring. I. All wiring associated with building management and control system cover shall be as follows: 1. Sensor jacket color, Green 2. LAN communications, Yellow 3. All THHN wiring shall comply with Division 26 insulation color identification 3.06 EXHAUST AND SUPPLY FANS: A. Provide interlocks as scheduled on the plans unless shown on the electrical drawings. BUILDING MANAGEMENT AND CONTROL SYSTEM VLK Architects, 2007 23 0933 - 12 2740.00 CREEKVIEW ELEMENTARY SCHOOL COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX B. Provide BMCS override to disable operation of all exhaust and supply fans interlocked and/or specified throughout project. C. Provide local override push button as indicated on plans. Override button shall enable exhaust fan to operate for scheduled length of time (adjustable). 3.07 BUILDING ELECTRICAL USAGE A. Provide digital monitoring of the building KVA and KW H. Coordinate with the switchgear manufacturer. B. Electrical Quality monitoring. 1. Monitor Watts, VA, VAR, Demand, Imbalance, Power Factor. 3.08 MISCELLANEOUS A. Freezer/Cooler Temperature Monitoring 1. Provide an analog temperature sensor located in the freezer compartment and cooler compartment. POINT DESCRIPTION TYPE DEVICE Freezer Alarm Al 10k Thermistor Cooler Alarm Al 10k Thermistor Freezer Door BI Magnetic Contact Cooler Door BI Magnetic Contact B. Lighting Control 1. Provide Sunrise/Sunset times daily based on longitude/latitude of school position and time based control of each lighting contactor specified in Division 26. a. Provide separate control of each contactor. POINT DESCRIPTION TYPE DEVICE Lighting Contactor DO Control Relay C. Humidity Sensor: Provide a sensor in Library to monitor space conditions. r llvT DESCRIPTION `DEVte Library Humidity Al Space Sensor BUILDING MANAGEMENT AND CONTROL SYSTEM VLK Architects, 2007 23 0933 - 13 2740.00 I CREEKVIEW ELEMENTARY SCHOOL COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX E. Outside Air: Provide a temperature sensor and a humidity sensor to monitor outside air conditions. POINT DESCRIPTION TYPE_ DEVICE Outside Temperature Al Thermistor Outside Humidity Al Humidity Sensor 3.09 DX ROOFTOP UNITS A. Each roof top unit is furnished with a low voltage thermostat. The BMCS shall provide start/stop control. Provide a temperature sensor in the space to provide optimum start/stop. POINT DESCRIPTION TYPES DEVICE Start/Stop DO Control Relay Space Temperature Al Space Thermistor Supply Air Temperature Al Duct Sensor Space CO2 Sensor Al Wall Mount CO2 Fan Start/Stop BO Cooling Stage BO Heating Stage BO 3.10 SRTU DX ROOFTOP UNITS A. Each roof top unit is furnished with a low voltage thermostat. The BMCS shall provide start/stop control. Provide a temperature sensor in the space to provide optimum start/stop. B. Control as follows: 1. Ambient temperature sensor shall energize first stage of cooling whenever ambient temperature rises above 56 degrees F (adjustable) and energize second stage of cooling whenever the temperature is above 76 degrees F (adjustable). 2. De -energize the cooling whenever the ambient temperature is below 55 degrees F (adjustable). 3. Internal unit controls shall operate the hot gas bypass and defrost safeties as required. 4. Start/stop of the unit shall be by BMCS. POINT_ DESCRIPTION TYPES DEVICE Star/Stop DO Control Relay Space Temperature Al Space Thermistor Supply Air Temperature Al Duct Sensor BUILDING MANAGEMENT AND CONTROL SYSTEM VLK Architects, 2007 23 0933 - 14 2740.00 CREEKVIEW ELEMENTARY SCHOOL COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX POINT DESCRIPTION TYPES DEVICE Fan Start/Stop BO Cooling Stage BO Heating Stage BO 3.11 100% DX ROOFTOP UNITS A. These units shall be furnished with direct expansion coil and gas heat in the reheat position. Controls shall be as follows: 1. Ambient temperature sensor shall energize first stage of cooling whenever ambient temperature rises above 56 degrees F (adjustable) and energize second stage of cooling whenever the temperature is above 76 degrees F (adjustable). 2. De -energize the cooling whenever the ambient temperature is below 55 degrees F (adjustable). 3. Internal unit controls shall operate the hot gas bypass and defrost safeties as required. 4. A discharge air temperature sensor shall stage heat to maintain 55 degree F. 5. Start/stop of the unit shall be by BMCS. POINT DESCRIPTION TYPES DEVICE Start/Stop DO Control Relay Space Temperature Al Space Thermistor Supply Air Temperature Al Duct Sensor Fan Start/Stop BO Cooling Stage BO Heating Stage BO 3.12 KITCHEN HOOD SUPPLY AIR HEATING SYSTEM A. This system consists of a gas -fired heater and a supply fan. B. A RTD sensing discharge air from the electric duct heater shall, through the direct digital control panel, stage the electric duct heater to maintain a 700 F discharge temperature (adjustable). POINT DESCRIPTION TYPES DEVICE Supply Fan DO Control Relay Discharge Temperature Al Discharge RTD Heating Stage 1 BI Heating Stage 2 BI BUILDING MANAGEMENT AND CONTROL SYSTEM VLK Architects, 2007 23 0933 - 15 2740.00 CREEKVIEW ELEMENTARY SCHOOL COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX Heating Stage 3 BI Heating Stage 3 BI 3.13 ELECTRIC RADIENT PANELS A. An electric thermostat shall activate the unit to maintain room setpoint. B. Provide enable / Disable function for all corridor electric panels. 3.14 DISHWASHER EXHAUST A. Interlock exhaust fan to operate when dishwasher is operating. Provide 5 minute (adjustable) run time for fan after dishwasher stops. 3.15 START-UP AND POINT VERIFICATION A. Final startup and point verification shall include the following information. 1. Field panel checkout. a. Verify enclosure is not mounted on vibrating surface. b. Verify class I and class II wiring is separated within enclosure. C. Check for shorts/grounds/induced voltages/proper voltages. d. Verify proper point terminations in accordance with as-builts. e. Verify that all modules are in proper place and addressed. f. Verify proper power voltage. g. Load database and programming. h. Startup the panel. i. Point and device checkout. 2. Analog input point checkout a. Verify the correct wiring terminations per the design documentation package, at the field panel. Verify that all wiring and terminations are neat and dressed. b. Verify the point address by checking that the analog input instrument is wired to the correct piece of field equipment. Do this by altering the environment at the sensing element or by disconnecting one of the wires at the sensor, and verifying that the reading at the field panel has reacted to this change. C. Verify the point database to be correct, (i.e., alarmability, alarm limits, slope/intercept, engineering units, etc.). Verify that the correct change of value (COV) limit has been defined. d. Verify the sensor has the correct range and input signal. (i.e., 20-120°F, 4 - 20 ma). Verify that the device is mounted in the correct location and is wired and installed correctly per the design documentation package. e. Set-up and/or calibrate any associated equipment (i.e., panel LCD meters, loop isolators, etc.). Verify that these auxiliary devices are mounted in the correct location and are wired and installed correctly per the design documentation package. f. Verify the correct reading at the field panel using appropriate MMI devices. Verify that any associated LCD panel meters indicate the correct measured value. 3. Digital input point checkout a. Verify the device is correctly wired and terminated as shown in the design documentation package. Verify that all wiring and terminations are neat and properly secured. BUILDING MANAGEMENT AND CONTROL SYSTEM VLK Architects, 2007 23 0933 - 16 2740.00 CREEKVIEW ELEMENTARY SCHOOL COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX b. Verify the point address by verifying that the digital input is correctly terminated at the controlled piece of equipment. C. Verify the point database is correct (i.e., point name, address, alarmability, etc.). d. Set-up and/or calibrate the associated equipment, i.e. smoke detector, high/low temp detector, high/low static switch, flow switch, end switch, current relay, pressure switch, etc. is mounted in the correct location, and is wired and installed correctly per the control system installation drawings. e. With the controlled equipment running or energized as described in the digital output checkout procedures, verify the correct operation of the digital input point and associated equipment by putting the digital input monitored equipment into its two states. Verify that the proof or status point indicates the correct value at the operator's terminal and that the status led is giving the proper indication in each mode of operation (on/off). 4. Digital output point checkout a. Verify that device is correctly wired and terminated as shown in the design documentation package. b. Verify that the correct voltage is utilized in the circuit. C. Verify the point database to be correct (i.e. point name, address, etc.). d. Check and verify that the end device responds appropriately to the digital output(s). e. After verifying the set-up and operation of any associated digital input/proof points, check and verify correct operation of the logical point and associated equipment by commanding the point to all possible states (i.e. off, on, fast, slow, auto, etc.). Verify that the defined proof delay is adequate for all modes of operation. f. If any interlocked equipment exists that has independent hand -off -auto or auxiliary control wiring, verify correct operation of same. Also check that any interlocked equipment such as EP switches for damper operation or exhaust and return fans are wired correctly and operate correctly. g. Verify that the controlled piece or pieces of equipment can not be cause to change state via the digital output if an associated hand -off -auto switch is in the hand /on or hand/off mode of operation, unless specified as a fireman's override point etc. 5. Analog output point checkout a. Verify the correct wiring or piping terminations per the design documentation package, at the field panel. Verify that all wiring and piping terminations are neat and dressed. b. Insure that the correct output device(s) are installed per the Control System Installation Drawings. (i.e., I/P or P/I transducers, transformers, power supply, etc.). Verify that these devices are installed, wired and piped correctly. Verify that any configuration jumpers are in the proper settings for the required application. Verify related transformers are fused in accordance with installation drawings. C. Verify the point database to be correct. Verify that the correct COV limit has been defined. d. Verify the point address by checking that the analog output is wired and/or piped to the correct output transducer and/or equipment. BUILDING MANAGEMENT AND CONTROL SYSTEM VLK Architects, 2007 23 0933 - 17 2740.00 CREEKVIEW ELEMENTARY SCHOOL COLLEGE STATION ISO COLLEGE STATION, TX e. Verify that the controlled device is calibrated (i.e., 3-8PSI valve, 8-13 PSI damper motor, 4-20 ma variable frequency drive, etc.) and is in the correct location, and is wired or piped and installed correctly per the design documentation package. If the controlled device is not calibrated, then a three-point (high, low and mid -point) calibration procedure must take place. Verify proper operation of the end device. When calibration has been verified, ensure that installation drawings, point database, and PPCL have been updated. f. Set-up and or calibrate any associated equipment, (i.e., panel LCD meters, loop isolators, pneumatic gauges, etc.). Also verify that these auxiliary devices are mounted in the correct location, and are wired or piped and installed correctly per the design documentation package. g. After verifying the set-up and operation of any associated equipment check for the correct operation of the logical point and associated equipment by commanding the analog output to the top and bottom of its range. Verity that the control device(s) responded appropriately as indicated by the design documentation package. Check to insure that all network terminals, host console devices, etc. can also command these outputs. h. Check that all pneumatic gauges, pilot positioners and LCD panel meters indicate the correct values. 6. Terminal equipment controller checkout a. Load program database b. Enable programs C. Verify sequence of operations 7. Programming checkout a. Provide checkout for each system and sequence of operation. b. The following are sample sequence of operations tests. The intent of these procedures is to provide a plan of action to verify system operations via block checks of the project specific sequence of operations. The procedures may be used in this format, or one procedure to a page should more detail be required. The procedures outlined below should be verified for accuracy, and may be modified to meet your specific requirements. C. DESCRIPTION OF TEST: AHU Alarm Checkout. Verify AHU-1 discharge air temperature alarming is operational and is received at the designated terminal. d. INPUT TO TRIGGER TEST: Change discharge temperature high alarm limit through software to a value below the current discharge temperature (discharge temperature - 10°F). e. EXPECTED OUTCOME: A high temperature alarm will be received per the Alarm Definition Report at its designated terminal. f. Provide signoff sheet with indication for test Pass, Fail, Date of test and Initials for signoff. 8. Workstation checkout a. Verify the operation of all trunk interface equipment. b. Verify all workstation software, including options, based upon the installation instructions for the PC. C. Perform software backup (site, options, etc.) d. Complete workstation configuration report for owner signoff. e. Provide verification that all graphics have been created, as required by project bid documents. BUILDING MANAGEMENT AND CONTROL SYSTEM VLK Architects, 2007 23 0933 - 18 2740.00 CREEKVIEW ELEMENTARY SCHOOL COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX 3.16 TESTING AND ACCEPTANCE A. General 1. After completion of installation and start-up procedures, commence the specified 3-phase verification and testing sequence leading to final acceptance. a. Follow in the order specified. b. Each testing phase shall be satisfactorily completed before entering the next phase. 2. Prior to entering each phase of the sequence, submit for approval, a written agenda describing in detail the procedure to be followed to meet the requirements for each specified verification, test or demonstration. 3. Submit for approval, a sample of the form on which the test will be reported. a. Identify project. b. Provide a list of all points, arrange in numerical order of point addresses. 1) Show point descriptor and location of each. 2) Indicate DDC panel that processes each point. 3) Use the list as a basis for the specified report form. C. Signatures of participants and observers. d. Results. e. Description of adjustment or corrections of points in error. f. Date. 4. Provide schedule of tests. Estimate dates of significant events. 5. Test, calibrate and adjust each point in the system as specified. 6. Provide documentation of all tests and verifications as specified. 7. Provide trend reports indicating proper control of all points for an extended period of time. B. Phase 1 - Testing, Calibrating, and Adjusting 1. Operate each analog point in the entire system. a. At a point in the upper quarter of its range. b. At a point in the lower quarter of its range. C. At its operating point. 2. Provide personnel and diagnostic instruments at both the central and remote locations. 3. Provide testing stimulants for alarms. 4. Use digital meters of double the accuracy of the instruments being calibrated. 5. Provide an approved test device for simulating high and low temperatures. 6. When the function is performed, read values at the central control and observe the actual function at the field instrument. 7. Exercise each binary point and observe indication at console and simultaneously observe operation in the field. 8. Submit an operation report for each point in the system, in approved format, and describe any corrective or adjusting action taken. 9. Test all power transducers with a Dranetz Power Analyzer. C. Phase 2 - Equipment and Point Verification 1. Verify calibration or function of each point. a. Verify analog points at operating value. b. Record on specified form. C. Make approved adjustments to out of tolerance points. 1) Identify these points for ready reference. 2. After verification procedure in completed: a. Verify corrected points. b. Record on specified form. BUILDING MANAGEMENT AND CONTROL SYSTEM VLK Architects, 2007 23 0933 - 19 2740.00 CREEKVIEW ELEMENTARY SCHOOL COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX C. Points requiring correction. 1) Replace sensor or actuator if electrical measurements indicated components are out of specified tolerance. D. Phase 3 - Software Verification 1. Submit agenda and report format for software demonstrations. 2. Demonstrate to the Owner and the Engineer that all software programs and automatic control sequences function as specified. 3. Demonstrate compliance with response time specifications. a. Simulate normal heavy load conditions. b. Initiate at least ten successive occurrences on normal heavy load conditions as specified, and measure response time of typical alarms and status changes. 4. Provide written documentation of demonstration, signed by representatives of the Contractor and Engineer. E. Provide the following reports to Engineer at final completion of all Testing. 1. List of all points. 2. List of all points currently in alarm. 3. List of all disabled points. 4. List of all points in over -ride status. 5. List of all points currently locked out. 6. List of user accounts and access levels. 7. List all weekly schedules. 8. List of holiday programming schedules. 9. List of limits and deadbands. 10. System diagnostics reports including, list of DDC panels on line and communicating, status of all DDC terminal units device points. 11. List of programs. 12. Provide trend data reports to ensure proper operation and sequence control of BMCS. F. Substantial Completion of the BMCS will not occur until completion and acceptance of all testing and acceptance procedures. 3.17 TRAINING A. The contractor shall provide factory -trained instructor to give full instruction to designated personnel in the operation of the system installed. Instructors shall be thoroughly familiar with all aspects of the subject matter they are to teach. The contractor shall provide all students with a student binder containing product specific training modules for the system installed. All training shall be held during normal working hours of 8:00 am to 4:30 PM weekdays. B. Provide 40 hours of training for Owner's designated operating personnel. Training shall include: Explanation of drawings, operations and maintenance manuals Walk-through of the job to locate control components Operator workstation and peripherals DDC controller and ASC operation/function Operator control functions including graphic generation and field panel programming Operation of portable operator's terminal Explanation of adjustment, calibration and replacement procedures Student binder with training modules BUILDING MANAGEMENT AND CONTROL SYSTEM VLK Architects, 2007 23 0933 - 20 2740.00 CREEKVIEW ELEMENTARY SCHOOL COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX C. Since the Owner may require personnel to have more comprehensive understanding of the hardware and software, additional training must be available from the Contractor. 3.21 PROJECT MANAGEMENT A. Provide a designated,project manager who will be responsible for the following: 1. Construct and maintain project schedule. 2. Authorized to accept and execute orders or instructions from General Contractor, Owner / Architect & Engineer. 3. Attend project meetings as necessary to avoid conflict and delays. 4. Make necessary field decisions relating to this section. 5. Coordination / Single point contact. 6. Have Internet access for project management. END OF SECTION BUILDING MANAGEMENT AND CONTROL SYSTEM VLK Architects, 2007 23 0933 - 21 2740.00 CREEKVIEW ELEMENTARY SCHOOL COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX SECTION 23 3113 - DUCTWORK PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Duct construction, support and accessories. Dimensions shown on the drawings are free area dimensions. 1.02 RELATED WORK A. Division 23 Mechanical 1. Air Devices 2. Insulation 3. Fan Coil Units 4. Fans 5. Packaged Rooftop Air Conditioners 6. Testing, Balancing And Adjusting (TAB) of Environmental Systems B. Finishes, Painting and Color Coding 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. The intent of ductwork specifications is to obtain superior quality workmanship resulting in an installation that is absolutely satisfactory in both function and appearance. Provide ductwork in accordance with the specifications for each type of service. B. An approved contractor for this work under this division shall be: 1. A specialist in this field and have the personnel, experience, training, skill, and the organization to provide a practical working system. 2. Able to furnish evidence of having contracted for and installed not less than 5 systems of comparable size and type that have served their owners satisfactorily for not less than 5 years. 1.04 GUARANTEE A. Guarantee ductwork for 1 year from the date of substantial completion. The guarantee covers workmanship, noise, chatter, whistling, or vibration. Ductwork shall be free from pulsation under conditions of operation. 1.05 CONTRACTOR COORDINATION A. Erect ducts in the general locations shown, but conform to structural and finish conditions of the building. Before fabricating any ductwork, check the physical conditions at the job site and make necessary changes in cross sections, offsets, and similar items, whether they are specifically indicated or not. B. Coordinate location of ductwork with structural members and Architectural drawings and requirements. 1.06 SHOP DRAWINGS AND SAMPLES A. Submit shop drawings of all ductwork layouts, including enlarged plans and elevations of all air handling equipment, and summit details of duct fittings, including particulars such as gauge sizes, welds, and configurations prior to starting work. DUCTWORK VLK Architects, 2007 23 3113 - 1 2740.00 CREEKVIEW ELEMENTARY SCHOOL COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX B. Submit product data and sealing materials to be used. C. Submit sound attenuation data. D. Submit shop drawings in plan, elevation and sections, and three-dimensional view showing equipment in mechanical equipment areas. PART 2 - DUCTS 2.01 STANDARDS AND CODES A. Except as otherwise indicated, sheet metal ductwork material and installation shall comply with the latest edition of SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards. Air distribution devices (such as dampers) included in this specification shall comply with the latest applicable SMACNA Fire, Smoke and Radiation Damper Installation Guide for HVAC Systems and NFPA 90A. 2.02 DUCT MATERIAL AND CONSTRUCTION A. Except for the special ducts specified below use lock forming quality prime galvanized steel sheets or coils up to 60" wide. Stencil each sheet with gauge and manufacturer's name. Stencil coils of sheet steel throughout on 10' centers with gauge and manufacturer's name. Provide certification of duct gauge and manufacturer for each size duct. B. Rectangular low and medium pressure duct constructed of sheet metal in accordance with the latest edition of SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards. C. Low pressure round ducts shall be shop fabricated with snap lock longitudinal seams. Ducts shall be constructed for a minimum of 2" w.g. static pressure. E. Dishwasher Hood Exhaust System: Welded 304 Stainless steel. F. Kitchen exhaust duct: Welded Black steel, minimum 16 gauge. 2.03 ACOUSTICAL DUCT A. Duct and fittings: 1. Double wall acoustically treated. 2. Annular space packed with fiberglass insulation. 3. Perforated metal liner to provide specific acoustic impedance B. Pressure rating and tests as specified for single wall ductwork. 2.04 DUCT SEALING OF SEAMS AND JOINTS A. Follow seal classification as indicated in Table 1-2 of SMACNA "HVAC AIR DUCT LEAKAGE TEST MANUAL". Use seal class A for 4" w.g. static. All longitudinal and transverse joints and seams shall be sealed by use of a fireproof, non -hardening, and non -migrating elastomeric sealant. With the exception of continuously welded joints and machine made spiral lock seams, joints and seams made air tight with duct sealer. Duct sealer shall be Benjamin Foster 32-14. 1. Indoor applications — Benjamin Foster 32-14 2. Outdoor applications — Benjamin Foster 32-17 DUCTWORK VLK Architects, 2007 23 3113 - 2 2740.00 CREEKVIEW ELEMENTARY SCHOOL COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX 2.05 FLEXIBLE DUCT LOW PRESSURE A. Construction: 1. Continuous galvanized spring steel wire helix, with reinforced metalized cover a. The fabric shall be mechanically fastened to the steel helix without the use of adhesives. 2. UL 181 Class I air duct label 3. Reinforced vapor barrier jacket 4. Rated for use at system pressure (6" we minimum) 5. Flexible duct connections from lateral taps to variable volume boxes or terminal boxes shall be rated at twice the maximum pressure rating of the medium pressure system. B. Fire hazard classification: 1. Flame spread rating 25 maximum. 2. Smoke developed rating 50 maximum. C. Thermal characteristics: 1. R-6 BTU/hr/sq. ft./OF 2. 2" wall thickness insulation with 1" overlap D. Acceptable manufacturers: 1. Flexmaster 2. Hart & Cooley 3. Omniair 2.06 FIRE DAMPERS A. Fire dampers for required wall ratings that are 95% minimum free area. Provide Type B or Type C UL dampers for low, medium and high-pressure rectangular, square or round ducts. Dampers shall be activated by a fusible link designed to react at 165°F. Install per manufactures recommendations to provide a UL assembly. Provide sealed sleeve to meet desired leakage performance. B. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Ruskin 2. Prefco Products 3. Air Balance 4. Greenheck, Inc. 5. Nailor Industries 6. Pottoroff 2.07 DUCT LINING A. Duct lining shall be 1" thick, 1-1/2 lb. density, flexible lining coated on the air stream side to reduce attrition. Liner shall be Schuler Lina-Coustic, Certain -Teed Ultralite, or equal meeting requirements of NFPA 90-A. Provide I.A.Q. rated liner. 2.08 VOLUME DAMPERS A. Manual balancing dampers that meet or exceed the following minimum construction standards: 1. Frame 16-gauge 2. Blades 16-gauge 3. Bearings corrosion resistant DUCTWORK VLK Architects, 2007 23 3113 - 3 2740.00 CREEKVIEW ELEMENTARY SCHOOL COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX 4. Concealed linkage 5. Opposed blade dampers B. Acceptable manufacturer: 1. Ruskin Model MD-35 or approved equal, by 2. Arrow 3. American Warming and Ventilating 4. Nailor Industries 5. Pottoroff 2.09 ACCESS DOORS A. Round spin -in door of galvanized steel. 1. Fire proof sealing gaskets and quick fastening locking devices 2. Insulated door 3. Conform to the requirements of the NFPA 4. Identification and use of each access door 5. UL label to match the construction in which it is installed 6. Cable attached to door and outer frame 7. Low leakage Access Door B. Acceptable Manufacturer 1. Flex master, Inspector Series 2. Approved Equal 2.10 COMBINATION FIRE/SMOKE DAMPERS A. Combination fire/smoke dampers meeting the following requirements: 1. Each combination fire/smoke damper shall be 1-1/2 hour fire rated under UL Standard 555, 4th Edition, and shall be further classified by Underwriters Laboratories as a leakage Rated Damper for use in smoke control systems under the latest version of UL555S, and bear a UL label attesting to same. The damper manufacturer shall have tested, and qualified with UL, a complete range of damper sizes covering all dampers required by this specification. Testing and qualifying a single damper size is not acceptable. The leakage rating under UL555S shall be Leakage Class II. 2. The damper frame shall be a minimum of 16 gauge, galvanized steel, formed into a structural hat channel shape with tabbed corners for reinforcement, as approved in testing by Underwriters Laboratories. Bearings shall be integral high surface area non -electrolytic materials construction to incorporate a friction free frame blade lap seal, or molybdenum disulfide impregnated stainless steel or bronze oilite sleeve type turning in the damper frame. The dampers shall be opposed blade type. The blades shall be constructed with a minimum of 16- gauge galvanized steel. The blade edge seal material shall be able to withstand 450°F. The jamb seals shall be flexible stainless steel compression type. 3. As part of the UL qualification, dampers shall have demonstrated a capacity to operate (open and close) under HVAC system operation conditions, with pressures of at least 4" water gauge in the closed position, and 2,000 fpm air velocity in the open position. 4. Each combination fire/smoke damper shall be equipped with a controlled 7 to 15 second heat -actuated release device. The electric EFL shall close and lock the fire/smoke damper during test, smoke detection, power failure or fire conditions through actuator closure. springs. To prevent duct and HVAC component damage, the damper shall at all times be connected to the actuator for controlled closure in not less than 7 seconds and no more than 15 seconds. Instantaneous damper closure is unacceptable. After exposure to high temperature of fire, the DUCTWORK VLK Architects, 2007 23 3113 - 4 2740.00 CREEKVIEW ELEMENTARY SCHOOL COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX damper must be inspected prior to reset to ensure proper operation. Release temperature is 165°F. 5. Provide UL555S qualified electric actuator at 120 VAC. 6. Provide air -foil type blades. B. Provide integral sleeves C. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Ruskin 2. Air Balance, Inc. 3. Greenheck, Inc. 4. Nailor Industries 5. Pottoroff 2.11 SMOKE DAMPERS A. Smoke dampers meeting the following requirements. 1. Each smoke damper shall be classified by Underwriters Laboratories as a leakage Rated Damper for use in smoke control systems under the latest version of UL555S, and bear a UL label attesting to same. The damper manufacturer shall have tested, and qualified with UL, a complete range of damper sizes covering all dampers required by this specification. Testing and qualifying a single damper size is not acceptable. The leakage rating under UL555S shall be Leakage Class IL 2. The damper frame shall be a minimum of 16 gauge, galvanized steel, formed into a structural hat channel shape with tabbed corners for reinforcement, as approved in testing by Underwriters Laboratories. Bearings shall be integral high surface area non -electrolytic materials construction to incorporate a friction free frame blade lap seal, or molybdenum disulfide impregnated stainless steel or bronze oilite sleeve type turning in the damper frame. The dampers shall be opposed blade type. The blades shall be constructed with a minimum of 16 gauge, galvanized steel. The blade edge seal material shall be able to withstand 450°F. The jamb seals shall be flexible stainless steel compression type. 3. As part of the UL qualification, dampers shall have demonstrated a capacity to operate (open and close) under HVAC system operation conditions, with pressures of at least 4" water gauge in the closed position, and 2,000 fpm air velocity in the open position. 4. Provide UL555S qualified electric actuator at 120 VAC. 5. Provide air -foil type blades. B. Provide integral sleeves. C. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Ruskin 2. Air Balance, Inc. 3. Greenheck, Inc. 4. Nailor Industries 5. Pottoroff 2.12 DIFFUSER FITTINGS LOW PRESSURE TAPS A. Fitting shall meet or exceed the following minimum construction standards: 1. Conical with a base diameter two inches larger than the tap diameter. DUCTWORK VLK Architects, 2007 23 3113 - 5 2740.00 4 3. 4 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION CREEKVIEW ELEMENTARY SCHOOL COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX Construct fitting and damper of galvanized steel in accordance with ASTM A 527, G90 finish. a. Fitting with a 3/16-inch high stop bead approximately 2-1/2-inches from the discharge end of the fitting b. Provide the fitting with a butterfly damper, damper rod, end bearings and heavy duty locking quadrant. C. Size the length of the straight section of the fitting to match the damper blade diameter. Center the damper blade in the straight section. Match the fitting body gauge to the SMACNA duct gauge, but not less than: a. Through 8 inches: 26 gauge; Damper blade 22 gauge b. 10 inches and 12 inches: 24 gauge; Damper blade 22 gauge C. 14 inches and 16 inches: 22 gauge; Damper blade 22 gauge d. 18 inches and 20 inches: 20 gauge; Damper blade 20 gauge Fasten damper blade to a 3/8 X 3/8 continuous square rod with minimum (2) galvanized U-bolts. Support the damper rod to the fitting with airtight nylon end bushings / bearings. Provide the damper with a self-locking regulator and handle. Provide a 2" sheet metal stand-off to extend the regulator. Flex duct grip area 2 inches behind retaining bead Flex duct retaining bead —1 inch from end Conical length of at least 3 inches Barrel length of at least 9 inches A. Use construction methods and requirements as outlined in SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards as well as SMACNA Balancing and Adjusting publications, unless indicated otherwise in the specifications. Refer to details on the drawings for additional information. B. Reinforce ducts in accordance with recommended construction practice of SMACNA. Provide additional reinforcement of large plenums as required to prevent excessive flexing and or vibration. C. Cross break or bead sheet metal for rigidity, except ducts that are 12" or less in the longest dimension. D. Where ducts pass through walls in exposed areas, install suitable escutcheons made of sheet metal angles as closers. At locations where ductwork passes through floors, provide watertight sleeves projecting 3" above finished floor and flush with bottom of floor slab. Fabricate sleeves of 1/8" thick steel, galvanized after fabrication. Anchor into adjacent floor slab as required. Sleeves are required inside as well as outside chases. Support ducts where passing through floors with steel structural angles of adequate bearing surface. Structural angles shall be galvanized after fabrication. Do not rest structural angles on top of the sleeve. E. Metal or lined ductwork exposed to view through grilles, registers, and other openings shall be painted flat black. Do not install grilles, registers, or similar items until painting is complete. F. Fire Dampers shall be installed per manufacturer's recommendations to create a UL rated assembly. G. Install end bearing at all location where damper shaft penetrates duct wall. DUCTWORK VLK Architects, 2007 23 3113 - 6 2740.00 CREEKVIEW ELEMENTARY SCHOOL COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX H. Clean duct to remove accumulated dust. Ducts shall be closed on ends between phases of fabrication to assure that no foreign material enters the ducts. 3.02 DUCTWORK A. Construct rectangular ducts and round ducts in accordance with the latest SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards. Use the static pressure specified on the air handling unit schedule or fan schedules as a minimum for duct construction. All ductwork between the variable volume air handling units and the terminal units shall be constructed to the medium pressure ductwork specification. B. Provide adjustable, galvanized splitter-dampers, pivoted at the downstream end with appropriate control device at each supply duct split. C. For branch ducts wider than 18", and when shown on drawings provide extractors with an appropriate control device at each rectangular zone or branch supply duct connection. Provide controllers for extractors. Branch ducts shall have a 450 angle in the direction of flow. Do not provide extractor at branch ducts to sidewall registers where the registers are within 10 feet of the main duct. D. Shop manufactured curved blade scoops may be used for branch duct takeoffs up to 18" wide. Taper scoop blade to the end, to prevent any sagging that may cut into, or damage duct liner if specified during operation. 1. Construct shop manufactured scoops and splitter blades of galvanized sheet metal 2 full gauges heavier than equivalent sheet metal gauge of branch duct (up to 16 gauge). 2. Check extractors, scoops and splitter blades thoroughly for freedom of operation. Oil bearing points before installing. E. Use pushrod operator with locking nut and butt hinges assembly. F. Provide opposed -blade volume dampers with an appropriate control device in each of the following locations: 1. Return air ductwork 2. Outside air branch duct 3. Exhaust branch duct 4. Exhaust connections to hoods except kitchen grease hoods or equipment 5. In each zone at multi -zone unit discharge installed downstream of duct mounted re -heat coils 6. At each outside air and return air duct connection to plenum of constant volume units 7. At discharge side of constant volume boxes 8. Where otherwise indicated or required for balancing coordinate location of additional dampers required by TAB Contractor. 9. Provide multi -blade dampers when blade width exceeds 12". Provide end bearing where damper shaft penetrates duct wall. G. Elbows 1. Rectangular: Where square elbows are shown, or are required for good airflow, provide and install single -wall or airfoil turning vanes. Job -fabricated turning vanes, if used, shall be single -thickness vanes of galvanized steel sheets of the same gauge metal as the duct in which they are installed. Furnish vanes fabricated for the same angle as the duct offset. The use of radius elbows with a centerline radius of not less than 1-1/2 times the duct width may be provided in lieu of vaned elbows where space and air flow requirements permit. DUCTWORK VLK Architects, 2007 23 3113 - 7 2740.00 CREEKVIEW ELEMENTARY SCHOOL COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX 2. Round Oval Duct. Provide elbows with a centerline radius of 1-1/2 times the duct diameter or duct width. For round ducts, furnish smooth elbows or 5 piece, 900 elbows and 3 piece, 450 elbows. H. For control devices concealed by ceilings, furring, or in other inaccessible locations, furnish extension rods and appropriate recessed -type Young regulators, mounted on the surface of the ceiling or the furring, unless specified, or shown otherwise. Provide with chrome plated cover plates. Use only one mitered gear set for each control device. I. Install streamline deflectors at any point where dividing a sheet metal duct around piping or where other such obstruction is permitted. Where such obstructions occur in insulated ducts, fill space inside streamliner and around obstructions with glass fiber insulation. J. Insulated Flexible Duct 1. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, and the terms of its UL listing. Duct shall not exceed 6' in length. Make connections by use of sheet metal collars and stainless steel circular screw clamps. Clamps shall encircle the duct completely and be tightened with a worm gear operator to the point that will provide an airtight connection without unnecessary deformation of the duct. Provide one clamp on flexible duct and one clamp on external insulation. Vapor barrier jacket shall be tucked inside to conceal insulation material. 2. Construct bends over 450 with sheet metal elbows. K. Duct Supports. 1. Horizontal ducts up to 40". Support horizontal ducts up to and including 40" in their greater dimension by means of #18 U.S. gauge galvanized iron strap hangers attached to the ducts by a minimum of two locations per side by means of screws, rivets or clamps, and fastened to inserts with toggle bolts, beam clamps or other approved means. Place supports on at least 8' centers. Use clamps to fasten hangers to reinforcing on sealed ducts. 2. Horizontal ducts larger than 40". Support horizontal ducts larger than 40" in their greatest dimension by means of hanger rods bolted to angle iron trapeze hangers. Place supports on at least 8' centers in accordance with SMACNA Standards. 3. Support vertical ducts where they pass through the floor lines with 1-1/2" x 1-1/2" x 1/4" angles for ducts up to 60". Above 60", the angles shall be increased in strength and sized on an individual basis considering space requirements. 4. Supports shall be suspended from structural or by independent support. Do not support from structural bridging. Upper attachments should be selected with a safety factor of 4 or 5 times actual load conditions and subject to Engineers approval. Double wrap straps over open web of joist. L. Branch connections for medium pressure ductwork shall be made with a conical lateral. Field installed conical branch ducts shall be minimum 20-gauge galvanized sheet metal, "Everdur" welded and coated with "Galvabar". 3.03 PLENUMS A. Return air plenums shall be rectangular galvanized sheet metal ductwork. B. Fabricate plenums upstream of fan of 16-gauge material. C. Fabricate plenums upstream of filters minimum 18-gauge material. DUCTWORK VLK Architects, 2007 23 3113 - 8 2740.00 CREEKVIEW ELEMENTARY SCHOOL COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX 3.04 FLEXIBLE CONNECTIONS A. Where ducts connect to fans or air handling units that are not internally isolated, make flexible airtight connections using "Ventglas" fabric. The fabric shall be fire-resistant, waterproof and mildew resistant with a weight of approximately 30 ounces per square yard. Provide a minimum of 1/2" slack in the connections, and a minimum of 2-1/2" distance between the edges of the ducts. Also, provide a minimum of 1" slack for each inch of static pressure on the fan system. Fasten fabric to apparatus and to adjacent ductwork by means of galvanized flats or draw bands. Where connections are made in outdoor locations, seal fabric to metal with mastic. 3.05 ACCESS DOORS A. Install ductwork access doors in structural angle frames and provide with sash locks and hinges arranged for convenient access. Construct doors that occur in insulated ducts with an insulation filler. Stencil each door for specific use. Install access doors in each of the following locations: 1. Fire Dampers 2. Smoke Dampers 3. Smoke/fire Dampers 4. Outside Air Dampers 5. Duct Mounted Coils (up -stream) 6. Control Dampers B. Minimum size of access door 12" or 1" smaller than duct. C. Construct access door air tight, and conform to recommendations of NFPA and SMACNA. D. Demonstrate suitability of access for the intended purpose. Install multiple access doors as required. 3.06 DUCT LINING A. Install glass fiber acoustical lining where shown on drawings. Secure to duct surfaces with Benjamin Foster 85-62 adhesive and sheet metal fasteners on 12" centers. Coat exposed edges and leading edges of cross -joints with adhesive. B. Provide metal nosing that is either channeled or "Z" profiled or are integrally -formed from the duct wall securely installed over transversely oriented liner edges facing the air stream at fan discharge and at any interval of lined duct preceded by unlined duct. C. Refer to Insulation & Liner Detail on drawings for locations requiring liner to be installed. D. Do not install liner in multi -zone unit ductwork. 3.07 SEALING OF SEAMS AND JOINTS A. Seal supply, return, exhaust and outside air duct systems. 3.08 FLUES A. Provide and install flues for all gas fired equipment. B. Refer to plans for all related locations. DUCTWORK VLK Architects, 2007 23 3113 - 9 2740.00 CREEKVIEW ELEMENTARY SCHOOL COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX C. Coordinate size with selected equipment manufacturer. D. All fittings and accessories shall be manufactured by the flue manufacturer. The flue shall be installed per manufacturer's instruction. 3.09 DISHWASHER HOOD EXHAUST SYSTEM A. All material and fittings shall be 304 Stainless steel, welded joints, watertight construction. Grade horizontal duct 1/4" per lineal foot to drain toward the washer. 3.10 KITCHEN EXHAUST DUCT A. All material and fittings shall be minimum 16 gauge, coated black steel to prevent rusting. All seams and joints in the kitchen exhaust duct, and penetrations of the hood enclosure to its lower outermost perimeter that directs and captures grease -laden vapors and exhaust gases shall have a liquid tight continuous external weld. All ducts shall be installed without forming dips or traps that might collect residues. Provide 18" x 18" or equal area at each elbow and as required for cleaning access, in direction of air flow. Access doors shall be located on the vertical wall of the duct 1-1/2" from the bottom of duct and shall be fitted with tight fitting sliding door and latch. All interior surfaces of ducts shall be accessible for cleaning and inspection purposes. Duct shall maintain minimum 1/4" per lineal foot slope to the exhaust hood. Provide duct over lay at the roof curb for a complete seal. Install kitchen exhaust system per local authority. In the absence of a local authority, the requirements of the Uniform Mechanical Code shall govern. 3.11 ACOUSTICAL DUCT A. Install acoustical ductwork where indicated on the drawings. 3.12 SCREENS A. Furnish and install screens on all duct, fan, etc., openings furnished by the Contractor that lead to, or are, outdoors; screens shall be No. 16 gauge, one-half inch (1/2") mesh in removable galvanized steel frame. Provide safety screens meeting OSHA requirements for protection of maintenance personnel on all fan inlets and fan outlets to which no ductwork is connected. END OF SECTION DUCTWORK VLK Architects, 2007 23 3113 - 10 2740.00 CREEKVIEW ELEMENTARY SCHOOL COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX SECTION 23 3416 - FANS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Furnish and install fans, including centrifugal, axial and propeller types, with supplemental equipment. 1.02 RELATED WORK A. Division 23 Mechanical: 1. Ductwork 2. Vibration Isolation 3. Air Balance 4. Electrical Provisions of Mechanical Work 1.03 PERFORMANCE A. Provide fan type, arrangement, rotation, capacity, size, motor horsepower, and motor voltage as shown. Fan capacities and characteristics are scheduled on the drawings. Provide fans capable of accommodating static pressure variations of +10% of scheduled design at the design air flow. B. Rate fans according to appropriate Air Moving and Conditioning Association, Inc. (AMCA), approved test codes and procedures. Supply fans with sound ratings below the maximums permitted by AMCA Standards. All fans provided must be licensed to bear the Certified Ratings Seal. C. Statically and dynamically balance all fans. D. Motors shall be sized so that they do not operate within the motor service factor. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit fan performance curves with system operating point plotted on curves. B. Submit manufacturer's printed installation instructions. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Cook B. Greenheck C. Penn Ventilator D. Acme E. Carnes FANS VLK Architects, 2007 233416 2740.00- 1 CREEKVIEW ELEMENTARY SCHOOL COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX 2.02 PROTECTIVE COATINGS A. Manufacturer's Standard. Apply to fans, motors and accessories, the manufacturer's standard prime coat and finish, except on aluminum surfaces or where special coatings are required. B. Galvanizing. After fabrication of the parts, hot -dip coat surfaces that require galvanizing. Where galvanizing is specified, a zinc coating may be used. After fabrication, apply the zinc coating and air-dry the coating to 95% pure zinc. Acceptable zinc coatings include Zincilate, Sealube, Amercoat, Diametcoat, or an approved equal. 2.03 SUPPLEMENTAL EQUIPMENT A. Motor Covers. Provide weatherproof motor covers for installations out of doors. Apply the same finish as used on the fan. B. Belt Drives: 1. Unless otherwise specified for belt -driven fans, equip the fan motors with variable pitch sheaves. Select the sheave size for the approximate midpoint of adjustment and to provide not less than 20% speed variation from full open to full closed. Size drives for 150% of rated horsepower. Key the fan sheave to the fan shaft. 2. Nonadjustable motor sheaves may be used for motor sizes over 15 horsepower, at the Contractor's option. However, if changing a nonadjustable sheave becomes necessary to produce the specified capacity, the change must be made at no additional cost. 3. Provide belt guards and apply the same finish as used on the fan. 4. Oil and heat resistant, nonstatic type belts. 5. Bearings shall be designed and individually tested specifically for use in air handling applications. Construction shall be heavy duty, regreasable, ball type, in a pillow block, cast iron housing, selected for a minimum L50 life in excess of 200,000 hours at maximum catalog operating speed. C. Safety Disconnect Switch: Provide a factory -wired to motor, safety disconnect switch on each unit. D. Relief Vents and Air Inlets: Provide vents and inlets with aluminum frames and 1/2" mesh, galvanized bird screens. Include dampers where shown. E. Prefabricated Roof Curbs: Furnish prefabricated roof curbs as detailed. The minimum height is 14". Include a resilient pad on each roof curb so the equipment can be mounted on the top flange for proper seal. Coordinate roof slope and curb to ensure equipment is installed in level position. Provide double shell to protect insulation from damage. F. Dampers. Where automatic backdraft damper is scheduled: 1. Multi -bladed. 2. Heavy duty. 3. Roll formed aluminum blades. 4. Nylon bearings. 5. Neoprene weather strip on blade edge. G. Where motorized damper is scheduled: 1. The motor and damper are specified in the Building Management and Control System Specification. FANS VLK Architects, 2007 233416 2740.00- 2 CREEKVIEW ELEMENTARY SCHOOL COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX H. All fans are to be provided with a durable, deep etched, .025" thick, factory installed aluminum identification plate with the following information. Plates are to be furnished with four mounting holes. 1. Fan mark as indicated on the Contract Drawings. 2. Serial number 3. Model number 4. Capacity (CFM) and static pressure. 5. Motor HP 6. Motor Amps 7. Manufacturer 8. Motor phase 9. Number of Belts/Make/Size 10. Motor volts 2.04 VENTILATION AND EXHAUST FANS A. Provide the ventilation and exhaust fans shown on the drawings. B. Provide each motor with internal overload protection. C. Provide each belt driven fan with approved, totally enclosed belt guard. D. Provide approved safety screen where inlet or outlet is exposed. E. Provide duct flanges where required for connections. F. Furnish kitchen hood exhaust fans with vented curb extension that meets,NFPA 96, cleanout port, grease tap, curb seal, drain connection and hinge kit. G. Furnish supply fans with 1" aluminum, washable filter section. 2.05 ROOFTOP VENTILATION AND EXHAUST SYSTEMS A. Provide the rooftop ventilation and exhaust systems shown on the drawings. B. Provide each motor with internal overload protection. C. Components: 1. Aluminum, stainless steel or plastic coated bird guard. 2. Screws and fasteners of stainless steel or nonferrous material. 3. All aluminum construction unless indicated otherwise on fan schedule. D. Welded construction, corrosion resistant fasteners, minimum 16 gauge marine allow aluminum. E. Aluminum base shall be continuously welded curb cap corners. 2.06 INDIRECT GAS -FIRED MAKE-UP AIR UNIT A. Provide the indirect gas -fired make-up air unit shown on the drawings. B. Provide each motor with internal overload protection. C. Indirect Gas -Fired Furnace 1. Power vented with post purge cycle. 2. ETL listed to ANSI Z83.8 and CGA 2.6. FANS VLK Architects, 2007 233416 2740.00- 3 CREEKVIEW ELEMENTARY SCHOOL COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX 3. 80% thermal efficiency. 4. Gas control to include 4:1 modulating control from 25% to 100%. 5. Stainless steel heat exchanger. 6. Direct spark ignition system. 7. Insulated double wall construction. D. Magnetic motor starter with solid state overload protection. E. Control transformer with fusing. F. Disconnect switch. G. 2-inch washable aluminum mesh filters. H. Factory wired and tests. I. Provide discharge temperature control. J. Factory mounted and wired motorized intake damper. K. Externally mounted 115 volt GFCI outlet in NEMA 3R box. L. Galvanized steel weatherhood with birdscreen. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install fans according to the manufacturer's instructions and in the locations shown on the drawings. B. Do not operate fans or fan powered devices for any purpose until ductwork is clean, filters in place, bearings lubricated and the fan has been run under observation. C. Roof mounted fans shall be secured to the curb with stainless steel lag screws at a minimum of 6-inches on center. Follow manufacturer's installation instructions if they are more stringent. Install roof mounted equipment in a level position. Units shall be seated on properly sized curb. Gap between base of the fan and top of the curb shall be sealed with neoprene 1" x 1/a" gasket. Gasket shall be glued or attached with pressure sensitive adhesive. D. Install curbs and equipment in level position. E. Ceiling mounted in -line centrifugal blowers 1. Shall be suspended from structure with 1/2-inch zinc plated all -thread rods secured to structure. 2. Provide sub -structure where required. 3. Mount bottom of fan no more than 18-inches above the finished ceiling height. 3.02 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Provide two sets of belts for each fan, not including the set installed on the fans. Tag set to identify fan. END OF SECTION FANS VLK Architects, 2007 233416 2740.00- 4 CREEKVIEW ELEMENTARY SCHOOL COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX SECTION 23 3713 - AIR DEVICES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Furnish and install air distribution devices, including grilles, diffusers, registers, dampers, and extractors. 1.02 RELATED WORK A. Division 23 Mechanical. 1. Ductwork. 2. Air Balance. 3. Electrical Requirements for Mechanical Work. 1.03 COOPERATION WITH OTHER TRADES A. Coordinate this work with work under Division 26 Electrical, to ensure that intended functions of lighting and air systems are achieved. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit product data for outlets, grilles, registers, control devices, and similar equipment for review prior to placement of purchase order. B. Submittal shall include performance sheet for each air device type. Performance sheet shall include NC levels, throw, and total pressure loss at various air flows. 1.05 FINISHES A. Paint exposed devices with factory standard prime coat, or factory finish coat, as specified. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.01 DIFFUSERS, GRILLES AND REGISTERS - Refer to Drawing Schedule. 2.02 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Tuttle and Bailey. B. Titus. C. Krueger. D. Metal -Aire. E. Nailor Industries. F. Price AIR DEVICES VLK Architects, 2007 23 3713 -1 2740.00 CREEKVIEW ELEMENTARY SCHOOL COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX 2.03 ACCESSORIES A. Supply Grille Extractors. Provide supply grilles with an air control device capable of positively regulating the volume of air extracted from the supply duct. Select extractors similar to Titus Model AG25, tight -closing in the minimum position. Include a key -operated or worm -gear adjusting mechanism to facilitate positioning from the grille opening. Where adjustment is not accessible at the grille opening, provide a square control rod equipped with a locking quadrant. B. Mounting Frames. Provide each grille or register not equipped with a removable core with a companion, all-purpose mounting frame constructed like grille frame to facilitate installation and removal of the grille or register without marring adjacent mounting surfaces. 01. Furnish frames with 1/2" thick sponge rubber gasket to prevent air leakage. 02. Provide a frame that neatly fits the grille. Mounting frames will not be required for grilles or registers mounted directly on exposed ductwork. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION A. Do not install ceilings adjacent to fixtures until installation of fixtures, air supply assemblies, return -air blank -off strips and flexible duct have been approved. Remove and reinstall any part of the installation found incorrect. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Louvered diffuser outlets mount tight against the ceiling. Fasten outlets to ductwork with sheet metal screws. For perforated diffusers, attach the frame assembly by a concealed hinge assembly to an outer frame compatible with the type of ceiling on which the diffuser is installed. END OF SECTION AIR DEVICES VLK Architects, 2007 23 3713 -2 2740.00 CREEKVIEW ELEMENTARY SCHOOL COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX SECTION 23 4100 - AIR FILTRATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Furnish and install air filters. 1.02 RELATED WORK A. Division 23 Mechanical. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit manufacturer's product data sheets and capacity information as specified. B. Submit recommended Dirty Filter pressure drop. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 AIR FILTERS A. The filter cells: 1. Permanent frame with renewable media. 2. 18-gauge galvanized steel holding frame. 3. 11-gauge galvanized steel wire grids to support the media. 4. Front grid hinged and secured with a latch. B. The renewable viscous coated glass fiber media: 1. Graduated density from front to back. 2. Initial resistance not to exceed 0.17" WG at 500 fpm velocity. 3. • UL listed Class II. C. Acceptable manufacturers: 1. Cam -Farr. 2. AAF. D. Spare filter: 1. Provide the following material to the Owner for use during the warranty period. a. Sufficient media of each thickness, in original cartons; for a complete change. 2.02 AIR FILTERS A. Filter cells: 1. Permanent, impingement, washable. 2. Metal, panel type. 3. Electro galvanized 14 mesh steel screen media arranged in alternate layers of flat and herringbone -crimp screens, 4 layers of each per inch. 4. 1/8" rod reinforced. 5. Enclosed 16 gauge galvanized steel frames. 6. Coated with high flash point adhesive. B. Resistance to air flow of clean filter not to exceed 0.10" WG at 500 fpm. 1. Maximum face velocity 500 fpm. C. Provide one complete set of spare filters for each unit. AIR FILTRATION VLK Architects, 2007 23 4100 - 1 2740.00 CREEKVIEW ELEMENTARY SCHOOL COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX 2.03 AIR FILTERS A. The filter cells: 1. Disposal media and frame. 2. Coated with high flash point adhesive. B. Resistance to air flow of a clean filter not to exceed 0.12" WG at 300 fpm. C. UL listed Class II rated. PART 3, EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install the filters in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. END OF SECTION AIR FILTRATION VLK Architects, 2007 23 4100 - 2 2740.00 CREEKVIEW ELEMENTARY SCHOOL COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX SECTION 23 7413 - SINGLE PACKAGE ROOFTOP AIR CONDITIONERS (100% Outside Air) PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Provide and install a single -package, single -zone, electric air conditioner for rooftop application. 1.02 RELATED WORK A. Division 23 Mechanical. 1. Ductwork. 2. Air Balance. 3. Electrical provisions for mechanical work. 4. Air Filtration. 1.03 PERFORMANCE A. As scheduled on drawings, with head pressure control to enable unit start and operate down to 20 degrees F ambient. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Manufacturer's certified capacity data B. Submit manufacturer's installation, start-up and service instructions. C. Submit recommended clearance dimensions for air flow and service. D. Submit coordination drawings as specified. Give consideration to adjacent structures as they affect air flow patterns. E. Submit internal wiring diagram of Control Center F. Submit sequence of operation in narrative form. G. Mark-up a copy of the specifications indicating in the margin of each paragraph the following: COMPLY, DO NOT COMPLY, NOT APPLICABLE. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Addison. B. Reznor C. Aaon 2.02 COMPRESSOR A. Provide a thermally protected, serviceable semi -hermetic compressor with service valves, vibration isolation, crankcase heaters, slight glass and filter drier. Provide with a 5-year parts and labor warranty. SINGLE PACKAGE ROOFTOP AIR CONDITIONERS (100% Outside Air) VLK Architects, 2007 23 7413 - 1 2740.00 CREEKVIEW ELEMENTARY SCHOOL COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX 2.03 EVAPORATOR AND CONDENSER COILS A. Provide copper tubes with mechanically bonded aluminum fins for evaporator and condenser coils. Provide hot gas bypass for evaporator coil. B. Provide louvered condenser coil. C. Provide factory installed hail / vandalism guards for condenser coils. 2.04 EVAPORATOR FANS A. Provide a belt -driven, forward -curved, centrifugal evaporator fan, with adjustable motor sheaves. Motor shall contain permanently lubricated bearings. Provide motor HP as indicated on the drawings. 2.05 CASING FILTERS AND DUCT CONNECTION A. Provide a cabinet constructed of galvanized or zinc -coated steel, primed and coated with baked enamel and suitable for outdoor installation. B. Provide duct connections on the bottom of each unit, as indicated on drawings. C. Provide manually operated outdoor air balancing dampers and motorized shut-off damper. D. Furnish 2" thick filters as specified. E. Provide stainless steel or polymer fully IAQ condensate drain pan with positive slope in all directions to outlet. 1. Line the condensate drain pan with 1-1/2" waterproof insulation. 2. Provide a hinged access door with quick release handle adjacent to condensate drain pan for inspection. Install access door on drain connection side of unit. F. Double wall casing construction 1. Construct interior casing panels with 1-1/2 lb. insulation for acoustic and condensate control. G. Furnish through -the -bottom electrical service connection. 2.08 ROOF CURB A. Install a roof curb of the same manufacture as the air conditioning unit. 1. Curb to support the unit and provide a watertight enclosure to protect ductwork and utility services. 2. Use a design complying with National Roofing Contractors Association requirements. 3. Level curb according to manufacturer's recommendations. 4. Provide spring isolation curb around complete unit. 5. Curb height shall be minimum 14". 2.09 OUTDOOR FANS A. Provide propeller type with direct -driven permanently lubricated motor. Fan shall discharge upward. SINGLE PACKAGE ROOFTOP AIR CONDITIONERS (100% Outside Air) VLK Architects, 2007 23 7413 - 2 2740.00 CREEKVIEW ELEMENTARY SCHOOL COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX 2.10 SHORT CYCLE CIRCUIT A. Provide circuit to prevent compressor from short cycling as a result of a rapid change in thermostat setting. Circuit also prevents compressor restart at least 5 minutes after shutdown. 2.11 CONVENIENCE OUTLET A. Provide 120V GFI outlet in unit cabinet. 2.12 SERVICE DISCONNECT SWITCH A. Non -fused disconnect switch with external locking handle. 2.13 MOTORIZED OUTSIDE AIR DAMPER A. Low leakage 14-gauge galvanized steel 1. Airfoil blades 2. Ruskin CD60 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install according to manufacturer's recommendations and as shown on drawings. END OF SECTION SINGLE PACKAGE ROOFTOP AIR CONDITIONERS (100% Outside Air) VLK Architects, 2007 23 7413 - 3 2740.00 CRESTVIEW ELEMENTARY SCHOOL COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX SECTION 23 7417 - SINGLE PACKAGE ROOFTOP AIR CONDITIONERS (SRTU) PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Provide and install a single -package, single -zone, electric air conditioner with gas heat for rooftop application. 1.02 RELATED WORK A. Division 23 Mechanical. 1. Ductwork. 2. Air Balance. 3. Electrical provisions for mechanical work. 4. Air Filtration. 1.03 PERFORMANCE A. As scheduled on drawings, with head pressure control to enable unit start and operate down to 20 degrees F ambient. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Manufacturer's certified capacity data B. Submit manufacturer's installation, start-up and service instructions. C. Submit recommended clearance dimensions for air flow and service. D. Submit coordination drawings as specified. Give consideration to adjacent structures as they affect air flow patterns. E. Submit internal wiring diagram of Control Center F. Submit sequence of operation in narrative form. G. Mark-up a copy of the specifications indicating in the margin of each paragraph the following: COMPLY, DO NOT COMPLY, NOT APPLICABLE. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Addison B. Reznor C. Aaon 2.02 COMPRESSOR A. Provide a thermally protected, serviceable semi -hermetic compressor with service valves, vibration isolation, crankcase heaters, slight glass and filter drier. Provide with a 5-year parts and labor warranty. SINGLE PACKAGE ROOFTOP AIR CONDITIONERS (SRTU) VLK Architects, 2007 23 7413 - 1 2740.00 CRESTVIEW ELEMENTARY SCHOOL COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX B. Provide a minimum of two stages of cooling with hot gas reheat. 2.03 EVAPORATOR AND CONDENSER COILS A. Provide copper tubes with mechanically bonded aluminum fins for evaporator and condenser coils. Provide hot gas bypass for evaporator coil. B. Provide louvered condenser coil. C. Provide factory installed hail / vandalism guards for condenser coils. 2.04 EVAPORATOR FANS A. Provide a belt -driven, forward -curved, centrifugal evaporator fan, with adjustable motor sheaves. Motor shall contain permanently lubricated bearings. Provide motor HP as indicated on the drawings. 2.05 CASING FILTERS AND DUCT CONNECTION A. Provide a cabinet constructed of galvanized or zinc -coated steel, primed and coated with baked enamel and suitable for outdoor installation. B. Provide duct connections on the bottom of each unit, as indicated on drawings. C. Provide manually operated outdoor air balancing dampers and motorized shut-off damper. D. Furnish 2" thick filters as specified. E. Provide stainless steel or polymer fully IAQ condensate drain pan with positive slope in all directions to outlet. 1. Line the condensate drain pan with 1-1/2" waterproof insulation. 2. Provide a hinged access door with quick release handle adjacent to condensate drain pan for inspection. Install access door on drain connection side of unit. F. Double wall casing construction 1. Construct interior casing panels with 1-1/2 lb. insulation for acoustic and condensate control. G. Furnish through -the -bottom electrical service connection. 2.08 ROOF CURB A. Install a roof curb of the same manufacture as the air conditioning unit. 1. Curb to support the unit and provide a watertight enclosure to protect ductwork and utility services. 2. Use a design complying with National Roofing Contractors Association requirements. 3. Level curb according to manufacturer's recommendations. 4. Curb height shall be minimum 14". 2.09 OUTDOOR FANS A. Provide propeller type with direct -driven permanently lubricated motor. Fan shall discharge upward. SINGLE PACKAGE ROOFTOP AIR CONDITIONERS (SRTU) VLK Architects, 2007 23 7413 - 2 2740.00 CRESTVIEW ELEMENTARY SCHOOL COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX 2.10 SHORT CYCLE CIRCUIT A. Provide circuit to prevent compressor from short cycling as a result of a rapid change in thermostat setting. Circuit also prevents compressor restart at least 5 minutes after shutdown. 2.11 CONVENIENCE OUTLET A. Provide 120V GFI outlet in unit cabinet. 2.12 SERVICE DISCONNECT SWITCH A. Non -fused disconnect switch with external locking handle. 2.13 MOTORIZED OUTSIDE AIR DAMPER A. Low leakage 14-gauge galvanized steel 1. Airfoil blades 2. Ruskin CD60 2.14 CASING FILTERS AND DUCT CONNECTION A. Provide a cabinet constructed of galvanized or zinc -coated steel, primed and coated with baked enamel and suitable for outdoor installation. B. Provide duct connections on the bottom of each unit, as indicated on drawings. C. Provide manually operated outdoor air dampers. D. Furnish 2" thick filters as specified. E. Furnish through -the -bottom electrical service connection. 2.15 GAS HEATING SECTION A. Unit shall be equipped with stainless steel burners and heat exchangers. B. Gas Controls. 1. Automatic gas valve and pressure regulator. 2. A manual shutoff valve. 3. Pilot valve. 4. Two flame rollout limit switches. 5. An adjustable fan control. 6. Fixed high limit controls C. Unit shall be equipped with an electric spark pilot ignition system. 1. Electronic flame detection. 2. 100% safety shutoff. D. Combustion air shall be induced by a positive pressure power venting fan. 1. Pre -purge of combustion chamber. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install according to manufacturer's recommendations and as shown on drawings. END OF SECTION SINGLE PACKAGE ROOFTOP AIR CONDITIONERS (SRTU) VLK Architects, 2007 23 7413 - 3 2740.00 CREEKVIEW ELEMENTARY SCHOOL COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX SECTION 23 8119.13 - SINGLE PACKAGE ROOFTOP AIR CONDITIONERS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Provide and install a single -package, single -zone, electric air conditioner with gas heat for rooftop application. 1.02 RELATED WORK A. Division 23 Mechanical. 1. Ductwork. 2. Air Balance. 3. Electrical provisions for mechanical work. 4. Air filtration. 1.03 PERFORMANCE A. As scheduled on drawings, with head pressure control to enable unit start and operate down to 20 degrees F ambient. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Manufacturer's certified capacity data B. Submit manufacturer's installation, start-up and service instructions. C. Submit recommended clearance dimensions for air flow and service. D. Submit coordination drawings as specified. Give consideration to adjacent structures as they affect air flow patterns. E. Submit internal wiring diagram of Control Center F. Submit sequence of operation in narrative form. G. Mark-up a copy of the specifications indicating in the margin of each paragraph the following: COMPLY, DO NOT COMPLY, NOT APPLICABLE. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Trane. B. York. 2.02 COMPRESSOR A. Provide a thermally protected, serviceable semi -hermetic compressor or hermetic compressor with service valves, vibration isolation, crankcase heaters, slight glass and filter drier. Provide with a 5-year warranty. SINGLE PACKAGE ROOFTOP AIR CONDITIONERS VLK Architects, 2007 23 8119.13 - 1 2740.00 CREEKVIEW ELEMENTARY SCHOOL COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX 2.03 EVAPORATOR AND CONDENSER COILS A. Provide copper tubes with mechanically bonded aluminum fins for evaporator and condenser coils. B. Provide hail guards for condenser coils. 2.04 EVAPORATOR FANS A. Provide a belt -driven, forward -curved, centrifugal evaporator fan, with adjustable motor sheaves. Motor shall contain permanently lubricated bearings. Provide motor HP as indicated on the drawings. 2.05 GAS HEATING SECTION A. Unit shall be equipped with stainless steel burners and heat exchangers. B. Gas Controls. 1. Automatic gas valve and pressure regulator. 2. A manual shutoff valve. 3. Pilot valve. 4. Two flame rollout limit switches. 5. An adjustable fan control. 6. Fixed high limit controls C. Unit shall be equipped with an electric spark pilot ignition system. 1. Electronic flame detection. 2. 100% safety shutoff. D. Combustion air shall be induced by a positive pressure power venting fan. 1. Pre -purge of combustion chamber. 2.06 CASING FILTERS AND DUCT CONNECTION A. Provide a cabinet constructed of galvanized or zinc -coated steel, primed and coated with baked enamel and suitable for outdoor installation. B. Provide duct connections on the bottom of each unit, as indicated on drawings. C. Provide manually operated outdoor air dampers. D. Furnish 2" thick filters as specified. E. Furnish through -the -bottom electrical service connection. 2.07 ROOF CURB A. Install a roof curb of the same manufacture as the air conditioning unit. 1. Curb to support the unit and provide a watertight enclosure to protect ductwork and utility services. 2. Use a design complying with National Roofing Contractors Association requirements. 3. Level curb according to manufacturer's recommendations. 4. Curb height shall be minimum 14". SINGLE PACKAGE ROOFTOP AIR CONDITIONERS VLK Architects, 2007 23 8119.13 - 2 2740.00 CREEKVIEW ELEMENTARY SCHOOL COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX 2.08 OUTDOOR FANS A. Provide propeller type with direct -driven permanently lubricated motor. Fan shall discharge upward. 2.09 HEAD PRESSURE CONTROL A. Provide solid state outdoor air fan speed control to permit unit to operate down to -20°F. 2.10 SHORT CYCLE CIRCUIT A. Provide circuit to prevent compressor from short cycling as a result of a rapid change in thermostat setting. Circuit also prevents compressor restart at least 5 minutes after shutdown. 2.12 CONVENIENCE OUTLET A. Provide 115V outlet in unit cabinet. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install according to manufacturer's recommendations and as shown on drawings. END OF SECTION SINGLE PACKAGE ROOFTOP AIR CONDITIONERS VLK Architects, 2007 23 8119.13 - 3 2740.00 CREEKVIEW ELEMENTARY SCHOOL COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX SECTION 23 8216 - HEATING AND COOLING COILS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Furnish and install heating and cooling coils. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Submit manufacturer's product data sheets and unit capacity information as specified. B. Submit manufacturer's Installation, Start -Up and Service Instructions. C. Submit internal wiring diagram. 1. Electrical interlocks. 1.03 RELATED WORK A. Division 23 Mechanical. 1. Air Handling Units. 2. Fan Coil Units. 3. Weatherproof Roof Mounted Air Handling Units. 4. Ductwork. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.01 DIRECT EXPANSION COOLING COILS A. DX cooling coils. 1. Constructed of copper tubes and aluminum fins. 2. Designed and circuited for use with direct expansion refrigeration. B. Cooling coil face velocity. 1. Not of magnitude to cause moisture to be carried off the coil. 2. Maximum velocity as scheduled. C. Circuit cooling coil with interlaced tubes so the entire face is active under all modes of unloading. Refer to the schedule on the drawings. D. Coils shall be constructed in casings as required for installation. E. Where coils are stacked, provide intermediate drain pans with drop tubes to drain condensate to the main drain pan without flooding the lower coil. 2.04 ELECTRIC HEATERS A. Capacity shall be as scheduled on the drawings. Heater shall have 80% nickel, 20% chromium, open resistance coils insulated by floating ceramic bushings, and be supported in an aluminum steel frame. B. Ceramic bushings shall be recessed into embossed openings and staked into supporting brackets spaced 3-1/2" maximum center to center. C. Coil shall be machine -crimped into threaded terminals and insulated with phenolic bushings. All terminal hardware shall be stainless steel. HEATING AND COOLING COILS VLK Architects, 2007 23 8216 - 1 2740.00 CREEKVIEW ELEMENTARY SCHOOL COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX D. Heater shall be listed by the Underwriters Laboratories for zero clearance to combustible surfaces and for use with central air conditioners. E. For primary protection, furnish a disk -type automatic reset thermal cutout for pilot duty only. F. For secondary protection, load -carrying manual reset thermal cutouts shall be wired in series with each heater circuit. Cutouts shall be rated at 480 volts minimum. G. Voltage, phase and number of heating stages shall be furnished in accordance with duct heater schedule. Three-phase heaters shall have single-phase circuits for operation from a 3- phase, 4-wire power source. Circuits shall be rated at 48 amperes maximum. Furnish one set of line terminals to feed all circuits. Heater shall be tested dielectrically at 2000 volts before shipment. Field -installed conductors feeding the heater shall be sized for 125% of the connected load. H. Built-in components shall be factory wired to terminal blocks for field connection. All internal wiring shall be insulated for 105°C. Built-in magnetic contactors shall disconnect all ungrounded conductors to each circuit. Furnish heaters with an air flow switch that will not allow heaters to energize without proof of air flow. Built-in transformer shall be dry industrial type, sized to carry full contactor holding coil load. Primary windings shall be fused at the factory. Built-in fuses shall be factory wired to each circuit to protect all underground conductors. Type NON or NOS fuses to be factory installed in phenolic fuse blocks. Built-in disconnect switch to be snap action, industrial type. Provide a door interlock mechanism to prevent hinged terminal box cover from being opened when the switch is on. Switch shall be unfused. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install the duct heaters in accordance with the manufacturer's Installation, Start -Up and Service Instructions. END OF SECTION HEATING AND COOLING COILS VLK Architects, 2007 23 8216 - 2 2740.00 CREEKVIEW ELEMENTARY SCHOOL COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX SECTION 26 0100 - ELECTRICAL OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Compile electrical product data and related information appropriate for Owner's operation and maintenance of products furnished under Contract. Prepare electrical operating and maintenance data as specified in this Section and as referenced in other sections of specifications. _ B. Instruct Owner's personnel in operation and maintenance of equipment and systems. C. Submit 5 copies of complete manual in final form. 1.02 ELECTRICAL OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL SUBMITTAL SCHEDULE A. Thirty (30) days after receipt of reviewed submittals bearing the Architect / Engineer's stamp of acceptance (including resubmittals), submit for review 1 copy of the first draft of the Electrical Operating and Maintenance Manual. This copy shall contain as a minimum: 1. Table of Contents for each element 2. Contractor information 3. All shop drawings, coordination drawings and product data, bearing the Architect/Engineer's stamp of acceptance. 4. All parts and maintenance manuals for items of equipment 5. Warranties (without starting dates) 6. Certifications that have been completed; submit forms and outlines of certifications that have not been completed 7. Operating and maintenance procedures. 8. Form of Owner's Training Program Syllabus (including times and dates) 9. Control operations / equipment wiring diagrams 10. Coordination Drawings 11. Schedule of Lamps 12. Schedule of Ballasts 13. Schedule of Fuses 14. Other required operating and maintenance information that are complete. B. Copy will be returned to the Contractor within 15 days with comments for corrections. C. Submit the (5) completed manuals in final form to the Architect / Engineer. 1. Prior to substantial completion for Owner's use after the Owner accepts facility maintenance. 2. Include all specified data, test reports, drawings, dated warranties, certificates, along with other materials and information. D. The Architect/Engineer shall review the manuals for completeness within 15 days. E. The Contractor shall be notified of any missing or omitted materials. The Manuals shall be reworked by the Contractor, as required, in the office of the Architect / Engineer. The manuals will not be retransmitted. F. Four complete manuals shall be delivered to the Owner. ELECTRICAL OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS VLK Architects, 2007 26 0100 - 1 2740.00 CREEKVIEW ELEMENTARY SCHOOL COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 BINDERS A. Commercial quality black, 3-ring binders with clear, durable, cleanable plastic covers. B. Minimum ring size: 1 ". Maximum ring size: 3". C. When multiple binders are used, correlate the data into related groupings. D. Label contents on spine and face of binder with full size insert. Label under plastic cover. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 ELECTRICAL OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL A. Form for Manuals: 1. Prepare data in form of an instructional manual for use by Owner's personnel. 2. Format: a. Size: 8-1/2" x 11 " b. Text: Manufacturer's printed data or neatly typewritten. 3. Drawings: a. Provide reinforced punched binder tab and bind in text. b. Fold larger drawings to size of text pages. 4. Provide flyleaf indexed tabs for each separate product or each piece of operating equipment. 5. Cover: Identify each volume with typed or printed title "Operating and Maintenance Instructions". List: a. Title of Project b. Identity of separate structures as applicable C. Identity of general subject matter covered in the manual. 6. Binder as specified B. Content of Manual: 1. Neatly typewritten Table of Contents for each volume arranged in systematic order as outlined in the specifications. a. Contractor, name of responsible principal, address and telephone number b. A list of each product required to be included, indexed to content of the volume. C. List with each product, name, address and telephone number of: 1) Subcontractor or installer 2) Maintenance contractor as appropriate 3) Identify area of responsibility of each. 4) Local source of supply for parts and replacement d. Identify each product -by-product name and other identifying symbols as set forth in Contract Documents. 2. Product Data: a. Include those sheets pertinent to the specific product. b. Annotate each sheet to: 1) Identify specific product or part installed. 2) Identify data applicable to installation. 3) Delete references to inapplicable information. ELECTRICAL OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS VLK Architects, 2007 26 0100 - 2 2740.00 CREEKVIEW ELEMENTARY SCHOOL COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX 3. Drawings: a. Supplement product data with drawings as necessary to illustrate: 1) Relations of component parts of equipment and systems 2) Control and flow diagrams b. Coordinate drawings with information in Project Record Documents to assure correct illustration of completed installation. C. Do not use Project Record Documents as maintenance drawings. 4. Written text as required to supplement product data for the particular installation: a. Organize in consistent format under separate headings for different procedures. b. Provide logical sequence of instructions for each procedure. 5. Copy of each warranty, bond and service contract issued a. Provide information sheet for Owner's personnel, giving: 1) Proper procedures in event of failure 2) Instances that might affect validity of warranties or bonds 6. Shop drawings, coordination drawings and product data as specified. C. Sections for Equipment and Systems 1. Content for each unit of equipment and system as appropriate: a. Description of unit and component parts: 1) Function, normal operating characteristics, and limiting conditions. 2) Performance curves, engineering data and tests. 3) Complete nomenclature and commercial number of replaceable parts. b. Operating procedures: 1) Start up, break-in, routine / normal operating instructions 2) Regulation, control, stopping, shut down and emergency instructions 3) Summer and winter operating instructions 4) Special operating instructions C. Maintenance procedures: 1) Routine operations 2) Guide to trouble -shooting 3) Disassembly, repair and reassembly 4) Alignment, adjusting and checking 5) Routine service based on operating hours d. Servicing and lubrication schedule 1) List of lubricants required e. Manufacturer's printed operating and maintenance instructions. f. Copies of typed circuit directories of panel board to reflect actual room graphics numbers and room names (not architectural room numbers from the drawings). 1) Electrical 2) Controls 3) Communications g. Original manufacturer's parts list, illustrations, assembly drawings and diagrams required for maintenance. 1) Predicted life of part subject to wear 2) Items recommended to be stocked as spare parts h. Schedule of fuses i. Complete equipment field accessible internal wiring diagrams j. Schedule of lamps k. Schedule of ballasts I. Each Contractor's coordination drawings 1) As installed color coded piping diagrams. ELECTRICAL OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS VLK Architects, 2007 26 0100 - 3 2740.00 CREEKVIEW ELEMENTARY SCHOOL COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX M. List of original manufacturer's spare parts and recommended quantities to be maintained in storage n. Other data as required under pertinent sections of the specifications 2. Prepare and include additional data when the need for such data becomes apparent during instruction of Owner's personnel. 3. Additional requirements for operating and maintenance data as outlined in respective sections of specifications 4. Provide complete information for products specified in Division 26. 5. Provide certificates of compliance as specified in each related section. 6. Provide -start up reports as specified in each related section. 7. Provide signed receipts for spare parts and material. 8. Provide training report and certificates. END OF SECTION ELECTRICAL OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS VLK Architects, 2007 26 0100 - 4 2740.00 CREEKVIEW ELEMENTARY SCHOOL COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX SECTION 26 0500 - ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Except as modified in this Section, General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, applicable provisions of Division 1 General Requirements, and other provisions and requirements of the Contract Documents apply to work of Division 26 Electrical. B. Applicable provisions of this section apply to all sections of Division 26, Electrical. 1.02 CODE REQUIREMENTS, AND FEES A. Perform work in accordance with applicable statutes, ordinances, codes and regulations of governmental authorities having jurisdiction. B. Electrical work shall comply with applicable inspection services: 1. Underwriters Laboratories. 2. National Fire Protection Association. 3. State Health Department. 4. Local Municipal Building Inspection Department adopted codes with amendments. 5. National Electrical Code with local amendments. 6. State Regulatory Agencies 7. Where the project is located outside a municipal jurisdiction, and has no municipal inspection services, the National Electrical Code with amendments of the municipality with extraterritorial jurisdiction shall govern. 8. Where the project is located outside any municipal jurisdiction, including extraterritorial jurisdictions, the National Electrical Code with local adopted amendments of the largest municipality located in the same county or parish shall govern. 9. International Energy Conservation Code C. Resolve any code violations discovered in contract documents with the Engineer prior to award of the contract. After Contract award, any correction or additions necessary for compliance with applicable codes shall be made at no additional cost to the Owner. D. This Contractor shall be responsible for being aware of and complying with asbestos NESHAP regulations, as well as all other applicable codes, laws and regulations. E. Obtain all permits required. 1.03 CONTRACTOR'S QUALIFICATIONS A. An approved contractor for the work under this division shall be: 1. A specialist in this field and have the personnel, experience, training, and skill, and the organization to provide a practical working system. 2. Able to furnish evidence of having contracted for and installed not less than 3 systems of comparable size and type that have served their Owners satisfactorily for not less than 3 years. 1.04 REFERENCE SPECIFICATIONS AND STANDARDS A. Materials which are specified by reference to Federal Specifications; ASTM, ASME, ANSI, or AW WA Specifications; Federal Standards; or other standard specifications must comply with latest editions, revisions, amendments or supplements in effect on date proposals are received. Requirements in reference specifications and standards are minimum for all ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS VLK Architects, 2007 26 0500 - 1 2740.00 CREEKVIEW ELEMENTARY SCHOOL COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX equipment, material and work. In instances where specified capacities, size or other features of equipment, devices or materials exceed these minimums, meet specified capacities. 1.05 CONTRACT DRAWINGS A. Contract drawings are diagrammatic only and do not give fully dimensioned locations of various elements of work. Determine exact locations from field measurements. B. Every effort has been made by the Engineer to indicate wiring of all receptacles, light fixtures, switches, telephone outlets, HVAC equipment, kitchen equipment, elevator equipment, and all other devices / appliances requiring electrical power. It is the intent of the Engineer that all light fixtures be powered and controlled unless specifically noted on the plans; that all wiring devices (receptacles and direct connected equipment) be circuited to a power source of the correct voltage, unless specifically noted on the drawings; and that all HVAC, kitchen and elevator equipment be properly wired to the correct voltage power source; that all communications and security systems devices and equipment and all fire alarm system devices and equipment are installed, wired and systems are fully operational. C. It is the responsibility of the Contractor to review the architectural drawings (reflected ceiling plans) for light fixtures, casework elevation details for electrical devices which are not indicated on the electrical drawings; to review the mechanical and plumbing documents and kitchen equipment drawings to determine the electrical rough -ins for all equipment requiring power connections, and to include in their proposals the correct and complete electrical rough -ins for all of these items which were inadvertently not indicated on the electrical drawings, OR the Contractor shall specifically enumerate each item requiring electrical rough - in which is not specifically shown on the electrical drawings, and indicate the electrical provisions of these items as specifically excluded from his proposal. D. It is the responsibility of the Contractor to compare the scale of all electrical drawings with the scale of the architectural drawings and make adjustments to all electrical drawings which have the incorrect drawing scale so that his material takeoffs are not in error due to an incorrectly labeled drawing scale and his proposal is complete. E. No proposal shall be accepted which specifically excludes any of the provisions of paragraphs B, C, or D above. 1.06 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS A. Maintain at the job site a separate set of white prints (blue line or black line) of the contract drawings for the sole purpose of recording the "as -built" changes and diagrams of those portions of work in which actual construction is significantly at variance with the contract drawings. Mark the drawings with a colored pencil. Prepare, as the work progresses and upon completion of work, reproducible drawings clearly indicating locations of various major and minor feeders, equipment, and other pertinent items, as installed. Record underground and underslab service and feeders installed, dimensioning exact location and elevation of such installations. B. At conclusion of project, obtain without cost to the Owner, electronic AutoCAD CAD files of the original drawings and transfer as -built changes to these. Provide the following as -built documents including all contract drawings regardless of whether corrections were necessary and include in the transmittal: "2 sets of CDs and prints for Owner's use, one set of CDs, prints, and mylars for Architect / Engineers Records". Delivery of these as -built electronic, reproducible and prints is a condition of final acceptance. 1. 3 sets of electronic AutoCAD (2004 dwg) CAD drawing files, on CD-ROM media, of each contract as -built drawing. 2. One reproducible Dayrex mylar film positive of each contract as -built drawing. 3. Three sets of blue -line prints of each contract as -built drawing. ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS VLK Architects, 2007 26 0500 - 2 2740.00 CREEKVIEW ELEMENTARY SCHOOL COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX C. As -Built Drawings should indicate the following information as a minimum: 1. Indicate all addendum changes to documents. 2. Remove Engineer's Seal, name, address, and logo from drawings. 3. Mark documents AS -BUILT DRAWINGS. 4. Clearly indicate: DOCUMENT PRODUCED BY: 5. Indicate all changes to construction during construction. Indicate actual routing of all conduit, etc that were deviated from construction drawings. 6. Indicate exact location of all underground electrical raceways, and elevations. 7. Correct schedules to reflect (actual) equipment furnished and manufacturer. 8. During the execution of work, maintain a complete set of Drawings and specifications upon which all locations of equipment, devices, and all deviations and changes from the construction documents in the work shall be recorded. 9. Exact location of all electrical equipment in building. Label panel schedules to indicate actual location. 10. Exact location of all electrical equipment in and outside of the building. 11. Exact location of all outdoor lighting poles and equipment. 12. Location, size and routing of all feeder conduits, equipment, etc. shall be accurately and neatly shown to dimension. 13. Exact location of all roof mounted equipment, wall, roof and floor penetrations. 14. Cloud all changes. 15. Update all panel schedules with all additional circuits added or deleted through construction. Identify each circuit to include all information specified for directory cards for circuit identification in panelboards. 1.07 SPACE REQUIREMENTS A. Consider space limitations imposed by contiguous work in selection and location of equipment and material. Do not provide equipment or material that is not suitable in this respect. 1.08 RELATION WITH OTHER TRADES A. Carefully study all matters and conditions concerning the project. Submit notification of conflict in ample time to prevent unwarranted changes in any work. Review other Divisions of these specifications to determine their requirements. Extend electrical services and final connections to all items requiring same. B. Because of the complicated relationship of this work to the total project, conscientiously study the relation and cooperate as necessary to accomplish the full intent of the documents. C. Provide sleeves and inserts in forms as required for the work. Stub up and protect open ends of pipe before any concrete is placed. Furnish sizes of required equipment pads. Furnish and locate bolts and fittings required to be cast in them. D. Locate and size openings required for installation of work specified in this Division in sufficient time to prevent delay in the work. E. Refer to other Divisions of the specifications for the scope of required connections to equipment furnished under other Division. Determine from the General Contractor / Construction Manager for the various trades, the Owner, and by direction from the Architect / Engineer, the exact location of all items. The construction trades involved shall furnish all roughing -in drawings and wiring diagrams required for proper installation of the electrical work. 1. Make final electrical connections to all electrically operated equipment indicated on the drawings, except as noted. ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS VLK Architects, 2007 26 0500 - 3 2740.00 CREEKVIEW ELEMENTARY SCHOOL COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX 2. The responsibility for alignment of motor and driven equipment is specified in the related division. F. Request all Shop Drawings required in ample time to permit proper installation of all electrical provisions. G. Extend services as indicated to the various items of equipment furnished by others. Rough -in for the various items and make final connections ready for operation upon placing of the equipment. 1.09 CONCEALED AND EXPOSED WORK A. When the word "concealed" is defined as hidden from sight as in chases, furred spaces or above ceilings. "Exposed" is defined as open to view, in plain sight. 1.10 GUARANTEE A. Guarantee work for 1 year from the date of substantial completion of the project. During that period make good any faults or imperfections that may arise due to defects or omissions in material, equipment or workmanship. At the Owner's option, replacement of failed parts or equipment shall be provided. 1.11 MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT A. Furnish new and unused materials and equipment meeting the requirements of the paragraph specifying acceptable manufacturers. Where two or more units of the same type or class of equipment are required, provide units of a single manufacturer. 1.12 NOISE AND VIBRATION A. Select equipment to operate with minimum noise and vibration. If noise or vibration is produced or transmitted to or through the building structure by equipment, piping, ducts or other parts of work, and judged objectionable by the Owner, Architect, or Engineer, rectify such conditions at no additional cost to the Owner. If the item of equipment is judged to produce objectionable noise or vibration, demonstrate at no additional cost that equipment performs within designated limits on a vibration chart. 1.13 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers names and catalog number specified under sections of Division 26 are used to establish standards of design, performance, quality and serviceability and not to limit competition. Equipment of similar design, materials, energy efficiency characteristics (where applicable) and lighting performance characteristics (where applicable) equal to that specified, manufactured by a named manufacturer shall be acceptable on approval. A request for prior approval of equipment not listed must be submitted ten (10) days before proposal due date. Submit a marked -up set of the relevant specification section indicating all variances, a comparison to the specified product, and of construction and performance criteria, complete design and performance data for the specified product and the proposed substitution for comparison to the Engineer. The Architect issues approvals of acceptable manufacturers as addenda to the Construction Proposal Documents. 1.14 UTILITIES, LOCATIONS AND ELEVATIONS A. Locations and elevations of the various utilities included within the scope of this work: 1. Obtained from utility maps and other substantially reliable sources. 2. Are offered separate from the Contract Documents as a general guide only without guarantees to accuracy. ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS VLK Architects, 2007 26 0500 - 4 2740.00 CREEKVIEW ELEMENTARY SCHOOL COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX B. Examine the site and verify the location and elevation of all utilities and of their relation to the work. Existing utilities indicated on the site plans are for reference only and shall be field verified by the Contractor with the respective public or private utility. 1.15 OPERATING TESTS A. After all electrical systems have been completed and put into operation, subject each system to an operating test under design conditions to ensure proper sequencing and operation throughout the range of operation. Tests shall be made in the presence of the Architect / Engineer and Owner. Provide minimum 24-hour advance notice of scheduling of all tests. Make adjustments as required to ensure proper functioning of all systems. Special tests on individual systems are specified under individual sections. Submit 3 copies of all certifications and test reports adequately in advance of completion of the work to allow for remedial action as required to correct deficiencies discovered in equipment and systems. 1.16 WARRANTIES A. Submit 3 copies of all warranties and guarantees for systems, equipment, devices and materials. These shall be included in the Operating and Maintenance Manuals. 1.17 BUILDING CONSTRUCTION A. It shall be the responsibility of the sub -contractor to consult the Architectural and Engineering drawings, details and specifications and thoroughly familiarize himself as to the construction and all job related requirements. All construction trades shall cooperate with the General Contractor / Construction Manager job site superintendent and lay out work so that all piping and other items are placed in the walls, furred spaces, chases, etc., so that there shall be no delay in the job. 1.18 TEMPORARY FACILITIES A. General: Refer to Division 1 for general requirements on temporary facilities. B. Temporary Wiring: Temporary power and lighting for construction purposes shall be provided under this Division. Installation of temporary power shall be in accordance with NEC Article 527. C. Temporary facilities, wire, lights and devices are the property of this Contractor and shall be removed by this Contractor at the completion of the Contract. PART 2 - PRODUCTS — NOT USED PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 IDENTIFICATION OF EQUIPMENT A. Identification of Equipment: 1. All major equipment shall have a manufacturer's label identifying the manufacturer's address, equipment model and serial numbers, equipment size, and other pertinent data. Take care not to obliterate this nameplate. The legend on all nameplates or tags shall correspond to the identification shown on the Operating Instructions. 2. A black -white -black (red -white -red for emergency circuits) 3 layer laminated plastic engraved identifying nameplate shall be permanently secured to each switchboard, distribution panel, motor control center, transformer, panelboard, safety disconnect switch, enclosed circuit breaker, wireway, busduct plug, terminal cabinet, TVSS protection device, capacitor, individual motor controller, contactor, fire alarm panels ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS VLK Architects, 2007 26 0500 - 5 2740.00 CREEKVIEW ELEMENTARY SCHOOL COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX (main and remote booster), and communications (voice, data, video) cabinet or rack with stainless steel screws. a. Identifying nameplates shall have 1/2-inch high, engraved letters for equipment designation and Ya-inch letters indicating source circuit designation, (ie: "PANEL HA —served from MDP-6 located in Mech. Rm. 100"). b. Each switchboard, distribution panel, and motor control center branch circuit device shall have a nameplate showing the load and location of load served in'/a-inch high, engraved letters. C. Each section of multiple section panelboards shall also indicate panelboard section number (ie: Panel "HA -Section 2 — served from MDP-6 located in Mech. Rm. 100") d. Enclosed switches, starters, circuit breakers and contactors: Provide neatly typed label inside each motor starter and contactor enclosure door identifying motor or load served, nameplate horsepower, full load amperes, code letter, service factor, and voltage / phase rating. Provide Phenolic nameplate on cover exterior to indicate motor or load served, location of load served, panel(s) and circuit(s) serving load(s), description and location of control controlling contactor (i.e.: contactor controlled by switch in Room A107.), and panel and circuit feeding line side of control transformer. Example of label for lighting / receptacle contactor: Lighting Contactor Panel HA 2,4,6 Control circuit — Panel HA 2,4 Location — West parking Lot Pole Lights Switched - BMCS 3. Cardholders and directory cards shall be furnished for circuit identification in panelboards. Cardholder shall be located on inside of panel door and shall be in a metal frame with clear plastic front. Circuit lists shall be typewritten. Circuit descriptions shall include explicit description and identification of items controlled by each individual breaker, including final graphics room number or name designation and name of each item served. If no building appointed room number or name is given, list locations per the following examples — A. Storage in Rm 100 — B. Office in Rm 100 — C. Storage west of Rm. 100. List corridors as "corridors". Identify circuits controlled by contactors using a separate notation for each contactor used. List notation at bottom of schedule stating the circuits are controlled by a contactor, list exact location of contactor, and how switched. Do not use architectural room number designation shown on plans. Obtain final graphics room number identification from Architect's final room number graphics plan. All locations served by breakers shall be listed on schedule. Panel schedule shall be large enough to contain all information required. 4. Permanent, waterproof, black markers shall be used to identify each lighting and power grid junction box, gutter and wireway. Clearly indicate the panel and branch circuit numbers available at that junction box, gutter or wireway. Where low voltage relay panels are used for lighting control, identify the low voltage relay panel and number in addition to the branch circuit panel and number. 5. Pull Boxes, Transformers, Disconnect Switches, etc.: Field work each with a name plate showing identity, voltage and phase and identifying equipment connected to it. The transformer rating shall be shown on the panels or enclosures. For an enclosure containing a motor starter, the nameplate shall include the Owner's motor number, motor voltage, number of motor phases, motor load being serviced, motor horsepower, and motor full load current. Nameplates shall also indicate where panel is fed from. B. Prohibited Markings: Markings intended to identify the manufacturer, vendor, or other source from whom the material has been obtained are prohibited for installation in public, tenant, or common areas within the project. Also prohibited are materials or devices that bear evidence ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS VLK Architects, 2007 26 0500 - 6 2740.00 CREEKVIEW ELEMENTARY SCHOOL COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX that markings or insignias have been removed. Certification, testing (example, Underwriters Laboratories), and approval labels are exceptions to this requirement. C. Warning Signs: Provide warning signs where there is hazardous exposure associated with access to or operation of electrical facilities. Provide text of sufficient size to convey adequate information at each location; mount permanently in an appropriate and effective location. Comply with industry standards for color and design. D. Wire and Cable Markers: Provide vinyl cloth markers with split sleeve or tubing type, except in manholes provide stainless steel with plastic ties. E. Wire and Cable Labeling: Provide wire markers on each conductor in all boxes, pull boxes, gutters, wireways, contactors, and motor controllers and load connection. Identify with panelboard / switchboard branch circuit or feeder number for power and lighting circuits, and with control wire number as indicated on equipment manufacturer's shop drawings for control wiring. F. Underground Warning Tape: Thomas and Betts or approved equal. Six-inch wide plastic tape, colored red or orange with suitable warning legend describing buried electrical lines; telephone lines and data lines. All underground electrical conduits shall be so identified. Tape shall be buried at a depth of 6-inches below grade and directly above conduits or ductbanks. Provide magnetic marking tape below all underground electrical conduits. 3.02 CUTTING AND PATCHING A. General: Comply with the requirements of Division 1 for the cutting and patching of other work to accommodate the installation of electrical work. Except as authorized by the Architect / Engineer, cutting and patching of electrical work to accommodate the installation of other work is not permitted. 3.03 INSTRUCTION OF OWNER'S PERSONNEL A. Prior to substantial completion, conduct an on -site training program to instruct Owner's operating personnel in the operation and maintenance of the electrical systems. 1. Provide the training during regular working day. 2. The Instructors shall be experienced in their phase of operation and maintenance of the electrical systems and with the project. B. Time to be allocated for instructions. 1. Minimum of 20 hours dedicated instructor time 2. 4 hours on each of 5 days 3. Additional instruction time for specific systems as specified in other Sections. C. Before on -site training, submit the program syllabus; proposed time and dates; for review and approval, minimum 48 hours prior to proposed training time and date. 1. One copy to the Owner 2. One copy to the Architect / Engineer D. The Owner shall provide a list of personnel to receive instructions, and shall coordinate their attendance at the agreed upon times. E. Use operation and maintenance manuals as the basis of instruction. Review manual with personnel in detail. Explain all aspects of operation and maintenance. F. Demonstrate start-up, operation, control, adjustment, trouble -shooting, servicing, maintenance, and shut down of each item of equipment. ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS VLK Architects, 2007 26 0500 - 7 2740.00 CREEKVIEW ELEMENTARY SCHOOL COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX G. Demonstrate equipment functions (both individually and as part of the total integrated system). H. Prepare and insert additional data in the operating and maintenance manuals when the need for additional data becomes apparent during instructions. Submit a report within one week after completion of training. List time and date of each demonstration, hours devoted to the demonstration, and a list of people present, with their respective signatures. At the conclusion of the on -site training program, have the person designated by the Owner sign a certificate to certify that he / she has a proper understanding of the system, that the demonstrations and instructions have been satisfactorily completed, and the scope and content of the operating and maintenance manuals used for the training program are satisfactory. K. Provide a copy of the report and the certificate in an appropriately tabbed section of each Operating and Maintenance Manual. 3.04 OPENINGS A. Framed, cast or masonry openings for boxes, equipment or conduits are specified under other divisions. Drawings and layout work for exact size and location of all openings are included under this division. 3.05 HOUSEKEEPING PADS A. Provide concrete equipment housekeeping pads under all floor and outdoor mounted electrical equipment. B. Concrete and reinforcing steel shall be as specified in Division 3, or as indicated or noted. C. Concrete pads: 1. 6-inches thick minimum indoors; 8-inches thick minimum outdoors, or as indicated on the drawings or in other sections of the specifications. 2. Chamfer strips at edges and corner of forms. 3. Smooth steel trowel finish. 4. Extend 3-inches minimum indoors beyond perimeter of equipment unless otherwise shown. 5. 6-inch x 6-inch #8 wire reinforcement mesh. 3.06 OBSTRUCTIONS A. The drawings indicate certain information pertaining to surface and subsurface obstructions, which has been taken from available drawings: Such information is not guaranteed, however, as to accuracy of location or complete information. 1. Before any cutting or trenching operations are begun, verify with Owner's representative, utility companies, municipalities, and other interested parties that all available information has been provided. 2. Should obstruction be encountered, whether shown or not, alter routing of new work, reroute existing lines, remove obstruction where permitted, or otherwise perform whatever work is necessary to satisfy the purpose of the new work and leave existing services and structures in a satisfactory and serviceable condition. B. Assume total responsibility for and repair any damage to existing utilities or construction, whether or not such existing facilities are shown. ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS VLK Architects, 2007 26 0500 - 8 2740.00 CREEKVIEW ELEMENTARY SCHOOL COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX 3.07 VANDAL RESISTANT DEVICES A. Where vandal resistant screws or bolts are employed on the project, deliver to the Owner 2 suitable tools for use with each type of fastener used, and 25 percent spare fasteners. B. Proof of delivery of these items to the Owner shall be included in the Operating and Maintenance Manuals. 3.08 PROTECTION A. Protect work, equipment, fixtures, and materials. At work completion, work must be clean and in original manufacturer's condition. B. Do not deliver equipment to this project site until progress of construction has reached the stage where equipment is actually needed or until building is closed in enough to protect the equipment from weather. Equipment allowed to stand in the weather shall be rejected, and the contractor is obligated to furnish new equipment of a like kind at no additional cost to the Owner. 3.09 COORDINATION OF BRANCH CIRCUIT OVERCURRENT AND PROTECTION DEVICES A. Review with equipment specified which requires electrical connections. Review equipment shop drawings and manufacturer's nameplate data and coordinate exact branch circuit overcurrent protective device and conductors with equipment provided. 1. Provide equipment manufacturer's recommended overcurrent protective device indicated on nameplate at no additional cost to the Owner. 2. If branch circuit conductors and / or conduit sizing is less than the minimum required by equipment manufacturer, notify the Architect / Engineer immediately, prior to rough -in. 3. If equipment manufacturer is a substitution to the specified equipment manufacturer, provide the greater of the conductors specified or those required for the installed equipment manufacturer's minimum circuit conductors, at no additional cost to the Owner. 4. If conductors indicated on plans are in excess of that permitted by equipment manufacturer, notify Architect / Engineer immediately, prior to rough -in. 5. If conductors indicated on plans are in excess of that permitted by the equipment manufacturer, provide the maximum conductors permitted by the equipment manufacturer based on NEC ampacity tables, either in a single set, or as a set of parallel conductors as permitted by the NEC. Conductor size and quantity entering the equipment enclosures shall not exceed the equipment manufacturer's maximum recommendations. 3.10 OVERCURRENT DEVICE COORDINATION STUDY A. Contractor shall provide a coordination study and fault current analysis report, conducted and prepared by the switchgear manufacturer. The coordination study and fault current analysis shall include the manufacturer's recommendations for all adjustable overcurrent devices specified or provided. B. Contractor shall adjust all overcurrent device settings based on manufacturer's recommendations, or as directed by Owner / Architect at no additional cost to Owner. C. Submittals: Submit four copies of certified coordination study results to the Architect for review. ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS VLK Architects, 2007 26 0500 - 9 2740.00 CREEKVIEW ELEMENTARY SCHOOL COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX 3.11 EQUIPMENT BACKBOARDS A. Backboards: 3/4 inch, fire retardant, exterior grade plywood, painted gray, both sides. 1. Provide minimum of two 4-ft. by 8-ft. sheets of plywood for each new telephone terminal location. 2. Provide minimum of two 4-ft. by 4-ft. sheets of plywood for each new data / voice / video / communications equipment location / cable TV head end equipment, or security equipment location. 3.12 TESTING A. The contractors for the various sub -systems shall submit proposed testing procedures for their systems, subject to review and approval and Owner acceptance. The contract will not be declared to be substantially complete until the functional operation of the subsystems have been demonstrated and verified and reports have been provided, reviewed and accepted. B. The project will not be declared substantially complete until the following has taken place. 1. The "As -Built" drawings have been submitted, reviewed and accepted by the Architect / Owner / Owner's Construction Representative. 2. The various systems have been commissioned and accepted to include the following: a. Building Emergency Lighting System 3.13 LOAD BALANCING A. Balance load on all phases in each panel to within 10% of respective phase loads. END OF SECTION ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS VLK Architects, 2007 26 0500 10 2740.00 CREEKVIEW ELEMENTARY SCHOOL COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX SECTION 26 0509 - ELECTRICAL UTILITY COORDINATION AND SERVICE ENTRANCE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. General: Electrical service shall be provided by local utility company. B. Power Company Data: Obtain from utility company information and installation standards for electrical service installation. C. Responsibilities: Determine what equipment and labor is provided by utility company and what equipment and labor is required of this Contractor. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL A. Service Data: Ensure that utility company service data is accurate and verified. 2.02 PRIMARY SERVICE A. General: Division 26 shall provide primary service conduit, concrete transformer pads, concrete ductbank, manholes, and pull boxes as required and as specified. B. Utility company shall provide primary cables, splices, terminations, and primary underground and overhead service conductors. 2.03 TRANSFORMERS AND SWITCHGEAR A. General: Division 26 shall make provisions for service as required by utility company, including, but not limited to permanent or removable/lockable vehicular barriers, grounding rods, grounding conductors, and sleeves. B. The utility company shall provide service transformers, primary switchgear, primary protective relaying, and connections to the customer service. 2.04 SECONDARY SERVICE CONDUCTORS A. General: Division 26 shall provide secondary service entrance conductors, conduit and concrete ductbank. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Standards: The installation of the service entrance provisions shall comply with the published standards and requirements of the utility company, the utility company's specific construction requirements for this project, and with requirements of this Division. B. Correction: Any failure to meet the standards and requirements shall be corrected to the satisfaction of the utility company and Owner without any additional cost to the Owner. C. Contractor shall provide all construction materials and labor that the utility company determines to be the responsibility of the customer, at no additional cost to the Owner. ELECTRICAL UTILITY COORDINATION AND SERVICE ENTRANCE VLK Architects, 2007 26 0509 - 1 2740.00 CREEKVIEW ELEMENTARY SCHOOL COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX D. The materials and labor required by the utility company that shall be provided by the contractor includes, but is not limited to permanent or removable / lockable vehicular barriers, grounding rods, grounding conductors, sleeves, concrete pads, concrete reinforced ductbanks, conduits, metering racks and metering enclosures. E. Utility pole and service entrance ductbank locations shall be staked and surveyed prior to pole installation by the Contractor to verify their proper placement is within the Owner's property and respective utility easements. Contractor shall verify by survey that the pole and service entrance ductbank location and easements do not interfere with existing easements, right-of-ways, or other restricted properties. Conflicts with existing easements and restrictions shall be brought to the attention of the Architect prior to construction. Contractor shall initiate contact with the power provider (retail seller), utility (transmission and distribution), and Owner within 14 days of Notice to Proceed to ensure permanent power will be available to the site. Any delays resulting from lack of this coordination shall be the responsibility of the Contractor. END OF SECTION ELECTRICAL UTILITY COORDINATION AND SERVICE ENTRANCE VLK Architects, 2007 26 0509 - 2 2740.00 CREEKVIEW ELEMENTARY SCHOOL COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX SECTION 26 0510 - CONTRACT QUALITY CONTROL PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Contract quality control including workmanship, manufacturer's instructions, mock-ups and demonstrations. 1.02 QUALITY CONTROL PROGRAM A. Maintain quality control over supervision, subcontractors, suppliers, manufacturers, products, services, site conditions and workmanship to produce work in accordance with contract documents. 1.03 WORKMANSHIP A. Comply with industry standards except when more restrictive tolerances or specified requirements indicate more rigid standards or more precise workmanship. B. Perform work by persons qualified to produce workmanship of specified quality. C. Secure products in place with positive anchorage devices designed and sized to withstand stresses, vibration, and racking. Under no conditions shall material or equipment be suspended from structural bridging. D. Provide finishes to match approved samples; all exposed finishes shall be approved by the Architect / Engineer. Submit color samples as required. 1.04 MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS A. Comply with instructions in full detail, including each step in sequence. B. Should instruction conflict with Contract Documents, request clarification from Architect / Engineer before proceeding. 1.05 MANUFACTURER'S CERTIFICATES A. When required in individual Specification Sections, submit manufacturer's certificate in duplicate, certifying that products meet or exceed specified requirements. 1.06 MANUFACTURER'S FIELD SERVICES A. When required in individual Specification Sections, manufacturer shall provide manufacturer's qualified personnel to observe: 1. Field conditions 2. Condition of installation 3. Quality of workmanship 4. Start-up of equipment 5. Testing, adjusting, and balancing of equipment B. Manufacturer's qualified personnel shall make written report of observations and recommendations to Architect / Engineer. CONTRACT QUALITY CONTROL VLK Architects, 2007 26 0510 - 1 2740.00 CREEKVIEW ELEMENTARY SCHOOL COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX 1.07 MOCK UPS A. Assemble and erect the specified equipment and products complete, with specified anchorage and support devices, seals and finishes. B. Do not proceed with any work involving a mock-up, until the related mock up has been approved in writing. C. Acceptable mock-ups in place shall be retained in the completed work. D. Perform tests and submit results as specified. 1.08 SCHEDULING OF MOCK-UPS A. Schedule demonstration and observation of mock-ups, in phases, with Architect / Engineer. 1. Rough -in 2. Finish with all appurtenances in place 3. Demonstrations PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 EQUIPMENT AND MATERIAL A. Comply with recognized National rating and approval agencies as well as all codes and ordinances at the federal, state and city levels. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 ADJUSTMENTS AND MODIFICATIONS A. Contractor shall provide all adjustments and modifications as requested by the manufacturer's qualified personnel at no additional cost to Owner. B. Coordination Drawings: 1. Electrical room size and location required and to scale 2. Equipment and accessories, switchgear and piping 3. Indicate clearances and service access. 3.02 CITY INSPECTIONS A. Contractor shall notify design prime consultant and associated Architect / Owner's Construction Manager when he requests an inspection by the City Inspector. 3.03 MOCK-UPS A. Mock up the light fixture fireproofing for each type of light fixture to be located in fire rated ceilings. Demonstrate that the fire proofing material does not interfere with the mechanical operation of light fixture doors, hinges, or latches. B. Mock up a typical classroom and computer lab with all wiring devices, cover plates, rough -in boxes, conduits, etc. Provide all conductors from all wiring devices to above ceiling space to demonstrate conduit routing and conductor fill. END OF SECTION CONTRACT QUALITY CONTROL VLK Architects, 2007 26 0510 - 2 2740.00 CREEKVIEW ELEMENTARY SCHOOL COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX SECTION 26 0512 - SHOP DRAWINGS, COORDINATION DRAWINGS & PRODUCT DATA PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Prepare submittals as required by Specifications and as outlined below. B. Submit product data shop drawings only for the following and for items specifically requested elsewhere in the Contract Drawings and Specifications. Architect / Engineer reserves the right to refuse shop drawings not requested for review and to imply that materials shall be provided as specified without exception. C. The term submittal, as used herein, refers to all: 1. Shop Drawings 2. Coordination Drawings 3. Product data D. Submittals shall be prepared and produced for: 1. Distribution as specified 2. Inclusion in the Operating and Maintenance Manual, as specified, in the related section 1.02 SHOP DRAWINGS A. Present drawings in a clear and thorough manner. Identify details by reference to sheet and detail, schedule, or room numbers shown on Contract Drawings. B. Show all dimensions of each item of equipment on a single composite Shop Drawing. Do not submit a series of drawings of components. C. Identify field dimensions; show relation to adjacent or critical features or work or products. 1.03 COORDINATION DRAWINGS A. Present in a clear and thorough manner. Title each drawing with project name. Identify each element of drawings by reference to sheet number and detail, or room number of contract documents. Minimum drawing scale: 1/4"=V-0". B. Prepare coordination drawings to coordinate installations for efficient use of available space, for proper sequence of installation and to resolve conflicts. Coordinate with work specified in other sections and other divisions of the specifications. C. For each room containing major electrical switchgear and each outside equipment pad with major electrical switchgear and equipment, submit plan and elevation drawings. Show: 1. Actual electrical switchgear, equipment and components to be furnished. 2. NEC working space and NEC access to NEC working space. 3. Relationship to other equipment and components and openings, doors and obstructions 4. Housekeeping pad location and dimensions D. Identify field dimensions. Show relation to adjacent or critical features of work or products. E. Verify location of wiring devices, telephone outlets and other work specified in this Division. 1. Coordinate with drawing details, site conditions and millwork shop drawings prior to installation. 2. Where required for clarification, submit shop drawings prior to rough -in and fabrication. SHOP DRAWINGS, COORDINATION DRAWINGS & PRODUCT DATA VLK Architects, 2007 26 0512 - 1 2740.00 CREEKVIEW ELEMENTARY SCHOOL COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX F. Submit shop drawings in plan, elevation and sections, showing receptacles, outlets and other electrical devices in casework, cabinetwork and built-in furniture. 1.04 PRODUCT DATA A. All product options specified shall be indicated on the product data submittal. All options listed on the standard product printed data not clearly identified as not part of the product data submitted shall become part of the Contract and shall be provided. B. Mark each copy of standard printed data to identity pertinent products, referenced to specification section and article number. C. Show reference standards, performance characteristics and capacities; wiring and piping diagrams and controls; component parts; finishes; dimensions and required clearances. D. Modify manufacturer's standard schematic drawings and diagrams to supplement standard information and to provide information specifically applicable to the work. Delete information not applicable. E. Mark up a copy of the specifications for the product to indicate a) acknowledgement of the specification requirement (Comply), or b) acknowledgement that the particular specification requirement does not apply to this specific project (Not Applicable) or, c) acknowledgement that the specification requirement cannot be made or that a variance is being submitted for review to the Architect/Engineer/Owner (Does Not Comply, Explanation:) 1.05 MANUFACTURERS INSTRUCTIONS A. Submit Manufacturer's instructions for storage, preparation, assembly, installation, start-up, adjusting, calibrating, balancing and finishing. 1.06 CONTRACTOR RESPONSIBILITIES A. Review submittals prior to transmittal. B. Determine and verify: 1. Field measurements 2. Field construction criteria 3. Manufacturer's catalog numbers 4. Conformance with requirements of Contract Documents C. Coordinate submittals with requirements of the work and of the Contract Documents. D. Notify the Architect/Engineer in writing at time of submission of any deviations in the submittals from requirements of the Contract Documents. E. Do not fabricate products, or begin work for which submittals are specified, until such submittals have been produced and bear contractor's stamp. Do not fabricate products or begin work scheduled to have submittals reviewed until return of reviewed submittals with Architect/Engineer's acceptance. F. Contractor's responsibility for errors and omissions in submittals is not relieved whether Architect/Engineer reviews submittals or not. G. Contractor's responsibility for deviations in submittals from requirements of Contract Documents is not relieved whether Architect/Engineer reviews submittals or not, unless Architect/engineer gives written acceptance of the specific deviations on reviewed documents. SHOP DRAWINGS, COORDINATION DRAWINGS & PRODUCT DATA VLK Architects, 2007 26 0512 - 2 2740.00 CREEKVIEW ELEMENTARY SCHOOL COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX H. Submittals shall show sufficient data to indicate complete compliance with Contract Documents: 1. Proper sizes and capacities 2. That the item will fit in the available space in a manner that will allow proper service 3. Construction methods, materials and finishes Schedule submissions at least 15 days before date reviewed submittals will be needed. 1.07 SUBMISSION REQUIREMENTS A. Make submittals promptly in accordance with approved schedule, and in such sequence as to cause no delay in the Project or in the work of any other Contractor. B. Number of submittals required: 1. Shop Drawings and Coordination Drawings: Submit one reproducible transparency and three opaque reproductions. 2. Product Data: Submit the number of copies the contractor requires, plus those to be retained by the Architect / Engineer. C. Accompany submittals with transmittal letter, in duplicate, containing: 1. Date 2. Project title and number 3. Contractor's name, address and telephone number 4. The number of each Shop Drawing, Project Datum and Sample submitted 5. Other pertinent data D. Submittals shall include: 1. The date of submission 2. The project title and number 3. Contract Identification 4. The names of: a. Contractor b. Subcontractor C. Supplier d. Manufacturer 5. Identification of the product 6. Field dimensions, clearly identified as such 7. Relation to adjacent or critical features of the work or materials 8. Applicable standards, such as ASTM or federal specifications numbers 9. Identification of deviations from contract documents 10. Suitable blank space for General Contractor and Architect/Engineer stamps 11. Contractor's signed and dated Stamp of Approval E. Coordinate submittals into logical groupings to facilitate interrelation of the several items. 1. Finishes which involve Architect / Engineer selection of colors, textures or patterns 2. Associated items requiring correlation for efficient function or for installation 1.08 SUBMITTAL SPECIFICATION INFORMATION A. Every submittal document shall bear the following information as used in the project manual: 1. The related specification section number 2. The exact specification section title B. Submittals delivered to the Architect / Engineer without the specified information will not be processed. The Contractor shall bear the risk of all delays, as if no submittal had been delivered. SHOP DRAWINGS, COORDINATION DRAWINGS & PRODUCT DATA VLK Architects, 2007 26 0512 - 3 2740.00 CREEKVIEW ELEMENTARY SCHOOL COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX 1.09 RESUBMISSION REQUIREMENTS A. Make resubmittals under procedures specified for initial submittals. 1. Indicate that the document or sample is a resubmittal 2. Identify changes made since previous submittals B. Indicate any changes which have been made other than those requested by the Architect / Engineer. 1.10 CONTRACTOR'S STAMP OF APPROVAL A. Contractor shall stamp and sign each document certifying to the review of products, field measurements and field construction criteria, and coordination of the information within the submittal with requirements of the work and of Contract Documents. B. Contractor's stamp of approval on any submittal shall constitute a representation to Owner and Architect / Engineer that Contractor has either determined and verified all quantities, dimensions, field construction criteria, materials, catalog numbers, and similar data or assumes full responsibility for doing so, and that Contractor has reviewed or coordinated each submittal with the requirements of the work and the Contract Documents. C. Do not deliver any submittals to the Architect / Engineer that do not bear the Contractor's stamp of approval and signature. D. Submittals delivered to the Architect / Engineer without Contractor's stamp of approval and signature will not be processed. The Contractor shall bear the risk of all delays, as if no submittal had been delivered. 1.11 ARCHITECT/ENGINEER REVIEW OF IDENTIFIED SUBMITTALS A. The Architect/Engineer will: 1. Review identified submittals with reasonable promptness and in accordance with schedule. Specific equipment submittals that may be required to be expedited shall be submitted separately without other submittal items not requiring the same prompt attention. 2. Affix stamp and initials or signature, and indicate requirements for resubmittal or approval of submittal 3. Return submittals to Contractor for distribution or for resubmission B. Review of submittals will not extend to design data reflected in submittals that is peculiarly within the special expertise of the Contractor or any party dealing directly with the Contractor. C. Architect / Engineer's review is only for conformance with the design concept of the project and for compliance with the information given in the contract. 1. The review shall not extend to means, methods, sequences, techniques or procedures of construction or to safety precautions or programs incident thereto. 2. The review shall not extend to review of quantities, dimensions, weights or gauges, fabrication processes or coordination with the work of other trades. D. The review and approval of a separate item as such will not indicate approval of the assembly in which the item functions. 1.12 SUBSTITUTIONS A. Do not make requests for substitution employing the procedures of this Section. B. The procedure for making a formal request for substitution is specified in other Divisions. SHOP DRAWINGS, COORDINATION DRAWINGS & PRODUCT DATA VLK Architects, 2007 26 0512 - 4 2740.00 CREEKVIEW ELEMENTARY SCHOOL COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX PART 2 - PRODUCTS - NOT USED. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 SHOP DRAWINGS AND PRODUCT DATA A. Submittals shall not be combined or bound together with any other material submittal. B. Submit individually bound shop drawings and product data for the following when specified or provided: 1. Enclosed Motor Controllers 2. Panelboards and enclosures 3. Wiring devices 4. Transformers 5. Switchboards 6. Lighting fixtures, ballasts and lamps 7. Site Lighting poles and equipment 08. Motor control centers 09. Transient Voltage Surge Suppression and Filtering 10. Electrical Contactors 11. Lighting Controls and Occupancy Sensors 3.02 COORDINATION DRAWINGS A. Submit coordination drawings as specified. END OF SECTION SHOP DRAWINGS, COORDINATION DRAWINGS & PRODUCT DATA VLK Architects, 2007 26 0512 - 5 2740.00 CREEKVIEW ELEMENTARY SCHOOL COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX SECTION 26 0515 - EARTHWORK PART 1 - GENERAL A. Excavate and backfill conduit trenches for underground raceways, and excavate for structures installed as part of Electrical Work. PART 2 - PRODUCTS A. Refer to other Divisions PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXCAVATION A. Excavate trenches for underground raceways to the required depth to ensure minimum coverage. B. Cut the bottom of the trench or excavation to uniform grade. C. Should rock be encountered, excavate 6" below grade, fill with bedding material and tamp well. D. Lay out alignment of conduit trenches to avoid obstructions. Assure that proposed route of conduit will not interfere with building foundation before any cutting is begun. Should interference be found, contact the Architect / Engineer before proceeding. 3.02 BACKFILL A. Backfill shall not be placed until the work has been inspected, tested and approved. Complete backfill to the surface of natural ground or to the lines and grades shown on drawings. Except where special materials are required by other Divisions, use stabilized sand. Do not use peat, silt, muck, debris or other organic materials. Deposit backfill in uniform layers and compact each layer as specified in other Divisions. B. Restoration. Compact backfill, where trenching or excavation is required in improved areas such as pavements, walks, and similar areas, to a condition equal to the adjacent undisturbed earth, and restore surface of the area to the condition existing prior to trenching or excavating operation. 3.03 DISPOSAL OF EXCESS MATERIAL A. Remove excess excavation material or material unsuitable for backfill. Excess material can be spread on grade, or shall be removed from site as directed by the Owner / Architect. END OF SECTION EARTHWORK VLK Architects, 2007 26 0515 - 1 2740.00 CREEKVIEW ELEMENTARY SCHOOL COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX SECTION 26 0519 - CONDUCTORS AND CONNECTORS — 600 VOLT PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Provide electrical conductors, wire and connector work as shown, and specified. B. Types: The types of conductors and connectors required for the project include the following: 1. 600V building conductors 2. 600V building conductor connectors C. Application: The applications for conductors and connectors required on the project are as follows: 1. Power distribution circuitry 2. Lighting branch circuitry 3. Appliance, receptacle, and equipment branch circuitry 4. Motor branch circuitry 5. Control wiring 6. Line voltage D. Refer to other specific specification sections for voice, video, data, alarm and instrumentation cables. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. UL Label: Conductors and connectors shall be UL labeled. 1.03 REFERENCES A. Refer to other specific specification sections regarding specialized wiring and connections. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Essex B. General Cable C. Southwire D, American Wire and Cable E. Polywater 2.02 CONDUCTORS AND CONNECTORS: A. General: Except as indicated, provide conductors and connectors of manufacturer's standard materials, as indicated by published product information, designed and constructed as instructed by the manufacturer, and as required for the installation. B. Conductors: Provide factory -fabricated conductors of the size, rating, material, and type as indicated for each use. Conductors shall be soft or annealed copper wires meeting, before stranding, the requirements of ASTM B 3, Standard Specification for Soft or Annealed Copper Wire for Electrical Purposes, latest edition. 1. Conductors for control wiring sized #14 AWG through #10 AWG shall be stranded. CONDUCTORS AND CONNECTORS VLK Architects, 2007 26 0519 - 1 2740.00 CREEKVIEW ELEMENTARY SCHOOL COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX 2. Conductors for power and lighting shall be stranded. Stranding shall be Class B meeting the requirements of ASTM B 8, Standard Specification for Concentric -Lay - Stranded Copper Conductors, Hard, Medium Hard, or Soft. C. Insulation: Insulation shall meet or exceed the requirements of UL 83, Standard for Thermoplastic Insulated Wires. 1. Insulation for conductors shall be UL Type THHN/THWN, 75 degrees C. 2. All wiring inside lighting fixtures shall be temperature rated per NEC. D. Cable Lubricant: Fire resistant, nonflammable, water based, Polywater type J or 3M type W L/W LC/W LX. 2.03 COLOR CODES FOR CONDUCTORS FOR BRANCH CIRCUITS AND FEEDERS A. Provide color coding for conductors as required by NEC 210.5. Color coding for phase and voltage shall be as required by local codes and standards. Where such standards do not exist, color coding shall be as follows: Color Wire Sizes #10'and Smaller: Wire Sizes #6 and Smaller: Use Code Use Continuous Color Coded Continuous Color Coded Table Insulation Insulation (Note 02) Note 01 System/ A B C N Q' IG Phase 120/208 Black Red Blue White Green Green/Yellow 3 Ph Stripe 120/240 Black Orange Blue White Green Green/Yellow 3 Ph w/color Stripe stripe (Note 03) 120/240 Black N/A Blue 1 Ph 277/480 Brown Purple Yellow White Green Green/Yellow Note 05 Stripe Notes to Color Code Table: 1. Phase and Neutral Wire size #8 and larger, black conductors with color marking tape at each termination and where accessible; colors as noted above. 2. Ground Wire sizes #4 and larger, black conductor with green marking tape at each termination and where accessible. 3. Neutral Conductor: Provide three continuous white stripe on other than green insulation when 120/208V system is not present at this installation. 4. Switched legs of phase conductors for lighting and appliance branch circuits shall be of the same color as described above throughout the entire circuit. 5. Neutral Conductor 277V: Provide gray conductor insulation to identify 277 volt system neutral from 120 volt system neutral where each system shares a conduit, raceway, junction box, pull box or cabinet. 6. The use of phasing tape is not allowed for conductor color identification for conductor size #10 and smaller. 7. Conductors shall be the same color from breaker to device. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. General: Install electrical conductors and connectors as shown, in accordance with the manufacturer's written instructions, the requirements of NEC, the NECA Standard of Installation, and industry practices. CONDUCTORS AND CONNECTORS VLK Architects, 2007 26 0519 - 2 2740.00 CREEKVIEW ELEMENTARY SCHOOL COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX B. Coordination: Coordinate conductor installation work with electrical raceway and equipment installation work, as necessary for interface. C. Conductors: 1. Pull conductors together when more than one is being installed in a raceway. Whenever possible, pull conductors into their respective conduits by hand. Use pulling lubricant when necessary. 2. Before any conductor is pulled into any conduit, thoroughly swab the conduit to remove foreign material and to permit the wire to be pulled into a clean, dry conduit. 3. Run feeders their entire length in continuous section without joints or splices. 4. No wire smaller than #12 AWG shall be permitted for any lighting or power circuit. No wire smaller than #14 AWG shall be used for any control circuit, unless shown otherwise. 5. For 15 and 20 amp branch circuits operating at 150V or less, provide #10 AWG wire when the first outlet is over 75-feet from the panelboard. For branch circuits operating at 150 to 600 volts, provide #10 AWG wire when the first outlet is over 150-feet from the panelboard. 6. All neutrals installed in 120/208 volt circuits shall be size #10 AWG. Up to three 120- Volt circuits of different phases may share a common neutral unless noted otherwise. Up to three 277 Volt circuits of different phases may share a common neutral, unless noted otherwise. Neutral conductors for non -linear loads shall be considered a current carrying conductor as required by the NEC. 7. Branch circuit voltage.drop shall not exceed 3% of rated voltage. 8. No tap or splice shall be made in any conductor except in outlet boxes, pull boxes, junction boxes, splice boxes, or other accessible locations. Make taps and splices using an approved compression connector. Insulate taps and splices equal to the adjoining conductor. Make splices or taps only on conductors that are a component part of a single circuit, protected by approved methods. Taps or splices in feed through branch circuits for connection to light switches or receptacles shall be made by pigtail connection to the device. 9. Support conductors in vertical raceways, as required by the NEC. 10. Do not permit conductors entering or leaving a junction or pull box to deflect to create pressure on the conductor insulation. 11. Make joints in branch circuits only where circuits divide. These shall consist of one through circuit to which the branch from the circuit shall be spliced. 12. Make connections in conductors up to a maximum of one #6 AWG wire with two #8 AWG wires using twist -on pressure connectors of required size. 13. Make connections in conductors or combinations of conductors larger than specified using cable fittings of type and size required for specific duty. 14. After a splice is made, insulate entire assembly with UL-approved insulating tape to a value equivalent to the adjacent insulation. 15. Make splices and connections in control circuit conductors using UL-approved solderless crimp connectors. 16. Make grounding connections using ground clamps, connectors, or exothermic welds of a suitable type UL-approved for the duty. 17. All conduits shall be installed with an insulated ground conductor. The ground conductor shall be identified with green colored insulation for wire sizes No.10 AWG and smaller. Ground conductors size No. 8 AWG and larger shall be identified as required by the NEC. All 120V circuits shall have dedicated neutral, common neutral conductors for 120V phase conductors are prohibited. All 277V circuits may share a common neutral unless noted or required otherwise. Neutral conductors for non- linear loads shall be considered a current carrying conductor as required by NEC. 18. No more than six current carrying conductors shall be installed in a single raceway. When four, five, or six current carrying conductors are installed in a single raceway, their current carrying ampacities shall be derated as required by the NEC for non - diversified loads. Minimum wire size shall be #10 AWG. The installed wire size shall have a nominal ampacity rating of 125% of that required or specified when four or CONDUCTORS AND CONNECTORS VLK Architects, 2007 26 0519 - 3 2740.00 CREEKVIEW ELEMENTARY SCHOOL COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX more current carrying conductors are installed in a single raceway. Neutral conductors shall be considered a current carrying conductor in all non -linear loaded circuits as required by the NEC. Maximum number of current carrying conductors in any conduit shall not exceed eight. 19. When more than three (3) phase conductors are size #10 AWG, they shall be installed in a one -inch conduit. 20. Neatly train and lace wiring inside boxes, equipment and panelboards. 21. Clean conductor surfaces before installing lugs and connectors. 22. Make splices, taps and terminations to carry full ampacity of conductors with no perceptible temperature rise. 23. Provide stranded conductors connected with mechanical type copper connecting lugs correctly sized to the diameter of the bare conductors. Run mains and feeders their entire length in continuous pieces without splices or joints. Provide the same size wire form the panelboard to last outlet on circuit. Color code conductors. 24. Do not install a pull string in conduits containing conductors. 25. Conductors shall be the same color from load side of overcurrent protection device to outlet or utilization equipment. 26. Spare conductors shall not be installed in any conduit, gutter, raceway, panel or enclosure unless noted otherwise. D. Identification: Label each phase conductor in each junction box with corresponding circuit number, using self-adhesive wire markers. 3.02 TESTING: A. Pre-Energization Check: Before energizing, check cable and conductors for circuit continuity and short circuits. Correct malfunctions. B. Service Entrance and Feeder Insulation Resistance Test: Each main service entrance conductor and each feeder conductor shall have its insulation resistance tested after the installation is complete except for connection at its source and point of termination. 1. Make tests using a Biddle Megger or equivalent test instrument at a voltage of not less than 1000 VDC. Measure resistance from conductor to conductor, conductor to neutral (if present) and from conductor to ground. Insulation resistance shall not be less than the following: Wire Size Insulation A( WG) Resistance (Ohms) #8 250 K #6 through #2 100 K #1 through #4/0 50 K Larger than #4/0 25 K 2. Conductors that do not meet or exceed the insulation resistance values listed above shall be removed, replaced, and retested. C. Submittals: Contractor shall furnish instruments and personnel required for tests. Submit 4 copies of certified test results to Architect for review. Test reports shall include conductor tested, date and time of test, relative humidity, temperature, and weather conditions. D. Voltage and Current Values: The voltage and current in each conductor shall be measured and recorded after connections have been made and the conductor is under load. CONDUCTORS AND CONNECTORS VLK Architects, 2007 26 0519 - 4 2740.00 CREEKVIEW ELEMENTARY SCHOOL COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX DC HIGH VOLTAGE CABLE TEST REPORT (Specification Paragraph 3.2, C) Date Contract and Work Location: _ Contract (Project) No.: _ Circuit Identification: _ (Dwg., Title, Number and Ckt. Number) Test Equipment: (Make, Model, Serial No., Etc.) Applied Test Voltage Normal Oper. Voltage Cable Installation: New Used (Date) (No. Years) Cable Size AWG Cable Length Ft. Temperature Humidity TEST DATA - RESISTANCE IN KILO OHMS K-OHMS 0 z 0 U A-N B-N C-N A-G B-G C-G A-B B-C A-C 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 END OF SECTION CONDUCTORS AND CONNECTORS VLK Architects, 2007 26 0519 - 5 2740.00 CREEKVIEW ELEMENTARY SCHOOL COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX SECTION 26 0520 - STEEL METAL CLAD CABLES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. At the Contractor's option, steel metal clad (MC) cables may be utilized for single circuit branch circuit wiring downstream of the home run outlet or junction box in concealed, indoor areas as defined in NEC 330, subject to acceptance by the State and Local Codes. - 1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. Metal Clad Cable shall be constructed in strict accordance with Underwriter's Laboratories, Inc., Standard for Metal Clad Cables, UL 1569. The cable shall bear the UL label and the manufacturer's "E" number. B. Further, the product shall have passed UL test procedure 1479, Through Penetration Fire Rating, and meet NEC 330.22(C) Environmental Air Handling Spaces. 1.03 QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this Section with minimum fifteen years experience. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS — METAL CLAD A. AFC 2.02 GENERAL A. Steel Construction B. Minimum conductor size shall be #12 AWG. C. All MC cable shall have an insulated ground conductor. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install MC cable and fittings only for single circuit branch circuits, downstream of hone run outlet or junction box. Install MC Cable and fittings in accordance with local codes and applicable sections of the NECA "Standard of Installation" in concealed locations only. MC cable shall not be used in any kitchen or food preparation areas, natatoriums, or vocational shop areas. 1. Fasten MC cable supports to building structure and surfaces. 2. Do not support MC Cable with wire or perforated pipe straps. Remove wire used for temporary supports. 3. Do not attach MC Cable to ceiling support wires. 4. Arrange MC Cable to maintain head room and present neat appearance. 5. Maintain 12-inch clearance between MC Cable and surfaces with temperatures exceeding 104 degrees F. STEEL METAL CLAD CABLES VLK Architects, 2007 26 0520 - 1 2740.00 CREEKVIEW ELEMENTARY SCHOOL COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX 6. Cut MC Cable square using manufacturer recommended tools and methods; de - burr cut ends. 7. Ground and bond MC Cable as required. 8. Identify MC Cable as required. 9. Route all MC Cable perpendicular or parallel to building lines. B. Group related MC Cable; support using conduit rack or cable tray. Construct rack using steel channel; provide space on each for 25 percent additional conduits. C. Securely fasten MC Cable, supports and boxes, to ceiling, walls, with Rawl Plugs or approved equal anchors. Use lead cinch anchors or pressed anchors. Use only cadmium plated or galvanized bolts, screws. Plastic anchors and lead anchors shall not be used for overhead applications. D. Provide separate MC Cables for each of the following when specified, indicated or required: 1. 120/208 volt circuits 2. 277/480 volt circuits E. Do not install MC Cable in or below concrete slabs, outdoors, at wet or damp locations, or in exposed areas. F. In suspended ceilings, support conduit runs from the structure, not the ceiling system construction. 1. Do not support from structural bridging. 2. Do not support from metal roof deck. G. Hold horizontal and vertical MC Cables as close as possible to walls, ceilings and other elements of the building construction. H. Install all MC Cable perpendicular or parallel to building lines in the most direct, neat and workmanlike manner. 1. Install MC Cable to conserve building space and not obstruct equipment service space or interfere with use of space. MC Cable shall not be routed on floors, paved areas or grade. Run MC Cable to avoid proximity to heat producing equipment, piping, and flues, keeping a minimum of 8-inches clear. J. Conceal MC Cable in all areas. MC Cable can be exposed in mechanical and electrical rooms for lighting circuits only. K. Support MC Cable on galvanized channel, using compatible galvanized fittings (bolts, beam clamps, and similar items), and galvanized threaded rod pendants at each end of channel and secure raceway to channel and channel to structure. Where rod pendants are not used, channel supports are to be secured to structure at each end. MC Cable supports are to be secured to structure using washers, lock washers, nuts and bolts or rod pendants (use of toggle bolt "wings" are not acceptable. Support single MC Cable runs using a properly sized galvanized conduit hanger with galvanized closure bolt and nut and threaded rod. Raceway support system materials shall be galvanized and manufactured by Kindorf, Unistrut, Superstrut, Caddy, or Spring Steel Fasteners, Inc. Do not support MC Cable from structural bridging or fire rated ceiling system. Do not support more than one MC Cable from a single all -thread rod support. Channel supports shall have cut ends filed smooth. STEEL METAL CLAD CABLES VLK Architects, 2007 26 0520 - 2 2740.00 CREEKVIEW ELEMENTARY SCHOOL COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX L. MC Cable for lighting fixture connection shall be supported from the structure with #13 AWG galvanized iron wire pendants and "Caddy clips". MC Cable for lighting fixture connection can be supported from the ceiling suspension system using "Caddy clips". Do not support MC Cable from structural bridging. END OF SECTION STEEL METAL CLAD CABLES VLK Architects, 2007 26 0520 - 3 2740.00 CREEKVIEW ELEMENTARY SCHOOL COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX SECTION 26 0526 - ELECTRICAL GROUNDING PART 1-GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Grounding shall conform to the requirements of: 1. National Electrical Code. 2. Governing local codes. 3. All Local Utility Companies B. Ground effectively and permanently. 1. Neutral conductor at the main service disconnect and other separately derived systems. 2. All conduit systems. 3. All electrical equipment and related current carrying supports or structures. 4. All metal piping systems. 5. All building structural metal frames. 6. All telephone/voice/video/CATV/data utilities 1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ANSI/IEEE Standard 142 - "Recommended Practice for Grounding of Industrial and Commercial Power Systems." B. ANSI/UL 467 - "Safety Standard for Grounding and Bonding Equipment." C. Article 250 of the NEC (NFPA 70) for grounding. D. NECA — Standard of Installation E. NETA ATS — Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electrical Power Distribution Equipment and Systems F. EIA / TIA 607 PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Copperweld B. Cadweld C. Burndy D. O. Z Gedney 2.02 GROUNDING ELECTRODES A. Driven Rod Electrode 1. 3/4" x 10'-0" copper clad grounding electrode. 2. UL listed. 3. Approved thermal fusion connector methods (exothermic). B. Metal Frame of Building. C. Foundation concrete encased rebar. ELECTRICAL GROUNDING VLK Architects, 2007 26 0526 - 1 2740.00 CREEKVIEW ELEMENTARY SCHOOL COLLEGE STATION ISO COLLEGE STATION, TX 2.03 MATERIALS AND COMPONENTS A. Data/Voice communications closet ground bar: 1. MDF closets/head end rooms: Erico Cadweld #B544A027 ground bar. 2. IDF closets, Erico Cadweld #B542A004 ground bar. B. Heavy-duty, bolt type, copper alloy or bronze for grounding and bonding applications, in configurations required for particular installation. C. Reference other sections of this specifications for materials specified there. 2.04 EXOTHERMIC CONNECTIONS A. Exothermic type for underground and structural steel; Cadweld B. Exothermic materials, accessories, and tools for preparing and making permanent field connections between grounding system components. 2.05 WIRE A. Stranded, copper cable B. Foundation Electrodes: 2/0 AWG C. Grounding Electrode Conductor: Size to meet NFPA 70 requirements PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 GROUNDING AND BONDING A. In the service equipment, provide a separate (dedicated) ground bus. 1. Bond the ground bus with copper bus bar or cable, of equal or greater current carrying capacity of the service grounding conductor, to the neutral bar. 2. Resistance of neutral to ground shall not exceed 10 ohms. 3. Connect the electric service grounding electrode conductors to the incoming metal water pipe system (when available, using a suitable ground clamp) and to a supplemental electrode such as a ground rod or ground loop. 4. Provide grounding and bonding at the power company's metering equipment. 5. Provide access and cover for access to the ground grid and removable connections for testing the system. B. Connect the grounding electrode conductor between the ground bus and the grounding electrode system. 1. In rigid PVC conduit. 2. Provide thermo fusion connection for each driven ground electrode. a. Access cover top shall be flush with finish grade or floor. 3. The total ground resistance shall not exceed 10 ohms for service entrance grounds and 25 ohms for equipment grounds. a. Where this condition cannot be obtained with one electrode, install a longer electrode, deep -driven sectional electrodes, or additional grounding electrodes until the required ground resistance is obtained. b. The minimum distance between driven ground rod electrodes shall be 10'. C. Provide an insulated equipment grounding conductor inside all conduits, raceways, surface raceways, gutters and wireways. The ground wire shall be bonded to each box to ELECTRICAL GROUNDING VLK Architects, 2007 26 0526 2 2740.00 CREEKVIEW ELEMENTARY SCHOOL COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX suitable lug, bus, or bushing. All bonding jumpers shall be routed inside conduit or raceway. D. Provide an insulated isolated equipment grounding conductor in addition to the insulated equipment grounding conductor for all isolated grounding feeders, branch circuits, outlets and isolated grounding receptacles. E. Provide all conduit terminating in switchgear, transformers, switchboards, panelboards and voice/data outlets with grounding bushings, where required, and ground wire extended to ground bus in equipment. F. Main bus and building grounding electrode conductor installation shall be witnessed by the Architect / Engineer. G. Install rod electrodes as indicated. Install additional rod electrodes as required to achieve specified resistance to ground. H. Provide bonding to meet Regulatory Requirements. Interface with lightning protection system when lightning protection system is specified. Locate and install anchors, fasteners, and supports in accordance with NECA "Standard of Installation". K. Do not fasten supports to pipes, ducts, mechanical equipment, or conduit. L. Do not use spring steel clips and clamps. M. Do not use powder -actuated anchors. N. Do not drill or cut structural members. O. Do not use compression or mechanical connectors underground. 3.02 METAL FRAME OF BUILDING OR STRUCTURE A. Effectively ground the building steel or structure per NEC 250-52 (2). 3.03 UFER GROUND A. Provide a UFER ground at bottom of building slab per NEC 250.52 (3). 3.04 MISCELLANEOUS REQUIREMENTS A. Continuity of the building equipment grounding system shall be maintained throughout the project. Equipment grounding jumpers shall be installed across conduit expansion fittings, liquid -tight flexible metal and flexible metal conduit, light fixture pigtails in excess of 6', and other non -electrically continuous raceway fittings. B. Equipment grounding conductors and grounding electrode conductor shall be stranded copper conductors and run in a suitable raceway. Grounding conductors and grounding electrode conductor shall be continuous, without joints or splices over their entire length, except as allowed by NFPA 70/NEC. C. For separately derived alternating current system grounds, bond the case and neutral of each transformer secondary winding directly to the nearest available effectively grounded structural metal member as required in NEC 250. ELECTRICAL GROUNDING VLK Architects, 2007 26 0526 - 3 2740.00 CREEKVIEW ELEMENTARY SCHOOL COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX D. Exterior Electrical Equipment Racks: 1. Provide driven ground electrode. E. Technology/Data/Voice Communications, CATV, CCTV, and MATV Equipment Grounding: Provide grounding electrode conductor from the communications service equipment to the building grounding system as required. Provide #6 ground conductor from telephone/voice/CATV/data company demarcation point to building electrical service entrance ground electrode connection and as required by all local utility companies. 1. MDF Closets Telecommunications Main Ground Bar (TMGB): Provide Erico Cadweld #B544A027 ground bar, wall mounted to the telecommunications plywood backboard. Provide one #3 AWG insulated ground conductor from ground bar to building steel. Provide #2/0 AWG insulated ground conductor to the building electrical service ground at the main electrical service disconnect. 2. IDF Closets Telecommunications Ground Bar (TGB): Provide Erico Cadweld #B542A004 ground bar mounted to the telecommunications plywood backboard. Provide one #6 AWG insulated ground conductor from ground bar to building steel and to ground bus of nearest electrical panelboard or switchboard. 3. Provide #2/0 AWG insulated ground conductor between each TMGB and all TGBs. 4. Provide #2/0 AWG insulated ground conductor from TMGB to electrical service ground bus at main electrical service switch. 5. Bond each equipment rack with #6 AWG insulated ground conductor to the TMGB/TGB. 6. Route TMGB — TGB ground conductor using the shortest route practical with long radius curves. F. Ground lighting fixture bodies to the conduit grounding system. G. Receptacles shall require a ground wire bonded to the conduit ground system, except where and insulated/isolated grounding receptacle or outlet is specified. H. Motor Frames: Ground the frame of each motor with a properly sized separate ground wire around flexible conduit. Ground connections to building steel, grounding electrodes and all underground connections shall be by thermal fusion (exothermic). Provide OZ Type "BJ" bonding jumper at all expansion joints, points of electrical discontinuity or connections in conduit where firm mechanical bond is not possible, such as flexible connections, insulating couplings, etc. K. Ground each lighting and power panelboard by connecting the grounding conductors to the grounding stud. L. Ground each secondary dry -type transformer to the ground bus of the primary side panelboard. Provide a bonding jumper between the ground stud and the neutral. Ground transformer ground stud to ground loop if a ground loop is installed or the nearest structural steel member. M. Bond every item of equipment served by the electrical system to the building equipment ground system. This includes switchboards, panelboards, disconnect switches, receptacles, cable trays controls, fans, air handing units, pumps and flexible duct connections. N. Ground each light pole. ELECTRICAL GROUNDING VLK Architects, 2007 26 0526 - 4 2740.00 CREEKVIEW ELEMENTARY SCHOOL COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX 3.06 MANHOLE AND/OR PULL BOX GROUNDING A. Provide a driven ground rod and ground bond loop in each power and telephone manhole or pull box. Bond cable racks and medium voltage cable shields at splices and terminations, ductbank conduit ground bushings and all other metal components in manholes or pull box to the ground loop. 3.07 ISOLATED GROUND A. Isolated Grounding Systems: Use insulated equipment grounding conductor and connect to grounding electrode system. 3.08 COORDINATION A. General: Coordinate installation of grounding connections for equipment with equipment installation work. 3.09 TESTING A. Ground Resistance Test: Perform a ground resistance test for comparison to future inspection and testing data by the Owner. Test shall be performed using a Biddle Megger Earth Tester or equivalent test instrument. The test shall not be performed within 48 hours after the last rainfall. 1. Inspect and test in accordance with NETA ATS except Section 4 2. Grounding and Bonding: Perform inspections and tests listed in NETA ATS, Section 7.13 B. Submittals: Furnish instruments and personnel required for tests. Personnel shall be trained in all aspects of testing grounding systems and shall be formally trained on using all test equipment required. Submit 2 copies of certified test results for Owner's record and submit 4 copies of certified test results to Architect / Engineer for review. Test reports shall include date and time of tests, relative humidity, temperature, and weather conditions. END OF SECTION ELECTRICAL GROUNDING VLK Architects, 2007 26 0526 - 5 2740.00 CREEKVIEW ELEMENTARY SCHOOL COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX SECTION 26 0533.01 - ELECTRICAL FLOOR BOXES AND FITTINGS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Provide electrical floor box and fitting work as required, scheduled, indicated, and specified. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE_ A. UL Label: Electrical boxes and fittings shall be UL labeled. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Thomas & Betts, Memphis, TN B. Hubbell C. Wiremold 2.02 MATERIALS - FLOOR BOXES A. Floor boxes used in floors with waterproof membranes shall be cast iron, painted inside and out with weatherproof paint intended for use on metal as indicated on the plans. B. Floor boxes used in floors without waterproof membranes shall be formed steel with zinc or cadmium plate at least .0005" thick on the outside and .00015" thick on the inside as indicated on the plans. C. Construction shall be as required by UL 514A. D. Carpet or the frame shall be brass. E. Cover assembly shall protect against the ingress of water or foreign material with a gasket and shall be UL listed as mop tight. F. Thomas & Betts 640 / 840 Series 2.03 GENERAL DESIGN - FLOOR BOXES A. Shall deliver electric power from receptacles installed at the surface of the floor or from service fittings. B. Telephone/data cable without interference from electric power delivery. C. Cubic inch capacity shall be as required. D. Boxes shall accept conduit sizes as required. E. Shall be listed by UL ELECTRICAL FLOOR BOXES AND FITTINGS VLK Architects, 2007 26 0533.01 -1 2740.00 CREEKVIEW ELEMENTARY SCHOOL COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX 2.04 MATERIALS - FLOOR BOXES - CONCEALED SERVICE A. Shall be electro-galvanized, 14 gauge sheet steel except at waterproof membrane floors where they shall be cast iron. B. Construction shall be as required by UL 514A. C. Carpet frame shall be nylon UL Recognized Component QMFZ2. D. Hinged outer cover shall be reinforced with a 5/32" steel plate. E. Series 665SC/667SC as manufactured by Thomas & Betts 2.05 GENERAL DESIGN - FLOOR BOXES - CONCEALED SERVICE A. Shall deliver electric power from duplex receptacles installed below the surface of the floor. B. Shall deliver telephone or data cable without interference from the electric power delivery C. Shall protect delivery of both services by a hinged cover with a retractable opening and foam plastic dust seal D. Hinged cover shall accept carpet or tile to match floor covering and be 180 degrees reversible. E. Shall accept conduit sizes up to 1 -1 /4 inches F. Box shall be listed by UL G. When hinged cover is closed and no services in place, device shall have no obstructions above surface of floor. 2.06 GENERAL DESIGN - FIRE RATED, POKE -THROUGH SERVICE FITTINGS A. Shall be UL classified for use in up to four hour rated concrete floors, and up to three hour rated steel and concrete floors. B. Shall be UL listed for use with power and low voltage in a single service fitting and shall protect against ingress of water or foreign material with a neoprene gasket at base of fitting. C. Shall be installed in a single core drilled hole D. Shall permit use with "H" cut opening in carpet so carpet can be restored if position is vacated E. Shall have interchangeable service fitting accessories including hinged guard and low voltage communication inserts F. Service fitting head shall be bronze. G. Low voltage channel shall accept one 50 pair, 24 AWG cable through communication raceway. H. Shall be the Poke-Thru Series as offered by Thomas & Betts — FPT Series ELECTRICAL FLOOR BOXES AND FITTINGS VLK Architects, 2007 26 0533.01 -2 2740.00 CREEKVIEW ELEMENTARY SCHOOL COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX 2.07 MATERIALS - SERVICE FITTING HEADS A. Shall be brushed aluminum 2.08 GENERAL DESIGN - SERVICE FITTINGS A. Shall deliver electrical power from receptacles as designated on the plans B. Shall deliver telephone/data through precut bushed opening C. Shall be furnished standard with required receptacles D. Shall be furnished standard with conduit nipple for direct screw threading into T&B cover assembly E. Shall be listed by UL PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. Locate position for floor boxes and runs of conduit as shown on the plans, or as required. Coordinate with the Architect for dimensional locations of floor boxes prior to cutting or pouring slab. B. Select appropriate size of floor boxes, poke -through, or multiple services floor boxes for quantity of wiring devices indicated and as recommended by manufacturer. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Position floor boxes and conduit runs B. After concrete pour, pull wires and install devices according to manufacturer's recommendations. C. Activate in accordance with the National Electrical Code. D. Coordinate with floor covering contractor to complete installation. E. Core drill openings for poke -through service fitting and install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 1. Minimum spacing of 2' on center and not more than one unit per each 65 square feet of floor area in each span; required by Fire Resistance Directory. END OF SECTION ELECTRICAL FLOOR BOXES AND FITTINGS VLK Architects, 2007 26 0533.01 -3 2740.00 CREEKVIEW ELEMENTARY SCHOOL COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX SECTION 26 0533 - CONDUIT SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Furnish and install a complete system of electrical conduits and fittings. 1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. National Electrical Code. B. Local codes and ordinances. C. UL. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Raceways 1. Allied, Triangle, Carlon, Wheatland, Can -Tex, Perma-cote, Certain -Teed, Anamet, Inc., Electri-Flex Co. B. Fittings 1. Appleton, Crouse Hinds, Steel City, O.Z. Gedney, Carlon, Raco, Inc. 2.02 GENERAL A. The minimum conduit size shall be 3/4-inch. B. The minimum conduit size for TechnologyNoice/Data/Video shall be 1-1/4 inch. C. The minimum conduit size for flexible metallic conduit for tap connections to light fixtures shall be inch. D. Electrical nonmetallic tubing, flexible polyethylene or PVC tubing shall not be used on this project. E. BX and AC cable shall not be used on this project. F. PVC elbows and fittings, except for threaded/slip-on/glue or straight conduit slip-on / glue fittings, shall not be used on this project. G. Intermediate metal conduit (IMC) shall not be used on this project. 2.03 RIGID STEEL CONDUIT A. UL labeled, Schedule 40. 1. Mild steel pipe. 2. Zinc coated inside and out. 3. Threaded ends 4. Insulated bushings CONDUIT SYSTEMS VLK Architects, 2007 26 0533 - 1 2740.00 CREEKVIEW ELEMENTARY SCHOOL COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX B. Fittings shall meet the same requirements as rigid steel conduits. 1. UL labeled. 2. Threaded fittings 2.04 ELECTRICAL METALLIC TUBING (EMT) A. UL labeled, standard weight. 1. Cold rolled steel tubing. 2. Zinc coated inside and out. B. Fittings shall meet the same requirements as EMT conduits. 1. UL labeled 2. Set Screw Fittings 3. Steel fittings with setscrews with lock nuts on threaded ends, no snap locks. 4. Cast metal fittings are not approved. 5. Uni-couple type connectors are not approved. 6. Split ring, anti -short bushings are not approved. 7. Insulated throat connectors 2.05 PVC COATED RIGID STEEL WITH URETHANE INTERIOR COATING A. UL labeled, Schedule 40 zinc coated with 40 mil thick PVC exterior coating, 2 mil thick urethane interior and thread coating, threaded ends. B. Threaded fittings shall meet the same requirements as rigid steel conduits, with PVC exterior coating, urethane interior coating and UL label. C. Insulated bushings D. Touch-up compounds for interior urethane and exterior. E. Manufacturer: Perma-cote 2.06 FLEXIBLE CONDUIT A. Steel flexible metallic conduit. 1. Zinc coated inside and out. 2. 18-inches minimum length, 36-inches maximum length B. Steel flexible metallic conduit for tap connections to light fixtures: 1. 18 inches minimum length, 6 feet maximum length. C. Liquid tight flexible steel conduit. 1. Type L.A. - Grounded - UL Approved. 2. 18-inches minimum length, 24-inches maximum length 2.07 PVC CONDUIT A. UL labeled Schedule 40 B. PVC fittings and solvent welded joints. C. Acceptable PVC condulet manufacturer: Cantex CONDUIT SYSTEMS VLK Architects, 2007 26 0533 - 2 2740.00 CREEKVIEW ELEMENTARY SCHOOL COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX 2.08 CONDULETS AND CONDUIT BODIES A. UL Labeled B. Approved Manufacturer 1. Appleton 2.09 ROOF MOUNTED CONDUIT AND BOX SUPPORTS A. Conduit supports and pads suitable for direct sunlight, conduit size, weight, quantity and roof system with unistrut supports and accessories. Conduit supports shall allow for conduit expansion and contraction.. B. Approved Manufacturer: 1. Portable Pipe Hangers 2. Cooper B-Line C-Port 3. Miro Industries Models 2.5, 2.5-5, 2.5-AH, 12-AH, 16-AH 2.10 ALUMINUM CONDUIT A. UL Labeled B. Fittings shall meet the same requirements of aluminum conduits 1. UL Labeled PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install electrical conduits and fittings for all wiring of any type unless specifically specified or instructed to do otherwise. Install conduits and fittings in accordance with local codes and applicable sections of the NECA "Standard of Installation", concealed where possible. 1. Fasten conduit supports to building structure and surfaces. 2. Arrange supports to prevent misalignment during wiring installation. 3. Do not support conduit with wire or perforated pipe straps. Remove wire used for temporary supports. 4. Do not attach conduit to ceiling support wires. 5. Arrange conduit to maintain head room and present neat appearance. 6. Maintain 12-inch clearance between conduit and surfaces with temperatures exceeding 104 degrees F. 7. Cut conduit square using saw or pipe cutter; de -burr cut ends. 8. Bring conduit to shoulder of fittings; fasten securely. 9. Use conduit hubs to fasten conduit to sides and tops of electrical equipment, device, box, gutter, wireway, disconnect, etc. in damp and wet locations. 10. Use suitable caps to protect installed conduit against entrance of dirt and moisture. 11. Ground and bond conduit as required. 12. Identify conduit as required. 13. Route all conduits perpendicular or parallel to building lines. 14. Do not use no -thread couplings and connectors for galvanized steel, PVC coated galvanized steel, or aluminum rigid conduit. B. Group related conduits; support using conduit rack. Construct rack using steel channel; provide space on each for 25 percent additional conduits. CONDUIT SYSTEMS VLK Architects, 2007 26 0533 - 3 2740.00 CREEKVIEW ELEMENTARY SCHOOL COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX C. In areas where raceway systems are exposed and acoustical or thermal insulating material is to be installed on walls, partitions, and ceilings, raceways shall be blocked out proper distance to allow insulating material to pass without cutting or fitting. Also provide Kindorf galvanized steel channels to serve as standoffs for panels, cabinets and gutters. D. Securely fasten conduits, supports and boxes, to ceiling, walls, with Rawl Plugs or approved equal anchors. Use lead cinch anchors or pressed anchors. Use only cadmium plated or galvanized bolts, screws. Plastic anchors and lead anchors shall not be used for overhead applications. E. Provide separate raceway systems for each of the following when specified, indicated or required: 1. 120/208 volt circuits 2. 277/480 volt circuits 3. Emergency a. Life safety branch b. Critical branch C. Equipment branch 4. Voice/Data 5. Sound reinforcement / Theatrical and Architectural Dimming Controls 6. MATV/CATV 7. Security CCTV 8. Security System 9. Communications / PA Systems / Sound System Line Input and Speakers 10. Fire Alarm F. Unless shown otherwise, do not install conduit in or below concrete slabs. G. Unless shown otherwise, do not install conduit horizontally in concrete slabs. H. Roof penetrations shall be made in adequate time to allow the roofing installer to make proper flashing. Conduit for equipment mounted on roof curbs shall be routed through the roof curb. Conduit, gutters, pull boxes, junction boxes, etc. shall not be routed on roof unless specified otherwise. Where specifically indicated to be routed or mounted on the roof, supports shall be as specified, as recommended by roofing manufacturer and roof support manufacturer and as required by NEC. Place supports every five feet along conduit run and within 3 feet of all bends, condulets, and junction boxes. Provide roofing pad under stands at directed by Architect and as recommended by roofing manufacturer and roof support manufacturer. Provide additional unistrut supports and accessories as required. PVC coated conduit shall have all nicks and cuts to the protective coating repaired using manufacturer's approved touch-up material as recommended by manufacturer. Provide a minimum two -wraps of 3M-50 type over touch-up. Conduit terminations at switchgear, pull boxes, outlet boxes, stub -up, and stub -outs, or where wire size is #4 or larger: 1. Provide insulated throat connectors for EMT conduits. 2. Provide insulated bushing on all rigid conduit terminations. 3. Provide locknuts inside and outside of all boxes and enclosures. 4. Provide threaded type plastic bushing at all boxes and enclosures CONDUIT SYSTEMS VLK Architects, 2007 26 0533 - 4 2740.00 CREEKVIEW ELEMENTARY SCHOOL COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX K. In suspended ceilings, support conduit runs from the structure, not the ceiling system construction. 1. Do not support from structural bridging. 2. Do not support from metal roof deck. L. Completely install each conduit run prior to pulling conductors. All boxes are to be accessible after completion of construction. M. All conduits must be kept dry and free of water or debris with approved pipe plugs or caps. Cap or plug conduit ends prior to concrete pours. N. Ream ends of conduits after cutting and application of cutting die to remove rough edges. O. Hold horizontal and vertical conduits as close as possible to walls, ceilings and other elements of the building construction. P. Install all conduits perpendicular or parallel to building lines in the most direct, neat and workmanlike manner. 1. Install conduits to conserve building space and not obstruct equipment service space or interfere with use of space. Conduit shall not be routed on floors, paved areas or grade. 2. Where a piece of equipment is wired from a switch or box on adjacent wall, the wiring shall go up the wall from the box, across at or near the ceiling, and back down to the equipment. Wiring shall not block the walkway between wall and equipment. 3. Horizontal runs of conduit on exposed walls shall be kept to a minimum. 4. Conduit for mechanical/plumbing equipment installed outdoors shall be routed with the associated mechanical/plumbing pipe support rack system where practical, coordinate with Division 23. 5. Conduits installed in public areas, not concealed by architectural ceilings, shall be supported by galvanized steel channel racks tight to bottom of roof deck or floor deck. Conduits shall be grouped for neat workman -like appearance. Q. Install expansion and deflection fittings and bonding jumpers on straight runs which exceed 200-feet, on center, and at 200-feet maximum, on center, on straight runs which exceed 400-feet, and where conduits cross building expansion joints. R. Provide grounding bushings at concentric/eccentric knockouts or where reducing washers are used. S. Run conduit to avoid proximity to heat producing equipment, piping, and flues, keeping a minimum of 8-inches clear. T. Install conduit as a complete system, without conductors, continuous from outlet to outlet and from fitting to fitting. Make up threaded joints of conduit carefully in a manner to ensure a tight joint. Fasten the entire conduit system into position. A run of conduit between outlet and outlet, between fitting and fitting, or between outlet and fitting shall not contain more than the equivalent of four quarter bends, including those bends located immediately at the outlet or fitting. U. Conceal conduit systems in finished areas. Conduit can be exposed in mechanical and electrical rooms and where otherwise shown or indicated only. Run the conduit parallel and perpendicular to the structural features of the building and support with malleable iron conduit clamps at intervals as required by NEC or on conduit racks, neatly racked and bent in a smooth radius at corners. CONDUIT SYSTEMS VLK Architects, 2007 26 0533 - 5 2740.00 CREEKVIEW ELEMENTARY SCHOOL COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX V. Conduit bends shall be factory elbows or shall be bent using equipment specifically designed to bend conduit of the type used to maintain the conduit's UL listing. W. Support conduit on galvanized channel, using compatible galvanized fittings (bolts, beam clamps, and similar items), and galvanized threaded rod pendants at each end of channel and secure raceway to channel and channel to structure. Where rod pendants are not used, channel supports are to be secured to structure at each end. Conduit supports are to be secured to structure using washers, lock washers, nuts and bolts or rod pendants (use of toggle bolt "wings" are not acceptable. Support single conduit runs using a properly sized galvanized conduit hanger with galvanized closure bolt and nut and threaded rod. Raceway support system materials shall be galvanized and manufactured by Kindorf, Unistrut, Superstrut, Caddy, or Spring Steel Fasteners, Inc. Provide chrome or nickel -plated escutcheon plates on conduit passing through walls and ceilings in finished areas. Do not support conduit from structural bridging or fire rated ceiling system. Do not support more than one conduit from a single all -thread rod support. Provide electrical insulating sleeve or wrapping for aluminum conduit supported by zinc coated supports or fasteners. Channel supports shall have cut ends filed smooth. When installed outside of the building, or in areas subject to moisture, the cut ends shall be painted with ZRC galvanized paint or equivalent. X. Flexible conduit for lighting fixture connection shall be supported from the structure with #13 AWG galvanized iron wire pendants and "Caddy clips". Do not support conduit from structural bridging. Flexible conduit shall not be longer than 6 feet and shall contain an equipment grounding conductor. Y. Terminate all motor connection conduits in mechanical room spaces with a floor pedestal and with "Tee" conduit at motor outlet height for flexible conduit. Z. Where conduit is not embedded in concrete or masonry, conduit shall be firmly secured by approved clamps, half -straps or hangers. Tie wire and short pieces of conduit used as supports and or hangers are not approved. AA. Where "LB" condulets are used, 2-inches and larger shall be type "LBD". BB. No more than 12 conduits containing branch circuits may be installed in junction boxes, pull boxes or gutters. CC. "Daisy Chaining" light fixtures installed for lay -in ceiling areas is not allowed. Each light fixture shall have it's own fixture whip form junction box. The only exception being light fixtures installed end to end using chase nipples between them, or light fixtures recessed in non -accessible ceilings. DD. Flexible metal conduit and liquid tight flexible metal conduit shall only be used for final connections from junction box to equipment, light fixtures, power poles, etc. They are not to be used in lieu of conduit runs. They shall not be used for wall or roof penetrations unless they are installed in a conduit sleeve at least one size larger than the OD of the flexible conduit. EE. Where 3-1/2-inch conduit is specified and the required or specified material is Schedule 80 PVC, provide 4-inch conduit. CONDUIT SYSTEMS VLK Architects, 2007 26 0533 - 6 2740.00 CREEKVIEW ELEMENTARY SCHOOL COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX 3.02 CONDUITS A. Conduit above grade indoors: 1. Concealed Conduits: EMT with set screw fittings 2. Exposed conduits: a. Below nine feet AFF where not directly attached and against building walls, ceiling, or structure: Rigid galvanized conduit. b. Where subject to physical damage: Rigid galvanized conduit. C. Wet locations: PVC coated galvanized rigid steel d. Damp Locations: EMT with steel compression fittings e. Exposed conduits in mechanical rooms shall be rigid galvanized steel when installed below four feet above finished floor. B. Conduit run outside the building underground; conduit where indicated beneath the building slab: 1. PVC Coated Galvanized rigid steel or PVC. a. PVC conduit and fittings shall be used only for straight horizontal runs. Provide PVC coated rigid galvanized steel conduit and fittings with urethane interior coating at all changes in direction and at all vertical runs to 18 inches above finished floor elevation. For slab penetrations, provide continuous PVC coated rigid galvanized steel conduit and fittings with urethane interior coating from change in direction to 18 inches above finished floor elevation. b. Change in direction for all underground conduit shall be with long sweep radius. C. Conduit for all floor boxes shall be routed below building slab from floor box to nearest column, wall, or as indicated. d. Conduits shall not be routed in building slab. 2. Encase all underground conduits in concrete. a. Concrete shall be dyed red throughout with a ratio of 10 pounds of dye per yard of concrete. b. Provide minimum 3-inch concrete encasement around conduits. C. Provide conduit spacers for parallel branch/feeder conduits. d. When prior written approval from Owner and Architect to omit concrete encasement of conduits below building slab is given, conduits either specified or approved in writing to be routed under building slab without concrete encasement for electrical branch circuits or voice / data / video / communications horizontal drops or outlets shall be installed 18 inches below finished floor and on select fill. All other conduits, including but not limited to electrical feeders, voice / data / video / communications vertical, riser, tie, trunk, or service cable conduits shall be installed 48- inches below finished floor and on select fill. e. Use suitable manufactured separators and chairs installed 4 feet on centers. Band conduit together with suitable banding devices. Securely anchor conduit at each chair to prevent movement during concrete placement. 3. Install building voice / data / video / communications main service conduits and electrical service transformer primary and secondary conduits with top of concrete encasement minimum 48-inches below finished grade or pavement. Voice / data / video / communications conduits and electrical service primary conduits for utility owned electrical service transformers shall also comply with the respective utility company requirements and standards. All other underground conduits outside of building other than voice / data / video / communications main service conduits and electrical service transformer primary CONDUIT SYSTEMS VLK Architects, 2007 26 0533 - 7 2740.00 CREEKVIEW ELEMENTARY SCHOOL COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX and secondary conduits shall have top of concrete encasement at 36 inches minimum below finished grade or pavement. 4. Provide two "caution" plastic tapes at 6-inches and 18-inches below finished slab, grade, or pavement; identify as specified. 5. Provide magnetic locator tape at top of first compacted layer of backfill or concrete. 6. Changes in direction of underground conduit runs exceeding a total of 10 degrees, either vertical or horizontal, shall be accomplished by long sweep bends having a minimum radius of curvature of 5-feet and shall be separated by a minimum of 104eet straight section of conduit. 7. During construction, partially completed underground conduits shall be protected from the entrance of debris such as mud, sand, and dirt by means of conduit plugs. As each section of the underground conduit is completed, a testing mandrel with diameter 1/4-inch smaller than the conduit, shall be drawn through each conduit. A brush with stiff bristles shall be drawn through until conduit is clear of particles of earth, sand, or gravel. Conduit plugs shall then be installed. 8. Utility underground conduit for Utility Company cable shall be installed per Utility Company standards, and their specifications for this project. 9. Concrete shall be Portland Cement conforming to ASTM-C-150, Type 1, Type III or Type V if specified. Cement content shall be sufficient to product minimum strength of 2,500 PSI. 10. Contractor shall stake out routing and location of underground conduits using actual field measurements. He shall obtain approval of the Owner and Architect before beginning trenching and excavation. 11. Verify location and routing of all new and existing underground utilities with the Owner and Architect on the job site. Stake out these existing utilities so that they will not be damaged. Stake out new utilities to provide coordination with other trades and with new and existing utilities, easements, property lines, restricted land use areas, and right-of-ways. 12. Where long sweep turns are specified or required, change in direction of runs, either vertical or horizontal, shall be accomplished by long sweep bends having a minimum radius of curvature of 25 feet and a maximum arc of 22.5 degrees. The long sweep bends may be made up of one or more curbed PVC coated galvanized steel or straight PVC sections. Manufactured bends shall have the largest radius possible. C. Conduit installed above grade outdoors: 1. Galvanized rigid steel where subject to physical damage or where located less than four feet above finished floor. 2. Aluminum where not subject to physical damage and where located four feet above finished floor. D. Conduit shown in concrete floor or roof slab: 1. PVC Coated Galvanized Rigid steel. E. Conduits within 100 feet of cooling towers, at designated corrosive locations, or where conduit penetrates concrete slab. 1. PVC coated galvanized rigid steel F. Connections to equipment mounted on roof, rotating equipment, transformers, and kitchen or food processing equipment, or where flexible conduit is required outdoors. 1. Liquid tight flexible metal conduit (1/2 inch may be used for roof top supply / exhaust fans only) 2. Liquid tight flexible metal conduit 24-inch maximum length CONDUIT SYSTEMS VLK Architects, 2007 26 0533 - 8 2740.00 CREEKVIEW ELEMENTARY SCHOOL COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX G. Light fixture whips: 1. '/z-inch flexible conduit 2. Length not to exceed 6-feet 0-inches 3. Dedicated ground wire inside conduit 4. Light fixture whips shall not be supported from the ceiling suspension system. Provide support from structure with "Caddy" clips. Light fixture whips shall not rest on ceiling grid or tile. H. Conduits at Natatorium or therapeutic pool areas; conduit within 100 feet of Natatorium or therapeutic pool exhaust equipment openings; conduit at Natatorium or therapeutic pool HVAC, pumping and water treatment areas: 1. PVC coated galvanized rigid steel conduit, fittings and accessories Conduits in classified hazardous (Classified) locations: 1. Conduit fittings and seals UL listed for the classification 3.03 CONDUIT PENETRATIONS, SLEEVES AND ESCUTCHEONS A. Furnish sleeves for placing in construction for all conduit passing through concrete or masonry walls, partitions, beams, grade level other than floor, and roofs. A conduit sleeve shall be one size larger than the size of conduit, which it serves except where larger sizes are required for manufactured water, fire, or smoke stop fittings. 1. Sleeves set in concrete floor construction shall be minimum Schedule 40 galvanized steel. 2. Sleeves shall extend 3-inches above the finished floor. B. Sleeves in concrete or masonry walls shall be Schedule 40 galvanized steel. Sleeves shall be set flush with finished wall. C. Install manufactured UL listed water, fire, and smoke stop fittings, or caulk around conduit or cables in sleeves with sufficient UL listed fire safe insulation or foam to maintain wall or floor slab fire or smoke rating. Refer to Architecture drawings for locations of rated walls. D. Provide Linkseal Mechanical Seals around conduit penetrations through walls below grade. Provide a pull box to serve as a water stop inside wall penetration. Internally seal low voltage cabling conduit penetrations with waterproof caulking. E. Sleeves penetrating walls or grade beams below grade shall be Schedule 40 black steel pipe with 1/4-inch thick steel plate secured to the pipe with continuous fillet weld. The plate shall be located in the middle of the wall and shall be 2-inches wider all around than the sleeve that it encircles. The sleeve should extend a minimum of 24-inches on either side of the penetration. The entire assembly shall be hot -dipped galvanized after fabrication. F. Conduit passing through the housing on connected equipment shall pass through a cleanly cut hole protected with an approved grommet. Route conduit through roof openings, for piping and ductwork or through suitable roof jack, with pitch pocket. Coordinate location with roofing installation as required. G. Conduit passing through fire rated wall shall be sealed with Fire Stop. Route conduit to preserve fire resistance rating of partitions and other elements, using materials and methods under the provisions of Division 7. CONDUIT SYSTEMS VLK Architects, 2007 26 0533 - 9 2740.00 CREEKVIEW ELEMENTARY SCHOOL COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX 3.04 POWER UNDERGROUND CONDUIT SYSTEMS AND SERVICE ENTRANCE UNDERGROUND CONDUIT A. Power underground conduits and service entrance shall be of individual conduit encased in concrete. Unless shown otherwise, the type of conduit used shall not be mixed in any one underground conduit and shall be the size indicated on the drawings. The concrete encasement surrounding the underground conduit shall be rectangular in cross-section, having a minimum concrete thickness of 3-inches, except that conduit for 120V and above shall be separated from control and signal conduits by a minimum concrete thickness of 3-inches. Encasement concrete shall be tinted in red. B. During construction, partially completed underground conduits shall be protected from the entrance of debris such as mud, sand, and dirt by means of conduit plugs. As each section of the underground conduit is completed, a testing mandrel shall be drawn through until each conduit is clear of particles of earth, sand, or gravel. Conduit plugs shall then be installed. C. Furnish the exact dimensions and location of power underground conduit to be encased in time to prevent delay in the concrete work. D. Conduit for service entrance underground conduits shall be as indicated on the drawings E. Primary power underground conduit shall be installed in accordance with utility company standards and the utility company specifications for this project. 3.05 TECHNOLOGYNOICE/DATANIDEO COMMUNICATIONS, SIGNAL, LOW VOLTAGE AND EMPTY CONDUIT SYSTEM RACEWAYS A. Conduit shall be installed in accordance with the specified requirements for conduit and with the additional requirements that no length of run shall exceed 1004eet for 1 inch or smaller trade sizes, and shall not contain more than two 90-degree bends or the equivalent. Pull or junction boxes shall be installed to comply with these requirements. Provide plastic bushings at all conduit terminations. Provide a grounding bushing on each data and voice conduit. B. Conduits shall be installed from outlet box to above an accessible ceiling. All cables routed through open spaces (no -ceiling below roof deck or above floor deck) shall be routed in conduit. Technology, telephone, communication systems, CATV, CCTV, fire alarm and BMCS cables can be installed above accessible ceilings without conduit. Cables installed above accessible ceiling shall be plenum rated. Conduit rough in of these cables shall include a 90-degree turn -out to an accessible location with insulated bushings on the end of the conduit. 1. Provide conduit from each telephone / voice outlet box to accessible ceiling plenum. 2. Provide conduit from each technology / data / communications outlet box to accessible ceiling plenum. 3. Provide conduit from each cable TV / video / audio outlet box to accessible ceiling plenum. 4. Provide conduit from each security / surveillance device outlet box to accessible ceiling plenum. 5. Provide two conduits for each combination data/voice/video outlet box and each outlet box indicated to contain more than four data, voice, or video drops to accessible ceiling plenum. CONDUIT SYSTEMS VLK Architects, 2007 26 0533 - 10 2740.00 CREEKVIEW ELEMENTARY SCHOOL COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX C. All conduit in which cable is to be installed by others shall have pull string installed. The nylon pull string shall have not less than 200 lb. tensile strength. Not less than 12-inches of slack shall be left at each end. Provide blank cover plate before substantial completion if box is for a future installation after substantial completion of the project. Conduit shall extend to a minimum six inches above nearest accessible ceiling, and be turned horizontally with plastic bushing at terminations. D. Conduits for Building Entrance Facilities: 1. Outside Plant: Install a pull box every 300-feet or after 180 degree turns. All turns should be large sweeps (not sharp 90s) with the radius of the sweep at least 1 OX the diameter of the conduit. Hence a 4-inch conduit requires a 40-inch radial sweep. If field conditions absolutely mandate a sharp 90 bend to be installed, then a pull box shall be installed at that location regardless of distance. 2. Inside Plant: Install a pull box every 150-feet or after 180 degree turns. All turns shall be large sweeps, not sharp 90s, with the radius of the sweep at least 1 OX the diameter of the conduit. Hence, a 4-inch conduit requires a 40-inch radial sweep. If field conditions absolutely mandate a sharp 90 degree bend to be installed, then a pull box shall be installed at that location regardless of distance. 3. Building entrance facilities shall not terminate in an IDF or any other space except the MDF. 4. Coordinate the termination location of the building entrance facilities in the MDF with the room layout and equipment configuration. 5. Provide (3) one -inch ribbed innerducts in each 4-inch conduit. 3.06 IDENTIFICATION A. Conduit Systems: Provide adequate marking of major conduit exposed or concealed in interior accessible spaces to distinguish each run as either a power or signal/communication conduit. Except as otherwise indicated, use orange banding with black lettering. Provide self-adhesive or snap -on type plastic markers. Locate markers at ends of conduit runs, near switches and other control devices, near items of equipment served by the conductors, at points where conduit passes through walls or floors or enters non -accessible construction, and at spacing of not more than 50-feet along each run of exposed conduit. Switch -leg conduit and short branches for power connections need not be marked, except where conduit is larger than 1-inch. END OF SECTION CONDUIT SYSTEMS VLK Architects, 2007 26 0533 - 11 2740.00 CREEKVIEW ELEMENTARY SCHOOL COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX SECTION 26 0535 - ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS FOR EQUIPMENT PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Electrical connections as required and scheduled, and as specified. 1.02 RELATED WORK A. Refer to other Divisions for specific individual equipment electrical requirements. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. UL Label: Products shall be UL labeled to the extent possible. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS AND COMPONENTS A. General: For each electrical connection indicated, provide a complete assembly including, but not limited to, pressure connectors, terminals (lugs), electrical insulating tape, heat -shrinkable insulating tubing, cable ties, solderless wire nuts, and other items and accessories needed to complete splices and terminations. B. Raceways: Refer to related sections. C. Conductors and Connectors: Refer to related section. D. Terminals: Provide electrical terminals as indicated by the terminal manufacturer for the application. PART 3 - EXECUTION: 3.01 INSTALLATION OF ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS: A. General: Install electrical connections as shown, in accordance with applicable portions of the NECA Standard of Installation, and industry practices. B. Conductors: Connect electrical power supply conductors to equipment conductors in accordance with equipment manufacturer's written instructions and wiring diagrams. Where possible, match conductors of the electrical connection for interface between the electrical supply and the installed equipment. C. Splice Insulation: Cover splices with electrical insulation equivalent to, or of a higher rating than, insulation on the conductors being spliced. D. Appearance: Prepare conductors by cutting and stripping covering, jacket, and insulation to ensure a uniform and neat appearance where cables and wires are terminated. E. Routing: Trim cables and wires to be as short as practical. Arrange routing to facilitate inspection, testing, and maintenance. F. Motor Connections: Where possible, terminate conduit in conduit boxes at motors. Where motors are not provided with conduit boxes, terminate the conduit in a suitable condulet, and make motor connections. Conduit passing through the housing on connected equipment shall pass through a cleanly cut hole protected with an approved grommet. ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS FOR EQUIPMENT VLK Architects, 2007 26 0535 - 1 2740.00 CREEKVIEW ELEMENTARY SCHOOL COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX G. Coordination: Coordinate installation of electrical connections for equipment with equipment installation work. H. Identification: Refer to Electrical General Provisions for identification of electrical power supply conductor terminations with markers approved. As to type, color, letter and marker size by the Architect. Fasten markers at each termination point, as close as possible to each connecting point. I. Equipment and Furnishings: Refer to other Divisions. Coordinate power and control provisions shown for equipment and furnishings with the provisions required for the furnished equipment and furnishings. Where the power and control requirements are less than or equal to those specified, modifications to power and control provisions shall be made at no cost as a part of coordination. Where power and control requirements are in excess of those shown, notify the Architect in writing of the requirements. END OF SECTION ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS FOR EQUIPMENT VLK Architects, 2007 26 0535 - 2 2740.00 CREEKVIEW ELEMENTARY SCHOOL COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX SECTION 26 0537 - ELECTRICAL BOXES AND FITTINGS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Provide electrical box and fitting work as required, scheduled, indicated, and specified. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. UL Label: Electrical boxes and fittings shall be UL labeled. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 FABRICATED MATERIALS A. Interior Outlet Boxes: Provide galvanized steel interior outlet wiring boxes, of the type, shape, and size, including depth of box, to suit respective locations and installation. Construct with stamped knockouts in back and sides. Provide gang boxes where devices are shown grouped. Single box design; sectional boxes are not acceptable 1. Type of Various Locations: a. Ceilings: 4-inch square, 2-1/8-inch deep. b. Plaster Walls: 4-inch square, 2-1/8-inch deep, with raised plaster cover; set with face flush with finished surface, shallow boxes where necessary. C. Dry -wall Construction Walls: Standard galvanized switch box, 2-1/8-inch deep, and shallow boxes where necessary. d. Masonry Walls: Galvanized switch boxes made especially for masonry installations; depths of boxes must be coordinated for each installation. e. Surface: Type FS or FD box with surface cover. f. Corrosive locations or natatorium areas: Aluminum or 304 stainless steel construction suitable for the installation. g. Hazardous (Classified) Locations: Explosion proof boxes, seals and fittings. h. Special: Where above types are not suitable, boxes as required, taking into account space available, appearance, and Code requirements 2. Interior Outlet Box Accessories: Outlet box accessories required as for installation, including covers or wall device plates, mounting brackets, wallboard hangers, extension rings, plaster rings for boxes in plaster construction, fixture studs, cable clamps and metal straps for supporting outlet boxes. Accessories shall be compatible with outlet boxes used and meet requirements of individual wiring. B. Damp Location Outlet and Damp or Wet Location Switch Boxes: Deep type hot dipped galvanized cast -metal weatherproof outlet wiring boxes, of type, shape, and size required. Include depth of box, threaded conduit ends, and stainless steel cover plate with spring -hinged waterproof caps suitable for application. Include faceplate gasket and corrosion -resistant fasteners. C. Wet Location Outlet Boxes: Hot dipped galvanized cast-iron weatherproof outlet wiring boxes, of type, shape, and size required. Include depth of box, threaded conduit ends, and rain tight while -in -use cover plate Leviton 5977/5997-GY. Include faceplate gasket and corrosion -resistant fasteners. D. Junction and Pull Boxes: Galvanized sheet steel junction and pull boxes, with screw -on covers, of type, shape, and size, to suit respective location and installation. ELECTRICAL BOXES AND FITTINGS VLK Architects, 2007 26 0537 - 1 2740.00 CREEKVIEW ELEMENTARY SCHOOL COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX Type for Various Locations: a. 100 Cubic Inches in Volume or Smaller: Standard outlet boxes with stamped knockouts. b. 101 Cubic Inches in Volume or Larger: Code gauge steel with sides formed and welded, screw covers unless shown or required to have hinged doors. Boxes with covers of 12-inches or more in any dimension shall have hinged doors with locking device same as furnished on panelboards. Knockouts factory stamped or formed in field with a cutting tool to provide a clean symmetrically cut hole. C. Exterior or Wet Areas: 304 stainless steel NEMA 4X construction with gaskets and corrosion -resistant fasteners E. Conduit Bodies: Provide galvanized cast -metal conduit bodies, of type, shape, and size, to suit location and installation. Construct with threaded conduit ends, removable cover, and corrosion -resistant screws. F. Bushings, Knockout Closures, and Locknuts: Provide corrosion -resistant punched -steel box knockout closures, conduit locknuts, and insulated conduit bushings of type and size to suit use and installation. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION OF BOXES AND FITTINGS A. Install electrical boxes and fittings as shown and as required, in compliance with NEC requirements, in accordance with the manufacturer's written instructions, in accordance with industry practices. B. Junction and pull boxes above 2-foot x 2-foot grid ceilings shall be mounted within 18- inches of ceiling grid. Junction and pull boxes above 2-foot x 4-foot grid ceiling shall be mounted within 30-inches of ceiling grid. All junction box or pull box openings shall be side or bottom accessible. C. Use outlet and switch boxes for junctions on concealed conduit systems except in utility areas where exposed junction or pull boxes can be used. D. Determine from the drawings and by measurement the location of each outlet. Locate electrical boxes to accommodate millwork, fixtures, marker boards, and other room equipment at no additional cost to the Owner. The outlet locations shall be modified from those shown to accommodate changes in door swing or to clear interferences that arise from construction as well as modifying them to center in rooms. The modifications shall be made with no cost as part of coordination. Check the conditions throughout the job and notify the Architect of discrepancies. Verify modifications before proceeding with installation. Set wall boxes in advance of wall construction, blocked in place and secured. Set all wall boxes flush with the finish and install extension rings as required extending boxes to the finished surfaces of special furring or wall finishes. Provide wall box support legs attached to stud to prevent movement of box in wall. E. Unless noted or directed otherwise at installation, place outlet boxes as indicated on architectural elevations and as required by local codes. F. Outlets above counters, mount. long axis horizontally. Refer to architectural elevations and coordinate to clear backsplash and millwork. ELECTRICAL BOXES AND FITTINGS VLK Architects, 2007 26 0537 - 2 2740.00 CREEKVIEW ELEMENTARY SCHOOL COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX G. Provide pull boxes, junction boxes, wiring troughs, and cabinets where necessary for installation of electrical systems. Surface mounted boxes accessible to the public shall not have stamped knockouts. H. Provide weatherproof boxes for interior and exterior locations exposed to weather or moisture. I. Provide knockout closures to cap unused knockout holes where blanks have been removed. J. Locate boxes and conduit bodies to ensure access to electrical wiring. Provide minimum 12-inch clearance in front of box or conduit body access. K. Secure boxes to the substrate where they are mounted, or embed boxes in concrete or masonry. L. Boxes for any conduit system shall not be secured to the ceiling system, HVAC ductwork or piping system. M. Provide junction and pull boxes for feeders and branch circuits where shown and where required by NEC, regardless of whether or not boxes are shown. N. Coordinate locations of boxes in fire rated partitions and slabs to not affect the fire rating of the partition or slab. Notify the Architect in writing where modification or construction is required to maintain the partition or slab fire rating. O. Exterior boxes installed within 50-feet of cooling towers or water treatment areas shall be of 304 stainless steel, of weatherproof NEMA 4X construction. P. Identification: Paint the exterior and cover plates of building interior junction boxes and pull boxes to correspond to the following colors: 1. Orange: - 480/277 VAC systems 2. Blue: - 240 VAC three phase delta systems. 3. Red - Emergency circuits and exit lights, fire alarm system. 4. Green - 120/208 VAC 3 phase and 120/240 VAC single-phase systems 5. Blue - Mechanical and miscellaneous equipment power branch circuits 6. White - Security and Surveillance equipment circuits Q. All boxes shall be labeled with each circuit number and each circuit relay number if applicable on the cover plate, visible from the outside of the box. R. Align adjacent wall mounted outlet boxes for switches, thermostats, and similar devices. S. Use flush mounting outlet box in finished areas unless specifically indicated as being used with exposed conduit. T. Locate flush -mounting box in masonry wall to require cutting of masonry unit corner only. Coordinate masonry cutting to achieve neat opening. U. Do not install flush mounting box back-to-back in walls; provide minimum 6 inches separation. Provide minimum 24 inches separation in acoustic rated walls. V. Secure flush mounting box to interior wall and partition studs. Accurately position to allow for surface finish thickness. W. Use stamped steel bridges to fasten flush mounting outlet box between studs. ELECTRICAL BOXES AND FITTINGS VLK Architects, 2007 26 0537 - 3 2740.00 CREEKVIEW ELEMENTARY SCHOOL COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX X. Install flush mounting box without damaging wall insulation or reducing its effectiveness. Y. Use adjustable steel channel fasteners for hung ceiling outlet box. Z. Do not fasten boxes to ceiling support wires. AA. Support boxes independently of conduit. BB. Use gang box where more than one device is mounted together. Do not use sectional box. CC. Use gang box with plaster ring for single device outlets. DD. Large Pull Boxes: Use hinged enclosure in interior dry locations, surface -mounted cast metal box in other locations. EE. Anchor outlets in suspended ceilings to the building construction. FF. In finished areas not receiving furred ceilings, install outlet boxes on concrete deck of the floor or roof above. Exercise extreme care in locating outlet boxes. GG. . Mount boxes to the building structure with supporting facilities independent of the conduits entering or leaving the boxes. HH. Where multiple feeders are in one pull box, conductors shall be wrapped with 3M No. 7700 Arc and fireproof tape. II. Where required, provide plaster rings of suitable depth on outlet boxes. Face of outlet box or plaster ring shall be not more than 1/8 inch from finished surface. JJ. Equip boxes supporting fixtures designed to accept fixture studs with 3/8-inch stud (galvanized malleable iron) inserted through back of box and secured by locknut. Boxes not equipped with outlets shall have level metal covers with rust -resisting screws. KK. Do not mount junction boxes above inaccessible ceilings or in inaccessible spaces. Do not mount junction boxes above ceilings accessible only by removing light fixture. At inaccessible spaces use junction box furnished with light fixture or light fixture wiring compartment UL listed for through wiring. LL. No more than 12 conduits containing branch circuits may be installed in any junction or pull box. MM. Junction boxes shall be protected from building finish painters' over spray; ie: mechanical rooms, to comply with item "P" in this section. 3.02 ADJUSTING A. Adjust flush -mounting outlets to make front flush with finished wall material. B. Install knockout closures in unused box openings. END OF SECTION ELECTRICAL BOXES AND FITTINGS VLK Architects, 2007 26 0537 - 4 2740.00 CREEKVIEW ELEMENTARY SCHOOL COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX SECTION 26 0540 - ELECTRICAL GUTTERS AND WIREWAYS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Provide electrical gutter work as shown, as specified and as required. B. Application: The types of electrical gutters required for the project include the following: 1. Electrical wiring gutters 2. Voice / Data / Video / Communication and signal distribution wireway 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. UL Label: Gutters and wireways shall be UL labeled. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.01 ELECTRICAL GUTTERS AND WIREWAYS A. General: Provide hinged galvanized steel electrical gutters and wireways in the types and sizes indicated or required, minimum 16 gauge thickness, with rounded edges and smooth surfaces; constructed in compliance with applicable standards; with features required. B. Size: Provide size indicated. Where size is not indicated, construct in accordance with the NEC and other standards. Gutters shall be of manufacturer's standard lengths, without field cutting or field extensions. C. Accessories: Provide gutter and wireway accessories where indicated, constructed of same metal and finish as gutters or wireways. D. Supports: Provide gutter and wireway supports indicated, conforming to NEC, and as recommended by the manufacturer, and as specified in Section 26 0533 Conduit Systems. E. Materials and Finishes: NEMA 1 gutters and wireways shall have gray powder coat finish over galvanized steel. Gutters and wireways installed outside or inside natatorium areas shall be of 304 stainless steel NEMA 4X construction. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Provide gutters and wireways only where specified or required. Use of gutters and wireways shall be kept to a minimum. B. Finishing: Remove burrs and sharp edges of gutters and wireways wherever they could be injurious to conductor insulation or jacket. C. Installation: Install gutters and wireways where shown or required, in accordance with the manufacturer's written instructions, NEC, NECA "Standard of Installation," and with recognized industry practices to ensure that the gutters and wireways comply with the specified requirements. Comply with requirements of NEMA and the NEC pertaining to installation of electrical gutters. D. Grounding: Electrically ground gutters and wireways to ensure continuous electrical conductivity. Provide equipment grounding conductor. ELECTRICAL GUTTERS AND WIREWAYS VLK Architects, 2007 26 0540 - 1 2740.00 CREEKVIEW ELEMENTARY SCHOOL COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX E. Conductors: 1. Complete gutter and wireway installation before starting the installation of conductors. 2. Provide sufficient space to permit access for installing, splicing, and maintaining the conductors. F. A maximum of 12 conduits containing branch circuits shall be allowed to be installed in any gutter or wireway. END OF SECTION ELECTRICAL GUTTERS AND WIREWAYS VLK Architects, 2007 26 0540 - 2 2740.00 CREEKVIEW ELEMENTARY SCHOOL COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX SECTION 26 0550 - FIRESTOPS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Provide firestop as required, and as specified. Refer to Architectural drawings for all fire and smoke rated partitions, walls, floors, etc. B. Types: Firestop required for the project includes smokestop. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. UL Label: Firestops shall be UL labeled. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Nelson. B. 3M (Minnesota Mining Manufacturing). C. Hilt! D. Specified Technologies, Inc. 2.02 MATERIAL AND COMPONENTS A. General: Except as otherwise indicated, provide firestop manufacturer's standard materials and components as indicated by published product information, designed and constructed as recommended by the manufacturer, and as required for installation. 2.03 FIRESTOP A. Conduits: Provide a soft, permanently flexible sealant for 1-1/2 to 2 hour rated fireproofing for steel conduits (up to 4" diameter). B. Low Voltage Cables, Fiber Optic Cable and Innerduct: Provide Specified Technologies, Inc. EZ-Path single, double, or triple pathways as required. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION OF FIRESTOPS A. General: Install firestops in accordance with the manufacturer's installation instructions and industry practices to ensure that the firestops comply with requirements. Comply with UL and NFPA standards for the installation of firestops. END OF SECTION FIRESTOPS VLK Architects, 2007 26 0550 - 1 2740.00 CREEKVIEW ELEMENTARY SCHOOL COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX SECTION 26 0922 - MOTOR CONTROL CENTERS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Motor control center work is as required, scheduled, and as specified. B. Types: Motor control centers required for the project include 600V motor control centers. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Square D 2.02 MATERIALS AND COMPONENTS A. General: Except as otherwise indicated, provide motor control center manufacturer's standard materials and components as indicated by published product information, designed and constructed as recommended by the manufacturer, and as required for a complete installation. 2.03 600 VOLT MOTOR CONTROL CENTERS A. General: Provide a factory -assembled, dead -front construction, metal -enclosed, self- supporting motor control center of the voltage, phase, ampacity, and short circuit bracing required. 1. Motor control centers shall consist of the required number of vertical sections bolted together to form one metal enclosed rigid structure. 2. Motor control centers shall include starters, protective devices, and equipment as required with interconnections, instrumentation, and control wiring. Small wiring, fuse blocks, and terminal blocks within the motor control center shall be included within the motor control center. Groups of control wires leaving the motor control center shall be furnished with terminal blocks with suitable numbering strips. Wiring shall be NEMA Class I, Type B, unless shown otherwise. Size buckets to enable field servicing of components without removing entire bucket. 3. A power monitor shall be included for each motor starter. Monitor relay shall drop out upon loss of any phase, undervoltage on any or all phases, or phase reversal from A-B-C sequence. Relay shall be adjustable for trip range and shall reset automatically when phase voltage and sequence is corrected. Motor starters shall open when monitor relay drops out, and automatically reset. Where solid state overload relays provide this specified requirement, separate overload relays may be omitted. 4. A single-phase control power transformer shall be included with each motor starter for 120V control power. The primary shall be connected to the line side of the motor starters; the secondary shall have one leg fused and one leg grounded. Arrange transformer terminals so that wiring to terminals will not be located above the transformer. B. Enclosure Construction: The motor control center framework shall be fabricated on a die - formed steel base or base assembly consisting of formed steel and commercial channel welded or bolted together to support the entire shipping unit for moving on rollers and floor mounting. The framework shall be formed code gauge steel, welded and bolted together to support cover plates, busing, and component devices during shipment and installation. MOTOR CONTROL CENTERS VLK Architects, 2007 26 0922 - 1 2740.00 CREEKVIEW ELEMENTARY SCHOOL COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX 1. Each motor control center section shall have an open bottom and individually removable top plate for installation and termination of conduit. Top and bottom conduit area shall be shown and dimensioned on the shop drawings. Front plates used for mounting meters, selector switches, or other front -mounted devices shall be hinged, with wiring installed and laced, and at the flexible hinged side. Closure plates shall be small enough for easy handling by one man and held in pace with slotted quarter turn fasteners. Door shall be held closed with captive textured thumb screws. 2. An isolated horizontal wiring trough shall be arranged so that when bolted with adjacent vertical sections, the wiring trough will form a convenient pull box arrangement running the entire length of the motor control center. Each section shall also have a full height, isolated, non -obstructed, completely accessible, vertical wiring trough between the side and the starter units. Wire straps shall be furnished in the vertical wireway to group and tie wires in place for a neat, orderly installation. End sections shall have end closing plates that can be removed for the addition of future sections. Removable blank doors shall cover unused unit spaces. 3. Unit space of a section shall be divided into six 12 inch space modules or other sizes in multiples of 6-inches for unit arrangements. Size 1 and Size 2 across the line, non -reversing, combination starter units, except those with 100 ampere fuse clips, shall fit into one space to permit rearrangement in the field. 4. A main lug compartment shall be included complete with main lugs to accommodate incoming cables. The compartment shall be located in the topmost or bottom -most unit space of the section as required. 5. Steel surfaces shall be chemically cleaned and treated to provide a bond between paint and metal surfaces to help prevent the entrance of moisture and formation of rust under the paint film. The paint finish shall be gray enamel over a rust - inhibiting phosphate primer. 6. Enclosure shall be of NEMA 1 construction unless otherwise indicated. C. Busing: The motor control center busing shall be copper and of sufficient cross-section area to continuously conduct rated full load current with a maximum temperature rise of 650C above an ambient temperature of 40°C. 1. The bus bars shall be braced to comply with the integrated equipment rating of the motor control center. The main horizontal bus bars between sections shall be located near the top of the motor control center. The horizontal main bus bar supports, connections, and joints shall be bolted or welded, as required, not to require periodic maintenance. Bolted joint connections shall have at least two bolts per joint per connection and have at least two bolts per joint per phase. Half - lapped bus joint construction is not acceptable. Horizontal bus shall be extended in each direction to allow for future motor control sections. 2. Buses shall be arranged A-B-C, left -to -right, top -to -bottom, and front -to -rear throughout. A ground bus shall be secured to each vertical section structure and extend the entire length of the motor control center. 3. Insulated horizontal and vertical bus barriers shall reduce the hazard of accidental contact. Vertical bus barriers shall have plugs to close off unused openings. Bottom bus covers shall be included below the vertical bus to protect the ends of bus from contact with fish tapes or items entering the bottom of the enclosure. Drawout units shall be retained in the operating position by two conveniently positive latching mechanisms. Units shall be capable of being withdrawn to a test position (disengaged from bus) and padlocked. 4. Sections shall include full length main busing of the ampacity rating indicated on the drawings. Each section shall contain full length sub -busing for future installations. MOTOR CONTROL CENTERS VLK Architects, 2007 26 0922 - 2 2740.00 CREEKVIEW ELEMENTARY SCHOOL COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX D. Motor Control Devices: Each motor control device shall be a combination motor control unit consisting of a magnetic starter in combination with a circuit breaker. Each unit shall be rated as shown, and as required by equipment served. 1. Provide full -voltage, non -reversing, single -speed (FVNR), full -voltage, non - reversing, two -speed, two -winding (2S-2W), and reduced -voltage, non -reversing auto -transformer -type, closed transition (RVNR) starters sized as required. Starters shall be constructed and tested in accordance with the latest NEMA standards. 2. Provide circuit breakers as specified below. 3. Magnetic starter contacts shall be solid silver alloy, and shall not require filing, dressing, or cleaning throughout the life of the starter. 4. Operating coils shall be 120V, and shall be pressure molded, and designed so that accidental exposure to excessive voltage up to 480V will not damage the coil. The starter shall also be designed so that when a coil fails due to an overvoltage condition, the starter shall definitely open, and shall not freeze in the closed position. 5. Starters shall have manual reset, solid state, trip -free overload relays in each phase conductor. 3 phase FVNR starters shall have three overload relays. Single- phase FVNR starter shall have an overload relay in each ungrounded conductor. Two speed, full -voltage magnetic starters shall have overload relays for all 6 control legs. Overload relays shall not be field -convertible from manual to automatic reset. Provide button in front cover to reset all overload relays. 6. Starters shall have 30.5mm RUN and STOP LED pilot lights. Furnish additional pilot lights for motor starters as shown. Provide FAST and SLOW pilot lights for two -starters. Pilot lights shall be mounted in the starter enclosure cover. Pilot lights shall be operated from an interlock on the motor starter, and shall not be wired across the operating coil. Green — Stop Red - Run Yellow - Slow Blue - Fast 7. Starters shall have 30.5mm HAND -OFF -AUTOMATIC switches. Provide for FAST -SLOW, REMOTE -LOCAL speed selection from HVAC control system for two -speed starters. Two -speed starters shall have deceleration relays between fast and slow speeds. Coordinate motor starter controls with the requirements of Division 23. Motor starter controls shall be mounted in the starter enclosure cover. 8. Each motor starter shall have two normally open and two normally closed nonconvertible auxiliary contact in addition to the number of contacts required for the "holding interlock" and control wiring. In addition, it shall be possible to field install one or more additional auxiliary contacts without removing existing wiring, or removing the starter from the enclosure. 9. Make provision for the units to be removed from the vertical bus without disturbing the wiring of the individual motor starter unit and permit starter door to be closed and fastened when removed. Include means to prevent incorrect operation of the stab -in mechanism. Each individual removable unit shall be held in place with a positive -acting center toggle mechanism. Motor starter units up through NEMA Size 4 shall be provided with the stab -in mechanism. E. Integrated Equipment Rating: Each motor control center, as a unit, shall be given an integrated equipment rating by the manufacturer. The integrated equipment short-circuit rating shall certify that equipment is capable of withstanding the stresses of a fault available at the motor control center. The ratings shall have been established from tests by the manufacturer on similar equipment as the motor control center. This test data shall be available and submitted, if requested, with or before the submittal of shop drawings. MOTOR CONTROL CENTERS VLK Architects, 2007 26 0922 - 3 2740.00 CREEKVIEW ELEMENTARY SCHOOL COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX F. Circuit Breakers: Molded case circuit breakers shall be thermal magnetic or RMS sensing solid state for feeder branches and for motor starters. Circuit breakers shall have interrupting ratings no less than the following values. Frame Size Interrupting Capacity 100A 35,000 AIC 225A 35,000 AIC 400A 35,000 Al 600A 65,000 AIC 800A 65,000 AIC PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION OF MOTOR CONTROL CENTERS A. General: Install motor control centers where shown, in accordance with the manufacturer's written instructions and industry practices to ensure that the motor control centers comply with the specified requirements. B. Standards: Comply with requirements of NEMA and NEC standards, and NECA Standard of Installation, for installation of motor control centers. C. Tightness: Torque bus connections and tighten mechanical fasteners. D. Fuses: Install fuses, of the ratings shown, in each motor starter. E. Overloads: Install solid state overload relays with manual reset in each motor starter. Ratings and setting shall be based on actual motor nameplate full -load amps. F. Concrete Pads: Install each motor control center on a 4-inch reinforced concrete housekeeping pad. The housekeeping pad shall extend 3-inches beyond the housing of the motor control center, unless shown otherwise. Furnish the position of any block outs, dimensions, and location of the housekeeping pads to prevent delay of the concrete work. G. Adjustment: Adjust operating mechanisms for free mechanical movement. H. Coordination: Motor starter supplier shall coordinate with motors furnished by Division 23. Motor starter supplier shall coordinate with the Building Management Control System, Division 23. Identity each motor control center and each individual motor starter or branch circuit protective device as specified in Section 26 0500. 3.02 TESTING A. Pre-Energization Checks: Before energizing, check motor control center for continuous circuits and short circuits. B. Motor Control Center Insulation Resistance Test: Each motor control center bus shall have the insulation resistance tested after installation is complete, except for line and load side connections. Tests shall be made using a Biddle Megger or equivalent test instrument at voltage not less than 1000VDC. Resistance shall be measured from phase - to -phase and from phase -to -ground. MOTOR CONTROL CENTERS VLK Architects, 2007 26 0922 - 4 2740.00 CREEKVIEW ELEMENTARY SCHOOL COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX C. Provide thermal infrared scan of motor control center under full load as directed and witnessed by Owner. Provide digital video disc (DVD documentation with test results for comparison to future test. D. Submittals: Furnish instruments and personnel required for tests. Submit 4 copies of certified test results to ARCHITECT/ENGINEER for review. Test reports shall include motor control center tested, date and time of test, relative humidity, temperature, and weather conditions. END OF SECTION MOTOR CONTROL CENTERS VLK Architects, 2007 26 0922 - 5 2740.00 CREEKVIEW ELEMENTARY SCHOOL COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX SECTION 26 0923 - LIGHTING OCCUPANCY SENSORS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Provide occupancy sensing control devices so that lighting is turned off automatically in individual rooms or sections of rooms after a reasonable time delay when the last person leaves the room or area. B. Occupancy sensing controls shall accommodate for irregular use of rooms or areas, all individual work habits, and all occupancy habits or conditions of space utilization. Occupancy sensors must provide full volumetric coverage. 1.02 SCOPE A. Contractor shall furnish and install a complete and operable occupancy sensing lighting control devices, as described in the specifications herein. B. Work included: All labor, materials, appliances, tools, equipment necessary for and incidental to performing all operations in connection with furnishing, delivery and installation of the work of this Section, complete, as shown on the drawings and/or specified herein. Work includes, but is not necessarily limited to the following: 1. Examine all other specification sections and drawings for related work required to be included as work under Division 26. 2. General provisions and requirements for electrical work. 3. Refer to Wiring Devices for wall switch cover plates. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Product manufacturer shall have a minimum of (5) years experience in the manufacturing of occupancy sensors. B. All components shall be UL listed, meet all state and local applicable code requirements. C. All components shall offer a five (5) year manufacturer's warranty. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit applicable manufacturer's specifications sheets, installation instruction, wiring diagrams and performance data for all components required. B. Submit floor plans indicating ceiling heights and coverage patterns of all occupancy sensors to indicate complete coverage of small motion. Occupancy sensor layout shall be prepared by the manufacturer. Minimum size floor plans 11x17 inch; minimum scale one inch equals 16 feet. C. Provide a complete written item -by -item, line -by-line specification review stating compliance or deviation in full description. Any deviations to this specification must be clearly stated in writing. It is the contractor's responsibility to provide submittals that meet or exceed the specifications herein prior to commencement of work. D. Submit a sample of each style and color of occupancy sensor and switch with related cover plate. Attach plate to wiring device and label backside of plate with job description with permanent black marker. LIGHTING OCCUPANCY SENSORS VLK Architects, 2007 26 0923 - 1 2740.00 • CREEKVIEW ELEMENTARY SCHOOL COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Novitas B. Watt Stopper C. My -Tech D. Hubbell E. Leviton F. Sensor Switch 2.02 OCCUPANCY SENSORS A. Part numbers based on Novitas. Device color shall be white. B. Ceiling Mounted Dual Technology Sensors*** 01-300, 01-310 C. High Bay Sensor*** 01-320 D. Extreme Temperature Sensor*** 01-340 * For use with Novitas 13-041 and heavy duty 13-051 Switchpacks only. ** For use with GE RR7 and Sierra 1070E compatible relays only *** Can be powered by heavy duty 13-051 Switchpacks 2.03 FEATURES AND PERFORMANCE PARAMETERS A. Sensors shall provide an override feature that will force lights on in the event of sensor malfunction. B. Ceiling sensors shall provide no -gap minor motion coverage throughout the entire controlled area. C. Ceiling, Dual Technology, and High Bay sensor electronics shall be mounted on snap -out circuit boards, which are replaceable, in the event of failure, without disturbing hard wiring or sensor mounting. D. Ceiling, Dual Technology, and High Bay sensors shall be available in more than one frequency to enable individual control of adjacent spaces without gaps in coverage. E. Sensors shall operate on 15 VDC as supplied by Novitas Switchpacks. F. All ceiling sensors shall have a manual override switch to allow the load to be turned on without the use of tools or pins in the event of sensor malfunction. G. Sensors shall have easily accessible, adjustable controls for time delay and sensitivity. Controls shall be recessed to limit tampering. H. Sensor housings shall comply with UL 94VO and shall be equipped with a protective grill to shield detectors from damage. LIGHTING OCCUPANCY SENSORS VLK Architects, 2007 26 0923 - 2 2740.00 CREEKVIEW ELEMENTARY SCHOOL COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX I. All sensors shall be provided with an indicator light to verify that motion is being detected and that the unit is in operation. J. Sensors shall contain timing circuitry to provide adjustable "time to lights off" delay of 15 seconds to 30 minutes. K. All ultrasonic sensors shall be crystal controlled to within +/- 0.005% tolerance to assure constant and stable performance. L. The High Bay Sensor and Extreme Temperature Sensor shall be HID Bi-Level dimming compatible with HID dimming ballasts/systems. M. Dual Technology, High Bay and Extreme Temperature sensors shall include an Internal pull-up switch or jumper for choosing an open collector with or without pull-up when connecting to a BAS system. N. Designer series, Dual Technology, High Bay and Extreme Temperature sensors shall include a lighting sweep function that shall ensure that lights remain off immediately after power on sweeps. O. All ceiling sensors shall be mounted through a single hole. P. High bay and Extreme Temperature sensors shall feature versatile mounting options to surface, 2S or 4S junction box. Q. Dual Technology and High Bay sensors shall include a Self -Adjusting Time Delay that shall reset the time delay automatically to 10 minutes after an hour of lights staying off, if left at the minimum setting. R. Extreme temperature sensors shall include a Self -Adjusting Time Delay that shall reset the time delay automatically to 6 minutes after an hour of lights staying off, if left at the minimum setting. S. The Extreme Temperature Sensor shall include built in temperature compensation circuitry and algorithm that shall minimize false activation caused by natural factors such as wind, temperature change, etc. T. The High Bay Sensor shall be available with an independently adjustable two-way coverage pattern. U. The High Bay Sensor shall be able to detect the major types of motion (i.e., driving a forklift or walking into an aisle) of people in controlled areas of a warehouse or other High Bay area. V. Dual Technology, High Bay and Extreme Temperature sensors shall self -adjust sensitivity to optimize performance. W. All sensors shall utilize the NEMA WD 7 Guide and robotic method to verify coverage patterns. X. All sensors and Switchpacks shall be manufactured by the same company and shall be aesthetically compatible, i.e., from the same product line or generation of products. LIGHTING OCCUPANCY SENSORS VLK Architects, 2007 26 0923 - 3 2740.00 CREEKVIEW ELEMENTARY SCHOOL COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX 2.03 SWITCHPACKS A. Part numbers based on Novitas: BAS 13-041 * Heavy Duty 13-051 * *For use with Novitas Designer, Standard and Airflow Tolerant series, and Dual Technology, High Bay and Extreme Temperature sensors. B. For ease of mounting, installation and future service, Switchpacks shall be able to externally mount through a 1/2" knock -out on a standard electrical enclosure and shall be an integrated, self contained unit consisting internally of a load switching relay and transformer to provide low voltage power of 15 VDC. Switchpacks shall power up to five (5) sensors. C. Relay contacts shall be isolated and have ratings of: 13-051: 15 Amps: 120 VAC Tungsten 20 Amps: 120 VAC Ballast 20 Amps: 277 VAC Ballast 1 HP: 120 VAC 2HP: 250 VAC D. Control wiring between sensors and Switchpacks shall be Class 2, 18 AWG stranded UL classified, Teflon Jacketed cable suitable for use in plenum ceilings. E. Enclosures for Switchpacks shall be pressed steel, NEMA I Construction with mounting plates and barriers to provide separation between line and low voltage wiring or standard 4" deep junction box with Switchpack mounting through a 1/2" knockout. F. The Heavy Duty Switchpack shall have a heavy duty Form A relay and zero crossing circuitry that forces the relay contacts to engage and disengage at the zero crossing point of the AC voltage source, minimizing the magnitude of the inrush current and increasing the life of the Switchpack. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. Provide the quantity of occupancy sensors required for complete and proper volumetric coverage to completely cover the controlled areas. Contractor shall verify room coverage and ceiling heights with manufacturer and provide the quantity of occupancy sensors compatible with space and area to be covered. Rooms shall have one hundred (100) percent volumetric coverage of small motion detection to completely cover the controlled areas to accommodate all occupancy habits of single or multiple occupants at any location within the room(s). The locations and quantities of sensors shown on the drawings are diagrammatic and indicate only rooms that are to be provided with sensors. Proper judgment must be exercised in executing the work so as to ensure the best possible installation in the available space and to overcome local difficulties due to space limitations or interference of structural or architectural components. Provide additional sensors of the specific type as required to provide complete and proper volumetric coverage. B. Exact locations of Switchpack boxes shall be based on observing good installation practice and shall be consistent throughout the project. Switchpacks shall be located in LIGHTING OCCUPANCY SENSORS VLK Architects, 2007 26 0923 - 4 2740.00 CREEKVIEW ELEMENTARY SCHOOL COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX accessible ceiling spaces. Attention shall be paid to all aspects of installation to ensure that there is the minimum aesthetic impact of the hardware on the appearance of. the affected rooms. All control unit hardware shall be completely contained within a suitable NEMA-type enclosure, with no exposed wire other than low voltage Class 2 wiring. C. Control units used for the security or fire systems shall be powered from the emergency power source as indicated on the drawings. Other control units shall be powered from the lighting circuit, which they control. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. All occupancy sensors and switchpacks shall be of the same manufacturer throughout unless otherwise noted. B. Install occupancy sensors in areas shown, in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions, requirements of NEC, and in accordance with industry practices. Do not 1 install devices until wall construction and wiring is completed. C. Install occupancy sensors and switches only in electrical boxes that are clean, free from excess building materials, debris, and similar matter. D. Install occupancy sensors plumb and aligned in the plane of the wall, floor, or ceiling in where they are installed. E. Unless indicated otherwise, circuit switchpacks ahead of local control switches - source — switchpack — local toggle switch(s). 3.03 SENSOR TESTING AND ADJUSTMENT A. At the time of installation the contractor shall test and adjust each sensor for proper detection of motion appropriate to room usage. The contractor shall follow the testing and adjustment procedures as written in the manufacturer's installation instructions for each sensor model. B. Prior to testing and adjusting, verify with Owner/Architect the initial settings for each type of area based on its intended function and use. C. Verify with Owner all adjustable functions of each type of occupancy sensor prior to installation. Set all adjustable functions of each type of occupancy sensor as directed by Owner. Initial settings unless directed by Owner / Architect: 1. Time delay = maximum 2. Zero Time Delay = Off 3. Auto -On = Off 4. Manual -On = On 5. Self -Adjust = On 6. Disable Self -Adjust = Off 7. Energy Saver (Dual Level) = On 8. Manual Override = Off D. Before energizing, check for continuity of circuits, short circuits, and grounding connections. After energizing, check devices to demonstrate proper operation. END OF SECTION LIGHTING OCCUPANCY SENSORS VLK Architects, 2007 26 0923 - 5 2740.00 CREEKVIEW ELEMENTARY SCHOOL COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX SECTION 26 0925 - ELECTRICAL CONTACTORS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Miscellaneous electrical contactors as shown, required, scheduled, and as specified. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Provide products produced by one of the following: Square D 2.02 CONTACTORS: A. Provide contactors as shown, required, and specified. The number of poles, ampere -ratings, and pole arrangements shall be as required. Contactors shall conform to the following: 1. Rated for continuous duty at full rated current in an unventilated enclosure. Eight - hour duty ratings are not acceptable. 2. Contacts shall be readily replaceable, self -aligning, silver alloy. 3. Load contactors shall be rated for not less than 30A continuous rating. Auxiliary contacts shall be rated for not less than 10 amperes. 4. Contactors rated for lighting and mixed loads shall have an interrupting capacity of 150% of their continuous duty rating. 5. Contactors shall be capable of successfully handling inrush currents at 20 times rating. 6. Provide a minimum of two spare load contacts on each individual contactor rated 60A or less for future use. B. Electrically -held Devices shall conform to the following: 1. AC operated units shall have laminated low loss electrical steel core pieces with machine ground pole faces and shading coils. 2. Units rated at 300A and above shall have DC operating coils and include the necessary rectifier for the AC/DC operation. 3. Normally open contactors shall be spring -loaded open and magnetically closed. 4. Contactors for emergency lighting or power shall be normally closed. C. LED Pilot Lights: Provide 30.5mm run and stop pilot lights for all individual contactors operated by automatic controls. Pilot lights shall be mounted in the contactor enclosure cover. Pilot lights shall be operated from an interlock on the contactor and not be wired across the operating coil. Green - OFF Red - ON D. Controls: Individual contactors operated by automatic controls shall have 30.5mm HAND- OFF -AUTOMATIC switches, otherwise provide HAND-OFF switches. Contactor controls shall be mounted in the contactor enclosure cover. E. Control Power. A single-phase control power transformer shall be included with each individual contactor operated by manual or automatic controls for 120V control power. The primary shall be single phase 277 VAC connected to the line side of the contactor. The secondary shall have one leg fused and one leg grounded. ELECTRICAL CONTACTORS VLK Architects, 2007 26 0925 - 1 2740.00 CREEKVIEW ELEMENTARY SCHOOL COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX F. Enclosure: 1. Contactors and control enclosures installed in indoor locations shall be NEMA 1 heavy-duty enclosures unless shown otherwise. 2. Contactors and control enclosures installed at kitchen and food preparation locations, hose down areas, cooling towers, exterior locations, and in other corrosive areas shall be NEMA 4X, stainless steel. G. Minimum interrupting rating shall be 35KAIC. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION OF MISCELLANEOUS ELECTRICAL CONTROLS A. Provide electrically held contactors, with line side wiring complete, in accordance with the National Electrical Code and manufacturer's recommendations. B. Fuses: Install fuses where coil control power is fed from line side of contactor. C. Adjustment: Adjust operating mechanisms for free mechanical movement. D. Coordinate contactor control and operation requirements with the Building Management Control System. E. Identify each contactor as specified in Section 26 0500. 3.02 INTERIOR AND EXTERIOR LIGHTING CONTROL A. Parking lot lighting, building mounted exterior lighting, and exterior signage shall be controlled by the specified Building Management and Control System. Interior lighting as noted on the plans shall be controlled as noted on the plans and as specified by the Building Management and Control System. Contractor shall circuit all systems to be controlled by the Building Management and Control System through contactors compatible with system controls and shall ensure the control and operation of lighting control system is complete. B. Provide mechanically held contactors where control is three -wire, momentary control signal. C. Provide electrically held contactors where control is two -wire, constant control signal for open or close. D. Provide normally closed contactors for emergency lighting and power circuits where contactors are indicated or required. E. Provide normally closed contactors for circuits controlled by "emergency power off" or teacher control switches in science classrooms, computer labs, and vocational instructional areas. F. Provide control contactors and cabling for bi-level or tri-level HID ballast. Bi / tri level control contactors for exterior lighting shall be controlled by the Building Management Control System, with local BMCS manual override for both "ON" and "HIGH" settings. Bi / tri level controls for interior lighting shall be controlled by occupancy sensors and local control switch. END OF SECTION ELECTRICAL CONTACTORS VLK Architects, 2007 26 0925 - 2 2740.00 CREEKVIEW ELEMENTARY SCHOOL COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX SECTION 26 1216 - THREE PHASE, ENERGY EFFICIENT DRY -TYPE HARMONIC MITIGATING TRANSFORMERS (HMT) PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Work Included: Low Voltage (less than 600 Volt) transformer work as shown, scheduled, indicated, and specified. B. Types: Transformers required for the project include energy efficient dry -type harmonic mitigating transformers. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Standards: Transformers shall be designed and tested in accordance with NEMA and ANSI C33.4 and C89.2 standards. B. UL Label: Transformers shall be UL labeled. C. EPA Energy Star Standards 1.03 STANDARDS A. UL-506 B. ANSI C75.11 C. NEMA ST-20 D. NEMA TP-1 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Include outline and support point dimensions of enclosures and accessories, unit weight, voltage, KVA, and impedance ratings and characteristics, no load core loss, full load winding conductor loss, full load losses, efficiency at 0, 25, 35, 50, 75 and 100 percent rated loads based on IEEE Standard 519-1992 Table 43 for non -linear load profile, percent regulation with 80 percent and 100 percent power factor loads, sound level, tap configurations, insulation system type and rated temperature rise. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Powersmiths International Corp. B. Power Quality International C. Hammond Power Solutions D. G.E. (OEM = Hammond Power Solutions) THREE-PHASE, ENERGY EFFICIENT DRY -TYPE HARMONIC MITIGATING TRANSFORMERS VLK Architects, 2007 26 1216 - 1 2740.00 CREEKVIEW ELEMENTARY SCHOOL COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX 2.02 MATERIALS AND COMPONENTS A. Except as otherwise indicated, provide transformer manufacturer's standard materials and components as indicated by published product information, designed and constructed as recommended, and as required for a complete installation. 2.03 ENERGY EFFICIENT DRY -TYPE HARMONIC MITIGATING TRANSFORMERS A. General: Indoor transformers shall be dry -type, multiple -winding transformers, rated as shown, and shall have manufacturer's standard impedance. B. Construction: Transformer core shall be constructed of cold -rolled, oriented, high permeability silicon steel, either formed as a coil or laminated. Windings shall be copper, individual winding terminated with tin-plated copper bars, or wire electrically welded to the end of the windings. C. Windings: Transformer secondary windings shall be zig-zag (0-degree phase shift). The secondary windings shall provide for magnetic flux cancellation of the zero sequence (triplen) harmonic currents from non -linear loads connected to the transformer secondary. Triplen harmonic currents shall not appear on the current waveform of the transformer primary winding. D. Taps: Transformers 15 to 30 kva shall have two 5% taps, one above and one below normal. Transformers 45 kva and larger shall have four 2-1/2% taps, two above and two below normal. E. Temperature Rating: Transformers shall use an insulation system that has been temperature classified and approved by UL. Transformers shall have a maximum winding temperature rise of 1500C with an insulation system temperature classification of 220°C. F. Accessories: Transformers shall have insulated ground bus, 200% neutral bus, and electrostatic winding shield. G. Load Rating: 1. Transformers shall be capable of operating at 100% of nameplate rating continuously while in an ambient temperature not exceeding 40°C. 2. Transformers shall be capable of meeting the daily overload requirement of ANSI C57.12. H. Vibration Isolation: Each transformer core and coil shall be mounted in the transformer enclosure on rubber vibration isolators. Sound Rating: The transformer shall have sound levels equal to or lower than those ratings established in NEMA ST-20 and as shown in the following table. Sound ratings shall be measured in accordance with ANSI C89.91. Transformer Rating (kva) (600 Volt Class) 0to9 10 to 50 51 to 150 151 to 300 301 to 500 Maximum Sound Level Decibels: NEMA ST-20 40 45 50 55 60 Efficiency: Transformers shall meet the EPA Energy Star energy savings requirement of efficiencies greater than 98% with both linear and non -linear load profiles. Non -linear load THREE-PHASE, ENERGY EFFICIENT DRY -TYPE HARMONIC MITIGATING TRANSFORMERS VLK Architects, 2007 26 1216 - 2 2740.00 CREEKVIEW ELEMENTARY SCHOOL COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX profile based on IEEE Std. 519-1992 Table 4.3 Spectrum of typical switch mode power supplies, or a typical K-13 load profile. K. Impedance - positive and negative sequence: 2.5 — 4.0% (up to 75kVA), 2.3-4.8% (112.5- 300kVA). L. Zero sequence impedance and reactance: Less than 0.95% and 0.3% respectively. M. Testing: 1. The manufacturer shall have tested each transformer for proper operation before shipment. 2. The manufacturer shall have performed the following additional tests on units identical to the design type being supplied. Furnish proof of performance of these tests in the form of test data sheets upon request: a. Sound levels. b. Temperature rise tests. C. Full -load core and winding losses. d. Percent regulation with 80 and 100% power factor load. e. Percent impedance. f. Exciting current. g. Insulation resistance. h. Non -linear load testing efficiency at 0, 25, 35, 50, 75 and 100% load under non -linear load profile based on IEEE Std. 519-1992 Table 4.3. Spectrum of typical switch mode power supplies. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION OF TRANSFORMERS A. General: Install transformers where shown, in accordance with the manufacturer's written instructions and industry practices to ensure that the transformers meet the specifications. Comply with requirements of NEMA and NEC standards, and applicable portions of NECA Standard of Installation, for installation of transformers. Transformers shall be floor mounted. Ceiling mounted transformers are not acceptable unless written permission by Owner/Engineer. B. Dry -Type Transformer Mounting: Indoor, floor mount transformer on properly sized Amber/Booth Type RVD rubber -in -shear vibration isolators. Only where specifically indicated on the plans or approved in writing by the Owner/Engineer, transformers shall be trapeze mounted using properly sized Amber/Booth type BRD rubber -in -shear hangers. Transformer enclosures shall make no contact with wall surfaces. C. Conduit: Conduit directly connected to transformer enclosures shall be flexible liquid tight conduit extending for a minimum of 18-inches and a maximum of 36 inches from transformer enclosure as measured along the conduit centerline. Include a ground wire, size in accordance with NEC, internal in each length of flexible conduit. D. Grounding: Ground and bond transformers as a separately derived system unless noted otherwise, refer to NEC 250. Installation of bonding strap or bonding conductor between ground and neutral bus shall be witnessed by the Engineer prior to applying power and terminating secondary conductors. E. Transformers shall be provided with secondary load neutral conductor rated at 200%. THREE-PHASE, ENERGY EFFICIENT DRY -TYPE HARMONIC MITIGATING TRANSFORMERS VLK Architects, 2007 26 1216 - 3 2740.00 CREEKVIEW ELEMENTARY SCHOOL COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX 3.02 TESTING A. Insulation Tests: Before energizing, check transformer windings for continuity. B. Winding Current: During initial no-load energizing, check current in each primary winding. C. Tap Settings: Measure and record load current and voltage of transformers while loaded to verify proper transformer tap settings. D. Submittals: Furnish instruments and personnel required for tests. Submit four copies of certified test results to Engineer for review. Reports include transformer tested, date and time of tests, relative humidity, temperature, and weather conditions. E. Notification: Notify Engineer in writing of any deviation from manufacturer's pre -shipment test data. END OF SECTION THREE-PHASE, ENERGY EFFICIENT DRY -TYPE HARMONIC MITIGATING TRANSFORMERS VLK Architects, 2007 26 1216 - 4 2740.00 CREEKVIEW ELEMENTARY SCHOOL COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX SECTION 26 2413 - SWITCHBOARDS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Work Included: Switchboard work as shown, scheduled, indicated, and specified. B. Types: Switchboards required for the project include power distribution switchboards. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. UL Labels: Provide switchboards UL labeled for service entrance and meeting requirements of UL 891. . B. NEMA Compliance: Comply with National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA) Standard PB2, "Dead -Front Distribution Switchboards." 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Indicate detailed dimensions for the front and side views. B. Indicate conduit entrance locations and requirements. C. Indicate enclosure material finish and NEMA classification type. D. Indicate nameplate legends. E. Indicate size and number of bus bars and ground; switchboard instrument details. F. Include electrical characteristics including voltage, frame size and trip ratings, withstand ratings, and time current curves of all equipment and components. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Square D 2.02 MATERIALS AND COMPONENTS A. Except as otherwise indicated, provide switchboard manufacturer's standard materials and components as indicated by published product information, designed and constructed as recommended, and as required for a complete installation. 2.03 DEAD -FRONT DISTRIBUTION SWITCHBOARDS A. Provide a factory -assembled, dead -front, NEMA 1 construction, metal enclosed, self supporting, switchboard of voltage, phase, ampacity, and short circuit bracing shown. 1. Switchboard shall consist of the required number of front and rear aligned vertical sections bolted together to form one metal enclosed rigid switchboard. The switchboard shall be designed as a free-standing board with front access. 2. Switchboard shall include protective devices and equipment shown with interconnections, instrumentation, and control wiring. Small wiring, necessary fuse blocks, and terminal blocks in the switchboard shall be furnished. Groups of control wires leaving the switchboard shall be furnished with terminal blocks with numbering strips. SWITCHBOARDS VLK Architects, 2007 26 2413 - 1 2740.00 CREEKVIEW ELEMENTARY SCHOOL COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX B. Enclosure Construction: The switchboard framework shall be fabricated on a die -formed steel base, or base assembly, consisting of formed steel and commercial channel welded or bolted together to support the shipping unit for moving on rollers and floor mounting. The framework shall be formed code gauge steel, welded and bolted together to support cover plates, busing, and component devices during shipment and installation. 1. Each switchboard section shall have an open bottom and individually removable top plates for installation and termination of conduit. Top and bottom conduit areas shall be shown and dimensioned on the shop drawings. Front plates used for mounting meters, selector switches, or other front -mounted devices shall be hinged, with wiring installed and laced, and with flexibility at the hinged side. Closure plates shall be screw removable and small enough for easy handling by one man. 2. Steel surfaces shall be chemically cleaned and treated to provide a bond between paint and metal surfaces to prevent moisture entering and rust forming under the paint film. The paint finish shall be gray powder coat over a rust -inhibiting phosphate primer. C. Busing: The switchboard busing shall be copper, and of sufficient cross -sectional area to continuously conduct rated full load current with a maximum temperature rise of 650C above an ambient temperature of 40°C. 1. The bus bars shall be braced to comply with the integrated equipment rating of the switchboard. The main horizontal bus bars between sections shall be located on the back of the switchboard to permit maximum available conduit area. The horizontal main bus bar supports, connections, and joints shall be bolted or welded, as required, so as not to require periodic maintenance. Bolted joint connections shall have at least two bolts per joint per phase. Half lapped bus joint construction is not acceptable. 2. Buses shall be arranged A-B-C, left -to -right, top -to -bottom, and front -to -rear throughout. A ground bus shall be secured to each vertical section structure and extend the entire length of the switchboard. 3. The main horizontal bus and incoming line shall be isolated and insulated from outgoing busing and cable connections. 4. Where space is shown on one line drawings, space shall be bused to install future switches sized as shown. Each vertical section shall be fully bused. 5. The main horizontal bus shall be non -tapered, fully rated, extended and drilled for future additions and splice plates. 6. Fully insulate load side bus bars at rear accessible compartments. D. Integrated Equipment Rating: Each switchboard, as a complete unit, shall be given a single integrated equipment rating by the manufacturer. The integrated equipment short circuit rating shall certify that equipment is capable of withstanding the stresses of a fault equal to that shown in RMS symmetrical amperes. Ratings shall have been established by actual tests by the manufacturer on similar equipment construction as the subject switchboard. This test data shall be available and furnished, if requested, with or before the submittal of shop drawings. E. Indicating Instruments: Switchboard instrumentation shall be digital display, panel mounted, rated for 120V, 60 hertz. The display unit shall be UL listed in accordance with UL 508. The electronic metering device shall have LED, LCD, or gas plasma output display with the following features: 1. Voltmeter, phase to phase and phase to ground or neutral. 2. Current, per phase RMS and 3 phase coverage. 3. Demand current per phase. 4. Power factor per phase and 3 phase average. 5. Real power, 3 phase total. 6. Reactive power, 3 phase total. - 7. Apparent power, 3 phase total. SWITCHBOARDS VLK Architects, 2007 26 2413 - 2 2740.00 CREEKVIEW ELEMENTARY SCHOOL COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX 8. Frequency. 9. Average demand real power. 10. Adjustable demand interval (5 to 60 minutes). 11. Nonvolatile memory. 12. Password protected set-up and reset. 13. 3 current transformers with primary to match bus size and 5 ampere secondary with metering class accuracy. 14. Full scale readouts with the following accuracy: a. Current and voltage measurement +/-1% b. Power and energy +/-2% C. Frequency +/-0.5% d. Power Factor +/-4% e. Data update time 0.5 seconds(4 wire) 15. Metering Output. a. Pulse output based on kWh, kvarh, or kVAh. b. Analog output 4-20mA based on kWh, kvarh, or kVAh. 16. Monitoring: a. Harmonic analysis through 63`d with THD and TIF. b. Event recorder. C. Waveform capture. d. Data logger. e. Triggered trace memory. 17. Communication: a. Front mounted RS232 port and dual rear mounted RS485 ports. b. ModBus RTU protocol. C. Mini RTU: digital 4 in/4 out. d. Analog 1 in/4 out. e. Local/remote display of all values. 18. Software: a. Windows based software shall be provided to enable setpoint programming. F. The Main Protective Device(s) shall be individually mounted: 1. Molded case circuit breaker shall be the quick -make, quick -break, electronic trip true RMS solid state sensing. Adjustable: current, 6 settings, ground fault (where required), instantaneous trip, and short time trip. Solid state trip, without fusible elements, 100 percent continuous current rating. 2. Circuit breakers 2501-5000A; power circuit breaker type 3. Circuit breakers 40-2500A, extra heavy-duty type 4. Main protective devices rated 1000A and above shall have integral ground fault interrupter with test switch. G. Branch Protective Devices shall be group mounted: 1. Molded case circuit breaker, quick -make, quick -break, thermal magnetic trip, 80 percent continuous current rating. 2. Circuit breakers 2501-5000A, power circuit breaker type. 3. Circuit breakers 40-2500A, extra heavy-duty type. 4. Fusible switches shall be quick -make, quick -break units utilizing the double -break principle of circuit rupturing to minimize arcing and pitting and shall conform to the ratings shown on the plans. a. Each switch shall have an individual door over the front, equipped with a voidable interlock that prevents the door from being opened when the switch is in the ON position unless the interlock is purposely defeated by activation of the voiding mechanism. All switches shall have externally operated handles. Switches shall be equipped with Class R rejection type fuse holders, and Class RK1 and L fuses of ampere rating and type as indicated on the plans suitable for application of the system. SWITCHBOARDS VLK Architects, 2007 26 2413 - 3 2740.00 CREEKVIEW ELEMENTARY SCHOOL COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX H. Ground Fault Protection: Where shown, ground fault protection shall be achieved with adjustable pickup for ground fault currents, field -adjustable from 200 amperes and instantaneous to 60 cycle time delay. The ground fault protection system shall include necessary current sensors, internal wiring, and relays to coordinate opening the monitored faulted circuits. 1. Each ground fault interrupter shall include monitor panel with TEST switch, RESET switch, and ground fault indicator. In the TEST position, the flow of ground fault current shall be simulated through the current sensor to test the complete system, including sensor pick-up, relaying equipment, and trip mechanism. 2. Ground fault protection shall be set at minimum setting for both current and time during construction. The switchboard manufacturer shall include in the submittal data for the switchboard, the minimum setting of the devices and the recommended setting for normal building operation. 3. The ground fault system shall be factory -tested before shipment as specified: a. The switchboard manufacturer shall provide a factory ground fault protection system test for circuit testing and verification of tripping characteristics. The manufacturer shall pass predetermined values of current through the sensors and measure the tripping time for each phase and neutral. The measured time -current relationships shall be compared to the trip - characteristic curves. If the ground fault device trips outside the range of values indicated on the curve, the ground fault device shall be replaced or recalibrated. b. Relays, electrically operated switches, shunt -trip switches, circuit breakers, and similar items shall have proper voltages applied to their circuits and satisfactory operation demonstrated. C. Upon completion of the factory ground fault protection system test, the current and time on each ground fault device shall be set to minimum values. Mimic Bus: Show bussing, connections and devices in single line form on the front panels of the switchboard using red colored plastic strips, fastened flat against the panel face with screws. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION OF SWITCHBOARDS A. Install switchboards where shown, in accordance with the manufacturer's written instructions, and industry practices to ensure that the switchboards meet the specifications. B. Comply with the requirements of NEMA and NEC, and NECA Standard of Installation, for installation of switchboards. C. Torque bus connections and tighten mechanical fasteners. D. Install fuses, of ratings shown, in each switchboard. E. Concrete Pads: Install switchboards on a 4" reinforced concrete housekeeping pad. The housekeeping pad shall extend 3" beyond the housing of the switchboard unless shown otherwise. Switchboard shall be bolted to the housekeeping pad using 3/8" minimum galvanized bolts and anchors on 30" maximum centers. Furnish the exact position of any block outs, dimensions, and location of the housekeeping pads to prevent delay of the concrete work. F. Adjustment: Adjust operating mechanisms for free mechanical movement. Adjust circuit breaker time characteristic curves as directed by the Engineer. SWITCHBOARDS VLK Architects, 2007 26 2413 - 4 2740.00 CREEKVIEW ELEMENTARY SCHOOL COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX G. Indicating Instruments: Provide initial factory start-up and programming. Integrate with the Building Management System for monitoring and logging of peak KVA. 3.02 TESTING A. Pre-Energization Checks: Before energizing, check switchboards for continuous of circuits and for short circuits. B. Switchboard Insulation Resistance Test: Each switchboard bus shall be insulation resistance tested after installation is complete except for line and load side connections. Tests shall be made using Biddle Megger or equivalent test instrument at a voltage of not less than 1000 vDC. Resistance shall be measured from phase -to -phase and from phase -to -ground. Minimum acceptable value for insulation resistance is 2 megohms. C. Ground Fault protection System Test: After completion of construction and before final acceptance testing, the ground fault protection system shall be field-tested and reset to the manufacturer's settings for both current and time by a representative of the manufacturer's engineering service department. After the test, set ground fault to 50 percent of the largest overcurrent device rating in the switchboard. Ground fault setting shall not exceed 1200 amperes. D. Provide thermal infrared scan of switchboard under full load as directed and witnessed by Owner. Provide digital video disc (DVD) documentation with test results for comparison to future test. E. Submittals: Furnish instruments and personnel required for tests. Submit 4 copies of certified test results to the Architect for review. Test reports shall include switchboard tested, date and time of test, relative humidity, temperature, and weather conditions. END OF SECTION SWITCHBOARDS VLK Architects, 2007 26 2413 - 5 2740.00 CREEKVIEW ELEMENTARY SCHOOL COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX SECTION 26 2416 - PANELBOARDS AND ENCLOSURES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Panelboard and enclosure work, including cabinet, as shown, scheduled, indicated, and specified. B. Types: Panelboards and enclosures required for the project include the following: 1. Power distribution panelboards. 2. Lighting and appliance panelboards. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. UL Standards: Panelboards and enclosures shall confirm to all applicable UL standards and shall be UL labeled. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Square D 2.02 MATERIALS AND COMPONENTS A. General: Lighting and appliance panelboards shall be dead -front safety -type equipped with molded case circuit breakers as shown and scheduled. Power distribution panelboards shall be dead -front type equipped with fusible switches or circuit breakers as shown and scheduled. B. Bussing Assembly: Panelboard and power distribution panelboard bussing shall be copper. Bus structure and mains shall have ratings as shown and scheduled. Ratings shall be established by heat rise tests with maximum hot spot temperature on any connector or busbar not to exceed 650C rise above 400C ambient. Heat rise test shall be conducted in accordance with UL 67. The use of conductor dimensions is not accepted in lieu of actual heat tests. Furnish a bare uninsulated ground bus inside each panelboard enclosure. Two section panelboards shall be connected with copper cable, with an ampacity meeting or exceeding the main bus ampacity. Panelboards serving non -linear loads and fed with neutrals greater than 100% shall have 200% neutral bussing and isolated ground bus. C. Circuit Breakers: Circuit breakers shall be molded case, thermal magnetic type equipped with individually insulated, braced, and protected connectors. The front faces of circuit breakers shall be flush with each other. Tripped indication shall be shown by the breaker handle taking a position between ON and OFF. Make prepared space provisions for additional breakers so that no additional connectors will be required to add breakers. Circuit breakers in lighting and appliance panelboards shall have bolt -in breakers. Two and three pole breakers shall have internal common trips. External handle ties will not be accepted. Circuit breakers for distribution panelboards shall have plug -on circuit breakers. 1. Provide lighting and appliance panelboard branch circuit breakers with interrupting capacity as shown, but in no case less than the following symmetrical amperes RMS: PANELBOARDS AND ENCLOSURES VLK Architects, 2007 26 2416 - 1 2740.00 CREEKVIEW ELEMENTARY SCHOOL COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX Voltage (volts) Interrupting Capacity 120/208/240 10,000 AIC 277/480 14,000 AIC 2. Circuit breakers for lighting circuits shall be UL listed switch duty (SWD). 3. Ground fault interrupter (GFI) circuit breakers, where shown, shall be 5 mA ground fault trip and shall include a TEST button. 4. Provide distribution panel circuit breakers with high interrupting capacity, or integral current limiters as shown. Circuit breakers shall have interrupting capacity not less than the following symmetrical amperes RMS: CONVENTIONAL FRAME SIZE/ VOLTAGE INTEGRAL INTERRUPTING CAPACITY 100A/240V 10,000 AIC 225A/240V 25,000 AIC 400A/240V 65,000 AIC 600A/240V 65,000 AIC 800A/240V 65,000 AIC 1000A/240V 65,000 AIC 1200A/240V 65,000 AIC 100A/480V 18,000 AIC 225A/480V 35,000 AIC 400A/480V 35,000 AIC 600A/480V 65,000 AIC 800A/480V 65,000 AIC 1000A/480V 65,000 AIC 1200A/480V 65,000 AIC D. Fusible Switches: Fusible switches shall be quick -make, quick -break type. Each switch shall be enclosed in a separate steel enclosure. The enclosure shall employ a hinged cover for access to the fuses. Interlock cover with the operating handle to prevent opening the cover when the switch is in the ON position. This interlock shall be constructed so that it can be overridden for testing fuses without interrupting service. The switches shall have padlocking provisions in the OFF position. Switches shall include positive pressure rejection type fuse clips for use with UL Class R fuses and be UL labeled for 200,000 AIC. E. Spaces: Where space for future breakers or switches is shown, panelboard enclosure shall include removable blank panels or knockouts to allow installation of future breakers or switches, prepared spaces, and panelboard busing shall be complete, including required connectors. F. Integrated Equipment Rating: Each panelboard, as a complete unit, shall have a short- circuit rating equal or greater than the available short circuit current. Rating shall have been established by tests on similar panelboards with the circuit breakers or fusible switches installed. Series rated panelboards and their protective upstream devices shall be labeled as required by the NEC. G. Panelboard Enclosures: Provide sheet steel enclosures, minimum 16-gauge nominal thickness, with multiple knockouts, unless shown otherwise. Provide all panelboard fronts with piano hinged door in hinged trim to box, spring -loaded door pulls, and flush lock and PANELBOARDS AND ENCLOSURES VLK Architects, 2007 26 2416 - 2 2740.00 CREEKVIEW ELEMENTARY SCHOOL COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX key, panelboard enclosures keyed alike to match the Owner's standard key system; coordinate with Owner. Equip with interior circuit directory frame, card, and clear plastic covering for lighting and appliance panelboards. Provide gray powder coat finish over a rust inhibitor. Panelboards located in kitchen preparation or natatorium areas shall have stainless steel door and trim (NEMA 1). Enclosures at exterior locations shall be NEMA 4X. Enclosure shall be for recessed or surface mounting as shown. Enclosures shall be fabricated by the same manufacturer as panelboards to be enclosed. Multi -section panelboards shall have same physical dimensions. PART 3 - EXECUTION - 3.01 INSTALLATION OF PANELBOARDS AND ENCLOSURES A. General: Install panelboards and enclosures, as shown, including electrical connections, in accordance with the manufacturer's written instructions, the requirements of NEC, NECA Standard of Installation, and industry practices. B. Coordination: Coordinate installation of panelboards and enclosures with conductor and raceways installation work. C. Anchoring: Anchor enclosures to walls and structural surfaces ensuring that they are permanently and mechanically secured. D. Directory Card: Provide a typed circuit directory card(s) upon completion of work. Directory card shall be of super heavy -weight index card stock, 110 lb, white. Directory shall include type of load (ie: receptacles, lighting, exhaust fan, etc.) and location (ie: Room 102, Gymnasium, etc.) Room number shall be identified as the actual graphics room number assigned to the space and not the room number identified on the Plans. Circuits with shunt trip shall be identified with the control circuit operating the shunt trip (ie: Kitchen Hood No. 2). Shunt trip breakers with common trip circuit shall be grouped in the panelboard (ie: circuits 1, 3, 5 and 7). E. Fuses: Install fuses, of the ratings and class shown, in each power distribution and motor control panelboard. F. Circuit Arrangement: Arrange branch circuit connections to 3-phase lighting and appliance panelboards so that when two or three circuits are run with a common neutral, each circuit is connected to a different phase unless shown otherwise. Branch circuits shall be connected to the circuit breakers in the lighting and appliance panelboard to provide the best possible phase balance, unless shown otherwise. G. Spare Conduits: Provide (3) 1-inch and (3) 3/4-inch spare conduits capped to 6-inches above accessible ceiling space and (3) 1-inch and (3) 3/4-inch conduits capped down to. ceiling space on floor below for all recessed lighting and appliance panelboards and all lighting and appliance panelboards located above ground floor. H. Arrange each phase conductor to enter each circuit breaker or fuse switch at a 90- degree angle. Conductors shall be bent neatly opposite the fuse or circuit breaker to which they are to be attached. Vertically installed conductors should be neatly tie - wrapped. Conductors shall be connected in a neat and professional manner. Provide excess wire in panelboard for each circuit. Conductors brought in from the top or bottom of the cabinet shall be bent neatly opposite the fuse or circuit breaker to which they are to be attached. Excess conductor length shall be equal to the height plus the width of the cabinet. Each conductor shall be run along the panel and looped back 180 degrees before being connected to its fuse or circuit breaker. Panelboard shall be cleaned of all construction debris prior to substantial completion review. Neutral and grounding PANELBOARDS AND ENCLOSURES VLK Architects, 2007 26 2416 - 3 2740.00 CREEKVIEW ELEMENTARY SCHOOL COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX conductors shall be installed similar to the phase conductors except omit the excess wire length. I. Circuit breakers and conductors installed for TVSS devices shall be located at the top or bottom of the panelboard in respect to the location of the TVSS device. Route all conductors to the TVSS device using long sweep bends and the shortest conductor length possible. J. Install ground bus for ground conductors. Ground conductors size #1 and larger are to be landed to can with mechanical lugs and not to ground buss. K. Install panels so that breaker number 1 is the top left breaker. Panel interiors shall not be installed where breaker number 1 is the bottom right breaker. L. In panels that contain multi -layered neutral bus install neutrals beginning with the back neutral bus row and work forward. Do not make up neutrals on front neutral bus row unless all other rows are full. M. Label breaker mounting space with stick -on number labels. 3.02 TESTING A. Before energizing, energization, check for continuity of circuits and short circuits. END OF SECTION PANELBOARDS AND ENCLOSURES VLK Architects, 2007 26 2416 - 4 2740.00 CREEKVIEW ELEMENTARY SCHOOL COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX SECTION 26 2425 - ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Safety and disconnect switch work where required, scheduled, indicated, and specified. B. UL Approved: Safety and disconnect switches shall have UL approval and the UL label. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Square D 2.02 ENCLOSED SWITCHES A. General: Provide heavy duty type, dead -front, sheet steel enclosed, surface -mounted safety switches of the type and size indicated. Safety switches shall be rated for the voltage of the circuit where they are installed. Safety switches used as motor disconnects shall be horsepower rated for the motor served. B. Switch Mechanism: 1. Safety switches shall be quick -make, quick -break type with permanently attached arc suppressor. Constructed so that switch blades are visible in the OFF position with the door open. The operating handle shall be an integral part of the box, not the cover. Switch shall have provision to padlock in the OFF position. Safety switches shall have a cover interlock to prevent unauthorized opening of the switch door when the switch mechanism is in the ON position, or closing of the switch mechanism when the switch door is open. 2. Cover interlock shall have an override mechanism to permit switch inspection by authorized personnel. Current -carrying parts shall be constructed of high conductivity copper with silver-plated switch contacts. Lugs shall be suitable for copper conductors and front removable. C. • Fusing: Provide fusible safety switches where required or indicated. Fuse clips shall be positive pressure rejection type fuse clips suitable for use with UL Class R or Class J fuses. D. Neutral: Provide safety switches with number of switched poles indicated. Where a neutral is present in the circuit, provide a solid neutral with the safety switch. Where a ground conductor is present in the circuit, provide a separate solid ground with the safety switch. 2.03 ENCLOSED CIRCUIT BREAKERS A. Molded -Case Circuit Breaker: NEMA AB 1, with interrupting capacity to meet available fault currents. 1. Thermal -Magnetic Circuit Breakers: Inverse time -current element for low-level overloads, and instantaneous magnetic trip element for short circuits. Adjustable magnetic trip setting for circuit -breaker frame sizes 250A and larger. 2. Adjustable Instantaneous -Trip Circuit Breakers: Magnetic trip element with front - mounted, field -adjustable trip setting. 3. Electronic Trip Unit Circuit Breakers: RMS sensing; field -replaceable rating plug; with the following field -adjustable settings: ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS VLK Architects, 2007 26 2425 - 1 2740.00 CREEKVIEW ELEMENTARY SCHOOL COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX a. Instantaneous trip b. Long -and short -time pickup levels. C. Long -and Short -time time adjustments. d. Ground -fault pickup level, time delay and 12t response B. Molded -Case Circuit Breaker Features and Accessories: Standard frame izes, trip ratings and number of poles. 1. Lugs: Mechanical style suitable for number, size, trip ratings and material of conductors. 2. Application Listing: Appropriate for application; Type SWD for switching fluorescent lighting loads; Type HACR for heating, air-conditioning, and refrigerating equipment. 2.04. ENCLOSURES A. Enclosures in indoor locations shall be NEMA 1 heavy duty enclosures unless shown otherwise. B. Enclosures in exterior locations shall be NEMA 4X stainless steel, heavy duty. C. Enclosures at kitchen and food preparation locations, hose down areas, cooling towers, and in other corrosive areas shall be NEMA 4X, stainless steel. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. General: Install safety and disconnect switches where required or indicated, in accordance with the manufacturer's written instructions, requirements of the NEC, NECA Standard of Installation, and industry practices. Provide fuse identification label showing type and size inside door of each switch. Include devices in coordination study to indicate overcurrent devices will selectively coordinate. B. Location: Provide safety switches where shown and at each motor out of sight of, or more than 50' from the switch or panel from which the motor circuit is fed. C. Supports: Provide all safety and disconnect switches with galvanized angle or other supports where mounting on wall or other rigid surface is impractical. Switches shall not be supported by conduit alone. Where safety and disconnect switches are mounted on equipment served, the switch shall not inhibit removal of service panels or interfere with access areas. Provide mounting hardware that will allow removal of safety and disconnect switches. Do not utilize drive pin anchors through enclosure. D. Safety and Disconnect Switches: Install disconnect switches used with motor -driven appliances, motors and controllers within sight of the controller position unless indicated otherwise. E. Coordination: Coordinate safety and disconnect switch installation work with electrical raceway and cable work as necessary for interface. F. Variable Frequency Drive (VFD) Warning Plaque: Yellow -White -Yellow 3-layer laminated plastic engraved plaque 'WARNING" (1/2 Inch Letters). "TURN OFF VFD BEFORE OPENING THIS SWITCH FOR MAINTENANCE." (1/4 inch letters). Provide VFD warning plaque at safety disconnect switches which are located down -stream of VFDs. Secure plaque to disconnect switch or immediately adjacent to disconnect switch with fasteners. ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS VLK Architects, 2007 26 2425 - 2 2740.00 CREEKVIEW ELEMENTARY SCHOOL COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX G. Provide disconnect switch for all electric duct heaters. 3.02 TESTING A. General: Before energizing, check for continuity of circuits and short circuits. END OF SECTION ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS VLK Architects, 2007 26 2425 - 3 2740.00 CREEKVIEW ELEMENTARY SCHOOL COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX SECTION 26 2430 - FUSES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Fuse work as shown and scheduled, and as specified. B. Types: Fuses required for the project include the following: 1. 250 volt current limiting fuses. 2. 600 volt current limiting fuses. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Provide products produced by Bussman. 2.02 CURRENT LIMITING FUSES - 600 VOLTS AND LESS A. General: Provide 200,000 amperes interrupting capacity (AIC) current -limiting fuses of the current ratings shown and voltage rating equal to or greater than the voltage at the point of application. B. Types: 1. Fuses in circuits supplying individual motors, groups of motors, or loads including motors, 600 amperes or less, shall be UL Class RK1 or Class J, time delay fuses, Bussman LPS-RK (600V) LPJ-SP (600V), LPN-RK (250V), or Gould A60 (600V), A2D (250V). 2. Fuses in circuits supplying individual motors, groups of motors, or loads including motors, 601 to 4000 amperes, shall be UL Class L time delay fuses, Bussman KRPC "HI -CAP", or Gould A413Q. 3. Fuses in circuits supplying other than motor loads, 600 amperes or less, shall be UL Class RK1, time delay fuses, Bussman LPS-RK (600V), LPN-RK (250V), or Gould A61) (600V), A213 (250V). 4. Fuses supplying transient voltage surge suppressor devices (TVSS) shall be surge rated for use with TVSS devices. 2.03 SPARE FUSES A. General: Provide spare fuses in the amount of 10% of each type and size installed, but not less than 3 spares of a specific size and type. Deliver to the Owner at the time of project acceptance. Fuses shall be encased in a labeled steel enclosure with padlock provision, to be wall mounted where directed. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. General: Install fuses in fuse holders immediately before energizing of the circuit where the fuses are installed. Fuses shall not be installed and shipped with equipment. B. Labels: Place fuse identification labels, showing fuse size and type installed, inside the cover of each switch. END OF SECTION FUSES VLK Architects, 2007 26 2430 - 1 2740.00 CREEKVIEW ELEMENTARY SCHOOL COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX SECTION 26 2773 - WIRING DEVICES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Provide wiring device work as shown, scheduled, indicated, and specified. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. UL Label: Wiring devices shall be UL labeled. B. NEMA Standard WD1. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit a sample of each style and color of 120V, 20A duplex receptacle and each 120/277V switch with related cover plate. Attach plate to wiring device and label back side of plate with job description with permanent black marker. B. Submit manufacturer's product data sheet for each style of device and plate on the project. C. Submit drawings of plans, elevation and sections of receptacles and outlets in casework, cabinetwork and built-in place furniture. Coordinate dimensions with millwork shop drawings and related architectural drawing series. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Leviton, Mfg. Co., Inc. B. Pass and Seymour, Inc. C. Hubbell, Inc. D. Cooper E. Lutron, Inc. (Dimming) 2.02 WIRING DEVICE COLOR A. Device color shall be gray except 20A, 125V receptacles which are directly supplied from an emergency source shall be red. Provide equivalent hospital grade devices where red is not available in grade specified. Verify with Architect prior to submitting for approval. 2.03 RECEPTACLES A. Industrial grade receptacles, 2 pole, 3 wire grounding, with green hexagonal equipment ground screw, ground terminals and poles internally connected to mounting yoke, with metal mounting straps, back and side wired with screw type terminals, molded phenolic compound, NEMA configuration indicated. 1. 20A, 125V grounded duplex NEMA #5-20R: Leviton #5362X 2. 20A, 125V isolated ground duplex NEMA #5-20R: Leviton #5362-IGX WIRING DEVICES VLK Architects, 2007 26 2773 - 1 2740.00 CREEKVIEW ELEMENTARY SCHOOL COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX 3. 20A, 125V ground fault circuit interruption (GFCI) NEMA #5-20R: Leviton #8898- HGX B. Heavy -Duty Simplex: Single heavy-duty type receptacles, with green hexagonal equipment ground screw, with metal mounting straps, back wiring, black molded phenolic compound, NEMA configuration as indicated. 1. 30A, 125V grounded single NEMA #5-30R: Leviton #5371 with #80728X cover plate. 2. 30A, 250V, grounded, 3-wire, 2-pole NEMA #6-30R: Leviton #5372 with #80728X cover plate or weatherproof cover plate. 3. 20A, 125/250V, grounded, 4-wire, 3-pole NEMA #14-20R: Hubbell #8410 with Leviton #84004-40 cover plate. 4. 20A, 125V, grounded, NEMA 5-20R, Leviton #5801 W with Leviton #84004-40 cover plate. C. Hospital grade receptacles, 2 pole, 3 wire grounding, with green hexagonal equipment ground screw, ground terminals and poles internally connected to mounting yoke, with metal mount straps, back and side wired with screw type terminals, molded phenolic compound, NEMA configuration indicated. 1. 20A, 125V grounded duplex NEMA #5-20R: Leviton #8300-X 2. 20A, 125V isolated ground duplex NEMA #5-20R: Leviton #8300-LIG (orange) 3. 20A, 125V ground fault circuit interruption (GFCI) with indicator light: Leviton NEMA 5-20R-8898-HGX 4. 20A/125V Tamper Resistant Duplex NEMA 5-20R: Leviton 8300-SGX 2.04 WALL SWITCHES A. Toggle: Specification grade flush toggle switches, with mounting yoke insulated from mechanism, equipped with plaster ears, switch handle, back and side -wired screw terminals. 1. Single -pole, 120/277V, 20A switch: Leviton #1221-2X 2. Double Pole 120/277V, 20A switch: Leviton #1222-2X 3. Three-way, 120/277V, 20A switch: Leviton #1223-2X 4. Four-way, 120/277V, 20A switch: Leviton #1224-2G 5. Single -pole, 120/277V, 20A switch, red pilot light: Leviton #1221-PL 6. Rotary key operated switch. a. Single -pole, 120/277V, 20A key operated switch: Leviton #1221-2KL b. Two -pole, 120/277, 20A key operated, Leviton #1222-2KL. C. Three-way, 120/277V, 20A key operated switch: Leviton #1223-2KL d. Four-way, 120/277V, 20A key operated switch: Leviton #1224-2KL e. Key switches shall be all keyed alike to match the Owner's standard key system. Coordinate with Owner. 2.05 WALL DIMMERS A. Wall Box Dimmers: Self-contained, wall box mounted, linear slide square law dimmers with a positive OFF position at the end of travel. Dimmers shall operate continuously at rated load in an ambient temperature up to 400C and an input of 100 to 130V. 1. Single -pole, 120V, 1000 watt incandescent: Lutron #N-1000-X. 2. Single -pole, 120V, 2000 watt: Lutron #N-2000-X. 3. Single -pole, 120V, 16A for Lutron Electronic Dimming Ballast, Lutron #NF-10-X. 4. Single -pole, 277V, 8A for Lutron Electronic Dimming Ballast, #NF-10-277. 5. Three way, four way, Lutron to match above. WIRING DEVICES VLK Architects, 2007 26 2773 - 2 2740.00 CREEKVIEW ELEMENTARY SCHOOL COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX 2.06 GFCI —GROUND FAULT CIRCUIT INTERRUPTER, BLANK FACE A. 20A, 125V, GFCI, switch rated, blank face feed through with circuit lock -out, Leviton only: Leviton #8590-w 2.07 INTERIOR WALL COVER PLATES A. Satin finish Type 302 stainless steel only 1. Type 302 stainless steel screws satin finish. 2.08 EXTERIOR COVER PLATES A. Refer to Specification 26 0537 - Electrical Boxes and Fittings B. Heat trace or other loads continuously plugged in outdoors: Provide Crouse -Hinds W RLD-1 cover. Install round plug on cord supplied with heat trace or other equipment to match weatherproof bushing on receptacle cover. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. All wiring devices for receptacles and wall switches shall be of the same manufacturer throughout unless otherwise noted. 1. Lutron dimming controls shall be used with Lutron dimming electronic ballast. 2. Key switches shall be as specified and as approved by Owner. 3. Submit color sample for each specified color to Architect. B. Install wiring devices where shown, in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions, requirements of NEC, and in accordance with industry practices. Do not install devices until wall construction and wiring is completed. C. Install receptacles and switches only in electrical boxes that are clean, free from excess building materials, debris, and similar matter. D. Install wiring devices plumb and aligned in the plane of the wall, floor, or ceiling in where they are installed. E. Install switches in boxes on the strike side of doors as hung. Install a uniform position so the same direction will open and close the circuit throughout the project. Where more than one switch is in the same location, install switches in a multi -gang box with a single cover plate. F. Provide a plate for every receptacle, switch, telephone outlet and other wiring devices. Fasten all plates outdoors with type 302 Allen Head "tamper -proof" screws. G. Mounting heights of all wiring devices shall comply with current Accessibility Standards and local codes. H. Provide tamper resistant receptacles protected upstream by switch rated, GFCI blank face feed through device in all child day care, pre -kindergarten and similar -areas designated for occupancy by pre-K or child day care occupants. I. Refer to Architectural drawing, elevations, etc. for exact location of wiring devices where indicated on the Architectural plans. Coordinate location of all wiring devices with other WIRING DEVICES VLK Architects, 2007 26 2773 - 3 2740.00 CREEKVIEW ELEMENTARY SCHOOL COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX specialty items and millwork and avoid conflicts. Coordinate with all trades to avoid conflicts during construction. J. Locate receptacles for electric water coolers so that the receptacle is accessible and concealed as much as practical from public view. K. Provide weatherproof NEMA 3R, GFCI, 20A, 125V duplex receptacles outdoors where indicated and within 25' of all new electrically operated equipment mounted outdoors and on roofs. L. Provide GFCI, 20A, 125V duplex receptacles at all receptacle locations indicated on drawings in mechanical rooms, electrical rooms, custodial rooms, instructional food preparation areas, science prep and science room work counters, kitchen and food preparation areas, and all locations where receptacles indicated are within six feet of water sources, sinks, lavatories, faucets, eyewash locations and mop sinks. M. Install wall box dimmers to achieve full rating specified and indicated after de -rating for ganging as instructed by manufacturer. N. Do not share neutral conductor on dimming circuits. O. Install receptacles with grounding pole as directed by Owner. If installed horizontally, install with neutral on top. P. Connect wiring device grounding terminal to branch circuit equipment grounding conductor. Q. Connect wiring devices by wrapping ground conductor around screw terminal or lug. Provide pigtail to each receptacle and each switch. Neutral and phase conductors shall be installed using side or rear entry lugs only. Do not wrap conductors around screw terminals. Tighten all screws and lugs as recommended by manufacturer. R. Provide nameplate engraving for emergency outlets at locations indicating panelboard and circuit number. S. All receptacles and switches shall have a minimum of two wraps of Scotch 33 or equivalent tape around terminal screws. T. Provide disconnect toggle switch within sight of all trap primers, circulation pumps, 120 volt motors and motorized equipment. 3.02 TESTING A. Before energizing, check for continuity of circuits, short circuits, and grounding connections. After energizing, check wiring devices to demonstrate proper operation and receptacles for correct polarization. Test GFCI receptacle operation with simulated ground fault tester. B. Operate each wall switch with circuit energized and verify proper operation. C. Verify that each receptacle device is energized. D. Test each receptacle device for proper polarity. E. Test each GFCI receptacle device for proper operation. END OF SECTION WIRING DEVICES VLK Architects, 2007 26 2773 - 4 2740.00 CREEKVIEW ELEMENTARY SCHOOL COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX SECTION 26 2913 - COMBINATION MOTOR CONTROLLERS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Motor controller work as required, scheduled and specified. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Square D 2.02 MOTOR CONTROLLERS A. General: Combination motor controllers shall consist of an integrally mounted, thermal magnetic or magnetic only circuit breaker disconnect or disconnect switch as specified in Section 16170; magnetic, full voltage non -reversing (FVNR) or two speed controller as required, in a heavy duty type, dead front enclosure, surface -mounted; size and number of poles as required. Controllers shall be constructed and tested in accordance with NEMA Standards. Refer to Division 23 for Variable Frequency Inverter furnished by Division 23, installed by Division 26. B. Contacts: Magnetic controller contacts shall be silver alloy, and not require any filing, dressing, or cleaning for the life of the controller. C. Operating Coils: Operating coils shall be 120V, pressure molded and designed so that accidental exposure to excessive voltage up to 480V will not damage the coil. Design controller so that when a coil fails due to over voltage, the controller shall open, and not freeze in the closed position. D. Overload Relays: Controllers shall have manual -reset, trip -free, solid state, overload relays in each phase conductor. Three phase FVNR controllers shall have three overload relays. Single-phase FVNR controllers shall have an overload relay in each ungrounded conductor. Two speed, full -voltage magnetic controllers shall have overload relays for all six ungrounded conductors. Overload relays shall not be field -convertible from manual to automatic reset. Provide reset button located in front cover to reset all overload relays. E. LED Pilot Lights: Provide 30.5mm run and stop pilot lights for all motor controllers. Furnish additional pilot lights for motor controllers as shown. Provide FAST and SLOW pilot lights for two -speed controllers. Pilot lights shall be mounted in the controller enclosure cover. Pilot lights shall be operated from an interlock on the motor controllers, and not be wired across the operating coil. Green - Stop Red - Run Yellow - Slow Blue - Fast F. Controls: Controllers shall have 30.5mm HAND -OFF -AUTOMATIC switches. Provide for FAST -SLOW, REMOTE -LOCAL speed selection from HVAC control system for two -speed controllers. Two -speed controllers shall have deceleration relays between fast and slow speeds. Coordinate motor controller controls with the requirements of Division 23. Motor controller controls shall be mounted in the controller enclosure cover. G. Control Power: A single phase control power transformer shall be included with each controller for 120V control power. The primary shall be connected to the line side of the motor COMBINATION MOTOR CONTROLLERS VLK Architects, 2007 26 2913 - 1 2740.00 CREEKVIEW ELEMENTARY SCHOOL COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX controller through two fuses; the secondary shall have one leg fused and one leg grounded. Arrange transformer terminals so that wiring to terminals is not located above the transformer. H. Auxiliary Contacts: Each controller shall have two normally open and two normally closed nonconvertible auxiliary contact in addition to the number of contacts required for the holding interlock and control wiring. One or more additional auxiliary contacts can be field installed without removing existing wiring, or removing the controller from its enclosure. Phase Failure Monitors: Provide a 3 phase failure monitor for each motor controller. Monitor on any or all phases, for phase reversal from A-B-C sequence, under/over voltage, and phase failure. Provide adjustable relay for trip range. Provide automatic reset upon restoration of power to all phases. Where solid state overload relays provide this specified requirement, separate phase failure relays may be omitted. J. Unit Wiring: Unit shall be completely pre -wired to terminals to eliminate any interior field wiring except for: connection of power supply conductors to switch line side terminals; motor leads to the controller load side terminals; and control conductors to holding coil terminals. K. Enclosure: 1. Motor Controllers installed in indoor locations shall be NEMA 1 heavy duty enclosures unless shown otherwise. 2. Motor Controllers installed at kitchen and food preparation locations, hose down areas, cooling towers, exterior locations, and in other corrosive areas shall be NEMA 4X, stainless steel. L. Minimum interrupting rating shall be 35KAIC. 2.03 MANUAL MOTOR CONTROLLERS A. General: Manual motor controllers shall consist of an integral controller and overload protection in a common enclosure, surface mounted. Size and number of poles shall be as shown and required with pilot light. B. Manual Motor Controller: Manual motor controller with overload protection, 1 HP maximum, 115 or 230V; General Electric Model #CK101Y1-(1) Pole, CR101H1-(2) Pole; General Electric Model #CR101Y11-(1) Pole, with pilot light, CR101H11-(2) Pole; with pilot light. C. Enclosures: 1. Manual motor controllers installed in indoor locations shall be NEMA 1 heavy duty enclosures unless shown otherwise. 2. Manual motor controllers installed at kitchen and food preparation locations, hose down areas, cooling towers, exterior locations, and in other corrosive areas shall be NEMA 4X, stainless steel. D. Disconnect Switch: For self -protected motors where one pole toggle motor control switch is allowed, the switch shall be horsepower rated and as specified for toggle switches in Section 16140. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION OF MOTOR CONTROLLERS A. General: Install combination motor controllers where required or indicated and in accordance with the manufacturer's written instructions, requirements of the NEC and NECA Standard of Installation, and industry practices. COMBINATION MOTOR CONTROLLERS VLK Architects, 2007 26 2913 - 2 2740.00 CREEKVIEW ELEMENTARY SCHOOL COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX B. Overloads: Install overload relays with manual reset in each phase of motor controller. Overload adjustable settings shall be based on actual motor nameplate full load amps. Field verify nameplate full load amps and adjust all relay settings accordingly. C. Phase Failure Relay: Adjust phase failure relay to 10 percent over voltage and 10 percent under voltage. D. Coordination: Motor controllers shall be provided to coordinate with motors furnished by Division 23. Motor controller controls shall be provided to coordinate with controls specified in Division 23. E. Supports: Provide individual and combination motor controllers with galvanized angle or other suitable supports if mounting on wall or other rigid surface is impractical. Controllers shall not be supported by conduit alone. Where motor controllers are mounted on equipment served, the switch shall not inhibit removal of any service panels or interfere with any required access areas. Manual motor controllers shall be installed plumb and aligned in the plane of the wall where they are installed. F. Identify each motor controller as specified in Section 26 0500. G. Where motor controllers are indicated to be installed as part of a Motor Control Center, refer to the Motor Control Center specification. 3.02 TESTING A. Pre-Energization Check: Check motor controllers for continuous circuits and short circuits. B. Post Hook -Up Test: After wire and cable hook-ups, energize motor controller to show it functions as specified. END OF SECTION COMBINATION MOTOR CONTROLLERS VLK Architects, 2007 26 2913 - 3 2740.00 CREEKVIEW ELEMENTARY SCHOOL COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX SECTION 26 4300 - TRANSIENT VOLTAGE SURGE SUPPRESSION AND FILTERING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Hybrid high-energy suppression filter system that integrates transient voltage surge suppression (TVSS) with high -frequency electrical line noise filtering. The unit shall be connected in parallel with the facility's wiring system. The unit shall be manufactured in the USA by a qualified manufacturer of suppression filter system equipment, which has been engaged in the commercial design and manufacture of such products for a minimum of five years. 1.02 CODES AND STANDARDS A. The specified unit shall be designed, manufactured, tested, and installed in compliance with the following standards: 1. American National Standards Institute and Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (ANSI/IEEE C62.41-2002 and C62.45-2002). 2. Federal Information Processing Standards Publication 94 (FIPS PUB 94). 3. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA), Standard LS-1-1992. 4. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA 70 (NEC), 75, and 78). 5. Underwriters Laboratories (UL 1449, 2"d Edition 2005). 6. UL 1283 — Electromagnetic Interference Filters 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Provide detailed compliance or exception statements to all provisions of this specification. Additionally, manufacturers shall submit independent test data from , a nationally recognized testing laboratory verifying the following. Failure to do so will result in product disapproval. 1. Life cycle testing. 2. Overcurrent protection, when specified. 3. UL 1449 2ND Edition TVSS ratings, with UL test report file number. 4. Noise Attenuation, NEMA LS-1, 1992 5. Single Impulse Surge Current Capacity, ANSI/IEE C62.41-1991 Standards UL 1449 Suppressed Voltage Ratings. 6. End of life mode testing, minimum repetitive surge current capacity testing based on ANSI/IEEE C62.45 —1987 Standards. 7. NEMA Standard LS-1-1992 testing data and unit performance ratings. 8. Blank copy of Factory start-up and diagnostic test report to be included in the Electrical Operations and Maintenance Manual. 9. Line by line specification review indicating compliance or deviation. Deviation shall include full description of the deviation. 10. Documentation of UL 1449 Short Circuit Ratings PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Current Technology B. Liebert C. LEA D. Square D TRANSIENT VOLTAGE SURGE SUPPRESSION AND FILTERING VLK Architects, 2007 26 4300 - 1 2740.00 CREEKVIEW ELEMENTARY SCHOOL COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX 2.02 TVSS DEVICES A. The nominal unit operating voltage and configuration shall be equivalent to the system for which the unit is connected. B. The maximum continuous operating voltage (MCOV) of all suppression components utilized in the unit shall not be less than 115% on 277V systems and 125% on 120V systems of the facility's nominal operating voltage. C. Tested Single -Pulse Surge Current Capacity. Based on ANSI/IEEE C62.41-2002's Category C3 current waveform, and in accordance with NEMA Publication #LS 1-1992, the tested single -pulse surge current capacity, in amps, of the unit shall be no less than as follows: 1. Lowest Exposure (EGPE2-80-L1)(LGPE 80) Mode of Protection L-L L-N L-G N-G Tested Single Pulse Surge Current Amps 80,000 80,000 80,000 80,000 2. Medium Exposure (TG125-L1-DM)(S1025) Mode of Protection L-L L-N L-G N-G Tested Single Pulse Surge Current Amps 125,000 125,000 125,000 125,000 3 Hi h Exposure TG200-Li -DM SI040 Mode of Protection L-L L-N L-G N-G Tested Single Pulse Surge Current 2.00,000 200,000 200,000 200,000 D. NEMA LS-1-1992 Unit Performance Ratings. The unit's published performance ratings shall be the UL 1449 2"d Edition listed suppression ratings. The suppression rating for Ringwaves or Combination Waves shall be, for each mode of protection as follows: 1. Lowest Ex osure EGPE2-80-L1 LGPE 80 Nominal System L-N L-G N-G L-L Voltage UL/133 UL/B3 UL/133 UL/B3 120/208/240 400/300 400/400 400/325 700/425 277/480 800/500 1000/825 600/650 1500/700 2. Medium Exposure (TG125-L1-DM)(SI025) Nominal System L-N L-G N-G L-L Voltage UL/B3+C1 UL/B3+C1 UL/B3+C1 UL/B3+C1 120/208/240 400/425 400/425 400/425 800/825 277/480 800/850 800/850 600/850 1500/1650 3. High Exposure (TG200-L1-DM)(SI040) Nominal System L-N L-G N-G L-L Voltage UL/C3 UL/C3 UL/C3 UL/C3 120/208/240 400/750 400/800 400/700 800/1200 277/480 800/1150 800/1175 1000/1050 1500/2100 TRANSIENT VOLTAGE SURGE SUPPRESSION AND FILTERING VLK Architects, 2007 26 4300 - 2 2740.00 CREEKVIEW ELEMENTARY SCHOOL COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX E. Life Expectancy Testing: The unit shall be life -cycle tested to protect against and survive at least 15,000 ANSI/IEEE C62.41-2002 and C62.45-2002 Category C3 biwave (20kv,10kA) surges without failing or degrading the UL 1449 Surge Suppression Rating by more than 10%. F. Internal Impedance. The unit shall provide a path of extremely low impedance and shall not utilize printed circuit boards, quick type disconnects or small gauge wire in the surge current diversion path. All internal paths shall be low impedance copper conductor or copper bus bar. G. High Frequency Extended Range Tracking Filter. The unit shall include a high frequency extended range tracking filter and shall be UL 1283 listed as an Electromagnetic Interference Filter. H. Field Connections. The unit shall include mechanical lugs for each phase, neutral and ground, if applicable. Enclosure. Panelboard EGPE2/LGPE extension series shall be NEMA 1. TG series units shall be provided in a NEMA 4 enclosure. Unit Status Indicators. The unit shall include solid state, long life, LED visual status indicators that monitor the on-line status of each phase of the unit, dry contacts for remote monitoring and audible alarm. K. Units other than panel board extensions shall have internal fused disconnects. L. UL 1449 Short Circuit Rating shall be 200 KAIC minimum. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 FIELD INSTALLATION A. The unit shall be installed as close as practical to the facility's wiring system in accordance- with applicable national/local electrical codes and the manufacturer's recommended installation instructions. Connection shall not be any longer than necessary, avoiding unnecessary bends. Minimum wire size and overcurrent protection shall be provided and as indicated or recommended by the manufacturer. B. TVSS units specified for lighting and appliance panel boards shall be integral mounted or mounted directly above or below the first section of the panel board it is protecting. Any other mounting location will not be acceptable and shall be corrected, without exception, at no additional cost to the Owner. C. TVSS units specified power distribution panelboards or switchboards shall be mounted directly above or adjacent to the power distribution panelboard or switchboard using unistrut supports secured to structure as required. Conduit length between power distribution panelboard or switchboard shall be less than six -inches. D. Overcurrent device and conductors for TVSS devices shall be the maximum recommended by the manufacturer. Manufacturer's recommendations shall prevail over the information given in the plans and specifications. 3.02 TESTING A. Factory Trained Representative shall provide start-up to include initial verification of proper installation and initiate factory warranty. A copy of the Factory diagnostic test report and written approval of the installation shall be included with the Electrical TRANSIENT VOLTAGE SURGE SUPPRESSION AND FILTERING VLK Architects, 2007 26 4300 - 3 2740.00 CREEKVIEW ELEMENTARY SCHOOL COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX Operating and Maintenance Manual. The Contractor shall make all adjustments, changes, corrections, etc. as required by the Factory Trained Representative so that the installation is in compliance with the manufacturer's installation and operation instructions without additional charge to the Owner. 3.03 WARRANTY A. The manufacturer shall provide a Limited Ten -Year on site warranty for parts and labor from date of substantial completion against failure when installed in compliance with applicable national/local electrical codes and the manufacturer's Installation, Operation and Maintenance Instructions. END OF SECTION TRANSIENT VOLTAGE SURGE SUPPRESSION AND FILTERING VLK Architects, 2007 26 4300 - 4 2740.00 CREEKVIEW ELEMENTARY SCHOOL COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX SECTION 26 5113 - LIGHTING FIXTURES AND LAMPS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Work Included: Lighting fixture work is as shown, scheduled and specified. B. Applications: The applications of lighting fixtures required for the project include the following: 1. General lighting 2. Emergency lighting 3. Outdoor area lighting 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. CBM Label: Provide fluorescent ballasts that comply with Certified Ballast Manufacturers Association (CBM) standards and carry the CBM mark on the label. B. UL Standards: Lighting fixtures shall conform to applicable UL standards, and be UL labeled. C. Emergency light fixtures shall conform to the requirements of NFPA 101, and 70 (NEC). D. ANSI Standards: All HID ballasts shall be designed and manufactured in accordance with ANSI Standard for HID Ballasts, ANSI C82.4. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. In addition to product data, submit a 4" x 4" sample of all fluorescent lenses for review and comparison to lenses installed on the project. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Provide products produced by manufacturers shown or scheduled for each type of lighting fixture. Where fluorescent ballasts are indicated as generic electronic ballast (GEB) or otherwise indicated using manufacturer's nomenclature, provide products produced by one of the following for ballasts and lamps: 1. Fluorescent Ballasts: Advance Transformer Co. Universal Lighting Technology Sylvania 2. HID Ballast Universal Lighting Technology Advance Transformer Company 3. Fluorescent Dimming Ballast: Lutron 4. Fluorescent Emergency Battery Packs: Bodine IOTA Chloride Lithonia 5. Fluorescent, HPS Lamps: General Electric Co. Osram Sylvania LIGHTING FIXTURES AND LAMPS VLK Architects, 2007 26 5113 - 1 2740.00 CREEKVIEW ELEMENTARY SCHOOL COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX Philips Lighting 6. Pulse Start Metal Halide Lamps (all wattages in vertical burn position and 50-150 watt in universal burn position), and non -pulse start metal Halide lamps (all wattages): General Electric Co. Sylvania Philips Lighting Venture 7. Pulse Start metal Halide Lamps 200-500 watt horizontal burning position: Venture Sylvania 8. Incandescent Lamps General Electric Co. Osram Sylvania Philips Lighting 9. Emergency Generator Transfer Devices: Bodine Nine 24 Inc. Entertainment Networks IOTA 2.02 MATERIALS AND COMPONENTS A. General: Provide lighting fixtures of the size, type, and rating indicated, complete with, but not limited to, lamps, lamp holders, reflectors, ballasts, starters, and wiring. B. Fixture Types: 1. Fluorescent Fixtures: Provide fluorescent fixtures complete with lamps and ballasts. a. Fluorescent fixture lenses, where required, shall be extruded virgin acrylic, prismatic type nominal 0.125" thick, 7.8-ounces per square foot minimum. Reduced profile lensed fluorescent fixtures designed specifically for T8 lamps shall have reversed apex geometry lenses to decrease lamp imagery. b. Fluorescent fixtures in continuous rows shall be supplied with fixture couplings, chase nipples, and accessories recommended by the manufacturer for continuous row installation. C. Parabolic fixtures shall have both ballast housing reflector covers installed including fixtures requiring single ballast. Louvers shall be fl- inch low iridescent anodized aluminum with specular silver finish. d. Wire guard at fixtures in mechanical and electrical rooms, gymnasiums and high abuse areas. e. Fluorescent fixtures located outdoors, in interior unconditioned spaces, and in wet locations shall be of aluminum construction. f. Fluorescent fixture door frame shall be of aluminum construction, white finish. 2. HID Fixtures: Provide HID fixtures complete with lamps and ballasts. a. HID fixtures in gymnasiums shall be protected with wire guards and/or cages and safety chains to ballast and reflector. 3. Downlight Fixtures: Provide recessed downlight fixtures with trim rings compatible with the ceiling material where fixture is to be installed. 4. LED Exit Signs: The exit lighting fixtures shall meet the requirements of Federal, State, and Local Codes. a. Gymnasiums, locker rooms, athletic/PE wing and associated corridors, black box theaters, auditorium stages, cafetoriums and kitchens: Vandal resistant, wet location cast aluminum with polycarbonate protective cover exit signs, Lithonia Extreme Series. LIGHTING FIXTURES AND LAMPS VLK Architects, 2007 26 5113 - 2 2740.00 CREEKVIEW ELEMENTARY SCHOOL COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX 5. Emergency Lighting Units: Lead Calcium batteries with self -diagnostics. Provide full light output at 90 minutes of battery operation. 6. All gymnasium light fixtures shall be totally enclosed with wire guards. C. Electronic Ballast - Fluorescent: 1. Provide programmed rapid start, low noise, high power factor, normal light output, Class P, thermally protected, electronic ballasts for fluorescent lighting fixtures. 2. Ballast shall have a Class A sound rating. 3. Five-year warranty replacement program. 4. Fluorescent ballast shall be rated for 0 degrees F minimum starting temperature, parallel, programmed rapid start. 5. Linear fluorescent T-8 lamp ballast, Advance #RN CNXS32SC Series 6. Ballast factor 0.88 minimum. 7. Total Harmonic Distortion, 10% or less 8. Power Factor, greater than 0.98. 9. Linear fluorescent lamps shall be rated for 50,000 starts. 10. Compact fluorescent lamps shall be rated for 100,000 starts. D. Ballasts - HID: 1. Provide high power factor ballasts with a minus 20OF temperature rating. 2. Ballasts for lamps up to 250 watts, shall have a Class B sound rating, unless otherwise noted. Ballasts for lamps 300 watts and larger shall have a Class C sound rating, unless noted otherwise. 3. Metal Halide ballast 50-100 watt shall be Electronic. 4. Metal Halide ballast, 150 through 1000 watt shall be Electronic or Pulse Start, Super Constant Wattage Auto transformer (SCWA) or electronic. 5. Metal halide ballast of 1500-2000 watts shall be constant wattage autotransformer (CWA). E. Voltage: Ballasts for use on 120V systems shall be suitable and guaranteed for voltage range of 100V to 130V. Ballasts for use on 277V systems shall be suitable and guaranteed for voltage range of 225V to 290V. F. Lamps: 1. Provide lamps of the wattage, type, color, and reflector lamps with type of beams indicated, as shown, scheduled, and complying with the light fixture's recommendations. Any deviation between the lamps specified and those recommended by the light fixture manufacturer shall be brought to the attention of the Architect/Engineer prior to submission of shop drawings. 2. Similar wattage and type fluorescent lamps shall be from the same manufacturer and production run. 3. Fluorescent lamps shall be low mercury, lead free, TCLP Passing. Minimum color rendering index shall be 82. 4. Linear T8 fluorescent lamps shall have an average rated life of 24,000 hours at 3-hours per start. 5. Metal Halide lamps 50 watt through 1000-watt lamps shall be Pulse Start except for tubular "T-Type" metal halide lamps where those lamps are not available. 6. Metal halide lamps shall be phosphor coated except for outdoor area, and exterior wall mounted fixtures, and wherever light fixture manufacturer recommends clear lamps. 7. Similar wattage and type metal halide lamps shall be from the same manufacturer and production runs. 8. High pressure sodium lamps 70-400 watt shall be rated at 30,000 hours, low mercury, lead free, TCLP passing. HPS lamps 70-400 watt shall not cycle at end of life. - LIGHTING FIXTURES AND LAMPS VLK Architects, 2007 26 5113 - 3 2740.00 CREEKVIEW ELEMENTARY SCHOOL COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX 9. Incandescent lamps shall be extended service, inside frosted, unless noted otherwise. G. Light fixture housing for exterior use: Provide aluminum or stainless housing. Where stainless steel hardware is used, both male and female fasteners shall be stainless steel. H. Emergency Fluorescent Battery Ballasts - Fluorescent: Full light output 90-minute minimum operation. Nominal 1250-1400 lumen battery ballasts for emergency linear fluorescent or long compact fluorescent lighting fixtures. Provide minimum 3400 lumen battery ballasts for emergency fluorescent lighting fixtures in gymnasiums, cafeterias, and areas where the ceiling height is 14' or greater. Where pendant mounted direct / indirect fixtures are mounted above 14-feet, provide two 1400 lumen emergency battery packs for each 4400t emergency lighting segment indicated. Locate each 1400 lumen battery pack in two separate 4-foot segments, as required. Provide minimum 700-lumen emergency battery ballast for small compact fluorescent lighting fixtures 3-year replacement warranty. I. Emergency fluorescent battery ballasts shall illuminate two lamps for fixtures with two or more lamps. J. Emergency Battery Packs — Exit Signs: Nickel Cadmium battery with self- diagnostics; Minimum 3-year non -prorated replacement warranty. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. General: Install lighting fixtures of the types indicated, where shown, and at indicated heights in accordance with the fixture manufacturer's written instructions and industry practices to ensure that the fixtures meet the specifications. Fixtures shall fit the type of ceiling system scheduled. B. Standards: Comply with NEMA standards, applicable requirements of NEC pertaining to installation of interior lighting fixtures, and with NECA Standard of Installation. C. Attachment: Fasten fixtures to the indicated structural support members of the building. Provide four separate wire supports for recessed ceiling mounted lighting fixtures, one at each corner of fixture. Check to ensure that solid pendant fixtures are plumb. Provide T- ear locking clips on all four sides for fluorescent lay -in fixtures. D. Coordination: Field coordinate and locate lighting fixtures in open ceiling areas including mechanical and electrical rooms so that light is not obstructed by piping, ductwork, etc. E. Final adjustment of all aimable exterior light fixtures shall be in coordination with, and to the satisfaction of, the Owner's designated representative. Pre -aim all fixtures prior to scheduled final aiming and adjustment with Architect/owner. Verify that all rotatable optics are in their proper orientation prior to final aiming. F. Fluorescent Dimming Circuits — Fluorescent lamps with dimming ballasts shall be burned - in at 100 percent light level for 100 hours prior to dimming. Where fluorescent emergency ballasts are used in conjunction with fluorescent dimming ballast, verify all wiring connections with both the fluorescent emergency ballast and dimming ballast manufacturer. The charging circuit for the emergency ballast shall be the same un- switched, non -dimmed branch circuit providing operational power to the dimming ballast, unless directed otherwise by the ballast manufacturers. LIGHTING FIXTURES AND LAMPS VLK Architects, 2007 26 5113 - 4 2740.00 CREEKVIEW ELEMENTARY SCHOOL COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX G. Provide wire guards for emergency lighting units. Provide vandal resistant exit signs without wire guards in all physical. education and athletic sports areas, including egress corridors adjacent to these areas, black box theaters, auditorium stages, cafetoriums and kitchens. H. Provide exit sign directional arrows as required. Install in accordance with manufacturers instructions. J. Install suspended luminaries using pendants supported from swivel hangers. Provide pendant length required to suspend luminary at indicated height. K. Locate recessed ceiling luminaries as indicated on the Architectural reflected ceiling plan. L. Install surface mounted luminaries plumb and adjust to align with building lines and with each other. Secure to prohibit movement. M. Exposed Grid Ceilings: Support surface mounted luminaries on grid ceiling directly from building structure. Provide auxiliary members spanning ceiling Ts to support surface mounted luminaries. Fasten surface mounted luminaries to ceiling T using bolts, screws, rivets, or suitable clips. N. Install recessed luminaries to permit removal from below. O. Install recessed luminaries using accessories and fire stopping materials to meet regulatory requirements for fire rating. P. Install wall -mounted luminaries at height as directed by Architect. Q. Install accessories furnished with each luminary. R. Connect luminaries to branch circuit outlets using flexible conduit as specified. S. Make wiring connections to branch circuit using building wire with insulation suitable for temperature conditions within luminaries. T. Bond products and metal accessories to branch circuit equipment grounding conductor. U. Provide generator transfer devices for light fixtures powered by generator or inverter emergency lighting circuits which are used for normal lighting and to be switched with the switched normal lighting circuit in the same room, corridor or area. 3.02 TESTING A. General: Upon installation of lighting fixtures, and after building circuits are energized, apply electrical energy to demonstrate proper operations of lighting fixtures, emergency lighting, and controls. When possible, correct malfunctioning units at the site, then retest to demonstrate proper operation; otherwise, remove and replace with new units, and proceed with retesting. B. Lamps: Install new incandescent lamps before final inspection. Fluorescent HID lamps may be used to finish the building. Replace gaseous discharge lamps that are defective, show discolorations, or have exceeded more than 1/3 of their rated life, in accordance with construction inspector's records, with new lamps for final inspection. C. Pre -Inspection Tasks: Immediately before final inspection, clean fixtures inside and out, including plastics and glassware, adjust trim to fit adjacent surfaces, replace broken or LIGHTING FIXTURES AND LAMPS VLK Architects, 2007 26 5113 - 5 2740.00 CREEKVIEW ELEMENTARY SCHOOL COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX damaged parts, and lamp and test fixtures for electrical and mechanical operations. Any fixtures, or parts of fixtures that show signs of rust or corrosion at the time of completion, shall be removed, and replaced with protected metal parts. D. Final aiming and Adjustment: Aim and adjust aimable and adjustable lighting fixtures for their intended purpose. Re -aim and re -adjust as required to the satisfaction of the Architect/Owner, including nighttime adjustment of exterior lighting in the presence of the Architect/Owner. END OF SECTION LIGHTING FIXTURES AND LAMPS VLK Architects, 2007 26 5113 - 6 2740.00 CREEKVIEW ELEMENTARY SCHOOL COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX SECTION 26 5600 - SITE LIGHTING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK A. The extent of site lighting required is indicated on the drawings and schedules and by the requirements of this Section and Section 26 0500 General Electrical Provisions. B. Poles and Standards specified in this Section are for outdoor use for the support of luminaries and include the following: Aluminum and/or steel C. Related Sections: Refer to other Division sections for the following: 1. Lighting Fixtures and Lamps 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Codes and Standards: Provide luminaries, poles standards and appurtenances conforming to the following: 1. Conform to applicable sections of American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO): LTS-1 Standard Specifications for Structural Supports for Highway Signs, Luminaries and Traffic Signals. 2. American National Standards Institute (ANSI): a. C2 National Electrical Safety Code. b. C78.1300 Specifications for High Pressure Sodium Lamps Series. 3. Conform to applicable sections of American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)B 429, Standard Specification for Aluminum -Alloy Extruded Structural Pipe and Tube. 4. Conform to applicable sections of Certified Ballast Manufacturer's Association (CBM) standards for fluorescent lamp ballasts. 5. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA): a. FA 1 Outdoor Floodlighting Equipment. b. OD 3 Physical and Electrical Interchangeability of Photo Control Devices and Mating Receptacles. 6. Conform to applicable sections of National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) 70, National Electrical Code. 7. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL): a. 57 Electric Lighting Fixtures b. 1029 High -Intensity -Discharge Lamp Ballasts. C. 1572 High Intensity Discharge Lighting Fixtures. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Refer to Section 26 0500 General Electrical Provisions. B. Submittal sheets shall be sequentially numbered with the format: Sheet number of number total. Example 1 of 3. C. Submit manufacturer's product data including the following: 1. Dimensioned and detailed drawings in booklet form with separate sheet or sheets for each fixture, assembled in luminarie "type" alphabetical order and showing: materials of construction; arrangement of components and wiring; gasketing for weather tightness; means of mounting luminarie and adjusting aspect; finishes; photometric data with lamp or lamps specified; electrical data including volts, amperes and watts; and for roadway type luminaries, distribution data according to Illuminating Engineering Society (IES) roadway classification type. 2. Lamp ANSI designation, initial and mean lumen output, average rated hours of lamp life and lamp mortality curve, and color temperature and color rendering index. SITE LIGHTING VLK Architects, 2007 26 5600 - 1 2740.00 CREEKVIEW ELEMENTARY SCHOOL COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX 3. Ballast ANSI designation; electrical characteristics, including volts, lamp and line operating and starting amperes, watts and watt losses, percent of allowable line voltage variation range and lamp crest factor; minimum lamp starting temperature; and normal and maximum ballast operating temperature. 4. Ballast CBM approval and UL listing, volts, lamp and line amperes, input watts, and minimum lamp starting temperature. 5. Poles and standards dimensions, details of hand holes and wire entries, mast or bracket arms and connection to poles, wind load and deflection, and finishes. 6. Submit a computer generated point -by -point calculations for all outside lighting. 7. Line -by-line compliance of the specification indicating compliance or description of deviation. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers acceptable contingent upon Product's compliance with the specifications: refer to Lighting Fixture Schedules on the drawings for acceptable manufacturers of light fixtures. Acceptable Pole Manufacturers: Valmont, KW. Whitco poles are not acceptable. 2.02 LUMINARIES A. Refer to Section 26 5113 Lighting Fixtures and Lamps, for ballast and lamp requirements. Provide potted ballast for low noise B. Provide luminaries of the sizes, type and ratings indicated, complete with housings, lenses, refractors, lamps, lamp holders, reflectors, ballasts, starters, igniters, mounting brackets or hardware with adjusting means and wiring. C. Provide luminaries with rigidly formed, wither and light tight enclosures that will not warp, sag, or deform in use. Provide housings free from burrs, sharp edges or corners. D. Provide captive hardware hinged doors, operating freely, to allow lamp installation and removal without the use of tools. Equip door mechanism to preclude accidental falling of the door when opening or closing or when secured in the closed position. Provide for door removal for cleaning or replacing lens. E. Provide stainless steel hinges, latches, fasteners, and hardware to prevent corrosion of hardware or the staining of adjacent surfaces. F. Use interior formed and supported light reflecting surfaces having ref lectances of not less than 85 percent for white surfaces, 85 percent for specular surfaces, and 75 percent for specular diffuse surfaces. G. Use borosilicate tempered glass, lenses and refractors. Use heat and aging resistant resilient gaskets to seal and cushion lens and refractor mounting in luminarie doors. H. Provide finishes of the color and type indicated and having the following properties: 1. Protection of metal from corrosion - 5 year warranty against perforation or erosion of the finish from weathering. 2. Color retention — 5-year warranty against fading, staining, or chalking from weathering, including solar radiation. 3. Provide finish of uniform thickness and color, free from streaks, stains or orange peel texture. SITE LIGHTING VLK Architects, 2007 26 5600 - 2 2740.00 CREEKVIEW ELEMENTARY SCHOOL COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX 2.03 POLES AND STANDARDS A. Provide poles of the types and heights indicated. Provide internal raceway for underground power supply, with luminarie support pole base indicated. Provide poles that will carry the indicated supports, luminaries and appurtenances, at the required heights above grade, without excessive defection or whipping of the luminarie when subjected to 100 mph winds with a 1.3 gust factor. Pole structural integrity shall rely solely on the anchor bolts and nuts. Pole shall not be in direct contact with concrete base or mortar. B. Provide metal lighting poles with steel or aluminum shaft; equipped for post top or mast arm luminarie mounting. Provide wiring access hand hole with welded '/z" NC ground lug, readily accessible from hand hole opening. Provide features as follows: 1. Provide a one-piece pole shaft fabricated from a weldable grade carbon structural steel tubing with a uniform thickness as required. Material shall conform to ASTM A- 500, Grade C. 2. Provide anchor base of the same material and finish as the pole, welded to the pole. Provide adequately sized (at least 15 square inches) hand hole with screwed cover. Provide galvanized steel hold-down or anchor bolts and leveling nuts. Provide full base cover. 3. Factory prime coat with polyester powder -coat paint. Steel poles shall be hot dipped galvanized, with prime coat, with 8 mil minimum polyester powder -coat paint. Color to match light fixture. C. Anchor bolts: 1. Provide zinc coated anchor bolts and nuts. Length shall be per pole manufacturer's shop drawings, complete with 3 inch right angle bend on one end and 6 inches of thread on the other end. Provide zinc coated flat washers, lock washers, and hexagonal nuts for each pole. 2. Provide template for positioning of anchor bolts. D. Accessories: 1. Full base covers, finish to match pole 2. Hand hole with cover plate and vandal resistant hardware. 2.04 LUMINARIE MOUNTING A. Provide corrosion resistant metal luminarie mounting compatible with the poles and fixtures that will not cause galvanic action at contact points. Provide mounting that will correctly position the luminarie to provide the required light distribution. Provide drill mounting to pole shaft unless specified otherwise. B. Provide brackets, cantilevered and without under brace, of the sizes, styles, and finishes indicated with straight tubular end section to accommodate the luminarie. C. Provide steel tenon only for single fixture yoke or spider post top mounting securely fastened to the top of the pole shaft, fabricated to accept and rigidly support the luminarie to be mounted thereon. Set screws shall have pole shaft drilled to prevent rotational movement. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 LIGHTING POLE INSTALLATION A. Install lighting poles as follows: 1. Install lighting poles and standards as indicated, in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions, and in compliance with ANSI C2. 2. Provide excavation and poured concrete bases using 3,000 pound 28-day concrete, and provide anchor hook -bolts, nuts and washers in conformance with the details SITE LIGHTING VLK Architects, 2007 26 5600 - 3 2740.00 CREEKVIEW ELEMENTARY SCHOOL COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX and manufacturer's requirements. Refer to Division 3 for concrete work. Project anchor bolts 2-inches minimum above base. Use double nuts for adjustment. 3. To protect finish, use fabric web slings (not chain or cable) to raise and set finished poles and standards. 4. Install pole clear of contact of concrete base or mortar. B. Grounding: Provide equipment bonding and grounding connections, sufficiently tight to assure permanent and effective grounds, poles and standards. Bond all metal, non -current carrying parts to ground. Provide 3/a-inch x 10 foot driven ground rod at each lighting pole. Bond all grounded metal parts to the ground rod, using thermal fusion (exothermic). C. Wiring: 1. Provide Type SO cord from base of pole lights to top of poles. Do not use single conductors. 2. Install inline fuse holders, fuses, at base of pole lights on each lighting circuit. Fuse size shall be as follows: WATTAGE # OF LAMPS 208V 240V 277V 480V 400 1 5 5 5 5 400 2 8 8 5 5 400 3 10 10 8 5 400 4 15 10 10 8 1000 1 10 8 8 5 1000 2 15 15 15 8 3. Provide Styrofoam wedge at midpoint of pole to prevent wire flapping and provide conductor stress relief at top of pole. 3.02 LUMINARIE INSTALLATION A. Install exterior luminaries at locations and heights as indicated, in accordance with the manufacturer's written instructions, applicable requirements of NFPA 70, ANSI C2 and with recognized industry practices to ensure that lighting installation fulfills requirements. B. Fasten luminaries securely to indicated structural supports and check to ensure that the required degree of freedom is provided to allow alignment or aiming of the fixtures for indicated light distribution. C. Clean exterior luminaries of dirt and debris upon completion of installation. Do not damage finishes or lens or refractor surfaces. D. Provide equipment grounding connections using branch circuit equipment and connected sufficiently tight to assure a permanent and effective ground. 3.03 TESTS AND DEMONSTRATIONS A. Upon installation of lighting fixtures, and after building circuits are energized, apply electrical energy to demonstrate proper operations of lighting fixtures, emergency lighting, and controls. Correct malfunctioning units, then retest to demonstrate proper operation; otherwise, remove and replace with new units, and proceed with retesting. Verify correct reflector types and orientation prior to final aiming. B. Pre -Inspection Tasks: Immediately before final inspection, clean fixtures inside and out, including reflectors, plastics and glassware, adjust trim to fit adjacent surfaces, replace broken or damaged parts, and lamp and test fixtures for electrical and mechanical operations. Any fixtures, or parts of fixtures that show signs of rust or corrosion at the time of SITE LIGHTING VLK Architects, 2007 26 5600 - 4 2740.00 CREEKVIEW ELEMENTARY SCHOOL COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX completion, shall be removed, and replaced with protected metal parts. Pre -aim lighting fixtures as practical prior to final aiming and adjustment. C. Final aiming and Adjustment: Aim and adjust aimable and adjustable lighting fixtures for their intended purpose, as specified, as indicated and/or recommended by Manufacturer's photometric report. Re -aim and re -adjust as required to the satisfaction of the Architect/Owner, including nighttime adjustment of exterior lighting in the presence of the Architect/Owner. Provide five business day notification of proposed night-time review by Owner / Architect. 3.04 LAMP REPLACEMENT AND PROVISION OF SPARE LAMPS A. At time of substantial completion, replace lamps in luminaries that are observed to be not functioning properly after Contractor's use and testing. Provide spare replacement lamps amounting to 10 percent (but not less than ten lamps in each case) of each type and size lamp used in each type fixture. END OF SECTION SITE LIGHTING VLK Architects, 2007 26 5600 - 5 2740.00 CREEKVIEW ELEMENTARY SCHOOL COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX SECTION 27 0500 - COMMUNICATIONS GENERAL PROVISIONS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS: A. Except as modified in this Section, General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, applicable provisions of Division 01 General Requirements, and other provisions and requirements of the Contract Documents apply to work of Division 27 Communications. B. Applicable provisions of this section apply to all sections of Division 27, Communications. C. The general provisions of the Contract and the requirements of the following Sections apply to the Work specified in this Section. See Division 26 for related general and specific requirements. 1.02 CODES AND STANDARDS: A. All equipment and work performed shall comply with all of the current and applicable Codes, Rules, Ordinances, Regulations and Standards (including those not specifically listed in this Specification) as interpreted and enforced by the authorities having jurisdiction including: 1. Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) 2. Authorities Having Jurisdiction (AHJ) - Local 3. American National Standards Institute (ANSI)" 4. American Society of Testing and Materials (ASTM) Communications Cables - B694, B736, D4565, D4566, D4730, D4731, D4732 5. Building Industry Consulting Services International (BICSI) 6. Code of Federal Regulations - Title 47 7. Electronics Industries Association (EIA) Standard Test Procedures for Fiber Optic Fibers, Cables, Transducers, Connecting and Terminating Devices - EIA- 455 Series 8. Federal Communications Commission (FCC) - Communications Act and FCC Rules 9. Federal Information Processing Standards (FIPS) Federal Building Standard for Telecommunications Pathways and Spaces - FIPS PUB 175, FIPS PUB 176 10. The Insulated Cable Engineers Association (ICEA) Communications Cable Stands - P-47-434, S-56-434, S-80-576, S84-608, S-85-625, S-86-634, S-87- 640, S-89-648, S-90-661, S-98-688, S-99-689, S-100-685 11. International Electro-technical Commission (IEC) 12. Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE) Local Area Networks/Metropolitan Networks Standards Collection - LAN/MAN 802 Series 13. International Organization for Standardization (ISO) (ISO/IEC) Premise Wiring Core and LAN/MAN Core Equivalents-11801, 8802, 14763-1 14. International Telecommunication Union (ITU-T) Telecommunications Standardization 15. National Electrical Code (NEC) National Electrical Code - NFPA 70 16. National Electrical Contractor's Association (NECA) Standards of Installation 17. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA) Performance Standard for Twisted Pair Premise Voice and Data Communications Cable -WC 63.1, WC 63.2, WC 66 18. National Electrical Safety Code (NESC) 19. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) - National Fire Alarm Code NFPA 72, Life Safety Code NFPA 101 20. Society of Cable Telecommunications Engineers (SCTE) 21. Local Accessibility Standards - COMMUNICATIONS GENERAL PROVISIONS VLK Architects 2007 27 0500 - 1 2740.00 CREEKVIEW ELEMENTARY SCHOOL COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX 22. Telecommunications Industries Association (TIA) (ANSI/TIA/EIA) Wiring and Cabling Standards - 526, 568, 569, 570, 571, 598, 606, 607, 758, TSB 31-B, 63, 67, 72, 75 and 95 23. Uniform Building Code (UBC) 24. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (U.L.) - 497A, 910, 1077, 1863, 1283, 1459, 1604, 1651, 1681, 1690, 1778, 1977 B. Resolve any code violations discovered in contract documents with the Engineer prior to award of the contract. After Contract award, any correction or additions necessary for compliance with applicable codes shall be made at no additional cost to the Owner. C. This Contractor shall be responsible for being aware of and complying with asbestos NESHAP regulations, as well as all other applicable codes, laws and regulations. D. Obtain all permits required. 1.03 SUMMARY: A. Provide complete and working Communications Systems including equipment, conduit, wiring, material, labor and training as described in this Specification and the Drawings. The Communications Systems Drawings and Specifications are the sole property of the Architect and are not to be duplicated, scanned, loaned or in any way made available to persons not designated as authorized by the Architect. All Communications Systems plans and specifications are to be returned to the Architect following completion of bid. 1.04 SPACE REQUIREMENTS A. Consider space limitations imposed by contiguous work in selection and location of equipment and material. Do not provide equipment or material that is not suitable in this respect. 1.05 RELATION WITH OTHER TRADES A. Carefully study all matters and conditions concerning the project. Submit notification of conflict in ample time to prevent unwarranted changes in any work. Review other Divisions of these specifications to determine their requirements. Extend electrical services and final connections to all items requiring same. B. Because of the complicated relationship of this work to the total project, conscientiously study the relation and cooperate as necessary to accomplish the full intent of the documents. C. Provide sleeves and inserts in forms as required for the work. Stub up and protect open ends of pipe before any concrete is placed. Furnish sizes of required equipment pads. Furnish and locate bolts and fittings required to be cast in them. D. Locate and size openings required for installation of work specified in this Division in sufficient time to prevent delay in the work. E. Refer to other Divisions of the specifications for the scope of required connections to equipment furnished under other Division. Determine from the General Contractor / Construction Manager for the various trades, the Owner, and by direction from the Architect/Engineer, the exact location of all items. The construction trades involved shall furnish all roughing -in drawings and wiring diagrams required for proper installation of the electrical work. 1. Make final connections to all communications equipment indicated on the drawings, except as noted. COMMUNICATIONS GENERAL PROVISIONS VLK Architects 2007 27 0500 - 2 2740.00 CREEKVIEW ELEMENTARY SCHOOL COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX F. Request all Shop Drawings required in ample time to permit proper installation of all electrical provisions. G. Extend services as indicated to the various items of equipment furnished by others. Rough -in for the various items and make final connections ready for operation upon placing of the equipment. 1.06 CONCEALED AND EXPOSED WORK A. When the word "concealed" is defined as hidden from sight as in chases, furred spaces or above ceilings. "Exposed" is defined as open to view, in plain sight. 1.07 GUARANTEE A. Guarantee work for a minimum of two years or as noted longer elsewhere from the date of substantial completion of the project. During that period make good any faults or imperfections that may arise due to defects or omissions in material, equipment or workmanship. At the Owner's option, replacement of failed parts or equipment shall be provided. 1.08 MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT A. Furnish new and unused materials and equipment meeting the requirements of the paragraph specifying acceptable manufacturers. Where two or more units of the same type or class of equipment are required, provide units of a single manufacturer. 1.09 NOISE AND VIBRATION A. Select equipment to operate with minimum noise and vibration. If noise or vibration is produced or transmitted to or through the building structure by equipment, piping, ducts or other parts of work, and judged objectionable by the Owner, Architect, or Engineer, rectify such conditions at no additional cost to the Owner. If the item of equipment is judged to produce objectionable noise or vibration, demonstrate at no additional cost that equipment performs within designated limits on a vibration chart. 1.10 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers names and catalog number specified under sections of Division 27 are used to establish standards of design, performance, quality and serviceability and not to limit competition. Equipment of similar design, equal to that specified, manufactured by a named manufacturer shall be acceptable on approval. A request for prior approval of equipment not listed must be submitted ten (10) days before proposal due date. Submit complete design and performance data to the Architect. The Architect and Owner issue approvals of acceptable manufacturers as addenda to the Construction Proposal Documents. 1.11 UTILITIES, LOCATIONS AND ELEVATIONS A. Locations and elevations of the various utilities included within the scope of this work: 1. Obtained from utility maps and other substantially reliable sources. 2. Are offered separate from the Contract Documents as a general guide only without guarantees to accuracy. B. Examine the site and verify the location and elevation of all utilities and of their relation to the work. Existing utilities indicated on the site plans are for reference only and shall be field verified by the Contractor with the respective public or private utility. COMMUNICATIONS GENERAL PROVISIONS VLK Architects 2007 27 0500 - 3 2740.00 CREEKVIEW ELEMENTARY SCHOOL COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX 1.12 CONTRACT DRAWINGS A. Contract drawings are diagrammatic only and do not give fully dimensioned locations of various elements of work. Determine exact locations from field measurements. B. It is the responsibility of the Contractor to compare the scale of all electrical drawings with the scale of the architectural drawings and make adjustments to all electrical drawings which have the incorrect drawing scale so that his material takeoffs are not in error due to an incorrectly labeled drawing scale and his proposal is complete. 1.13 ABBREVIATIONS AND DEFINITIONS: Abbreviations: A/V - Audio/Visual AWG - American Wire Gauge BCR - Building Communications Room CATV - Cable Antenna Television CCTV - Closed Circuit Television CMP - Communications Media Plenum CMR - Communications Media Riser dB- Decibel EMI - Electromagnetic Interference ER- Equipment Room FACP - Fire Alarm Control Panel FCR - Floor Communications Room Hz- Hertz IC - Intermediate Cross -connect IDF - Intermediate Distribution Frame IM - Information Management is- Information Systems or Information Services (also see MIS) IT - Information Technology Km - Kilometer LCD - Liquid Crystal Display LED - Light Emitting Diode M - Micron MATV - Master Antenna Television (A.K.A. Main Antenna Television) Mbps - Million Bits Per Second MC - Main Cross -connect MDF - Main Distribution Frame MHz- Megahertz MIS - Management Information Systems or Services NEXT - Near -End Cross Talk nm - Nano -meter OFN - Optical Fiber Non-conductive OFNP - Optical Fiber Non-conductive Plenum OFNR -Optical Fiber Non-conductive Riser OTDR -Optical Time Domain Reflectometer PBX - Private Branch Exchange POS - Point of Sale PSELFEXT - Power Sum Equal Level Far -End Cross Talk PSNEXT - Power Sum Near -End Cross Talk SMATV - Satellite Main Antenna Television TC - Telecommunications Closet (Now referred to as TR) TR - Telecommunications Room (A.K.A. TC Telecommunication Closet) UTP - Unshielded Twisted Pair Wire COMMUNICATIONS GENERAL PROVISIONS VLK Architects 2007 27 0500 - 4 2740.00 CREEKVIEW ELEMENTARY SCHOOL COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX Definitions: Administration Subsystem - Cable, connectors, cross -connect and inter -connect hardware, patch cords, and other equipment that allows easy reconfiguration of the telecommunications system to accommodate personnel and floor plans changes. Campus Backbone Subsystem - Connects telecommunications processing equipment in different buildings on the same campus. Communications Cabling - Any fiber optic, copper, coaxial or other transmission media used for transmitting or receiving communications systems data. Communications System - Communications Systems and associated wired or wireless interconnection. Communications Drawings - All floor plans, elevations, details, schematics, block diagrams, legends, tables, notes or attachments associated with any or all of the Communications Systems. Distribution Cable - The telecommunications UTP wiring between the telecommunications room and the outlet connectors. Equipment Subsystem - Telecommunications cable, connectors, support hardware, blocks, and protective devices that serve to connect the network interface and the backbone subsystem through the administrative subsystem. Horizontal Subsystem - Telecommunications cable, outlets and distribution cords that extend the riser backbone from the administrative points in the TRs to work stations. Information Systems - Software systems including operating systems, programs, data manipulation and management systems, control software and various forms of proprietary and off -the -shelf software. Information Technology - The practical application of knowledge associated with designing, installing and maintaining the equipment, hardware and infrastructure utilized for control, distribution, or display of telecommunications, audio, video and data signals. Because computers are central to information management, computer departments within companies and universities are often called (IT Departments) and are responsible for MIS or IS personnel and services. Low Voltage Wire - Wire or cable used for one or more systems that operate on 24 volts or less. Low Voltage Wire is used to install and interconnect one or more of the Communications Systems. Low Voltage Wire includes patch cords, jumpers and all portions of cable or wire used to make the Communications Systems operational or for system communications. Management Information Systems - A class of software that provides managers with tools for organizing and evaluating their department. Typically, MIS systems are written in COBOL and run on mainframes or minicomputers. Within companies and large organizations, the department responsible for computer systems is sometime called the MIS department. Another name for MIS is Information Services (IS). Multiplexer - A communications device that multiplexes (combines) several signals for transmission over a single medium. A multiplexer is sometimes called a "mux". A demultiplexer is required to complete the process by separating multiplexed signals from COMMUNICATIONS GENERAL PROVISIONS VLK Architects 2007 27 0500 - 5 2740.00 CREEKVIEW ELEMENTARY SCHOOL COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX a transmission line. Frequently a multiplexer and demultiplexer are combined into a single device capable of processing both outgoing and incoming signals. Riser Backbone Subsystem - Telecommunications cable, splice enclosures, and associated hardware that provide the main cable routes in a building. It interconnects building floors and larger areas of a single floor. It also interconnects administrative points in satellite TRs to the administrative points in the building main equipment room. Station Cable - The wiring between the outlet connections and the work area equipment. Communications Systems - One or more of the following and associated equipment: Data/Networking Systems, Telecommunications Systems, Paging / Intercom Systems, Clock/Control Systems, Master Antenna Television Systems, Cable Antenna Television Systems, Broadcast Video Systems, Audio/Visual Presentations Systems, Microwave/Wireless Systems. Telecommunications - The transmission, emission or reception of signs, signals, images, sound or intelligence of any nature by wire, radio, optical or other technical transmission system. Work Area - Location of an employee or student and their data/telecommunications equipment or devices. Work Area Subsystem - Station mounting cords, extension cords, connectors, adapters, and interface units that provide physical and electrical connectivity between workstation equipment and the horizontal subsystem. 1.14 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. Equipment Standards: 1. System and all components shall be brand new stock from manufacturer. 2. All electronics shall be 100% solid state. 3. System and all components shall bear a UL Label. B. Contractor Qualifications: At the time of Proposal, the Contractor shall: 1. Have manufactured, supplied or installed at least three (3) other systems of similar size, complexity, and general operation as the systems described in these specifications. The Contractor shall furnish in writing to Architect proof of compliance with this paragraph at the time of proposal. 2. Hold all legally required Texas State Contractor's licenses necessary to accomplish the installation and activation of the described system at the facilities indicated. The Contractor shall submit copies of licenses to the Architect prior to the start of work 3. Hold all legally required state registrations to meet local requirements for submittal drawings. 4. Have a local office within fifty (50) miles of the project site staffed with factory trained technicians who have experience on systems of similar complexity and function as the systems described in these specifications. These technicians shall be fully capable of system engineering support, installation supervising, system start-up, and providing the Owner with training and service on both hardware and software for the systems specified. 5. Certify complete and total compliance with the provisions of these specifications by letter or submittal of the proposal response forms, signed by an officer of the corporation, or a principal if other ownership currently exists. In addition, the letter or forms shall include a complete listing of exceptions, if any. COMMUNICATIONS GENERAL PROVISIONS VLK Architects 2007 27 0500 - 6 2740.00 CREEKVIEW ELEMENTARY SCHOOL COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX 1.15 SUBMITTALS: A. Provide SUBMITTALS according to Division 01 and the following. B. Requirements: 1. Submit paragraph -by -paragraph specification review indicating compliance or deviation with explanation. 2. Submit proof that all system components and cables are U.L. Listed. 3. An equipment list with names of manufacturers, model numbers, and technical information on all equipment proposed. Clearly mark exact model number proposed to be installed. 4. Product technical information sheets for each principal components in the proposed system, including cable, wire, terminal marking, and wire marking material. 5. Certification from the manufacturer stating that the system Contractor is an authorized distributor or installer of the proposed system when such certifications exist. 6. A statement listing every technical and operational parameter wherein the submitted equipment varies from that which was originally specified. If the submitter fails to list a particular variance and his submittal is accepted, but is subsequently deemed to be unsatisfactory because of the unlisted variance, the submitter shall replace or modify such equipment at once and without cost to the Owner. 1.16 EXAMINATION OF SITE: A. The Contractor shall have visited the site and familiarized himself with all existing conditions prior to submitting his proposal and shall be prepared to carry out the work within the existing limitations. Failure or neglect to do so shall not relieve the Contractor of his responsibilities not entitle him to additional compensation for work overlooked and not included in his proposal. B. The Contractor shall confirm the availability of the proper power source for each piece of specified equipment, through site visits and Drawings as necessary. Where proper power does not exist, the Contractor shall provide the required power, circuits, outlets, conduits, and wire as specified under Division 26. 1.17 DATA ACCURACY: A. Absolute accuracy of information regarding existing conditions cannot be guaranteed. The Drawings and Specifications are for the assistance and guidance of the Contractor and exact locations, distances, elevations, etc., shall be governed by actual field conditions. Where variations from the contract documents are required, such variations shall be approved by the Architect/Owner. 1.18 SECURITY: A. The Contractor is responsible for complying with all of the Owner's and facility security's requirements to prevent theft or damage to equipment, tools and materials. If any deviation from facility security requirements is necessary, approval for such deviation shall be coordinated with the Owner. B. The Contractor shall not disclose any confidential information of the Owner. The Contractor acknowledges that such action is highly injurious and can do damage to the Owner. The Contractor will agree to and comply with the standard policies and provisions of the Owner regarding outside Contractors and Consultants. COMMUNICATIONS GENERAL PROVISIONS VLK Architects 2007 27 0500 - 7 2740.00 CREEKVIEW ELEMENTARY SCHOOL COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX 1.19 UTILITIES: A. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to provide all temporary connection and cables, lighting, light stands and power. The facilities shall be used in accordance with all applicable regulations regarding operations, safety and fire hazards of the governmental Authorities Having Jurisdiction, provided they are not used in a wasteful manner. 1.20 PERMITS: A. All permits required for the specified performance and completion of the work shall be secured by the Contractor. These permits shall be presented and reviewed at the initial project progress meeting. 1.21 NOTIFICATION: A. The Contractor shall not shut off any existing systems. The Contractor shall give the Owner at least ten (10) calendar day's notice of any requirements to shut off or interference with existing alarm, regulating, computer or other service systems. The Owner will arrange and execute any shutdown. All work such as splicing, connections, etc., necessary to establish or re-establish any system shall be completed by the Contractor in close coordination with the Owner. 1.22 INTERFERENCES WITH THE OWNER: A. Transportation and storage of materials at the facility, work involving the facility, and all other matters affecting the habitual use by the Owner of its buildings, shall be conducted so as to cause the least possible interference, and at times and in a manner acceptable to the Owner. The Contractor shall make every effort to delivery equipment per the schedule required by the project. 1.23 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS A. Maintain at the job site a separate set of white prints (blue line or black line) of the contract drawings for the sole purpose of recording the "as -built" changes and diagrams of those portions of work in which actual construction is significantly at variance with the contract drawings. Mark the drawings with a colored pencil. Prepare, as the work progresses and upon completion of work, reproducible drawings clearly indicating locations of various major and minor feeders, equipment, and other pertinent items, as installed. Record underground and underslab cables installed, dimensioning exact location and elevation of such installations. B. At conclusion of project, obtain without cost to the Owner, electronic AutoCAD CAD files of the original drawings and transfer as -built changes to these. Provide the following as - built documents including all contract drawings regardless of whether corrections were necessary and include in the transmittal: "2 sets of CDs and prints for Owner's use, one set of CDs, prints, and mylars for Architect/Engineers Records". Delivery of these as -built electronic, reproducible and prints is a condition of final acceptance. 1. 3 sets of electronic AutoCAD (2000 dwg) CAD drawing files, on CD-ROM media, of each contract as -built drawing. 2. One reproducible Dayrex mylar film positive of each contract as -built drawing. 3. Three sets of blue or black -line prints of each contract as -built drawing. C. As -Built Drawings should indicate the following information as a minimum: 1. Indicate all addendum changes to documents. 2. Remove Engineer's Seal, name, address, and logo from drawings. 3. Mark documents AS -BUILT DRAWINGS. 4. Clearly indicate: DOCUMENT PRODUCED BY: COMMUNICATIONS GENERAL PROVISIONS VLK Architects 2007 27 0500 - 8 2740.00 CREEKVIEW ELEMENTARY SCHOOL COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX 5. Indicate all changes to construction during construction. Indicate actual routing of all conduit and cables, etc that were deviated from construction drawings. 6. Indicate exact location of all underground communications raceways, and elevations. 7. Correct schedules to reflect (actual) equipment furnished and manufacturer. 8. During the execution of work, maintain a complete set of Drawings and specifications upon which all locations of equipment, devices, and all deviations and changes from the construction documents in the work shall be recorded. 9. Exact location of all communications equipment in building. Label panel schedules to indicate actual location. 10. Exact location of all communications equipment in and outside of the building. 11. Location, size and routing of all communications cables, conduits, equipment, etc. shall be accurately and neatly shown to dimension. 12. Exact location of all roof mounted equipment, wall, roof and floor penetrations. 13. Cloud all changes. 1.24 OPERATING TESTS A. After all communications systems have been completed and put into operation, subject each system to an operating test under design conditions to ensure proper sequencing and operation throughout the range of operation. Tests shall be made in the presence of the Architect/Engineer and Owner. Provide minimum 24-hour advance notice of scheduling of all tests. Make adjustments as required to ensure proper functioning of all systems. Special tests on individual systems are specified under individual sections. Submit 3 copies of all certifications and test reports adequately in advance of completion of the work to allow for remedial action as required to correct deficiencies discovered in equipment and systems. 1.25 WARRANTY A. All equipment shall be covered for the full manufacturers warranty period and systems shall be warranted by the Contractor for a period of two years commencing with the filing date of substantial completion. The Warranty shall cover all costs for warranty service, including parts, labor, prompt field service, pick-up, transportation, delivery, reinstallation, and retesting. A contract for service shall cover the period starting with the first expected activation of each system and shall continue without interruption to cover the period to the end of the two-year warranty as defined above. The end of the warranty period shall be handled such that a smooth transition to a maintenance agreement with the Owner shall be achieved with no lapse in coverage. B. Submit 3 copies of all warranties and guarantees for systems, equipment, devices and materials. These shall be included in the Operating and Maintenance Manuals. 1.26 BUILDING CONSTRUCTION A. It shall be the responsibility of the sub -contractor to consult the Architectural and Engineering drawings, details and specifications and thoroughly familiarize himself as to the construction and all job related requirements. All construction trades shall cooperate with the General Contractor / Construction Manager job site superintendent and lay out work so that all piping, cables, pathways, raceways, and other items are placed in the walls, furred spaces, chases, etc., so that there shall be no delay in the job. COMMUNICATIONS GENERAL PROVISIONS VLK Architects 2007 27 0500 - 9 2740.00 CREEKVIEW ELEMENTARY SCHOOL COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX 1.27 TEMPORARY FACILITIES A. General: Refer to Division 01 for general requirements on temporary facilities. B. Temporary Wiring: Temporary power and lighting for construction purposes shall be provided under Division 26. Installation of temporary power shall be in accordance with NEC Article 305. C. Temporary facilities, wire, lights and devices are the property of this Contractor and shall be removed at the completion of the Contract. 1.28 EXTRA MATERIALS: Keys: Provide three (3) sets of all keys for system cabinets. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.01 WORK INCLUDED: All materials listed in PART 2 - PRODUCTS of this Division Sections and on the Drawings shall be provided by the Contractor unless specifically excluded or modified in other portions of this Specification or Addendums. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION: A. This project has a critical path, which must be closely followed in order to meet the completion date. The Contractor shall review the proposed schedule at the Award of Contract meeting and be prepared to staff his work force according to the schedule constraints presented at that time. B. Aesthetics are an important consideration in this installation. All components shall be installed so as to have aesthetically pleasing results as determined by the Owner and Architect. Actual locations of all visible components shall be coordinated in advance with the Owner and Architect. C. Install, make fully operational and test the system as indicated on the Drawings and in the Specifications. Where information is not available the worst -case condition must be assumed to ensure a complete, functional system. D. Any interfacing with other systems shall be the Contractor's responsibility under this contract, and the details, both logical and physical, of such interfaces shall be reflected in the Submittals and As -Built drawings. E. If appropriate, interfaces with the Owner's Data Network, Telecommunications and Communications System shall be coordinated with the Owner and Architect. F. All necessary back boards, back -boxes, pull -boxes, connectors, supports, conduit, cable and wire shall be furnished and installed to provide a complete and reliable system. Exact location of all backboards, boxes, conduit and wiring runs shall be presented to the Owner/Architect for approval in advance of any installation. Provide as required and as specified in Division 26. G. Where required provide 120-VAC, 60 Hz power from nearest electrical panel through a junction box, to the system devices. Provide as required and as specified in Division 26. COMMUNICATIONS GENERAL PROVISIONS VLK Architects 2007 27 0500 - 10 2740.00 CREEKVIEW ELEMENTARY SCHOOL COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX H. Where required, install conduit, cable and wire parallel and square with building lines, including raised floor areas. Conduit fills shall not exceed 40%. All equipment shall be mounted with sufficient clearance to minimize EMI as well as meet all applicable codes and facilitate observation and testing. Securely hand and/or fasten with appropriate fittings to ensure positive grounding, free of ground loops, throughout the entire system. Units shall be installed parallel and square to building lines. J. Quiet and vibration -free operation of all equipment is a requirement of this installation. Properly adjust, -repair, balance or replace any equipment producing objectionable (in the judgment of the Owner or Architect) noise or vibration in any of the occupied areas of any building and provide additional brackets and bracing if necessary. Any such additions or changes shall be at no additional cost to the Owner. K. Installation shall comply with the CODES AND STANDARDS portion of this Section. Where more than one code or regulation if applicable, the more stringent shall apply. L. Where new equipment is replacing old equipment, the Contractor is responsible for removing and disposing of the old equipment and doing whatever repair work is necessary as specified by the Owner/Architect. M. Install firestopping, as specified in Division 26 for all penetrations in slabs and firewalls to meet code at the completion of work and prior to final testing demonstration to the Owner. N. The installation shall be performed in a professional manner. O. On a daily basis, clean up and deposit in appropriate containers all debris from work performed under the appropriate specification sections. Stack and organize all parts, tools and equipment when not being used. P. Preparation, handling and installation shall be in accordance with the Manufacturer's written instructions and technical data appropriate to the product specified. O. All work shall conform to the National Electrical Contractor's Association "Standard of Installation" for general installation practice. R. At the conclusion of the installation, all work areas, including all enclosures and boxes, shall be vacuumed and cleaned to remove all debris and grease. 3.02 COORDINATION WITH OWNER/ARCHITECT A. Close coordination with the Owner/Architect is vital to achieve a complete, aesthetically pleasing job. The Contractor shall ensure that the Owner/Architect is kept fully apprized of job progress. 3.03 CUTTING, PAINTING, AND PATCHING: A. Structural members shall not be drilled, bored or notched in such a manner that shall impair their structural value. Cutting of holes in structural members, if required, shall be done with core drills and only with the specific approval of the Owner/Architect for each instance. B. All walls that require cutting or repair during the installation process shall be returned to their original condition, including the matching of colors and finishes to the satisfaction of the Owner/Architect, and at no additional cost to the Owner. COMMUNICATIONS GENERAL PROVISIONS VLK Architects 2007 27 0500 - 11 2740.00 CREEKVIEW ELEMENTARY SCHOOL COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX 3.04 WIRE AND CABLE: A. All low voltage cable shall be low smoke plenum rated, limited energy, with 300-volt insulation. B. All wires in exposed areas shall run through conduit as specified in Division 26. C. Provide conduits, cable trays, raceways, wireways, boxes and outlets as specified in Division 26. D. After installation, and before termination, all wiring shall be checked and tested to insure there are no grounds, opens, or shorts on any conductors. In addition, all wires between buildings or underground and all coax cables shall have insulation tested with a megohmeter (megger) and a reading of greater than 20 megohms shall be required to successfully complete the test. E. Run wires continuously from termination to termination without splices. F. Wire and cable shall be supported in each equipment and terminal cabinet and in each terminal and pull box in vertical risers and horizontal runs with wire duct and strap -type supports. At any point where wire duct is required for good wire management, whether shown on elevations or not, install appropriate duct. Where terminal boards are used, wire ducts shall be supplied on both sides and at not rime shall wires cross over terminal boards. Arrange cables neatly to allow inspection, removal and replacement. Lace cables as required. Spot tie wire bundles with plastic cable ties and securely affix to panels. If screw type terminals are specified, terminal strip connections shall be locking, tongue style, pressure crimp, and solderless spade lug. G. Visually inspect wire and cable for faulty insulation prior to installation. Protect cable ends at all times with acceptable end caps except during actual termination. At no time shall any coaxial cable be subjected to a bend less than a 6-inch radius. Protect wire and cable from kinks. Install 1 pull rope for all 2" or larger sized conduits. H. Provide plastic bushings and strain relief material at all conduit exit points and where necessary, to avoid abrasion of wire and excess tension on wire and cable. Cables above accessible ceilings shall not rest on ceiling tiles. Use Velcro tie wraps to hold cables. Provide independent support for all cables. Support is to be from building structure (do not support from pipes or conduits). Communications cables shall not tie off on HVAC supports, all -thread, ceiling grid hanger wire or electrical / mechanical piping system. J. Ground and bond equipment and circuits in accordance with NEC and Division 26. 3.05 IDENTIFICATION AND TAGGING: A. All cables, wires, wiring forms, terminal blocks and terminals shall be identified by labels, tags to other permanent markings in accordance with TIA/EIA-606. The markings shall clearly indicate the function, source, or destination of all cabling, wiring and terminals. All cables and wires shall be identified, utilizing heat -shrink, machine printed, polyolefin wire markers (Brady Type B-32 or equao. Hand written tags are not acceptable. B. Should a situation arise where the wire tagging format as shown on the drawings cannot be used, a substitute format shall be submitted which complies with the intent to provide documentation that will permit end -to -end tracing of all Communications Systems wiring. COMMUNICATIONS GENERAL PROVISIONS VLK Architects 2007 27 0500 - 12 2740.00 CREEKVIEW ELEMENTARY SCHOOL COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX C. All panels shall be provided with permanently attached engraved lamacoid labels with identifying names and functions. All terminal points shall be appropriately labeled. Labels shall be consistent in form, color, and typeface throughout the system and all must contain the name of the system or subsystem as part of the label textual information. Design, color, font and layout shall be coordinated with, and approved by, the Owner. D. Identification of Equipment: 1. All major equipment shall have a manufacturer's label identifying the manufacturer's address, equipment model and serial numbers, equipment size, and other pertinent data. Take care not to obliterate this nameplate. The legend on all nameplates or tags shall correspond to the identification shown on the Operating Instructions. 2. A black -white -black 3 layer laminated plastic engraved identifying nameplate shall be permanently secured to each wireway, terminal cabinet, and communications (voice, data, video) cabinet or rack. a. Identifying nameplates shall have 1/2-inch high, engraved letters. For equipment designation and t/a-inch letters indicating source circuit designation, (ie: °IDF(FCR) XXYY —served from MDF (BCR) XXGG). 3. Permanent, waterproof, black markers shall be used to identify each communications grid junction box, clearly indicating the type of system available at that junction box. 4. Pull Boxes: Field work each with a nameplate showing identity, and identifying equipment connected to it. Nameplates shall also indicate where pull box is fed from. E. Prohibited Markings: Markings intended to identify the manufacturer, vendor, or other source from whom the material has been obtained are prohibited for installation in public, tenant, or common areas within the project. Also prohibited are materials or devices that bear evidence that markings or insignias have been removed. Certification, testing (example, Underwriters Laboratories), and approval labels are exceptions to this requirement. F. Warning Signs: Provide warning signs where there is hazardous exposure associated with access to or operation of communications facilities. Provide text of sufficient size to convey adequate information at each location; mount permanently in an appropriate and effective location. Comply with industry standards for color and design. G. Wire and Cable Labeling: Provide wire markers on each conductor in all boxes, pull boxes, gutters, wireways. Identify with drop/circuit number. H. Underground Warning Tape: Thomas and Betts or approved equal. Six-inch wide plastic tape, colored red or orange with suitable warning legend describing buried communications lines. All underground conduits shall be so identified. Tape shall be buried at a depth of 6-inches below grade and directly above conduits or ductbanks. Provide magnetic marking tape below all underground conduits. 3.06 CUTTING AND PATCHING A. General: Comply with the requirements of Division 01 for the cutting and patching of other work to accommodate the installation of electrical work. Except as authorized by the Architect/Engineer, cutting and patching of electrical work to accommodate the installation of other work is not permitted. COMMUNICATIONS GENERAL PROVISIONS VLK Architects 2007 27 0500 - 13 2740.00 CREEKVIEW ELEMENTARY SCHOOL COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX 3.07 INSTRUCTION OF OWNER'S PERSONNEL A. Prior to substantial completion, conduct an on -site training program to instruct Owner's operating personnel in the operation and maintenance of the communications systems. 1. Provide the training during regular working day. 2. The Instructors shall be experienced in their phase of operation and maintenance of the electrical systems and with the project. B. Time to be allocated for instructions. 1. Minimum of 3 hours dedicated instructor time 2. 1 hour on each of 3 days 3. Additional instruction time for specific systems as specified in other Sections. C. Before on -site training, submit the program syllabus; proposed time and dates; for review and approval, minimum 48 hours prior to proposed training time and date. 1. One copy to the Owner 2. One copy to the Architect/Engineer D. The Owner shall provide a list of personnel to receive instructions, and shall coordinate their attendance at the agreed upon times. E. Use operation and maintenance manuals as the basis of instruction. Review manual with personnel in detail. Explain all aspects of operation and maintenance. F. Demonstrate start-up, operation, control, adjustment, trouble -shooting, servicing, maintenance, and shut down of each item of equipment. G. Demonstrate equipment functions (both individually and as part of the total integrated system). H. Prepare and insert additional data in the operating and maintenance manuals when the need for additional data becomes apparent during instructions. Submit a report within one week after completion of training. List time and date of each demonstration, hours devoted to the demonstration, and a list of people present, with their respective signatures. J. At the conclusion of the on -site training program, have the person designated by the Owner sign a certificate to certify that he/she has a proper understanding of the system, that the demonstrations and instructions have been satisfactorily completed, and the scope and content of the operating and maintenance manuals used for the training program are satisfactory. K. Provide a copy of the report and the certificate in an appropriately tabbed section of each Operating and Maintenance Manual. 3.08 OPENINGS A. Framed, cast or masonry openings for boxes, equipment or conduits are specified under other divisions. Drawings and layout work for exact size and location of all openings are included under this division. 3.09 OBSTRUCTIONS A. The drawings indicate certain information pertaining to surface and subsurface obstructions, which has been taken from available drawings. Such information is not guaranteed, however, as to accuracy of location or complete information. COMMUNICATIONS GENERAL PROVISIONS VLK Architects 2007 27 0500 - 14 2740.00 CREEKVIEW ELEMENTARY SCHOOL COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX 1. Before any cutting or trenching operations are begun, verify with Owner's representative, utility companies, municipalities, and other interested parties that all available information has been provided. 2. Should obstruction be encountered, whether shown or not, alter routing of new work, reroute existing lines, remove obstruction where permitted, or otherwise perform whatever work is necessary to satisfy the purpose of the new work and leave existing services and structures in a satisfactory and serviceable condition. B. Assume total responsibility for and repair any damage to existing utilities or construction, whether or not such existing facilities are shown. 3.10 VANDAL RESISTANT DEVICES A. Where vandal resistant screws or bolts are employed on the project, deliver to the Owner 2 suitable tools for use with each type of fastener used. B. Proof of delivery of these items to the Owner shall be included in the Operating and Maintenance Manuals. 3.11 PROTECTION A. Protect work, equipment, fixtures, and materials. At work completion, work must be clean and in original manufacturer's condition. B. Do not deliver equipment to this project site until progress of construction has reached the stage where equipment is actually needed or until building is closed in enough to protect the equipment from weather. Equipment allowed to stand in the weather shall be rejected, and the contractor is obligated to furnish new equipment of a like kind at no additional cost to the Owner. 3.12 EQUIPMENT BACKBOARDS A. Backboards: 3/4 inch, fire retardant, exterior grade plywood, painted gray, both sides. 1. Provide minimum of two 4-ft. by 8-ft. sheets of plywood for each location shown. 2. Provide minimum of two 4-ft. by 4-ft. sheets of plywood for each communications location. 3.13 SITE MANAGEMENT RESPONSIBILITY: A. The Contractor shall provide an on -site Project Manager as defined in SUPERVISION OF WORK portion of this Section. 3.14 START-UP RESPONSIBILITY: A. The Contractor shall initiate System operation. The Contractor shall provide competent Start -Up personnel on each consecutive working day until all Communications Systems are functional and ready to start the acceptance test phase. If the Contractor, in the Owner/Architect's judgment, is not demonstrating progress in solving any technical problems, the Contractor shall supply Manufacturer's factory technical representation and diagnostic equipment at no cost to the Owner, until resolution of those defined problems. Where appropriate, the Contractor shall bring the Systems on-line in their basic state (i.e., alarm reporting, facility code access control, etc.) It is the responsibility of the Owner to provide the specific database information that will be utilized for initial system programming. COMMUNICATIONS GENERAL PROVISIONS VLK Architects 2007 27 0500 - 15 2740.00 CREEKVIEW ELEMENTARY SCHOOL COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX B. Properly ground each piece of electronic equipment prior to applying power. Properly ground all shielded wire shields to the appropriate earth ground at the hub end only, not at the remote or device end. C. Use a start-up sequence that incrementally brings each portion of the system on-line in a logical order that incorporates checking individual elements before proceeding to subsequent elements until the entire system is operational. The basic steps should include: 1. Establish ground planes at the equipment rooms and hub end of the systems as specified in Division 26. 2. Disconnect power, connect the first device, reconnect power, and verify operational correctness. Repeat until the entire system is verified and operational. 3.15 PREPARATION FOR ACCEPTANCE (SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION): A. All systems, equipment, and devices shall be in full and proper adjustment and operation, and properly labeled and identified. B. All materials shall be neat, clean and unmarred, and parts securely attached. C. All extra material as specified shall be delivered and stored at the premises as directed. D. Test reports of each system and each system's components and As -Built Project Drawings shall be complete and available for inspection and delivery as directed by the Owner. 3.16 SYSTEM ACCEPTANCE REQUIREMENTS: A. Before final acceptance or work, the Contractor shall perform and/or deliver each of the following in the order stated. B. The Contractor shall deliver three (3) composite "System Operations and Maintenance" manuals in three-ring binders, sized to hold the material below, plus 50% excess. Each manual shall contain in appropriately tabbed sections: 1. A statement of Guarantee including date of termination and the name and phone number of the persons to be called in the event of equipment failure. 2. A set of Operating procedures for the overall System that includes all required Owner activities, and that allows for the Owner operation of all attributes and facilities of the System. 3. A section for each specific type of equipment containing the vendor manuals, instruction sheets, and any related literature that cam in the original shipping container for that piece of equipment. Include all warranty cards. C. Testing: 1. The Contractor shall perform all tests required by Division 26 and those submitted as part of this Section. 2. The Contractor shall activate all devices for proper system operation, including supervisory and trouble circuit tests. Similarly, audible alarms will not be activated except on a one-time, coordinated basis, to check the actual sounding devices. 3. A test report for each piece of equipment shall be prepared by the Contractor and submitted to the Owner. This report shall include a complete listing of every device, the date it was tested, by whom and the results. The final test reports shall indicate that every device tested successfully. Failure to completely test and document the tests will result in a delay of final testing and acceptance. COMMUNICATIONS GENERAL PROVISIONS VLK Architects 2007 27 0500 - 16 2740.00 CREEKVIEW ELEMENTARY SCHOOL COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX D. As -Built Drawings: 1. After completion of all the tests listed above, and prior to the final acceptance test, The Contractor shall submit the complete As -Built drawings as identified in PART 1 — PROJECT RECORD DRAWINGS. 2. The final As -Built Drawings shall consist on one set of reproducible prints, two (2) sets of Point -to -Point Detail Drawings, Equipment Schedules, and the complete detailed technical data that was shipped by the manufacturer with all installed equipment. E. Final Acceptance Test: The Final Acceptance Test shall demonstrate the installed and activated System's performance and compliance with System Specifications. However, before this testing can begin the following must have received and reviewed by the Owner. 1. System Operations and Maintenance Manuals 2. System Test Reports 3. As -Built Drawings 3.17 NOTICE OF COMPLETION A. When the Final System Acceptance Requirements described above including the Final Acceptance Test described above have been satisfactorily completed. The Owner/Architect shall issue a Letter of Completion to the Contractor indicating the date of such completion. The Notice of Completion shall be recorded by the Contractor upon receipt of the Owner/Architect completion letter. This date of record shall be the start of the warranty period. END OF SECTION COMMUNICATIONS GENERAL PROVISIONS VLK Architects 2007 27 0500 - 17 2740.00 CREEKVIEW ELEMENTARY SCHOOL COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX SECTION 27 0500.02 - TELECOMMUNICATIONS, CATV, VOICE, DATA, VIDEO UTILITY COORDINATION AND SERVICE ENTRANCE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. General: Provide infrastructure, conduit, ductbanks and pathways from public street right- of-way to building for telecommunications, CATV, voice, data, and video. B. Utility Company Data: Obtain from utility company information and installation standards for telecommunication, CATV, voice, data, video service installation. C. Responsibilities: Determine what equipment and labor is provided by utility company and what equipment and labor is required of this Contractor. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL A. Utility Data: Ensure that utility company service data is accurate and verified. 2.02 UTILITY INFRASTRUCTURE A. General: Division 26 shall make provisions for utilities as required by utility company, including, but not limited to permanent or removable/lockable vehicular barriers, grounding rods, grounding conductors, sleeves, conduits, concrete ductbanks, pull boxes and manholes. B. The utility company shall provide cabling and connections to the Owner's demarcation point of service. C. General: Division 26 shall provide telecommunication, CATV, voice, data, video conductors beyond the utility company's point of demarcation as specified elsewhere in Division 26. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Standards: The installation of the service entrance provisions shall comply with the published standards and requirements of the utility company, the utility company's specific construction requirements for this project, and with requirements of this Division. B. Correction: Any failure to meet the standards and requirements shall be corrected to the satisfaction of the utility company and Owner without any additional cost to the Owner. C. Contractor shall provide all construction materials and labor that the utility company determines to be the responsibility of the customer, at no additional cost to the Owner. D. The materials and labor required by the utility company that shall be provided by the contractor includes, but is not limited to permanent or removable / lockable vehicular barriers, grounding rods, grounding conductors, sleeves, concrete pads, concrete reinforced ductbanks, conduits, racks and metering enclosures, pull boxes and manholes. TELECOMMUNICATIONS, CATV, VOICE, DATA, VIDEO UTILITY COORDINATION AND SERVICE ENTRANCE VLK Architects, 2007 27 0500.02 - 1 2740.00 CREEKVIEW ELEMENTARY SCHOOL COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX E. Utility pole and utility conduits and/or ductbank locations shall be staked and surveyed prior to utility installations by the Contractor to verify their proper placement is within the Owner's property and respective utility easements. Contractor shall verify by survey that the pole, conduit and ductbank location and easements do not interfere with existing easements, right-of-ways, or other restricted properties. Conflicts with existing easements and restrictions shall be brought to the attention of the Architect prior to construction. F. Contractor shall initiate contact with the utility provider (retail seller), utility transmission and distribution, and Owner within 14 days of Notice to Proceed to ensure all utilities will be available to the site. Any delays resulting from lack of this coordination shall be the responsibility of the Contractor. END OF SECTION TELECOMMUNICATIONS, CATV, VOICE, DATA, VIDEO UTILITY COORDINATION AND SERVICE ENTRANCE VLK Architects, 2007 27 0500.02 - 2 2740.00 CREEKVIEW ELEMENTARY SCHOOL COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX SECTION 27 0507 - COMMUNICATIONS SHOP DRAWINGS, COORDINATION DRAWINGS & PRODUCT DATA PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Prepare submittals as required by Division 01 and as outlined below. B. Submit product data shop drawings only for the following. and for items specifically requested elsewhere in the Contract Drawings and Specifications. Architect/Engineer reserves the right to refuse shop drawings not requested for review and to imply that materials shall be provided as specified without exception. C. The term submittal, as used herein, refers to all: 1. Shop Drawings 2. Coordination Drawings 3. Product data D. Submittals shall be prepared and produced for: 1. Distribution as specified 2. Inclusion in the Operating and Maintenance Manual, as specified, in the related section 1.02 SHOP DRAWINGS A. Present drawings in a clear and thorough manner. Identify details by reference to sheet and detail, schedule, or room numbers shown on Contract Drawings. B. Show all dimensions of each item of equipment on a single composite Shop Drawing. Do not submit a series of drawings of components. C. Identify field dimensions; show relation to adjacent or critical features or work or products. 1.03 COORDINATION DRAWINGS A. Present in a clear and thorough manner. Title each drawing with project name. Identify each element of drawings by reference to sheet number and detail, or room number of contract documents. Minimum drawing scale: 1/4"=1'-011 . B. Prepare coordination drawings to coordinate installations for efficient use of available space, for proper sequence of installation and to resolve conflicts. Coordinate with work specified in other sections and other divisions of the specifications. C. For each room containing technology equipment and each rack with technology equipment, submit plan and elevation drawings. Show: 1. Actual technology equipment and components to be furnished. 2. NEC working space and NEC access to NEC working space. 3. Relationship to other equipment and components and openings, doors and obstructions 4. Rack location and dimensions D. Identify field dimensions. Show relation to adjacent or critical features of work or products. E. Verify location of communications station devices, telephone outlets and other work specified in this Division. COMMUNICATIONS SHOP DRAWINGS, COORDINATION DRAWINGS & PRODUCT DATA VLK Architects 2007 27 0507 - 1 2740.00 CREEKVIEW ELEMENTARY SCHOOL COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX 1. Coordinate with drawing details, site conditions and millwork shop drawings prior to installation. 2. Where required for clarification, submit shop drawings prior to rough -in and fabrication. F. Submit shop drawings in plan, elevation and sections, showing outlets and other devices in casework, cabinetwork and built-in furniture. 1.04 PRODUCT DATA A. All product options specified shall be indicated on the product data submittal. All options listed on the standard product printed data not clearly identified as not part of the product data submitted shall become part of the Contract and shall be provided. B. Mark each copy of standard printed data to identify pertinent products, referenced to specification section and article number. C. Show reference standards, performance characteristics and capacities; wiring and piping diagrams and controls; component parts; finishes; dimensions and required clearances. D. Modify manufacturer's standard schematic drawings and diagrams to supplement standard information and to provide information specifically applicable to the work. Delete information not applicable. E. Mark up a copy of the specifications for the product to indicate a) acknowledgement of the specification requirement (Comply), or b) acknowledgement that the particular specification requirement does not apply to this specific project (Not Applicable) or, c) acknowledgement that the specification requirement cannot be made or that a variance is being submitted for review to the Architect/Engineer/Owner (Does Not Comply, Explanation:) 1.05 MANUFACTURERS INSTRUCTIONS A. Submit Manufacturer's instructions for storage, preparation, assembly, installation, start-up and adjusting. 1.06 CONTRACTOR RESPONSIBILITIES A. Review submittals prior to transmittal. B. Determine and verify: 1. Field measurements 2. Field construction criteria 3. Manufacturer's catalog numbers 4. Conformance with requirements of Contract Documents C. Coordinate submittals with requirements of the work and of the Contract Documents. D. Notify the Architect/Engineer in writing at time of submission of any deviations in the submittals from requirements of the Contract Documents. E. Do not fabricate products, or begin work for which submittals are specified, until such submittals have been produced and bear contractor's stamp. Do not fabricate products or begin work scheduled to have submittals reviewed until return of reviewed submittals with Architect/Engineer's acceptance. COMMUNICATIONS SHOP DRAWINGS, COORDINATION DRAWINGS & PRODUCT DATA VLK Architects 2007 27 0507 - 2 2740.00 CREEKVIEW ELEMENTARY SCHOOL COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX F. Contractor's responsibility for errors and omissions in submittals is not relieved whether Architect/Engineer reviews submittals or not. G. Contractor's responsibility for deviations in submittals from requirements of Contract Documents is not relieved whether Architect/Engineer reviews submittals or not, unless Architect/engineer gives written acceptance of the specific deviations on reviewed documents. H. Submittals shall show sufficient data to indicate complete compliance with Contract Documents: 1. Proper sizes and capacities 2. That the item will fit in the available space in a manner that will allow proper service 3. Construction methods, materials and finishes I. Schedule submissions at least 15 days before date reviewed submittals will be needed. 1.07 SUBMISSION REQUIREMENTS A. Make submittals promptly in accordance with approved schedule, and in such sequence as to cause no delay in the Project or in the work of any other Contractor. B. Number of submittals required: 1. Shop Drawings and Coordination Drawings: Submit four opaque reproductions. 2. Product Data: Submit the number of copies the contractor requires, plus those to be retained by the Architect/Engineer. C. Accompany submittals with transmittal letter, in duplicate, containing: 1. Date 2. Project title and number 3. Contractor's name, address and telephone number 4. The number of each Shop Drawing, Project Datum and Sample submitted 5. Other pertinent data D. Submittals shall include: 1. The date of submission 2. The project title and number 3. Contract Identification 4. The names of: a. Contractor b. Subcontractor C. Supplier d. Manufacturer 5. Identification of the product 6. Field dimensions, clearly identified as such 7. Relation to adjacent or critical features of the work or materials 8. Applicable standards, such as ASTM or federal specifications numbers 9. Identification of deviations from contract documents 10. Suitable blank space for General Contractor and Architect/Engineer stamps 11. Contractor's signed and dated Stamp of Approval E. Coordinate submittals into logical groupings to facilitate interrelation of the several items. 1. Finishes which involve Architect/Engineer selection of colors, textures or patterns 2. Associated items requiring correlation for efficient function or for installation COMMUNICATIONS SHOP DRAWINGS, COORDINATION DRAWINGS & PRODUCT DATA VLK Architects 2007 27 0507 - 3 2740.00 CREEKVIEW ELEMENTARY SCHOOL COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX 1.08 SUBMITTAL SPECIFICATION INFORMATION A. Every submittal document shall bear the following information as used in the project manual: 1. The related specification section number 2. The exact specification section title B. Submittals delivered to the Architect/Engineer without the specified information will not be processed. The Contractor shall bear the risk of all delays, as if no submittal had been delivered. 1.09 RESUBMISSION REQUIREMENTS A. Make resubmittals under procedures specified for initial submittals. 1. Indicate that the document or sample is a resubmittal 2. Identify changes made since previous submittals B. Indicate any changes which have been made other than those requested by the Architect/Engineer. 1.10 CONTRACTOR'S STAMP OF APPROVAL A. Contractor shall stamp and sign each document certifying to the review of products, field measurements and field construction criteria, and coordination of the information within the submittal with requirements of the work and of Contract Documents. B. Contractor's stamp of approval on any submittal shall constitute a representation to Owner and Architect/Engineer that Contractor has either determined and verified all quantities, dimensions, field construction criteria, materials, catalog numbers, and similar data or assumes full responsibility for doing so, and that Contractor has reviewed or coordinated each submittal with the requirements of the work and the Contract Documents. C. Do not deliver any submittals to the Architect/Engineer that do not bear the Contractor's stamp of approval and signature. D. Submittals delivered to the Architect/Engineer without Contractor's stamp of approval and signature will not be processed. The Contractor shall bear the risk of all delays, as if no submittal had been delivered. 1.11 ARCHITECT/ENGINEER REVIEW OF IDENTIFIED SUBMITTALS A. The Architect/Engineer will: 1. Review identified submittals with reasonable promptness and in accordance with schedule. Specific equipment submittals that may be required to be expedited shall be submitted separately without other submittal items not requiring the same prompt attention. 2. Affix stamp and initials or signature, and indicate requirements for resubmittal or approval of submittal 3. Return submittals to Contractor for distribution or for resubmission B. Review of submittals will not extend to design data reflected in submittals that is peculiarly within the special expertise of the Contractor or any party dealing directly with the Contractor. C. Architect/Engineer's review is only for conformance with the design concept of the project and for compliance with the information given in the contract. 1. The review shall not extend to means, methods, sequences, techniques or procedures of construction or to safety precautions or programs incident thereto. COMMUNICATIONS SHOP DRAWINGS, COORDINATION DRAWINGS & PRODUCT DATA VLK Architects 2007 27 0507 - 4 2740.00 CREEKVIEW ELEMENTARY SCHOOL COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX 2. The review shall not extend to review of quantities, dimensions, weights or gauges, fabrication processes or coordination with the work of other trades. D. The review and approval of a separate item as such will not indicate approval of the assembly in which the item functions. 1.12 SUBSTITUTIONS A. Do not make requests for substitution employing the procedures of this Section. B. The procedure for making a formal request for substitution is specified in Division 1. PART 2 - PRODUCTS - NOT USED. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 SHOP DRAWINGS AND PRODUCT DATA A. Submittals shall not be combined or bound together with any other material submittal. B. Submit individually bound shop drawings and product data for the following when specified or provided: 1. Structural Cabling 3.02 COORDINATION DRAWINGS A. Submit coordination drawings as specified. END OF SECTION COMMUNICATIONS SHOP DRAWINGS, COORDINATION DRAWINGS & PRODUCT DATA VLK Architects 2007 27 0507 - 5 2740.00 CREEKVIEW ELEMENTARY SCHOOL COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX SECTION 27 0509 - CONTRACT QUALITY CONTROL PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Contract quality control including workmanship, manufacturer's instructions, mock-ups and demonstrations. 1.02 QUALITY CONTROL PROGRAM A. Maintain quality control over supervision, subcontractors, suppliers, manufacturers, products, services, site conditions and workmanship to produce work in accordance with contract documents. 1.03 WORKMANSHIP A. Comply with industry standards except when more restrictive tolerances or specified requirements indicate more rigid standards or more precise workmanship. B. Perform work by persons qualified to produce workmanship of specified quality. C. Secure products in place with positive anchorage devices designed and sized to withstand stresses, vibration, and racking. Under no conditions shall material or equipment be suspended from structural bridging. D. Provide finishes to match approved samples; all exposed finishes shall be approved by the Architect / Engineer. Submit color samples as required. 1.04 MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS A. Comply with instructions in full detail, including each step in sequence. B. Should instruction conflict with Contract Documents, request clarification from Architect/Engineer before proceeding. 1.05 MANUFACTURER'S CERTIFICATES A. When required in individual Specification Sections, submit manufacturer's certificate in duplicate, certifying that products meet or exceed specified requirements. 1.06 MANUFACTURER'S FIELD SERVICES A. When required in individual Specification Sections, manufacturer shall provide a manufacturer's qualified personnel to observe: 1. Field conditions. 2. Condition of installation. 3. Quality of workmanship. 4. Start-up of equipment. 5. Testing and adjusting of equipment. B. Manufacturer's qualified personnel shall make written report of observations and recommendations to Architect/Engineer. CONTRACT QUALITY CONTROL VLK Architects, 2007 27 0509 - 1 2740.00 CREEKVIEW ELEMENTARY SCHOOL COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 REFERENCE APPLICABLE SPECIFICATION SECTIONS. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 ADJUSTMENTS AND MODIFICATIONS A. Contractor shall provide all adjustments and modifications as requested by the manufacturer's qualified personnel at no additional cost to Owner. END OF SECTION CONTRACT QUALITY CONTROL VLK Architects, 2007 27 0509 - 2 2740.00 CREEKVIEW ELEMENTARY SCHOOL COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX SECTION 271300.02 - DATA AND VOICE STRUCTURED CABLING SYSTEM - LAN PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY OF WORK A. Provide a complete and tested Category 6e structured cable system (SCS) for data and analog voice interconnections (Local Area Network). The structured cable system shall include fully terminated fiber optic or copper twisted pair cables, raceways, conduit, UTP termination devices, data communications outlets, patch panels, patch cables, racks, multi -media cabling connectors and cables, and other incidental and miscellaneous premises wiring system hardware as required for a complete and usable system. The installation shall comply with applicable codes and standards in effect at the job site and as indicated in the Drawings and Specifications. B. Provide MDF to IDF fiber optic cable interconnections. The fiber strands shall be terminated and clearly marked on each IDF and MDF patch panel. C. Provide and locate all IDFs as required for a complete system. Additional IDF locations must be approved. Locate in Mechanical/Electrical type room. Contractor is responsible for any additional power requirements. D. Network electronics equipment shall be furnished by the Owner. The Contractor shall coordinate with other system vendors, where appropriate, to facilitate equipment installation, scheduling, protection of equipment and access to the project site in order to provide the Owner a substantially complete project in a timely manner. E. Provide media presentation connectivity where indicated, specified or required. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: 1. The Structured Cable System Installer shall be licensed and shall meet all applicable regulations. The Contractor shall be a member of BICSI and a firm normally employed in the low voltage and data cabling industry. 2. The contractor shall be certified by the manufacturing company in all aspects of design, installation and testing of the products described herein, and have a minimum of five (5) years experience on similar SCS cabling systems. 3. The contractor must be certified by the manufacturer of the products, adhere to the engineering, installation and testing procedures and utilize the authorized manufacturer components and distribution channels in provisioning this Project. 4. The contractor shall be experienced in all aspects of this work and shall be required to demonstrate direct experience on recent systems of similar type and size. The contractor shall own and maintain tools and equipment necessary for successful installation and testing of optical and metallic premise distribution systems and have personnel who are adequately trained in the use of such tools and equipment. 5. A resume of qualifications shall be submitted with the Contractor's proposal indicating the following: a. A list of five recently completed projects of similar type and size with contact names and telephone numbers for each. b. A list of test equipment proposed for use in verifying the installed integrity of metallic and fiber optic cable systems on this project. C. A technical resume of experience for the contractor's Project Manager and on -site installation supervisor who shall be assigned to this project. d. A list of technical product training attended by the contractor's personnel that shall install the SCS system shall be submitted. DATA AND VOICE STRUCTURED CABLING SYSTEM - LAN VLK Architects, 2007 27 1300.02 - 1 2740.00 CREEKVIEW ELEMENTARY SCHOOL COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX e. Any subcontractor who shall assist the SCS contractor in performance of this work shall have the same training and certification as the SCS contractor. 6. The Proposer without use of sub -contractors shall install the entire Data Cable system. The contractor shall employ full time local technicians and installers. The manufacturer shall maintain a full time factory certified employed service staff for product support and service. B. The Contractor shall attend a mandatory pre -construction meeting with individuals deemed necessary by the Owner's representative prior to the start of the work. 1. T568A and T568B are the two wiring standards for an 8-position modular connector, permitted under the TIA-568-A wiring standards document. Provide T568A unless directed otherwise by the Owner / Architect. Coordinate with owner correct color pair termination prior to final terminations. 2. Items requested by the Owner/Architect to finalize rack equipment configuration, rack cable management, rack cable terminations and other miscellaneous minor changes shall become part of the Contract Documents as supplementary information. C. The products specified in Part 2 of this Specification shall be supplied by a single manufacturer, with the exception of 1) data racks and other hardware that is not defined as part of the channel test configuration by TIA/EIA TSB67, Transmission Performance Specifications for Field Testing of unshielded Twisted -Pair Cabling Systems; 2) Outside plant (OSP) copper cable. Manufacturer shall have a minimum of seven (7) years experience and shall be ISO 9001 Certified. D. The Owner's representative reserves the right to reject all or a portion of the work performed, either on technical or aesthetic grounds. E. Warranty 1. The selected system installer shall be factory certified by the system component manufacturer, and shall provide an end -to -end performance warranty of not less than Twenty (20) years. The proposer shall provide certification documentation. The performance warranty shall be issued by the manufacturer and shall warrant that all cable links have been tested end -to -end using a Level 4 tester, per TSB- 67, and that all test results conform to the most current TIA/EIA-568-A and/or TSB-67 Link values. 2. The warranty shall also cover multimode fiber optic cabling. Performance testing shall be conducted in accordance with ANSI/EIA/TIA-526-14 Standard, Method B. 3. The warranty shall stipulate that all products used in this installation meet the prescribed mechanical and transmission specifications for such products as described in ISO/IEC 11801, ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-A, or EN 50173. Quality and workmanship evaluation shall be solely by the Owner / Architect / Engineer and designated representatives. 1.03 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Standards: All work shall be performed in accordance with the latest revisions of the following standards and codes: 1. Local Building Code 2. Local Electrical Code 3. NEC National Electrical Code B. Other references: 1. TIA/EIA-568-3 - Commercial Building Telecommunications Wiring Standard DATA AND VOICE STRUCTURED CABLING SYSTEM - LAN VLK Architects, 2007 27 1300.02 - 2 2740.00 CREEKVIEW ELEMENTARY SCHOOL COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX 2. EIA/TIA-569 - Commercial Building Standard for Telecommunications Pathways and Spaces. 3. TIA/EIA-606-A - The Administration Standard for the Telecommunications Infrastructure of Commercial Buiidings 4. TIA/EIA-607 - Commercial Building Grounding and Bonding Requirements for Telecommunications 5. EIA/TIA 455-A - Standard Test Procedure for Fiber Optic Fibers, Cables, Transducers, Sensors, Connecting and Terminating Devices and Other Fiber Optic Components. 6. TIA/EIA TSB 67 - Transmission Performance Specification for Field Testing of Unshielded Twisted -Pair Cabling Systems. 7. TIA/EIA TSB 72 - Centralized Optical Fiber Cabling Guidelines 8. ISO/IEC 11801 -Generic Cabling Standard 9. EN 50173 - Generic Cabling Standards for Customer Premises 10. ANSI/EIA/TIA - Optical power Loss Measurements of Installed Multimode Fiber 526-14 Cable Plan 11. Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE 802.xLAN) C. Governing Codes and Conflicts: If the requirements of these specifications or the Project Drawings exceed those of the governing codes, regulations, and manufacturer installation requirements, then the requirements of these specifications and the drawings shall govern. However, nothing in the drawings or specifications shall be construed to permit work not conforming to all governing codes, regulations, and manufacturer installation requirements. 1.04 ABBREVIATIONS A. The following abbreviations are used in this document: DC Direct Current IDF Intermediate Distribution Frame MDF Main Distribution Frame PBX Private Branch Exchange UTP Unshielded Twisted Pair SCS Structured Cabling System 1.05 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Structured Wiring Systems 1. Leviton Telcom. 2. AMP Netconnect 3. Hubbell 4. Panduit 5. Nordx 6. Systimax 7. Ortronics 8. Siemon 9. ADC B. Support Systems 1. Caddy 2. Panduit - Vertical & Horizontal Enhanced WMP Series 3. Leviton - Versi-Duct 4. AMP Netconnect 5. ADC DATA AND VOICE STRUCTURED CABLING SYSTEM - LAN VLK Architects, 2007 27 1300.02 - 3 2740.00 CREEKVIEW ELEMENTARY SCHOOL COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX 1.06 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Submit the following items, for Owner review and approval, within twenty- eight (28) days of Notice to Proceed: 1. Proposed circuit routing and circuit grouping plan prepared by a BICSI certified RCDD (Registered Communications Distribution Designer). The RCDD certification must have been granted on or before five years previous of proposal due date. 2. Products: Provide standard manufacturer's cut sheets or other descriptive information. 3. Testing: UTP cable test result forms, fiber optic cable test result forms and a list of instrumentation to be used for systems testing. 4. Provide a line -by-line item specification review indicating compliance or deviation with full description of deviation. 5. Samples: Complete manufacturer's product literature and samples of patch panel, fiber terminations and station jacks with cover plate. B. Documentation: Contractor shall provide documentation to include test results, and as - built drawings. An example of test results as they will be presented should be included with the shop drawings. 1. Fiber Test Results: hand written results are not acceptable. Copies of test results are not acceptable. Results to be provided on disk and printed form. 2. Work Station Cable Results: The results of the workstation cable tests shall be provided in the form of printouts from the test equipment. C. Project Completion: As a condition for project acceptance, the Contractor shall submit the following for review and approval: 1. Complete manufacturer's product literature for all products installed during the course of the Project for Operation & Maintenance. 2. Inspection and Test Reports: During the course of the Project, the Contractor shall maintain an adequate inspection system to insure that the materials supplied and the work performed conforms to contract requirements. The Contractor shall provide written documentation that indicates that materials acceptance testing was conducted as specified. The Contractor shall also provide documentation, which indicates that all cable termination testing was completed and that all irregularities were corrected prior to job completion. 3. Operating and Maintenance Instructions for all devices within the system. These instructions shall reflect any changes made during the course of construction, and shall be provided to the Owner, for their use, in a three-ring binder labeled with the project name and description. (4 copies) 4. As -built Drawings shall include fiber and copper backbone cable routes, data outlet locations with correct labeling and MDF/IDF locations. The as -built drawings shall be prepared using Auto Cad 2000 electronic format or later on CD. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL A. Materials shall be as listed or shall be approved equivalent products of other manufacturers meeting the intent and quality level of the TIA/EIA specifications. B. Ratings: All products shall be new and brought to the job site in the original manufacturer's packaging. Electrical components (including innerduct) shall bear the Underwriter's Laboratories label. All communications cable shall bear flammability testing ratings as follows: CM Communications Cable CMP Plenum Rated Communications Cable DATA AND VOICE STRUCTURED CABLING SYSTEM - LAN VLK Architects, 2007 27 1300.02 - 4 2740.00 CREEKVIEW ELEMENTARY SCHOOL COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX CMR Riser -Rated Communications Cable OSP Outside Plant Cable C. Initial Cable Inspection: The Contractor shall inspect all cable prior. to installation to verify that it is identified properly on the reel identification label, that it is of the proper gauge, containing the correct number of pairs, etc. Note any buckling of the jacket that would indicate possible problems. Damaged cable or any other components failing to meet specifications shall not be used in the installation. D. Cable Lubricants specifically designed for installing communications cable may be used to reduce pulling tension as necessary when pulling cable into conduit. 1. Approved Products Twisted Pair Cable Lubricant: Dyna-Blue or American Polywater Optical Fiber Cable Lubricant: Optic -tube or Ideal E. Fire Wall Sealant: Any penetration through fire walls (including those in sleeves) shall be resealed with an Underwriter Laboratories (UL) approved sealant. 1. Approved Products: Flameseal. 2.02 DATA CLOSET (MDF/IDF) TERMINATION HARDWARE A. Equipment Racks. Provide and install equipment racks in locations required and indicated on the attached Drawings. Racks shall be equipped as detailed and hereafter specified. Racks shall be 19" x 84" floor -mount. Provide enclosed patch panels in areas accessible by students and/or non -approved personnel. B. Distribution Rack Grounding: Rack shall be grounded using stranded #6 AWG insulated copper conductor. Provide all required bonding materials and hardware and bond to building grounding electrode subsystem and at building electrical'service entrance. C. Fiber Optic Patch Panels: The enclosures used shall provide termination panels for SC type connectors or as directed by Owner, and be of sufficient size and capacity to terminate the fiber count of the inside or outside fiber optic cables. Patch panels must be 19" rack mountable. Provide all termination accessories, enclosures and test for a complete fiber optic distribution system. D. Patch Panels shall consist of face plates pre -assembled with communication port housings and shall be 19" rack mountable. Workstation patch panels shall terminate all workstation communications outlets. Furnish units that adhere to the performance requirements TIA/EIA-568A standards. 1. 48 - Port E. A Power Strip shall be installed vertically at the back of each data rack or horizontally at the base of the rack. F. Soft Cinch Velcro cable Management (IDF & MDF Rooms) 1. Velcro, lengths as required. 2. Blue color for data cables. 2.03 CABLE ROUTING/PATHWAY A. Cable Tray - Ladder Racks: Metal cable tray shall be provided to affix to the top of all floor mount racks. Cable tray shall be used to brace racks to walls and to route cable from walls to racks in communications closets. B. Cable Support System: Cable saddles, Bridle Rings shall be used to route all exposed cables (cable not in conduit or cable tray) in open access environments as well as in communications closets. DATA AND VOICE STRUCTURED CABLING SYSTEM - LAN VLK Architects, 2007 127 1300.02 - 5 2740.00 CREEKVIEW ELEMENTARY SCHOOL COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX 1. Flexible and non-metallic loop 2. Hold up to 5" diameter bundle of cable 3. Without sagging, bending or damaging cable C. Cable Ties 1. Velcro, lengths as required. 2. Blue color for data cables. 3. Plenum rated ties in concealed locations. D. Provide cable management panels as required for horizontal and vertical cable management at all racks. 1. Slotted duct configuration for copper and fiber cabling systems. 2.04 STATION CABLE A. The cable provided for all outlets shall be unshielded twisted pair, four -pair, 24 AWG solid copper conductor, meeting the intent and quality level of the TIA/EIA-568-A Commercial Building Wiring Standard. One (1) cable shall be installed for each port shown on the Drawings. Plenum rated CMP 1. Outer jacket color. a. Light Blue 2. Approved products: a. Belden CDT b. CommScope C. Berk-Tek d. Superior Essex 2.05 STATION HARDWARE A. Flush mount jacks shall be high quality 8p 8c modular jacks with circuit board construction and IDC style or 110-style wire, T568A or T568B terminations. Jacks shall meet EIA/TIA TSB40 recommendations for connecting hardware. 1. Multimedia inserts shall be Decora style, color to match building standard wiring device color. 2. Face plates shall match building standard wiring device faceplates manufacturer for 8p 8c outlets at all locations. Refer to section 26 2773 for wiring device faceplate specification. Verify color with Architect/Owner. 3. Blank insert covers shall be provided for unused workstation ports. 4. Submit samples for approval prior to purchase 5. Provide necessary accessories for floor -mounted boxes 6. Minimum four ports or as noted if greater 7. 8-conductor Connector 8. Wall mount phone faceplate, 8-conductor 2.06 FIBER OPTIC PRODUCTS A. Multi -mode Fiber Optic Cable shall be UL listed type OFNP; 62.5/125 micron graded index multi -mode fibers, each with a color -coded PVC buffer. Maximum attenuation shall be 3.75 dB/km at 850 nm and 1.0 dB/km at 1300 nm. Minimum bandwidth shall be 160 MHZ/km at 850 nm and 500 MHZ/km at 1300 nm and contain no metallic elements. Fiber optic cable outer jacket shall be orange. Cable routed outside, between buildings, etc. shall be rated OSP (outside plant cable). B. Single Mode Fiber Optic Cable shall be UL listed type OFNP, 9.0 micron and single mode fibers, each with a color -coded PVC tight buffer. Maximum attenuation shall be 1.0 dB/km at 1310 nm and 10 Gbe transmission distance greater than 10km at 1300 nm. Fiber optic cable outer jacket shall be orange. Cable routed outside, between buildings, etc. shall be rated OSP (outside plant cable). DATA AND VOICE STRUCTURED CABLING SYSTEM - LAN VLK Architects, 2007 27 1300.02 - 6 2740.00 CREEKVIEW ELEMENTARY SCHOOL COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX C. Interlock armor fiber optic cables. 1. Steel or Aluminum 2. Riser -Rated or Plenum Rated 3. Orange Plenum rated jacket 4. Outer and inner jacket 5. Orange Colored Armor 6. Colored Jacket D. Number of Fibers 1. Fiber between IDF & MDF. a. 12 2. Single Mode Fiber between MDF & Outside Plant Locations. a. 12 E. Fiber Optic Connectors shall be SC or ST type connectors. 1. Coordinate connector type with Owner 2.07 CABLING A. All cabling used throughout this project shall comply with the requirements as outlined in the National Electric code (NEC) Articles 725, 760, 770, and 800 and the appropriate local codes. All copper cabling shall bear CMP (Plenum Rated), CM/CMR (Riser Rated), OSP (Outside Plant Cable Rated) and/or appropriate markings for the environment in which they are installed. All fiber optic cabling shall be OFNP (Plenum Rated), OFNR (Riser Rated), OSP (Outside Plant Rated) and/or appropriate markings for the environment in which they are installed. 2.08 VGA AND AUDIO HARDWARE A. Audio cable shall be as specified for data cabling. VGA cabling shall be Category 6 STP minimum or shielded pre -fabricated, molded connector cable. B. Audio jacks shall be high quality RCA type modular jacks with circuit board construction and IDC style or 110 style wire terminations. 1. Blank insert covers shall be provided for unused workstation ports. 2. Submit samples for approval. prior to construction 3. Provide necessary accessories for floor -mounted boxes. 4. Minimum six ports or as noted if greater. 5. RCA jack(s) for audio shall be white in color. Jack shall be gold plated with red stripe (right audio), black stripe (left audio). 2.09 LABELS A. Durable laser printable cable labels. 1. Designed to function in most desktop laser printers. 2. Durable Polyester label stock. 3. Self -Laminating wrap around design. 4. Available in US letter sheet size of 8.5" x 11 ". 5. Clear Polyester with White and Colored Print -on areas. 6. Polyester rated for OF to 275F for indoor and outdoor applications. 7. Patch Panel Port Identification. 8. Face Plate and Port Labels. 9. 110 & NS6-110 Cross Connect Labels 10. Rack and Cabinet Labels. 11. Fiber Adapter Labels. 12. Pre -Printed Port Labeling. DATA AND VOICE STRUCTURED CABLING SYSTEM - LAN VLK Architects, 2007 27 1300.02 - 7 2740.00 CREEKVIEW ELEMENTARY SCHOOL COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. The system shall utilize a network of fiber optic, and unshielded twisted pair, riser, tie and station cables. Cables and terminations shall be provided and located as shown and in the quantities indicated on the drawings. Fiber cables shall terminate on Fiber Distribution Centers (FDCs) and/or modular patch panels located in all demarcation and termination points shown on the drawings or as required. All cables, and terminations, shall be identified at all locations. All cables shall terminate in an alphanumeric sequence at all termination locations. All copper cable terminations shall comply with, and be tested to TIA/EIA 568A and TSB-67 standards. Available and unused pairs between the ER and TC(s) shall terminate and shall be identified as spare at each location. B. Provide one (2) - 25 pair cable run from existing true telephone company demarc to MDF location in each building. These tie cables will be terminated on split-50 blocks and so labeled. Punch blocks shall be wall mounted in demarc room and in MDF on plywood. All voice lines shall use standard 25-pair color schemes. C. Voice only (POT) cables shall be home runs, from outlet at final termination to IDF or MDF, whichever is closest. Punch blocks shall be wall mounted in demarc room and in MDF on plywood. Then TIE cables will be provided in order for 2 voice pairs per drop to be cross connected simultaneously from each IDF to the MDF. This means: 1. If there are 50 voice drops going to IDF1, then there should be enough tie cable pairs terminated from that IDF1 to the MDF to fully patch 2 times (100) the amount of the voice pairs through to MDF. D. The termination pinout will be: Pair 1 pin 1: White Green pin 2: White Orange Pair 2 pin 3: Blue White pin 4: White Blue Pair 3 pin 5: Orange White pin 6: Green White White Brown and Brown coiled inside gang box/outlet. (RJ11) 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Furnish and install complete with all accessories a Structured Cabling System (SCS). The SCS shall serve as a vehicle for transport of data, video and telephony signals throughout the network from designated demarcation points to outlets located at various desk, workstation and other locations as indicated on the contract drawings and described herein. Applications standards supported should include, but be not limited to, IEEE 802.3, 10Base5, 10BASE-T, IEEE 802.5, 4 Mbps, 16Mbps 328 ft. [100m), and TP-PMD. In addition, these links/channels shall be capable of supporting applications such as 100 Base-T and 52/155 Mbps ATM AND 77 Channel Analog Broadband Video to 550 Mhz. Gigabit cable performance shall be capable of supporting applications including AES/EBU Digital Audio, 270 Mbps Digital video, 622 Mbps 64-CAP ATM, 1000BASE-T Gigabit Ethernet and 1.2 Gigabit ATM. B. The cabling shall be installed per requirements of the manufacturer and the Project Documents, utilizing material meeting all applicable TIA/EIA standards. The Contractor is DATA AND VOICE STRUCTURED CABLING SYSTEM - LAN VLK Architects, 2007 27 1300.02 - 8 2740.00 CREEKVIEW ELEMENTARY SCHOOL COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX responsible for providing all incidental and/or miscellaneous hardware not explicitly specified below as required for a complete and operational system. C. Contractor shall not hang cabling on pipes or wiring looms. Provide and install separate J- Hooks, cable saddles or cable trays to carry cable plant that is installed. Cable support shall be secured to building structure. D. Cable shall run parallel and perpendicular to building lines. Cable runs shall be free of splices, kinks, excessive slack, and damage to the outer jacket. Changes in direction will be made with smooth bends, not exceeding minimum bend radius. E Cable shall not run in close proximity (6 inches perpendicular, 12 inches parallel) to power conduits (and other electrical noise sources). F. Cables shall be placed with sufficient bending radius so as not to kink, shear or damage the cable jacket or to otherwise diminish the transmission capability of the wire inside. G. Cables shall be of a different color than those used by the non-IP, telephone, video cables or electrical cables in order to easily identify the data network wiring. H. Cable and/or cable bundles shall not be attached to any electrical wiring or light fixtures, nor will its vertical deflection allow it to come in contact with HVAC mechanical equipment, electrical wiring, conduits, piping, or fluorescent light fixtures. All data and VoIP cables shall be home runs from outlet at final termination to patch panel at IDF (intermediate distribution frame) or home runs from outlet at final termination to MDF. Cable Termination: 1. Number of twists per foot shall be maintained all the way to cable termination point. 2. Provide 1-meter service loop above ceiling for each drop. K. All as -built documentation and test results are to be approved and stamped by a Registered communications Distribution Designer (RCDD). L. If there is no IDF or MDF within 90-meter cable limitations of drop, contractor shall be responsible for additional IDF's as required for a complete system. Locate additional IDFs in Mechanical/ Electrical Rooms or as directed by Owner. Provide additional 120 volt power and receptacles as required for additional IDF locations, similar to those IDF's indicated or specified elsewhere. M. Between MDF and IDF(s) provide multi -mode fiber cable using armored cable encasing all fiber cable. N. Fiber paths shall be routed separate from copper paths. O. Cable Pathway: 1. In suspended ceiling and raised floor areas where duct, cable trays or conduit are not available, the Contractor shall bundle, in bundles of 50 or less, station wiring with cable ties snug, but not deforming the cable geometry. Cable bundles shall be supported and attached to the building structure and framework at a maximum of five (5) foot intervals.*The Contractor shall adhere to the manufacturer's requirements for bending radius and pulling tension of all cables. 2. Cables shall not be attached to lift out ceiling grid supports or laid directly on the ceiling grid. 3. Cables shall not be attached to or supported by fire sprinkler heads or delivery systems or any environmental sensor located in the ceiling air space. DATA AND VOICE STRUCTURED CABLING SYSTEM - LAN VLK Architects, 2007 27 1300.02 - 9 2740.00 CREEKVIEW ELEMENTARY SCHOOL COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX P. Fire Wall Penetrations: the Contractor shall avoid penetration of fire rated walls and floors wherever possible. Contractor shall also seal all floor, ceiling and wall penetrations in fire or smoke barriers and in the wiring closet. Q. Wall Penetrations: Where penetrations are necessary, they shall be sleeved with metallic conduit and resealed with an Underwriter Laboratories (UL) approved sealant. R. Allowable Cable Bend Radius and Pull Tension: In general, communications cable cannot tolerate sharp bends or excessive pull tension during installation. Refer to the cable manufacturer's allowable bend radius and pull tension data for the maximum allowable limits. S. After installation, exposed cable and other surfaces must be cleaned free of lubricant residue. T. Provide pull strings in all new conduits, including all conduits with cable installed as part of this contract. Pull test is not to exceed 200 pounds. U. Conduit sleeves shall be provided from outside IDF/MDF location to below ceiling area above ladder rack inside IDF/MDF. Minimum conduit size for data cabling sleeves shall be 4 inch. V. Damage: 1. The Contractor shall replace or rework cable showing evidence of improper handling including stretches, kinks, short radius bends, over -tightened bindings, loosely twisted and over -twisted pairs at terminals and excessive cable sheath has been removed. 2. The Contractor shall replace any damaged ceiling tiles that are broken during cable installation. Ceiling tiles shall match existing or new as specified elsewhere. W. All clean-up activity related to work performed shall be the responsibility of the Contractor and must be completed daily before leaving the facility. X. Cable Termination: 1. Cable shall be terminated using tools specified by the cable manufacturer. 2. Number of twists per foot shall be maintained all the way to cable termination point. Y. Mounting heights shall conform to the Local Building Code Accessibility Standards. Mounting height shall match adjacent wiring devices unless noted otherwise. Z. Double duplex receptacle(s) shall be installed at all OF locations and circuited to the nearest computer power panel board. AA. No patch panel, cable, outlet or punch block shall be within 6 feet of transformers or 12 inches of fluorescent lights, light fixtures, A/C wiring, radio systems or any other RF emitting device in ceilings or in/on walls. BB. Conduit for cable shall be concealed inside walls for drops unless otherwise noted. CC. All as -built documentation and test results are to be approved and stamped by a Registered communications Distribution Designer (RCDD). Provide Auto Cad 2000 as built drawings and electronic format test results. DD. Provide owner with total count of ports used per IDF / MDF location. DATA AND VOICE STRUCTURED CABLING SYSTEM - LAN VLK Architects, 2007 27 1300.02 - 10 2740.00 CREEKVIEW ELEMENTARY SCHOOL COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX EE. Emergency phone copper / Vo-IP 1. All 25-pair "tie -cables" (between telephone company demarc and network racks) are to be terminated at a patch panel in the network rack. 2. Tie -cables should be terminated using 1-pair at each port; the 25th pair should be doubled up on the last port (in a 24-port panel). 3. Emergency phone locations. a. Locations as indicated. b. Elevator Machine C. Building Management Control Panel. d. Security System. e. Fire Alarm Panel FF. Wireless Access Points: Provide orange outlets in patch panel for identification of wireless access point cables. Install each outlet above ceiling in outlet box with terminal of same design as station hardware except with orange outlets. GG. VoIP: Provide green outlets in patch panels for identification of VoIP cables. HH. PoE: Provide red outlets in patch panels for identification of miscellaneous PoE outlets. II. Any data cabling installed in any conduit that is run underground in or under building slab shall be sealed at each end with approved gel cable/conduit sealant. JJ. All patch panels shall be provided with 25% spare capacity for future growth. KK. Media interface: Provide outlets, connectors, cable, etc., as required for the intended function of audio / visual presentation. 3.03 VOICE ONLY (POT) PREMISE WIRE COMPONENTS A. Connecting Blocks: 1. Punch down blocks shall be assembled and mounted on backboards in locations shown on the drawings and or as required. Each backboard rack / punch down block shall be securely mounted to the wall on plywood. Blocks / backboards shall be mounted such that the side rails are plumb. Blocks shall be grounded in accordance with NEC requirements. 2. Wall mount cabinets will be securely mounted to vertical surfaces in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions and recommendations. Cabinets shall be mounted such that the cabinet sides are plumb. The cabinet top will be mounted 7 feet from the finished floor. Cabinets shall be grounded in accordance with NEC requirements. 3. Backboards shall be used to mount 66-type connecting blocks and for horizontal jumper runs. Provide a different color for identification of functional areas in cross -connected fields. Blue = station, Green tie -cable. 3.04 DOCUMENTATION A. Labels: The Contractor shall label all outlets using permanent machine engraved labels approved by the Owner. Label patch panels in the wiring closet to match those on corresponding data outlets. The font shall be at least one -eighth inch (1/8") in height, block. All labels shall correspond to as-builts and to final test reports. B. Contractor shall ensure complete durable laser printable cable labels typed labeling of all outlets and cables with numbers that correspond to locations on the punch down block. Labeling system shall correspond to the Owner's labeling system. Verify with Owner. Provide tags (black letters on white labels, plastic coated) on all cables and outlets. DATA AND VOICE STRUCTURED CABLING SYSTEM - LAN VLK Architects, 2007 27 1300.02 - 11 2740.00 CREEKVIEW ELEMENTARY SCHOOL COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX C. Final system room designations shall be based on actual room number graphics. (Do not use Architectural drawing room designations). D. All cables shall be labeled at both ends and all terminations shall be stenciled with a typed label for quick circuit identification. Labeling shall conform to TIA/EIA standard 606 and include interconnect cable identification numbers. E. A floor plan, clearly labeled with all outlet jack numbers, shall be included in the as -built plans. Install additional copy of floor plan in each IDF & MDF. 3.05 EQUIPMENT RACK CONFIGURATION A. Equipment Racks: 1. Floor Mounted Equipment racks shall be assembled and mounted in IDF/MDF locations as required in locations indicated on the drawings. Each rack shall be securely mounted to the floor and braced to the wall with cable tray in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions and recommendations. Racks shall be mounted such that the side rails are plumb. Racks and cable tray shall be grounded in accordance with NEC requirements. Rack shall be installed for.future expansion and with proper access behind after electronic equipment is installed. 2. Wall Mount Cabinets shall be securely mounted to vertical surfaces in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions and recommendations. Cabinets shall be mounted such that the cabinet sides are plumb. The cabinet top shall be mounted 7 feet from the finished floor. Cabinets shall be grounded in accordance with NEC requirements. 3. Provide at least 50% of mounting space remaining after patch panel's installation for later placement of hubs/routers etc in each rack. a. Provide vertical patching of data cables, instead of horizontal patching; this requires that each network rack be populated with no more than 50% of patch panels, leaving 50% of the available rack space for customer equipment b. Upper 50% of each rack shall house cable patch panels C. Lower 50% of each rack shall house Owner's equipment 4. Provide additional racks, 3 total, for Owner provided equipment in each MDF location. 5. Provide coordination drawing with IDF/MDF equipment layout for approval prior to installation. B. Wire Management Components: Horizontal cable management panels shall be installed directly above and below each patch panel. Vertical cable management panels shall be installed on each side of the rack. In instances where more than one rack is installed in a single location, vertical cable management shall be installed between the racks. C. Cable Placement: Cable installation in the wiring closet must conform to the Project Drawings. All cabling shall be routed so as to avoid interference with any other service or system, operation, or maintenance location. Avoid crossing areas horizontally just above or below any riser conduit. Lay and dress cables to allow other cables to enter the conduit/riser without difficulty at a later time by maintaining a working distance from these openings. D. Cable shall be routed as closely as possible to the ceiling, floor or corners to ensure that adequate wall or backboard space is available for current and future equipment. All cable runs within the wiring closet shall be horizontal or vertical within the constraints of minimum cable bending radii. Minimum bend radius shall be observed. Cables shall not be tie -wrapped to electrical conduit or other equipment. E. All incoming cables shall be routed on the cable tray and neatly dressed down to the patch panels. DATA AND VOICE STRUCTURED CABLING SYSTEM - LAN VLK Architects, 2007 27 1300.02 - 12 2740.00 CREEKVIEW ELEMENTARY SCHOOL COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX F. Provide rack and jack panel hardware as required for all data station wiring. G. Backboard: Provide an equipment backboard at each MDF, IDF and telephone equipment location. Backboard shall be 3/V x 8' x 4' Grade A fire retardant plywood, with fire retardant paint. Coordinate placement of all equipment with Owner. 3.06 STATION WIRING INSTALLATION A. General: 1. Cabling between wiring closet and workstation locations shall be made as individual home runs. No intermediate punch down blocks or splices may be installed or utilized between the wiring closet and the communications outlet at the workstation location. 02. All cable must be handled with care during installation so as not to change performance specifications. Factory twists of each individual pair must be maintained up to the connections points at both ends of the cable. There shall never be more than one and one-half inches of unsheathed UTP cable at either the wiring closet or the workstation termination locations. B. Exposed Cable: All cabling shall be installed inside walls or ceiling spaces whenever possible. Exposed station cable shall only be run where indicated on the Drawings. Additional exposed cable runs shall require Owner approval, and shall only be allowed when no other options exist. Cabling shall be installed concealed at all times, except in unfinished mechanical rooms or wiring closets where cable shall be installed exposed and located to avoid conflicts with pass -through cabling, etc. Tie wraps shall be used to provide a neat appearance. Provide Velcro straps to dress the cable. C. Placement: All cabling and associated hardware shall be placed so as to make efficient use of available space. All cabling and associated hardware shall be placed so as not to impair the Owner's efficient use of their full capacity. D. Cable Routes: All cabling placed in ceiling areas must be in conduit, cable tray, or properly supported. Cable supports shall be permanently anchored to building structure or substrates. Provide attachment hardware and anchors designed for the structure to which attached and that are suitably sized to carry the weight of the cables to be supported. Attaching cable to pipes or other mechanical items is not permitted. Cable shall be routed so as to provide a minimum of 18" spacing from light fixtures, sources of heat, power feeder conduits and EMI sources. Cabling shall not be attached to ceiling grid support wires. Cable runs shall be parallel or perpendicular to building structure. Band multiple cables together every 6 feet. 3.07 STATION CABLE A. Provide station patch cable at each station. Cable shall be tested as part of the SCS. Leave cable installed in station jack, neatly coiled and tie wrapped. Provide one-third quantities of each (one -meter, two -meter, and three -meter) station cable lengths. Coordinate with Owner the locations for each length of station cable. B. Provide VGA and left and right channel audio station cables for the video and audio wiring devices indicated or required at each initiation and receiving station (one patch cable for each wiring device). 1. Station cables shall be highly flexible factory molded cable assemblies. Contacts shall be gold plated. Cable outer jacket shall be black. 2. For each pair of station cables, provide one 2-meter (receiving station) and one 3- meter station cable (initiation station). 3. Station cables shall be left connected in the jack, coiled, dressed and tie -wrapped as directed by the Owner/Architect. DATA AND VOICE STRUCTURED CABLING SYSTEM - LAN VLK Architects, 2007 27 1300.02 - 13 2740.00 CREEKVIEW ELEMENTARY SCHOOL COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX 4. Provide patch cord as required. 3.08 PATCH CABLES A. Patch Cables shall be provided by Contractor for each station outlet and each patch panel jack (i.e. 2 cables per drop/tie cable). Patch cables shall be pinned per EIA 568E or A standards (Verify with Owner / Architect) and shall be terminated with 8p8c non -keyed plugs at both ends. Patch cords shall be a length suitable to neatly run from farthest two jacks on patch panel and still provide slack to dress cable. Patch cables for outlets shall be same in configuration except shall vary in length. Provide 25% of the total required at nominal 5 feet, 50% of the total required at nominal 7 feet, 25% of the total required at nominal 10 feet long to insure enough cables of correct distance to fit most circumstances. B. Patch cables shall be managed and dressed at patch panel to insure neat appearance. C. Patch Cords 1. Outer jacket color. a. Blue 3.09 STATION HARDWARE A. Flush mount jacks shall be mounted in a faceplate with back box. B. Placement: Where possible, the communications outlet shall be located so that its centerline is 18" above floor level or 12" above permanent bench surfaces. Outlets shall not be mounted on temporary, movable, or removable surfaces, doors, or access hatches. Verify exact location with architectural elevation drawings, millwork and furnishings. C. 8p 8c Jack Pin Assignments: 1. Pin connections for data station cable outlets and patch panels shall match EIA/TIA 568A modular jack wiring recommendation T568B unless directed otherwise by Owner / Architect. 2. Pin connections at data jack patch panels shall match pin connections at outlets (straight through wiring). 3.10 FIBER OPTIC CABLE INSTALLATION A. Provide multi -mode fiber between MDF and IDFs. B. Fiber optic cable rated underground shall be installed in conduit. Conduit shall contain three inner ducts or provide multi -cell conduit unless specified otherwise. C. Cable terminations shall be performed by manufacturer trained and certified technicians. Terminations shall be made in a controlled environment. The Contractor may choose to have the cables assembled off -site, although testing must be completed with the cable in its final installed condition. D. Warning Tags: At each location where fiber cable is exposed to human intrusion, it shall be marked with warning tags. These tags shall be yellow or orange in color, and shall contain the warning: "CAUTION FIBER OPTIC CABLE". The text shall be permanent, black, block characters, and at least 3/16" high. A warning tag shall be permanently affixed to each exposed cable or bundle of cables, at intervals of not less than five (5) feet. Any section of exposed cable that is less than five (5) feet in length shall have at least one warning tag affixed to it. E. Fiber paths shall be separate from copper paths. DATA AND VOICE STRUCTURED CABLING SYSTEM - LAN VLK Architects, 2007 27 1300.02 - 14 2740.00 CREEKVIEW ELEMENTARY SCHOOL COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX 3.10 CABLE TESTING A. Notification: The Owner/Architect/Engineer shall be notified one week prior to any testing so that the testing may be witnessed. B. Final Acceptance: Before requesting a final acceptance, the Contractor shall perform a series of end -to -end installation performance tests. The Contractor shall submit for approval a proposal describing the test procedures, test result forms and timetable for all copper and fiber-optic cabling. C. Procedures: Trained personnel shall perform all testing. Acceptance of the test procedures discussed below is predicated on the Contractor's use of the recommended products and adherence to the inspection requirements and practices set forth. Acceptance of the completed installation shall be evaluated in the context of each of these factors. D. Errors: When errors are found, the source of each error shall be determined, corrected and the cable retested. All defective components shall be replaced and retested. Retest results must be entered on the test results form. All corrections shall be made prior to final acceptance test. E. Twisted Pair Cable Testing 1. At a minimum, the Contractor shall test all station drop cable pairs from data closet termination patch panel port to station insert. Products shall be tested for compliance to ANSI/TIA/EIA 568A and ISO/IEC 11801 for a rated installation. Test equipment used shall meet TIA/EIA TSB-67, Level 4 accuracy. Further, the Contractor shall have a copy of TSB-67 in their possession and be familiar with its contents. Testing shall be against either appropriate category standards or the manufacturer's specifications whichever is more stringent and applicable. 2. Each wire/pair shall be tested at both ends for the following: a. Wire map (pin to pin connectivity) b. Length (in feet) C. Attenuation d. Near end cross talk (NEXT) e. Power Sum f. Structural Return Loss g. Delay Skew h. PSNEXT i. ACR j. PSACR k. Equal Level Far End Crosstalk (ELFEXT) I. PSELFEXT m. Far End Crosstalk (FEXT) n. Propagation Delay 3. Test equipment shall provide an electronic and printed record of these tests. Test equipment calibration documentation shall be available for on -site inspection. 4. Test results of each four -pair UTP cable must be submitted with identification to match labels on all patch panel ports and 8p8c jacks and must match as-builts associated with that cable. F. Fiber Optic Cable Testing 1. Testing device for OSP fiber optic cables shall be a high quality OTDR (Optical Time -Domain Reflectometer) equipped with a printer. The printed data shall show, in addition to any summary information, the complete test trace and all relevant scale settings. The OTDR must have the capability to take measurements from bare fiber strands as well as ST or SC connector terminations. DATA AND VOICE STRUCTURED CABLING SYSTEM - LAN VLK Architects, 2007 27 1300.02 - 15 2740.00 CREEKVIEW ELEMENTARY SCHOOL COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX 2. All fiber optic cable shall be tested on the reel before installation to ensure that it meets the specifications outlined herein. 3. After installation, the Contractor shall test each intra-building fiber strand with a power meter in accordance with EIA 455-171 Method D procedures (bi-directional testing) at both 850 and 1300 nm. A form shall be completed for each cable showing data recorded for each strand including length, total segment (end to end) loss (dB) and connector losses (dB) at each end. In addition, the printed data strip for each strand shall be attached to the form. Patch cables shall also be tested. 4. Acceptable fiber optic cable and connector loss shall not exceed 1.5 dB. The Contractor is responsible for obtaining minimum loss in fiber connections and polishing per manufacturer specifications. G. Acceptance of the Data Communications Cabling System shall be based on the results of testing, functionality, and the receipt of documentation. With regard to testing, all fiber segments and all workstation data cables must meet the criteria specified. With regard to functionality, the contractor must demonstrate to the Owner that 100 Base-T data signals can be successfully transmitted, bi-directionally, from the MDF and from some number of individual data outlets. The number of outlet locations to be tested shall be determined by the Owner. 3.11 ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS A. Provide data outlet to central plant area; coordinate final location with Building Management Control System. B. Provide data cable to the following locations. Coordinate final location. 1. Main Fire Alarm Panel. 2. Intrusion Alarm Panel. 3. CCTV Digital Video Recorder. C. Provide data wiring from each cash register (POS System — Point of Sale) to nearest IDF or MDF location. Provide wire and wiring methods approved by the Owner. D. Provide data cable from master employee time clock to slave time clock as directed by Owner. 3.12 INSPECTION A. Conformance to the installation practices covered above is to be verified when completed. In some cases, the Owner/Architect/Engineer may observe before acceptance. 3.13 STRUCTURED CABLING SYSTEM IDENTIFICATION A. Coordinate with Architect and Owner's Information Systems Department the required SCS identification prior to construction. Exact nomenclature for identification shall be submitted in writing to the Architect for review prior to final identification. B. Cable Drop Label Nomenclature: 1. Each port shall be identified using the following convention: 2. IDF# - Floor# (only if IDF serves multiple floors) - Blade# - Port# (Example: IDF101-B1-P1) 3. Each port on the "front" or facing side of each patch panel shall be identified using the following convention: a. Room # (Graphic #); Label for wireless jack shall be of contrasting color DATA AND VOICE STRUCTURED CABLING SYSTEM - LAN VLK Architects, 2007 27 1300.02 - 16 2740.00 CREEKVIEW ELEMENTARY SCHOOL COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX 4. Each patch panel or "blade" shall be identified on the "front" or facing side using the following convention: a. MDF#-Blade# (Example: MDF# - 131) b. IDF#-Blade# (Example: IDF# - 131) 5. In each rack, blade numbering should begin with blade #1 occupying the upper left patch panel (as viewed from the "front" of the patch panels), extending down vertically through each rack's complement of patch panels, and sequencing to the upper patch panel in the next adjacent rack. 6. All data cable jackets should be labeled at both terminations: a. Cable end at faceplate termination should be labeled to match faceplate designation. b. Cable end at IDF/patch panel termination should be labeled to match back port designation on patch panel. E. Label fiber on each IDF and MDF patch panel. Label in a manner that designates clearly which IDF they are originating from and where they are going - i.e. From IDF#_ to Room #_ or to MDF Room # _. 3.14 WARRANTY A. A twenty (20) year Extended Product Warranty and Application Assurance for this wiring system shall be provided as follows: 1. The Extended Product Warranty shall ensure against product defects, that all approved cabling components exceed the specifications of TIA/EIA 568A and ISO/IEC IS 11801, exceed the attenuation and NEXT requirements of TIA/EIA TSB 67 and ISO/IEC IS 11801 for cabling links/channels, that the installation shall exceed the loss and bandwidth requirements of TIA/EIA TSB 67 and ISO/IEC IS 11801 for fiber links/channels. The warranty shall apply to all passive SCS components. 2. The Extended Product Warranty shall cover the replacement or repair of defective product(s) and labor for the replacement or repair of such defective product(s). B. The Extended Warranty Application Assurance shall cover the failure of the wiring system to support the application which it was designed to support by recognized standards or user forums that use the ITA/EIA 568A or ISO/IEC IS 11801 component and link / channel specifications for cabling, for a twenty (20) year period. C. Upon successful completion of the installation and subsequent inspection, the customer shall be provided with a numbered certificate, from the manufacturing company, registering the installation. END SECTION DATA AND VOICE STRUCTURED CABLING SYSTEM - LAN VLK Architects, 2007 27 1300.02 - 17 2740.00 CREEKVIEW ELEMENTARY SCHOOL COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX SECTION 27 4133 - TWO WAY BROADBAND TELEVISION AND CATV DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK A. The General Provisions of the contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions, and Division O and Division 1, apply to the work specified in this Section. B. Provide all equipment, materials, labor, supervision, test equipment and services necessary for or incidental to the installation of a complete and operating television broadband distribution system built to commercial standards. The system shall be as shown or indicated on the drawings and/or as specified. C. Equipment specified herein is designed to provide specific functional and operational characteristics. It is the responsibility of the Television Broadband Distribution System contractor to provide all features and functions as outlined in these specifications. D. The Electrical Contractor shall provide all conduit systems, standard electrical boxes, and operating power for the system as outlined on the project drawings. The Television Broadband Distribution System contractor shall coordinate all system requirements with and provide special back boxes to the Electrical Contractor prior to installation of conduit. E. Testing, as described in Part 3, for all requirements shall be performed with all amplifiers, cable runs, and wiring devices in place. F. Provide all documentation and training as outlined in these specifications. 1.02 CODES AND REGULATIONS A. NFPA 70, National Electrical Code. B. FCC Rules, Part 76. C. Americans with Disabilities Act. D. Texas Accessibility Standards. E. Local and State Building Codes. F. All requirements of the local Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ). G. All applicable parts will be FCC Class B approved. H. All equipment, cable, devices, and accessories provided shall be listed and labeled by Underwriter's Laboratories, Inc. for the intended use under the latest appropriate testing standard. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: 1. Signal strength calculations for each run to determine balance and tap values. 2. Drawing location of all components and labeling of cable system; indicate value for each tap. 3. Equipment list and data sheets on system devices, racks, special boxes, wire, and other material as requested by the Architect, including manufacturer, model TWO WAY BROADBAND TELEVISION AND CATV DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM VLK Architects, 2007 27 4133 - 1 2740.00 CREEKVIEW ELEMENTARY SCHOOL COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX number, indication of all options and accessories, and catalog data sheets with photograph. 1.04 QUALIFICATIONS OF CONTRACTOR A. The Contractor, as a business entity, shall be an authorized and designated representative of the equipment manufacturer and shall have been actively engaged in the business of selling, installing, and commercial building systems for a period of at least five years. B. The Contractor shall have an office within 150 miles of the job site, staffed with trained technicians who are qualified and licensed to supervise the installation, to be responsible that the system is installed as submitted, to conduct system start-up and perform a 100% operational audit of all installed devices, to instruct the Owner's representatives in the proper operation of the system, and to provide services throughout the warranty period. C. The Contractor shall be fully experienced in the design and installation of the system herein specified, and shall furnish with the proposal an itemized list of the installations of the type specified herein. This list shall include the name of the project, date of completion, the amount of the contract, the name, and telephone number of the person to contact for reference. This list must contain at least two (2) projects within a 150- mile radius of the school district to allow Architect/Owner's Representatives to visit the job site for review of the system installation and service. D. The Contractor shall employ full time local technicians and installers. The manufacturer shall maintain a full time factory certified employed service staff for product support and service. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL A. Provide only materials that are new, of the type and quality specified. B. All basic equipment for which there are Underwriters' Laboratories Standard requirements shall be listed by UL and be so labeled, or shall conform to their requirements, in which case, certified statements to the effect shall be furnished by the manufacturer with a copy of an examination report by a recognized laboratory acceptable to the Local Authority. C. All basic equipment shall be new and shall be the latest product of a manufacturer of established reputation and experience of quality electronic equipment. The manufacturer shalt have supplied similar apparatus to comparable installations rendering satisfactory service for at least three (3) years. D. System Description: Television broadband distribution equipment and cable plant compatible with two-way signal transmission of local origination and cable television signals. All channels in the 10-900 MHZ frequency range shall be supported. The system shall be capable of distribution of the specified signal strength to each outlet shown on plans. The system shall comply with all FCC rules and meet current FCC requirements regarding radiation losses and shielding requirements. Media to be CATV application coaxial cable of the types specified. Wiring to extend from a single connection (at the amplifiers) in IDF rooms to each television signal outlet. Room drops to each wall plate shall be in a star topology from each directional tap mounted in -line at main trunks inside IDF rooms in an accessible location. Patch panel racks used for Cat5e cabling are not to TWO WAY BROADBAND TELEVISION AND CATV DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM VLK Architects, 2007 27 4133 - 2 2740.00 CREEKVIEW ELEMENTARY SCHOOL COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX be used for this system. Contractor to provide a single point RG-11/U trunk line connection in the head -end room at amplifier(s). E. Band width of all passive devices shall be a minimum of 10 MHZ to 900 MHZ. F. All wire shall be UL listed for CATV applications. Follow the manufacturer's instructions. All wire exposed in attic spaces shall be plenum rated non -conduit per NEC. G. All cable shall have labels on both ends utilizing self -laminating, flexible vinyl film and non -smear nylon marking pens. Utilize Tyton Corporation Part No. R0175 Rite -On labels and Part No. FTP1 nylon'marking pens or equivalent. H. Installation subject to approval, inspection, and test of the Architect/Engineer. 2.02 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. All reference to manufacturers or suppliers model numbers and other pertinent information herein are supplied to establish minimum standards of performance, function and quality. The model numbers used are those of Blonder -Tongue Laboratories, Inc, Old Bridge, New Jersey. The intent is to establish a standard of quality, function and features. It is the responsibility of the Contractor to ensure that the proposed product meets or exceeds every standard of these products and requirements as set forth in these specifications. B. The functions and features specified are vital to the operation of this facility therefore inclusion in the list of acceptable manufacturers does not release the Contractor from strict compliance with the requirements of this specification. C. The following are acceptable manufacturers any other proposed suppliers must be pre - approved: 1. Blonder -Tongue 2. General Instrument/Jerrold Electronics 3. Pico Macom/Tru-spec 4. Scientific Atlanta 5. Wiremold Interlink 2.03 CABLE AND DEVICES A. Plenum Long Distance RF Trunk Cable: Main trunk runs exceeding 300 feet shall be .500 semi -flex coaxial CATV trunk cable, NEC type CL2P, CMP, or CATVP, 15 AWG solid copper clad aluminum center conductor at 1.32 OHM/M nominal D.C.R., solid 100% aluminum shielded at .40 OHM/M' nominal D.C.R., 75 OHM Nominal impedance, with nominal signal attenuation not to exceed 2.52 dB per 100 feet at 600 Hz. CommScope No. 2312K or equivalent by Belden, Comtran, or Hitachi. B. Plenum RF Trunk Cable: (Main trunk runs not exceeding 300 feet) Type RG-11 /U coaxial CATV cable, NEC type CL2P, CMP, or CATVP. 14 AWG solid bars copper center conductor at 2.6 OHM/M' nominal D.C.R., double shielded, 100% aluminum polyester foil coverage plus 65% (+/-5%) aluminum braid, 750HM nominal impedance, with nominal signal attenuation not to exceed 4.3 dB per 100 feet at 600 Hz. CommScope No. 2286K, West Penn Wire No. 25821 or equivalent by Belden, Comtran, or Hitachi. C. Plenum RF Room Drop Cable: Type RG-6/U coaxial CATV cable, NEC type CL2, CM, or CATV, 18 AWG solid bare copper center conductor at 6.5 OHM/M' nominal D.C.R., double shielded, 100% aluminum polyester foil coverage plus 65% (+/-5%) aluminum braid, 750HM nominal impedance, with nominal signal attenuation not to exceed 5.6 dB TWO WAY BROADBAND TELEVISION AND CATV DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM VLK Architects, 2007 27 4133 - 3 2740.00 CREEKVIEW ELEMENTARY SCHOOL COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX per 100 feet at 600 MHZ. Comm Scope No. 2278K, West Penn Wire No. 25841 or equivalent by Belden, Comtran, or Hitachi. D. Broadband Cable Connectors: Connectors for .500 aluminum trunk cable shall feature a one piece body and separate center conductor pin, type F. connectors for RU-11/U cable shall feature a one piece body and separate center conductor pin, Type F. Connectors for RU-6/U cable shall feature a one piece body with attached crimp ring, Type F. all connectors shall be stripped and crimped according to the manufacturer's recommendations for the cable and fitting. Connections and fittings to be Blonder -Tongue Model No. BR-500-BAFF for .500 aluminum trunk cable #BTF-110 Hex for RU-11/U cable and Model #BTF-56 Hex for RG-6/U cable or equivalent. E. Splitters: Provide, as required to route trunk cable, and as required at drops for RF input. Splitters shall be Blonder -Tongue Model SUV-x or XRS-x series or equivalent providing 10 to 900 MHZ band width. F. Directional Tap -offs: Provide as required (typically four drop or two drop units) directional tap -offs in trunk cable with a tap for each room drop. Tap -offs shall be Blonder -Tongue Model CRT-xA series or equivalent, tap values of 9 to 32 dB as required. G. Provide Blonder -Tongue Model 4670 or equivalent 75 OHM terminators on all unused F connections. H. Wall Plates: Wiremold Interlink with audio/video inserts as required. Color shall match building standard for wiring devices. I. Provide a connection to system the same as a room tap for a system monitor television in the distribution rack. J. Provide Broadband Combiner / Amplifier for the system to combine and distribute the signal to all areas. Amplifier shall be of push-pull, hybrid IC module design. Amplifier shall be 19" rack mounted and designed in such a way to augment the dissipation of heat. Unit shall have front access gain and slope control. Band width shall be 10 to 450 MHZ. K. The Contractor shall select frequencies that are unused by local television transmitters or any known or detected signal source that will interfere with proper signal transmission and as directed by Owner / Architect. Provide for distribution of all program sources simultaneously over separate standard TV Channels. L. The system shall provide for an input from a remote local origination system (future) and be capable of retransmitting the modulated sub -band signals over a designated standard television channel. M. HEAD END EQUIPMENT RACK: Furnish and Install one (1) complete head end equipment rack located as indicated, confirm exact location with Owner prior to rough in. Components shall consist of: 1. EIA standard 19" floor cabinet: a. 77" high rack space b. Rear door and lift-off side panels C. Filler panels in front as required d. Constructed of 16 gauge CRS throughout e. Hinges shall be bolted and not welded for strength f. Rear section shall be of one piece construction with electric welding at all seams g. Panel mounting rails shall be tapped for 10-32 screws TWO WAY BROADBAND TELEVISION AND CATV DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM VLK Architects, 2007 27 4133 - 4 2740.00 CREEKVIEW ELEMENTARY SCHOOL COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX h. Overall dimensions shall be: 81.25 inches high, 22.313 inches wide, and 18.5 inches deep each i. Equipment rack shall be an Atlas/Soundolier model #502-77B-962 with 542-77B side panels or equivalent j. Mount the broadband amplifier in the top of rack; all other equipment and filler panels. k. Finish to be Atlas/Soundolier Color #96 textured black backing enamel. I. Provide a minimum of three modulators for owner inputs. N. VIDEO TOWER: Furnish and Install one (1) complete video tower located as indicated, confirm exact location with Owner prior to rough in. Provide manufacturer's replacement part number if model numbers have changed or become obsolete. Components shall consist of: 1. Two (2) Blonder -Tongue AP-60-550B Agile Processor, Part #59817 2. One (1) Blonder-TongueAP-OPT-17 Sub Band Input Option for AP-60-5506, Part #59177 3. One (1) Blonder Tongue OC-12D Twelve Port Passive Combiner, Part #5953 4. Seven (7) Blonder -Tongue AM-60-550B Agile Audio/Video Modulators, Part #59417 5. One (1) Blonder -Tongue DSV VHF Sub -Channel Diplexer, Part #4375 6. One (1) Blonder Tongue AB-4 Coaxial Two -Channel Switch, Part #4017 7. One (1) Middle Atlantic W MK-44SA-32WRK Series Floor Standing Equipment Rack 8. One (1) Middle Atlantic 44-RR44 Additional Rail Kit 9. One (1) Middle Atlantic MW-VT Vented Rack Top Panel 10. One (1) Middle Atlantic SPN-44-312 Pair of Rack Side Panels 11. One (1) Middle Atlantic MW-VT Vented Rear Rack Door 12. One (1) Middle Atlantic CBS WRK-32 Caster Wheel Base (w/4 casters) 13. One (1) Middle Atlantic HP-500 10-32 M.S. Black Rack Screw Kit 14. Eight (8) U2 Two Rack Unit, Rack Shelf 15. Four (4) Middle Atlantic VT-1 One Rack Unit, Vent Panel 16. One (1) Middle Atlantic PDI 41 5C Rack Mt. Vertical A.C. Power Plug Strip, 14- outlets 17. One (1) Toshiba 1 3A25 13" Color TV 18. 1 Triplite "SMART3000RM2U Smart Uninterruptible Power Supply or Equivalent O. CAMERA CART: Furnish and Install one (1) complete camera cart. Locate as directed by Owner. Components shall consist of: 1. One (1) Wheelit 1110 Video Camera Adjustable Column 2. One (1) Wheelit 3126 Video Camera Micro Fluid Pan -Tilt Adjustable Head 3. One (1) Wheelit 518-6 6' Equipment Strap 4. One (1) Wheelit 550 Footman's Loop with Screw 5. One (1) DA-LITE PM2-42 Pixmate Adjustable Height 3-Shelf Cart 6. One (1) Blonder Tongue AM-60-550B Agile Audio/Video Modulator, Part #5941 7 7. One (1) Blonder -Tongue AM-OPT-04 Sub Band Output Option for AM-60-550B, Part #5904 8. One (1) Blonder -Tongue DSV VHF Sub Channel Diplexer, Part #4375 9. One (1) SIMA SVS-14 4 IN X 1 Out Audio -Video Passive Switcher 10. One (1) Shure SCM268 4-Input MIC Mixer 11. Two (2) Shure SM-58s Dynamic Cardioid Handheld Microphone With On/Off Switch 12. One (1) Sure SLX124/85/SM58-H5 Combo Wireless Microphone System Includes: 1-SLX4 UHF Agile Diversity Receiver (1-15-Band, 518-542 MHz) 1-PS20 In -Line Power Supply 1 Rack Mount Hardware Kit TWO WAY BROADBAND TELEVISION AND CATV DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM VLK Architects, 2007 27 4133 - 5 2740.00 CREEKVIEW ELEMENTARY SCHOOL COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX 1-SLX-1-H5 Bodypack Transmitter 1-WL185 Cardioid Lavalier Condenser Mic. 1-SW-21SM58-H5 Handheld Mic & Transmitter 13. One (1) Atlas DS-7 Microphone Desk Stand 14. One (1) Atlas MS-10C Microphone Floor Stand 15. One (1) Nady XC-6 6' Long, XLR Connector Microphone Cable 16. One (1) Nady XC-25 25' Long XLR Connector Microphone Cable 17. One (1) Middle Atlantic PD615C A.C. Power Plug Strip, 6-Outlets 18. One (1) Middle Atlantic RK-4 4-Rack Space Studio Rack 19. One (1) Toshiba 13A25 Color Video Monitor 20. One (1) Sony DCR-HC46 Mini DV Digital Camcorder 21. One (1) Sony MSX-M512S 512 Mb Memory Stick Pro Duo Media P. Provide patch cord between wall outlet and TV / VCR with RG-6 cable. 2.04 SURGE AND AMPERAGE PROTECTION A. Provide surge and amperage protection for any wiring that exits from one building and where the wiring enters another. Each surge protector shall be bonded to the building grounding system. B. Surge protectors for television distribution cable shall be American Power Conversion model P-CATV Surge Arrest RF protectors or equivalent. Note: Include signal attenuation from these devices in signal strength calculations. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 CABLE INSTALLATION AND ATTACHMENTS A. System wiring and equipment installation shall be in accordance with good engineering practices as established by the EIA and the NEC. Wiring shall meet all state and local electrical codes. All wiring shall test free from all grounds and shorts. All television signal cable and devices shall be supported from the building structure and bundled. The support system shall provide a protective pathway to eliminate stress that could damage the cabling. The cable shall not be crushed, deformed, skinned, crimped, twisted, or formed into tight radius bands that could compromise the integrity of the cabling. Television signal cables shall not be run loose on ceiling grid or ceiling tiles. Support shall be provided by appropriate fasteners that may be loaded with multiple cables. The required support wires for the ceiling grid or light fixtures shall not be utilized. All cabling and supports must be positioned at least 12 inches above the ceiling grid. B. Television signal cables shall be run in bundles above accessible ceilings and supported from building structure. Cabling shall be loosely bundled with wire wraps randomly spaced at 30 to 48 inches on center; wire wraps shall not be tight enough to deform cabling and shall not be used to support the ceiling. C. Attachments for cabling support shall be spaced at 48 to 60 inches on center. The cable bundle shall not be allowed to sag more than 12" mid -span between attachments. Attachments shall be sized as follows: 1. Bundles up to 11F dia. (Ten 1/a" cables) — 2" bridle ring, Caddy #4BRT32 or equivalent. 2. Bundles up to 3/V dia. (Sixteen 1/47 cables) — 3/d' J-Hook, Caddy #CAT12 or equivalent. 3. Split bundles greater than 34" diameter or provide cable tray. TWO WAY BROADBAND TELEVISION AND CATV DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM VLK Architects, 2007 27 4133 - 6 2740.00 CREEKVIEW ELEMENTARY SCHOOL COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX D. Do not mix different signal strength cables on the same J-Hook (i.e. fire alarm with television signal cable). Multiple J-Hooks can be on the same attachment point up to the rated weight of the attachment device. E. Television signal cables shall be run in conduit stubs, where stubs are provided, from wall -mounted devices to above accessible ceilings. Conduit shall be required only within walls and concealed spaces to provide access. Provide a plastic snap bushing or sleeve on the end of each conduit stub such as Thomas & Betts Catalog #443-3/4", 242-1 ", 425- 1-1/4", 4272" or equivalent. F. Conduit shall be used for television signal cable in exposed areas. G. All conduit and raceways shall be supported from the structure at industry standard intervals for the size specified, utilizing proper anchoring devices and techniques for each type of cable used. H. All penetrations through fire rated walls or floors shall feature a short length of metal conduit. The hole shall be neatly cut, not oversize or irregular. Seal the interior of the conduit sleeve around the cables and around the outside of the sleeve on each side of the penetration with fire -stop caulk or putty, such as Minnesota Mining & Mfg. Co. (3M) — CP 25WV+ caulk, MPS-2+ putty, or equivalent. Install according to the manufacturer's instructions. I. All cabling and equipment shall be located and installed as follows: 1. All cable shall have a label on both ends utilizing self -laminating, flexible vinyl film and non -smear nylon marking pens; Tyton Corporation Part #RO175 Rite -On labels and Part #FTP1 nylon marking pens or equivalent. 2. Each cable run shall include a 3' service loop with wire tie located in the ceiling above the rack. This is to allow for future re -termination or repair. 3. Mount all equipment firmly in place. Route cable in a professional, neat and orderly installation. 4. All cabling shall be placed with regard to the environment, EMI/RFI interference and its effect on communication signal transmission. 5. Do not route any cable within 2' of any light fixture, HVAC unit, service access area, electrical panel, or any device containing a motor or transformer. 6. Television signal cable shall not be installed in the same conduit with line voltage electrical cable. 7. Maximum pulling tension should not exceed 25 lb/ft. or manufacturer's recommendation, whichever is less. 8. Any pulling compounds utilized must be approved by the cable manufacturer and shall not degrade the strength or electrical characteristics of the cable. 9. Cable bends shall not exceed the manufacturer's suggested bend radius. 10. Provide for adequate ventilation to all equipment and take precautions to prevent electromagnetic or electrostatic hum. J. Termination practices: 1. Strip back only as much cable jacket as required to terminate. 2. Preserve wire twists as closely as possible to point of termination (0.5" maximum) to keep signal impairment to a minimum. 3. Avoid twisting cable during installation. 3.02 DESIGN AND PERFORMANCE A. All like materials shall be of one manufacturer; do not mix approved brands. TWO WAY BROADBAND TELEVISION AND CATV DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM VLK Architects, 2007 27 4133 - 7 2740.00 CREEKVIEW ELEMENTARY SCHOOL COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX B. Use RG/11 cable for main trunk lines to connect all directional taps at IDF. Room outlet drops to be RG/6 cable runs not to exceed 250 feet. Use bushings when exiting junction boxes and at top of conduit stubs provided by Electrical Contractor. C. All wiring will be placed with regard to the environment, EMI/RFI interferences and its effect on operation. D. The system designed for -46 dB cross -modulation or greater and a carrier to noise ratio of at least 46 dB. E. The system shall deliver a composite RF signal across a bandwidth of 10-900 MHZ at a minimum +6dB to every outlet. All levels shall be across a characteristic 75 OHM Impedance. F. Isolation between any two outlets in the system shall be a minimum of 25 dB on any frequency between 10 and 300 MHZ. Isolation between any two outlets shall exceed 20 dB over a total range of 5 Hz to 400 MHZ. G. Equipment shall also be capable of providing two-way communication over a single cable. System shall be compatible with video all -page and distance learning system equipment. The system shall deliver a +10 dB composite RF signal at the head end (backhaul) when a +38 dB signal is input at each outlet. H. System radiation shall not exceed the following limits: 5 MHZ to 54 MHz 15 Wmeter @ 100 ft. 54 MHZ to 216 MHz 20 Wmeter @ 100 ft. 216 MHZ to 400 MHz 15 V/meter @ 100 ft. All unused ports to be terminated with 75 ohm terminators. 3.03 TESTING, WARRANTY, SERVICE A. All equipment will carry a one-year warranty or manufacturer's warranty whichever is greater. B. A qualified representative of the contractor shall supervise the final connections and testing of the system and it shall be subject to the final acceptance of the Architect/Engineer and Owner. C. The System contractor shall make a thorough inspection of the complete installation to ensure the following: 1. Complete and functional system. 2. Installed in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 3. All wiring shall test free from all grounds, crosses and shorts. 4. Each signal outlet shall be tested at a frequency range of 50-900 MHZ. Testing will require use of a signal generator at the head end and a Wavetek 1880 tester or equivalent at the far end. 5. Testing for continuity and signal strength shall be performed and recorded for each outlet. A representative of the owner shall be present for all testing. Testing shall verify design and performance requirements as specified. D. The contractor shall provide a warranty of the installed system against defects in material or workmanship for a period of one (1) year from the date of acceptance. Any equipment or wiring shown to be defective shall be replaced, repaired, or adjusted free of charge. All labor and materials shall be provided at no expense to the Owner. All equipment will carry a one-year warranty or manufacturer's warranty whichever is greater. TWO WAY BROADBAND TELEVISION AND CATV DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM VLK Architects, 2007 27 4133 - 8 2740.00 CREEKVIEW ELEMENTARY SCHOOL COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX 3.04 DRAWINGS, MANUALS, AND TRAINING A. Upon completion of the installation and prior to final inspection, this Contractor shall furnish five (5) copies of as -built drawings. Provide one vellum reproducible and four prints. In addition, this Contractor shall furnish four (4) copies of a manual giving complete instructions for the operation, inspection, testing and maintenance of the system including wiring diagrams. Insert test results in manuals. Provide the Owner with electronic versions of the as-builts on CDs. B. All cables shall have both ends labeled and included in the as -built documentation. C. All cable paths and wiring methodology shall be documented. D. Formal on -site training sessions shall be conducted by this Contractor. Provide documented general instruction as follows: 1. Provide instruction to the Owner's designated personnel to include the location, inspection, maintenance, testing, and operation of all system components. Provide a minimum of two (2) hours. 2. Provide instruction to the designated users on the operation of the system and how to utilize the system to their best benefit. Provide a minimum of two (2) hours. END OF SECTION TWO WAY BROADBAND TELEVISION AND CATV DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM VLK Architects, 2007 27 4133 - 9 2740.00 CREEKVIEW ELEMENTARY SCHOOL COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX SECTION 27 5116 - SOUND REINFORCEMENT SYSTEM PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Furnish and install a complete local sound reinforcement system as required. 1. A complete system includes items such as wiring, microphones, speakers, amplifiers, racks, and mounting shelves. 2. Integrate all components to provide a complete and functioning system. B. Locate equipment to accommodate millwork, fixtures, marker boards and other room equipment at no additional cost to the Owner. C. Integrate the sound reinforcement system with the school communications system. D. Plenum rated cable may be used as an option at the contractor's discretion. Wherever cabling is run exposed, conduit shall be used to cover and protect wiring. 1.02 (QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Provide the system by a company that has been designing and supplying similar systems for a period of 3 years. Provide, upon request by Owner or Architect / Engineer, names and addresses of similar installations. B. Provide central processing control console wiring connections by factory engineers or authorized factory trained personnel. 1.03 WARRANTY A. Warranty equipment for a period of 1 year, from date of substantial completion. B. Correct defects in material or workmanship with a minimum loss of operating time at no cost to Owner. C. On site service. 1.04 SUBMITTAL A. Submit shop drawings as specified. B. Submittals include, but are not limited to, marked product data on equipment and cables. C. Submit wiring diagrams and scaled area plans indicating the approximate routing of conduits and cables, equipment locations, speakers, and accessories. 1.05 REFERENCES A. National Electrical Code B. UL SOUND REINFORCEMENT SYSTEM VLK Architects, 2007 27 5116 - 1 2740.00 CREEKVIEW ELEMENTARY SCHOOL COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Dukane B. Rauland/Biamp C. Atlas/Soundolier D. Shure E. Electrovoice F. TOA G. KDM Electronics H. Bogen I. Peavey J. QSC K. Sennheiser 2.02 CAFETORIUM AND GYMNASIUM - REMOTE SOUND REINFORCEMENT SYSTEMS A. In -wall self-contained 150-watt mixer/amplifier with the following at each venue: 1. Master Volume Control 2. Less than 2% distortion at 45-20KHz. 3. Frequency response of 35-20KHz +/- 2dB. 4. Six low-z mic inputs. 5. Two hi-z auxiliary inputs. 6. Remote override from administrative communications system. 7. Amplifier Compressor module with attack time of 500 ms, release time 3-5 seconds, compression ratio of 10 to 1, and fixed gain -20dB below threshold. 8. Octave filter set with nine octaves of control with content 'Q' control. Filter shall cover octave bands from 50-12.8KHz. 9. Provide optional input/controls as noted on the drawings. a. Auxiliary input. b. Auxiliary output. 10. Phantom power for condenser type microphones. B. Cafetorium Speakers: 1. Soundolier C803AT827 high compliance 8- inch coaxial speakers, 8 watt 25 volt transformer with 62-8 baffles, 95-8-7 backbox and #81-813 tile bridge, as indicated on the drawings. 2. Suspend from structure. Do not suspend from ceiling grid or tile. C. Gymnasium Speaker: 1. Speaker to be suspended from structure with drivers just below structural steel to prevent sound transmission interference. Coverage to be in a 3600 radius and be able to handle 175 Watt RMS and 350 watts of program peak power. Auxiliary Gymnasium speaker to be KDM Octasound #SP820A. SOUND REINFORCEMENT SYSTEM VLK Architects, 2007 27 5116 - 2 2740.00 CREEKVIEW ELEMENTARY SCHOOL COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX 2.03 CABLES AND CONTROL WIRING A. All cabling is to be installed in conduit. 1. LF and HF reinforcement cabling to be at least #12 twisted pair. 2. Other speaker cables to be #16 jacketed equal to West Penn 225 or 25225 plenum. 3. Microphone and communication cabling to be shielded at least #22 gauge jacketed cable equal to West Penn 452 or 25291. 4. Control wiring to be #18 jacketed equal to West Penn 224 or 25224 plenum. 5. Outer insulation cover of sound reinforcement system cable color shall be gray. B. Cables, wiring and interconnect terminal strips to be logically, legibly and indelibly labeled for immediate identification by a direct hot -stamp method or a factory stamped closed sleeve method as approved. Adhesive strip labels are acceptable only if sealed with transparent heat -shrinkable tubing to hold the marker in its position. Provide all wiring labeling information on schematic diagram in project record drawings. Labeling equal to: 1. Brady PM-1 M "Porta-Mark". 2. T&B heatshrink markers. 3. Or approved equal 2.04 HEARING ASSIST SYSTEM (One for each Venue) A. The hearing assist system is to consist of an FM transmitter with one antenna. The . transmitter will broadcast in the FM band from 72.1 MHZ to 75.9 MHZ. Exact location of mounting for cafetorium, and auxiliary gymnasium to be verified with Architect and Owner. Provide mounting shelf and power supplies. 1. Williams Sound PPA 375E system with PPAR35 receivers, one RPK005 rack mount kit, and one ANT 005 whip antenna. 2. Remote antenna located in an accessible above -ceiling space 2.05 MICROPHONES AND ACCESSORIES A. Microphones, provide for each venue: 1. (2) Shure — Cardioid Dynamic microphones and locking on/off switch with neodymium alloy magnet and 2 year warranty. 2. (2) Shure — SLX Wireless UHF diversity wireless receiver with rack mount kit. 3. (2) Shure - Hand held microphone transmitter. 4. (2) Shure - head set microphone with body pack transmitter. 5. (2) Shure — Lavalier microphone with body pack transmitter. B. Hanging microphones above stage: 1. (4) Shure MX202B/C C. Microphone Outlets for each Venue: 1. Soundolier #S501-13C outlets for wall mounting and Thomas & Betts multiple service floor boxes for floor mounting. D. Microphone extension cables - provide for each venue: 1. (4) 25' extension cables with male/female connectors. E. Microphone stands - provide for each venue: 1. Two (2) floor stands with 10" base and 62" height adjustment. 2. Two (2) table top stands with base. F. Remote Source Audio Mixer for each Venue: 1. KDM Electronics MX120A-02, dual source remote mixer, recessed mount with lockable cover. Phantom Powered. SOUND REINFORCEMENT SYSTEM VLK Architects, 2007 27 5116 - 3 2740.00 CREEKVIEW ELEMENTARY SCHOOL COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX G. Flush mounted wall cabinet for wireless microphone receives and hearing assist transmitter for each wall mounted amp/mixer venue. 1. Atlas-Soundolier #AW R-3A flush mounted wall cabinet with locking door and three (3) standard rack unit capacity. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Provide and install Sound Reinforcement Systems as required. All equipment and their controls shall be labeled with 1/4" lamicoid strips engraved with 1/8" high block letters indicating device operation and level control function. Verify exact location of equipment and remote source control panel with Architect prior to rough -in. B. Speaker Installation: Install speaker types as required. Select speaker taps to match amplifier maximum output and space conditions. C. Conduit and Cables 1. Install conduit, fittings and boxes as specified in Division 26. 2. Single system cables may be grouped together in a common conduit of adequate capacity to facilitate the ease of installation and prevent conductor or insulation damage. a. In no case shall the conduit fill exceed 50% capacity. b. Do not group conductors or cables of different systems in a common conduit. 3. Cable: a. Install cables as recommended by the system manufacturer. Conductor quantities specified are minimum required. Conductors to be installed shall be coordinated with the system equipment supplier. b. Cables installed on exposed surfaces, in inaccessible locations, or underground shall be installed in conduit. C. All microphone and line level cables shall be installed in conduit. Speaker cables installed above accessible ceiling space may be installed without conduit. All speaker cables not installed in conduit shall be plenum rated. 4. Cables not installed in conduit shall be grouped, bundled and run to a central distribution junction box. Cable shall be bundled on a maximum of 2'-6" on center and secured to the structure at a maximum of 5' on center. Bundling and support shall be with plenum rated cable ties. 5. Cables installed in hollow wall spaces shall be installed in conduit to an accessible location. 6. Tag each circuit at each end and at each terminal with a separate tag indicating the area served. 7. Color code wires in accordance with IPCEA standards. 8. Terminate speaker cables in a junction box. D. Coordinate final connection of power and ground wiring to equipment. Power and ground wiring shall terminate inside equipment racks, and be hard -wired directly to ground busses to ensure uninterrupted operation. E. All equipment and enclosures described in this specification section shall be permanently attached to the structure and held firmly in place. Supports shall be adequate to support their loads with a safety factor of at least three. F. The process of equalizing and testing the Audio Sound System may necessitate moving and adjusting certain component parts (e.g. loudspeakers). This shall be done at no additional cost to the Owner. SOUND REINFORCEMENT SYSTEM VLK Architects, 2007 27 5116 - 4 2740.00 CREEKVIEW ELEMENTARY SCHOOL COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX G. Take such precautions as are necessary to prevent and guard against electromagnetic and electrostatic noise. H. Exercise care in wiring to avoid damage to the cables and to the equipment. Isolate cables carrying signals at different levels and separate to restrict channel bleed -through the feedback oscillation in any amplifier section. Connect all loudspeakers electrically in - phase, using the same wire color code for speaker wiring throughout the project. Make all joints and connections with resin -core solder or with approved mechanical connectors. I. Keep wiring separated into four groups of conduit for microphone level circuits (level below -20 dBm), line level circuits up to +30 dBm), loudspeaker circuits (above +30 dBm), and power circuits. J. Locate wireless microphone system and hearing assist system antennas at or above ceiling or at bar joist height in areas without ceilings. Coordinate exact location with Owner to provide adequate coverage in the area served by the system. Provide adequate protective vandal guards. Adjust antenna location for best possible reception/transmission in area of coverage. K. Provide hearing assist transmitter(s) and receivers for each sound reinforcement system. The quantity of hearing assist receivers for each system shall be equal to a minimum of four (4) percent of the total seating capacity, but in no case less than ten (10) receivers for the area of coverage of each local sound reinforcement system. L. Locate all wireless microphone receivers and/or antennas for best possible reception for area of coverage. Coordinate exact location with Owner/Architect. Provide adequate protective vandal guards at exposed locations in gymnasiums, cafetoriums and high activity areas. Adjust each antenna as required for maximum reception. 3.02 TESTING AND ACCEPTANCE A. General 1. After completion of installation and start-up procedures, commence a verification and testing sequence leading to final acceptance. 2. Submit for approval, a sample of the form on which the test will be reported. a. Identify project. b. Signatures of participants and observers. C. Results. d. Description of adjustment or corrections of defective components. e. Date. 4. Provide schedule of tests. Estimate dates of significant events. a. All testing shall be performed in the presences of the Owner/Architect/ Engineer. 5. Test, calibrate and adjust each device in the system. 6. Verify operation of all specified functions. 7. Provide documentation of all tests and verifications as specified. B. The following tests and adjustments shall be performed by the Contractor. All equipment required supplied by the Contractor. Follow EIA standard RS-160 and RS-219 in performing the tests. Make all necessary corrections to bring systems into specification compliance. Record the results of these tests in project record drawings. Submit written results of tests to Architect prior to scheduled equalization and final inspection date. 1. Measure and record impedance of each speaker line at frequency of 1,000 Hz, with loudspeakers connected to their respective lines. 2. Measure and record overall system hum and noise level of each input channel with controls set so that -50 dBm microphone input or +4 dBm input would drive SOUND REINFORCEMENT SYSTEM VLK Architects, 2007 27 5116 - 5 2740.00 CREEKVIEW ELEMENTARY SCHOOL COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX the system to full amplifier output. Terminate inputs with resistor (150 to 600 ohms) and disconnect power to noise generator for this test. 3. Adjust the gain of each active device to provide both optimum signal - to noise ratio, and at least 10 dZB headroom at each active device. Observe the output of each active device with an oscilloscope of 5 MHZ band width, and verify visually that the signal required for full amplifier output is free of overload, clipping, parasitics, and radio frequency components. Adjust gain structure of all active components and record the input and output signal levels of all active components and record the input and output signal levels of all active components in both dBm and volts, during normal program levels. 4. Measure and record system electrical frequency response for each input channel through power amplifier. Required is flat response with permissible deviation of +/-1 dB within the range of 30 Hz to 16 kHz. 5. Check system to assure freedom from oscillations or stray RF pickup. Check inputs with no signal and with typical program material driving system to full output. Detect unwanted signals on oscilloscope at termination. 6. Check phasing of loudspeakers by applying constant power per octave (pink) noise to system and walking through the transition areas of coverage from one loudspeaker to the next. Transition should be smooth with no apparent shift in source from one speaker to the next. Apply sine wave sweet signal to each loudspeaker system sweeping from 50 Hz to 5,000 Hz and at a level of 10 dB below full amplifier output, and listen for rattle or objectionable noises. Correct if apparent. 7. Achieve uniform distribution of sound from each loudspeaker (with bleachers in their extended position in gymnasium where applicable). Drive system with broadband, constant power per octave (pink) noise, and measure the SPL using a sound level meter incorporating an octave -band filter centered at 4 kHz. Adjust noise level until the meter readings are between 75 and 80 dB. Use a sound level meter filter that meets ANSI S1.4-1971 Type 2 and ANSI S1.11-1971 standards set for slow meter damping. Take all readings at seated ear height. Adjust speaker as necessary to achieve +/-3 d6 over entire area covered by this system. 3.03 EQUALIZATION PROCEDURES A. The following equalization procedures will be performed by the Sound Reinforcement System Contractor. Contractor to provide personnel familiar with the installed system to perform the adjustments and make final modifications. The fidelity test to be run consists of driving the system with constant power per octave (pink) noise and measuring the sound -pressure level in each one-third octave band from 40 to 16,000 Hz. One-third octave filters shall be used to adjust the response as necessary to fit the requirements of the space. 3.04 INSTRUCTIONS A. Provide 8 hours, 4 hours on each of two days, of instruction to the Owner designated user and maintenance personnel on the use and operation of the system. Instructing personnel shall be a competent engineer on technician familiar with the installed system. Instruction times shall be arranged by the Owner. 3.05 ACCEPTANCE BY OWNER A. Upon completion of initial tests and delivery of all documents, diagrams, and project record drawings, notify the Architect in writing that the installation has been completed in accordance with the requirements of the specification and is ready for equalization and inspection by representatives of the Owner. 1. Acceptance testing will include operation by the Owner of each major system and other components (microphones, consoles, racks, loudspeakers, etc.) deemed SOUND REINFORCEMENT SYSTEM VLK Architects, 2007 27 5116 6 2740.00 CREEKVIEW ELEMENTARY SCHOOL COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX necessary. Contractor will assist as necessary in this testing. 2. In the event the need for further adjustments or work becomes evident during acceptance testing, the Contractor will continue his work until system is acceptable, at no additional cost to the Owner. 3.06 EXTRA WARRANTY PROVISIONS A. Labor and materials provided under this section to be warranted for not less than one (1) year after final acceptance of the work by The Owner. Defects occurring in labor, or materials within the one-year warranty are to be rectified by replacement or repair. This Contractor, within the warranty period, is required to answer all service calls and requests for information within a 24 hour period, and repair or replace any faulty item within a 24 hour period, without charge, including parts and labor. END OF SECTION SOUND REINFORCEMENT SYSTEM VLK Architects, 2007 27 5116 - 7 2740.00 CREEKVIEW ELEMENTARY SCHOOL COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX SECTION 27 5123 - SCHOOL COMMUNICATION SYSTEM PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Furnish and install a complete school communications system. 1. A complete system includes items such as wiring, push/call buttons, handsets, control consoles, and main distribution equipment. 2. Integrate all components to provide a complete and functioning system. B. Locate equipment to accommodate millwork, fixtures, marker boards and other room equipment at no additional cost to the Owner. C. Integrate the communications system with the following systems: 1. Clock and Bell System 2. Owner's phone system 3. Local sound reinforcement sound systems D. Return air plenum cable may be used as an option at the contractor's discretion. Wherever cabling is run exposed, conduit shall be used to cover and protect wiring. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Provide the system by a company that has been designing and supplying similar systems for a period of 3 years. Provide, upon request by Owner or Architect / Engineer names and addresses of similar installations. B. Provide central processing control console wiring connections by factory engineers or authorized factory trained personnel. 1.03 WARRANTY A. Warranty equipment for a period of 1 year, from date of substantial completion. B. Correct defects in material or workmanship with a minimum loss of operating time at no cost to Owner. C. On site service. 1.04 SUBMITTAL A. The installing contractor and/or equipment supplier shall provide complete and detailed shop drawings and include: 1. Wiring and interconnection schematics. 2. Complete point-to-point wiring diagrams 3. Riser diagrams. 4. Complete floor plan drawings locating all system devices. 5. Factory data sheets on each piece of equipment proposed. 6. Detailed system operational description. Any specification differences and deviations shall be clearly noted and marked. 7. Complete system bill of material. 8. Line by line specification review stating compliance or deviation. B. All submittal data will be in bound form with Contractor's name, Supplier's name, and project name adequately identified. C. Minimum size drawings: 11" x 17". SCHOOL COMMUNICATION SYSTEM VLK Architects, 2007 27 5123 - 1 2740.00 CREEKVIEW ELEMENTARY SCHOOL COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX 1.05 COORDINATION A. It shall be the responsibility of the installing contractor to coordinate all requirements surrounding installation of the communication system with all other trades. B. Pre -installation meeting: Schedule a pre -installation meeting specifically for the School Communication System with Owner and Architect. 1.06 REFERENCES A. National Electrical Code. B. UL C. Communication systems connected to a telephone utility company shall comply with the Federal Communications Commission rules Section 68 and the corresponding UL listing PART2-PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Dukane B. Rauland C. Telecor. D. Bogen E. Simplex F. Atlas/Soundolier G. Valcom 2.02 CENTRAL CONTROL EQUIPMENT A. The central equipment shall be mounted in a standard 19" equipment rack. The central equipment shall consist of but not be limited to: 1. The equipment housing. 2. A power supply to provide operating DC power for the circuitry contained within the central equipment housing and all administrative control stations (ACSs) shall be provided. 3. A central microprocessor unit containing all solid-state memory and components necessary to provide the features specified herein. 4. Zone circuit boards as required to meet the system requirements for remote stations and/or communications linkage. 5. The provision for terminating the cabling from up to 128 remote stations and 8 administrative control stations (ACSs) shall be provided. 6. The provisions to automatically activate a selectable program source between class changes. 2.03 EXTERNAL PAGING AMPLIFIER A. External paging amplifiers shall be provided as required to meet the load requirements of the system when activated in the all -page mode. The system shall be equipped with equipment required for (one) program channel. SCHOOL COMMUNICATION SYSTEM VLK Architects, 2007 27 5123 - 2 2740.00 CREEKVIEW ELEMENTARY SCHOOL COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX B. Program/paging amplifiers shall have the following: 1. Power output shall be capable of providing sufficient power for the speakers required to the project and include an additional 25% capacity. 2. Maximum .5% harmonic distortion from 20-20KHz. 3. Frequency response of 20Hz to 20KHz +/-1 dB. 4. 90 dB signal to noise ratio at 20Hz to 20 KHz. 5. 1 V RMS input sensitivity at 1 KHz. 6. Master volume control. 2.04 PROGRAM SOURCES A. AM/FM tuner - Denon T000150ORD B. CD / Cassette / MP3 playback, Tascam CC-22 mklll 2.05 EMERGENCY TONE GENERATOR A. Provide tone generator. It shall incorporate a multi -tone generator with priority relay to override any paging or program function of the system. B. The tone generator shall be activated from an external contact closure provided by the (fire alarm panel/emergency pushbutton). 2.06 EQUIPMENT RACK A. The central equipment shall be housed in a 19-inch W X 72-inch H equipment rack with casters. The rack shall be of sufficient vertical size to contain all of the specified equipment to be housed within. The rack shall be equipped with a locking rear door and removable side panels. All unused front panel space shall be filled with the appropriate size blank panels. B. Telephone Type 66 blocks shall be mounted inside lockable, hinged panel with 3/4" painted plywood backboard. C. The program sources shall be remotely located from the control equipment. The rack shall be a wood grain finish, table top rack located as directed by the Owner. 2.07 SPEAKERS A. Ceiling speakers: 1. General Purpose Speaker: 8" speaker with 5 oz. magnet complete with line matching transformer. Program rating shall be 15 watts continuous. Provide a white round recessed steel baffle with each unit. The speaker shall be a Soundolier SD72W. Provide Soundolier CS95-8 enclosure system and 81-8R speaker supports for each speaker. 25/70V transformers shall have primary taps of 0.25, 0.5, 1, 2 and 5 watts. Tap speaker at 0.25 watt. 2. Classroom, office, conference, telephone, teacher lounge, workroom speakers: 8 ohm speaker with 5 oz. magnet, complete with line matching transformer. Program rating shall be 12 watts continuous. Provide a white, round, steel, recessed baffle with each unit. The speaker shall be a Soundolier SD72WV, with integral volume control. Provide Soundolier CS95-8 enclosure system and 81-8R speaker supports for each speaker. 25/70V transformers shall have primary taps of 0.25, 0.5, 1, 2, 5 watts; tap speaker at 0.5 watt. B. Recessed Vandal proof Wall Speaker: Soundolier APF-15T flush mount horn with multitap line matching transformer. Provide with each unit a Soundolier VP161-APF baffle and 193-8-6 recessed backbox. Tap at 1.8 watts. SCHOOL COMMUNICATION SYSTEM VLK Architects, 2007 27 5123 - 3 2740.00 CREEKVIEW ELEMENTARY SCHOOL COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX C. Surface mount speaker/horn: Soundolier AP-15TC surface mount wide-angle loudspeaker with multitap line matching transformer with armored cable adaptor. D. Wall mounted volume control: Soundolier AT- 10PA or approved equal recessed autotransformer volume control. Volume control shall have public address (PA) emergency override of volume control. E. Remote Source Output Volume Control: Rack mounted in remote source rack. Provide line level volume control of output of each remote source device. Label each volume control for each output device. 2.08 CALL -IN DEVICES A. Push to call button: Momentary call switch mounted on a stainless steel plate, with engraved PUSH -TO -CALL on plate. B. Wall mounted handset (Switch Hook): Intercom station telephone. C. Desk mounted handset (Switch Hook): Staff telephone station. D. Administrative Control Station (ACS) 1. The administrative control station (ACS) shall be the control center for communications, paging, and signaling functions for the system. The ACS shall contain control panel with buttons for functional control and user programming. 2. For voice intercom, the ACS shall be equipped with a handset, keypad, speaker, microphone, and a TALK/LISTEN button. 3. Each ACS shall be equipped with a sounder for audible annunciation of incoming calls. 4. The ACS shall be capable of answering the next call in the calls waiting stack by depressing only one button. 5. An ACS shall have the ability to forward its call -in coverage to another ACS. An indication shall be shown in both the ACS forwarding coverage of calls as well as the ACS to which call coverage is being forwarded to. When in the forward coverage mode, an ACS shall still visibly annunciate incoming calls, and it can be used to make and answer calls or other assigned functions. 6. It shall be possible to manually activate and sound the time event signal to any of the 8 time zones from the ACS. 7. The ACS shall be equipped with a built-in tone generator, which provides for both time signal tone and user accessible tones (single chime, repetitive chime, steady tone, hi-lo, alarm, wail, and warble) for use as manually activated emergency or other signals. 8. All ACSs shall have a dedicated control labeled "ALL PAGE". The operation of this control shall gather all speakers for distribution of tone signaling distress or emergency signals, and emergency voice announcements. This control shall be defeatable as to restrict access into the all -page function only to assigned ACSs. 9. A designated ACS within the system shall have the ability to enter the user accessible functions for data input and programming. A "Security Code" number shall be required to enter this programming mode. 2.09 ANTENNA A. Roof Mounted FM Antenna. 1. Gain of not less that 6.5DB at frequencies of 88 to 108 MHZ and 20 DB front to back rejection ratio. 2. Coaxial antenna lead-in. B. Loop type indoor AM antenna oriented and located as required. SCHOOL COMMUNICATION SYSTEM VLK Architects, 2007 27 5123 - 4 2740.00 CREEKVIEW ELEMENTARY SCHOOL COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX 2.10 MASTER CLOCK SYSTEM A. The system shall contain an integral Master Clock and Programmer that shall be capable of performing the following functions: 1. Provide 500 discrete time event entries for programming functions based upon: a. The time of day in hours and minutes b. The day or combination of seven days of the week on which the event is to occur C. The selection of any one or any combination of 32 zones or (8) outputs to be activated d. The selection of any one or combination of 16 schedules to allow for maximum flexibility due to special circumstances or seasonal changes. e. The selection of 16 user -programmable Event Tones 1) Any combination of time schedules may be active simultaneously 2) Event Tones are programmable from a library of 25 Tone Types B. Provide for Automatic Daylight Savings Time adjustment with Leap Year programming. C. Provide momentary contact closures for external device operation. Provide four inputs, four outputs and four flex -puts. 1. Inputs shall be programmable by the user to initiate any desired system activity (e.g. Page, Tone, Program, Event, System Reset, etc.) .2. Outputs shall be programmable by user to activate during any desired system activity (e.g. Page, Tone, Program, Time of Day, etc.) a. Display the time of day in either 12 or 24-hour format at each Administrative telephone b. Master Clock will interface with an existing master clock to allow the two systems to synchronize C. Master clock shall correct compatible secondary clocks, analog, digital, or both D. The system shall provide for an editing and review routine to permit the user to change and edit time events, zones, and schedules. E. The system shall allow pre -selected program material to be distributed according to pre- programmed schedules, i.e. March to Music, National Anthem, etc. F. Synchronous single and double face 24VAC run/24 VAC/DC correct, analog, corrective, 12-inch display. Provide vandal guards in high activity areas, gymnasiums. 1. Wall or ceiling mounted as required. 2. Provide vandal guards in athletic and high activity areas. 3. Power input shall be 24VDC. 4. Faraday clocks are not acceptable. G. Clock power supply: Provide secondary clock 24VDC power supply. Power supply shall be sized in quantity to meet the load requirements of the system. H. Master Clock system shall be Dukane MCS 350. Clock face shall be 24D40. 2.11 UPS BATTERY BACK-UP A. Provide UPS Battery back up for the communications system to operate a minimum of 24 hours stand-by then 20 minutes of operation upon loss of power. B. Acceptable Manufacturers: Liebert, PowerWare, Best Power SCHOOL COMMUNICATION SYSTEM VLK Architects, 2007 27 5123 - 5 2740.00 CREEKVIEW ELEMENTARY SCHOOL COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INTERCOM SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. The intercom system shall consist of a central equipment cabinet, microprocessor control unit, power supply, zone modules, administrative control stations (ACSs), amplifiers, and station loudspeaker assemblies. Provide all associated material hardware, wiring, and options as described herein to provide a complete working system, which shall meet the specified requirements. B. The intercom system shall provide the following communications paths and functions. 1. ACS to remote loudspeaker station (provide two channels). 2. Administrative control station to administrative control station. 3. Remote speaker to administrative control station. 4. Zone paging. C. The system shall be designed so as to accomplish any combination or all of the above functions simultaneously. D. The system shall provide the facilities for the paging or sounding emergency signals or time event signals to selected groups or all remote speakers. E. The system shall provide facilities for the control and distribution of up to two program channels to individual, selected groups, or all remote speakers, as well as intercom communications and class change signals. F. The system shall include the facilities of a built-in master clock and programmer capable of correcting appropriate secondary clock displays and controlling events based on user programmed time schedule programs. G. Provide remote control of program distribution. Distribution of the program source shall be possible from any administrative control station (ACS). H. Zone system as follows: 1. All speakers in corridors shall be zone area designation. (ie. all speakers in corridors in the 100 series rooms, all speakers in corridors in the 200 series rooms. etc. etc.) 2. Electrical Rooms, Mechanical Rooms, Telephone Closets, Data Closets, Janitor's Rooms, and Storage Rooms shall be zoned with the nearest corridor zone. 3. All outside horns shall be one zone. 4. Each individual room such as and not limited to classrooms, cafeteria, office, conference room and gymnasium shall be an individual zone. 3.02 INTERCOM SYSTEM FUNCTIONS A. The base system shall provide one simultaneous open voice speech paths between administrative control station and station loudspeakers within each 24-zone / classroom group. 1. The speech channels shall be true multiple, simultaneous, UNRESTRICTED, amplified voice channels requiring no automatic queue or call stacking to access the intercom amplifier. 2 The system shall come equipped to provide modular expansion to eight (8) simultaneous open voice speech paths and a minimum expansion capability of 128 additional stations. 3 An intercom amplifier shall be provided integral with each ACS. B. The system shall provide the capacity for both a loudspeaker station and a pushbutton at each remote location. Each remote station shall be assigned an architectural or ID SCHOOL COMMUNICATION SYSTEM VLK Architects, 2007 27 5123 - 6 2740.00 CREEKVIEW ELEMENTARY SCHOOL COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX number to communicate with its assigned ACSs. The system shall permit user selection of 2, 3, 4, or 5-digit architectural dialing. C. The system shall allow preselected coverage of calls from remote station to ACS on a remote station basis. A remote station shall be able to report to multiple administrative control stations simultaneously. Functions of an unattended ACS may be forwarded by the user to an attended ACS. This provides overlapping or distinct coverage of remote stations by administrative control stations. Systems not allowing programmable flexibility of remote station coverage shall be unacceptable. D. The system shall incorporate all necessary circuitry to prevent monitoring of remote stations equipped with call origination switches with privacy mode. E. The system shall have 8 user assignable groups of stations for zoned audio paging with any remote station belonging to more than one group. A separate group/zoning shall be user assignable for 8 zones of class change signals. F. The system shall allow for user definable pre -selective access to "zone" and "all -page" functions. This feature will prevent unauthorized paging from designated ACSs. G. The system shall provide facilities so that the user has access for sounding selected tones from any ACS on either all -page or by zone basis for use as emergency or other alarm signals. H. Provisions shall be provided inherent to the system, to allow for the use of a priority override inputs (i.e. principal's microphone and telephone extension). This circuit, when activated by an external source, shall gather all speakers for distribution of the signal information provided by the external source. This priority override input shall preempt other functions currently under way in the system. Upon conclusion of the priority override function, all pre-empted functions shall be automatically restored. The system shall have the capability to operate with external paging amplifiers to increase the audio output available for paging. Adequate audio amplification shall be provided as required. The system shall be equipped with control point outputs and activate outboard devices such as priority override muting relays on remote local sound reinforcement systems. The control point outputs shall be activated when the system is placed in the emergency page mode or if the emergency tone generator is activated and shall mute the output of the local sound reinforcement system. K. The system shall be equipped with RS-232 ports to allow for the following: 1. Diagnostics via a standard computer terminal. 2. Modem interface to allow remote factory engineering assistance. Systems not providing a port of access to the system shall not be acceptable. L. System must allow simultaneous operation of both diagnostic and functional routines (paging, zone page, time events, call -in, etc.). M. The system shall have the ability to perform scan functions from the administrative control stations or computer terminal for: 1. Review of call -in coverage assignments to an ACS. 2. Review ID numbers of remote stations assigned to either of the two program channels. 3. Review that ACSs are forwarding coverage. 4. Edit and review master clock time programs. SCHOOL COMMUNICATION SYSTEM VLK Architects, 2007 27 5123 - 7 2740.00 CREEKVIEW ELEMENTARY SCHOOL COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX N. Higher priority calls shall not cancel when the "Clear All Calls" routine is used. Only normal calls shall clear and cancel. O. Line loss on two-way communications circuits to be no greater than .5dB per 500 feet of circuit length. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. General: Install new communication system components in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. 1. Terminate all field wiring on telephone punch blocks mounted in an enclosure as specified. 2. Provide 25-pair cabling from telephone switch to local telephone terminal board. 3. Label cables and wiring logically, legibly, and permanently for ease of identification, using adhesive strip type labels. 4. All communications wires and cables, which are to be routed in the ceiling spaces shall be identified and tagged every 50 feet. The identification shall include the room number on markers similar to T&B sleeve marker. 5. Provide integration of clock and bell, telephone system. 6. Provide integration of local sound reinforcement system override. B. Speaker Installation: 1. Install new speakers types as indicated on the drawings. 2. Speakers in high ambient noise areas (cafetorium, gymnasiums, etc.) Shall be tapped as required to overcome the ambient noise generated by the public. C. Conduit and Cables 1. Install conduit, fittings and boxes as specified in Division 26. 2. Single system cables may be grouped together in a common conduit of adequate capacity to facilitate the ease of installation and prevent conductor or insulation damage. a. In no case shall the conduit fill exceed 50% capacity. b. Do not group conductors or cables of different systems in a common conduit. 3. Cable: a. Install cables as recommended by the system manufacturer. Conductor quantities specified are minimum required. Conductors to be installed shall be coordinated with the system equipment supplier. b. Cables installed on exposed surfaces, in inaccessible locations, or underground shall be installed in conduit. C. Cables installed above accessible, ceiling spaces may be installed without conduit. All cables not installed in conduit shall be plenum rated. 4. Cables not installed in conduit shall be grouped and bundled. Cable shall be bundled on a maximum of 2'-6" on center and secured to the structure at a maximum of Ton center. Bundling and support shall be with plenum rated cable ties. 5. Cables installed in hollow wall spaces shall be installed in conduit to an accessible location. 6. Tag each circuit at each end and at each terminal with a separate tag indicating the area served. 3.04 INSTRUCTIONS A. Provide eight hours instruction to the operating/maintenance personnel, which shall include initial programming of eight schedules. SCHOOL COMMUNICATION SYSTEM VLK Architects, 2007 27 5123 - 8 2740.00 CREEKVIEW ELEMENTARY SCHOOL COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX 3.05 TESTING AND ACCEPTANCE A. General 1. After completion of installation and start-up procedures, commence a verification and testing sequence leading to final acceptance. 2. Submit for approval, a sample of the form on which the test will be reported. a. Identify project. b. Provide a list of all system devices, arrange in numerical order of point addresses. 1) Show descriptor and location of each. C. Signatures of participants and observers. d. Results. e. Description of adjustment or corrections of defective components. f. Date. 3. Provide schedule of tests. Estimate dates of significant events. a. All testing shall be performed in the presences of the Owner / Engineer. 4. Test, calibrate and adjust each device in the system. 5. Verify operation of all specified functions. 6. Provide documentation of all tests and verifications as specified. 3.06 ROOM NUMBER DESIGNATION A. Final system room designations shall be based on actual room number graphics. (Do not use Architectural drawing room designations). 3.07 GROUNDING OF EQUIPMENT A. Racks and cabinets shall be grounded to the metallic structure of the building or to the building system power ground in accordance with NEC section 250. Securely bond equipment to the ground system through a minimum 14 gauge green insulated conductor. B. Electronic systems shall be grounded to the building system ground, with a maximum resistance of 0.1 ohm. Systems ground may be a driven ground rod, building steel, or other approved ground of the building power systems ground. 3.08 ANTENNA A. Furnish and install the Antenna as specified. 3.09 MASTER CLOCK A. Provide all final connections as required for integration with communications system. B. Provide clocks as indicated on the drawings. C. Provide guards over clocks located in high activity areas. D. Provide clock power supplies in equipment rack and/or mechanical/electrical rooms. Provide 120V, 20A dedicated circuit. 3.11 SERVICE AND MAINTENANCE A. The contractor shall provide a 1-year warranty of the installed system against defects in material and workmanship. All labor and materials shall be provided at no expense to the Owner during normal working hours. The warranty period shall begin on the date of acceptance by the Owner/Engineer. SCHOOL COMMUNICATION SYSTEM VLK Architects, 2007 27 5123 - 9 2740.00 CREEKVIEW ELEMENTARY SCHOOL COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX B. The contractor shall, at the Owner's request, make available a service contract offering continuing factory authorized service of this system after the initial warranty period. C. The installing contractor shall submit evidence that he maintains in his service department the following items: 1. Central Switch Assembly 2. Station Line Card 3. Master Station Module 4. System Control Card END OF SECTION SCHOOL COMMUNICATION SYSTEM VLK Architects, 2007 27 5123 - 10 2740.00 CREEKVIEW ELEMENTARY SCHOOL COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX SECTION 28 0100 - ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Compile Electronic Safety and Security (ESS) product data and related information appropriate for Owner's operation and maintenance of products furnished under Contract. Prepare ESS operating and maintenance data as specified in this Section and as referenced in other sections of specifications. B. Instruct Owner's personnel in operation and maintenance of equipment and systems. C. Submit 5 copies of complete manual in final form. 1.02 ESS OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL SUBMITTAL SCHEDULE A. Thirty (30) days after receipt of reviewed submittals bearing the Architect/Engineer's stamp of acceptance (including resubmittals), submit for review 1 copy of the first draft of the ESS Operating and Maintenance Manual. This copy shall contain as a minimum: 1. Table of Contents for each element. 2. Contractor information. 3. All shop drawings, coordination drawings and product data, bearing the Architect/Engineer's stamp of acceptance. 4. All parts and maintenance manuals for items of equipment. 5. Warranties (without starting dates). 6. Certifications that have been completed. Submit forms and outlines of certifications that have not been completed. 7. Operating and maintenance procedures. 8. Form of Owner's Training Program Syllabus (including times and dates). 9. Control operations / equipment wiring diagrams. 10. Coordination Drawings. 11. Schedule of Low Voltage Wire and Cable 12. Schedule of ESS Equipment 13. Schedule of ESS Field Devices 14. Other required operating and maintenance information that are complete. B. Copy will be returned to the Contractor within 15 days with comments for corrections. C. Submit the (5) completed manuals in final form to the Architect/Engineer. 1. Prior to substantial completion for Owner's use after the Owner accepts facility maintenance. 2. Include all specified data, test reports, drawings, dated warranties, certificates, along with other materials and information. D. The Architect/Engineer shall review the manuals for completeness within 15 days. E. The Contractor shall be notified of any missing or omitted materials. The Manuals shall be reworked by the Contractor, as required, in the office of the Architect / Engineer. The manuals will not be retransmitted. F. Four complete manuals shall be delivered to the Owner. ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS VLK Architects, 2007 28 0100 - 1 2740.00 CREEKVIEW ELEMENTARY SCHOOL COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 BINDERS A. Commercial quality black, 3-ring binders with clear, durable, cleanable plastic covers. B. Minimum ring size: 1 ". Maximum ring size: 3". C. When multiple binders are used, correlate the data into related groupings. D. Label contents on spine and face of binder with full size insert. Label under plastic cover. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 ESS OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL A. Form for Manuals: 1. Prepare data in form of an instructional manual for use by Owner's personnel. 2. Format: a. Size: 8-1/2" x 11 ". b. Text: Manufacturer's printed data or neatly typewritten. 3. Drawings: a. Provide reinforced punched binder tab and bind in text. b. Fold larger drawings to size of text pages. 4. Provide flyleaf indexed tabs for each separate product or each piece of operating equipment. 5. Cover: Identify each volume with typed or printed title "Operating and Maintenance Instructions". List: a. Title of Project b. Identity of separate structures as applicable. C. Identity of general subject matter covered in the manual. 6. Binder as specified. B. Content of Manual: 1. Neatly typewritten Table of Contents for each volume arranged in systematic order as outlined in the specifications. a. Contractor, name of responsible principal, address and telephone number. b. A list of each product required to be included, indexed to content of the volume. C. List with each product, name, address and telephone number of: 1) Subcontractor or installer. 2) Maintenance contractor as appropriate. 3) Identify area of responsibility of each. 4) Local source of supply for parts and replacement. d. Identify each product by product name and other identifying symbols as set forth in Contract Documents. 2. Product Data: a. Include those sheets pertinent to the specific product. b. Annotate each sheet to: 1) Identify specific product or part installed. 2) Identify data applicable to installation. 3) Delete references to inapplicable information. 3. Drawings: a. Supplement product data with drawings as necessary to illustrate: 1) Relations of component parts of equipment and systems. ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS VLK Architects, 2007 28 0100 - 2 2740.00 CREEKVIEW ELEMENTARY SCHOOL COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX 2) Cable Plant Layout b. Coordinate drawings with information in Project Record Documents to assure correct illustration of completed installation. C. Do not use Project Record Documents as maintenance drawings. 4. Written text as required to supplement product data for the particular installation: a. Organize in consistent format under separate headings for different procedures. b. Provide logical sequence of instructions for each procedure. 5. Copy of each warranty, bond and service contract issued. a. Provide information sheet for Owner's personnel, giving: 1) Proper procedures in event of failure. 2) Instances which might affect validity of warranties or bonds. 6. Shop drawings, coordination drawings and product data as specified. C. Sections for Equipment and Systems. 1. Content for each unit of equipment and system as appropriate: a. Description of unit and component parts. 1) Function, normal operating characteristics, and limiting conditions. 2) Performance data, engineering data and tests. 3) Complete nomenclature and commercial number of replaceable parts. b. Operating procedures: 1) Start up, routine and normal operating instructions. 2) Regulation, control, stopping, shut down and emergency instructions. 3) Special operating instructions. C. Maintenance procedures: 1) Routine operations 2) Guide to trouble -shooting. 3) Disassembly, repair and reassembly. 4) Adjusting and checking. 5) Routine service d. Manufacturer's printed operating and maintenance instructions. e. Original manufacturer's parts list, illustrations, assembly drawings and diagrams required for maintenance. 1) Items recommended to be stocked as spare parts. f. Schedule of low voltage wire and cable g. Schedule of ESS equipment h. Schedule of ESS field devices i. Each Contractor's coordination drawings. 1) As installed color coded wiring and cabling diagrams. j. List of original manufacturer's spare parts and recommended quantities to be maintained in storage. k. Other data as required under pertinent sections of the specifications. 2. Prepare and include additional data when the need for such data becomes apparent during instruction of Owner's personnel. 3. Additional requirements for operating and maintenance data as outlined in respective sections of specifications. 4. Provide complete information for products specified in Division 28. 5. Provide certificates of compliance as specified in each related section. 6. Provide start up and testing reports as specified in each related section. 7. Provide signed receipts for spare parts and material. 8. Provide training report and certificates. END OF SECTION ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS VLK Architects, 2007 28 0100 - 3 2740.00 CREEKVIEW ELEMENTARY SCHOOL COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX SECTION 28 0500 - ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY GENERAL PROVISIONS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS: A. Except as modified in this Section, General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, applicable provisions of Division 01 General Requirements, and other provisions and requirements of the Contract Documents apply to work of Division 28. B. Applicable provisions of this section apply to all sections of Division 28. C. The general provisions of the Contract and the requirements of the following Sections apply to the Work specified in this Section. See Division 26 for related general and specific requirements. 1.02 CODES AND STANDARDS: A. All equipment and work performed shall comply with all of the current and applicable Codes, Rules, Ordinances, Regulations and Standards (including those not specifically listed in this Specification) as interpreted and enforced by the authorities having jurisdiction including: 1. Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) 2. Authorities Having Jurisdiction (AHJ) - Local 3. American National Standards Institute (ANSI) 4. American Society of Testing and Materials (ASTM) Communications Cables - B694, B736, D4565, D4566, D4730, D4731, D4732 5. Building Industry Consulting Services International (BICSI) 6. Code of Federal Regulations - Title 47 7. Electronics Industries Association (EIA) Standard Test Procedures for Fiber Optic Fibers, Cables, Transducers, Connecting and Terminating Devices - EIA- 455 Series 8. Federal Communications Commission (FCC) - Communications Act and FCC Rules 9. Federal Information Processing Standards (FIPS) Federal Building Standard for Telecommunications Pathways and Spaces - FIPS PUB 175, FIPS PUB 176 10. The Insulated Cable Engineers Association (ICEA) Communications Cable Stands - P-47-434, S-56-434, S-80-576, S84-608, S-85-625, S-86-634, S-87- 640, S-89-648, S-90-661, S-98-688, S-99-689, S-100-685 11. International Electro-technical Commission (IEC) 12. Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE) Local Area Networks/Metropolitan Networks Standards Collection - LAN/MAN 802 Series 13. International Organization for Standardization (ISO) (ISO/IEC) Premise Wiring Core and LAN/MAN Core Equivalents-11801, 8802, 14763-1 14. International Telecommunication Union (ITU-T) Telecommunications Standardization 15. National Electrical Code (NEC) National Electrical Code - NFPA 70 16. National Electrical Contractor's Association (NECA) Standards of Installation 17. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA) Performance Standard for Twisted Pair Premise Voice and Data Communications Cable -WC 63.1, WC 63.2, WC 66 18. National Electrical Safety Code (NESC) 19. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) - National Fire Alarm Code NFPA 72, Life Safety Code NFPA 101 20. Society of Cable Telecommunications Engineers (SCTE) 21. Local Accessibility Standards ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY GENERAL PROVISIONS VLK Architects, 2007 28 0500 - 1 2740.00 CREEKVIEW ELEMENTARY SCHOOL COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX 22. Telecommunications Industries Association (TIA) (ANSI/TIA/EIA) Wiring and Cabling Standards - 526, 568, 569, 570, 571, 598, 606, 607, 758, TSB 31-B, 63, 67, 72, 75 and 95 23. Uniform Building Code (UBC) 24. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (U.L.) - 497A, 910, 1077, 1863, 1283, 1459, 1604, 1651, 1681, 1690, 1778, 1977 B. Resolve any code violations discovered in contract documents with the Engineer prior to award of the contract. After Contract award, any correction or additions necessary for compliance with applicable codes shall be made at no additional cost to the Owner. C. This Contractor shall be responsible for being aware of and complying with asbestos NESHAP regulations, as well as all other applicable codes, laws and regulations. D. Obtain all permits required. 1.03 SUMMARY: A. Provide. complete and working ESS Systems including equipment, conduit, wiring, material, labor and training as described in this Specification and the Drawings. The ESS Systems Drawings and Specifications are the sole property of the Architect and are not to be duplicated, scanned, loaned or in any way made available to persons not designated as authorized by the Architect. All ESS Systems plans and specifications are to be returned to the Architect following completion of bid. 1.04 SPACE REQUIREMENTS A. Consider space limitations imposed by contiguous work in selection and location of equipment and material. Do not provide equipment or material that is not suitable in this respect. 1.05 RELATION WITH OTHER TRADES A. Carefully study all matters and conditions concerning the project. Submit notification of conflict in ample time to prevent unwarranted changes in any work. Review other Divisions of these specifications to determine their requirements. Extend electrical services and final connections to all items requiring same. B. Because of the complicated relationship of this work to the total project, conscientiously study the relation and cooperate as necessary to accomplish the full intent of the documents. C. Provide sleeves and inserts in forms as required for the work. Stub up and protect open ends of pipe before any concrete is placed. Furnish sizes of required equipment pads. Furnish and locate bolts and fittings required to be cast in them. D. Locate and size openings required for installation of work specified in this Division in sufficient time to prevent delay in the work. E. Refer to other Divisions of the specifications for the scope of required connections to equipment furnished under other Division. Determine from the General Contractor / Construction Manager for the various trades, the Owner, and by direction from the Architect/Engineer, the exact location of all items. The construction trades involved shall furnish all roughing -in drawings and wiring diagrams required for proper installation of the electrical work. 01. Make final connections to all ESS equipment indicated on the drawings, except as noted. ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY GENERAL PROVISIONS VLK Architects, 2007 28 0500 - 2 2740.00 CREEKVIEW ELEMENTARY SCHOOL COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX F. Request all Shop Drawings required in ample time to permit proper installation of all electrical provisions. G. Extend services as indicated to the various items of equipment furnished by others. Rough -in for the various items and make final connections ready for operation upon placing of the equipment. 1.06 CONCEALED AND EXPOSED WORK A. When the word "concealed" is defined as hidden from sight as in chases, furred spaces or above ceilings. "Exposed" is defined as open to view, in plain sight. 1.07 GUARANTEE A. Guarantee work for a minimum of two years or as noted longer elsewhere from the date of substantial completion of the project. During that period make good any faults or imperfections that may arise due to defects or omissions in material, equipment or workmanship. At the Owner's option, replacement of failed parts or equipment shall be provided. 1.08 MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT A. Furnish new and unused materials and equipment meeting the requirements of the paragraph specifying acceptable manufacturers. Where two or more units of the same type or class of equipment are required, provide units of a single manufacturer. 1.09 NOISE AND VIBRATION A. Select equipment to operate with minimum noise and vibration. If noise or vibration is produced or transmitted to or through the building structure by equipment, piping, ducts or other parts of work, and judged objectionable by the Owner, Architect, or Engineer, rectify such conditions at no additional cost to the Owner. If the item of equipment is judged to produce objectionable noise or vibration, demonstrate at no additional cost that equipment performs within designated limits on a vibration chart. 1.10 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers names and catalog number specified under sections of Division 28 are used to establish standards of design, performance, quality and serviceability and not to limit competition. Equipment of similar design, equal to that specified, manufactured by a named manufacturer shall be acceptable on approval. A request for prior approval of equipment not listed must be submitted ten (10) days before proposal due date. Submit complete design and performance data to the Architect. The Architect and Owner issue approvals of acceptable manufacturers as addenda to the Construction Proposal Documents. 1.11 UTILITIES, LOCATIONS AND ELEVATIONS A. Locations and elevations of the various utilities included within the scope of this work: 1. Obtained from utility maps and other substantially reliable sources. 2. Are offered separate from the Contract Documents as a general guide only without guarantees to accuracy. B. Examine the site and verify the location and elevation of all utilities and of their relation to the work. Existing utilities indicated on the site plans are for reference only and shall be field verified by the Contractor with the respective public or private utility. ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY GENERAL PROVISIONS VLK Architects, 2007 28 0500 - 3 2740.00 CREEKVIEW ELEMENTARY SCHOOL COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX 1.12 CONTRACT DRAWINGS A. Contract drawings are diagrammatic only and do not give fully dimensioned locations of various elements of work. Determine exact locations from field measurements. B. It is the responsibility of the Contractor to compare the scale of all electrical drawings with the scale of the architectural drawings and make adjustments to all electrical drawings which have the incorrect drawing scale so that his material takeoffs are not in error due to an incorrectly labeled drawing scale and his proposal is complete. 1.13 ABBREVIATIONS AND DEFINITIONS: Abbreviations: A/V - Audio/Visual AWG - American Wire Gauge BCR - Building Communications Room CMP - Communications Media Plenum CMR - Communications Media Riser dB - Decibel EMI - Electromagnetic Interference ER- Equipment Room ESS - Electronic Safety and Security FACP - Fire Alarm Control Panel FCR - Floor Communications Room Hz - Hertz IDF - Intermediate Distribution Frame Km - Kilometer LCD - Liquid Crystal Display LED - Light Emitting Diode M - Micron MDF - Main Distribution Frame MHz - Megahertz NEXT - Near -End Cross Talk nm - Nano -meter OFN - Optical Fiber Non-conductive OFNP - Optical Fiber Non-conductive Plenum OFNR -Optical Fiber Non-conductive Riser OTDR -Optical Time Domain Ref lectometer TC - Telecommunications Closet (Now referred to as TR) TR - Telecommunications Room (AXA. TC - Telecommunication Closet) UTP - Unshielded Twisted Pair Wire Definitions: Low Voltage Wire - Wire or cable used for one or more systems that operate on 24 volts or less. Low Voltage Wire is used to install and interconnect one or more of the ESS Systems. Low Voltage Wire includes patch cords, jumpers and all portions of cable or wire used to make the ESS Systems operational or for system communications. Electronic Safety and Security Systems - One or more of the following and associated equipment: Fire Detection/Alarm Systems, Intrusion Detection/Alarm Systems, Access Control Systems, Video Surveillance Systems, ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY GENERAL PROVISIONS VLK Architects, 2007 28 0500 - 4 2740.00 CREEKVIEW ELEMENTARY SCHOOL COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX 1.14 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. Equipment Standards: 1. System and all components shall be brand new stock from manufacturer. 2. All electronics shall be 100% solid state. 3. System and all components shall bear a UL Label. B. Contractor Qualifications: At the time of Proposal, the Contractor shall: 1. Have manufactured, supplied or installed at least three (3) other systems of similar size, complexity, and general operation as the systems described in these specifications. The Contractor shall furnish in writing to Architect proof of compliance with this paragraph at the time of proposal. 2. Hold all legally required Texas State Contractor's licenses necessary to accomplish the installation and activation of the described system at the facilities indicated. The Contractor shall submit copies of licenses to the Architect prior to the start of work 3. Hold all legally required state registrations to meet local requirements for submittal drawings. 4. Have a local office within fifty (50) miles of the project site staffed with factory trained technicians who have experience on systems of similar complexity and function as the systems described in these specifications. These technicians shall be fully capable of system engineering support, installation supervising, system start-up, and providing the Owner with training and service on both hardware and software for the systems specified. 5. Certify complete and total compliance with the provisions of these specifications by letter or submittal of the proposal response forms, signed by an officer of the corporation, or a principal if other ownership currently exists. In addition, the letter or forms shall include a complete listing of exceptions, if any. 1.15 SUBMITTALS: A. Provide SUBMITTALS according to Division 1 and the following. B. Requirements: 1. Submit paragraph -by -paragraph specification review indicating compliance or deviation with explanation. 2. Submit proof that all system components and cables are U.L. Listed. 3. An equipment list with names of manufacturers, model numbers, and technical information on all equipment proposed. Clearly mark exact model number proposed to be installed. 4. Product technical information sheets for each principal components in the proposed system, including cable, wire, terminal marking, and wire marking material. 5. Certification from the manufacturer stating that the system Contractor is an authorized distributor or installer of the proposed system when such certifications exist. 6. A statement listing every technical and operational parameter wherein the submitted equipment varies from that which was originally specified. If the submitter fails to list a particular variance and his submittal is accepted, but is subsequently deemed to be unsatisfactory because of the unlisted variance, the submitter shall replace or modify such equipment at once and without cost to the Owner. ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY GENERAL PROVISIONS VLK Architects, 2007 28 0500 - 5 2740.00 CREEKVIEW ELEMENTARY SCHOOL COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX 1.16 EXAMINATION OF SITE: A. The Contractor shall have visited the site and familiarized himself with all existing conditions prior to submitting his proposal and shall be prepared to carry out the work within the existing limitations. Failure or neglect to do so shall not relieve the Contractor of his responsibilities not entitle him to additional compensation for work overlooked and not included in his proposal. B. The Contractor shall confirm the availability of the proper power source for each piece of specified equipment, through site visits and Drawings as necessary. Where proper power does not exist, the Contractor shall provide the required power, circuits, outlets, conduits, and wire as specified under Division 26. 1.17 DATA ACCURACY: A. Absolute accuracy of information regarding existing conditions cannot be guaranteed. The Drawings and Specifications are for the assistance and guidance of the Contractor and exact locations, distances, elevations, etc., shall be governed by actual field conditions. Where variations from the contract documents are required, such variations shall be approved by the Architect/Owner. 1.18 SECURITY: A. The Contractor is responsible for complying with all of the Owner's and facility security's requirements to prevent theft or damage to equipment, tools and materials. If any deviation from facility security requirements is necessary, approval for such deviation shall be coordinated with the Owner. B. The Contractor shall not disclose any confidential information of the Owner. The Contractor acknowledges that such action is highly injurious and can do damage to the Owner. The Contractor will agree to and comply with the standard policies and provisions of the Owner regarding outside Contractors and Consultants. 1.19 UTILITIES: A. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to provide all temporary connection and cables, lighting, light stands and power. The facilities shall be used in accordance with all applicable regulations regarding operations, safety and fire hazards of the governmental Authorities Having Jurisdiction, provided they are not used in a wasteful manner. 1.20 PERMITS: A. All permits required for the specified performance and completion of the work shall be secured by the Contractor. These permits shall be presented and reviewed at the initial project progress meeting. 1.21 NOTIFICATION: A. The Contractor shall not shut off any existing systems. The Contractor shall give the Owner at least ten (10) calendar day's notice of any requirements to shut off or interference with existing alarm, regulating, computer or other service systems. The Owner will arrange and execute any shutdown. All work such as splicing, connections, etc., necessary to establish or re-establish any system shall be completed by the Contractor in close coordination with the Owner. ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY GENERAL PROVISIONS VLK Architects, 2007 28 0500 - 6 2740.00 CREEKVIEW ELEMENTARY SCHOOL COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX 1.22 INTERFERENCES WITH THE OWNER: A. Transportation and storage of materials at the facility, work involving the facility, and all other matters affecting the habitual use by the Owner of its buildings, shall be conducted so as to cause the least possible interference, and at times and in a manner acceptable to the Owner. The Contractor shall make every effort to delivery equipment per the schedule required by the project. 1.23 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS A. Maintain at the job site a separate set of white prints (blue line or black line) of the contract drawings for the sole purpose of recording the "as -built" changes and diagrams of those portions of work in which actual construction is significantly at variance with the contract drawings. Mark the drawings with a colored pencil. Prepare, as the work progresses and upon completion of work, reproducible drawings clearly indicating locations of various major and minor feeders, equipment, and other pertinent items, as installed. Record underground and underslab cables installed, dimensioning exact location and elevation of such installations. B. At conclusion of project, obtain without cost to the Owner, electronic AutoCAD CAD files of the original drawings and transfer as -built changes to these. Provide the following as - built documents including all contract drawings regardless of whether corrections were necessary and include in the transmittal: "2 sets of CDs and prints for Owner's use, one set of CDs, prints, and mylars for Architect/Engineers Records". Delivery of these as -built electronic, reproducible and prints is a condition of final acceptance. 1. 3 sets of electronic AutoCAD (2000 dwg) CAD drawing files, on CD-ROM media, of each contract as -built drawing. 2. One reproducible Dayrex mylar film positive of each contract as -built drawing. 3. Three sets of blue or black -line prints of each contract as -built drawing. C. As -Built Drawings should indicate the following information as a minimum: 1. Indicate all addendum changes to documents. 2. Remove Engineer's Seal, name, address, and logo from drawings. 3. Mark documents AS -BUILT DRAWINGS. 4. Clearly indicate: DOCUMENT PRODUCED BY: 5. Indicate all changes to construction during construction. Indicate actual routing of all conduit and cables, etc that were deviated from construction drawings. 6. Indicate exact location of all underground ESS raceways, and elevations. 7. Correct schedules to reflect (actual) equipment furnished and manufacturer. 8. During the execution of work, maintain a complete set of Drawings and specifications upon which all locations of equipment, devices, and all deviations and changes from the construction documents in the work shall be recorded. 9. Exact location of all ESS equipment in building. Label panel schedules to indicate actual location. 10. Exact location of all ESS equipment in and outside of the building. 11. Location, size and routing of all ESS cables, conduits, equipment, etc. shall be accurately and neatly shown to dimension. 12. Exact location of all roof mounted equipment, wall, roof and floor penetrations. 13. Cloud all changes. 124 OPERATING TESTS A. After all ESS systems have been completed and put into operation, subject each system to an operating test under design conditions to ensure proper sequencing and operation throughout the range of operation. Tests shalt be made in the presence of the Architect/Engineer and Owner. Provide minimum 24-hour advance notice of scheduling of all tests. Make adjustments as required to ensure proper functioning of all systems. ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY GENERAL PROVISIONS VLK Architects, 2007 28 0500 - 7 2740.00 CREEKVIEW ELEMENTARY SCHOOL COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX Special tests on individual systems are specified under individual sections. Submit 3 copies of all certifications and test reports adequately in advance of completion of the work to allow for remedial action as required to correct deficiencies discovered in equipment and systems. 1.25 WARRANTY A. All equipment shall be covered for the full manufacturers warranty period and systems shall be warranted by the Contractor for a period of two years commencing with the filing date of substantial completion. The Warranty shall cover all costs for warranty service, including parts, labor, prompt field service, pick-up, transportation, delivery, reinstallation, and retesting. A contract for service shall cover the period starting with the first expected activation of each system and shall continue without interruption to cover the period to the end of the two-year warranty as defined above. The end of the warranty period shall be handled such that a smooth transition to a maintenance agreement with the Owner shall be achieved with no lapse in coverage. B. Submit 3 copies of all warranties and guarantees for systems, equipment, devices and materials. These shall be included in the Operating and Maintenance Manuals. 1.26 BUILDING CONSTRUCTION A. It shall be the responsibility of the sub -contractor to consult the Architectural and Engineering drawings, details and specifications and thoroughly familiarize himself as to the construction and all job related requirements. All construction trades shall cooperate with the General Contractor / Construction Manager job site superintendent and lay out work so that all piping, cables, pathways, raceways, and other items are placed in the walls, furred spaces, chases, etc., so that there shall be no delay in the job. 1.27 TEMPORARY FACILITIES A. General: Refer to Division 01 for general requirements on temporary facilities. B. Temporary Wiring: Temporary power and lighting for construction purposes shall be provided under Division 26. Installation of temporary power shall be in accordance with NEC Article 305. C. Temporary facilities, wire, lights and devices are the property of this Contractor and shall be removed at the completion of the Contract. 1.28 EXTRA MATERIALS: Keys: Provide three (3) sets of all keys for system cabinets. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 WORK INCLUDED: All materials listed in PART 2 - PRODUCTS of this Division Sections and on the Drawings shall be provided by the Contractor unless specifically excluded or modified in other portions of this Specification or Addendums. ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY GENERAL PROVISIONS VLK Architects, 2007 28 0500 - 8 2740.00 CREEKVIEW ELEMENTARY SCHOOL COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION: A. This project has a critical path, which must be closely followed in order to meet the completion date. The Contractor shall review the proposed schedule at the Award of Contract meeting and be prepared to staff his work force according to the schedule constraints presented at that time. B. Aesthetics are an important consideration in this installation. All components shall be installed so as to have aesthetically pleasing results as determined by the Owner and Architect. Actual locations of all visible components shall be coordinated in advance with the Owner and Architect. C. Install, make fully operational and test the system as indicated on the Drawings and in the Specifications. Where information is not available the worst -case condition must be assumed to ensure a complete, functional system. D. Any interfacing with other systems shall be the Contractor's responsibility under this contract, and the details, both logical and physical, of such interfaces shall be reflected in the Submittals and As -Built drawings. E. If appropriate, interfaces with the Owner's Data Network or Telecommunications System shall be coordinated with the Owner and Architect. F. All necessary back boards, back -boxes, pull -boxes, connectors, supports, conduit, cable and wire shall be furnished and installed to provide a complete and reliable system. Exact location of all backboards, boxes, conduit and wiring runs shall be presented to the Owner/Architect for approval in advance of any installation. Provide as required and as specified in Division 26. G. Where required provide 120-VAC, 60 Hz power from nearest electrical panel through a junction box, to the system devices. Provide as required and as specified in Division 26. H. Where required, install conduit, cable and wire parallel and square with building lines, including raised floor areas. Conduit fills shall not exceed 40%. All equipment shall be mounted with sufficient clearance to minimize EMI as well as meet all applicable codes and facilitate observation and testing. Securely hand and/or fasten with appropriate fittings to ensure positive grounding, free of ground loops, throughout the entire system. Units shall be installed parallel and square to building lines. J. Quiet and vibration -free operation of all equipment is a requirement of this installation. Properly adjust, repair, balance or replace any equipment producing objectionable (in the judgment of the Owner or Architect) noise or vibration in any of the occupied areas of any building and provide additional brackets and bracing if necessary. Any such additions or changes shall be at no additional cost to the Owner. K. Installation shall comply with the CODES AND STANDARDS portion of this Section. Where more than one code or regulation if applicable, the more stringent shall apply. L. Where new equipment is replacing old equipment, the Contractor is responsible for removing and disposing of the old equipment and doing whatever repair work is necessary as specified by the Owner/Architect. ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY GENERAL PROVISIONS VLK Architects, 2007 28 0500 - 9 2740.00 CREEKVIEW ELEMENTARY SCHOOL COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX M. Install firestopping, as specified in Division 26 for all penetrations in slabs and firewalls to meet code at the completion of work and prior to final testing demonstration to the Owner. N. The installation shall be performed in a professional manner. O. On a daily basis, clean up and deposit in appropriate containers all debris from work performed under the appropriate specification sections. Stack and organize all parts, tools and equipment when not being used. P. Preparation, handling and installation shall be in accordance with the Manufacturer's written instructions and technical data appropriate to the product specified. Q. All work shall conform to the National Electrical Contractor's Association "Standard of Installation" for general installation practice. R. At the conclusion of the installation, all work areas, including all enclosures and boxes, shall be vacuumed and cleaned to remove all debris and grease. 3.02 COORDINATION WITH OWNER/ARCHITECT A. Close coordination with the Owner/Architect is vital to achieve a complete, aesthetically pleasing job. The Contractor shall ensure that the Owner/Architect is kept fully apprized of job progress. 3.03 CUTTING, PAINTING, AND PATCHING: A. Structural members shall not be drilled, bored or notched in such a manner that shall impair their structural value. Cutting of holes in structural members, if required, shall be done with core drills and only with the specific approval of the Owner/Architect for each instance. B. All walls that require cutting or repair during the installation process shall be returned to their original condition, including the matching of colors and finishes to the satisfaction of the Owner/Architect, and at no additional cost to the Owner. 3.04 WIRE AND CABLE: A. All low voltage cable shall be low smoke plenum rated, limited energy, with 300-volt insulation. B. All wires in exposed areas shall run through conduit as specified in Division 26. C. Provide conduits, cable trays, raceways, wireways, boxes and outlets as specified in Division 26. D. After installation, and before termination, all wiring shall be checked and tested to insure there are no grounds, opens, or shorts on any conductors. In addition, all wires between buildings or underground and all coax cables shall have insulation tested with a megohmeter (megger) and a reading of greater than 20 megohms shall be required to successfully complete the test. E. Run wires continuously from termination to termination without splices. F. Wire and cable shall be supported in each equipment and terminal cabinet and in each terminal and pull box in vertical risers and horizontal runs with wire duct and strap -type supports. At any point where wire duct is required for good wire management, whether ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY GENERAL PROVISIONS VLK Architects, 2007 28 0500 - 10 2740.00 CREEKVIEW ELEMENTARY SCHOOL COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX shown on elevations or not, install appropriate duct. Where terminal boards are used, wire ducts shall be supplied on both sides and at not rime shall wires cross over terminal boards. Arrange cables neatly to allow inspection, removal and replacement. Lace cables as required. Spot tie wire bundles with plastic cable ties and securely affix to panels. If screw type terminals are specified, terminal strip connections shall be locking, tongue style, pressure crimp, and solderless spade lug. G. Visually inspect wire and cable for faulty insulation prior to installation. Protect cable ends at all times with acceptable end caps except during actual termination. At no time shall any coaxial cable be subjected to a bend less than a 6-inch radius. Protect wire and cable from kinks. Install 1 pull rope for all 2" or larger sized conduits. H. Provide plastic bushings and strain relief material at all conduit exit points and where necessary, to avoid abrasion of wire and excess tension on wire and cable. Cables above accessible ceilings shall not rest on ceiling tiles. Use Velcro tie wraps to hold cables. Provide independent support for all cables. Support is to be from building structure (do not support from pipes or conduits). ESS cables shall not tie off on HVAC supports, all -thread, ceiling grid hanger wire or electrical / mechanical piping system. J. Ground and bond equipment and circuits in accordance with NEC and Division 26. 3.05 IDENTIFICATION AND TAGGING: A. -All cables, wires, wiring forms, terminal blocks and terminals shall be identified by labels, tags to other permanent markings in accordance with TIA/EIA-606. The markings shall clearly indicate the function, source, or destination of all cabling, wiring and terminals. All cables and wires shall be identified, utilizing heat -shrink, machine printed, polyolefin wire markers (Brady Type B-32 or equan. Hand written tags are not acceptable. B. Should a situation arise where the wire tagging format as shown on the drawings cannot be used, a substitute format shall be submitted which complies with the intent to provide documentation that will permit end -to -end tracing of all ESS Systems wiring. C. All panels shall be provided with permanently attached engraved lamacoid labels with identifying names and functions. All terminal points shall be appropriately labeled. Labels shall be consistent in form, color, and typeface throughout the system and all must contain the name of the system or subsystem as part of the label textual information. Design, color, font and layout shall be coordinated with, and approved by, the Owner. D. Identification of Equipment: 1. All major equipment shall have a manufacturer's label identifying the manufacturer's address, equipment model and serial numbers, equipment size, and other pertinent data. Take care not to obliterate this nameplate. The legend on all nameplates or tags shall correspond to the identification shown on the Operating Instructions. 2. A black -white -black 3 layer laminated plastic engraved identifying nameplate shall be permanently secured to each wireway, terminal cabinet, and ESS cabinet or rack. a. Identifying nameplates shall have 1/2-inch high, engraved letters. 3. Permanent, waterproof, black markers shall be used to identify each ESS grid junction box, clearly indicating the type of system available at that junction box. 4. Pull Boxes: Field work each with a nameplate showing identity, and identifying equipment connected to it. Nameplates shall also indicate where pull box is fed from. ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY GENERAL PROVISIONS VLK Architects, 2007 28 0500 - 11 2740.00 CREEKVIEW ELEMENTARY SCHOOL COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX E. Prohibited Markings: Markings intended to identify the manufacturer, vendor, or other source from whom the material has been obtained are prohibited for installation in public, tenant, or common areas within the project. Also prohibited are materials or devices that bear evidence that markings or insignias have been removed. Certification, testing (example, Underwriters Laboratories), and approval labels are exceptions to this requirement. F. Warning Signs: Provide warning signs where there is hazardous exposure associated with access to or operation of ESS facilities. Provide text of sufficient size to convey adequate information at each location; mount permanently in an appropriate and effective location. Comply with industry standards for color and design. G. Wire and Cable Labeling: Provide wire markers on each conductor in all boxes, pull boxes, gutters, wireways. Identify with drop/circuit number. H. Underground Warning Tape: Thomas and Betts or approved equal. Six-inch wide plastic tape, colored red or orange with suitable warning legend describing buried ESS lines. All underground conduits shall be so identified. Tape shall be buried at a depth of 6-inches below grade and directly above conduits or ductbanks. Provide magnetic marking tape below all underground conduits. 3.06 CUTTING AND PATCHING A. General: Comply with the requirements of Division 01 for the cutting and patching of other work to accommodate the installation of electrical work. Except as authorized by the Architect/Engineer, cutting and patching of electrical work to accommodate the installation of other work is not permitted. 3.07 INSTRUCTION OF OWNER'S PERSONNEL A. Prior to substantial completion, conduct an on -site training program to instruct Owner's operating personnel in the operation and maintenance of the ESS systems. 1. Provide the training during regular working day. 2, The Instructors shall be experienced in their phase of operation and maintenance of the electrical systems and with the project. B. Time to be allocated for instructions. 1. Minimum of 12 hours dedicated instructor time 2. 4 hours on each of 3 days 3. Additional instruction time for specific systems as specified in other Sections. C. Before on -site training, submit the program syllabus; proposed time and dates; for review and approval, minimum 48 hours prior to proposed training time and date. 1. One copy to the Owner 2. One copy to the Architect/Engineer D. The Owner shall provide a list of personnel to receive instructions, and shall coordinate their attendance at the agreed upon times. E. Use operation and maintenance manuals as the basis of instruction. Review manual with personnel in detail. Explain all aspects of operation and maintenance. F. Demonstrate start-up, operation, control, adjustment, trouble -shooting, servicing, maintenance, and shut down of each item of equipment. G. Demonstrate equipment functions (both individually and as part of the total integrated system). ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY GENERAL PROVISIONS VLK Architects, 2007 28 0500 - 12 2740.00 CREEKVIEW ELEMENTARY SCHOOL COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX H. Prepare and insert additional data in the operating and maintenance manuals when the need for additional data becomes apparent during instructions. Submit a report within one week after completion of training. List time and date of each demonstration, hours devoted to the demonstration, and a list of people present, with their respective signatures. At the conclusion of the on -site training program, have the person designated by the Owner sign a certificate to certify that he/she has a proper understanding of the system, that the demonstrations and instructions have been satisfactorily completed, and the scope and content of the operating and maintenance manuals used for the training program are satisfactory. K. Provide a copy of the report and the certificate in an appropriately tabbed section of each Operating and Maintenance Manual. 3.08 OPENINGS A. Framed, cast or masonry openings for boxes, equipment or conduits are specified under other divisions. Drawings and layout work for exact size and location of all openings are included under this division. 3.09 HOUSEKEEPING PADS A. Provide concrete equipment housekeeping pads under outdoor mounted ESS equipment. B. Concrete and reinforcing steel shall be as specified in Division 03, or as indicated or noted. C. Concrete pads: 1. 6-inches thick minimum indoors; 8-inches thick minimum outdoors, or as indicated on the drawings or in other sections of the specifications. 2. Chamfer strips at edges and corner of forms. 3. Smooth steel trowel finish. 4. Extend 3-inches minimum indoors beyond perimeter of equipment unless otherwise shown. 5. 6-inch x 6-inch #8 wire reinforcement mesh. 3.10 OBSTRUCTIONS A. The drawings indicate certain information pertaining to surface and subsurface obstructions, which has been taken from available drawings. Such information is not guaranteed, however, as to accuracy of location or complete information. 1. Before any cutting or trenching operations are begun, verify with Owner's representative, utility companies, municipalities, and other interested parties that all available information has been provided. 2. Should obstruction be encountered, whether shown or not, alter routing of new work, reroute existing lines, remove obstruction where permitted, or otherwise perform whatever work is necessary to satisfy the purpose of the new work and leave existing services and structures in a satisfactory and serviceable condition. B. Assume total responsibility for and repair any damage to existing utilities or construction, whether or not such existing facilities are shown. ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY GENERAL PROVISIONS VLK Architects, 2007 28 0500 - 13 2740.00 CREEKVIEW ELEMENTARY SCHOOL COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX 3.11 VANDAL RESISTANT DEVICES A. Where vandal resistant screws or bolts are employed on the project, deliver to the Owner 2 suitable tools for use with each type of fastener used. B. Proof of delivery of these items to the Owner shall be included in the Operating and Maintenance Manuals. 3.12 PROTECTION A. Protect work, equipment, fixtures, and materials. At work completion, work must be clean and in original manufacturer's condition. B. Do not deliver equipment to this project site until progress of construction has reached the stage where equipment is actually needed or until building is closed in enough to protect the equipment from weather. Equipment allowed to stand in the weather shall be rejected, and the contractor is obligated to furnish new equipment of a like kind at no additional cost to the Owner. 3.13 EQUIPMENT BACKBOARDS A. Backboards: 3/4 inch, fire retardant, exterior grade plywood, painted gray, both sides. 1. Provide minimum of two 44 by 8-ft. sheets of plywood for each location shown. 2. Provide minimum of two 44 by 4-ft. sheets of plywood for each ESS location. 3.14 SITE MANAGEMENT RESPONSIBILITY: A. The Contractor shall provide an on -site Project Manager as defined in SUPERVISION OF WORK portion of this Section. 3.15 START-UP RESPONSIBILITY: A. The Contractor shall initiate System operation. The Contractor shall provide competent Start -Up personnel on each consecutive working day until all ESS Systems are functional and ready to start the acceptance test phase. If the Contractor, in the Owner/Architect's judgment, is not demonstrating progress in solving any technical problems, the Contractor shall supply Manufacturer's factory technical representation and diagnostic equipment at no cost to the Owner, until resolution of those defined problems. Where appropriate, the Contractor shall bring the Systems on-line in their basic state (i.e., alarm reporting, facility code access control, etc.) It is the responsibility of the Owner to provide the specific database information that will be utilized for initial system programming. B. Properly ground each piece of electronic equipment prior to applying power. Properly ground all shielded wire shields to the appropriate earth ground at the hub end only, not at the remote or device end. C. Use a start-up sequence that incrementally brings each portion of the system on-line in a logical order that incorporates checking individual elements before proceeding to subsequent elements until the entire system is operational. The basic steps should include: 1. Establish ground planes at the equipment rooms and hub end of the systems as specified in Division 26, 2. Disconnect power, connect the first device, reconnect power, and verify operational correctness. Repeat until the entire system is verified and operational. ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY GENERAL PROVISIONS VLK Architects, 2007 28 0500 - 14 2740.00 CREEKVIEW ELEMENTARY SCHOOL COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX 3.16 PREPARATION FOR ACCEPTANCE (SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION): A. All systems, equipment, and devices shall be in full and proper adjustment and operation, and properly labeled and identified. B. All materials shall be neat, clean and unmarred, and parts securely attached. C. All extra material as specified shall be delivered and stored at the premises as directed. D. Test reports of each system and each system's components and As -Built Project Drawings shall be complete and available for inspection and delivery as directed by the Owner. 3.17 SYSTEM ACCEPTANCE REQUIREMENTS: A. Before final acceptance or work, the Contractor shall perform and/or deliver each of the following in the order stated. B. The Contractor shall deliver three (3) composite "System Operations and Maintenance" manuals in three-ring binders, sized to hold the material below, plus 50% excess. Each manual shall contain in appropriately tabbed sections: 1. A statement of Guarantee including date of termination and the name and phone number of the persons to be called in the event of equipment failure. 2. A set of Operating procedures for the overall System that includes all required Owner activities, and that allows for the Owner operation of all attributes and facilities of the System. 3. A section for each specific type of equipment containing the vendor manuals, instruction sheets, and any related literature that cam in the original shipping container for that piece of equipment. Include all warranty cards. C. Testing: 1. The Contractor shall perform all tests required by Division 28 and those submitted as part of this Section. 2. The Contractor shall activate all devices for proper system operation, including supervisory and trouble circuit tests. Similarly, audible alarms will not be activated except on a one-time, coordinated basis, to check the actual sounding devices. 3. A test report for each piece of equipment shall be prepared by the Contractor and submitted to the Owner. This report shall include a complete listing of every device, the date it was tested, by whom and the results. The final test reports shall indicate that every device tested successfully. Failure to completely test and document the tests will result in a delay of final testing and acceptance. D. As -Built Drawings: 1. After completion of all the tests listed above, and prior to the final acceptance test, The Contractor shall submit the complete As -Built drawings as identified in PART 1 — PROJECT RECORD DRAWINGS. 2. The final As -Built Drawings shall consist on one set of reproducible prints, two (2) sets of Point -to -Point Detail Drawings, Equipment Schedules, and the complete detailed technical data that was shipped by the manufacturer with all installed equipment. E. Final Acceptance Test: The Final Acceptance Test shall demonstrate the installed and activated System's performance and compliance with System Specifications. However, before this testing can begin the following must have received and reviewed by the Owner. 1. System Operations and Maintenance Manuals ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY GENERAL PROVISIONS VLK Architects, 2007 28 0500 - 15 2740.00 CREEKVIEW ELEMENTARY SCHOOL COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX 2. System Test Reports 3. As -Built Drawings 3.18 NOTICE OF COMPLETION A. When the Final System Acceptance Requirements described above including the Final Acceptance Test described above have been satisfactorily completed. The Owner/Architect shall issue a Letter of Completion to the Contractor indicating the date of such completion. The Notice of Completion shall be recorded by the Contractor upon receipt of the Owner/Architect completion letter. This date of record shall be the start of the warranty period. END OF SECTION ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY GENERAL PROVISIONS VLK Architects, 2007 28 0500 - 16 2740.00 CREEKVIEW ELEMENTARY SCHOOL COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX SECTION 28 0507 - SHOP DRAWINGS, COORDINATION DRAWINGS & PRODUCT DATA PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Prepare submittals as required by Division 1 and as outlined below. B. Submit product data shop drawings only for the following and for items specifically requested elsewhere in the Contract Drawings and Specifications. Architect/Engineer reserves the right to refuse shop drawings not requested for review and to imply that materials shall be provided as specified without exception. C. The term submittal, as used herein, refers to all: 1. Shop Drawings 2. Coordination Drawings 3. Product data D. Submittals shall be prepared and produced for: 1. Distribution as specified 2. Inclusion in the Operating and Maintenance Manual, as specified, in the related section 1.02 SHOP DRAWINGS A. Present drawings in a clear and thorough manner. Identify details by reference to sheet and detail, schedule, or room numbers shown on Contract Drawings. B. Show all dimensions of each item of equipment on a single composite Shop Drawing. Do not submit a series of drawings of components. C. Identify field dimensions; show relation to adjacent or critical features or work or products. 1.03 COORDINATION DRAWINGS A. Present in a clear and thorough manner. Title each drawing with project name. Identify each element of drawings by reference to sheet number and detail, or room number of contract documents. Minimum drawing scale: 1/4"=1'-0". B. Prepare coordination drawings to coordinate installations for efficient use of available space, for proper sequence of installation and to resolve conflicts. Coordinate with work specified in other sections and other divisions of the specifications. C. For each room containing ESS equipment and each rack with ESS equipment, submit plan and elevation drawings. Show: 1. Actual ESS equipment and components to be furnished. 2. NEC working space and NEC access to NEC working space. 3. Relationship to other equipment and components and openings, doors and obstructions 4. Rack location and dimensions D. Identify field dimensions. Show relation to adjacent or critical features of work or products. E. Verify location of ESS station devices and other work specified in this Division. 1. Coordinate with drawing details, site conditions and millwork shop drawings prior to installation. 2. Where required for clarification, submit shop drawings prior to rough -in and fabrication. SHOP DRAWINGS, COORDINATION DRAWINGS & PRODUCT DATA VLK Architects, 2007 28 0507 - 1 2740.00 CREEKVIEW ELEMENTARY SCHOOL COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX F. Submit shop drawings in plan, elevation and sections, showing outlets and other devices in casework, cabinetwork and built-in furniture. 1.04 PRODUCT DATA A. All product options specified shall be indicated on the product data submittal. All options listed on the standard product printed data not clearly identified as not part of the product data submitted shall become part of the Contract and shall be provided. B. Mark each copy of standard printed data to identify pertinent products, referenced to specification section and article number. C. Show reference standards, performance characteristics and capacities; wiring and piping diagrams and controls; component parts; finishes; dimensions and required clearances. D. Modify manufacturer's standard schematic drawings and diagrams to supplement standard information and to provide information specifically applicable to the work. Delete information not applicable. E. Mark up a copy of the specifications for the product to indicate a) acknowledgement of the specification requirement (Comply), or b) acknowledgement that the particular specification requirement does not apply to this specific project (Not Applicable) or, c) acknowledgement that the specification requirement cannot be made or that a variance is being submitted for review to the Architect/Engineer/Owner (Does Not Comply, Explanation:) 1.05 MANUFACTURERS INSTRUCTIONS A. Submit Manufacturer's instructions for storage, preparation, assembly, installation, start-up and adjusting. 1.06 CONTRACTOR RESPONSIBILITIES A. Review submittals prior to transmittal. B. Determine and verify: 1. Field measurements 2. Field construction criteria 3. Manufacturer's catalog numbers 4. Conformance with requirements of Contract Documents C. Coordinate submittals with requirements of the work and of the Contract Documents. D. Notify the Architect/Engineer in writing at time of submission of any deviations in the submittals from requirements of the Contract Documents. E. Do not fabricate products, or begin work for which submittals are specified, until such submittals have been produced and bear contractor's stamp. Do not fabricate products or begin work scheduled to have submittals reviewed until return of reviewed submittals with Architect/Engineer's acceptance. F. Contractor's responsibility for errors and omissions in submittals is not relieved whether Architect/Engineer reviews submittals or not. G. Contractor's responsibility for deviations in submittals from requirements of Contract Documents is not relieved whether Architect/Engineer reviews submittals or not, unless Architect/engineer gives written acceptance of the specific deviations on reviewed documents. SHOP DRAWINGS, COORDINATION DRAWINGS & PRODUCT DATA VLK Architects, 2007 28 0507 - 2 2740.00 CREEKVIEW ELEMENTARY SCHOOL COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX H. Submittals shall show sufficient data to indicate complete compliance with Contract Documents: 1. Proper sizes and capacities 2. That the item will fit in the available space in a manner that will allow proper service 3. Construction methods, materials and finishes Schedule submissions at least 15 days before date reviewed submittals will be needed. ' 1.07 SUBMISSION REQUIREMENTS A. Make submittals promptly in accordance with approved schedule, and in such sequence as to cause no delay in the Project or in the work of any other Contractor. B. Number of submittals required: 1. Shop Drawings and Coordination Drawings: Submit four opaque reproductions. 2. Product Data: Submit the number of copies the contractor requires, plus those to be retained by the Architect/Engineer. C. Accompany submittals with transmittal letter, in duplicate, containing: 1. Date 2. Project title and number 3. Contractor's name, address and telephone number 4. The number of each Shop Drawing, Project Datum and Sample submitted 5. Other pertinent data D. Submittals shall include: 1. The date of submission 2. The project title and number 3. Contract Identification 4. The names of: a. Contractor b. Subcontractor C. Supplier d. Manufacturer 5. Identification of the product 6. Field dimensions, clearly identified as such 7. Relation to adjacent or critical features of the work or materials 8. Applicable standards, such as ASTM or federal specifications numbers 9. Identification of deviations from contract documents 10. Suitable blank space for General Contractor and Architect/Engineer stamps 11. Contractor's signed and dated Stamp of Approval E. Coordinate submittals into logical groupings to facilitate interrelation of the several items. 1. Finishes which involve Architect/Engineer selection of colors, textures or patterns 2. Associated items requiring correlation for efficient function or for installation 1.08 SUBMITTAL SPECIFICATION INFORMATION A. Every submittal document shall bear the following information as used in the project manual: 1. The related specification section number 2. The exact specification section title B. Submittals delivered to the Architect/Engineer without the specified information will not be processed. The Contractor shall bear the risk of all delays, as if no submittal had been delivered. SHOP DRAWINGS, COORDINATION DRAWINGS & PRODUCT DATA VLK Architects, 2007 28 0507 - 3 2740.00 CREEKVIEW ELEMENTARY SCHOOL COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX 1.09 RESUBMISSION REQUIREMENTS A. Make resubmittals under procedures specified for initial submittals. 1. Indicate that the document or sample is a resubmittal 2. Identify changes made since previous submittals B. Indicate any changes which have been made other than those requested by the Architect/Engineer. 1.10 CONTRACTOR'S STAMP OF APPROVAL A. Contractor shall stamp and sign each document certifying to the review of products, field measurements and field construction criteria, and coordination of the information within the submittal with requirements of the work and of Contract Documents. B. Contractor's stamp of approval on any submittal shall constitute a representation to Owner and Architect/Engineer that Contractor has either determined and verified all quantities, dimensions, field construction criteria, materials, catalog numbers, and similar data or assumes full responsibility for doing so, and that Contractor has reviewed or coordinated each submittal with the requirements of the work and the Contract Documents. C. Do not deliver any submittals to the Architect/Engineer that do not bear the Contractor's stamp of approval and signature. D. Submittals delivered to the Architect/Engineer without Contractor's stamp of approval and signature will not be processed. The Contractor shall bear the risk of all delays, as if no submittal had been delivered. 1.11 ARCHITECT/ENGINEER REVIEW OF IDENTIFIED SUBMITTALS A. The Architect/Engineer will: 1. Review identified submittals with reasonable promptness and in accordance with schedule. Specific equipment submittals that may be required to be expedited shall be submitted separately without other submittal items not requiring the same prompt attention. 2. Affix stamp and initials or signature, and indicate requirements for resubmittal or approval of submittal 3. Return submittals to Contractor for distribution or for resubmission B. Review of submittals will not extend to design data reflected in submittals that is peculiarly within the special expertise of the Contractor or any party dealing directly with the Contractor. C. Architect/Engineer's review is only for conformance with the design concept of the project and for compliance with the information given in the contract. 1. The review shall not extend to means, methods, sequences, techniques or procedures of construction or to safety precautions or programs incident thereto. 2. The review shall not extend to review of quantities, dimensions, weights or gauges, fabrication processes or coordination with the work of other trades. D. The review and approval of a separate item as such will not indicate approval of the assembly in which the item functions. 1.12 SUBSTITUTIONS A. Do not make requests for substitution employing the procedures of this Section. B. The procedure for making a formal request for substitution is specified in Division 01. SHOP DRAWINGS, COORDINATION DRAWINGS & PRODUCT DATA VLK Architects, 2007 28 0507 - 4 2740.00 CREEKVIEW ELEMENTARY SCHOOL COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX PART 2 - PRODUCTS - NOT USED. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 SHOP DRAWINGS AND PRODUCT DATA A. Submittals shall not be combined or bound together with any other material submittal. B. Submit individually bound shop drawings and product data for the following when specified or provided: 1. Low Voltage Wire 2. Electronic Access Control and Intrusion Detection 3. Electronic Surveillance 4. Fire Detection and Alarm 3.02 COORDINATION DRAWINGS A. Submit coordination drawings as specified. END OF SECTION SHOP DRAWINGS, COORDINATION DRAWINGS & PRODUCT DATA VLK Architects, 2007 28 0507 - 5 2740.00 CREEKVIEW ELEMENTARY SCHOOL COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX SECTION 28 0510 - CONTRACT QUALITY CONTROL PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Contract quality control including workmanship, manufacturer's instructions, mock-ups and demonstrations. 1.02 QUALITY CONTROL PROGRAM A. Maintain quality control over supervision, subcontractors, suppliers, manufacturers, products, services, site conditions and workmanship to produce work in accordance with contract documents. 1.03 WORKMANSHIP A. Comply with industry standards except when more restrictive tolerances or specified requirements indicate more rigid standards or more precise workmanship. B. Perform work by persons qualified to produce workmanship of specified quality. C. Secure products in place with positive anchorage devices designed and sized to withstand stresses, vibration, and racking. Under no conditions shall material or equipment be suspended from structural bridging. D. Provide finishes to match approved samples; all exposed finishes shall be approved by the Architect / Engineer. Submit color samples as required. 1.04 MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS A. Comply with instructions in full detail, including each step in sequence. B. Should instruction conflict with Contract Documents, request clarification from Architect/Engineer before proceeding. 1.05 MANUFACTURER'S CERTIFICATES A. When required in individual Specification Sections, submit manufacturer's certificate in duplicate, certifying that products meet or exceed specified requirements. 1.06 MANUFACTURER'S FIELD SERVICES A. When required in individual Specification Sections, manufacturer shall provide a manufacturer's qualified personnel to observe: 1. Field conditions. 2. Condition of installation. 3. Quality of workmanship. 4. Start-up of equipment. 5. Testing and adjusting of equipment. B. Manufacturer's qualified personnel shall make written report of observations and recommendations to Architect/Engineer. CONTRACT QUALITY CONTROL VLK Architects, 2007 28 0510 - 1 2740.00 CREEKVIEW ELEMENTARY SCHOOL COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 REFERENCE APPLICABLE SPECIFICATION SECTIONS. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 ADJUSTMENTS AND MODIFICATIONS A. Contractor shall provide all adjustments and modifications as requested by the manufacturer's qualified personnel at no additional cost to Owner. END OF SECTION CONTRACT QUALITY CONTROL VLK Architects, 2007 28 0510 - 2 2740.00 CREEKVIEW ELEMENTARY SCHOOL COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX SECTION 28 3111 - FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM SYSTEM PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Provide all detailed engineering, documentation, materials and devices, installation, calibration, software programming and check-out necessary for a complete and fully operational fire detection and alarm system in accordance with the full intent and meaning of the drawings and specifications including, but not limited to, the following: 1. Supply, install and connect all hardware necessary to provide a complete and operational fire detection and alarm system. 2. Supply, install and wire all field hardware, fire alarm control panel, power supplies, power circuits, alarm initiating devices, audible and visual alarm devices, auxiliary control relays, signal initiating and signaling devices, conduits, wires, fittings and all accessories required for the system to perform as specified as required. 3. Supply, install, debug and test all software required to provide all software functions described in accordance with the full intent and meaning of the drawings and specifications. 4. Coordinate the work specified under this Section with other trades and contractors to assure a complete and fully operational system. B. The intent of fire detection and alarm system work is specified in this section and indicated on the drawings. Fire detection and smoke detection devices indicated are for design intent, reference and coordination purposes only. The installing contractor shall design and provide a complete system, meeting the requirement of this section. The Contractor shall provide all fire alarm and initiation devices required for a complete system acceptable to all governing authorities. Provide proper spacing and coverage of all devices. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Division 23 B. Sprinkler Systems C. Food Service 1.03 CODES / STANDARDS / REFERENCES (LATEST EDITIONS) A. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): 1. NFPA 13 Systems, Installation 2. NFPA 17 Dry Chemical Extinguishing Systems 3. NFPA 70 National Electrical Code 4. NFPA 72 National Fire Alarm Code. 5. NFPA 80 Fire Doors and Fire Windows 6. NFPA 90A Standard for the Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems. 7. NFPA 92A Smoke Control Systems 8. NFPA 101 Life Safety code. 9. NFPA 105 Smoke Control Door Assemblies 10. NFPA 2001 Fire Extinguishing Systems, Clean Agent B. UL: Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. 91h Edition 1. 217 Single and Multiple Station Smoke Detectors. 2. 268 Smoke Detectors for Fire Protective Signaling Services. 3. 864 Control Units for Fire Protective Signaling Services, 9th Edition. FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM SYSTEM VLK Architects, 2007 283111 - 1 2740.00 CREEKVIEW ELEMENTARY SCHOOL COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX 4 864 Transient protection 5. 1480 Speakers for Fire Protective Signaling Systems 6. UL Fire Protection Equipment Directory. 7. UL Electrical Construction Materials Directory. C. Uniform Federal Accessibility Standards (UFAS). D. Factory Mutual P7825 Approval Guide E. American National Standards Institute (ANSI). F. National Electrical Manufacturer's Association (NEMA). G. Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE). H. Electronic Industries Association (EIA-232-C): Interface between Data Terminal Equipment and Data Communication Equipment Employing Serial Binary Data Interchange. I. Requirements of American Disabilities Act (Public Law 101-336). J. Local Accessibility Standards K. State Fire Marshall or Requirements of Local Authorities having Jurisdiction L. State Insurance Code M. National Building Code O. International Building Code P. Uniform Building Code Q. Local & State Building Codes R. Resolve any code or standards deviations discovered in contract documents with the Engineer 3 days prior to bid of the contract. After bid of Contract any correction or additions necessary for compliance with applicable codes shall be made at no additional cost to the Owner. S. In addition the above requirements, comply with all local codes. Where discrepancies exist between codes, drawings or specifications, the more stringent requirement shall prevail. Installation shall be subject to approval, inspection and test of applicable regulatory agencies. 1.04 MANUFACTURER'S AND INSTALLER'S QUALIFICATIONS A. The manufacturer shall regularly and presently produce, as the manufacturer's principle products, the equipment and material of the type and design specified for this project, and shall have manufactured the item for at least 5 years. B. Manufacturer's product shall have been in satisfactory operation on three installations of similar size, type and design as this project, for approximately 3 years. C. Manufacturer shall submit at the time of bid a list of installations where the products have been in operation. FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM SYSTEM VLK Architects, 2007 283111 - 2 2740.00 CREEKVIEW ELEMENTARY SCHOOL COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX D. The installing contractor shall have been actively engaged in the business of designing, selling, installing, and servicing fire alarm systems for at least ten (10) years. E. The entire Fire Detection and Alarm System shall be installed by an authorized representative of the Fire Alarm Manufacturer and certified by the manufacturer to distribute, sell, and install the specified fire alarm and smoke detection system. Include all components, elements, and testing and acceptance procedures. F. If the submitted system is being supplied by an authorized distributor of the equipment manufacturer the distributor shall have been actively engaged in the sale, installation and service of the type of system proposed for this project for a minimum of 10 years. G. Any proposed installer who cannot show evidence of such qualifications may be rejected. The services of a technician provided and certified by the equipment manufacturer shall be provided to supervise the installation and tests of the system. H. Furnish evidence there is an experienced and effective service organization, which carries a stock of repair parts for the system to be furnished. I. The installing contractor shall be licensed by the State Fire Marshall to design, sell, install, and service fire alarm systems as required by the State Insurance Code. J. The installing contractor shall have on his staff an installation superintendent licensed by the State Fire Marshall's office for such purpose and under whose supervision installation, final connections, and check out will take place as required by the State Insurance Code. K. The installing contractor or equipment supplier shall have on staff a minimum of one (1) certified NICET Level III state licensed fire alarm planner under whose supervision system design shall take place. In lieu of a NICET certified state licensed fire alarm planner, the contractor or supplier may provide design supervision by a registered professional engineer, who regularly engages in the design of fire alarm systems. L. The installing contractor shall provide 24-hour, 365 days per year emergency service with factory trained, state licensed service technicians. M. Material shall be new and in perfect condition when installed. N. Electrical or electronic equipment provided under this Division which has been damaged, exposed to weather, or is, in the opinion of the Architect/Engineer otherwise unsuitable because of improper fabrication, storage, or installation, shall be removed and replaced with new equipment, at no additional cost to the owner. 1.05 COORDINATION A. It shall be the responsibility of the installing contractor to coordinate all requirements surrounding installation of the fire alarm system with all other trades. 1.06 DEFINITIONS A. General: Wherever mentioned in this specification or on the drawings, the equipment, devices and functions shall be defined as follows: 1. Alarm Signal: A signal, which signifies a state of emergency requiring immediate action and immediate notification of the Fire Department. These are signals such as: a. The operation of a manual station. b. The operation of a fire suppression system switch. FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM SYSTEM VLK Architects, 2007 283111 - 3 2740.00 CREEKVIEW ELEMENTARY SCHOOL COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX 2. Pre -Alarm Signal: A signal, which indicates a detection device, has operated. These signals require and immediate response, but do not require immediate notification of the Fire Department. 3. Supervisory Signal: A signal, which signifies the impairment of fire protection system, which may prevent its normal operation. 4. Trouble Signal: A signal, which indicates that a fault, such as an open circuit or ground, has occurred in the system. 5. Alarm Zone: An alarm initiating device or combination of devices connected to a single alarm initiating device circuit. 6. Pre -Alarm Zone: A detector or group of detectors connected to a single detector circuit, which can send an alarm to the central control panel. 7. Supervision Zone: A supervisory signal initiating device or combination of such devices connected to a single supervisory signal circuit. 8. Communication Zone: A fire alarm indicating device or series of devices arranged to visually and/or audibly indicate a fire alarm signal. 1.07 SUBMITTALS A. Fire alarm submittal shall be bound and separate from all other submittals. The installing contractor and/or equipment supplier shall provide complete and detailed shop drawings and include: 1. Provide a complete written, item -by -item, line -by-line, specification review stating compliance or deviation in full description. 2. Control panel wiring and interconnection schematics. 3. Complete point-to-point wiring diagrams. 4. Complete floor plan drawings locating all system devices. 5. Complete system bill of material. 6. Detailed system operational description. Any specification differences and deviations shall be clearly noted and marked. 7. Provide a complete description of system operation. 8. Manufacturer's installation instruction. 9. Bound form with contractor's name, supplier's name, project name, state fire alarm license, Fire Alarm Planning Superintendent license and all Technician(s) license adequately identified. 10. Submittal sheets sequentially numbered with the format: sheet number of number total. For example: 1 of 3. 11. Complete set of manufacturer's operating instructions, circuit diagrams and the information necessary for proper installation, operation and maintenance. 12. Field and factory wiring diagrams of all systems and for typical devices showing all connections with all terminals and interconnections identified. 13. Complete schematic circuit diagrams for all equipment, including panel modules. 14. Floor plan drawings including all panel and device locations, conduit sizes between devices and panels; number, size and type of conductors between devices and panels; walls, doors and graphic room numbers; exact power requirements and conduit routing with the location of all junction boxes and exact locations of devices and equipment. Submit a floor plan drawing circuiting/zoning shall be identified on the drawings. 15. Complete wiring, routing, and schematic diagrams, software descriptions, and details required to demonstrate that the system has been coordinated and will function as a system. 16. Manufacturers catalog cut sheets shall be provide for each piece of equipment with the appropriate model or part number highlighted in cases where multiple model numbers or part numbers are shown. 17. Detailed list of all hardware components, which are included. 18. Installation details for each type of field mounted device installed under this 19. contract. Point-to-point termination schedules with cable identification numbers and terminal strip numbers. FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM SYSTEM VLK Architects, 2007 283111 -4 2740.00 CREEKVIEW ELEMENTARY SCHOOL COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX 20. Fire detection and alarm system's panel configuration complete with peripheral devices, batteries, power supplies, and interconnection diagrams. 21. Submit a riser diagram of trunk wiring and device -to -device wiring and device to fire alarm control panel wiring. Riser shall show: a. Conduit sizes and types. b. Number, size and type of conductors. C. Fire detection and alarm devices arranged in the required circuiting/zoning, as defined in the specifications and on the drawing. d. Battery calculations to show compliance with the requirements of the specifications for both alarm and supervisory mode. 22. Submit sound and visual level to confirm that number and location of signaling devices will provide required sound and visual levels throughout the building. 23. Sample of proposed graphic/text annunciation. 1.08 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS A. Submit complete sets of operation and maintenance manuals. Manual, less as-builts, and sign -off sheets, shall be provided upon completion of the work and not less than 30 days prior to final acceptance testing of the system. Approval of the manual will be required prior to final approval. B. The Operation and Maintenance Manual shall consist of the following: 1. The manual shall include the names, addresses and telephone numbers of each Contractor installing products, and of the nearest service representative for each product. The manual shall have a Table of Contents and tab sheets. Update manuals to include modifications made during installation, checkout and acceptance. The manual shall include the sections described in the following paragraphs. 2. The Functional Design Section shall identify the operational requirements for the system and explain the theory of operation, design philosophy, and specific functions. Hardware and software functions, interfaces, and requirements shall be provided for system operating modes. 3. The Hardware Section shall describe equipment provided, including general description and specifications, installation and checkout procedure, electrical schematics and layout drawings. Alignment and calibration procedures, manufacturer's repair parts list indicating source of supply, interface definition, signal identification and wiring diagrams. Also, include a complete parts list of all components as well as a list of recommended spare parts. The spare parts list shall include, for each item, the manufacturer's name, the model of the part, and serial number, if appropriate, and a physical and electrical description of the part. 4. The Software Section shall describe programming and testing, starting with a system overview and proceeding to a detailed description of each software module, to instruct the user on programming or reprogramming any portion of the system and other information necessary to enable proper system usage. 5. The Operation Section shall provide instructions for operation of the system, including system start-up procedures, use of system and applications software, alarm presentation (where applicable), failure and recovery procedures, preventive maintenance schedule, parameter schedules and sequence definition, and system access requirements. 6. The Maintenance Section shall provide descriptions of maintenance for equipment including inspection, periodic preventive maintenance, fault diagnosis, and repair or replacement of defective components. 7. The Shop Drawings section shall include copies of all approved shop drawings and submittal materials updated to "AS BUILT". FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM SYSTEM VLK Architects, 2007 28 3111 - 5 2740.00 CREEKVIEW ELEMENTARY SCHOOL COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX 1.09 AS -BUILT DRAWINGS A. Prepare and submit detailed "As -Built" drawings. The drawings shall include certified test of the system, testing and acceptance sign -off sheets, and other items specified elsewhere to be performed after initial submission of operation and maintenance manuals, complete wiring diagrams showing connections between all devices and equipment, both factory and field wired. Include a riser diagram and drawings showing the as built location of all devices and equipment. The drawings shall show the system as installed, including all deviations from both the project drawings and the approved shop drawings. The drawings shall be prepared on uniform sized sheets, the same size as the project drawings. These drawings shall be submitted to be inserted in the specified Operations and Maintenance Manuals. 1.10 OPERATIONAL INSTRUCTIONS A. Provide a typeset printed or a laser jet printed instruction card mounted behind a lexan plastic or glass cover in a stainless steel or aluminum frame. Install the frame in a conspicuous location observable from the Fire Alarm Control Panel (FACP). The card shall show those steps to be taken by an operator when a signal is received as well as the functional operation of the system under all conditions, normal, alarm, and trouble. The instructions shall be approved by the Architect/Engineer before being posted. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS & SOURCE MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers acceptable contingent upon Products' compliance with the specifications: 1. GE / Edwards System Technologies - Local Strategic Partner 2. Notifier — Notifier ONYX System Approved Distributor 3. Farenhyt by Silent Knight — Farenhyt Engineered Systems Distributor 4. Private labeled signaling devices manufactured by Gentex Corp. are not acceptable. 5. Atlas Soundolier — speakers only 2.02 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. System shall be a completely multiplexed addressable fire detection and alarm system, tested and left in first class operating condition. B. The system shall provide communication with initiating and control devices individually. All of these devices shall be individually annunciated at the fire alarm control panel. Annunciation shall include the following conditions for each point: 1. Alarm 2. Trouble. 3. Open 4. Short 5. Device missing/failed. C. System circuits shall be wired as follows: Initiating device circuit (IDCs) shall be Style B, indicating appliance circuit (IACs) shall be Style Y, and signal line circuit (SLCs) shall be Style 4 as describe in NFPA 72. D. The system shall contain independently supervised initiating device circuits. The alarm activation of any initiation circuit shall not prevent the subsequent alarm operation of any other initiation circuit. FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM SYSTEM VLK Architects, 2007 283111 - 6 2740.00 CREEKVIEW ELEMENTARY SCHOOL COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX E. There shall be supervisory service initiation device circuits for connection of all sprinkler water flow switches and valves. Device activation shall cause a general alarm at the fire alarm control panel. Each flow and tamper switch shall have an individual address. F. There shall be independently supervised and independently fused indicating appliance circuits for all alarm signaling devices. Disarrangement conditions of any circuit shall not affect the operation of other circuits. G. Auxiliary manual controls shall be supervised so that an "off normal" position of any switch shall cause an "off normal' system trouble. H. The incoming power to the system shall be supervised so that any power failure must be audibly and visually indicated at the fire alarm control panel. A green "power on" LED shall be displayed continuously while incoming power is present at the building fire alarm control panel. I. The system batteries shall be supervised so that a low battery condition or disconnection of the battery shall be audibly and visually indicated at the building fire alarm control panel. J. The system modules shall be electrically supervised for module placement. Should a module become disconnected, the system trouble indicator shall illuminate and the audible trouble signal shall sound. K. The system shall have provisions for disabling and enabling all circuits individually for maintenance or testing purposes. L. The system shall be provided with sufficient battery capacity to operate the entire system upon loss of normal 120 VAC power in a normal or supervisory mode for a period of 24 hours with 20 minutes of alarm operation at the end of this period as a minimum. The system shall automatically transfer to the standby batteries upon power failure. All battery charging and recharging operations shall be automatic. If batteries are fully discharged, the charger shall recharge them back to full charge in four hours. M. All external circuits requiring system operating power shall be 24 VDC and shall be individually fused at the respective fire alarm control panel. N. All addressable devices shall have the capability of being disabled or enabled individually from the fire alarm control panel. O. A maximum of 60 addressable devices shall be multi -dropped from a single pair of wires. Systems that require factory reprogramming to add or delete devices within the capability of the designed system are unacceptable. Expansion of the designed system shall be accomplished by factory reprogramming. P. The communication format to the addressable devices shall be a completely digital poll/response protocol to allow Mapping of the circuit wiring. A high degree of communication reliability must be obtained by using parity data bit error checking routines for address codes and check sum routines for the data transmission portion of the protocol. Q. Each addressable device must be uniquely identified by an address code. The system must verify that proper type device is in place and matches the desired software configuration. All remote or external panels shall have an individual address for monitoring. R. Wiring type, distances, survivability, and wiring configuration types shall be approved by the equipment manufacturer. The system shall allow a line distance of up to 2,500 feet to FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM SYSTEM VLK Architects, 2007 283111 - 7 2740.00 CREEKVIEW ELEMENTARY SCHOOL COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX the furthest addressable device on a Style Y circuit. Plenum rated fire alarm cable shall have an outer jacket insulation color of red. Minimum wire size shall be #18 AWG. S. Each panel extender shall have an individual address. 2.03 FIRE ALARM CONTROL PANEL (FACP) A. The FACP shall be modular with solid state, microprocessor based electronics and shall be capable of communicating with the types of addressable devices specified below. It shall display only those primary controls and displays essential to operation during a fire alarm condition. Keyboards or keypads shall not be required to operate the system during fire alarm conditions. B. The fire alarm control panel (FACP) shall be fully enclosed in a lockable steel enclosure as specified herein. All operations required for testing or for normal care and maintenance of the system shall be performed form the front of the enclosure. If more than a single unit is required to form a complete control panel, the unit enclosures shall match exactly. The system shall operate at 24 VDC. C. Panel shall be large enough to accommodate all components and also to allow ample gutter space for interconnection of all panels as well as all field wiring. Each enclosure and each component shall be identified by an engraved red laminated phenolic resin nameplate. Lettering on the nameplate shall not be less than 1" high. Individual components and modules within the cabinets shall be identified by engraved laminated phenolic resin nameplates. D. A local audible device shall sound during alarm, trouble, or supervisory conditions. This audible device shall sound differently during each condition to distinguish one condition from another without having to view the panel. This audible device shall also sound during each key press to provide an audible feedback to ensure that the key has been pressed properly. E. The following primary controls shall be visible through a front access panel: 1. 80 character alphanumeric display. 2. Individual red system alarm LED. 3. Individual yellow supervisory service LED. 4. Individual yellow trouble LED. 5. Green "power on" LED. 6. Alarm acknowledge key. 7. Trouble acknowledge key. 8. Alarm silence key. 9. System reset key. F. Under normal condition, the front panel shall display a "SYSTEM IS NORMAL" message and the current time and date. G. Should an abnormal condition be detected, the appropriate LED (Alarm, Supervisory or Trouble) shall flash. The panel audible signal shall pulse for alarm conditions and sound steady for trouble and supervisory conditions. H. The 80-character display shall provide the following information relative to the abnormal condition of a point in the system. 1. 40-character custom location label. 2. Type of device (i.e. smoke, pull station, water flow). 3. Point status (i.e. alarm, trouble). 4. Address location to correspond to the actual graphic room numbers. FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM SYSTEM VLK Architects, 2007 28 3111 - 8 2740.00 CREEKVIEW ELEMENTARY SCHOOL COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX Alarm conditions shall be displayed on the 80-character display. The top line of 40 characters shall be the point label and the second line shall be the device type identifier. The system alarm LED shall flash on the control panel until the alarm has been acknowledged. Once acknowledged, this same LED shall latch on. A subsequent alarm received from another zone shall flash the system alarm LED on the control panel. The 80-character display shall show the new alarm information. J. Each independently supervised circuit shall include a discrete readout to indicate disarrangement conditions per circuit. K. Acknowledgment for each abnormal condition shall be provided. Acknowledge keys shall not be pass code protected. Acknowledge keys shall be protected by the locked enclosure only. After all points have been acknowledged, the LEDs shall glow steady and the audible device be silenced. The total number of alarms, supervisory and trouble conditions shall be displayed, along with a prompt to review each list chronologically. The end of the list shall be indicated by the message, "END of LIST". L. Pressing the appropriate acknowledge button shall display the first unacknowledged condition in the appropriate list (either alarm, supervisory or trouble), and shall require another acknowledge button for each subsequent alarm condition. Press to acknowledge shall only silence the displayed point. M. Alarm silencing: 1. Should the "Alarm Silence" button be pressed, all alarm signals shall cease operation. 2. Signals shall not be silenced during alarm silence inhibit mode. N. System reset: 1. The "System Reset" button shall be. used to return the system to its normal state after an alarm condition has been remedied. The 80-character display or reset LED shall step the user through the reset process with simple English Language messages. 2. Should an alarm condition continue to exist, the system shall remain in an abnormal state. System control relays shall not reset. The audible device and the alarm LED shall be on. 3. Should the alarm silence inhibit function be active, the System Reset and alarm silence key shall be ignored. O. Additional function keys, or their equivalent, shall be provided to access status data for the following points: 1. Initiating device circuits. 2. Indicating appliance circuits. 3. Auxiliary relays feedback points. 4. All other input/output points. P. The following status data, or their equivalent shall be available: 1. Primary state of point. 2. Device, PID and card type information. 3. Current priority of outputs. 4. Disable/enable status. 5. Verification tallies of initiating devices. 6. Automatic/manual control status of output points. 7. Acknowledge status. 8. Relay status. Q. LED supervision: Where provided, all slave module LEDs shall be supervised for burnout or disarrangement. Should a problem occur, the 80-character display shall display the module and LED location numbers to facilitate location of that LED. FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM SYSTEM VLK Architects, 2007 28 3111 - 9 2740.00 CREEKVIEW ELEMENTARY SCHOOL COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX R. System trouble reminder: should a trouble condition be present within the system and the audible trouble signal silenced, the trouble signal shall resound at pre-programmed time intervals to act as a reminder that the fire alarm system is not 100% operational. Both the time interval and the trouble reminder signal shall be programmable. S. The fire alarm control panel features shall include, but not be limited to: 1. Setting of time and date. 2. LED testing. 3. Alarm, trouble, and abnormal condition listing. 4. Enabling and disabling of each monitor point separately. 5. Activation and deactivation of each control point separately. 6. Changing operator access levels. 7. Walk test enable. 8. Running diagnostic function. 9. Displaying software revision level. 10. Displaying historical logs. 11. Displaying card status. 12. Point listing. 13. For maintenance purposes, the following lists, or their equivalent, shall be available from the system program and/or the point lists menu: a. All points list by address. b. Monitor point list. C. Signal list. d. Auxiliary control list. e. Feedback point list. f. LED/switch status list. 14. Fire Drill: a. Fire drill activation switch shall activate all audio/visual devices only. Fire drill shall not enter into the alarm sequence of operation, shall not close smoke or fire/smoke dampers, shall not deactivate any HVAC systems, kitchen hoods, etc. b. Activation of any trouble or alarm condition shall supercede the evacuation drill. C. Fire drill shall be canceled by the system reset key, alarm silence, or drill key. 15. Scrolling through menu options or lists shall be accomplished in a self -directing manner. These controls shall be located behind an access door. 16. The 80-character display shall have an alpha numeric, back LCD lighted, LED, or gas plasma display. The display shall support numeric and both upper and lower case letters. Lower case letters shall be used for soft key titles and prompting the user. Upper case letters shall be used for system status information. A cursor shall be visible when entering information. 17. The system shall be capable of being tested by one person. The actuation of the "enable walk test" program at the fire alarm control panel shall activate the "Walk Test' mode of the system, which shall cause the following to occur: a. The remote monitoring circuit connection shall be bypassed. b. Control relay functions shall be bypassed. C. The control panels shall show a trouble condition. d. The panel shall be capable of selecting either: the alarm activation of any initiation device causing the audible signals to activate for two seconds or the alarm activation of any initiation devices causing the audible signals to code a number of pulses to match the zone number. e. The panel shall automatically reset itself after signaling is complete. f. Any momentary opening of an initiating or indicating appliance circuit wiring shall cause the audible signals to sound for 4 seconds indicating a trouble condition. g. The control panel shall be capable of supporting up to 8 separate testing FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM SYSTEM VLK Architects, 2007 283111 - 10 2740.00 CREEKVIEW ELEMENTARY SCHOOL COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX groups whereby one group of points may be in a testing mode and the other (non -testing) groups may be active and operate as programmed per normal system operation. After testing is considered complete, testing data may be retrieved from the system in chronological order to ensure device/circuit activation. h. Should the walk test feature be on for an inappropriate amount of time, it shall revert to the normal mode automatically. 18. Provide three (3) access levels with level 3 being the highest level. Level 1 action shall not require a pass code. Pass codes shall consist of up to ten (10) digits. Changes to pass codes shall only be made by Level 3 authorized personnel. a. When entering a pass code, the digits entered shall not be displayed. All key presses shall be acknowledged by a local audible sound and/or visual "*" in the 80 character display. b. When a correct pass code is entered, the new access level shall be in effect until the operator manually logs out or the keypad has been inactive for ten (10) minutes. C. Should an invalid code be input, access shall be denied. d. Access to a level shall only allow the operator to perform all actions within that level plus all actions of lower levels, not higher levels. e. The following keys/switches, or their equivalent shall have access levels associated with them: Set time/date. Manual control. Disable/enable. Clear historical alarm log. Clear historical trouble log. Walk test. Change alarm verification. f. The following keys/switches shall not be pass code protected and shall be protected by the lockable enclosure: Alarm Silence System Reset Acknowledge 19. The fire alarm system shall allow for loading and editing special instructions and operating sequences as required. The system shall be capable of being reprogrammed to accommodate system expansion and facilities changes in operation. All software operations shall be stored in a non-volatile programmable memory within the fire alarm control panel. Loss of primary and secondary power shall not erase the instructions stored in memory. 20. Resident software shall allow for full configuration of initiating circuits so that additional hardware shall not be necessary to accommodate changes in, for instance, sensing of normally open contact devices to sensing of normally closed contact devices, or from sensing of normally open contact devices to sensing a combination of current limited and non -current limited devices on the same circuit and being able to differentiate between the two, or changing from a non - verification circuit to a verification circuit or vice -versa. 21. Resident software shall also allow for configuration of indicating appliance and control circuits so that additional hardware shall not be necessary to accommodate change in, for instance changing a non -coded indicating appliance circuit to a coded circuit. 22. The main fire alarm panel shall have the resident ability to store a minimum of 600 system events in chronological order of occurrence. Event history shall include all system alarms, troubles, operator actions, unverified alarms, circuit/point alterations, and component failures. Events shall be time and date stamped. Events shall be stored in non-volatile buffer memory. Access to history buffer shall be secured via 5-digit password security code. The system shall have the capability of recalling alarms and trouble conditions in chronological order for the purpose of recreating an event history. Loss of primary or secondary power FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM SYSTEM VLK Architects, 2007 28 3111 - 11 2740.00 CREEKVIEW ELEMENTARY SCHOOL COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX shall not erase the events stored in the memory. Each recorded event shall include the time and date of that event's occurrence. a. The following Historical Alarm log events shall be stored: Alarms. Alarm acknowledgment. Alarm silence. System reset. Alarm historical log cleared. b. The following historical trouble log events shall be stored: Trouble conditions. Supervisory alarms. Trouble acknowledgment. Supervisory acknowledgment. Alarm verification tallies. Walk tests results. Trouble historical log cleared. 23. Alarm verification shall be by device, whereby only verification from the same device will confirm the first activation and cause the alarm sequence to occur. 24. The control panel shall have the capability to display the number of times (tally) a device has gone into a verification mode. Should this verification tally reach a pre- programmed number, a trouble condition shall occur. 25. The control panel shall have a dedicated supervisory service LED and a dedicated supervisory service acknowledge key. Pressing the supervisory service acknowledge key shall silence the supervisory audible signal while maintaining the supervisory service LED "ON" indicating the off -normal condition. 26. Activation of an auxiliary bypass key shall override the selected automatic functions. 27. The system shall have keys that will allow the operator to display all alarms, troubles, and supervisory service conditions including the time of each occurrence. 28. RS-232-C output: the fire alarm control panel shall be capable of operating remote IBM compatible PC and/or printers; output shall be ASCII from an EIA RS-232-C connection with an adjustable baud rate. Each RS-232-C port shall be capable of supporting and supervising a remote CRT and printer. Data amplifiers shall be used to increase data line distance when required. The fire alarm control panel shall support three (3) RS-232-C ports and shall be expandable for additional RS-232-C ports. 29. Panel shall be sized to accommodate all required equipment. Panel shall be equipped with locks and transparent door, providing freedom from tampering yet allowing full view of the various displays and controls. T. The fire alarm control panel shall have a 25% spare module and battery capacity for future use. Space module(s), shall be provided in panel with terminals labeled. Each initiating circuit shall have 25% spare capacity. Space modules shall be provided in the fire alarm control panel with terminals labeled. U. The power supply shall provide all control panel and peripheral power needs with filtered power as well as unregulated 24VDC power for external audio-visual devices. The audio-visual power shall be increased as needed by adding additional modular expansion power supplies. All power supplies shall be designed to meet UL and NFPA requirements for POWER -LIMITED operation on all external signaling lines, including initiating circuits and indicating circuits. Design the system power supplies and power trunk wiring for all annunciation devices required, and to add a minimum of five (5) 110cd visual devices in the future. Individual design loading shall not exceed 70% of power supply and system wiring capacity. 1. Input power shall be 120VAC 60Hz. The power supply shall provide internal supervised batteries and automatic charger. The power supply shall provide positive and negative ground fault supervision, battery/charger fail condition, AC FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM SYSTEM VLK Architects, 2007 28 3111 - 12 2740.00 CREEKVIEW ELEMENTARY SCHOOL COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX power fail indicators. The power supply shall also provide supervision of modular expansion power supplies as may be required. 2. Surge protection shall be integral to the control panels. 3. Each power supply shall be monitored and have an individual address. V. DIGITAL FIRE ALARM COMMUNICATOR 1 Two line primary and secondary telephone line connections 2. Automatically seizes telephone line. 3. Automatic verification between panel and receiving station. 4. Transmits common trouble and supervisory conditions. 5. Dialer status LED. 6. DIALER Enable / Disable switch. 7. Two communication formats 20PPS or 4/2 format. 8. Dual tone multi -frequency (DTMF) or Pulse modes. 9. Programming password protected. 10. UL approved. W. Detector sensitivity shall be programmable from the control panel from the following sensitivities: 0.5, 1.0, 1.5, 2.0, 2.5, 3.0 and 3.7% obstruction. Detectors shall be able to be programmed to alert a trouble signal at a lower obstruction and shall report an alarm if the smoke density increases to a predetermined set point. Control Panel and Detectors shall be capable of "Day -Night" automatic sensitivity adjustments. X. CONTROL SWITCHES 1. Acknowledge/step Switch 2. Signal Silence Switch 3. System Reset Switch 4. System Test Switch 5. Lamp Test Y. AUTOMATIC DETECTOR TEST: The system shall include a special automatic detector test feature, which permits reading and adjustment of the sensitivity of all intelligent detectors from the main control panel. An automatic detector test shall occur automatically fourteen times each twenty-four hour period or be initiated manually from the FACP as desired. In addition, the automatic test feature shall also permit the functional testing of any "intelligent" detector or addressable interface device individually from the main control panel. Automatic detector test sequencing shall be terminated upon receipt of an alarm condition. Detector test shall report all unprogrammed devices installed and report all programmed devices not installed. 2.04 FIELD DEVICES A. All devices shall be supervised for trouble conditions. The fire alarm control panel shall be capable of displaying the type of trouble condition (open, short, device missing/failed). Should a device fail, it shall not hinder the operation of other system devices. B. Visual Signals 1. Strobe lights shall be of the electronic flashing xenon strobe type and operate on 24 VDC. The strobe light shall be capable of producing 75 candela on axis to comply with ADA and UL 1638 requirements, and 15, 30, or 110 candela to comply with UL 1971 requirements. Visual signals in common areas of illumination shall have synchronized flash. Provide white with red letters. 2. All wall mounted strobe units installed in students toilets, gymnasiums, corridors, student locker/dressing rooms, kitchen preparation and serving areas, vocational shops, athletic/drill team training rooms, and where wall mounted in cafeterias, corridors and commons areas, shall have a protective cover, STI Stopper #STI1221 E Series. Provide enviro kit for locations where dampness, water or dust are present. FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM SYSTEM VLK Architects, 2007 28 3111 - 13 2740.00 CREEKVIEW ELEMENTARY SCHOOL COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX C. Combination Alarm Signal and High Intensity Visual Signals 1. Strobe lights shall be of the electronic flashing xenon strobe type and operate on 24 VDC. The strobe light shall be capable of producing 75 candela on axis to comply with ADA requirements, and 15, 30 or 110 candela to comply with UL 1971 requirements. Visual signals in common areas of illumination shall have synchronized flash. Each unit shall provide a Code 3 Temporal tone. The horn shall be capable of an output of 95dB at 10', and intensity adjusted accordingly for the area of coverage. Electronic Mini -Sounder or horn set on low setting shall be provided in interior rooms 900 square feet or less. Mini -sounder shall not be used in any corridors, mechanical electrical rooms and similar large spaces and areas of high ambient noise level. Provide white with red letters. 2. All wall mounted combination units installed in student toilets, gymnasiums, corridors, student locker/dressing rooms, kitchens, preparation and serving area, vocational shops, athletic/drill team training rooms, and where wall mounted in cafeterias, corridors and commons areas, shall have a protective cover, STI Stopper #STI1220E Series. Provide enviro kit for locations where dampness, water or dust are present. 3. The audible emergency alarms shall produce a sound that exceeds the prevailing sound level in the room or space by at least 15 dba or shall exceed any maximum sound level with a duration of 60 seconds by 5 dba, whichever is louder. Sound levels for alarm signals shall not exceed 110 dba at the minimum hearing distance from the audible appliance. D. Exterior Audible Signal: 1. Provide semi -flush mounted, molded of high impact red thermoplastic and listed for exterior weatherproof locations. E. Manual Pull Station: Addressable pull stations shall contain electronics that communicate the station's status (alarm, normal) to the control panel over two wires which also provide power to the pull station. They shall be manufactured from high impact red Lexan with white lettering. Station shall mechanically latch upon operation and remain so until manually reset by opening with a key common to all system locks. Pull stations shall be double action without glass rods. The front of the station shall be hinged to a back plate assembly and shall be opened with a key to reset the station. The key shall be common with the control panels. The addressable manual station shall have address setting programmed electronically and automatically from the fire alarm control panel. Manual stations shall be designed for semi -flush (surface) mounting on standard electrical box. All pull stations units shall have a protective cover, STI Stopper II #STI-1130 surface mounted cover with local alarm horn. Provide STI, Weather Stopper II #ST13150 for locations where dampness, water or dust are present. F. Intelligent Multi -Criteria Photoelectric Smoke Detectors 1. The intelligent multi -criteria detection device shall include the ability to combine the signal of the thermal sensor with the signal of the photoelectric signal in an effort to react hastily in the event of a fire situation. It shall also include the inherent ability to distinguish between a fire condition and a false alarm condition by examining the characteristics of the thermal and smoke sensing chambers and comparing them to a database of actual fire and deceptive phenomena. 2. The detectors shall use the photoelectric principal to measure smoke density and shall, on command from the control panel, send data to the panel representing the ANALOG level of smoke density. The detector shall provide automatic sensitivity "drift" compensation. The detector shall also provide a "maintenance alert" feature whereby the detector shall initiate a trouble condition should the unit's sensitivity approach the outside limits of the normal sensitivity window. 3. The detectors shall provide address -setting means electronically and automatically at the control panel. FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM SYSTEM VLK Architects, 2007 283111 - 14 2740.00 CREEKVIEW ELEMENTARY SCHOOL COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX 4. The detectors shall provide operational status and alarm state LED. Under normal conditions, the LED shall flash, indicating the detector is operational and in regular communication with the control panel. An output connection shall also be provided in the base for connecting an external remote alarm LED. 5. The detector shall be semi -flush ceiling mounted and be provided with modular detector head with twist -lock base. No radioactive material shall be used. 6. Voltage and RF transient suppression techniques shall be employed as well as smoke signal verification circuit and an insect screen. G. Duct photoelectric smoke detectors: 1. Detectors shall be analog addressable type. 2. To minimize nuisance alarms, detectors shall have an insect screen and be designed to ignore invisible airborne particles or smoke densities that are below the factory set alarm point. No radioactive material shall be used. 3. Removal of the detector head shall interrupt the supervisory circuit of the fire alarm detection loop and cause a trouble signal at the control panel. 4. Voltage and RF transient suppression techniques shall be employed as well as smoke signal verification circuit and an insect screen. 5. Remote alarm/power LED indicator shall be provided. Unit shall be wall or ceiling mounted in readily visible and accessible area near the location of detector; exact location of unit to be approved by the Architect/Engineer. 6. Detectors shall operate on the same principles and exhibit the same basic characteristics as area type photoelectric smoke sensors. The detector shall operate in air velocities of 300 FPM to 4,000 FPM. Each detector shall interface directly to the, system SLC loop without the requirement of interface zone modules. 7. The unit shall consist of a clear molded plastic enclosure (or remote mounted LED status indicator shall be provided next to the smoke detector) with integral conduit knockouts to provide visual viewing of detector/sensor for monitoring sensor operation and chamber condition. The duct housing shall be provided with gasket seals to insure proper seating of the housing to the associated ductwork. Each unit's sampling tubes shall extend the width of the duct and be provided with porosity filters to reduce sensor/chamber contamination. 8. The detectors shall provide alarm and power status indication by LED. Under normal conditions, the LED shall flash, indicating the detector is operational and in regular communication with the control panel. Steady illumination of the LED shall indicate that the control panel has detected and verified an alarm condition. An output connection shall also be provided in the base for connecting an external remote alarm LED. 9. The detectors shall provide address setting means electronically and automatically from the control panel. H. Intelligent Thermal Detectors 1. The detectors shall use dual electronic thermostats to measure temperature levels in its chamber and shall, on command from the control panel, send data to the panel representing the analog temperature level. 2. The detectors shall provide address -setting means electronically and automatically at the control panel. 3. The detectors shall provide operational status and alarm state LED. Under normal conditions, the LED shall flash, indicating the detector is operational and in regular communication with the control panel. An output connection shall also be provided in the base for connecting an external remote alarm LED. 4. The detector shall be semi -flush ceiling mounted and be provided with modular detector head with twist -lock base. 5. Thermal Detectors shall be combination rate -of -rise and fixed -temperature- rated at 135°F for areas where ambient temperatures do not exceed 100°F and shall be 200OF for areas where ambient temperatures exceed 100°F but not 150°F. FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM SYSTEM VLK Architects, 2007 283111 - 15 2740.00 CREEKVIEW ELEMENTARY SCHOOL COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX The fixed temperature element shall consist of a fusible alloy retainer and actuator shaft. Detectors shall have a smooth ceiling rating of 2,500 square feet. Detectors shall be located as shown on the drawings and where required by local _ code authority. 6. Provide fixed temperature 190OF detector in kitchen and kiln room in lieu of combination rate -of -rise / fixed -temperature type. Auxiliary AHU Relays: Air Products model MR-101C relays shall be provided for HVAC and AHU control and interface. Relays shall be heavy-duty type with contacts rated up to 10 amps at 120V AC, 60 HZ. Relays shall be provided with NEMA I dust cover assembly and be provided with DPDT contacts as well as activated LED indicator. Monitor Module: 1. Addressable monitor modules shall be provided where required to interface to contact alarm devices. The monitor module shall be used to connect a supervised zone of conventional initiating devices to an intelligent SLC loop. 2. The monitor module shall provide address -setting means electronically and automatically at the control panel. A status/alarm LED shall be provided which shall indicate that the monitor module is operational and in regular communication with the control panel, and indicate detection of an alarm condition. K. Control Module 1. Control/relay modules shall be provided where required to provide audible alarm interface and/or relay control interface. The control module shall be used to connect a supervised zone of conventional indicating devices town intelligent loop. The zone may be wired class A or class B - field selected. The control module may be optionally wired as dry contact (form C) relay. 2. The control module shall provide address -setting means electronically and automatically at the control panel. A status/alarm LED shall be provided which shall indicate that the control module is operational and in regular communication with the control panel and indicate when the device is actuated via the fire alarm control panel. L. Auxiliary Interface Points: All auxiliary input points (kitchen hoods, water flow, tamper switches, fire extinguishing systems etc.) shall be connected as required, and addressed as a separate initiating point of annunciation at the fire alarm panel and any remote annunciator as required. M. Water flow switches / Valve supervisory switches shall be provided and installed by the fire protection contractor and connected by the fire alarm contractor. Wiring of these field devices to the fire alarm system shall be the responsibility of the fire alarm contractor. It is the responsibility of this contractor to ensure the proper function of the system. Each fire protection zone (flow switch) and (Valve switch) shall be addressed electronically and automatically at the control panel as a separate point of annunciation at the fire alarm panel. Coordinate exact location with fire protection contractor and civil drawings. 2.05 MAGNETIC DOOR HOLDERS, AUTOMATIC FIRE DOORS / SHUTTERS, AND SECURITY GRILLES WITH AUTOMATIC EMERGENCY EGRESS ELECTRIC LOCK EMERGENCY EGRESS DOORS A. Magnetic fire door hold open devices, interface for automatic roll down fire doors/shutters, and interface for security grilles with emergency egress shall be provided. Coordinate with Division 8 and Architectural Drawings for exact location. B. The operation of any alarm, pre -alarm, or supervisory device in the fire alarm system shall cause the following: FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM SYSTEM VLK Architects, 2007 283111 - 16 2740.00 CREEKVIEW ELEMENTARY SCHOOL COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX 1. Release of the magnetic fire door holding devices, permitting the fire doors to be closed by the door closer. 2. Permit the automatic roll down fire doors/shutters to close automatically. 3. Permit the security grilles with emergency egress to open automatically. C. The magnetic door holders, automatic roll down fire doors/shutters, and security -grilles with emergency egress, shall be associated with two smoke detectors located on the ceiling with one on either side of the fire door/shutter or security grille opening. The operation of either of these detectors shall also cause the magnetic holder to release the fire door, the automatic fire door/shutter to close, and the security grille with emergency egress to open. D. The operation of smoke detectors associated with a magnetic door holder, automatic roll down fire door, or security grille shall transmit a pre -alarm signal to the fire alarm panel. 2.06 REMOTE ALPHA -NUMERIC DISPLAY ANNUNCIATORS A. Remote alpha -numeric annunciator(s) to annunciate all system events and duplicate the displayed status at the main FACP. The annunciator(s) shall be an 80-character display similar to the main FACP and operate via the system RS485 or RS232 serial output terminal from the main FACP. The unit shall operate from FACP 24VDC power and function during system power failure while the system resides on standby batteries. The remote annunciator(s) shall include: 1. Integral time -date clock 2. System reset 3. System silence 4. System acknowledge 5. Display/step switch 6. Integral trouble buzzer 7. LCD contrast adjust B. Fire Drill Operation B. Annunciator shall upon command display the first system alarm, last alarm, and system alarm count. The following primary controls shall be visible through a front access panel: 1. 80 character alphanumeric display, LCD, LED, or gas plasma 2. Individual red system alarm LED 3. Individual yellow supervisory service LED 4. Individual yellow trouble LED 5. Green "POWER ON" LED 6. Alarm acknowledge key 7. Trouble acknowledge key B. Alarm silence key 9. System reset key 10. LED test PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Installation shall include the delivery, storage, setting in place, fastening to the building structure, interconnection of the system components, alignment, adjustment and all other work, whether or not expressly specified, which is necessary to result in a tested and operational system. B. All installation practices shall be in accordance with, but not limited to, the specifications and drawings. Installation shall be performed in accordance with the applicable standards, requirements and recommendations of the National Electrical Code and any authorities FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM SYSTEM VLK Architects, 2007 28 3111 - 17 2740.00 CREEKVIEW ELEMENTARY SCHOOL COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX having jurisdiction. Proper protection against corrosion shall be provided on all electrical equipment in accordance with the requirements of the National Electrical Code. The installation shall conform to all manufacturers recommendations. C. All equipment shall be firmly secured in place unless requirements of portability dictate otherwise. Fastenings and support shall be adequate to support their loads with a safety factor of at least three. D. All boxes, equipment, etc., shall be plumb and square. The contractor must take such precautions as are necessary to prevent and guard against electrostatic hum, to supply adequate ventilation, and to install the equipment to provide reasonable safety for the operator. E. In the installation of equipment and cables, coordinate with Architectural drawings for possible conflicts with millwork, casework, marker boards, furniture, lockers, etc., and notify the architect of any discrepancies. Verify modifications before proceeding with installation. F. Mount end -of -line resistor for each box circuit in backbox above ceiling located at the last manual alarm station or automatic initiating device in a circuit. Mark device accordingly in the field. G. Provide two dedicated phone lines from telephone company demarcation point to fire alarm panel. Telephone cable shall be Category 5e rated and installed in 3/4" conduit. H. Upright and/or Wall Post -Indicating Valve: Provide conduit and wiring from fire alarm control panel to post -indicating valve, coordinate exact location of PIV with fire sprinkler contractor prior to rough -in. Coordinate final location with Civil Drawings and Fire Protection Contractor. I. Contractor shall submit on completion of system verification, a point -by -point check list indicating the date and time of each item inspected and issue a certificate confirming that the inspection has been completed and the system is installed and functioning in accordance with the Specifications prior to date of substantial completion. J. Provide remote alphanumeric display annunciators in the main campus administrative area of the central office in constantly attended area and additional annunciators where indicated on the drawings. K. Visual signals, where wall mounted shall be 80" AFF. Where visual signals are ceiling mounted, maximum height shall be 30-feet. All visual signaling devices shall be installed per NFPA 72. L. Detectors shall be installed per NFPA 90A and be listed with the fire alarm control panel. M. Auxiliary Equipment Monitoring Wiring and connection to equipment shall be the responsibility of the fire alarm contractor. N. Power for magnetic door holders should be provided from the nearest receptacle circuit wired through fire alarm relay. O. Smoke detectors shall be mounted to a 4-inch octagon box with hanger bar or with box secured to building structure. P. Provide power via 120-volt, 20-Amp dedicated circuits with lock -on provisions at the respective circuit breaker for the main fire alarm control panel, each panel extender and each remote power supply at no additional cost to the Owner. The complete fire alarm system shall be powered under emergency power when emergency life safety power is FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM SYSTEM VLK Architects, 2007 283111 - 18 2740.00 CREEKVIEW ELEMENTARY SCHOOL COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX available at the project site. When emergency life safety power is not available at the project site, power shall originate from the nearest available 120-volt panel. 3.02 CABLE AND BOXES INSTALLATION A. All circuits shall be protected to avoid interruption of service due to short-circuiting or other conditions, which might adversely affect the connected devices. Each individual signaling circuit shall be classified as a circuit pair. B. All cabling in racks, cabinets and junction boxes shall be neatly strapped, dressed and adequately supported. Cable installation shall conform to good engineering practices and to the standards of the National Electrical Code. C. Cables shall be terminated with the proper connector required for the associated operation of the equipment to which it is connected. Screw terminal blocks shall be furnished for all cables, which interface with racks, cabinets, consoles or equipment modules. D. All cables within a rack, console or junction box shall be grouped according to the signals being carried to reduce signal contamination. E. Where shielded conductors enter a panel or enclosure, and where power wiring exists, provision shall be made to provide physical isolation of signal and power conductors. F. Supply and install all fittings and accessories whether or not they are specified, required for proper, safe and reliable operation of the system. G. All wire shall be installed in an approved conduit/raceway system (except where permitted by NEC and the local authority having jurisdiction). Maximum conduit fill shall not exceed 40%. H. Minimum conduit size shall be 3/4" EMT with insulated bushings. Install conduit per engineered shop drawings. Systems utilizing open wiring techniques with low smoke plenum cable shall provide conduit in all inaccessible locations, inside concealed walls, all mechanical/electrical rooms, or other areas where wiring might be exposed to view and or subject to damage. J. All vertical wiring and all main trunk/riser wiring shall be installed in a complete raceway/conduit system. All riser boxes shall be adequately sized for the number of conductors transversing the respective box as well as the number of terminations required. K. All junction boxes containing fire alarm wiring are to be painted red. L. All plenum wiring is to be installed parallel and perpendicular to the building structure. Install wiring tight up against structure for protection. Cable shall be bundled with cable ties on a maximum of 2'-6" and secured to the structure at a maximum of 5' on center. Cable shall not lie on ceiling grid or ceiling tiles. .M. The system ground is to be connected to the local ground bus. Under no conditions shall the AC neutral either in a power. panel or in receptacle outlets be used for a reference ground. N. All wiring shall be in accordance with NFPA 72, the National Electrical Code, Local Codes. All wiring shall conform to recommendations of the equipment manufacturer, and as indicated on the engineered shop drawings. FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM SYSTEM VLK Architects, 2007 28 3111 - 19 2740.00 CREEKVIEW ELEMENTARY SCHOOL COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX O. All wire shall be UL Listed FPL for limited energy (300V) and fire alarm applications and shall be installed in conduit. Limited energy FPLP or MPP wire may be run open in return air ceiling plenums provided such wire is UL Listed for such applications and is of the low smoke producing fluorocarbon type and complies with NEC Article 760 and approved by the local authority having jurisdiction. P. No other wiring shall be run in the same conduit as fire alarm wiring. Q. All fire alarm wiring to be red. All fire alarm circuits shall be identified at each termination and at each 25 feet between terminations. 3.03 FINISHES A. Main Fire Alarm Panel color shall be approved by Owner / Architect. 3.04 ALARM SYSTEM SEQUENCE OF OPERATION A. General: 1. All fire alarm circuits shall be electrically supervised. 2. Automatic response functions shall be accomplished by the first device initiated. Alarm functions resulting from initiation by the first device shall not be altered by subsequent alarms. An alarm signal shall be the highest priority. A pre -alarm signal shall have second priority and supervisory or trouble signals shall have third and fourth level priority. Signals of a higher level priority shall take precedence over signals of lower priority even though the lower priority condition occurred first. B. Fire alarm operating sequences shall be as follows: 1. Activation of any automatic detector, manual station, or sprinkler flow switch shall cause the location of alarm to be identified in an audible and visual manner at the building fire alarm control panel (FACP), and shall initiate the following events: a. The system common alarm LED on the CPU Module shall flash. The internal audible trouble device shall sound. Acknowledging the alarm condition shall silence the audible trouble device and revert the flashing common alarm LED to a steady state. b. The 80-character display shall indicate all applicable information associated with the alarm condition including: zone, device type, device location, and time of alarm. Location and zoning messages shall be custom field programmed to respective premises. C. Any remote or local annunciator LED's associated with the alarm point shall be illuminated as herein specified. d. The remote signaling connection shall be activated relaying the alarm signal to an approved central station (central station connection and service provided by Owner). Point ID and descriptor must be sent and received. e. All automatic events programmed to the alarm point shall be executed .and the associated indicating devices and/or outputs activated. f. Activate all audible/visual alarm devices. Where prerecorded voice announcement is required or specified, the prerecorded announcement shall be preceded with attention tone(s), followed by the approved prerecorded announcement and continue in a cycle until the system is reset. Manual voice announcement shall interrupt the prerecorded cycle and the prerecorded cycle shall resume automatically after three minutes. g. De -activate all HVAC systems. h. De -energize the kitchen hood supply/exhaust fans as required by local authority having jurisdiction. i. Close all related smoke dampers. j. Close all related smoke/fire dampers. FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM SYSTEM VLK Architects, 2007 283111 - 20 2740.00 CREEKVIEW ELEMENTARY SCHOOL COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX k. Release all magnetic door hold open devices. I. Open all security grilles with emergency egress. M. Activate to close all related fire and smoke doors and shutters. n. Signal the building automation system and security system, and Owner's security/police personnel as directed by Owner/Architect. The audible alarms shall be inhibited from being silenced for a period of 3 minutes after commencing operation unless alarm is acknowledged and appropriate action has been taken. o. Release the electric strike, unlocking, but not unlatching, locked doors controlled by an access control system. Release Counter Shutters and hold -open devices on all fire and smoke doors. 2. Activation of duct mounted smoke detector on the HVAC equipment, or a smoke detector mounted in the return/supply air stream of any fan shall shut down the unit as required by NFPA. The activation of one of these detectors shall send a supervisory signal to the control panel and also initiate the Alarm Sequence of Operation. 3. Activation of a control valve supervisory switch shall initiate the following events: a. The activation of any sprinkler valve supervisory (tamper) switch shall activate the system supervisory service audible signal and illuminate the LED at the building fire alarm control panel (FACP). Differentiation between valve tamper activation and opens and/or grounds on the initiation circuit wiring shall be provided. b. Activation of a sprinkler system control valve supervisory switch shall not prevent the events listed under Article 3.04. C. Restoring the valve to the normal position shall cause the supervisory service audible signal to pulse, indicating the restoration to normal position. The supervisory service reset key shall be provided to silence the audible signal. 4. Activation of the smoke detector and heat detector in the elevator machine room and at top of elevator shaft shall cause the elevators' controllers to be tripped by way of the shut trip breaker, and shall also initiate the events listed under Article 3.04. 5. Any subsequent fire alarm shall reactivate the alarm indicating appliances and activate the respective control sequences described above. 6. Upon reset of the fire alarm control panel, HVAC units shall be capable of being started, and resume normal operation. C. Activation of the manual evacuation (drill) switch shall operate the alarm indicating appliances without causing other control circuits to be activated. However, should true alarm occur, all alarm functions should occur as described. D. ALARM VERIFICATION shall be field programmed for each respective detector. Global verification will not be acceptable. The verification sequence is activated after a "check" procedure and the panel will wait a field programmable delay period (0-50 seconds) then proceed to re -sample the detector for continued presence of smoke. If the alarm condition still exists or a non -verified device is actuated during the verification period, the system will then initiate all alarm sequences specified herein. The system shall incorporate the ability to log in memory the number of verification events that have occurred for each selected device. 3.05 COMMISSIONING THE SYSTEM A. The installing contractor shall be responsible for verifying that each component of the system is fully operational and in conformity with the specifications. He shall also be responsible for insuring that all elements function together as a system in accordance with the specifications. FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM SYSTEM VLK Architects, 2007 28 3111 - 21 2740.00 CREEKVIEW ELEMENTARY SCHOOL COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX B. A state licensed and factory trained technical representative of the manufacturer shall supervise the final control panel connections and testing of the system. Upon completion of the acceptance tests, the owner and/or his representatives shall be instructed in the proper operation of the system. C. The installing contractor shall functionally test each and every device in the entire system for proper operation and response. Any items found not properly installed or non-functioning shall be replaced or repaired and retested. The final test indicating a fully functional fire alarm system shall be recorded and printed and a copy submitted to the Architect, Engineer and Owner. D. The installing contractor shall provide a complete written report on the functional test of the entire system. A copy of the test report shall be provided with maintenance manuals. The test report shall be signed and dated by the licensed fire alarm superintendent responsible for supervising the final system test and checkout. E. The installing contractor's fire alarm superintendent shall test the entire system in the presence of the local authorities having jurisdiction. The contractor shall be responsible for making any changes, adjustments, or corrections, as may be required by the local authorities. The Contractor shall affix his certification label and installation certificate to the interior of the main fire alarm control panel. F. The testing and acceptance shall be performed within 30 days after the fire alarm installation is completed. The test shall be performed by a minimum of two qualified fire alarm system technicians acceptable to the authority having jurisdiction. The test which is a comprehensive 100 percent inspection and test of all fire alarm system equipment, shall include the following: 1. Fire alarm control equipment: a visual and functional test of the fire alarm control and auxiliary control equipment. 2. A visual inspection shall be conducted to establish that all electrical connections and equipment, as required, are properly installed and operating. 3. A functional fault simulation test shall be conducted on all relevant field wiring terminations to ensure that wiring is properly supervised as required. 4. Indicators shall be tested to ensure proper function and operation. 5. Control panel auxiliary functions shall be functionally tested to verify proper operation. 6. Control panel supervisory and alarm current readings shall be taken to verify that the control panel has the appropriate power supplies and standby batteries to operate the system as required. A three -minute general alarm stress test, both under AC power and standby power, shall be conducted to further ensure complete operation of the system. 7. Fire alarm peripheral devices; All fire alarm peripheral devices shall be functionally tested and the location and testing information recorded for each device. 8. Manual initiating devices: a. Each manual fire alarm station shall be functionally tested for alarm operation. b. Each manual fire alarm station shall be functionally tested for proper wiring supervision. 9. Automatic initiating devices: a. Each automatic initiating device shall be activated in accordance with manufacturer's instructions to ensure proper operation. b. Each automatic initiating device shall be functionally tested for proper wiring supervision. C. Each automatic initiating device shall be inspected to ensure proper placement and mounting as required by specifications. FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM SYSTEM VLK Architects, 2007 283111 - 22 2740.00 CREEKVIEW ELEMENTARY SCHOOL COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX 10. Alarm signaling devices: a. Each alarm signaling device shall be tested and decibel reading taken at 10' from the device and recorded to ensure proper operation. b. Each alarm signaling device shall be functionally tested for proper wiring supervision. C. Decibel reading shall be taken to ensure that the alarm signal level can be clearly heard in all areas of the facility. d. All visual alarm indicators shall be functionally tested to ensure proper operation and that they are clearly visible. 11. Reporting: Upon completion of the initial verification audit, a report shall be sent to the Architect/Engineer indicating that all fire alarm equipment has been tested and is in 100 percent operation. The report shall also contain the audit testing information as to the location and operational status of each peripheral device. The 100 percent audit shall be performed by a factory -trained representative. G. It is the intent of these specifications and of the Architect/Engineer that a continued program of system maintenance be provided by the Owner in compliance with NFPA 72. It is mandatory that the installing Contractor provide such services and make available these services to the Owner upon completion of the project. H. Upon completion of installation and full acceptance testing, submit NFPA 72 certificate of compliance that the total fire alarm system, including any subsystems, is fully functional and that the components are UL listed for function intended. 3.06 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION A. Each piece of equipment shall be provided with a permanently engraved or embossed or silkscreen identification tag. The tag shall include the following information: 1. Name of manufacturer. 2. Manufacturer's equipment description. 3. Serial number and model number. 4. Voltage and current rating. 3.07 SPARE PARTS AND TOOLS A. Interchangeable Parts: All spare parts furnished shall be directly interchangeable with the corresponding components of the installed system. Spare parts shall be packaged and identified by nameplate, tagging, or stamping. Spare parts shall be delivered to the site in unopened cartons for storage as directed by the Owner. B. Spare Parts: Provide minimum of two, or 5% of building total, whichever is greater unless noted otherwise. 1. Spare shut down modules 2. Spare detectors of each type in the system 3. Spare alarm indicating devices of each type in the system 4. Spare manual pull stations 5. Spare protective covers of each type in the system. 6. Spare relays/controls required for connection to smoke and fire/smoke dampers 7. Devices listed above are to be installed as directed by Architect/Engineer or local code authorities at no additional cost to the Owner. Unused spare parts are to be parts for Owner's cabinet. 8. Provide one telescopic pole for each type of area detector located above 12 feet AFF to facilitate removal and installation of detector head. C. Provide two copies of the final software programmed into the fire alarm system. D. Parts list: Furnish a list, in duplicate, of all other parts and accessories the manufacturer of the system recommends to be stocked for maintenance. FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM SYSTEM VLK Architects, 2007 283111 - 23 2740.00 CREEKVIEW ELEMENTARY SCHOOL COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX 3.08 KEYS A. Keys and locks for all equipment shall be identical. Provide not less than six keys of each type required. Identify keys by an appropriate number stamped on each key or on a metal tag attached thereto. Provide a key numbering chart in each operation and maintenance manual furnished. 3.09 SMOKE DAMPERS AND FIRE/SMOKE DAMPERS A. Smoke dampers and combination fire/smoke dampers shall be controlled by an automatic alarm initiating device. Smoke dampers installed to isolate the air handling system shall be arranged to close automatically when the system is in alarm. B. Coordinate motor operator voltage with supplier. C. Open all dampers prior to starting air handling equipment. D. Provide 120V power from nearest general purpose 20A receptacle circuit as required, or as noted otherwise. 3.10 GRAPHIC FLOOR PLANS A. Provide color coded floor plan detailed with actual room names, actual graphic room numbers as directed by the Owner, and adequate information to direct people to the fire alarm devices in alarm and to exits with non -fading floor plan media. Do not use architectural plan room names and numbers. B. Each plan shall clearly relate the room numbers on the annunciator to the area description on the floor plan. All fire alarm devices located to correspond with the annunciator. C. The floor plan shall be solvent welded in acrylic plastic. 1. Mount in an extruded aluminum frame next to the main fire alarm control panel. D. Install graphic floor plans as directed by Architect/Owner prior to substantial completion. Each area or room designation shall be verified with the fire alarm device during testing. 3.11 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS A. Provide Fire Alarm System Operating Instructions for the following items including, but not limited to: 1. Alarm Signal a. How to open panel door b. What to read and follow the instruction on display C. How to acknowledge alarm d. How to silence the signals e. How and when to reset the system f. How to return system to normal operation 2. Trouble / Supervisory a. How to open panel door. b. What to read and follow the instruction on display C. How to acknowledge trouble condition d. Appropriate personnel to respond B. Provide laminated instructions in extruded aluminum frame. Mount adjacent to the Fire Alarm Control Panel and remote annunciator panel(s) for ready reference. FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM SYSTEM VLK Architects, 2007 283111 - 24 2740.00 CREEKVIEW ELEMENTARY SCHOOL COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX 3.12 ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS A. The contractor is to ensure all areas of the building are covered with visual and audio alarm devices for occupant notification of a fire alarm. B. Provide all accessories required for off -site monitoring. Coordinate with Owner for appropriate off -site monitoring service. Provide all necessary programming for interfacing with the Owner's on -site and off -site remote signaling receiving station, including programming of descriptors and addresses at the receiving station. C. Coordinate door hold devices with door and door hardware. D. Provide interface with and coordinate shunt -trip circuit breakers and control devices with kitchen hood fire control systems and elevator equipment. E. Alarm circuit power supplies and circuiting shall be designed and installed to accept an additional five (5) 110cd visual devices for future expansion. The initial design shall not exceed 70% of the rated power supply and circuit capability. F. Provide one dedicated alarm circuit for (future) portable (temporary) building(s) to the nearest main building egress exit discharge to the designated portable building location. Provide 100 feet of cable coiled and marked "FACP-ALARM-PORTABLES" above an accessible ceiling. G. Provide one dedicated initiating device circuit with a minimum capacity of 25 devices for (future) portable (temporary) building(s) to the nearest man building egress discharge to the designated portable building location. Provide 100 feet of cable coiled and marked "FACP-INITIATING PORTABLES" above an accessible ceiling. 3.13 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION A. Final acceptance of the FIRE ALARM SYSTEM by the owner, local code authorities and Occupancy Permit has been issued. B. All fire alarm system shop drawings, operating and maintenance manuals, maps and as - built drawings shall be submitted to and accepted by the Architect / Owner prior to date of substantial completion. 3.14 WARRANTY A. The fire alarm system, including labor and material, shall be free from defects in workmanship and materials, under normal use and service, for a period of one year from the date of substantial completion. Any equipment or workmanship shown to be defective shall be repaired, replaced or adjusted during normal working hours at no cost to the owner within 4-hour notification. B. Repair services and replacement parts for the system to be furnished under this Contract shall be available for a period of ten years after the date of final acceptance. Service during the warranty period shall be provided within four hours after notification and all repairs shall be corrected within 24 hours after notification throughout the warranty specified in this section. C. The installing contractor shall provide 24 hour, 365 days per year emergency service with factory trained, state licensed service technicians. D. The equipment manufacturer shall be represented by a local service organization and the name of such shall be furnished to the Owner, Architect, and Engineer. FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM SYSTEM VLK Architects, 2007 28 3111 - 25 2740.00 CREEKVIEW ELEMENTARY SCHOOL COLLEGE STATION ISD COLLEGE STATION, TX E. Provide a certified fire alarm test of the complete system at the end of the warranty period and correct any and all items to bring the system to an approved status at no cost to the Owner. Clean all smoke detectors and replace all defective parts at no cost to the Owner. F. Guarantee labor, materials, and equipment provided under this contract against all defects for a period of one year after the date of final acceptance and receipt and approval of "As -Built" drawings and schematics of all equipment. 3.15 TRAINING A. Provide a minimum of 4-hours training course to all fire personnel assigned by Owner's Representative. The training shall include a course syllabus and hands-on participation. Training shall be conducted on site. The system shall be able to perform all system operations and simulate all types or forms of alarm conditions. B. Provide a video of the training program to the Owner's Representative to be used for periodic refresher course, training of the local fire department and for training of new employees. C. The training course shall include, in addition to the above, a system overview, and a review of the operation and maintenance manual. D. The instructor shall be factory trained and shall be thoroughly familiar with all parts of the installation on which instruction is to be given. The instructor shall be trained in operating theory as well as in practical operation and maintenance work. E. The training course shall be given after commissioning of the system and acceptance by the Owner and the local Authority Having Jurisdiction. END OF SECTION FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM SYSTEM VLK Architects, 2007 28 3111 - 26 2740.00 Creek View Elementary School College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas SECTION 31 1000 SITE CLEARING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Clearing the site of vegetation, site improvements and obstructions to make way for new work. 1.02 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Existing Conditions: Contractor shall visit the site and verify the nature and extent of clearing work required. B. Protection: Contractor shall be responsible for the protection of adjoining property and improvements outside the limits of the work. Protect walks, curbs and paving from damage by heavy equipment and trucks. Take precautions to prevent injury to trees which are to remain. PART 2 - PRODUCTS Not applicable. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 PERFORMANCE A. Clearing: 1. Remove trees, shrubs and other vegetation from within the area of the site where shown on the drawings. Grub out roots to a depth of at least 18" below natural grade. 2. Break up and remove foundations, paving, walks and curbs. Dig out and remove buried obstructions to a depth of 24" below natural grade or 24" below the intended excavation elevation, whichever is lower. 3. Refer to SECTION 01 1100 - SUMMARY OF WORK for handling of piping and conduit encountered below grade. 4. Unless otherwise specified on the drawings, trees with calipers greater than 3" shall not be cleared (removed). B. Pavement Removal 1. Bituminous and concrete pavements shall be removed to neatly sawed edges. Saw cuts shall be made to a minimum depth of 1 t/z". If a saw cut in concrete pavement falls within 3' of an existing score joint, construction joint, saw joint, cold joint, expansion joint, or edge, the concrete shall be removed to that joint or edge. All saw cuts shall be parallel and/or perpendicular to the line of existing pavement. If an edge of a cut is damaged subsequent to saw cutting, the concrete shall again be sawed to a neat, straight line for the purpose of removing the damaged area. C. Disposal: 1. Cleanup and remove from the site the stumps, logs, broken paving, rubble and debris that is existing and resulting from the clearing and grubbing operations. 2. Material to be wasted shall be legally disposed of off site. 3. Burning of combustible materials on the site will not be permitted. 3.02 BACKFILLING A. All holes, cavities, and depressions in the ground caused by site preparation operations will be backfilled and tamped to normal compaction and will be graded to prevent ponding of water and to promote drainage. In areas that are to be immediately excavated, the Architect/Engineer may permit holes, etc., to remain open. 3.03 STORM WATER MANAGEMENT PRACTICES A. During the progress of the work, the contractor shall provide and maintain storm water erosion and silt control measures in place at the site and shall provide additional erosion control barriers, silt fences, and other techniques in accordance with best management practices. Contractor shall remove storm water management items at completion of project. END OF SECTION SITE CLEARING VLK Architects, 2007 31 1000 - 1 2740.00 Creek View Elementary School College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas SECTION 31 2300 EXCAVATION AND FILL PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Excavating, filling, backfilling, grading, and compacting of earth at the site. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 014523 - Testing and Inspection Services. 2. Section 31 1000 -Site Clearing. 3. Section 31 2313 - Building Subgrade Preparation 4. Section 31 2333 - Trenching and Backfilling. 5. Section 31 6329 - Drilled Concrete Piers. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Samples: Submit in accordance with SECTION 01 3323 - SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, AND SAMPLES. Submit a one gallon sample and material analysis results of imported topsoil from a testing laboratory indicating compliance with these specifications. Any topsoil delivered to the site which does not comply with the approved sample shall be re -tested at the Contractor's expense and replaced. B. Test Reports: 1. Submit copies of test reports in accordance with SECTION 01 4523 - TESTING AND INSPECTION SERVICES. 2. Submit copies of test reports for select fill material. No select fill material shall be delivered to the site until after the tests have been made and test reports confirmed. 3. Compaction Tests: Submit copies of compaction test reports. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Laboratory Control: Select fill material and imported topsoil, if required, shall be inspected and tested by an independent testing laboratory. 1. Testing laboratory shall make tests of the soil from the selected source to determine that it meets the specified requirements for select fill and imported topsoil. 1.04 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Temporary Sheeting: Shore and sheet excavations to protect utilities and to prevent cave-in. Maintain sheeting secure until permanent construction is in place. Remove sheeting as excavations are backfilled. B. Drainage: Provide for adequate surface drainage during construction to keep the site free of surface water without creating a nuisance in adjacent areas. C. Pumping: Keep the excavations free of water at all times by pumping or other means. This shall be the responsibility of the Contractor regardless of the cause, source, or nature of the water. D. Protection: 1. Property: Protect adjoining property, including improvements out -side the limits of the work. Protect walks, curbs, and paving from damage by heavy equipment and trucks. 2. Trees: Protect tops, trunks, and roots of trees on the site which are to remain. Box or fence trees vulnerable to damage during construction. Remove interfering branches with care and cover scars with tree paint. Do not permit fires, storage of materials or excavation within the branch spread of trees to remain. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.01 SOIL MATERIALS A. Topsoil: 1. Topsoil on the building and paving site areas shall be stripped, cleaned of grass, roots and debris to a depth of between 4" to 6", and stockpiled for later use. EXCAVATION AND FILL VLK Architects, 2007 31 2300 - 1 2740.00 Creek View Elementary School College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas 2. Imported topsoil shall be required where scheduled and as required to achieve a minimum 6" depth planting bed for all lawn areas. a. Contractor shall haul and place imported topsoil obtained from off -site sources as necessary to construct the topsoil layer and various other details of the construction drawings. All costs related to such imported topsoil fill will be included in the contract price, and no additional or separate payment for imported fill will be due the Contractor. b. Topsoil shall be secured from an approved off -site location. It shall be fertile, friable, natural loam containing a liberal amount of humus and shall be capable of sustaining vigorous plant growth. It shall be free of stone lumps, clods of hard earth, plants or their roots, sticks, and other extraneous matter. Under no circumstances will topsoil be accepted unless it is free of the aforementioned contaminants. Contractor may use approved means of treating the topsoil to ensure its acceptability. Imported topsoil shall be rock free. c. The soil texture shall be classified as loam or sandy loam according to the "soil triangle" published by the United States Agriculture Department and the following criteria: 1) Sand (2.0 to 0.05 mm dia.)(No. 10 sieve): Loam 25-50%; Sandy Loam 45-85%. 2) Silt (0.05 to 0.002 mm dia.)(No. 270 sieve): Loam 30-50%; Sandy Loam less than 50%. 3) Clay (smaller than 0.002 mm dia. XHydrometer Analysis): Sandy Loam less than 50%. 4) Natural organic content: Not less than 1.5%. 5) pH of Soil: Not more than 7.6. 6) Soil texture shall be determined by utilizing processes as prescribed in ASTM D 422 using the No. 10 and No. 270 sieves and a hydrometer analysis. 3. Unsuitable Materials: Topsoil or unclassified fill will be declared as "unsuitable" by the Architect if, in his opinion, any of the following conditions or matter and particles are present to a degree that is judged detrimental to the proposed use of the material: a. Moisture. b. Decayed or un-decayed vegetation. c. Hardpan clay, heavy clay, or clay balls. d. Rubbish. e. Construction rubble. f. Sand or gravel. g. Rocks, cobbles, or boulders. h. Cementitious matter. i. Foreign matter of any kind. 4. Unsuitable materials shall be disposed of as "waste" as specified in SECTION 31 1000 - SITE CLEARING 5. Wet Material: If fill material is unsatisfactory for use as embankment solely because of high moisture content, the Architect may grant the Contractor permission to process the material to reduce the moisture content to a usable optimum condition. B. Unselected Earth Fill: Clean, sandy soil free of organic matter and refuse, roots, clay lumps and rocks larger than 2". C. Granular Fill: Clean gravel or crushed rock graded to produce a mixture passing 1 %" sieve and retained on sieve. Granular fill for areas to be covered with membrane waterproofing shall be clean pea gravel graded no larger than %". D. Free -Draining Fill: Coarse sand or sand and gravel mixture with less than 12% passing a No. 200 sieve, and a Plasticity Index less than 4. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Establish extent of excavation by area and elevation; designate and identify datum elevation. B. Set required lines and levels. C. Maintain bench marks, monuments and other reference points. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Before starting excavation, establish location and extent of underground utilities occurring in work area. B. Notify utility companies to remove and relocate lines which are in way of excavation. C. Maintain, reroute or extend as required, existing utility lines to remain which pass through work area. EXCAVATION AND FILL VLK Architects, 2007 31 2300 - 2 2740.00 Creek View Elementary School College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas D. Protect and support utility services uncovered by excavation. E. Remove abandoned utility service lines from areas of excavation; cap, plug or seal such lines and identify at grade. F. Accurately locate and record abandoned and active utility lines rerouted or extended on Project Record Documents. G. Upon discovery of unknown utility or concealed condition, discontinue affected work and notify Architect. H. Remove grass, weeds, roots and other vegetation from areas to be excavated, filled and graded. Fill stump holes and like small excavations with suitable material placed in lifts and thoroughly tamped. I. Scarify the subgrade soil in place to a depth of 6" and compact to between 95 and 100 percent of Standard Density, at or above optimum moisture content, in accordance with ASTM D 698. 3.03 EXCAVATION A. General: Excavate to the lines, grades and sections shown on the drawings. Allow space for the construction of forms. Excavate as required regardless of the condition or type of material encountered. 1. Cut areas accurately to the indicated cross -sections and grades. Take care to prevent excavation below the grades indicated. Any bottoms and slopes that are undercut shall be backfilled with earth fill and compacted. 2. Finish the excavating required for graded areas to a tolerance of 0.10 foot above or below the rough grade. 3. Remove underground obstructions except for piping and conduit which shall be handled as specified in SECTION 01 1100 - SUMMARY OF WORK. B. Overcut planting and lawn areas to allow a layer of topsoil not less than 6" thick. C. Maintain excavations to drain and be free of excess water. Ponding of water on site will not be permitted. D. Exercise extreme care in grading around existing trees. Do not disturb existing grades around existing trees except as otherwise noted. When excavation through roots is necessary, and after review by Architect, perform by hand and cut roots with sharp axe. E. Fill over -excavated areas under structure bearing surfaces in accordance with Architect's direction. F. Do not allow construction equipment to create "pumping" of soils. G. Stockpile excavated clean fill for reuse where directed. Remove excess or unsuitable excavated fill from site. 3.04 WASTING A. Surplus excavated material not suitable or required for embankment fill and backfill shall be wasted off site. 3.05 FILL AND BACKFILL A. Filling: Construct compacted fills to the lines, grades and sections shown on the drawings. 1. Complete stripping and wasting operations in advance of fill construction. 2. Deposit and mix fill material in horizontal layers not more than 8" deep, loose measurement. Manipulate each layer until the material is uniformly mixed and pulverized. 3. Fill material shall have a moisture content at or slightly above optimum, to achieve specified compaction. If fill is too wet, dry by aeration to achieve desired moisture content. If fill is too dry, add water and mix in by blading and discing to achieve desired moisture content. 4. Exercise care to prevent movement or breakage of walls, trenches, and pipe during filling and compaction. Place fill near such items by means of light equipment and tamp with pneumatic or hand tampers. B. Backfilling: Construct compacted fill against and around items below finish grade. 1. Do not backfill until underground construction has been inspected, tested and approved, forms removed, and the excavations cleaned of trash and debris. 2. Do not backfill against items until all of the permanent supports and bracing members are in place or until adequate shoring has been erected to prevent displacement and deflection under horizontal load. Exercise care in the placing and compacting of backfill so as not to damage the structure in any way. 3. Bring backfill to required grades by depositing material in horizontal layers not more than 8" deep, loose measurement. 4. If subgrade membrane waterproofing over concrete is installed, the Architect shall inspect the waterproofing before any backfill is placed. Do not puncture or otherwise damage the waterproofing while backfilling. EXCAVATION AND FILL VLK Architects, 2007 31 2300 - 3 2740.00 Creek View Elementary School College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas 3.06 GRADING A. Site Grading: Shape and finish earthwork to bring the site to the finish grades and elevations shown on the drawings. 1. Establish grades by means of grade stakes placed at corners of units, at abrupt changes of grade, and elsewhere as may be required. 2. Rough grade for walks, paving, and site improvements to the subgrade elevations required. Soft and unstable material which will not readily compact when rolled or tamped shall be removed and the resulting depressions filled with stable material and re -compacted. 3. Finish grade to the finish contours and spot grades shown. Extend cuts and fills to feather out beyond the last finish contour or spot grade shown. Grade to uniform levels and slopes between points for which elevations are given, round off abrupt changes in elevation, and finish off smoothly. Finish grades shall slope away from the building in all directions to assure proper drainage. B. Grading Around Trees: Where grading is required within the branch spread of trees that are to remain, perform the work as follows: 1. When trenching occurs, the tree roots shall not be cut but the trench shall be tunneled under or around the roots by hand digging. 2. When the existing grade at a tree is below the new finished grade, and fill not exceeding 6" is required, clean washed gravel graded from 1" to 2" size shall be placed directly around the tree trunk. The gravel shall extend out from trunk on all sides a minimum of 18" and finish approximately 2" above the finished grade at the tree. Install gravel before earth fill is placed. 3. Trees in areas where the new finished grade is to be lowered shall have re -grading work done by hand to elevation as indicated. Existing grades immediately surrounding the trunk shall not be altered except at the direction of the Architect. 3.07 PLACING TOPSOIL A. Prior to placing topsoil, scarify subgrade to a depth of 6". Following scarification, topsoil shall be spread in one 6" thick lift. Topsoil shall be compacted to the approximate density of undisturbed soil. If there is insufficient stockpiled topsoil from on -site sources to complete the work, bring in topsoil from off -site sources as needed. After topsoil has been placed. Blade, roll lightly, and rake as required to comply with compaction tests. B. After placement of topsoil, Contractor shall eliminate all low or hollow places that would allow water to stand or pond during rainfall or during operation of lawn irrigation systems. The area shall be free of all natural debris and shall also be free of all clods and rocks which are %" in size or larger. C. Finish surfaces shall be not be more than 0.10 feet above or below established grade elevation. D. Provide uniform roundings at top and bottom of slopes and other breaks in grade. Correct irregularities and areas where water will stand. E. Uniformly distribute topsoil to required grades; feather back to where grades remain unchanged. F. Finish lawn and unpaved areas to 1" below top of walk and curbs. 3.08 PROTECTION, CLEAN-UP AND EXCESS MATERIALS A. Protect grades from construction and weather damage, washing, erosion and rutting, and repair such damage that occurs. B. Correct any settlement below established grades to prevent ponding of water. C. At locations where lime, concrete or other foreign matter has penetrated or been mixed with earth, remove damaged earth and replace with clean material. D. Remove excess stockpiled material, debris, waste, and other material from site and leave work in clean finished condition for final acceptance. Contractor is responsible for disposal of debris and excess materials. END OF SECTION EXCAVATION AND FILL VLK Architects, 2007 31 2300 - 4 2740.00 Creek View Elementary School College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas SECTION 312313 BUILDING SUBGRADE PREPARATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Excavating, filling, backfilling, grading, and compacting of earth at the building site. 1. Building foundation shall consist of: a. Pier and beam construction with structurally suspended concrete floor system placed on carton forms placed on grade. b. Provide "Select Fill; Perimeter Grade Beam" for backfill at perimeter grade beams. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 014523 - Testing and Inspection Services. 2. Section 31 1000 -Site Clearing. 3. Section 312300 - Excavation and Fill. 4. Section 312300 - Trenching and Backfilling. 5. Section 316329 - Drilled Concrete Piers. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Samples: Submit in accordance with SECTION 01 3323 - SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, AND SAMPLES. Submit a one gallon sample and material analysis results of imported topsoil from a testing laboratory indicating compliance with these specifications. Any topsoil delivered to the site which does not comply with the approved sample shall be re -tested at the Contractor's expense and replaced. B. Test Reports: 1. Submit copies of test reports in accordance with SECTION 01 4523 - TESTING AND INSPECTION SERVICES. 2. Submit copies of test reports for select fill material. No select fill material shall be delivered to the site until after the tests have been made and test reports confirmed. 3. Compaction Tests: Submit copies of compaction test reports. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Laboratory Control: Select fill material and imported topsoil, if required, shall be inspected and tested by an independent testing laboratory. 1. Testing laboratory shall make tests of the soil from the selected source to determine that it meets the specified requirements for select fill and imported topsoil. 1.04 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Temporary Sheeting: Shore and sheet excavations to protect utilities and to prevent cave-in. Maintain sheeting secure until permanent construction is in place. Remove sheeting as excavations are backfilled. B. Drainage: Provide for adequate surface drainage during construction to keep the site free of surface water without creating a nuisance in adjacent areas. C. Pumping: Keep the excavations free of water at all times by pumping or other means. This shall be the responsibility of the Contractor regardless of the cause, source, or nature of the water. D. Protection: 1. Property: Protect adjoining property, including improvements outside the limits of the work. Protect walks, curbs, and paving from damage by heavy equipment and trucks. 2. Trees: Protect tops, trunks, and roots of trees on the site which are to remain. Box or fence trees vulnerable to damage during construction. Remove interfering branches with care and cover scars with tree paint. Do not permit fires, storage of materials or excavation within the branch spread of trees to remain. BUILDING SUBGRADE PREPARATION VLK Architects, 2007 31 2313 - 1 2740.00 Creek View Elementary School College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 SOIL MATERIALS A. Select Earth Fill; Concrete Floor System: Clean clayey sand or a very sandy clay soil from a selected borrow source with a Plasticity Index between 20 and 35 and a Liquid Limit value of 55. B. Select Earth Fill; Perimeter Grade Beam: Clean sal from on site or a selected borrow source with a Plasticity Index (PI) between 20 and 25. C. Unselected Earth Fill: Clean, sandy soil free of organic matter and refuse, roots, clay lumps and rocks larger than 2". PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Remove grass, weeds, roots and other vegetation from areas to be excavated, filled and graded. Fill stump holes and like small excavations with suitable material placed in lifts and thoroughly tamped. 3.02 EXCAVATION A. General: Excavate to the lines, grades and sections shown on the drawings. Allow space for the construction of forms. Excavate as required regardless of the condition or type of material encountered. 1. Cut areas accurately to the indicated cross -sections and grades. Take care to prevent excavation below the grades indicated. Any bottoms and slopes that are undercut shall be backfilled with earth fill and compacted. 2. Finish the excavating required for graded areas to a tolerance of 0.10 foot above or belowthe rough grade. 3. Over -excavate to provide a clearance under the soffits of grade beams and slabs to accommodate the void carton forms. 4. Remove underground obstructions except for piping and conduit which shall be handled as specified in SECTION 01 1100 - SUMMARY OF WORK. B. Scarify the subgrade soil in place to a depth of 12" and compact to a minimum of 95% of Standard Density, at 2 percent below to 2 percentage points above optimum moisture content, in accordance with ASTM D 698. C. Excavation for Select Fill: 1. Replace weak existing soils that were excavated as part of the proof -rolling operations. 2. Excavation should be defined by a perimeter that extends at least five feet horizontal distance away from the outside face of the structures. 3. All building pad subgrade surfaces exposed after the stripping of the vegetation and the removal of the existing surficial soils and other surficial building foundation, utility, sidewalk, or paving materials should be proof -rolled with a 10-ton pneumatic roller or equivalent vehicle to identify any areas of soft or weak soils. 4. The soft or weak soils in the identified areas should then be removed and replaced with compacted select fill. 3.03 FILL AND BACKFILL A. Filling: Construct compacted fills to the lines, grades and sections shown on the drawings. 1. Complete stripping and wasting operations in advance of fill construction. 2. Deposit and mix fill material in loose lifts less than 6" thick, loose measurement. Manipulate each layer until the material is uniformly mixed and pulverized. 3. Fill material shall have a moisture content of 1 percent below to 3 percent above optimum, to achieve specified compaction. If fill is too wet, dry by aeration to achieve desired moisture content. If fill is too dry, add water and mix in by blading and discing to achieve desired moisture content. 4. Exercise care to prevent movement or breakage or walls, trenches, and pipe during filling and compaction. Place fill near such items by means of light equipment and tamp with pneumatic or hand tampers. B. Backfilling: Construct compacted fill against and around concrete beams below finish grade. 1. Do not backfill until underground construction has been inspected, tested and approved, forms removed, and the excavations cleaned of trash and debris. 2. Do not backfill against beams until all of the permanent structural concrete supports and bracing members are in place or until adequate shoring has been erected to prevent displacement and deflection of the beams under horizontal load. Exercise care in the placing and compacting of backfill so as not to damage the structure in any way. BUILDING SUBGRADE PREPARATION VLK Architects, 2007 31 2313 - 2 2740.00 Creek View Elementary School College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas 3. Provide "Select Earth Fill; perimeter grade beam" at backfill for grade beams and footings. Unless noted otherwise, concrete walls extending five feet or more below the outside grade shall be backfilled with sand to within two feet of finish grade. The top two feet of backfill against these walls shall be "Select Earth Fill; perimeter grade beam". 4. Bring backfill to required grades by depositing material in horizontal layers not more than 9" deep, loose measurement. 5. If subgrade membrane waterproofing over concrete is installed, the Architect shall inspect the waterproofing before any backfill is placed. Do not puncture or otherwise damage the waterproofing while backfilling. 3.04 COMPACTION A. Compact each layer of earth fill and backfill thoroughly and evenly until there is no evidence of further compaction and a solid and -uniform density is secured. 1. Equipment for compacting shall be sheepsfoot and rubber tired rollers or other compactors capable of obtaining the required density. Compact the fill with power tampers and by hand in areas not accessible to rollers. 2. Compact each layer of fill to the density listed below as a function of the location. The required density in each case is indicated as a percentage of the maximum dry unit weight determined using the standard compaction test ASTM D 698. 3. Compact select fill to the density listed below at a moisture content between 1 percent belowto a maximum of 3 percent above the optimum moisture content (-1 to +3). Compact select fill at the perimeter grade beams to the density listed below at a moisture content between 2 percent below to 2 percentage points above optimum (-2 to +2). a. Material under the building slab -on -grade ---- 95 to 100% b. Material adjacent to grade beams ----------- 93 to 98%. 3.05 GRADING A. Grading Under Carton Forms: Fine -grade areas under carton forms as required to achieve concrete floor slab thickness as shown and obtain required floor elevations. 3.06 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Compaction Tests: Field density testing of the select fill material under the building and at perimeter grade beam shall be performed by an Independent Testing Laboratory. 1. Testing laboratory shall make one in place density test for each 2000 sq. ft. of area per lift, but in no case less than three tests, and one test per 100 linear feet of backfill area adjacent to grade beams, to insure that the specified density is obtained. END OF SECTION BUILDING SUBGRADE PREPARATION VLK Architects, 2007 31 2313 - 3 2740.00 Creek View Elementary School College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas SECTION 31 2333 TRENCHING AND BACKFILLING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Excavating, backfilling, and compacting required for the installation of piping and utility lines, including storm and sanitary sewers, gas, and water lines and electrical cables. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 31 2300 - Excavation and Fill; building and site earthwork. 1.02 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Temporary Sheeting: Shore and sheet trench excavations as necessary to protect utilities and to prevent cave-in. Remove sheeting as trenches are backfilled. B. Pumping: Keep the trench excavations free of water at all times by pumping or other means until the backfilling has been completed. This shall bethe responsibility of the Contractor regardless of the cause, source, or nature of the water. C. Protection: Contractor shall be responsible for protecting site improvements which are to remain. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Earth Fill: Material for general backfill shall consist of earth, loam, sandy clay, sand, and gravel or other approved materials free of organic matter and refuse, clay lumps, and rocks larger than 1'/2" in diameter. Excavated material may be used for backfilling if it meets the above requirements. B. Sand: Unwashed natural sand free of clay, dirt and debris. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXCAVATION A. General: 1. Excavate to the depths indicated and as otherwise required for the proper installation of piping and utility lines. Excavate all materials encountered, including rock and filled -in material. Minimum cover for exterior lines shall be 24" unless otherwise indicated. Generally, more cover shall be provided if grade will permit. 2. Excavations less than five feet deep shall be made by open cut with trench banks kept as nearly vertical as practicable. During excavation, material suitable for backfilling shall be piled in an orderly manner a sufficient distance back from edges of trenches to avoid over -loading and consequent slides and cave-ins. 3. Excavate trenches to the necessary width for proper laying of pipe and cables. Grade bottom of trenches to provide proper fall and uniform bearing and support for each section of pipe on undisturbed soil or 2" of sand fill at every point along its entire length except where it is necessary to excavate for bell holes and for the proper sealing of pipe joints. 4. Where inverts are not shown, grading shall be determined by the National Plumbing Code requirements for the service intended and the size of the pipe used. 5. Dig bell holes and depressions for joint make-up after the trench bottom has been graded. Dig bell holes and joint depressions only to such length, depth and width as will permit accurate work in the making of the joints and to insure that the pipe will rest directly upon the prepared trench bottom for its maximum possible length. 6. Except where rock excavation is required, care shall be taken not to excavate trench bottom below the depths required. Excavate rock to a minimum overdepth of 6" below the indicated trench depth. Backfill overdepth rock excavation and excess trench excavation with sand. 7. Whenever wet or otherwise unstable soil is incapable of supporting the pipe is encountered in the trench bottom, such soil shall be removed to the depth and for the length required and the trench backfilled with sand to indicated trench bottom grade. 8. At all underground utilities which enter/exit the building perimeter, provide a continuous clay plug on each side of the grade beam to encompass that zone between the edge of the grade beam to a minimum of 3'-0" laterally, each way, into the utility ditch. Also, provide a similar 3'-0" clay plug at the site termination end of the utility line. TRENCHING AND BACKFILLING VLK Architects, 2007 31 2333 - 1 2740.00 Creek View Elementary School College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas B. Sanitary Sewers: 1. The width of the trench at and below the level of the top of the pipe shall be no more than 16" wider than the outside diameter of the pipe to be installed. The width of the trench above that level may be as wide as necessary for the proper performance of the work. 2. The bottom 4" or so of the pipe trenches shal I be excavated only a few feet in advance of the pipe laying and shall be done manually by persons skilled in this type of work. Round the bottom of the trench so that at least the bottom quadrant of the pipe rests firmly on undisturbed soil. C. Water Lines: Unless specifically otherwise indicated, grade trenches so as to avoid high points which would necessitate the placing of vacuum and relief valves in the water lines. Grade trench bottoms as specified under Article 3.01 A. above for pipe laying requirements. D. Gas Lines: Grade trench bottoms as specified under Article 3.01 A. above for pipe laying requirements. Excavate deeper as may be required to avoid interference of gas lines with other utilities. E. Electrical Systems: 1. The banks of trenches for the electrical cables and duct lines need not be vertical but may be sloped or widened provided there is no interference with other utilities. 2. Where rock is encountered, overexcavating and backfilling with sand will not be required. 3.02 BACKFILLING A. General: 1. Trenches shall not be backfilled until all required tests are performed and until the utilities systems as installed conform to the requirements specified in the several sections under Division 15 and 16 covering the installation of the utilities. 2. Remove all trash, paper, organic material and debris from the trenches before backfilling. 3. Trenches which are improperly backfilled or in which settlement occurs shall be reopened to the depth required for correction and then refilled, mounded over and smoothed off. 4. Rock, broken concrete or pavement and boulders shall not be used as backfill material. B. Lower Part of Trench: 1. Backfill trench with sand deposited in IT'lifts and compacted with suitable tampers to a depth of 12" above the top of the pipe. Settling of sand will be permitted. 2. Take care not to damage or puncture the coating or wrapping of pipes. C. Upper Part of Trench: 1. Backfill the remainder of the trench with the earth fill as specified in paragraph 2.01 A above. 2. Deposit material in layers not more than 12" deep, loose measurement, and compact each layer as it is placed. 3. Exercise care in the placing and compacting of backfill to prevent movement or breakage of pipe. 4. Restore the surface as near as practicable to its original condition and grade. 3.03 COMPACTION A. Compact each layer of backfill material thoroughly and evenly until there is no evidence of further compaction and a solid and uniform density is secured. Compact each layer to the densities listed below for the various locations as a percentage of the maximum dry unit weight determined using the standard compaction test, ASTM D 698. 1. Under building 95 to 100% 2. Under asphalt and concrete paving 95 to 100% 3. Under lawn areas and sidewalks 85 to 90% 4. Under other areas density same as adjacent soil. END OF SECTION TRENCHING AND BACKFILLING VLK Architects, 2007 31 2333 - 2 2740.00 Creek View Elementary School College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas SECTION 31 3200 SOIL STABILIZATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: In -place lime treatment to stabilize the subgrade under the paving. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 014523 -Testing and Inspection Services. 2. Section 31 2300 - Excavation and Fill. 3. Section 32 1313 - Concrete Paving. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Lime Stabilization for Paving Areas: 1. Hydrated Lime: Type A (dry): Per TSDHPT Item 264-2. 2. Lime should meet the requirements of Items 2.5.2 and 2.5.3 in the North Central Texas Council of Governments standard specifications for Public Works Construction. B. Soil: Upper 6" of the material in -place after the subgrade has been established, compacted and shaped. C. Lime: Hydrated lime made from "high -calcium" type limestone with an unhydrated lime content not exceeding 6% by dry soil weight and a "free" water content not exceeding 4% by weight. Waste lime will not be acceptable. There must be sufficient lime to produce a minimum pH of 12.4 within the upper 6" thickness. 2.02 EQUIPMENT A. Distributor truck or tank equipped with agitator to maintain a uniform mixture of lime and water. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Insure that surfaces have been brought to approximate rough grades (plus or minus 0.10 feet). Loosen and pulverize soil to a depth of 6 inches below bottom of designated paving or slab areas, including a distance of one foot outside perimeter of paving. B. The percentages of lime indicated in this specification section are for bidding purposes only. Prior to beginning any soil stabilization, the contractor shall verify with the Owner the amount and type of soil stabilization material to be used. 3.02 PERFORMANCE - PAVING SUBGRADE A. General: It is the primary requirement to secure a completed 6" deep subgrade of treated material containing a uniform lime mixture, free of loose areas, of uniform density and moisture content, well bound for its full depth and with a smooth surface suitable for placing subsequent paving and slabs to achieve a soils Plasticity Index of not greater than 15. Construction methods and equipment shall comply to NCTCOG Items 4.6. B. Scarification: Excavate and scarify the material to be treated down to the secondary grade (proposed bottom of lime treatment). Wet or unstable material below the secondary grade shall be corrected by scarifying, adding lime and compacting to uniform stability. Then spread the excavated and scarified material to the desired cross section. Full depth of treatment shall be 6 inches and full width shall be the entire area to be paved between points and lines located one foot beyond pavement edges. C. Placing Lime: Add lime to the scarified material in an amount equal to 6% by dry weight measurement, of 6" depth of compacted subgrade. Apply lime mixed with water to form a slurry. Spread lime only on that area where mixing operations can be completed during the same working day. SOIL STABILIZATION VLK Architects, 2007 31 3200 - 1 2740.00 Creek View Elementary School College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas D. Mixing: Mix the soil and lime thoroughly with suitable road mixers or other approved equipment until a homogeneous, friable mixture is obtained free from clods and lumps. Aerate or sprinkle the mixture as necessary to secure the optimum moisture content Necessary optimum moisture content shall be between optimum and 4% wet of optimum. E. Curing: Allow the mixture to cure for a period of from 48 to 72 hours. During the curing period keep the material moist. F. Final Mixing: After the required curing time, mix the material uniformly with a rotary mixer to reduce the size of the particles so that 100% will pass a 1 %" sieve and 60% will pass a No. 4 sieve. Lime -soil mixture pH shall be 12.4 or greater. If not possible to attain 12.4, maximum pfH attainable shall be validated by laboratory test for soil being treated. G. Compacting: Sprinkle the mixture as required and compact by rolling and tamping to a minimum of 95% standard density, ASTM D 698, with moisture content between optimum and 4% wet of optimum. Correct irregularities and weak spots by scarifying, adding or removing material and re -shaping and re -compacting. Maintain the surface of the subgrade smooth, free from undulations and ruts and to the established lines and grades. H. Surface Moisture: Keep the surface of the compacted subgrade moist by sprinkling until such time as the paving is placed. 3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Compaction Tests: Field density testing of the completed stabilized subgrade under paving shall be performed by an Independent Testing Laboratory. 1. The Laboratory shall make one density test for each 5000 sq. ft. of stabilized subgrade to insure that the specified density is obtained. END OF SECTION SOIL STABILIZATION VLK Architects, 2007 31 3200 - 2 2740.00 Creek View Elementary School College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas SECTION 31 6329 DRILLED CONCRETE PIERS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Concrete piers, including drilling, reinforcing, casing, and placing concrete. B. Related Documents/Sections: 1. Document 00 3200 - Geotechnical Data. 2. Section 014523 -Testing and Inspection Services. 3. Section 03 2000 - Concrete Reinforcing. 4. Section 03 3000 - Cast -in -place Concrete. 5. Typical Pier Detail - refer to structural drawings. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Data Reports: Independent Testing Laboratory shall log each drilled shaft by recording not less than the following information: 1. Identifying mark; use same identifying mark shown on drawings. 2. Date and time excavation started; 3. Shaft diameter as per drawings; 4. Shaft diameter as constructed; 5. Bottom of penetration as per drawings; 6. Bottom of penetration as constructed; 7. Actual elevation at initial point of drilling, i.e. top of ground (in relation to sea level); 8. Bottom of casing (if casing is used) (in relation to sea level); 9. Comments on water conditions; 10. Date and time excavation completed; 11. Date and time concrete placed; Note: This data report does not reduce or limit the scope of work or the recording of data as required by the testing laboratory services for fulfillment of the contract documents. B. Complete logs at the end of each day and submit a copy to the Architect for review. C. Reconciliation of Drilled Piers: Upon completion of the construction of the drilled piers, the contractor shall reconcile the actual costs of the drilled piers against the estimated costs, based on the estimated depths and sizes of piers shown on the structural drawings, the percentage of piers estimated to require casing, other pertinent information given in this specification and the contractor's unit prices stated on the Bid Form, which included Extra and Credit prices for drilled piers. 1. The contractor shall document the total costs of the combined reconciliations of the drilled pier depths for submission to the Architect in a format identical to that represented by Sample Worksheet "I" included at the end of this specification section. 2. Referto Sample "III", included at the end of this specification section for Glossary of Terms used in Sample Worksheet "I". D. Confirmation of contact with Owner's testing company. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Tolerances: 1. Center line of the top of the drilled shaft shall be within 3" of the plan location. 2. Drilled shaft shall be plumb to within 1 Y2' the first 10' plus 1 % of the depth greater than 10'. B. Prior to start of shaft drilling, Contractor shall contact Owner's testing laboratory for verification and identification of bearing strata by their geotechnical engineer. 1.04 UNIT PRICES A. Piers: Bids shall be based on drilling to estimated bearing elevation(s) of bell piers. Bids shall state unit prices per foot inclusive of drilling, reinforcing, and concrete for depths greater or less than the estimated depths as shown on typical pier detail. Adjustment of the contract sum shall be based on the total of individual shaft depths greater or less than estimated depths multiplied by their respective applicable unit price. The reconciliation of pier shaft lengths shall be calculated as shown on the "Sample "I" Pier Depth Reconciliation Worksheet" included in this specification section. DRILLED CONCRETE PIERS VLK Architects, 2007 31 6329 - 1 2740.00 Creek View Elementary School College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas B. Depth to static water table elevation should be verified shortly before construction begins. In the event that water is encountered during construction, the Geotechnical Engineer must be contacted for verification of the suitability of the recommendations in his report. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Reinforcement shall meet the requirements specified in SECTION 03 2000 - CONCRETE REINFORCING. B. Concrete shall meet the requirements specified in SECTION 03 3000 - CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE with the exception of the following slump requirements: 4" to 6" for dry shafts 6" to 8" if casings are used C. Casing: ASTM A 252, Grade 2 or ASTM A 36. D. Pier Sleds: Provide "Centraligner' sleds and Hijacker pier bolsters as manufactured by Pieresearch, Arlington, TX (phone 817.265.0980) or equivalent. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 PERFORMANCE A. Drilling: Drill foundation shafts with a power auger drilling machine designed forthe purpose. Locate accurately and drill to the required size and depth. Underream for pier bells. Actual depth required for piers shall be determined by an engineer from the independent testing laboratory at the project site during the pier drilling operation. The pier drilling rig shall have sufficient size and power to penetrate to the required depths. B. Cleaning: Machine clean the bottoms of shafts of loose material and debris. De -water the shafts. Shafts shall be inspected by the testing laboratory before concrete is placed. C. Reinforcing Steel: 1. Form a cage as a structural element to maintain its shape and proportion throughout the placing of concrete and extraction of casing. 2. Install pier sleds so that reinforcing remains in position without displacement while the concrete is placed. Sled spacing and attachment shall be in accordance with sled manufacturer's recommendations. 3. Block reinforcing steel up off the bottom at least 3" with pier bolsters and fasten in place without any contact with the sides of the shaft. D. Placing Concrete: Place concrete in each pier shaft not later than 8-hours after drilling, underreaming and cleaning of the pier hole is completed. 1. Concrete shall be placed using a clean "tremie". In no event shall concrete strike the sides of the excavation or the reinforcing cage. Placement by the "Free Fall" method may be implemented only at the direction of the Owner's on -site testing laboratory. 2. Vibrate or "rod" only the top 10' of concrete. Do not vibrate concrete of 6" slump or higher. 3. Do not place concrete in intersecting walls and beams until the pier concrete is no longer plastic. E. Casing: 1. If caving soil orflowing water is encountered, use a casing to prevent caving and to exclude water. Casing shall be temporary type, to be withdrawn as the concrete is placed. 2. If a temporary casing is used, withdraw casing as concrete is placed so that bottom of casing remains below top of concrete throughout placing operation or until top of concrete reaches stable soil free from seepage. Do not rotate casing during withdrawal. 3. The requirement for casing of piers and the quantity of casing required for each pier, if any, shall be determined by the independent testing laboratory representative at the project site during the pier drilling operation. 3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspection and Evaluation: The Independent Testing Laboratory shall provide full-time inspection at the project site during the drilling of shafts, installation of reinforcing steel, and placing of concrete in pier shafts. Full-time inspection shall include recording and reporting the information required in this specification. B. The cost of the full-time inspection service shall be borne by the Owner. DRILLED CONCRETE PIERS VLK Architects, 2007 31 6329 - 2 2740.00 Creek View Elementary School College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas C. All costs associated with reinspection, additional inspection or retesting required as a result of non -conforming work shall be borne by the Contractor. 3.03 LIMITATIONS OF AUTHORITY OF TESTING LABORATORY A. Laboratory is not authorized to: 1. Release, revoke, alter or enlarge on requirements of contract documents. 2. Approve or accept any portion of the work. 3. Perform any duties of the Contractor. 3.04 CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITIES A. Cooperate with laboratory personnel, provide access to work. B. Furnish copies of product test reports as required. C. Furnish incidental labor and facilities: 1. To provide access to work to be tested. 2. To obtain and handle samples at the Project site. 3. To facilitate inspections and tests. 4. For storage and curing of test samples. D. Notify laboratory sufficiently in advance of operations to allow for laboratory assignment of personnel and scheduling of tests. Notify laboratory immediately if there is a change in schedule to alleviate any unnecessary trips by laboratory personnel. E. Payment for all retesting required because of nonconforming work or materials. END OF SECTION DRILLED CONCRETE PIERS VLK Architects, 2007 31 6329 - 3 2740.00 Creek View Elementary School College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas SAMPLE WORKSHEET "I" PIER DEPTH RECONCILIATION WORKSHEET PROJECT PIER DIAMETER THIS PAGE PAGE OF A MINUS B = C x D = E PIER NO. ESTIMATED BEARING ELEVATION ACTUAL BEARING ELEVATION AMOUNT DEEPER (+) OR SHALLOWER (-) THAN ESTIMATED BEARING APPLICABLE UNIT PRICE FROM BID FORM (NOTE: EXTRA(+) OR CREDIT - NET EXTRA COST OR CREDIT DUE PER PIER 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 TOTAL OF COLUMN " E" DRILLED CONCRETE PIERS VLK Architects, 2007 31 6329 - 4 2740.00 Creek View Elementary School College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas SAMPLE "III" GLOSSARY OF TERMS USED IN SAMPLE WORKSHEETS "I" AND "II" COLUMN "A" - ESTIMATED BEARING ELEVATION: For bidding purposes, it is the estimated elevation shown on the typical pier detail in the structural drawings at which point pier penetration commences. COLUMN "B" -ACTUAL BEARING ELEVATION: Actual elevation at which the bearing material is encountered by each pier as determined in the field by the independent testing laboratory. COLUMN "C" -AMOUNT DEEPER (+) OR SHALLOWER (-) THAN ESTIMATED BEARING ELEVATION: The amount, in feet, the bearing material was encountered above or below the estimated bearing elevation. COLUMN "D" - APPLICABLE UNIT PRICE FROM BID FORM, EXTRA (+) OR CREDIT (-): The applicable Extra and/or Credit unit prices per linear foot including drilling, reinforcing and concrete shown on the successful contractor's Bid Form. COLUMN "E" - NET EXTRA COST OR CREDIT DUE PER PIER: Net extra cost or credit due per individual pier (exclusive of casing, if required). COLUMN "F" - GROUND ELEVATION AT PIER: The elevation of ground at pier at time pier is drilled. COLUMN "G" - ESTIMATED CASING LENGTH: The estimated total linear feet of casing required for bidding purposes. COLUMN "H" -ACTUAL CASING LENGTH: The actual total linear feet of casing utilized during drilling. DRILLED CONCRETE PIERS VLK Architects, 2007 31 6329 - 5 2740.00 Creekview Elementary School College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas SECTION 32 1313 CONCRETE PAVING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Concrete walks, curbs and gutters, paving, approaches, and other concrete flatwork outside the building. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 03 3000 - Cast -in -place Concrete. 2. Section 03 3519 - Colored Concrete Finishing. 3. Section 07 9200 -Joint Sealants. 4. Section 31 2300 - Excavation and Fill: excavating, filling, and grading. 5. Section 31 3200 - Soil Stabilization: lime stabilized subgrade. 6. Section 32 1723 - Pavement Markings. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Samples: Submit in accordance with SECTION 01 3323 - SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, AND SAMPLES. B. Provide a diagram of proposed control joints and expansion joints. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. City Standards: Street sidewalks, curbs and gutters, and approaches shall be constructed to meet or exceed the requirements of the city standard specifications where the city standards are applicable. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Formwork shall meet the requirements specified in SECTION 03 1100 - CONCRETE FORMING AND ACCESSORIES. B. Reinforcing: Install reinforcing to meet the requirements of SECTION 03 2000 - CONCRETE REINFORCING Minimum reinforcement at paving, parking, and flatwork shall be #3 rebars at 18" o.c. each way. C. Concrete shall meet the requirements specified in SECTION 03 3000 - CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE. Minimum compressive strength shall be 3000 psi at 28 days. D. Expansion Joint Fillet: 1. ASTM D 1751 preformed strips of asphalt saturated cane fiberboard forjoints in standard finished flatwork (walks, curbs and gutters). 2. ASTM D 1752, Type I preformed strips of elastic sponge rubber compound for joints to be caulked with sealant and joints in architectural concrete flatwork. 3. The use of redwood expansion joints is prohibited. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Grade Control: Establish and maintain the lines and grades for concrete site work items by means of line and grade stakes. Complete any fine grading required to prepare the subgrade. Maintain the finished subgrade cushions in a satisfactory condition. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Forming: Set forms to lines and grades, and brace and secure to withstand wet concrete without deflection or leakage. Stake forms securely in position with joints keyed to prevent relative displacement. Clean and oil forms each time they are used. 1. Walks: 4" thick. Surfaces shall be crowned or sloped to drain. 2. Curbs and Gutters: As detailed. CONCRETE PAVING VLK Architects, 2007 32 1313 - 1 2740.00 Creekview Elementary School College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas 3. Paving, Drive Approaches, and Playgrounds: 6'/2" thick at bus lanes and delivery routes; 5" thick elsewhere. Thicken edges as required. 4. Miscellaneous: Catch basins, flagpole base, and other miscellaneous items of concrete shall be constructed to detail. B. Reinforcing: Install reinforcing to meet the requirements of SECTION 03 2000 - CONCRETE REINFORCING Minimum reinforcement at paving, parking and flatwork shall be #3 rebars at 18" o.c. each way. C. Concrete: Place concrete to meet the requirements of SECTION 03 3000 - CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE. 1. Place concrete in accordance with ACI 301 and 304. Deposit concrete so that specified slab thickness will be obtained after vibrating and finishing operations. Minimize handling to prevent segregation. Consolidate concrete by suitable means to prevent formation of voids or honeycombs. Exercise care to prevent disturbance of forms and reinforcing and damage to vapor retarder. Place concrete to lines and levels shown, properly sloped to drain into adjacent yard areas and drainage structures. 2. Hot Weather Placement: ACI 305. 3. Cold Weather Placement: ACI 306. 4. Ensure reinforcement, inserts, embedded parts, and formed joints are not disturbed during concrete placement. 5. Place concrete continuously between predetermined construction joints. Do not break or interrupt successive pours such that cold joints occur. D. Expansion Joints: Locate expansion joints around fixed objects within or abutting concrete, and at intervals of not more than 30 ft. o.c. along walks and curbs and 50 ft. o.c. along drive and parking paving. 1. Install preformed filler with the top edge approximately'/4" below the finished concrete surface to leave a neat, straight joint. 2. Joints shall be wide unless specifically dimensioned otherwise on the drawings. Joint edges shall be rounded with an edging tool. 3. There shall be no connection by reinforcement or keyway across expansion joints. Joints shall be held in alignment with sleeved, smooth dowels where required. E. Scoring: 1. Saw cut walks, approaches, and paving using an abrasive or diamond blade. Cut joint width shall be Me" and depth shall be'/:' deep at walks and Y, slab thickness at approaches and paving. Cutting of joints must be done as soon as concrete surface is firm enough not to be torn or damaged by the blade (within 4 to 12 hours), and before random shrinkage cracks can form in the concrete slab. a. Score walks at approximately 5 foot intervals each way. Where walks abut curbs, the scoring of walks and curbs shall align. b. Score curbs and gutters at approximately 5 foot intervals. c. Score approaches and paving at approximately 10 foot intervals each way or as shown. Standard Finishing: Strike slabs off true by double screeding to the required level at or below the elevations and grades shown on the drawings. Set edge forms and screed strips accurately to produce the designated elevations and contours. 1. Walks: Float with wood floats to true planes with no coarse aggregate visible. Hand trowel to produce smooth surfaces. Brush surfaces with a soft fiber brush to produce a uniformly striated finish. Edge concrete surfaces with a rounded edging tool. 2. Curbs and gutters: Finish the curb and flow lines of gutters with a steel "S" shaped trowel to the contour of the curb and gutter and then cross brush surfaces with a soft fiber brush to produce a fine brush finish. 3. Approaches: Screed and float to a monolithic medium float finish and belt with a canvas belt to produce a herringbone texture finish. 4. Curb Ramps: Score surface, as detailed, to meed the Texas Accessibility Standards. Provide integral contrasting color, per Specification SECTION 03 3519 - COLORED CONCRETE FINISHING 5. Paving: The surface shall be troweled and edged with a steel trowel and then broomed to obtain a smooth, uniform brush finish. G. Curing: 1. Cure concrete 7 days as specified in SECTION 03 3000 - CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE. Coat exposed surfaces with curing compound and protect surfaces from pedestrian and vehicular traffic during the curing period. Damaged areas shall be re -sprayed. 2. Concrete surfaces designated to receive chemical stain must be free of curing compound. Accordingly, finished concrete shall be "water -cured" orshall be completely sandblasted if cured with a curing compound membrane. H. Removing Forms: Forms shall remain in place for at least 12 hours after concrete has been placed and finished. Remove forms without damaging the concrete. Bars and heavy tools shall not be used to pry against the concrete in removing the forms. CONCRETE PAVING VLK Architects, 2007 32 1313 - 2 2740.00 Creekview Elementary School College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas 3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Concrete Tests: Testing and acceptance of concrete shall meet the requirements specified in SECTION 03 3000 - CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE. B. Grade and Smoothness Tests: 1. Plan Grade: Finished surface of the flatwork shall not vary more than 0.04 ft. above or below the plan grade or elevation. Finished surfaces of abutting pavement and walks shall coincide at their juncture. Where a new pavement or walk abuts an existing surface, transition pavement or walk strip shall be installed. 2. Surface Smoothness: Finished surface of the flatwork shall have no abrupt changes of more than 1/8' and shall not deviate from the testing edge of a 12 ft. straight edge more than `/:' plus or minus tolerance. Flow line of gutters shall not deviate from the testing edge of a 10 ft. straight edge more than Ma" plus or minus tolerance. 3.04 CLEANING A. Remove debris, scraps, surplus materials, tools and equipmentfrom the premises upon completion of the work. Clean concrete droppings from walks and curbs. Leave the graded areas free of debris and rubble. 3.05 PROTECTION A. Immediately after placement, protect concrete under provisions of SECTION 01500 -TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS from premature, drying, excessive hot or cold temperatures, and mechanical injury. END OF SECTION CONCRETE PAVING VLK Architects, 2007 32 1313 - 3 2740.00 Creekview Elementary School College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas SECTION 32 1723 PAVEMENT MARKINGS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Pavement marking on concrete paving. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 32 1313 - Concrete Paving 1.02 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Requirements: Apply paint when ambient temperature is 50°F. or above, and relative humidity is below 85%. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer: Shall have a minimum of 2 years experience in the layout and striping of parking lots. B. Job Conditions: Do not apply marking paint when weather is foggy or rainy, or ambient or pavement temperatures are below 40 degrees F., nor when such conditions are anticipated during eight hours after application. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit manufacturers product data and installation instructions. B. Substitutions: Submit in accordance with SECTION 01 6200 - PRODUCT OPTIONS. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Traffic Paint: Fed. Spec. TT-P-115E, Type III alkyd -chlorinated rubber -chlorinated paraffin marking paint. Fire lane stripes shall be per city requirements. Provide Premium Chlorinated Rubber Base Paint as manufactured by Highway Signs & Paint, Inc. (phone 214 446-1605). B. Cleaning Solvent: VM & P Naphtha. 2.02 EQUIPMENT A. Applicators: Hand -operated push type marking machine or conventional airless spray equipment with guide lines and templates. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Surface Conditions: Clean and dry free from dirt, loose paint, oil, grease, wax, and other contaminants. 1. Concrete Surfaces: Allow concrete to cure a minimum of 90 days prior to application of marking paint. 2. Existing Concrete and Asphalt Surfaces: Shall be swept clean of all debris, including grease. B. Equipment Condition: Clean previously used paint and solvent from application equipment, using VM & P Naphtha. C. Paint: Stir contents thoroughly from bottom of container. Do not thin paint. D. Locate markings as indicated on Drawings. Provide qualified technician to supervise equipment and application of markings. Lay out markings using guide lines, templates and forms. E. Allow paving to cure before painting as required by manufacturer of traffic paint. PAVEMENT MARKINGS VLK Architects, 2007 32 1723 - 1 2740.00 Creekview Elementary School College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas F. Allow protective coating to cure a minimum of 48 hours prior to application of traffic paint. 3.02 APPLICATION A. Parking Stripes and Symbols: Using approved equipment, apply paint to a minimum thickness of 15 mils. Stripes shall be 4" wide. Marking edges of stripes and symbols shall be sharply outlined. B. Firelane Striping: Stripe firelanes as shown on the plans and as required to meet City requirements. END OF SECTION PAVEMENT MARKINGS VLK Architects, 2007 32 1723 - 2 2740.00 Creekview Elementary School College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas SECTION 32 1900 WALK, ROAD, AND PARKING APPURTENANCES PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Provide and install handicapped parking signs, traffic directional signs, bicycle racks, and bollards. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit in accordance with SECTION 01 3323 - SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, AND SAMPLES. Include catalog, cuts of each type of sign and manufacturer's installation instructions. 1.03 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver, store, and handle signs in accordance with SECTION 01 6500 - PRODUCT DELIVERY REQUIREMENTS and SECTION 016600 - PRODUCT STORAGE AND HANDLING REQUIREMENTS and in manufacturer's cartons. Store off ground on planking. Cover with non -staining plastic. 1.04 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Coordinate installation of signs with work of other trades. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Site signs: As manufactured by Sa-So (Sargent -Sowell, Inc.) 1185 108th Street, Grand Prairie, Texas 75050 (phone 647-1525), or approved equivalent. 1. General: Site signs shall be of the quality manufactured by Sa-So and are listed by Sa-So catalog numbers for convenience in identification. 2. Aluminum Sheets: ASTM B 209, alloy 6061 T6, degreased and etched, 0.080" thickness. Sign faces shall be fully reflectorized with material conforming to Mil. Spec. MIL-R-13689A. 3. Bolts, Nuts, Washers, and Clamps: Cadmium or galvanized steel. Bolts shall be a minimum of 5/16" in diameter. Clamps shall be two-piece assemblies of at last 14 gage steel or shall be an adjustable steel strap bracket. 4. Posts: Standard galvanized steel pipe 23/s" in diameter and weighing not less than 2 lbs. per linear foot. 5. Concrete: Provide concrete consisting of Portland cement (ASTM C 150), aggregates (ASTM C 33), and clean water. Mix materials t obtain concrete with a minimum 28-day compressive strength of 2500 psi, using at least 4 sacks of cement per cubic yard, 1" maximum size aggregate, maximum 3" slump, and 2% to 4% entrained air B. Embedded Removable Pipe Bollards: Provide Model CBR-RE, with padlock receiver and lid to coverthe empty embedment sleeve, for round pipe bollards as manufactured by Creative Pipe, Inc. or one of the following manufacturers: Cal Pipe Manufacturing (1-800-536-2248) Creative Pipe, Inc. (1-800-644-8467) Ironsmith (1-800-3384766) 1. Fabrication: 6-inch ID, 0.280-inch wall, Schedule 40 steel pipe. 2. Height: Reference drawings. 3. Top: Domed. 4. Mounting: Removable embedded, pad lockable. 5. Finish: Hot -dipped galvanized. 6. Accessories: Pad lockable or integral hole covers for removable bollards. C. Bicycle Rack: As manufactured by Bike Security Racks Company (phone 1-800-545-2757), or approved equivalent. 1. Bicycle Racks: provide bicycle racks made from ASTM A 53, Schedule 40 galvanized steel pipe, 2.375" o.d. x 0.154" wall. Provide The Bike Rail Model No. BRA 2.9. Each with 7-14 bike capacity. D. Wheel Stops: Precast, air -entrained concrete, 2500-psi minimum compressive strength, approximately 6 inches high, 9 inches wide, and 84 inches long. Provide chamfered corners and drainage slots on underside, and provide holes for anchoring to substrate. 1. Dowels: Galvanized steel, diameter 3/4 inch, minimum length 10 inches WALK, ROAD, AND PARKING APPURTENANCES VLK Architects, 2007 32 1900 - 1 2740.00 Creekview Elementary School College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Excavation: Drill holes of the size indicated for posts. Excavate holes to the depths indicated. Remove excess concrete and excavated soil from the site. B. Setting Posts: 1. Remove all loose and foreign materials from sides and bottoms of holes, and moisten soil prior to placing concrete. Center and align posts in holes. 2. Place concrete around posts in a continuous pour, and vibrate or tamp for consolidation. Check each post for vertical and top alignment, and hold in position during placement and finishing operations. Trowel finish tops of footings, and slope or dome to direct water away from posts. 3. Attach signs to posts with bolts, washers, nuts and clamps. C. Wheel Stops: Securely attach wheel stops into pavement with not less than 2 galvanized steel dowels embedded in precast concrete at one-third points. Firmly bond each dowel to wheel stop and to pavement. 1. Extend upper portion of dowel 5 inches into wheel stop and lower portion a minimum of 5 inches into pavement. 3.02 CLEANING A. Clean exposed sign faces and galvanized surfaces, and leave free of defects. Use no abrasives. Leave pavement and graded area clean and free of debris. END OF SECTION WALK, ROAD, AND PARKING APPURTENANCES VLK Architects, 2007 32 1900 - 2 2740.00 Creekview Elementary School College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas SECTION 32 3115 GALVANIZED CHAIN LINK FENCING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Galvanized steel chain link fences and gates. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit shop drawings, product data, and manufacturer's installation instructions in accordance with SECTION 01340 - SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, AND SAMPLES. B. Include plan layout, gird, spacing of compoenents, accessories, fittings, hardware, anchorages, and schedule of components. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Provide chain link fences and gates as manufactured by one of the following: Allied Tube and Conduit Corp. American Chain Link Fence Company American Tube Company Anchor Fence, Inc. Capitol Wire and Fence Co., Inc. Century Tube Corp. Cyclone Fence Div./USX Corp. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Steel Fabric: Comply with Chain Link Fence Manufacturers Institute (CLFMI) Product Manual. Fumish one-piece fabric widths for fencing up to 12 feet high. All fencing shall have a knuckled selvage top and bottom. Wire size includes zinc coating. Provide 2-inch mesh, 9-gage (0.148-inch diameter) wire, typical. B. Galvanized Steel Finish: ASTM A 392, Class 1, with not less than 1.2 oz. zinc per sq. ft. of uncoated wire surface. C. Framing: Strength requirements for posts and rails shall comply with ASTM F 669. D. Pipe shall be straight, true to section, material, and sizes specified, and shall conform to the following weights per foot: NPS in Outside Diameter Type I Type II inches (OD) in inches Steel Steel 1-1/4 1.660 2.27 1.84 1-1/2 1.900 2.72 2.28 2 2.375 3.65 3.12 2-1/2 2.875 5.79 4.64 3-1/2 4.000 9.11 6.56 E. Steel Framework, General: Posts, rails, braces, and gate frames. 1. Type I Pipe: Hot -dipped galvanized steel pipe conforming to ASTM F 1083, plain ends, standard weight (schedule 40) with not less than 1.8 oz. zinc per sq. ft. of surface area coated. 2. Type II Pipe: Manufactured from steel conforming to ASTM A 569 or A 446, grade D, cold formed, electric welded with minimum yield strength of 50,000 psi and triple coated with minimum 0.9 oz. zinc per sq. ft. after welding, a chromate conversion coating and a clear polymer overcoat. Corrosion protection on inside surfaces shall protect the metal from corrosion when subjected to the salt spray test of ASTM B 117 for 300 hours with the end point of 5 percent Red Rust. F. End, comer, and pull posts: 2.875-inch OD Type I or II steel pipe. G. Line or intermediate posts: 2.375-inch OD Type I or II steel pipe. GALVANIZED CHAIN LINK FENCING VLK Architects, 2007 32 3115 - 1 2740.00 Creekview Elementary School College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas H. Top Rail: Manufacturer's longest lengths, with expansion -type couplings, approximately 6 inches long, foreach joint. Provide means for attaching top rail securely to each gate corner, pull, and end post. 1. Galvanized Steel: 1-1/4-inch NPS (1.664nch OD) Type I or II steel pipe. I. Tension Wire: ASTM A 824, 0.177-inch-diameter metallic -coated steel marvelled tension wire with finish to match fabric. J. Tie Wires: 12-gauge (0.106-inch diameter) galvanized steel with a minimum of 0.80 oz. per sq. ft. of zinc coating of surface area in accordance with ASTM A 641, Class 3. K. Post and Line Caps: Provide weathertight closure cap for each post Provide line post caps with loop to receive tension wire or top rail. L. Tension or Stretcher Bars: Hot -dip galvanized steel with minimum length 2 inches less than full height of fabric, minimum cross-section of 3/16 inch by 3/4 inch and minimum 1.2 oz. zinc coating per sq. ft. of surface area. Provide one bar for each gate and end post, and two for each corner and pull post, except where fabric is integrally woven into post. M. Tension and Brace Bands: Minimum 3/4-inch-wide hot -dip galvanized steel with minimum 1.2 oz. zinc coating per sq. ft. of surface area. 1. Tension and Brace Bands: Minimum 12 gage (0.105 inch) thick. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. General: Install fence in compliance with ASTM F 567. Do not begin installation and erection before final grading is completed. B. Setting Posts: Floor flange with 43/a" anchor bolts. Space maximum 10 feet o.c. Check each post for vertical and top alignment, and hold in position during placement and finishing operations. C. Top Rails: Run rail continuously through line post caps, bending to radius for curved runs and at other posts terminating into rail end attached to posts or post caps fabricated to receive rail. Provide expansion couplings as recommended by fencing manufacturer. D. Brace Assemblies: Install braces so posts are plumb when diagonal rod is under proper tension. E. Bottom Tension Wire: Install tension wire within 6 inches of bottom of fabric before stretching fabric and tie to each post with not less than same gage and type of wire. Pull wire taut, without sags. Fasten fabric to tension wire with 11-gage hog rings of same material and finish as fabric wire, spaced maximum 24 inches o.c. F. Tension or Stretcher Bars: Thread through or clamp to fabric 4 inches o.c., and secure to end, corner, pull, and gate posts with tension bands spaced not over 15 inches o.c. G. Tie Wires: Use U-shaped wire of proper length to secure fabric firmly to posts and rails with ends twisted at least 2 full turns. Bend ends of wire to minimize hazard to persons or clothing. 1. Maximum Spacing: Tie fabric to line posts 12 inches o.c. and to rails and braces 24 inches o.c. H. Fasteners: Install nuts for tension bands and hardware bolts on side of fence opposite fabric side. Peen ends of bolts or score threads to prevent removal of nuts. END OF SECTION GALVANIZED CHAIN LINK FENCING VLK Architects, 2007 32 3115 - 2 2740.00 Creek View Elementary School College Station I. S D. College Station, Texas SECTION 32 80 00 IRRIGATION SYSTEM PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. Work Included: 1. Piping, fittings, and miscellaneous accessories. 2. Valves, sprinkler heads, and controllers. 3. Testing, adjusting, and balancing. B. Related Work: 1. Trenching, Backfilling and Compacting: Section 02 4100 2. Electrical requirements: Division 26 00 00 1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) Publications: ASTM D 2241-89 Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Pressure Rated Pipe (SDR Series) ASTM D 2466-90a Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule 40 ASTM D 2564-91 Solvent Cements for Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe and Fittings ASTM D 2855 Standard Recommended Practice for Making Solvent -Cemented Joints with Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Pipe and Fittings B. National Electric Code C. City of College Station Plumbing Code D. Standard Plumbing Procedures 1.03 SUBMITTALS: A. Shop Drawings: Indicate layout, circuiting, and installation details. 1.04 QUALITY CONTROL: A. Installer Qualifications: Project foreman shall have a minimum of five years experience in the installation of irrigation systems similar to the work of this project. Foreman shall be present at all times during the installation of the irrigation system. B. Irrigation work shall comply with the City of College Station Plumbing and Electrical Codes. C. All plastic pipe shall be certified by Manufacturer to have passed or be able to pass Anhydrous Acetone Immersion Test. D. Do not allow irrigation system work to be covered up or enclosed until all work has been inspected, tested, and approved IRRIGATION VLK Architects, 2007 32 80 00 - 1 2740.00 Creek View Elementary School College Station I. S D. College Station, Texas — by the Landscape Architect and local governing authorities. 1.05 SUBMITTALS: A. Product Data: Submit for Architect's approval: 1. Complete materials list. 2. Information on controller and interface with the District central control system. 3. Manufacturer's installation instructions which, when approved, shall become the basis for inspection and acceptance or rejection of installed work. 4. Shop drawings shall be prepared by a Licensed Irrigator. B. Certificate of Compliance: Indicating that all installed materials comply with the specified requirements. C. Extra Materials: Upon completion provide the Owner: 1. Three keys for valve locked -top. 2. Three valve couplers. 3. Three hose swivels. D. Record Irrigation Drawings: The Contractor is responsible to prepare two (2) copies of record drawings on blueline prints which shall show all deviations from the bid documents made during construction. The drawings shall indicate and show approved substitutions of size, material and manufacturer's name and catalog number. The drawings shall be delivered to the Owner's designated representative prior to final acceptance of work. These drawings shall be prepared by a Licensed Irrigator. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING: A. Deliver materials to job site in Manufacturer's original unopened packaging. Transport plastic pipe on a vehicle long enough to allow pipe to lay flat without bending. B. Store materials off the ground, protected from weather and damage. Do not install items that become cracked, broken, or otherwise damaged or non-functional. In the event of damage, repair or replace at no additional cost to Owner. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 POLY VINYL CHLORIDE (PVC) PIPE AND ACCESSORIES: A. Pipe: ASTM D 2241, Type I, Grade 1 or 2, minimum hydrostatic design stress of 2,000 psi. 1. Minimum burst pressure: a. 3/4 inch diameter and smaller: 315 psi. b. 1 inch diameter and larger: 200 psi. 2. Continuously and permanently mark with manufacturer, pipe size, IPS size, type of material, and code number. B. Fittings: ASTM D 2466 Schedule 40, Type I or II, socket type. C. Sleeves: ASTM D 2466, Schedule 40. D. Solvent Cement: ASTM D 2564. E. Risers: Rainbird, or other manufacturer approved by Architect. IRRIGATION VLK Architects, 2007 32 80 00 - 2 2740.00 Creek View Elementary School College Station I. S D. College Station, Texas 1. Lawn heads: Risers shall have flexible, damage -resistant rubber nipple below grade. 2. Quick coupling valves shall have multiple swing -joint assembly nipples and elbows. Install with ball valve as outlined herein. 3. Swing joints: Swing joints shall be Spears O-Ring Seal type. 2.02 VALVES: A. Wire and Splices: All wire shall be single strand solid copper, sized by the Contractor and shall be a minimum 14 gauge with Type OF insulation which is Underwriters Laboratory approved for direct underground burial when used in a National Electrical Code Class II Circuit (30 volts AC or less) as per Articles 725 and 300. Voltage drop shall be taken into consideration. All wire shall be color coded so that the common wire shall have white insulation and the signal wires shall have red insulation. All wire connectors shall have a two-piece PVC housing which, when filled with resin epoxy and pressed together, forms a permanent, one-piece, moisture -proof wire splice. All connectors shall be U.L. listed, rated 600 volt, for PVC insulated wire. No wire nuts shall be allowed. No wire splices shall be buried. All wire connectors shall be 3M-DBY approved equal. All wire shall be considered incidental to the cost of the project. B. Quick Coupling Valves: Brass or bronze body and parts able to withstand pressure of 150 psi without leakage, 1 inch female inlet, IPS with one-piece, single lug, single key with self -closing cover. C. Double Check Valve Assembly: Double gate valve(s), double check valve assembly shall be located as shown on the plans. Assembly shall include two spring loaded brass check valves and two cast iron gate valves with flanged type connections. Double check valve assemblies shall be Febco 850 or approved equal. 1. Valve boxes: Precast concrete with locking, cast iron cover and frame, with cover permanently marked "water". D. Electric Controller and Valves: Electric irrigation controller is an allowance within bid documents and shall be capable of operating the stations as indicated on the drawings and operating within a District -wide central control system.. Power source shall be standard 120Vof 670 Cycle AC. Output for operation of companion solenoid actuated valved shall be 24 Volt 70 Cycle AC. Wiring to valves to be as hereinbefore specified (2.1.D). Electric remote control valves shall have plastic bodies and covers and shall be globe -type diaphragm valves of normally closed design. Operation shall be accomplished by means of an integrally mounted heavy-duty 24-V AC solenoid complying with National Electrical Code, Class II Circuit. Solenoid coil shall be potted in epoxyresin within a plastic coated, stainless steel housing. Solenoids shall be completely waterproof, suitable for direct underground burial. A flow stem adjustment shall be included in each valve. The valve shall be able to be used with dirty water. The valve shall be able to compensate for pressure through the use of a pressure regulating device. Electric remote control valves shall be Toro 220 series as per plans. All valves shall be enclosed in a valve box. This valve box shall be properly supported and of sufficient construction that tractors and mowers crossing over the box will not push the box down and crush the pipe, valve, or box. E. Manual Control Valves: All manual valves shall be Spears compact design plastic ball valves produced from virgin PVC Type 1, Grade 1 with Viton "O" rings with Safe -T-Shear stem or approved equal. F. Valve Boxes: 1. Electric Valves: Boxes for electric valves 3" and smaller shall be Brooks 1419 Standard Series with snaplock cover or approved equal. 2. Wire splices: Boxes for wire splices shall be Brooks 70 Series with snaplock cover or approved equal. 3. Manual Valves: Shall be Brooks 70 series with snaplock cover or approved equal. G. Concrete Materials: Materials for concrete vaults, footings, and thrust blocking shall meet the requirements of the IRRIGATION VLK Architects, 2007 32 80 00 - 3 2740.00 Creek View Elementary School College Station I. S D. College Station, Texas CTCOG Standard Specifications Institute Item 7.4, Concrete for Structures. All concrete shall have a minimum compressive strength of 2,000 pounds per square inch at the end of twenty-eight (28) days. Concrete shall have a minimum of four (4) sacks (376 lbs.) of cement per cubic yard. 2.03 SPRINKLER HEADS: A. Manufacturer's standard unit of cycolac plastic, guaranteed to indefinitely withstand corrosive action of soils and water used. B. Heads shall be designed to provide uniform coverage over entire area of spray shown on drawings at available water pressure and as follows: 1. Shrubbery: Fixed pattern, with screw -type flow adjustment. 2. Pop -Up Spray: Fixed pattern, with screw -type flow adjustment and stainless steel retraction spring. C. Rotary Heads: Rotary pop-up sprinklers shall be in -line combination type with positive drive by means of a water -driven gear motor. Nozzles shall be readily accessible without removing the upper head assembly. Rotary type pop-up spray heads shall be Hunter as designated on the plans. See plans for type of nozzle to be specified. D. Pop -Up Spray Heads: Spray heads shall pop-up a minimum of four (4) inches. Twelve (12) inch pop-up heads shall be used in all planting beds or areas which serve shrubs and/or groundcover unless otherwise noted on the plans. The sprinkler body and all related parts shall be plastic, cycolac or polycarbonate. They shall have a spring retraction for positive return action of the pop-up nozzle. This spring for retraction and the adjsutable screw shall be made of corrosion resistant materials. Spray heads shall be Toro as designated on the plans. E. Special Heads: Special heads not covered by these Specifications shall be furnished in accordance with the specifications and details shown on the plans. 2.04 AUTOMATIC CONTROL SYSTEM: A. Controller: The Controller used on this project shall be Rainbird ESP -MC. Low voltage system manufactured expressly for control of automatic circuit valves of underground sprinkler systems. Provide capacity to suit number of circuits as indicated. 1. Control wire: UL approved Type OF-600V, PVC jacketed, single conductor underground cable. 2. Wire gauge as required by length of run and controller manufacturer's specification. 3. Splices for underground control wiring shall be UL approved for direct burial. C. Control Cabinet: Attach a typewritten legend inside each controller door indicating areas covered by each remote control valve. Provide a reduced size, laminated, color coded irrigation plan on the wall near the controller. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.00 GENERAL A. This part shall include the placing of all specified materials at the locations and elevations as shown on the drawings or as established by the Landscape Architect. IRRIGATION VLK Architects, 2007 32 80 00 - 4 2740.00 Creek View Elementary School College Station I. S D. College Station, Texas The work performed hereunder shall conform in every respect to the Contract Documents, the applicable local requirements, the applicable local ordinances and sanitary codes, the regulations of the State Health Department, the regulations of the Occupational Safety and Hazardous Administration (OSHA) and the regulations of the Environmental Protection Agency (EPA). In the event that the Contract Documents do not adequately specify materials, methods of construction or workmanship of any portions of the proposed work, the North Central Texas Council of Government's (NCTCOG) Standard Specifications for Public Works Construction, as amended in the Contract Documents, shall apply. If the NCTCOG Standard Specifications do not adequately describe the requirements of any portion of the work, the Standards of the Trade shall govern. B. The installation of the irrigation project shall be made by an individual or firm duly licensed under Article No. 8751 VTCS, titled "Licensed Irrigators Act", S.B. No. 259 as passed by the 66th Legislature. The Contractor shall be specialized in commercial landscape irrigation installation and shall be approved by the Owner's designated representative. All work shall be supervised on the site by a Licensed Irrigator by the State of Texas. 3.01 SYSTEM DESIGN A. Design Pressures: Irrigation pump pressure and as indicated on the drawings. B. Design location of heads is approximate. Make adjustments as necessary to avoid obstructions. C. Where piping, heads, valves, or other elements of the system are indicated under paved areas but running parallel or adjacent to planting areas, without indication of sleeves or other special accommodations, the intention is for the items to be installed in the planting area. D. Piping Layout: Piping layout is diagrammatic. Route piping around existing trees and shrubs in such manner as to avoid damage to plantings. Do not dig within the ball of newly planted trees or shrubs. In areas where existing trees are present, trenches will be adjusted on -site to provide a minimum clearance of four feet between the drip line of any tree and any trench. The Contractor shall notify the Owner's representative in writing of a planned change in trench routing from that shown on the drawing. E. Contractors Responsibility: The Contractor shall not willfully install the irrigation system as shown on the drawings when it is obvious in the field that obstructions, grade differences or discrepancies in equipment usage, static water pressure, or area dimensions exist that might not have been considered in the engineering. Such obstructions or differences shall be brought to the attention of the Owner's designated representative in writing before work commences. In the event this notification is not performed, the Contractor shall assume full responsibility for any revision necessary. 3.02 PREPARATION: A. Prior to start of irrigation work inspect site to verify that the system may be installed as indicated. Do not begin work until unsuitable conditions have been corrected. B. Verify location of existing underground utilities prior to start of trenching. C. Field verify all dimensions. D. Existing Utilities: Locations and elevations of various utilities included with the scope of this work have been obtained from the most reliable sources available and should serve as a general guide without guarantee to accuracy. The Contractor shall examine the site and verify to his own satisfaction the locations and elevation of all utilities and availability of utilities and services required. The Contractor shall inform himself as to their relation to the work and the submission of bids shall be deemed as evidence thereof. The Contractor shall repair, at his own expense, and to the satisfaction of the Owner's designated representative, damage to any utility shown on or not shown on the plans, including civil plans for the project . IRRIGATION VLK Architects, 2007 32 80 00 - 5 2740.00 Creek View Elementary School College Station I. S D. College Station, Texas 2. Should utilities not shown on the plans be found during excavations, Contractor should promptly notify designated representative for instructions as to further action. 3. Contractor shall make necessary adjustments in the layout as may be required to connect existing stubouts, conduit locations, etc., should such stubouts or locations not be located exactly as shown, and as may be required to work around existing work at no increase in cost to the Owner. All such work will be recorded on as -built drawings and turned over to the Owner's designated representative prior to final payment. 3.03 PIPING SYSTEM: A. Trenching: Refer to Section 02 4100. All lateral piping shall be buried a minimum of 12 inches below finished grade. All main piping shall be installed with a minimum of 18" of cover. B. Carefully inspect all pipe and fittings prior to installation. Remove all dirt, burrs and reaming. C. Lay pipe on solid subbase with markings up, uniformly sloped, as indicated. Connect piping to building system in location indicated. 1. Slope circuit piping to drain valve at least 1/2-inch in 10 feet of run. 2. Seal all wall penetrations. 3. Restore damaged landscaping. D. All piping passing under paving or other slabs more than 6 feet wide shall be installed in Schedule 40 PVC sleeves. E. Make all piping joints with specified solvent cement. Joints shall set a minimum of 15 minutes prior to handling or moving, and 24 hours prior to filling with water. F. Centerload piping with a small amount of backfill to prevent arching and whipping under pressure. G. Backfill trenches in accordance with Section 02221 after all inspections and corrections have been made and the system has been accepted by the Architect. H. PVC pipe shall not be installed when there is water in the trench, nor shall PVC pipe be laid when temperature of 40 degrees or below or when rain is eminent. PVC pipe will expand and contract as the temperature changes. Therefore, pipe shall be snaked from side to side of trench bottom to allow for expansion and contracting. Control Wire Installation: 1. All control wire less than 500 feet in length shall be continuous without splices or joints from the controller to the valves. Connections to the electric valves shall be made within 18 inches of the valve using connectors specified in paragraph 2.1.D unless otherwise approved by the Owner's designated representative in writing. 2. All control wires shall be installed at least 18 inches deep in ditches in accordance with Details of the Irrigation Drawings. Contractor shall obtain the Owner's approval for wiring routing when installed in separate ditch. Control wires may be installed in a common ditch with piping; however, wires must be installed a minimum of 4 inches from piping as per Details of the Irrigation Drawings. 3. All wire passing under existing or future paving, sidewalk, construction, etc., shall be encased in a PVC or galvanized steel conduit extending at least 12 inches beyond edges of paving, sidewalks or construction. 3.04 EQUIPMENT: A. Circuit Valves: Install in valve box, arranged for easy adjustment and removal, buried deep enough that valve box lid will not protrude above grade. Provide union on downstream side. IRRIGATION VLK Architects, 2007 32 80 00 - 6 2740.00 Creek View Elementary School College Station I. S D. College Station, Texas 2. Provide plastic ball valve on upstream side of valve sized to conform to piping, accessible within same or separate valve box.. 3. Adjust automatic control valves to provide flow rate of rated operating pressure for each sprinkler circuit. B. Sprinkler Heads: Install in accordance with manufacturer written instructions. 1. Install lawn heads flush with finish grade, and no closer than 1-1/2 inches from walks, paving, and curbs. 2. Install shrubbery heads where indicated and in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.. 3. Locate part -circle heads to maintain a minimum distance of 4 inches from walls and 2 inches from other boundaries, unless otherwise indicated 4. Rotary Heads: Rotary pop-up heads shall be installed as per the Irrigation Drawings. Rotary pop-up heads shall be installed on a swing -joint assembly. After the head height has been determined, a Schedule 80 PVC extension shall be added between the head and swing nipple in order to maintain a head height flush with grade until grass is established. Under the warranty, the Contractor must return after grass is established and adjust heads to proper grade. 5. Pop -Up Spray Heads: Pop-up spray heads shall be installed on a flexible PVC nipple directly on to lateral piping. Heads shall be installed with underside of flange flush with the finish grade. Contractor will be required to adjust heads as necessary after establishment of grass. 6. Quick Coupling Valves: Quick coupling valves shall be installed with the top of the cover 1/2-inch below the finish grade. Quick coupling valve shall be installed on a swing joint assembly with a 1 inch Ball valve. A valve box shall be installed around the quick coupling valve. Under the warranty, the Contractor must return after grass is established and adjust heads and boxes to proper grade. 7. Thrust Blocking: All main line piping shall be installed with concrete thrust blocking. For thrust blocking of main line piping see Details of the Irrigation Drawings. C. Automatic Controllers: Manual and Electric Valves: Manual and electric valves shall be sized and located where shown on plans. Top of valve boxes shall be flush with finished grade. The Contractor will be required to adjust after establishment of grass. Valve boxes shall be properly supported and of sufficient construction that tractors and mowers crossing over the boxes will not push boxes down and crush the pipe, valve or box. Electric Controllers and Valves: a. Electric controller(s) shall be located as shown of the plans and shall be capable of operating the number of stations indicated on the plans. b. Electric Power: Electric power shall be available within designated interior location. Service wiring to the breakers and disconnects and controller cabinet shall be furnished by the Contractor. c It will be the responsibility of the contractor to furnish and install the proper size wire on each of the low voltage circuits from the master control center to the various section automatic valves. Also see Section 2.1.D. Consideration will be given to each circuit for allowance voltage drop and economy consistent with accepted practices of electrical installation. Under no circumstances shall the voltage of any branch circuit be reduced more than proper due to length of run exceeding the maximum allowable for the wire size used. d Remote electrical control valves shall be located and sized as shown on the plans. All electrical connection shall be made when the weather is dry with connection kits in strict accordance with manufacturers recommended procedures. Contractor shall submit connection kit data as required under Section 1.3. 3.05 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING: A. Notify Architect a minimum of 48 hours prior to start of testing. Conduct all tests in presence of Architect. B. Flushing: IRRIGATION VLK Architects, 2007 32 80 00 - 7 2740.00 Creek View Elementary School College Station I. S D. College Station, Texas 1. Prior to backfilling, with all control valves in place but before lateral pipes are connected, completely flush and test the main line and repair all leaks. 2. Flush out each section of lateral pipe before sprinkler heads are attached. C. Testing: Furnish all required personnel and equipment to accomplish testing as follows: 1. Thoroughly bleed line of all air and debris. Fill and maintain line full of water for a minimum period of 24 hours immediately prior to the test. 2. After valves are installed, test all live water lines for leaks at a pressure of 120 psi for a continuous period of 2 hours, with all couplings exposed and with all pipe sections centertoaded. 3. Correct all leaks and retest until system is accepted by the Architect. D. Thoroughly clean, adjust, and balance all systems. Final Adjustment: a. After installation has been completed, make final adjustment of sprinkler system preparatory to the Owner's designated representative's final inspection. b. Completely flush system to remove debris from lines by removing nozzle from heads on ends of lines and turning on system. C. Check sprinklers for proper operation and proper alignment for direction of throw. d. Check each section of spray heads for operating pressure and balance to other sections by use of flow adjustment on top of each valve. e. Check nozzling for proper coverage. Prevailing wind conditions may indicate that arc of angle of spray should be other than as shown on drawings. In this case, change nozzles to provide correct coverage and furnish record data to Owner's designated representative with each change. f. After system is thoroughly flushed and ready for operation, each section of sprinklers must be adjusted to control pressure at heads Use the following method, one section at a time: 1) Remove last head on section and install a temporary rise above grade. Install tee with pressure gauge attached on top of riser and reinstall head with nipple onto tee. 2) Correct operating pressure at last head of each section as follows: Spray Heads - 25 psi Rotary Heads - 35 psi Or as per manufacturers recommendations 3) After replacing head, at grade, tamp thoroughly around head. g. The Contractor shall furnish all water necessary for testing, flushing and jetting unless noted otherwise. E. Demonstrate complete system to Architect and Owners representatives: 1. Show that all remote control valves are properly balanced and that all heads are properly adjusted for radius and arc coverage. 2. Instruct Owner's maintenance personnel in the operation and maintenance of the irrigation system. Include contents of the Owner's Manual. 3. Guarantee and Maintenance: a. The Contractor shall guarantee material and workmanship for one year after installation including repair and replacement of defective materials, workmanship and repair of backfill settlement. Contractor shall provide maintenance for one year after installation. b. Maintenance shall include, but not necessarily be limited to, the following: 1) Adjustment of sprinkler height and plumb to compensate for settling. 2) Adjustment of head coverage as necessary. 3) Unstopping heads plugged by foreign material. 4) Adjustment of controller as necessary to insure proper performance. IRRIGATION VLK Architects, 2007 32 80 00 - 8 2740.00 Creek View Elementary School College Station I. S D. College Station, Texas 5) Cleaning to insure heads pop-up and pop -down properly. 6) All maintenance necessary to keep the system in good operating order. *** END OF SECTION *** IRRIGATION VLK Architects, 2007 32 80 00 - 9 2740.00 SECTION 32 92 13 HYDROMULCHING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY Creek View Elementry School College Station I.S.D College Station, Texas A. Section Includes: Soil preparation, fertilization, planting, and other requirements regarding hydro -mulching operations to turfgrass areas as indicated on the plans. B. Related Sections: 1. Division 31 - Earthwork; topsoil. 1.02 SUBMITTALS: A. Product Data: Submit in accordance with Section 01340. Submit a sample label or specification for each type of fertilizer. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. Establishment and Acceptance: Regardless of unseasonable climatic conditions or other adverse conditions affecting planting operations and the growth of the grass, it shall be the sole responsibility of the Contractor to establish a uniform stand of grass. When adverse conditions such as drought, cold weather, high winds, excessive precipitation, or other factors prevail to such an extent that satisfactory results are unlikely, the Owner may, at his own discretion, stop any phase of the work until conditions change to favor the establishment of grass. 1. Uniform Stand of Grass: A uniform stand with complete coverage of the specified grass shall be defined as not less than 150 growing plants per square foot for seeded areas. B. Post Planting Maintenance: Maintenance shall begin immediately after each portion of grass area is planted. All planted areas will be protected and maintained by watering, weeding, and replanting as necessary until receipt by Owner of Certificate of Occupancy or as much longer as necessary to establish a uniform stand with complete coverage of the specified grass. Grass shall be mowed once a week by the Contractor until final acceptance. All water equipment deemed necessary by the Contractor will be provided by the Contractor. Contractor will pay for all water required for watering. 1.04 WARRANTY: A. Grass shall be guaranteed by the Contractor for 45 days after the date of substantial completion for this portion of the project, or attainment of the required stand of grass, which ever is later. During this time, the Contractor shall be responsible for all watering, weeding, mowing, fertilization, other maintenance as required, and replanting. 1. At the end of the 45-day warranty period, the grass will be re -inspected by the Owner and any defective areas will be repaired or replaced by the Contractor. 2. The grass will be re -inspected in subsequent 45-day intervals as required until all defective areas comply with subsection 3.01, D. All costs associated with the initial 45-day warranty period and subsequent 45-day periods, if required, shall be the responsibility of the Contractor. Hydromulching VLK Architects, 2007 32 92 13 - 1 2740.00 Creek View Elementary School College Station I.S.D College Station, Texas PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS: A. Bermudagrass Seed: Grass seed shall be Cynodon dactylon (Common Bermudagrass). The seed shall be harvested within 1 year prior to planting; free of Johnsongrass, field bind weed, doddler seed, and free of other weed seed to the limits allowable under the Federal Seed Act and applicable seed laws. The seed shall not be a mixture. The seed shall be hulled, extra fancy grade, treated with fungicide, and have a germination and purity that will produce, after allowance for Federal Seed Act tolerance, a pure live seed content of not less than 85%, using the formula; purity % times (germination % times plus hard or sound seed %). Seed shall be labeled in accordance with U.S. Department of Agriculture rules and regulations. B. Fertilizer. Fertilizer shall be a commercial product, uniform in composition, free flowing, and suitable for application with approved equipment. Fertilizer shall be delivered to the site in fully labeled original containers. Fertilizer which has been exposed to high humidity and moisture, has become caked or otherwise damaged making it unsuitable for use, will not be acceptable. 1. Initial Planting Application: Fertilizer for the initial planting application shall be of an organic base containing by weight the following (or other approved) percentages of nutrients: 15-10-5 (N-P-K), also containing 10-15% sulfate and traces of iron and zinc as required and approved by the Owner. 2. Post Planting Application: Fertilizer for the post planting application will be a chemical base fertilizer containing by weight the following percentages of nutrients: 21-0-0 (N-P-K) ammonium sulfate or the nitrogen equivalent of 33-0-0 ammonium nitrate. C. Hydro -Mulch: Provide Conwed Hydro -Mulch. All mulch will be manufactured from hardwoods only and will be refined specifically for lawn hydro -mulch applications. D. Roundup: Apply Roundup to all areas to receive grass to remove all undesirable plant growth. E. Topsoil shall be as described in Division 31. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Soil Preparation: 1. Tillage: Tillage shall be accomplished to loosen the soil, destroy existing vegetation, and prepare an acceptable seed bed. All areas shall be tilled with heavy duty disc or chisel -type breaking plow, chisels set not more than 10" apart. Initial tillage shall be done in a crossing pattern for double coverage, then followed by a disc harrow. Depth of tillage shall be 6". 2. Cleaning: All rocks and clods 3/4" in size or larger shall be removed from the fine graded area. Soil shall be further prepared by the removal of debris, including building materials, rubbish, weeds, concrete chips and small pieces of wood, regardless of size. 3. Fine Grading: After tillage and cleaning, all areas to be planted shall be leveled, fine graded, and drug with a weighted spike harrow or float drag. The required result shall be the elimination of ruts or depressions that would cause water to stand or pond immediately after rainfall or operation of the lawn irrigation system, humps, and objectionable soil clods. This shall be the final soil preparation step to be completed before the commencement of fertilizing and planting. B. Fertilizing: 1. Initial Planting Application: The specified fertilizer shall be applied at the rate of 18 pounds per 1,000 square feet Hydromulching VLK Architects, 2007 32 92 13 - 2 2740.00 Creek View Elementary School College Station I.S.D College Station, Texas (800 pounds per acre). a. Timing: The initial planting application of fertilizer shall be applied after the soil preparation, but not more than 2 days prior to grass planting. Fertilizer shall be applied over sod after planting, but not more than 2 days later. 2. Post Planting Application: Thirty days after planting, grass areas shall receive an application of 21-0-0 or 33-0-0 fertilizer at the rate of 9 pounds per 1,000 square feet (400 pounds per acre). a. Timing: The Landscape Architect will determine if it is too late in the growing season for the post planting application. In the event that it is, the application shall be made in the spring of the next year, or the cost of the application shall become a credit due to the Owner. 3. Post Planting Maintenance: Areas without a uniform stand (complete coverage) shall receive subsequent applications of fertilizer, as described above, every 30 days until a uniform stand is achieved. C. Planting: 1. Hydroseeding: Following soil preparation, Bermudagrass seed, fertilizer, mulch, and water shall be mixed together and applied to the planting area in the following quantities and rates using conventional "Hydro -Mulch" equipment as manufactured by the Bowie Machine Works: ITEM RATE PER ACRE Grass Seed 110 pounds Fertilizer 800 pounds Water As needed Wood Fiber Mulch Minimum as needed to achieve marking of seeded areas a. Timing: Under no circumstances shall grassing operations occur in planting periods other than the following: April 15 to September 1 of the year of project substantial completion. If grassing operations cannot be accomplished during these periods the Contractor shall establish an interim stand of winter rye grass, then remove the rye and provide specified grass during the next period in the following year. D. Acceptance of grass for the purpose of establishing the date of Substantial Completion and subsequent re -inspection shall be based on the following minimum requirements: 1. Grass must indicate weed -free uniform, healthy, and vigorous growth, devoid of discoloration and signs of dehydration. 2. The grade shall be free of low or hollow places so that water shall not stand or pond during rains or irrigation operation. 3. Grass shall be firmly rooted so that sections cannot be removed. E. Protection: No heavy equipment shall be moved over the planted lawn area unless the soil is again prepared, graded, leveled, and replanted. Protect all paving surfaces, curbs, utilities, plant materials, and any other existing improvements from damage by heavy equipment. Any damages shall be repaired or replaced at no cost to the Owner. F. Erosion Control: Throughout the project and the maintenance period for grass, it is the Contractor's responsibility to maintain the topsoil in place at specified grades. Topsoil and grass losses due to erosion shall be replaced by the Contractor until establishment and acceptance is achieved. G. Clean Up: Contractor shall remove excess material or debris brought onto the site or unearthed as a result of hydro - mulching operations. """ END OF SECTION " Hydromulching VLK Architects, 2007 32 92 13 - 3 2740.00 Creek View Elementary School College Station I.S.D College Station, Texas SECTION 32 92 23 SODDING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Grass sodding in areas where indicated on the plans. B. Related Sections: 1. Division 31 - Earthwork; topsoil. 1.02 DEFINITION OF TERMS A. Grass area shall mean all areas to be grassed with sod. B. Materials shall mean all items such as topsoil, fertilizer, herbicide, and grass needed to accomplish the grassing. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. Inspection of Grass Sod and Materials: Grass sod is subject to inspection and approval at the place of growth or upon delivery, for conformity to specification requirements as to quality and variety. Such approval shall not impair the right of inspection upon delivery at the site during the progress of work or right to rejection due to damage suffered in handling or transportation. Rejected grass shall be removed immediately from the site. Materials are subject to inspection and approval upon delivery. 1.04 WARRANTY: A. Grass shall be guaranteed by the Contractor for 45 days after the date of substantial completion for the project, or attainment of the required stand of grass, which ever is later. During this time, the Contractor shall be responsible for all watering, weeding, mowing, fertilization, other maintenance as required, and replanting. 1. At the end of the 45-day warranty period, the grass will be re -inspected by the Owner and any defective areas will be repaired or replaced by the Contractor. 2. The grass will be re -inspected in subsequent 45-day intervals as required until all defective areas comply with subsection 3.01, E. All costs associated with the initial 45-day warranty period and subsequent 45-day periods, if required, shall be the responsibility of the Contractor. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. General: All materials and grass sod shall be of first grade quality, be in prime condition when installed and when the project is accepted. Any commercial processed or packaged material shall be delivered to the site in the original unopened containers bearing the manufacturers guaranteed analysis. B. Topsoil: Reference Division 31. C. Fertilizer: 1. 16-4-12 or 15-5-10 fertilizer with iron and sulfur, shall be a commercial grade, pelleted or chip type, uniform in SODDING VLK Architects, 2007 32 92 23 - 1 2740.00 Creek View Elementary School College Station I.S.D College Station, Texas composition, dry and free flowing. 2. Fertilizer shall be delivered to the site in the original unopened containers and bear the manufacturer's guaranteed analysis. Any fertilizer that becomes caked or damaged, making it unsuitable for use, will not be acceptable. D. Herbicide: "Roundup". E. Pre -Emergent Herbicide: "Surflan" or "Betasan". F. Grass Sod: All grass sod shall be 100% Common Bermuda , be fully mature, well maintained grass, with a good strong root system free of all other grasses, contain no weeds, be evenly cut with conventional sod -cutting machine to 3/4" thickness. All grass shall be from the same growing ground and delivered to the project site in prime condition. G. Water: Suitable water for the execution of this work including maintenance shall be furnished by the Contractor. The Contractor shall be responsible forfurnishing his own labor, hose and hose connections from the outlets where the water will be furnished, if permanent irrigation system is not yet operable. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION OF SOD A. Under no circumstances shall installation of sod occur in planting periods other than the following: April 15 to September 15 of the year of project substantial completion. If installation of sod cannot be accomplished during these periods the Contractor shall establish an interim stand of winter rye grass, then remove the rye and provide specified grass with associated requirements for maintenance as required in article 3.03, during the next period in the following year. B. Soil Preparation: Remove all Johnsongrass roots and weeds by hand digging or by spraying with Herbicide ten (10) days prior to beginning soil preparation work. Should it rain the day grass and weeds are sprayed, those areas which do not show evidence of chemical reaction in three (3) days shall be re -sprayed. C. Tillage and Grading: 1. Tillage shall be accomplished to loosen the soil, destroy existing vegetation, and prepare an acceptable bed. Depth of tillage shall be 6". The finished surface shall be 1" below proposed finish grade. 2. Cleaning: All rocks and clods 3/4" in size or larger shall be removed from the fine graded area. Soil shall be further prepared by the removal of debris, including building materials, rubbish, weeds, concrete chips and small pieces of wood, regardless of size. 3. Fine Grading: After tillage and cleaning, all areas to be planted shall be leveled, fine graded, and drug with a weighted spike harrow or float drag. The required result shall be the elimination of ruts or depressions that would cause water to stand or pond immediately after rainfall or operation of the lawn irrigation system, humps, and objectionable soil clods. This shall be the final soil preparation step to be completed before the commencement of fertilizing and planting. 4. Laying of Sod: All areas to receive sod shall be prepared and finish graded in accordance with these specifications. Areas to receive sod shall be moist but not muddy. Sod shall be delivered to the site fresh and shall be laid immediately upon receipt. Sod shall be laid with tight fitting staggered joints and shall be watered within an hour after being laid. Sod which shows evidence of going through a "heat", is discolored or dehydrated shall be removed from the project site. After sodding, the finished surface shall be free of depressions. Roll surface with drum roller as required to achieve a smooth level surface. D. Fertilizer Applications: 1. Apply fertilizer with a broadcast spreader at the rate of two pounds per 100 square feet. Apply fertilizer immediately after grass installation and repeat the application at 6-week intervals until accepted by the Architect. E. Acceptance of grass for the purpose of establishing the date of substantial completion and subsequent re -inspections SODDING VLK Architects, 2007 32 92 23 - 2 2740.00 Creek View Elementary School College Station I.S.D College Station, Texas shall be based on the following minimum requirements: 1. Grass must indicate weed -free uniform, healthy, and vigorous growth, devoid of discoloration and signs of dehydration. 2. The grade shall be free of low or hollow places so that water shall not stand or pond during rains or irrigation operation. The surface shall be smooth and even following design grades. 3. Grass shall be firmly rooted so that sections cannot be removed. 4. Grass joints shall be tight fitting and shall show evidence of elimination. 3.02 GRASS REPLACEMENTS A. All replacements shall be grass of the same type as specified on the drawings. Replacement grass shall be furnished and planted as specified under paragraph: Installation of Sod. The cost shall be bome by the Contractor except for those replacements resulting from civil disobedience, acts of neglect on the part of others, physical damage by animals, improper Owner maintenance, vehicles, fire, or losses due to curtailment of water by local authorities or to "Acts of God". Floods, tornadoes, winds of hurricane force, hail, exceptional or untimely freezes are not normal and the damage they do cannot be calculated in a bid. 3.03 MAINTENANCE A. During Grass Operations: 1. Maintenance shall begin immediately after grassing is stated and shall continue until the work is substantially completed and accepted. Grass shall be watered, maintained and protected until accepted by the Architect in writing. 2. Settled grass shall be reset to proper grade position and dead grass removed. Defective work shall be corrected as soon as possible after it becomes apparent and weather and season permit. Upon completion of grassing and prior to substantial completion, the Contractor shall remove from the site excess soil and debris, and repair any damage to structures, resulting from grassing operations. 3. All lawn areas shall be mowed as required to maintain a maximum height of 2" until accepted by the Architect. B. Maintenance Program: Contractor shall supply the Owner's representative with a years written recommended maintenance program. Owners representative must approve the maintenance program before final payment is made to the Contractor. 3.04 SITE MAINTENANCE A. The Contractor shall at all times maintain the site in a neat and orderly condition free from trash and waste construction materials. Unattended construction materials, equipment and trash shall be left in such a manner that they do not constitute fire hazards or become or cause nuisance or dangers due to forces of nature such as rain and wind. Existing improvements, as designated by the Owners representative, whether on the construction site or adjacent property, shall be protected in place and shall be provided with adequate access. Paved area shall be cleaned of all mud and debris resulting from grassing operations. 3.05 FINAL CLEANUP A. After completion of the work required under the contract and before acceptance of the work, the Contractor shall at his own expense clean up the site of the work and any and all property used during grassing operations to the satisfaction of the Owners representative. B. Contractor shall remove and dispose of all excess materials resulting from his work and shall repair, replace or restore SODDING VLK Architects, 2007 32 92 23 - 3 2740.00 Creek View Elementary School College Station I.S.D College Station, Texas to the satisfaction of the Owner's representative all property of any type or nature which has been moved, damaged or altered in any way by his operations including existing slopes. He shall return all roadway surfaces to their original condition and appearance. C. All dirt and debris shall be removed from paved surfaces by washing or sweeping as necessary. Ditches, culverts and drainage structures adjacent to and downstream from the work site, shall be inspected and cleaned of all material and debris resulting fro his operations. Ditches shall be re -shaped if necessary. All new facilities shall be cleaned of dust, dirt, spilled concrete, oil and other substances as directed by the Owner's representative. D. All work and storage areas shall be graded so that they drain. Grades shall be smooth, evenly sloped surfaces, matching or equivalent to that existing when work was started. 3.06 DISPOSAL OF WASTE MATERIAL A. All waste material shall become the property of the Contractor and shall be disposed of by the Contractor at local landfill operations in accordance with applicable ordinances and regulations. "' END OF SECTION' SODDING VLK Architects, 2007 32 92 23 - 4 2740.00 SECTION 32 93 00 PLANTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION: A. Work Included: Creek View Elementary School College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas 1. Furnish and install all plants and provide all other materials, labor, equipment, and appliances, and perform all work in connection with the planting of trees, shrubs, groundcovers, and other such materials. B. Related Documents: The Drawing and General Provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions, apply to the work of this Specification. 1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS: A. American Joint Committee on Horticultural Nomenclature (AJCHN) Publication: 1942 Standardized Plant Names (2nd Addition) B. American National Standards Institute (ANSI) Publication: ANSI Z60.1-1986 Nursery Stock C. Association of Official Analytical Chemists (AOAC): 1975 Official Methods of Analysis (12th Addition) 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. All shipments and orders of plant materials shall be properly inspected at the nursery or at the growing site by the Federal and State authorities having jurisdiction. B. Provide completed inspection certificate with invoice for each shipment or order of stock. C. All plant material shall be approved by the Landscape Architect before planting at the site. Contractor shall provide information on source of material and may provide digital photos of typical plants for approval. Approval of plants at the place of growth, digitally, or upon delivery will be for quality, size, and variety only and shall not in any way impair the right of rejection for failure to meet other requirements during progress of the work. 1.04 PLANT MATERIAL GUARANTY AND REPLACEMENT: A. All plants installed under this contract shall be guaranteed for one full year following acceptance, and shall be alive and in satisfactory growth at the end of the guaranty period. B. An inspection will be made by the Owner's Representative within ten days of expiration of the guaranty period. All plant material installed under this contract which is determined to be dead or not in satisfactory growth shall be removed and replaced with new plant material to conform with size and species of original. Replacement shall be made as soon as conditions permit during the next normal planting season. PLANTS VLK Architects, 2007 32 93 00 - 1 2740.00 Creek View Elementary School College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas C. All replacement materials shall be plants of the same kind and size as original. They shall be furnished and planted as specified for new planting. 1.05 SUBMITTALS, INSPECTIONS, AND TESTS: A. The Landscape Architect will inspect proposed topsoil at its source to determine compliance with the specifications, and to approve the depth to which it may be stripped. 1. If requested at the time of inspection, take representative samples to the proposed stripping depth from several locations in the area under consideration, but in no case less than 3 samples. 2. Transmit sealed samples to the Owner's Testing Lab for testing in accordance with methods approved by the Association of Official Analytical Chemists or the State Agricultural Experiment Station. 3. Delivery of topsoil may begin upon approval by Landscape Architect and the Owner's Testing Lab. C. Fertilizer. Analysis and associated soil improvements will be made by the Owner's Testing Lab using methods approved by the Association of Official Analytical Chemists or the State Agricultural Experiment Station. D. Tree Paint: Submit manufacturer's product data and instructions for approval. 1.06 DELIVERY, HANDLING, AND STORAGE: A. Deliver all non -plant materials in manufacturer's original, unopened packaging with labels legible and intact. Store materials off the ground in an area protected from weather. B. Handle all plant material during relocation to prevent drying out, heat or cold damage, or damage to roots, trunk, stems, and foliage. Damaged materials will not be accepted and replacement as referenced herein under guarantee terms shall apply. C. Schedule digging of plant material so that planting takes place as soon as practicable after removal. Maintain at all times a liberal supply of burlap or bagging to cover and protect the roots of stock being relocated from drying out until actual planting. 1. For balled and burlapped or container plants which cannot be planted immediately, cover the ball with moist soil or mulch, or other suitable protection, to prevent drying from wind and sun. 2. Keep all plants watered as necessary until planting. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS OTHER THAN PLANT MATERIAL: A. Topsoil: All existing topsoil striped for this work and suitable for reuse shall be stored on site as directed by the Landscape Architect. Dispose of all excess topsoil on the site as directed by the Landscape Architect. If the quantity of existing topsoil is inadequate to complete the work, furnish sufficient topsoil to properly install all work as specified and indicated on the Drawings, and as follows: a. Natural, fertile, friable agricultural soil, having characteristics of representative productive soils in the vicinity, and obtained from naturally well -drained areas. b. Topsoil shall not be excessively acid or alkaline nor contain toxic substances. C. Topsoil shall be without admixture of subsoil and shall be reasonably free from clay lumps, stones, stumps, roots, live plants, or similar substances one inch or more in diameter, debris, or other objects which might be a hindrance to planting operations. d. Topsoil shall be free from Johnson grass (Sorgum halepense), nut grass (Cyperus rotundus), and objectionable weeds. PLANTS VLK Architects, 2007 32 93 00 - 2 2740.00 Creek View Elementary School College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas B. Prepared soil for planting beds: 1. Composed of 50% topsoil, 50% Acid Gro "Double -Duty" Mix, with 5 pounds of commercial fertilizer per cubic yard, thoroughly and uniformly mixed. 2. May be either pre -mixed or mixed in place by spreading all materials uniformly overthe entire area to be prepared and rototilled thoroughly until a homogeneous mixture is achieved. C. Backfill: A. Planting beds: Prepared soil. 2. Planting pits (trees): Existing soil except that very poor soils, gravel, hardpan, or other soil deleterious to plants shall not be used. If existing soil is unacceptable, over excavate pit width by 50% and backfill with approved topsoil. D. Fertilizer shall comply with applicable State laws and shall be uniform in composition, dry, and free flowing. Fertilizer which has been wet or is caked or otherwise damaged will not be allowed. E. Acid Gro: Shall be Acid Gro "Double -Duty" Mix by Soil Building Systems, Inc., 5801 Harvest Hill Road, Suite 2049, Dallas, Texas 75230, (214) 239-4777. F. Surface Mulch: Commercial grade shredded hardwood mulch. G. Water: Provide an adequate supply of clean, fresh water to complete the work of this contract. Furnish all necessary hoses, equipment, attachments, and accessories for the adequate irrigation of planted areas as specified. H. Tree Protection: Provide and install one "Arbor-gard" per tree as manufactured by Deep Root Corporation, 7354 Bolsa Avenue, Westminster, CA 92683, (714) 898-0563. I. Tree Paint: Waterproof, adhesive and elastic, antiseptic, free from kerosene, coal tar creosote, and other material injurious to the life of the tree. Proposed tree paint must be approved by Landscape Architect prior to use. 2.02 PLANT MATERIALS: A. Plant List: Indicated on the drawings. B. Nomenclature: Plant names indicated comply with the AJCHN "Standardized Plant Names." Names indicated that are not included in the AJCHN publication generally comply with local nursery practice. C. Quality and Size: Comply with ANSI Z60.1for replacements. 1. All plant material shall be nursery grown unless noted otherwise. B. All plants shall be of the highest quality for the referenced species, shall be well formed with no flat or misshaped sides or features. All plant material shall be subject to approval by Landscape Architect. 2. Plants shall have a habit of growth that is normal for the species and shall be sound, healthy, vigorous, and free from insect pests, plant diseases, and injuries. 3. All plants shall equal or exceed the measurements scheduled. Measurements shall be made before pruning, with branches in normal position. Any necessary pruning shall be made at the time of planting. 4. Substitutions will be allowed only upon written documentation that the specified item is not available. D. Balled and burlapped Plants: 1. Dug with firm, natural balls of earth of sufficient diameter and depth to encompass the fibrous and feeding root system necessary for full recovery of the plant as commonly accepted in the industry. 2. Balls shall be firmly wrapped with burlap or similar material and bound with twine, cord, or wire mesh. 3. Ball may be secured to a platform to prevent breaking or cracking during the planting process. PLANTS VLK Architects, 2007 32 93 00 - 3 2740.00 Creek View Elementary School College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas PART 3 - EXECUTION: 3.01 GENERAL: A. Planting operations shall proceed as rapidly as possible as the site becomes available, consistent with normal seasonal limitations for planting work. 1. Planting operations may be conducted during unseasonable conditions at Contractor's risk and at no additional cost to the Owner. This does not alleviate Contractor of specified requirements and guaranty. 2. Do not plant any material in frozen ground. B. When unsatisfactory weather conditions occur during planting such as drought, high winds, or excessive moisture which are likely to produce unacceptable results, all planting work shall be stopped. Do not resume until desired results can be achieved or until alternate or corrective measures are approved by Landscape Architect. 3.02 PREPARATION AND LAYOUT: A. Planting Bed Preparation: 1. Shrubs: Install prepared soil to a uniform full depth of 12 inches. 2. Groundcover and seasonal planting: Install prepared soil to a uniform full depth of 6 inches. Cultivate to a depth of 9 inches and grade smooth. 3. Top of finished beds shall receive shredded mulch top dressing as indicated on the planting details B. Layout: 1. Locate planting materials as indicated. Make necessary adjustments for underground or overhead obstructions encountered, as approved by Landscape Architect. 2. No planting, except ground cover and seasonal planting, shall be placed closer than 2 feet to any pavement or structure. 3. Install all edging in straight lines; smooth free flowing curves; or bent at crisp, sharp angles as indicated on the Drawings. Touch -up damaged paint finish on edging after installation. 3.03 PLANTING OF TREES AND SHRUBS: A. Do not take any tree from its location for planting until the pit or hole in the section to be planted has been properly excavated and prepared. B. Pit Size: Nursery trees: Minimum of 18 inches larger than the root -spread or root -ball. Smaller plants and shrubs: Minimum of 6 inches wider than root spread. Where unsuitable soil conditions are encountered, over excavate pit width a minimum of 50%. C. Set all plants plumb and straight. Set at such a level that, after settlement, a normal or natural relationship of the crown of the plant with the ground surface will be established. Locate each plant in the center of its pit. D. Ball Placement: Uniformly loosen soil at the bottom of the pit to a depth of 3 inches. Place plants in their wrapped ball so that after settlement they will stand at approximately the same depth as in the former location. E. Water each plant thoroughly when the pit is two-thirds backfilled. After watering, backfill shall be well taped into place and then additional soil placed up to the level of the adjacent surrounding grade. Construct a 4 inch high soil lip around the perimeter of the pit to form a "rain well" and place a 2-3 inch deep layer of mulch inside. PLANTS VLK Architects, 2007 32 93 00 - 4 2740.00 Creek View Elementary School College Station I.S.D. College Station, Texas Pruning: 1. Each tree and shrub shall be pruned in accordance with standard horticultural practice to preserve the natural character of the plant. Pruning shall be done with clean, sharp tools. 2. Bruised or broken parts of large or fleshy roots shall be cutoff smooth before planting. Make all pruning cuts flush with the trunk or branch. All dead and broken branches shall be removed. 3. Paint all cuts over 1 inch in diameter with tree paint to cover all exposed cambium and other living tissues. 3.04 PLANTING GROUND COVER AND SEASONAL PLANTING: A. Spread commercial fertilizer at the rate of 4 pounds per 1000 square feet over the entire area to receive ground cover and cultivate into the top 6 inches of the soil. 3.05 CLEANING: A. Maintain all paved areas and haul routes free of soil, rock, manure, peat, and other planting material. After completion of planting operations, remove all excess planting materials from the site and legally dispose of. 3.06 MAINTENANCE: A. Maintenance shall begin immediately following the last operation of installation for each portion of work, and shall continue as follows: Planting shall be protected and maintained until installation of planting is complete and accepted. Maintenance shall include watering, weeding, mulching, cultivating, removal of dead material, resetting plants to proper grades or upright position, restoration of the "rain well', and other necessary operations required to maintain the planted material in a healthy condition. B. At the end of the maintenance period the Landscape Architect will determine the acceptability of the completed work, exclusive of the possible replacement of plants during the guaranty period, and if further maintenance is required. C. The Landscape Architect will notify Contractor in writing of deficiencies noted and requirements for completion of the work. Maintenance or other work remaining to be done will be subject to reinspection prior to final acceptance. *** END OF SECTION *** PLANTS VLK Architects, 2007 32 93 00 - 5 2740.00